JP2021104379A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of effectively utilizing a layer function in display performance peculiar to a technical field of a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: display control means capable of generating drawing data by arranging specific display and prescribed display in different layers respectively; and display means performing display on the basis of the drawing data. Near the specific display, the prescribed display is performed, and the specific display and the prescribed display are performed overlapped. There are the case that in the display control means, drawing data related to the specific display is generated in the state that the specific display is arranged in a first layer of lower display priority than a layer where the prescribed display is arranged; and the case that in the display control means, the specific display is arranged in a second layer of higher display priority than the layer where the prescribed display is arranged from the state that it is arranged in the first layer and drawing data related to the specific display is generated in the state that the specific display is arranged in the second layer.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure687

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a ball game machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) and a rotating body type game machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

In recent years, a gaming machine that generates drawing data by using a layer function in display control has been known (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-050640

In such a gaming machine, the layer function is used only for the purpose of superimposing images, and the layer function is used in a display effect peculiar to the technical field of the gaming machine. There was room for improvement in the way.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively utilizing a layer function in a display effect peculiar to the technical field of a gaming machine.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1] includes a determination means capable of deriving a determination result advantageous to the player, a display control means capable of arranging various displays on a plurality of layers to generate drawing data, and the above-mentioned. The drawing data is displayed in a state where the specific display is arranged on a first layer having a display means for displaying based on the drawing data and having a lower priority for display than the layer on which the predetermined display is arranged. The specific display is generated by the control means and displayed on the display means, and the specific display is arranged on a second layer having a higher priority for display than the layer on which the predetermined display is arranged. In this state, the drawing data may be generated by the display control means and the specific display may be displayed on the display means. In the display means, the specific display and the predetermined display are displayed overlapping. In some cases, the specific display mode includes, at least, a first display mode and a second display mode in which the player has a higher expectation for a determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first display mode. The specific display of the first display mode can be arranged in the first layer and the second layer, and the specific display of the second display mode is the first layer and the second layer. The specific display of the second display mode is arranged and displayed on the second layer, which is higher than the ratio of the specific display arranged and displayed on the first layer. It is a game machine to play.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively utilizing the layer function in a display effect peculiar to the technical field of the gaming machine.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. be. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. In (a), in the view of the effect operation unit viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button, a part of the operation button is cut out and a part to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, a button frame, or the like is shown. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from behind by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the function display unit from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to a game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays an electrical connection between a payout control board which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the payout control unit and the like. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram which shows various input / output signals with a main control board, and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 89 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the LOCKN signal history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection failure determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the connection recovery processing. It is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in a game machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operating state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure which shows the circuit structure in the case where a plurality of sensor signal input units connected to each of a plurality of magnetic detection sensors are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor of the detection circuit unit. (A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the conventional example, and (B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the embodiment. (A) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the conventional example, and (B) shows the signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit in the embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the magnetic sensor input circuit of another Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the circuit structure which arranged the voltage output part, the voltage raising part, and the detection circuit part on the same board. It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit structure which arranged the voltage raising part and the detection circuit part on the same board, and arranged the voltage output part on another board (sensor board). It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit structure which arranged the voltage output part and the voltage raising part on the same board, and arranged the detection circuit part on another board (for example, a main control board). The figure which shows the circuit structure which connected a plurality of sensors in parallel to a voltage output part. It is a figure which shows typically the state that integration is aimed at only the component (discrete component) having high security performance against fraud in the 1st control part MCG. It is a figure which shows a part region in the base board of the main control board which concerns on a modification. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the acquisition principle of the operation information in the vicinity of an opening window. FIG. 119 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119. The figure schematically shows the relationship between the special operation receiving portion when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front view and various effect members arranged at positions where the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front view. be. (A) is a diagram for explaining the first operation control mode for the display unit, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the second operation control mode for the display unit. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 3rd operation control mode with respect to a display part. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode with respect to a movable body. It is a figure explaining the 4th operation control mode with respect to a movable body. It is a flowchart which shows the control example about the detection information analysis processing of a physical object executed in the peripheral control part steady processing. (A) is a time chart showing control when an effect reception occurs at a plurality of operation parts, and (b) shows a state of occurrence of an effect operation when an effect reception occurs at a plurality of operation parts. It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows the effect example 1 using the special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the effect example 1 using the special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the effect example 2 using the special operation receiving part. It is a figure which shows the effect example 2 using the special operation receiving part. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passing process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passing process (step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol ordinary processing (step S5403). It is a figure which shows the determination table T1 of the effect pattern (variation effect) which is referred to in the said effect symbol variation start processing in a normal gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing procedure about the lottery (the notice lottery performed in the effect symbol variation start processing) about the advance notice effect appearing in the execution period (the symbol variation time) of the effect pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice determination table T2 which is referred to when the fluctuation (the hold to be digested) is not the target of the timer look-ahead effect in a normal game state (the second timer notice lottery). (A) is a diagram showing an example of the first mission effect determination table T3a (first mission effect lottery) referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is performed in the normal game state, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the normal game. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd mission effect determination table T3b (the 2nd mission effect lottery) which is referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is not performed in the state. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice side timer type determination table T4 which is referred in the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505). Reach type and processing status (reach type and processing status) when it is decided to execute the mission production (make the conversation notice appear) and when it is not decided to execute the mission production (make the conversation notice appear). In addition to the first to fourth processing statuses, the fifth processing status and the sixth processing status, which will be described later), are shown in comparison with the upper limit number of appearances of timer target candidate effects. Step S5508 in the first processing state in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (YES in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5a referred to in the process of. Step S5523 in the second processing state in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5b referred to in the process of. Step S5533 in the third processing state in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5532) are made. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5c referred to in the process of. Step S5543 is in the fourth processing state in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5d which is referred to in the process of. The process of step S5508 in the first processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (YES in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6a-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 as a result of executing (step S5509). The process of step S5523 in the second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6b-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 as a result of executing (step S5524). The process of step S5543 in the fourth processing situation in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6d-2 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 2 as a result of executing (step S5544). Corresponds to the character reach in the second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variable number to be performed is selected. Corresponds to SP reach in the second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variable number to be performed is selected. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T7a referred to in the 1st timer non-target notice lottery (step S5512). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T7b referred to in the 2nd timer non-target notice lottery (step S5525). When the fifth processing status is such that the timer effect on the notice side is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5e referred to in the process of step S5553. When the sixth processing status is such that the timer effect on the notice side is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5f referred to in the process of step S5563. In the fifth processing situation in which the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5552) without executing the timer effect on the advance notice side (NO in step S5503), step S5553. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6e-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 as a result of executing the process of (step S5554). In the fifth processing situation in which the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5552) without executing the timer effect on the advance notice side (NO in step S5503), step S5553. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6e-2 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 2 as a result of executing the process of (step S5554). In the sixth processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the timer effect on the notice side (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5552), step S5563 It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6f-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 as a result of executing the process of (step S5564). In the sixth processing situation in which it is determined not to execute the timer effect on the notice side (NO in step S5503) and not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5552), step S5563 It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6f-2 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 2 as a result of executing the process of (step S5564). In (a), the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variation display is being executed and the three hold information (all the first special symbols) in which the variation display is not executed are stored. It is a figure which shows an example about the table T7a which is referred in the 1st special figure look-ahead processing when a new prize (the 1st special symbol) occurs in a state. Further, in (b), the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variation display is being executed and the two hold information (both are the first special symbols) in which the variation display is not executed are stored. It is a figure which shows an example about the table T7b referred to in the 1st special figure look-ahead processing when a new prize (the 1st special symbol) occurs in this state. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8a-1 and the table T8a-2 that are referred to when the execution mode of the timer look-ahead effect is determined in the situation where the pre-reading variable number is 4. .. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8b-1 and the table T8b-2 that are referred to when the execution mode of the timer look-ahead effect is determined in the situation where the pre-reading variable number is 3. .. It is usually referred to when there is no hold information in which the variable display is running and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) that causes a jackpot symbol to appear. It is a figure which shows the time hold change table T9a. Special that is referred to when there is a jackpot symbol that appears between the hold information in which the variable display is running and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3). It is a figure which shows the time hold change table T9b. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing procedure about the processing performed for realizing a change effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. (A) is the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer target exclusion effect to be performed. (B) is the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the second processing situation in which the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer target exclusion effect to be performed. The timer target first-out performed in the second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the production. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination process about whether the timer target first-out effect is generated, and further, at what timing the timer target first-out effect is generated. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination process about which type of the effect mode to generate at the timing when the timer target first-out effect is performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination process about which type of the effect mode to generate at those timings when the timer target first-out effect is performed at any two timings of timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure which shows an example about the content of the determination process about which type of the effect mode to generate at those timings when the timer target first-out effect is performed at all the timings Ta1 to Ta3. In the second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S507) are made, the number of notices is 2. A revival timer effect is performed when it is determined that there is one (step S523), and when it is determined that the "conversation notice" is performed at the earlier timing and the "character A operation 1" is performed at the later timing. It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of. (A) is the mode of the single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer target suppression control to be performed. FIG. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in timer target suppression control when the rate at which the suppression period occurs differs depending on the type of effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer target. (A) is the mode of the single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the timer production for the new timer to be performed. (B) is the mode of the single timer (YES in step S506), and in the second processing situation in which the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of the timer production for the new timer to be performed. The timer mode effect is performed in the second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S507). It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of. The second (a) to (c) is the mode of the single timer (YES in step S506), and the determination that the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S507) is made. This is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the count output stop control performed in the processing status of. It is a flowchart which shows an example about the processing procedure at the time of realizing the count output stop control. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of a timer plus production. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer stagnation effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of the progress production which leads to the timer target production. It is a figure for demonstrating the concrete content of the operation effect in a timer. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific content of a timer concealment effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows concretely an example of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison target with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by a fixed channel system. It shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship with the game state, the reproduced sound, and the priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the search process of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or a combination thereof. It is a figure which shows an example of the composition table of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the free channel search processing in the case of executing the control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the condition which selects the channel which exchanges a sound output (stops a sound reproduction) when a channel is not vacant at the time of output of a new sound in this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the production example for explaining the sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing when a sound effect is reproduced, (B) shows the channel which each sound effect is output. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effect in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows the screen composition example of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the composition table of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table for each channel group which shows the priority of volume (volume) control for each group in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the group volume control processing which performs sound control corresponding to the group to which the output sound of this embodiment belongs. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control table for each sound effect which shows the volume (volume) control for every total reproduction time (output time) of a sound in this embodiment. This is the first half of the flowchart showing the procedure of the volume control process for performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. This is the latter half of the flowchart showing the procedure of the volume control process for performing sound control based on the parameters set for each sound effect of this embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in this embodiment in chronological order, (A) shows the execution timing of an effect, and (B) shows the volume of each effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. It is a figure which shows the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the condition (cancellation condition) at which the notification is terminated for each type of the notification sound illustrated in FIG. 244. (A) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. Is a diagram. (B) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied. It is a figure which shows. (C) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied. It is a figure which shows. (A) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. Is. (B) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. Is. (C) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. Is. (D) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. Is. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode of notifying the state of a gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the content of the notification process under the progress of production separately for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process about volume adjustment. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a time chart which shows an example about a channel reservation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure about the process related to the setting of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows an example about the restriction content which is determined separately of a channel restriction level. It is a figure which shows another example about the restriction content which is determined separately for each channel restriction level. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when a channel special opening process is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation situation of each channel when the operation sound output processing under suppression is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of the allocation status of each channel when the processing related to the channel allocation cancellation operation is performed. An example of the allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decoration body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot judgment, and the situation on the movable decoration body side. It is a time chart which shows. The allocation status of each channel when a movable body abnormality is detected in a process other than this process, not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot judgment, and the movable body. It is a time chart which shows an example of the situation on the decoration side. It is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel and the situation on the movable decoration side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorations at a specific timing during the period in which the design changes. .. A time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel and the status on the movable decoration side when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorations at two different timings during the period when the design changes. be. It is a time chart which shows an example about the control content for realizing the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows an example about the display content when the operation is performed a plurality of times. It is a time chart which shows an example about the control content for realizing the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows the production example using the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a time chart which shows the production example using the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous hit function). It is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword production operation unit. It is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword production operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect pattern selection table in the effect mode which can execute the sword withdrawal effect, (A) is shown an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword withdrawal preparation transition effect according to the type of a variation pattern, (B ) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword-drawing effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body when the aura member is provided in the sword part (sword blade part) itself, and is (A) the sword delivery state, (B) the first sword pulling state, (C) the second. Indicates the state of sword withdrawal. It is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword pulling operation of a sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) a sword delivery state, (B) a first sword pulling state, and (C) a second sword pulling state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body and the operation validity period related to the operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword drawing effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword drawing effect of the modification 1. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword drawing effect of the modification 1. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body of the modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword drawing effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword drawing effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword drawing effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword drawing effect of the modification 2. It is an example of the production transition diagram of the sword drawing effect of the modification 2. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration body used for the pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure which shows the production transition example of the pseudo continuous production common to all production patterns. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is given while the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is given while the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is given while the pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the post-operation effect (drop effect of a specific decorative member SDY (sudare)) of the sword decoration body during the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the effect transition example which is characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the effect transition example which is characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the production transition example which becomes a feature of the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of effect pattern which can be selected based on a variation pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decorative body and a specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decorative body and a specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decorative body and a specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect which performs the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect which performs the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern. Similar to the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the transition example. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button was once enabled without the sword decoration being effective, and then the sword decoration was activated. It is a figure which shows the suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation-related production. It is a figure explaining an example of the production when "specific operation-related production" is set as the production target of the timer production. It is a time chart explaining an example of the effect content for each type about the effect when a plurality of types (precursor effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the production example about the effect content when the precursor effect which is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the effect content when the precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect content when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the button image BTG is displayed in the mode (a specific effect mode) to which a princess character is added. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the operation error occurs between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the operation error occurs between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the production example when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the production example when the first precursor effect is performed. It is a time chart which shows the production example when the first precursor production is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production which the degree of expectation is shown by the automatic production function. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation unification control in the state of an automatic button effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing at the time of the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing at the time of the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the stable side automatic effect processing at the time of the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect reception process according to the display type in the automatic button effect state. (A) is a time chart showing an effect example when the operation is performed a plurality of times in the mode of one-shot operation when it is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, and (b) is controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the effect example when it is operated in the mode of long-pressing when it is not done. (A) is a time chart showing an effect example when the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state, and (b) is a long press while the automatic effect function is functioning in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the production example when the operation is started in an aspect. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is three, the symbol variation is started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set". It is a time chart which shows the processing example when the operation (release operation) for canceling the automatic button effect state and the operation (setting operation) for setting are performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. When the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holdings is three, the symbol is set to "the second effect pattern (loss fluctuation) in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set". A time chart showing a processing example when the fluctuation is started and an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation. be. When the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the "third effect pattern in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears and the specific effect reception period (specific valid period) can be set", and the execution period of the symbol variation is It is a time chart which shows the processing example when the operation for setting to the automatic button effect state is performed in. It is a figure which shows the production example when the production progresses in the 3rd production pattern. It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period to affect "specific process which concerns production such as production setting". It is a figure which shows the modification about the prohibition period to affect "specific process which concerns production such as production setting". It is a time chart which shows an example about the production process regarding the special production reception period. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when operating a movable decorative body when a specific condition is satisfied. It is a time chart which shows the modification example with respect to the example shown in FIG. 374. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 which starts a new symbol variation comes in the situation where a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 which a special effect pattern is started arrives in the situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the process until the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the original position. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in a series of operation confirmation periods. (A) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation button other than the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and (B) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation button in the arbitrary operation confirmation period. (A) is a time chart showing the operating state of the sword ornament during the operation acceptance period, and (B) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament and the abnormality detection outside the operation acceptance period. (C) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament and the abnormality detection during the operation acceptance period. (A) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation button, and (B) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body provided on the game board. (A) is a time chart showing the operating state of the operation button in the effect when the button is projected in the normal state, and (B) is a time chart showing the operating state of the operation button in the effect when the button is projected when an abnormality occurs. .. (A) is a time chart showing the operating state of the operation button in the normal button normal effect, and (B) is a time chart showing the operating state of the operation button in the normal button operation when an abnormality occurs. .. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs during the operation acceptance period, and (B) is a time chart of the operation button when an abnormality occurs during the automatic operation confirmation period. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the operation state and the notification mode. It is a time chart showing the flow of the production when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button during the operation reception period, and (B) shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs during the operation reception period. It is a time chart. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the non-time saving state, and (B) is a time chart of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the time saving state. It is a time chart showing an operating state. It is a functional block diagram explaining the structure and outline of the function for executing the effect control in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure in the peripheral control part of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the basic concept of production control in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure until the data necessary for the production control of the gaming machine of this embodiment is acquired. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the sound module of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of the lamp module of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the sequence control in the effect control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the lamp and sound in the production control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the function such as a sound and a motor in the effect control of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler definition of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation of the accessory controlled by using the scheduler data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the advance notice effect which is executed in the series of fluctuation display from the fluctuation start to stop of the special symbol in this embodiment, and shows an example of the scheduler and the scheduler data used. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which controls the lighting / blinking of a lamp in the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls a lamp in the button cut-in notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the overall flow in the star character advance notice of this embodiment, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" which controls a left star character. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls the right star accessory in the star accessory notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls the middle star accessory in the star accessory notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which performs the motor control in the logo accessory fall notice of this embodiment. It is a drawing explaining the scheduler data which is executed when the power of the gaming machine of this embodiment is turned on. It is a figure explaining the structure for processing a command and a scheduler data in the peripheral control board of the gaming machine of this embodiment, and the relationship of these structure. It is a figure explaining the process of executing the scheduler data at the time of power-on of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice effect in a series of variation display from the change start to stop of a special symbol in this embodiment, (A) is the effect executed from the change start to the end, and executes the effect. The scheduler data for this purpose and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the hatchet accessory in the hatchet accessory fall notice. It is a figure explaining the content of the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which controls a motor in the button hatchet first half fall notice which is the first half part of the hatchet accessory fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the first half of the hatchet character second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which controls a motor in the hatchet character second half fall notice which is the latter half part of the hatchet character fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the latter half of the hatchet character latter half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which controls a motor in the hatchet character latter half fall notice which is the latter half part of the hatchet character fall notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern storing the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern storing the combination of the liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern which stores the combination of the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the effect control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control start processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control activation processing of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control update processing of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the procedure of executing the advance notice effect in the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern "10H03H" of this embodiment, (A) is the timing to execute the advance notice effect and execution time of the advance notice effect, (B) is The scheduler data driven by each scheduler for executing the advance notice effect is shown. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image which creates the drawing data file in the step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect to 4 effect) by the image composition / motion creation graphic tool for the step-up notice for liquid crystal display of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the effect block data of the step-up notice of this embodiment, (A) shows the structure of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, (B) is the structure of the step-up notice sub-effect block data. show. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal effect in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the effect switch in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the effect SW group of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect SW activation command table of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice in this embodiment, (A) shows the stage where a step-up notice effect is executed, (B) shows an example of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. .. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in this embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing step-up notice 1, and (B) is the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect. A drawing image using scheduler data is shown. It is a figure explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing division in this embodiment, and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data to be replaced with the master data. It is a figure explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of this embodiment, and in particular, shows the evaluation procedure of setting an effect SW to ON. It is a figure explaining an example of the function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the details of the structure of the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is an example of the program code which defines the effect SW information table, (B) is bit assignment of effect SW control information, (C) Is a diagram showing an example of a production SW group. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data code which defines the effect SW flag and effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) shows effect SW flag, (B) shows effect SW information table. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect SW replacement table information and the program data which defines the effect SW replacement table included in the effect SW information table of this embodiment, (A) is effect SW replacement table information, (B) is effect SW. Shows the replacement table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is a list which stores the address which stores each layer information table, (B) is the content of the layer information table (for background). Is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the layer information table of this embodiment, (A) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice 1), (B) is the content of the layer information table (the first half of the notice 2). show. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block in this embodiment, (A) shows the liquid crystal layer table of the step-up notice effect, (B) shows the structure of the liquid crystal effect common block. .. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1-4) of each step of the step-up notice of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the outline of the button mini character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the individual common block of the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program data which defines the liquid crystal effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing division which can be determined in the callback function at the time of the callback execution by the effect SW of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing result of each layer and the drawing result of all layers at the time of executing the advance notice effect of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the common block over a plurality of periods of this embodiment, (A) shows the display of a symbol and execution timing of a notice effect, (B) shows the structure of the liquid crystal notice effect block by a common block. It is a figure explaining the conventional structure which writes an image to a frame buffer by writing the image written in each layer respectively. It is a figure explaining the procedure of converting an image file stored in an off-screen buffer in this embodiment and then writing it into a frame buffer. It is a figure explaining the procedure of temporarily storing a display list command group in this embodiment in a peripheral control RAM, and then transferring it to a sound source built-in VDP. It is a figure explaining the procedure of transferring a display list command group in this embodiment to a sound source built-in VDP without storing in a peripheral control RAM. It is a figure which shows the example of the configuration which has a plurality of display areas which display the identification symbol in a variable manner in this embodiment, (A) is the configuration example which has the display area A and the display area B of the identification symbol on one display screen, (A). B) is a configuration example in which a display area A and a display area B of the identification symbol are provided on each display screen when the two display screens are provided. It is a figure explaining the emphasis mode of the display area which executes the variation display of the identification symbol in this embodiment, (A) is the normal mode which displays the display area A and the display area B in a standard mode (specified size). , (B) is a highlighting mode A that displays the display area A in a highlighting mode, and (C) is a highlighting mode B that displays the display area B in a highlighting mode. It is a figure explaining an example of the screen transition of the configuration which performs the variation display of the identification symbol of this embodiment in the display area A and the display area B respectively, and is interlocked with the case where the variation of a part of the identification symbol is stopped in the display area A. An example is shown in which the variation of the identification symbol is stopped in the display area B. It is a figure explaining an example of the screen transition of the configuration which performs the variation display of the identification symbol of this embodiment in the display area A and the display area B respectively, and is shown in the display area B when the variation is stopped regardless of the display mode of the display area A. An example of displaying all the stop symbols is shown. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the effect block of the timer effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the timer effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the production block of the background effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the background effect of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the mini character production of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example which the identification symbol fluctuates and displays in each of the plurality of display areas of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which the identification symbol is variable display independently in each of the plurality of display areas of this embodiment, and is variable display in the same mode at a predetermined timing. It is a figure which shows the example which the identification symbol fluctuates in each of the plurality of display areas of this embodiment, and stops at a different symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the game board of the game machine in this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of the character accessory in this embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of the snowman accessory in this embodiment, (A) is a view from the front, (B) is a view seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the character accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the cover member of the character accessory of this embodiment from the back side. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory substrate of the character accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of this embodiment, and shows the back side side of the character accessory substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship between a light emitting body and a transmissive portion and a non-transmissive portion of a cover member in the character accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the light guide member which diffuses the light from a light emitting body in the character accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory substrate of the character accessory of the modification 1 of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of the modification 1 of this embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship between a light emitting body and a transmissive part and a non-transparent part of a cover member in the character accessory of the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory substrate of the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment of this embodiment, and shows the state which the character accessory substrate and the light guide member overlap. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate. It is a figure which shows the state which attached the character accessory of the modification 2 of this embodiment to a game board. It is a figure which shows the cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back side cover member of the snowman accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the front side of the snowman substrate of the snowman accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the back surface side of the snowman substrate of the snowman accessory of this embodiment of this embodiment. It is the figure which looked at the cross section in the horizontal direction of the snowman accessory of this embodiment from the top. It is the figure which looked at the cross section in the horizontal direction of the snowman accessory in the modified example of this embodiment from the top. It is a figure which showed the whole of the game board of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the front view, the perspective view, and the exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the front view and the back view of the face substrate of the rabbit character of this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the face cover part of the rabbit character of this embodiment. It is a perspective view which showed the state which the rabbit accessory of this embodiment is in a standby position. It is a figure which showed one Example about the rabbit role of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed one Example about the rabbit role of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed one Example about the rabbit role of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the whole of the game board in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is the figure which showed the stump box part of this embodiment and its exploded view, the front view of the rear wall cover, and the front view of the rear wall substrate. It is a figure which showed the stump box part and its exploded view, the front view of the rear wall cover, and the front view of the rear wall substrate in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the front view, the perspective view, and the exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the Example about the mountain accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the board back grass accessory of this embodiment. In the stump box portion shown in FIGS. 498 (A) and 499 (A) of the present embodiment, the box upper wall portion, the box right wall portion, the box lower wall portion, and the box left wall portion are moved from the standby position to the moving position, respectively. It is a figure which showed the moved state. It is a figure which showed the example which did not provide the stump board part in front of the stump box part of this embodiment, and provided the grass board part which is fixedly provided in place of the 1st grass movable part and the 2nd grass movable part. be. It is a figure which showed the modification of FIG. 517 of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the modification of FIG. 518 of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the modification of FIG. 518 of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the modification of FIG. 518 of this embodiment. (A) and (B) are views showing an example of the configuration of the box rear wall portion of FIG. 520 of the present embodiment, and (C) and (D) are views of the box rear wall portion of FIG. 521 of the present embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the structure. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, and the change of the state of the moving state of the frame movable body and the light emitting effect state with the passage of time. It is a figure which shows typically the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, and the change of the state of the moving state of the frame movable body and the light emitting effect state with the passage of time. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, and (A) and (B) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, and (A) and (B) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, and (A) and (B) are right side views. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a time chart of a modified example showing an operation mode, a display state, and a light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game panel in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 5 is an enlarged right front perspective view of the game panel in the second embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the area cover member in 2nd Embodiment. It is a layout plan view of the obstacle nail in the right side game area in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member in 2nd Embodiment. In the second embodiment, it is a cross-sectional view of an obstacle nail in the right game area, (a) is a cross-sectional view of a place where one obstacle nail is housed in a penetration portion, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of two obstacle nails. A cross-sectional view of a portion housed in the penetrating portion is shown, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of a portion where three obstacle nails are housed in the penetrating portion. It is a front view which shows an example of a nail sheet. It is a front view which shows an example of the usage form of a nail sheet. An example of the installation mode of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area cover member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area cover member. In the figure, (c) is a cross-sectional view when the area cover member is attached to the existing member, and (d) is a cross-sectional view when the area cover member is integrated with the existing member. In the installation example of a plurality of types of area cover members in the third embodiment, (a) is an installation mode of the area cover member in which the right penetrating portion is shifted inward, and (b) is an installation mode in which the left penetrating portion is inward. The installation mode of the shifted area cover member is as follows: (c) is the installation mode of the area cover member in which both penetrating portions are shifted inward, and (d) is the installation mode of the region cover member in which the right penetrating portion is shifted outward. However, (e) shows an installation mode of the area cover member in which the left penetrating portion is shifted outward, and (f) shows an installation mode of the area cover member in which both penetrating portions are shifted outward, respectively. ing. In another embodiment of the area cover member according to the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area cover member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area cover member. However, (c) is an installation mode in which the area cover member is rotated 180 degrees and both penetrations are shifted inward, and (d) is an installation mode in which the area cover member is rotated 90 degrees to the right and both penetrations are inward. The staggered installation mode is shown in the front view in (e), in which the area cover member is rotated 90 degrees to the left and both penetrating portions are staggered inward. Another embodiment of the area cover member according to the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area cover member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area cover member. However, in (c), the installation mode in which the area cover member is moved downward and the penetrating portions on both sides are shifted downward is shown in the front view. In another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, the shapes of the penetrating portions to be variously applied are shown in the front view in (a) to (d). Another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) is an installation mode of the area cover member accommodating two obstacle nails in the penetrating portions on both sides, and (b) is two in the penetrating portion. The front view shows an example of the case where the area cover member is installed from the front side to the game panel while accommodating the obstacle nails of the above. (D) and (e) are cross-sectional views showing an example of the case where the area cover member is installed on the game panel from the front side. Another embodiment of the area cover member according to the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of a case where the area cover member is fixed from the rear of the game panel, and (b) is a front view showing the area cover member of the game panel. Cross-sectional views showing an example of the case of fixing from the rear of the above are shown respectively. In another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing a part of the left game area before the area cover member is installed, and (b) is the left side after the area cover member is installed. A front view showing a part of the game area is shown. Another embodiment of the region cover member according to the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an installation mode of the region cover member formed by shifting the penetrating portion downward, and (b) is an upper view of the penetrating portion. The front view which showed the installation mode of the region cover member which was formed by shifting is shown respectively. An example of how to install the decorative sticker on the area cover member, (a) is a front view showing the area cover member before installing the decorative sticker, and (b) is a mode in which the decorative sticker is attached to the entire circumference of the penetrating portion. (C) is a front view showing a mode in which a decorative sticker is attached to a part of the periphery of the penetrating portion. It is an example of the accommodation mode of the obstacle nail in the penetrating part formed in the area cover member, and (a) to (c) are in the penetrating part which formed the convex part on the front side and the game panel side of the area cover member. The accommodation mode of the obstacle nail is shown in the cross-sectional view. It is an example of the accommodation mode of the obstacle nail in the penetration part formed in the area cover member, and (a) to (g) are the obstacle nail in the penetration part which formed the convex part in the central part of the cross section of the area cover member. The accommodation mode is shown in cross-sectional view. It is an example of the accommodation mode of the obstacle nail in the penetrating part formed in the area cover member, and (a) to (d) are the obstacle nail in the penetrating part which formed the convex part on the game panel side of the area cover member. The accommodation mode is shown in the cross-sectional view. An example of the mode of accommodating the obstacle nail in the penetrating portion formed in the area cover member, in (a) to (d), accommodating the obstacle nail in the penetrating portion forming the convex portion on the front surface side of the area cover member. Each aspect is shown in cross section. An example of the mode of accommodating the obstacle nail in the penetrating portion formed in the area cover member, and in (a) to (e), the mode of accommodating the obstacle nail in the penetrating portion blocking the front side of the area cover member is a cross-sectional view. Each is shown in. An example of a mode of accommodating an obstacle nail in a penetrating portion formed in a region cover member, and in (a) to (c), a mode of accommodating an obstacle nail in a region cover member having ribs formed around the penetrating portion is a cross section. Each is shown in the figure. An example of a mode of accommodating an obstacle nail in a penetrating portion formed in a region cover member, (a) shows a visual mode before fraudulent activity, and (b) shows a visual mode after fraudulent activity in the front view. It is shown. A front view of another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment is shown. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. (A) and (B) are front views showing the pachinko machine of the modified example in this embodiment. (C) is a front view of the root vegetable frame movable body of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the production mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a table which showed the display effect pattern of the game board side effect display device, and the image data to be arranged in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a table which showed the display effect pattern of the game board side effect display device, and the image data to be arranged in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a table which showed the priority of the layer used for the display effect of the game board side effect display device and the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a table which showed the priority of the layer used for the display effect of the game board side effect display device and the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a table which showed the priority of the layer used for the display effect of the game board side effect display device and the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a table which showed the priority of the layer used for the display effect of the game board side effect display device and the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a table which showed the priority of the layer used for the display effect of the game board side effect display device and the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a table which showed the combination of the image data arranged in the display effect of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, and the image data. It is a table which showed the display effect pattern of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the layer used, and the priority of the image data arranged. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a table which showed the priority of the layer used for the display effect of the game board side effect display device and the image data arranged in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are connected to each other at both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and the player, which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and is attached to the center of the dish unit 320, according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. The effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and the door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. And, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, the door frame left side unit 530, and the door frame right side unit 550. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls, which are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820, are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is stored according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal guide path 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the tongue ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the lower part for bass inside. It is mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 having the speaker 921, the power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and houses the power supply board inside, and the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game balls are housed inside. It is provided with a payout control board box 950.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer circumference of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launching device 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front by disassembling the outer frame. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to the left frame member 30 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front left end side of the upper frame member 10, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the like. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upper portion on the left end side of the front view and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the center of the left and right, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700, which will be described later, is locked. , Prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10 are the same. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notches 22 recessed from the front surfaces of both left and right ends to the rear. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch portion 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B described later of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that the game ball can pass through. A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a standing wall portion 54 protruding forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 and the front surface upward It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface of the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A unit 57 and a unit 57 are provided. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to increase the strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 61 having a quadrangular outer shape and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a is formed so as to accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which will be described later, of the hinge member 620 on the main body frame side.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is rearward from the center in the front-rear direction. Only one game ball can pass through the rising flat rising portion 72, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 up and down. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the two is gradually narrowed, the ball is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. NS.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 are shown with respect to the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. FIG. 17 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are obliquely opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal axial support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the center of rotation of the lock member 66). , The front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not have a moment to rotate in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right side, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the bearing groove 63 is placed in the bearing groove 63 from the open side on the main body frame. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is accommodated in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It becomes a held (locked) state in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

Further, since the return portion 55 extending forward is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 54, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 from being used for fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect operation unit 400 installed in the center of the plate unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but the plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth in a rectangular shape (square). The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launcher 680, and the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

Although the details of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the dish unit 320 is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 has an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged under the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card put into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball rental display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display an effect image. It includes a display device 460.

Although the details of the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame left side unit 530 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting and decorating.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, although the details will be described later. It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 projects far forward from the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides, and at the front end. The right unit decorative lens member 561 and the door are provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are It includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the left side side in front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 in the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the door and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the door is provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and is attached to the tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. It includes 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single-shot button operation sensor 312, and the like. Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , The upper speaker 573, and the like are provided with a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 into which the cylinder lock 211 of the above is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. It penetrates back and forth between the lower plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The dish passage port 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth in the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The sheet metal 132, the vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and the vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. It includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a cutout portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of projecting pieces 141a in the columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disk-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the door frame and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame while being interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and is provided with a lock spring 144 that urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the shape of the side view is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

In the door frame upper hinge pin 142, a portion (upper end) protruding upward from the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a to restrict the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end is in contact with the flange member 143 and the lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the collar member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 when the operator holds the portion and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulled out downward. Can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. As a result, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a good state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a is provided.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end portion narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

In the door frame side lower hinge member 150, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is a door extending vertically from a height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through hole 111. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. The board 162 and the like are provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. The left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protrusion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 at a portion outside the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the attachment piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Then, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 regulates the backward movement of the glass unit 190, so that the glass unit is mounted. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate upward from the base 171 and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally lifted. do not have.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 projects upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190 mounting piece 191a. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and an outward direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flange portions 182 that project into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the tubular portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three ridges 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends vertically to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the intermediate reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is brought into contact with the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball (the game ball launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into the ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 10008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in the front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending forward and backward, and a locking unit for rotating a key attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and inserted into the keyhole 211a. It includes a rotation transmission member 212 that transmits to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and the corresponding key can be either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. As a result, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated by the cylinder lock 211 from the rear at a position substantially central in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in the front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted through 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and FIG. 39 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the effect operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the mounting portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. The base unit 430, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the base unit 430, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410, are attached to the effect. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the central side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arc shape at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are arranged in a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer to the center than.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to irregularities having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending shortly in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which project rearward in a columnar shape along the outer circumference of the flange portion 413b and are arranged in a plurality (four) at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The detection pieces 413d, which project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction on the outside of the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer circumference. A plurality (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction and a tubular opening extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the push detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which is narrowed inward, substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of is visible from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Is being urged forward by. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, which causes the front side of the outer peripheral edge to come into contact with the frame unit 415, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing against the above, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the push detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the central side of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is provided by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear is visible is formed so as to be narrowed from the outer circumference to the inside. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 and is closer to the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being luminescently decorated except for the portion targeted for luminescent decoration, and it is possible to perform luminescent decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 which is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame main body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and a central opening 416a that penetrates back and forth on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and notched portions 416c formed by a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, three each, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is notched. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. It is located between the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame body 416 (effect operation unit 400), the pair of mounting portions 416e and the left and right side portions of the notch 416c are mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface of the frame body 416, except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral opening 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side (FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect operation unit 400 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 is formed on the front side of a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is on the front side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

A weight 424a eccentric to the rotation shaft is attached to the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative substrate unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative substrate unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire effect operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. 45A shows a production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by a first button decoration part of the operation button, a button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 46A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is operated by the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The total height of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the portion below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the total width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The effect operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is provided between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). It can be seen in a state, and the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. 44, The portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410 to make it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can be done. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. , The entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the effect operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) where the player is relatively easy to press, the operation button 410 is pressed against the player. It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the frame is formed until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the effect operation unit attachment of the frame unit 415 attachment portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 or the like. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. It can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. This makes it difficult to see the rear part of the outer peripheral edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, but the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the outer peripheral gap of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button to be opened from the front side (player side). It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 having a fixed position is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from deteriorating in appearance, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, thereby forming the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other and are geometrically arranged. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration portion 411a. With the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 gives the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of them emit light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the operation button 410 is emitted. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. Since the operation buttons 410 are arranged inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 when viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescent and decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light of the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a plurality of frame top lens decorative substrates 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 and mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 47C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 47 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit that covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 530 is a strip-shaped left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the left unit base 531. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent one that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and on the left unit which is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 534, the left unit lower decorative base 535, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, and is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. It includes a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 531a have a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) are formed from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled into the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective vertical wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through port 111. ing. In the left-side reflective vertical wall portion 538, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. The reflective surface may be provided by providing the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective sticker to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective standing wall portion 33.

The left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusing lens member 532A and a lower diffusing lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a with a circular front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a square front view quadrangle corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. It includes a lens unit 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The circular lens portion 532a can irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to the front in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescently decorated by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c on the front surface. The input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusion reflection portion 532c) and the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface as a whole, moving forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e. It includes a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflection portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, in which the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

The square lens portion 532b is assembled on the door frame 3, and the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens unit 532b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens unit 532e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel parallel to the front, and the input light is transmitted. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflector 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending in the front-rear direction (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflector 532c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in the above direction), and travels in the square lens portion 532b from the center side to the outside along the front surface thereof. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection unit 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside in the square lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. It reflects to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c increases, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection unit 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffuser lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines and then dividing a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing line as a boundary. Is arranged in the radial direction so that the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the light emitted from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light with a more uniform shade forward. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. It is equipped with a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. Each lens is decorated with light emitted from the lens.

The decorative base 534 on the left unit is a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically, and is formed in a square tubular shape extending back and forth. The upper decorative base 534 of the left unit is inclined so that a portion forming the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The front view of the decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed in a U shape that is open upward. The lower decorative base 535 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 534 of the left unit, and the left It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the lower decorative base 535 of the unit, the lower end of the upper doglegged part, and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It is composed of a linear part.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically and shortly, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 and the door frame right side decorative board 552 are attached to the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. It includes a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. It is attached to the member 553 and is attached to the right side surface of the transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. It is provided with a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are open. The box-shaped, opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are attached so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit right light-shielding member 560.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover. It includes a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a square tube shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through port 111. ing. In the right-side reflective vertical wall portion 568, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, the reflective surface itself is provided from a reflective material such as metal or resin on the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, and is also reflected on the inner surface. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and is a portion that bears a part (right side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective vertical wall portion 33.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit light and decorate via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the decorative substrate 552B on the lower right side of the door frame is connected to the relay substrate of the door body of the door frame base unit 100, and the decorative substrate 552A on the upper right side of the door frame is the decorative substrate 552B on the lower right side of the door frame. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left surface side in the front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and a front view right side of the main body 553a, respectively. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of the plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed substantially in the center of each of the vertical directions when the left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 553e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is reflected outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a to the outside (right side when viewed from the front), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f to the left on the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559 Since the light that reflects toward the main body and passes through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the left decorative member 554 of the right unit housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflections formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b and the rear wall portion 556b are notched in a quadrangular shape from the left end side in the front view to the right, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a in the front view. Front view of the housing recess 556d, which is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e, which protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and is provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. On the left side, each input lens unit 556e is provided with a plurality of side reflection units 556f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be centered in the vertical direction.

Right unit The main body of the right diffusion lens member 556a has a side view shape in which the upper corner of the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comes into contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of the plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notch portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notch portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially in the center of each of the vertical directions when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 556e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light radiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view as the whole moves forward, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is reflected outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a to the outside (left side when viewed from the front), but the right unit right shading member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is irradiated to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left on the right side of the right unit right shading member 560. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be luminescent and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be lightly and uniformly decorated.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view right side (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed) of the main body portion 556a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in the front view, and rear. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the main body portion 559a extends from the right side to the right and is rearward. It includes a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right side of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right shading member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of the plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided with a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths as a set, and three sets separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right light-shielding member 560 has a side view shape such that the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of white members. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled into the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 is used to decorate the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and illuminate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right LED 552b corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other. The light emitting decoration can be made only by the medium LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering with each other, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently luminescent and decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each region.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedra. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedron decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape as if it were installed.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends shortly in the vertical direction and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward in a large plate shape from the door frame left side unit 530, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be luminescent and decorated.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have the illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and other players around him / her can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the staff of the game hall, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. FIG. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 56C is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and a pair of upper speakers 573 extending to the left and right and the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear part open and penetrate the front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated from each other in the vertical direction, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Although not shown here, the pair of side bases 572 (left side base 572a, right side base 572b) each have an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the above-mentioned outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer outer light emitting portion 34b) provided so as to emit light from the outer outer periphery into the outer periphery of the opening window, and from the inner periphery of the opening window. The structure is such that an outer peripheral light detection unit 35 (left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a, right outer outer light detection unit 35b) for detecting the light outside the outer periphery thereof is provided.

That is, as will be described later, according to such a structure, the outer peripheral light emitting unit 34 and the outer peripheral light detecting unit 35 are arranged outside the outer periphery of the opening window, so that the opening is viewed from the front. Almost the entire area of the window can be made to function as a part (operation receiving part) that is operated by the player. Further, the outer peripheral external light detection unit 35 is not arranged in an exposed state, but is arranged in the internal space 3435 (see FIG. 119) of the side base 572 which is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. Therefore, when the light is detected by the outer peripheral external light detection unit 35, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the directing light that may cause disturbance.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction and has translucency, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576, which are attached to the front of the unit body 271 and close the plurality of slits 574b respectively. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit body 271 straddling the opening 574a, and a top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. Top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decoration, which are attached to both the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of a plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The top middle left decorative member 581 and the top middle left decorative member 581, which are attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central end of the opening 574a, respectively. It is provided with a top middle right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate through each other. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to each part, and a door that is attached to the front surface of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 respectively. It includes a pair of light-shielding members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The unit so as to close the attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. It includes a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely so that the front surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 move rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portion of the quadrangle extending to the left and right near both left and right ends bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in a shape such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating back and forth, respectively, at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction in a portion extending diagonally in a portion protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that extends diagonally forward to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed so that the front surface thereof is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 271 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a deformed pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central part in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and the deformed pentagon extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The front surface of the door frame top interior decorative substrate 577 is tilted so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top interior decorative member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 271 close to both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side close to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side toward the center side. It is composed of 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d composed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. It has.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As it advances toward the center side, it is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, the irregularities of the square pyramid protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a square weight stand protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 allows a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 allows a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 271. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending vertically and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right triangles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. An abbreviation that connects the upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with a right triangle lower wall and an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The middle left decorative board 586 of the door frame top is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the middle left decorative substrate 586 of the door frame top at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The middle right decorative board 587 of the door frame top is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side from the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It is partitioning. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the relay board on the door body of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576 on both the left and right sides are hollowed out rearward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and left and right of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 near both ends in the left-right direction. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good state, and a high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member. The entire front surface of the 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Door frame action effect]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the horizontal direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through-hole 111. The front surface (front surface of the front and lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) of the lower half (the part below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be recessed rearward (dish unit). It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 are located rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the effect operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the center of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the player is made to stand out and emphasize the effect operation unit 400. It is possible to draw a strong attention to the effect operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 tilts the effect operation unit 400 arranged in front of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since it is installed in the state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state of facing the player's head (face), and the player drops his / her line of sight to display the production operation unit 400. When you look at it, you can see the operation button 410 in a state close to the front, and you can see the large and round operation button 410 intensely, and you can raise the expectation for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, a short distance of hand movement is required. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and it can be pressed to the left or right. It can be operated satisfactorily from the front or the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the production using the operation button 410.

Further, since the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the plate unit 320 and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the effect operation unit 400, the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player and operates the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and an appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d which is opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his left hand finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate 322.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction holes 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction, and are arranged on the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in the front view. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged below the front (direct front) of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Then, the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as it enters the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, production image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. can.

Further, in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball supply port 323c has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged at a position on the front left side of the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 stands on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly fed to the lower plate ball. It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be reflected on the right wall portion and indirectly guided to the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 does not show the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound produced by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his / her hand on or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e to the touch. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the right side unit 550 of the frame can exert an action effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. You can make the player feel as if you are there, and you can let other players around you play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation.

Further, since the door frame 3 can be light-emittingly decorated on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island equipment, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through opening 111, and fronts on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out to the rear (the top middle decoration member of the door frame top unit 570 is more than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the 576 are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be highlighted and emphasized to the player. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575, and a top. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with a high-quality stereo sound. can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top interior decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward in the center of the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration at the top and bottom where the virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction stands out, and the decoration has a sophisticated feel. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Further, in the door frame 3, since the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the effect operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, are projected forward, the top middle decoration member 576. And when the effect operation unit 400 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63. It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled and seen from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the 1100, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which game balls can be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a grand prize opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. It includes an upper 2300, a gate portion 2003 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a second starting port 2004.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and the back unit 3000 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65 and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. By inserting the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the mounting bosses 1010 and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100).

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1011 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates these notches 1011 and 1127 and is a lower full tank path. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1114 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. , Is equipped. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1115 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions 1115 are formed so as to be cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1121 that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a through-hole 1122 that penetrates into the.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120. It is almost the same surface as the front surface. Further, the holding step portion 1121 is formed so that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and is forward from the front of the holding step 1121. It projects toward and elastically engages with the engaging step portion 1115. The engaging claw 1124 has a size such that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engaging piece 1125 is placed on the upper side (upper side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 with a gap formed between the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 and the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 so as to be inserted. It extends by a predetermined amount toward the center side). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claw 1124 and the engaging piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The cutout portion 1127 coincides with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1127 penetrates the cutout portions 1011 and 1127 of the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder is connected to the front component 1000. The 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guidance unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 of the embodiment different from the above game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction in the front view. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the lower end in the front view and is opened downward to have a notch 1152 having the same shape as the notch 1011 of the front component 1000 and a notch 1152 above the notch 1152 in the vertical direction. It is provided with a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating the front and rear positions where the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component 1000. It is provided with a fixing hole 1154. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel is connected to the front component 1000. The 1150 can be positioned.

Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for mounting the table unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. A lottery is made by accepting a normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the first starting port 2002. The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the first special lottery, and the first special holding consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. To the number display 1404, the second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2004. When the second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the big winning opening 2005 It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

[5-7. Game board side production display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED, and can display a still image or a moving image.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 into the 3010c diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and lock the lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1126. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a grand prize opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. It includes an upper 2300, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached to a substantially center in the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size capable of accepting only one game ball at a time, and the large winning opening 2005 opens a plurality of game balls at a time ( (For example, 4 to 6) It extends to the left and right with a size that can be accepted, and is formed so that it can be opened and closed according to the game state.

The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit lower 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 capable of always accepting a game ball.

The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 in the game area 5a. The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (game area 5a). Can be guided to the center in the left-right direction of.

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and is located in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect unit and the like provided on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It includes an open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. The start port unit 2100 is arranged directly under the stage 2530, and when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received by the first start port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, which is rotatably attached around an axis extending to the left and right along the above and houses the effect drive board.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decorative unit 3050 mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and the back unit 3000 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is provided with a cutout portion 3010d in which a lock mechanism 3020 is mounted by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the rear view.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the game board side effect display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

As the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, and the like are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[6. Game content]
Next, the content of the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , The game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the stronger the ball can be driven by rotating it in the clockwise direction, that is, a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, that is, , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is located directly above the first start port 2002, so that it is accepted by the first start port 2002 with high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted at the start port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), On the downstream side thereof, the area provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 will flow down.

Then, when the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it will be in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. NS.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

Further, if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hits", "small hits", "probability fluctuation hits", "time reduction hits", etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting the game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and "5R big hit". There are "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", and the like.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. After the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the large prize opening 2005 when the large prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are received from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game balls, by accepting the game balls in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where a game ball can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The closing opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is entered. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game balls unacceptable in a closed state is specified. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2002 (Ii) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. NS. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is made by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The existing symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the symbols correspond to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

The time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present invention is the present invention. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present invention is attached to the bulging portion of the present invention of the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present invention. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative part of the present invention, and the first button decorative part 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative part of the present invention, respectively.

Further, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are used as the second decorative body of the present invention in the present embodiment. The second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432, the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478 correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention, respectively. ..

Further, each LED and subscreen decorative board mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 in the present embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is used as a light emitting body of the present invention, and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present invention is used as a back decoration means of the present invention. The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention, respectively.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3 When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A). 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), and the first button decoration part 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap. Since it is possible to show the player a decorative decoration with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the player and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

Further, the operation button interior decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). At the same time, since the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the operation of the player, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move the button lens 411. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) come close to each other or separate from each other. The first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a and the second by changing the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.). It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the decorative portion 432g inside the button (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), and the first button decorative portion 411a The decoration (intersection mode) with the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be changed. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the side opposite to the decorative member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) inside the operation button, it is referred to as the first decorative body. Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the second decorative body, the distance to the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) will be significantly different, and the button lens 411 will be operated to move the distance. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the player is not in the state, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) Since the crossing mode (overlapping condition) with and is changed, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the central side of the button lens 411 not provided with the first button decoration portion 411a. The decorative member 432 inside the operation button on the back side (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) and the effect display device 460 on the door frame side can be visually recognized well, and the first button decoration portion 411a is radial. The decoration of the player can direct the player's line of sight to the center of the button lens 411, and the decorative member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) or the door frame inside the operation button is passed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. It is possible to strongly direct the player's attention to the side effect display device 460.

Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with a second button interior decoration portion 432 g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 intersect with each other, and the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g The perspective of the decoration can be surely exhibited, and the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g can be made conspicuous to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. can.

Further, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432 g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is provided with a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432 g. By decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Further, each LED (or subscreen decorative board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436. When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) inside the operation button can be made to emit light by the light, and the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the light emitting decoration can also entertain the player. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside by the second button inner decoration portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED477a) of the decorative board 436 can be diffused, in the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button are on. The interior decoration board 435 and the inner decoration board 436 under the operation button are light-emitting and decorated by direct light, whereas the first button decoration section 411a is decorated inside the second button. The indirect light diffused by the portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for light emission decoration, whereas the second button internal decoration portion 432 g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminescent and decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly light-emittingly decorated, each LED of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. (Or, when the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside with the LED 477a emitted from the outside, the perspective is further emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that strongly attracts the player's attention can be obtained.

Further, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door) are arranged. It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame) inside the operation button do not need to be secured. The second effect display device on the side (460A) can be expanded outward to make it as large as possible, and by making it larger, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device on the door frame side) can be enlarged. 460A) can be made to stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the button lens 411 outside, by arranging the frame unit 415 on the outside portion of the button lens 411, the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be arranged. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal, which can enhance the decorativeness, improve the appearance, and strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 to give an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. Compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed over the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, if the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent some players from becoming frustrated and deteriorating their interest, and the button lens 411 is damaged. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through hole 111, below the through hole 111. The outer diameter is 10 cm on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward on the side. The operation button 410, which is movable (advance / retreat) by the player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within the range of ~ 30 cm, and the operation button interior decoration that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, it is conventional. In the pachinko machine, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen at the position where the storage plate of the game ball stands out, so the player can see it at a glance. It is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 has a high appealing power. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is provided with a translucent second button decoration so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, which are provided with the part 411b and are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) behind the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative part 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for luminescent decoration of the frame side lens 417. It includes an inner tubular portion 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions the decorative portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that separates the second button decorative portion 411b and the central side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411 by the inner cylinder portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extending portion 413f, or the second LED 422b. , 423b can prevent the light from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently emitted and decorated. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly luminescent and decorated, respectively, and a good-looking luminescent effect can be produced. In addition, various patterns of light emission can be produced by appropriately combining extinguishing, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. with respect to the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the first LEDs 422a and 423a for emitting and decorating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for emitting and decorating the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated on the left outside of one operation button. Since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) in preparation for the board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the second button decorative part Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far away as possible from the second button decoration portion 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently diverted. The second button decorative portion 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly luminescent and decorated, the appearance of the luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, which strongly attracts the interest of the player. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is attached as the operation button 410 moves forward and backward. And the wiring connected to the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 does not bend or extend, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be moved. The luminous decoration can be entertained by the player without any problem, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are provided through the transparent button lens 411. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is set to the second button decoration portion 411b. Is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, by appropriately emitting the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen transparently. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be light-emitting decorated in various patterns, so that the player's interest can be focused on the operation button 410 and the operation button 410. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and can be used for light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 is used by the player during the execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the player to operate the operation button 410, the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type production) can be enjoyed, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, when the player participation type production is executed, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Further, since it is provided with a translucent main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f that allow only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to be light-emitting and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 413f of the operation button 410 is provided. The portion on the center side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and is arranged behind by brightening the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411). It is possible to prevent the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be light-emitting decorated in a good state, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect) can be decorated by emitting light through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emitting effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, since the inner cylinder portion 416d is extended from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. It can be completely separated from the portion 411b by the inner tubular portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the inner cylinder portion 416d, light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylinder portion 416d is located closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the decorative substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be realized in which the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylinder portion 416d and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 are extended from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not go under the rear end of the main body 413a, and the light from the operation button 410 is completely blocked from entering the center side of the button lens 411. Can be done. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a and 423a can illuminate and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b in a good state, and through the transparent button lens 411, the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emitting effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, when viewed from the front, the second button is decorated in front of the outer portion of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is located, the operation button interior decorative member 432 (door frame side second) is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). The outer member and the rear side (back side) of the effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see by the second button decorative portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. Further, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is light-emitting decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the decoration member 432 inside the operation button (the second effect on the door frame side) is compared with the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outside and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make it difficult to see the members on the outside and the rear side of the operation button internal decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the appearance of the player can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light, a light emission effect in which the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410 and a light emission in which the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player the effect, the light emission effect that the light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can not get bored with the various light emission effects, and the player can enjoy it. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is driven into the game area 5a by the stored game ball in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3. Along with mounting, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321 to attach a predetermined size of installation space behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and the portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 in the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is arranged from that portion. Since the lower plate 322 that can store the game ball is attached by extending the portion of the lower plate main body 325 corresponding to the lower plate second region A2, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. Therefore, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively inconspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player. can.

Further, at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate second region A2 extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer circumference, and extends upward to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game balls are provided, the game balls in the lower plate 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game ball supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to the interruption of the game due to the damage of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game ball to the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading (spilling) from the lower plate main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable when the game ball invades the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be surely prevented from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved. Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can perform the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening) of the lower plate main body 325. When a hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second region A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips and the like from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can be done.

Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game ball released from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the vertical wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from being damaged, reduce the interruption of the game, and reduce the player's interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball in contact with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced to prevent them from being damaged.

Further, since at least the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are used as separate members, when the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340 and 340A. It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side in which 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction of the front surface bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is performed so as to accept the game ball into the general winning opening 2001 or the like. The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 is provided, and the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging part, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. A storage plate capable of storing a game ball composed of a lower plate 322 and a lower plate 322 is provided, and the storage plates (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) are placed outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower plate first area A1 located and a lower plate second area A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in the front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out, and the storage dishes (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made small to be inconspicuous. can. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) that stands out can be seen in the part where the upper plate and the lower plate are visible, so that the player can see the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power, which can be recognized at a glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is open. Although it becomes smaller, the first of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in the front view. Since the extension unit 325B, the second extension unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 in a range that cannot be seen from the front (lower plate second area A2). can. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of storage of the game ball can be secured, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the lower plate main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower plate first region A1, the lower plate covers 340, 340A having the lower plate second region A2, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension are added. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, etc. having different sizes are prepared in advance. By installing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, which are sized according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the space at the rear depends on the amount of protrusion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) to the rear, various effect operation units 400 (second) having different amounts of protrusion to the rear. The lower plate 322 that can be used for the effect operation unit 400A) can be used, and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward and is a game ball. Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, various shapes of lower plate covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (mounting) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, which have shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, various forms can be supported. It is possible to obtain the same effects as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the game ball is placed is the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the portion where more game balls are loaded due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate main body 325, even if many game balls are stored, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are separated from the lower plate main body 325. It does not act, and it is possible to prevent the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls is located below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is performed such that a game ball is received in a general winning opening 2001 or the like. The lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction while having 321 and the lower plate 322. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including and is difficult to see (make it difficult to see) from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, which is of interest to the player. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract. Further, since it is difficult for the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) to visually recognize the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the player can play the game in the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being noticed and distracted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 that guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to see the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d, the portion between the ball pulling hole 322a, the lower plate ball pulling hole 322a is left open. , The game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to make the illusion that the game ball is discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a from the front, it is probable. In addition, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 that can be seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of the 322 is large, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game balls discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 are brought into the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Because it can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the portion between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, and discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box). , It is possible to prevent the game ball from circulating in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to make sure that the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 is in a state where it is difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, prevent the player from being distracted, and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is immediately noticed by the ball guide portion 322c or the like without being noticed by the player. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball is discharged downward (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 from the front, the lower plate can be seen from the front. Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than twice the visible size with respect to the size of 322, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of game balls as in the lower plate of a conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 that bulges forward below the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game in which a game ball is received by a general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. A large-scale production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the plate unit cover 326 is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction. In addition to being provided with a portion 326a, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction is recessed on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 so as to be scooped backward. Due to the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a can be made to appear to protrude greatly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect) can be made to appear. The operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side, and the large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, at first glance, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the game ball is wrapped around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and a sufficient amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, and the player can concentrate on the game, entertain the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his / her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, his / her fingertips are on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the storage amount of the game ball is sufficiently secured even by tactile sensation, and in the state where the game ball is stored in the lower plate 322, the inside of the lower plate 322. Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decline in interest. Further, since the fingertips of the hands placed in the lower plate 322 do not easily touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to reassure the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), a sufficient storage amount of the game ball can be secured even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. It is possible to make the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be provided. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the side and the upper side of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player can enter the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the fingertips and the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 and the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and injuring the player when the hand is put in. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be moved from the player side. It can be a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make it stand out more and attract the attention of the player, and the decoration by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is easy to see. Then, it is possible to entertain the decoration and production of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321 and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates up and down, it is a conventional pachinko machine. Since it has the same function as the lower plate in the above, a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine does not get confused about the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with this pachinko machine 1, and is the same as the conventional one. You can play the game with a sense of humor, and you can dedicate the player to the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball supply port 323c are arranged when viewed from the front. The lower plate ball punching hole 322a is not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clearer to improve the appearance, and the pachinko machine with high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plate unit 320 that bulges forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. The door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting the effect to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. The operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside is attached, and the outer diameter is surrounded so as to surround the outer circumference of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 that is about 15 cm in length and whose center bulges away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A tubular button base 413 that includes a one-button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412, and projects from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Since it is provided, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second) is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, or the like. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the effect display device 460A, and improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the decorative member 432 provided inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, from the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit) can be increased by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. Even if the gap between the lens and the 470) becomes relatively large, it can be well hidden by the first button decorative portion 411a or the like, so that a large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be prevented from deteriorating the appearance. The 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without any problem. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out, and the player's interest is strong. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that attracts and has high appeal.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side in a tubular shape is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decorative member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an angle, the inner wall of the button base 413 can block the outer side of the operation button interior decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) to make it invisible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in the direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward), it is near the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, the advancing / retreating direction of the operation button 410. Since it is in a state of being inclined with respect to (a plane orthogonal to), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) are combined with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge. ), The outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the operation button interior decorative member 432 and the door frame arranged in the operation button 410 are arranged. The side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player with the operation button 410. The 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be realized.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative property). Therefore, the operation button 410 is made to stand out in the pachinko machine 1 and is of interest to the player. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

Further, since the button frame 412 is opaque in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button is formed at the portion of the button frame 412. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

Further, a button frame 412 that is opaque over the entire circumference with a predetermined width from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 is provided, and the player cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button on the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the gap between the main body 413a and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see. It is possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Can be moved well.

Further, since the outer circumference of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the outer circumference has no directionality as compared with the case of having a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player participation type production using the operation button 410 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410 when the player participates in the operation. Since it is possible to easily touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest can be operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). In addition to being able to entertain the production, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the operation button 410 by the production image and the light emission effect by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). , By actively participating the player in the player participation type production and entertaining it, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In addition, by executing the production in the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. Can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, it is possible to immediately make the player recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the player is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 raise expectations for the effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decoration portion 411a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The button lens 411 in which the first button decorative portion 411a is not formed may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button is not attached to the button frame 412. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed on the portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the first) so as to surround the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. (2) A button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes in a tubular shape toward the base unit 450) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one of the display devices 460A may project toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire circumference of the outer circumference of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have at least decoration (flat decoration by sticking a sticker, printing, etc., three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. When the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as grain, slit, prism, etc. on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to the above, but is recessed from the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) to the rear, and is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). It may be set to 322, or it may be recessed rearward only from the right outer part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a part of it wraps around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). You may want to be there.

Further, in the above embodiment, the shape (shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the portion (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is curved rearward. Although an example of denting in a shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be dented in a polygonal prismatic shape or a polyhedron shape.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "operation dial, touch panel, etc." "Equipped with an operating device", "Equipped with a rotating body with decoration on the surface", "Equipped with a decorative body with decoration and a movable device for moving the decorative body", "Game Characters, items, logos, and decorations that imitate scenes (dioramas) in three dimensions according to the concept of the machine "," Characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns according to the concept of the gaming machine , Etc. are decorated by stickers, printing, etc. ”, etc., and members such as units or panels may be attached. Further, the member to be attached to the attachment space 326j (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is provided with the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a which is open forward for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is used. A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. It is desirable that the front surface of such a dish unit cover be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine by stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as the covering portion covers an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322. An example of covering the lower plate with difficulty in seeing from the front is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area of less than half of the storage area of the game ball in the lower plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the arc-shaped one in which the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are partially provided in the circumferential direction is shown. The second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the rear member of the display device 460A or the like is shown so as to be always visible, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front and rear (or up and down) is subject to predetermined conditions. A configuration may be provided in which a variable light transmitting means is provided so that the rear side can be visually recognized by satisfying the above. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, "a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side" and "a liquid crystal film that is transparent by turning the power on / off". The rear side becomes visible because it becomes opaque or becomes opaque. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing the variable light transmitting means on at least one of the front member and the rear member, only the front member or the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized in a normal state. The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. Then, in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that cannot be seen in the normal state can be seen, and thus the front member can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the rear member of the rear member can show an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

More specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under a normal state, the rear side of the front member is darkened to decorate only the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap.

Alternatively, when the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member under normal conditions, so that the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be seen. The decoration by the surface of the can be shown to the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member, and the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized. Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and the front member and the rear member When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration with the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion of the LED or the like (or, the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are brightened by the light of the light emitting portion of the LED or the like at the same time. ) And the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member, respectively, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. As a result, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, and various decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened, so that it is on the surface of the front member or the rear member. The glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as something like a magic mirror, but even if it is made like a liquid crystal film, the same effect can be obtained. Further, when a liquid crystal film or the like is used as a variable light transmitting means, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so that it can be transmitted between the front member and the rear member or after. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or luminescent and decorated) by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of luminescent effects and decorative effects. ..

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a game ball rental device connection terminal board that relays an electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 73 is a block diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control unit.

As its control configuration, the pachinko machine 1 includes a first control unit MCG that controls the game including the payout of prize balls in addition to the generation process of the control power supply (for example, + 5V) as shown in FIG. A second control unit SCG that produces an effect related to a game being played by the first control unit MCG is provided.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. , The payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 are provided, and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and a predetermined time elapses from the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. 69. Main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor with built-in various control programs such as the main control program that is executed after the game is executed and controls the game operation, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various types. A main control input circuit 1310b for inputting a detection signal from a detection switch, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage is mainly provided.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, "main control built-in") that updates a big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game by hardware. It is described as "hard random number circuit 1310an"). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 32767 is preset). The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (1 value within a predetermined numerical range) as an initial value and is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, which will be described later, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When this is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function has the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. The based signal is configured as a circuit to be output from its various output terminals.

The first start port sensor 4002 for detecting the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 for detecting the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and the general, as shown in FIG. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting the game ball that has entered the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Is entered in. Further, the gate sensor 4003 for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, the count sensor 4005 for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, which is attached and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the first special symbol display 1403 is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. , 2nd special symbol display 1405, 1st special hold number indicator 1404, 2nd special hold number indicator 1406, normal symbol display 1402, status indicator 1401, and round indicator 1407. do.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main with a reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 4005 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 do not frequently detect the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310 cc without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 951. When the payout control board 951 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 bb without the reset function. , No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, provides a bus 1310ah. The circuit is connected via (see FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec outputs a command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of the game ball is, as shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, and the operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output by the operation. .) Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Detection from the payout control MPU952a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in various control programs including a payout control program that controls operation, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 952b into which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. It includes a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 and the 952d. The payout control MPU952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), a built-in ROM thereof (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and the like. It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU952a, the payout control program serializes various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to the first error release command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. As a signal, serial data is output to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). Further, this payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program also issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when the detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and a payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The ball out detection sensor 827 that detects the out of the game ball in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and the payout detection sensor 842 that detects the game ball discharged from the payout ports 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the description described later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is a payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full is full is first the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data manner, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. The signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function, thereby performing payout control without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. Outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and outputs the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display. By outputting the drive signal to be displayed on the 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically). At the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball mesh with each other in the vicinity of the entrance, and the payout rotating body becomes difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, it means that there is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). Is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. Notifies that the game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to CR unit 6). Is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet). The number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC) (not shown), and the playground (hall) is provided through the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls and various other information (game information, error details related to the payout operation of the game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in).
The external terminal plate 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hall. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls the payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the input / output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending display unit 330. It is output to the equal rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental device return display unit 330. Further, in the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental display unit 330, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. There is. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is sent to the predetermined payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and with this as an opportunity, the payout control MPU952a uses the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is also output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952 cc without the reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for renting game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The boards of the terminal board 880 and the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. , The game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is supplied to the payout control board 951, while the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are supplied to the frequency display board 365. ..

The frequency display board 365 has a push button switch 328 mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball rental display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the rental balance display unit 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

In the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball rental device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

The ball return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged side by side in a row, and one of these three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven by one digit segment indicator, which is a so-called dynamic lighting method. The digit segment display is controlled to light up. By such lighting control, the ball lending / returning display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays the error of the CR unit 6. The ball return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment display, and the designated one-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by turning on the CR unit 6 are connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input is performed via the board 880, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment display is displayed. The contents of the light emitted from the vessel can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball return display unit 330. In this CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan remaining display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input sends an EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball rental is possible or impossible, is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of balls of the game ball paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, among the first control unit MCG, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 supplied from the pachinko island equipment and capable of electrically connecting or electrically shutting off AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power sources. A launch control unit 953 that controls launch by the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power factor rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a in which the power switch 934 is operated to rectify the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. The power factor improvement circuit 935b, the smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power with the power factor improved by the power factor improvement circuit 935b, and various alternating currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. It includes a power supply creation circuit 935d for creating a power source.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not the player is touching or a finger, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. Is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. Further, in the launch control circuit 953a, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 951. ..

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The game ball received by the ball feeding member is controlled to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control on the first control unit MCG based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and is shown in FIG. Peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door. While controlling the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the calendar information and hour / minute that specify the date. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and a knob that rotates the volume of music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. It includes a volume adjusting volume 1510a that can be adjusted by operating it.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LEDs, and other light emitting modes) that are continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc. that defines the above, and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of jackpot game states and special Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing effect flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU1511a is operating normally. ”) And.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power failure occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply board 931. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 931 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold it and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, if the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board to transmit game board side motor drive data for transmission to drive board 4170 and output drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on game board 5. Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of light emission data on the door side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 3 from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a are input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit via the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system goes out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1511e together. I am diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serials I. It is composed of a / O port 1511ae, a WDT1511af with a built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 1511ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels, ~ DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1511ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1511ah, various serial I / O ports 1511ae with peripheral control, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I / O ports 1511ag with peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between the O port 1511ae, the WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511ae are serial I / O ports for lamp drive boards, serial I / O ports for motor drive boards, serial I / O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier boards, and frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring information on an effect operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets when the watchdog timer is started and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period of time (until the timer is up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT1511e, and play games. The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a is output. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to the game production are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, from mute to the maximum volume. The volume of the sound effect can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, the notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful, or the game will shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, and the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids is specified.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. Some of them are read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 1511b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and the current brightness setting information. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, which is the effect display device on the game board side. When the 1600 backlight is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b, which exclusively store a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. Various control program copy areas 1511cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information that is updated when various control programs are executed. Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero, while backup is performed. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. (For example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is a production information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later. ) Is backed up as Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and production information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as an object. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cc to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when the sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a Since the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V-blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As described later, "(1ms)" is defined as "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated. And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is lit. It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 1511cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC4165a described later) is set, and is stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cap and the like are provided. In the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set. In the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are set. Dial created based on various information acquired based on the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc. (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400). A storage area in which rotation (rotational direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set. When drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 are output based on the LOCKN signal to be output to convey that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the frequency of defects and the state of occurrence of defects during connection with the effect display drive board 4450 is set.

Bank0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, the peripheral area of the previous time is executed. When the control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. NS. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time. When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is in the first and second areas of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs with two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). Is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. It is copied at high speed. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, for a total of two pairs managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511 kb has Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. This is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1fr), is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed, and are stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1ms). The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac makes a high-speed copy, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac are standardized. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are commanded when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even at that time, it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state). Etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da is used to manage various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and a special effect flag), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, briefly explaining the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 1511a is backed up in "(RAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3" , And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area. 1511dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. 72. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in sound source"), and drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with built-in sound source for control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various types of music, sound effects, etc. To the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b that stores sound data, the audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and heads toward the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal. And, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input and the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is input. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It has. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as sprite data used for displaying screens and images described later, for example, ring-shaped image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and operation menu background image described later can be displayed. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume adjustment icon described later. Volume setting icon used for display In addition to image data, etc., the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the player's point of view. The service mode screen image data used for the above, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b also store the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400 should be operated.

Peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 1310 from peripheral control ROM 1511b of peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of peripheral control RAM 1511c. The schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to 1511cae, and the screen data at the beginning of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage, each time a V blank signal is input. The first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to 1511cae, and set the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when a V blank signal is input, the head is headed according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP1512a is a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 74 based on the input screen data. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. The effect display arranged in the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is peripheral as described above. Since the control board 1510 outputs the output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, "V-by-One (V-by-One) of THine Electronics Inc. is used in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. By adopting a differential communication system called "registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise.

The channel CH1 uses a serial interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas the channel CH2 uses an interface based on a parallel system. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side directing transmitter IC4610d, and is housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, the various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals on the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a becomes Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side. Image data for the effect display device 460 is stored from channel CH2 in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 effect display drive board 4450. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). Peripheral control MPU1511a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

The sound source built-in VDP1512a employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, in the sound effect built-in VDP1512a, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 74, the music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b. By extracting sound data such as sound effects and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without being completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a include a plurality of sound source built-in VDP1512a built-in sound sources. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined to obtain the volume of the combined production sound. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, it flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by being amplified to the master volume value. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. By synthesizing the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a, the volume of the combined production sound is actually the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Amplifies to the master volume value, and serializes this amplified production sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is combined. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. ..

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, it is easy to control the notification sound to be played in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification. The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually displayed at the bottom. It is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound proceeds according to the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after this predetermined period elapses, the sound generation that has been forcibly set to mute is generated. The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400). When the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to shift to the setting mode and adjusted, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It is supposed to flow.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, the notification sound is played. Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound has elapsed for a predetermined period because the muted production sound is proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data. Then, when the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 stop flowing, the production sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but follows the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b are for drawing on the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses the right side audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data, which is not shown in the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown) that is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the left side audio data is used as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference method between the left and right sides of the board extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, so that, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data can be obtained. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to make one left side audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal, and is a red video signal. , The green video signal, and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, so that the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP1512a.

Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, and three sync signals, horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal. When is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d has three image signals, a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, and a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal. Three synchronous signals, a signal and a clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring length required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is obtained from the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (No. 1). Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game ball paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branch unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility is unitized is arranged. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn in the vicinity of the payout device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball and the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The environment is such that it receives noise that has invaded the machine.

For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is described by THine Electronics Inc. By adopting a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 are used. As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the above, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is not just a parallel wire provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where a parallel wire is adopted as a differential paired cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source. Even if the mechanism is less susceptible to noise by adopting the differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd., the configuration with such hardware alone is due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise that has entered the power supply line supplied from the Pachinko Island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it looks like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that various images are displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what kind of image it is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The production transmitter IC1512d adopts a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. Therefore, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twist pair cable is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the door frame side effect display device 460 can reliably display the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm that cannot be recognized at all from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later. And, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 3, various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. As a result, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 to remove various wirings, and then the door frame 3 is removed from the main body frame 4, so that the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained. If the problem that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3'is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the door frame 3 having the problem, and the door frame 3 is used. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3'side. It can be electrically connected to the substrate.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. A twisted pair cable that can be used is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The boards with the board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wirings that transmit various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side production transmitter IC1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are combined with the video transmission wiring pattern. Wiring patterns for power supplies and other wiring patterns for various signals for transmitting various signals are mixed. Therefore, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively, separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal boards called a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, it is used for video transmission formed on these plurality of relay terminal boards. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The terminals 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring that transmits various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. One of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, and the harness that supplies power is red and the other wires are gray. .. The wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is in the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be housed. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is input as a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 , That is, it is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected so as to transmit these two signals, while being differential. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected in a circuit so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , It is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When two differential signals, a positive signal and a negative signal, are not input, a circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, so that the door frame side effect transmitter is transmitted. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Peripheral control MPU1511a is demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period when the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in the customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, various serialized effects are generated. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to a door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal to that effect, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a to generate an image for notifying that when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a considers that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 It can be determined that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the 320, but when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") to convey the problem. (Please call a clerk. ”) Is output to the game board side production display device 1600 by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound to that effect (for example,“ a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. By controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC1512c, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU1511a. Based on the effect, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be used to develop the effect. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. It can be mentioned that the screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments in a range of 100% to 70%, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the panel-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame-side effect display device 460, is included.

Further, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information as the date and hour, minute and second information first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU1511a can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the game machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, in addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has brightness setting information, input date and time information, etc. when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the pachinko / pachislot machine side effect display device 1600 is performing the demonstration while waiting for customers, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program to produce the game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The decrease in brightness due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies the date and time as calendar information and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is added by 10% to 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. The current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and an electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is used as the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and a game production (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player. The notification sound for, etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and are muted. The volume from to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, the notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation portion 401 of the production operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the pachinko / pachislot machine side effect display device 1600 is performing the demonstration while waiting for customers, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. Therefore, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and the notification sound, it is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the volume of music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and cases where the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume adjusting volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the pachinko machine 1 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the production operation unit 400 You can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 to increase the volume to the desired level, and if you feel the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is loud and the music or sound effects are noisy, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not playing is continued for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, he / she will be seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game. If the player who was playing the game feels the volume adjusted loudly and the music or sound effects are noisy, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can use the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The ground (GND) of various boards and the ground (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is plugged into the power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931, and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Section 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 931 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. The synchronous commutator circuit 935a is supplied from the pachinko island facility, rectifies AC 24 volts (AC24V), and supplies the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to create DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies the + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power supply creation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses + 37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and has a launch strength (launch strength) commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 302. While controlling the drive current for launching (launching) toward the launching solenoid 682 and outputting it to the firing solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

The power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c from + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is the + 24V power supply line.

The + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and is paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. That is, the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 which are in the forward direction by the diode PD0. A current flows toward the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is returned from the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 again. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, in the + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0, the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. The current is flowing toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When it disappears, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

As shown in FIG. 75, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and of these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages, + 24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and are peripheral through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 76A, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. It is supplied to each of the 4180a. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates DC 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3.

Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 13.V from + 12V. The + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to each of the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952. The + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Is. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. The +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951 at all.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. In the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is created from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and + 5V of the main control board 1310. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU1310a. The + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

In the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 are supplied via the payout control board 951, and the signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V are monitored. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76B via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, the input is input to the decorative substrate of the door frame or the like via the frame decorative drive amplifier substrate 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared with the case of monitoring the voltage to be output, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and then the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, and main control MPU created by the main control board 1310 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and a communication interface circuit between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control board 1310g shown in FIGS. 69 and 75. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz)). )) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly comprises the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g was applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal was grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component was removed from the 3rd terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is first electrically removed from the ripple (AC component folded by the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Is smoothed.

The + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). By connecting to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 causes a power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and + 5V is created. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU1310a and the main control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is in a state of being electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, respectively.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency division of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit in which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, a circuit in which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built into the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed from the time the power is turned on). It has a function to perform. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error of the payout control board 951, the main control is performed when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic is input from the payout control board 951. The operation signal in which is HI is input from the payout control board 951 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. At this time, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the transistor MTR0 is turned on by inputting the operation signal whose logic is HI by being pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the switch is switched. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, the voltage between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning port sensor 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, and the second starting port sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (folded by the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The AC component) has been removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitoring voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. A monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal 2 of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is a positive terminal of the MIC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is a negative terminal of the MIC21B. The results of these comparisons are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC 22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC 22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are the power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) set in advance when the voltage starts to drop from + 24V when + 24V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 24V voltage is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is + 5V due to the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
Monitoring of a + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become the power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) set in advance when the voltage starts to drop from + 12V when + 12V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above. The preset of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 12V voltage is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the + 12V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, due to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. Further, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D type flip-flop MIC 22 releases the latch state and transfers the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same as the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. (The logical signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal) On the other hand, when the signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Further, in the D type flip-flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal becomes, the state of outputting the signal whose logic is HI from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic. Maintain the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, so that the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal can be used. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the output terminal 1 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a + 24V power failure or a momentary power failure and a + 12V power failure at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, signals from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary power failure, are input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is electrical to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is output started and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is an output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. Further, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. No function It is output from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the payout control board 951 as a payout power failure warning signal, and is also output to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is a D type flip-flop. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, so that the transistor MTR20 is Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as a payout failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. 78. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and wiring. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 on the payout control board 951. In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal and electricity of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in FIG. Is connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30, MR31, and the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34, and the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor in the previous stage The MTR21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. 78. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. In the above, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72. Be connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35, MR36, and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, so that the transistor MTR23 becomes Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the peripheral control board. It is input to 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. There is no reset function that outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal and the peripherals input to the main control MPU 1310a. While the logic is the same as the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22, is delivered to the payout control board 951. There is no reset function to output as a power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has two transistors, the front stage and the rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and its surroundings. The logic is the reverse of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU1310a is electrically connected via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cc without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the above, and is a payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 of the above is a pull-up resistor and an electrical one end of which is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are the main control boards between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is mounted on the 1310, the power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, whereas the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used. In order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the boards of the 951 and the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU952a and the peripheral control MPU1511a.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. 77. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main pay serial data transmission signal without the reset function. No reset function by transmitting to circuit 1310cc The main control output circuit 1310cc transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the TXB terminal mainly transmits the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. As a peripheral serial data transmission signal, it is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and a main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function transmits a main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, payout notifying that the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received. The payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered, etc.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or the drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is provided to the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69. Is output and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69 are displayed. Drive signals are output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and drive signals are output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various indicators, and various information related to the game (game information). Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise that invades the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. The reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the above.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 makes the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photoIC) as communication interface circuits. It is mainly composed of.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is charged. As + 12V, it can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Since the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of invading noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, which is + 5V.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits the command. When transmitted as main-circle serial data from the shift register 1310aea, a main-circle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data are stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19,200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal No. 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When it is pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+ 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 and the negative terminal are grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal for the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. It is input to the input terminal of.

As a result, as described above, when + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When + 5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main-circle serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main-circle serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main-circle serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 ensures that the data is received without any omission or omission.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the transistor. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, and when the transistor MTR50 is turned on, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which the communication voltage of + 12V applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, and Even if the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops due to a power failure or momentary power failure due to the electrical parallel connection, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of the MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and it is composed of the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the main control output circuit 1310cc, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50. And the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, is applied, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to be interrupted, and it is possible to prevent the command from being missing. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missing command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main peripheral serial data. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310 cc. Therefore, 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310 cc without a function, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and is missing. It can be received reliably without any problems.

[10. Payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control unit and the like, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a payout motor drive. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control unit circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is applied to the 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (GND). + 5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs + 5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from + 5V output from the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 to smooth the filter. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. In the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 causes a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples by the capacitor PC3 and smoothed. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU952a, is grounded to ground (GND).

Further, the DDR terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid VBB. Since the electric charge is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a result, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the payout control MPU952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the pay VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Payout control unit circuit]
In addition to the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 952 resets as peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU952a and the reset function The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is in a state of being electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, the + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCS terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCS terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VCS terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b is input with a payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, the circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, the circuit in which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. .. First, the circuit in which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be described, then the circuit in which the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input, the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, and the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. A circuit in which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit in which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Since the output terminals of various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279, the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 70 are open collector output types, various detections are made. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, a circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the door frame 3 released from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and the door frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The 2nd terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR21, the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via a resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, it is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR21, PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24, PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF according to the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. NS. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 21 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 22 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. , The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input]
The main body frame release switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the main body frame 4 released from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and the main body frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The 2nd terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 by the pull-up resistor PR28 on the + 5V side. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via a resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR31, PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619.

When the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is generated. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is turned off to perform logic. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are in the present embodiment. Even in the case of, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is the main frame door opening signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or The player can determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since it is input, this outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, and the hall computer uses the outer end frame door opening information output signal to transmit the door frame. Although it is not possible to determine whether 3 is in the state of being released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is opened. It is possible to determine that the player who says that the door is in a state that does not occur during the normal game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame is turned on. 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end can be output. The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from the normally closed switch to the normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618'and main body frame opening switch 619'), , The door frame opening switch 618'turns on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turns off (disconnects) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. .. The main body frame opening switch 619'turns on (conducts) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns off (disconnects) when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body is released for some reason. Even if the frame opening switch 619'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619'are adopted as normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit to which a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to and resists the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a payout power failure warning signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41, PR42, and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931. When the power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout power failure warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310 cc. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both of the conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the + 12V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. Occasionally, since the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. When the voltage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V voltage, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a, while When there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltage, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power failure warning signal input to the payout control MPU952a and the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is passed through the handle relay terminal board 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered in. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. The 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is 3 for the full tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after removing the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and one end to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC 40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full. In the present embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, the accommodation space is filled with the stored game balls. , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is lowered to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931 to the payout control board. In 951, when the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Although the circuit configuration was used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball burnout detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are T-type filter circuits such as the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through it. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball-out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full, and the payout control MPU952a is a full tank detection sensor. When it is determined that the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. That is, when noise invades the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU952a is a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored and is not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body, and even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the payout motor 834 is driven. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the prize ball passage described above by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 In some cases, the load is abnormally applied to the payout motor 834, causing abnormal heat generation and failure, or the mechanism for transmitting the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body breaks down. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is configured so that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via a resistor PR49 and electrically. The base terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, the fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. In addition, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a via. When the first-stage and second-stage transistors PTR42 and PTR43 are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the second-stage transistor PTR43 changes, and the signal becomes the RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Is entered in.

In addition, the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts constituting the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 by the above.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR49, PR50, and the transistor PTR42 is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52, PR53, and the transistor PTR43 is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and the resistors PR55, PR56, and the transistor PTR44. The circuit composed of is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is used in the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error, and the power is turned on. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time and the error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). In the function of canceling the error in), it becomes an error clearing signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42 to turn on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clearing that erases the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is judged that it is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, the error is cleared. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor PTR44 when the output terminals of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR44 is turned on by being input to the base terminal of the above, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage is turned off, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and it is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR 43 in the rear stage. When the voltage is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a clears the RAM by erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined that the signal is to be instructed, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time the power is turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. Judge that it is an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is being operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is HI. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is instructed to perform RAM clear that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Payout motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the drive ICPIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, respectively, and is also electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952da and input to the voltage switching input terminal, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor drive voltage via the Zener diode PZD60, and is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60. It is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and is also supplied to the payout motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals 6 and 7 of the drive ICPIC60 are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60. At the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, the payout motor drive signal is input via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal, and 11th terminal, which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the resistors PR60 to PR63, it is an excitation signal. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. It is designed to be output to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. If this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged. Therefore, as protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the front stages of the 3rd and 10th terminals which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 includes the BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, and the BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal, via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 connects to the rental device such as a game ball. An XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, via the terminal board 869. And output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuits for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like are mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LED and phototransistor are built-in).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Occasionally, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and is also connected to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 via ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in 1. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is changed, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. NS.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply board 931. NS.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the power supply board 931. Will be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is changed, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photo is taken. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the optocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the optocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is changed, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, so that the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The EXE signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. It is input from 952 bc to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 cc is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR83 via a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is changed, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the EXE output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is possible or impossible is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Is entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 cc is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as a PRDY.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Will be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function. No reset function The payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.

Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a has the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection). In addition to the signals 1 and the like being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is transmitted via the payout control input circuit 952b. It may be input, or the detection signals from the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 70 may be input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Output or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payer ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payer is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Output to the error LED display 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the payout control board 951 has the payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like described above. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in addition to the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 951 includes a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, and the like. And 2 rounds big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal related to the above, a payout power failure warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to the external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The prize ball number information output signal output for each, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal. A game information signal such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. That is, two signals, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and a prize ball number information output signal, are output to the external terminal board 784, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer has the number of jackpots in which the round is 2 times (2 round jackpot). The number of big hits in the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of big hits in which the number of rounds is 15 (the number of big hits in 15 rounds) and the number of big hits in the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round jackpots and the number of occurrences of 15-land jackpots from the total number of jackpots. It is not possible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of jackpots occur. It may be difficult to get a big hit for 15 rounds. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily arouse the player's gambling spirit.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, so that the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot and the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of big hits in 15 rounds. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is 2 rounds or 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. Since the number of big hits and the number of 2 round big hits can be displayed separately or only the number of 15 round big hits can be displayed as the number of big hit gaming states, it is possible to arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary. do not have.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round jackpot to the end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also the 15-round jackpot. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a 2-round jackpot information output signal and 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 comprises an outer end frame door opening information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, and a 2-round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal does not occur during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. It is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is obtained every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal to that effect, and the main prize ball number information output signals are various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. It is a signal to notify every time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on the game ball entered in, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal generates a 15-round jackpot. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that a 2-round jackpot has occurred, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation has a probability fluctuation. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the signal is being displayed, and the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal indicating that the variation display is finished (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal ends the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, and the starting opening winning information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. This is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row on the external terminal board 784. The output terminal PT1 is white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer uses the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball 10 each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to count the number of the paid out game balls and grasp the total number of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is provided in green to output an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is in a state in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during the normal game. This is a signal to convey that, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. / Or it can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is grayed out to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal to convey that it is in a state, and in the present embodiment, the end (stop) of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and receives the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, and the number of times is counted to count the number of times, and the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of times that the special symbol is variablely displayed on the symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is provided in yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment, it is a signal to that effect. , Every time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting port winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting port winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting port 2004, and count the number of times the starting port winning information output signal is input to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a 15-round jackpot has occurred. In the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is used. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of times the 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot is occurring, and in the present embodiment, while the two-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT6, It is designed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of times the two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue to output a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has finished (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol. In the present embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, and when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer is the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can know the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is colored in red to output a time-saving and medium-time information output signal. As described above, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state is occurring, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving / medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving / medium information output signal is input. In addition to being able to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the time saving, it is possible to grasp the total number of times the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs an information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the information output signal during the probability fluctuation is a signal indicating that the probability fluctuation is occurring, and is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability fluctuation is occurring in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state where the probability fluctuation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. In addition to being able to grasp that there is, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the probability fluctuation and to grasp the total number of times the probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various prize openings such as the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the general prize openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the ball has reached 10, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as prize balls from the pachinko machine 1 each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of game balls to be paid out to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. It should be noted that, for example, a game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on a game ball entered in various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds. It is designed to be output at intervals of 0.128 seconds, as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control boards. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output via (passing through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting the wiring having a connector that is colored in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the connection from being targeted. Then, the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so as not to mix the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 for this purpose are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a row from the left side of the center to the right side, in this respect as well, the wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent accidental electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting signals to the hall computer.

In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are holed from the external terminal board 784, respectively. It is configured to tell the computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. If a big hit of 15 rounds happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when the remaining number is low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient. (Also, if ball clogging or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). Then, in the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since it is a signal to convey that fact for each case, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 because the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. The clerk in the hall, for example, checks the hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying the game ball from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and identifies the position of the ball clogging (also, it occurs in the payout device 830, for example). By identifying the position of the ball jam and the position of the ball hose) and eliminating the problem, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, even if the clerk in the hall is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, so after the 15 rounds of big hits are completed, the game ball is paid out by the clerk in the hall. When the game returns to the above state, the payout control board 951 pays out the unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in the period when the 15-round big hit is completed and the 15-round big hit is not generated. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal to notify each time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, even though the 15-round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. Therefore, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1. The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. When the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are displayed. Through this, we adopted a mechanism to convey information to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (trouble such as ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle or the like, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state. It is possible to accurately convey the relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the number of game balls to be released to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. The liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly comprises the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. Is transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively. Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The positive signal and the negative signal from which noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It restores to three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal (that is, restores to a parallel signal before serialization). As for the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are 8 bits each. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are also input in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two differential signals, the positive signal and the negative signal, are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit so that it does. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected in a circuit so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , The peripheral control board 1510 transmits to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is stored in the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of.

The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, a door frame when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. From the side effect transmitter IC1512d, the serial signal (serial data) by the differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are input. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side. During the period of display on the display device 1600 and the period of demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 while waiting for customers, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display. In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is used. It is sent as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock. The data format is completely different from that of the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. Assuming that the data is used, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, from the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the data, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDS VDD terminal, PLL VDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied with + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application sheet, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded to the ground, respectively.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logical) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal which is the ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The LVDS VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDS VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The PLL VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as a ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLL VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal tells that when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and operates normally, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and powers down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded to the ground. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3 V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at the rising edge. It is a terminal for designating either (the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to allow output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it will not be possible to output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them to the ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In the normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. This mode outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the effect that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery) is requested to be transmitted. This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, The door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, but for some reason, it is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is used. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a is a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d in order to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. For the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the It is transmitted to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door. It may be directly connected electrically via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the two. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that conveys that the data output from the D0 terminals to the D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, is valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs the clock signal DCLK generated by the PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to D17 terminal are three video signals (18), which are a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal). The blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 terminal to D5 terminal, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 terminal to D11 terminal, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 terminal to D17 terminal, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground. It has become.

[Mounting mode of each electronic component of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG]
By the way, it is generally known that when an electronic component is surface-mounted, it is advantageous in that the hardware circuit can be suitably miniaturized by integration. However, for integrated circuit components among electronic components (components in which multiple types of single-function elements (resistors, diodes, capacitors, etc.) are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package), Due to its nature, the package is naturally larger than a discrete component (a component in which one single-function element is enclosed in a relatively small package), so that a relatively large space is created on the back side of the package. Then, the space on the back side of such a package becomes a place (a place where electronic parts (illegal parts) are easily mounted illegally) that is difficult to visually confirm in the surface mount state. For this reason, in the field of gaming machines, electronic components have been inserted and mounted on a base plate (so-called base substrate, etc.) instead of surface mounting for many years.

That is, the electronic components to be inserted and mounted tend to create a relatively large gap between the package and the base plate. Therefore, by inserting and mounting electronic components, it is possible to maintain the space on the back side of the package as a place that can be easily visually confirmed even in the mounted state, so that unauthorized components can be mounted. It is made to be suppressed favorably.

However, in recent years, in the field of pachinko and pachislot machines, the space used for production has become even larger, and while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components, the hardware circuit has been downsized. There is an increasing demand for planning.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. 69, the second control unit that only controls the effect related to the game. Considering that the SCG is not directly related to the privilege obtained by the player and is unlikely to be the target of fraud, the second control unit SCG is configured by surface mounting.

That is, as described above, the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment is configured to include the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. 69. Then, the second control unit SCG uses various integrated circuit parts and various discrete parts mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510 to perform an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process. Is made feasible.

Here, as various integrated circuit components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510, for example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the like are included. Further, as various discrete components mounted on the base board of the peripheral control board 1510, for example, there are resistors AR10 and AR11 shown in FIG. 79, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10, and the like.

In this regard, in the second control unit SCG according to this embodiment, lead portions of various electronic components are placed on the surface of the base plate (here, the base substrate of the peripheral control board 1510). Only the surface mount area that is mounted in the form is formed. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMDs) are also used as the various electronic components described above of the peripheral control board 1510. However, since these electronic components are not directly related to the benefits obtained by the player and are not easily targeted for fraud, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of the electronic components is not deteriorated. The hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 can be miniaturized.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. Then, the first control unit MCG uses various integrated circuit components and various discrete components mounted on the base boards of the boards 1310, 951, 931 to supply the control power supply (for example, + 5V). It is said that the generation process and the process related to the game including the payout of the prize ball can be executed. However, since such processing on the first control unit MCG side is directly linked to the granting of benefits to the player, the first control unit MCG is likely to be subject to fraud. Therefore, although the hardware circuit is required to be miniaturized, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components will be significantly reduced, and the game will be enjoyed. The reality is that the decline in the number of people is inevitable.

However, on the other hand, even such a first control unit MCG is mounted on the base plate (the base board of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951 and the base board of the power supply board 931). Discrete components among various electronic components have a smaller package than integrated circuit components, and even if electronic components are illegally mounted on the back side, they can be easily visually confirmed. It can be said that it is a component having relatively high performance as a security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

That is, the inventor has found that among the electronic components mounted on the first control unit MCG, components having high security performance against fraud (discrete components) and components having low security performance against fraud (integrated circuit components) are mixed. Focusing on the fact that the hardware circuit is further integrated, if only the parts with high security performance against fraud (discrete parts) are used, the first control unit MCG side, which is easily subject to fraud, can also be used. We have found that it is possible to reduce the size of hardware circuits while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

FIG. 117 is a diagram schematically showing how the first control unit MCG is integrated only with parts (discrete parts) having high security performance against fraud. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 117, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the illegal mounting of electronic components even on the MCG side of the first control unit, which is easily subject to fraud. Explain that.

As shown in FIG. 117, the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment includes a base plate BB and various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB. .. Note that FIG. 117 is only a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of the characteristic technique according to the present application. For example, the base plate BB is actually a base substrate of the main control substrate 1310 and a payout control substrate. It is configured to have three base boards, that is, a base board of 951 and a base board of a power supply board 931. An example in which the characteristic technique according to the present application is applied to such an embodiment will be described later. As a matter of fact, here, for convenience of explanation, first, an example in which they are composed of one base substrate will be described.

Here, on the base plate BB,
-The insertion mounting area TH, in which the lead portion provided in the electronic component is inserted into the base plate BB and is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance,
-The lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate BB, and the surface mount area SM is excellent in integration performance due to multi-stage stacking of wiring patterns, but is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Both are provided in the form of being divided.

With such a configuration, while it is possible to mount electronic components that are difficult to be fraudulent on the surface mount area SM, electronic components that should pursue fraud suppression rather than integration are mounted on the through-hole mounting area TH side. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, and at the same time, it is possible to preferably maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts.

That is, as described above, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as the various electronic components D described above,
-Integrated circuit component D1 with low security performance against unauthorized mounting, which is enclosed in a relatively large package in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated.
-The single-function element is only enclosed in a relatively small package, and is equipped with a discrete component D2 having high security performance against unauthorized mounting.

In this regard, as a characteristic first technique according to the present application, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, the integrated circuit component D1 having low security performance is subjected to the through-hole mounting region TH and the surface. It is mounted only in the insertion mounting area TH which is excellent in fraud suppression performance among the mounting areas SM, and only the discrete parts having high security performance are mounted in the surface mounting area SM which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. As a result, even on the MCG side of the first control unit, which is liable to be the target of fraud, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the fraudulent mounting of electronic components.

Further, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, as the discrete component D2 having high security performance, the surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM It has an insertion mounting type discrete component D2b mounted in the insertion mounting area TH.

That is, as described above, with respect to electronic components, it is generally possible to achieve integration by using a surface mount type rather than a through-hole mount type. However, when both the through-hole mounting area TH and the surface mounting area SM are separately provided as the base plate BB, for example, in terms of circuit design, the position where the electrically connected integrated circuit component D1 is provided. In consideration of the space provided for the wiring pattern related to this, it is better to arrange the electronic components in the through-hole mounting area TH instead of the surface mounting area SM so that the integration can be reversed. Cases can also occur.

In this respect, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, not all of the discrete parts D2 are used as surface mount type discrete parts D2a, but the most suitable mode for integration is achieved. Discrete parts D2b of insertion mounting type are intentionally used for some parts. As a result, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be miniaturized more favorably while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

As shown in FIG. 117, the insertion mounting region TH having excellent fraud suppression performance is not formed on one side (back side) surface of the substrate and is formed on the other side (front side) surface of the discrete component. And integrated circuit components are both mounted. On the other hand, the surface mount region SM, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, is not formed on one side (back side) surface of the substrate and is formed on the other side (front side) surface of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component. It is desirable that our integrated circuit components are not mounted and only discrete components are mounted. That is, in this case, first, the mounting of the mounting electronic component on the back surface side, which tends to be a blind spot when confirming whether or not the illegal component is mounted, is eliminated. On top of this, in the insertion mounting area TH, which is excellent in fraud suppression performance, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for fraud and discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted, while improving fraud suppression performance. Since it was decided to mount only discrete components that are difficult to be fraudulently targeted in the inferior surface mount area SM, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be downsized while maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of fraudulent components. Will be.

Furthermore, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, even in the discrete component D2 having high security performance, the capacitor element having a large capacitance value (backup). For power supplies, etc.), the surface mount area is relatively larger than other elements (resistor elements, diode elements, capacitor elements with small capacitance values (for filter circuits, etc.), etc.). It is not used as the surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on the SM, but is prepared only as the insert mount type discrete component D2b-C mounted on the insert mounting area TH. As a result, in order to reduce the size of the hardware circuit, it becomes possible to more preferably maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components.

However, although a capacitor element having a large capacitance value is larger than other elements (discrete parts), a large gap is not created between the package and the base plate as compared with the integrated circuit component D1. .. Therefore, the capacitor element may be used as a surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted in the surface mount area SM, and even in this case, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components is maintained. Is possible.

Moreover, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, a characteristic second technique is inherent, which is based on a viewpoint different from the characteristic first technique according to the present application described above. ing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 117, in the first control unit MCG according to this embodiment, one hardware circuit for the purpose of exerting a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). Is provided as a discrete circuit (hardware circuit that does not use the integrated circuit component D1) DHC that is electrically configured by the discrete component D2. However, this discrete circuit DHC is provided with an electrical structure composed of a plurality of discrete components D2 mounted in a form divided into an insertion mounting region TH and a surface mounting region SM.

That is, in this case, although it is one discrete circuit DHC intended to exert a specific electrical function (for example, backup power supply function), it is mounted on the base plate BB in the insertion mounting area TH. The electronic component D2b having a shape that makes it possible and the electronic component D2a that has a shape that makes it possible to mount the surface mounting region SM will be mixed. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrically close role to exert a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it difficult to recall the fact that there is a problem, and it is possible to expect the suppression of fraud by increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit. Further, by mounting a part of the electronic components on the surface mount area SM, it is possible to expect the hardware circuit to be miniaturized.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while suppressing fraud against electronic components.

However, as described above, the example shown in FIG. 117 is for explaining the principle of the two characteristic techniques according to the present application. Therefore, next, the example in which each of the above techniques is applied to the embodiment of the present application will be described. explain.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the base plate of the main control board 1310, the base board of the payout control board 951, and the base board of the power supply board 931. It is configured to have three base substrates of. Then, both the through-hole mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM are provided on these base boards in a separated manner.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, of the three base boards, only the through-hole mounting region TH is formed on the base board of the power supply board 931, and the base of the main control board 1310 is formed. In the substrate and the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951, both the through-hole mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM are provided so as to be separated from each other.

Then, among the various electronic components D mounted on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, the diode MD0 of the above-mentioned "backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM" (FIG. 75). (See) is mounted as a surface mount type discrete component D2a on the surface mount region SM of the base board of the main control board 1310. Similarly to this, the diode PD0 (see FIG. 75) in the above-mentioned "backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM" is surface-mounted on the base board of the payout control board 951. It is to be mounted as a surface mount type discrete component D2a in the region SM.

According to such a configuration, of the integrated circuit component D1 having low security performance and the discrete component D2 having high security performance, only the discrete component D2 (diode MD0, diode PD0) is used as the surface mount type discrete component D2a. It will be mounted on the surface mount area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951), respectively. As a result, even on the MCG side of the first control unit, which is easily subject to fraud, it becomes possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against the fraudulent mounting of electronic components (). The characteristic first technology according to the present application).

Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, in the surface mount region SM formed on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, a specific type of discrete component (here, the diode MD0 and the diode PD0 are both Schottky). Only a plurality of diode elements) will be mounted. That is, in this case, since all the electronic components mounted on the surface mount region SM, which are inferior in fraud suppression performance, have the same shape, it is expected that the labor required for fraud confirmation can be saved.

Further, in the above configuration, the discrete components (electronic components that play a part of the power supply function) that the power supply board 931 should originally have are mounted on a board (main control board 1310) different from the power supply board 931. I have to. That is, even if there is not enough space to form the surface mount area SM on the power supply board 931, the surface mount area SM is formed on another board and mounted as a surface mount type discrete component D2. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in circuit design of the first control unit MCG as a whole.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) having a plurality of discrete components D2 (here, a capacitor element and a Schottky diode element) for the purpose of exerting a backup power supply function. However, the plurality of discrete components D2 constituting the discrete circuit DHC are separately mounted in the insertion mounting region TH (capacitor element) and the surface mounting region SM (Schottky diode element), respectively. It is supposed to be.

According to such a configuration, although it is one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exerting the backup power supply function, the insertion mounting area TH (power supply board) is on the base plate BB. The electronic component D2b having a shape that enables mounting on 931) and the electronic component D2a having a shape that enables mounting on the surface mounting area SM (main control board 1310, payout control board 951) are mixed. become. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG, they have an electrically close role to exert a specific electrical function (for example, a backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it difficult to recall the fact that there is a problem, and it is possible to expect suppression of fraud by increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit (the second characteristic technique according to the present application).

Moreover, in the example applied to this embodiment, a plurality of discrete components D2 included in one discrete circuit DHC (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exerting the backup power supply function are inserted into the insertion mounting area TH (capacitor element). And the surface mount area SM (shot key diode element), and the discrete components D2 are mounted on two different boards (main control board 1310, payout control board 951 (shot key diode element), power supply board). It is supposed to be mounted separately on 931 (capacitor element). That is, in this case, the electronic components D2a and D2b mixed for surface mounting and through-hole mounting are mounted on different base boards, respectively. Therefore, the difficulty of understanding the circuit will be further increased, and the suppression of fraud can be further expected.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the mounting surface of the surface mounting area SM on the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is the insertion mounting area TH of the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so that the area is smaller than the mounting surface. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a third party to notice that the surface mount area SM having inferior fraud suppression performance is provided, and suppression of fraudulent activity can be expected.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the number of types of electronic components mounted on the surface mount region SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is determined by the number of types of electronic components mounted on the base plate of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to be smaller than the number of types of electronic components mounted in the through-hole mounting area TH in the BB. Therefore, the types of electronic components to be visually checked to see if any illegal acts have been performed on the electronic components mounted in the surface mount area SM, which is relatively inferior in security performance, are relatively reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to facilitate the visual check.

Further, in the above embodiment, as is clear from FIG. 117, the total number of electronic components mounted on the surface mount region SM in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is determined in the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG. It is provided so as to be smaller than the total number of electronic components mounted in the through-hole mounting area TH. Therefore, the total number of electronic components to be visually checked for illegal acts on the electronic components mounted in the surface mount area, which is relatively inferior in security performance, is relatively reduced. , The load on the visual check can be reduced.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface mount area SM is provided on the base board of the main control board 1310 and the base board of the payout control board 951, respectively, but on the base board of the power supply board 931. It may be formed.

Further, the surface mount region SM is formed only on a specific base board, and the surface mount type discrete component D2 that should be originally mounted on another base board is also arranged together on the specific base board. May be good. According to such a configuration, when confirming whether or not improper mounting is performed, it is only necessary to focus on the surface mount area SM formed on a specific base substrate, so that fraud confirmation can be performed. It is expected that the time and effort required will be saved.

However, considering that the integrated circuit component D1 is mounted on any of the above three base boards, at least the through-hole mounting region TH must be formed on all three base boards in order to appropriately suppress fraud. Must be.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is a base board of the main control board 1310, a base board of the payout control board 951, and a base board of the power supply board 931. Although it is assumed that it is composed of three base substrates, as shown schematically in FIG. 117, they may be collectively configured on one base substrate.

Further, the "base plate BB of the first control unit MCG" according to the present application may be any one in which the surface mounting area SM and the insertion mounting area TH are separated, and this is provided by a plurality of base boards. It may be provided by one base substrate.

For example, as the base board of the main control board 1310, a first base board on which only the insertion mounting area TH is formed and a second base board on which only the surface mounting area SM is formed are provided, and the second base is provided. By inserting and mounting the board in the insertion / mounting area TH of the first base board, the electrons mounted in the first base board are inserted and mounted while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components. It can be assumed that a structure is adopted in which the components and the electronic components surface-mounted on the second base board are electrically connected to each other. In this case, the "base of the first control unit MCG" The “plate BB” is a concept that includes at least both a first base substrate on which only the insertion mounting region TH is formed and a second base substrate on which only the surface mounting region SM is formed. That is, such an aspect is also one of the aspects such as "the base plate BB of the first control unit MCG is provided with both the through-hole mounting region TH and the surface mounting region SM separately". It is included as an embodiment.

When the first base board on which only the through-hole mount area TH is formed and the second base board on which only the surface mount area SM is formed are provided, the through-hole mount area TH and the surface mount area SM are provided. It is desirable to dispose the first base substrate and the second base substrate so as to face different directions (preferably orthogonal directions).

That is, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is an electronic component enclosed in a relatively small package as a component (surface mount component) mounted in the surface mount area SM inferior in fraud suppression performance. By using only discrete components, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while eliminating the space for mounting illegal components (reducing the space on the back side).

However, even if the discrete component (surface mount component) has excellent security performance, there is a small space on the back side of the discrete component (surface mount component) that is difficult to visually confirm when it is mounted in the surface mount area SM. Still left. Therefore, the hall side that operates and manages the pachinko machine 1 understands that "there is no space left on the back side of the discrete parts (surface mount parts) for mounting illegal parts". However, in a situation where it is difficult to visually confirm the anxiety such as "a very small fraudulent part may be created and it may be mounted fraudulently". There is a concern that the operation and management of the pachinko machine 1 will become complicated, such as being forced to confirm.

Therefore, it is more desirable that the base boards of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 are provided in the following modes instead of the above-described modes.

[Modification example of each base board of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951]
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a part of the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 according to the modified example. Hereinafter, a modified example of the base board MB of the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. Although the description of the modification of the base substrate of the payout control substrate 951 will be omitted, it is possible to transform the base substrate MB of the main control substrate 1310 described below with the same contents.

As shown in FIG. 118, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification is configured to include at least an insertion mounting board THB which is inferior in integration performance but excellent in fraud suppression performance.

Further, also in the through-hole mounting board THB according to this modification, a plurality of types of electronic components (through-hole mounting components) are mounted in the same manner as in the insertion mounting board TH of the above embodiment. Similarly, the electronic components (through-hole mounting components) include both the integrated circuit component D1 having low security performance and the discrete component D2b having high security performance.

However, as is clear from FIG. 118, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the through-hole mounting board THB and the through-hole mounting lead portion are inserted into the insertion-mounting board THB. Only electronic components that are mounted in the form of being provided are provided. That is, although the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification has a surface mount region and a surface mount component mounted on the region, any of them can be seen at first glance. It is decided to adopt a special mounting structure that does not seem to be provided.

More specifically, the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification includes the integrated circuit component D1 and the discrete component D2b as the insertion mounting components, and the special mounting component D3 (in the drawing, the special mounting component). It has D3a and a special mounting component D3b). Although the special mounting component D3 contains an electronic component (surface mount component) mounted in a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance, it is concealed with respect to the through-hole mounting board THB. It is inserted and mounted via a lead portion TL for special insertion mounting, which will be described later.

According to such a special mounting component D3, fraud suppression is performed even though the surface mounting area described later and the electronic component (surface mounting component) mounted in the surface mounting area are respectively provided inside the surface mounting area. Since it will have an appearance shape that looks as if it is a single through-hole mount component mounted on the high-performance through-hole mount board THB, it is expected that it will be excluded from the target components for fraudulent purposes by malicious persons. Will be able to be done. In the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, the portion of the through-hole mounting board THB in which such a special mounting component D3 is inserted and mounted is surface-mounted on which the surface-mounting component is mounted. It will function as an area.

Moreover, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, such special mounting components D3 are not collectively (adjacently) arranged in one place, but are placed in a plurality of places on the base board MB. In addition to being dispersed, at least one of the special mounting components D3 (in the figure, the special mounting component D3a) is arranged so as to be surrounded by a relatively large area (insert mounting area) in which the through-hole mounting components D1 and D2b are inserted and mounted. It is supposed to be set up.

That is, in this case, the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance and the electronic components (surface mount components) mounted in the surface mount region are subdivided and inconspicuous, and in combination with the above-mentioned appearance shape, the fraud suppression performance is improved. The surface mount area exists when a malicious person looks at the base board MB of the main control board 1310 because it is excellently mixed in the insert mounting area provided as a relatively large area. This makes it even more difficult to notice, and it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining more suitable suppression performance against mounting of unauthorized parts.

Further, as will be described later, a diode MD0 (see FIG. 75) as the surface mount type discrete component D2a shown in FIG. 117 is enclosed inside the special mounting component D3a according to this modification. As described above, such a diode MD0 is used in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) for the purpose of exerting the backup power supply function. Nevertheless, even in this modification, the insertion mounting area (capacitor element (capacitor BC0)) and surface mounting area (Schottky diode element) are used for a plurality of discrete components constituting one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit). (Diode MD0)) and each are to be mounted separately. Moreover, the capacitor element (capacitor BC0) to be inserted and mounted in the through-hole mounting area is located in the insertion-mounting area not adjacent to the special mounting component D3a containing the shotkey diode element (diode MD0) (power supply board 931 or the like). It is implemented in.

In this way, it is difficult to recall that the electronic component built in the special mounting component D3a exerts a specific electrical function (backup power supply function), and the difficulty of circuit understanding is increased. As a result, even if it is noticed that there is a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance, fraud suppression can be expected.

Next, an example of the structure of the special mounting component D3a according to this modification will be described. In addition, in FIG. 118, for convenience of explanation, the portion where the special mounting component D3a is mounted is enlarged, and the outer package OP of the special mounting component D3a is partially omitted to expose the internal structure thereof. The figure (the part surrounded by the dotted line) is included.

As shown in the explanatory diagram, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification includes a special surface mount board SMB as a surface mount board on which a surface mount type electronic component (surface mount component) is mounted, and the above. A surface mount type discrete component D2a mounted on a special surface mount board SMB, and a lead part for special insertion mounting as a lead part for insertion mounting inserted into a through hole (specific insertion hole) of the above insertion mounting board THB. It includes a TL and an outer package OP that molds each of these parts with a molding resin.

Here, the special surface mount board SMB electrically connects the surface mount lead portion SL provided on the electronic component (surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the board and the special insert mount lead portion TL. It has a wiring pattern HP formed so as to be connected to each other, and is provided so that the mounting surface thereof is substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface on the through-hole mounting board THB.

The surface area of the special surface mount board SMB on the mounting surface is limited to a size sufficient for mounting the surface mount type discrete component D2a, and is required, for example, when the integrated circuit component constituting the main control MPU 1310a is mounted. It is designed to have a mounting surface with an area smaller than the area considered to be. That is, in the insertion mounting board THB, even when all the electronic components required for operating the pachinko machine 1 are mounted, a margin space for further mounting other electronic components is left, whereas it is special. In the surface mount board SMB, in order to reduce the size, when the electronic component to be mounted (surface mount type discrete component D2a) is mounted, there is enough space to mount other electronic components. Not left.

With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to improper the special surface mount board SMB in some way. Therefore, the hardware circuit can be further miniaturized while suppressing the mounting of fraudulent parts. It will be expected.

Further, the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself has a package structure (inner package) that is molded by a molding resin. Inside, the Schottky diode element (diode MD0) included in one discrete circuit (backup power supply circuit) is electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL by a bonding wire. That is, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with the surface mount lead portion SL formed so as to be pulled out to the outside of the inner package (mold resin), and the surface mount lead portion SL is provided. By being electrically connected to the special insertion mounting lead portion TL via the wiring pattern HP formed on the special surface mounting board SMB, it can be connected to other electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting board THB. The Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is electrically connected so that processing can be performed in cooperation with each other.

Furthermore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is provided with a flat appearance shape (package shape), and is soldered so that the flat surface faces the special surface mount substrate SMB. It is surface mounted. However, as described above, the special surface mount board SMB on which the surface mount type discrete component D2a is mounted has a relationship in which the mounting surface thereof is substantially orthogonal to the mounting surface of the insertion mounting board THB. Therefore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a provided in the special mounting component D3 is not a flat surface thereof but a thin surface (thin surface) facing the insertion mounting substrate THB. It will be implemented in a form.

In such a configuration, a thin surface having a relatively small area, not a flat surface having a relatively large area, faces the through-hole mounting substrate THB. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 118, only a small area (two through holes) is left in the insertion mounting board THB so that one discrete component (insertion mounting type) can be mounted. Even in such a situation, the special mounting component D3 can be arranged in the small area (for two through holes).

The size (horizontal length in the drawing) of the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself according to this modification is when the special mounting component D3a is mounted on the through-hole mounting board THB. The pitch between the through holes into which the lead portion TL for special insertion mounting is inserted (installation interval of specific insertion holes) is smaller than that.

Further, the lead portion TL for special insertion mounting has a bifurcated structure in which one end side sandwiches the special surface mount board SMB from both sides thereof, and the wiring pattern HP of the special surface mount board SMB is formed. By being soldered at the present location, it is fixed to the special surface mount board SMB and is electrically connected to the surface mount lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. .. On the other hand, the other end side is fixed to the insertion mounting board THB by being soldered while being inserted into the through hole of the insertion mounting board THB, and the insertion mounting board THB side. It is electrically connected to various electronic components via the wiring pattern of.

Further, although the outer package OP has a package structure (inner package) in which the surface mount type discrete component D2a itself is molded by the mold resin, the mold resin is different from the mold resin. Therefore, the surface mount type discrete component D2a is further molded (double molded) together with the special surface mount substrate SMB to be mounted.

With such a configuration, it becomes extremely difficult to perform some kind of fraud on the surface mount board which is inferior in fraud suppression performance.

In particular, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the external shape created by the outer package OP of the double mold is different from the external shape of the specific type of surface mount component itself surface-mounted internally. .. That is, in this case, since the discrete component D2a itself can be mounted in a concealed state, it seems that a specific type of surface mount component built in the special mounting component D3a is not mounted. The difficulty of understanding the circuit will be increased, and it will be possible to expect the suppression of fraud.

Moreover, in the outer package OP, only the special insertion mounting lead portion TL of the special insertion mounting lead portion TL and the surface mounting lead portion SL provided inside is the outer package OP (mold resin). The surface mount type discrete component D2a is integrally molded together with the special surface mount substrate SMB so as to be pulled out to the outside of the above, whereby the special mount component D3a is inserted and mounted as a lead portion (special insertion mount). It is mounted on the through-hole mounting board THB as one electronic component having a lead portion TL).

According to such a configuration, the special mounting component D3a is provided even though the surface mount board having poor fraud suppression performance and the electronic component (surface mount component) mounted on the board are provided inside. Since it will be possible to function as if it were a single insert mounting component mounted in an insert mounting area with excellent fraud suppression performance, it is expected that it will be excluded from the targets of fraudulent purposes by malicious persons. Will be able to be done. In addition, since it can be handled in the same manner as a single insertion-mounting type discrete component in terms of distribution and mounting, it can be said that it is also excellent in terms of such ease of handling.

Furthermore, the outer package OP is mounted on the surface mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the discrete component D2a itself. By integrally molding with the target special surface mount substrate SMB, the appearance shape as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes is also given.

That is, as shown in FIG. 117, when the surface mount type discrete component is left in an external shape smaller than the pitch between through holes (installation interval of insertion holes) in the insertion mounting region, the main control board is used. It becomes easy for a third party to notice that a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the base board MB of 1310, which may promote fraudulent activity.

In this regard, in the above configuration, the surface mount type discrete component D2a having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes is regarded as one electronic component having a size that does not fit within the pitch between the through holes. It is designed to be mounted after having an external shape. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 118, there are no electronic components having an external shape having a width smaller than the pitch between the through holes on the base board MB of the main control board 1310, and the electronic components are inserted and mounted. Since it is possible to make it appear as if only the type of electronic component (through-hole mounting component) is mounted, it is possible to improve the suppression performance against mounting of an unauthorized component.

Furthermore, the external shape created by such an outer package OP is different from the external shape of the electronic components surface-mounted inside, and all the through-hole mounting components (special) mounted on the through-hole mounting board THB. It has a unique appearance shape that is different from any of the electronic components (electronic components except the mounting component D3). That is, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification provides excessive security performance such as protecting the mere discrete component D2a, which has only limited functions as compared with the arithmetic processing unit, with a double mold resin. After giving it, it is designed to have a unique and relatively large appearance shape as an appearance shape that intentionally attracts the attention of malicious persons.

With such a configuration, the excessive security performance provided on the base board MB of the main control board 1310 can be shown to a third party, so that the motivation to commit fraud is reduced. Can be expected.

Further, the outer package OP is given an identification number indicating the type of the electronic component as the special mounting component D3a. In this modification, the content (○ 3213) of the identification number is described in the inner package (○ 3213). It is designed to be different from the content (SD) of the identification number attached to the surface mount type discrete component D2a) mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB.

With such a configuration, the content (SD) of the identification number assigned to a specific type of surface mount component does not appear, so that the external shape created by the outer package OP and the surface mount inside are mounted. Coupled with the fact that the appearance shape of the surface mount component of a specific type is different (combined with the structure of the double mold), it becomes possible to make it appear that the surface mount component of a specific type is not mounted. In addition, it becomes possible to make it appear as if only an insertion-mounting type electronic component (through-hole mounting component) is mounted, and it becomes possible to improve the suppression performance against mounting of an illegal component.

Further, in the special mounting component D3a according to this modification, the length of the special surface mount substrate SMB in the thickness direction is made smaller than the length of the surface mount type discrete component D2a in the thickness direction. On top of this, a mounting surface on which electronic components and wiring patterns are provided is formed only on one side of the flat surface of the special surface mounting substrate SMB, and the mold resin is directly attached to the back surface side thereof. It has become.

That is, by adopting such a configuration, not only a unique and asymmetrical appearance shape is formed, but also the length in the thickness direction of the special mounting component D3a is mounted in the through-hole mounting area TH. It is smaller than the length of the discrete component D2b in the thickness direction. This eliminates the need to secure a special mounting space when mounting the special mounting component D3a on the through-hole mounting board THB, in combination with the above-mentioned structure in which the mounting surfaces are orthogonal to each other. The special mounting component D3a can be mixed in while the insertion mounting component is mounted.

As described above, the special mounting component D3a according to this modification looks like a single insertion mounting type discrete component, but in reality, it is a special surface mount board SMB and a surface mount type discrete component. D2a and D2a are included in each of them. That is, in the special mounting component D3a, the special insertion mounting lead portion TL is fixed to the special surface mounting board SMB inside and electrically connected to the surface mounting lead portion SL via the wiring pattern HP. On the other hand, the through-hole mounting component has a structure in which the lead portion for insertion and mounting is electrically connected to a specific electronic component by a bonding wire inside the lead portion.

Further, in the base board MB of the main control board 1310 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 118, a Schottky diode element (diode MD0) is internally provided as a special mounting component D3 having such an internal structure. In addition to the surface mount special mounting component D3a, a special mounting component D3b for internally surface mounting a capacitor element having a small capacitance value is provided.

That is, the special mounting component D3b according to this modification is a filter for a specific data line between the discrete component D2b of the insertion mounting type mounted in the insertion mounting area TH and the discrete component D2b provided as a resistance element. It forms a circuit. Recall that even with such a configuration related to a filter circuit, the electronic components included in one discrete circuit have an electrically close role in exerting a specific electrical function (filter function). It is possible to make it difficult to do, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit, it becomes possible to expect suppression of fraud.

Regarding the special mounting component D3b, both the resistance element and the capacitor element constituting the filter circuit may be internally surface-mounted on the special surface mount substrate SMB. However, in this case, at least the tallest electronic component (insertion-mounting component) among the electronic components (through-hole mounting components) to be inserted and mounted on the through-hole mounting board THB, such as arranging the electronic components side by side in a row. For example, it is desirable to keep the appearance shape lower than that of the capacitor element omitted in the drawing) in order to reduce the size of the base board MB of the main control board 1310.

Further, the special mounting component D3 may include a plurality of types of electronic components as described above, or may include a plurality of one type of electronic components. In any case, when a plurality of electronic components are built in, the plurality of electronic components are surface-mounted on one special surface mount substrate SMB side by side in a row, and the electrons thereof are mounted on the surface. It is desirable that the components and the special surface mount substrate SMB are collectively molded with a molding resin and packaged.

However, if a plurality of electronic components are built in the special mounting component D3, the appearance shape will naturally become large, and "because it is a type of electronic component that is inserted and mounted in this size and shape, one There is a concern that it will not be possible to expect a dazzling effect that utilizes prejudice, such as "I think it is a discrete component of the insertion mounting type." Therefore, in order to preferably obtain the dazzling effect utilizing such prejudice, one surface mount type discrete component is used alone, and its appearance shape is made different by the above-mentioned double mold structure, and its thinness is obtained. It is desirable that the surface is mounted so as to face the through-hole mounting board TH.

In addition to forming the outer package OP of the above-mentioned double mold with a non-transparent material such as mold resin, the outer package has an identification number different from the identification number assigned to one surface mount type discrete component itself. It can be said that it is also important to increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit by attaching it to the OP.

The special mounting component D3 according to this modification has a structure having a "one surface mount type discrete component" smaller than the "one insertion mounting type discrete component" inside the special mounting component D3. The size when double-molded becomes about the same size as "one insertion mounting type discrete component", which makes it possible to expect to exert the above-mentioned excellent action and effect. .. Therefore, in a configuration in which a "single insertion mounting type discrete component" is provided and double-molded, the size becomes larger than that of the "one insertion mounting type discrete component". Since it is clear, it cannot be expected to exert the above-mentioned excellent action and effect.

Hereinafter, the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 will be summarized. Unless otherwise specified, the contents described below can be adopted by any of the techniques described with reference to FIG. 117 and other examples thereof, and the techniques described with reference to FIG. 118 and other examples thereof. It is a structure that can be played.

As described above, the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 are
-Has a board on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using those electronic components, in addition to the generation processing of a control power supply (for example, + 5V), the progress processing of the game including the payout of prize balls It has a first control unit MCG that controls the above, and a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and by using those electronic components, an effect related to a game advanced by the first control unit MCG is performed. 2nd control unit SCG
The purpose of this game machine is to solve the problem of "miniaturizing the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting". ..

More specifically, in the technique described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, first, "among the first control unit MCG and the second control unit SCG shown in FIG. 69, the effect control related to the game is performed. The second control unit SCG, which is only performed, is not directly related to the privilege obtained by the player and is not easily targeted for fraud. " It is one of the technical features that this is configured only by surface mounting. That is, in this case, surface mount type components (SMDs) are also used as the various mounting electronic components described above of the peripheral control board 1510, and the player obtains these mounting electronic components. Since it is not directly related to the privilege and is not easily targeted for fraud, the hardware circuit mounted on the pachinko machine 1 without degrading the security performance against illegal mounting of electronic components for mounting. It will be possible to reduce the size of the.

On the other hand, since the processing on the first control unit MCG side is directly linked to the granting of the player's privilege, the first control unit MCG is likely to be the target of fraud. Therefore, although the hardware circuit is required to be miniaturized, if the first control unit MCG is simply integrated by surface mounting, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components is significantly reduced. The reality is that the decline in game entertainment is inevitable.

Therefore, in the technique described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, on the substrate of the first control unit MCG,
-Insert-hole mounting area where the lead portion provided in the electronic component for mounting is mounted in the base plate BB, and the integration performance is inferior but the fraud suppression performance is excellent.
-A surface mount area in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component for mounting is mounted on the surface of the base plate BB, and the integration performance is excellent due to the multi-stage stacking of wiring patterns, but the fraud suppression performance is inferior. First of all, both of and are to be provided. On top of this, the technical feature is that the following two types of mounting electronic components with different properties are sorted and mounted in a through-hole mounting area or a surface mounting area having the above-mentioned properties so as to be able to solve the above-mentioned problems. It is one of.

-Multiple types of single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively large package, and integrated circuit components with low security performance against unauthorized mounting-Single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package. Discrete parts with high security performance against unauthorized installation

More specifically, in the first control unit MCG, the integrated circuit component having low security performance is mounted only in the through-hole mounting area TH and the surface mount area, which are excellent in fraud suppression performance. At the same time, in the surface mount area where the fraud suppression performance is inferior, only the discrete parts having high security performance are mounted. As a result, even on the MCG side of the first control unit, which is liable to be subject to fraud, it is possible to reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against illegal mounting of mounting electronic components.

However, even when the security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components is maintained in this way, the board of the first control unit MCG is likely to be subject to unauthorized mounting. There is no change. Therefore, the substrate of the first control unit MCG is basically a transparent cover member (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.) as shown in FIGS. 4, 7, 62, and the like. ), It is desirable to dispose of the pachinko machine 1 so that its mounting surface (flat surface) faces the rear side. That is, in this case, not only can the transparent cover member make it difficult to cheat on the mounting surface (flat surface), but also the operation of opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 is enough to make the first control unit MCG. Since it will be possible to monitor (visually check) whether or not an illegal component is mounted on the board, the illegal component can be used as a board (first board) on which an integrated circuit component that is likely to be an illegal target is mounted. It will be possible to appropriately secure the suppression performance and the ease of monitoring for mounting.

In order to obtain such an effect, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the mounting electronic components are mounted on one side surface (back side surface) of the substrate of the first control unit MCG. Instead, the mounting electronic components are mounted only on the other side surface (front side surface), and the mounting electronic components are covered with the above-mentioned transparent cover members (various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.). Needless to say, the pachinko machine 1 should be arranged so that the other side surface (front side surface) faces the rear side.

Further, in view of the fact that the main control board 1310 is a portion of the first control unit MCG that is directly linked to the granting of benefits to the player, the first control unit MCG has each of the above-described configurations. Among the substrates, it can be said that it is particularly desirable to apply the substrate to the substrate of the main control substrate 1310.

Furthermore, in order to more preferably maintain the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting, first, as the board of the main control board 1310, an insertion mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed to form an integrated circuit component. At least prepare a first board in which both discrete components are inserted and mounted, and a second board in which a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed and integrated circuit components are not mounted and discrete components are surface mounted. To. Then, among those substrates, the first substrate is covered with the transparent cover members (various substrate boxes 930, 950, 1320, etc.), and one of the surfaces (electronic components are not mounted). The second substrate is arranged so that the other side of the back side surface) and the other side surface (front side surface on which electronic components are mounted) faces the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Both the one side surface (the back side surface on which the electronic component is mounted) and the other side surface (the front side surface on which the electronic component is mounted) do not face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 and are orthogonal to the rear side. It is desirable to arrange it so that it faces the direction in which it is used. That is, in this case, since the existence of the surface mount area (second substrate), which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, can be made difficult to see from the rear side, the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting is more preferable. Will be expected to be maintained.

However, even with such a configuration, if a malicious person is obsessed with "whether a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed somewhere", the surface inferior in fraud suppression performance. There is a concern that the second substrate on which the mounting area is formed will be noticed. In this case, although only the discrete component having high security performance among the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is mounted in the surface mount area of the second substrate, a fraudulent act that the hole side has not yet recalled. If (for example, a very small fraudulent chip is being developed) is used, a loss may occur.

Therefore, regarding the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate in which both the integrated circuit component and the discrete component are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance, not only the insertion mounting area but also the fraud suppression The surface mount area, which is inferior in performance, should be formed on the same surface (front side surface). Then, no electronic components for mounting are mounted on the surface mount area, and the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate is covered with the pachinko machine while the pattern wiring as the surface mount area is exposed. It is desirable to dispose of the 1 so as to face the rear side. That is, in this case, the surface mount area of the other side surface (front side surface) of the first substrate arranged so as to face the rear side is when a malicious person attempts to cheat from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It plays a role as an advertising tower that appeals to "The surface mount area, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, is not mounted with any mounting electronic components, and has high fraud suppression performance as a pachinko machine 1." As a result, it becomes possible for a malicious person to lose the motivation to find the second substrate on which the surface mount area inferior in the fraud suppression performance is formed. It is desirable that the surface mount region formed on the first substrate is provided at a position (such as the edge of the first substrate) where the existence of the surface mount region can be easily noticed when the first substrate is viewed.

Further, regarding the pattern wiring as the surface mount region formed on the first substrate, is it an independent shape that is not electrically connected between the surface mount region and the through-hole mount region formed on the same surface? Although it is electrically connected to the through-hole mounting area, it is formed so that even if an illegal component is mounted on the surface mounting area, the insertion-mounting area side is not affected (the game is advanced). It is important to form it on an output signal that does not need to be used above). On the other hand, in the second substrate according to this explanatory example, unlike the first substrate, only the surface mount region having inferior fraud suppression performance is formed among the insert mount region and the surface mount region. Electronic components for mounting (here, discrete components) are surface-mounted on the surface mount area.

Even when each of the above configurations is adopted, it is possible that a malicious person may find out "a second substrate on which discrete components are surface-mounted on a surface-mounted area inferior in fraud suppression performance". Sex cannot be completely excluded. Therefore, among the surface mount areas of the main control board 1310, the "surface mount area formed only on the other surface of the first board and on which no electronic components for mounting are mounted" is the surface mount area. With the pattern wiring as exposed, the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to face the rear side, while the "surface mount region formed only on the other side of the second substrate" is provided. Is a surface-mounted state in which only the discrete parts, which are difficult to be illegally targeted, out of the discrete parts and the integrated circuit parts are surface-mounted, and the second substrate is molded by a mold member (impermeable member), and the one side surface (the above-mentioned one side (non-transparent member) Both the back side surface (back side surface) on which no electronic component is mounted and the other side surface (front side surface) are arranged so as not to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 but to face a direction orthogonal to the rear side thereof. Is desirable. That is, in this case, it is possible to conceal that the surface mount area is formed on the second substrate and which type of discrete component is surface-mounted with respect to the surface mount area. Not to mention, the mold member makes it difficult to cheat on the mounting surface (the surface mount area, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, functions as a special area where it is practically impossible to mount fraudulent components, so that fraudulent components can be mounted. Since it will be possible to exclude it from the targets that require monitoring of mounting), "We will reduce the size of the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting. It is expected that problems such as "things" will be solved favorably.

However, more preferably, with respect to the mounting component (here, the discrete component) surface-mounted in the surface mounting region, as shown in FIG. 118 as an example of the molding structure, the molding member (here, the second substrate) is combined with the molding member (the second substrate). It should be inserted and mounted in the insertion and mounting region TH of the first substrate in a state of being molded by the non-transparent member). According to such a configuration, a first substrate arranged so as to face the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 (a surface mount area that impresses that "a surface mount component is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1" and electronic components. Of the boards in which the insertion and mounting areas are formed, the insertion and mounting areas include "discrete parts," "integrated circuit parts," and "mold members (non-transmissive members) together with the second board." The surface mount areas molded by the above are inserted and mounted respectively, and are electrically connected between each electronic component. That is, in this case, when the first board is visually recognized from the rear side, both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted, and the surface mount area (first) which is inferior in fraud suppression performance is included in the insertion mounting area which is excellent in fraud suppression performance. 2 The board) is difficult to see due to the mold member, and it can be mixed in as if it were an insertion mounting component to make it function electrically. Therefore, "Maintain security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting. At the same time, it is expected that the problem of "miniaturizing the hardware circuit" will be solved more preferably.

Further, the second substrate on which the surface mount components are mounted is inserted and mounted on the first substrate so that the thin surface of the substrate faces the rear side (the substrate surfaces of the second substrate are orthogonal to each other with respect to the first substrate). Since it is inserted and mounted in the form of a through-hole, it becomes possible to mount the second substrate in the molded state without creating a large blind spot between the first substrate and the first substrate.

Here, even when each of the above configurations is adopted, "the second substrate itself, which is in a state of being molded by the mold member (non-transparent member), is molded together with the illegal parts (non-transparent member). ) Is required to periodically check whether any fraudulent activity such as "replace with another substrate in the molded state" has been performed. In this regard, if the above-mentioned mold structure is simply adopted, the above-mentioned fraudulent act is performed when the above-mentioned fraudulent act is performed in which the color and material of the mold member are replaced with another substrate having the same configuration. It becomes difficult to detect that it is in a damaged state, and the security performance against unauthorized mounting of mounting electronic components may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the surface mount area of the second substrate to be molded, only a specific type of discrete component (electronic component for mounting) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control board 1310 is available. It is desirable that it is surface-mounted, and that other types are not surface-mounted on the second substrate and are mounted only on a different substrate. According to such a configuration, only discrete parts having a specific shape are surface-mounted in the surface mount region of the second substrate, so that the shape of the undulating portion in the mold member (the shape of the undulating portion ( The degree of swelling of the mold member (see, for example, FIG. 118) at the mounting position of the discrete component is unified. That is, when another substrate on which an illegal component is mounted in addition to a specific type of discrete component is molded by a molding member, the degree of swelling of the molded member at the mounting position of the illegal component is the mounting position of the specific type of discrete component. Since the degree of swelling of the mold member is different from that of the above-mentioned fraudulent activity, the difference in shape (the degree of swelling is not single) that appears in the mold member facilitates the monitoring of the above-mentioned fraudulent activity, and prevents the illegal mounting of the electronic component for mounting. It is expected that the security performance will be maintained favorably.

In this case, in the substrate of at least the main control substrate 1310 of the first control unit MCG, the discrete components of a specific type are collectively mounted only in the surface mount region of the second substrate. It can be said that it is more desirable to prevent the hardware circuit from being mounted on a board different from the two boards in order to reduce the size (integration) of the hardware circuit.

However, since the "discrete component of a specific type" in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects is required to be an electronic component for mounting having the same shape, for example, as a "discrete component of a specific type". If the "Schottky barrier diode" is surface-mounted on the second board, the "PN diode" is a "discrete component different from the specific type" and is not mounted on the second board and is a different board. Will be required to be implemented in. Strictly speaking, when a "Schottky barrier diode" is surface-mounted on the second substrate as a "specific type of discrete component", the "Schottky barrier diode" of the same product is mounted on the second substrate. It is required that the "Schottky barrier diode" of a different product be mounted on the surface, and it is desirable that the "Schottky barrier diode" is not mounted on the second substrate but mounted on a different substrate.

However, in the substrate included in the main control board 1310, it is required to mount many types of discrete components in addition to the specific types of discrete components. Therefore, in order to make the hardware circuit smaller (integrated) more preferably, only the types of surface-mounted discrete components are different, and other structures (insertion mounting areas are not formed). Prepare a third board that is the same as the above-mentioned second board for mounting on only one side, mold structure, etc., and surface mount only one type of discrete component that is different from the specific type. It is desirable that the third board is inserted and mounted in the through-hole mounting area of the first board so as to be electrically connected to other mounting electronic components. According to such a configuration, the substrates (second substrate, third substrate) having the above-mentioned mold structure are different electronic components for each type of discrete component (in the example of FIG. 118, the special mounting component D3a, special It will be prepared as a mounting component (corresponding to D3b), and the shape to be monitored (the degree of swelling in the mold member) will be unified for each board having a mold structure, and monitoring for the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (on the corresponding board). Since it becomes possible to facilitate (confirmation that electronic components of a type that should not be mounted are not mounted), "hardware while maintaining security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting". It becomes possible to suitably solve the problem of "miniaturizing the circuit". In addition to the second substrate and the third substrate, a substrate on which only discrete components of a type different from the discrete components mounted on these substrates are surface-mounted may be similarly prepared.

When only one discrete component is surface-mounted on the second substrate or the third substrate as shown in FIG. 118, the monitoring can be further facilitated and the double mold structure described above can be obtained. Combined with this, it becomes possible to more preferably solve the problem of "minimizing the hardware circuit while maintaining the security performance against unauthorized mounting of electronic components for mounting".

Further, when a plurality of substrates thus molded (here, a second substrate and a third substrate (corresponding to the special mounting component D3a and the special mounting component D3b in the example of FIG. 118)) are provided, the substrates are used. It is desirable that each surface mount surface (the other surface described above) is arranged so as to face a specific direction. According to such a configuration, it is possible to collectively check the swelling condition of the mold member of each substrate from the same direction. Therefore, monitoring for the above-mentioned fraudulent activity (a type that should not be mounted on the corresponding substrate) It becomes possible to facilitate confirmation (confirmation of whether or not electronic components are mounted).

Furthermore, each member (molding member) that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component-side identification display according to the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted on each of the substrates. In addition, it is desirable that the surfaces to which the component side identification labels are attached are arranged so as to face the same direction. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make a one-to-one correspondence between the "type of component side identification display" and the "shape that should appear on the mold member" that are attached to the second substrate and the third substrate, respectively. , It becomes possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether or not replacement of parts has occurred. At this time, the component side identification display should be attached to the mold surface (the surface on which the mold member does not bulge) opposite to the side on which the surface mount region is formed. It is desirable to eliminate the distortion as the identification display and prevent a confirmation error from occurring.

Further, according to the above configuration, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate on which a surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, one electron molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate. It is provided as a component and is inserted and mounted so that the board surfaces are orthogonal to each other with respect to the insertion and mounting region formed on the first substrate. That is, in this case, the second board and the third board on which the discrete parts originally provided as the surface mount parts are mounted are as if they are insert mounting parts without creating a large space between them and the first board. Since it can be inserted and mounted on the first substrate, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be miniaturized while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of illegal parts.

However, in order to suitably maintain the suppression performance against mounting of illegal parts, the appearance as "an electronic component that is inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were a through-hole mounting component" is given to the second board or the above. It is required to hold each of the third substrates so that they cannot be seen on the substrate on which the surface mount region is formed. Therefore, with respect to the second board and the third board, it is necessary to prevent a plurality of types of discrete components from being surface-mounted, to prevent integrated circuit components from being surface-mounted, and further, as shown in FIG. 118, 1 By making only one discrete component surface mountable, the size of the board can be suppressed and this can be combined with one through-hole mounting component (a structure in which the electric element is connected to the lead portion for insertion mounting by a bonding wire). It can be said that it is extremely important to make it look as if it is a general electronic component (discrete component) that it has. That is, the surface mount area formed on the second substrate or the third substrate is at least an insertion mounting area formed on the first substrate or a vacant state formed on the first substrate but nothing is mounted. The area is required to be smaller than the surface mount area.

Furthermore, after making the second substrate and the third substrate more compact in this way, the first substrate has one electron each of the second substrate and the third substrate with respect to the first substrate. Through-hole mounting components (discrete components (general electronic components with a structure in which electrical elements are connected to insertion-mounting leads by bonding wires) are mounted at a lower mounting height than those electronic components when they are inserted and mounted as components. Parts)) and insert-hole mounting parts that are mounted at a higher mounting height than those electronic parts (discrete parts (general electronic parts with a structure in which electrical elements are connected to insertion-mounting leads by bonding wires)) It is more desirable that and are arranged respectively. According to such a configuration, the second substrate or the third substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is inserted and mounted in the insert mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance formed in the first substrate. It will be possible to make it look more suitable as if it were one electronic component. In this sense, the second board and the third board should be provided as electronic parts (molded parts) smaller than any of the integrated circuit parts inserted and mounted on the first board, or inserted into the first board. It can be said that it is also important to provide the electronic components (molded components) that are smaller than the largest of the mounted discrete components.

Further, in general, including the substrate (first substrate) on which the through-hole mounting region according to this embodiment is formed, the substrate corresponding to the type of the electronic component to be mounted is also on the substrate on which the electronic component is mounted. A side identification display is often attached. For example, an electrical diagram symbol corresponding to the Schottky barrier diode is given in the vicinity of the place where the Schottky barrier diode is mounted. However, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate according to this embodiment, it is possible to increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit by concealing which type of electronic component functions as the electronic component. It can be said that it is desirable to preferably maintain the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal parts.

Therefore, on the through-hole mounting surface of the first board, different board-side identification indications are attached in the vicinity of each position where the second board and the third board are inserted and mounted as one electronic component. However, all of these board-side identification displays include any board-side identification display in the through-hole mounting region of the first control unit MCG, including the board-side identification display attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. It is desirable to have a unique mode different from the display (for example, a special display mode such as "?" Or "*"). That is, in this case, even if the board-side identification display (mounting surface of the first board) attached near the position where the second board and the third board are inserted and mounted is confirmed, the mode is the same type of mounting electrons. Since it has a unique aspect that is different from the board-side identification display attached to the component, which type is mounted as a discrete component surface-mounted on the second board or the third board, respectively. It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize.

However, when a structure that enhances the difficulty of circuit understanding by concealing which type of electronic component the second board or the third board functions as is adopted in this way, the type is adopted. There is a concern that a malicious person may scrape the mold member and try to confirm the internal element in order to grasp the above.

Therefore, with respect to the second substrate and the third substrate, first, the substrate side identification display should not be attached to the surface mount surface (surface mount surface in the molded state) formed on the substrates. However, even if a malicious person tries to check the inside of the molded member by scraping it, it is difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete part. Is desirable.

Furthermore, with respect to each discrete component surface-mounted in the surface-mounting region formed on the second substrate or the third substrate, most of the discrete components inserted and mounted in the insertion-mounting region formed on the first substrate. Is formed by molding with a first mold member of a different color, and then a second mold member having the same or similar color as the specific color is used on both the second substrate or the third substrate to be mounted. Further, it is desirable that the molded electronic component is inserted and mounted in the through-hole mounting region formed on the first substrate. According to such a configuration, the second substrate and the third substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed are molded in the same form as other through-hole mounting components with respect to the first substrate. Even in the case of through-hole mounting, the administrator on the hall side can easily find out where the second and third boards are, and the second and third boards are fraudulent. It becomes possible to facilitate confirmation of whether or not it is present.

In this case, even a malicious person will be assisted in grasping information on which surface mount area (second board or third board) is provided, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. It could be. In this regard, in the above configuration, the discrete component surface-mounted with respect to the surface mount region is molded together with the second substrate or the third substrate by the second mold member to conceal the type as the electronic component. In addition to increasing the difficulty of understanding the circuit, the second mold member is provided in the same or similar color as the specific color arranged on the first mold member of the surface-mounted discrete component. ing. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of discrete component surface-mounted with respect to the surface-mounted area, an act is performed in which the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside thereof. Even if it is, it is difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded together with the second substrate or the third substrate is being scraped or the first mold member inside thereof is being scraped. This makes it possible to conceal the type of electronic component and to maintain the difficulty of circuit understanding.

Further, as described above, in this explanatory example, among the through-hole mounting surfaces of the first substrate, the second substrate and the third substrate are respectively inserted and mounted as one electronic component in the vicinity of each position on the same mounting surface. A board-side identification display having a unique mode (for example, a special display mode such as "?" Or "*") different from any board-side identification display is attached. However, if only the board side identification display having such a unique aspect is attached, it is not possible for the hall side to grasp which type of electronic component functions as the electronic component, and maintenance / maintenance is performed. There is a concern that it will adversely affect management. Therefore, among the through-hole mounting surfaces of the first substrate, a substrate having a unique aspect at a position that is relatively easy to see in the vicinity of each position where the second substrate and the third substrate are inserted and mounted as one electronic component. In addition to providing a side identification display, the same type of mounting electronic component (or different) that is on the same mounting surface at a position that is relatively difficult to see (such as directly under the molded second board or third board). It is desirable that the board-side identification display having the same aspect as the board-side identification display attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component on the board is also secretly attached.

Further, as described above, in this explanatory example, in the surface mount region of the second substrate, a specific type (for example, Schottky barrier diode) among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control board 1310 is used. Only discrete components (electronic components for mounting) are surface-mounted. Further, in the surface mount area of the third substrate, one type (for example, a relatively small specific capacity) different from the specific type among various discrete components mounted on the substrate of the main control board 1310 is provided. Only the discrete parts (electronic parts for mounting) of the capacitor) are surface-mounted. According to these configurations, it is clear that the second substrate and the third substrate alone cannot function as a discrete circuit having a specific function (for example, a backup circuit or a filter circuit). That is, the mounting electronic components surface-mounted in the surface mount region formed on the molded substrate (second substrate or third substrate) and the substrate different from the substrate (second substrate or third substrate) (here). Then, by forming a specific discrete circuit with mounting electronic components surface-mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on the first board), it is possible to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding or to increase the difficulty of circuit understanding or to mold the board. (2nd board or 3rd board) It is difficult to replace itself (because the structure inside the mold is concealed and it is necessary to make a mold part that does not have a specific circuit function) and it is illegal. It will be expected to be used for countermeasures.

As described above, in summarizing the techniques described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, the configurations having some technical features have been described in the order in which synergistic effects can be expected. Each configuration is only described as the best embodiment, and it is not always necessary to use all of the configurations in the implementation, and the configurations are appropriately combined regardless of the order in which they are described. It is possible to carry out.

Next, the technical idea that can be grasped from the above-described embodiment and modification is described below.

[Technical Thought 1-1]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area in which lead portions provided in electronic components are inserted into the base plate, and
It has a surface mount area in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
Of the plurality of electronic components, at least one of the surface mount components mounted on the surface mount region is the surface mount component itself, which is molded by the mold resin. Is a gaming machine characterized in that it is molded together with the surface mount area to be mounted by another mold resin.

[Technical Thought 1-2]
A first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted and can execute a control power supply generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
A gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of the progress processing of the gaming.
In the base plate of the second control unit, an insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided in an electronic component is inserted into the base plate and a lead portion provided in the electronic component are included in the base plate. Of the surface mount area mounted on the surface of the above, only the surface mount area is provided.
The base plate of the first control unit is provided with both the through-hole mounting area and the surface mounting area.
Of the plurality of electronic components, the first side surface mount component mounted on the surface mount region provided on the base plate of the first control unit and the surface mount region provided on the base plate of the second control unit. Of the first side surface mount component and the second side surface mount component, although the second side surface mount component to be mounted is itself molded by a molding resin. The game machine is characterized in that the first side surface mount component is further molded together with the surface mount area by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the first side surface mount component itself.

In such technical ideas 1-1 and 1-2, the surface mount components mounted in the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance are molded by the molding resin, though they themselves are molded. Since the surface mount area to be mounted is integrally molded with a mold resin different from the mold resin, some fraud can be applied to the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance. It will be extremely difficult.

[Technical Thought 2]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
Through-hole mounting plates that are mounted by inserting the insert-mounting reeds provided in the through-hole mounting components of the electronic components,
It has a surface mount plate on which the surface mount lead portion provided on the surface mount component of the electronic components is placed on the surface.
The surface mount plate has
At least a special surface mount plate having a lead portion for special insertion mounting formed so as to extend outward from the surface mount plate and be inserted into the through-hole mount plate is included.
On the special surface mount plate,
A wiring portion formed so as to electrically connect the surface mount lead portion of the surface mount component mounted on the special surface mount plate and the special insert mount lead portion is provided.
The surface mount components mounted on the special surface mount plate are
Of the surface mount lead portion and the special insert mount lead portion, only the special insert mount lead portion is integrally molded together with the special surface mount plate so as to be pulled out to the outside of the mold resin. A gaming machine characterized in that it is mounted on the through-hole mounting plate as an electronic component having a lead portion for special through-hole mounting.

In such technical idea 2, the surface mount component mounted in the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance functions as if it is one insert mount component mounted in the insert mount area excellent in fraud suppression performance. By being able to do this, it can be expected that malicious persons will be excluded from the target of fraudulent purposes.

[Technical Thought 3]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
Through-hole mounting plates that are mounted by inserting the insert-mounting reeds provided in the through-hole mounting components of the electronic components,
It has a surface mount plate on which the surface mount lead portion provided on the surface mount component of the electronic components is placed on the surface.
For the surface mount component,
It includes at least discrete surface mount components in which single-function elements are molded with molding resin.
The discrete surface mount component is
The discrete surface mount component itself has a relatively large appearance shape by being integrally molded with the surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin itself, and the base of the specific control unit. A gaming machine characterized in that it has an appearance shape different from that of all electronic components mounted on a board.

In such a technical idea 3, an excessive security performance such as protection with a double mold resin is given to a mere discrete surface mount component which has only a limited function as compared with an arithmetic processing unit or the like. , It is designed to have a unique and relatively large appearance shape as an appearance shape that intentionally attracts the attention of malicious persons. That is, in this case, since the excessive security performance provided in the specific control unit can be shown to a third party, it can be expected that the willingness to commit fraudulent acts will decrease.

[Technical Thought 4]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area in which lead portions provided in electronic components are inserted into the base plate, and
It has a surface mount area in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
In the base plate of the specific control unit, the surface mount region is dispersedly provided at a plurality of locations so that each region is a relatively small region, whereas the insert mounting region is dispersed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided as a relatively large area surrounding at least one of the surface mount areas provided.

In such a technical idea 4, the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is not grouped in one place but dispersed to be subdivided into small pieces to make them inconspicuous, and then the fraud suppression performance is excellent and relatively large. It is arranged so that it is mixed in the insertion mounting area provided as an area. Therefore, it becomes possible for a malicious person to make it difficult for a malicious person to notice the existence of the surface mount area when looking at the base plate of the specific control unit, and while maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of unauthorized parts, It is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized.

[Technical Thought 5]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and is provided with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic circuits.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of electronic circuits
A backup power supply circuit that supplies backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off is included as a discrete circuit having at least a capacitor and a diode, which are electronic components of a single-function element. ,
The base plate of the specific control unit is
An insertion mounting area in which lead portions provided in electronic components are inserted into the base plate, and
It has a surface mount area in which a lead portion provided on an electronic component is mounted on the surface of the base plate.
The through-hole mounting area is
The electronic components mounted in the surface mount area are provided as relatively large areas surrounding the surface mount area so as to be adjacent to some of the electronic components mounted in the through-hole mount area.
The backup power supply circuit
Although it is provided as a discrete circuit having a backup power supply function of supplying backup power to a predetermined storage unit when the control power supply is cut off, the capacitor and the diode of the discrete circuit have the same. One of the electronic components is mounted on the surface mount region surrounded by the through-hole mounting region, and the other electronic component is the one electron mounted on the surface mount region of the through-hole mounting region. A gaming machine characterized in that it is mounted at a position not adjacent to a component.

In such a technical idea 5, although it is one discrete circuit for the purpose of exerting a specific electric function (backup power supply function), it can be mounted on the base plate in the insertion mounting area. Electronic components with a shape that allows them to be smoothed and electronic components that have a shape that allows them to be mounted on the surface mount area will be mixed. Therefore, when a third party visually recognizes the base plate of the specific control unit, it is recalled that they have an electrically close role to exert a specific electrical function (backup power supply function). It becomes possible to make it difficult, and by increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit, it becomes possible to expect suppression of fraud.

Moreover, after arranging the surface mount area, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance, into the insertion mounting area, which is provided as a relatively large area with excellent fraud suppression performance, a specific electrical function (backup power supply) is provided. The capacitors and diodes included in one discrete circuit for the purpose of exhibiting the supply function) are arranged so as not to be adjacent to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance, and even if the existence is noticed, the electronic component mounted in the surface mount area cooperates with other electronic components. As a result, it becomes difficult to recall what kind of electrical function is mounted to exert, and by further increasing the difficulty of understanding such a circuit, it is preferable to suppress fraud. You can expect it.

[Technical Thought 6]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
Through-hole mounting plates that are mounted in such a way that lead parts for insertion and mounting provided in electronic components are inserted,
It has a surface mount plate on which surface mount leads provided on electronic components are placed on the surface.
The surface mount plate has
At least a special surface mount plate having a lead portion for special insertion mounting formed so as to extend outward from the surface mount plate and be inserted into the through-hole mount plate is included.
The special surface mount plate is
It has a wiring portion formed so as to electrically connect the surface mounting lead portion of the electronic component mounted on the special surface mounting plate and the special insertion mounting lead portion, and also has a wiring portion formed so as to electrically connect the lead portion for insertion mounting to the insertion mounting plate. The special through-hole mounting lead portions are inserted into the through-hole mounting plates and arranged so that the mounting surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other.

A gaming machine characterized by that.

In general, the components mounted on the surface mount plate often have a flat shape. In this regard, in the above technical idea 6, the special surface mount plate is arranged so that the mounting surfaces of the insert mounting plates are substantially orthogonal to each other. That is, in this case, the electronic component is mounted as the through-hole mounting plate because the thin surface having only a relatively small area is opposed to the through-hole mounting plate instead of the flat surface having a relatively large area. The special surface mount plate can be arranged even in a situation where only a small possible area (surface area) is left.

[Technical Thought 7]
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a specific control unit capable of executing a control power source generation process and a game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The base plate of the specific control unit is
Through-hole mounting plates that are mounted in such a way that lead parts for insertion and mounting provided in electronic components are inserted,
It has a surface mount plate in which a surface mount lead portion provided on an electronic component is placed on the surface of the base plate.
Among the plurality of electronic components, the surface mount component mounted on the surface mount plate includes a specific surface mount component having a size that fits within the installation interval of the specific insertion holes provided in the insertion mount plate. And
The specific surface mount component
Despite the size that fits within the installation interval of the specific insertion hole, it is integrally with the surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. A gaming machine characterized by having an external shape as an electronic component having a size that does not fit within the installation interval of the specific insertion holes by being molded.

That is, when a specific surface mount component is left in an external shape smaller than the installation interval of the insertion holes in the through-hole mounting plate, a surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. It can be easily noticed by a third party, which in turn can encourage fraud.

In this regard, in the above technical idea 7, the specific surface mount component is integrally molded together with the surface mount plate to be mounted by a mold resin different from the mold resin of the specific surface mount component itself. Since the appearance of an electronic component with a size that does not fit within the installation interval of a specific insertion hole is made to appear, a surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is provided in the specific control unit. It will be possible to make things less noticeable to third parties.

[Technical Thought 8]
A first control unit that has a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a base plate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The base plate of the first control unit is
An insertion mounting area in which a lead portion provided on a mounting electronic component is inserted into the base plate, and an insertion mounting area.
It has a surface mount area in which the lead portion provided on the electronic component for mounting is placed on the surface of the base plate.
The base plate of the first control unit includes at least a first substrate and a second substrate as substrates on which the surface mount region is formed.
The first substrate is
Neither the discrete component nor the integrated circuit component is mounted on the surface mount area, and the pattern wiring as the surface mount area is exposed and faces the rear side of the gaming machine. Is arranged in
The second substrate is
The integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the surface mount area, only the discrete component is mounted, and the game machine faces in a direction different from the rear side. A gaming machine characterized by being arranged.

In such a technical idea 8, a first substrate on which a surface mount region is formed in which no mounting electronic component is mounted and is vacant is intentionally prepared, and this first substrate is used as the surface mount region. The pattern wiring is arranged so as to face the rear side of the game machine while being exposed. That is, in this case, when a malicious person tries to cheat from the rear side of the gaming machine, "No electronic components for mounting are mounted in the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance, and the fraud is high as a gaming machine. It will play a role as an advertising tower that appeals that it has suppression performance, and it is expected that it will prevent unauthorized parts from being mounted.

On the other hand, on the second substrate, the gaming machine is arranged so as to face a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine so that its existence is hard to be noticed, and then an integrated circuit is provided for the surface mount area. Of the components and discrete components, integrated circuit components that are likely to be fraudulent targets are not mounted, and only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent targets are mounted. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the second substrate itself in combination with the existence of the first substrate, and even if the existence is noticed, the fraud suppression performance is inferior. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent targets are mounted in the surface mount area, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while appropriately maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of fraudulent components. Become.

[Technical Thought 9]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first control unit is
The first board on which the through-hole mounting area is formed so that the lead portion provided on the electronic component for mounting is inserted into the board, and the lead portion provided on the electronic component for mounting is the surface of the board. It has a second board in which a surface mount area that is mounted on top and a lead portion for special insertion mounting that extends outward and can be inserted into the insertion mounting area of the first board are formed. And
On the first substrate,
An insert mounting area that can be mounted by inserting an insertion mounting lead portion provided in the insertion mounting component and a surface mounting lead portion provided in the surface mounting component are placed on the surface. Both a surface mount area that can be mounted is formed, but no mounting electronic component is mounted on the surface mount area formed on the first substrate, and pattern wiring as the surface mount area is formed. It is supposed to remain exposed and
On the second substrate,
Of the insertion mounting area and the surface mounting area, only the surface mounting area is formed, and of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, only the discrete component is the mounting target of the second substrate. By inserting the lead portion for special insertion and mounting into the insertion and mounting area of the first board as one electronic component molded into the above, various insertion and mounting parts mounted on the first board can be used. A game machine characterized by being electrically connected between them.

In such a technical idea 9, as a surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance, no mounting electronic component is mounted and the pattern wiring as the surface mount region is exposed. The first board) and the surface mount area (second board) in which only the discrete parts, which are difficult to be illegally targeted, are surface-mounted and molded together with the boards. It has. That is, in this case, when a malicious person attempts to cheat from the rear side of the game machine, the surface mount area on which the mounting electronic components are mounted is difficult to see, and any mounting is used. Since only the surface mount area on which no electronic component is mounted becomes visible, the surface mount area is "no mounting electronic component is mounted on the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance. It will play a role as an advertising tower that appeals that it has high fraud suppression performance as a game machine, and it is expected that this will prevent fraudulent parts from being mounted.

Moreover, in addition to the surface mount area, an insert mount area having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed on the first substrate on which the surface mount area that plays the role of the advertising tower is formed. Therefore, the surface mount area (second board) that is molded together with the above boards is inserted and mounted. That is, in this case, among the insertion mounting areas having excellent fraud suppression performance in the board (first board) that impressed that "surface mount components are not mounted", the surface mounting area (first board) having poor fraud suppression performance is inferior. Since the 2 boards) are made to be mixed in in a form that is difficult to see due to the mold, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while appropriately maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of illegal parts. Become.

[Technical Thought 10]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first control unit is
The first board on which the insertion mounting area is formed in which the lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component is inserted into the board, and the lead portion provided on the mounting electronic component are the surfaces of the board. It has a second substrate with a surface mount area formed on which it is mounted.
In the first substrate,
The mounting electronic component is not mounted on one side surface, and both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are mounted on the other side surface, and the other side surface is behind the gaming machine. While it is arranged facing the side,
In the second substrate,
The mounting electronic component is not mounted on one side surface, and the integrated circuit component of the integrated circuit component and the discrete component is not mounted on the other side surface, and only the discrete component is mounted on the mold member. In the state of being molded by the above, both the one side surface and the other side surface are mounted on the first substrate so as to face a direction different from the rear side of the game machine. A game machine to be.

In such a technical idea 10, the mounting electronic components are not mounted on one side of the first substrate in which the insertion mounting area having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed, and the mounting electronic components are integrated with the discrete components on the other side. Since both the circuit components and the circuit components are mounted and the other side is arranged so as to face the rear side of the game machine, the integrated circuit components that are likely to be fraudulent are mounted. As a substrate (first substrate), it becomes possible to suitably secure the suppression performance against mounting of illegal parts and the ease of monitoring.

Further, for the second substrate in which a surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, mounting electronic components are not mounted on one side surface, and integrated circuit components that are likely to be fraudulent targets are mounted on the other side surface. Since only discrete components that are not likely to be fraudulent targets are mounted, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while appropriately maintaining the suppression performance against mounting of fraudulent components. Become.

Moreover, in the second substrate, both the one-sided surface and the other-sided surface of the gaming machine are in a state where the surface mounting area on which the discrete components are mounted is molded together with the substrate by a molding member. It is arranged so as to face a direction different from the rear side of the. That is, in this case, the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is made to function as a special area in which fraudulent parts cannot be mounted, and it is necessary to monitor the mounting of fraudulent parts (game machine). It will be possible to remove it from the confirmation target from the rear side).

Further, with respect to the surface mount area (second substrate) thus excluded from the monitoring target for mounting of illegal parts, the thin portion of the substrate faces the rear side (both one side surface and the other side surface are concerned). Since it is mounted on the first substrate so as to face a direction different from the rear side of the gaming machine), the molded state without creating a large space between the first substrate and the first substrate. It becomes possible to mount the second board.

[Technical Thought 11]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first control unit is
A first substrate in which an insertion mounting region is formed in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted, respectively.
A second substrate among the discrete component and the integrated circuit component, wherein the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and a surface mount region is formed in which a specific type of mounting electronic component is surface-mounted among the discrete components, and the above. A third substrate in which the integrated circuit component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and a surface mount region is formed in which a surface mount region is formed in which a mounting electronic component of a type different from the specific type of the discrete component is surface-mounted. Have and
The second substrate and the third substrate are
By being provided as separate electronic components molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on each of these substrates, and by being inserted and mounted in the insertion-mounting region formed on the first substrate, respectively. It can be electrically connected to various through-hole mount components mounted on the first board.
Each member that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is provided with a component side identification display according to the type of discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, respectively, and the component side. A gaming machine characterized in that all surfaces with identification marks are arranged so as to face a specific direction.

In such a technical idea 11, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for fraud and discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate on which an insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Therefore, on the second and third boards in which the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent targets are mounted in different types for each board.

Therefore, for mounting electronic components mounted on the insertion mounting area side, which has excellent fraud suppression performance, the fraud suppression function as before is maintained, and mounting is performed on the surface mounting area side, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. As for the electronic components for mounting, it is confirmed whether the electronic components for mounting having the shapes of the types corresponding to them are mounted on each of the second and third boards (the types of electronic components that should not be mounted on the corresponding board). Since it will be easier to confirm whether or not is implemented), it is expected that even if fraud is committed, it will be easy to detect and the hardware circuit will be miniaturized. become.

Moreover, the second substrate and the third substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed are provided as separate electronic components molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on each of the substrates. In addition, by inserting and mounting each of the through-hole mounting regions formed on the first board, it is possible to electrically connect to various through-hole mounting components mounted on the first board. There is. That is, in this case, a specific type of discrete component originally provided as a surface mount component and a discrete component of a type different from the specific type are inserted and mounted on the first substrate as if they were insert mounting components. Therefore, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be downsized while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal parts.

Furthermore, each member that molds the second substrate and the third substrate is each provided with a component-side identification display according to the type of discrete component that is surface-mounted on the substrate. The surfaces with the side identification indications are arranged so as to face a specific direction. That is, in this case, the "type of component-side identification display" and the "shape that should appear on the mold member" attached to the second and third boards, which are inserted and mounted on the first board, are one-to-one. Since it becomes possible to make a correspondence, it becomes possible to facilitate fraud monitoring as to whether or not replacement of parts has occurred.

[Technical Thought 12]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first control unit is
The first board in which an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted is formed, and the integrated circuit component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and the integrated circuit component is not mounted. It has a second substrate with a surface mount area on which discrete components are surface mounted.
The second substrate is
It is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is inserted and mounted so that the substrate surfaces are orthogonal to the insertion-mounting region formed on the first substrate. By doing so, it is possible to electrically connect to various through-hole mounting components mounted on the first board.
On the first substrate,
Through-hole mounting components that are mounted at a lower mounting height than the electronic components when the second board is inserted and mounted as one electronic component on the board, and mounting heights higher than the electronic components. A gaming machine characterized in that each of the through-hole mounting components is arranged.

In such a technical idea 12, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for fraud and discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate on which an insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent targets are mounted on the second board on which the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, the hardware can appropriately maintain the suppression performance against mounting of fraudulent components. It is expected that the circuit will be miniaturized.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. The board surfaces are orthogonal to each other with respect to the through-hole mounting area. That is, in this case, the second board on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mount component is mounted is the first board as if it were an insertion mounting component without creating a large space between the second board and the first board. Since it becomes possible to insert and mount the hardware circuit, it is expected that the hardware circuit can be downsized while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal parts.

Further, on the first substrate, a through-hole mounting component mounted on the first substrate at a mounting height lower than that of the electronic component when the second substrate is inserted and mounted as one electronic component, and the electronic component. Since the through-hole mounting components to be mounted at a higher mounting height are respectively arranged, the second substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is fraudulently formed on the first substrate. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize that the component is mounted in the through-hole mounting area having excellent suppression performance.

[Technical Thought 13]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first control unit is
The first board in which an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted is formed, and the integrated circuit component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and the integrated circuit component is not mounted. It has a second substrate with a surface mount area on which discrete components are surface mounted.
The discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate is formed by being molded by a first mold member having a specific color different from most of the discrete components inserted and mounted on the first substrate. And
The second substrate is
A through-hole mounting region formed on the first substrate and provided as one electronic component molded by a second molding member having the same or similar color as the specific color together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be electrically connected to various through-hole mounting components mounted on the first board by being inserted and mounted on the first board.

In such a technical idea 13, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for fraud and discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate on which an insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent targets are mounted on the second board on which the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, the hardware can appropriately maintain the suppression performance against mounting of fraudulent components. It is expected that the circuit will be miniaturized.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. It is made to be inserted and mounted for the inserted through-hole mounting area. That is, in this case, the second board on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mount component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insert mount component. , It is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of illegal parts.

Further, regarding the discrete components surface-mounted in the surface mount area formed on the second substrate, the first mold member having a color different from that of most of the discrete components inserted and mounted in the insert mounting area formed on the first substrate. After being molded by, the second substrate to be mounted is configured as one electronic component further molded by a second molding member having the same or similar color as the specific color. I have to.

Therefore, even when the second substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is molded in the same form as other through-hole mounting components and inserted and mounted on the first substrate, holes are formed. The manager on the side can easily find out where the second board is, and can easily confirm whether or not the second board is fraudulent. However, in this case, even a malicious person may help to grasp information on which surface mount area (second substrate) is provided, which is inferior in fraud suppression performance.

In this respect, in the above configuration, it is difficult to understand the circuit by concealing the type of the electronic component by molding the discrete component surface-mounted with respect to the surface mount region together with the second substrate by the second mold member. In addition to enhancing the properties, the second mold member is provided with the same or similar color as the specific color arranged on the first mold member of the surface-mounted discrete component. That is, in this case, in order to grasp the type of discrete component surface-mounted with respect to the surface-mounted area, an act is performed in which the second mold member is scraped by a malicious person and an attempt is made to check the inside thereof. Even if it is, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the second mold member molded together with the second substrate is being scraped or the first mold member inside the second mold member is being scraped. As a result, it is expected that the type of the electronic component will be concealed and the difficulty of circuit understanding will be suitably maintained.

[Technical Thought 14]
A first control unit that has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted and can execute game progress processing by using those electronic components.
It has a substrate on which a plurality of mounting electronic components are mounted, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic components.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of mounting electronic components include
It includes discrete components in which single-function elements are enclosed in a relatively small package, and integrated circuit components in which multiple types of single-function elements are integrated and enclosed in a relatively large package.
The substrate of the first control unit is
The first board in which an insertion mounting region in which both the discrete component and the integrated circuit component are inserted and mounted is formed, and the integrated circuit component of the discrete component and the integrated circuit component is not mounted, and the integrated circuit component is not mounted. It has a second substrate with a surface mount area on which discrete components are surface mounted.
The second substrate is
The first substrate is provided as one electronic component molded together with discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is inserted and mounted in an insertion-mounting region formed on the first substrate. It is possible to electrically connect to various through-hole mount components mounted on the
The mounting surface of the second substrate is not provided with any substrate-side identification display corresponding to the discrete component surface-mounted on the substrate, and the mounting surface of the first substrate is the one electronic component. A specific substrate-side identification display is attached corresponding to the position where the second substrate is inserted and mounted, and the specific substrate-side identification indication is attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. A gaming machine characterized in that it has a unique aspect different from any of the board-side identification indications attached within the insertion / mounting area of the gaming machine, including the substrate-side identification indication.

In such a technical idea 14, both integrated circuit components that are easily targeted for fraud and discrete components that are not easily targeted for fraud are mounted on the first substrate on which an insertion mounting region having excellent fraud suppression performance is formed. Since only discrete components that are unlikely to be fraudulent targets are mounted on the second board on which the surface mount area inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, the hardware can appropriately maintain the suppression performance against mounting of fraudulent components. It is expected that the circuit will be miniaturized.

Moreover, the second substrate on which the surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed is provided as one electronic component molded together with the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and is formed on the first substrate. It is made to be inserted and mounted for the inserted through-hole mounting area. That is, in this case, the second board on which the discrete component originally provided as the surface mount component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were an insert mount component. , It is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the performance of suppressing the mounting of illegal parts.

Furthermore, the mounting surface (surface mounting surface) of the second substrate is not provided with any substrate-side identification display corresponding to the discrete components surface-mounted on the substrate, and the mounting surface of the first substrate Is attached with a specific board-side identification display corresponding to the position where the second board as one electronic component is inserted and mounted, and the specific board-side identification display is the same type of mounting electronic component. Including the substrate-side identification display attached in response to the above, the unique mode is different from that of the substrate-side identification display attached in the first control unit and the second control unit. That is, in this case, even if a specific board-side identification display attached to the mounting surface of the first substrate is confirmed, the mode is different from the substrate-side identification display attached corresponding to the same type of mounting electronic component. Since it is a unique aspect, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as a discrete component surface-mounted on the second substrate. In addition, even if a malicious person scrapes the mold member and tries to check the inside of the discrete component in order to grasp the type of discrete component surface-mounted with respect to the surface mount area. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which type is mounted as the discrete component.

[Technical Thought 15]
A first control unit having a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and by using those electronic circuits, a control power supply generation process and a game progress process can be executed, respectively.
It has a base plate on which a plurality of electronic circuits are formed, and is provided with a second control unit capable of executing an effect progress process according to the result of the game progress process by using those electronic circuits.
It is a gaming machine that can give a privilege to a player when a special gaming result is obtained as a result of executing the progress processing of the gaming.
The plurality of electronic circuits provided in the first control unit include
It consists of electronic components for mounting single-function elements, and includes specific discrete circuits aimed at exerting specific electrical functions.
The base plate of the first control unit has an insertion mounting region and a surface mounting region formed on different substrates.
In the specific substrate on which the surface mount region is formed in the base plate, only the specific type of mounting electronic components among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit are surface-mounted and the specific types are mounted. Various types of electronic components mounted on different substrates by being provided as one electronic component molded together with the electronic components for mounting and being inserted and mounted in the through-hole mounting region formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. It is possible to electrically connect to the through-hole mount components of
Among the plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit, other mounting electronic components different from the specific type are inserted and mounted in the insertion mounting region formed on a board different from the specific board. A gaming machine characterized by being played.

In such a technical idea 15, only discrete components (mounting electronic components constituting a specific discrete circuit) that are difficult to be fraudulently targeted are mounted on a specific substrate on which a surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed. Therefore, it is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while suitably maintaining the suppression performance against the mounting of illegal parts.

Moreover, in a specific board in which a surface mount region inferior in fraud suppression performance is formed, only specific types of mounting electronic components among a plurality of types of mounting electronic components constituting a specific discrete circuit are surface-mounted, and the specific types are mounted. Various types of electronic components mounted on different substrates by being provided as one electronic component molded together with the electronic components for mounting and being inserted and mounted in the through-hole mounting region formed on a substrate different from the specific substrate. It is designed to be electrically connectable to the through-hole mount components of.

That is, in this case, since the specific board on which the surface mount component is mounted can be inserted and mounted on the first board as if it were a through-hole mount component, it is possible to suppress the mounting of illegal components. It is expected that the hardware circuit will be miniaturized while maintaining the optimum value. Further, since only the specific type of mounting electronic components among the mounting electronic components constituting the specific discrete circuit are surface-mounted on the specific board, it is confirmed whether or not the surface mounting area is fraudulent. It will be possible to simplify. In addition, since the specific board is molded together with a specific type of mounting electronic component and then inserted and mounted on another board into which other mounting electronic components are inserted and mounted, the molded specific board is specified. To increase the difficulty of understanding the circuit for a specific discrete circuit formed over the surface mount area formed in the board and the through-hole mount area formed on a board different from the specific board, and to be used as a countermeasure against fraud. Will be expected.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands received from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, is described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board are described, and the main control board receives the command. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69. When the signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 which are storage plates. When a device that pays out game balls as a rental ball) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), a main control board. The prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number). Command 10H specifies one prize ball, and command 11H. In, two prize balls are specified, ..., In command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage plates) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machine is installed. When 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the payout control board 951 is connected from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be sent to, command 20H specifies one prize ball, command 21H specifies two prize balls, ..., Command 2EH gives a prize. Fifteen spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 88 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and a self-check is specified in this command 30H. After the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status indicating the type of the command have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the jackpot, the power on, the normal electric role effect, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and change state designation regarding the first special symbol display 1403. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state. The probabilities and time-saving states include a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a time-saving state, and a low-probability state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state. Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than that in the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time for variable display of the symbol compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state) and stopping and displaying the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, the normal lottery result by the normal lottery described later at a predetermined time can be displayed. The number of stops displayed is increased as compared with the non-time saving state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is lengthened as compared with the non-time saving state (normal game state), as shown in FIG. By increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004 shown, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls held (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state). The second starting port 2004 It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of game balls to.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named Special Figure 2 Synchronized Effect Start, Special Symbol 2 Designation, and Special Figure 2 Synchronized Effect End related to the second special symbol display 1405. These various commands are assigned a status of "B * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command specifies the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 2 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Big hit related]
As shown in Fig. 89, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot 1 open Nth display, jackpot 1 closed display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). (Opening or opening start of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2005) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command between the rounds starts during the closing of the large winning opening 1 (large starting port unit 2100). It indicates that the winning opening 2005 is being closed or the closing is started), and the large winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that have entered the jackpot 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command indicates the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is the jackpot symbol display command. It instructs the display of symbol information.

Further, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command starts during the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit, or The small hit count display command indicates (opening start), and the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). The small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100). It is transmitted at the time of opening the Nth round of the big winning opening 2005), and the command for displaying the closing of the big winning opening 1 is sent at the time of closing the big winning opening 1 (starting closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 is opened, and the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005. Is transmitted by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot unit 2100 opens the jackpot 2005. ) Is sent.

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (at the time of opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium large winning opening (when the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is , Sent at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category is composed of a command named a power-on state and a power-on main control return destination. These various commands are assigned "D * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is used for the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Includes information instructing that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. ) With information indicating which of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored. , Information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, and. When creating so-called max type, middle type, and Amadeji type, for example, the model code of this pachinko machine is for the copyright of which work, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuations occur). In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is to specify the series code to identify which type is the max type, middle type, or Amadeji type indicating the model type, and to specify the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code of the game specification and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability change in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited. It is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. ing.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. Is also sent to.). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power on time process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Fuzu-tuned production-related]
The normal-figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the vessel 1402, which are named as the start of the normal figure synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command is for designating the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state and a high probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state. It is composed of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually). As the game state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Ordinary symbol is transmitted when the fluctuation time elapses (when the ordinary symbol is confirmed), and the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric service effect is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69, and the division thereof is as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named Hit Opening, Solenoid Open Display, and Solenoid Ending. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command is left and right when the normal power is opened (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the start port solenoid 2107). It is transmitted at (when expanding in the direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display category is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned a status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is indicated in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 other than during the big hit (when the condition device is operating) (even though it is not a big hit, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). Is detected by the count sensor 4005) to indicate the start of the winning abnormality notification, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, electrical in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When an electrical connection with 4005 or the like is broken or short-circuited, the start of the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display is instructed, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command causes an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69. When this occurs, the magnetic detection switch is instructed to start the abnormality notification.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 3 is directed to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70. When the door is in the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. This is to instruct the end of the door opening notification when the state is set. On the other hand, in the main body frame opening command, the main body frame 4 is directed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed, and the main body frame closing command is issued to the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, it instructs the end of the main body frame opening notification.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is transmitted to, the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is sent to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. Of these, it is transmitted when any of them becomes disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is sent. The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display division consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to an error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is indicated in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, "7 * H" is displayed as shown in FIG. Along with setting it as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds "7 * H" which is additional information to these received commands. Formats the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed, the error release navigation command is sent when the error release navigation is performed, and the frame state 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related division is composed of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). Is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). It inspects various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

As the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. It is executed and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. others]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 90, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect, and is the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively. The state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortened non-operating state is instructed, and the high-probability end designation command is instructed to shift the state from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. Is still used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of holds) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is to hold 0 to 4 special symbols 2 (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 The number of balls (the number of balls (holding number) that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) is transmitted. Yes, the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command pre-reads the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. Based on this, the first special symbol display 1403 indicates the start of the look-ahead effect for notifying the notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command has the function of holding the special symbol 2 to display the second special symbol of the display unit 1400. Before it is used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1405, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect of pre-reading and notifying the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start port winning command is used at the time of starting port winning (when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002, or the second. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is sent to notify the effect, and is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed), and the high-probability end designation command is sent. , The special symbol 1 storage command is sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed after the high probability number of times is exhausted in the case of "high probability N times" (after the out-of-order stop period elapses), and the special symbol 1 operation hold ball number change. Time (when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the first start is further performed. It is transmitted when a game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is used for variable display of a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the number of holdings decreases). , The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol 2 changes (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 displays the fluctuation of the special symbol. When there is a hold number that has not been used yet, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number increases, or when the hold number increases, the special symbol changes on the second special symbol display 1405. It is sent when the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it for display), and the normal symbol memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 operation changes (when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the number of reserved balls is reduced), the normal symbol of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. When there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the display 1402, and when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the hold number increases, or from the hold number, the normal symbol display 1402 When the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation is increased (the game ball is at the first start port 2002). When the number of reserved balls is increased after entering the ball), the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation is increased (when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls is increased). When it increases), it will be sent. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start port winning command is used when the start port is won (when a game ball enters the first start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the first start port 2002, or the second start port. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), it is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify the fact by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment is designed to be used not only for voice notification from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 merely receives the start opening winning command, and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not notify by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection abnormality and CR not connected, and bit 0 (B0, "B") when the ball is out. Represents a bit.) Is set to a value 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to a value 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and a connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command are set to have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) includes a ball-shaped, payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. In the ball-shaped ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1, and the payout detection sensor. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and in the retry error, the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is defective. The "retry error" indicates that the inconsistent game ball is repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bits (B0), bits (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. And the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared during ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bits 1 (B1) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and so on. The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, the frame state change, and the error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated. Random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol shown in FIG. 69, which is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405. A random number for the display pattern, a random number for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when the jackpot game state is generated, and this jackpot. A random number for determining the initial value for a big hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of a random number for a symbol, and a random number for determining a small hit game state, which is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating a small hit game state. A random number for a small hit symbol to be used for determining a small hit symbol, a random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol to be used for determining an initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol, and the like are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 and a random number for determining normal symbol hit are used for determining the initial value of the random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the ordinary symbol, and the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variablely displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. 69. It is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random numbers are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69. As described above, in the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, first, the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is set to one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the process when the main control side power is turned on, which will be described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is the main control MPU1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on the extracted ID code, performs the initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number. It is a mechanism to execute and set this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is constantly overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The ID code is stored by storing the ID code in the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random value for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed to perform a second operation. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the starting port 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit).

Following step S10, the main control program sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for setting the initial value in the main control built-in WDT1310af that monitors whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally (hereinafter, "" The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a is reached before the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. On the other hand, when the WDT1310af with built-in main control is activated and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, the timer clear setting value is set. The timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In this electric power clearing process, first, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result becomes HI when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In the electric power clearing process, the power failure clear signal is first output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to start the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with its logic as LOW. Will be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is input. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done. The determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-mentioned D type flip-flop MIC 22, as the power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop the output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a with its logic as HI. Is entered in. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip-flop MIC 22 in the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on on the game side). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it is done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated by determining that the RAM is cleared.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is being operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process that initializes the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. Set to the state (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability fluctuation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time wait process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is shown in FIG. 72, is activated (boot). I'm waiting until you do). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. When the power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

When the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S28, the main control program sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, checksum value (sum value), backup flag BK-FLG value, and other game backup information in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power off processing, which will be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset, and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed by performing various subsequent processes. Therefore, the backup flag BK- after normally ending the main control side power off processing described later. If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed, the main control program is used for all of the main control internal RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (the payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program performs by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Instead, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clear and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is turned off. When it is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to be used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310a. ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control program sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a to update the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state by hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers, the hardware random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is determined in advance at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values in the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again. Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a random number for jackpot determination.

Following step S48, the main control program makes reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. 89 The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. be. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt enable setting (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program receives an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time elapses from the power-on, that is, when the main control side main process is started. The execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the receipt is restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to send the detection signal input in connection with the operation of the operation switch 954 to the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear process is executed with the input as an opportunity (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side), and the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error release navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted). Game control side normal operation control means), it is treated as a release switch for canceling the error notification associated with the generated error. That is, the operation switch 954 (error release unit), which was originally supposed to be used to release the error that occurred in the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit instead of the operation switch 954 (error release unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. It functions as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later), or after a predetermined time has elapsed, a game It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that occurs in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S54, the main control program performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. It should be noted that the above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, the main control program determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and if there is no power failure warning signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. As a result, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program includes a start port solenoid 2107, an attacker solenoid 2108, a first special symbol indicator 1403, a second special symbol indicator 1405, and a first special hold number indicator 1404 shown in FIG. 69. , The second special hold number indicator 1406, the ordinary symbol indicator 1402, the ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188, the status indicator 1401, the round indicator 1407, and the like are stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Here, a point will be described in which the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The charged charge is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is supplied. The main control side power off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms from the time when the power is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the pachinko island equipment is used. When the power is cut off, the main control side power off processing can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. The waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) until the system that controls the drawing of the device 460 starts (boots) is started by timing, and immediately before the waiting time is reached. If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Therefore, even if the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may not be possible to complete the main control side power off processing in the power on processing. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without causing a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM is completed. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no manifestation of intention by the hall clerk to clear the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ) There is a problem that it will be.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, the game can be advanced. It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the check sum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the backup process for storing the game information due to the progress of this game by supplying the power supply from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process of power failure on the main control side composed of the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a is main. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64) match. Since the determination is made, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in RAM is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af to reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power off processing can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, it has been so far. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period during a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the processing when the main control side power is turned on at the time of power recovery, and the main control MPU 1310a The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power supply cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after, in step 24, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. If the power failure warning signal has been input, the determination returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 By repeating the determination of, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared again. Since the time measurement cannot be started, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af by such software, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52. It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process (control flow) in which interrupt permission is set and the timer interrupt processing on the main control side is started, which will be described later. I adopted the mechanism. When the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or momentary power failure in this way, the part covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all, and the main control side power supply The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) can be divided into two parts, one that is covered by hardware so that the power failure processing is surely completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. It is possible to reliably prevent the game information) from being changed.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey the information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified into power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. There is. Here, first, when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2107 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. In other words, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on of the main control return destination command at power-on is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the jackpot game state (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 Drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to cause a momentary power failure or power failure when the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 steps. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the attacker is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. The driving of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the large winning opening 2005 shifts from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state of being opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and restored according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and a large winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the number of balls of the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is issued. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the fourth round (fourth round) of the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 to indicate the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). When transmitting to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. A command to display the fifth round of opening the large winning opening is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the transition from the state to the released state (that is, the opening of the fifth round of the large winning opening 2005 is started). do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It becomes.

Further, for example, a screen for notifying the player that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, that the movable piece is expanded) is displayed to the second start port 2004. The main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2107 while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (screen to be transmitted to the player), and the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs when the movable piece of the above is expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 is in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the start port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. The movable piece will shift from a state in which it stands up substantially vertically to a state in which it is expanded in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating the presence in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the gaming state is possible, and in such a case, the gaming state is returned to the gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the screen instructing the game (that is, the screen instructing the game to put the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player cannot know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. And are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the grand prize opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state shifts to the current state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen indicating how many rounds it is). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in a big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. A screen that tells you that there is a message (for example, a screen that tells the player that "It's a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening.") It is possible to instruct a player who sits in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side to insert the game ball into the grand prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-described example, in a state in which the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the game is restored. When electricity is turned on, a screen telling that the start port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction as the return destination of the main control board 1310 (for example, "Movable pieces" The peripheral control board 1510 displays the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the screen that conveys the message "The game is being expanded. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower start port." Can be instructed to the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in a state of being memorized in. Then, in these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is generated. (Including the time of power recovery to recover), any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is restored. It is composed of information instructing whether to do so and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), and the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs after 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). I don't know if the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D). Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing on the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line will be on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310s are sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while being mixed. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the above to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. And are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the workers on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turn on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can perform the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And the series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuates, the next big hit game state will be In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which of the same work is for the copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, on the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later is the normal time described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued to the payout control board 951. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for informing that has been normally received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 69, which detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001,2201 shown in FIG. Detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 Detects a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 and a game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. Detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 to detect a game ball entering the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. , The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 for detecting fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. The detection signal and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read and input information. Is stored in the input information storage area. Further, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 90 and other categories is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004. And the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect the game balls that have entered the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the count sensor 4005 that detects the game balls that have entered the large winning openings 2005. Detection signal from, detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start port 2002, second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start port 2004 The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when the switch input process is started, and are read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After that, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program transmits the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. By performing a total of two readings, one for the first to third readings to be compared and the other for the second to fourth readings, a total of two readings, due to the effects of chattering and noise, etc. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 Reliability can be increased.

Following step S104, the main control program performs the winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the big hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not used in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93. The winning random number is updated in the winning random number update processing and the winning random number update processing in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer occurs. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs the prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on the input information is created and paid out as the prize ball. When the number of planned game balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that fact, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or mainly. The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so in order to convey that, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. Create a self-check command to send to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, the number of balls to be paid out will be added to the next number of balls. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the added number of game balls is added. When has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into the status display shown in FIG. To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information that conveys that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation). Navi command and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command referred to here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005) , A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. (Determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), or taking out the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol and storing it in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the above-mentioned jackpot determination value range (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and are read from the normal judgment table, whereas the value 31768 with a high probability. ~ Value 32767 is set and is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the main control built-in. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the ROM matches in advance, a random number for jackpot determination (that is, a random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a). Is included in the jackpot judgment range.

When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified in relation to the big hit shown in FIG. 89 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, big winning opening 1). A closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the grand prize opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2, the figure is shown in the figure. The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a is set so as to turn on the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in 10. The output information is stored in the output information storage area, or 15 rounds are performed. At one time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b is set so as to turn on the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as the gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It has become like. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is judged whether or not it matches the judgment value per normal symbol (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and used as transmission information. In addition to storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. , When the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol fluctuation display pattern random number. The display pattern is determined, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and normally according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. A drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is sent to the starting port solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece when it is in the big hit game state. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as time-saving and medium-time information output information and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 synchronization effect-related and various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, as shown in FIG. 89, created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. A big prize is won based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected by various commands classified into commands and big hits. Large prize opening 1 count display command equivalent to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to the normal electric power production, various commands classified as related to the normal electric role production, Fig. 90 Various commands classified into the notification display (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.) and various commands classified into the status display (frame state 1 command, error cancellation) shown in Navi commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value calculated by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. It can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data. When the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. , Status, status, which configures the power-on state command, sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configures the main control return destination command when power-on. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, the game information is read from the game backup information and responds to the game information. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit) ) Is sent a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navigation command (second error release command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (1st main body frame closing command) A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU1310a. As a result, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af, the main control MPU1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is used as the backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In this routine, the peripheral control board 1510 issues the main control return destination command at power-on in FIG. 89, which indicates the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electric drive sources by the port output process in step S118 in this routine. It can be output to. That is, the main control board 1310 is mainly used in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reserved setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 93. Based on the power-on recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, the power-on state command and the power-on main A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. The effect can be displayed in the display area of. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by being seen by the player in such a state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. In step S38 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. And the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in that order, and then the main control board inspection is performed in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to the inspection device of the process. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, by setting the interrupt enable, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. , It becomes possible to receive various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 has the effect backup information (1fr) that is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc. ), And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), is compared. When they match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms), is copied back to Bank 0 (1 ms) to make a hot start, but the compared contents do not match (that is,). , When there is a discrepancy), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and cold start is performed.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73 is also backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) are compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set with respect to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to make it a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72 and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and FIG. 73 In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and the current brightness setting information. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is set, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness to turn on. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the start address is sent to the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 72. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad one byte at a time. Then, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400, etc. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is displayed as a game effect. It is decided as appropriate whether or not it is reflected in.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the display data creation process described later is transferred from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. 74 by the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output processing, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but the various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the effect of the plurality of LEDs and the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production by music and sound effects according to.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c faces the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also reproduced in stereo.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of screen data from the first screen data is sent to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate whether it is the mode.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are instructed. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a from the first sound command data among the sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in the time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage is started. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data to output. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various types transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is based on the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound. The generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. do. Further, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of the start port winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols. Normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4), symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol memory command output when the number of start hold changes, large winning opening 2005 The large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command,) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state it is currently in. Further, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing are the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command, or the door frame close. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc in the reception command analysis processing. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cc. The various commands are classified into the various commands shown in FIG. 89, which are classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and the power-on. Various commands to be executed, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to the notification display shown in FIG. 90, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to testing, and various commands that are classified as others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90, various commands are included. Peripheral control unit 1511 sets the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, to the peripheral control unit 1511. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the state display shown in FIG. 90. In the case of various commands, for example, an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side. The effect display device 1600 (effect device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and the lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and the speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (the effect device). Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program acquires the current time information in step S1002 and sets it in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and stores the information in the calendar information storage unit. The stored calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs a look-ahead effect control process (step S1027). The look-ahead effect control process executes the process related to the look-ahead effect based on the effect command analyzed in the receive command analysis process in step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when a special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command or a special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command (hereinafter, “look-ahead effect command”) is received, the look-ahead effect is executed. Make settings. The details of the look-ahead effect control process will be described later.

The look-ahead effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 when the game ball wins the starting ports 2101, 1022. In the present embodiment, when the peripheral control board 4140 receives the pre-reading effect command, the pre-reading effect execution flag is set in the reception command analysis process in step S1022. In the look-ahead effect control process, if the look-ahead effect execution flag is set, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the content of the look-ahead effect command. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the look-ahead effect command is received from the main control board 4100, it is determined whether or not the peripheral control board 4140 actually executes the look-ahead effect.

Then, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the mode of the hold display of the start memory is changed as the look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect). In addition, after the normal look-ahead effect is executed, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a continuous look-ahead effect is executed in which the mode of the hold display is changed every time the start memory in which the variable display is executed in advance is exhausted. do. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect is usually performed, and it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous look-ahead effect. The predetermined condition is, for example, a case where the number of undigested start memories is a certain number or more, and a case where the expectation that the result of the variable display game based on the start memory to be read ahead is a big hit is high. You may.

The content of the look-ahead effect is not only to change the display mode of the start memory, but also to display the display effect on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 such as changing the character display and the background, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output from the speaker. , The movement of the movable body may be produced.

Following step S1027, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Based on the light emission data to be output, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. At the same time, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is generated by peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and creates a sprite data on the game board side effect display device. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to control the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is started to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volumes 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set so as to increase toward the volume 6. The VDP1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the audio data is transmitted as audio data serialized by the sound data output process in step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC1512c, music and sound effects can be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in by programming the volume from mute to the maximum volume. The VDP1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program converts the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 into the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc. In addition to copying and backing up each, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the work area 1511ca to be backed up, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511ca, which are included in Bank0 (1fr). Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is set in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc by using the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae as the effect backup information (1fr). Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank0 (1fr). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511 cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 1511cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 1511cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1fr).

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the work area 1511da to be backed up shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is high-speed in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the effect backup information (SRAM). And the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM), Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and specifies Bank0 (SRAM). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the second area 1511dc. All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 1511dc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in −FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB—FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady-state processing starts from the effect control program first setting a value 1 in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted, which is shown in FIG. 72, is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 96 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is a value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady-state processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is executed while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, it is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the execution of peripheral control unit steady processing is completed by setting the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not it has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed by the time the V-blank signal is input and the next V-blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 95. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned processing omission this time peripheral control unit steady processing exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 97. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, in which the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, they are arranged in a time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c is input. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the effect operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the constituent time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the motor on the amplifier board side. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the region 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor is stored in byte by byte, external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmitted buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. Of the drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series, motors for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the or solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is created. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in 73. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as the required factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the start address of the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, the effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input. (The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripherals shown in FIG. 73 are created. The control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Drawing state information acquisition From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the storage area 1511cak, the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the effect display device on the door frame side. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time it is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, which are included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up, are included. , And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) around Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cc. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1ms) from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc, and Bank 0 (1 ms) is specified. ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1 ms) in the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank 4 of the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1ms).

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a Even in the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the periphery 1 byte of information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially output from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, following the status of the first byte of the main frequency serial data, the mode is still the second byte of the main frequency serial data, and the third byte of the main frequency serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. It is in a shaving environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 1511 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is affected by noise and changed to a main peripheral serial data different from the normal one between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte of the above and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 73, and the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. (Step S1216), and the routine ends. This received command storage area 1511cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are the received command storage areas. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU1511a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, which is shown in FIG. 75, is input from the main control board 1310. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and then starts a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning). It is determined whether or not the signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. When 2 macro seconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and when the power failure warning signal has not been input, this routine is terminated as it is, while the power failure warning is terminated. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU1511a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The received command is stored in).

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511ca included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is peripheral. Specify the copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc as the request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, from the content stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, , 1 byte) in succession Copy all in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the first area 1511 kb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is consecutive. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in the Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area to be stored, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc, which is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core. 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) are transferred to the reception command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify a copy, and specify the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second area 1511 cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a gives a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e. Is not output, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one of the drawing state information acquisition processes in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511ca (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 has a capacity, and the history of the LOCKN signal is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cap as the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , Requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data), and predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is set to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on. Shifts bit by bit from to the most significant bit B7.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, a connection failure determination process to be executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, in this LOCKN signal, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that the signal is output to that effect, specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is a value 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits are a value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value do not match, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match, the peripheral control board 1510 There is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined and the value 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). The communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective each time this routine is executed. (Counting the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. It is designed to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1526, it is determined that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication error flag CC-FLG is the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It is a flag indicating whether or not a problem has definitely occurred. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. At times, it is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, a connection recovery process to be executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101, and includes the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that fact.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step). S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of the screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. To determine if the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is running, while the screen generation schedule. When the effect is completed according to the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been started. In this determination, a period during which the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or a customer waiting state is performed and a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine is in the period based on the screen generation schedule data, and the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period during which the pachinko machine is waiting for customers or during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating, the process proceeds to step S1542 described later, while the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. When it is not during the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or during the period when the pachinko / pachislot machine side effect display device 1600 is in the waiting state for customers (simply in the waiting state for customers). This routine is terminated as it is.

When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is running, this routine is terminated as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the production is completed and all the pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not started, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. The number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is counted up. (Count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has occurred even once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, this is the case as it is. While terminating the routine, even once it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT when the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has reached the transmitter and the transmitter. It is a flag indicating whether or not the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection of the above has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the value has not been reached, the SYNC pattern output process is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is provided for the door frame side effect. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and is used for the door frame side effect. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Perform (step S1548) and end this routine. In this communication error display process, in order to convey that a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. Performs the process of drawing in. For example, the message "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side. Further, in the communication error display processing, a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state is performed. During this period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The peripheral control MPU1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is used for the game. Along with performing processing to display in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") is repeatedly emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Perform the flow process. At this time, the process of turning on all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be performed.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 103.

First, a decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the part steady processing or the like, and the main control side shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is the main control side of the power-on processing. The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main process, the timer interrupt process on the main control side shown in FIG. 94, or the second shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the start opening 2004 is a "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 to 15 rounds. In each round, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). The round is digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the large winning opening 2005.

The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is from the main control board 1310. By controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 based on the command, the left decorative symbol is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative symbol is in the center. , And the variable display of the right decorative symbol is started on the right side, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is stopped. At this time, the player can recognize the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can be confirmed also in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative symbol is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative symbol from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative symbol from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. As described above, the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is started and stopped by the variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are displayed in a variable display start and stop display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is the first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002, or the second lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 for transmitting the special lottery result is received, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. 8 is shown as shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is steady. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Because the pointer is updated to indicate the number of screen data to be output to the VDP1512a with built-in sound source from the data, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, it follows the screen generation schedule data. Since the production is in progress, the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and while the screen generation schedule data is being activated, that is, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed. Even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the determination of step S1540 in this connection recovery process, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is.

As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT can be used until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, with the transmitter). Even if it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the receiver and the receiver even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not performed. The process of recovering the connection with the player is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, "upper plate" is displayed. Since the message "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the side. Please call the clerk." Is not displayed, tell that the drawing data received from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Is displayed.

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the steady processing, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and the pointer Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the screen generation schedule data has not been started and the screen generation schedule data has not been started in the scheduler update process, the power of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the steady process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the same process, and the communication check counter CC- When the CNT value is 0, that is, when it has not been determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the communication check counter is used. When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the process of step S1544 in the same process is performed. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is set to the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If it has not reached, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-described SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), That is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to the process of step S1548 in the same process, the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed, and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When there is a problem with the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, and there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. In other words, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. When (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. A problem has occurred in the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk. ”Is displayed and notified, and the drawing data received from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys the data is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is displayed again. During the interval period until the start of, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect are used. A state in which there is a problem in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be is not reaching the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is set to the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. When it has reached (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. A process is performed to notify by displaying the message "There was a problem with the LCD display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk."

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is activated, the left decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol are activated. , And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if it is the number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the connection recovery process is performed. The communication error display process in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device is displayed. The 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. During the interval period until the variable display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is enabled. On the other hand, until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is displayed. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data is invalidated. This is because the combination result of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information most of interest to the player, and is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which is given is generated, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed correctly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the central decorative symbol are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, instead of interrupting the effect in the middle and recovering to the state where the drawing can be performed correctly. By stopping and displaying the decoration pattern on the right side, the drawing of the information most of interest to the player is completed.

In this respect, the period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the customer waiting state. During the period of the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, the LOCKN signal output request data is significantly different from the case of transmitting the LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, it is differential as described above. Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuits so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is, in the first place, the LOCKN signal output request data. As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a tells the effect display drive board 4450 that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no problem has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the effect display drive board 4450 has a problem. (For example, "A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk.") To that effect by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source to the effect display device on the game board side. By outputting to 1600 and outputting a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") to the audio data transmission IC1512c by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f may receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the LOCKN signal output request data is received, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the LOCKN signal as a response signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no problem in the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN. When no signal is input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Then, when it is determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU1511a discovers a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the clerk of the hall or the like by executing the notification process. The clerk in the hall can extremely easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be done without any trouble. ing. Therefore, it is possible to find a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 without any trouble.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided on the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for the door frame side effect. When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a communication problem occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the receiver ICSDIC0 receives the image. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to convey that the drawn drawing data becomes abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a connection confirmation signal for transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a can detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage, and work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to eliminate the defect. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by discovering and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. When it cannot be received normally, the effect control microprocessor outputs the LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal, which informs that a communication failure has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication failure. A message "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is generated, which is an image indicating that the image is being displayed, and this generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side production display device 1600. It can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a detects a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage, and notifies the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall or directly notify the clerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall has a problem. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by early detecting and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. There is a problem in the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the receiver, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication problem between image communications. Is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , It is possible to keep outputting repeatedly. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication problem is resolved.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where the connection between the effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the above state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and solving a communication problem between image communications is performed. A connection confirmation signal is sent from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. While the output is being repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the game is played. When the progress of the above is started again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is predetermined. Data pattern (SYNC pattern) can be stopped to be transmitted to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It has become like. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a defect resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not progressing by displaying the start and stop, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication defect is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the progress of the game is not executed. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion (distortion of the image) of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 is still present. Every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the progress of the game again (every time the period (interval period) of the timing K1 to the timing K2 is reached), it can be directed to be resolved.

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 and a second start, which is a start area in which a game ball launched by a ball launching device 650 toward a game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control MPU952a of 70 is implemented.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information related to payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 954 of FIG. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 92 is performed, the information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit is turned on, the payout control built-in RAM is used. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored information related to payout, and a main control side power supply of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the turn-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on), the error generated for the payout device 830 is cleared. The RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is not output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor but is output to the payout control MPU952a which is a payout control microprocessor as an error release signal for the operation. ..

As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the process when the main control side power is turned on in FIG. 92 is performed, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information related to the above is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit power is turned on. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information about payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and a RAM clear function of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. When the operation is performed after the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process (or the period in which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time the power is turned on) has elapsed, the payout device 830 An error canceling function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor MPU952a without outputting it to the main control MPU1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, as an error clearing signal for clearing the generated error. Since it is provided in combination, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error clear function, by operating one operation switch 954. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting port sensor 4002, a second starting port sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, and a vibration detection sensor. , This is a circuit in which a detection signal from a magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is given as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit in which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. do.

In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a gaming ball driven into the gaming area to manipulate the flowing state of the gaming ball as desired to obtain an unfair profit. There is no end to fraudulent gaming activities.

In order to detect such an illegal game act and suppress the illegal act by a light emitting means, a voice alarm, or the like, a magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided corresponding to a predetermined position in the game area. There is.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 104 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit installed in a gaming machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 4161. As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is composed of a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive sensor, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, + 5V) when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value. It is designed not to (0V).

The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

When the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, the transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. Further, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. As a result, when the transistor ITR0 is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the pull-up resistor IR2 and also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

The main control input circuit 1310b is composed of a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1. One end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to a collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage of the panel relay board 4161 via a connector CON2. , + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR in the previous stage is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the voltage output unit 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and to which + 12V is applied. Further, the detection circuit unit 4164 is a circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied while being connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and a transistor ITR1 in which a base terminal is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Applies to.

Further, in the previous stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, the sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of a circuit composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1 and the transistor ITR0. As described above, the panel relay board 4161 is provided with the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164.

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the + 12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in a table format in FIG. 108. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 4161, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on, as in the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. ..

By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion. There are two types of connector members, pin contact type and bellows contact, depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member. In the case of the bellows contact type, when the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work, pin contact Gap is easier to open than the type. When a gap is opened, dust and the like can easily enter from this portion.

Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when a large number of game balls are continuously concentrated and flowed down when playing right-handed, when vibration from a specific part of the game area is applied to the connector member, slight sliding wear occurs. However, this may cause contact resistance.

Here, a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR occurs in a connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161. The operation of is described. For example, in FIG. 104, when a contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a chain line. The magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that when the contact of the connector is normal.

As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where magnetism is not detected, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR Will be lifted. In FIG. 104, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, a current flows through the contact resistor RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, so that a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. .. Then, when the voltage lifted by the contact resistor RR reaches the specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state, the transistor ITR0 may be turned on. That is, the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 installed on the panel relay board 4161 may erroneously detect the sensor signal when the contact resistance RR is generated.

[Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 105 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of a magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the first embodiment in the present embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 104. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 shall be installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning port 2001, the large winning port 2005, the out port 1126, and the like. become.

The difference between the magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment and the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit is that when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164, it is in a non-detection state. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the voltage (second voltage) pulled down to the ground side by the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR and lower than the first voltage is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 The point is that the voltage raising unit 4166 is provided, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the voltage raising unit 4166.

In the first embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example composed of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the front stage of the connection part. It is connected.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 It is connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conducting state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS unit is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

Then, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is in such an abnormal state, in the above example, when it is determined that the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a is peripheral. An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511, and a process for outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer is performed. In response to the error command, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality by the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the alarm lamp, the voice, or the like.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR Is lifted. In FIG. 105, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 by flowing a current through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. become. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains a non-conducting state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False positives can be prevented.

As in the conventional case, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a sends an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the transmitted error command with a magnet. The game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device 460, the warning display, the voice, etc. are notified that an illegal game act using the above is performed or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected. do. Further, an error signal is output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 106 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit installed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment is the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 104, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control of the main control board 1310. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 has one end connected to the first resistor IR1 whose one end is connected to the voltage output unit 4163 and the other end connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1 and the other end is grounded. It is configured to include a second resistor IR3. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 104, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged after the other end of the resistor IR1. It differs in that it is connected to the connection point of the transistor ITR0 with the base terminal. That is, in the second embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example composed of a resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to the ground and drops when the predetermined voltage is applied.

One end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. ing.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the voltage raising unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage lowered to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state of detecting magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

Further, a voltage of + 12V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a first resistor IR1 of the voltage raising section 4166, and a second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the voltage raising section 4166 have a voltage of + 12V. A current flows to the ground via the first resistor IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR Is lifted. In FIG. 106, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, a current flows through the contact resistor RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, so that a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor. It will be. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1 and further this current flows to the ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, the current due to a predetermined voltage higher than the applied second voltage and lower than the first voltage almost drops to the ground, and the second resistor Almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage of IR3. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage remains off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False positives can be prevented.

[Example 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 107 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of a magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment is the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 104, a connector, a voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 4161, a detection circuit unit 4164, and a main control input of the main control board 1310. The circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 comprises two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. And the resistors IR1, IR4, IR5 are included. Compared with the above-described second embodiment, in the third embodiment, the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5 connected in series instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded are connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting the Darlington circuit, respectively. You are connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example composed of a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 that cause a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

Further, the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and is also connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the first stage, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the second stage. Further, the collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are set at one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 in which + 12V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied to the other end, and are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). By connecting the base terminal of the transistor to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off, and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state of detecting magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

Further, a voltage of + 12V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a resistance IR1 of the voltage raising unit 4166, a resistance IR4, and a resistance IR5. A current flows to the ground via the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is turned on.

When the subsequent transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR Is lifted. In FIG. 107, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, a current flows through the contact resistor generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, so that a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1. .. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1 and further, this current flows to the ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and most of the current is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the rear stage of the resistance IR1. It does not flow. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Also, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage does not turn on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit remain off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False positives can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 109, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of these sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 turns off.

Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is broken, the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the broken magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on to detect the detection circuit unit 4164. Transistor ITR1 is turned off. When there are a plurality of sensors, voltage output units 4163 are provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and the voltage output units 4163 provided for each are provided with a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, "TD62083AP" (commercially available product, TOSHIBA). Can be used by connecting to (manufactured).

Although the sensor signal input unit 4162 deployed on the panel relay board 4161 of the present embodiment has been described above, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the connector member. It suffices as long as the sensor signal is transmitted from the detection sensor by means of various sensors, for example, general winning opening sensor 4020, first starting port sensor 4002, second starting port sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, vibration detection sensor, contact. It is possible to apply a sensor or the like.

[Application example to which the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the panel relay board 4161 can be applied]
The sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments described above has been described as preventing erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance generated when the contact of the connector is abnormal. By the way, the applicable portion of the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments is not limited to the contact portion of the connector.

As described above, in a gaming machine, there is a situation in which detection sensors are installed at a plurality of locations in the gaming area (for example, they are arranged in the vicinity of a start opening, a winning opening, a large winning opening, an out opening, etc.). .. Therefore, the electrical connection between the detection sensor and the detection circuit unit (for example, the transistor on the panel relay board) that detects the detection signal from the detection sensor has various circuit patterns and wiring (harness) depending on the location where the detection sensor is installed. The length of is selected as appropriate. Regarding this point, various forms will be taken depending on the model of the gaming machine.

By the way, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes due to the change in resistance value due to the secular change of the used electrical parts (for example, connector and detection sensor) and wiring pattern, and the length of the wiring (harness). If it is different from the value, the circuit may not operate normally. In addition, the resistance value also changes due to a specification change during development, for example, when the type of detection sensor, the arrangement location, and the length of the wiring (harness) are changed in design. Therefore, the current flowing through the detection sensor changes. In addition, there may be places where noise is easily picked up by changing the location of the detection sensor, extending the length of the harness, or changing the location where the harness is routed, and the degree of influence of noise also changes.

If a current flows through the resistance value that changes due to such a situation, the current flowing through the detection sensor may differ from the original design value. That is, there is a risk of erroneously detecting the signal of the detection sensor. Further, due to the influence of noise, the circuit may not operate normally, and the signal of the detection sensor may be erroneously detected.

The sensor signal input unit 4162 provided with the voltage raising unit 4166 of the first to third embodiments is of the electrical components (for example, a connector and a detection sensor) used, the aging of the wiring pattern, and the wiring (harness). Even when the resistance value changes depending on the length, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise, and the detection circuit can be generalized. In the conventional example of FIG. 104 and the embodiment of FIG. 105, the changing resistance value is shown by a two-dot chain line.

In the following, the case where noise is placed on the harness will be described as an example. Further, FIG. 110A shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 110B shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 110A is a signal waveform input when there is no noise, and the right side is a signal waveform input when there is noise.

As shown in FIG. 110A, in the conventional example, when there is no noise, the level is low (0.4V) when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, and the transistor ITR0 in FIG. 104 is turned on. It is possible to maintain a level lower than the voltage (0.8V). When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, the level is high (12V), which is higher than the voltage (0.8V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

On the other hand, in the conventional example, when noise is present, even if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, the peak of the noise waveform is the voltage (0.8V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on as shown by the hatched portion. ) Is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the signal of the sensor is erroneously detected.

Further, not limited to noise, for example, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), when an overshoot occurs, a false detection does not occur in the state where magnetism is detected, but when an undershoot occurs, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. And I can't keep it off. Therefore, the signal of the sensor is erroneously detected.

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 raises the voltage that can be input to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of FIG. 105 to 2V as an example of a voltage higher than 0.8V. Has been done. In the absence of noise, the detection operation is low level (0.4V) when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, which is lower than the raised voltage of 2V, so the voltage at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on. A level lower than (0.8V) can be maintained. When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism, it is at a high level (12V) and is higher than the raised voltage of 2V. Therefore, the voltage raising unit 4166 is turned on and the transistor ITR0 is turned on (0. The level becomes higher than 8V), and the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, when noise is present, the peak of the noise waveform exceeds the voltage (0.8V) at which the transistor ITR0 is turned on even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. However, since the voltage is lower than the raised voltage of 2V, the voltage raising portion 4166 is maintained in the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be maintained in the off state. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

Next, for example, a case where a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in the resistance value due to aging will be described as an example. Further, FIG. 111A shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the conventional example, and FIG. 111B shows a signal waveform input to the sensor signal input unit 4162 in the embodiment. The left side of FIG. 111A is a signal waveform input in a normal case, and the right side is a signal waveform input when a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in resistance value due to aging.

In the conventional example, when a voltage rise occurs due to an increase in the resistance value due to aging, the input voltage is a transistor as shown by the hatched portion even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Since the voltage (0.8V) at which ITR0 is turned on is exceeded, the transistor ITR0 remains on, and the off state cannot be maintained. Therefore, the signal of the sensor is erroneously detected.

On the other hand, in the embodiment, even when the voltage rises due to the resistance value rising due to aging, the transistor ITR0 is turned on for the input voltage when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism. Even if the voltage (0.8V) is exceeded, the voltage is lower than the raised voltage of 2V, so that the voltage raising unit 4166 is maintained in the off state. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 can be maintained in the off state. Therefore, erroneous detection can be prevented.

As described above, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the first to third embodiments includes the voltage raising unit 4166, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to aging or noise. Further, since the sensor signal input unit 4162 includes a voltage raising unit 4166, noise may occur if the location of the detection sensor is changed, the length of the harness is extended, or the location where the harness is routed is changed. The sensor signal input unit 4162 can prevent the influence of noise even if there is a place where it is easy to pick up. Therefore, the circuit units (sensor signal input unit 4162 and detection circuit unit 4164) provided on the panel relay board 4161 can be generalized. Therefore, it is possible to have a margin for design changes during development.

[Sensor signal input unit 4162'in another embodiment]
The magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in Examples 1 to 3 described above includes a built-in transistor STR, and the built-in transistor STR is turned on when magnetism is not detected, while the built-in magnetometer STR is turned on when magnetism is detected. The transistor STR is turned off. In other words, the sensor signal input unit 4162 uses a transistor whose input is low when magnetism is not detected and high when magnetism is detected. Instead, a magnetic sensor that has a high input when no magnetism is detected and a low input when magnetism is detected, in other words, a magnetometer that turns off when no magnetism is detected and turns on when magnetism is detected. It is also possible to use.

FIG. 112 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a magnetic sensor input circuit of another embodiment. The magnetic sensor MGS is turned off when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and turns on when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value.

The input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 4161 via the connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. Further, the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS is grounded.

As the voltage raising unit 4166, those of Examples 1 to 3 described above can be used. In this other embodiment, the voltage raising unit 4166 is an example composed of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. In another embodiment, the detection circuit unit 4164'is composed of the transistor ITR0. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2, and is connected to the pull-up resistor NR to which + 12V is applied to one end. There is. Here, the circuit configuration of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 is the same as that of the first to third embodiments. In another embodiment, the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 constitute the sensor signal winning unit 4162', and the transistor ITR0 constitutes the detection circuit unit 4164'.

[Detection operation when normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on by being applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the Langista ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164', and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0.

Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which + 12V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1, so that the transistor NTR1 is turned on. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

[Detection operation in case of abnormality due to change in resistance value]
When the magnetic sensor MGS is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is off. As a result, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage). Since this applied voltage is higher than the Zener voltage, the Zener diode ZD0 is turned on, and the transistor ITR0 is turned on by being applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0.

At this time, even if noise is placed on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the voltage applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 (corresponding to the first voltage) is higher, so the Zener diode ZD0 There is no effect on the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 via the anode terminal of the above, and the transistor ITR0 is still turned on. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164'.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on. When the magnetic sensor MGS is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0 to which + 12V is applied, the connector CON1, the input terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS.

As a result, the voltage at one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

At this time, even if noise is placed on the harness from the magnetic sensor MGS, the predetermined voltage due to the noise applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. It is a predetermined voltage, and this predetermined voltage is applied to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the off state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the voltage raising unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. The operation of the main control input circuit 1310b is the same as the detection operation in the normal case.

[Example of arranging a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 on the panel relay board 4161]
Next, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to claim 1. As shown in FIG. 113, an example is shown in which the same substrate (on the panel relay substrate 4161), the voltage output unit 4163, the voltage raising unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, at least one of the voltage raising unit 4166, the voltage output unit 4163, and the detection circuit unit 4166 may be arranged on the same substrate. FIG. 114 shows a circuit configuration in which the voltage raising unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are arranged on the same substrate (panel relay board 4161), and the voltage output unit 4163 is arranged on another substrate (for example, a sensor substrate). It is a figure which shows an example.

Further, in FIG. 115, the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 are arranged on the same substrate (panel relay board 4161), and the detection circuit unit 4164 is arranged on another substrate (for example, main control board 1310). It is a figure which shows the example of the circuit structure. As described above, the arrangement positions of the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 can be changed in various ways.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing another example of the circuit configuration of the invention according to the embodiment of the present invention. The resistance value that changes with aging and the wiring length includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS, the wiring (harness) from these to the panel relay board 4161, and the connector CON1. The detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on the game board 5a is composed of the magnetic detection sensors 4024 of Examples 1 to 3 in FIG. 113.

The voltage output unit 4163 outputs the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the first state, while the second voltage is lower than the first voltage when the detection sensor unit is in the second state. Output voltage. For example, in the circuit shown in FIG. 113, when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism, it outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4V), while the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism. At that time, a high level voltage (for example, 12V) is output.

The detection circuit unit 4164 switches the output of the detection signal on and off in response to the first voltage or the second voltage output from the voltage output unit 4163. Since the detection circuit unit 4164 of FIG. 113 uses the detection circuit unit 4164 described in the first to third embodiments, the pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to + 12V is connected to the front stage of the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. ing.

Then, with respect to the subsequent stage of the voltage output unit 4163, the first voltage (for example, 12V in each embodiment) is higher than the second voltage (for example, 0.4V in each embodiment). Even if a predetermined voltage lower than (as an example, a voltage of 0.8 V or more and less than 2.0 V is shown in FIG. 111) is applied, the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is avoided. A voltage raising unit 4166 is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, one detection circuit unit 4164, a plurality of voltage output units 4163, and a plurality of voltage raising units 4166 are arranged on the same board (on the panel relay board 4161). .. In this example, the sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the voltage output unit 4163 and the voltage raising unit 4166 arranged after the voltage output unit 4163. Further, a plurality of voltage raising units 4166, ... Each of which is electrically connected in parallel to one detection circuit unit 4164.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 or the magnetic sensor MGS are the bases of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. Multiple terminals are connected in parallel. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

In FIG. 113, when any one of the sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 is turned off, and thereby the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is turned on. Is. Therefore, the detection signal can be detected without erroneous detection of any of the plurality of detection sensor units. As described above, when the sensor signal input unit 4162 provided with the voltage raising unit 4166 is used, it is not necessary to consider the resistance value that changes as shown in the figure. Therefore, a plurality of sensor signal input units 4162 can be integrated on one board (on the panel relay board 4161), and the panel relay board 4161 can be commonly used (generalized) for various types of gaming machines. Is possible. Therefore, it contributes to design changes during development and reduction of man-hours related to manufacturing.

FIG. 116 shows an example in which a plurality of magnetic sensors MGS of another embodiment described with reference to FIG. 112 are provided, and the plurality of magnetic sensors MGS are electrically connected to the voltage output unit 4163 in parallel. Further, in FIG. 116, the magnetic sensor MGS of another embodiment is configured. In another example of FIG. 116, when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism (magnetic sensor MGS is on), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a low level voltage (for example, 0.4 V), while the magnetic sensor. When the MGS does not detect magnetism (magnetic sensor MGS is off), the voltage output unit 4163 outputs a high level voltage (for example, 12V).

On the other hand, FIG. 116 is different in that there is no pull-up resistor IR2 pulled up to + 12V because the detection circuit unit 4164'described in another embodiment is used, and + 12V is formed at one end of the main control input circuit 1310a. The collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor NR1 to which is applied.

In FIG. 116, when any one of these magnetic sensors MGS detects magnetism and is turned on, the transistor ITR0 of the detection circuit unit 4164'is turned off, thereby turning on the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b. Is.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control related to the game progress and the production will be summarized.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process results. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 has a display mode (design, various background images, characters, characters, etc.) of the effect display device 1600 based on the control signal (control command) output from the main control board 1310. It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members (such as the effect operation unit 400 and the movable member) that contribute to the effect.

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second starting port winning processes are performed. In this first and second starting port winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the starting port, and when it is determined that a winning ball has been won, a process of increasing the number of holdings on the corresponding special symbol side by one is performed. Will be done.

If the processing flag is 0 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variation start process is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, on the condition that the number of pending hits is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and the result of this jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored. , Update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, when the processing flag is 1 when the first and second starting port winning processes are completed, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (identification symbol) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is based on the result of the jackpot determination memorized above and the current gaming state. After determining and setting the variable time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the stop display) and the stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, when the processing flag is 2 when the first and second starting port winning processes are completed, the changing process is executed. In this variable processing, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is monitored by a timer, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is based on the time-out. To stop. After that, when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (loss). The process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

On the other hand, when the first and second start opening winning processes are completed and the processing flag is 3, the jackpot game process is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode (for example, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game determined based on the type of the winning jackpot. Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, processing is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the winning jackpot type is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. After updating the game status flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

As the fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect that appears on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a jackpot fluctuation fluctuation pattern, a missed reach fluctuation fluctuation pattern, and a missed fluctuation fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is developed so as to finally stop and display the jackpot symbol after the reach effect. The production to be performed is executed. The out-of-reach variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach is to be performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number. An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbol is finally disengaged and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed. The loss variation is a variation that occurs when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number does not determine that the reach is to be performed. The effect display device 1600 does not undergo the reach effect. , The effect that the variable display of the decorative symbol is finally removed and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern is defined so that it is possible to specify which of the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side is the fluctuation pattern.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by acquiring game information such as the result of the jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to the game information, such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern can appear. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 makes the effect display device 1600 appear a variation pattern of the decorative pattern based on the acquired game information, and also changes the effect display (background or reserved image) related to the degree of expectation. Controls such as changing the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and operating a movable member such as the movable effect unit 3100 after the backside are executed.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the operation information for the operation button 410 and the operation information of the player in the vicinity of the opening window, and can execute the control related to the effect according to the information.

Here, the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window will be described. FIG. 119 is a schematic diagram for explaining the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window, and in addition to omitting unrelated members in explaining the principle of acquiring operation information, the related members are also included. These are schematically shown. Further, FIG. 120 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 119.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game board 5 and the game area 5a, which are housed in the main body frame 4 and in which the game area 5a through which the game ball flows down, are visible. It has an opening window and is provided with a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Then, as shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the door frame 3 is provided with a reflective vertical wall portion 33 which is erected along the outer periphery of the opening window and is formed so that light can be reflected at least on the inner side surface thereof. Has been done. The opening window is a portion of the through-hole 111 that is on the front side (front side) of the glass plate 192.

Here, the reflective vertical wall portion 33 is provided as a frame decoration. More specifically, the reflective standing wall portion 33 is formed by the lower reflective standing wall portion 338 formed by the lower plate unit base 323, the left reflective standing wall portion 538 formed by the left unit base 531 and the right unit base 551. The right side reflective vertical wall portion 568 is provided, and these members are arranged in a substantially U shape (a mode in which the reflective vertical wall portion is not installed on the upper side of the opening window) along the outer peripheral peripheral edge of the opening window. It is composed by doing. Then, in the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, the inner surfaces thereof are all substantially perpendicular to one specific virtual plane P (FIG. 120). It is provided so as to be a light reflecting surface.

According to such a configuration, none of the lower reflective standing wall portion 338, the left reflective standing wall portion 538, and the right reflective standing wall portion 568 is provided among the reflective standing wall portions 33 formed in a substantially U shape. The portion (upper side of the opening window) is "light from a predetermined light source outside the outer circumference of the opening window travels on the specific virtual plane P described above and is taken into the outer circumference of the opening window, and eventually the reflective vertical wall portion. It functions as the first part that makes it possible to "reflect at 33", and at the same time, "the light reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 travels on the specific virtual plane P described above and outside the outer periphery of the opening window." It will also function as the second part that makes it possible to "make it detected".

Furthermore, in the reflective vertical wall portion 33 according to this embodiment, one reflection is performed across the inner surfaces of each of the three separate members (lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and right reflective vertical wall portion 568). A structure is adopted in which a member 36 (for example, a reflective sticker) is attached, whereby the reflective performance of the reflective vertical wall portion 33 including the joint of three separate members is suitably secured.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the left side base 572a provided on the upper left side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window (see FIG. 23). In the internal space 3435a of the above, a left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and a left outer outer light detecting unit 35a are provided. The left side base 572a itself is provided by a member having an extremely low (or 0) light transmittance.

Here, the internal space 3435a is a space including the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P intersecting the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568, respectively, and is provided with an opening window. It is provided as a space that is opened only toward the side so that light can travel toward the opening window side and that light from the opening window side can be taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while providing such an internal space 3435a behind the left upper speaker 573, it is placed between the pachinko machine 1 and the opening window in order to suppress fraudulent activity from the back of the speaker 573. The transmission member 3436a designed to have extremely high transparency and extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is arranged.

Further, the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is unitized with the left outer outer light detecting unit 35a, and the light is directed toward at least a wide range on the specific virtual plane P on the side where the opening window is provided. Is provided so that it can proceed.

Further, the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a is unitized with the left outer outer light emitting unit 34a, and can detect light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least one specific virtual plane P. It is provided so that it can be used.

According to such a configuration, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a travels to the opening window side and is reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33, becomes the reflected light from the reflective standing wall portion 33, and becomes the internal space 3435a. Incorporated in. In this regard, in the internal space 3435a, since only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the left side base 572a, the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a while the disturbance is suitably suppressed. The light emitted and reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 can be detected by the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the right side base 572b provided on the upper right side of the door frame 3 outside the outer periphery of the opening window (see FIG. 23). In the internal space 3435b of the above, a right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b and a right outer outer light detecting unit 35b are provided. The right side base 572b itself is also provided by a member having extremely low (or 0) light transmittance.

Here, the internal space 3435b is a space including the above-mentioned one specific virtual plane P at a position where the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 intersect, respectively, like the internal space 3435a. Moreover, it is provided as a space that is opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided so that the light can travel toward the opening window side and the light from the opening window side is taken in. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while providing such an internal space 3435b behind the right upper speaker 573, it is placed between the pachinko machine 1 and the opening window in order to suppress fraudulent activity from the back of the speaker 573. The transmissive member 3436b designed to have extremely high transmittance and extremely low influence on the traveling direction of light is arranged.

Further, the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b is unitized with the right outer outer light detecting unit 35b, and the light is directed toward at least a wide range on the specific virtual plane P on the side where the opening window is provided. Is provided so that it can proceed.

Further, the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b is unitized with the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b, and can detect light from the side where the opening window is provided on at least one specific virtual plane P. It is provided so that it can be used.

According to such a configuration, the light from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b travels to the opening window side and is reflected by the reflective standing wall portion 33, becomes the reflected light from the reflective standing wall portion 33, and becomes the internal space 3435b. Incorporated in. In this regard, in the internal space 3435b, since only the light from the opening window side is taken in by the right side base 572b, while the disturbance is suitably suppressed, the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b The light emitted and reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 can be detected by the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a region surrounded by the lower reflective vertical wall portion 338, the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 by the height and width of them from three directions ( Areas marked with dots in FIG. 120) function as a special operation receiving unit 3333 capable of detecting an operation by the player, and the operation mode of the player with respect to the special operation receiving unit 3333 is determined. Therefore, it is possible to execute the effect control according to the determination.

For example, when the player does not operate the special operation receiving unit 3333, the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a in a wide angle range is not blocked by any physical object, and the reflective vertical wall unit 33 It becomes the reflected light from various angles (various angles on at least one specific virtual plane P) and heads toward the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a. That is, the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a uses an optical lens or the like to transmit reflected light from such various angles to a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). Has a structure that can be detected separately, and outputs information to the peripheral control board 1510 that no physical object exists in the special operation receiving unit 3333 based on the separate detection signal.

At this time, the light emitted from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b in a wide angle range is not blocked by any physical object, and various angles (at least one specific virtual plane P) on the reflective vertical wall portion 33. It becomes the reflected light from the angle) and heads toward the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b. That is, the right outer peripheral light detection unit 35b also uses an optical lens or the like to transmit reflected light from such various angles to a plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). Has a structure that can be detected separately, and outputs information to the peripheral control board 1510 that no physical object exists in the special operation receiving unit 3333 based on the separate detection signal.

On the other hand, when the special operation receiving unit 3333 is operated by the player in the manner shown in FIG. 119, a part of the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a in a wide angle range is the player's finger ( It will be blocked by the physical object), and only the light other than the light directed in the blocked direction (angle range) will be the reflected light in the reflective vertical wall portion 33 and will be directed to the left outer peripheral light detecting portion 35a. That is, in this case, the left outer peripheral light detecting unit 35a is based on the information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P), and the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a By determining the blocked direction (angle) and its magnitude (angle range) of the light emitted from the left outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, in which direction and how large the physics is when viewed from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a. Information about whether the object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

At this time, a part of the light emitted from the right outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b in a wide angle range is also blocked by the player's finger (physical object), and the light directed in the blocked direction (angle range). Only the light other than the above becomes the reflected light in the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 and heads toward the right outer peripheral external light detecting portion 35b. That is, in this case, the right outer peripheral light detecting unit 35b has the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b based on the information from the plurality of light receiving elements (a plurality of light receiving elements arranged on at least one specific virtual plane P). By determining the blocked direction (angle) and its magnitude (angle range) of the light emitted from the light, in which direction and how large the physics is when viewed from the right outer peripheral light emitting unit 34b. Information about whether the object exists is output to the peripheral control board 1510.

In the peripheral control board 1510, the information from the left outer peripheral external light detection unit 35a and the information from the right outer outer light detection unit 35b are acquired and analyzed, respectively, so that the special operation receiving unit 3333 physically receives the information. In addition to information on whether or not an object exists (whether an operation was performed on the special operation receiving unit 3333), when a physical object exists in the special operation receiving unit 3333, its coordinate position (x, y) and size are large. You will be able to obtain information related to this. Then, as will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment periodically acquires such information, whereby the movement of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and the size of the physical object can be determined. It is possible to determine an operation gesture such as a change, and the effect control according to the determination is executed.

It should be noted that these analysis processes do not necessarily have to be performed on the peripheral control board 1510 side, but are performed by external means for acquiring information from the left outer peripheral external light detection unit 35a and the right outer outer light detection unit 35b. The peripheral control board 1510 may acquire the analysis result from the external means, or the external means and the peripheral control board 1510 may share the analysis.

Further, the light emission from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light emission from the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b are set to blink respectively, the left outer outer light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state, and the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b is turned off. A certain period and a period in which the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the extinguished state and the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b is in the light emitting state may be alternately generated. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state is detected on the left outer outer light detecting unit 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer outer light emitting unit 35a is in the light emitting state is detected on the right outer peripheral side. If the external light detection unit 35b detects the light and analyzes the light based on this information, the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light from the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b do not interfere with each other. Therefore, it is expected that more accurate detection information will be obtained.

Further, the light emission from the left outer outer light emitting unit 34a and the light emission from the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b are set to blink respectively, the left outer outer light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state, and the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b is off. The period in which the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is off and the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b is in the light emitting state, and the period when the left outer outer light emitting unit 34a is in the off state and the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b is also in the light emitting state. One cycle in which the period in which the light is off is sequentially generated may appear repeatedly. That is, in this case, the reflected light when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a is in the light emitting state is detected on the left outer outer light detecting unit 35a side, and the reflected light when the right outer outer light emitting unit 35a is in the light emitting state is detected on the right outer peripheral side. If it is detected on the external light detection unit 35b side, the offset portion when the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the right outer outer light emitting unit 35a are in the extinguished state is also detected and analyzed based on these information. The light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the light from the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b no longer interfere with each other, and the detected offset can be eliminated before making a judgment. It is expected that high detection information will be obtained.

Further, visible light may be used as the light from the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b. However, in the pachinko machine 1, considering that the effect is produced by light in various places, it is possible to use invisible light such as infrared rays to disturb the disturbance from these effect lights and the effect light. It is more desirable to suitably suppress the adverse effect on the light.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, "light from a predetermined light source outside the outer periphery of the opening window travels on the specific virtual plane P described above and is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window, and thus is taken into the outer periphery of the opening window. The first part that makes it possible to "reflect by the reflective vertical wall portion 33" and "the light reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 travels on the specific virtual plane P described above and outside the outer circumference of the opening window". A second portion that enables "to be detected" is provided as the same portion of the reflective standing wall portion 33 formed in a substantially U shape. However, a plurality of regions where light is allowed to travel between the inside and outside of the outer circumference of the opening window are provided for the reflective vertical wall portion 33, and the outer peripheral light emitting portion and the outer peripheral light detecting portion are separately provided in these regions. And may be arranged respectively.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reflective vertical wall portion 33 is formed in a substantially U-shape with an upper opening, but the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b of the upper part of the opening window are formed. A reflective standing wall portion 33 may also be formed on the peripheral edge between them. However, it is desirable that the internal space 3435a and the internal space 3435b are opened in a downward direction in order to prevent direct light from lighting or the like from being taken in and causing disturbance. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left outer peripheral light emitting unit 34a and the left outer outer light detecting unit 35a, and the right outer outer light emitting unit 34b and the right outer outer light detecting unit 35b are used. The operation in the operation receiving unit 3333 is made to be detectable, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, any structure may be used as long as the operation of the special operation receiving unit 3333 can be detected. It may be detected by a light detection unit, and the coordinates (x, y) and size of the physical object may be determined from the detection result.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer outer light emitting portion 34b) provided outside the outer periphery of the opening window is emitted from the opening window. External light detection unit 35 (left outer circumference) provided outside the outer circumference of the opening window as reflected light from the reflective vertical wall portion 33 which is erected along the outer circumference of the opening window and is formed so as to reflect light at least on the inner side surface thereof. By detecting with the external light detection unit 35a and the right outer peripheral external light detection unit 35b), the vicinity of the opening window is made to function as the special operation receiving unit 3333, and the effect according to the operation mode of the player in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is produced. It is made feasible.

Then, the outer peripheral external light detection unit 35 is not arranged in an exposed state, but is arranged in the internal space 3435 of the side base 572 opened toward the side where the opening window is provided, thereby detecting the outer outer light. As described above, when the light is detected by the unit 35, the directing light that may be a disturbance can be suitably excluded.

However, even with such a configuration, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 is reflected by the reflective vertical wall portion 33 from the portion of the internal space 3435 that is opened toward the side where the opening window is provided. Since the structure is such that not only the light but also the directing light can be taken in, there is a concern that such directing light may become a disturbance and adversely affect the detection accuracy by the outer peripheral external light detection unit 35.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 120, the frame-side light emitting portion L1 provided on the right unit base 551 of the main body frame 4 is first on the specific virtual plane P described above. It is arranged at a position where it cannot be irradiated with the traveling light. More specifically, the frame-side light emitting unit L1 is provided at a position on the front side of the special operation receiving unit 3333, and is in front of the base unit BL1 having extremely low (or 0) light transmittance. It is attached to the side. Since the base portion BL1 has a wider shape than the frame-side light emitting portion L1, it is difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L1 to travel to the rear side (the side where the opening window is provided). As a result, the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L1 is less likely to be taken into the internal space 3435.

Moreover, in the right unit base 551 according to this embodiment, the first right decorative base portion 551a provided with a material that allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side. It has a second right decorative base portion 551b provided with a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or zero transmittance) that hinders the progress of light from the light emitting portion L1. The first right side decoration base portion 551a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting portion L1 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 can contribute as the directing light, whereas the second right side decoration base portion 551a is formed. The base portion 551b is formed between the frame-side light emitting portion L1 and the opening window so that the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L1 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

In particular, the second right decorative base portion 551b according to this embodiment is the first, while allowing the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 to travel to the player side through the first right decorative base portion 551a. The right decorative base portion 551a is provided so as to extend to a part of the front surface side thereof, whereby the light from the frame side light emitting portion L1 is suitably suppressed from advancing to the opening window. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the right unit base 551 is provided with both the base portion BL1 and the second right decorative base portion 551b, but only one of these is provided. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L1 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

On the other hand, the frame-side light emitting portion L2 provided on the left unit base 531 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the front side of the base portion BL2 having extremely low (or 0) light transmittance. It is in a position where it can irradiate light traveling on the specific virtual plane P of. However, as is clear from FIG. 120, since the reflection member 36 is provided between the frame-side light emitting portion L2 and the opening window, the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L2 is provided with the opening window. It is difficult to travel to the side, which makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

However, since the height and width of the reflection member 36 are low, there is a concern that the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L2 is reflected by another member or the like and heads toward the opening window. Therefore, also in the left unit base 531 according to this embodiment, the first left decorative base portion 531a provided with a material that allows the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel with high transmittance, and the frame side It has a second left decorative base portion 531b provided with a material (for example, metal) having a low transmittance (or zero transmittance) that hinders the progress of light from the light emitting portion L2. The first left side decoration base portion 531a is formed so as to surround the frame side light emitting portion L2 so that the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 can contribute as the directing light, while the second left side decoration. The base portion 531b is formed between the frame-side light emitting portion L2 and the opening window so that the light from the frame-side light emitting portion L2 does not easily travel toward the side where the opening window is provided. This also makes it difficult for the light from the frame-side light emitting unit L2 to be taken into the internal space 3435.

In particular, the second left decorative base portion 531b according to this embodiment is the first, while allowing the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 to travel to the player side through the first left decorative base portion 531a. It is provided so as to extend to a part of the front side of the left decorative base portion 531a so as to preferably suppress the light from the frame side light emitting portion L2 from advancing to the opening window. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the left unit base 531 is provided with the second left decorative base portion 531b, and the right unit base 551 is provided with the second right decorative base portion 551b. These members do not necessarily have to be provided, and even in this case, it is difficult for the effect light to be taken into the internal space 3435 as described above. When the second left side decoration base portion 531b and the second right side decoration base part 551b are not provided, the reflection member 36 is the first left side decoration base part 531a and the first right side decoration base part 551a. If it is attached to the inner surface (the surface that cannot be contacted from the outside) of the first left decorative base portion 531a or the first right decorative base portion 551a instead of being attached to the outer surface (the surface that can be contacted from the outside), it can be attached from the outside. It will be expected to avoid the deterioration of the reflection performance due to the direct physical contact of the. In this case, the light from the outer peripheral light emitting unit 34 (left outer outer light emitting unit 34a, right outer outer light emitting unit 34b) passes through the first left side decorative base portion 531a and the first right side decorative base portion 551a, and then the above. It is reflected by the reflection member 36, passes through the first left decorative base portion 531a and the first right decorative base portion 551a again, and then is taken into the internal space 3435.

Further, when the left unit base 531 is provided with the second left decorative base portion 531b and the right unit base 551 is provided with the second right decorative base portion 551b, the reflection member 36 is omitted and the second is provided. The left decorative base portion 531b and the second right decorative base portion 551b themselves may also function as reflecting members using a material such as metal. According to such a configuration, the directing light from the frame-side light emitting portions L1 and L2 becomes disturbed only by providing the reflecting member (second left side decorative base portion 531b, second right decorative base portion 551b). The detection accuracy by the outer peripheral light detection unit 35 can be suitably ensured by the reflected light from the reflection member (second left side decoration base portion 531b, second right side decoration base portion 551b) while appropriately suppressing the light. Become.

In the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, it is possible to obtain information such as the coordinates and size of a physical object located in the vicinity of the opening window by using the principle of acquiring operation information in the vicinity of the opening window. This makes it possible to use almost the entire area of the opening window (the approximately area that can be seen from the front of the glass plate 192) as the special operation receiving unit 3333, resulting in more dynamic and highly flexible operability. It is possible to realize a directing property suitable for this.

Hereinafter, the operability and the effectability that can be realized by using such a special operation receiving unit 3333 will be described. FIGS. 121 to 127 are schematic views for explaining the operability and the effectability that can be realized by using the special operation receiving unit 3333, and are related in explaining the operability and the effectability. In addition to omitting the missing members, these are also schematically shown for related members.

FIG. 121 shows a special operation receiving portion 3333 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and various effect members A to E arranged at positions where the pachinko machine 1 overlaps the special operation receiving portion 3333 when viewed from the front. Is schematically shown. The arrows in the figure simply indicate the movable range of various movable bodies among the effect members A to E.

As shown in FIG. 121, when the special operation receiving portion 3333 according to this explanatory example is viewed from the front, the back side sandwiching the glass plate 192 can contribute to the production according to the result of the jackpot determination. As members, movable bodies A1, A2, B, C, a display unit D, and a board surface light emitting unit E provided so as to be able to emit light at a portion where a game ball can flow down or at other portions are arranged. .. The arrows in FIG. 121 schematically show the movable range of the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C.

It should be noted that these members are shown as an example for explaining the technical aspects of the present application, and do not necessarily match the examples described above with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. However, basically, the movable bodies A1, A2, B, and C are "back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back top middle movable production unit 3400, back The lower front movable effect unit 3500 and other movable members correspond to the display unit D, the display unit D corresponds to the effect display device 1600, and the board surface light emitting unit E corresponds to various decorations provided in the game board 5. It corresponds to "various LEDs mounted on a substrate". The board surface light emitting unit E does not necessarily have to be provided on the game board 5, and may be, for example, a member (light guide plate or the like) provided on the front side of the game board 5.

Here, in the peripheral control board 1510, first, the display unit D in which the effect display according to the result of the jackpot determination is performed is positioned as the target of the operation effect, and the display unit D of the special operation receiving unit 3333 is viewed from the front. When the player performs an operation on the overlapping coordinate regions and this is detected as a physical object, it is possible to control so that the effect change corresponding to the operation appears on the display unit D.

Hereinafter, an example of effect control in the case where the display unit D causes an effect change by an operation on the special operation receiving unit 3333 will be described.

[First operation control mode for display unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122 (a), when the first effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when the 3333 is viewed from the front, the first coordinate area Z1 facing the first display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) so that the effect can be accepted and displayed. A specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed in the first display area of the part D. Then, during a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S1 is displayed, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking)) is performed on any part of the special operation receiving unit 3333 in the first coordinate region Z1. It is not necessary to touch the special operation receiving unit 3333 with a finger or the like.)) When this is detected as a physical object, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden. The reception of the effect for the first coordinate region Z1 is terminated, and the display unit D causes an effect change, so that it is possible to execute a control in which the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination can be suggested depending on the type of the generated effect change.

At this time, in order to generate an effect change based on the operation being performed on any part of the special operation receiving unit 3333 in the first coordinate region Z1, the effect change is at least displayed on the display unit D. It is desirable to generate it in the first display area facing the first coordinate area Z1. That is, in this case, when the player makes it difficult to visually recognize the first display area with his / her finger or the like in the front view, the effect change occurs at least in the first display area, so that the player can change the effect. In the first display area until the first display area is visually recognized (using the space between the glass plate 192 and the display unit D) from an oblique direction (using the space between the glass plate 192 and the display unit D) instead of shifting one's finger or looking straight ahead. It will be possible to make it difficult to recognize the changes in the production that are appearing. Alternatively, the player may proceed with the game without confirming the change in the effect in the first display area while keeping his / her finger on the first coordinate area Z1, or is located in front of the pachinko machine 1. It will be possible to select a way of enjoying the game, such as having a third party who does not have it confirm the change in the effect in the first display area, and it is expected that the game will be improved.

If no operation by the player is detected between the appearance of the specific operation instruction image S1 and the elapse of a predetermined period (the arrival of a specific timing), the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden. At the same time, the reception of the effect for the first coordinate area Z1 is terminated. At this time, the effect change that appears when there is an effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1 may be generated, or the effect change that appears when there is an effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1 may not occur. The effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1 may be terminated.

[Second operation control mode for display unit D]
Further, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122 (b), when the second effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when the 3333 is viewed from the front, "the second coordinate area Z2 facing the second display area of the display unit D" and "the third display of the display unit D". Both the area and the third coordinate area Z3 facing the area are set (controlled) so that the effect can be received, and the second operation instruction image S2 is displayed in the second display area of the display unit D to display the third display area. The third operation instruction image S3 is displayed in. Then, in the predetermined period in which both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 of the special operation receiving unit 3333 is displayed. An operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, a finger or the like is sufficient in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and it is not always necessary to touch)) is performed on somewhere, and this is a physical object. When it is detected, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, the production reception of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is terminated, and the display unit D is described. In, a specific effect (an effect corresponding to the selected side (coordinate area side where the physical object is detected)) is generated, and in the generated specific effect, control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination is possible. ..

The operation by the player was not detected from the appearance of both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 until a predetermined period elapses (a specific timing arrives). In that case, both the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are hidden, and the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3 is terminated. ing. At this time, the specific effect that appears when the effect is received for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 may be generated, or the specific effect may not be generated. However, when a specific effect that appears when the effect is received for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is generated, the operation for the second operation instruction image S2 is accepted prior to the execution of the specific effect. It is desirable to make the display (effect, etc.) generated when the operation is performed or the display (effect, etc.) generated when the operation for the third operation instruction image S3 is received appear. That is, in this case, it is possible to grasp that the effect on the side where the effect is generated is forcibly executed while neither the second coordinate area Z2 nor the third coordinate area Z3 is operated. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in the game interest without knowing what kind of production is being performed.

Further, in the first operation control mode and the second operation control mode for the display unit D, not only the effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3 is allowed, but also the same. Within the period, the same effect reception may be allowed for other operation means such as the operation button 410.

For example, in the first operation control mode for the display unit D, when the first effect condition is satisfied, both the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 can receive the effect, and the specific operation instruction image S1 Is displayed, even when a pressing operation (detection of a button switch) is performed on the operation button 410 instead of an operation (detection of a physical object) on the first coordinate area Z1, the above specific The operation instruction image S1 is hidden, the effect reception of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is terminated, and the effect change is caused in the display unit D. Enables control that may suggest a degree.

Even when there is an operation (detection of a physical object) on the first coordinate area Z1, the specific operation instruction image S1 is hidden, the production reception of the first coordinate area Z1 and the operation button 410 is terminated, and the above. The display unit D causes an effect change, and it is possible to execute a control in which the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination can be suggested depending on the type of the effect change.

Further, in the second operation control mode for the display unit D, when the second effect condition is satisfied, the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, and the operation button 410 can all receive the effect. do. Then, during a predetermined period in which the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed, the operation is not an operation (detection of a physical object) for any of the second coordinate area Z2 and the third coordinate area Z3. When a pressing operation (detection of the button switch) is performed on the button 410, the second selection image indicating that the specific operation instruction image S2 is selected and the specific operation instruction image S3 are selected. A switching display is performed between the image and the third-selected image indicating that the image is in the present state. Then, when a predetermined period from the display of the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 elapses while either the second selection image or the third selection image is displayed, the selection image is displayed. A display (effect, etc.) that can be grasped that the operation for the operation instruction images S2 and S3 on the side where is appearing is generated, and the second operation instruction image S2 and the third operation instruction image S3 are selected. All the images (second selection image and third selection image) are hidden, and the reception of the effect for the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, and the operation button 410 is terminated. Then, after that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated in the display unit D, and control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination in the generated specific effect can be executed.

In addition, within the above-mentioned predetermined period, it is possible to receive an operation for another operation means (an operation for accepting any decision), and when there is an operation for the other operation means, a selected image appears. A display (effect) that can be grasped that the operation for the operation instruction images S2 and S3 on the side is accepted is generated, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected image (second selection) are generated. The image and the third selection image) may be hidden to terminate the reception of effects for the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and yet another operation means. Then, after that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated in the display unit D, and control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination in the generated specific effect can be executed.

Further, as long as it is within the above-mentioned predetermined period until the specific effect appears, regardless of whether the second selection image or the third selection image appears, the second coordinate region Z2 and the third coordinate Area Z3 can be used for directing. Then, when an operation on either the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is detected, it does not matter which of the second selection image and the third selection image appears, and the effect is produced. The display (effect, etc.) on the side where the reception was made appears, and the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selection image (second selection image, third selection image) are all hidden. Then, the effect reception for the second coordinate area Z2, the third coordinate area Z3, the operation button 410, and yet another operation means is terminated. At this time, the operation is detected prior to hiding the second operation instruction image S2, the third operation instruction image S3, and the selected image (second selection image, third selection image). The switching display may be performed so that the selected image (second selected image, third selected image) on the other side appears. Then, after that, a specific effect (effect on the selected side) is generated in the display unit D, and control that can suggest the degree of expectation for the result of the jackpot determination in the generated specific effect can be executed.

According to such a configuration, not only the effect reception for the first coordinate area Z1, the second coordinate area Z2, and the third coordinate area Z3 is allowed, but also for other operation means such as the operation button 410. The same production reception is possible. In this regard, in the second operation control mode, when the operation for the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate area Z3 is performed while enabling the same effect reception, the second coordinate area Z2 or the third coordinate Only one operation (detection of a physical object) is accepted for the area Z3, and it is possible to generate an effect on the side according to the preference of the player. That is, when another operation means is used, "the side according to the preference of the player until a predetermined period elapses after the specific operation instruction image S2 and the specific operation instruction image S3 are displayed". Is required to "cannot generate the effect of" or "perform at least two or more operations using a plurality of operating means", whereas when a specific operation receiving unit 3333 is used, it is more than this. Since it is possible to make the display mode appear according to the player's preference with only a small number of operations (once in this production example), it is possible to realize more complicated production with simple operability. It will be expected.

In addition, while providing such efficient operability, when operability capable of achieving a desired operation by performing at least two or more operations using a plurality of operating means is also provided at the same time. The player becomes able to worry about which operation should be selected as the desired operation while performing the operation in the process stage leading to the desired operation. That is, in this case, it becomes easier to imagine the production situation after selection while performing the operation in the process stage up to the desired operation, and it is difficult to decide which operation should be performed with a margin within a predetermined period. You will be able to do it. In this way, since the player can selectively use the operation means having a different required number of operations depending on whether he / she is in a state where he / she can make a prompt decision or is in a state where he / she is worried, the game interest can be maintained. Will be.

As described above, in the peripheral control board 1510, by setting the display unit D as the target of the operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, it is possible to realize an unprecedentedly interesting effect. However, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the special operation receiving unit 3333 has a larger operation receiving range when viewed from the front than the display unit D (the coordinate range to be detected is the glass plate 192. It is provided to have (almost the entire area), and by realizing a production using such a special relationship, it is possible to realize more dynamic and highly flexible operability and a production suitable for this. ..

[Third operation control mode for display unit D]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 123 (a), when the third effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when the 3333 is viewed from the front, the fourth coordinate area Z4 facing the fourth display area of the display unit D is set (controlled) so that the effect can be accepted and displayed. A specific operation target image S4 is displayed in the fourth display area of the unit D, and a specific image urging that the specific operation target image S4 should be operated to move to the movable body B in another display area of the display unit D is displayed. indicate.

Then, in a predetermined period after the specific operation target image S4 is displayed, an operation is performed on any part of the special operation receiving unit 3333 in the fourth coordinate region Z4 (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192). Strictly speaking, it suffices if there is a finger or the like in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and it is not always necessary to touch it)), and when this is detected as a physical object, as shown in FIG. 123 (b). , The coordinate area that can accept the effect is not the limited fourth coordinate area Z4 in the display unit D, but a large fifth coordinate area including at least the coordinate area facing the movable body B provided outside the display unit D. Change the setting to Z5. The fifth coordinate region Z5 of this explanatory example faces the movable body B provided outside the display unit D from the coordinate region facing the fourth display region (not necessarily coincident with the fourth coordinate region Z). It includes the coordinate area to be used, and is set so as to straddle the movable body B, the display unit D, and the board light emitting unit E.

At this time, the display mode of the specific operation target image S4 is changed (for example, the color is changed) based on the operation on somewhere in the fourth coordinate region Z4 of the special operation receiving unit 3333. It may be made to move or displayed in a vibration mode) so that it can be recognized that the specific operation target image S4 is in a movable state by the operation by the player.

That is, in this third operation control mode, the physical object is held in the special operation receiving unit 3333 with a physical object such as a finger, and the physical object is placed at a coordinate position facing the movable body B in the fifth coordinate area Z5. When it is moved to, the specific operation target image S4 appearing in the display unit D acts on the movable body B provided outside the display unit D, as if the effect on the movable body B is started. The production is realized.

Therefore, when the physical object such as a finger is fastened in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and the physical object is moved in the fifth coordinate region Z5, the peripheral control board 1510 detects the movement of the physical object, and the movement of the physical object is detected. It is possible to execute control to move the specific operation target image S4 in the display unit D so as to follow the movement of the detected physical object. As a result, the specific operation target image S4 is in the special operation receiving unit 3333 of the physical object from the time when the physical object is in the middle of moving to the coordinate position facing the movable body B. It moves in the display unit D so as to follow the movement in the front view.

More specifically, with a physical object such as a finger fastened in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the physical object is moved from the position shown in FIG. 123 (b) in the fifth coordinate region Z5 to FIG. 124 (a). When the image S4 is moved to the position shown in the above, the peripheral control board 1510 moves the specific operation target image S4 in the display unit D so as to follow the movement of such a physical object. However, when a physical object such as a finger is in the position shown in FIG. 124 (a) and an attempt is made to display the specific operation target image S4 in the display area facing the position, the operation target image S4 of the specific operation target image S4. A part of the display unit D protrudes from the display unit D, and the entire display cannot be displayed. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the specific operation target image S4 is displayed only in the portion that can be displayed in the display unit D, and the portion that protrudes from the display unit D is present. Is controlled to emit light from the corresponding portion of the board surface light emitting unit E so that the above can be recognized. More specifically, as the physical object approaches the coordinate position facing the edge of the display unit D, the portion of the specific operation target image S4 displayed on the display unit D is reduced, and the board surface light emitting unit E It is controlled so that the corresponding portion is increased as the light emitting region of.

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to express a state in which the specific operation target image S4 in the display unit D is about to jump out of the display unit D by the operation by the player, and the display unit D can be expressed. More dynamic and highly flexible operability that does not fit into this single unit and suitable effectability will be realized.

In particular, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 124 (a), a physical object such as a player's finger is located at a coordinate position facing the display unit D in the fifth coordinate region Z5. Despite being placed, the effect control is performed not only on the display unit D but also on a member (board surface light emitting unit E) different from the display unit D. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved in the coordinate region facing the plurality of members of the special operation receiving unit 3333, it becomes easy to recognize that the effect corresponding to the movement appears. It becomes possible to suitably realize the effectability suitable for the dynamic operability.

When a physical object such as a player's finger is moved slightly upward from the position shown in FIG. 124 (a) in the fifth coordinate region Z5, the physical object is not the display unit D but the game board 5. (Here, the board surface light emitting unit E) is placed at a coordinate position facing the board surface light emitting unit E). However, also in this case as well, instead of suddenly hiding all of the specific operation target image S4 and causing only the board light emitting unit E to emit light, the specific operation is performed as the physical object moves away from the coordinate position facing the display unit D. The target image S4 is controlled so that the portion displayed on the display unit D is reduced and the portion corresponding to the light emitting region of the board surface light emitting unit E is increased. That is, in this case, when the physical object is separated from the coordinate position facing the display unit D by a specific distance, the effect (here, light emission) is produced only on the board surface light emitting unit E of the display unit D and the board surface light emitting unit E. As a result, it becomes possible to express an effect as if the specific operation target image S4 has moved out of the display unit D.

Then, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate region Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 124 (b), the peripheral control board 1510 faces the position facing the physical object. Control is performed so that both the board surface light emitting unit E and the movable body B in the above light are emitted. That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the same control as the above-mentioned effect control performed between the display unit D and the board surface light emitting unit E is performed between the board surface light emitting unit E and the movable body B. I try to do it. More specifically, when the physical object in the coordinate area facing the game board 5 (here, the board surface light emitting unit E) approaches the coordinate area facing the movable body B to a predetermined distance, the physical object becomes this. Even though it is in the coordinate region facing the board surface light emitting unit E, the effect control is performed not only on the board surface light emitting unit E but also on a member (movable body B) different from the board surface light emitting unit E. I have to. Therefore, even when the physical object is moved within the coordinate region facing both the board surface light emitting unit E and the movable body B of the special operation receiving unit 3333, the effect corresponding to the movement (here, the display is displayed). It becomes easy to recognize that the specific operation target image S4) that has moved to the outside of the part D appears (moves), and thereby it becomes possible to suitably realize the effectability suitable for the dynamic operability. ..

Then, when a physical object such as a player's finger moves further upward in the fifth coordinate region Z5 and reaches the position shown in FIG. 125, the peripheral control board 1510 moves the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B. It is determined that the operation as if the movement was properly performed, and the condition in the third operation control mode is satisfied, and the effect reception for the fifth coordinate area Z5 is terminated. Further, a display recognizable that the condition (moving the specific operation target image S4 to the movable body B) in the third operation control mode is satisfied appears on the display unit D, and the movable body B is used. Execute the control to start the production. The effect using the movable body B can be realized, for example, as an effect of causing the movable body B to emit light in a predetermined mode, an effect of operating the movable body B in a predetermined mode, and the like, and a jackpot determination is made through such an effect. To be able to suggest the degree of expectation for the result of.

In the third operation control mode, when the physical object is moving in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and the physical object deviates from the fifth coordinate region Z5 (a finger is moved from the special operation receiving unit 3333). It is desirable to start over from the state shown in FIG. 123 (a). That is, as will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 basically periodically acquires the position information of the physical object regardless of the execution status of the effect, whereby the physical object moves within the fifth coordinate region Z5. Information indicating that the object has moved, information indicating that the object has moved outside the fifth coordinate area Z5, and the like can be obtained.

Further, the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the specific operation target image S4 is moved so as to follow only the movement of the specific direction component of the physical object. The operation target image S4 may be moved.

Further, the fifth coordinate region Z5 may be the entire coordinate region of the special operation receiving unit 3333. In addition, if there is no part that can be expressed as an effect suggesting that the specific operation target image S4 exists on the side opposite to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed, it is close to the coordinate position where the physical object is placed. An effect expression suggesting that a specific operation target image S4 exists at the site may be performed.

Further, in this explanatory example, a board surface light emitting unit E capable of producing an effect expression (light emission) is placed between the display unit D and the movable body B, but the board surface light emitting unit E is not always required. good. That is, in this case, the player is required to move the physical object to the coordinate position facing the movable body B (or the coordinate position in the vicinity) after the specific operation target image S4 is not displayed on the display unit D. Will continue the operation while holding the moving image of the specific operation target image S4 in the head.

Further, the display unit D displays a map capable of grasping the positional relationship between the display unit D and the movable body B, and indicates in the map at which position the specific operation target image S4 exists according to the movement of the physical object. It is also possible to perform the effect display suggested by.

Although the coordinate regions Z1 to Z5 are shown in the drawings of FIGS. 122 to 125, they are not actually visible to the player.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, among the various effect members shown in FIG. 121, the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in which the effect operation is performed according to the result of the jackpot determination are also positioned as targets of the operation effect, and are special. When the player operates the coordinate area of the operation receiving unit 3333 that overlaps the movable bodies A1, A2, and C in front view and this is detected as a physical object, the effect operation corresponding to the operation appears. It is controllable. Therefore, the player can operate in an appropriate manner (speed, movement amount) while selecting any one of the plurality of movable bodies.

[Fourth operation control mode for the movable body C]
For example, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 and 126 (a), when the fourth effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the special operation receiving unit Of all the coordinate areas (see FIG. 119) when the 3333 is viewed from the front, the sixth coordinate area Z6 facing a part of the movable body C is set (controlled) so that the effect can be received. At this time, in order for the player to be able to recognize that the sixth coordinate region Z6 is capable of accepting the effect in order to operate the movable body C, a specific display image may appear on the display unit D or the movable body may be displayed. It is desirable to make C emit light (for example, emit light in a blinking mode) or vibrate in the first aspect.

Then, in a predetermined period after the sixth coordinate region Z6 is set so that the effect can be accepted, an operation (for example, a touch operation on the glass plate 192 (strictly speaking, special)) is performed on somewhere in the sixth coordinate region Z6. If a finger or the like is inside the operation receiving unit 3333, and it is not always necessary to touch it)) and this is detected as a physical object, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), it is possible to accept the effect. The setting of the coordinate region is changed from the sixth coordinate region Z6 to a large seventh coordinate region Z7 including at least the movable range CT of the movable body C. Here, the 7th coordinate area Z7 is set as a coordinate area including all of the 6th coordinate area Z6.

That is, in this fourth operation control mode, with the physical object such as a finger fastened in the special operation receiving portion 3333, the physical object is placed at the end of the movable range CT of the movable body C in the seventh coordinate region Z7. When the movable body C is moved to the coordinate position facing the portion, the movable body C can be moved so as to follow the movement of the physical object.

Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 126 (b), a physical object such as a finger is detected in the seventh coordinate region Z7, and the movable body C is in a state of being moved by the movement of the physical object. It is desirable to control so that the object can be recognized. In the example shown in FIG. 126 (b), the movable body C is made to emit light in the second mode (for example, light emission in the constant mode).

However, the player does not know what kind of movable range CT is provided in the movable body C, and after the physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate region Z6, the movable body C is said to be the same. Even if an attempt is made to move the physical object along the movable range CT of the movable body C, there is a concern that this cannot be performed properly. As a result, when a physical object such as a player's finger deviates from the 7th coordinate area Z7 even though he / she intends to operate along the movable range CT of the movable body C (special operation receiving unit). (Including the case where the finger is released from 3333), contrary to the player's intention, the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) is restarted, which may reduce the interest of the game.

In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b), the seventh coordinate region Z7 in the fourth operation control mode is set as the control target. The sixth coordinate region Z6 is set in a range expanded by at least the first distance over all directions in the front view, including the direction opposite to the upper side where the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. It is supposed to be.

According to such a configuration, even if the player does not know what kind of movable range CT is provided in the movable body C, the direction deviated from the movable range CT of the movable body C. When the finger (physical object) is moved to the side, the movable body C does not move even though the production reception is done (despite the fact that the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) cannot be redone). Since the phenomenon occurs, it becomes possible to estimate the movable range CT of the movable body C and perform the operation by confirming such a phenomenon.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the movable range CT set for the movable body C, the movable body C is placed at a plurality of predetermined positions (the first position (shown in FIG. 126 (b)). Position), the second position shown in FIG. 126 (c), the third position shown in FIG. 127 (a), and the fourth position (terminal position) shown in FIG. 127 (b)). Make it possible to execute the control to make it. Then, on this, the seventh coordinate region Z7 is the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 including the portion facing the first position (original position), and the second drive coordinate region including the portion facing the second position. It can be classified into Z7-2, a third drive coordinate area Z7-3 including a part facing the third position, and a fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 including a part facing the fourth position, and driving them. By determining to which of the coordinate regions Z7-1 to Z7-4 the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate region Z6 has moved, the movable body C is moved to the drive coordinate region corresponding to the determination. Control is feasible.

Here, the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 including the portion facing the first position (original position) in the movable range CT is the control target as shown in FIGS. 126 (a) and 126 (b). The movable range CT of the movable body C is set as a range extended by at least the first distance from the sixth coordinate region Z6 with respect to the left, right, and downward directions excluding the upper side where the CT extends.

According to such a configuration, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate region Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and the setting is changed to the seventh coordinate region Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)), the setting is changed. Even if the physical object is moved in a direction different from the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends (movement less than the first distance), the physical object is within a single first driving coordinate region Z7-1. The movable body C does not move and remains in the first position (original position) corresponding to the detected first drive coordinate region Z7-1. Become. That is, in this case, the movable body C does not move even though the operation by the player has been accepted for production (despite the fact that the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) cannot be redone). Therefore, by confirming such a phenomenon, it becomes possible to estimate the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends and perform the operation.

On the other hand, after a physical object such as a finger is detected in the 6th coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and the setting is changed to the 7th coordinate area Z7 (FIG. 126 (b)), the physical object can be moved. When the movable range CT of the body C is moved in the extending direction (movement less than the first distance), the physical object only moves a second distance shorter than the first distance, and FIG. 126 (b) shows. The first drive coordinate region Z7-1 shown in FIG. 126 reaches the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 shown in FIG. 126 (c). That is, in this case, based on the fact that the physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C is in the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 (FIG. 126 (FIG. 126). It will move from b)) to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate region Z7-2.

Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 including the portion facing the second position in the movable range CT also extends in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. The left and right directions orthogonal to the above have a range that extends by the same distance as the first drive coordinate region Z7-1. On the other hand, the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

According to such a configuration, when the physical object detected in the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 is moved in a direction different from any of the vertical directions in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends, the physical object is moved. , It becomes easier to be detected only in a single second drive coordinate area Z7-2, and the movable body C corresponds to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 in which the physical object is detected without moving. Will continue to stay in the second position. That is, in this case, the movable body C does not move even though the operation by the player has been accepted for production (despite the fact that the state shown in FIG. 126 (a) cannot be redone). Therefore, by confirming such a phenomenon, it becomes possible to estimate the direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends and perform the operation.

Moreover, by setting the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 to be expanded to the left and right ranges deviated from the movable range CT of the movable body C in this way, the sixth coordinate region Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)). After the physical object such as a finger is detected in the above, the standard judged to be appropriate as an operation when the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C is relaxed. This makes it possible to alleviate the difficulty of moving a physical object while guessing what kind of movable range CT is provided in the movable body C. You will be able to maintain your interest.

When the movable body C moves to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C is located at the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1. The light may be emitted in a mode different from the light emitting mode (for example, blue) (for example, green). At this time, when a physical object is detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 before the movable body C finishes moving to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (movable). If the light emitting mode is changed (for example, from blue to green) when the body C starts to move toward the second drive coordinate region Z7-2, the operation by the player is properly received. It becomes possible to recognize from an early stage, and it becomes possible to suppress an irritated feeling due to a delay in the behavior of the movable body, which is inevitably generated in response to a quick operation by a player's finger or the like.

Further, when the physical object moves at a speed exceeding the moving speed of the movable body, the movable body cannot be moved so as to follow the physical object, but in this case, at a predetermined moving speed, Control is performed to move to the latest detection position.

Then, the physical object in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 (FIG. 126 (c)) moves upward by the operation of a finger or the like by the player, and the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (FIG. 127)). When detected in a)), the movable body C corresponds to the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) corresponding to the second drive coordinate region Z7-2. It will move to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 126 (c), the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 including the portion facing the third position in the movable range CT is in the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. The left and right directions orthogonal to the above have a range extending over a longer distance than the first driving coordinate region Z7-1 and the second driving coordinate region Z7-2. On the other hand, the vertical direction in the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 where the movable range CT of the movable body C extends is set to be shorter than the length in the horizontal direction.

That is, as described above, when the operation target is a movable body that does not have a technique for instructing the operation direction unlike the display means, this is performed without knowing what kind of movable range is provided. You have to move the physics object while guessing. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, the effect is received up to the left and right ranges deviated from the movable range CT of the movable body C. As described above, by expanding the range, the criteria judged to be appropriate as an operation when moving the movable body C along the movable range CT are relaxed.

However, when a physical object such as a finger is detected in the sixth coordinate region Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) and then the physical object is moved along the movable range CT of the movable body C, the sixth coordinate region Z6 The deviation from the movable range CT tends to increase as the distance from the moving range CT increases. Therefore, in the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 (FIG. 127 (a)), the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 and the second drive coordinate region Z7-1 and the second are in the left and right directions orthogonal to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. By having a range that extends over a longer distance than the drive coordinate area Z7-2, the movement distance of the physical object from the sixth coordinate area Z6 becomes large, and the deviation from the movable range CT gradually increases. However, this can be accepted as an appropriate production operation. This makes it possible to alleviate the difficulty of moving a physical object over a long distance while guessing what kind of movable range CT is provided in the movable body C. As a result, it will be possible to maintain the taste of games. For example, even when the physical object moves upward in a coordinate range that does not face the movable range CT of the movable body C, the movable body C moves upward.

When the movable body C moves to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate region Z7-3, the light emitting mode (for example, blue) or the second position when the movable body C is located at the first position It may be made to emit light in a light emitting mode (for example, red) different from the light emitting mode (for example, green) when it is located in. Further, when a physical object is detected in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 before the movable body C finishes moving to the third position corresponding to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 (movable body C). The light emission mode may be changed (for example, from blue to green) when the object starts to move toward the third drive coordinate region Z7-3.

Then, for the same reason, the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 is further further than the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 in the left and right directions orthogonal to the vertical direction in which the movable range CT of the movable body C extends. It has a range that extends over a long distance. However, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 moves upward by the operation of a finger or the like by the player, and the fourth drive coordinate area Z7- When detected in 4, the movable body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) corresponding to the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4. It is not always moved to the position (FIG. 127 (b)). Not only that, when the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 moves upward and is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 by an operation such as a finger by the player, it is movable. The body C is moved from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) corresponding to the third drive coordinate region Z7-3 to the first position (FIG. 127 (c)) corresponding to the first drive coordinate region Z7-1. It can be moved.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, whether or not the movable body C can be moved to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 based on the result of the jackpot determination. It has been decided, and in the determined decision, such an effect using the movable body C is provided to the player. Then, when the physical object detected in the sixth coordinate region Z6 is detected in the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 by an operation such as a finger by the player, the movable body C is moved to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (FIG. 127). The degree of expectation (specific result is obtained) depending on whether the effect of moving to b)) appears or the effect of returning to the first position (FIG. 127 (c)) without moving to the fourth position appears. It may be a definitive indication of).

In the peripheral control board 1510, the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 moves upward and is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 by an operation such as a finger by the player. In this case, assuming that the conditions in the fourth operation control mode are satisfied, the effect reception for the seventh coordinate area Z7 is terminated. Then, when it is determined that the movable body C can move to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (b), the movable body C is set in an area where the effect can be accepted. Will be controlled to move to the fourth position. On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body C cannot be moved to the fourth position, as shown in FIG. 127 (c), the movable body is not set in the area where the effect can be accepted. Control is performed to move C to the first position.

However, at this time, even if it is determined that the movable body C can move to the fourth position, the movable body C moves once downward (the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127). (B)) Even if it is determined that the movable body C cannot move to the fourth position, the movable body C is once moved upward. It is desirable to show the moving movement (the effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b))) in order to improve the interest of the game.

Then, when the movable body C moves to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4, the light emitting mode (for example, blue) or the second position when the movable body C is located at the first position It is made to emit light in a light emitting mode (for example, rainbow color) different from both the light emitting mode (for example, green) when it is located at the position and the light emitting mode (for example, red) when it is located at the third position. However, the timing may be later than that when the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4, unlike the case of the first to third positions (movable body C). It is desirable to make it appear after the timing when it becomes possible to definitively grasp the movement from the movement of to the fourth position. Similarly, when the movable body C moves to the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1, it is not when a physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. It is desirable to end the light emission after a later timing (a timing at which it becomes possible to definitively grasp that the movable body C does not move to the fourth position).

The peripheral control board 1510 controls to move the movable body C to the first position (original position) after a predetermined time elapses after moving the movable body C to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4. By doing so, the fourth operation control mode is terminated.

By the way, in this fourth operation control mode, the movable body is between the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) and the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) of the movable range CT regardless of the degree of expectation of the jackpot. It is possible to move C freely. For example, when the movable body C is moved to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) and then the physical object is operated to return to the first drive coordinate region Z7-1 side, the peripheral control board 1510 is first driven. Based on the fact that the physical object is detected again in the coordinate area Z7-1, the movable body C is controlled to move from the second position (FIG. 126 (c)) to the first position (FIG. 126 (b)). .. Further, when the movable body C is moved to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) and then the physical object is operated to return to the second drive coordinate region Z7-2 side, the peripheral control board 1510 is driven by the second drive. Based on the fact that the physical object is detected again in the coordinate area Z7-2, the movable body C is controlled to move from the third position (FIG. 127 (a)) to the second position (FIG. 126 (c)). It will be.

According to such a configuration, the player prefers a driving mode in which the movable body C is moved up and down in small steps as an effect of whether or not the movable body C moves to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)). Since it will be possible to make it appear according to the player's taste, or to perform it only for the time that suits the player's taste, it will be possible to control the "pause" until the final result appears in the production, and the game interest will be improved. Will be expected. After the physical object is detected in the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4, the effect reception for the fourth operation control mode is terminated, so that the movable body C cannot be freely manipulated.

It should be noted that the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 is between the time when the sixth coordinate area Z6 (FIG. 126 (a)) is set (controlled) so that the effect can be accepted and the time when a predetermined period elapses (a specific timing arrives). If the physical object is not properly detected in, the effect reception for the 6th coordinate area Z6 or the 7th coordinate area Z7 is terminated. At this time, the behavior of the movable body C that appears when the physical object is properly detected in the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 may be caused, or the movable body C may be generated without causing such behavior. , It may be controlled to be positioned at a plurality of predetermined positions (first position (original position) shown in FIG. 126 (b)).

Further, in the fourth operation control mode according to this explanatory example, regardless of the degree of expectation of the jackpot, the movable range CT is from the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the third position (FIG. 127 (a)). It was possible to move the movable body C freely during the period, but instead, within the range of the first position (FIG. 126 (b)) to the fourth position (FIG. 127 (b)) of the movable range CT. The higher the position, the higher the expectation of the suggested jackpot. That is, in this case, the peripheral control board 1510 selects one of a plurality of effect patterns having different jackpot expectations based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the positions (first position to fourth position) determined by the selected effect pattern. ) Will be controlled so that the movable body C can be operated. At this time, when the physical object moves from the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, or moves from the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 to the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. Occasionally, an effect (behavior of going back and forth) of whether or not the movable body C moves to the next position may appear.

Further, in the first to third operation control modes for the display unit D, when the images S1 to S4 can be received for effect, the coordinate areas Z1 to 4 larger than those of the images S1 to S4 are generated in the front view. On the other hand, in the fourth operation control mode for the movable body C, when the movable body C is made capable of receiving the effect, the sixth coordinate region Z6 smaller than the movable body C is generated in the front view. That is, since the movable body often includes a part having a relatively large amount of movement and a part having a relatively small amount of movement, for example, a part having a relatively small amount of movement is produced. It is desirable to exclude it from the reception target in order to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest. On the other hand, in the display unit, when trying to set the coordinate area according to the size of the image that can accept the effect, it is required to make the image large in order to maintain the operability favorably. Since there is a concern that the balance with the displayed image may become unbalanced, it is desirable to set the size of the image that can be received for the production separately from the setting range of the coordinate area.

However, when the movement of the physical object is detected in the specific coordinate area (here, the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4) and the control is performed to make the effect corresponding to the movement appear. For example, the physical object detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 moves and moves to the fourth drive coordinate area without passing through the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 and the third drive coordinate area Z7-3. It is also assumed that a situation may occur in which the Z7-4 is suddenly detected. Such a situation may occur, for example, when the right hand is set as the detection target in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 and then the left hand is set as the detection target in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4 without moving the right hand. Therefore, it should be determined that the physical object is not moving, and the effect (movement of the movable body C, etc.) corresponding to the movement should not be executed.

In this regard, the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment generates an interrupt timer process every 4 ms while executing the above-mentioned peripheral control unit steady process (every 33.3 ms), and this interrupt is performed. In the timer process, the information from the left outer peripheral light detection unit 35a and the information from the right outer outer light detection unit 35b are acquired and stored as coordinate information indicating the coordinate position where the physical object is detected. Then, in the above-mentioned peripheral control unit stationary processing, a specific coordinate region is analyzed by analyzing a plurality of (8, 9) coordinate information stored every 4 ms after the previous peripheral control unit stationary processing is completed. (For example, it is determined whether or not the physical object is moving properly in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4), and the control data for the actuator is determined according to the result of the determination. To set. Then, in the interruption process every 1 ms, the movable body C is controlled to drive the movable body C based on the control data set in this way, so that the movable body C has the physical object up to the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4. From the time when the movement is in the middle of the movement, the physical object moves so as to follow the movement of the physical object in the sixth coordinate region Z6 in the front view. The coordinate information is stored in the time-series order in which the coordinate positions were acquired.

For example, even if a physical object is detected in the 4th drive coordinate area Z7-4 after the physical object is detected in the 1st drive coordinate area Z7-1, the physical object is detected in the 4th drive coordinate area Z7-4. Coordinate information indicating that the physical object was detected in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2 and the physical object in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3 at the timing before the physical object was detected in If there is no coordinate information indicating that the physical object has been detected, it is determined that the physical object has not moved properly, and the movable body C is controlled not to operate.

That is, in the fourth operation control mode, the movable body C moves from the first position corresponding to the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 to the fourth position corresponding to the fourth drive coordinate area Z7-4. The case where the physical object detected in the first drive coordinate area Z7-1 is in the second drive coordinate area Z7-2, in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, and in the fourth drive coordinate area Z7- It is a case where each is detected in chronological order in 4, for example, if there is no detection in the third drive coordinate area Z7-3, only up to the second position corresponding to the second drive coordinate area Z7-2. The movable body C does not move. As a result, an appropriate effect can be produced only when an appropriate operation is performed on the special operation receiving unit 3333.

Further, in the fourth operation control mode, control is performed to move the movable body C according to whether a physical object is detected in each coordinate region Z7-1 to Z7-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example. In the movable range CT of the movable body C, the movement of the movable body C is controlled according to whether or not the movement of the physical object having the vector component in the direction toward the fourth drive coordinate region Z7-4 is detected. You may do it. That is, in this case, the vector component of the physical object is analyzed based on the coordinate positions stored in the acquired time series order.

Regarding the setting control of the coordinate area used in the fourth operation control mode, the movement detection of the physical object, and the effect control of the movable body C, for example, in the third operation control mode described above, in the display unit. It may be applied to the image S4 of.

Further, in the third operation control mode and the fourth operation control mode, the detection (effect reception) related to the movement of the physical object after the movement of the physical object is started by the special operation receiving unit 3333 has not been completed and is still continued. During this period, it was decided to control the movement of the effect target (display image or movable body) in a manner corresponding to at least the movement direction and the movement amount of the already detected physical object. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to create a directing property as if he / she creates the directing himself / herself, so that the deterioration of the gaming interest can be suppressed.

By the way, in the first operation control mode, the second operation control mode, the third operation control mode, and the fourth operation control mode, the effect reception for the special operation receiving unit 3333 is the coordinates set at that time. Limited to the area. However, the detection of the physical object itself in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is always performed (every 4 ms), and the detected coordinate information is stored in association with the acquired time series. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the position and movement of the physical object based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series in the peripheral control unit steady processing (every 33.3 ms). In this regard, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, any one of a plurality of analysis processes having different analysis contents can be executed, and the special operation receiving unit can be executed. Even if the same movement is detected as the movement of the physical object in the unit 3333, different control can be performed according to the analysis result.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a control example of the detection information analysis process of the physical object executed in the peripheral control unit steady process.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 first determines whether or not it is in the operation effect acceptance period that occurs based on the satisfaction of the specific effect condition according to the result of the jackpot determination (step S3301). As a result, when the operation effect reception period is in effect, as described above, the physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect reception is possible based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series. In addition to analyzing whether or not there is a physical object, if a physical object is detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be accepted, the movement mode and size of the physical object are further analyzed (step S3302). Then, based on the analysis results for such effects, control (resetting and termination) regarding the coordinate area that can accept the effects, control that causes changes in the effects such as display images and movable bodies, and the current state of affairs. Control is performed to maintain the effect state of (step S3303). Even if a physical object is not detected in the coordinate area where the effect can be accepted as a result of the processing in step S3302, the control (resetting, resetting, and control) related to the coordinate area where the effect can be accepted can be performed. (End), control to return the effect target such as the display image or the movable body to the original position (for example, control to move the movable body C to the first position shown in FIG. 126 (a)) may be performed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S3301, when it is determined that the coordinate area in which the effect can be received is not set for the special operation receiving unit 3333, the analysis content for the above effect is determined. The analysis is performed with the contents different from those of the above (step S3312). That is, the special operation receiving unit 3333 according to this embodiment is provided so as to face the entire game board 5. Therefore, in order to improperly facilitate the winning of the game ball, the act of placing a magnet at the coordinate position facing various winning openings in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the wire from the gap between the door frame 3 and the glass plate 192, etc. It can be assumed that an act of invading and destroying a speaker that emits an alarm sound at the time of fraud is performed.

Therefore, in the process of step S3312, it is analyzed whether or not there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is performed in the special operation receiving unit 3333 based on the coordinate information stored in association with the time series. I am trying to do it. For example, it is determined whether or not a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and if a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the movement mode and size of the physical object, etc. Analyze whether is consistent with the movement mode and size that can appear when cheating is being performed. Then, when it is determined that there is a possibility of fraudulent activity as a result of such analysis for fraud countermeasures, an external output indicating that fraudulent activity is being performed is executed, or an alarm sound or alarm light is emitted. Control is performed so that fraud measures such as issuance are taken (step S3313), and if it is not determined that there is a possibility of fraud, control is performed so that such fraud measures are not taken (step S3313). ).

As an analysis procedure (step S3312) for such fraud countermeasures, for example, when a physical object is detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the detected coordinate position is set as an analysis reference position (step S3312). Remember. Next, an analysis coordinate range that includes the analysis reference position and extends by a predetermined distance from the analysis reference position is set, and the detected physical object is within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). ) Stay over (physical objects move very little). As a result, if the detected physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is a possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed within the analysis coordinate range. It is possible to adopt a method of determining that there is. At this time, if the size of the physical object is large enough to prevent fraudulent activity (such as having an extremely thin shape), the fraudulent activity is performed even if such a movement mode is detected. It may not be determined that there is a possibility of being present. As a result, it is possible to prevent erroneous notification when dirt or the like adheres to the glass plate 192.

According to such a configuration, during the operation production reception period, even if all the acts are performed, it is not judged as a fraudulent act, and the analysis is performed only as the production act and the result of the analysis is performed. While the production control is performed according to the above, if it is not during the operation production reception period, all actions are determined as the analysis target of the fraudulent activity, and the control for fraud countermeasures can be performed according to the result of the analysis. become. Therefore, even if one event (for example, an event in which a physical object is detected in a specific coordinate region for 30 seconds) occurs in the special operation receiving unit 3333 and this is detected, depending on the effect situation, It may be regarded as a directing act and cause a specific change in the directing, or it may be regarded as a fraudulent act and may be notified fraudulently. In this way, by using one detection information properly for multiple different purposes (here, the purpose of production and the purpose of countermeasures against fraud) according to the situation of the game or production, more purposes with less detection information. Will be achieved, and an efficient control structure will be realized.

In this explanatory example, when the operation effect reception period that occurs based on the satisfaction of the specific effect condition according to the result of the jackpot determination is not reached, the effect is not changed by the operation on the special operation receiving unit 3333. Although it has been described as a thing, even when it is not during the operation effect reception period (always), the display image is changed by the detection of the physical object in the special operation receiving unit 3333, and the movable body emits light or moves. May be good. However, in this case, when it is not during the operation production acceptance period, all actions are judged as the analysis target of the fraudulent act, and also the analysis target of the production action is determined, and control is performed according to the result of these judgments. Become. Therefore, when one event occurs in the special operation receiving unit 3333, both the effect change and the fraudulent notification can appear.

In addition, while monitoring whether the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a specific effect condition according to the result of the jackpot determination is satisfied. When the operation effect acceptance period occurs based on this, the analysis process for the fraud countermeasure is not terminated, and monitoring is performed to see if the physical object continues to stay within the analysis coordinate range for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It is desirable to continue to perform the operation effect even after the reception period occurs. That is, in this case, in addition to performing the analysis process for the effect and the control according to the result during the operation effect reception period, does the physical object continue to stay within the coordinate range for the analysis for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds)? Will continue to be monitored, and depending on the result of the monitoring, fraudulent notification will be performed.

By the way, when the special operation receiving unit 3333 is in the first effect period in which the effect reception regarding the first effect event (for example, the effect of moving the movable body) is permitted, the operation means different from the special operation receiving unit 3333 (for example, the effect of moving the movable body). For example, the operation button 410) may be controlled to further generate a second effect period in which the effect reception for the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the displayed image) is allowed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 129 (a), at timing t1, the special operation receiving unit 3333 allows an effect reception (panel operation reception) related to the first effect event (for example, an effect of moving a movable body). It is assumed that the first production period has occurred. In this first production period, the movement of the physical object is started in the special operation receiving unit 3333 from the occurrence of the period to the arrival of the timing t2 when the first reception time has elapsed. Control to operate a movable body in a manner corresponding to at least the movement direction and movement amount of a physical object that has already been detected (analyzed) while the detection (analysis) related to movement is not completed and is still continued. (For example, control of moving a specific movable body so as to follow the movement of a physical object) can be executed.

In this regard, when the peripheral control board 1510 determines that a specific effect condition is satisfied based on the result of the jackpot determination, the first effect period is generated and this is continued without being completed. In addition, a second effect (button operation reception) related to a second effect event (for example, an effect of changing a display image) is allowed in an operation means (for example, an operation button 410) different from the special operation receiving unit 3333. It is possible to execute the control to set the effect pattern and the advance notice effect that are set to generate the period.

That is, in this case, if the timing t11 arrives while the first effect period is occurring, the operation button 410 allows the effect reception (button operation reception) for the second effect event (for example, the effect of changing the displayed image). Control is performed to generate the second effect period to be performed. Then, when the operation for the operation button 410 is received between the occurrence of the second production period and the arrival of the timing t12 when the second reception time has elapsed, the second production period ends at that point. Let me. Alternatively, if the operation for the operation button 410 is not accepted before the timing t12 arrives, the second effect period ends when the timing t12 arrives.

According to such a configuration, the production reception for the first production event is allowed in the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333), and the production reception for the second production event. Will occur simultaneously with the second effect period allowed by the second operation portion (here, the operation button 410) (timings t11 to t12 shown in FIG. 129 (a)). Moreover, in the above configuration, the end timings of the first effect period and the second effect period are different, and the second effect period generated later than the first effect period ends earlier. That is, in this case, if the second effect period occurs later than the first effect period, whether the operation is interrupted and the second operation part is operated even if the first operation part is being operated. , The first operation part and the second operation part are required to be operated in different modes at the same time, and it is possible to provide an unprecedentedly interesting production operability and suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. You will be expected.

In order to preferably realize such an effect operability, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the effect reception regarding the second effect event (the effect on the side that is completed in a relatively short time). Regarding the reception), it is produced when it is detected that a predetermined number of times (preferably once) or a predetermined amount of operations (a finite amount of operations) have been performed on the second operation part (here, the operation button 410). Assuming that the execution condition is satisfied, it is desirable to perform control to generate a second effect event (for example, an effect operation that changes the displayed image) without requiring any operation thereafter. For example, when one pressing operation is detected for the operation button 410, the second effect period ends before the timing t12 arrives, and no operation is required thereafter, and the effect changes to the displayed image. This corresponds to the control that causes the above.

On the other hand, regarding the production reception related to the first production event (the production reception on the side that ends after a relatively long period of time), at least until the end of the second production period, and even after that, the second production reception. Regardless of the number of operations or the amount of operations for the first operation part, the effect reception for the first effect event is continued without being terminated, and each time the operation for the first operation part is performed during the continuation, the operation is performed. It is desirable to perform control that reflects changes in the effect according to the operation. For example, the movement of the physical object detected in the special operation receiving unit 3333 is analyzed, and this is continued without terminating the effect reception according to the movement mode (movement amount, etc.) of the physical object, and thus the physical object of the physical object. This includes control that repeatedly executes a process of moving the movable object to the latest analyzed coordinate position each time the movement is analyzed periodically (every 33.3 ms).

According to such a configuration, even if the operation for the first operation part is interrupted when the second effect period occurs after the first effect period, the operation opportunity for the first operation part is lost. Since it is possible to preferably guarantee that the game will not be damaged, the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the interruption can be suppressed. Further, if the operation for the first operation part is interrupted and then the second operation part is operated, the second production period can be ended at a relatively early stage, and after that, the operation for the second operation part can be completed. Since the effect change (second effect event) corresponding to the operation occurs without the need for the operation, the operation on the first operation part can be restarted at a relatively early stage. This will also be suitably secured for the operation opportunity for the operation site of 1.

Then, in this case, in the situation where the operation for the first operation part is restarted, the effect change (second effect event) according to the operation for the second operation part is about to start, and the first operation It becomes possible to generate a special production situation such that the second production event can be enjoyed while the operation opportunity for the part is provided. In this regard, "when an operation is performed on the second operation part, an effect event in which the size of the specific display image changes occurs, and when the operation on the first operation part is performed, the specific display image reaches a specific position. If it is set as the first effect event that it affects (changes) the mode of the effect target of the second effect event, such as "to generate a moving effect event", the above In a special production situation, it becomes possible to enjoy the second production event while changing the mode of the production target of the second production event by operating the first operation part, which is more dynamic and flexible. High operability and directing suitable for this will be realized.

Here, as an example of influencing (changing) the mode of the effect target of the second effect event when the operation on the first operation portion is performed, for example, the effect of the second effect event. To change at least one of the moving amount, moving direction, moving speed, light emitting mode (light color, traveling direction, light amount, etc.), size, or shape of an object (display image, moving body, etc.). However, the present invention is not limited to these, and any one that can have some influence on the effect target (display image, sound effect, movable body, etc.) of the second effect event is sufficient. That is, while the target of the operation effect for the first operation part and the target of the operation effect for the second operation part are the same effect target, the mode of the effect generated in the effect target (for example, the first operation part). In the operation effect for the second operation part, the size is changed, and in the operation effect for the second operation part, the display position is changed). Further, the first effect period does not necessarily have to be set as a finite time, and even after the end of the second effect period, the operation for the first operation part is accepted, and the second effect is performed. Anything that can perform an operation on the first operation site when an event is occurring may be used.

Further, in the period in which both the first production period and the second production period occur at the same time, the second production event is related to the production reception related to the first production event and the production reception related to the second production event. Only for the production reception, the display prompting the operation instruction and the display suggesting the maximum remaining time as the second production period preferably prompt the interruption of the operation for the first operation part. Desirable above.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, in order to preferably realize the relationship of such effects, even if the control is performed to generate the second effect period later than the first effect period, It is controlled so that the first production period is not generated later than the second production period.

Further, in the above explanatory example, both the first production period and the second production period are made to occur at the same time, but when the second production period occurs later than the first production period, the first production period is set. It may be temporarily terminated and the first effect period may be regenerated when the second effect period ends. Even in this case, it is possible to realize the above-mentioned operability and effectability that affect the mode of the effect target of the second effect event when the operation on the first operation portion is performed. It is possible.

Further, in the above-described example, it is determined that the control for reflecting the effect change according to the operation is performed each time the operation for the first operation part is performed, but the operation is performed a plurality of times for the first operation part. When there is, control may be performed to reflect the effect change according to the operation.

Then, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, various operation reception effects such as the following can be realized by appropriately using the control methods according to the above-described explanatory examples.

[Production example 1 using the special operation receiving unit 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 130A, the effect pattern of the effect example 1 (variation pattern of the effect example 1) is set based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect of the effect example 1 is set on the display unit D. It is assumed that the decorative pattern SZ is changed by the pattern. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, the coordinate regions (not shown) facing the movable bodies A1 and A2 of the special operation receiving unit 3333 are set so that the effect can be received within the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 1 appears. Generate an operation effect period to be (controlled).

Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 1, at least the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 1 which is determined to operate the movable body A1 and the effect example 1 which is determined to operate the movable body A2. The production pattern A2 of is included. However, while the movable body A1 is provided so as to be visible from the player side on the front side of the game board 5, the movable body A2 is made difficult to be seen from the player side behind the game board 5. It is provided at a position where it overlaps with the movable body A1 in front view. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, regardless of which of the effect patterns A1 and A2 is performed as the effect pattern of the effect example 1, in the display unit D, the coordinate region facing the movable body A1 (not shown). In, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) should be performed is displayed. Similarly, regardless of which of the effect patterns A1 and A2 is performed, the movable body A1 is made to emit light to suggest that the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1 should be operated. ing.

Then, when such a slide operation is properly accepted while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 is made to follow the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 130 (b). The movable body A1 is controlled to start moving to the left. Even in this situation, the display unit D suggests that the slide operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state.

Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific position while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 is movable in a form of following the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 131 (a). After moving the body A1 to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which the effect reception for the movable body A1 is allowed. In this situation, the display unit D displays a display suggesting that the movable body A1 has succeeded in moving to a specific effect position and the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is high, and the movable body A1 emits light. It is desirable that an effect such as a change in the mode or shape of the above is performed.

However, even when the slide operation by the player reaches a specific position while the effect pattern A1 is being performed, if the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 may show FIG. 131 ( As shown in b), the operation effect period in which the effect reception for the movable body A1 is permitted is terminated so that the follow-up movement of the movable body A1 with respect to the slide operation of the player is interrupted, and the movable body A1 is moved to the original position. Controls the movement so that it returns. Then, in this case, the display unit D displays a display suggesting that the movable body A1 fails to move to a specific effect position and the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is low, and the movable body A1 ends the light emission. It will be controlled so that it is done.

On the other hand, when the player's slide operation is properly accepted while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the slide operation as shown in FIG. 130 (c). The movable body A2 is controlled to start moving to the left in a manner that follows it. Even in this situation, the display unit D suggests that the slide operation should be performed in the movable direction (here, the left direction) of the movable body A1 in the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1. Is displayed, and the movable body A1 is in a light emitting state. However, in addition to this, the movable body A2 is also controlled so as to be in a light emitting state.

Then, when such a slide operation reaches a specific position while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 is movable in a form of following the slide operation by the player as shown in FIG. 131 (c). After moving the body A2 to a specific effect position, control is performed so as to end the operation effect period in which the effect reception for the movable body A2 is allowed. In this situation, the display unit D displays a display suggesting that the movable body A2 has succeeded in moving to a specific effect position and the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is extremely high, and the movable body A2 has a display. It is desirable that the effect such as changing the mode and shape of light emission is performed.

However, even when the slide operation by the player reaches a specific position while the effect pattern A2 is being performed, if the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied, the peripheral control board 1510 may show FIG. 131 ( As shown in b), the operation effect period in which the effect reception for the movable body A2 is permitted is terminated so that the follow-up movement of the movable body A2 with respect to the slide operation of the player is interrupted, and the movable body A2 is moved to the original position. Controls the movement so that it returns. In this case, the display unit D displays a display suggesting that the movable body A2 fails to move to a specific effect position and the degree of expectation for the jackpot determination is low, and the movable bodies A1 and A2 emit light. Will be controlled to be terminated.

According to such an effect example 1, when the slide operation by the player is performed while the situation shown in FIG. 130 (a), which makes the movable body A1 appear to operate, appears, the movable body A1 Instead, the movable body A2, which was difficult to see, will move in the form of sudden appearance, so the decline in the game interest will be suppressed by the surprising movable production as if the production target was replaced. Will be able to be.

Further, although the illustration is omitted, according to such an effect example 1, the player can operate the slide within the period from the appearance of the situation of FIG. 130 (a) to the appearance of the situation of FIG. 130 (c). Although the movable body A2 has started moving, it is still in a position that is difficult to see (behind the game board 5), and from the player's side, it seems that no change in production has occurred. You will be able to appear. That is, in this case, the movable body A2 moves to the front side of the display unit D after causing disappointment that no change in the effect has occurred even though the slide operation by the player is properly performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to more preferably suppress the deterioration of the game interest by such a surprisingly movable production.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example 1, as shown in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (c), the movable bodies A1 and A2 are advanced to a position where they overlap with the decorative symbol SZ in the fluctuating state. , It becomes possible to encourage the player to shift the gaze from the decorative symbol SZ to the movable bodies A1 and A2, and it becomes possible to make it difficult to overlook which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the mode of overlapping with the decorative symbol SZ differs depending on whether the movable body A1 appears or the movable body A2 appears, so that the decorative symbol SZ is changed to the movable bodies A1 and A2. Even if the player fails to shift the gaze, it is possible to predict which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared by checking the size and position of the part where the decorative symbol SZ is difficult to see. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when it is overlooked which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 has appeared.

In the above-mentioned production example 1, the movable body A1 is arranged on the front side of the game board 5, and the movable body A2 is arranged on the back side of the game board 5, but the front side of the game board 5. Both the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be arranged in the above, or both the movable bodies A1 and A2 may be arranged behind the game board 5.

Here, when both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are arranged on the front side of the game board 5, the movable body A1 is arranged on the front side of the movable body A2 so as to make it difficult to see the movable body A2. It is desirable to maintain the difficulty in visually recognizing the movable body A2 by keeping the movable base portion (the portion that does not move) and the like continue to be located on the front side of the movable body A2 even when the A1 moves.

On the other hand, when both the movable bodies A1 and A2 are arranged behind the game board 5, it is possible to give pleasure as to which of the movable bodies A1 and A2 appears by the operation by the player. Will be. In this case, the portion of the game board 5 located on the front side of the movable bodies A1 and A2 is made to emit light to encourage the operation to the coordinate region (special operation receiving portion 3333) facing the portion. Is desirable.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example 1, the movable directions (left direction) of the movable bodies A1 and A2 are set to be the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable direction of the movable body A1 is set to the left and the movable direction of the movable body A2 is set to the upward direction, the game is played in the left direction prompted by the operation instruction (suggested image HG1) suggesting the left direction. Despite the slide operation performed by the person, the movable body A2 moves upward, and such a surprise-like movable effect can more preferably suppress the deterioration of the game interest. Alternatively, even though the operation on the movable body A1 whose movable direction is set to the left is prompted, the player can slide the movable body upward by displaying an operation instruction suggesting the upward direction. When this is done, the movable body A2, which has been difficult to see, may move upward and appear.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example 1, when the movable body A2 appears by the operation by the player, the movable body A1 is prevented from operating, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the movable body A2 is moved by the operation by the player, the movable body A1 is also moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, even if the movable bodies A1 and A2 are moved by a predetermined distance and then only the movable body A1 is moved so as to return to the original position, the deterioration of the game interest is more preferably suppressed by the movable effect with a surprise property. You will be able to get it. Alternatively, when moving the movable body A2 by the operation by the player, first, only the movable body A1 is moved following the slide operation by the player. Then, even if the movable body A1 is moved by a predetermined distance and then the movable body A1 is moved so as to return to the original position and the movable body A2 is moved following the slide operation by the player, it is a surprise property. A certain movable effect makes it possible to more preferably suppress the deterioration of the game interest. However, when the operation target by the player is exchanged between the movable bodies A1 and A2, the operation by the player is allowed to stay at a predetermined place for a predetermined time (the time required for the movable body A2 to move to the predetermined place). It is desirable to perform the production.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example 1, in the situation where the movable body A2 is moving (see FIGS. 130 (c) and 131 (c)), the movable body A1 and the movable body A2 are made to emit light, respectively. In this situation, the movable body A1 does not necessarily have to emit light. That is, in this case, the timing at which the physical object is detected in the coordinate region (special operation receiving unit 3333) facing the movable body A1 or the movable body A2 starts advancing to the front side of the display unit D and returns to the original position. Control is performed to end the light emission of the movable body A1 at a timing (timing when the movable body A1 is moved to a predetermined position) which is easier to see than a certain time.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example 1 and its alternative examples, the movable body A2 is arranged on the rear side where the movable body A2 overlaps with the movable body A1 in the front view, but the board surface light emitting portion E is arranged instead of the movable body A1. You may do so. That is, in this case, when the movable body A2 is moved (in the situation shown in FIG. 130 (a)), the board surface light emitting portion E located on the front side of the movable body A2 is made to emit light, so that the movable body is in a state of being difficult to see. The operation to the coordinate area (special operation receiving unit 3333) facing A2 is urged.

Further, in the display unit D according to the above-mentioned production example 1, in each situation shown in FIGS. 130A to 130C, one production is performed in the suggested image HG1 regardless of the location of the movable bodies A1 and A2. The situation (the initial situation where none of the movable bodies are operating) is shown. However, instead of this, the display mode of the suggested image HG1 is changed according to the location of the movable bodies A1 and A2, and the moving state of the movable bodies A1 and A2 can be recognized only by looking at the suggested image HG1. It may be.

[Production example 2 using the special operation receiving unit 3333]
For example, as shown in FIG. 132A, the effect pattern of the effect example 2 (variation pattern of the effect example 2) is set based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect of the effect example 2 is set on the display unit D. It is assumed that the decorative pattern SZ is changed by the pattern. Then, in the peripheral control board 1510, the coordinate region (not shown) of the special operation receiving unit 3333 facing the movable body A1 is set (control) so that the effect can be received within the period in which the effect pattern of the effect example 2 appears. ) Generate an operation effect period.

Here, as the effect pattern of the effect example 2, at least the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2 which is defined to operate the movable body A1 and the movable body A1 and the movable body B are defined to operate, respectively. The effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 is included. Then, in the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2, the same as in the case of the effect pattern A1 of the above-mentioned effect example 1, FIGS. 130 (a) and (b), and FIGS. 131 (a) (or FIG. 131 (b)). The movable body A1 is moved by providing an opportunity to receive an operation effect on the movable body A1 in the embodiment shown in the above. On the other hand, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, the opportunity to accept the operation effect for the movable body A1 is provided, and then the opportunity to accept the operation effect for the movable body B is provided. Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510, regardless of which of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed as the effect pattern of the effect example 2, in the display unit D, the coordinate region facing the movable body A1 (not shown). In, the suggestion image HG1 suggesting that the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) should be performed is displayed. Similarly, regardless of which of the effect patterns A1 and AB is performed, the movable body A1 is made to emit light to suggest that the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1 should be operated. ing.

However, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, when an operation on the coordinate area (not shown) facing the movable body A1 is accepted (when a physical object is detected), a specific effect event is given to the movable body A1. First, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), the suggestion image HG1 in the display unit D is hidden, and control is performed to interrupt the effect reception in the coordinate region facing the movable body A1. At this time, it is desirable that the decorative symbol SZ in the display unit D be displayed in a mode that is visible but difficult to see (such as translucent display), and the light emitting state of the movable body A1 is also interrupted. It is desirable to let them do it.

Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (c), in the display unit D in which the suggestion image HG1 is hidden in this way, an operation on an operation means (operation button 410, etc.) different from the special operation receiving unit 3333 is performed. The operation instruction image SG to be prompted is displayed, and the operation acceptance period of the specific effect using the other operation means (operation button 410, etc.) is generated. Then, when an operation for another operation means (operation button 410 or the like) is accepted during the operation acceptance period of the specific effect, the operation instruction image SG in the display unit D is hidden as shown in FIG. 133 (a). At the same time, the movable body B, which is different from the movable body A1 initially shown as the production target, is controlled to operate. In this production example 2, the movable body B is advanced to the front side of the display unit D by a predetermined time.

Then, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, after the movable body B operates in this way, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the display unit D is movable in the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1. A suggestion image HG2 suggesting that the operation of sliding the body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) should be performed is displayed, and a coordinate region of the special operation receiving portion 3333 facing the movable body A1 (not shown). Is set (controlled) so that the effect can be accepted. The operation effect period is generated again. At this time, the opportunity for the effect operation of the movable body A1 is given again, but after the situation shown in FIG. 132A appears, the movable body B does not operate and the movable body A1 operates. It is desirable to set the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2 in which the movable body A1 operates after the movable body B operates, to have a higher degree of expectation than the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2. In this case, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), the display mode of the suggested image HG2 is different from that of the suggested image HG1 shown in FIG. 132 (a), suggesting that the effect pattern has a high degree of expectation. It is desirable to make the light emitting mode of the movable body A1 different from the light emitting mode of the movable body A1 shown in FIG. 132 (a) to suggest that the effect pattern has a high degree of expectation. ..

In the production pattern AB of the production example 2, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, as in the case of the production pattern A1 of the production example 1 described above, FIGS. 130 (b) and 131 (b) a) (or, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 131 (b)), the movable body A1 is provided with an opportunity to receive an operation effect on the movable body A1 so that the movable body A1 moves. Further, after the situation shown in FIG. 133 (b) appears, as in the case of the effect pattern A2 of the above-mentioned effect example 1, FIGS. 130 (c) and 131 (c) (or FIG. 131 (b)). ) May be provided as an opportunity to receive an operation effect on the movable body A1 so that an effect pattern in which the movable body A1 moves appears.

In particular, in the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, as shown in FIG. 133 (b), a suggestion image HG2 suggesting that the effect pattern has a high degree of expectation is made to appear, and the light emitting mode of the movable body A1 is displayed. Since they are made different, this is also a movable effect that appears when the operation of sliding the movable body A1 in the movable direction (here, the left direction) is performed in the coordinate region (not shown) facing the movable body A1. It is desirable to perform the above in a special execution mode different from that of the effect pattern A1 of the effect example 2.

According to the effect pattern AB of the effect example 2, the first effect opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is first given (in this situation, the second operation). Despite the fact that the second effect opportunity is not given to the part (for example, the operation button 410), when the first operation part is operated and the effect is received, the first operation part is different from the first operation part. A second effect opportunity is given to the second operation portion (for example, the operation button 410), and the first effect opportunity is temporarily lost. Then, when the second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) is operated and the production is received in the situation where the first production opportunity is once lost, the second production event (for example, the production reception) corresponding to the production reception is received. Here, the operation of the movable body B) will occur. That is, in this case, when the effect reception for the first operation part is made, it becomes possible to generate the effectability as to whether or not the second effect opportunity is given to the second operation part. Innovative operability using the operation part of is provided.

In order to preferably realize such a novel operability using a plurality of operation parts, it is desirable that the second operation part is always provided in a manner that is physically difficult to operate. Then, when it is determined that the second production opportunity is given to the second operation part, it is difficult to physically operate the second operation part based on the fact that the production reception for the first operation part has been made. It is desirable to control the mode from the mode to the mode that is easy to operate, and to allow the effect reception for the second operation portion when the mode is in the mode that is easy to operate. Here, the "physically difficult to operate mode" means, for example, a mode in which the second operation portion (for example, the operation button 410) is covered with another member to make the operation difficult, or a second operation portion. Is a mode in which is positioned in the state when is already operated, and "controlling from a mode that is physically difficult to operate to a mode that is easy to operate" means, for example, the second operation part itself. Control to operate to a position not covered by other members, control to operate other members covering the second operation part to a position not to cover the second operation part, operation of the second operation part It can be realized as a control to operate to a position different from the state when it is done. Further, in this case, the trigger for controlling the second operation part from the mode in which it is physically difficult to operate to the mode in which it is easy to operate does not necessarily have to be when the effect reception for the first operation part is made, and it is specified. It may be when a specific time has passed since the effect pattern of is executed. In any case, in order to give the second production opportunity to the second operation part when the effect reception for the first operation part is made, the second operation part itself or a member provided in the vicinity thereof is operated. It is desirable to do so in order to suggest that the operation target has been changed from the first operation site to the second operation site and that the change raises the degree of expectation.

Further, in the effect pattern AB of the above-mentioned effect example 2, after giving the first effect opportunity using the first operation part (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333), the first operation part is operated and this is performed. It was decided to give a second production opportunity based on the fact that the production was accepted. However, after the first production opportunity using the first operation site (here, the special operation receiving unit 3333) is given (or after the suggested image HG1 is displayed), the first operation portion has elapsed. A second effect opportunity may be given to a second operation part (for example, the operation button 410) different from the operation part of the above, and the first effect opportunity may be temporarily lost. In this case, the first effect event is generated by the operation on the first operation part until the predetermined time elapses, but the first effect event ends based on the elapse of the predetermined time. (If the production target is a movable body, the movable body is controlled to return to the original position). Alternatively, the first effect opportunity using the first operation part is not given, and a second operation part (for example, different from the first operation part) different from the first operation part is given after a lapse of a predetermined time after displaying the suggested image HG1. A second production opportunity may be given to the operation button 410). That is, in this case, even though the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the effect reception is not performed by the operation on the first operation portion.

Further, in the effect pattern AB of the above-mentioned effect example 2, it was decided to hide the suggestion image HG1 after displaying the suggestion image HG1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, FIG. 132 with the suggestion image HG1 displayed. The operation instruction image SG shown in may be further displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to describe how the suggestion image HG1 changes to the suggestion image HG2 having a higher degree of expectation, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. However, at this time, when the suggestion image HG1 is displayed in a state where the effect reception for the first operation part is not performed, the display mode of the suggestion image HG1 is changed (for example, from color display to black and white display, translucent, etc. It is desirable to make the display mode relatively difficult to see. Furthermore, a timekeeping image showing the remaining display time of the suggested image HG1 (the remaining time for which the effect is received for the first operation part) is also displayed, and the effect is not received for the first operation part. By showing the state in which the remaining time does not decrease in the state by the timed image, it is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining period in which the effect reception for the first operation portion is performed does not decrease. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game using another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) with peace of mind. In this case, it seems that the remaining time for which the effect reception is performed has decreased by a predetermined amount even though the effect reception for the first operation part is not performed, and then the remaining time does not decrease. Is shown by the above-mentioned timed image, it becomes possible to provide a more interesting effect.

Further, in the effect pattern AB of the above-mentioned effect example 2, after the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, the effect reception for the first operation part is not performed based on the effect reception for the first operation part. A period is generated, and the display mode of the suggested image HG1 is changed (for example, from a color display to a black-and-white display or a display mode that is relatively difficult to see such as translucent) in the predetermined period, and timekeeping is performed. The image may show how the remaining time does not decrease (for example, the display meter does not decrease and becomes stationary). At this time, it is desirable to change the display mode of the image different from the suggested image HG1 on the display unit D. In this case, when the predetermined period ends after the second production opportunity is provided, the display mode of the suggested image HG1 is changed to a mode with a higher degree of expectation, and the production reception for the first operation portion is performed again. You may do so.

Further, in the effect pattern of the above-mentioned effect example 2, after displaying the suggestion image HG1 for prompting the operation targeting the movable body A1 (or in the state where the suggestion image HG1 is displayed), the movable body B is operated. However, the movable body B does not have to be operated by the operation by the player. For example, based on the fact that a special result is obtained in the determination of whether a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. It may be a non-operable movable body that operates. When such a non-operable movable body is adopted, even if it is decided to operate (a special result is obtained), the operation instruction for the non-operable movable body is not given and the operation is accepted. Nor. In this regard, if it is possible to appropriately determine whether or not the predetermined operating conditions for the non-operated movable body are satisfied regardless of the execution status of the effect pattern, other effect targets (movable body and display image). Since it becomes possible to secretly make a decision to operate the non-operated movable body while the suggestion image HG1 is displayed, an operation instruction regarding another production target appears and the operation is accepted. While it is possible, it is possible to have the possibility that a non-operated movable body that has nothing to do with this will suddenly move, or that the special movable body and other production targets will move at the same time. Therefore, it can be expected that the game entertainment will be improved by such an unexpected operation production.

Further, when the suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear in the display unit D, the target operation part (a specific coordinate area in the special operation receiving unit 3333, the operation button 410, etc.) ) Only can be received, but also in the coordinate area (special operation receiving unit 3333) facing the portion where the suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image SG appear. May be good. According to such a configuration, even if the operation portion cannot be recognized, only the specific images (suggestion images HG1 and HG2 and the operation instruction image S) appearing in the display unit D are operated. It becomes possible to generate the same effect, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In the above embodiment, at least of the physical objects that have already been detected while the special operation receiving unit 3333 has started the movement of the physical object and the detection related to the movement has not been completed and is still continued. It is possible to execute control to move the effect target (display image or movable body) in a mode according to the movement direction and the movement amount, but when controlling the movement of the effect target, the movement speed of the physical object is detected. Then, the high or low of the moving speed may be reflected in the movement of the movable body.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above embodiment, in realizing the operation effect using the special operation receiving unit 3333, the effect is produced in the coordinate region of the special operation receiving unit 3333 facing the operation target portion. Although the reception is made, it does not necessarily have to be the coordinate area facing the part to be operated, and the production reception may be made in a specific coordinate area of the special operation receiving unit 3333. good.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above embodiment, the peripheral external light detection unit 35 detects a change in light caused by an operation (physical object such as a finger) on the special operation receiving unit 3333, and the peripheral control board 1510 detects this. By analyzing, it was decided to determine the operation mode (movement information of a physical object such as a finger) with respect to the special operation receiving unit 3333. The operation mode for the unit 3333 (in this case, the mode of the touch operation for the glass plate 192) may be determined. However, in this case, there is a concern that the visibility of the game area and the display area through the glass plate 192 may be adversely affected.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program has been shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first has the above-mentioned first as shown in FIG. 134. On condition that the detection signal by the start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (YES in step S5231), a random number for determining the first big hit is acquired from the random number counter. The first start port passing process such as storing this in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol (YES in step S5233). A second start port passage process such as acquiring a second big hit determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140,
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variation jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 The opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times after the game is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005. Control to 8R jackpot game state,
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "16R probability variation jackpot", the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated 16 times to control the 16R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "8R probability variation jackpot B", the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times to control the 8R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). It is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes after the game is repeated twice.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, right-handed is more advantageous to the player than left-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, and right-handed is more advantageous than right-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As mentioned above, left-handed hitting is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of a lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, a jackpot game that is open for a long time of up to 8 rounds. Only the state (generally 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if a big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, there is a probability of approximately 50% (allocation rate of winning species). ), The expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained when the big hit is won, such as the 16-round long-open jackpot game state (generally 2000 game balls can be obtained) is executed. Therefore, when the transition to the right-handed state is controlled, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than when the player is in the left-handed state.

In the big hit control process, in starting such open control of the big winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing such opening control of the jackpot 2005, as shown in FIG. 140, there is a high probability depending on the winning species of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game. Executes each set process of flag and time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating that it is in a high-probability state, and is used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 139, which will be described later. Probability change big hit, 8R Probability change big hit B) is set when the game state is finished, and when the next big hit is made, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 144 described later or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) Will be reset with.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 140, the time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state. The jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 16R probability variation jackpot B, 8R probability variation jackpot B) is set at the end of the game state, and when the next jackpot is reached, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. Alternatively, it is reset by the second special symbol stop process (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the low probability time saving state occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 144 described later is performed. Alternatively, it is reset by the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

The fluctuation count counter is a counter that indicates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the fluctuation count counter is reset, and is used in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (second fluctuation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 142, which will be described later. It is a thing, and it is updated (for example, count-up) when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B). It is reset when starting the jackpot game state based on.

If the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set as the process of step S5236. To determine. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the large winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving are performed. Each set process such as the number of times counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140 (a), the small hit is not won in the big hit determination.

If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is On condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, when the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of random numbers for the second jackpot determination stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol A second special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the second special symbol that is in the pending state is not lost (unless the value of the second special reserved number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of the holding status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second big hit judgment random number will be performed continuously without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player only maintains the driving of the game ball (right-handed) to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state). Only the lottery (judgment processing) for the two big hit judgment random numbers can be continuously performed without interruption.

In addition, the special symbol game (symbol variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol). Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5232).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5231 that the first start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. 135. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5421, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern). ) Is obtained from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" which is (upper limit value) (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to bring the state to the above, the following steps S5243 to S5245 will be performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the first special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the process ends (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information on winning for pre-reading determination, symbol type for pre-reading determination). Information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information on a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S5233, the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 136. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, for second jackpot symbol). Random numbers, random numbers for the second variation display pattern) are acquired from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not the value is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to achieve the above state, the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the second special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process ends (step S5255). As will be described later, the pre-reading effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information on a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command. Further, in the process of step S5255, a process (FIG. 176) for realizing the transformational effect described later can be performed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

When the number of holdings of the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of holdings of the first special symbol in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (First hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is instructed in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). The command to be executed (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since it is a program module of the above and only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The big hit judgment random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read big hit judgment random number, lottery processing for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. First special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the process of determining the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the determination process of the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )

3. 3. It is executed corresponding to the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the special symbol on the effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed.

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.

5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the determination processing regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 138, first steps S5301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is a variation display of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S5302. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the random number for the first jackpot determination, the random number for the first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot symbol, the random number for the first variation display pattern). The random number stored in the area is read from the RAM of the same main control. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special is stored in each storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM. First-in first-out (First-In) random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbol is stopped (for example, random numbers for first jackpot determination, first reach determination random numbers, first jackpot symbol random numbers, first random number for variable display pattern) The shift operation is performed in the mode of First-Out).

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and a start winning prize for the first start port 2002. Random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). .. Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and responds to the occurrence of a start winning prize in the second start port 2004. The random numbers extracted by the above are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

After that, as the process of step S5305, the jackpot determination process, which is the determination process for the winning of the jackpot, is performed based on the read out random number for determining the first jackpot. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), this process ends.

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a high probability time shown in FIG. 140 (A) if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5311). If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S5312) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) is selected (step S5313) and selected. The jackpot determination table is compared with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 140 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the game state is low probability for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). The jackpot judgment table at the time of low probability used in the case of (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) and the high used when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state) It is equipped with a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability. Then, in the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332. The first big hit judgment random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so as to match the deviation judgment value indicating that the first big hit judgment random number of the type is the above loss (big hit probability at low probability; generally "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big hit determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. In the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability referred to, 204 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers match the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit was won, and 65332 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned loss. The above-mentioned second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability; approximately 1/321).

Further, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value, and 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are used. The above-mentioned first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the outlier determination value (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, which is referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. , 2040 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63496 types of second jackpot judgment random numbers match the deviation judgment value indicating that the above is lost. The above-mentioned second big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). The jackpot judgment value (of the jackpot judgment value) set in the jackpot judgment table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot judgment table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot judgment random number. The number of jackpots may be the same and the jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the big hit judgment table at the low probability and the big hit judgment table at the high probability may be different (both may be different). ..

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5315). ), Set the jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot (step S5316), and end the jackpot determination process.

Further, when it is determined in step S5315 that the jackpot has been lost, the read jackpot determination random number matches the small hit determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won based on the selected jackpot determination table. Whether or not it is determined (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), in this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (a loss determination is made).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5317 that the result is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. The reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state and when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. It is provided with a reach determination table in a high-probability time-saving state used in the case of, and a reach determination table in a low-probability state used when the gaming state is in a low-probability state (low-probability non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. The above-mentioned reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with. However, in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game in the time saving state, it matches the reach judgment value indicating that all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers do not reach. This may be done so that it does not match the reach determination value indicating reach.

Further, in the reach judgment table in the low probability state, five types of reach judgment random numbers including the same reach judgment random number as the reach judgment random number set in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values shown and to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the low probability state than in the high probability time saving state, and can be obtained with a predetermined probability.

Further, in the reach determination table in the high-probability non-time-saving state, five types of reach determination including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state and the low-probability state. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the random number for reach is reached and the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers are not reachable. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating reach is the same as in the low-probability non-time-saving state.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319) (YES in step S5120). , The reach flag indicating that the fluctuation becomes reach is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 141, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 140 (B) and reads out the random number for the first jackpot symbol in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. And the selected symbol determination table are compared with each other to determine the jackpot symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 140 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers) are displayed for the judgment result (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). Random numbers for the first big hit symbol) are stored in the form of being associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 140 (C), in the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side, a random number for the second jackpot symbol (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) is displayed. Here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second big hit symbol) are stored in a form associated with each other.

In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the type of the big hit is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big hit symbol. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol are set to be different. .. More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probabilistic jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high-probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot symbol. The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number for the second big hit symbol is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number. ing.

The following is a brief summary of the specific game and production contents for each type of jackpot.

1. 1. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the jackpot 2103 (easy), and after this 8R jackpot game state. Controls the high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state. 8R probability variation jackpot A controlled by the effect mode indicated in the effect display device 1600 that is in a relatively advantageous state.

2. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the jackpot 2103 (easy), and after this 8R jackpot game state. Controls the variable display of the special symbol to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or wins a jackpot within the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state An 8R normal jackpot that performs a battle effect in which a specific character is defeated (battle defeat effect) and is controlled by the effect mode indicated by the effect display device 1600 that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state in a low probability time saving state.

3. 3. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 16R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the jackpot 2103 (easy), and after this 16R jackpot game state. Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also directs whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 16R big hit game state (success production). ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the time was controlled to the high probability time saving state, it is controlled to the effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 that the state is relatively advantageous. 16R probability change jackpot

4. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the above count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter the jackpot 2103 (easy), and after this 8R jackpot game state. Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and also directs whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state (failure effect). ) Is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the time was controlled to the high probability time saving state, it is controlled to the effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 that the state is relatively advantageous. 8R probability change jackpot B

5. After the big hit symbol combination appears in the effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the big winning opening 2103, the count sensor 4005 By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected in, the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 2R jackpot game state, it is special. While controlling the variable display of the symbol to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or winning a jackpot within the period until it is digested 100 times), a specific character is in the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state. Performs a battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which the player is defeated, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the 2R normal jackpot is controlled by the effect mode in which the effect display device 1600 indicates that the state is relatively disadvantageous.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and the jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball does not win a prize at the first starting port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 will occur, and unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 Only the variation display is executed, and the jackpot related to the second special symbol (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) is generated.

In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening / closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

If the 8R probability variation jackpot A is determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 8R probability variation jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot symbol is selected as the jackpot symbol. decide. Although not shown, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot symbol. If the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Further, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol (the mode when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped) is set. After determining the specific symbol stop mode) (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines to be a lost symbol as an mode when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (step S5336), and then proceeds to step S5337. do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is subjected to any one of the above lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach loss, and loss) as the process of step S5337. (It may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is set to the determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results so that the instruction (may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

The peripheral control MPU1511a displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → Stop and display in the order of the middle decorative symbols (Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time). For example, the peripheral control MPU1511a is determined to be a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when a type other than the 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols) is determined. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the missed symbol with reach (the combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different intermediate decorative symbols; reach loss. (Symbol), and if the outlier is specified, it is decided to be the outlier symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when a hit is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU1511a causes the hit effect display (special display mode) to appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game. Is designed to appear during the jackpot game after the start of.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 142. If this is done (step S5341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and a small hit flag is selected. If is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table at the time of small hit (not shown) is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (step S5345). When (not shown) is selected (step S5346) and none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag is set, that is, when the normal loss (the loss without performing the reach effect) occurs, the time of the loss occurs. (Not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283) (step S5355), this process ends. As a result, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 1403 for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

The variation pattern table of this example is used as a random number for jackpot determination (random number for first jackpot determination, random number for second jackpot determination) and a random number for jackpot symbol (random number for first jackpot symbol, random number for second jackpot symbol). Multiple types are provided for each judgment result based on the results. Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each random number for the first variable display pattern. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a reads out the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal processing step S5302 from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number. By comparing with the random numbers for the variable display pattern and acquiring the variable time information associated with the random numbers for the variable display pattern read out from this table, the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) Determine the fluctuation pattern of. As a result, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since the small hit is not won, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small hit is not won, but the small hit may be won.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for the variation display pattern. Has been done. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59. Random numbers for various types of variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with low jackpot expectation is executed, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns have high jackpot expectations. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

The super reach effect (SP effect) has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a big hit game state, the player for the big hit game state when the super reach effect is executed. Expectations are rising. That is, such a super reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a big hit, and the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state even if a loss is finally displayed. Will be able to increase. However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectation for the jackpot game state, a high-expected notice production, which is a lottery separate from the fluctuation pattern, appears during the period when the super reach production is being executed. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the random number for determining the first jackpot and the random number for the first jackpot symbol and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state In common with, a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the second big hit judgment random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the time saving state is 0.1 seconds to A fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set, and a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time saving state and the non-time saving state, and the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 2004 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state. At the same time as urging, the player has secured time for winning the game ball to the second starting port 2004.

In addition, when 0.1 seconds is selected from the fluctuation time when the second special symbol is lost, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) is selected. It will be possible to prevent the waste from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

That is, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the region directly above the gate portion 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area into the gate portion 2003 in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%). The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be continuously accepted (a time saving state in which almost all the game balls driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be accepted by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of around "about 1/32". It will be possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol coming off based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 shows the fluctuation time of the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) extremely. It is said that it can be set to a short 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation is completed in a time (0.1 seconds) less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, and thus 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals are accepted into the second starting port 2004 one after another, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being ejected without being subjected to the lottery process. ..

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 143, first steps S5371. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

If the fluctuation time timer is not 0 even though the fluctuation timer is subtracted by 1 (step S5371), until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixedly stopped). Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the process of steps S5371 and S5372 is performed.

FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 144, first steps S5381. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot gaming state (step S5387). The waiting time until the start of the big hit game state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the high probability flag is reset. When the time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation count counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step). S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot executing flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the jackpot game in the above-mentioned jackpot control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R probability variation jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation) according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Set the jackpot command, 8R probability variation jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game state (battle effect or additional challenge effect) according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), it is first determined whether or not the time is shortened with a low probability (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (100 times in this case) (here). Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition for ending the low-probability time-saving state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state) (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is started. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process shifts the first special symbol process flag to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. At the time of updating to (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240b) described above determines that the small hit execution flag is set. The small hit game state will be executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the game state is not changed when the small hit game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is regarded as a loss, and the first special symbol process without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit. This process ends when the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S5394). That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit executing flag and the small hit executing flag are not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is played according to the hold status. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) will be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S5401 that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is on and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 145, the main As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate passage process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S5403) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S5405) that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped.
4. The variation display of the normal symbol so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop processing (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit a normal figure", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S5407)

The initial value of the normal symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S5402).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state in the process of step S5401 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 146, the above As the process of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of held normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to newly put the variable display control of the normal symbols into the held state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S5413, the ordinary random number and the normal figure variation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5421, as shown in FIG. 147. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S5422, the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers and ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the variation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control FIFO 1310a is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal map) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 are sequentially extracted from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown) at the time saving time (not shown). In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), a non-time saving hit determination table (not shown) is selected (not shown). Step S5427), the selected normal symbol hit determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5428).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU1310a, and is used when the game state is a time saving time (high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a non-time-saving normal map hit determination table used in the case of time (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random number was won, and the normal figure is matched. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the deviation determination value in the normal figure indicating that the deviation is out. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the game ball is always won by hitting the normal drawing, the movable piece is opened, and the game ball is opened to the second starting port 2004. It controls acceptance as much as possible. Not all of the 255 types, but more ordinary random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be made to match the judgment value per normal figure indicating that the normal random number is won per normal figure.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers have been won. The above ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal figure, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. As described above, in the non-time saving time, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting port is opened because the winning ball is not won in the normal drawing. There is no control over the acceptance of game balls into 2004. However, as described above, the winning of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than that in the time saving state, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the winning. At that time, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, and then moved forward again. (Ii) The acceptance of the game ball into the starting port 2004 may be disabled.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5429). ), After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S5430), the normal symbol hit as the mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S5431). On the other hand, when the result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing is determined to be out of order, the variation of the ordinary symbol is determined. The out-of-normal symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) at the time of control stop is determined (step S5432). After that, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process is terminated.

Then, while the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to obtain the peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing)). In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and the effect according to the game situation can be executed.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a start-up prize has occurred, and when in that situation, controls the hold display and the look-ahead effect according to the start-up prize. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following fluctuation pattern specification command reception waiting process, effect symbol change start process, effect symbol change process, effect symbol change stop process, jackpot display process , The jackpot game processing, and the jackpot end effect processing are executed.

Fluctuation pattern specification command reception wait process: During the period from the main control MPU1310a to the reception of the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern, the effect (demo effect, etc.) is applied when the symbol is not in the variation state and the control related to the jackpot is not performed. While performing control, when a fluctuation pattern command related to the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start processing.

Effect symbol variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol variation period are determined based on the variation pattern command, etc., and the decorative symbol variation is started based on the determined effect content. To control. Then, after that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the effect symbol change.

Processing during effect symbol change: Controls to start various effect contents determined in the effect symbol change start process at each timing during the symbol change period, and when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the process flag is set to the effect symbol. Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing: Controls to stop the fluctuation of decorative symbols based on the reception of a command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols, and to derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, when the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and when the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol, the value of the process flag is changed to the variable pattern specification command reception waiting process. Update to the value corresponding to.

Big hit display processing: Controls an effect (such as a display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit) during the period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit symbol to when the big hit game is started. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game.

Processing during big hit game: Controls various effects during the period when the big hit game state occurs. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Jackpot end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect (display effect for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended, etc.) in the period from the end of the jackpot game state to the variable permissible state is controlled. .. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the process of waiting for the variable pattern specification command reception.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of an effect pattern (variation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when in the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 148, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (variation effect) is associated with each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the variation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the determined effect pattern is determined. It is controlled so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started based on (variation effect).

The effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (variable effects) are associated with one variation number indicated by a variation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (variable effects) is determined based on an effect lottery or a game situation. You may try to do so. As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also has a plurality of effect patterns associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, after the effect pattern (variation effect) is determined in this way, a notice lottery (determination process of the notice effect) is performed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the symbol type, and the variation pattern. By controlling the advance notice effect won in the advance notice lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the above-determined effect pattern (variation effect) is performed (processing during the change of the effect symbol), a plurality of effect contents can be displayed. It is designed to suggest the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear depending on the appearance mode of them as a compoundable property.

Conventionally, in such a composite effect, a plurality of the same specific advance notice effect (for example, timer effect) may appear and be executed while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. By doing this, it is expected that the game will be maintained. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, the frequency of executing multiple timer effects while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed is naturally low. , It was considered difficult to fully improve the game entertainment.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" is intended for a predetermined effect that appears during the execution of the effect pattern (variable effect), and the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed is the first predetermined numerical value. It is executed as a count effect display from (for example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"), or as a standby display (in preparation, etc.) before starting the count display. Is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, conversation notice or cut-in A) that causes either a relatively unfavorable effect (low expectation) or an advantageous effect (high expectation) for the player appears. , B, etc.) is the target of the timer effect, and it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result is always generated when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (particularly, the timer effect on the advance notice side executed as a result of the advance notice lottery), it is kept secret as to which effect is the target of the effect at least when the count display is started. It is desirable to do so. Further, the "timer effect effect target" is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value becomes the second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") as the timer effect. That is, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing when the effect target is generated.

In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the passage of time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place to accurately display the number of seconds and the like. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which a count display such as count-up or count-down is performed, the time has elapsed since the start of counting ( It does not have to be an accurate indication of the number of seconds, etc.).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (preliminary side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when the user wins the advance notice lottery, the above effect pattern determined based on the determination table T1 ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (variable side timer effect) that is built in in advance as the effect content of the variable effect). That is, in this case, if only the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed as the count effect display as "the effect content of the advance notice effect that functions so that the jackpot expectation is added to the effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command". Instead, by executing it as "the production content of the production pattern itself determined based on the fluctuation pattern command", the degree of expectation from the jackpot expectation indicated by the production pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command It will be possible to make the count effect display (timer effect) appear without unnecessary addition (addition of expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in the advance notice lottery"). For example, if the jackpot expectation when a specific effect pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern command appears is "20%", the jackpot expectation is increased by the combined effect function when the advance timer effect is further executed. For example, it becomes "40%" and the appearance frequency has to be reduced by that amount, but when the variable side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself, a big hit is expected. It is possible to execute the timer effect with the degree set to "20%" (it can appear only by selecting a specific fluctuation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be preferably maintained.

The degree of expectation of a big hit when an effect pattern (variable effect) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the variation number (further, the effect pattern). Basically, the expectation of a big hit as the variation number increases. There is a tendency for the degree to increase. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the variable side timer effect in which the "conversation notice" is the effect target is executed as the effect content. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), whereas the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 (variation number 9). 10) <Variation number 17 (18) is set. Further, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail here, but even in the determination table referred to in the low probability time saving state and the high probability time saving state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself itself. As a result, an effect pattern (count variation pattern) in which the variable side timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a probability different from that in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can execute the variation side timer effect for the conversation notice. It differs from variable numbers 3 and 4 in that. Further, the variable numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 9 and 10 are executed by the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice, and the variable numbers 11 and 10. In No. 12, the variable side timer effect with the cut-in A as the effect target is executed, and in the variation numbers 13 and 14, the conversation notice and the cut-in A are executed, and the variable side timer effect with the cut-in A as the effect target is executed. It differs in that it can be done. Further, the variable numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 17 and 18 are executed by the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice, and the variable numbers 19 and 18. In No. 20, the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-in B is executed, and in the variable numbers 21 and 22, the conversation notice and the cut-in B are executed, and the variable side timer effect targeting them is executed. It differs in that it can be done. It should be noted that the jackpot expectation is higher when the variable side timer effect targeting the cut-ins A and B is executed than when the variable side timer effect targeting the conversation notice is executed. Is set so that the jackpot expectation tends to be higher when the variable side timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

The "conversation notice" is an effect that can appear at a relatively early stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and is often added with a relatively low degree of expectation. On the other hand, the cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and a relatively high degree of expectation is added. It is a production that often occurs (or a production that always has a relatively high degree of expectation). Therefore, the "conversation notice" is set so that the appearance rate (execution probability) is higher than other effects (cut-in A, B, the character A action, B, etc., which will be described later) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be done. Further, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variable effect is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in A that appears as the content of the advance notice effect in the character reach, whereas in the SP reach, the advance notice is given. It is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in B instead of the cut-in A that appears as the effect content of the effect.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, the effect content (effect pattern) is obtained for a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ) Is assigned as the variable side timer effect. On top of this, if the fluctuation pattern is a "predetermined type (for example, fluctuation numbers 1 to 6) such as shortened fluctuation or normal reach effect with low expectation", the count effect display as the timer effect on the notice side is displayed. While the effect is not won (increasing the premium degree) and the expectation level UP when the notice side timer effect appears is appropriately secured, the variation pattern is "a variation pattern for executing the effect side timer effect (increasing the premium degree). In the case of "variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22 and the like count fluctuation patterns)", the fluctuation pattern is of the above-mentioned predetermined type (for example, fluctuation) as compared with the case where it is not such a count fluctuation pattern. The ratio corresponding to (numbers 1 to 6, etc.) is set to be low.

Here, 14 fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation side timer effect is executed, and two of them (0) are prepared. Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) (variation numbers 5 and 6) that may be set to the individual correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, eight fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation side timer effect is not executed, and four fluctuation patterns (variations) are prepared. Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

In such a configuration, when the effect content of the variation pattern is one that can perform the count effect display (variation side timer effect) (count variation pattern), it is more noticeable than the case where the variation pattern does not perform the variation side timer effect. The rate at which it is judged that the count effect display (timer effect on the notice side) cannot be executed as the effect content of the effect is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one effect pattern (variable effect) without unnecessarily increasing the degree of expectation and lowering the appearance frequency.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), The rate at which the advance notice side timer effect appears differs depending on which count fluctuation pattern the count fluctuation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. At that time, the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a medium lottery probability, and when the effect pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

Even when the effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice side timer effect may appear with a low probability. Further, even if any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the advance notice side timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability is executed, the actual hit is larger than in the case of loss. The effect pattern that has been won in the above can appear with a higher lottery probability, and the variable number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variable number 16. ing.

In such a configuration, the count effect display is announced depending on whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (for example, variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (for example, variation number 22). The ratio of execution as the effect content (timer effect on the notice side) will be different. Therefore, among the above-mentioned count fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays in one effect pattern (variation effect) is high, the type thereof. Depending on the situation, the rate at which a plurality of count displays appear can be further increased, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained in a suitable manner.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if the effect pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach) in which the effect content of the same reach type appears, the variable side timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the advance timer is within the execution period of the effect pattern as compared with the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variation side timer effect is not included as the effect content. The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which the timer effect on the advance notice side is determined by the advance notice lottery) is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (variable side timer effect and notice side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring a jackpot expectation that one advance notice side timer effect is won in the advance notice lottery. It will be possible to make it possible, and by extension, it will be possible to realize the production opportunity of the double timer without unnecessary addition of the jackpot expectation.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in the case, the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which "conversation notice" is the effect target and the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) for which "cut-in" is the effect target. The mode of the count display (form, color, etc. of the count number) is different. That is, in this case, even when an effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the mode of the count display of the variable side timer effect (variable side count effect display) is confirmed. By doing so, in combination with "the rate at which the advance notice side timer effect appears differs depending on which count fluctuation pattern is used", the ease of appearance of the notice side timer effect is recognized. You will be able to expect.

Regarding the mode of the count display that appears in the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), regardless of whether or not the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in), the variable side timer effect (variable side) The mode of the count display (conversation notice, cut-in) that appears in the count effect display) may be different (or at least different from any one), or may be the same (or at least the same as any one). ..

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the advance notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display) will be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the effect. It is useful for making the player recognize that the timer effect on the notice side, which is set to a high degree, is appearing, and to improve the sense of expectation. In this sense, it is more desirable that the notice-side timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) that appear in the variable-side timer effect (variable-side count effect display). Regarding the above-mentioned common mode as the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), a plurality of modes having different expectations (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do so.

Further, in order to make it possible to more preferably recognize that the advance notice side timer effect is executed, the count display when the advance notice side timer effect is executed and the count display when the variable side timer effect is executed are displayed. It is desirable to make the count speeds (for example, the speed at which the numbers change during count-up and count-down) differ. In such a configuration, even during the period in which the count display is in progress after the timer effect is started, the count speed of the timer effect is closely watched, and it is relative to the variable side timer effect having a relatively low expectation. It becomes possible to make people interested in which of the timer effects on the advance notice side, which has a high degree of expectation, is being executed, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the timer digestion period.

At this time, in the variable side timer effect, the count is displayed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the notice side timer effect according to the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in). If the count is displayed in a mode (cut-in) and a mode (conversation notice) in which the count is displayed at a speed that is not relatively close to the count speed of the timer effect on the notice side, whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is executed. It will be possible to add fun by making the difficulty of judgment different. Further, in the variable side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and erasure of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or the variable side timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. The count may be displayed by displaying the count.

According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect are executed at the same time, it is easy to grasp whether or not the notice side timer effect is executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and the interest of the game will be improved.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a count is displayed for the fluctuation pattern (count fluctuation pattern such as fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) corresponding to the variable side timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required for digesting all counts) are set as selectable effect patterns. Then, when the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation side timer effect is acquired, one of the above-mentioned plurality of effect patterns is determined based on a random number for the effect, etc., so that the count display of the variation side timer effect and the advance notice side timer By making the ease of simultaneous execution with the count display of the effect different (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap), the ease of determining whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is executed is different. I try to give it fun

In this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect effect target and reach) in which the start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for total count digestion) of the count display is different for one fluctuation pattern. Although it was decided to prepare the same production content), multiple production patterns (however, the timer production is targeted) with different start timing or end timing (total number of counts or time required for total count digestion) of the count display. The type of effect and the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern may be the same for each effect pattern), and a plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared so as to have a one-to-one correspondence.

In addition, the number of counts displayed (total number of counts) when they appear between the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect can be made different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the notice By making the selection rate of the specific count display number different from that of the side timer effect, it becomes possible to give fun by making it difficult to judge whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed. ..

Further, while the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the countdown display, if the variable side timer effect is executed in the countup display, it is deterministically grasped whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed. It is expected that the game will be able to be played and that the game will be greatly improved. Further, while the timer effect on the notice side is executed in the countdown display, the timer effect on the variable side targeting the specific effect (for example, conversation notice) is executed in the countup display, and the effect different from the specific effect (for example). If the variable side timer effect for cut-in) is executed in the countdown display, it will be interesting to make it difficult to judge whether or not the notice side timer effect is executed depending on the effect target. You will be able to grant it.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is set as the effect target for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, and there are cases where different effects are set as the effect target. To control. When the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the effect is different from that of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect. Even if the rate at which the jackpot expectation is low is set to be high and the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display is displayed. I try to make the end timing different.

That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, one of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect has a predetermined value first. At this point, it is as if a different effect is being produced (the timer effect is executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation) because the count display of the other is continued while the end is reached. It looks like it is. After that, the other count display that has been continued also reaches a predetermined value and ends in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is the object of the effect. Even if it is clarified by the timer production on the finished side that a conversation notice with a relatively low expectation is targeted for production, a different production that can appear after that is targeted for production ( It is expected that the timer effect is executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation) to maintain the expectation and improve the interest of the game.

Further, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect in this way, the timing at which the variable side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice side timer effect are predetermined. It is desirable to make the count end corresponding display (for example, "count successful!", "Chance UP!", Etc.) appear separately at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, which target the "conversation notice" executed as the effect on the variable side or the advance notice side, appear in one effect pattern, respectively. In this case, the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but in the variable side timer effect, as the variable side effect in relation to the "conversation notice". While the count display is advanced according to the variable side specific effect ("count success!", Effect according to the appearance of the conversation notice, etc.) that occurs, in the notice side timer effect, it is related to "conversation notice". The count display is displayed according to the notice side specific effect ("Chance UP!"" That occurs as the effect on the notice side, or the timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined few seconds before the start of the effect). By advancing, different count end corresponding displays will appear at different timings.

By the way, it is required that each of the conversation notice and the cut-in effect is always executed when it is targeted for the effect of the variable side timer effect (when the count fluctuation pattern is determined). In particular, conversation notices and cut-ins are effects that can be executed in multiple modes with different expectations. Therefore, when the target is the effect of the variable side timer effect, it is relative when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It is required to appear in a mode with a high degree of expectation. Therefore, the effect to be the effect target of the variable side timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect content of the above effect pattern (variable effect), and the variable side timer effect and the effect target are simply executed when the effect pattern is executed. It is desirable to make it possible for each of the effects to be performed (a mode with relatively high expectations) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to control so that when the variable side timer effect is executed, the effect (a mode having a relatively high degree of expectation) to be the target of the effect is always selected in the advance notice lottery. ..

If each of the conversation notice and the cut-in effect is not targeted for the effect of the variable side timer effect, it is determined whether or not to appear as the effect content of the notice side in the advance notice lottery described later, and of course, the advance notice is made. A determination is made as to what mode (a mode having a relatively high degree of expectation or a mode having a relatively low expectation) is to appear as the effect content on the side, and the appearance is controlled based on the result of the determination. ..

Hereinafter, the process of determining the effect pattern using FIG. 148 will be summarized.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when a variation pattern command, a symbol type command, or the like is acquired from the main control MPU1310a, first, the current game is based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command. Refer to the judgment table according to the state. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expectation degree) to the probability variation expectation when a specific effect pattern appears and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state. become.

Next, as the effect patterns associated with the variation numbers, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display appearing in the variable side timer effect) are prepared so as to be selectable. If so, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display is selected based on the winning of the jackpot determination. At this time, if the jackpot judgment is won, the effect pattern is set so that the rate of delaying the start timing or end timing of the count display is high, and thereby the start timing or end timing of the count display is set. The slower the number, the more likely it is that a jackpot symbol will appear.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when the special effect condition is satisfied. Even in this case, the effect pattern set so that the variable side timer effect does not appear is selected from the plurality of effect patterns.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, after the effect pattern (the effect from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change) that appears during the symbol change is selected in this way, what kind of advance notice effect is given within the execution period of the effect pattern. It will be decided whether to additionally execute (combine) in any manner (notice lottery).

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing procedure for the lottery related to the notice effect (notice lottery performed in the effect symbol change start process) that appears within the execution period (symbol variation time) of the effect pattern. The procedure for processing the advance notice lottery described below is merely an example, and the procedure for processing the advance notice lottery is not limited to this as long as it can achieve the intended purpose as the advance notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 149, at the time of the advance notice lottery, it is first determined whether or not the fluctuation (holding to be digested) waiting to start is subject to the timer look-ahead effect described later (step S5501). ). As a result, the first timer advance notice lottery is performed when it is the target of the timer look-ahead effect (step S5502), whereas the second timer advance notice lottery is performed when it is not the target of the timer look-ahead effect (step S5502). S5521).

That is, when the timer is subject to the timer look-ahead effect (first timer advance notice lottery), the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed as compared with the case where the timer look-ahead effect is not applied (second timer advance notice lottery). It is set to increase the rate at which decisions are made. The ratio may include a ratio determined by 100%. Further, in both the first timer advance notice lottery and the second timer advance notice lottery, different decision tables are prepared for each game state, and it is decided that the advance timer effect is executed according to the game state. The percentages to be played (for example, in the high-probability time-saving gaming state, the decision to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side is made at a lower percentage (including the percentage determined by 0%) than in the normal gaming state) are different. It has become.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to when the fluctuation (hold to be digested) is not the target of the timer look-ahead effect in the normal game state (second timer advance notice lottery). ..

As shown in FIG. 150, in the second timer advance notice lottery according to this embodiment, when a predetermined type of variation pattern command (variation numbers 1 to 6 in this case) is acquired, the advance timer effect is produced. Does not make a decision to do. This point is the same even in the case of the first timer advance notice lottery or other gaming states.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, in the second timer advance notice lottery, even if the effect pattern (for example, the SP reach corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22) shows the effect contents of the same reach type, the variation side. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22) in which the timer effect is included as the effect content, the effect pattern in which the variable side timer effect is not included as the effect content (for example, SP reach corresponding to the variation numbers 15 and 16) is compared. Therefore, the rate at which the decision to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side is made is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (variable side timer effect and notice side timer effect) can be made to appear in one effect pattern without winning the double timer effect described later in the advance notice lottery. As a result, the double timer production opportunity can be realized without unnecessary addition of the jackpot expectation (winning the double timer production). This point is the same even in the case of the first timer advance notice lottery or other gaming states.

However, in the first timer advance notice lottery, the ratio of the decision to execute the advance notice side timer effect is generally higher than that of the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to in such a second timer advance notice lottery. More specifically, in the first timer advance notice lottery, regardless of which of the variable numbers 7 to 22 is selected, the advance notice side is compared with the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to in the second timer advance notice lottery. The percentage of decisions to execute the timer effect is high.

Further, as will be described later, in the timer look-ahead effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes (low expectation mode, high expectation mode, determination) in which the ratio of execution of the advance notice side timer effect in the variation targeted for the look-ahead is different. Aspect) is to be executed. Then, in the first timer advance notice lottery, first, it is determined in which mode the timer look-ahead effect is executed, and even when the look-ahead is executed in the low expectation mode, the second timer advance notice lottery is performed. Compared to the timer advance notice determination table T2 referred to in the above, the rate at which the determination to execute the advance notice side timer effect is made is set to be generally higher. When the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the high expectation mode, the ratio of the decision to execute the timer look-ahead effect on the advance notice side is generally higher than that in the case where the timer look-ahead effect is executed, and the timer look-ahead effect is increased. When the execution is performed in the definite mode, it is set so that the determination to execute the advance timer effect is always made regardless of the fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 1 to 22).

Then, when it is decided to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side as a result of such a timer advance notice lottery (first timer advance notice lottery, second timer advance notice lottery) (YES in step S5503), the process of step S5504 is the first. If it is not decided to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side while the 1 mission effect lottery is performed (NO in step S5503), the second mission effect lottery is performed as the process of step S5551.

That is, as described above, in the timer effect, the larger the number of counts displayed (total number of counts) when the count display is started (the longer the time required for the timer to consume), the higher the expectation of big hits tends to be. Is set to have. However, in this case, when the number of counts displayed (total number of counts) displayed when the count display is started is small, the expectation of big hits tends to be low, so even though the timer effect is executed, the game is played. There was concern that the interest would decline.

Therefore, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 displays a "specific display related to the first effect" such as "make the first effect appear", and the specific display is displayed. When the first effect occurs (appears) during the display of, a special display such as "Mission Success" appears, making it possible to execute a mission effect that confirms that the jackpot has been won.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the effect type (here, the conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early stage among the effect types targeted for the effect of the timer effect is set as the first effect. We are going to adopt it. That is, in this case, if the timer effect is executed while the specific display such as "Make the conversation notice (first effect) appear" appears (while the mission effect appears), the count display is displayed. Even if the number of counts displayed (total number of counts) displayed when is started is small, the target of the timer notice is "a conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage" (a big hit due to the success of the mission). It can be expected that the winner will be confirmed), and the count display will continue even after the conversation notice ends because the number of count displays (total number of counts) displayed when the count display starts is large. Even in such a case, it can be expected that the expectation of a big hit will be high, so that the game entertainment when the timer effect is executed can be stably enhanced.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, in order to more preferably play the synergistic effect generated by such a timer effect and the mission effect, a specific display (conversation notice) related to the first effect should appear. ) Is displayed, a notice lottery (each process shown in FIG. 149) so that the appearance rate of the timer effect is higher than when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not displayed. Is to be done. As a result, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the timer effect will be executed only by displaying the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear), so that the deterioration of the game interest is preferably suppressed. You will be able to. The first effect targeted for the mission display does not have to be a “conversation notice”, and may be executed in place of any of the effects shown in FIG. 160, for example.

When the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed, the appearance ratio of the timer effect is higher than when the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not displayed. Any method may be adopted as a method for increasing the value, but it can be realized by adopting any of the following methods, for example.
a. First decide whether to perform the mission effect, and when it is decided to perform the mission effect, the timer effect is set so that the appearance rate of the timer effect is higher than when it was not decided to perform the mission effect. Method for determining whether to appear b. First decide whether to perform the timer effect, and when it is decided to perform the timer effect, perform the mission effect so that the appearance rate of the mission effect is higher than when it is not decided to perform the timer effect. Method to decide whether to appear

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment employs the above method b. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) when it is determined that the advance timer effect has been won in the process of step S5503, it is not determined that the advance timer effect has been won in the process of step S5503. Compared to the second mission production lottery (step S5551) in this case, the ratio of the decision to display (mission display) the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first production is higher. It is determined whether or not to display the mission within the fluctuation (effect pattern).

In addition, a specific display related to the first effect (make a conversation notice appear) and a timer look-ahead effect (first preceding mode, second preceding mode, third preceding) suggesting that the timer effect on the notice side is executed. Aspect) can be displayed at the same time. Further, under predetermined conditions, a predetermined display (mission suggestion display) may be displayed in which a specific display related to the first effect (make a conversation notice appear) appears at a high rate when it appears.

Further, regarding the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear), for example, when the hold information (hold information for generating the mission effect) that is the target of the mission effect is obtained, the hold information is displayed. It may be possible to display it over a plurality of variable displays until it is digested. At this time, when the hold information that is the target of the mission effect (the hold information that generates the mission effect) is the hold information that becomes a big hit, the fluctuation that is executed before the hold information that becomes the big hit is digested. A conversation notice may appear in the display to display a special display (mission success). However, when the special display (mission success) is displayed in advance in this way (when the mission success is displayed when the hold information that generates the mission effect has not been digested yet), the loss fluctuation display is executed. It is desirable to limit it when you are. That is, in this case, even though the special display (mission success) is displayed, the loss symbol (loss effect) appears in the variable display in which the special display appears, but the special display (mission success) is displayed in this way. By digesting the hold information that is the target of the mission effect and displaying the jackpot symbol (big hit effect) in the variable display, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

According to such a configuration, while the mission effect and the timer look-ahead effect are executed over a plurality of fluctuations, even if the mission succeeds before the timer effect count display is started, the variation display shows a lost pattern. By displaying the display, it becomes possible to realize an effect as if the variable display in which the jackpot symbol appears is carried over until the variable display in which the count display of the timer effect is started appears.

FIG. 151 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the first mission effect determination table T3a (first mission effect lottery) referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is performed in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 151 (b) is a diagram. Is a diagram showing an example of a second mission effect determination table T3b (second mission effect lottery) that is referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is not performed in the normal game state.

As is clear from FIGS. 151 (a) and 151 (b), first, in the first mission effect determination table T3a referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is performed, when the advance notice side timer effect is not performed. Compared to the second mission production decision table T3b that is referred to, the ratio of the decision to display (mission display) the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first production is set to be higher. There is. The same applies to each table referred to when in another gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, although the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 correspond to the fluctuation pattern in which the "conversation notice" appears as the fluctuation effect, the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 are acquired. When is set, the mission effect in which the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is not executed in both the first mission effect determination table T3a and the second mission effect determination table T3b. Has been done. That is, since the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 are so-called normal reach effects (reach types with low expectations), both timer effects and mission effects occur in such low expectations reach effects, and the mission is successful. In that case, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the failure to satisfy the desire to "want to see such a production with a higher-expected type of reach production." Therefore, although the variable numbers 5 and 6 are reach effects in which the variable side timer effect is performed with the "conversation notice" as the effect target, in either the first mission effect determination table T3a or the second mission effect determination table T3b. However, it is desirable to set not to execute the effect in which the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed. The same applies to each table referred to when in another gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 also correspond to the variation patterns in which the "conversation notice" appears as the variation effect, but these variation numbers are acquired. Even when there is, it is set not to execute the mission effect in which the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is displayed in both the first mission effect decision table T3a and the second mission effect decision table T3b. Has been done. This is because the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 are fluctuation patterns at the time of loss, and it is not possible to indicate that the mission is successful (suggesting that the jackpot has been won) in terms of production. This point is also the same for each table referred to when in another gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 148, the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 correspond to the hit variation patterns in which the "conversation notice" appears as the variation effect, and these variation numbers 10, 14, 22 When the specific display related to the first production (make the conversation notice appear) is displayed when 18 and 22 are acquired, the message of mission success (confirmation that the jackpot has been won) is displayed. The Rukoto. Therefore, in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504), which is referred to when the timer effect on the advance notice side is performed, the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 10, 14, 18, When 22) is acquired, the execution probability is set (tripled) to be significantly higher than that of the second mission effect lottery (step S5551), which is referred to when the advance timer effect is not performed. There is. Through such control, it is possible to give the impression that the mission effect is likely to appear when the timer effect appears. This point is also the same for each table referred to when in another gaming state.

On the other hand, during the execution of the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 16, 20) in which the "conversation notice" is not made to appear as the effect content of the variation effect, the specific display related to the first effect (make the conversation notice appear). Is displayed, a strange production situation such as "The conversation notice cannot be displayed even though the mission is displayed, and the jackpot symbol is displayed after the mission fails" may occur. do not have. Therefore, even in the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) referred to when the timer effect on the advance notice side is performed, the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause the "conversation advance notice" to appear as the variation effect, etc. ) Is acquired, it is set (doubled) so that the execution probability is not so high as compared with the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) that is referred to when the advance timer effect is not performed. There is. This point is also the same for each table referred to when in another gaming state.

However, as will be described later, when it is decided that the mission effect is executed after the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that does not cause the "conversation notice" to appear as the variation effect is acquired, the probability is relatively high. It is controlled so that the probability that the "conversation notice" is executed as the effect content of the notice effect is high (step S5509 and step S5534 described later). Considering that such control is performed, even for the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) in which the "conversation notice" does not appear as the effect content of the variation effect, the "conversation notice" is produced as the effect of the variation effect. The mission may be produced with the same execution probability as the hit variation pattern (variation numbers 8, 12, 20, etc.) that appears as the content.

On the other hand, the variable numbers 7, 11, 15, and 19 are reach effects at the time of loss so that the "conversation notice" does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect. Such a reach effect can be performed when the mission effect is lost without causing the "conversation notice" to appear. Therefore, refer to this when the timer effect on the notice side is performed. In the first mission production lottery to be performed, the execution probability is set (tripled) to be significantly higher than that of the second mission production lottery (step S5551) referred to when the advance timer effect is not performed. There is. Through such control, it is possible to give the impression that the mission effect is likely to appear when the timer effect appears. This point is also the same for each table referred to when in another gaming state.

As will be described later, it has been decided that the reach effect (variation numbers 7, 11, 15, 19, etc.) at the time of loss that does not cause the "conversation notice" to appear as the effect content of the variable effect is acquired and the mission effect is executed. Occasionally, the probability that the "conversation notice" is executed as the effect content of the notice effect is controlled to be zero. This is because it is not possible to indicate that the mission is successful (suggesting that the jackpot has been won) in the reach production at the time of loss.

According to the configuration related to such a mission production, the production target of the timer production (count production display) is always the second production (conversation notice) rather than the first production (conversation notice) (when the mission production does not appear). It is more desirable to have a production with a higher degree of expectation (for example, cut-in or a character operation described later) in order to obtain a sense of expectation, and the production target of the timer production (count production display) is the first production. When it is (conversation notice), it is not possible to obtain a favorable sense of expectation. However, if the timer effect (count effect display) is executed when the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, the effect target of the timer effect is the first effect. Regardless of whether it is (conversation notice) or the second production (cut-in), it is possible to obtain at least a feeling of expectation that exceeds the expectation obtained by the second production (cut-in). You will be able to enjoy with confidence.

Moreover, when such a specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect (conversation notice) is displayed, the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect (conversation notice) in the design effect. Since the appearance rate of the timer effect (count effect display) is higher than when is not displayed, the game is played only by displaying the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first effect (conversation notice). It becomes possible to preferably suppress the decline in interest. In order to realize such effect control, the variable side timer effect does not necessarily have to be prepared in an executable manner, and this may be realized only by the advance notice side timer effect.

Further, in this embodiment, both the conversation notice and the cut-in (or the character operation described later) can be executed within one production pattern, and the conversation notice is the cut-in (or the role described later). It is designed to appear at a timing earlier than the object movement). Therefore, when the mission display (make the conversation notice appear) is executed, there is a possibility that the mission will succeed even if the count display number (total number of counts) displayed when the timer effect count display is started is small. Being conscious will suppress the decline in expectations. In addition, when the number of counts displayed (total number of counts) displayed when the count display of the timer effect is started is large, the expectation can be appropriately maintained by itself. It will be expected to maintain stability.

Further, as will be described later, the timing of displaying (mission display) the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) related to the first production is the period during which the symbol change targeted for the specific display is performed. It is possible to appear not only in the inside but also during the period when the symbol change targeted for the specific display is still in the pending state. In addition, the first effect is displayed in a situation where a specific display (make a conversation notice appear) related to the first effect is displayed during the period when the symbol change targeted for the mission effect is still on hold. It will be described later that a special display such as "mission success" may appear when it occurs (appears).

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) is performed in this way, the advance notice side timer type lottery is performed to determine the execution mode of the advance notice side timer effect as the process of step S5505. ..

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of the advance notice side timer type determination table T4 referred to in the advance notice side timer type lottery (step S5505).

As shown in FIG. 152, in the advance notice side timer type determination table T4, it is acquired whether the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of the single timer or the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the form of the double timer. The production random numbers are assigned according to the variable numbers that are different. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the advance timer type determination table T4 is referred to based on the fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command, and the acquired effect random number values are the single timer mode and the double timer. The lottery for the timer type on the advance notice side (step S5505) is executed by determining which of the modes is allocated.

The "single timer" to be determined in the notice side timer type lottery corresponds to "a mode in which one notice side timer effect is executed in one effect pattern", and is a "double timer". Corresponds to "a mode in which two notice-side timer effects having different effect targets are executed in one effect pattern". In the notice side timer type determination table T4, the production random numbers are assigned to each variation number so that the jackpot expectation when the "double timer" appears is higher than that of the "single timer".

Further, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned fluctuation side timer effect can be executed depending on the type (variation number) of the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, if it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of a single timer when such a count fluctuation pattern is selected, the change side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect appear in one effect pattern. As a result, the timer effect is executed in the form of a double timer (or triple timer). Similarly, if it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of the double timer when the count fluctuation pattern is selected, the change side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect are generated in one effect pattern. By appearing, the timer effect is executed in the form of a triple timer (or a quadruple timer).

That is, in this case, if the number of appearances (single, double) of the timer effect on the advance notice side is determined regardless of whether or not the count fluctuation pattern is selected, "the appearance of the timer effect appearing in one effect pattern". The relationship such as "the higher the number, the higher the expectation of big hits" may collapse, and this makes it impossible to understand the meaning of the production when the timer production is executed (which mode has the high expectation). There is a concern that the game interest will decline due to this.

Therefore, in the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, among the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the notice side timer effect can appear. When a fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 7, 8, 15, 16) that does not execute the variable side timer effect is selected, the reach type (character reach with relatively low expectation, SP reach with relatively high expectation). The SP reach, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, makes it easier to select the mode of the double timer.

On the other hand, among the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the advance notice side timer effect can appear, the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, 22) that execute the two variation side timer effects having different effect targets. When is selected, the mode of the double timer only in the case of SP reach with relatively high expectation according to the reach type (character reach with relatively low expectation, SP reach with relatively high expectation). Is selected. That is, in this case, if the mode of the quadruple timer appears by the appearance of two variable side timer effects and two notice side timer effects with different production targets in one production pattern, the type of SP reach with a relatively high expectation. It will be definitively suggested that the production pattern will be executed, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment. However, instead of this, if the mode of the quadruple timer appears by the appearance of two variable side timer effects and two notice side timer effects with different production targets in one production pattern, it is definitely confirmed that the jackpot symbol will appear. It may be suggested.

When the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 13, 14, 21, 22) for executing the two variable side timer effects having different effect targets are selected, the mode of the single timer in the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505). Even when is selected, the mode of the triple timer appears by the appearance of two variable side timer effects and one notice side timer effect having different effect targets in one effect pattern. In order to maintain the degree of expectation when such a triple timer aspect appears, the above-mentioned timer notice lottery (first timer notice lottery, second timer notice lottery) corresponds to a fluctuation pattern with a relatively low degree of expectation. When the variable numbers 13 and 14 to be used are selected, it is determined that the advance timer effect is executed only with a relatively low probability as compared with the variable numbers 7 to 12 of the same character reach (decision to use the triple timer). (Refer to the distribution mode of variation number 13 in FIG. 150).

On the other hand, among the fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 7 to 22) in which the advance notice side timer effect can appear, the fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 9 to 12, 17 to 20) that executes one fluctuation side timer effect is selected. When it is, the selection probability of the double timer mode in the case of the character reach (variation number 9 to 12) having a relatively low expectation is set to be significantly low, and the SP reach (variation number) having a relatively high expectation is set. 17 to 20) are set so that the selection probability of the double timer mode is significantly higher. That is, in this case, in combination with the distribution mode of the variation number 13 in FIG. 150 described above, the mode of the triple timer (one variable side timer effect and two notice side timer effects, or two variable side timers) is included in one effect pattern. When the production and one timer production on the notice side) appear, the proportion of SP reach with relatively high expectations will increase instead of the character reach with relatively low expectations, so it is necessary to improve the interest of the game. Will be able to.

In the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505) according to this embodiment, only the process of selecting either the single timer or the double timer as the type of the notice side timer effect is performed. However, for the notice side timer type lottery (step S5505), the lottery process may be performed so that the notice side timer effect of triple timer or more can be executed, and the mode of the count display of the notice side timer effect is expected. It may be executed as a lottery process as to which of a plurality of different modes (for example, different colors) is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, after the advance notice side timer type lottery (step S5505) is performed, as a result of the advance notice side timer type lottery (step S5505), the mode of the single timer and the mode of the double timer Which of the two (step S5506) was decided to perform the advance notice side timer effect, and further, was it decided to perform the mission effect as a result of the first mission effect lottery (step S5504) (step S5507, S532)? Production lottery (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543) targeting the timer target candidate production (notice production that can be the production target of the timer production on the notice side) with the contents (table) according to each result of , S5544).

More specifically, one of the following processes will be executed.
-In the case of the first processing status in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5507). First, based on the advance notice number determination table referred to when in the first processing status, how many timer target candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the advance notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. (Step S5508). Next, a determination process as to which type of advance notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect for the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the effect target of the timer effect. (Step S5509).

-In the case of the second processing status in which the mode is a single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S5507). First, based on the advance notice number determination table referred to when in the second processing status, how many timer target candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the advance notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. (Step S5523). Next, a determination process as to which type of advance notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect for the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the effect target of the timer effect. (Step S5524).

-When the third processing status is in the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5532). First, based on the advance notice number determination table referred to when in the third processing status, how many timer target candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the advance notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. (Step S5533). Next, a determination process as to which type of advance notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect for the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the effect target of the timer effect. (Step S5534).

-In the case of the fourth processing status in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5532) are made. First, based on the advance notice number determination table referred to when in the fourth processing status, how many timer target candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the advance notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. (Step S5543). Next, a determination process as to which type of advance notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect for the number determined in the determination process, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the effect target of the timer effect. (Step S5544).

FIG. 153 shows the reach types when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) and when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not made. And the processing status (in addition to the 1st to 4th processing status, the 5th processing status and the 6th processing status described later), etc. be.

As shown in FIG. 153, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). ) Is not determined to be executed, so that the upper limit of appearance (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect is controlled to be larger.

That is, whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed, whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of a single timer, and whether or not the reach type is a reach effect with a relatively high degree of expectation. Regardless of the judgment result such as, etc., if it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made. The upper limit of appearance (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect is larger than that when is not performed.

It should be noted that such processing settings are set when the above-mentioned effect lottery (steps S5508, S5509, S5523, S5524, S5533, S5534, S5543, S5544) at the time of executing the advance notice side timer effect, or when the advance notice side timer effect is not executed, which will be described later. It is realized through the setting of each table referred to in the production lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564).

According to such a configuration, when the mission production (make the conversation notice appear) is executed, it is expected that the appearance ratio of the notice production will increase and the average number of appearances will increase, thereby improving the game entertainment. Of course, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that "if the notice production occurs so frequently, conversation notices with relatively low expectations may appear among those notice productions and the mission may be successful." become able to. As described above, the production targeted for the mission display is required to be a production with a relatively low expectation such as a conversation notice, but it does not necessarily have to be the one with the lowest expectation, and the notice side. When the types of effects that can be the effect target of the timer effect are classified into two groups according to the degree of expectation, the effect may be classified into a group on the side with a relatively low degree of expectation. Alternatively, it is a notice production that appears at a timing before the reach production is started because the expectation is lower than this, as compared with the specific production that appears after the reach production is started and has a relatively high expectation. May be good.

FIG. 154 is the first processing state in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5507) are made. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5a which is referred to in the process of step S5508 in the case.

First, as shown in FIG. 154, since the table T5a is referred to when the advance notice side timer effect or the mission effect is executed, it corresponds to a fluctuation pattern in which the advance notice side timer effect cannot be executed. When the fluctuation numbers 1 to 6 and the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) that causes the conversation notice to appear as the production content of the fluctuation production are acquired, the table concerned. T5a is never referenced.

Further, in the table T5a, since it is referred to when the advance timer effect is executed in the mode of a single timer, an effect random number is set for each variation number so that at least one timer target candidate effect is selected. Allocated. However, with respect to the variable number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the advance notice effect.

Further, in the table T5a, among the variable numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effect of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variable numbers 10 to 12, and only a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variable numbers 14. Not. However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice and cut-in A) does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 10 to 12, the effect content of the variable effect is One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) appears, and when variable number 14 is reached, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in A) appear as the effect content of the variable effect. It has become like. Therefore, in the variable numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with substantially one more notice effect being assigned to each, and in the variable number 14, substantially two more notice effects are assigned. It is synonymous with being assigned to each.

Then, for example, in the variation number 14, the production random number of "400" is substantially assigned to the number of advance notices 3, and the effect random number of "600" is assigned to the number of notices 4. Since it is synonymous with, it can be said that among the variable numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, the notice effects are most likely to appear.

By the way, the effect pattern (character reach + conversation notice) that appears when the variation number is 10 is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the effect pattern (character reach + cut-in A) that appears when the variation numbers 11 and 12. That is as described above. However, in the table T5a referred to when in the first processing status, the variation number 10 is an effect pattern in which "mission success (special display) is displayed and then stopped by a jackpot symbol". Considering that it is "what is executed", the number of appearances and the appearance probability of the notice effect are higher than those of the variable numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). When the mission success (special display) is displayed, the game interest is improved.

On the other hand, even in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, almost the same relationship as the relationship of each variation number in such a character reach is set. .. However, among the SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10, and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, the hit time The number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the notice effect are higher in the change number 20 at the time of hit than in the change number 18 (the number of notices tends to increase as the change number has a higher expectation of big hit). Further, in SP reach, the appearance rate (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

As will be described later, in the character reach in the first processing status, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation) until the symbol fluctuation is stopped. , Special timer) is about to appear. However, one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a big hit confirmation effect (special timer), and even when a conversation notice is selected, it will function as a big hit effect due to a successful mission, so it is a timer target. When four or more candidate effects appear, a notice effect for confirming the jackpot will appear. Therefore, in the table T5a, in the variation number 7 which is the character reach at the time of loss, only up to three timer target candidate effects can appear, and the variation number which is the character reach (cut-in A) at the time of loss. In 11, only a maximum of two timer target candidate effects (substantially a maximum of three) can appear.

On the other hand, in the SP reach in the first processing status, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, etc.) until the symbol fluctuation is stopped. The timing at which the cut-in B and the accessory B operation) can appear has come. However, when the conversation notice is selected, it functions as a big hit effect due to the success of the mission, so when six timer target candidate effects appear, a big hit confirmation notice effect appears. Therefore, in the table T5a, in the variation number 15 which is the SP reach at the time of loss, only a maximum of 5 timer target candidate effects can appear, and the variation number which is the character reach (cut-in B) at the time of loss. In 19, only a maximum of 4 timer target candidate effects (actually, a maximum of 5) can appear.

An example of each effect prepared as the timer target candidate effect is described below.
-Conversation notice: The dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the jackpot expectation may change depending on the content of the dialogue, but the jackpot expectation when the conversation notice appears is other. It is set lower than the effect (hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation).
-Hold change: Display corresponding to the hold display that is the target of the digestion even during the symbol change performed according to the hold digestion (display corresponding to the hold display when it is in the hold state, although it is not already in the hold state) Is displayed, the display mode (color, etc.) of the hold display that has become the digestion target is changed, and the suggested jackpot expectation level may change depending on the display mode after the change. The jackpot expectation at the time when the pending change appears is set lower than the cut-in A, the accessory A operation, the cut-in B, and the accessory B operation.
-Cut-in A: The specific image A is displayed in a form that is preferentially displayed for the effect being performed during the symbol change, and the jackpot expectation when the cut-in A appears is the accessory A. It is set lower than the movement, cut-in B, and accessory B movement.
-Character A operation: One of the above-mentioned movable objects for effect is operated, and the jackpot expectation when the accessory A operation appears is set lower than that of the accessory B operation.
-Cut-in B: The specific image B is displayed in a form that is preferentially displayed for the effect being performed during the symbol change, and the jackpot expectation when the cut-in B appears is the accessory A. It is set lower than the movement and the accessory B movement.
-Character B operation: One of the above-mentioned movable objects for production is operated, and the jackpot expectation when the character B movement appears is the other production (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A). , Character A operation, cut-in B) is set higher. The effect movable body to be operated by the accessory B operation may be different from or the same as the effect movable body used in the accessory A operation, but when the same effect movable body is used, the operation is performed. The mode will be different.

It should be noted that each of these effects can be executed as an effect for the timer, as well as a period before, during, or after the count display is executed, or a variable period during which the timer effect is not executed. However, it can be executed as an effect that is not a timer target. Further, each of these effects may be feasible in any of a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, such as a blue cut-in A and a red cut-in A. Further, the pending change may include a premier mode (special mode) in which a big hit is confirmed when it appears. However, in this case, if the premier mode (special mode) appears during the execution of the count display, the hold change will not be executed as the target of the timer effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

FIG. 155 shows a second processing state in which a single timer mode (YES in step S5506) and a decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5b referred to in the process of step S5523 in the case.

First, as shown in FIG. 155, since the table T5b is referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is executed, the variation number 1 corresponding to the variation pattern in which the advance notice side timer effect cannot be executed. The table T5b is not referred to when ~ 6 is acquired. However, since it is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the variation numbers 9, 13, and 17 corresponding to the loss variation pattern (the variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. , 21 is also referenced in the table T5b. Therefore, in the table T5b, the production random numbers are also assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

Further, since the table T5b is also referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of a single timer, at least one timer target candidate effect is selected separately for each variation number. Is assigned. However, with respect to the variable number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, the timer target candidate effect may not necessarily be selected as the effect content of the advance notice effect.

Similarly, in the table T5b, among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variable numbers 7 to 12. Only one timer target candidate effect is assigned to the variable numbers 13 and 14 with relatively high expectations. However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice and cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 9 to 12, the effect content of the variable effect is 1. One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears, and two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the effect content of the variation effect for variation numbers 13 and 14. It has become. Therefore, variable numbers 9 to 12 are synonymous with substantially one more notice effect, and variable numbers 13 and 14 are substantially two more notices. It is synonymous with the fact that each production is assigned.

Then, for example, the variation number 14 is substantially synonymous with the effect random number of "1000" being assigned to the notice number 3, so that the variation numbers 7 to correspond to the character reach effect. It can be said that it is allocated so that a large number of notice effects are most likely to appear among the 14.

Even in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, substantially the same relationship as the relationship of each variation number in such a character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance rate (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

In addition, in the table T5b, the effect random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as in the table T5a, but since they are referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the table is referred to when the mission effect is not executed. The upper limit of appearance (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect is smaller than that of T5a.

FIG. 156 shows a third processing state in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the determination to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (YES in step S5532) are made. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5c referred to in the process of step S5533 in the case.

First, as shown in FIG. 156, since the table T5c is also referred to when the advance notice side timer effect or the mission effect is executed, it corresponds to a fluctuation pattern in which the advance notice side timer effect cannot be executed. When the fluctuation numbers 1 to 6 and the fluctuation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) that causes the conversation notice to appear as the production content of the fluctuation production are acquired, the table concerned. T5c is never referenced.

However, in the table T5c, since it is referred to when the advance timer effect is executed in the mode of the double timer, the effect random numbers are set separately for each variation number so that at least two timer target candidate effects are selected. Allocated. However, for the variable number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, it is not always necessary to allocate two timer target candidate effects as the effect content of the advance notice effect. One timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9, 17) may be assigned as the effect content of the advance notice effect, or the timer target candidate effect may not be allocated (variation numbers 13, 21) according to the effect content.

Further, in the table T5c, among the variable numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, a maximum of five timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effect of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the winning effects of the variable numbers 10 to 12, and only a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the variable numbers 14. Not. However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice and cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 10 to 12, the effect content of the variable effect is 1. One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears, and when the variation number 14 is reached, two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the effect content of the variation effect. ing. Therefore, in the variable numbers 10 to 12, it is synonymous with substantially one more notice effect being assigned to each, and in the variable number 14, substantially two more notice effects are assigned. It is synonymous with being assigned to each.

Then, for example, in the variation number 14, the production random number of "400" is substantially assigned to the number of advance notices 4, and the effect random number of "600" is assigned to the number of notices 5. Since it is synonymous with, it can be said that among the variable numbers 7, 8, 10 to 12, 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, the notice effects are most likely to appear.

In addition, in the character reach when in the third processing status, up to five timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer) until the symbol fluctuation is stopped. ) Is about to appear. However, one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a big hit confirmation effect (special timer), and when the conversation notice is selected, it will function as a big hit effect due to the success of the mission. When four or more appear, a notice effect (mission success or special timer) for confirming the jackpot will appear. Therefore, in the table T5c, the maximum number of variation numbers at the time of loss is three (the total number of timer target candidate effects on the variable side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the advance notice side is up to three). Is not allowed to appear.

Moreover, since one of the maximum five timer target candidate effects is a jackpot confirmation effect (special timer), a notice is given when the notice number 5 is selected when the change number is 8, or when the change numbers are 10 and 12. When the number 4 is selected, and when the notice number 3 is selected when the variation number is 14, it is confirmed that the jackpot confirmation effect (special timer) is executed. In this way, when the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of the double timer, the rate of appearance of the special timer described later is higher than that in the case where the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of the single timer. In addition to winning the jackpot, you will be able to have a sense of expectation that you will shift to a high-probability time-saving state and that a 16-round jackpot game will be executed. In particular, when the mode of the double timer and the mission production is executed, it becomes possible to have such a feeling of expectation even more, so it is effective to make good use of the mission production with low expectation in the first place. You will be able to create a variety of production situations.

By the way, the effect pattern (character reach + conversation notice) that appears when the variation number is 10 is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the effect pattern (character reach + cut-in) that appears when the variation numbers 11 and 12. That is as described above. However, in the table T5c referred to when in the third processing status, the variation number 10 is an effect pattern in which "mission success (special display) is displayed and then stopped by a jackpot symbol". Considering that it is "what is executed", the number of appearances and the appearance probability of the notice effect are higher than those of the variable numbers 11 and 12 (when the mission success (special display) is not displayed). When the mission success (special display) is displayed, the game interest is improved.

On the other hand, even in the SP reach (variation numbers 15, 16, 18 to 20, 22), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, almost the same relationship as the relationship of each variation number in such a character reach is set. .. However, among the SP reach, the variation number 18 corresponds to the variation number 10, and the variation numbers 19 and 20 correspond to the variation numbers 11 and 12, but unlike the case of the character reach, the hit time The number of appearances and the probability of appearance of the notice effect are higher in the change number 20 at the time of hit than in the change number 18 (the number of notices tends to increase as the change number has a higher expectation of big hit). Further, in SP reach, the appearance rate (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

As will be described later, in the SP reach in the third processing status, up to six timer target candidate effects (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation) until the symbol fluctuation is stopped. , Cut-in B, accessory B operation) has come to appear. However, when the conversation notice is selected, it functions as a big hit effect due to the success of the mission, so when six timer target candidate effects appear, a big hit confirmation notice effect appears. Therefore, in the table T5c, the maximum number of variation numbers corresponding to the SP reach at the time of loss is five (the total number of timer target candidate effects on the variable side and the number of timer target candidate effects on the advance notice side is up to five). However, the timer target candidate effect can only appear.

FIG. 157 is a fourth processing state in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5532) are made. It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5d which is referred to in the process of step S5543 in the case.

First, as shown in FIG. 157, since the table T5d is referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is executed, the variation number 1 corresponding to the variation pattern in which the advance notice side timer effect cannot be executed. The table T5d is not referred to when ~ 6 is acquired. However, since it is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the variation numbers 9, 13, and 17 corresponding to the loss variation pattern (the variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect. , 21 is also referenced in the table T5b. Therefore, in the table T5d, the production random numbers are also assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

Further, since the table T5d is also referred to when the notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of the double timer, at least two timer target candidate effects are selected separately for each variation number. Is assigned. However, for the variable number in which the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears as the effect content of the variable effect, it is not always necessary to allocate two timer target candidate effects as the effect content of the advance notice effect. One timer target candidate effect (variation numbers 9, 17) may be assigned as the effect content of the advance notice effect, or the timer target candidate effect may not be allocated (variation numbers 13, 21) according to the effect content.

Similarly, in the table T5d, among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach effect, a maximum of four timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effect of the variable numbers 7 and 8. On the other hand, a maximum of three timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effects of the variable numbers 10 to 12, and a maximum of two timer target candidate effects are assigned to the hit effects of the variable numbers 13 and 14. Is only allocated. However, in the variable numbers 7 and 8, the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice and cut-in) does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, whereas in the variable numbers 9 to 12, the effect content of the variable effect is 1. One timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in) appears, and two timer target candidate effects (conversation notice and cut-in) appear as the effect content of the variation effect for variation numbers 13 and 14. It has become. Therefore, variable numbers 9 to 12 are synonymous with substantially one more notice effect, and variable numbers 13 and 14 are substantially two more notices. It is synonymous with the fact that each production is assigned.

Then, for example, the variation number 14 is substantially synonymous with the effect random number of "1000" being assigned to the notice number 4, so that the variation numbers 7 to correspond to the character reach effect. It can be said that it is allocated so that a large number of notice effects are most likely to appear among the 14.

Even in the SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, substantially the same relationship as the relationship of each variation number in such a character reach is set. However, in SP reach, the appearance rate (average number of appearances) of the number of notices is higher than that of character reach.

In addition, in the table T5d, the effect random numbers are distributed in substantially the same manner as in the table T5c, but since they are referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the table is referred to when the mission effect is not executed. The upper limit of appearance (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effect is smaller than that of T5c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of the advance notice side timer type lottery (step S5505), it is determined whether the advance notice side timer effect is performed in either the single timer mode or the double timer mode (step). S5506), and whether it was decided to perform the mission production as a result of the first mission production lottery (step S5504) (steps S5507, S5532), the timer target candidates according to the contents (tables T5a to d). After determining the number of appearances of the effect (notice effect that can be the effect target of the timer effect on the advance notice side) (steps S5508, S5523, S5533, S5543), any type of advance notice is used as the timer target candidate effect for the determined number. Judgment processing is performed as to whether or not the effect is to appear, and which of the advance notice effects is to be the effect target of the timer effect (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

FIG. 158 shows the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506), and in the first processing situation in which the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6a-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 as a result of executing the process of step S5508 (step S5509).

For example, as shown in FIG. 158, the table T6a-1 (step S5509: number of notices 1) is referred to when it is determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the mode of a single timer. Therefore, one advance notice effect determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effect is naturally set as the effect target of the advance notice side timer effect (in the figure, the circles are the notice side timer effects). It shows that it is executed as a production target). On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (2 or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5509: number of notices N), N timer target candidate effects are used. Along with determining the advance notice effect, one of them will be determined as the effect target of the advance notice side timer effect.

In addition, when it is required to determine N (2 or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects, N-1 of them (1 in the single mode and 2 in the double mode). ) When the following number of effects are targeted for the timer effect on the advance notice side (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544), even if N same effect combinations are selected as the timer target candidate effects. , It is desirable that the jackpot expectation is different depending on which of these effects is determined as the timer effect on the advance notice side. For example, a pre-production that appears at a relatively early timing in one production pattern (for example, a conversation notice) and a post-production that appears at a relatively late timing in one production pattern (for example, character A). When is selected as the timer target candidate effect, the later effect (for example, the character A operation) is set as the advance effect (for example, the character A operation) than when the earlier effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target of the timer. It is set so that the appearance ratio of the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is higher when the timer is used as the effect target (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544).

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even when the variation number for executing "conversation notice" or "cut-in A, B" is acquired as the effect content of the variation effect, the advance notice effect is performed. "Conversation notice" and "cut-in A, B" can be decided as the content of the production. However, as a result, if it is decided that the same effect appears in both the effect content of the variable effect and the effect content of the notice effect, it is not controlled to appear separately as the effect content of the advance notice effect, and it varies. The process of setting the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A, B) that appears as the effect content of the effect as the effect target of the timer effect on the notice side is performed (steps S5509, S524, S534, S544).

For example, in the example of the table T6a-1 (notice number 1), when the "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect at the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, or the "cut" is performed at the variation numbers 11-14. When "in A" is determined as the production content of the notice production, or when "cut-in B" is determined as the production content of the notice production with the variation numbers 19 to 22, the production content of the variation production and the production of the notice production It will be decided that the same production will appear in both the content and the content. However, here, the control to appear separately as the effect content of the notice effect is not performed, and the effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) that appears as the effect content of the variable effect is set as the effect target of the timer effect on the notice side. Processing is being performed.

If it is decided to make a specific effect (conversation notice, cut-in A or cut-in B) appear in both the effect content of the variable effect and the effect content of the advance notice effect, this is separately set as the effect content of the advance notice effect. It is also possible to set the specific effect (the effect content of the advance notice effect) on the side to appear separately as the effect target of the timer effect on the advance notice side by controlling the appearance.

Further, since this table T6a-1 (number of notices 1) is referred to when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear), it is also shown in FIG. 148. As described above, when the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing the "conversation notice" are acquired as the content of the variation effect, or "conversation notice" is selected as the timer target candidate effect (content of the notice effect). In the case (PTN1), a special display (mission success) is displayed and it is definitively suggested that a jackpot symbol appears.

In this regard, in the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 at the time when the "conversation notice" is executed as the content of the variation effect, the variation numbers 8, 12, 12 at the time when the "conversation notice" is not executed as the content of the variation effect. Compared to 16 and 20, the ratio of determining "conversation notice" as the production content of the notice effect is set to be lower. That is, as described above, when the "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect at the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22, both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect produce the "conversation notice". However, when two timer effects target the same effect, basically, a big hit is expected compared to the case where two timer effects target different effects. This is because the degree is set to be low. As a result, the appearance rate of the special display (mission success) can be relatively low when both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect target the "conversation notice".

The same applies to the effect content of the variable effect other than the "conversation notice". For example, among the variable numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach, the variable number that does not execute "cut-in B" as the effect content of the variable effect. Of 15 and 16, 150 production random numbers are assigned to the variation number 15 at the time of loss, whereas 250 production random numbers are assigned to the variation number 16 at the time of hit. On the other hand, among the variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach, among the variation numbers 19 and 20 for executing "cut-in B" as the effect content of the variation effect, the variation number 19 at the time of loss has 250 production random numbers. On the other hand, only 200 production random numbers are assigned to the variable number 20 at the time of hit.

That is, in this case, if "cut-in B" is targeted only by the variable side timer effect at the variable numbers 15 and 16, both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect appear at the variable numbers 19 and 20. As a result, the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when both of these have "cut-in B" as the production target. As a result, in a situation where two timer effects are counted and displayed at the same time, whether or not those timer effects reach a predetermined value for the same effect target functions as an important effect element, and during the count display. You will be able to maintain a good game interest.

Further, among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach, the variation numbers 8, 10, 12, and 14 at the time of hitting are until the big hit symbol (special display mode) is stopped in the effect pattern (during symbol variation). In the form of a special timer that targets the effect that appears after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is stopped (for example, the probability change suggestion effect during the jackpot game or the high round suggestion effect) in the effect pattern instead of the effect that appears in. It is possible to decide to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side. This special timer will be described later, but in this embodiment, even if it is determined in the process of step S5509 to generate the special timer, the special timer may not appear, and the execution thereof may not occur. The execution mode of the special timer, including the presence or absence of the above, will be determined in the process of step S5514 later.

Here, the advance notice side timer effect may have a relatively high jackpot expectation even if the total number of counts from the start to the end of the count display is small (such as when the count display is started in the middle of the variable display). On the other hand, in the variable side timer effect, when the total number of counts from the start to the end of the count display is small, the degree of expectation suggested by the timer effect is always lower than when it is large. You may.

As will be described later, such a special timer not only definitively suggests that a jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern, but also when it appears, it is in a high-probability time-saving game state or a 16-round jackpot. It can be said that it is more useful for the player than the timer effect, which targets other effects, in that the ratio of the game being executed is relatively high. The ratio may include 100%.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the special display (mission success) appears in the mission production, the appearance rate of the special timer is higher than when the special display (mission success) does not appear. By controlling the display, the expectation when the special display (when the mission is successful) is more preferably played (steps S5509 and S5534). For example, in the table T6a-1 (number of notices 1), among the variable numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach in which the special timer can appear, the variable side timer effect (mission success) that targets the conversation notice appears. While 100 random numbers are assigned to the special timers for the variable numbers 10 and 14 at the time of hitting, the variable side timer effect (mission success) that targets the conversation notice does not appear. Only 50 production random numbers are assigned to the special timers in the fluctuation numbers 8 and 12.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if the special display (mission success) does not appear, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is performed (steps S5509, S5534), the mission effect (conversation). By controlling so that the appearance rate of the special timer is higher than when the notice is not performed (steps S5524 and S5544), the expectation when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) appears. Is played more favorably.

Further, when the timer effect is performed in the double mode of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the appearance rate of the special timer is higher than that in the case where the timer effect is performed in the double mode of only the notice side timer effect. It is set to be low. Further, even when the timer effect is performed in the triple mode of one variable side timer effect and two notice side timer effects, one of the notice side timer effects targets the same effect as the variable side timer effect. In this case, the appearance rate of the special timer is set to be lower than that in the case where the same effect is not set as the effect target for the advance timer effect and the variable timer effect.

FIG. 159 is a second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6b-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 as a result of executing the process of step S5523 (step S5524).

As shown in FIG. 159, in this table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1), among the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach in which the special timer can appear, the variation numbers 10 and 14 are shown. Fifty production random numbers are assigned, and 20 production random numbers are assigned to the variable numbers 8 and 12. In this way, when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not performed (table T6b-1), the special timer is compared with when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is performed (table T6b-1). It is clear that the appearance rate of is set to be low.

Further, since this table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1) is referred to when the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed, the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variable effect. The table T6b-1 (notice number 1) is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss variation pattern (the variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) are acquired. Therefore, in the table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1), the production random numbers are also assigned to the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

Moreover, in the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21 and 22, the variation side timer effect with the "conversation notice" as the effect content appears as the effect content of the variation effect. When "conversation notice" is selected as the effect content of, both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are executed with the "conversation notice" as the effect target. Therefore, in the table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1), when "conversation notice" is selected in the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21 and 22, "conversation notice" is selected in the other variation numbers. The production random numbers are distributed so that the expectation of big hits is lower than when "conversation notice" is selected.

The same applies to the production contents of the variable effect other than the "conversation notice". For example, the "cut-in B" in which both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect can be the target of the effect in SP reach is also obtained. Allocation is made in the same manner as in the case of the above-mentioned table T6a-1 (notice number 1).

Further, similarly, this table T6b-1 (step S5524: notice number 1) is also referred to when it is determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the mode of the single timer. One notice effect determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effect is naturally set as the effect target of the timer target effect on the notice side. On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (2 or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5524: number of notices N), N timer target candidate effects are used. The same applies to the fact that the advance notice effect is determined and one of them is determined as the effect target of the advance notice side timer effect.

In contrast to the timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5509, S5524) when the advance notice side effect timer is performed in such a single mode, the timer target advance notice lottery (step S5534,) when the advance notice side effect timer is performed in the double mode. Also in S5544), when both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are the effect targets, the big hit is compared with the case where the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are different effect targets. The production random numbers are basically distributed in the same manner, such as the point that the degree of expectation is set to be low.

FIG. 160 shows a fourth processing situation in which the mode of the double timer (NO in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5532). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6d-2 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 2 as a result of executing the process of step S5543 (step S5544).

As shown in FIG. 160, this table T6d-2f (step S5544: notice number 2) is referred to when it is determined to execute the notice side timer effect in the mode of the double timer. Therefore, both of the two advance notice effects determined to be executed as the timer target candidate effects are naturally set as the effect targets of the timer target effect on the notice side. On the other hand, although the illustration is omitted, when it is required to determine N (3 or more) notice effects as timer target candidate effects (step S5544: number of notices N), N timer target candidate effects are used. Along with determining the advance notice effect, two of them will be determined as the effect target of the advance notice side timer effect. Such processing is also executed in the timer target advance notice lottery in other production situations.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160, also in this table T6d-2f, when both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are the same effect, the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are produced. The jackpot expectation is set to be lower than when a different effect is set as the effect target.

If one of the two advance notice effects selected as the advance notice side effect timer is the same effect target as the variable side effect timer, one of the two advance notice effects selected as the special advance notice side effect timer is on the variable side. The selection ratio of the special timer is lower than when it is not the same effect target as the effect timer.

In particular, when both of the two advance notice effects selected as the advance notice side effect timers in the variation numbers 13, 14, 21, and 22 are the same effect targets as the two variable side effect timers appearing in one effect pattern. The expectation for big hits is significantly lower.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, as a result of performing such a timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5509, S5524, S5534, S5544), which effect of the timer target candidate effect appears, and the effect of the timer target effect When it is decided which target is to be selected, the count display lottery is then performed as the process of step 510.

In this count display lottery (step 510), each effect for which it is determined to appear as a timer target candidate effect is to appear at which timing in one effect pattern (variable pattern), and further, it is set as an effect target. A decision is made as to which timing within one effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) the timer effect on the advance notice side to be counted and displayed is to be executed. In this decision, when the appearance timing of the effect targeted for the effect of the timer effect on the notice side is late, the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is compared with the appearance timing of the effect targeted for the effect of the timer effect on the notice side earlier. ) Should be performed so that the appearance rate is high.

FIG. 161 is a second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variable number corresponding to the character reach is selected.

For example, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are selected in such a second processing situation, first, as an effect on the variation effect (effect pattern) side, as shown in FIG. 161.
・ During the normal production period, when the normal production is performed,
・ The normal reach production period after the decorative pattern is in the reach mode under the background during the normal production, ・ The character reach production period in which the production is progressed by switching to a background different from the normal production, and ・ The big hit It has been decided that each period, such as the symbol stop period in which the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped (big hit symbol, lost symbol), will appear sequentially within the fluctuation time of 50 seconds (the period during which the symbol changes). (Refer to the lines of "Fluctuating time" and "Fluctuating PTN effect" in the figure).

Further, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 14 is acquired, as an effect pattern, the variable side timer effect is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation and displayed for 10 seconds, and then "conversation notice" ", And after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable side timer effect is restarted and displayed for 10 seconds, and then" cut-in A "is made to appear.

As described above, even if there is one fluctuation pattern (variation number), the effect pattern is not limited to this, and the variation side timer effect is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, and this is counted and displayed for 5 seconds. It is also possible to select other production patterns such as making a "conversation notice" appear after the timer. Further, as described above, the selection of such an effect pattern has been executed before the lottery (each process shown in FIG. 149) related to the advance notice effect.

Then, in the count display lottery (step 510), it is determined in the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524) while it is said that each of these production periods appears in sequence and the production content on the variable side has been determined. It is determined at what timing the effect target of the advance notice side effect timer and the advance notice side effect timer that counts and displays toward the effect target appear. In addition to the timer target candidate effect that is the effect target of the timer target effect timer in the timer target advance notice lottery, if the timer target candidate effect that is not the effect target is further determined, the timer target candidate effect that is not the effect target is The appearance timing will also be determined by the count display lottery (step 510).

For example, when "conversation notice" is determined as the production content of the notice effect in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524), any of the conversation notices 1 to 4 is shown in FIG. It is determined whether to execute the conversation notice and the timer effect on the notice side in the manner of. In this embodiment, of the conversation notices 1 to 4 in the figure, the mode of the conversation notice 1 has the lowest expectation of a big hit, and it is selected so that the expectation of a big hit increases as the number increases. The probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of the conversation notices 1 to 4 is selected based on the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 7 to 14), and the winning of the jackpot is different. It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

However, at this time, when the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, and 14 in which the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variation effect are acquired, the advance notice effect is also performed in the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524). When "conversation notice" is decided as the production content, the mode of conversation notice 1 is always selected. In this case, apart from the conversation notice performed as the effect content of the variable effect, the conversation notice does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, and the count display of the timer effect is displayed for the conversation notice performed as the effect content of the variable effect. The control to be performed will be executed (aspect of conversation notice 1 in the figure).

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, in the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524), as the effect content of the advance notice effect, "hold". When "change" is determined, it is determined in which mode of the pending changes 1 to 5 the pending change and the timer effect on the advance notice side are executed, and "cut-in A" is determined as the effect content of the advance notice effect. If so, it is determined in which mode of cut-in A1 to 3 the cut-in A and the timer effect on the notice side are to be executed, and the "character A operation" is determined as the effect content of the above-mentioned notice effect. If so, it is determined in which mode of the accessory A operation 1 to 4 the accessory A operation and the advance timer effect are executed, and the "special timer" is determined as the effect content of the advance notice effect. In this case, it is determined which of the special timers 1 and 2 is used to execute the advance notice side timer effect.

In this embodiment, in any of the effect selections of the pending changes 1 to 5, the cut-in A effects 1 to 3, and the accessory A operations 1 to 4 in the figure, the mode with the smallest number is the highest probability of big hit. The selection probability is set so that the jackpot expectation increases as the number increases. On the other hand, the special timers 1 and 2 are all effects indicating that the jackpot symbol (special display mode) always appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 161, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, there are three timings at which the advance timer effect can appear while one effect pattern (here, character reach) is performed. Although they are prepared (at the start of fluctuation, shortly before the appearance timing of notice E2, shortly before the appearance timing of notice F), those appearance timings are for multiple types of timer target notices (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in). A, character A operation, special timer) are also used. Then, at such a plurality of appearance timings (at the start of fluctuation, shortly before the appearance timing of the notice E2, shortly before the appearance timing of the notice F), a plurality of count displays are prepared as the total number of count displays when the notice side timer effect appears ( 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 70 seconds, etc.), and no matter which of the total number of counts displayed is displayed, it is predicted which production is the production target. It is designed to be difficult to configure.

For example, as shown in FIG. 161, when the variation numbers 7 to 14 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, 10 seconds is reached at the timing slightly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the above-mentioned plurality of appearance timings. , 20 seconds, or 30 seconds, a timer effect on the notice side having the total number of count displays can appear. However, when a notice-side timer effect having a total number of 10-second count displays appears, it is difficult to predict which mode of conversation notice 3 or hold change 3 is being executed even in the character reach effect pattern. Even when the notice side timer effect having the total number of count displays for 20 seconds appears, either of the pending change 4 and the cut-in A2 is executed only in the character reach effect pattern. It is difficult to predict.

In this regard, when the notice side timer effect having the total number of count displays of 30 seconds appears at the timing that arrives shortly before the appearance timing of the notice E2 among the above-mentioned plurality of appearance timings, only the character reach effect pattern is displayed. Looking at it, only the aspect of the character A operation 2 can be executed. However, looking at the SP reach effect pattern (see FIG. 162) described later, since the mode of the character A operation 2 can be executed at the same timing from the start of the fluctuation, the appearance timing of the notice E2 is a little. Even if a notice-side timer effect with a total count display of 30 seconds appears at the timing when it arrives before, the notice-side timer effect will be displayed in any mode, including whether it is character reach or SP reach. It is difficult to predict whether it will be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to leave it unclear which effect is targeted for the effect when the timer effect on the notice side appears (the jackpot expectation differs depending on the type of effect targeted for the effect). Therefore, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained until the count display of the timer effect reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0). In this embodiment, when a timer effect on the notice side with the same total number of count displays appears at the same timing, basically (unless there is a balance with the mission effect, etc.), the effect target is the conversation notice. When the time is the lowest, the jackpot expectation is the lowest, and the jackpot expectation is set to gradually increase in the order of hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, and accessory B operation.

Further, according to the above configuration, when the advance notice side timer effect appears, a plurality of total count display numbers (the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the length of the number of seconds) are prepared at any appearance timing. , When the notice side timer effect appears, it becomes possible to make people interested in which the total number of count displays is, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest when the notice side timer effect appears. ..

In this embodiment, it is difficult to predict the effect target at the time of appearance of the timer effect on the advance notice side that appears at any timing, but the effect target is one with respect to the total number of count displays. A mode in which the effect target is set as predictable by associating only (for example, a special timer) may be included. Further, the appearance timing at which the advance notice side timer effect may appear may include an appearance timing in which only one count display total number appears.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), for convenience of explanation, when the same effect is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the effect varies in the figure. It is described as if the count display is performed for the same number of seconds in the side timer effect and the advance timer effect, or the count display is terminated at the same timing. However, as described above, in reality, even when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the end timing of each count display is made different. , One of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) and ends, while the other count display is continued.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), it is described as if the count display of the timer effect is performed in seconds, but the unit of the number appearing in the count display is "seconds". It is not limited to. Therefore, for example, the time required for the numerical change of the count display may differ between the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, and the time required for each number change in the count display appearing in the variable side timer effect is constant. It does not have to be.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 161 (character reach: number of notices 1), when the "special timer" is determined as the effect content of the advance notice effect, the advance notice side timer effect is produced in any of the special timers 1 and 2. Is to be decided. That is, in this case, when 20 seconds have passed after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (character reach) (during the execution period of the jackpot game), the count display becomes a specific numerical value (here, 0). Will reach. After that, an effect suggesting that the type of jackpot is advantageous to the player (for example, a hit type that shifts to a high-probability time-saving state, a hit type in which a 16-round jackpot game is performed, etc.) is started. However, the mode of such a special timer is set in step S5514 described later.

In this embodiment, it is determined which of the special timers 1 and 2 is selected in the count display lottery (step S5511), but the process related to this determination will be described later. It may be set in step S5514.

Further, when the count display is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, not at the timing when the variable display according to the hold information is started, it is a case where the timer look-ahead effect described later is not executed. Also, the mode (for example, in preparation for the timer) displayed in the timer look-ahead effect described later may appear (for example, appear with a predetermined probability) for a predetermined time until the count display is started.

FIG. 162 shows a second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count display lottery (step 510) performed when the variable number corresponding to SP reach is selected.

For example, when variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to SP reach are selected in such a second processing situation, first, as an effect on the variation effect (effect pattern) side, as shown in FIG. 162.
・ During the normal production period, when the normal production is performed,
-The normal reach production period after the decorative pattern is in the reach mode under the background during the normal production, -The character reach production period in which the production is progressed by switching to a background different from the normal production,
・ The decorative design is not fixed and stopped within the character reach production period, and the SP reach production period that appears in the form of further progress of the production, and ・ The decorative design is fixed and stopped so that the winning of the jackpot is shown (big hit symbol, lost symbol) It is in the processing status that it has been decided that each period, such as the symbol stop period, appears sequentially within the fluctuation time of 90 seconds (the period during which the symbol changes) (“variation time” in the figure, See the line "Fluctuating PTN Production").

Further, in this processing situation, for example, when the variation number 22 is acquired, as an effect pattern, the variable side timer effect is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation and displayed for 10 seconds, and then the "conversation notice" is displayed. ", And after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable side timer effect is restarted and displayed for 10 seconds, and then" cut-in B "is made to appear.

In this example (SP reach: number of notices 1), as in the case of the example (character reach: number of notices 1) shown in FIG. 161, even if there is one fluctuation pattern (variation number), the effect pattern is Is not limited to this, and other effect patterns such as starting the variable side timer effect after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, counting and displaying this for 5 seconds, and then displaying the "conversation notice" can be selected. ing.

Then, in this example (SP reach: number of notices 1), for example, when "conversation notice" is determined as the effect content of the notice effect in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524), the same. As shown in FIG. 162, it is determined in which of the modes 1 to 6 of the conversation notice 1 to 6 the conversation notice and the timer effect on the notice side are to be executed. In this embodiment, of the conversation notices 1 to 6 in the figure, the mode of the conversation notice 1 has the lowest expectation of a big hit, and it is selected so that the expectation of a big hit increases as the number increases. The probability is set. Therefore, in this count display lottery (step 510), one of the conversation notices 1 to 6 is selected based on the winning of the jackpot and the fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 15 to 22), and the winning of the jackpot is different. It is desirable to perform the count display lottery based on different selection tables.

However, similarly to this, when the variation numbers 17, 18, 21, 22 in which the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variation effect are acquired, the above notice is also given in the timer target notice lottery (here, step S5524). When "conversation notice" is determined as the production content of the effect, the mode of the conversation notice 1 is always selected. In this case, apart from the conversation notice performed as the effect content of the variable effect, the conversation notice does not appear as the effect content of the variable effect, and the count display of the timer effect is displayed for the conversation notice performed as the effect content of the variable effect. The control to be performed will be executed (aspect of conversation notice 1 in the figure).

Further, as shown in FIG. 162, when the variation numbers 15 to 22 corresponding to the character reach are acquired, in the timer target advance notice lottery (here, step S5524), as the effect content of the advance notice effect, "hold". When "change" is determined, it is determined in which mode of the pending changes 1 to 7 the pending change and the timer effect on the advance notice side are executed, and "cut-in A" is determined as the effect content of the advance notice effect. If so, it is determined in which mode of cut-in A1 to 5 the cut-in A and the timer effect on the advance notice side are to be executed, and the "character A operation" is determined as the effect content of the advance notice effect. If so, it is determined in which mode of the character A operation 1 to 4 the character A operation and the timer effect on the advance notice side are to be executed, and "cut-in B" is determined as the effect content of the advance notice effect. If so, it is determined in which mode of cut-in B1 to 5 the cut-in B and the timer effect on the advance notice side are to be executed, and the "character B operation" is determined as the effect content of the advance notice effect. Determines which of the accessories B operations 1 to 4 is used to execute the accessory B operation and the advance timer effect.

Even in this SP reach example, any of the effects of pending changes 1 to 7, cut-in A1 to 5, accessory A operation 1 to 4, cut-in B1 to 5, and accessory B operation 1 to 4 in the figure is selected. Also, the mode with the smallest number is the mode with the lowest expectation of big hits, and the selection probabilities are set so that the expectation of big hits increases as the number increases.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 162, six timings at which the timer effect on the advance notice side can appear while one effect pattern (here, SP reach) is performed are prepared (at the start of fluctuation, advance notice E2). Shortly before the appearance timing of, shortly before the appearance timing of the notice F, shortly before the end of the normal reach production period, within the character reach production period, the timing when the SP reach production period starts), the timer on the notice side at these timings It is the same as the case of the example shown in FIG. 161 that it is difficult to predict which effect the effect target is when the effect appears.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 162, the mode in which the effect target is set to be predictable by associating only one effect target with the total number of count displays (for example, the timer of cut-in B is 40 seconds) and the advance notice. The appearance timing at which the side timer effect can appear includes an appearance timing (for example, 10 seconds at the timing when the SP reach effect period starts) in which only one count display total number appears.

In this way, in the count display lottery (step S5510), the appearance time of the advance notice effect and the advance notice side timer effect determined in the timer target advance notice lottery is determined. In this regard, when the number of advance notice effects determined by the timer target advance notice lottery is two or more, in addition to the effects that are targeted for the advance timer effect, the appearance time of the effects that are not the target of the advance timer effect. Etc. are also decided. Further, when the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the mode of the double timer, at what timing each of the two advance notice side timer effects and the effects to be produced are made to appear (two notice side timer effects). (Including whether or not to execute the count display at the same time) will be further determined.

However, in this count display lottery (step S5510), the number of advance notice effects determined in the timer target advance notice lottery, whether or not the mode is a double timer, and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are executed. It is desirable that the appearance time of the advance notice effect and the advance notice side timer effect determined in the timer target advance notice lottery is determined in different manners depending on the processing status such as whether or not. For example, in a processing situation in which a mission production (make a conversation notice appear) is executed, if a conversation notice appears at a relatively early stage after the fluctuation starts, there is no dramatic excitement, so a comparison is made after the fluctuation starts. It is desirable to make it easier to select conversation notices that appear at a later stage. Further, in the double timer mode, two timer effects are executed when the situation in which each count display is simultaneously progressed appears, rather than when each count display is executed in a period in which the count displays do not overlap in one effect pattern. Since it is possible to give a real feeling that each count display is progressing at the same time, the selection ratio is higher when the situation where each count display is progressing at the same time appears than when the situation where each count display is progressing at the same time does not appear. It is desirable to do. Further, when the number of advance notice effects determined by the timer target advance notice lottery is two or more, the appearance time of those advance notice effects is determined so that the advance notice effects do not appear at the same time.

It should be noted that the timing at which the timer effect on the notice side can appear (for example, at the start of fluctuation, shortly before the appearance timing of notice E2, shortly before the appearance timing of notice F, shortly before the end of the normal reach production period, character reach production period Regarding the timing when the SP reach production period starts), each notice production (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation) can be performed within the period. It is desirable to set. That is, in this case, even if the advance notice effect does not appear at a specific timing, the advance notice side timer effect is started, or even if the advance notice side timer effect does not start at a specific timing, the advance notice effect is performed. It can be expected that the decline in game interest will be suppressed. In addition, since the notice effect appears at a specific timing and the effect situation in which the timer effect on the notice side is started may occur, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved. In this case, when the advance notice effect is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (at a specific timing), the advance notice effect is not executed when the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. It is desirable to set so that the rate at which the timer effect on the advance notice side is started is higher than that at the time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when the count display lottery (step S5510) is performed in this way, the mode of the advance notice side timer effect determined in the count display lottery becomes a special timer as the process of the next step S5511. Determine if it is possible.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, the timer target candidate effect (notice effect that can be the effect target of the timer effect on the notice side) is not a target. Non-target notices E1, E2, E3 and non-target notice F can be executed as a notice effect (a notice effect that cannot be the effect target of the timer effect on the notice side). Of these, the non-target notice E2 is set so that the jackpot expectation is lower than that of the non-target notice F in the situation where the count display of the notice side timer effect is not performed, whereas the notice side timer effect In the situation where the count display is performed, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than that of the non-target notice F.

In such a configuration, when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice F (second effect) is executed while the count display is not performed. While the expectation that the jackpot symbol (specific symbol mode) will appear is lower than when the timer is displayed, the count is counted when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed while the count display is being performed. The timer effect on the advance notice side (count effect) so that the expectation that the jackpot symbol (specific symbol mode) will appear is higher than when the non-target advance notice F (second effect) is executed while the display is being performed. Display) becomes feasible. Therefore, the timer effect on the notice side (the non-target notice E2 (during the execution period of the count display)) in which the count display is performed in such a way that the expectation level when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears is greatly increased. The timer effect) at which the first effect) is started and ended is referred to as a "special timer".

That is, in this case, while the count display is not performed, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) functions as an effect with a lower expectation than the non-target notice F (second effect), whereas the count display is displayed. While it is being performed, the non-target notice E2 (first production) functions as a production with a higher degree of expectation than the non-target notice F (second production). Therefore, although it is a non-target notice E2 (first effect) that is not originally related to the effect target of the timer effect (count effect display) on the notice side, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is before the count display is digested. It becomes possible to make people interested in whether or not one production) appears, and by doing so, it is possible to maintain the game interest during the period until the count display is digested and the predetermined production (timer target candidate production) is performed. It will be expected to be planned.

In addition, when the count display is started with the total number of counts with a small number of timer effects on the notice side, the jackpot expectation is set to be lower than when the count display is started with the total number of counts with a large number of timer effects on the notice side. By realizing the control applied to such a special timer, even if the notice side timer effect starts the count display with a small total number of counts, the non-target notice E2 is executed while the count display is being executed. It becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer will appear, and it will be possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. In this sense, if the non-target notice E2 appears while the count display is being executed, the premier mode in which the jackpot is confirmed in the subsequent effects (conversation notice, cut-in, character movement, etc.) that are the targets of the timer effect. It is desirable to control so that the rate of appearance of is high. The ratio may include 100%.

In this embodiment, the non-target notices E1 to E3 are executed as so-called step effects, and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is conditional on the appearance of the non-target notice E1. It is supposed to be able to appear in. Further, the non-target notice E3 can appear on condition that the non-target notices E1 and E2 appear respectively, and in this embodiment, the jackpot symbol always appears when the non-target notice E3 appears. I am trying to do it. According to such a configuration, if the non-target notice E1 (specific effect) appears while the count display of the notice side timer effect is being performed, it is necessary to make people interested in whether the non-target notice E2 appears. It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment during the count digestion period.

However, the non-target notices E1 to E3 do not necessarily have to be executed as a so-called step effect, and are not necessary for realizing the above-mentioned effect relationship between the non-target notice E2 and the non-target notice F. Target notices E1 and E3 do not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the order is such that the non-target notice F appears after the non-target notice E2 (first effect) appears, but the order is not limited to this. The target notice E2 (first production) may appear. In short, the non-target notice E2 may be the one that appears first in all the notice effects, or may be the one that appears last in all the notice effects, and the appearance timing thereof. May be set appropriately. Further, the non-target notice E2 may be an image related (suggested) to the type of reach effect executed in the variable display.

Further, when the non-target notice E2 is not realized as a so-called step effect, it is desirable that the non-target notice E2 is performed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations. At this time, when the non-target notice E2 appears in the mode with the highest jackpot expectation, the jackpot expectation may be higher than the non-target notice F even if the count display is not performed. .. However, when comparing the jackpot expectation that can be expected when the non-target notice E2 appears (expectation including all aspects) in the situation where the count display is not performed and the jackpot expectation that can be expected when the non-target notice F appears. , It is required that the jackpot expectation is higher when the non-target notice F appears.

In this regard, when the non-target notice E2 appears in the situation where the count display is performed (in the case of the special timer), the non-target notice E2 appears in any of a plurality of modes including the mode in which the jackpot expectation is low. It is desirable that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of the non-target notice F regardless of which aspect appears. That is, in this case, even though the non-target notice E2 is executed in a mode in which the jackpot expectation is low, a production situation in which the jackpot expectation is dramatically increased is created. Even if the appearance may be disappointing for a moment, it is expected that the game will be improved as a surprise by confirming that the count display is being executed. In this sense, the non-target notice E2 can be executed in a mode with a low jackpot expectation even in such a special timer situation, and then the non-target notice E2 is executed in any mode including the low mode. Even if is executed (furthermore, it is desirable that the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is the same regardless of whether or not other notice effects have occurred). The degree of expectation may include 100%. However, even in this case, when the non-target notice E2 appears in the situation where the count display is performed, it is desirable to set so that the highly expected aspect among the plurality of aspects is likely to appear.

Further, when executing the count display straddling the non-target notice E2, for example, the same number (for example, even if the count display is started with any of different total counts (for example, "10" and "5")). It is desirable to control so that the non-target notice E2 appears when "1") is set. At this time, among the candidates for the total number of counts (for example, "20", "10", "5") appearing at the start of the count display, less than half of the candidates with the smallest total number of counts (for example, "5"). It is desirable to control so that the non-target notice E2 appears when the number (a number less than 2.5) is reached. In this way, by preventing the non-target notice E2 from appearing until the count display is completely digested, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest in the period until the count display is completely digested.

The non-target notice F may also be made executable in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, but in the situation of the special timer, the non-target notice F has the highest jackpot expectation. Even if it appears in a mode, it is required to set the non-target notice F so that the jackpot expectation is not higher than that of the non-target notice E2 (for example, the mode with the lowest jackpot expectation).

Further, the non-target notice E2 may be made to appear at any of a plurality of timings from the time when the variable display is started. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears with the same total number of counts at the same timing, there will be a case where the non-target notice E2 is straddled and a case where the count display is not straddled. It will be expected to be maintained.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the variable side timer effect, the non-target notice E2 appears in the candidates that can be selected as the execution mode (effect pattern) within the execution period of the count display. Such aspects are not included.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, when it is determined in the process of step S5511 that the mode of the advance notice side timer effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) can be a special timer, step S5512 When the first timer non-target notice lottery is performed and it is determined that the mode of the notice side timer effect determined in the count display lottery (step S5510) cannot be a special timer, the process of step S5525 is performed. As a result, a second timer non-target notice lottery will be held.

The case where it is determined that the timer can be a special timer is, for example, in the example shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, the effect mode shown in bold and diagonal characters among a plurality of effect modes (for example, FIG. This is the case when the conversation notices 2 and 3 shown in 161, the pending changes 2 to 4, the cut-in A1 and 2 and the character movements 1 and 2) are selected, and whether or not the effect mode can be a special timer. Is pre-classified.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the table T7a referred to in the first timer non-target notice lottery (step S5512), and FIG. 164 is a diagram referred to in the second timer non-target notice lottery (step S5525). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T7b.

As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164, in the timer non-target notice lottery (steps S5512 and S5525), the timer cannot be the target of the notice side timer effect based on the big hit winning result, the fluctuation pattern (variation number), and the like. A determination process is performed as to which of the non-target effects E1 to E3 and F prepared as the effect is to be executed.

Of these, in the table T7a (first timer non-target notice lottery) referred to at the time of the special timer, the notice E2 is given as compared with the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when the special timer is not. The jackpot expectation when the mode to be executed (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected is significantly high. More specifically, when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) for executing the notice E2 is selected, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the mode (PTN5, 6) for executing the notice F is selected. ing.

On the other hand, in the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when the timer is not a special timer, the notice F is executed when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) for executing the notice E2 is selected. The jackpot expectation is lower than when the aspects (PTNs 5 and 6) are selected.

In this embodiment, when the table T7a referenced at the time of the special timer and the table T7b referenced at the time of not the special timer are compared, when the mode (PTN3, 4, 8) for executing the notice E2 is selected. There is a change in the distribution of the production random numbers and there is a change in the jackpot expectation, but when the mode (PTN5, 6) for executing the notice F is selected, the jackpot expectation does not change, and even the distribution of the production random numbers changes. Is the same.

According to the effect by such a special timer, when the count display is executed in the mode of straddling the non-target notice E2 (the mode of the special timer), the mode of straddling the non-target notice F without straddling the non-target notice E2 (the mode of straddling the non-target notice E2). Compared to the case where the count display is executed in a mode that is not a special timer), the rate at which a highly expected effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol effect is stopped. The ratio will be increased.

Furthermore, when both the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) are executed in the one symbol effect in which the count effect is not executed, the count effect is not executed. In the production, the non-target notice F (second effect) is not executed and the ratio of the jackpot symbol appearing is higher than when the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed. Even if (second effect) is not executed and the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed within one symbol effect, the count effect is performed in the first mode straddling the non-target notice E2 (first effect). Is executed, both the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) are executed within one symbol effect, and the non-target notice F (second effect) is straddled. The rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when the count effect is executed in the two modes.

That is, in this case, even if the "non-target notice E2 (first effect)" and the "count effect" are executed symbol effects, the count effect is "non-target notice E2 (first effect)". Is it straddling, or is it not straddling "non-target notice E2 (first production)" and is originally executed to suggest that the degree of expectation has risen further "non-target notice F (second production)" The degree of expectation is higher when "non-target notice F (second effect)" is not performed than when "non-target notice F (second effect)" is performed in one design production. Will be higher. Therefore, a production (conversation notice, pending change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in) different from any of the production targets of the count production (non-target notice E2 (first production) and non-target notice F (second production)). Although it is not set to (B, character B movement, etc.) and is not originally related to the non-target notice E2 (first effect) or non-target notice F (second effect), "the count effect is ended. "Does the non-target notice E2 (first production) appear before?" Or "Even if the non-target notice E2 (first production) appears after the count production is finished, the non-target notice F (first production) will appear after that. It becomes possible to make people interested in "whether two productions) will be executed further", and this will allow the game to be enjoyed during the period until the count display is digested and the predetermined production (timer target candidate production) is performed. It will be expected to be maintained.

In this embodiment, when the count effect straddles the non-target notice E2 (first effect) which is not executed as the effect target of the count effect, it is not executed as the effect target of the count effect. The relationship between the non-target notice F (second production) when the count production straddles the expectation is reversed from the relationship between the expectation when the count production does not straddle. However, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) may be executed as the effect target of the count effect. According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed, the color rendering property as to whether or not the count effect straddles the non-target notice E2 (first effect) or the non-target notice F (second effect). Will also be added.

Further, either one of the non-target notice E2 (first effect) and the non-target notice F (second effect) can be executed as the effect target of the count effect, and the other is executed as the effect target of the count effect. It may be something that does not occur.

In addition, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), the jackpot expectation is higher than when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect), which is advantageous to the player. It may be configured so that the rate of transition to a different gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state, etc.) is high. At this time, the rate of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player (high-probability time-saving gaming state, etc.) may be 100%.

Further, as described above, the counting effect is executed in any one of a plurality of modes (total number of counts, display mode, timing at which counting is started, etc.). In this regard, the count effect of a specific mode may be executed so as to straddle the notice E2 (first effect) and not the notice F (second effect), or straddle the notice E2 (first effect). Moreover, it is desirable that the execution is performed so that there is at least a case where the execution is performed so as to straddle the notice F (second effect). According to such a configuration, for example, even if the counting effect of the same number of seconds is started, either the case where only the notice E2 (first effect) is straddled or the case where only the notice F (second effect) is straddled. Since it becomes possible to advance the count effect while it is unknown whether the count effect is the same, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the period in which the count effect is being executed.

Furthermore, regarding the counting effect of a specific mode, there are cases where the count effect is executed so as to straddle the notice E2 (first effect) and not the notice F (second effect), and a case where the notice E2 (first effect) is straddled. In addition to the case where it is executed so as to straddle the notice F (second effect), there is also a case where it is executed so that neither the notice E2 (first effect) nor the notice F (second effect) is straddled. It is desirable to have it. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) will appear over the entire period from the start to the end of the count effect. become able to. In this case, the notice E2 (first effect) and the notice F (second effect) may appear within the same symbol variation in which the count effect of the specific mode is executed, but within the same symbol variation. It may not appear in.

Further, in this embodiment, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect). It was configured as follows. However, when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect), it is desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears does not change regardless of the mode in which the count effect is executed. .. According to such a configuration, it became possible to provide a completely independent effect that is not affected by the effect such as "which mode appears as the count effect", and the count effect was executed. It becomes possible to suitably enhance the color rendering of the time.

On the other hand, when the count effect straddles the notice F (second effect), the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears may change depending on which mode the count effect is executed. desirable. According to such a configuration, depending on whether the target of the count effect is the notice E2 (first effect) or the notice F (second effect), the mode as the count effect becomes the jackpot expectation degree. Since it becomes possible to make the effectability different, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained during the period during which the count effect is being performed.

However, even if the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) is the most promising mode among the plurality of modes, the expectation level when the count effect straddles the notice E2 (first effect) is exceeded. It is desirable not to have them, for example, to have the same expectations. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Further, among the counting effects of the plurality of modes, at least some of the counting effects are configured so as to straddle the notice F (second effect) but not the notice E2 (first effect). It is desirable to do. In this way, the number of modes as a count effect that can straddle the notice E2 (first effect) is made smaller than the number of modes as a count effect that can straddle the notice F (second effect). By doing so, it becomes possible to suggest the possibility of straddling the notice F (second effect) depending on which mode the count effect is performed. However, it is desirable to prepare at least two or more modes of the count effect that can straddle the notice E2 (first effect).

Further, the notice F (second effect) is executed before the notice E2 (first effect), and the notice E2 (first effect) is issued after the notice F (second effect) is completed. As described above, it may be executed. At this time, when the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) is executed, the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) is executed, but the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) is executed. It is desirable to increase the proportion of count effects that straddle the notice E2 (first effect). According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed, even if it ends straddling the notice F (second effect) instead of the notice E2 (first effect), the notice E2 (first effect) is performed. It becomes possible to expect that the straddling count effect will appear further, and the game entertainment can be maintained favorably.

Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment executes the effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination. In this respect, even if the effect pattern is such that the advance notice F (second effect) does not appear, it is desirable that the advance notice E2 (first effect) and the count effect straddling the notice E2 (first effect) can appear respectively. According to such a configuration, even if the notice F (second effect) does not appear, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the count effect straddling the notice E2 (first effect) will appear. Will be. However, when the notice F (second effect) does not appear, the notice E2 (first effect) is given as compared with the case where the notice F (second effect) is executed but the count effect straddling the notice F (second effect) does not appear. It is desirable that the ratio of straddling count effects appearing is low.

In addition, regarding the fact that a plurality of modes are prepared as modes of the count effect (total number of counts, display mode, timing at which the count is started, etc.) that can straddle the notice F (second effect). As described above, even when the count effect is executed in any of the plurality of modes, the notice F (second effect) is not necessarily executed within the period during which the count effect is executed. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, even when the count effect is executed in a desired mode, whether or not the notice F (second effect) appears within the period during which the count effect is executed is also determined. It becomes possible to have fun, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the counting effect is being performed.

In addition, regarding the fact that a plurality of modes of the count effect (total number of counts, display mode, timing at which the count is started, etc.) that can straddle the notice E2 (first effect) are prepared. As described above, when the count effect is executed in any of the plurality of modes, it is desirable to ensure that the notice E2 (first effect) is executed within the period during which the count effect is executed. .. According to such a configuration, when the count effect is executed in a desired mode, it is suggested in advance that the count effect greatly increases the degree of expectation across the notice E2 (first effect). Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably improve the game entertainment while the count effect is being performed.

Then, when the timer non-target notice lottery (first timer non-target notice lottery, second timer non-target notice lottery) is performed in this way and which of the non-target notices to be executed is determined, then step S5513 It is determined whether or not the state is determined to execute the above-mentioned special timer as the process of.

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, in the situation where the reach effect (character reach) of a specific type is selected, the notice side timer is based on the result of the jackpot determination (winning, fluctuation pattern, etc.). It is possible to execute a control that starts the effect (count effect display) and continues the count display even after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern (effect display). That is, in this case, the count display will continue even after the effect pattern (effect display) according to the result of the jackpot determination is completed and hidden, so that a special symbol is used from the remaining time of the count display. It has become difficult to predict the fluctuation time (type of reach) of, for example, a production in which the count display started during the symbol fluctuation is involved in the production during the jackpot game state after the symbol is stopped is realized. It will be possible to make the subsequent production development interesting.

More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, first, the start interval period of the jackpot game and the jackpot game after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, after the symbol is fixed and stopped). In the period), the number of rounds (16 rounds) with a large expected value of the amount that can be obtained as a prize when it appears and the first special production where the proportion of winning the type that shifts to the high probability time saving game state increases when it appears The second special effect, which is executed at a high rate, can be executed. It should be noted that these ratios may include 100%. Then, the timer effect on the advance notice side, which targets the effect started after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears, is started before the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears and is counted. It is decided to control the display to be continuously executed even after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears.

That is, in this case, the count display of the advance notice side timer effect started before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears is not ended when the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, and the jackpot symbol (special display mode) When a specific numerical value (here, 0) is reached after continuous execution even after the appearance of, the first special effect or the second special effect will appear. Therefore, when such a special timer appears, it definitely suggests that a jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in the effect pattern, and when it appears, it is in a high-probability time-saving game state or a 16-round jackpot game. Since the rate at which is executed is relatively high, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

However, in order to realize such a special timer, first of all, the big hit is won by the big hit judgment, and the big hit is a specific type (a type that generates a high-probability time-saving game state or a 16-round big hit game. It is possible to control so that a special timer appears with a higher execution probability than when it is determined that it is not the specific type. Desired.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when the execution of the above-mentioned special timer is determined in the process of step S5513, the execution of whether or not to cause the special timer to appear is executed next as the process of step S5514. The execution mode of the special timer is determined including the presence or absence.

For example, in the process of step S5514, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot is a specific type (a type that generates a high-probability time-saving game state or a type that generates a 16-round jackpot game). As a result, when the jackpot is not of a specific type, it is determined that the special timer will not appear with a predetermined probability. Therefore, when the special timer appears, the expectation that the jackpot is of a specific type is increased by the amount thinned out in this way. You will be able to do it. The degree of expectation may be 100%. Further, when it is decided not to make the special timer appear, another notice effect (timer target candidate effect, non-target notice) or the advance timer effect may be made to appear instead of the special timer.

In this embodiment, in the process of step S5514 after once determining that the special timer is to be executed in the timer target advance notice lottery, the type of jackpot is determined and the special timer is executed based on the result. It was decided to decide again whether or not to do so, but in addition to winning the big hit, by making the timer target advance notice lottery based on the type of big hit, whether to execute the special timer in the process of step S5514 It may not be decided again whether or not it is.

In addition, for the first special effect or the second special effect after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears (for example, the start interval period of the big hit game or the big hit game period after the symbol is fixed and stopped), the big hit is It may be executed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations, which is a special type. That is, in this case, when the count display reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0) when the special timer appears, the first special effect or the second special effect is executed in the highly expected mode among the plurality of modes. It will be.

Further, in this embodiment, with respect to the effect (first special effect or second special effect) after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, a predetermined time has elapsed since the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears. Although it was decided to make it appear at the timing (in the example shown in FIG. 161, the timing when 20 seconds have passed), a plurality of timings (for example, the first when 15 seconds have passed) after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears. It may be made to appear at the timing and the second timing after 30 seconds have passed. That is, in this case, as the special timer, the first mode in which a specific numerical value (here, 0) is reached when 15 seconds have passed (or shortly before) after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, and the jackpot symbol. When 30 seconds have passed (or shortly before) after the appearance of the (special display mode), one of the second mode, which reaches a specific numerical value (here, 0), is selected and made to appear.

At this time, it is set so that the ratio of obtaining a special type of jackpot is higher when the effect appears at the second timing than when the effect appears at the first timing, and the jackpot is a specific type. Occasionally, if the execution is performed so that the ratio of the special timer appearing in the second aspect is higher than that in the first aspect, how long the count display after the big hit symbol (special display mode) appears is continued. It will be possible to add fun. It should be noted that these ratios may include 100%. By the way, if the effect does not appear at either the first timing and the second timing, the ratio of obtaining the special type of jackpot will be set lower than when the effect appears at the first timing. ..

Further, regarding the special timer, in the execution period of the fluctuation display before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, for example, "timer is being prepared" is displayed, and the "timer is being prepared" is displayed. The count display may be started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is made to appear while the jackpot symbol is displayed. That is, during the jackpot game, the time required to digest each round game fluctuates according to the progress of the game, so that during the execution period of the variable display before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears. If the count display is started, it is difficult to set the count display of the special timer to reach a predetermined value during a specific round game, and further to start the effect to be the effect target. In this regard, if the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, for example, the state of "timer preparing" is maintained until a specific round game during the jackpot game is started. Then, by starting the count display when the specific round game is started, the count display reaches a predetermined value during the specific round game, and the effect to be the production target is executed. It will be possible to set to. At this time, it is possible not to display "timer is being prepared" or the like until the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) is displayed.

Further, when the count display is started after the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears in this way, it is different even during the execution period of the variable display before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears. The count display of the timer effect on the advance notice side may be started. Regarding the other notice-side timer effect, the effect that the count display is completely digested and becomes the effect target appears before the jackpot symbol (special display mode) appears, or the jackpot symbol (special display mode) may be produced. After the appearance of the special display mode), the count display may be completely digested and the effect to be produced may appear (double special timer).

It should be noted that different effects appear between the effect during the variable display and the effect during the big hit game, and usually, an effect at the time of effect switching (for example, an opening effect) different from any of the effects is executed between them. Often done. In this regard, after setting the count display so that the count display does not reach a predetermined value in any timer effect within the switching period in which the effect at the time of such effect switching is executed, the count display is hidden within the switching period. It is desirable to make the player aware that the two effects (here, the effect during the variable display and the effect during the jackpot game) are not connected to each other. However, in this case, even while the count display of the timer effect is hidden, the count display is digested by the amount of time that has passed, and when the count display is displayed again, it is hidden. It is desirable to control the value so that it is less than the value of (a value that is large when counting up, not counting down).

Then, when the execution mode of the special timer is determined in this way (step S5514) or the execution of the special timer is not determined (NO in step S5513), the timer target advance notice lottery or count is then performed as the process of step S5515. After setting the notice effect determined by the display lottery or the like in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the notice lottery is terminated. As a result, drawing data or the like corresponding to the effect determined in the advance notice lottery is created, and control is performed to start each effect at the timing when each effect should appear in the process during the change of the effect symbol.

On the other hand, after the second mission effect lottery (step S5551) in the case where it is determined that the advancer timer effect has not been won (NO in step S5503), various lottery related to the advancer timer effect (notice side) Timer target candidate production (notice) according to the content (table) according to whether it was decided to perform the mission production as a result of the second mission production lottery without performing the timer type lottery, single lottery, etc. An effect lottery (steps S5553, S5554, S5563, S5564) is performed for a notice effect that can be an effect target of the side timer effect.

More specifically, one of the following processes will be executed.
-When the fifth processing status is such that the timer effect on the notice side is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (YES in step S5552). First, based on the advance notice number determination table referred to when in the fifth processing status, how many timer target candidate effects are used as the effect contents of the advance notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. A determination process for whether or not to appear is performed (step S5553). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of advance notice effect appears as the timer target candidate effect for the number determined by the determination process (step S5554).

-When the sixth processing status is such that the timer effect on the notice side is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is made (NO in step S5552). First, based on the advance notice number determination table referred to when the sixth processing status is in effect, how many of the timer target candidate effects are used as the effect contents of the advance notice effect during the execution of one effect pattern. A determination process for whether or not to appear is performed (step S5563). Next, a determination process is performed as to which type of advance notice effect appears as the timer target candidate effect for the number determined by the determination process (step S5564).

Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 153, even in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the advance notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503), the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed. When the decision is made to that effect, the maximum number of appearances (average number of appearances) of the timer target candidate effects will be larger than when the decision to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not made. I try to control it.

FIG. 165 shows a fifth processing state in which it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5e which is referred to in the process of step S5553 when it is. Further, in FIG. 166, it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T5f which is referred in the process of step S5563 when it is in a process state.

First, as shown in FIG. 165, since the table T5e is referred to when the mission effect is executed, the loss variation pattern that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect (the mission cannot succeed). The table T5e is not referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the variation pattern) are acquired. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 166, since the table T5f is referred to when the mission effect is not executed, the loss variation pattern that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect (the mission can succeed). The table T5f is also referred to when the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to (no variation pattern) are acquired. Therefore, in the table T5f, the production random numbers are also assigned to the variable numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 separately for each notice number.

Further, both the table T5e and the table T5f are referred to when the advance notice side timer effect is not executed in the fifth and sixth processing situations, and in these processing situations, the advance notice side timer effect effect is produced. It is not essential to select one of the timer target candidate effects that can be the target. Therefore, in both the table T5e and the table T5f, an effect random number is assigned to each variation number so that the timer target candidate effect does not necessarily have to be selected (notice number 0).

In addition, among the same reach effects (character reach and SP reach) on the table T5e and table T5f, the variable numbers that do not show the timer target candidate effect (conversation notice or cut-in A) as the effect content of the variable effect will change. As the production content of the production, the timer target candidate production (conversation notice and cut-in A) does not appear. Compared to the variable number, the ratio of selecting a large number of timer target candidate productions is higher, and the character at the time of loss With variable number 7 which is reach, only up to 3 timer target candidate effects can appear, and with variable number 15 which is SP reach at the time of loss, only up to 5 timer target candidate effects can appear. The points that are not performed are the same as those of the above-mentioned table T5a and the like.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, how many of the timer target candidate effects are made to appear as the effect contents of the advance notice effect in the fifth and sixth processing situations in which the advance notice side timer effect is not executed. After the determination process (steps S5553, S5563) is performed, the determination process (steps S5554, S5564) for which type of advance notice effect is to appear as the timer target candidate effect is performed for the determined number. .. However, if it is determined that none of the timer target candidate effects will appear as a result of the above-mentioned advance notice number determination process (steps S5553, S5563) (notice number 0), the timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5554, S5564) Regardless of the variation number, one processing result that does not select any timer target candidate effect is always selected.

FIG. 167 shows a fifth processing state in which it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6e-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 (step S5554) as a result of executing the process of step S5553. Further, in FIG. 168, it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is executed (YES in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6e-2 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 2 as a result of executing the process of step S5553 in the process situation (step S5554).

Further, in FIG. 169, it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6f-1 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 1 as a result of executing the process of step S5563 in a process situation (step S5564). Further, in FIG. 170, it is determined that the advance notice side timer effect is not executed (NO in step S5503) and the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed (NO in step S5552). It is a figure which shows an example of the table T6f-2 which is referred to when it is decided to set the notice number to 2 as a result of executing the process of step S5563 in a process situation (step S5564).

For example, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, when it is determined that the tables T6e and T6f referred to in the fifth and sixth processing states do not execute the advance timer effect. Since they are referenced, none of the N advance notice effects determined to be executed as timer target candidate effects are set as effect targets for the timer target effect on the notice side, and all of them are normal. It will be executed as the mode of the advance notice effect (in the figure, the x mark indicates that it is executed as the mode of the normal advance notice effect).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, in the tables T6e and T6f referred to in the fifth and sixth processing states, the same effect is produced by the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect. Since it is not targeted, it is executed when the variation numbers 9, 10, 13, 14, 17, 18, 21 and 22, which correspond to the variation pattern that causes the conversation notice to appear as the effect content of the variation effect, are acquired. Random numbers are assigned to each variable number so that the conversation notice is not selected as the notice effect to be performed. Similarly, in the tables T6e and T6f, the variation numbers 11 to 14, 19 to correspond to the loss variation pattern (variation pattern in which the mission cannot succeed) in which the cut-ins A and B appear as the effect content of the variation effect. When 22 is acquired, an effect random number is assigned to each variation number so that the cut-ins A and B are not selected as the advance notice effects to be executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 167 to 170, the tables T6e and T6f referred to in the fifth and sixth processing states are referred to when the advance timer effect is not executed. Therefore, the advance notice effect to be selected does not include the effect (here, the special timer) on the premise that the advance notice side timer effect is performed.

In addition, the table T6e, which is referred to when in the fifth processing status, is referred to when it is decided to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear). Therefore, FIG. 148 shows. As shown at the same time, when the variation numbers 10, 14, 18, and 22 for executing the "conversation notice" are acquired as the content of the variation effect, or as the timer target candidate effect (content of the notice effect), the "conversation notice" is displayed. "(PTN1) is the same as in the case of Table 6a described above in that a special display (mission success) is displayed and it is definitively suggested that a jackpot symbol appears.

Further, in the table T6f referred to when in the sixth processing status, since the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) is not executed, the conversation notice appears as the effect content of the variable effect. Table 6a described above shows that the production random numbers are also assigned to the variation numbers 9, 13, 17, and 21 corresponding to the loss variation patterns (variation patterns in which the mission cannot succeed). It is the same as the case of.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149, even when it is determined not to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side in the process of step S5503, after the timer target advance notice lottery (steps S5554, S5564) is performed in this way, Which of the non-target effects E1 to E3 and F, which is prepared as an effect that cannot be the effect target of the timer effect on the notice side based on the winning result of the big hit and the fluctuation pattern (variation number), is to be executed. The determination process (third timer non-target notice lottery: step S5555) is performed.

Although the table referred to in step S5555 is omitted, it basically has the same mode as the table T7b (second timer non-target notice lottery) referred to when it is not a special timer. For example, a notice. When the mode for executing E2 (PTN3, 4, 8) is selected, the jackpot expectation is lower than when the mode for executing the notice F (PTN5, 6) is selected.

Then, after the third timer non-target notice lottery (step S5555) is performed in this way, the timer target notice lottery (steps S5554, S5564) and the third timer non-target notice lottery (step S5554) and the third timer non-target notice lottery (step S5554) are then processed as steps S5515. After setting the advance notice effect determined in step S5555) or the like in a predetermined storage area, the process related to the advance notice lottery ends. As a result, drawing data or the like corresponding to the effect determined in the advance notice lottery is created, and control is performed to start each effect at the timing when each effect should appear in the process during the change of the effect symbol.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when it is determined in the process of step S5503 that the timer effect on the advance notice side is not executed, the timer target advance notice lottery and the third timer non-target advance notice lottery are processed separately. I decided to do it as. However, if it is decided not to execute the advance notice side timer effect in the process of step S5503, it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effect E1 to E3 and F in relation to the advance notice side timer effect. The timer target advance notice lottery and the third timer non-target advance notice lottery may be executed within one lottery process.

Further, the mode of the special timer described above (the non-target notice E2 is set so that the jackpot expectation is lower than that of the non-target notice F in the situation where the count display of the timer effect on the notice side is not performed. , In the situation where the count display of the timer effect on the notice side is performed, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than that of the non-target notice F). Since it is not necessary to determine the execution mode of the non-target effects E1 to E3 and F, the timer target advance notice lottery and the third timer non-target advance notice lottery may be executed within one lottery process.

Further, in this embodiment, after determining whether or not to execute the timer effect on the advance notice side, it is decided to perform a determination process as to which effect is to be executed as the advance notice effect and in what mode. After deciding in what mode the effect of the above is to be executed, whether or not to execute the timer effect on the warning side and the execution mode may be determined.

By the way, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, when a prize (acceptance of a game ball) occurs in the start ports 2002 and 2004, whether to perform a look-ahead effect on the hold information according to the prize. Judgment processing for whether or not is performed (steps S5245, S5255). In this regard, in this determination process, the display mode (color, form, etc.) of the hold display, which is the target of the look-ahead effect, is changed based on the information on the winning / failing of the jackpot judgment and the fluctuation pattern included in the hold information. Lottery for change effects (lottery for presence / absence of execution and display mode), lottery for look-ahead zone production that spans multiple fluctuations (lottery for presence / absence of execution, execution mode (color, number of continuous executions, etc.)), etc. In addition to this, a lottery will be held as to whether or not the variable display according to the pending information is subject to the "timer look-ahead effect".

Here, the timer look-ahead effect is an effect in which the rate at which the timer effect on the advance notice side appears within the fluctuation time becomes high when the fluctuation display (variation display of the effect target) that was in the pending state when it appears is being executed. For example, in the effect display device 1600 or the like, a predetermined image (for example, "timer is being prepared" is set at the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol that is started after the winning timing (timing when the timer look-ahead effect is won). ”, Etc.) is displayed. The reason why a predetermined image (for example, "timer is being prepared") does not appear at the winning timing (timing when the timer look-ahead effect is won) is that the player side determines which hold information corresponds to the timer look-ahead effect. This is to make it difficult to recognize.

According to such a timer look-ahead effect, it can be suggested that the rate of appearance of the notice side timer effect is high over a plurality of variable displays while it is unspecified which hold display is supported. Since it will be possible, it will be expected to maintain the game interest over multiple variable displays. However, among the preceding effects (look-ahead effects), including such timer look-ahead effects, a type that continuously (or continues) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. When executing a production (preceding period production), if the same type of production (preceding period production) and its execution period overlap, the production becomes too complicated and what is the target / purpose. There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline because it is not possible to understand whether it is a production.

Therefore, in determining whether or not to execute such a preceding period effect (pre-reading determination at the time of winning), the preceding period effect according to the other pending information that has been won earlier is not executed and is waiting to be executed. Make a judgment as to whether or not it is in the state of. Then, the advance period effect such as the timer look-ahead effect is newly added, at least on condition that the advance period effect according to the other pending information that has been won earlier is not executed and is not in the state of waiting for execution. It is possible to make a judgment to the effect that it will occur in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the two preceding period effects from being executed in an overlapping manner, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

As the preceding period effect, for example, in addition to the timer look-ahead effect, a homomorphic continuous look-ahead effect in which at least a part of the stop symbol appears in the same mode (color of a number, etc.) over a plurality of fluctuations, and a background image over a plurality of fluctuations. It is possible to adopt a look-ahead zone effect or the like that changes the mode to a special mode. Then, in the above processing (pre-reading determination at the time of winning), among these preceding period effects, the preceding period effects of the same type do not appear in an overlapping manner, and even if they are different types of preceding period effects, these execution periods are executed. Will be controlled so that they do not overlap. Of the look-ahead effects, for the type of effect (for example, hold change effect) that is performed over multiple variable displays by specifying which hold display is supported, the execution status of these preceding period effects. It is desirable to be able to appear regardless of the situation, but if a new prize is generated while the preceding period production is being executed or waiting to be executed, a new prize will be generated when it is not in that situation. It is desirable to perform the look-ahead determination at the time of winning so that the appearance ratio of the type of effect (for example, hold change effect) is lower as the look-ahead effect according to the prize.

In this way, while a preceding period effect such as a timer look-ahead effect (a type of effect that continuously (or continues) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported) is being executed. Is a game in which even if a new prize is generated for a game ball, the two preceding period effects interfere with each other by performing a prohibition control to prevent this from occurring for the corresponding preceding period effect. It will be possible to suppress the decline in interest. However, if such prohibition control is performed, the frequency of the preceding period production being performed as the preceding production is reduced by the amount that the preceding period production is subject to the prohibition control, and there is a concern that the game interest may be reduced. NS.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the preceding period effect corresponding to the hold information is executed while the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold information has not been started yet, a specific effect is first obtained. Set information indicating that you are in a restricted situation. Then, if the hold information is newly stored while the hold information is set by the previously stored hold information, at least the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored hold information is terminated. Until then, the preceding period effect corresponding to the newly stored hold information is not executed, while the above-mentioned newly stored after the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the previously stored hold information is completed. It is decided to control so that the preceding period production corresponding to the pending information can be executed.

That is, in this case, even if it is once determined that the execution of the preceding period effect corresponding to the reserved information is not permitted at the time when the reserved information is newly stored, the game is progressed and stored first. When the game situation is such that there is no concern that the production interference with the preceding period production corresponding to the pending information will occur, the execution of the above-mentioned preceding period production once determined that the execution is not permitted is permitted. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the frequency with which the preceding period production is performed while performing the prohibition control for the preceding period production, and thereby it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

More specifically, in the first special figure look-ahead process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure look-ahead process (FIG. 136: step S5255) when a new prize is generated, first, the first special hold The number of the new winning order (digestion order) is determined based on the number counter or the counter value obtained by the second special hold number counter. For example, in the case of the first special symbol look-ahead processing, first, the reserved information corresponding to the new prize is stored in any of the first special symbol reserved storage area a to the first special symbol reserved storage area d. Determine if it is in a state. After that, the pending information that is stored before the new prize and the variable display is in the running state and the pending information in which the variable display is not executed are included in the pending information in which the variable display is not executed, and the above-mentioned preceding period production is executed. Determine if there is something that is. As a result, even if there is specific pending information that is the target of execution of the preceding period production, the execution of the preceding period production according to the new prize is not completely prohibited, but the above specification. In the period after the variable display according to the hold information of is finished, it is controlled so that the execution of the preceding period production according to the new prize is allowed.

Hereinafter, a method for realizing such control will be described by taking a more detailed game situation as an example.

In FIG. 171 (a), the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variation display is being executed and the three hold information (all the first special symbols) in which the variation display is not executed are stored. It is a figure which shows an example about the table T7a which is referred in the 1st special figure look-ahead processing when a new prize (the 1st special symbol) occurs in this state. Further, in FIG. 171 (b), the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variation display is being executed and the two hold information (both are the first special symbols) in which the variation display is not executed are shown. It is a figure which shows an example about the table T7b which is referred in the 1st special figure look-ahead process when a new prize (the 1st special symbol) occurs in the stored state.

As shown in FIG. 171 (a), in this table T7a, the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variable display is being executed and the three hold information in which the variable display is not executed (whichever). Depending on which of the above (1st special symbol) is the target of the preceding period production, or none of them is the target of the preceding period production, a new prize (1st special symbol) will be awarded. It is possible to determine from what timing the corresponding hold information can be targeted for the preceding period production (the number of pre-readable fluctuations).

For example, in the table T7a, both the hold information (first special symbol) in which the variation display is being executed and the three hold information (all the first special symbols) in which the variation display is not executed are both. If is not the target of the preceding period effect, the variable display according to the hold 1 (the first hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area a) and the hold 2 (the first special symbol hold storage) The variable display according to the hold 3 (the third hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area b) and the variable display according to the hold 3 (the third hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area b), and the variable display according to the hold 3 (the second hold information stored in the area b). The new prize was targeted over four variable display periods with the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize (the fourth hold information stored in the first special symbol hold storage area d). It is determined that the preceding period effect can be executed (determination that the pre-reading variable number is 4). That is, in this case, the variation display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize is performed at the timing after the variation display in the running state ends and the variation display according to the first hold information is started. It will be allowed to execute the preceding period production targeting.

Further, in the table T7a, when the hold information in which the change display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the change display according to the hold 2 and the change display according to the hold 3 are newly added. It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new prize can be executed over the three variable display periods, that is, the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the winning prize (the number of pre-reading variable numbers is 3). Judgment). That is, in this case, the timing after the variation display corresponding to the running state ends, the variation display corresponding to the first hold information further ends, and the variation display according to the second hold information starts. Then, the execution of the preceding period production for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize is allowed.

Here, even when the hold information in which the change display is being executed is the target of the preceding period effect, the change display according to the hold 1, the change display according to the hold 2, and the hold 3 It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new prize can be executed over the four variable display periods of the variable display according to the new prize and the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize ( (Determining that the pre-reading variable number is 4) may be performed. However, in this case, the preceding period effect that appeared in the variable display in the running state and the new preceding period effect that starts in the variable display according to the hold 1 are continuously executed. Is the preceding period production the same production (whether the previous preceding period production is continuing), or is another preceding period production newly started (whether the previous preceding period production has ended)? Since it is difficult to distinguish between the two, a method of setting this as a prohibited period so that a new preceding period production does not occur in the first variable display after the preceding period production ends (method adopted in table T7a). It is more desirable to adopt. It should be noted that such a method is adopted not only in the table T7a but also in other tables T7 (in addition to the table T7b, a table (not shown)).

Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 1 is the target of the preceding period production, there are two variable displays, a variable display according to the hold 3 and a variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize. It is determined that the preceding period effect for the new prize can be executed over the period (determination that the pre-reading variable number is 2). That is, in this case, the variation display corresponding to the running state ends, the variation display according to the first hold information ends, the variation display according to the second hold information ends, and the third hold information ends. At the timing after the variable display according to the hold information is started, the execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize is allowed.

Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 2 is the target of the preceding period production, the preceding period for the new prize is only the period of the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize. It is determined that the effect can be executed (determination that the pre-reading variable number is 1). That is, in this case, the variation display corresponding to the running state ends, the variation display according to the first hold information ends, the variation display according to the second hold information ends, and the third hold information ends. The preceding period for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize at the timing after the variable display according to the new prize is further finished and the variable display according to the fourth hold information is started. Execution of the production is allowed.

Further, in the table T7a, when the hold 3 is the target of the preceding period production, it is determined that the preceding period production targeting the new prize is not feasible (the number of pre-reading variable numbers is 0). Judgment). That is, in this case, the execution of the preceding period effect for the variable display according to the hold 4 according to the new prize is not allowed.

On the other hand, in the table T7b, the hold 3 is not included as a determination target of whether or not it is the target of the preceding period production, and the number of pre-readable fluctuations obtained as the determination result is smaller than that of the above table T7a. However, since it is basically the same as the table T7a, the explanation is omitted. In addition, similar tables are prepared at the time of holding 2 winning and holding 1 winning, but the explanation is omitted.

By the way, at the time of winning the hold 4, it is assumed that there are two hold information that are the target of the preceding period production, but in this case, it will be based on the hold information on the side with the latest hold order. Decide whether to use the look-ahead variable number of. For example, when the hold 4 is won, if the variable hold and the hold 2 are subject to different preceding period effects in the table T7a, the hold 2 on the later side of the hold order is the target of the preceding period effect. The "look-ahead variable number = 1" will be determined.

Further, as described above, the control over the prohibited period of such a preceding period effect is a type of effect that is continuous (or continued) over a plurality of variable displays without specifying which hold display is supported. The purpose is to set a prohibition period for this type of production based on the execution status. Therefore, the prohibition period of the preceding period effect does not occur depending on the execution status of the type of effect (hold change effect) that specifies which hold display is supported, and the execution status of the preceding period effect (look-ahead). (Even if the number of possible fluctuations = 0) does not prohibit the type of effect (hold change effect) that specifies which hold display is supported.

Further, even in the case of the prohibition period of the preceding period production, among the timer look-ahead effects, the timer look-ahead effect performed in the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode described later will be caused by the advance notice side timer effect. Since certainty is not required, this may be made to appear.

In addition, as a prohibition control of the preceding period effect, when the holding information on the second special symbol side is included in the holding information in the state in which the variation display has not been executed, the holding information on the second special symbol side precedes. Even if it is not the target of the period effect, it may be controlled so that the new preceding period effect is not started until the variable display according to the hold information on the second special symbol side is completed. good. At this time, it is not necessary to set the period of the next variation display after the variation display according to the reserved information on the second special symbol side is completed as the prohibition period, and a new preceding period from the time when the next variation display is executed. It is desirable to allow the production to start.

In addition, regarding the process of confirming the status of the look-ahead effect set for the hold and determining the pre-reading variable number according to the result, a new prize will be generated each time the hold is exhausted. It is desirable to do it each time.

Then, in the first special figure pre-reading process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure pre-reading process (FIG. 136: step S5255), when the pre-readable variable number is determined in this way, the determined period (look-ahead possible). Judgment processing is performed as to what mode of the preceding period effect is to be executed (including the presence or absence of execution) based on the number of fluctuations.

For example, first, it is determined which type of preceding period effect is to be executed for the pending information corresponding to the new winning. As described above, as the types of preceding period effects, there are a plurality of pre-reading zone effects that display related background images across multiple fluctuations, and a plurality of specific preceding displays that suggest that there is a high possibility that a timer effect on the advance notice side will be executed. It is possible to prepare a timer look-ahead effect that is displayed across fluctuations as a selection candidate. As a result, when the type of the preceding period effect is determined, the determination process for determining how to execute the determined type of preceding period effect is performed.

FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b) show an example of the table T8a-1 and the table T8a-2 that are referred to when the execution mode of the timer look-ahead effect is determined in the situation where the pre-reading variable number is 4. Is. FIGS. 173 (a) and 173 (b) are diagrams showing an example of the table T8b-1 and the table T8b-2 that are referred to when the execution mode of the timer look-ahead effect is determined in the situation where the pre-reading variable number is 3. Is.

As described above, the timer look-ahead effect is an effect in which the rate at which the timer effect on the advance notice side appears when the hold information to be read ahead is exhausted when it appears, and the peripheral aspect of this embodiment is applied. In the control MPU 1511a, the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the first preceding mode, the second preceding mode, the third preceding mode, and the like in which the rate of appearance of the advance timer effect is different.

Here, the first preceding mode is for displaying the first mode such as "premonition of timer generation" in the effect display device 1600, and when the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the first preceding mode. The probability that the advance timer effect is executed is set to approximately 20% (step S5502).

Further, the second preceding mode is for displaying a second mode such as "timer generation chance" in the effect display device 1600, and when the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the second preceding mode, the advance notice side. The probability that the timer effect is executed is set to approximately 80% (step S5502).

Further, the third preceding mode is for displaying a third mode such as "timer is being prepared" in the effect display device 1600, and when the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the third preceding mode, the warning side timer is displayed. The effect is always executed (not 100%, but may have a higher probability than the second preceding embodiment) (step S5502).

Then, based on the information on the winning of the jackpot for the look-ahead determination, the information on the variation pattern number for the look-ahead determination, and the like, it is decided which execution mode is to be executed as the timer look-ahead effect. For example, in a situation where the pre-reading variable number is 4, referring to the tables T8a-1 and T8a-2 shown in FIGS. 172 (a) and 172 (b), the pre-reading corresponding to the variation numbers 1 to 22 is used. In the situation where one of the modes is selected based on the information and the effect random number assigned to the information and the pre-reading variable number is 3, the tables T8b-1 and T8b-shown in FIG. 173 are used. With reference to 2, one of the modes is selected based on the look-ahead information corresponding to the variation numbers 1 to 22 and the effect random number assigned to the information.

As shown in FIG. 172 (a), in the table T8a-1, the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is started in the state where the first preceding mode finally appears. The following three modes are prepared as modes.
-When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the states of hold 3 and hold 2, the timer look-ahead effect does not appear in any mode and is the target of the timer look-ahead effect. A mode in which the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) when the hold information fluctuation display is in the hold 1 state.-The change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is held. When the state of 3 is in the state of 3, the timer look-ahead effect is not caused to appear in any mode, and when the variable display of the hold information which is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 2, the timer look-ahead effect is first preceded. A mode (premonition of timer generation) that is displayed and continued even in the state of hold 1.-Timer look-ahead effect when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 3. Is displayed in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation), and this is continued even in the states of hold 2 and hold 1.

Further, in the table T8a-1, the following six modes are used as the mode in which the variable display of the hold information, which is the target of the timer look-ahead effect, is started in the state where the second preceding mode is finally displayed. It is prepared.
-When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the states of hold 3 and hold 2, the timer look-ahead effect does not appear in any mode and is the target of the timer look-ahead effect. A mode in which the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) when the hold information fluctuation display is in the hold 1 state.-The change display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is held 3 When the state of, the timer look-ahead effect does not appear in any mode, and when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 2, the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the second preceding mode. (Timer generation chance) is displayed and this is continued even in the state of hold 1. ・ When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 3, the timer look-ahead effect is set. 2 A mode in which the display is displayed in the preceding mode (timer generation chance) and this is continued even in the state of hold 2 and hold 1. ・ When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 3. The timer look-ahead effect is not caused to appear in any mode, and the timer look-ahead effect is set to the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the hold 2 state. ), And when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 1, the timer look-ahead effect is changed from the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) to the second preceding mode (premonition of timer generation). Mode to change to display (timer generation chance) -When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 3, the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation). Is displayed and this is continued even in the state of hold 2, but when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 1, the timer look-ahead effect is performed in the first preceding mode (timer). A mode in which the display is changed from the premonition of occurrence) to the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) ・ The timer look-ahead effect is performed when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the hold 3 state. In addition to displaying in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation), the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the first preceding mode (timer generation) when the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the hold 2 state. From the premonition of), the second preceding mode (timer generation) A mode in which the message is changed to (change) and displayed, and this is continued even in the state of hold 1.

It should be noted that the timer look-ahead effects of the first and second preceding modes are displayed in the state of hold 1 and then continuously displayed even after the hold information is digested and the variable display is started. It is desirable to do so. Further, the mode may be further changed in the variable display started by digesting the reserved information. Further, the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode may be hidden when the advance notice side timer effect is started in the variable display, but when the advance notice side timer effect is started. Even so, the display is continued even after the mode of hiding the first preceding mode and the second preceding mode before the advance notice side timer effect is started and the start of the notice side timer effect. Then, if it is hidden at a predetermined timing after that, it becomes possible to add fun. If the timer pre-reading effect is executed in either the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode but the timer effect on the advance notice side is not executed, it will not occur when a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. It will be displayed. Further, it is more desirable that the timing of hiding is the same as the timing of hiding when the advance notice side timer effect is executed (such as the predetermined timing described above).

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, although the timer look-ahead effect increases the execution rate of the timer effect on the advance notice side when all of them appear, the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding mode The timer look-ahead effect of (timer generation chance) and the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared) are made to appear as different effects from each other. Therefore, as is clear from the contents of the table T8a-1, the timer look-ahead effect is changed from these preceding modes to the third preceding mode in the state where the first preceding aspect and the second preceding aspect are displayed. This is not adopted for the display mode. Further, in a situation where the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared) appears, the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding aspect (timer generation chance) appears. Or, in a situation where the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding aspect (timer generation chance) appears, the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared) appears. Can occur.

Therefore, in the situation where the pre-reading variable number is 4, the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) with reference to the table T8a-1 shown in FIG. 172 (a). In addition to determining the execution mode related to the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared), the execution mode related to the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared) is further determined with reference to the table T8a-2 shown in FIG. 172 (b). It will be.

Here, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), in the table T8a according to this embodiment, the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect in the state where the third preceding embodiment finally appears. Only one of the following modes is prepared as a mode in which the variable display is started.
-When the variable display of the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is in the state of hold 3, the timer look-ahead effect is displayed in the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared), and this is held 2 and hold 1. A mode to continue even in the state

However, the case of the third preceding mode is not limited to the above-mentioned one aspect, and as in the case of the above-mentioned first preceding aspect, neither timer look-ahead effect appears when the state is in the state of hold 3 or hold 2, and the process is in progress. It is also possible to select a mode in which the third preceding mode is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) is executed, and the timer of the third preceding mode (timer generation chance). Both the case where the look-ahead effect is executed and the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) and the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer preparation) When each is executed, the case will appear. Then, when both the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) or the second preceding aspect (timer generation chance) and the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding aspect (timer preparation) are executed, respectively. Since it is definitely suggested that the timer effect on the notice side will be executed, enjoy the effect such as whether to change from the first preceding mode to the second preceding mode with a sense of security and a sense of security. Will be able to.

Further, it may be controlled so that the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode, the timer look-ahead effect of the second preceding aspect, and the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding aspect can appear at the same time.

It is desirable that the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared) is continuously displayed even after the target hold information is digested and the variable display is started. In this case, after the target hold information is digested and the variable display is started, the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared) is hidden when the advance notice side timer effect is started.

Further, in this embodiment, the third preceding mode of the timer look-ahead effect is adopted as a mode for displaying "timer is being prepared" in the effect display device 1600. It may be adopted as a mode for starting the count display for the effect (the effect that appears in the unexecuted variable display) that is the effect target of the timer effect. That is, in this case, for example, the remaining time during which the state of hold 1 is continued (the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol that is in the state of variable display when in the state of hold 1) and the change display after the hold 1 is digested are displayed. The count display will be performed over the total time from the start to the start of the effect targeted for the advance notice side timer effect, and the timer look-ahead effect (third preceding mode) and the advance notice side timer will be displayed. The effect will be executed as one count display in which two variable displays are connected.

In this regard, when the third preceding mode is realized as one count display linked to such a notice side timer effect, the count display is not executed in hold 3 or hold 2, and the count display is in the state of hold 1. It is desirable to execute. That is, if the count display is started when the hold 3 or the hold 2 is set, the effect set as the effect target of the notice side timer effect ( By changing the "remaining time until the effect in the unexecuted variable display) is started, the count display (count display until the predetermined number is reached) for the same effect can be appropriately executed. This is because there is a concern that it will disappear.

The table T8b-1 shown in FIG. 173 (a) and the table T8b-2 shown in FIG. 173 (b) are shown in the table T8a-1 and FIG. 172 (b) shown in FIG. 172 (a). Since it has basically the same relationship as the table T8a-2, the details will be omitted.

Further, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the determination of the hold change effect in the first special figure look-ahead process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure look-ahead process (FIG. 136: step S5255). It also processes. This hold change effect is to change the mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information acquired in response to the winning to one of a plurality of modes different from the normal hold mode, so that the hold display can be displayed in any mode. Depending on whether it is displayed or not, it suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit when the hold display is digested.

More specifically, as the hold display according to this embodiment, in addition to the normal hold mode when the hold change effect is not performed, the mode is displayed in blinking white, the mode is displayed in blue, and the mode is displayed in green. It is possible to display in any of the mode of displaying in red, the mode of displaying in red, and the mode of displaying in rainbow color. Is low, and the expectation of big hits gradually increases in the order of blue, green, and red. It is set so that the relationship becomes%. The jackpot expectation is naturally set for the normal hold mode, but the jackpot expectation when the normal hold is displayed should be lower than the mode displayed in blinking white. It may be the same as or higher than the mode of displaying in blinking white.

Therefore, usually, when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue appears, for example, a first effect situation having a lower expectation of a big hit than when displaying in green or red is provided. However, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment is a control that can provide a second effect situation in which the expectation of a big hit becomes high when a mode of displaying in white blinking or blue instead of green or red appears under a predetermined condition. Is executable.

FIG. 174 shows when there is no hold information in which the variable display is being executed and the pending information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3) causes a jackpot symbol to appear. It is a figure which shows the normal time hold change table T9a which is referred. Further, in FIG. 175, there is a case in which a jackpot symbol appears among the hold information in which the variable display is being executed and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold 1 to hold 3). It is a figure which shows the special time hold change table T9b which is sometimes referred.

In the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when a new prize (acceptance of a game ball) occurs in the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the first special figure pre-reading process (FIG. 135: step S5245) and the second special figure In the look-ahead process (FIG. 136: step S5255), the hold information that is stored prior to the new winning and the variable display is in the executing state and the hold information in which the variable display is not executed (for example, hold). It is determined whether or not there is a big hit symbol appearing among 1 to 3) (a judgment that the big hit is won as a result of the big hit judgment or the look-ahead judgment). As a result, if it is determined that there is no jackpot symbol to appear, the normal time table T9a (normal time table T9a) is set so that the jackpot expectation gradually increases in the order of blinking white, blue, green, red, and rainbow color. By executing the hold change effect with reference to FIG. 174), usually, for example, when a mode of blinking white or displaying in blue appears, the first effect situation in which the expectation of a big hit is lower than that of displaying in red is obtained. I am trying to be provided.

However, it is judged that there is a jackpot symbol that appears in the pending information that is stored before the new prize and the variable display is in the running state and the pending information in which the variable display is not executed. In this case (when a rare event occurs), the second effect situation is provided by executing the hold change effect with reference to the special time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175).

That is, as shown in FIG. 175, in the special time hold change table T9b, first, regarding the red color and the rainbow color regarding the mode of the hold display, the "big hit win / loss" acquired as the hold information according to the new prize is obtained. No matter which content the "look-ahead information" or "look-ahead information about the fluctuation pattern" indicates, the production random numbers are distributed so that they are not selected.

Further, regarding the green color related to the mode of the hold display, even if the variation pattern (variation numbers 7 to 14) in which the effect random numbers are distributed so as to be selectable in the normal hold change table T9a, the special hold change changes. In the table T9b, the production random numbers are distributed so that they are not selected. In this regard, if the look-ahead information regarding the fluctuation pattern corresponds to SP reach (variation numbers 15 to 22), green can be selected in the special time hold change table T9b, but it is normally held. Compared to the change table T9a, the random numbers are distributed so that the probability of appearance of green is lower when the jackpot is won or lost.

On the other hand, regarding the white blinking and blue color related to the mode of the hold display, the special time hold change table T9b has a higher probability of appearing when the jackpot is won or lost as compared with the normal time hold change table T9a. The production random numbers are distributed to. Further, regarding the white blinking and the blue color regarding the mode of the hold display, even if the variation numbers 1 and 2 are not selected in the normal hold change table T9a, they can be selected in the special hold change table T9b. The production random numbers are distributed as shown above.

According to such a configuration, for example, an effect with a high expectation that a jackpot symbol appears (for example, an effect in which a notice side timer effect targeting the movement of the character B in the fluctuation pattern of the SP reach appears) is executed. If a new prize is generated during the period (under predetermined conditions), and a green or red mode appears as a hold display according to the new prize, a jackpot symbol will appear in the high-expected effect being executed. A second production situation in which it becomes relatively easy to have the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear in the high-expectation production that is being executed when the white blinking or blue mode appears, while it becomes difficult to have expectations for. Will be able to provide.

In particular, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as described above, as the third preceding mode of the timer look-ahead effect, the remaining time during which the state of hold 1 is continued (the state of variable display when the state of hold 1 is in state). (Remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol in) and the time from the start of the fluctuation display after the hold 1 is digested to the start of the production targeted by the timer effect on the notice side. It is possible to execute the count display of. That is, in this case, even if the count display appears on the effect display device 1600, there is a possibility that the fluctuation display ends and the next fluctuation display starts before the count display reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, it is expected that the game interest will be improved in combination with the control using the special time hold change table T9b described above.

For example, in a situation where white blinking or blue hold display appears as hold 1, it is assumed that the count display (or timer preparation) of the timer effect on the notice side appears during execution of the variable display (for example, SP reach). , It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear in the second game progress rather than the first game progress described below.
-The timer effect on the notice side targets the effect in hold 1 that shows only a low expectation (blinking white or blue), and is held after the running fluctuation display (for example, SP reach) ends in a lost manner. The change display according to the hold information of 1 is started. The first game progress / advance notice side timer effect is not the effect in hold 1 showing only a low expectation (white blinking or blue), but the change during execution. A second game progress that targets the production in the display (for example, SP reach)

That is, although the notice-side timer effect with a high jackpot expectation (for example, a jackpot symbol appears with a probability of 10% or more when it appears) is executed, the notice-side timer effect has a low expectation (for example, appears). However, if the effect in Hold 1 (white blinking or blue) where the jackpot symbol appears only with a probability of a few percent is targeted for production, the possibility that the jackpot symbol will appear will be greatly reduced. However, according to the second game progress mentioned above, it is special because the chances are increased by avoiding such a production situation and the fluctuation display during execution is a big hit. The chance is increased by being able to expect that the hold display of hold 1 is blinking white (high probability of appearance) or blue (high probability of appearance) by referring to the time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175). The fact that the timer effect on the notice side targets "the effect in the variable display during execution" also functions as if it supports "the variable display during execution is a big hit") to increase the chance. Will occur, so it will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The third preceding mode of the timer look-ahead effect may be executed as "timer is being prepared" instead of the count display. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that when the status in which "timer is being prepared" is displayed is switched to the count display, the advance notice side timer effect is executed with the effect in the variable display as the effect target. Therefore, when there is a hold display that is blinking white or blue when the count display appears, it can be expected that the jackpot symbol will appear in the variable display.

On the other hand, when the green or red (especially red) hold display is displayed and the "timer preparing" is hidden and the count display is started, the timer effect on the advance notice side is performed. Not only does it make it difficult to have the expectation that a big hit symbol will appear in the fluctuation display, but also the timer on the notice side so as to raise the expectation level for the green and red (especially red) hold display. The production will not work. Therefore, if "Timer in preparation" is displayed in the situation where the green or red (especially red) hold display is displayed, until the green or red (especially red) hold display is exhausted. It is hoped that the count display will not start, and it will be expected that the game will be maintained within the period until the count display (notice side timer effect) is started.

In addition, according to such a configuration, when a production with a high expectation of a big hit appears in the variable display during execution, a new prize is generated and a hold display in any of modes such as blinking white, blue, green, and red is displayed. By confirming whether or not the game appears, it becomes possible to predict with a predetermined probability whether or not the jackpot symbol will appear in the variable display during execution, so that the decline in the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, although the hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b is executed for the hold display according to the new prize, the effect target is actually "new". Instead of "whether the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display of the hold information (hold information with hold change) according to the prize", "hold information stored before the new prize (hold that is not subject to hold change)" Information) It is designed to function as an effect on "whether a big hit symbol appears in the variable display". Therefore, even if no hold change is executed when a new prize is generated or the above-mentioned preceding period production is prohibited, the special time hold change table T9b is determined by the hold information that is subsequently won. When the hold change effect using is executed, the look-ahead effect can function as an effect as if the look-ahead effect occurred after the fact for the hold information for which no look-ahead effect was executed. It is expected that the game will be less enjoyed because it is not played.

In the special time hold change table T9b, the green mode can be selected in some reach types, but as in the red mode, it may not be selected in any fluctuation pattern. .. In short, if the rate of appearance of highly expected modes that can appear as hold display is lower than that of the normal hold change table T9a (including 0), it will be white when the count display appears. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment when there is a blinking or blue hold display.

Further, the pending change can be generated at the time of winning a prize, at the start of the fluctuation, or at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation, and the number of times of the change may be generated multiple times. That is, in this case, even if the count display of the timer effect on the warning side is started in the variable display according to the hold display that is blinking white or blue, the blinking white or blue may change to green or red. Because of this, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest in playing games. In this embodiment, even during the symbol change performed in response to the hold digestion, the display corresponding to the hold display that is the target of the digestion (although it is not already in the hold state, the hold display when it is in the hold state) The corresponding display) is displayed, and the mode of the display corresponding to the hold display is further changed (hold change) as described above.

However, when the hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b is realized, a new prize is generated while the specific effect with high expectation is being executed during the execution of the variation display, and the prize is given. When the hold display corresponding to the above is red, the jackpot symbol is displayed in the variable display in which a high-expectation specific effect (for example, a timer effect targeting the operation of the character B) is executed. It may be a situation that definitely suggests that it will not appear, and there is concern that the interest in games will decline.

Therefore, a new prize is generated at least during the period during which the specific timer effect that targets the movement of the character B is being executed (during the period during which the specific effect with high expectation is being executed). Even if this is done, it is desirable to control so that the hold display corresponding to the winning is not displayed in the effect display device 1600 and the mode of the hold change is hidden. In addition, it is desirable to maintain the non-display state with respect to the hold display even after the count display reaches a predetermined value and has been digested.

However, in this case, instead of continuously hiding the hidden hold display until the variable display is completed, for example, during the period of the variable display, a hit effect or a loss suggesting a big hit is won. It is desirable to make the hold display, which has been hidden after the timing when the loss effect suggesting the big hit loss) appears, to display the mode of the hold change. According to such a configuration, even if the hold display corresponding to the new prize is red, it is already suggested that the hold display is lost, so that the game interest is not deteriorated and the hold display is not only reduced. When is red, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by including the hold information with high expectation of big hit in the hold.

It should be noted that the control related to the non-display of the hold display does not target all of the timer effects (notice effects), but is a relatively big hit such as those that target the action of the character B among the timer effects. It is desirable to execute only for a specific timer effect with high expectation (notice effect with high expectation).

Further, as described above, when the hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b is realized, for example, the timer look-ahead effect is executed in the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared, etc.) while the blue hold display appears. If this is the case, it is desired that the game progress in which the count display (timer effect) is started and the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display before the blue hold display is digested. In this regard, even in the game situation where such game progress is performed, whether the count display (timer effect) is started during the fluctuation, or the fluctuation according to the blue hold display without being started. In the variable display where the count display (timer effect) is started and the jackpot symbol appears before the blue hold display is digested, so that the display gives a feeling of excitement as to whether the count display is started. , Count display (timer effect) when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation display rather than the rate (including 0%) at which the count display (timer effect) is started according to the start timing of the variation display. It is desirable to control so that the rate at which is started is higher. The ratio may include 100%. Alternatively, it is desirable to control the rate at which the count display (timer effect) is started when a predetermined time elapses after the variable display is started, as compared with the case where the red hold display is displayed. .. The ratio may include 100%.

The count effect (hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b) that causes a chance increase in such a double is, in short, "hold information displayed in the second aspect of the plurality of aspects (for example, for example). In the variable display of the identification information started by digesting the red look-ahead hold), the hold information displayed in the first aspect of the plurality of aspects (for example, the blue look-ahead hold) is digested. The ratio of the jackpot symbol (specific display result) being derived and displayed is higher than the started variable display of the identification information. "However," at least the specific count effect is executed within the period when the variable display of the identification information is executed. Hold information whose digestion order is later than that of the variable display in the execution state when the display is in (pre-reading hold for the variable display that is not yet executed when the specific count effect is executed within the execution period of the variable display). ) Is displayed in the second aspect (for example, red look-ahead hold), it is in the execution state than when the hold information is displayed in the first aspect (for example, blue look-ahead hold). In a certain variable display, the ratio of the specific display result being derived and displayed is reduced. "

According to such a configuration, when the red hold display (second mode) is displayed for the variable display which is slow in the digestion order and has not been executed yet, a specific count is performed in the variable display which is already in the execution state. Assuming that the count display of the effect reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") and is terminated, a blue hold display (first aspect) is displayed for the variable display that has a slow digestion order and has not yet been executed. Occasionally, an effect mode with a lower degree of expectation appears as the effect target than when the count display of the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") in the variable display that is already in the execution state and ends. The ratio will be high. That is, in this case, during the period during which the specific count effect is being executed, whether or not a red hold display (second aspect) appears for the variable display that has not yet been executed functions as an important effect element. Through such a special effect relationship between the count effect and the look-ahead effect, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest for a long period from the start to the end of the specific count effect. It will be expected. In this sense, during the period when the specific count effect is being executed, it is still executed at the time of a new prize or a hold change effect (for example, an effect that upgrades the blue hold display to the red hold display). It is important to make it possible for the hold display for the variable display that is not displayed to appear in any of a plurality of modes such as a blue hold display (first mode) and a red hold display (second mode). It can be said that there is.

According to the special effect relationship between the count effect and the look-ahead effect, when a red hold display (second mode) appears for a variable display that has not yet been executed, the process is being executed. If the variable display of is not finished and the variable display is continued from the next time onward, the ratio of the production mode with high expectation will appear when the counting effect is finished, so the specific count effect is finished. You will expect it not to be done. On the other hand, when a blue hold display (first aspect) appears for a variable display that has not been executed yet, it is less expected that the count effect is terminated by the variable display being executed. Since the rate at which a highly expected effect mode appears when the count effect ends is higher than when it ends within the variable display of, it is expected that the specific count effect will end earlier.

However, the count effect does not necessarily have to straddle a plurality of variable displays, and the count effect may be ended within one variable display in which the count effect is started. Even with such a configuration, if a new prize is generated while the count effect is being executed, a blue hold display (first mode) and a red hold are displayed for the variable display that has not yet been executed. Since there is no difference in the fact that which of the display (second aspect) appears can function as an important production index for the count effect, a special effect between the count effect and the look-ahead effect Through the relationship, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest for a long period from the start to the end of the specific count production.

At the start of the specific count effect, a plurality of hold displays are displayed, but none of them is in a specific mode (for example, look-ahead hold such as green or red) (for example, a situation where the look-ahead hold has not changed). Even if the above appears, it may be possible to execute a process of making a specific mode appear during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed (for example, a process of changing from a normal hold to a red hold). According to such a configuration, at the start of the specific count effect, it is assumed that a plurality of hold displays are displayed, but none of them has a specific mode (for example, a situation in which the look-ahead hold has not changed). However, there is a possibility that the count display in the specific count effect may change to a hold display having a specific mode (pre-reading hold such as green or red) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (specific display result in the variable display in the execution state). There is a possibility that a state in which the ratio is derived and displayed is high to a state in which the ratio is low), so that the game entertainment from the start to the end of the specific count effect is suitably maintained. Will be expected to do.

However, at this time, if a plurality of display modes are prepared as the count display by the specific count effect and the count display is displayed in the first mode and the count is exhausted, the second mode is used. A process of making a specific mode appear for the hold display until the count display in the specific count effect reaches a predetermined value (for example, normal hold), as compared with the case where the k count is consumed while being displayed. It is desirable to reduce the rate at which the process of changing from to red hold) is executed. According to such a configuration, by confirming the count display by the specific count effect, the display mode can be changed to the hold display having the specific mode (pre-reading hold such as green or red) during the count period. It is possible to recognize "high possibility" and predict "high possibility that the specific count effect will be continued until after the next symbol change is started" from the remaining count value. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide fun by comparing the results of those recognition / prediction.

On the other hand, on the contrary, at the start of the specific count effect, when a plurality of hold displays are displayed but none of them is in a specific mode (for example, a situation in which the look-ahead hold has not changed), During the execution period of the specific count effect, the process of causing the specific mode to appear during the period of execution of the specific count effect (for example, the process of changing from the normal hold to the red hold) may not be executable. According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the count display in the specific count effect can be changed to the hold display having a specific mode (pre-reading hold such as green or red) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (execution state). In the variable display, there is a possibility that the specific display result can be shifted from a state in which the ratio of the specific display result is derived and displayed to a state in which the ratio is low). You will be able to provide a sense of security.

In addition, a plurality of hold displays may be sequentially digested and a plurality of symbol fluctuations may be sequentially digested before the predetermined time required for the specific count effect elapses. According to such a configuration, even if the third hold display is set to red hold in the situation where the specific count effect is started, the symbol variation corresponding to the third hold display is started. Since there is a possibility that the specific count effect may reach a predetermined value during the execution period, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the specific count effect is completed.

Further, during the period in which the specific count effect is being executed, it may be possible to execute a process of putting the symbol fluctuation into the stopped state (temporary stop) and then putting the symbol fluctuation into the fluctuating state again. According to such a configuration, for example, when the symbol fluctuation is put into the stopped state (temporary stop) while the look-ahead hold appears for the variable display that has not been executed yet, the specified state is in the executed state. Since it will function as an effect as if the next symbol change is started while the count effect is continued, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the end of the specific count effect. Become.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example related to "double chance up" (hold change production using the special time hold change table T9b), the hold display is displayed smaller than the count display in the count effect, or is placed in front of the hold display. The change in the hold display can be made by moving the movable decoration or displaying another display image so that it covers the hold display so that even if there is a change in the hold display, it is difficult to notice. It is desirable to suppress the decline in the interest of the game when it occurs.

In addition, as a "specific count effect", a "first mode that requires a relatively long time" and a "second mode that requires a relatively short time" are prepared, and as a "effect pattern (pattern variation time)". A plurality of effects based on the result of the jackpot determination of "a specific effect pattern that is shorter than the relatively long time (first aspect) but longer than the relatively short time (second aspect)". You may select and execute from the patterns. According to such a configuration, when a specific effect pattern appears, the specific count effect is continued until the next fluctuation depending on which mode (first mode, second mode) the specific count effect is executed. Or, it will not be continued, so it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, in the above-mentioned production example related to "double chance up" (hold change production using the special time hold change table T9b), "hold information displayed in the second aspect of the plurality of aspects (for example, red). In the variable display of the identification information started by digesting the look-ahead hold), the hold information displayed in the first aspect of the plurality of aspects (for example, the blue look-ahead hold) is digested. The ratio of the jackpot symbol (specific display result) being derived and displayed is higher than the variable display of the identified information. "However," at least the specific count effect is executed within the period when the variable display of the identification information is executed. Hold information that is sometimes slower than the variable display in the execution state (when a specific count effect is executed within the execution period of the variable display, the look-ahead hold for the variable display that is not yet executed) Is displayed in the second aspect (for example, red look-ahead hold), it is in the execution state more than when the hold information is displayed in the first aspect (for example, blue look-ahead hold). In order to reduce the ratio of the specific display result to be derived and displayed in the variable display, there are cases where the symbol variation is executed in a shorter time than the predetermined time required for the specific count effect elapses, and cases where the specific count effect is required. The symbol change may be executed in a longer time than the time elapses. However, in this case, regarding the above-mentioned "specific count effect", "the remaining time for the specific effect (the remaining time until a specific effect change occurs for the specific effect) is suggested by updating the count value according to the passage of time. It does not necessarily have to be executed as "an effect that suggests the remaining time for a specific effect by an image change or the like according to the passage of time". In short, if it is possible to suggest the remaining time, it is possible to provide fun as to whether the symbol change will end before the remaining time is exhausted, and the game interest will decline. Can be suppressed.

It should be noted that the "specific count effect" is not "an effect that suggests the remaining time for the specific effect by updating the count value according to the passage of time", but "an image change that indicates the remaining time for the specific effect according to the passage of time, etc." Regarding what is realized by other depictions such as "the effect suggested by", the effect example (counting) is different from the above-mentioned production example related to "double chance up" (hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b). It may be applied to the production).

In addition, regarding the "specific count effect", the effect change related to the specific effect is completed in the middle stage before the suggested "remaining time until a specific effect change occurs with respect to the specific effect" is exhausted. May occur. At this time, it is possible that an effect change that cannot appear when all the "remaining time until a specific effect change occurs with respect to the specific effect" is exhausted without ending in the middle stage. These modifications are also applied to an effect example (count effect) different from the effect example (hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b) related to the above-mentioned "double chance up". May be good.

Furthermore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a new prize is awarded during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed. When the pending information is newly acquired in response to the occurrence, the variable display targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is started, and when this is being executed, the ratio at which the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed is as described above. It is decided to perform control that can execute the timer look-ahead effect (control related to the change effect) so as to be different according to the newly acquired hold information (new prize).

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of a processing procedure for the processing performed to realize such a change effect. In this process, a prize is awarded to a specific starting port (acceptance of a game ball) during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed. ) May occur, or within the period before the hold information held before the prize (the hold information in which the information about the production is deleted / reset) is exhausted. It may be performed at a predetermined timing of.

As shown in FIG. 176, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, as the process of step S5601, it is determined whether the hold information corresponding to the new prize indicates the specific game information. The specific game information may be, for example, "game information that causes a highly expected specific fluctuation pattern such as SP reach to appear when the new hold information is digested", or "the new game information". It may be "game information that wins a big hit when the pending information is digested". Here, for convenience of explanation, "game information that wins a big hit when the new reserved information is digested" will be described as the specific game information.

Then, as a result, when it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the new prize indicates the specific game information, then, as the process of step S5602, the hold information corresponding to the new prize is stored before the hold information. When at least a part of the information related to the effect is deleted from the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect (first preceding mode or the second preceding aspect) among the reserved information, and the change effect is performed. Reset to the content.

For example, when the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) is set as the timer look-ahead effect, when the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is digested, the timer effect on the advance notice side has a probability of approximately 20%. It is executed, and when the second preceding mode (timer generation chance) is set as the timer look-ahead effect, there is a probability of approximately 80% when the hold information targeted by the timer look-ahead effect is digested. As described above, the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed. However, in the process of step S5602, all (or at least a part) of the information related to the timer look-ahead effect is deleted, or the table referred to when determining the effect pattern (SP reach, etc.) or the advance notice lottery is used. Settings for changing to something different from the normal time (setting of change flag, etc.) will be made. Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, by performing control (FIG. 149) related to the effect based on the effect information modified (deleted / set) in this way, the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation) and the first timer look-ahead effect are performed. Regardless of which of the two preceding modes (timer generation chance) is set, in the process of step S5502 (FIG. 149), the advance notice side timer effect is executed with a probability of approximately 50%. In addition, when determining the content of the effect pattern, the advance notice effect, etc., for example, based on the fact that the change flag is set, the table (not shown) at the time of the change effect is referred to, and various effects are performed in a manner different from the normal time. Will be executed.

Then, after the modification process (step S5602) of the hold effect information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is performed, the background image is used as the process of step S5603, and the background image when the change effect is performed. Perform the process to change to. At this time, it is desirable that the display (first preceding mode, second preceding mode) appearing as the timer look-ahead effect is also hidden. That is, in this case, when a new prize is generated (or between the time when the prize is generated and the pending information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is digested), the background image is the background at the time of the completely changed effect. When suddenly changed to an image, the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode that has appeared until then is hidden, but the background image itself at the time of the change effect functions as one aspect of the timer look-ahead effect. You will be able to get it. Then, during the period when the background image at the time of the change effect appears in this way, whether or not the notice side timer effect appears when the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is exhausted (whether it is a fake). It will be possible to have great interest, which will allow the game to be maintained during the period when the timer look-ahead effect is being performed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5601, if it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the new prize does not indicate specific game information, whether or not to execute the completely changed ghost effect as the process of step S5611 next. Judgment processing is performed. This completely changing effect is an effect of changing the background image to the background image when the completely changing effect is performed in the process of step S5603, even though the above-mentioned modification process (step S5602) for the reserved information is not performed. That is.

If it is determined in the process of step S5611 that the completely changed effect is not executed, the current timer look-ahead effect (first preceding mode, second preceding mode) and the determination mode of various effects are to be continued. , The process (FIG. 176) is terminated without performing any process related to the change effect.

In such a configuration, when a new prize is generated during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect (table T8a-1, table T8b-1) of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed (in a specific starting region). When the game ball is accepted and the game information corresponding to it is newly acquired), the above-mentioned timer effect on the advance notice side is displayed when the variable display that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is started and this is being executed. The advance notice side timer effect can be executed so that the execution rate differs depending on the newly acquired game information (holding information). That is, in this case, if the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed, the hold information is not the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect, but the new hold information. The acquired hold information is specific game information (information indicating a specific fluctuation pattern such as SP reach, information indicating a jackpot, or information indicating that the type of jackpot is to shift to a high-probability time-saving gaming state, etc. ), The rate at which the timer effect on the advance notice side is executed changes during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect, so that it is the target of the timer look-ahead effect. It becomes possible to have expectations for other effects before the variable display is executed, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in the game interest during that period.

Further, in the above configuration, when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode or the second preceding mode is being executed, the hold information is not the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect. After performing the above modification process (step S5602) according to whether the newly acquired hold information is specific game information, before the hold information targeted for the timer look-ahead effect is digested. The background image is changed to the background image at the time of the change effect, and the display related to the timer look-ahead effect is hidden. That is, in this case, until the change effect is started, the main body of the effect is the timer look-ahead effect, and the effect situation that gives a sense of expectation to the pending information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is provided. On the other hand, after the start of the change effect, the main body of the effect is changed to the change effect, and in order to give a sense of expectation to the newly acquired pending information including the above timer look-ahead effect. It will be shifted to the production situation where various productions are performed. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly change the subject of the effect when a hold with a higher expectation than the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is acquired, and it is already set. It is possible to avoid depriving the production time of the highly expected pending information due to the production.

It should be noted that such a change effect may be executed even if the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect indicates that the jackpot is won. In other words, in this case, even though the main body of the production has moved to the newly won hold information, the big hit production will appear in the hold that is digested before that, so a surprise production is realized. As a result, the decline in game entertainment can be suppressed.

Further, in this embodiment, when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect of the first preceding mode or the second preceding aspect is being executed, the process related to the change effect (FIG. 176) is executed. However, the process related to the above-mentioned change effect (FIG. 176) may be executed even when the hold information is newly acquired during the period in which the timer look-ahead effect of the third preceding embodiment is executed. ..

Further, the background image at the time of the change effect may be continued even after the variable display according to the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is completed. That is, in this case, the hold information that is digested after the variable display according to the hold information that is the target of the timer look-ahead effect is completed will function as a completely changed effect.

Further, such a change effect may be executed on the condition that the new prize is generated and a specific condition is satisfied even when the timer look-ahead effect is not executed. In this case, for example, the table referred to when determining the production pattern (SP reach, etc.) and the advance notice lottery for all the reserved information stored before the new prize is changed to a different one from the normal time. Settings for making the effect (such as setting a change flag) will be made, and as a result, the appearance probability of various effects will change unless it is a change effect.

Further, in the above embodiment, the rate at which the advance notice side timer effect is executed is changed at the time of the change effect, but when the change flag is set, the effect pattern different from the normal time is determined to change the change side timer. The ratio at which the effect is executed may be changed. As a result, even if the variable number does not cause the variable side timer effect to appear when the change effect is not executed, the variable side timer effect appears when the change effect is executed, or the variable side timer effect appears when the change effect is not executed. Even if it is a number, it becomes possible to control so that the variable side timer effect does not appear when the change effect is executed.

In addition, when such a change effect is performed, even if the timer effect is made to appear when the change effect is not executed, there is a possibility that the variable side timer effect will not appear when the change effect is executed. Because there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline, if you win a lottery regarding a special notice effect that cannot appear during normal times (when the change effect is not executed) when the change effect is executed, the special notice will be given. It may be controlled so that the effect can appear.

Further, the rate at which the advance notice side timer effect is executed in the variable display that was the target of the timer look-ahead effect at the time of the change effect does not necessarily have to be constant (50% in this case). For example, the target of the timer look-ahead effect. It may be controlled so as to be different depending on whether or not the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display that has been changed to.

Hereinafter, the contents of the above-mentioned timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178. Here, the processing example related to each of the above-mentioned effects is merely an example, and for example, an effect other than the above-mentioned types may be executed as the content of the advance notice effect, or the appearance timing of each advance notice effect or the like. The appearance conditions and the like may be changed as appropriate as long as they are within the same technical concept. Therefore, in the production examples described below, there may be cases where the processing content related to each of the above-mentioned productions does not match, but it is within the scope of the same technical idea and within the range that can be implemented by those skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are only changed appropriately in. Further, the following "timer effect" basically means that the count display is executed by the advance notice side timer effect or the variable side timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning that includes a timer look-ahead effect. Further, as the mode of the "count display", the "number of seconds" is counted below, but the present invention is not limited to this.

FIG. 177 (A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 is performing a variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a state where the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state. In FIG. 177 (B), two prizes are generated during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (A), and the hold information corresponding to those prizes is stored, and the hold information corresponding to the prizes is stored. The hold display corresponding to 1 is a normal hold mode, and the hold display corresponding to the second winning hold 2 is displayed in a red mode. In FIG. 177 (C), after the decorative symbol SZ that was in the variable display state in the effect state shown in FIG. 177 (B) is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, the hold information is first-in first-out (First-In First-Out). ) Is displayed, and the hold information stored as hold 1 after the shift operation is digested and changed to a fluctuating state. In this production example, as is clear from the figure, even in the situation where the hold information of hold 1 is digested and the state of variable display (state of hold 0) is set, it is shown at the time of hold 1. The display control is performed so that the player can recognize the mode of the hold display (hold display of hold 0). Further, as described above, the hold display of hold 0 can be further changed in the mode of hold change (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in such a variable display state. It's a street.

Here, in the production situation shown in FIG. 177 (C), the hold information that was in the state of hold 1 at the time of FIGS. 177 (A) and 177 (B) is digested and the variable display is started. Or, the hold look-ahead effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display. As the mode of the hold look-ahead effect, any of the above-mentioned first precedent mode, second preceding mode, and third preceding mode may be executed, but in the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (C), the hold look-ahead effect is executed. The appearance of the effect means that the hold information of hold 0 (in the state of variable display) or the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold look-ahead effect (example here). Then, the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold look-ahead effect).

In FIG. 177 (D), one prize is generated during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (C), and the hold information corresponding to the prize is normally held as the hold display corresponding to the hold 2. The production status displayed in the above mode is shown. However, assuming that the hold display corresponding to the hold 2 indicates specific game information (here, jackpot information) and satisfies the execution condition of the above-mentioned change effect, it is shown in FIG. 177 (E). As described above, the control related to the change effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to the hold 2.

As described above, the one-change effect is a hold information (here, hold 1) that is stored before the hold information (here, hold 2) that causes the change effect, and is held by modifying the contents of the hold information (here, hold 1). It is something to digest. On the other hand, the above-mentioned one-change ghost effect is, for example, a hold that occurs when the hold display corresponding to hold 2 does not indicate specific game information (here, jackpot information), and the one-change ghost effect is generated. The contents of the hold information (here, hold 1) that is stored before the information (here, hold 2) and is in the hold state are held and digested without being modified. That is, in this case, the susceptibility to various effects will differ when the hold 1 is exhausted depending on whether the one-change effect or the one-change effect is performed. It is possible for the player to guess whether or not a hold indicating the game information is included (whether the one-change effect or the one-change effect is performed), so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed. In both the one-change effect and the one-change effect, it is desirable to control the hold display (here, hold 2) corresponding to those effects so that the hold change does not occur regardless of the result of the jackpot determination.

Therefore, the timing at which the control related to the change effect is executed based on the hold information (game information) corresponding to such hold 2 is after the variable display of hold 0, which is not the target of modification of the hold information, is completed. Moreover, it is desirable that the variable display of the hold 1 to be modified of the hold information is started before the start. In this respect, in this embodiment, the control related to the change effect is executed when the hold display of hold 1 is not yet shifted display after the lost symbol is stopped in the change display of hold 0. In addition to modifying the hold information (particularly, information related to the effect) of hold 1, as shown in FIG. 177 (E), the timer look-ahead effect and the mode of hold change (red) that have been displayed up to that point are displayed. In addition to hiding (displaying in a normal hold mode), the background image is changed to the background image when the change effect is performed. At this time, a predetermined display image (here, "change") is displayed for a predetermined time.

Further, in such an effect situation (FIG. 177 (E)), the timer look-ahead effect that has appeared until the end of the variable display of hold 0 continues to be displayed without starting the count display. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the target of the timer look-ahead effect is hold 1.

In FIG. 177 (F), after the appearance of the transformation effect background shown in FIG. 177 (E), the hold information stored as hold 1 is digested and changed into a fluctuating state by shifting the hold information respectively. It shows the production situation.

Here, in the production situation shown in FIG. 177 (F), the hold information that was in the state of hold 1 at the time of FIG. 177 (E) is digested and the variable display is started, or the same. The count display of the timer effect is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display. Similarly, in the production situation shown in FIG. 177 (F), a specific display (here, "make a conversation notice appear") related to the first production (here, "conversation notice") is displayed. Has been done. The timing at which the specific display (make the conversation notice appear) may be before the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears, or after the timing at which the timer effect (count display) appears. It is also good that it can appear at an appropriate timing.

It should be noted that the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects, decorative symbols, etc., including the case where the timer look-ahead effect is in the mode (FIG. 177 (D)). A part of the display range (left part) of the notice effect that displays "make the conversation notice appear" in the so-called ticker mode (slide image) is hidden by the timer effect that is displayed with priority over this. ing.

Further, in this production situation (FIG. 177 (F)), the timer production starts the count display with a relatively small number of counts such as "10 seconds". There is a high possibility that it will be the target of timer production, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. However, in this effect situation (FIG. 177 (F)), a specific display (conversation notice) indicating that the effect type (conversation notice) that appears at a relatively early stage among the effect types targeted for the timer effect is displayed. Is appearing), and it is expected that it will be confirmed and suggested that the target of the timer production is "a conversation notice that appears at a relatively early stage" and that the big hit is won by the success of the mission. Therefore, the decline in the interest in games will be suppressed.

Moreover, as described above, when the change effect is being executed, the timer effect appears with a probability different from that in the normal state. For example, when the timer look-ahead effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation), the timer effect appears only with a probability of about 20% in the normal state. On the other hand, when the change effect is executed, the timer effect appears with a probability of about 50%. Therefore, when the timer effect appears while the background of the change effect appears, the appearance probability of the timer effect changes instead of the change effect (approximately 20%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change (generally 20%). The expectation that (approximately 50%) is being executed, and by extension, the expectation that the jackpot will be won (because it is confirmed that the jackpot pending information is included when the change effect is executed) will increase. However, at this time, if the timer effect does not appear while the background of the change effect appears, the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change, not the change effect (approximately 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes. As a result, the degree of concern that the completely changed production (approximately 20%) is being executed increases.

When the timer look-ahead effect displayed in FIG. 177 (D) is displayed in the third preceding mode (timer is being prepared), the timer effect appears with a probability of 100% in the normal state. , When the change effect is executed, the timer effect appears only with a probability of about 50%. Therefore, if the timer effect does not appear while such a change effect background appears, the appearance probability of the timer effect changes instead of the change change effect (generally 100%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change. It will be definitively suggested that the production (approximately 50%) is being executed, and that the pending information for winning the jackpot is included. However, at this time, if the timer effect appears while such a change effect background appears, it is not a change effect (approximately 50%) in which the appearance probability of the timer effect changes, but a change effect in which the appearance probability of the timer effect does not change. As a result, the degree of concern that the production (generally 100%) is being executed increases.

FIG. 178 (G) is related to a timer suggesting that the count display of the timer effect executed in FIG. 177 (F) has reached a predetermined numerical value (here, 0) and has reached the predetermined numerical value (here, 0). The display (here, "Yukuzo") indicates the production status in which it appeared. The timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) suggesting that a predetermined numerical value (here, 0) has been reached may appear after the count display of the timer effect is hidden.

In the production situation shown in FIG. 178 (G), since the count display has reached a predetermined value while the mission display (make the conversation notice appear) is still displayed, some production is used as the production target of the timer production. It is definitely suggested that is about to appear, and it can be said that a great deal of attention is being paid to whether or not a conversation notice will appear as the production.

In FIG. 178 (H), after the timer effect that has reached a predetermined value in FIG. 178 (G) and the timer-related display are hidden, a conversation notice (here, here) is shown as an effect that is the effect target of the timer effect. "Maybe it's a chance") shows the appearance of the production situation. Immediately after this, a special display will appear indicating that the mission was successful in the mission production (make the conversation notice appear).

In the production situation shown in FIG. 178 (H), it is shown that the mission was successful in the mission production (make the conversation notice appear), so that it is definitely suggested that the jackpot will be won.

In FIG. 178 (I), after the mission was successful in FIG. 178 (H), the fluctuation display was stopped with a lost symbol even though the special display (here, "mission success!") Appeared. It shows the production situation.

That is, as described above, in this embodiment, with respect to the specific display (here, "make the conversation notice appear") related to the first production (here, "conversation notice"), the pending information to be the production target. (In the situation shown in FIG. 178 (I), it is possible to appear within the period of the variable display according to the variable display 1), and under predetermined conditions, the reserved information before the variable display (FIG. 178 (I)). ), It is possible to appear in advance even within the period of variable display according to hold 0). Moreover, the timing itself at which the first production (here, "conversation notice") is displayed and the special display (here, "mission success!") Appears is also the pending information (big hit) that is the target of the production. Not only can it appear within the period of variable display according to the variable display), but also within the period of variable display according to the reserved information (held information that does not become a big hit) prior to the variable display under predetermined conditions. It is said that it can appear in advance.

According to such a configuration, although it was definitely suggested that a special display (here, "Mission success!") Appears in the mission production and it becomes a big hit, the variable display ends with a lost pattern. Since it will be (stopped), an unexpected situation will occur as a player. However, after that, when the next fluctuation display is started, the fluctuation display will end (stop) with a jackpot symbol, so that a feeling of happiness will be given after being dropped into a despair state. .. As a result, even after it is definitely suggested that the jackpot will be a big hit, it will be possible to add a dramatic intonation, and it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment until the jackpot symbol is stopped. become.

However, when the special display appears in advance in this way, there is a concern that a complaint from the player side to the hall side will occur when the variable display ends (stops) with a lost symbol. Therefore, in the case of a loss fluctuation in which the special display appears first, the special display does not appear at the rate at which the look-ahead effect that extends to the next fluctuation display (variation display that becomes a big hit) is executed within the execution period of the fluctuation display. It is desirable to set it to be higher than the time. In this production example, as shown in FIG. 178 (I), a timer is used within a period from the completion of the mission in FIG. 178 (H) to the end (stop) of the fluctuation display with a lost symbol. A new look-ahead effect will be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the mission succeeds before the count display of the timer effect is started, the loss symbol is displayed in the variable display, and the variable display in which the count display of the timer effect is started appears. It will be possible to realize the effect as if the variable display in which the jackpot symbol appears is carried over. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a complaint on the player side to the hole side when the variable display ends (stops) with a lost symbol.

However, the look-ahead effect that spans the multiple variable displays (up to the variable display that becomes a big hit) does not necessarily have to be executed. In this sense, as shown in FIG. 178 (J), the pending information in which the big hit symbol appears. It is desirable to continue to display the special display (here, "Mission success!") That appeared within the execution period of the variable display in which the lost symbol appears even after the variable display is started after the game is digested. In this regard, if such a special display (here, "Mission success!") Is continuously displayed until the jackpot symbol appears in the variable display in which the jackpot symbol appears, the effect is produced until the jackpot symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 178 (K), it is definitively suggested that a big hit will be won as a production in the production pattern, because there is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable without being given a specific intonation. It is desirable to hide the special display (here, "Mission Success!") Before the appearance of. As a result, after the special display (here, "Mission success!") Is hidden, it is definitely confirmed that the production image shown in FIG. 178 (K) (here, the jackpot will be won as the production content in the production pattern). Until the suggested production image) appears, the anxiety about the appearance of the jackpot symbol will increase to some extent, and the production situation shown in FIG. 178 (L) (the production situation in which the jackpot symbol is stopped) will increase. ), It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In addition, in FIG. 178 (J), the count display of the timer effect of 30 seconds is started, and after the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (J) appears, the effect situation shown in FIG. 178 (K) is displayed. By the time it appears, the 30-second timer effect count display ends, the timer-related display (here, "Yukuzo") is displayed, and the effect that is the target of the effect has occurred. Needless to say.

Next, a timer effect example different from the timer effect example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180.

FIG. 179 (A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 is performing a variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a state where the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state. In FIG. 179 (B), three prizes are generated during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (A), and the hold information corresponding to those prizes is stored. The hold display corresponding to 1 is displayed in the normal hold mode, the hold display corresponding to the second winning hold 2 is displayed in the red mode, and the hold display corresponding to the third winning hold 3 is displayed in the blue mode. It shows the situation. In FIG. 179 (C), after the decorative symbol SZ that was in the variable display state in the effect state shown in FIG. 179 (B) is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol, the hold information is first-in first-out (First-In First-Out). ) Is displayed, and the hold information stored as hold 1 after the shift operation is digested and changed to a fluctuating state. In this production example as well, as is clear from the figure, even in the situation where the hold information of hold 1 is digested and the state of variable display (state of hold 0) is set, it is shown at the time of hold 1. The display control is performed so that the player can recognize the mode of the hold display (hold display of hold 0). Further, as described above, the hold display of hold 0 can be further changed in the mode of hold change (white blinking, blue, green, red, rainbow color) even in such a variable display state. It's a street. Further, in FIGS. 179 and 180, the movable body KT for production, which has been omitted in FIGS. 177 and 178 for convenience of explanation, is shown in the drawings. In addition, the movable body KT is, for example, "back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back top middle movable production unit 3400, back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc. It is equivalent to "movable member" etc.

Here, in the production situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), the hold information that was in the state of hold 1 at the time of FIGS. 179 (A) and 179 (B) is digested and the variable display is started. Or, the hold look-ahead effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display. As the mode of the hold look-ahead effect, any of the above-mentioned first precedent mode, second precedent mode, and third precedent mode may be executed, but in the effect situation shown in FIG. The appearance of the effect means that either the hold information of hold 0 (in the state of variable display), the hold information of hold 1, or the hold information of hold 2 is the target of the hold look-ahead effect. (In the example here, the hold information of hold 1 is the target of the hold look-ahead effect).

Here, as an aspect of the hold look-ahead effect, the count display may be executed from the time when the corresponding hold display (here, the hold information of hold 1) is still in the hold state. That is, in this case, not only may an event occur in which the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ ends after the count display reaches a predetermined value (“0” in this case), but the count display is a predetermined value (“0” in this case). Since the event that the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ ends before reaching is possible, the target of the timer effect is the target of any hold information even if the count display is being executed. It will be possible to make it difficult to grasp.

However, in this effect example, any one of the first preceding mode (premonition of timer generation), the second preceding mode (timer generation chance), and the third preceding mode (timer generation chance) is displayed as the mode of the hold look-ahead effect. Can be done.

In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), among the hold information 0, 1 and 2, the hold information 1 is in the red mode, which is the hold display mode with the highest expectation of a big hit. In view of this, from the player's point of view, it is desirable that the timer look-ahead effect targets the hold information 1 and generates a combined effect with the red hold display. That is, in this case, since it is shown that the expectation degree that the jackpot can be obtained by the hold information 1 is further higher by the composite effect, the hold 0 in the normal hold mode and the blue hold 2 in the low expectation degree are pre-read by the timer. It is possible to raise the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear in any of the hold information 0 to 2 as compared with the case where the jackpot expectation is dispersed as the target of the production. In addition, if the blue hold 2 with a low expectation becomes the target of the timer look-ahead effect, there is a concern that the game interest will deteriorate. Therefore, in order to maintain the game interest, the blue hold 2 with a low expectation is a timer. It is also important to advance the production so that it is not the target of the look-ahead production.

Moreover, as described above, in this embodiment, if a new prize is generated while the hold information (big hit hold) in which the big hit symbol appears is stored, the big hit hold time is not displayed in the normal time table T9a (FIG. 174). The hold change effect is executed with reference to a dedicated table (FIG. 175: special time hold change table T9b). In the hold change effect using the special time hold change table T9b, when the jackpot hold is already included (when hold 1 in the red mode is a jackpot), red and green are unlikely to appear as the hold 2 mode. And the mode of blinking blue or white is relatively easy to appear. Therefore, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (C), when the timer look-ahead effect targets the hold information 1 and functions to raise the jackpot expectation, the blue hold 2 with a low expectation is set as the timer. The blue mode is referred to by the special time hold change table T9b (Fig. 175) because the chance is increased by avoiding the deterioration of the game interest due to the target and the hold information of the hold 1 in the red mode is a big hit. Increased chances by expecting that the hold display of Hold 2 is blue (high probability of appearance) (the timer effect on the notice side with high expectation of big hit is "effect in the variable display during execution" The fact that the target of the production is also "functions as if it supports the fact that the variable display during execution is a big hit") will increase the chances, so it is necessary to improve the interest of the game. Will be able to.

Therefore, in the production situation shown in FIGS. 179 (B) and 179 (C), when a new prize is generated, a new hold display of blinking blue or white is generated, or a hold display of green or red is displayed. By confirming whether it will occur newly, it is possible to recognize whether the jackpot hold is included, and it can be said that the production situation is such that a new prize is urged.

In FIG. 179 (D), the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ that was in the running state is a lost symbol while the mode of the timer look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 179 (C) is maintained (without starting counting). After the end (stop), the hold information stored as hold 1 is digested by the shift operation of the hold information, and the effect state is changed to a fluctuating state.

When the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (D) is reached, the player can see that the target of the timer look-ahead effect is the hold information of hold 0 (in the state of variable display), which is the red mode, and the blue mode. It becomes possible to recognize that it is any of the hold information of hold 1, and it is desired that the count display is executed within the execution period of the variable display according to the hold information of hold 0, which is the red aspect.

In addition, also in this effect example, the timer effect is displayed with priority over other notice effects, decorative symbols, etc., including the case where the timer look-ahead effect is in the mode (FIG. 179 (D)). Here, a part of the range (left part) of the female character's dialogue part in the conversation notice is hidden by the timer effect that is displayed with priority over this.

FIG. 179 (E) shows an effect situation in which the timer look-ahead effect is terminated and the count display of the timer effect is being executed during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 179 (D). ..

However, as described above, whether or not the count display is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ according to the digestion of the red hold information (whether the timer look-ahead is for the red hold information). ) Is a matter of great interest to the player. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display in the executing state is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize that the count display is in the executing state. It is possible to control the movable body KT for directing to move forward and position it for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, it is confirmed whether or not the timer effect count display is executed while the timer effect (timer look-ahead effect, count display) is being executed and the player is given a feeling of excitement. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to further increase the attention to the timer effect and enhance the feeling of excitement.

In order to preferably realize such an effect, in a situation where the timer effect is executed but the count display is not yet executed (such as when the timer look-ahead effect is being executed), the movable body KT for the above effect is executed. It is desirable to control so as not to operate (move). That is, in this case, the movable body KT for the production suddenly moves where the player does not care about the existence of the movable body KT for the production, and the count display becomes difficult to see, so that the player cannot see the count display. Such a surprise effect that occurs at the worst timing makes it possible to further increase the attention to the timer effect and enhance the feeling of excitement.

Further, the operation effect by the movable body KT for the effect may be made to function only as an effect of making the timer look-ahead effect easier to see and making it difficult to see the count display among the timer effects. It may also function as a target notice E2 (first effect). That is, in this case, although the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is not the target of the timer effect and is not originally related, the non-target notice E2 (first effect) is executed during the execution of the count display. (FIG. 179 (E)), for example, a higher jackpot expectation than the cut-in effect shown in the next production situation (Fig. 179 (F)) will be shown, and the game interest will be improved. You will be able to do it.

As described above, it is desirable that the non-target notice E2 (here, the motion effect by the movable body KT for effect) is executed in any of a plurality of modes having different expectations, for example, counting. In the state where the display is not executed, it is desirable to indicate the jackpot expectation degree depending on which of the light emitting modes (blue, green, red) when the movable body KT for the effect is operated appears. At this time, when the movable body KT for the effect operates in the red light emitting mode, the jackpot expectation may be higher than that of the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (FIG. 179 (F)). The expected value of the jackpot expectation when the motion effect by the movable body KT for the effect occurs is lower than the expected value of the jackpot expectation of the cut-in effect shown in the next effect situation (Fig. 179 (F)). Is required to be. However, as described above, when the motion effect by the movable body KT for the effect is executed during the execution of the count display, the movable body for the effect is movable regardless of whether blue, green, or red appears as the light emitting mode. It is desirable to control so that the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the motion effect by the body KT is the same (for example, 70%). According to such a configuration, during the execution of the count display, attention is paid not to what kind of mode appears in the motion effect by the movable body KT for the effect, but to the motion effect itself by the movable body KT for the effect. As a result, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the enjoyment of the game depending on the mode when the motion effect by the movable body KT for the effect is generated.

By the way, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 179 (E), the above-mentioned double chance is successfully increased because the target of the timer look-ahead effect is not the hold 2 in the blue mode but the hold 1 in red. In addition, it has succeeded in increasing the chance by executing the non-target notice E2 (here, the motion effect by the movable body KT for the effect) during the execution of the count display. Therefore, even if it is in such a highly expected production situation, if it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will not be won in the variable display, the game interest is originally enhanced. It is inevitable that the game interest will be significantly reduced in the variable display that should be. In this regard, in the above-mentioned special time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175), which is referred to when the jackpot hold (including hold 0) is included, the hold in the green or red mode when a new prize is generated. Since it is difficult for the information to appear, if the hold 2 corresponding to the occurrence of a new prize in the production situation shown in FIG. 179 (E) is displayed on hold in the red mode, the jackpot hold is included. There is a possibility that the player will be exposed to what is not done.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a new prize is won during the period during which the count display of the specific timer effect, which is considered to be a highly expected mode, is executed, and during the period thereafter. Even if the mode occurs, it becomes difficult to recognize the mode (blinking white, blue, green, red, rainbow color), and even if the hold display that has already been displayed is changed to hold, it becomes difficult to recognize the mode. I'm supposed to do it. In the example shown in FIG. 179 (E), the hold 1 and 2 are hidden and displayed by their shadows, making it difficult to recognize the mode of the hold display. However, the hold display itself is displayed in the effect display device 1600. May be hidden. As a result, even though the count display with a high degree of expectation is being executed, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the game interest due to the appearance of a green or red hold display when a new prize is generated. become.

In FIG. 179 (F), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 179 (E) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”) and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, It shows the production status in which the production (cut-in production by a ally character) that is the production target of the timer production is being executed. As shown in FIG. 179 (F), even in a situation where the effect (cut-in effect by a ally character) that is the target of the timer effect is being executed, the holds 1 and 2 remain hidden and are shaded by their shadows. The mode of the hold display is difficult to recognize.

In FIG. 180 (G), after the effect (cut-in effect by the ally character) that is the effect target of the timer effect is executed in FIG. 180 (F), the ally character wins over the enemy character, so that the variable display is displayed. It shows the production situation where the jackpot symbol indicates that the game will be stopped.

In the production situation shown in FIG. 180 (G), since it is definitively suggested that the game will be a big hit, the game interest will be reduced regardless of which of the modes 1 and 2 appears. There is no such thing. Therefore, with respect to the hold 1 and 2 which are difficult to recognize, which mode has appeared after the effect indicating whether or not the jackpot is displayed is displayed in a recognizable manner. It is desirable to be done. That is, in this case, even if it is shown that the fluctuation display is definitely stopped due to the defeat of the ally character by the enemy character, the mode of hold 1 and 2 becomes recognizable at that time, and as a result, it is held. Since it may be recognized that any one of 1 and 2 is in the form of red or rainbow color, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (G), a new timer effect is generated and the count display is started. In this count display, even in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (H) in which the jackpot symbol is fixedly stopped and the variable display is terminated, the remaining count number remains (the count number displayed at the start of the count display). Of these, the number of counts is greater than the minimum number of counts (10 seconds)), and the effect that is the target of the timer effect is not generated at all, and continues even after the variable display ends. It is executed as the above-mentioned special timer effect.

However, after that, the count display of the timer effect is hidden during the period when the opening effect is executed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (I). As a result, the variable display (design effect) that ends in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (H) and the effect during the jackpot game that starts in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (J) (big hit game effect) are displayed. It becomes possible to recognize that the production is not connected to each other, and the player can enjoy the newly started production with a fresh feeling.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is secretly executed according to the passage of time even during the period in which the count display of the timer effect is hidden (execution period of the opening effect). Therefore, when the count display of the timer effect is redisplayed in the effect during the jackpot game (big hit game effect) started in the effect situation shown in FIG. 180 (J), the numerical value of the count display is advanced by that amount. I try to be there. Then, a production situation is created as if the remaining time until the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value suddenly decreases, so that the count is performed when the player's feelings are not ready. It becomes possible to make the display reach a predetermined numerical value, and it is preferably avoided that the timer effect that is continued from the state of the variable display becomes a rut.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the timer effect that is continued from the state of the variable display is controlled so that the count display reaches a predetermined value within the execution period of the jackpot game. At this time, the point that a timer-related display (here, "Yukuzo") suggesting that a predetermined numerical value (here, 0) has been reached appears is the same as the timer effect performed within the period of the variable display.

In FIG. 180 (K), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 180 (J) reaches a predetermined numerical value (here, “0”) and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, It shows the production status in which the specific effect (corresponding to the above-mentioned first special effect and the second special effect, "CHANGE" is displayed in the figure), which is the target of the timer effect, is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 180 (K), in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a specific effect (display of "CHANGE") can be executed within the execution period of the jackpot game, and the specific effect ("CHANCE" is displayed). When "CHANGE" is executed), the winning jackpot type is advantageous to the player (for example, the type in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 rounds, or the high-probability time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. It is shown that the degree of expectation is high. The ratio may be 100%. In this way, when the above-mentioned special timer effect in which the count display is continued until after the jackpot game is started is executed, not only the jackpot is confirmed, but also the winning jackpot is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. Since a certain degree of expectation will be high, it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

After that, when the ally character fights against the enemy character in a specific round game or the like, and the ally character wins as a result (Fig. 180 (L)), the winning jackpot is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. Will be shown to be. When a teammate character is defeated in the production, it is indicated that the winning jackpot is not a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player.

When the result of the production during the big hit game appears in this way, the game will proceed according to the result. For example, if the result that the ally character wins is obtained, the big hit game is executed up to 16 rounds. Or, after the jackpot game is completed, it will be controlled to a high probability time saving state. On the other hand, if the result that the ally character is defeated is obtained, the big hit game is ended in 8 rounds, or after the big hit game is finished, the game state with a lower degree of advantage than the high probability time saving state (for example, low probability). It will be controlled by the time saving state etc.).

Here, the effect content of the specific effect (display of "CHANGE") shown in FIG. 180 (K) may be related to the effect in which the ally character fights against the enemy character in the specific round game. For example, in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180 (K), the effect content in which the ally character acquires a weapon is set, and the effect of fighting the enemy character using the weapon acquired in the specific round game is executed. For example, in the specific effect shown in FIG. 180 (K), it is possible to imply that the ally character is more likely to win in the subsequent battle.

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself that may appear when such a timer effect is executed, and various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described. It should be noted that the effects described below can be appropriately combined and executed between the effects, and can also be appropriately combined and executed between the above-mentioned effects. Further, in each of the following production examples, the case where the effect is executed as the notice side timer effect is described, but the case may be executed as the variable side timer effect instead of the notice side timer effect. That is, in this case, the production content related to each of the following production examples is predetermined as the production content of the variation pattern.

[Timer target exclusion effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, a plurality of production modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc. ) Is prepared, one of those effect modes is set as a timer target (count target) (timer target notice lottery), and a count display is performed toward the timing when the timer target effect mode appears. To execute. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, a plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation (character A notice), special timer, cut-in B, character B operation). (Notice of character B)) is performed without knowing which one is the target of the timer, and the production mode (notice of the timer target) that is not the target of the timer in such a production situation. It is possible to display which is the effect mode that was not determined as the timer target in the lottery (timer target exclusion effect).

That is, in this case, at the stage where the remaining count in the timer effect is exhausted, the estimation material as to which effect mode is the target of the timer is provided. For example, when a low-expected production mode (for example, a conversation notice) is suggested as an effect mode that is not a timer target, the possibility that the low-expected production mode appears as a timer target is excluded at that time. Therefore, even though the remaining count in the timer production is being exhausted, the game is enjoyed by the expectation that a highly expected production mode (for example, the character B operation) will appear as a timer target. Will be expected to improve. Further, when a highly expected production mode (for example, the operation of the accessory B) is suggested as the production mode that is not targeted by the timer, it is considered that the timer production cannot be expected at that time, and other effects are not expected. It is expected that the production can be focused on and the deterioration of the game interest when the count display reaches a predetermined value can be suppressed. According to such a configuration, while the remaining count is being digested, the expectation for the timer effect can be appropriately changed without changing the mode of the count display itself.

FIG. 181 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer target exclusion effect performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "Character reach without timer" are selected in the situation. FIG. 181 (b) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer target exclusion effect performed when the variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "SP reach without timer" are selected in the situation.

In the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), a specific timer type (any of "hold change 5", "accessory A operation 3", and "special timer 1"). When is selected (see FIG. 161), the timer target exclusion effect is executed, and even in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), a specific timer type (see step S5510) is executed as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). When any of "hold change 5", "accessory A operation 3", and "accessory B operation 1") is selected (see FIG. 161), the timer target exclusion effect is executed.

However, the timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). For example, the timer type is irrelevant and the fluctuation pattern type. Or, it may be performed based on the fact that a special result is obtained in a predetermined production lottery based on the result of a big hit determination or the like. Further, as will be described later, the timer target exclusion effect may be made to appear within the fluctuation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be made to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. good. According to such a configuration, if it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed after the fact (for the timer target first-out effect) (although it is unknown whether it is executed), the effect that does not appear as the timer target. It becomes possible to indicate in advance which type the mode is. When the timer target exclusion effect appears while the timer effect has not been executed yet (the timer look-ahead effect is not even displayed), the timer effect is subsequently produced as compared with the case where the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. It is desirable that the rate of execution of is high so that the timer effect is also executed as an effect that suggests that the timer effect is executed in advance.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "hold change 5" or "accessory A operation 3", 20 seconds have passed since the symbol change was started. At the timing around, the count display with the count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes "0", the effect mode ("hold change 5" or "feature A operation") that is the target of the timer. 3 ") is appearing.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "hold change 5" or "accessory A operation 3", 20 seconds have passed since the symbol change was started. At the timing around the elapse, the count display with the count number of 20 seconds is started, and after the count display becomes "0", the effect mode ("hold change 5" or "role") that is the target of the timer. A operation 3 ") appears.

In this regard, in the case of these examples, the timer effect is not executed (the timer look-ahead effect is not even displayed) at the timing when 10 seconds have passed since the symbol change was started. The first timer target exclusion effect may occur. In the first timer target exclusion effect, for example, it is shown that the "conversation notice" is not a candidate for the timer target, and when the timer effect occurs within the fluctuation, the candidate for the timer target. Is narrowed down to any of the pending change, the cut-in A, the accessory A operation, the special timer, the cut-in B, and the accessory B operation, so that the player can grasp. That is, in this case, among the plurality of production modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation), the low-expected production mode is excluded from the timer target candidates. Since it becomes possible to recognize that (the high-expected production mode has the expectation that it is a candidate for the timer target), the player hopes that the timer production will occur within the fluctuation. Therefore, it is expected to improve the game interest when the timer effect (count display) is in the unexecuted state.

In the period in which the count display is not executed (in this example, the period from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the elapse of 20 seconds), the above-mentioned timer look-ahead effect (first preceding mode, second mode). The preceding mode, the third preceding mode) may be displayed.

Next, at the timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the symbol variation, the second timer target exclusion effect may occur in accordance with the start of the count display in the timer effect. In the second timer target exclusion effect, effects other than the effects (conversation notice) that have already been excluded in the first timer target exclusion effect are excluded. For example, in the second timer target exclusion effect, if it is shown that the "special timer" is not a timer target candidate, the timer target candidate is pending change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B. , It becomes possible for the player to grasp that it has been narrowed down to any of the character B movements. In this case, among a plurality of production modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation), the production mode in which the big hit is confirmed is selected from the timer target candidates. Since it becomes possible to recognize that it has come off, it is possible to arouse anxiety about whether a highly expected production will appear as a timer target from the time when the first timer target exclusion effect is executed. Become.

Then, the third timer target exclusion effect may occur at the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the symbol variation. In the third timer target exclusion effect, effects other than the effects (conversation notice, special timer) that have already been excluded in the first and second timer target exclusion effects are further excluded. For example, when it is shown that "cut-in B" is not a candidate for the timer target, the candidate for the timer target is narrowed down to one of the pending change, the cut-in A, the accessory A operation, and the accessory B operation. It will be possible for the player to understand this.

Then, at the timing when 40 seconds have passed from the start of the symbol change, the count display reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case), and the effect mode (“hold change 5” determined by the timer target notice lottery) In the case of ", a pending change occurs, and in the case of" accessory A operation 3 ", accessory A operation occurs)) is executed as the effect of the timer target.

By the way, in the timer effects of "hold change 5" and "feature A operation 3" shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b), the timer is targeted when 40 seconds have passed since the symbol change was started. Although the effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, in such a mode of the timer effect (the timer effect in which the effect of the timer target is executed when 40 seconds have passed), the effect is executed. , It can be seen that there are only three targets for timer production: conversation notice, hold change, and accessory movement. That is, in this case, when the experienced player confirms that the timer effect in which the count display reaches a predetermined value occurs at the timing of 40 seconds after the symbol change is started, the timer target is notified of the conversation. , Hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation, but one of three of conversation notice, hold change, and character A operation. It is expected to see through. At this time, if two of the conversation notice, the hold change, and the character A operation are excluded by the timer target exclusion effect, any of the effects will be displayed when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Since it appears or is exposed, it is desirable to execute the timer target exclusion effect so that at least two or more effects are left as candidates for the timer effect.

According to such a timer target exclusion effect, when the timer effect (count display) is in an unexecuted state or during the execution of the count display, the feeling of expectation and anxiety is intonation (any effect is excluded from the timer target). Since it becomes possible to have (depending on whether or not it is played), it is expected that the game interest will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value.

Moreover, in the examples shown in FIGS. 181 (a) and 181 (b), the timing for generating the timer target exclusion effect is the timing when the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) (or the timer target effect). Is set according to any one of a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc. from the start of fluctuation) prepared as candidates for (timing at which) appears.

For example, looking at the time charts shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, when 45 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, even if the count display becomes 0 after that, the "role A operation" is displayed as the effect of the timer target. It turns out that there is no possibility of appearing. In this way, in the timer effect, each timing (in this example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, and 40 seconds from the start of fluctuation) is usually prepared as a candidate for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case). As the passage of time passes, the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are also narrowed down. In this regard, by performing the timer target exclusion effect, even if it is a beginner, each timing prepared as a candidate for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case) (in this example, the fluctuation start). You will be able to enjoy the timer effect to a high degree by recognizing that the types of effects that can appear as timer targets will be narrowed down as 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc. pass. ..

Therefore, among the examples shown in FIG. 181 (a), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "special timer 1" (a count display having a count number of 70 seconds according to the start of the symbol variation of the character reach is displayed. In the example), each time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, and 40 seconds elapse from the start of fluctuation, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, the third timer target exclusion effect, and 4 The timer target exclusion effect for the second time will be executed respectively. Further, among the examples shown in FIG. 181 (b), an example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of "Character B operation 1" (a count having a count number of 70 seconds according to the start of the symbol variation of SP reach). In the example) in which the display is performed, the first timer target exclusion effect, the second timer target exclusion effect, and the third timer each time 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, and 50 seconds elapse from the start of the fluctuation. The target exclusion effect, the fourth timer target exclusion effect, and the fifth timer target exclusion effect are executed, respectively.

In the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment, each time a plurality of predetermined timings arrive after the symbol variation is started, one effect mode that is not a timer target in the count effect is suggested. I did it. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer target exclusion effect every time a plurality of predetermined timings arrive, and a predetermined probability is obtained each time the timings arrive based on the type of fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot judgment. The timer target exclusion effect may appear in, or the timing for executing the timer target exclusion effect may be selected from those timings. Further, at this time, the execution probability of the timer target exclusion effect may be different for each of a plurality of predetermined timings. For example, at a relatively early timing after the symbol change is started (for example, the timing at which the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) can occur), the symbol change is relatively started. If the ratio of the timer target exclusion effect being executed is higher than the late timing (for example, the timing at which the fourth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 181 (a) can occur), one effect is produced. The count display can be digested for a relatively long time in a state where it is suggested that the aspect is not timered. However, in this case, when the timer target exclusion effect is executed at the timing when the first timer target exclusion effect can occur, and when the timer target exclusion effect is executed at the timing when the fourth timer target exclusion effect can occur. It is desirable that the ratio (expectation degree) at which the jackpot symbol appears is the same regardless of the timing (or at any timing when the timer target exclusion effect is executed). In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. According to such a configuration, the timer target exclusion effect appears at an early timing (while the rate at which the timer target exclusion effect is executed is high) after the count display is started (after the symbol starts to fluctuate). Since you will be conscious of what you are doing, you will be expected to improve your game interest from the beginning of the production.

When realizing such an effect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the timer target is based on the result of the jackpot determination, the type of the fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "pending change 5" of the character reach). Judgment as to whether to generate the exclusion effect or at which timing (in the example of FIG. 181 (a), a maximum of 3 timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds)) the timer target exclusion effect is generated. Perform processing. Next, at each timing when it is determined to generate the timer target exclusion effect, a determination process is performed as to which effect mode is suggested as the effect mode that is not the timer target. It should be noted that these determination processes are performed, for example, after each process shown in FIG. 149, or after step S5510 is performed and before step S5511 is performed. It can be performed based on the processing result information.

Alternatively, a dedicated timer target exclusion effect (dedicated to conversation notice) that suggests that a specific effect mode (for example, conversation notice) is not subject to the timer may be performed. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU1511a first performs a dedicated timer target exclusion effect based on the result of the jackpot determination, the type of fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "pending change 5" of the character reach). It is necessary to perform a determination process as to whether to generate the timer or when to generate the dedicated timer target exclusion effect.

In any case, when the effect mode suggested as the effect mode that is not the target of the timer is the effect mode with relatively low expectations, the suggested effect mode is the effect mode with relatively high expectations. It is desirable that the proportion of high-expected effect modes appearing as timer-targeted effects is higher than in the case of. According to such a configuration, when a dedicated timer target exclusion effect that excludes a low-expected effect mode (conversation notice) appears, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

Further, at least at a specific timing among the above-mentioned plurality of timings, it may be suggested that only a specific production mode (for example, "conversation notice" which is a supposedly low-expected production mode) is not a timer target. It may be set as. That is, in this case, when the timer target exclusion effect occurs at a specific timing, it is understood that the specific effect mode (for example, "conversation notice" which is a supposedly low expectation effect mode) is not the timer target. Since it will be possible, it will be possible to maintain the interest of the game by giving a sense of expectation that the production of the timer target is a highly expected production mode.

Further, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this embodiment, one effect mode is suggested as an effect that is not a timer target, but under a predetermined condition, two or more effects that are not a timer target are suggested. You may suggest the production mode of. For example, if two low-expected effects are suggested, it will be possible to greatly enhance the interest of the game even at the stage where the remaining count in the timer effect is being consumed.

In addition, regarding the "display suggesting which effect mode is not the target of the timer", the period from the start of the count display until the count display reaches a predetermined value (0 in this case) (or). It is desirable to make it appear within the period until the effect that is the target of the timer is executed, and to maintain the display during the same period. Furthermore, with regard to the "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target", if the display is maintained even after the effect that is the timer target is executed, the timer effect can be produced. It becomes possible to use it as a material for remembering which production mode the target of.

In addition, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the "display suggesting which effect mode is not targeted by the timer" is displayed while the remaining count of the count display is being consumed (for example, a specific timer). When the timer effect of the type is executed, it is hidden at a predetermined timing (such as when the specific count value is reached) at a predetermined timing (when the specific count value is reached before the count display reaches the predetermined value). The count display may reach a predetermined value (here, “0”) while the value is maintained, and the effect targeted by the timer may be executed. That is, in this case, the remaining count of the count display is consumed without knowing when the "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target" is hidden. It will be expected to maintain a sense of tension during the same period (a period in which it is easy to become a rut). In order to obtain such an effect, the hidden "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target" reaches a predetermined value and becomes the timer target. It is desirable to maintain the hidden state even after the appearance of the effect mode. However, even if the "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target" is hidden, the effect once suggested as the effect mode that is not the timer target is the timer target effect. It is important to control it so that it does not appear, and it is possible to enjoy the timer effect with peace of mind as long as the memory about the hidden effect mode is not forgotten. In addition, the hidden "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target" is displayed even after the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect mode that is the timer target appears. After maintaining the hidden state (for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed), the symbol is displayed again at a timing before the fixed stop, and it is confirmed whether the player's memory is correct. It is desirable to be able to do it.

Further, when the timer effect (count display) is in the unexecuted state and the "display suggesting which effect mode is not targeted by the timer" appears, the predetermined effect condition is also satisfied. When it is satisfied, the timer effect (count display) may be hidden while it is in the unexecuted state. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to give a feeling of tension regarding the timer effect even before the count display is started, and it becomes possible to provide a sharp effect.

As will be described later, "display suggesting which effect mode is not targeted by the timer" is shown in FIGS. 198 (C) to (K) and FIGS. 200 (B) to (J). In addition, it is sufficient if it is possible to grasp that the effect mode does not occur when the count display becomes 0. Other methods include, for example, a method of displaying the name of the effect mode on the effect display device 1600 and marking it with a cross, as well as a conversation notice and cut-in at a timing before the count display reaches 0. A method to show that a female character or a male character has died and suggest that a conversation notice or cut-in cannot be executed, or a monochrome display is held before the count display reaches 0. Show that the characters A and B have failed and become inoperable at the timing before the count display reaches 0, as well as the method of displaying with and making the color change impossible. It is also possible to adopt a method that suggests that the accessory A operation and B cannot be performed. The point is to prepare a special mode that cannot appear at the timing before the count display reaches 0 when it is selected as the effect of the timer target, and this at the timing before the count display reaches 0. By executing an effect that is not a timer target, such as a conversation notice or a hold change, in a special mode, it is possible to realize a "display suggesting which effect mode is not a timer target". ..

Further, when the timer target exclusion effect is generated, a highly expected effect mode is more likely to appear as a timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value, as compared with the case where the timer target exclusion effect does not occur. If the control is performed in this way, it is expected that the improvement of the game interest when the count display is exhausting the remaining count will be more preferably achieved.

By the way, when it is suggested that the effect mode (special timer) for which the hit is confirmed is not the timer target in the timer target exclusion effect, any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Even so, there is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable because it will be compared with the production mode (special timer) for which the hit is confirmed. Therefore, when it is shown that the effect mode (special timer) for which the hit is confirmed is not the timer target, the symbol is concerned even if any other effect mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. The fluctuation may be stopped by the jackpot symbol.

Alternatively, when the timer target exclusion effect is generated, the jackpot symbol appears regardless of which effect mode appears as the timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"). The ratios (expectations) may be the same. In this case, the degree of expectation may include 100%. That is, in this case, since it is not necessary to pay attention to which effect mode appears as the timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value, it is substantially the time when the timer target exclusion effect appears (the rest of the count). It will be possible to end the timer effect early at the stage where the time is being exhausted). As a result, it becomes possible to shift attention to other productions even though the remaining count of the count display is being digested, so the production design that increases the types of productions that appear per unit time You will be able to encourage.

In addition, if two or more count displays (timer effect) appear within one symbol fluctuation period, and after the timer target exclusion effect is executed, if an effect situation occurs in which they reach a predetermined value at different timings, the timer It is desirable to control the effect mode that is suggested not to be a timer target in the target exclusion effect so that it does not appear as the timer target in any timer effect (count display).

In addition, regarding the effect mode that is suggested not to be the timer target in the timer target exclusion effect, even if the count display is different from the timing when the predetermined value is reached, it will not appear after that. It is desirable to control (control so that it does not appear even if it is not a timer target).

Further, when executing the timer target exclusion effect, a preceding effect may be performed to indicate whether or not the timer target is not targeted. That is, in this case, the timer target exclusion effect is not executed when the predetermined mode does not appear in the preceding effect, and the timer target exclusion effect is executed after the predetermined mode appears in the preceding effect.

Further, in this embodiment, the timer target exclusion effect is executed according to any of a plurality of timings prepared as candidates for the timing when the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, 0). However, the timer target exclusion effect may be executed in accordance with any of a plurality of predetermined timings, and it is not always necessary to execute the timer target exclusion effect in accordance with these timings. However, even within the period during which the count display is being executed, it is desirable that the timer target exclusion effect is not executed during a specific effect period such as a period during which the remaining count is low.

Further, among the timer types determined in the count display lottery (step S5510), the execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not permitted for the entire period during which the count display is executed, or the period during which the count display is executed. It is also possible that the execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not permitted in a part of the period of. By preparing such a special timer type, it becomes possible to concentrate on how the count display is digested when the timer type appears, and the original timer effect can be enjoyed. Will be. In order to obtain such an action effect, when the timer target exclusion effect is in a special period in which the timer target exclusion effect cannot occur, an effect mode different from that in the case where the timer target exclusion effect cannot occur is made to appear in the special period. It can be said that it is important for the player to be able to recognize this. On the other hand, even if the timer type does not allow the execution of the timer target exclusion effect for the entire period during which the count display is executed, the concentration on the timer effect is concentrated in the period before the count display is started. Since there is no concern that the timer will be killed, it is desirable to allow the execution of the timer target exclusion effect.

It should be noted that the period for hiding the above-mentioned "display suggesting which effect mode is not the timer target" is controlled as the same period as the period during which the execution of the timer target exclusion effect is not allowed. May be good.

Further, when the count display in the timer effect is executed in any one of a plurality of modes including at least the first mode and the second mode, and the count display is performed in the second mode, the first mode is used. It may be controlled so that the ratio of executing the timer target exclusion effect is higher than that in the case where the count display is performed in the mode. In this case, the ratio may include 100%. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest that the timer target exclusion effect is performed depending on the mode of the count display, and it becomes possible to pay attention to the effect during the count display depending on the mode of the count display.

The timer target exclusion effect is not performed when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). It may be performed based on the fact that a special result is obtained in a predetermined production lottery based on the result of the determination or the like. Further, as will be described later, the timer target exclusion effect may be made to appear within the fluctuation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be made to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. good.

Further, as described above, when the timer target exclusion effect appears in the state where the timer effect has not been executed yet (the state in which even the timer look-ahead effect display does not appear), the timer target exclusion effect does not appear as compared with the case where the timer target exclusion effect does not appear. It is desirable that the ratio of the timer effect being executed after that is increased so that the timer effect is executed as an effect that suggests that the timer effect is executed in advance. In this sense, the timer target exclusion effect may be executed as the first preceding mode or the second preceding aspect of the timer look-ahead effect. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation in which the timer effect is executed has not been started and is still in the hold state, a specific effect mode that is not targeted by the timer can be suggested by the timer effect. A specific effect mode is not targeted for the timer with the speculation that the timer effect appears due to the symbol fluctuation inside, the timer effect appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the pending state, or the timer effect does not appear. It is expected that the game will be maintained until the timer effect is generated.

[Timer target first-out effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, a predetermined effect (movement of the accessory B) using the specific decorative member (accessory B) is counted, and the count display is displayed toward the timing when the predetermined effect appears. It is executed up to a predetermined value within the period during which the design effect is performed. In this respect, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, the timer effect is specified within the period before the timing when the count display becomes a predetermined value and the predetermined effect appears in the period during which the symbol effect is performed. By making an effect using a decorative member appear, it can be suggested that a predetermined effect is counted (timer target first-out effect).

That is, in this case, by paying attention to what kind of effect appears when the remaining count in the count display is being consumed, the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Since it becomes possible to predict, it is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably maintained from the start of the count display to the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

FIG. 182 is a second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). This is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the timer target first-out effect performed when the variable numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to the “SP reach without timer” are selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 182, for convenience of explanation, when any of the specific timer types (first-out timers 1 to 6) not illustrated in FIG. 162 is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). The timer target first-out effect is executed. Further, in the first-out timers 4 to 6 of the first-out timers 1 to 6, the accessory A used in the "accessory A operation" and the accessory B used in the "accessory B operation" are used as the effect of the timer target. An effect such as "role A & B operation" that operates both is performed.

However, the timer target first-out effect is not performed when a specific timer type (first-out timers 1 to 6) is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), but is illustrated in FIG. 162, for example. When any of the selected timer types is selected, the timer target first-out effect may be performed, or the timer type is irrelevant and is special in a predetermined effect lottery based on the type of fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot judgment. It may be done based on the results obtained. Further, as will be described later, the timer target first-out effect may be made to appear within a fluctuation pattern in which it is determined that the timer effect is not executed, or may be made to appear at a timing before the timer effect is executed. good. According to such a configuration, if it is assumed that the count display of the timer effect is executed after the fact (for the timer target first-out effect) (although it is unknown whether it is executed), the count display of the timer effect is displayed. It becomes possible to indicate in advance which type of effect mode appears when the value reaches a predetermined value. In this case, when the timer target first-out effect appears in a state where the timer effect has not been executed yet (the state in which even the timer look-ahead effect is not displayed), the timer target first-out effect is later than the case where the timer target first-out effect does not appear. It is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed is high so that the timer effect is also executed as an effect that suggests that the timer effect is executed in advance.

Among the examples shown in FIG. 182, first, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of the first-out timers 1 and 4, the count number of 50 seconds is counted at the timing when 20 seconds have passed since the symbol variation was started. The counting display is started, and after the count display becomes "0", the effect mode ("character B operation" or "character A & B operation") that is the target of the timer appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the mode of the first-out timers 2 and 5, the count display having a count number of 70 seconds is started in accordance with the start timing of the symbol variation, and the count display is "0". After that, the effect mode (“character B operation” or “character A & B operation”) that is the target of the timer appears. On the other hand, in the example in which the timer effect is executed in the first-out timers 3 and 6, the display of the timer look-ahead effect (first preceding mode, second preceding mode, or third preceding mode) is performed according to the start timing of the symbol variation. At the same time as it appears, the timer look-ahead effect is hidden and the count display with a count number of 20 seconds is started at the timing when 50 seconds have passed while the timer look-ahead effect is displayed. After the display becomes "0", the effect mode ("character B operation" or "character A & B operation") that is the target of the timer appears.

In this regard, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, the timer effect is not executed (even the display of the timer look-ahead effect) at the timing when the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds) elapses from the start of the symbol variation. The first timer target first-out effect may occur even though it is set to (not in a state). In the first timer target first-out effect, for example, the accessory B used in the timer-targeted effects of the first-out timers 1 and 4 in the "role B operation" and "character A & B operation" is placed at or near the first position. A production that vibrates rattlingly (role B rattling) is performed at.

That is, the "effect B operation" which is the effect of the timer target of the first-out timer 1 is the "effect of displacing the accessory B from the first position to the second position", and is the effect of the timer target of the first-out timer 4. The "accessory A & B operation" is the first production, whereas the "accessory A & B operation" is "a production in which the accessory B is displaced from the first position to the second position and the accessory A is displaced from the third position to the fourth position". In the timer target first-out effect, although it is common in that the accessory B used in those effects is used, an effect different from any of these effects (character B rattling) is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the timer effect is performed after the timer effect is executed even though it is in the stage before the timer effect is executed, and the target effect in the timer effect is It becomes possible to suggest which production mode is used (suggesting that the production uses the accessory B). In addition, in the first timer target first-out effect, the effect (character B rattling) different from the timer target effect (character B operation, accessory A & B operation) is performed using the accessory B. While suggesting that the target effect in the timer effect is an effect using the accessory B, this is kept secret about how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect of the timer target is performed.

Further, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds) elapses from the start of the symbol variation, the second timer target while the timer effect count display is performed. First-out production can occur. In the second timer target first-out effect, for example, the accessory B used in the timer-targeted effects of the first-out timers 1 and 4 in the "role B operation" and the "character A & B operation" is moved from the "first position". An effect of displacing to "the first halfway position between the first position and the second position" (role B intermediate movement (small)) is performed.

That is, although the second timer target first-out effect is common in that the accessory B used in the "character B operation" and the "character A & B operation" is used, the effect is different from any of these effects (character). B Midway operation (small)) is to be performed. According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching a predetermined value (when the remaining count is digested), which production mode is the target production. It becomes possible to suggest (suggest that the production uses the character B). Also, in the second timer target first-out effect, the effect B is used to perform an effect different from the timer target effect (role B operation, accessory A & B operation) (role B intermediate operation (small)). By doing so, while suggesting which production mode the target production in the timer production is, how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value is explained. It becomes possible to keep it secret, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect of the timer target is performed.

Moreover, in the second timer target first-out effect, the range of the effect using the accessory B (from the "first position" to the "first position") is larger than the first timer target first-out effect (rattling near the "first position"). The displacement to the "midway position") is large, and the range of the effect that appears when the "feature B movement" or "feature A & B movement" is performed (displacement from the "first position" to the "second position") ) Is approaching. Therefore, by comparing the first timer target first-out effect and the second timer target first-out effect, the character B can be used in the timer target effect (“character B operation” or “character A & B operation”). It will be possible to provide speculation about how it works.

Further, in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4, at the timing when the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds) elapses from the start of the symbol variation, the third timer target while the timer effect count display is performed. First-out production can occur. In the third timer-targeted first-out effect, for example, the accessory B used in the timer-targeted effects of the first-out timers 1 and 4 in the "role B operation" and "character A & B operation" is "first" from the first position. An effect of displacing to the "second halfway position between the first halfway position and the second halfway position" (role B halfway operation (large)) is performed.

That is, although the third timer target first-out effect is common in that the accessory B used in the "character B operation" and the "character A & B operation" is used, the effect is different from any of these effects (character). B Midway operation (large)) is to be performed. According to such a configuration, when the count display reaches a specific count value before reaching a predetermined value (when the remaining count is digested), which production mode is the target production. It becomes possible to suggest (suggest that the production uses the character B). Also, in the third timer target first-out effect, the effect B is used to perform an effect different from the timer target effect (role B operation, accessory A & B operation) (role B intermediate operation (large)). By doing so, while suggesting which production mode the target production in the timer production is, how the accessory B operates when the count display reaches a predetermined value is explained. It becomes possible to keep it secret, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the count display reaches a predetermined value and the effect of the timer target is performed.

Moreover, in the third timer target first-out effect, the range of the effect using the accessory B (displacement from the "first position" to the "second halfway position") is larger than that of the first and second timer target first-out effects. The size is increased, and the mode is closer to the range of the effect (displacement from the "first position" to the "second position") that appears when the "character B operation" or the "character A & B operation" is performed. There is. Therefore, by comparing with the 1st to 3rd timer target first-out effects, the character B operates in any mode in the timer target effects (“character B operation” and “character A & B operation”). It will be possible to provide more speculation about what to do.

On the other hand, also in the case of the first-out timers 2 and 5, at the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds), the "role B rattling", Each effect such as "character B intermediate operation (small)" and "character B intermediate operation (large)" is performed as the first to third timer target first-out effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the first-out timers 2 and 5, the timer-targeted first-out effect is performed in a situation where the count display is exhausting the remaining counts at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. It will be done.

On the other hand, also in the case of the first-out timers 3 and 6, in the timing Ta1 (for example, 7 seconds), the timing Ta2 (for example, 27 seconds), and the timing Ta3 (for example, 57 seconds), the "role B rattling" and the "role" Each effect such as "object B intermediate operation (small)" and "character B intermediate operation (large)" is performed as the first to third timer target first-out effects. However, as shown in FIG. 182, in the case of the first-out timers 3 and 6, at each of the timings Ta1 and Ta2, the count display is not executed and the timer look-ahead effect is displayed. Based on this, the first and second timer target first-out effects will be performed. According to such a configuration, the timer target first-out effect is executed when the count display is not executed, but in the case of the first-out timers 1 and 4 in which even the timer look-ahead effect is not displayed. Compared to this, the rate of occurrence of events such as "the timer effect itself was not executed even though the timer target first-out effect was executed" is reduced, so the player has a higher expectation. You will be able to enjoy the timer-targeted first-out effect.

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 182, the count display reaches a predetermined value after the first to third timer target first-out effects are executed in this way. After that, the symbol variation is stopped after the effect of the timer target is executed.

In the timer target first-out effect according to this embodiment, each time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive after the symbol variation is started, the "character B operation" and the "character A & B operation" are performed. It was decided to perform the production using the accessory B used in. However, it is not always necessary to execute the timer target first-out effect each time a plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3 arrive, and the timings ta1 to ta3 are set based on the type of fluctuation pattern and the result of jackpot determination. The timer target first-out effect may appear with a predetermined probability each time it arrives, or the timing for executing the timer target first-out effect may be selected from those timings. Further, at this time, the execution probability of the timer target first-out effect and the selection ratio of the effect content may be different for each of the plurality of predetermined timings ta1 to ta3.

In order to realize such an effect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the timer target is based on the result of the jackpot determination, the type of the fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "first-out timer 1" of SP reach). A determination process (see FIG. 183) is performed as to whether to generate the first-out effect or when to generate the timer-targeted first-out effect. Next, at each timing when it is determined to generate the timer target first-out effect, a determination process (see FIGS. 184 and 185) is performed as to which effect mode is to be executed as the timer target first-out effect. It should be noted that these determination processes are performed, for example, after each process shown in FIG. 149, or after step S5510 is performed and before step S5511 is performed. It can be performed based on the processing result information.

FIG. 183 is a diagram showing an example of the content (table T10) of the determination process regarding whether to generate the timer target first-out effect and further, at what timing the timer target first-out effect is generated.

As described above, the timer target first-out effect is the timer target within the period before the timing when the count display becomes a predetermined value and the timer target effect appears during the period in which the symbol effect is performed. By making an effect using the specific decorative member used in the effect of the above appear, it is an effect that suggests that the effect using the specific decorative member is targeted by the timer, and the peripheral control according to this embodiment. In MPU1511a, three timings Ta1 to Ta3 are prepared as timings at which such a timer target first-out effect can appear.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, referring to the table T10 shown in FIG. 183, the winning information, the information regarding the type of the fluctuation pattern, the information regarding the timer type, and the effect random numbers assigned to the information are used. Based on the above, it is selected whether to execute the timer target first-out effect at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (or whether to execute the timer target first-out effect at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3).

As shown in FIG. 183, in the table T10, as selection candidates for executing the timer target first-out effect, "the timer target first-out effect is not executed at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (" none "in the figure)". "The timer target first-out effect is executed only at the timing Ta1 of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (" Ta1 "in the figure)", and "the timer target first-out effect is executed only at the timing Ta2 of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 (FIG. Among them, "Ta2") "," The timer target first-out effect is executed only at the timing Ta3 of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 ("Ta3" in the figure) "," At the timings Ta1 and Ta2 of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. Execute timer target first-out effect (“Ta1 & 2” in the figure) ”,“ Execute timer target first-out effect at timings Ta1 and Ta3 of timing Ta1 to Ta3 (“Ta1 & 3” in the figure) ”,“ Timing Ta1 ~ Execute timer target first-out effect at timings Ta2 and Ta3 of Ta3 (“Ta2 & 3” in the figure) ”,“ Execute timer target first-out effect at all timings Ta1 to Ta3 (“Ta1 & 2 & 3” in the figure) There are selection candidates such as ".

In the example of the table T10, when the count display is not executed and the timer look-ahead effect is not displayed, the effect random numbers are distributed so that the timer target first-out effect is not performed. Therefore, in the example of the table T10, in the case of the timer types of the special timers 1 and 4, the timer target first-out effect is not performed at the timing T1, the timing T1 & T2, the timing T1 & T3, and the timing T1 & T2 & T3. However, as described above, the timer target first-out effect may be performed at these timings.

Further, in the example of the table T10, when the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot symbol appears is selected, the rate at which the timer target first-out effect is executed is higher than in the case where the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot symbol does not appear is selected. It is set so that the number of times the timer target first-out effect is executed tends to increase.

Further, in the example of the table T10, when the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer target is "accessory A & B", compared with the case where the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer target is "accessory B". , The rate at which the timer target first-out effect is executed is set to be high, and the number of times the timer target first-out effect is executed is also set to increase.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when it is determined that the timer target first-out effect is to be performed at least at any of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 as a result of performing the determination process based on the table T10, when the timer target first-out effect appears. Further, the determination process for the effect type of is performed.

FIG. 184 is an example of the content (table T11) of the determination process regarding which type of effect mode is to be generated at the timing when the timer target first-out effect is performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure which shows.

That is, when it is determined that the timer target first-out effect is performed at any one of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU1511a refers to the table T11 shown in FIG. 184. Then, based on the winning information, the information on the type of the fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number assigned to the information, any type of effect mode (“Character B rattling”, It is determined whether or not the "feature B midway motion (small)" and "feature B midway motion (large)") appear at one timing that has already been determined.

FIG. 185 shows an example of the content (table T12) of the determination process regarding which type of effect mode is to be generated at those timings when the timer target first-out effect is performed at any two timings of timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure which shows.

That is, when it is determined that the timer target first-out effect is performed at any two timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU1511a refers to the table T12 shown in FIG. 185. Then, based on the winning information, the information on the type of the fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number assigned to the information, any type of effect mode (“Character B rattling → role” "Character B rattling", "Character B rattling → Character B intermediate movement (small)", "Character B intermediate movement (small) → Character B intermediate movement (small)", "Character B rattling → Character B intermediate movement" "Intermediate movement (large)", "Intermediate movement of character B (small)-> Intermediate operation of character B (large)", "Intermediate operation of character B (large)-> Intermediate operation of character B (large)") It is determined whether or not to appear at each of the two timings that have been determined.

For example, when it is determined based on the table T12 that "Character B rattling → Character B rattling" appears, "Character B rattling" is displayed at both of the two timings that have already been determined. It will be executed as a timer target first-out effect, and when it is determined based on the table T12 that "role B rattling → character B intermediate operation (small)" appears, the above two judgments have been made. "Character B rattling" is executed as the timer target first-out effect at the earlier timing of the timing, and "Character B intermediate operation (small)" is executed at the later timing of the above two determined timings. Will be executed as the timer target first-out effect.

FIG. 186 shows an example of the content (table T13) of the determination process regarding which type of effect mode is to be generated at those timings when the timer target first-out effect is performed at all the timings Ta1 to Ta3. It is a figure.

That is, when it is determined that the timer target first-out effect is performed at all the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the peripheral control MPU1511a refers to the table T13 shown in FIG. 186. Then, based on the winning information, the information on the type of the fluctuation pattern, the information on the timer type, and the effect random number assigned to the information, any type of effect mode (“Character B rattling → role” Object B rattling → Character B rattling ”,“ Character B rattling → Character B rattling → Character B intermediate movement (small) ”,“ Character B rattling → Character B intermediate movement (small) → Character B intermediate "Movement (small)", "Character B intermediate movement (small)-> Character B intermediate movement (small)-> Character B intermediate movement (small)", "Character B rattling-> Character B rattling-> Character B intermediate "Movement (Large)", "Rattling of character B → Intermediate operation of character B (Small) → Intermediate operation of character B (Large)", "Intermediate operation of character B (Small) → Intermediate operation of character B (Small) → "Character B midway motion (large)", "Character B midway motion (small) → bonus B midway motion (large) → bonus B midway motion (large)", "Character B midway motion (large) → role It is determined whether or not the object B intermediate operation (large) → the accessory B intermediate operation (large) ”) appears at the three timings that have already been determined.

For example, when it is determined based on the table T13 that "role B rattling-> character B rattling-> character B rattling" appears, the "role" is set at any of the three timings that have already been determined. It is determined that "object B rattling" will be executed as the timer target first-out effect, and "role B rattling-> character B intermediate operation (small)-> character B intermediate operation (large)" will appear based on the table T13. When is done, "Character B rattling" is executed as the timer target first-out effect at the first of the three timings that have been determined, and among the three timings that have been determined. At the second timing of, "Character B midway operation (small)" is executed as the timer target first-out effect, and at the third timing of the above three determined timings, "Character B midway operation (small) Large) ”will be executed as the timer target first-out effect.

In the examples of the tables T11 and T12, the determination process is performed in the same mode (selection ratio) regardless of which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 is determined to cause the timer target first-out effect. Depending on which of the timings Ta1 to Ta3 determines that the timer target first-out effect is to appear, the determination process may be performed in another mode (selection ratio). For example, if the timing at which it is determined that the timer target first-out effect is to appear is later, the rate at which an effect mode having a large effect range is selected increases, and the timer is used. It becomes possible to estimate how much time is left until the target effect is performed, based on the size of the range of the effect that appears in the timer target first-out effect. In this case, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 199 (G), the timer target is operated by operating the specific decorative member (here, the accessory B) in a manner in which the count display of the timer effect is overlapped with the count display in the front view. It is necessary to make the count display difficult to see during the execution of the first-out effect (role B intermediate movement (small), "character B intermediate movement (large)) in order to preferably obtain such an effect. Therefore, when the timer target first-out effect is executed without paying much attention to the count display, even if the timer target first-out effect is executed at the same timing, the timer target depends on the type of effect that appears at that time. When you are prepared for the production to be performed soon (when the production range is large), or when you feel that there is time left before the timer target production is performed (when the production range is small) ), And it is expected that it will be interesting by making it possible to create a gap with the time when the accurate remaining count is grasped after that. At this time, the timer target first-out effect The count display may be hidden during execution, and the count display may be redisplayed when the timer target first-out effect ends.

However, if the specific decorative member (here, the accessory B) is operated so as to overlap the count display of the timer effect in a front view so that the count display is difficult to see during the execution of the timer target first-out effect (in this case, the accessory B) ( Or, when the count display is hidden), it is misunderstood that the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is being executed even though the timer target first-out effect is being executed. There is a concern that it will end up. Therefore, it is desirable to make the count display difficult to see during the execution of the timer target first-out effect, while continuously executing the count sound generated in accordance with the execution of the count display. That is, the output of such a count sound is terminated when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and this is not output when the effect of the timer target is performed. Therefore, the timer target first-out By continuously outputting the count sound during the execution of the effect, it is expected to suppress the misunderstanding that the effect of the timer target is being executed.

Further, in the examples of the tables T11 to T13, when the variation pattern in which the jackpot symbol appears is selected, the effect range is larger in the timer target first-out effect than in the case where the variation pattern in which the jackpot symbol does not appear is selected. The mode is set to be selected at a high rate.

Further, in the example of the tables T11 to T13, when the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer target is "accessory A & B" and the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer target is "accessory B". In comparison, in the timer target first-out effect, the rate of selecting an effect mode having a large effect range is set to be high.

Further, in the example of the tables T12 and T13, when the timing is the later of the timings Ta1 to Ta3, the effect range is larger in the timer target first-out effect than when the timing is the earlier of the timings Ta1 to Ta3. Is set to be selected at a high rate. Therefore, it becomes possible to estimate whether or not there is much remaining time until the timer target effect is performed, based on the size of the range of the effect that appears in the timer target first-out effect.

Further, in the example of the tables T12 and T13, basically, as time elapses, the range of the effect in the timer target first-out effect (role B rattling → character B intermediate operation (small) → character B intermediate operation (large)). ) Is spreading, and even if the status quo (role B rattling → character B rattling, etc.) is maintained, the opposite (a mode in which the production range is narrowed) is set so as not to occur. That is, in this case, as time elapses, the mode approaches the range of the effect that appears when the timer target "feature B operation" or "feature A & B operation" is performed. By confirming the effect, it becomes possible to recognize that the remaining time until the timer target "feature B operation" or "feature A & B operation" is performed is reduced.

Further, in the timer target first-out effect according to this embodiment, the specific decorative member (character B) used at the time of the timer target effect (for example, the accessory B operation) is always used, but the timer target effect (for example) For example, the timer target first-out effect may be performed by using a decorative member (for example, the accessory A) different from the specific decorative member (the accessory B) used at the time of the accessory B operation). That is, in this case, the timer target first-out effect functions as an effect that suggests the type of effect that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value with a predetermined accuracy. Then, in the case of realizing such a timer target first-out effect, the type of effect to appear as the timer target first-out effect (role B rattling, character B intermediate operation (small), accessory B intermediate operation (large)). It is also desirable that the ratio (accuracy) of the suggested type of effect to appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value differs depending on the number of executions. For example, when a type of effect with a large range of effect (feature B intermediate movement (large)) appears, the timer target first-out compared to when a type of effect with a small range of effect (feature B rattling) appears. The ratio of the production (feature B movement, bonus A & B movement) using the specific decorative member (feature B) used in the production when the count display reaches a predetermined value is increased. When the number of executions of the timer target first-out effect is large within the fluctuation, the effect using the specific decorative member (role B) used in the timer target first-out effect (feature B) is compared with the case where the number of executions is small. The rate at which the operation and the accessory A & B operation) appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value may be increased.

Further, in this embodiment, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, a plurality of production modes including "role B operation" and "character A & B operation" ("character B operation", "character A & B"). Except for "operation", on the premise that any of the effect modes that do not use the accessory B) can appear, the effect using the specific decorative member (accessory B) is performed as the timer target first-out effect. And said. However, on the premise that only one of "character B operation" and "character A & B operation" is prepared as the effect mode using the character B, the specific decorative member (character) is used as the timer target first-out effect. The production using B) may be performed.

For example, as an effect mode using the accessory B, while only the "effect A & B operation" can appear as the effect of the timer target, the specific decorative member (character B) is used as the timer target first-out effect. When the effect is used, only a part of the decorative member (character B) used in the effect of the timer target (character A & B operation) is used in the timer target first-out effect. That is, in this case, while suggesting that the "effect using the accessory B" appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value by the timer target first-out effect, the "effect using the accessory B" It becomes more difficult to predict the whole picture (use the character A in addition to the character B), and this can be kept secret. Therefore, the effect of the character B when the count display reaches a predetermined value due to the first-out effect of the timer target multiple times (the character B rattling → the character B intermediate operation (small) → the character B intermediate operation (large)). Even if an effect approaching the range is executed and its prediction is possible, not only the effect range but also its existence is concealed for the accessory A, so that the timer when the count display reaches a predetermined value. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the content of the target effect (role A & B operation) in a concealed state. At this time, the operation mode of the accessory B when the accessory A & B operation is performed may be performed as the timer target first-out effect.

According to such a configuration, the timer target first-out effect is performed using only a part of the accessory A and B (character B) used in the "character A & B operation" which is the effect of the timer target. Of course, in the timer target first-out effect, only a part of the characters A and B (character B) used in the "character A & B operation" is used, and the effect range of the character B in the "character A & B operation" is used. The effect (part B intermediate movement (small), character B intermediate movement (large)) will appear only in a part of. Then, after such a small production range is gradually expanded by the timer target first-out effect multiple times, only the character B is performed in the larger effect range by performing the "character A & B operation" which is the timer target effect. Since the effect using the character A instead of the character A will appear, the novelty when the effect of the timer target is performed by performing the timer target first-out effect while the remaining count is being exhausted is lost. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably without such a situation.

Further, in this embodiment, the specific decorative member used in the timer target first-out effect and the specific decorative member used in the timer target effect (effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value) are completely matched. However, these do not necessarily have to be exactly the same, and may be any effect that can be suggested by the timer target first-out effect as to which effect mode appears as the timer target effect. For example, as a fan-shaped accessory, a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory" and a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory" are arranged so as to overlap each other in front view. The specific decorative member used in the above is a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory", and the specific decorative member used in the effect of the timer target is a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory". Even so, the fan-shaped accessory was used as the timer target first-out effect before the effect using the fan-shaped accessory was performed as the timer target effect (while the count display was being executed). It is possible to produce.

Further, in this embodiment, the accessory is used as the specific decorative member, but instead, the display means may be used as the specific decorative member. When the display means is used as the specific decorative member, the same effect as the effect using the above-mentioned accessory is realized by enlarging the range in which the display appears (the range of the effect) or changing the display content. It is possible.

By the way, it is desirable that the "effect using the specific decorative member" performed as the timer target first-out effect is terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed. When the specific decorative member is an accessory, control is performed to return the specific decorative member to the original position after a lapse of a predetermined time, and when the specific decorative member is a display means, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the specific decorative member is controlled. Control is performed to hide the display as the timer target first-out effect. At this time, it is desirable that the predetermined time required for the timer target first-out effect is shorter than the time required for the effect (timer target effect) that appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value. In this way, by realizing different production modes depending on the length of time, in the timer target first-out production, the specific decorative member used in the timer target production can be kept in a choi-like appearance that is not very satisfactory. Therefore, the game entertainment can be suitably maintained by waiting for the count display to reach a predetermined value.

[Resurrection timer production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the count display is hidden, a plurality of production modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B) It is possible to execute a count effect in which at least one of (movement, etc.) appears. In this respect, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, when the first effect mode (for example, conversation notice) appears among the plurality of effect modes after the count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden. Even if, the count display is redisplayed after this, and the timer effect is further continued. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time after the count display is redisplayed, the count display is hidden again and the second effect mode (for example, the character A operation (character A notice)) appears among the plurality of effect modes. (Resurrection timer production).

That is, in this case, after making it appear as if the first effect mode was the timer target (count target), the count display is redisplayed to further continue the timer effect, and the second effect mode is different from the first effect mode. Since it is shown that the effect mode of is a timer target, even if the count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden at the timing when a relatively low expectation effect appears. After that, it becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer target will be changed, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

FIG. 187 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. In the situation, it is decided that the number of notices is two (step S5523), and it is decided that the "conversation notice" is performed at the earlier timing and the "character A operation 1" is performed at the later timing. , This is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the revival timer effect performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to “Character reach without timer” are selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 187 (a), for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only the accessory A operation 1 but also a plurality of timer types) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161), the following processing related to the revival timer effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing related to the revival timer effect is not performed, and the revival timer effect is produced regardless of which timer type is determined. The following processing may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 187 (a), assuming that the timer type of "accessory A operation 1" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU1511a performs the next process as the next process. A plurality of production modes including the mode of the revival timer effect ("Character A operation 1-1", "Character A operation 1-2", "Character A operation 1" are applied to the selected "Character A operation 1". -3 ”or“ Character A operation 1-4 ”) is performed to determine whether to execute. It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the aspect of "accessory A operation 1-1", 20 seconds are started after the count display having a count number of 40 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation. When the lapse has passed, the "conversation notice" that is not the timer target is executed, and when 40 seconds have passed, the timer reaches the predetermined value and the count display is hidden. The "feature A operation (feature A notice)" is executed.

On the other hand, in the aspect of "Character A operation 1-2", the value is set to a predetermined value when 20 seconds have passed after the count display having a count number of 20 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol change. When the count display is reached and the count display is hidden, the "conversation notice" (first production mode) that is not subject to the timer is executed, but when the "conversation notice" is completed, the count display is displayed. It will be redisplayed and the timer effect will continue, and the count display will be hidden again after a predetermined time has elapsed (40 seconds after the count display with the count number of 20 seconds is started). The "feature A operation (feature A notice)" (second effect mode), which is the target of the timer, is executed.

On the other hand, in the aspect of "Character A operation 1-3", the predetermined value is reached when 12 seconds have elapsed after the count display having the count number of 12 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation. The notice E2 (first production mode) as a non-target notice that cannot be the effect of the timer target is executed while the count display is hidden, but the notice E2 (non-target notice) ends. When this is done, the count display is redisplayed and the timer effect continues, and the count display is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed (40 seconds after the count display with the count number of 12 seconds is started). Is hidden again and the timer target "feature A operation (feature A notice)" (second effect mode) is executed.

On the other hand, in the embodiment of "Character A operation 1-4", the predetermined value is reached when 8 seconds have elapsed after the count display having the count number of 8 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation. The notice E1 (first production mode) as a non-target notice that cannot be the effect of the timer target is executed while the count display is hidden, but the notice E1 (non-target notice) is executed. When it is finished, the count display is redisplayed and the timer effect continues, and it counts after a predetermined time has elapsed (40 seconds after the count display with the count number of 8 seconds is started). The display is hidden again, and the "feature A operation (feature A notice)" (second effect mode), which is the target of the timer, is executed.

That is, among the plurality of production modes prepared corresponding to "Character A operation 1", "Character A operation 1-2", "Character A operation 1-3", and "Character A operation". The mode of "1-4" corresponds to the effect of the revival timer. Then, in these revival timer effects, the count display is temporarily hidden between the time when the count display is started and the time when the timer target effect (role A operation) is performed, and the effect is not the timer target (the effect). Since the conversation notice, the notice E2, or the notice E1) appears, it is possible to make it seem as if the timer effect has ended when the effect appears.

In this regard, in the aspect of "Character A operation 1-2", a plurality of production modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B) that can be adopted as timer targets. , Character B operation, etc.), the effect (conversation notice) with a lower expectation of big hit than the effect targeted for the timer (character A operation) is targeted (first effect mode), and the revival timer effect is performed. I'm supposed to do it. That is, in this case, after the effect with low expectation of big hit (conversation notice) appears as if it appeared as the effect of the timer target, it is shown that the effect (conversation notice) is not the effect of the timer target (count display). (Redisplay), a production with a higher expectation of a big hit than the production (conversation notice) (role A operation) will appear as a timer target production (second production mode) (count display is not displayed again). Display), it is expected that the game will be improved by such a reversible production.

Further, in the modes of "Character A operation 1-3" and "Character A operation 1-4", a plurality of production modes that cannot be adopted as timer targets (for example, notice E1, notice E2, notice E3, notice F). Etc.), the revival timer effect is to be performed for any of the targets (first effect mode). In such a configuration, the timer effect is not ended at this timing when the effect mode (here, the notice E2 or the notice E1) that cannot be adopted as the timer target appears as if it is the effect of the timer target. It will be suggested that it will be continued. That is, in this case, in particular, the notice E1 that appears when the mode of "role A operation 1-4" is executed has a low expectation of itself, but the timer effect is continued without being terminated at this timing. By functioning as a production that suggests, it will be possible to contribute to the improvement of the game entertainment. It should be noted that a plurality of effect modes (for example, advance notice E1, advance notice E2, advance notice E3, advance notice F, etc.) that cannot be adopted as timer targets can appear even when the timer effect is not performed.

Further, in each of the "accessory A operation 1-2", "accessory A operation 1-3", and "accessory A operation 1-4" according to this embodiment, they appear when the count display is started. Although the numerical value is displayed as a numerical value different from 40 seconds (20 seconds, 12 seconds, 8 seconds, etc.), the peripheral control MPU1511a secretly sets a 40-second production timer for control and counts. By internally performing a process to continuously update the effect timer even while the display is temporarily hidden, the effect of the timer target (the effect of the timer target when 40 seconds have passed since the count display was started ( The accessory A movement) is made to appear. According to such a configuration, any of "Character A operation 1-1", "Character A operation 1-2", "Character A operation 1-3", and "Character A operation 1-4". Even when the accessory A operation 1 is executed in the embodiment, the count display can be hidden again at the same timing from the start of the fluctuation, and the effect of the timer target (the accessory A operation) can be made to appear.

Then, in such a revival timer effect, "the count display that appeared before it was once hidden" and "the count display that was once hidden and then redisplayed" are different count digestions. It is important to be able to recognize that the same count digestion is being performed instead of doing so in order to suggest that the timer production does not end in the middle and continues. ..

For example, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the mode of "accessory A operation 1-2", the count display is hidden when the count display having a count number of 20 seconds becomes "0 seconds". The "conversation notice" will be executed, but after the "conversation notice" is completed, the count display will be displayed in negative notation and redisplayed, so that "0 seconds" when it is hidden I try to express how the count digestion is not finished and this is continuing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), in the aspect of "accessory A operation 1-2", the count digestion is secretly continued even while the count display is hidden. The count display is redisplayed from the state where the count has been digested for the time that was hidden. More specifically, in the aspect of "accessory A operation 1-2", the count display is hidden at "0 seconds", and the count display is redisplayed after the hidden state is maintained for 2 seconds. However, when the count display is redisplayed, count digestion by minus count is performed from "-2 seconds" to 18 seconds.

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 187 (a), the symbol variation is stopped after the effect of the timer target is executed in this way.

When realizing such a revival timer effect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, based on the result of the jackpot determination, the type of fluctuation pattern, or the mode of the timer effect (for example, "Character A operation 1" of the character reach) Therefore, a determination process (see FIG. 187 (b)) is performed as to whether the revival timer effect is generated or in which mode the revival timer effect is generated. It should be noted that this determination process may be performed, for example, after the step S5510 shown in FIG. 149 is performed and at a timing before the step S5511 is performed, based on the result information of each process before that. It is possible.

FIG. 187 (b) shows that when the timer type of “role A operation 1” is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the “character A operation 1” includes the mode of the revival timer effect. It is a figure which shows an example about the content (table T14) of the determination processing which of a plurality of production modes is executed.

As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the character reach "character A operation 1" is selected, the "character A operation 1" is changed to "character A operation 1-1". , "Character A action 1-2", "Character A action 1-3", and "Character A action 1-4".

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, the table T14 shown in FIG. 187 (b) is referred to, and the winning information, the information regarding the type of the fluctuation pattern, the information regarding the timer type, and the information are allocated. Any aspect of "feature A action 1-1", "feature A action 1-2", "feature A action 1-3", and "feature A action 1-4" based on the effect random number. Will select whether to execute the timer effect.

As a result, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in any of the modes of "accessory A operation 1-3" and "accessory A operation 1-4", in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525. , The type of non-target notice will be determined based on the determined type. For example, when it is determined to execute the timer effect in the mode of "accessory A operation 1-3", it is determined that at least the advance notice E2 is executed as a non-target notice in the processing of steps S5512 and S5525. Therefore, when it is determined that the timer effect is to be executed in the mode of "accessory A operation 1-4", at least the notice E1 is executed as a non-target notice in the processes of steps S5512 and S5525. The judgment will be made.

In the example of the table T14, when the revival timer effect targeting the effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as the timer target is executed, the effect mode (notices E1 and E2) that cannot be adopted as the timer target is displayed. The jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the targeted revival timer effect is executed. Further, when the revival timer effect targeting the effect mode with high expectation among the effect modes (notices E1 and E2) that cannot be adopted as the timer target is executed, the effect mode (notice) that cannot be adopted as the timer target. It is set so that the jackpot expectation is higher than the case where the revival timer effect targeting the effect mode with the lower expectation among E1 and E2) is executed. Further, in the example of the table T14, when the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot symbol appears is selected, the rate at which the revival timer effect is executed is higher than in the case where the fluctuation pattern in which the jackpot symbol does not appear is selected. Is set to.

According to such a revival timer effect, the effect mode with low expectation (first effect mode) appears once by hiding the count display, which temporarily gives the player a disappointment, but then counts. The display is redisplayed and continued, and the count display that has continued after the predetermined time is hidden again to cause a highly expected effect mode (second effect mode) to appear. This makes it possible to give a player who was paying attention to the count display a temporary disappointment, but also to give surprises and surprises by continuing the count and reversing the production, which makes the game more enjoyable than before. Can be suppressed.

In this sense, after the production mode with high expectation (second production mode) is executed as the production using two different decorative members, the production mode with low expectation (first production mode) is performed. It is desirable to execute as an effect using only one of the above two different decorative members (or a decorative member related thereto) in order to express the reversibility due to the revival timer effect. At this time, one of the two different decorative members does not necessarily have to be exactly the same when used in the second effect mode and when used in the first effect mode. For example, as a fan-shaped accessory, a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory" and a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory" are arranged so as to overlap each other in a front view. This is a case where the decorative member used in the embodiment is a "relatively small fan-shaped accessory" and the decorative member used in the second production embodiment is a "relatively large fan-shaped accessory". However, it is possible to clearly indicate that the production performed as the first production mode has a lower degree of expectation.

In addition, in such a revival timer effect, "the count display that appeared before it was once hidden" and "the count display that was once hidden and then redisplayed" are different counts. In order to make it recognizable that the same count is being digested instead of being digested, the count sound is "temporarily hidden" even while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continuously execute the count display that appeared before the display and the count display that was once hidden and then redisplayed.

Further, in this embodiment, the revival timer effect is performed only once within the period in which one symbol change is performed, but the revival timer effect is performed a plurality of times within the period in which one symbol change is performed. It may be executed over. At this time, the same effect mode may be repeatedly displayed each time the count display is hidden. Then, as the number of times the revival timer effect is executed within the period in which one symbol change is performed, the effect mode with high expectation as the effect for the timer (effect type and effect content (cut-in mode, etc.)) It is desirable to increase the rate of appearance of.

Further, in the revival timer effect, the time from when the count display is hidden until the first effect mode (conversation notice, notice E1, E2, etc.) appears, and after the redisplayed count display is hidden again. By making the length different from the time until the second effect mode (role A operation) appears, it is possible to recognize whether or not the effect of the timer target is appearing. It is desirable to do.

Further, in order to improve the game entertainment as a timer effect, when a revival timer effect targeting an effect mode (conversation notice) that can be adopted as a timer target is executed, an effect mode that cannot be adopted as a timer target. Compared to the case where the revival timer effect targeting (notices E1 and E2) is executed, a more promising production mode (effect type and effect content (cut-in mode, etc.)) appears as the timer target effect. It is desirable to control so that the ratio is high. Further, when the revival timer effect targeting the effect mode with high expectation among the effect modes (notices E1 and E2) that cannot be adopted as the timer target is executed, the effect mode (notice) that cannot be adopted as the timer target. Compared to the case where the revival timer effect targeting the effect mode with the lower expectation among E1 and E2) is executed, the effect mode with higher expectation as the effect for the timer (effect type and effect content (cut-in)) It is desirable to control so that the rate of appearance of)) is high.

Further, in the revival timer effect according to this embodiment, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") and this is hidden, the first effect mode appears and the first effect is displayed. When the mode is completed, the count display is redisplayed and this is negatively counted, and after this reaches a specific negative value and this is hidden, the second effect mode is made to appear, but the count display is If the first effect mode and the second effect mode appear under the condition that they are hidden, the count display is hidden when the first effect mode and the second effect mode appear. Each count value at that time may be set as appropriate.

[Timer target suppression control]
That is, the effect to be the target of the timer effect (count target) can often be executed even when the timer effect is not performed. For example, the specific effect to be executed at a predetermined timing based on the fluctuation pattern. Productions (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A movement, cut-in B, character B movement, etc.) and predetermined effects (for example, hold change, etc.) executed at the timing of winning. Be prepared. However, of these, when the "specific effect executed at a predetermined timing based on the fluctuation pattern" is the target of the timer effect (count target) and the count display reaches the predetermined value, a new prize is awarded. Occasionally occurs and a predetermined effect (for example, hold change) occurs due to this, a predetermined effect is generated in relation to the count display reaching a predetermined value as a target of the timer effect. Or, as a production unrelated to the timer production, it may be difficult to grasp whether the predetermined production has occurred due to the occurrence of a new prize (confused situation), and eventually the target of the timer production (count target). ) May be overlooked (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a timer effect of a specific type for a specific effect is executed, the remaining time until the count display in the timer effect of the specific type reaches a predetermined value. When there are relatively many in the first period, the display of a predetermined effect that is not a timer target is allowed when a new prize is generated, but when the first period ends and the count display in the specific type of timer effect is a predetermined value. When the remaining time until reaching is reached in the second period, even if a new prize is generated, the display of a predetermined effect that is not the target of the timer is not allowed (timer target suppression control). As a result, in a situation where a specific type of count effect is executed with the specific effect as the timer effect, the count display is displayed as the target of the timer effect while allowing the occurrence of a predetermined effect that is not the timer target due to the occurrence of a new prize. It becomes difficult to grasp whether the predetermined effect was generated in connection with reaching the predetermined value, or whether the predetermined effect was generated due to the occurrence of a new prize as an effect unrelated to the timer effect (confused). It becomes possible to preferably avoid such a thing.

FIG. 188 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the timer target suppression control performed when a specific variation number is selected in a situation.

As shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds is obtained at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the symbol fluctuation. The display starts. Then, after the count display becomes "0", a specific effect that is the target of the timer appears. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the period from the start of the symbol fluctuation until the count display reaches a specific count value (for example, "5 seconds") before reaching a predetermined value (here, "0 seconds"). (1st period) allows the display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer when a new prize is generated (allowable period), but after the count display reaches a specific count value (for example, "5 seconds"). In the predetermined period (second period), even if a new prize is generated, the timer target suppression control that does not allow the display of the predetermined effect that is not the timer target is performed (suppression period).

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the timer target suppression control according to this embodiment, the suppression period (second period) in which the display of the predetermined effect is not allowed is set to "the count display is a specific count value (2nd period). For example, not only "the period from when the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example," 0 seconds ") until the specific effect which is the target of the timer is executed (finished)". It is decided to continue until "the period after the specific production is completed". That is, in this case, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds") and a specific effect that is a timer target is generated, the effect generation itself is suppressed, so that the timer target. The specific effect comes to function as a valuable effect generation opportunity, and the degree of attention to the specific effect is improved to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the count display reaches a predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"). Will be expected.

However, as shown in FIG. 188 (a), in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a predetermined time (for example, “5 seconds”) has elapsed since the specific effect, which is the target of the timer, is completed. At this time, the suppression period (second period) that does not allow the display of the predetermined effect that is not the timer target is terminated. According to such timer target suppression control, the symbol variation is stopped after the suppression period ends. In the period until a new prize is generated, the display of a predetermined effect that is not subject to the timer will be allowed again.

By the way, as described above, in the above-mentioned suppression period, even if a new prize is generated, the display of a predetermined effect that is not the target of the timer is not allowed. However, in this case, there is a concern that the player may play a game that does not generate a new prize during the suppression period in which the display of the predetermined effect is not allowed even if a new prize is generated, and as a result, the progress speed of the game per unit time. May decrease and cause a disadvantage on the hall side.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if a new prize is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect caused by the new prize is not allowed, but the display of the predetermined effect that is not allowed is not allowed. Instead of discarding the display itself of the predetermined effect, the control is performed to delay (carry over) the time of performing the display until the end of the suppression period. According to such a configuration, even if a new prize is generated during the suppression period, the display of the predetermined effect caused by the new prize is not allowed, but the display of the predetermined effect is preferably executed. Since it becomes possible to play, it becomes possible to suppress playing a game that does not generate a new prize during the suppression period.

When a new prize is generated within the permissible period and the predetermined effect is displayed, the acoustic output is performed according to the display of the predetermined effect, whereas a new prize is generated within the suppression period and the predetermined effect is displayed. When the display of the effect is delayed (carried over) until the end of the suppression period, it is desirable not to output the sound according to the display when the predetermined effect is displayed. As a result, it becomes possible to secretly display the predetermined effect at a timing different from the normal (at the time of winning), and when the player sees the predetermined effect displayed without his knowledge, he / she can be surprised. It will be expected to be granted to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the suppression period that occurs from the timing (specific count value) before the execution period of the effect that is the timer target to the timing after the end of the execution period is the timer target. It is desirable to control so that it does not always occur when the effect is performed.

For example, when such a suppression period is generated with a predetermined probability when a timer effect is performed, and when a big hit is won by a big hit judgment, it is compared with when a big hit is lost. Therefore, if the rate of occurrence of such a suppression period is increased, when a prize is generated aiming at the timing before and after the effect of the timer target is performed, a predetermined effect due to the prize is generated. It is now prompted to confirm whether or not (whether or not there is a suppression period and there is a high possibility that a big hit has been won), and a new prize will be generated during the suppression period. It will be suppressed that the game that does not let you play is performed.

In addition, the rate at which the suppression period occurs differs depending on the type of effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer target (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.). By doing so, whether or not a predetermined effect due to the prize is generated when a prize is generated within a period before the effect of the timer target is performed (a suppression period has occurred and a specific type of effect is generated. Is in a situation where there is a high possibility that it will be executed as a timer target), and it will be suppressed that games that do not generate new prizes will be played during the suppression period. Will be done.

FIG. 188 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a table (table T15) referred to in timer target suppression control when the rate at which the suppression period occurs differs depending on the type of effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer target. ..

As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, and the like are prepared as effects for the timer target. ..

In this regard, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), basically, the lower the jackpot expectation degree is, the lower the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer target effect is, and the jackpot expectation is high. The higher the degree of the effect, the higher the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the effect of the timer target is set.

More specifically, when the effect of the timer target is "conversation notice", the suppression period is not always generated, and when the effect of the timer target is "cut-in A", the suppression period is set to 20%. When the effect of the timer target is "cut-in B", the suppression period is generated at a rate of 40%, and the effect of the timer target is "feature A operation". At some point, the suppression period is generated at a rate of 60%, and when the effect of the timer target is "feature B operation", the suppression period is generated at a rate of 80%, and the timer target When the effect of is a "special timer", the suppression period is always generated.

According to such a configuration, the higher the expectation of a big hit, the higher the ratio of generating the suppression period before and after the execution of the timer target effect, so that a predetermined effect is generated by a new prize. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress the overlooking of a production mode with a high expectation of a big hit. Conversely, the lower the jackpot expectation is, the more likely it is that the production mode will be overlooked. Therefore, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the jackpot expectation is low. It will be possible to proceed with the production while keeping what was being kept secret, and it will be expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably until the design is stopped.

Further, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), the occurrence rate of the suppression period is determined according to the type of the effect mode appearing as the effect of the timer target, regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won. There is. Therefore, regardless of whether the jackpot is won or lost, if the type of the effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer target is the same, the suppression period can be generated at the same ratio. ..

By the way, in the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), when the effect of the timer target is "pending change", the suppression period is always generated even though the effect mode has a relatively low expectation of big hit. I am trying to do it. That is, the "pending change" according to this embodiment can be displayed not only as a specific effect that is a timer target, but also as a predetermined effect that is not a timer target when a new prize is generated. Therefore, if the suppression period does not occur when such a "holding change" occurs, the "holding change (changing symbol)" as a timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value There is a possibility that "change in hold display corresponding to") and "change in hold display (change in hold display corresponding to pending symbols)" due to a new prize may occur at the same time, and there is a concern that they may be confused. be. Therefore, it is desirable to make sure that the suppression period is generated when the effect of the timer target is "pending change". However, as mentioned above, as with the "conversation notice", the possibility of overlooking the "pending change" is increased, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the jackpot expectation is low. If the aim is to proceed with the production while keeping what has appeared concealed, it may be controlled so that the suppression period does not occur even when the production of the timer target is a "pending change".

In the example of the table T15 shown in FIG. 188 (b), the rate at which the suppression period occurs differs depending on the type of effect mode that appears as the effect of the timer target, but in addition to this, the same type of effect Even in the embodiment, the rate at which the suppression period occurs may be further different depending on the timer type determined in the count display lottery (FIG. 149: step S5510).

For example, even when "conversation notice" is selected as the effect of the timer target, the "conversation notice" is the "conversation notice 1 to 4" shown in FIG. 161 and further the "conversation notice 1 to 4" shown in FIG. 162. It is desirable to make the rate of occurrence of the suppression period different depending on which of the conversation notices 1 to 6 is applicable. In this case, the occurrence rate may include 100% or 0%.

In addition, the effect of the timer target is one of "conversation notice", "hold change", "cut-in A", "special timer", "character A operation", "cut-in B", and "character B operation". When this is the case, the suppression period may be generated at a predetermined ratio not only for a predetermined period before and after the execution of the effect of the timer target, but also for the entire period from the start to the stop of the symbol variation. In particular, when the effect of the timer target is the "special timer" with the highest expectation of a big hit, the "special timer" is set so that the suppression period is always generated over the entire period from the start of the symbol variation to the stop. It may be possible to raise the expectation that "" will be performed.

Further, in this embodiment, even if a new prize is generated during the suppression period, the display itself of the predetermined effect caused by the new prize is not discarded, and the time when the display is performed ends the suppression period. Although it was decided to perform the control of delaying (carrying over) until, the display itself of the predetermined effect may be discarded and not performed.

[Timer production targeting new timers]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, while the count display is being executed within the period during which the symbol effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, pending change) prepared as candidates for the count target are prepared. , Cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) It is possible to execute a timer effect that hides the count display at the timing when at least one of them appears. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, a "specific effect mode" is prepared as one of the plurality of effect modes that appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value, and then the "specific effect" is provided. When the "aspect" appears, a count display (second count display) different from the count display (first count display) up to that point is newly started.

That is, in this case, since the count display as the timer effect is executed in the form of being divided into the first count display and the second count display, even if the total time required for the timer effect is the same. , The time required to digest one count display (first count display or second count display) can be shortened, eliminating the monotony while digesting the count display and playing games. It will be expected to suppress the decrease of.

FIG. 189 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. Time to explain the specific content of the timer effect for the new timer that is performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "Character reach without timer" are selected in the situation. It is a chart. FIG. 189 (b) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. Time to explain the specific content of the timer effect for the new timer that is performed when the variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "SP reach without timer" are selected in the situation. It is a chart.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and 189 (b), for convenience of explanation, only one type of "timer production targeting a new timer" is prepared for each fluctuation pattern. , Prepare multiple types (new timer 1, new timer 2, etc.) with different occurrence times of the first count display (for example, a pattern in which the first count display is started from the middle of the symbol change) and end times. Then, they may be selected by lottery (FIG. 149: step S5510).

In the "timer effect targeting the new timer" shown in FIG. 189 (a), first, the first count display having a count number of 30 seconds is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation. Then, after the first count display becomes a predetermined value and is hidden, a "specific effect mode" that is a timer target appears. After the "specific production mode" appears in this way, a new count display (second count display with a count number of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared until then is newly displayed. This is to be started (new timer). In the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, whenever a "specific effect mode" appears, a count display (second count display) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared up to that point is displayed. ) Is newly displayed to start this. However, even though the first count display has reached a predetermined value in this way, if a different count display (second count display) is newly started, the effect targeted by the timer is executed. You may feel as if you were entrusted with the timer, and there is concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the "timer effect targeting the new timer" according to this embodiment, first, as a "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden. It is decided to make a "failure production" that does not show any expectation appear. That is, in this case, when the first count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect having a degree of expectation as an effect for the timer target (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, combination). It will create a disappointing production situation as if it failed to generate (object B movement, etc.), but in that production situation, the second count display will be newly started, so the game As a person, he / she will feel that he / she can challenge the failed timer production again, and it is expected that he / she will improve the interest of the game through the inflection of such feelings.

However, in the "timer effect targeting the new timer" shown in FIG. 189 (a), the second count display started after the "failure effect" is not ended within the period of the symbol change, and the remaining count is counted. The symbol stop (big hit symbol or lost symbol) is performed before the digestion is completed. According to such a configuration, even if the player is looking forward to what kind of expectation the effect will appear when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the count is digested. Since it will be possible to completely lose interest in the jackpot expectation when the symbol stop (big hit win) is displayed earlier than that, no production will appear without causing a decline in the game interest. The timer effect can be terminated. In the symbol stop that appears before all the 2nd count display is digested, in addition to the lost symbol, the jackpot symbol can also appear, so especially when the jackpot symbol appears, there is no interest in the game. It doesn't go down.

In other words, in the "timer production targeting the new timer" shown in FIG. 189 (a), almost the entire period (at least half) of the symbol fluctuation is performed even though no production with an expected degree appears as the timer target. The count display (1st count, 2nd count) will be performed over the above period).
・ In addition to performing a production that makes you aware of the possibility that a production with some degree of expectation may appear in the middle of the process (a production where the first count reaches a predetermined value)
-By providing a configuration in which the newly started second count display stops the symbol while leaving the count number, the expectation that the effect of the timer target will occur soon is almost all of the symbol fluctuation. It will be able to last for a period of time. Further, as described above, the mechanism is such that the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the fact that the production with the expected degree is not generated in both the first count display and the second count display is preferably suppressed. It's a street.

On the other hand, in the "timer effect targeting the new timer" shown in FIG. 189 (b), the number of counts for 30 seconds is set according to the start of the symbol variation, as in the example shown in FIG. 189 (a). The first count display with is started. Then, after the first count display becomes a predetermined value and is hidden, a "specific effect mode (failure effect)" that is a timer target appears. In this way, after the "specific effect mode (failure effect)" appears, a count display (second count display with a count number of 40 seconds) different from the first count display (non-display) that has appeared until then is displayed. The point of newly displaying and starting this is also the same as the example shown in FIG. 189 (a).

However, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), the symbol stop occurs after the second count display started after the "failure effect" reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") within the period of the symbol fluctuation. It is designed to do. In this regard, "timer production with a new timer as the production target" means, as described above, a sense of expectation that the production of the timer target will soon occur without any production having an expectation as the timer target appearing. Since it has a technical feature in sustaining it, even if the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") within the period of symbol fluctuation, it is necessary to make an effect with an expectation appear. I will not do it. On the other hand, when the second count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") within the period of the symbol fluctuation, the timer target is simply performed by processing that does not cause the effect with the expected degree to appear. It is not possible to sustain the expectation that the production will occur soon.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 189 (b), when the second count display started after the "failure effect" reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") within the period of the symbol variation, the second count display is performed. The count display is not hidden, but is maintained as a display that has reached a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the symbol is stopped while the display is maintained. In a state where the second count display reaches a predetermined value and is maintained, from the player's point of view, when the effect corresponding to the second count display reaching the predetermined value (the effect to be counted) appears. Since it looks like it is not in a strange state, it is possible to suitably maintain the expectation that the effect of the timer target will occur soon until the symbol is stopped. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to completely lose interest in the jackpot expectation when the symbol stop (big hit win) is displayed before the second count display is hidden. Therefore, it becomes possible to end the timer production without causing any production to appear without causing a deterioration in the game entertainment.

By the way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 189 (a) and 189 (b), for the player who has confirmed the "timer effect targeting the new timer", when the failure effect or the second count display occurs, nothing happens. There is a concern that it will be discovered that the production of the timer will not occur. Therefore, only when the jackpot symbol is stopped while the second count display is exhausting the remaining count (including the period in which the display in the state where the second count display reaches a predetermined value is maintained) is the first. A special effect may be generated as an effect corresponding to the 2-count display. Alternatively, the rate at which a special effect is generated may be increased. According to such a configuration, the second count display has a different counting purpose from the first count display, and whether the jackpot symbol is stopped within the period when the second count display consumes the remaining counts. It becomes possible to give the fun of whether or not. In this sense, the first count display and the second count display may have different display modes (form, position, size, etc.).

It should be noted that the special effect may be generated when the second count display leaves the remaining count and this is in the executing state. However, considering that a special effect is generated as an effect corresponding to the second count display, when the jackpot symbol is stopped, the second count display is hidden (the second count display leaves the remaining count). It is desirable to perform a special effect (after hiding it, even if it is in a state). Then, it is desirable that the special effect executed in this way is continuously displayed including the execution period of the jackpot game and the subsequent game period. That is, in this case, the special effect is terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a process different from the process related to the "timer effect targeting the new timer".

The special effect may be generated within the period of the symbol change. In this case, it is desirable to perform a special effect after the jackpot symbol appears (for example, displayed in a temporarily stopped state) and the second count display is hidden within the period of symbol fluctuation. However, the jackpot symbol may appear (for example, displayed in a temporarily stopped state) within the period of symbol fluctuation, and the second count display may be hidden after executing a special effect.

Then, if the occurrence rate (including 100%) of the special effect is to be increased when the jackpot symbol is stopped while the second count display is digesting the remaining count, the symbol stop is performed. When the second count display reaches a predetermined value before it is displayed, it may be hidden, and the symbol may be stopped in the hidden state. Even in such a case, it becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment while the second count display is being performed. However, even if a big hit symbol appears by stopping the symbol after the second count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, the rate of occurrence of the special effect remains relatively low. In this case, the ratio may include 0%.

When realizing such a "timer effect targeting a new timer", in particular, a "failure effect" that does not show any expectation when the first count display reaches a predetermined value is made to appear. If this is the case, it is different from the above-mentioned timer production in which other production modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) appear (these are). (In a separate lottery), the "timer production targeting the new timer" will be performed based on the satisfaction of certain production conditions that have nothing to do with the result of the jackpot judgment or the type of fluctuation pattern. It is desirable that the judgment is made. That is, in this case, in a situation where both the jackpot and the loss can be stopped when the symbol fluctuation is stopped (the jackpot symbol may appear according to the probability of the jackpot lottery), the "new timer is set. It becomes possible to generate a "timer effect targeted for effect", which makes it possible to generate a failure effect having no expectation when the first count display reaches a predetermined value. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the expectation that the effect of the timer target will occur soon without causing any effect having an expectation as the timer target for the period during which the symbol is changed.

However, if it is not required to exert such an action effect, the "specific production mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value is not a failure production that has no expectation. , Other production modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) may be executed. In this case, through the same processing as in the case of performing the above-mentioned timer effect for displaying other effect modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.). "Timer production targeting the new timer" will be executed.

In addition, in FIG. 189 (a), in the example in which the first fluctuation pattern (character reach without timer) is selected, the symbol is displayed before the second count display started after the “failure effect” reaches a predetermined value. The fluctuation is stopped, and in FIG. 189 (b), in the example in which the second fluctuation pattern (SP reach without timer) is selected, the symbol fluctuation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value. I did it. However, in the example in which the first fluctuation pattern (character reach without timer) is selected, a pattern in which the symbol fluctuation is stopped after the second count display reaches a predetermined value may appear, or a second pattern may appear. In the example in which the fluctuation pattern of (SP reach without timer) is selected, the symbol fluctuation may be stopped before the second count display started after the "failure effect" reaches a predetermined value. Further, when a fluctuation pattern different from these fluctuation patterns is selected, "timer effect with the new timer as the effect target" may be performed.

In addition, regarding the first count display, it is possible to execute the count display with a count number shorter than that of the second count display, which can be stopped in the middle of the count display, so that the effect of the timer target will soon occur. It is desirable to maintain a sense of expectation for what to do.

In this embodiment, in the count display generated after the "failure effect" is performed, if the symbol is stopped before the count display is completely digested, either the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol may appear. However, in the normal count display that occurs regardless of the "failure effect", it is desirable that the jackpot symbol always appears if the symbol is stopped before the count display is completely digested.

The first count display may have a plurality of modes (for example, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds) as the count number and may be executed in any of them, but the second count display may be executed. , Regardless of the number of counts executed in the first count display, it is possible to execute in only one mode (for example, 40 seconds) so that the first count display and the second count display are different count displays. It is desirable to make it recognizable that it is to be executed.

Further, considering that the first count display and the second count display are executed as different count displays, the period when the first count display is performed and the period when the second count display is performed are performed. It is possible to perform processing that makes the display mode (including different colors and effects) of the background image, etc. different from that when it is in (including the period during which the display has reached the predetermined value and is maintained). desirable. In such a process, even if a reach effect is generated within the period in which the first count display is performed and the background image is shifted to the reach effect, when the second count display is subsequently executed, until then. Even if a reach effect occurs within the period in which the second count display is performed and the background image is shifted to the reach effect, the second count display is executed. The display mode different from the previous one that sometimes appeared is maintained even during the reach effect period, and is maintained until the second count display is hidden.

In the "timer effect targeting the new timer" according to this embodiment, as a "specific effect mode" that appears when the first count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden. We decided to make a "failure effect" that does not show the degree of expectation appear, but instead of this, another count start suggestion that suggests that a count display different from the count display that was executed until then is newly started The production may be made to appear. Then, in this case, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the separate count start suggestion effect, or the degree of expectation may not be indicated.

[Timer mode production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, a plurality of production modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, and character A operation) prepared as candidates for counting during the period in which the symbol production is performed. , Cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.), it is possible to execute a timer effect in which the count display is performed up to a predetermined value toward the timing at which at least one appears. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the count display is set to a predetermined value within a period before the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, “0”). The hell timer mode (first timer mode display), in which the rate of appearance of highly expected production modes (effect type and production content (cut-in mode, etc.)) is relatively low when the timer becomes full. When the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which the rate of appearance of the highly expected effect mode is relatively high can be displayed as the effect of the timer target. Yes (timer mode production).

That is, in this case, since one of the timer mode displays having a different degree of advantage with respect to the timer effect is displayed when the remaining time of the count display is exhausted, this is a predetermined value after the count display is started. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until it becomes (here, "0").

FIG. 190 shows a second processing situation in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the decision not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) are made (NO in step S5507). The timer mode effect performed when the variation numbers 15 and 16 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "SP reach without timer" are selected and it is decided to perform "cut-in B1" as the effect for the timer target. It is a time chart for explaining the concrete contents of.

In the example shown in FIG. 190, for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (actually, there are not only cut-in B1 but also a plurality of timers) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161). The following processing related to the timer mode effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing related to the timer mode effect is not performed, and the timer mode effect is produced regardless of which timer type is determined. The following processing may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 190, assuming that the timer type of "cut-in B1" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU1511a performs the selected "cut-in" as the next process. "B1" is a plurality of production modes ("cut-in B1-1", "cut-in B1-2", "cut-in B1-3", "cut-in B1-4") including a timer mode production mode. Judgment processing is performed as to which one to execute. It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 190, in the aspect of "cut-in B1-1", when 50 seconds have elapsed after the count display having the count number of "50" is started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation. The "cut-in B (cut B notice)" which is the target of the timer is executed when the predetermined value (here, "0") is reached and the count display is hidden.

On the other hand, in the aspect of "cut-in B1-2", 20 seconds have passed since the count display having the count number of "50" was started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation, and this is the first identification. When the count value (here, "30") is reached, the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is displayed while the count digestion is in progress, and 50 seconds have passed since the count display was started. When a predetermined value (here, "0") is reached after a lapse of time, "cut-in B", which is the target of the timer, is executed while this is hidden, but the hell timer mode (first timer mode) The display of (display) is maintained even after "cut-in B" is hidden without being hidden.

On the other hand, in the aspect of "cut-in B1-3", 18 seconds have passed since the count display having the count number of "50" was started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation, and this is the first specific count value. When the second specific count value (here, "32") before that is reached, the heaven challenge effect of whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress is performed. As a result of failing to produce the heaven challenge, the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) is displayed, and when 50 seconds have passed since the count display was started and the predetermined value (here, "0") is reached. "Cut-in B", which is the target of the timer, is executed while the count display is hidden, but this is hidden for the display of the hell timer mode (first timer mode display). The display is maintained even after the "cut-in B" is hidden.

On the other hand, in the aspect of "cut-in B1-4", 18 seconds have passed since the count display having the count number of "50" was started in accordance with the start of the symbol variation, and this is the first specific count. A heaven challenge effect is performed to determine whether the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress when the second specific count value (here, "32") before the value is reached. As a result of the success of the heaven challenge production, the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is displayed, and 50 seconds have passed since the count display was started, and the predetermined value (here, "0") is reached. Then, "cut-in B", which is the target of the timer, is executed while the count display is hidden, but this is hidden for the display of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display). The display is maintained even after the "cut-in B" is hidden without any notice.

That is, among the plurality of production modes prepared corresponding to the "cut-in B1", the "cut-in B1-2", "cut-in B1-3", and "cut-in B1-4" modes are timers. It corresponds to the mode production. Then, in these timer mode effects, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is generated while the count digestion is in progress, and the timer target effect is executed while the display of either of these timer modes is displayed. Will be done. Therefore, even when the count display is exhausting the remaining count, the timer mode effect related to the timer effect can give the timer effect an effect.

More specifically, when the heaven timer mode appears as the type of timer mode effect, the ratio of the effect type with higher expectation as the effect for the timer is higher than the case where the hell timer mode appears. It is long-awaited that the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value will come because the ratio of high-expected modes appearing as the mode (effect content) of cut-in B, which is the effect of the timer target, will increase. As a result, it becomes possible to pay more attention to the timer effect. On the other hand, when the hell timer mode appears as a type of timer mode effect, the effect of the timer target itself cannot be expected as compared with the case where the heaven timer mode appears, so the effect is different from the timer effect. It becomes possible to direct the gaze toward the timer, and as a result, even if a low-expected production mode appears when the count display reaches a predetermined value, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In order to make the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode function more effectively, the same production as the timer target effect is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed and when the hell timer mode is displayed. Even when the mode appears, it is desirable to control so that the appearance rate of the big hit symbol is higher when the effect mode appears when the heaven timer mode is displayed.

Further, in the timer mode effect according to this embodiment (in the example shown in FIG. 190, the modes of "cut-in B1-2", "cut-in B1-3", and "cut-in B1-4"), the timer Even after the target effect is executed and hidden, the display related to the timer mode type (heaven timer mode, hell timer mode) is maintained. Therefore, even after the timer effect is completed, the effect can be advanced while the timer-related effect is displayed, and the effect status in which the timer effect is executed in either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode. The symbol will be stopped while the player is made aware of the presence of the timer. The display of the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode is hidden before the count display reaches the predetermined value (before the effect of the timer target occurs) or the symbol stop is displayed. It may be hidden at the previous timing, or it may be kept displayed even when the symbol stop is displayed and hidden when the symbol stop is completed.

Further, the display of the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode, or the heaven challenge effect may be generated before the count display is executed (for example, during the execution of the timer look-ahead effect). In addition, when the heaven timer mode or hell timer mode is displayed or the heaven challenge effect is performed while the count display is not executed, the timer effect is not necessarily generated between the time when those effects are executed and the time when the symbol is stopped. You may not let it. However, when the heaven timer mode or hell timer mode is displayed or the heaven challenge effect is performed when the count display is not executed, compared to the case where those effects are not executed when the count display is not executed. It is desirable that the rate at which the timer effect is executed is high until the symbol is stopped, and that the timer effect is also executed as an effect that suggests that the timer effect is executed in advance.

Further, in the modes of "cut-in B1-3" and "cut-in B1-4", a heaven challenge effect is performed when the count display reaches the second specific count value, and then the count display is the first. While the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode is displayed as a result of the heaven challenge effect when the specific count value is reached, in the mode of "cut-in B1-2", the count display becomes the second specific count value. At that time, the heaven challenge effect is not performed, and then the hell timer mode is displayed when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

According to such a configuration, after the count display is started, it is possible to first pay attention to whether or not the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached. As a result, if the heaven challenge effect does not appear when the second specific count value is reached, the possibility that the heaven timer mode will occur is lost. That is, in this case, the hell timer mode occurs when the count display reaches the first specific count value, or the timer mode effect itself does not occur. Therefore, the count display is the first specific count value. You will be able to pay more attention to whether or not the hell timer mode will occur when becomes.

When the timer mode effect itself does not occur, it is desirable that the rate at which a highly expected effect mode appears as the effect of the timer target is higher than when the hell timer mode occurs. However, if the ratio of the highly expected production mode appears as the timer target production is different between the case where the timer mode production itself does not occur and the case where the hell timer mode occurs, the opposite is true. Even when the relationship is adopted, it is possible to pay more attention to whether or not the hell timer mode occurs when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

On the other hand, if the heaven challenge effect appears when the second specific count value is reached, the heaven timer mode and the hell timer mode are used as the timer mode effect when the count display reaches the first specific count value. Since any of the above is executed, it becomes possible to pay more attention to the type of timer mode effect that appears when the count display reaches the first specific count value.

According to such a timer mode effect, not only when the count display reaches a predetermined value, but also some specific count values different from the predetermined value (first specific count value, second specific count value). Even when it reaches, the timer effect (count value) and the effect related to it can be made interesting and watched, so that the game entertainment during the period when the count display is executed Can be suitably maintained.

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 190, the count display of the timer effect reaches the second specific count value and the first specific count value in sequence, and when the predetermined value is reached, the effect of the timer target is executed, and then the timer target effect is executed. The symbol fluctuation will be stopped.

In this embodiment, when a specific timer type (actually, there are not only cut-in B1 but also a plurality of timers) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 161), the specific timer type is specified. It is determined which mode (cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, cut-in B1-4) is executed as the timer type (cut-in B1 in the example shown in FIG. 190). However, instead of cut-in B1, cut-in B1-1, cut-in B1-2, cut-in B1-3, and cut-in B1-4 are prepared as selection candidates for the count display lottery (step S5510). Then, it may be decided which timer type is selected from these candidates. This processing method can be similarly adopted in the processing related to the execution of other effects (for example, the revival timer effect).

In the example shown in FIG. 190, when the effect of the timer target is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed, as a specific type of effect (cut-in B) as compared with the case where the hell timer mode is displayed. The ratio of content with high expectations (such as cut-in B being performed with colors with high expectations) has been increased. However, instead of this, if the effect of the timer target is performed when the heaven timer mode is displayed, a plurality of effect types (for example, conversation notice, pending change) are performed as compared with the case where the hell timer mode is displayed. , Cut-in A, special timer, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.). Alternatively, in the heaven timer mode, the rate at which a highly expected effect type appears as the effect for the timer target may be high, and the rate at which the content has a high expectation may be high.

In addition, a specific production type among a plurality of production types (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, special timer, character A operation, cut-in B, character B operation, etc.) is selected as the effect for the timer. If a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode must be generated within the execution period of the count display. May be good. At this time, it is desirable that a pattern in which the hell timer mode occurs can appear without the heaven challenge effect being performed.

In addition, an effect indicating that either the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode always occurs within the period before the heaven challenge effect reaches the second specific count value may be performed.

In addition, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the heaven high probability mode in which the rate of success of the heaven challenge effect (the rate displayed in the heaven timer mode) becomes higher when the heaven challenge effect occurs than in the normal time. You may want to move to. That is, in this case, in the heaven high probability mode, the probability of occurrence of the heaven challenge effect itself when the heaven timer mode is not displayed is lowered (the probability of generating the hell timer mode without generating the heaven challenge effect, or the timer. By increasing the probability that the mode effect will not be generated) or by lowering the expectation of the timer target effect itself that occurred when in the heaven timer mode, the heaven high probability mode will be realized.

Further, in the heaven challenge production, a period during which the operation by the player can be accepted is set, and the result of success or failure of the heaven challenge production based on the operation performed by the player within the period (heaven timer mode, Which of the hell timer modes will occur) may be displayed.

In addition, if the heaven challenge effect occurs when the number of executed counts in the count display is relatively small, such as when the heaven challenge effect occurs at the same time as the timer effect count display starts, the count in the count display It is desirable that the rate of success of the heaven challenge effect (the rate displayed in the heaven timer mode) is higher than when the heaven challenge effect occurs when the number of executions is relatively large. .. That is, in this case, just before the appearance of the effect that is the target of the timer effect, it is possible to maintain the game interest due to the expectation that the effect will occur soon, and the effect that is the target of the timer effect appears. When it takes a long time (count number) to do so, it is expected that the game will be maintained with the expectation that the heaven challenge production will occur. In this case, the heaven challenge effect may be generated after the timer target effect is executed. In this case, the success rate of the heaven challenge effect is the lowest, and the timer target effect that has already been executed is the lowest. On the other hand, the heaven timer mode or the hell timer mode will occur in a follow-up manner.

Further, the heaven challenge effect may be generated as one of the target effects of the timer effect. When the heaven challenge effect is executed as the target effect of the timer effect, the rate of success in the heaven challenge effect (the rate displayed in the heaven timer mode) is set to 100%, and after the heaven timer mode is displayed. Within the symbol fluctuation period of, the ratio of high-expected effects (for example, character B operation) among the effects prepared as one of the timer target candidates, which were not targeted by the timer, is the effect. It is desirable to make it higher than if it did not appear.

[Count output stop control]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, while the count display is being executed within the period during which the symbol effect is being performed, a plurality of effect modes (for example, conversation notice, pending change) prepared as candidates for the count target are prepared. , Cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) It is possible to execute a timer effect that hides the count display at the timing when at least one of them appears. In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a predetermined effect different from the timer effect (desirably, but not necessarily limited to, a predetermined effect having a predetermined degree of expectation) is performed during the execution of the count display. When it is executed, the effect mode in which the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until it reaches a predetermined value, and the output related to the count display is not performed until it reaches a predetermined value, and this is performed at an intermediate stage when the predetermined effect is executed. One of the effect modes for canceling the output is selectively displayed (count output stop control).

According to such a configuration, even if the output related to the count display is performed in the timer effect, the count display is not necessarily performed until the predetermined value is reached, and the output is stopped in the middle of the output and the output related to the predetermined effect is output. Since it becomes possible to do so, it is expected that the output related to the count display of the timer effect will be performed and the game interest will be maintained until this reaches a predetermined value (count digestion period).

FIGS. 191 (a) to 191 (c) show a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and a determination is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for demonstrating the specific content of the count output stop control performed when a specific variation number is selected in the 2nd processing situation.

As shown in FIG. 191 (a), in the specific timer type, first, a count having a count number of 20 seconds is obtained at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the symbol fluctuation. The display starts. Then, after the count display becomes "0", the effect of the timer target, which is the timer target, appears.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the effect at the time when the predetermined effect appears. Determine if the situation is in a specific, predetermined production situation. As a result, when it is in a specific effect situation, the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the control to execute the predetermined effect is performed. It should be noted that the "predetermined specific effect status" used for determining whether or not to stop the output related to the count display of the timer effect is, for example, the count display of the timer effect is executed. This is an effect situation in which a conflict occurs in terms of effect output between the timer effect and the predetermined effect, such as when a predetermined effect is executed using an area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 191 (b), when the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the predetermined effect is executed, the timer effect is continued even after the output related to the predetermined effect is completed. The count display is not output again. On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, even after the output related to the count display is stopped, the time from the start of the count display (or the time from the start of the fluctuation) is secretly timed. When this reaches a predetermined value (a value when 20 seconds have passed since the count display was started), it is assumed that the timing for the count display whose output has been stopped reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") has arrived, and the timer I am trying to make the target production appear.

According to such a configuration, after the predetermined effect is executed, the output of the count display is stopped, but if the count display is not stopped, the value is set to a predetermined value (here, "0"). When the timing that should have been reached arrives, the effect of the timer target will appear. That is, in this case, it is expected that the timer effect, which was shown as if it had been terminated halfway by the execution of the predetermined effect, was secretly continued, and the effect of the timer target was improved when the effect of the timer appeared. Will be done.

However, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 191 (c), even if the predetermined effect is executed while the count display of the timer effect is being executed, the predetermined effect is performed. When the production status at the time when the production is made to appear is not in a specific predetermined production situation, the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until it reaches a predetermined value, and the count display is digested. In the meantime, the predetermined effect will be executed.

More specifically, the predetermined effect is "an effect that causes an enemy character to appear in a specific area", "an effect that attacks a specific area", or "a display when an effect fails in a specific area". In the case of "the effect of outputting music or music", if such a predetermined effect is executed while the count display is being executed in a specific area, the player will be able to perform the timer effect (count display). On the other hand, there may be a concern that it may have some adverse effect on the production (for example, the degree of expectation as a timer production is lowered). Therefore, when there is a production situation in which such a concern may occur, by stopping the output related to the count display of the timer production and executing the predetermined production, some adverse effect on the timer production can be produced. It becomes possible to execute a predetermined effect without producing an image as if it were exerted (the effect mode of FIG. 191 (b)). Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, since the effect of the timer target is made to appear as a surprise while maintaining the output stop state related to the count display, such a predetermined effect is used. It can be expected that the game entertainment will be improved on the contrary (the production mode of FIG. 191 (b)).

However, if the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped each time such a predetermined effect is executed, the effect image of the predetermined effect itself will be deteriorated, and there is a concern that the game entertainment will be deteriorated. Will be done. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the predetermined effect is executed, there is a space (area in which no effect is output) in a region different from the specific area where the count display of the timer effect is output. In some cases, the output related to the count display of the timer effect is not stopped, and the predetermined effect is output in a vacant area instead of the specific area described above (FIG. 191 (c). ) Production mode). As a result, it becomes clear that the predetermined effect is not an effect that stops the execution of the count display of the timer effect in the middle of the process, and the game interest is reduced when the predetermined effect is executed. Will be avoided.

Then, in each example shown in FIG. 191, the symbol variation is stopped after the effect of the timer target is executed in this way.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure when such count output stop control is realized.

As shown in FIG. 192, assuming that the determination to execute the predetermined effect is made based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of the fluctuation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment is used. First, when the timing for generating the predetermined effect arrives within the execution period of the symbol variation, it is determined whether or not the predetermined effect is in a specific effect state prior to starting the output related to the predetermined effect. (Step S5701).

Here, the "specific effect situation" means that when a predetermined effect is newly output, the area required for newly outputting the predetermined effect is various other effects (here, a count display of a timer effect, etc.). As described above, it is a situation in which all of the timers are used by the timer and there is no space for newly outputting the predetermined effect. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 201 (G) and 201 (H) described later, the “bullet firing effect” by the cannon corresponds to the predetermined effect. Then, in the bullet firing effect, the empty (unused) area of the upper left area, upper right area, left area, right area, and lower area in the display area is selected as the bullet firing destination. Normally, the unused area is used to produce a bullet firing effect. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G) described later, the area required to newly output such a bullet firing effect is various other effects (count display (upper left area), symbol variation (upper right). Area), timer mode effect (left area), timer target exclusion effect (right area), hold display (lower area)), and there is no space for newly outputting the predetermined effect. This corresponds to the above-mentioned "specific production situation". If a bullet is fired while in such a specific production situation, the production (for example, count display) that is already in the output state at the bullet firing destination will be damaged or destroyed by the fired bullet. (There will be a conflict between the timer effect and the predetermined effect regarding the effect output), and as a result, there may be concerns that the jackpot expectation may drop. Also mentioned above.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192, when it is determined that a specific effect situation is present (YES in step S5701) prior to starting the output related to the predetermined effect, it is already different from the predetermined effect. The output of the effect (here, the count display) in the output state is stopped (step S5702), and the free area created by this is used to perform the process related to the output of the predetermined effect (step S5703).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the situation is not specific (NO in step S5701) prior to starting the output related to the predetermined effect, another effect is used in the area required for the effect output. Since there is an unused area that has not been used, it is possible to perform processing related to the output of the predetermined effect using the unused area without stopping the output of the effect different from the predetermined effect. (Step S5713).

Here, when the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5703, the effect mode is advantageous to the player after the predetermined effect is executed, as compared with the case where the predetermined effect is executed through the process of step S5713. It is desirable to increase the rate of appearance of. For example, in the example of FIGS. 191 (b) and 191 (c), when the effect mode of FIG. 191 (b) appears in which the effect of the timer target is suddenly executed while the output related to the count display is stopped. It is desirable to control so that the proportion of the effect mode (effect type and effect content) with high expectation as the effect of the timer target is higher than that of the case where the effect mode of FIG. 191 (c) appears.

The processes of step S5702 and step S5703 may be executed as one process. For example, if the output data of the predetermined effect is overwritten in the processing area in which the output data of the count display is stored, the output related to the count display is naturally stopped, and the output is stopped in this output state. It becomes possible to perform output related to a predetermined effect.

Further, in this embodiment, when the output is in a specific production situation, the output related to the count display is stopped and the predetermined production is executed, but the production that is the target of the output cancellation is not limited to this, and other The output related to the production of is may be stopped.

In the process of step S5702, an effect type whose output is to be stopped is selected from among a plurality of effects (in the output state) that use the area required to output the predetermined effect, and the output of the selected effect is stopped. You may output a predetermined effect. In this case, it is desirable to set a priority in advance for a plurality of effects that are candidates for selecting output stop, and to select an effect type for which output is stopped based on the priority. It is desirable to set this priority in advance on the program based on whether the production is more important to the player. As a result of determining the priority, if all of the other effects in the output state have a higher priority than the predetermined effect, the output related to the other effects is maintained and the output of the predetermined effect is not performed. ..

Then, the effect type for which the output is to be stopped is executed as a plurality of effects that are related to the effect contents and are connected (for example, a timer effect that is connected by the count display and the timer target effect). The output is stopped during the effect that appears earlier in the effect (for example, during the execution of the count display), and the predetermined effect is set before the effect that appears later (for example, the timer target effect) is started. When is terminated, it is desirable to execute the effect that appears later without stopping the output.

In addition, regarding the production and the predetermined production that are subject to output cancellation when the predetermined production is executed, in addition to the production by the image display, the production by the character movement, the production by the music, the production by the board lamp, etc. good. In addition, when the predetermined effect is executed, the effect or the predetermined effect whose output is to be stopped is a combination of at least two or more of each effect element such as an image display, a character movement, music, and a board lamp. When it is executed as a composite effect, it may be sufficient to stop the output of at least one of the combined effect elements. For example, when the predetermined effect is the "bullet firing effect" shown in FIG. 201 (G), which will be described later, and the effect for which the output is to be stopped is the "combined effect of the image display and the board lamp", the combined effect. Even if only the output related to the image display is stopped and the output related to the board lamp is maintained, the effect of the board lamp in the display area where the bullet as the image display does not reach is adversely affected. It can be said that there is no concern that (competition due to production) will occur.

[Timer Plus production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, at least one of a plurality of production modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) is counted. It is possible to display the count display within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and after displaying the count display for a predetermined time, the count display is hidden and the effect to be counted appears in the hidden state. The production is feasible. In this regard, in the count effect, after hiding the count display that has reached the specific count value (for example, "0"), not only one of the above-mentioned plurality of effect modes appears, but also the specific count value (for example, "0") is displayed. By redisplaying the above count display in the form of having a larger count value than "), it is possible to execute an effect of continuing the count effect (timer plus effect).

That is, in this case, even if the count display becomes a specific count value (for example, "0") and one of the plurality of production modes appears under the condition that the count display is hidden, the count display is displayed. Since there is a possibility that the count value will be redisplayed with a count value larger than the specific count value and the count effect will be further continued (the possibility that a more highly expected effect mode will appear), the count display will be displayed. It will be expected to maintain the game entertainment after it is hidden.

FIG. 193 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer plus effect performed when a specific variation number (SP reach without timer) is selected in a situation.

In the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only cut-in B2 but also a plurality of timer types) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (FIG. (Refer to 162), the following processing related to the timer plus effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing related to the timer plus effect is not performed, and the timer plus effect is produced regardless of which timer type is determined. The following processing may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 193 (a), assuming that the timer type of "cut-in B2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU1511a selects the timer type as the next process. A determination process is performed as to which of a plurality of effect modes (“cut-in B2-1” and “cut-in B2-2”) including the timer plus effect mode is to execute the “cut-in B2”. It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 193 (a), in the aspect of "cut-in B2-1", 40 seconds are displayed after a count display having a count value of "40" is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the symbol variation. When a predetermined value (here, "0") is reached and the count display is hidden, the "cut-in B (cut B notice)" that is the target of the timer is executed.

On the other hand, in the mode of "cut-in B2-2", a count display in which the number of counts is significantly smaller than that of the mode of "cut-in B2-1" is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the symbol variation. There is. In general, in such a timer effect, no effect is often performed during the period from the execution of the count display to the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value, so that there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated during that period. NS. Therefore, in the timer plus effect (aspect of "cut-in B2-2") shown in FIG. 193 (a), first, a first count value (here, "4"), which is relatively small after a lapse of a predetermined time from the symbol fluctuation, is used. After displaying the count display with the timer and hiding it, in the hidden state, the first double-compatible effect is performed for a longer time (here, 4 seconds) than the time when the count display was displayed (4 seconds in this case). For example, it is supposed to be executed for 9 seconds).

Here, in the first double-compatible production, first, as the production corresponding to the count display having the first count value (here, "4") (first timer target production), the cut-in B production is performed. To execute. However, in the first timer target effect, a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation (a character wearing a blue aura) appears as a mode of the cut-in B. After that, an effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed so as to have a count value larger than the first count value. As for the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display, for example, whether or not a specific display image (count-up image) appears and whether or not a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) operates. It can be realized as an effect such as whether or not.

In addition, in the effect (count-up effect) regarding whether or not to redisplay the count display, each time the count display in the hidden state is redisplayed, it is executed prior to that, but a specific display is performed. The effect mode (color, light emission mode, etc.) when appearing as an effect using an image (count-up image) or a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is different depending on the number of times the image is redisplayed. It is desirable to do so. In addition, when a specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is adopted as an accessory indicating that the count display is redisplayed, the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is subjected to the count-up effect. Not only that, it is desirable that it be used for other effects such as determining a big hit. However, in this case, the operation mode of the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory) is different, and in addition to the specific movable accessory (count-up accessory), a different movable accessory is further operated. It is desirable to let them perform a movable effect in cooperation with them in order to make it known that the count-up effect is not being executed.

According to such a configuration, two different effects (first timer target effect (cut-in B) showing the degree of expectation) as the target of the count "4", and a second regarding whether the count display is redisplayed. Since the timer target effect (count-up effect) is performed, when the count display (count "4") for a relatively short time is executed, the timer target effect for a longer time can be enjoyed. become able to. Therefore, it is expected that the time required for the count display to be executed is reduced while maintaining the total time as a timer effect, and the deterioration of the game interest in the period until the count display reaches a predetermined value is suppressed. Become so.

In this regard, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-2", an effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears in the first double-compatible effect, and when the effect result appears, the first effect is obtained. The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of having a second count value (here, "5") larger than the count value of. However, in the first double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that fails to redisplay the above-mentioned count display appears is also prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is not redisplayed. It is desirable that the timer effect is terminated at this point.

After that, when the count display having the second count value (here, "5") is hidden after a predetermined time, the second double-corresponding effect is counted and displayed in the hidden state. Is executed for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the displayed time (5 seconds in this case).

Also in this second double-compatible production, first, as a production corresponding to the count display having a second count value (here, "5") (third timer target production), a cut-in B production is performed. Execute. However, in the third timer target effect, as the cut-in B mode, a mode (character wearing a green aura) having a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect appears. Then, after that, an effect (fourth timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed so as to have a count value larger than the second count value.

According to such a configuration, the count display of the second count value (here, "5"), which takes a longer time than the first count value (here, "4"), is executed. However, in exchange for this, the cut-in B effect is executed in a manner with a higher degree of expectation than the first timer target effect. Therefore, it is expected that the time required for the count digestion to maintain the total time as the timer effect is extended, and the decrease in the game interest during the period until the count display reaches the predetermined value is suppressed. Become.

In this regard, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-2", an effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the count display appears in the second double-compatible effect, and when the effect result appears, the second effect result appears. The timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of having a third count value (here, "7") larger than the count value of. However, even in the second double-compatible effect, an effect pattern is prepared in which an effect result that fails to redisplay the count display is prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is not redisplayed. It is desirable that the timer effect is terminated at that point.

After that, when the count display having the third count value (here, "7") is hidden, the count display is displayed for the third double-corresponding effect in the hidden state. It is decided to execute for a longer time (for example, 9 seconds) than the time (7 seconds in this case).

Here, even in the third double-compatible production, first, the cut-in is performed as the production corresponding to the count display having the third count value (here, "7") (the fifth timer target production). Perform the production of B. However, in the third timer target effect, as the cut-in B mode, a mode (character wearing a red aura) having a higher degree of expectation than the first and second timer target effects appears. Then, after that, an effect (sixth timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed so as to have a count value larger than the third count value.

According to such a configuration, the count display of the third count value (here, "7"), which takes a longer time than the first and second count values (here, "4" and "5"). However, in exchange for this, the cut-in B effect is executed in a manner with a higher degree of expectation than the first and second timer target effects, so that the count display is displayed. It is expected that the decline in the interest in games during the period until the predetermined value is reached will be suppressed.

In this regard, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-2", the effect result of failing to redisplay the above count display appears in the third double-compatible effect, and the timer effect ends at this point. Will be done. That is, in this case, in the timer effect, the cut-in B by the character wearing the red aura is finally executed as the effect of the timer target, but until the cut-in B according to the mode appears. Since the count display for a relatively short time is displayed multiple times and the effect corresponding to the count display is executed multiple times, the period from the start of the timer effect to the end of the timer effect is displayed. It is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Moreover, each time the count display is redisplayed, the count value is increased to increase the scale of the production as a whole, but the total time that the count display is displayed is more than the total time that the count display is hidden. Is also shortened, and each time the count display is hidden, the timer target effect is executed in a more promising manner, so the timer effect is executed while maintaining the game interest for a long time. You will be able to.

Further, in the mode of "cut-in B2-2", each time the count display is hidden, the degree of expectation is gradually increased by changing the mode (color) for the same effect (cut-in B). By expressing the state of progress, it is possible to execute these multiple count displays as one timer effect targeting "cut-in B", and the final displayed effect (red). It becomes possible to recognize that the cut-in B) by the character wearing the aura of is the effect target of the timer effect.

In the third double-compatible effect, an effect pattern in which an effect result that succeeds in redisplaying the above-mentioned count display appears is also prepared, and when the effect pattern appears, the count display is redisplayed and a timer effect is produced. It is desirable to continue. However, when the maximum number of times the count display is redisplayed is reached, the effect is not the cut-in B effect that was being executed until then, but a different effect (expectation is higher than any aspect of cut-in B). It is desirable to execute a special effect) that is not prepared as a candidate for the timer target so that it can be recognized that the maximum number of times has been reached. In this case, the effect as to whether or not to redisplay the count display after the special effect is executed does not appear, but the time required for the special effect is the double-compatible effect (two) that have appeared so far. The timer target effect is executed for a longer time than the effect (the effect is executed), suggesting that the expectation is higher than the effects that have appeared so far (cut-in B by the character wearing the red aura). It is desirable to do so in order to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the degree of expectation may be 100%.

FIG. 193 (b) is a time chart for explaining a modified example of the timer plus effect.

The timer plus effect may be performed in the manner shown in FIG. 193 (b). That is, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the count display having the first count value (here, “4”) is started after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the first count value ( Here, the effect corresponding to the count "4" corresponding to "4") (the effect at the time of the 4-second timer) is executed.

Here, in the production corresponding to the count "4" (production at the time of the 4-second timer), the production period is set for the time required for the first count value (here, "4") to be digested. Within the effect period, the timer target effect such as cut-in B is executed in a predetermined mode (such as a character wearing a blue aura).

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to execute the effect of the timer target in the situation where the count display is being executed, so that the game entertainment during the count digestion can be suitably maintained. ..

Moreover, when such an effect corresponding to the count "4" (effect at the time of a 4-second timer) is completed, the count display of the count "4" also reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), so that the timer Even if you do not check the count display of the effect, you can easily recognize that the count display has reached the predetermined value (here, "0") just by checking the effect corresponding to the count "4" (effect at the time of the 4-second timer). You will be able to.

Then, after the timing for ending the count "4" corresponding effect (4 second timer time effect) has arrived (after the count display of the count "4" reaches a predetermined value), the first count value (after the count display reaches a predetermined value) Here, an effect (first count-up effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed in a form having a count value larger than that of "4"). This first count-up effect is executed as the same effect as the "effect on whether or not to redisplay the count display" in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the above count display is displayed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer effect is terminated at this point without the count display being redisplayed.

However, when an effect pattern that succeeds in redisplaying the above count display appears as a result of the first count-up effect, a second count value (here, "4") larger than the first count value (here, "4") appears. Here, the timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of having "5"). In this regard, in this modification, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of having a second count value (here, “5”), the count corresponding to the second count value (here, “5”) is displayed. Execute the "5" corresponding effect (5 second timer time effect).

Here, in the production corresponding to the count "5" (production at the time of the 5-second timer), the production period is set for the time required for the second count value (here, "5") to be digested. During the production period, timer-targeted effects such as cut-in B appear in a mode with higher expectations (such as a character wearing a green aura) compared to the above-mentioned count "4" compatible effect (4 second timer effect). Will be made to.

Then, after the timing for ending the count "5" corresponding effect (5 second timer effect) has arrived (after the count display of the count "5" reaches a predetermined value), the second count value (here). Then, an effect (second count-up effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display is executed in a form having a count value larger than that of "5"). This second count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the "effect on whether or not to redisplay the count display" in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and the above count display is displayed as the effect result. When an effect pattern that fails to be redisplayed appears, the timer effect is terminated at this point without the count display being redisplayed.

However, when an effect pattern that succeeds in redisplaying the above count display appears as a result of the second count-up effect, a third count value (here, "5") larger than the second count value (here, "5") appears. Here, the timer effect is continued by redisplaying the count display in the form of having "7"). In this regard, in this modification, when the count display is redisplayed in the form of having a third count value (here, “7”), the count corresponding to the third count value (here, “7”) is displayed. Execute the "7" corresponding effect (7-second timer time effect).

Here, in the production corresponding to the count "7" (production at the time of the 7-second timer), the production period is set for the time required for the third count value (here, "7") to be digested. During the production period, the timer target production such as cut-in B appears in a mode with higher expectations (character wearing a red aura, etc.) compared to the case of the above count "5" compatible production (5 second timer production). Will be made to.

Then, after the timing for ending the count "7" compatible effect (7-second timer effect) has arrived (after the count display of the count "7" reaches a predetermined value), the third count value (here). Then, an effect (third count-up effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display may be executed in a form having a count value larger than "7"). This third count-up effect is also executed as the same effect as the "effect on whether or not to redisplay the count display" in the example of FIG. 193 (a), and as a result of the effect, the above count display is performed. When an effect pattern that fails to redisplay appears, the timer effect ends at this point without the count display being redisplayed.

In this regard, in this modified example, after the timing for ending the count "7" corresponding effect (7-second timer time effect) has arrived (after the count display of the count "7" reaches a predetermined value), the count is further increased. This shows an example in which the count-up effect itself, which suggests the possibility of, did not appear. In this way, even if the count-up effect itself does not appear, the count display is not redisplayed as in the case where the effect pattern that fails to redisplay the count display appears in the count-up effect. At that point, the timer effect will end.

According to the count-up effect related to such a modification, when a count display having a predetermined number of count values is displayed, the count value is displayed and immediately determined in advance corresponding to the count value. Since the count-corresponding effect (cut-in B, etc.) having the effect content for the required time is started, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the execution of the count display. In addition, when such a count-corresponding effect is completed (when the count display reaches a predetermined value), an effect is performed as to whether the count display has a larger count value and is redisplayed, and these two effects alternate. Since the timer effect is executed and continued by appearing, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the count display is simply performed in the timer effect and no effect is performed, which is suitable for the game entertainment. Will be able to maintain.

In this modified example, a count-compatible effect (for example, count "4") has an effect content for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) corresponding to the displayed count value (for example, "4"). While the corresponding effect) is being executed, the count display digestion (countdown of 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → 0) is also performed. However, as described above, the count-corresponding effect (for example, the count "4" -corresponding effect) related to this modified example is such that the effect is terminated at the timing when the displayed count value (for example, "4") is completely digested. Since it is executed, only the count value at the time of its appearance (for example, "4") is displayed for a predetermined time, and the count display during count digestion (4 → 3 → 2 → 1) is displayed. → It is more desirable not to necessarily perform this for the countdown of 0) in order to encourage attention to the count-corresponding effect (for example, the count “4” corresponding effect).

Then, in each of the examples shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the symbol variation is stopped after the timer effect is executed in this way.

Among the timer plus effects, in the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display, an effect reception period of a predetermined time is set, and counting is performed based on the operation performed by the player within the period. An effect suggesting that the display is redisplayed (success effect) or an effect suggesting that the count display is not redisplayed (failure effect) may appear. That is, in this case, after the success effect appears, the count display is redisplayed in a form that increases the number of counts to continue the timer effect, and when the failure effect appears, the count display is redisplayed after that. do not have. When such an effect is adopted, even if the player does not perform the operation within the effect acceptance period, a predetermined effect result (success effect or failure effect) is produced at a predetermined timing after the elapse of the period. It will be displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the time required for the first to third double-corresponding effects is set to the same time, but each count display (“4”, “5”, “7”) is supported. The production time may be set to different times from each other. For example, as the count value of each count display gradually increases each time the count display is redisplayed, the time required for this as a double-compatible effect corresponding to each count value gradually increases. If it is set to, the total time required for the count display itself can be kept relatively short, and the scale of the entire production can be appropriately extended while maintaining the interest of the game.

In addition, in the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display, when displaying the effect result, a plurality of effect modes having different ratios (expectations) in which the count display is redisplayed in a form in which the number of counts increases. Either may be displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, each time the count display is redisplayed, a count display having a count value larger than the count value when the previous count display is displayed is made to appear. It is not always necessary to redisplay the count display having a count value larger than the count value when the count display is displayed. That is, even when the count display reaches a predetermined value and the timer target effect is executed, even if the count display is redisplayed when the predetermined effect image appears after that, the game entertainment can be improved. It can be expected to be planned. However, despite redisplaying the count display with a count value smaller than the count value when the previous count display was displayed, there is a higher expectation as a timer target effect than the previous count display. If the rate of appearance (which may be 100%) is increased, the sense of speed from the display of the count display to the appearance of the timer target effect will be increased, and the game interest will be further improved. You will be able to do it. Then, when the redisplay in the count display having such a small count value is repeatedly executed, the appearance timing of the timer target effect gradually shortens from the time when the count display is first displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment by such an accelerated timer production.

[Timer stagnation effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, any one of a plurality of production modes (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) is performed. It is a count target, and the count display is executed within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the effect mode to be counted is made to appear among the plurality of effect modes. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this embodiment, the count display can be hidden between the start of the count display and the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value. There are cases where it is hidden for a first time and cases where it is hidden for a second time longer than the first time (timer stagnation effect).

That is, in this case, when the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of a plurality of effect modes appears as a count target, and the count display is the first time or this until the predetermined value is reached. Since it may be hidden over a longer second time, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time until any one of the plurality of production modes occurs, and a feeling of tension until the production to be counted is executed. Will be able to sustain.

FIG. 194 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer stagnation effect performed when the variation numbers 7 and 8 (see FIG. 148) corresponding to "character reach without timer" are selected in the situation.

In the example shown in FIG. 194 (a), for convenience of explanation, a specific timer type (not only the accessory A operation 2 but also a plurality of timer types) is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). (See FIG. 161), the following processing related to the timer stagnation effect is executed. However, when a specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the following processing regarding the timer stagnation effect is not performed, and the timer stagnation effect is produced regardless of which timer type is determined. The following processing may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 194 (a), assuming that the timer type of "accessory A operation 2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU1511a performs the next process as the next process. Regarding whether to execute the selected "Character A operation 2" in a plurality of production modes ("Character A operation 2-1" or "Character A operation 2-2"" including the mode of the revival timer effect. It is desirable that the determination process is performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 194 (a), in the aspect of "accessory A operation 2-1", 30 after the count display having the count value of "30" is started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation. When the seconds have passed, the predetermined value (here, "0") is reached and the count display is hidden, and the timer target "feature A operation (feature A notice)" is executed. Will be done.

On the other hand, in the aspect of "Character A operation 2-2", 5 seconds have passed after the count display having the count value of "10" was started after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation, and the count was counted. When the value becomes "5", it is hidden, and when the hidden state is maintained for 6 seconds, the count display is redisplayed with the count value of "4". After that, when 2 seconds have passed and the count value becomes "2", this is hidden again, and when the hidden state is maintained for 16 seconds, the count display is re-displayed with the count value of "1". It is displayed, and after reaching "0" one second later, the "feature A operation (feature A notice)" that is the target of the timer is executed while the count display is hidden. It has become.

According to such an aspect of "accessory A operation 2-2", as shown in FIG. 194 (a), a count display having a count value of "10" starts after a predetermined time from the start of the symbol variation. In spite of the mode in which the count display is performed, a predetermined value (here, "here," " When it reaches 0 "), the effect of the timer target is executed. That is, in this case, even if a count display having a relatively small count value appears, if an effect of hiding the count display for a predetermined time (timer stagnation effect) occurs while the count display is digested, the count is counted. The progress speed of is stagnated for that time, and it is expected that it will be executed as a timer effect that takes the same time as when a count display with a relatively large count value appears. .. As described above, in the timer production, the longer the time required for this, the higher the proportion of the production mode of the timer target with high expectation tends to appear. By making it possible to generate a stagnation effect, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in the game interest when a count display having a relatively small count value appears. In addition, since the time of the timer effect as a whole is extended by adding the time for which the count display is hidden, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest while the count display is executed. ..

Further, in the aspect of the "accessory A operation 2-2", as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the first time (6) until the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"). The count display is hidden for a period (a period between the count values "5" → "4") and a second time (16 seconds) longer than the first time. The period to be set (the period between the count value "2" → "1") can appear, but the count display is "non" regardless of the length of those times (first time, second time). When returning from the "display state" to the "display state", the count value is advanced (changed) only by a specific number (here, "1"), which is the minimum unit. That is, in this case, the longer the time that the count display is maintained in the "non-display state", the more the progress speed of the count is stagnant for that time, and as a result, the rate of appearance of a highly expected production mode is high. Since it will be expected to become, it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the aspect of the "accessory A operation 2-2", as the count value in the timer effect progresses, the time during which the count display is hidden is maintained in the "hidden state" for a longer period of time. It is set to. That is, in this case, even if the count display with a relatively small count value is being executed and the count digestion is likely to end (a situation in which the predetermined value is reached in a short time), at this point in time. If the timer stagnant effect appears in, the time required for the timer effect will be greatly increased and the degree of expectation will be greatly improved. Therefore, the game entertainment will be preferably maintained for the period until the count display reaches a predetermined value. You will be able to.

Further, in the aspect of the "accessory A operation 2-2", after the count display is hidden, the count display is redisplayed and the timer target effect is executed after reaching a predetermined value. However, after the count display is hidden, the count display is not necessarily redisplayed so that an effect pattern in which the timer effect is halfway terminated at this point can appear without executing the timer target effect. You may. When this effect pattern appears, the rate at which the symbol variation is stopped by the jackpot symbol is lower than when the predetermined value is reached and the timer target effect is executed. However, by preparing such an effect pattern, the timer effect is produced. It will be possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of this itself. Moreover, after the count display is hidden (after the timer effect is terminated halfway), while waiting for the count display to be redisplayed, the symbol fluctuation may be stopped by the jackpot symbol. It is expected that the realization of such a surprise-like production will improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the mode of "accessory A operation 2-2", the total time (22 seconds) in which the count display is hidden is longer than the total time (10 seconds) in which the count display is displayed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in the game interest while the count display is being executed.

FIG. 194 (b) shows an example of the relationship between the time until the count display is redisplayed (the time during which the non-display state is maintained) and the degree of risk that the count display is not redisplayed. It is a table H1 which shows separately of the count value at the time of being displayed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the type of timer effect including the mode of timer stagnation effect and its execution mode are affected based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of fluctuation pattern so that the relationship shown in Table H1 appears. It is desirable to perform processing.

According to such an embodiment shown in Table H1, as the count value progresses (as it approaches a predetermined value), the maintenance time when it is hidden tends to be longer, whereas it is hidden. There is a tendency that the risk that the timer effect is terminated without the count display being redisplayed while being displayed tends to increase gradually. That is, in this case, if the count value is hidden when the count value has not progressed so much, the total time as a timer effect is small, but it can be extended steadily with a small end risk, but the count value is large. If it is hidden at the stage of progress, the end risk is large, but the total time as a timer effect can be greatly extended, so the effect as a timer stagnation effect gradually changes as the count value progresses. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest while the count display is executed.

In Table H1, one non-display time is associated with each count value, but a plurality of non-display times are associated with each count value, and the timer is stagnant at any of these non-display times. The effect may be generated.

In addition, at what timing (count value) the count display is hidden while the count display is being executed, and the number of times the count display is hidden, the result of the jackpot judgment, the type of fluctuation pattern, etc. It is desirable to make a decision at the start of the symbol change based on this.

Further, in such a timer stagnation effect, an effect corresponding to the count display may be performed while the count display is hidden. For example, when the count value "6" is hidden for 6 seconds, the non-display effect corresponding to the count value "6" is performed for 6 seconds, and the count value "2" is hidden for 16 seconds. In the case of, if the non-display effect corresponding to the count value "2" (the effect mode is different from the non-display effect corresponding to the count value "6") is performed for 16 seconds. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when the count display is in the hidden state. At this time, an effect of whether or not the count display is redisplayed may appear in the non-display effect, and the count display may be redisplayed or the timer effect may be terminated according to the effect result. ..

More preferably, during the period from the start of the count display to the arrival of the predetermined value, when the count display is in the display state, there is a new effect (an effect different from the timer effect) that suggests the jackpot expectation. If you do not start it, and when the count display is in the hidden state, you can start a new effect that suggests the jackpot expectation (an effect different from the timer effect), so be careful about the remaining count. You will be able to enjoy a different effect from the timer effect. In addition to the increase in expectations due to the occurrence of the timer stagnation effect itself, it is now possible to enjoy the increase in expectations due to the production different from the timer effect, which gives a feeling of expectation for the timer stagnation effect. It will be possible to make it even higher.

Then, another effect that appears when the count display is in the non-display state may include a new timer effect different from the timer effect. However, in this case, the count is advanced faster than the progress speed of the hidden count, and a new timer is set before the timing when the hidden count display is redisplayed. It is desirable that the count display of the effect reaches a predetermined value so that the target effect appears. In addition, as a target effect of the new timer effect, an effect of redisplaying the count display in the hidden state may be performed.

[Progressive production leading to timer target production]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, count display up to a predetermined value is executed within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and at least one of a plurality of effect modes prepared as candidates for the effect corresponding to the count display. It is possible to execute a timer effect that causes one to appear as a timer target effect. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present application, a series of productions including the above-mentioned timer target effects (for example, conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation, etc.) The timer-compatible effect of is started before the count display reaches a predetermined value, and can be ended after the count display reaches a predetermined value (progress effect leading to the timer target effect).

That is, in this case, since a series of timer-compatible effects corresponding to the timer effects are executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, it is preferable to enjoy the game until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Will be able to maintain.

FIG. 195 is a time chart for explaining the specific contents of the progress effect leading to the timer target effect.

As shown in FIG. 195, the timer effect is currently executed for a specific timer type within the fluctuation period of the symbol, and the count value of the count display is up to the first specific value (here, the count "6"). Assuming that progress has been made, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the progress effect (corresponding to a series of timers) that leads to the effect content of the timer target effect that appears after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"). (Direction) is started.

Here, in this explanatory example, as shown in FIG. 195, a cut-in by a ally character is performed as a timer target effect that appears after the count value of the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”). The display image SEG3-1 to be performed is displayed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to this explanatory example, the cut-in by the ally character is performed during the period during the count digestion before the count value of the count display reaches the predetermined value (here, the count is "0"). The process leading to the situation is displayed as a production image (progress production that leads to the production content of the timer target production).

For example, in this explanatory example, the count value of the count display is the first specific value (here, the count "6") before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, the count "0"). When becomes, as an effect corresponding to this, a display image SEG1 depicting a person seeking help from a ally character is displayed.

Next, when the count value of the count display becomes the second specific value (here, the count "3") before the count value of the count display becomes a predetermined value (here, the count "0"). As a corresponding effect, a display image SEG2 is displayed, which depicts a ally character confronting an enemy character by accepting a request from a person seeking help.

That is, by sequentially making such display images SEG1 and SEG2 appear while the count display is advanced toward a predetermined value, when the count display is further advanced and reaches a predetermined value, a cut-in by a ally character (here, here). , The display image SEG3-1 in which the ally character wears an aura to defeat the enemy character) can be expected to be displayed, which makes it possible to enjoy the game while the count display is being executed. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease of.

However, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, even if the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value (here, the count "3") appears, it is cut by the ally character when the count display reaches a predetermined value. There is also an effect pattern in which the display image SEG3-2, which depicts the appearance of the ally character escaping in front of the enemy, is displayed instead of the display image SEG3-1 in which the in is performed. According to such a configuration, the count display has a predetermined value while it is possible to give an eye to which effect appears as the target of the timer effect in the period before the count display reaches the predetermined value. Since it is not possible to specify the effect mode that appears when the value is reached, this can be suitably maintained even for the game entertainment after the count display reaches a predetermined value. The display image SEG3-2 does not necessarily have to be prepared, and the display image SEG3-1 may always appear when the count display reaches a predetermined value.

In this regard, in this explanatory example, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, count "6") appears, or after the display corresponding to the second specific value (here, count "3") appears. After the image SEG2 appears, an effect pattern is prepared in which the count display is not further advanced and is terminated halfway before reaching a predetermined value. According to such a configuration, while such an effect progress that appears before reaching a predetermined value is performed, the count display progresses with the risk that the timer effect will end halfway without the timer target effect appearing. You will be able to enjoy. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to prepare an effect pattern in which the timer effect is terminated halfway, and the effect for which the timer is targeted may appear when the count display always reaches a predetermined value.

Further, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is the display image SEG3-1 in which the cut-in is performed by the ally character, as well as the display image SEG3-1. Although the illustration is omitted, it is displayed as an effect image that is connected to a different display image (for example, a cut-in by a different character) prepared as a timer target effect. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 204 (C) to (F) and 205 (G) to (I) described later, one of the three friendly characters shown in FIG. 204 (D) seeks help. The request from the person is accepted, and the accepted ally character confronts the enemy character and performs a cut-in effect.

Therefore, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, the count “6”) is displayed, the second specific value (here, the count “3”) is displayed. As a display image corresponding to ()), a display image different from the display image SEG2 may be displayed instead of the display image SEG2, and when the other display image is displayed, the display image is displayed when a predetermined value is reached. The production progress is made so as to connect to a display image different from SEG3-1 (for example, a cut-in by a different character). The display image SEG1 may be executed as an effect that is always connected to the display image SEG3-1 in which the cut-in by the ally character is performed.

It is desirable to decide which route to advance the effect while the count display is being executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and the type of the fluctuation pattern when the symbol is changed. When an effect pattern in which the timer target effect is not executed appears, the rate at which the symbol variation is stopped in the jackpot symbol is lower than when the timer target effect is executed after reaching a predetermined value. By preparing it, it becomes possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the timer effect itself.

Further, after the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value (here, count "6") appears, the count is counted until the count display reaches the second specific value (here, count "3"). The display may be hidden. For example, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, when the count "6" is displayed, the display image SEG1 corresponding to the count "6" is displayed for the time when the counts "5" to "4" are digested. The count display is hidden while the display image SEG1 is displayed. After that, the count display is displayed at the timing when the count number becomes "3", and the display image SEG2 corresponding to the count "3" is displayed for the time when the counts "2" to "1" are digested. The count display is hidden while the display image SEG2 is displayed. After that, if the count display is displayed at the timing when the count number becomes "0" and the display image SEG3-1 (timer target effect) corresponding to the count "0" is executed, it is predetermined. You will be able to enjoy the progress of the production corresponding to the number of counts without worrying about the count digestion toward the value.

The display image SEG1, the display image SEG2, the display image SEG3-1 and the like may be displayed as a still image or may be displayed as a moving image that takes a predetermined time. When displaying as a still image, a plurality of still images may be sequentially displayed within a predetermined time corresponding to a specific count value (first specific value or second specific value).

Further, the time when the display image SEG1 corresponding to the first specific value is displayed, the time when the display image SEG2 corresponding to the second specific value is displayed, and the display image SEG3-1 corresponding to the predetermined value are displayed. For times, it is desirable that they be set as different times from each other.

Further, in this embodiment, as a progress effect leading to the timer target effect, a plurality of types of progress effects connected to any of a plurality of types of timer target effects are prepared, but a specific timer target effect appears. Only occasionally, it may be possible to execute a progress effect that leads to the specific timer target effect before the count display reaches a predetermined value.

Further, in the explanatory example shown in FIG. 195, the progress effect leading to the timer target effect is executed from the time when the count number is "6", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there is a first specific count number (for example, "3") where the remaining count is relatively small, and when there is a second specific count number (for example, "6") where the remaining count is relatively large. When the progress effect that leads to the timer target effect is made executable, and the progress effect that leads to the timer target effect is executed when the remaining count is a relatively large second specific count number (for example, "6"). If the jackpot expectation is relatively high, the production will be progressed more while the number of continuous counts is large as if the jackpot expectation is high, which makes the game entertainment more suitable. Will be able to maintain.

[Operation effect in timer]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the count display up to a predetermined value can be executed within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and the count target effect targeted for the count display can be executed. In this regard, in the timer effect according to the present application, it is possible to set a period during which the operation for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can be received during the execution of the count display, and the operation means (for example, the operation button) can be set within the period. When the operation for 410) is performed, any of a plurality of operation mode in which the rate at which a highly expected effect (for example, cut-in B) appears as the count target effect when the count display reaches a predetermined value is different. To generate. In addition, as the period for which the production can be accepted, the first period from the time when the count display is the first count value to the time when the count display is the second count value, and the third count value where the count display is counted after the above second count value. The second period from the time of to the time of the fourth count value is prepared as at least a settable period. Then, during the symbol production period in which it is determined that a highly expected production mode (for example, cut-in B) appears as the count target production, the count display is the second from the first count value. When the operation for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed and the effect is received during the first period up to the count value, and when the count display is the third count value, it is the fourth. In the case where the operation for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed and the effect is received during the second period up to the count value, as a result of the effect reception, a specific operation effect is performed. The rate of occurrence of the mode (for example, a mode suggesting that a specific effect having a high degree of expectation appears as a timer target effect is high) is made different (operation effect in the timer).

That is, in this case, even if it is determined that a highly expected effect (for example, cut-in B) appears as a count-compatible effect, the count display is from the time of the first count value to the time of the second count value. Specific between the case where the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated and the case where the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated from the time when the count display is the third count value to the time when the count display is the fourth count value. Since the easiness of occurrence of the effect mode at the time of operation is different, whether the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated from the time when the count display is the first count value to the time when the count display is the second count value is the count display. Should the operating means (eg, operating button 410) be operated from the time of the third count value to the time of the fourth count value, or should the operating means (eg, operating button 410) be operated by both of them? It will be possible to make the game strategy such as.

For example, if the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated within a period in which a specific operation mode is likely to occur, the effect risk that the specific operation mode does not appear can be suppressed. Even if this appears as much as the specific operation mode is likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that a highly expected effect (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count target effect. On the other hand, if the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is operated within a period in which the specific operation mode is unlikely to occur, the effect risk that the specific operation mode does not appear is high. When the specific operation mode is less likely to occur, it becomes easier to have a sense of expectation that a highly expected effect (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count-compatible effect.

Then, until the count display reaches a predetermined value during these two periods with different personalities (from the time of the first count value to the time of the second count value and from the time of the third count value to the time of the fourth count value). Since it can appear between the two periods, it is interesting to know how to operate the operation means (for example, cut-in B) for these two periods, and the game interest during the count digestion is maintained. Will be expected.

FIG. 196 (a) is a second process in which the mode of the single timer (YES in step S5506) and the determination not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507) are made. It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the operation effect in a timer performed when a specific variation number (SP reach without a timer) is selected in a situation.

In the example shown in FIG. 196 (a), for convenience of explanation, when a specific timer type is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510) (see FIG. 162), the following processing related to the operation effect in the timer is performed. It is supposed to run. However, considering that the operation effect in the timer functions as "an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that a specific effect appears as the timer target effect", the specific timer type is determined as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510). When this is done, instead of performing the following processing related to the in-timer operation effect, the following processing related to the in-timer operation effect is performed even when the timer type in which another effect mode appears instead of cut-in B as the timer target effect is determined. Execute. When the timer type in which the effect having a lower expectation than the cut-in B appears as the timer target effect is determined, the effect is compared with the case where the timer type in which the cut-in B appears as the timer target effect is determined. The rate at which a specific operation mode is generated when the reception is made is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a), assuming that the timer type of "cut-in B2" is selected as a result of the count display lottery (step S5510), the peripheral control MPU1511a selects the timer type as the next process. A determination process is performed as to which of a plurality of effect modes (“cut-in B2-11” and “cut-in B2-12”) including the mode of the operation effect in the timer is executed for the “cut-in B2”. It is desirable that the determination process be performed based on the result of the jackpot determination or the result of a predetermined lottery.

In the example shown in FIG. 196 (a), in the aspect of "cut-in B2-11", 40 seconds are displayed after a count display having a count value of "40" is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the symbol variation. When a predetermined value (here, "0") is reached and the count display is hidden, the "cut-in B (cut B notice)" that is the target of the timer is executed.

On the other hand, in the mode of "cut-in B2-12", the predetermined value (as well) when 40 seconds have passed after the count display having the count value of "40" is displayed after the lapse of a predetermined time from the symbol variation. Here, "cut-in B (cut B notice)", which is the target of the timer, is executed when the count display is hidden after reaching "0"). However, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-12", it is the same as the first period from when the count value of the count display is "35 (first count value)" to "25 (second count value)". Regarding the operation effect in the timer when there is an operation for the operation button 410) in the second period from when the count value is "15 (third count value)" to when it is "5 (fourth count value)" The production reception is made, and a display suggesting that the production reception is in an acceptable state appears. In addition to the method of displaying a specific display image, the display suggesting that the production reception is permitted is "25 (second count value)" from the time of "35 (first count value)". By changing the display mode (size, shape, color, etc.) of the count value from the time of "15 (third count value)" to the time of "5 (fourth count value)". Is also feasible.

That is, in the aspect of "cut-in B2-12", either the first period (count values are "35" to "25") and the second period (count values are "15" to "5"). If the operation button 410 is operated within the period, the effect reception as the operation effect in the timer is performed, and the ratio of the appearance of the specific effect with high expectation as the count target effect differs based on the effect reception. Generate one of a plurality of operation mode. As for the plurality of operation mode, for example, it is possible to adopt a mode in which a predetermined lamp is lit in either blue or red (a specific operation mode), and the mode in which the lamp is lit in blue is possible. When it appears, the ratio of a specific effect with a high expectation as a count target effect is the lowest, and when a mode that lights up in red (a specific operation mode) appears, a specific effect with a high expectation appears as a count target effect. Can be set to be the highest.

FIG. 196 (b) determines which production mode should appear as the operation mode depending on whether the production is received during the first period or the production is received during the second period. It is a figure which shows an example about the table (table T16) which is referred to at the time of this.

As described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as an operation mode, a mode in which a predetermined lamp is turned on in either blue or red (a specific operation mode) is prepared.

In this regard, in the table T16 shown in FIG. 196 (b), in the effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which "cut-in B" appears as the timer target effect, when the effect is received during the first period, "cut-in B2-12" is displayed. Blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "30/100", and red (high expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "70/100". Then, blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "70/100", and red (high expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "30/100". Therefore, when the operation button 410 is operated in the first period, the effect risk that the red color (highly expected mode) does not appear can be suppressed, but the red color (highly expected mode) is likely to occur. Even if this appears by the amount, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that a highly expected production (for example, cut-in B) will appear as a count target production. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated in the second period, the effect risk that the red color (high expectation mode) does not appear is high, but the red color (high expectation mode) is less likely to occur. However, when this appears, it becomes easy to have a sense of expectation that an effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, cut-in B) will appear as an effect to be counted.

That is, although the illustration is omitted, in the production pattern in which the production mode with a lower expectation than "cut-in B" appears as the timer target production, for example, when the production is received during the first period, "50/100". Blue (low expectation mode) is selected at the ratio of "", and red (high expectation mode) is selected at the ratio of "50/100". Blue (low expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "90/100", and red (high expectation mode) is selected at a ratio of "10/100". Therefore, when red color (highly expected mode) appears in the second period, it is possible to have an expectation that the effect pattern (cut-in B2-12) in which "cut-in B" appears as the timer target effect is selected. become.

In this embodiment, when a specific timer type is determined, two periods, a first period and a second period, are generated within the fluctuation time, but the result and fluctuation of the jackpot determination At least one of the first period and the second period may be generated based on the pattern type, the timer type, and the like. For example, if only the first period occurs, the risk that red (highly expected mode) does not appear when the production is accepted can be suppressed, but the degree of expectation when red (highly expected mode) appears is also so high. The operation opportunity is given only under the single condition that it does not become high, and when only the second period occurs, there is a high risk that the red color (highly expected mode) does not appear when the production reception is done. However, the operation opportunity is given only under the single condition that the degree of expectation becomes high when the red color (high expectation mode) appears. That is, in this case, depending on the player's preference, even if he / she wants to operate on the first period side, the operation opportunity is given only on the second period side, or even if he / she wants to operate on the second period side. Since the operation opportunity is given only on the one period side, the count display is executed by causing a conflict as to whether or not to operate within the period on the unfavorable side while the count is digested. It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment preference while being played.

Further, in the first period and the second period, it may not always be displayed indicating that the production reception is in an acceptable state. That is, in this case, it is counted in a state where it is unclear whether the production reception is permitted in the first period or the second period, or whether the production reception is permitted in both the first period and the second period. Since the display is advanced, it becomes possible to make the timer effect more interesting, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment while the count display is executed.

Further, for the first period and the second period, it is desirable to set the same length of time that the production reception is allowed in those periods. According to such a configuration, the production reception is allowed for the same time in both the first period and the second period, so that the count value is a specific number of minutes (here, "10"). ) Can be provided as a "thinking time for performing operations", and it is possible to maintain the interest of the game during the period when the count display is executed by adding such a directing element. Will be.

Further, in the first period and the second period, it is possible to receive the operation by the player multiple times, and the production mode changes (for example, blue → green → red) through the multiple production receptions. The more the effect with high expectation (for example, cut-in B) appears as the effect to be counted, the higher the ratio may be. However, in this case, even if the effect reception is performed a plurality of times, the easiness of appearance of the finally appearing effect mode is set to be different between the first period and the second period.

[Timer concealment effect]
As described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the count display up to a predetermined value is executed within the period in which the symbol effect is performed, and the timer target effect corresponding to the count display can be executed. In this respect, in the present invention, during the execution of the count display, the count front effect by the decorative body can be executed on the front side of the count display.

That is, in this case, while the count display is in a situation where the count target effect is executed when the count display reaches the predetermined value, the count display is counted by the decorative body in a form that makes it difficult to see the count display until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Since the forward effect will be performed, the count value by the count display can only be grasped in a discrete manner, and the remaining time until the count target effect is executed is only for a short time (during the count forward effect by the decoration). It becomes difficult to grasp and the interest in the count display can be increased.

In addition, instead of making the count display difficult to see, the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear through the front effect of the count by the decorative body is raised, so that the count display is made difficult to see, which reduces the interest in the game. Will be expected to suppress this.

FIGS. 197 (a) to 197 (c) show a single timer mode (YES in step S5506), and a determination is made not to execute the mission effect (make the conversation notice appear) (NO in step S5507). It is a time chart for explaining the specific content of the timer concealment effect performed when a specific variation number is selected in the second processing situation.

In the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), first, a count display having a count number of "30" is started at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation. After the count display becomes "0", the timer target effect that is the timer target appears. However, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (a), the count forward effect by the decorative body can be executed on the front side of the count display at a predetermined timing during the execution of the count display.

Here, as the count forward effect by such a decorative body, for example, in the example of FIGS. 206 (B) and 206 (C) described later, the movable body KT for effect is moved to the front of the count display for a predetermined time. It can be realized as a count number erosion effect that positions this over. The decorative body does not necessarily have to be provided as a movable body, and may be any one that makes the count display relatively difficult to see at the time of production as compared with the case of non-production.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed as an effect state (a state in which the count display is difficult to see) until the count value reaches "10". In the effect state, it is suggested that a specific effect with a high degree of expectation is likely to appear as a timer target effect depending on the operation mode or the light emission mode of the decorative body.

Then, in the effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a), when the count forward effect by the decorative body is completed, the count value changes from "10" to "0" under a state in which the count display is easily visible. After that, one of a plurality of production modes will appear as the timer target production.

On the other hand, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (b), first, a count having a count number of "30" is obtained when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. The display is started, and after the count display becomes "0", the timer target effect that is the timer target appears. Further, the point that the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the count display during the execution of the count display is also the same as the case of the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (a).

However, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (b), the count forward effect by the decorative body is finished in a relatively short time, and when the count forward effect by the decorative body is finished. , The count value progresses from "15" to "0" under a state in which the count display is easily visible, and then any one of a plurality of production modes appears as the timer target production.

On the other hand, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (c), first, a count display having a count number of "25" is displayed at a timing when a predetermined timing (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol fluctuation was started. After the start and the count display becomes "0", the timer target effect that is the timer target appears. The point that the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the count display during the execution of the count display is the same as the case of the timer effect example shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b).

However, in the timer effect example shown in FIG. 197 (c), the count forward effect by the decorative body is generated and ended at a relatively early stage, and when the count forward effect by the decorative body is completed. , The count value progresses from "20" to "0" under a state in which the count display is easily visible, and then any one of a plurality of production modes appears as the timer target production.

By the way, in the timer effect, as described above, the larger the count value when the count display is started, the higher the proportion of the effect target having a high expectation as the timer target effect. In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the count front effect by the decorative body occurs, the count value at the time when the count display is started is not used as a reference, but the count front effect ends and is visually recognized. It is set so that the larger the count value when it is made easier, the higher the ratio of the appearance target with high expectation as the timer target effect appears. The ratio may include 100%.

For example, in the above-mentioned production examples of FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b), the count values when the count display is started are the same at "30" in all the production patterns, but FIG. 197 (a) In the production example of FIG. 197 (b), the count value is "10" when the count front effect ends and is easy to see, whereas in the production example of FIG. 197 (b), when the count front effect ends and it is easy to see. Since the count value of is “15”, the effect example of FIG. 197 (b) has a higher rate of appearance of an effect with a high degree of expectation as a timer target effect.

According to such a configuration, if the count forward effect occurs during the execution of the count display, the effect value as the size of the count number that appeared at the start of counting is damaged, and the count number when the count forward effect ends. Since the size of the game will be re-focused, it will be possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment during the execution of the count display.

For example, in the above-mentioned production example of FIG. 197 (c), a relatively small count value "25" is displayed at the start of counting, but when the count forward production ends, it is relatively large at the end of the production. The count value "20" is displayed, and compared to the production examples shown in FIGS. 197 (a) and 197 (b), the proportion of highly expected effects appearing as timer target effects is higher. There is.

That is, in this case, if the count forward effect occurs, there is a possibility that the rate at which a highly expected effect appears as the timer target effect is higher than when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting. Therefore, it is expected to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting.

However, when a relatively large count value is displayed at the start of counting, compared to the case where a relatively small count value is displayed at the start of counting, if a count forward effect occurs after that, a relatively large count is also displayed at the end. It is desirable to set so that the rate at which the value appears is high.

Further, in the above-mentioned production examples of FIGS. 197 (a) to 197 (b), since a plurality of times are prepared as the time from the start of the count display to the occurrence of the count forward effect, the count display is executed. It will be possible to maintain the game interest by being aware of the possibility that the count forward production may occur for a long period of time.

Further, in the above-mentioned production examples of FIGS. 197 (a) to 197 (b), since a plurality of times are prepared as the time from the start to the end of the count forward effect, the count forward effect is started. At that point, it becomes difficult to predict the count value at the end, and it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment until the end of the count forward production.

It should be noted that the count forward effect appears not only during the execution of the count display, but also during the period before the count display is executed, for example, during the execution of the timer look-ahead effect in which the rate at which the timer effect appears increases. You may do it. However, in view of the configuration according to the present application in which the count progress is made difficult to see by making the count progress appear during the execution of the count display and the aim is to be interesting as the effect, the count display is more than before the start. , It is desirable that the count forward effect is executed at a higher rate after the count display is counted. Further, if the count forward effect is executed while the timer look-ahead effect is being executed during the period within one symbol fluctuation, the count display is not yet started when the count forward effect ends, and the timer look-ahead effect is not yet started. When is in the state of being executed, the rate at which an effect with a high degree of expectation appears as a timer target effect is higher than when the count display is being executed when the count forward effect ends. It is desirable to set as.

In addition, when the count forward effect is executed while the timer look-ahead effect is being executed, the timer look-ahead effect and the count display are displayed at different positions, and then the timer look-ahead effect is displayed. Is executed, the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the display position of the timer look-ahead effect, and while the count display is being executed, the count forward effect by the decorative body is executed on the front side of the display position of the timer look-ahead effect. It is desirable to execute. That is, in this case, the decorative body moves to a different position depending on whether the timer look-ahead effect is being executed or the count display is being executed, for example, but the decorative body is moved to a different position on the front side of the timer look-ahead effect. If the timer look-ahead effect ends when is in the position, the count display starts at a position different from the timer look-ahead effect, which has been difficult to see until now. According to such a configuration, when the count forward effect occurs while the timer look-ahead effect is being executed, the count display is started at the stage where the count forward effect is still being executed and this is not finished. Even so, since the count value of the count display can be made easy to see from the start, there is a possibility that the effect value as the size of the count number at the start of the count is damaged. You will be able to enjoy the count forward production while being excluded.

In addition, regarding the count front effect, when it is in a relatively late stage where a certain amount of time has passed since the count display was started, rather than a relatively early stage in which a short time has passed since the count display was started. It is desirable that the rate at which the count forward effect is executed is higher.

Also, if the count forward effect is executed in a situation where the remaining count (remaining time) until the timer target effect is executed is executed, the magnitude of the count value that appears when this is completed cannot be expected. In addition, since there is a concern that it may be confused with the timer target production, the count forward production is terminated before the remaining count number becomes less than the predetermined number, and the remaining count number is less than the predetermined number. In, it is desirable not to newly execute the count forward effect.

Further, as for the count front effect, when a plurality of count displays are being executed, the decorative body may be positioned on the front side of the count displays.

Of the timer effects, a timer of a type that causes a predetermined effect image (for example, timer target exclusion effect, timer mode effect, etc.) or a predetermined effect movable body (timer target first-out effect) to appear when a specific count value is reached. When the effect is executed, it is possible to substantially expose the current count value by those related effects even while the count forward effect by the ornament is being executed, so that the count display can be visually recognized. It will be possible to predict how much counting progress has been made since it was made difficult. However, instead of performing the count forward effect by the decorative body only on the front side of the count value, a predetermined effect image (for example, timer target exclusion effect, timer mode effect, etc.) when a specific count value is reached). After the count display is made difficult to see, the count front effect is performed so that the decorative body is positioned in front of the position where the predetermined effect movable body (timer target first-out effect) appears. It may be difficult to predict how much counting progress is being made.

The decorative body to be produced on the front side of the count display is not limited to one, and the count front effect may be performed so that all of a plurality of decorative bodies are located on the front side of the count display. In this case, any one of a plurality of modes, such as a mode in which the plurality of decorative bodies are all located on the front side of the count display, and a mode in which only one of the plurality of decorative bodies is located on the front side of the count display. The count forward effect may be selectively executed with.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 198 to 207, various aspects of the above-mentioned timer effect itself and various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail. Here, the processing example related to each of the above-mentioned effects is merely an example. For example, an effect other than the above-mentioned types may be executed as the content of the effect, and the appearance timing and appearance condition of each effect may be executed. Etc. may be changed as appropriate within the scope of the same technical idea. Therefore, in the production example described below, there may be a production content that does not match the production content related to each of the above productions, but it is within the scope of the same technical idea and within a range that can be implemented by a person skilled in the art. There is no problem because the processing contents are only changed appropriately in. Further, the following "timer effect" basically means that the count display is executed by the advance notice side timer effect or the variable side timer effect, but in addition to the effect during the count display, It may have a meaning that includes a timer look-ahead effect. Further, as the mode of the "count display", the "number of seconds" is counted below, but the present invention is not limited to this.

FIG. 198 (A) shows an effect situation in which a variable display (for example, SP reach) of a decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a state where the number of holdings is 0 in a normal game state. ing. In addition, in FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, for convenience of explanation, a specific decorative member SDY for production, which has been omitted, is shown in the drawings. The specific decorative member SDY includes, for example, "back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back top middle movable production unit 3400, back bottom front movable production unit 3500, and the like. It is equivalent to "moving member of

In FIG. 198 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “70” during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 198 (A), and the count display (here, the countdown) is displayed. It shows the production status to be started.

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 198 (B), the target of the timer effect is when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value in accordance with the display of the timer effect (count number). Candidates for the effect type that can appear as are displayed, and while it is unclear which of these candidates will appear as the timer target effect while the count display is executed, one of those candidates is the timer target. It is possible to recognize that it appears as a production. In addition, "conversation" in the figure corresponds to a conversation notice, "hold" in the figure corresponds to a hold change, and "cut A" in the figure corresponds to cut-in A. The "role A" in the figure corresponds to the operation of the character A, the "secret" in the figure corresponds to the special timer, and the "cut B" in the figure corresponds to the cut-in B. The "role B" in the figure corresponds to the operation of the accessory B.

FIG. 198 (C) shows an effect situation in which the above-mentioned timer target exclusion effect is executed when the count number shown in FIG. 198 (B) becomes “60”.

As described above, the timer target exclusion effect is an effect mode that is not selected as a timer target (timer target in the timer target notice lottery) while it is unclear which effect mode the timer target effect is. It is possible to perform a display suggesting at least one (or two or more may be suggested) of the effect modes (the mode of effect that has not been determined as).

Here, as described above, in the timer effect, each timing (in this example, in this example) is usually prepared as a candidate for the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, 0) and the effect of the timer target can appear. As 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, etc. pass from the start of fluctuation, the types of effects that can appear as timer targets are also narrowed down. Therefore, in the effect example of FIG. 198 (C), the timing for generating the timer target exclusion effect is set to a plurality of timings (10 seconds, 20 seconds from the start of fluctuation) prepared as candidates for the timing at which the timer target effect can appear. , 30 seconds, 40 seconds, etc.) will be set according to the arrival.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (B), an effect pattern for displaying the timer effect with a count number of "70" is described. However, at this timing, the timer effect does not have a count number of "70", but has another count number such as "10", "20", "30", "40", or "50". It is also possible to generate an effect pattern to be displayed. Assuming that a timer effect having a count number of "10" appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), the count display of the timer effect is shown in FIG. 198 (C). A predetermined value (here, "0") will be reached at the same timing, and for example, a "conversation notice" will appear as an effect for the timer target. On the other hand, if a timer effect having a count number other than "10" appears at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (B), it is assumed that the "conversation notice" will not appear as the effect for the timer. When the count number has passed with the count number left at the timing shown in FIG. 198 (C), the "conversation notice" is substantially excluded from the types of effects that can appear as the timer target, and the timer target. It can be said that the candidates that can appear as a production have been narrowed down. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (C), since the count display is being executed with the count number of "60" left, at this timing, the effect candidates targeted for the timer are substantially selected. It is desirable to perform an effect (timer target exclusion effect) that suggests which effect type (conversation notice) is excluded from. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately express the production situation in which the player is placed.

However, in the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C), it is suggested that the "special timer" is not selected as the timer target effect instead of the "conversation notice" at this timing. There is. According to such a timer target exclusion effect, it becomes clear in the middle of counting that the "effect indicating that the jackpot is confirmed when it appears" is not selected as the timer target effect. It will be possible to arouse anxiety about whether a highly anticipated production will appear as a timer target.

In the timer target exclusion effect shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, among the display images displaying the candidates for the timer effect target effect, the display image (secret) corresponding to the "special timer" is locked. By superimposing the padlock in the state and displaying "Lock !!", it is suggested that the "special timer" is not selected as the effect of the timer target.

FIG. 198 (D) shows an effect situation in which the timer mode effect is executed when the count display reaches a specific count value after the appearance of the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C). There is.

As described above, the timer mode effect is the expected degree as an effect for the timer when the count display reaches the predetermined value within the period before the count display reaches the predetermined value (here, "0"). Hell timer mode (1st timer mode display) where the rate of appearance of high production modes (effect type and production content (cut-in mode, etc.)) is relatively low, and timer target when the count display reaches a predetermined value As the effect of the above, one of the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which the rate of appearance of the effect mode having a high degree of expectation is relatively high is displayed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), first, the heaven challenge effect of whether or not the heaven timer mode is displayed while the count digestion is in progress is performed, and the heaven challenge effect appears. At that point, it will be shown that either the hell timer mode or the heaven timer mode will always occur.

In the heaven challenge production, there is a high possibility of shifting to the hell timer mode or a high possibility of shifting to the heaven timer mode (for example, the devil and the angel are pushing each other, and which is the dominant situation. In this case, it is suggested whether the hell timer mode or the heaven timer mode occurs after such an effect.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (D), since the heaven challenge effect is executed while the effect type excluded by the timer target exclusion effect is shown, which effect type is selected in the timer target exclusion effect. Depending on whether it is excluded (whether the production type with low expectation is excluded or the production type with high expectation is excluded), is it in a situation where the hell timer mode is likely to occur, or is it heaven? It can be said that it is in a production situation where it is possible to predict with a certain degree of accuracy whether or not the timer mode is likely to occur.

In FIG. 198 (E), the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) is displayed as the result of succeeding in the heaven challenge production shown in FIG. 198 (D) (for example, the result of the angel winning the push against the devil). It shows the production situation being performed.

In this effect situation, it is shown that when the count display reaches a predetermined value, the mode shifts to the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display) in which the appearance rate of the effect mode with high expectation is relatively high as the effect of the timer target. Is done. Therefore, if the timer target exclusion effect is performed while in the heaven timer mode (second timer mode display), the result is advantageous for the player (here, the low-expected effect among the plurality of effect types is the timer target effect. It becomes possible to raise the expectation when the timer target exclusion effect occurs.

On the other hand, although not shown, the timer target exclusion effect is executed under the appearance of the hell timer mode (first timer mode display) as a result of the failure of the heaven challenge effect shown in FIG. 198 (D). In this case, the timer target is excluded because the ratio of suggesting a disadvantageous result for the player (here, the highly expected effect is not selected as the timer target effect among the multiple effect types) is high. You will be able to arouse the feeling of anxiety when the production occurs.

In the example of FIG. 198 (E), the transition to the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) is not expressed as the mode of the count display, but the mode of the changing decorative symbol SZ or related thereto. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that the heaven timer mode (or the hell timer mode) has been entered without overlooking other effects during the digestion of the remaining count. Further, in this case, the current timer mode can be easily confirmed even when the timer target exclusion effect occurs.

FIG. 198 (F) shows the second to fourth times after the appearance of the first timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (C), while the heaven timer mode generated in FIG. 198 (E) is displayed. Indicates the effect status in which the fifth timer target exclusion effect is executed when the timer target exclusion effect is executed and the count display becomes “20”.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), five of the seven types of effects prepared as the effect candidates for the timer target are locked and displayed by the timer target exclusion effect (five types of effects). Is in a state where it is shown that is not a timer target), so when the count display reaches a predetermined value, one of the remaining two types of effects (hold change, accessory B operation) occurs. It can be said that it is in a recognizable state. However, in the example shown in FIG. 198 (F), since the heaven timer mode is displayed, the remaining two types of production candidates (pending change, compared to the case where the heaven timer mode is not displayed) are displayed. The ratio of the effect on the side with a high degree of expectation is high in the accessory B operation), and the expectation until the count display reaches a predetermined value can be suitably maintained.

At this time, the display of the heaven timer mode may be hidden after the appearance of the timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (F) and before the appearance of the timer target effect. According to such a configuration, if it is not remembered that the heaven timer mode was displayed, it becomes unclear which of the remaining production candidates has a high occurrence rate, and it is counted as a compensation for not concentrating on the production. It becomes possible to give a feeling of tension until the display reaches a predetermined value.

In FIG. 199 (G), after the appearance of the fifth timer target exclusion effect shown in FIG. 198 (F), the count display becomes a predetermined value and before the timing when the timer target effect appears. By making an effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY as the accessory B) appear within the period, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY (character B) is set as the timer target. It shows the effect status in which the timer target first-out effect that suggests that the timer is being executed is being executed.

That is, in this case, since the timer target first-out effect is executed while the display related to the timer target exclusion effect appears, there is a possibility that any of the effect candidates narrowed down by the timer target exclusion effect will appear as the timer target effect. It will be possible to provide more information on whether or not the timer is high.

In this example, since the "feature B intermediate operation (small)" is executed as the timer target first-out effect, the effect candidates (pending change, character B operation) narrowed down by the timer target exclusion effect are specified. It can be recognized that there is a high possibility (may be 100%) that the "feature B operation", which is an effect using the decorative member SDY (accessory B), is executed as the effect of the timer target. Will be. As described above, the "role B intermediate movement (small)" means that the "role B movement", which is the effect of the timer target, is "the specific decorative member SDY (role B) is from the first position to the second position." When it is "displaced", it means "an effect in which the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B) is displaced from the first position to a predetermined position between the first position and the second position".

However, in this explanatory example, as the content of the effect related to the "accessory B operation", the first effect having a relatively low expectation is only to displace the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B) from the first position to the second position. In addition to the contents, in addition to displacementing the specific decorative member SDY (accessory B) from the first position to the second position, the accessory A is displaced from the third position to the fourth position. The production contents are prepared, and the production related to the "character B operation" is executed by any of the production contents.

In this regard, in the heaven timer mode according to this explanation example, compared to the case where the hell timer mode appears, when "role B operation" is selected as the effect of the timer target, the effect content is relatively high. The ratio of high second effect contents to appear is increased, so that even if the effect type that appears as the timer target effect is completely narrowed down by the timer target first-out effect, the heaven timer mode is concerned. It has come to play a useful function for the player as a player.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (G), when the timer target first-out effect using the specific decorative member (here, the specific decorative member SDY (role B)) is executed, the specific decorative member is being counted and digested. It is designed to be used for the timer target first-out effect in a form that overlaps with the count display of, which makes it difficult to visually recognize the count display. That is, in this case, when such a timer target first-out effect is executed while not paying much attention to the count display, the specific decorative member SDY (role B) used in the timer target effect is put into the state in which the effect is being executed. Coupled with this, it is easy to misunderstand that the timer target effect is being executed after the count display reaches a predetermined value and is hidden, instead of the timer target first-out effect during count digestion. It will be created. Therefore, when it is recognized that the effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) is not the timer target effect but the timer target first-out effect, the specific decorative member SDY (role B) is used as the timer target first-out effect. After that, even if no display related to the timer target first-out effect is performed until the count display reaches a predetermined value, the specific decorative member SDY (role) is used as the timer target first-out effect. It is expected that the timer target effect will be generated based on the recognition that B) has been used. When the timer target first-out effect is executed, the count display may be hidden until the timer target first-out effect is completed, instead of making it difficult to see.

FIG. 199 (H) shows a specific count value (here, “here,“ 0 ”) in which the count display is before a predetermined value (here,“ 0 ”) after the timer target first-out effect shown in FIG. 199 (G) is executed. A timer that suppresses the production according to the prize, even though a new prize is generated after reaching 3 ") and it is decided to execute the production (hold change) according to the prize. It shows the production status in which the target suppression control is executed.

That is, as described above, in particular, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (H), it is extremely unlikely that "pending change" is selected as the timer target effect by the timer mode effect or the timer target first-out effect. In other words, since "holding change" is still left as an effect candidate for the timer target, a holding change may occur in accordance with a new prize near the timing when the count display reaches a predetermined value. Then, the pending change may be mistakenly recognized as the effect of the timer target, and as a result, the effect of the timer target itself may be overlooked. When the "hold change" is executed as the effect of the timer target, it is executed for the "hold 0" in the figure, so it is relatively easy to distinguish whether the effect is the timer target. However, it is highly possible that these pending changes will be misidentified in a situation where the number of remaining counts is low and the number of remaining counts is low.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when the timer effect is executed, the first period (here, the count number is relatively long) until the count display in the timer effect reaches a predetermined value is relatively long. When there is a remaining "3"), a pending change is allowed according to the occurrence of a new prize, but the remaining time until the first period ends and the count display reaches a predetermined value. When the second period (here, the period after the number of counts reaches "3") is relatively small, even if a new prize is generated, the pending change corresponding to it is not allowed. By doing so, the above-mentioned concern is resolved (timer target suppression control).

In FIG. 199 (I), the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) in the effect situation in which the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. 199 (H) is executed, and is related to the timer. After the display (here, "Yukuzo") is displayed, it indicates the production status in which the production (feature B operation) that is the production target of the timer production is being executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), under the heaven timer mode, the operation of the character B, which is the effect of the timer target, is compared with the first effect, which has a relatively low expectation. It shows how it is being executed as the second production content with high expectations. However, here, as is clear from the fact that the accessory B corresponds to the specific decorative member SDY and the accessory A corresponds to the specific decorative member TGY, it is used for the effect when it is the second effect content. The specific decorative member TGY to be formed is a position located on the back side in front view from the specific decorative member SDY used for both the first effect content and the second effect content, and most of them (at least). It is intended to be produced at a position where (more than half the area) overlaps.

According to such a configuration, which of the first production content with a relatively low expectation and the second production content with a relatively high expectation is being executed (whether or not the specific decorative member TGY is in the production state). ) Can be made difficult to judge, which encourages concentration on the production of the timer target. In order to obtain such an action effect, the content of the second effect may be a specific decorative member SDY (role B) and a device that can be produced on the back side of the specific decorative member SDY (role B). In this sense, the specific decoration Instead of a composite effect of the member SDY (accessory B) and the specific decorative member TGY (accessory A), the specific display effect in the effect display device 1600 is used instead of the specific decorative member TGY (accessory A) to display the specific display. It may be executed as a composite effect of the effect and the specific decorative member SDY (role B).

In the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), the timer target suppression control shown in FIG. 199 (H) is continuously executed, and even if a new prize is generated, a pending change is generated accordingly. Nothing is done, and the hold display that won the prize in FIG. 199 (H) is kept unchanged.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (I), of the "pending change" and the "role B operation" left as the effect candidates for the timer target, the "character B operation" is executed as the effect for the timer target. A display that can be recognized as being displayed (“role B” in the figure is blinking) is displayed, and a display that can be recognized that “hold change” is not a timer target effect (“role B” in the figure) is displayed. "Hold" is marked with a cross).

FIG. 199 (J) shows the effect situation when the timer target suppression control is not executed when a predetermined time elapses after the effect of the timer target is executed in FIG. 199 (I).

That is, when a predetermined time elapses after the effect of the timer target is executed, there is no concern that this is mistaken as the effect of the timer target even if the "hold change" is executed. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 199 (J), the hold display in which the execution was carried over although it was decided to change the hold according to the winning at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (H) is targeted. This is put on hold at the timing shown in (J). As a result, even if a new prize that is the target of the hold change occurs near the timing when the effect of the timer target is executed, the hold change is properly set while clearly indicating that the effect is not the effect of the timer target. You will be able to do it.

In the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), at the timing shown in FIG. 199 (J), the hold display different from the changing hold display (hold 0) is targeted and changed to blue. However, in view of the above-mentioned special time hold change table T9b (FIG. 175) referred to when the jackpot hold (including hold 0) is included, such a blue hold display has appeared. Since it is clearly stated that the rate of appearance of the jackpot symbol in the fluctuation is higher than that in the case where the red hold display appears, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 199 (J), which effect type is excluded by the timer target exclusion effect even though a predetermined time has elapsed since the timer target effect was executed. , And the display indicating which effect was the timer target is continuously executed. In addition, the display suggesting that the user is in the heaven timer mode is continuously executed. However, the display suggesting that the user is in the heaven timer mode is displayed in a smaller size as the decorative symbol SZ is reduced in the reach display mode.

Then, in this explanatory example, each display that is continuously executed even in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (J) is continuously executed even in the situation where the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 199 (FIG. 199). K)). According to such a configuration, for example, even in the state where the symbol is stopped (the state where the jackpot symbol appears), the timer effect is executed in the effect process up to that point, and the effect targeted by the timer effect is achieved. It is possible to recognize that was the "role B operation".

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 200 and 201. ..

FIG. 200A shows an effect situation in which the variable display (for example, SP reach) of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in the normal game state with the number of reservations being 4. ing.

FIG. 200 (B) shows an effect in which the timer target exclusion effect is executed even though the timer effect is not executed during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 200 (A). It shows the situation.

In this timer target exclusion effect, it is shown that the "role B operation" is not a candidate for the timer target, and when the timer effect occurs within the fluctuation, the timer target candidate talks. It becomes possible for the player to grasp that the player has been narrowed down to any of the notice, the pending change, the cut-in A, the accessory A operation, the special timer, and the cut-in B. That is, in this case, among a plurality of effect modes (conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, accessory A operation, special timer, cut-in B, accessory B operation), the effect mode with a relatively high expectation is the timer target. Since it becomes possible to recognize that the player is out of the candidates, the player has come to hope that the timer effect does not occur within the fluctuation, and the timer effect (count display) is not executed. You will be able to stimulate the interest of playing games when you are there.

Note that, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201 suggest various effects prepared as effect candidates for the timer target when performing the timer target exclusion effect. Is not executed, and a display indicating that at least "the accessory B operation" is not selected as the effect of the timer target appears. Therefore, in the timer target exclusion effect according to this example, it is possible to grasp that the "feature B operation" is not the timer target effect, but it is unclear what other effect types are available as timer target effect candidates. The Rukoto.

In FIG. 200 (C), after the timer target exclusion effect is executed in FIG. 200 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of "15", and the count display (here, countdown) is started. It shows the production situation.

Here, in the timer target exclusion effect in this explanatory example, after displaying that at least "role B operation" is not selected as the timer target effect (FIG. 200 (B)), the display is displayed as a timer effect ( It is designed to continuously display this without hiding it until the count display) is executed, and the timer effect (count display) is started when the display appears. In such a configuration, how much expectation is this timer effect from the time when the count display is started (here, a timer effect in which the relatively high expectation "role B operation" is not executed)? Will be able to recognize.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 (B) and 200 (C), when a display suggesting that at least "role B operation" is not selected as the effect of the timer target appears, and this is continuously displayed. Although the mode of displaying them is different from time to time, it is not always necessary to make them different, and they may be the same.

In FIG. 200 (D), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200 (C) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the timer effect is displayed while the count display is hidden. It shows the production status in which the "conversation notice (first production mode)" prepared as a production candidate is being executed.

That is, in this case, from the player's side, it is recognized that the production such as "may be a chance" as the "conversation notice (first production mode)" is executed as the production target of the timer production. Become. However, the "conversation notice" shown in FIG. 200 (D) is not executed as the effect mode of the timer effect, and as is clear from the next effect situation (FIG. 200 (E)), the conversation notice is given. When it is finished, the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 200 (C) is redisplayed so that it can be continued (revival timer effect).

That is, in this case, after making it appear as if the "conversation notice (first effect mode)" was the timer target (count target), the count display is redisplayed to further continue the timer effect, and the first effect is performed. Since it is shown that the second effect mode different from the mode is the timer target, the count display reaches a predetermined value at the timing when the effect with a relatively low degree of expectation appears, and this is hidden. Even in such a case, it becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the timer target will be changed after that, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

FIG. 200 (E) redisplays the hidden count display after the "conversation notice" executed under the condition that the count display is hidden in FIG. 200 (D) ends. It shows the production status to continue this (revival timer production).

Here, in such a revival timer effect, the count digestion is secretly continued even while the count display is hidden (FIG. 200 (D)), and in the example of FIG. 200 (E), the count digestion is secretly continued. , The count display is redisplayed from the state where the count has been digested for the time that was hidden (2 seconds in this case). That is, in this case, after the "conversation notice" is completed, the count display is changed to a negative notation (here, "-2") and redisplayed, but "0" when it is hidden by this. Then, it became possible to express how the count digestion was not completed and this was continuously executed, and by extension, the "conversation notice" that appeared in Fig. 200 (D) was not the production for the timer. You will be able to recognize it.

In addition, in such a revival timer effect, "the count display that appeared before it was once hidden" and "the count display that was once hidden and then redisplayed" are different counts. In order to make it more reliable to recognize that the same count is being digested instead of being digested, the count sound is "once" even while the count display is hidden. It is desirable to continuously execute the count display that appeared before being hidden and the count display that was once hidden and then redisplayed.

In addition, when the count display is set to a negative notation (here, "-2") and executed, a display that can recognize how many counts remain (for example, "-2 (18 remaining)") is displayed. It is desirable to do so. In this case, when the count display reaches "-20 (remaining 0)" as a predetermined value (when a negative count is performed for 18 seconds from "-2"), this is hidden and the effect of the timer target is executed. Become so.

FIG. 200 (F) shows a production situation in which a heaven challenge effect (not shown) occurs while the count display shown in FIG. 200 (E) is continued, and as a result, the mode shifts to the heaven timer mode. ..

With the appearance of such a timer mode effect (heaven challenge effect, heaven timer mode), it is clearer that the timer effect has not ended and is still continuing (the state where the count display is being executed). Will be able to recognize. In the examples shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the display indicating that the state is in the heaven timer mode is not related to the decorative symbol SZ, but is in the display area. It is displayed as a stamp notation mode on the left side of.

FIG. 201 (G) shows another effect that has nothing to do with the timer effect while the count digestion is being executed after the display indicating that the state is in the heaven timer mode is performed in FIG. 200 (F). It shows the production situation where "cannon chance production" occurred as a predetermined production).

That is, in this "cannon chance effect", an effect mode in which the output related to the count display of the timer effect is continued until a predetermined value (here, -20) is reached, and the output related to the count display is set to a predetermined value (here, -20). ) Is not performed, and when the "cannon chance production" is executed, one of the production modes in which the output is stopped at the middle stage is selectively displayed (count output stop control).

More specifically, in the "cannon chance production", after displaying the cannon image near the center in the display area, from the cannon image, the upper left area, the upper right area, the left area, and the right in the display area. An effect of selectively using an empty (unused) area among the area and the lower area as a bullet firing destination to fire a bullet (bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) shown in FIG. 201 (H)). Is supposed to be done. However, in the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), the area required for newly outputting such a bullet firing effect (FIG. 201 (H)) is the other various effects (count display (upper left area), It is all used by the reach fluctuation (upper right area), timer mode effect (left area), timer target exclusion effect (right area), hold display (lower area)), and the bullet firing effect (FIG. 201 (Fig. 201) There is no space for new output of H) (specific production situation). And if the bullet is fired while in such a specific production situation, the bullet firing destination The effect that is already in the output state (for example, the count display) may be damaged or destroyed by the fired bullet (a conflict occurs between the timer effect and the predetermined effect regarding the effect output. In addition, there may be concerns that the expectation for big hits may drop as a result.

Therefore, in this explanatory example, when the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, if there is a specific effect situation (the situation shown in FIG. 201 (G)) in which there is no space for the output, there is a case. Of the areas that can be used as bullet firing destinations (upper left area, upper right area, left area, right area, lower area), the output related to the count display using the upper left area is set to a predetermined value ( Here, it is not performed until -20), and the output is stopped in the middle stage (count output stop control).

FIG. 201 (H) shows an effect situation in which the bullet firing effect is executed while the output related to the count display is not performed until it reaches a predetermined value (-20 in this case) and the output is stopped in the middle stage.

When the output related to the count display of the timer effect is stopped and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed in this way, the output related to the bullet firing effect is different from the case of the above-mentioned resurrection timer effect. The count display of the timer effect is not output again after the end. On the other hand, even after the output related to the count display is stopped, the time from the start of the count display (or the time from the start of fluctuation) is secretly timed, and this is a predetermined value (Fig.). When the value (-20)) when 35 seconds have passed since the count display was started at 200 (C) is reached, it is assumed that the timing for the output-stopped count display to reach the predetermined value has arrived, and the timer is targeted. I try to make the production appear.

FIG. 201 (I) shows cut-in A (cut-in effect by a ally character) as an effect for the timer after the timing at which the predetermined value should have been reached if the output-discontinued count display had not been stopped has arrived. Shows the production status in which is being executed. In relation to the revival timer effect, the cut-in A is executed as the "second effect mode".

According to such an effect progress, after the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the predetermined value is reached if the output of the count display is not stopped while maintaining the stopped state of the output related to the count display. When the timing that should have been reached comes, the effect of the timer target will appear. That is, in this case, the timer effect, which was shown as if it had been terminated halfway by the execution of the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect), was secretly continued. Will be expected.

In the effect situation shown in FIG. 201 (G), for example, when the display related to the timer mode effect is not performed and there is a vacancy in the left area, the count display of the timer effect (upper left area) is displayed. The output is maintained, and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is output using the empty space (left area). That is, in this case, the count display of the timer effect and the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) are executed at the same time, and the count display of the timer effect is displayed even after the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is completed. , It will be continuously executed until it reaches a predetermined value (-20 in this case).

In this way, the bullet firing effect (predetermined effect) is to output the output using any one of the plurality of regions, but the bullet is fired in any of the regions. There is no change in the jackpot expectation indicated by the launch effect (predetermined effect), and they are the same.

Further, also in this explanatory example, the display indicating which effect type is excluded in the timer target exclusion effect executed in FIG. 200 (B) and the heaven timer mode displayed in FIG. 200 (F) are related. As for the display, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped while they are continuously executed (FIG. 201 (J)).

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 201 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 202 and 203. ..

FIG. 202 (A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a state where the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state.

In FIG. 202 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “3” during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 202 (A), and the count display (here, the countdown) is displayed. It shows the production status to be started.

In FIG. 202 (C), after the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 202 (B) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, It shows the production status in which the production (cut-in B) that is the production target of the timer production is being executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (C), the "cut-in B" as the timer target effect is executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation. At this time, since the count display is also hidden, the timer production is terminated by the appearance of "cut-in B", which is considered to be a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low expectation for the player. You will recognize it as a timer. However, in this effect example, the count display is redisplayed after the "cut-in B" as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) is executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation. The effect of whether or not it is (the second timer target effect) is further made to appear.

In FIG. 202 (D), whether or not to redisplay the count display while "cut-in B" as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) is displayed. Indicates the effect status in which the effect (the second timer target effect) is being executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), as an effect regarding whether or not to redisplay the count display (second timer target effect), an operation system effect in which the player is allowed to operate for a predetermined time is allowed. Is executed, and if the player performs an operation within the predetermined time, the first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is redisplayed, or the second indicating that the count display is not redisplayed. The production result (not shown) is made to appear. Further, as an operation system effect in which the operation by the player is allowed for a predetermined time, in addition to displaying the operation instruction image SSG prompting the operation of the operation button 410, the first operation button 410 is operated. The operation expected image SKG, which suggests the ease (ratio) of appearance of the effect result, is displayed. The ratio may include 100%.

In the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), among the plurality of production modes prepared as the operation expected image SKG, the production mode in which the first production result is most likely to appear (favorable grandfather's ally). Character) has appeared. Therefore, although the "cut-in B" as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) has been executed in a mode (blue aura) with a relatively low degree of expectation, the count display is redisplayed. It can be said that the situation is such that the player can be strongly aware that the timer production will be continued. Moreover, in the timer plus effect according to this embodiment, the count value displayed in the first count display (here, the count value "3" shown in FIG. 202 (B)) is given a larger count value. Since the count display is redisplayed in the form, it is expected that a more highly expected effect mode will appear as a timer target effect.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (D), "cut-in B (blue aura)" as the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) is displayed. It was decided to execute an effect (second timer target effect) on whether or not to redisplay the count display (without hiding the display), but the timer target effect (third) shown in FIG. 202 (C). After hiding "cut-in B (blue aura)" as the timer target effect of 1), the effect as to whether or not to redisplay the count display (second timer target effect) is executed. May be good. However, in this case, the timer target effect (first timer target effect) shown in FIG. 202 (C) is switched to an effect as to whether or not to redisplay the count display (second timer target effect). It is desirable for the player to recognize that the timer effect has not been completed and is being continued (or may be continued).

In FIG. 202 (E), after the first effect result (not shown) indicating that the count display is to be redisplayed appears in the operation system effect shown in FIG. 202 (D), the timer effect is the count number of “5”. Is redisplayed with, and the second count display (here, countdown) is displayed. In the operation system production, in addition to the case where the operation by the player is accepted within the predetermined time, the case where the operation by the player is not accepted within the predetermined time is the same production result as the case where the operation is accepted (first). The effect result, the second effect result) will appear after the end of the predetermined time.

In FIG. 202 (F), after the second count display shown in FIG. 202 (E) reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”) and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed, It shows the production status in which the production (cut-in B) that is the production target of the timer production is being executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 202 (F), the “cut-in B” as the timer target effect is executed in a mode (red aura) with a relatively high degree of expectation. That is, in this effect example, those target effects are executed as the same type of effect in the first count display and the redisplayed second count display, and in the second target effect, the first target effect is executed. I try to execute it in the form of changing (promoting) to a production mode with higher expectations. According to such a configuration, it is recognized that by executing the same type of effect as the timer target effect, it is executed as one timer effect in which the first count display and the second count display are connected. As the number of times the count display is redisplayed increases, the effect mode as the timer target effect is changed (promoted) to a mode with a higher degree of expectation, so that the timer target effect occurs. It will be possible to improve the game entertainment from the time when the count display is redisplayed instead of the time.

In FIG. 203 (G), while the “cut-in B (red aura)” as the timer target effect shown in FIG. 202 (F) is displayed, the effect of whether or not to redisplay the count display is displayed. It shows the production status being executed.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 203 (G), among the plurality of effect modes prepared as the operation expected image SKG, the first effect result is more likely to appear than the example shown in FIG. 202 (D). A production mode (a middle-aged ally character) with a low value has appeared. Therefore, in a situation where "cut-in B" as a timer target effect has been executed in a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation (red aura), the count display may not be displayed again. It can be said that the situation is to raise awareness. In this way, after the count display reaches a predetermined value, an effect (cut-in B) having a mode (red aura) relatively advantageous to the player is executed as a timer target effect. On the other hand, an effect (operation expected image SKG) having a mode (a ally character of the middle age) relatively disadvantageous to the player is executed. Moreover, in such a timer plus effect, the more times the count redisplay is repeated on one side and the "cut-in B" changes to a mode advantageous to the player, the more relative to the player on the other side. Since the expected operation image SKG, which has a disadvantageous aspect, is more likely to appear and the rate of redisplaying is low, each time the count is redisplayed, the game interest is enhanced and a sense of tension is felt. It becomes possible to preferably impart both the maintenance and the maintenance of the above.

Then, as a result of such an effect, if the count display is not redisplayed, the timer effect is terminated at that time, and then the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 203 (H)).

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 203 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205. ..

FIG. 204 (A) shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a state where the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state.

In FIG. 204 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “10” during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 204 (A), and the count display (here, the countdown) is displayed. It shows the production status to be started.

Here, in the timer effect, in general, the longer the time required for counting digestion, the higher the proportion of the effect having a high expectation as the timer target effect. Therefore, such a small count number (here, here). If a count display having only "10") is displayed, there is a concern that the game interest may decline. Therefore, in this effect example, while executing the count display, an effect of hiding the count value for a predetermined time is generated, and the progress speed of the count is stagnated for that time, thereby performing count digestion. It is possible to execute a timer stagnation effect that maintains a sense of expectation by extending the required time.

In FIGS. 204 (C) and 204 (D), when the count display of the timer effect shown in FIG. 204 (B) becomes the first specific value (here, "5"), this is hidden. It shows the production situation at that time.

That is, in this effect example, when the count display reaches the first specific value (here, “5”) and the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), any effect type (here, “0”) is used as the timer target effect. In addition to starting a production that suggests whether a conversation notice, hold change, cut-in A, character A operation, special timer, cut-in B, character B operation) will appear (progressive effect that leads to the timer target effect). The count display is hidden while the effect is executed. The progress effect leading to the timer target effect may be started after the count display reaches the first specific value and is hidden.

In this production example, as a progress effect leading to the timer target effect, a display image SEG11 depicting a person seeking help from a ally character and a display image SEG12 accepting a request from the person seeking help are sequentially displayed. It has become so. Here, at the time when the display image SEG11 and the display image SEG12 are displayed, it is possible to narrow down to some extent which type of effect appears as the timer target effect, but it is specified which type of effect appears. It is desirable not to be able to do that. For example, the display image SEG12 shows that three friendly characters accept a request from a person seeking help, but it is predicted that one of the three friendly characters will confront the enemy character. Although it is possible, it is desirable to make it unclear which of the three friendly characters confronts the enemy character (for example, cut-in A or B).

In FIG. 204 (E), the count display is redisplayed with a count value of “4” after the “progress effect leading to the timer target effect (first time)” shown in FIGS. 204 (C) and 204 (D) is completed. It shows the production situation to be performed.

According to such a configuration, when the count value is between "10" and "5", the count value is also advanced by "1" each time one second elapses, whereas the count value is changed from "5" to "5". When progressing to "4", until the "progress effect leading to the timer target effect (first time)" that appears when the count value reaches "5" ends (here, 6 seconds), The count value does not progress and can be stagnant. In order to stagnant the progress of the count value, the count display may not necessarily be hidden, and the display may be maintained with the same count value (here, "5").

In FIGS. 204 (F) and 205 (G), when the count display redisplayed in FIG. 204 (E) is advanced to a second specific value (here, “2”), this is hidden. It shows the production situation when it is set to.

That is, in this effect example, the count display is hidden a plurality of times until the count display reaches a predetermined value, and each time the count display is hidden in this way, the timer target effect is displayed. The progress production that connects with is being executed. The progress effect leading to the timer target effect may be started after the count display reaches the second specific value and is hidden.

In this production example, as the progress production leading to the timer target production, the display image SEG13 showing the intention of the middle-aged ally character to confront the enemy character among the three ally characters depicted in FIG. 204 (D) and the middle-aged character. The display image SEG14, which depicts the appearance of the ally character confronting the enemy character, is sequentially displayed. Here, at the time when the display image SEG13 and the display image SEG14 are displayed, it is possible to grasp that a specific type of effect (cut-in B) appears as the timer target effect, but any effect content (blue aura) is available. It is not possible to specify whether or not to wear a red aura, etc.).

In FIG. 205 (H), the count display is a count value of “1” after the “progress effect leading to the timer target effect (second time)” shown in FIGS. 204 (F) and 205 (G) is completed. Shows the redisplayed production status.

According to such a configuration, when the count value is progressed from "2" to "1", the progress effect leading to the timer target effect (second time) appears when the count value becomes "2". Until the end of ")" (here, 14 seconds), the count value does not progress and can be stagnant.

In FIG. 205 (I), the count display redisplayed in FIG. 205 (H) is advanced to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”), and a timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”) is displayed. After that, it shows the production status in which the production (cut-in B), which is the production target of the timer production, is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the effect connected to the timer target effect is executed before the count display reaches the predetermined value, it is preferable to enjoy the game until the count display reaches the predetermined value. Will be able to maintain. In addition, while the effect connected to the timer target effect is executed, the count display is hidden and the progress of the count value is stagnant, so that the time required for counting digestion can be lengthened accordingly. As a result, it becomes possible to maintain the interest of the game.

Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 205 (J)).

Next, various aspects of the timer effect itself shown in FIGS. 198 to 205 and examples of effects different from the various effects performed in connection with the timer effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 206 and 207. .. In addition, in FIG. 206 and FIG. 207, for convenience of explanation, a movable body KT for production, which is omitted in other drawings, is shown in the drawings. In addition, the movable body KT is, for example, "back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back top middle movable production unit 3400, back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc. It is equivalent to "movable member" etc.

FIG. 206A shows an effect situation in which the effect display device 1600 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in a state where the number of reservations is 0 in the normal game state.

In FIG. 206 (B), the timer effect is displayed with a count number of “40” during the execution of the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 206 (A), and the count display (here, the countdown) is displayed. It shows the production status to be started.

Here, in the timer effect, in general, the longer the time required for counting digestion, the higher the proportion of the effect with high expectation as the timer target effect, so that such a large count number (here, here). When the count display with "40") is displayed, the person feels relieved, and there is a concern that the tension while the count number is digested cannot be appropriately maintained. Therefore, in this effect example, while executing the count display, the count front effect is generated by the decorative body in a form that makes it difficult to see the count display, and the count front effect is completed and the count display is displayed. The larger the count value when it is made easier to see again, the easier it is for an effect with a high degree of expectation to appear as a timer target effect.

In FIG. 206 (C), while the count display is being executed by the timer effect shown in FIG. 206 (B), the movable body KT as the decorative body is displaced to the front side of the count display for a predetermined time. It shows the production situation (counting forward production by the decorative body) that continues to stay for a long time. Further, FIG. 206 (D) shows an effect situation in which the count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body) shown in FIG. 206 (C) is completed and the count display is returned to a state in which it is easy to see.

According to such a configuration, even if a large count value is once displayed, it is eroded by the movable body KT (decorative body), and it is as if the count display of a smaller count value is redone. Since it becomes possible to provide the directivity, there is a concern that the tension during the digestion of the count number cannot be suitably maintained.

Further, in such a count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body), the longer the time required for the effect, the smaller the count value that is easy to see when the effect is completed, and by extension, the degree of expectation as a timer target effect. There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the difficulty in appearing high-quality productions. Therefore, in the count forward effect by the movable body KT (decorative body), even on the movable body KT (decorative body) side, there are a plurality of production modes having different expectations in a lottery different from the lottery for determining the effect mode of the timer effect. For example, it is desirable to make any one of the operation mode of the movable body KT, the light emitting mode, etc.) appear. According to such a configuration, even if it is difficult for a highly expected effect to appear as a timer target effect, it is shown that the big hit expectation is high depending on the effect mode on the movable body KT (decorative body) side, which is a separate lottery. If this is done, it will be possible to maintain a good game interest.

In this regard, in this production example, since the count value is returned to a state where it is easy to see while maintaining a relatively large count value such as "35", the expectation for the timer production is maintained even after that. It will be possible to expect that the count display will continue in this state.

FIG. 206 (E) displays an operation instruction image SSG when the count display reaches the first count value (here, “30”) in the timer effect shown in FIG. 206 (D), and operates the player. The production situation in which the opportunity is given is shown, and FIG. 206 (F) shows the production situation in which the operation by the player is received at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 206 (E) and the production result appears. ing.

That is, in this effect example, it is produced that there is an operation by the player in the first period from the first count value (here, "30") to the second count value (here, "20"). Allows reception, and as a result of the production reception, multiple production modes with different proportions of high-expected effects appearing as timer-targeted effects (in descending order of appearance rate, for example, Daikichi, Kichi, Kyou, etc.) ) Is made to appear.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 206 (F), an operation is performed by the player when the count value reaches "23", and as a result of the production, the most advantageous operation mode for the player ( Since Daikichi) appears, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value. In the first period from the first count value (here, "30") to the second count value (here, "20"), when the operation by the player is not accepted for production, the count display is not accepted. The count display will be advanced without any production result appearing.

FIG. 207 (G) displays an operation instruction image SSG to the player when the count display reaches the third count value (here, “15”) after the effect result shown in FIG. 206 (F) appears. On the other hand, the production situation in which the operation opportunity is given again is shown, and FIG. 207 (H) shows the production result when the operation by the player is received at the operation opportunity shown in FIG. 207 (G). It shows the production situation.

That is, in this effect example, it is produced that there is an operation by the player even in the second period from the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”). Allows reception, and as a result of the production reception, multiple production modes with different proportions of high-expected effects appearing as timer-targeted effects (in descending order of appearance rate, for example, Daikichi, Kichi, Kyou, etc.) ) Is made to appear.

In this production example, as shown in FIG. 207 (G), an operation is performed by the player when the count value reaches "8", and as a result of the production, a special operation time production that is most advantageous to the player is performed. Since the mode (Daikichi) appears, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained until the count display reaches a predetermined value. In the second period from the third count value (here, "15") to the fourth count value (here, "5"), when the operation by the player is not accepted for production, the count display is not accepted. The count display will be advanced without any production result appearing.

However, in this production example, the operation means (here, "20") is in the first period from the time when the count display is the first count value (here, "30") to the time when the count display is the second count value (here, "20"). For example, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410) and the effect is received, and when the count display is from the third count value (here, “15”) to the fourth count value (here, “5”). In the case where the operation for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed and the production is received during the second period up to, and as a result of the production reception, a special operation mode (Daikichi) The rate at which is generated is different.

More specifically, if the production is received during the first period, the rate of occurrence of the special operation mode (Daikichi) is relatively high, and the production is received during the second period. And the rate of occurrence of the special operation mode (Daikichi) is relatively low. Therefore, when the operation button 410 is operated in the first period, it is possible to suppress the effect risk that the special operation mode (Daikichi) does not appear, but the special operation mode (Daikichi) does. Even if this appears as much as it is more likely to occur, it is difficult to have a sense of expectation that a highly anticipated production will appear as a timer target production. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated in the second period, there is a high risk that the special operation mode (Daikichi) does not appear, but the special operation mode (Daikichi) occurs. When this appears as much as it is difficult to do, it becomes easier to have a sense of expectation that a highly expected effect will appear as a timer target effect.

According to such a configuration, the count display is the first from the first count value (here, "30") according to the player's preference and the production situation such as the degree of expectation shown in other productions. Whether the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) should be operated firmly in the first period with low production risk until the time of the 2 count value (here, "20"), the count display is the 3rd count value (here, "15"). ")" To the fourth count value ("5" in this case), the operation means (for example, operation button 410) should be operated bullishly in the second period with high production risk, or both. It becomes possible to make the game strategy interesting, such as whether to operate the operation button 410.

In FIG. 207 (I), after the effect result shown in FIG. 207 (H) appears, the count display is further advanced to reach a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the timer-related display (here, “Yukuzo”” is shown. ) Is displayed, and then the effect status (cut-in B), which is the effect target of the timer effect, is being executed. Then, after such a timer target effect is performed, the decorative symbol SZ is stopped (FIG. 207 (J)).

In each of the above-mentioned count effects, the count target effect is not immediately executed when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the count target effect is executed after a while. I am trying to be done. In this regard, a display mode suggesting which effect is executed as the count target effect within the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") until the count target effect is executed. May appear. According to such a configuration, even if a situation appears in which a plurality of effects are arranged in parallel when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), any of the effects is the target of the count effect. You will be able to enjoy it without misunderstanding that it is being executed as.

In this regard, within the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") until the count target effect is executed, instead of the above display mode, "some do not have a one-to-one correspondence with the count target effect. It is desirable that "a specific display mode commonly used in different count target effects" may appear. In this case, when a specific display mode appears, it is not suggested which of the commonly used count target effects appears, but when the display mode that should originally appear as the count target effect is performed. It is more desirable that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears is higher than that. According to such a configuration, although there is a risk of misunderstanding which effect is being executed as the count effect target, which effect is guaranteed to have a high rate of appearance of the jackpot symbol. Since it will be possible to have fun finding out whether or not it is being executed as a count effect target, it is expected that the game entertainment will be improved.

However, when the number of types of effects that can be executed as count target effects is N, within the period from when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, "0") until the count target effects are executed. Even if a specific display mode appears in, the count effect target is such that "any of M (2 or more) effects less than N is executed as the count effect target". It is desirable to be able to narrow down which effect is executed so that it is interesting to find out which effect is executed as the count effect target.

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95) which has already been described, a description of automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, will be described later. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background will be briefly explained.

In a general pachinko machine, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene according to the progress of the game to realize an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, even if the reach is supposed to improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds according to the type and some that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is a corresponding default each. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is a vacant channel, the sound to be reproduced may not be assigned to the vacant channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be reproduced is reproduced. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize a variety of sound effects.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of effectively utilizing the vacant channels to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a pair of upper speakers 573 (sound). Each channel is dynamically assigned and managed for each sound to be output from the output means) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means), while the number of combinations of sounds scheduled to be output is the number of each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in this embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). .. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
FIGS. 208 (A) and 208 (B) show an example of sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison target with respect to the present embodiment, respectively. FIG. 208 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is the one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

On the other hand, FIG. 208 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, one sound requires two channels when it is output in stereo, while one channel is required when it is output in monaural.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. As a channel allocation method, a pair of a playback channel and a sound is assigned exclusively to prevent the sound from being overwritten. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which the reproduction is started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and muted. As a channel allocation method, the same channel is assigned so that the playback timing is not affected as much as possible.

In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that hinder overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap in playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 209 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definitions of playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, top / bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound classification and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number is described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the upper and lower pan is the sound image localization of the sound by the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the upper and lower pan settings during sound playback, the volume output from the upper and lower speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference which is individually output from the upper and lower speakers which are a combination of these. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 210 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (regeneration) priority, and the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 211 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 211 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 211 (C) says that each sound cannot be reproduced when it is attempted to be reproduced. An example of the problem is shown. In FIGS. 211 (A) to 211 (C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

In FIG. 211 (A), "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" are sequentially arranged along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "medium".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in problem 1 of FIG. 211 (C), a start opening prize is won during the playback time of "first half notice A" as a new sound ("hold" in the figure). If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "first half notice A", so that the "first half notice A" The playback sound of "" is overwritten by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "first half notice A" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 211 (A), for example, as shown in problem 2 of FIG. 211 (C), a start opening prize is won during the playback time of "full screen notice" as a new sound ("hold" in the figure). If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 208 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full screen notice", so that the "full screen notice" is given. The playback sound of "" is overwritten by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 212 (A) and 212 (B) show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method as the present embodiment, respectively.

FIG. 212 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel, and the above-mentioned sound control by a fixed channel means that the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). The point is different. Here, the fact that the channel division is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned according to a rule described later (described above). Equivalent to "sound control by automatic channel method").

In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, as in the sound control by the fixed channel method described above, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is the one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

On the other hand, FIG. 212 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this automatic channel method, priority is assigned to each sound individually as shown in the figure. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when it is output in stereo, while one channel is required when it is output in monaural. Become.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which the reproduction is started is overwritten with another sound during the reproduction and muted.

In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each playback channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as "AUTO group"). While a plurality of AUTO groups can be defined, a plurality of playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce the sound for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority for designating a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group. If a sound is defined in the AUTO group when a new sound is reproduced, if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the specified AUTO group, the sound is immediately reproduced.

In the above case, if there is no free channel, the effect control program searches all the channels currently being played in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly played. If there is a channel having a lower priority or the same as the sound being reproduced, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority than the sound being reproduced or is not the same, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound.

FIG. 213 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, the playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, up / down pan initial value, volume initial value, such as the sound control by the fixed channel already explained, are used for each sound division and sound name. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting and output type setting, the identifier and priority for specifying the AUTO group (also called "playback priority"), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound It manages the definitions of numbers, seekpoints, playback type settings, and output type settings.

First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group in which each sound is reproduced in a plurality of AUTO groups. Further, the priority order is an index indicating which sound should be reproduced with priority when each sound is reproduced at the same time. In this priority order, the larger the numerical value, the more preferentially the sound should be reproduced, while the smaller the numerical value, the less preferentially the sound should be reproduced. In the present embodiment, the order of the types of sounds to be reproduced with priority is, for example, a notification sound having a priority of "25" ("notification sound 1", "notification sound 2", and "notification sound 3"). , A sound effect with a priority of "20" ("big hit confirmation sound" and "button press sound"), a BGM with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10". Sound effects (such as "full-screen notice sound effect"), sound effects with a priority of "05" ("first half notice sound effect" to "second half notice sound effect"), and pending winning sounds with a priority of "01" It is supposed to be. As a result, when an attempt is made to reproduce a notification sound in a state where there is no free channel, for example, it is not necessary to reproduce using a predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound having a lower priority (for example, a hold winning sound) ) Is being played back, and the notification sound is played with priority.

As described above, the left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. This left and right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L are output. The volume difference output from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

Further, as already explained, the upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It shows the initial position of sound image localization of the sound by the speaker of. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, the volume output from the upper and lower speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. This upper and lower pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference which is individually output from the upper and lower speakers which are a combination of these. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the pair of lower speakers 921.

Similarly, the initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set in the setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF", for example, and in addition, "1" (0x1FF for 0xFF) in the third byte. By setting), it will not be affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided in the gaming machine, and it will always be played at the volume set by the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds.

The seek point represents the playback start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as this seek point, for example, "0" is set for each of the "upper right speaker confirmation sound" to the "first half notice A sound effect", while the "second half notice A sound effect" and the "second half notice B effect" are set. [1] is set for each of "sound". With such a seek point, it is possible to register sounds in excess of the maximum number that can be registered in the sound source when the maximum number of sounds that can be registered is exceeded.

The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 214 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the priority. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (regeneration) priority, and the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 215 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 215 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 215 (A) and 215 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 215 (A), "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "middle symbol stop" are sequentially arranged along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "during a big hit".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on the reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( Corresponds to range A). Here, when the hold prize sound is to be reproduced as a new sound because there is a start opening prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure), the playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this hold winning sound can be played back using the playback channels 12 to 13, none of the playing sounds is overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to "holding sound playback" in the figure), and other sounds are not overwritten. The output of all kinds of sounds continues.

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 215 (A), as shown in FIG. 215 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "reach BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on the reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( Corresponds to range B). Here, for example, if a start prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure) is to be played and the hold prize sound is to be reproduced as a new sound, the playback channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , The output of all other types of sounds continues without any of the sounds being played being overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to the "hold sound play" in the figure).

In the “second half of the fluctuation” shown in FIG. 215 (A), for example, a notification (corresponding to the “notification 2 generation” in the figure) is generated, so that the notification sound has the highest priority of “25” as a new sound (corresponding to the “notification 2 generation” in the figure). When an attempt is made to reproduce (corresponding to the illustrated "notification 2"), as a result of searching for a free channel, it is found that there is no free channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 215 (B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being played at the start timing is searched, and the playback channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels playing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the hold winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound (corresponding to the “notification sound 2” in the figure) to be reproduced next is set. Since the priority is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sounds, the reserved winning sounds being reproduced on the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are overwritten by the notification sound.

FIG. 216 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control is used as the work name for each channel, such as setting reservation flag, required sound number, playing sound number, automatic allocation group, priority at the time of automatic allocation, elapsed time from registration, and volume control. It includes a work for pan and a work for pan control, and has each information corresponding to these.

If the setting reservation flag has a value other than "0", it indicates that the setting reservation has been made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1". The playing sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1".

In the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly assigned when it is "0", while the channel is automatically assigned when it is "1" ("Sound control by the automatic channel method" described later. Equivalent to). Here, for the automatic allocation group, for example, if it is "1", it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is "2", it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority when sound control is performed by the automatic channel method described later.

The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the registration, with the time when the desired reproduced sound is registered as "0". The elapsed time from the registration is the elapsed time among the plurality of playing sounds when trying to play a new sound in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being played. It is used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer period of time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound to be erased.

The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-mentioned left and right pan and upper and lower pan set values.

FIG. 217 shows an example of a search process for an empty channel when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. In addition, in FIG. 217, the channel is abbreviated as “ch”.

When there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1100A), the effect control program confirms the automatic allocation group for the new sound (step S1102A), and when this automatic allocation group is "0", the fixed allocation is performed. Is determined, and playback of a new sound is started on the specified channel.

On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than "0", the effect control program determines that the automatic allocation is automatic, and determines whether or not the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106A). ..

When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a vacant (monaural) channel (1 channel) (step S1108A), and if it exists, the vacant (monaural) channel. ) While starting the reproduction of the new sound on the channel (step S1109A), if it does not exist, the reproduced sound having the same or lower priority as the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether or not the channel exists (step S1110A).

The effect control program terminates the process if there is no channel of the reproduced sound having the same or lower priority than the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced, and if it exists, the effect control program terminates the process. Determines whether or not a plurality of corresponding channels exist (step S1112A).

When a plurality of the corresponding channels exist, the effect control program is playing the sound having the longest playback time from the registration among the corresponding channels based on the elapsed time from the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel of (step S1114A). On the other hand, when the corresponding channel does not exist but is one, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound on the (monaural) channel satisfying the desired condition (step S1116A).

On the other hand, in step S1106A described above, when the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there are vacant (stereo) channels (2 channels) (step). S1120A). When the effect control program determines that an empty channel exists, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproducing the new sound (step S1122A).

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free channel, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a new sound having the same or lower priority in the (stereo) channel of the sound being played (step). S1124A), since the process is terminated if it does not exist, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, if it exists, the effect control program determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126A).

The production control program starts the output of the new sound on the (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, while the effect control program is described above when there are a plurality of corresponding channels. Based on the elapsed time from registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130A).

As described above, the effect control program searches for an empty channel in order to reproduce a new sound. Such a search process for free channels will be described in a more visually easy-to-understand manner.

218 (A) and 218 (B) to 221 (A) and 221 (B) show specific examples of the free channel search process, respectively. As shown in FIG. 218 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for normal BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, normal BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 218 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_A having the priority of 05 occurs, and reproduces channels 02 to 03. Since there is a vacancy in, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the hotan pressing sound having a priority of 20 occurs, and sets the reproduction channels 04 to 05. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the button pressing sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 219 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B having the priority of 05 occurs, and reproduces channel 06. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 07, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these playback channels 06 to 07.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the jackpot confirmed sound having a priority of 20 occurs, and sets the reproduction channels 08 to 09. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the jackpot confirmed sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

Next, as shown in FIG. 220 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_C having the priority of 05 occurs, and the reproduction channel 10 is performed. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the hold winning sound having a priority of 01 occurs, and selects the reproduction channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 occurs, and sets the playback channels 14 to 15. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

222 (A) and 222 (B) to 225 (A) and 225 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 222 (A), the effect control program searches for free channels when a playback request for reach BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 222 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 occurs, and the playback channels 02 to 03 have vacancy. Since it exists, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

After repeating the above processing, the production control program then, as shown in FIG. 223 (A), triggers the occurrence of a playback request for the full-screen warning sound having a priority of 10, and the vacant channel. Since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a playback request for the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 occurs, and in FIG. 223 (A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to "non-reproduction (empty)" in the figure), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 occurs, and the playback channels 04 to 05 (playback channels 04 to 05). Since there is a vacancy in (corresponding to the “non-reproduction (vacant)” shown in the figure), the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the accessory warning sound having a priority of 10 occurs, and reproduces channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacancy in the space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the hold winning sound having a priority of 01 occurs, and reproduces channels 14 to 15 (reproduction channels 14 to 15 (A). Since there was a vacancy in (corresponding to the "non-reproduction (vacant)" shown in the figure), the reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), the effect control program searches for a free channel when a playback request for the notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 occurs, but the free channel does not exist. Therefore, the use of the playback channels 14 to 15 that are playing the "holding winning sound" having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being played is stopped, and the playback channels 14 to 15 are used in stereo. Reproduction of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound is started.

In this way, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel having a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule having a higher priority is obtained. Each sound of is played on the playback channel found by the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can the vacant channels be effectively utilized as described above, but also each sound to be output can be produced as many as possible by using each channel including the vacant channel. Since it can be played back, it is possible to realize a variety of sound effects and enhance the interest of the player.

226 (A) and 226 (B) to 227 (A) and 227 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 226 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the left symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 226 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the right symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and vacates the reproduction channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the medium symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and reproduces channels 00 to 01. Since there is a vacancy in, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (B), the effect control program searches for free channels when a playback request for the jackpot BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Because there is, the reproduction of the jackpot BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

In addition, when the replacement playback of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain playback channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound played on the playback channel before the replacement after the completion of the playback. It goes without saying that it is okay to do so.

[12-3. Variations of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the automatic channel method for sound control using all the playback channels for the maximum number of channels has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned fixed channel sound control is used. Sound control may be performed as follows depending on the combination or the like.

FIGS. 228 (A) to 228 (F) are diagrams showing variations of channel allocation in sound control by the two types of channel methods described above or combinations thereof, respectively.

FIG. 228 (A) shows an example of channel allocation in sound control by the maximum number of channels (16 channels) fixed channel method described so far as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. 228 (B) shows this. Corresponding to the embodiment of the present invention described above, an example of channel allocation in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels is shown. Since the sound control by assigning these two channels has already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 228 (C) shows an embodiment in which channels are assigned to the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed by the automatic channel method (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure). .. FIG. 228 (D) shows an embodiment in which one automatic channel group is used, channels are assigned to the maximum number of playback channels, and some playback channels are sound-controlled by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponds to "PTN3" in the figure).

FIG. 228 (E) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed for some playback channels by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponds to "PTN4" in the figure). A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 229 and after.

In FIG. 228 (F), one automatic channel group is used, channels are assigned to the maximum number of playback channels, sound control is performed by the automatic channel method, and some playback channels are sounded by the fixed channel method described above. Control is performed, but the difference from the above example is that the number of channels is secured so that the number of each reproduction channel is variable. A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 228 (F) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 235 and later.

As shown in this embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel system in which all channels are grouped into one group, free channels are assigned or channels being output are replaced based on a predetermined standard, so that sound is produced. Sound can be output simply by determining the priority of. Therefore, unlike the conventional control method that outputs sound by specifying a channel, channel management is not required, so it is possible to simplify control related to sound output and improve development efficiency. It becomes.

Further, by adopting the automatic channel method, it is possible to minimize the number of channels. For example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC having a small number of channels, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine is reduced. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by the automatic channel method]
Subsequently, the details of another form of the above-mentioned sound control method will be described. In the sound control method described above, as an automatic channel method, the sound assignment to each channel is dynamically changed so that many sounds can be reproduced by effectively utilizing the empty channels. In recent diversified gaming machines, hundreds or thousands of types of sounds are selected and output, which may complicate the management of sound sources.

In addition, by superimposing and outputting a plurality of sounds, it is possible to perform a duplicate notice effect or to enable various sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (C), by dividing the sound into a plurality of groups and dynamically allocating the plurality of sounds to the reproduction channel for each group, the sounds are surely duplicated and output. can do. It also has the advantage of facilitating management by dividing the sound by type.

Further, the sound includes a sound that should be output with priority over the production sound such as a notification sound and a sound that is continuously output such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 228 (D), the sound that is output with priority and the sound that is always output are output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes according to the result of the start prize or the variable display is output. Output using the automatic channel method.

With the above configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the vacant channels by the automatic channel method and prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel method. Further, since it is possible to classify by the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, it becomes easy to manage the effect data.

The sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 228 (C) and 228 (D), and has the advantages of each method. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 228 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control in which fixed channel system and multiple automatic channel system are mixed]
In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in the sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and includes a channel for reproducing sound by the fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method. .. Further, the channels for reproducing the sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG. 229.

[15-1-1. Playback channel configuration]
FIG. 229 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control according to the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of the present embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

The channel configuration table includes "automatic allocation" indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for the channel number, "classification" indicating the group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" of each channel. A "remark" is added as a supplement to the configuration table shown in FIG. 229.

As shown in FIG. 229, the configuration of each channel of the present embodiment is as follows: channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29 are. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

Further, the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 8 to 19 are "AUTO group 1", and the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 24 to 29 are "AUTO group 2".

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

The channel of channel number 0 (hereinafter, referred to as "channel 0" and each channel is represented by "channel" + "channel number") is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting sound that is commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the gaming machine is started. Further, channel 1 is a channel that is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during a game or in a customer waiting state. Channel 3 is a channel that is paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 6 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 5 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 4 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. be.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only the stereo output is performed, but also the sound quality of the BGM is improved by simultaneously outputting a plurality of sounds. Therefore, a plurality of (paired) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output at the same time. Furthermore, as will be described later, since it is possible to output BGM also on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to output four BGMs at the same time using a maximum of eight channels (4 pairs). It has become.

While the gaming machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly reproduced. Therefore, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically allocate the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, it is possible to simplify the control as compared with reproducing the sound only by the automatic channel method while preventing the generation of empty channels.

Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output when the advance notice effect is executed. In the advance notice production, the sound selected by lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. In this way, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method to the sound that is output each time based on a predetermined condition.

In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound at the time of the advance notice production is AUTO group 1.

When outputting a sound when the advance notice effect is executed, the peripheral control MPU1511a first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, free channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is a free channel, the sound specified from the free channel is set to be output. On the other hand, when there is no free channel, the channel in use is opened to output a new sound or the output of the specified sound is stopped based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG. 230.

Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that is paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. It is used when outputting BGM by superimposing four sounds or when outputting a specific effect sound. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output by an effect other than the advance notice effect output by the automatic channel method.

Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, similarly to channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel that is paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the reserved sound is output. The hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 may be, for example, a sound output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound output with priority when a big hit is confirmed. The sound based on the lottery result at the time of starting winning is output from channels 24 to 29 as described later.

Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel method is applied. Channels 24 to 29 reproduce sounds that are output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the start winning prize and sounds that are output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel system, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of jackpot confirmation even when there are no empty channels in channels 24 to 29, which attracts the player's attention. Can be done.

Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. Further, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. In this way, a fixed channel system in which an output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are surely transmitted to the outside.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel type channel is assigned when the output is constantly continued like BGM or when it is necessary to output reliably like an abnormality notification sound. On the other hand, by applying the automatic channel method to the sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, it is possible to prevent the sound from being output even though there are empty channels, and to create a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[15-1-2. Free channel search process]
Subsequently, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the free channel search process in the case of executing the control for outputting the sound of the present embodiment. FIG. 217 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, but FIG. 230 differs in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of common processing will be omitted.

In the free channel search process shown in FIG. 230, in the processes of step S1108B and step S1120B, when the new sound is the automatic channel method, it is determined whether or not there is a free channel in the same group of channels. That is, even if the channels of different groups are vacant, if there is no vacancy in the group of the same channel, the result of step S1108B and step S1120B is "No".

Further, in the free channel search process shown in FIG. 230, when there is no free channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on a predetermined condition is stopped, and a new sound is output from the channel (step). S1118B, step S1132B). Hereinafter, the selection conditions of the channel for stopping the sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. 231. It should be noted that the effect in which the sound output is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for replacing the sound output (stopping or opening the sound reproduction) when the channel is not available at the time of outputting the new sound in the present embodiment. .. As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being played and the new sound are compared, and the sound having a higher importance is prioritized. As will be described later, the attributes include the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume level, the amount of change in the sound during playback, and the sound playback time at the time of channel selection. Includes remaining playback time. Hereinafter, each condition will be specifically described.

Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114A and S1130A of FIG. 217, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. By selecting a channel having a long elapsed time from the start of reproduction in this way, the output of the sufficiently executed effect sound is ended, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the new effect has been executed.

Condition 2 selects a channel based on the playback time of the entire effect. For example, a production with a long playback time can have a high degree of expectation, so a production with a short playback time is selected. On the other hand, by canceling the effect having a long reproduction time, the influence on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the total playback time set in advance, regardless of the playback time from the start of playback.

Condition 1 and condition 2 are conditions related to the reproduction time, but in addition to this, for example, the sound output of the effect having a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction, that is, the progress ratio of the effect with respect to the total time of the effect. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the production.

Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, an effect in which a loud sound is output can be a more important effect, so a channel having a low volume in the output sound is preferentially selected. On the contrary, the channel having a large volume of the output sound may be preferentially selected so that the player recognizes that the effect is newly executed.

Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output can be an effect of higher importance, and a channel having a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. On the contrary, the channel with a large change in volume may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in the sound image localization position (panpot). For example, as a production that brings about a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the output of the left and right sounds of the stereo speakers can be a more important production, a channel with little change in the dynamic sound image localization position is used. Select with priority. On the other hand, a channel with a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 6 selects a channel based on the sound number (index). For example, select a number with a higher (smaller) note number. At this time, the priority may be associated with the sound number.

Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, assuming that a production that outputs a stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher degree of expectation, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected. On the other hand, since only one channel is used for monaural sound, if the number of free channels is insufficient even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is opened, select the channel that outputs stereo sound to increase the number of free channels. It may be.

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so that the volume cannot be adjusted may be more important, or an effect set so as to be able to adjust the volume may be more important.

In addition to the conditions shown above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. Further, by assigning a unique priority to all the sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priority.

The table shown in FIG. 231 shows the conditions 1 to 8 as an example, but these conditions may be applied individually or in combination of a plurality of conditions. For example, a threshold value may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions may be applied sequentially.

[15-1-3. Volume control]
Next, an example of controlling channel allocation based on the priority assigned to the newly output sound will be described. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the fluctuation will be described. FIG. 232 is a timing chart showing an effect example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which the sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel where each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 233 is a diagram showing an example of the priority order of sound effects in the production example of the present embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 232, the first half notice_A occurs when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display. At this time, an operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Further, the first half notice C occurs while the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are being executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 233, the priority of the first half notice_A is 03, the priority of the first half notice_B is 05, and the priority of the first half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set for the first half notice_B and the first half notice_C, when the lower priority notice effects are duplicated in the same group, the volume is increased based on the suppression volume value. It will be reduced.

Explaining the contents of each notice, the first half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and the character appears on the display screen and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

The first half notice_B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and the button press sound is played when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), the first half notice_B is started, and the effect is stereo from channels 10 and 11. Sound is output.

In the first half notice_C, along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and the sound having a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporarily The sound is muted (blackout production). After that, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half notice_C is resumed.

Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half variation of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents the volume.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation display is started from the time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at the time t1. At this time, it is output at the preset volume V_A of the effect sound effect of the first half notice_A.

After that, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button pressing sound of the effect button is reproduced at the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output at the volume V_B. Further, since the priority of the first half notice_B is higher than the priority of the first half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

If the priority of the advance notice effect executed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the advance notice effect being executed, it is not necessary to lower the volume, and even if the sound effects output at the same time are small. You do not have to lower the volume. In addition, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a specific combination of advance notice effects.

Further, when the first half notice C is executed at the time t3, the screen is dimmed until the time t5, and the sound effects other than the first half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output at the volume V_C.

Further, the output of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B effect sound effects muted from the time t3 is resumed at the time t5. Originally, the button pressing sound is output until the time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at the time t3.

After that, the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B continue to be produced until the preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at time t8, the first half notice_C ends, and the first half of the fluctuation ends.

During the period when the effect sound effect is muted, the output of the effect sound effect may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound effect may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (sub volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume that controls the volume of the entire staging sound effect is set to 0, and the output of the sound effect of the first half notice_C. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Further, even if the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice_C, the sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds having higher priority are output.

As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being played, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is lowered. It may be lowered, or the volume of the sound being played on the same channel (fixed channel method, automatic channel method) may be lowered. Further, the volume of the sound being played on the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[15-1-4. effect]
With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, the sound having a high priority can be preferentially output. High-priority sounds are, for example, sounds such as notification sounds and warning sounds that are surely transmitted to players and employees of the amusement park, and there is a high expectation that the result of variable display will be a big hit. It may be a sound effect to raise the expectation of the game, or it may be a sound effect that has a high directing effect and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, by classifying each channel used in the sound source control into a plurality of groups, it is possible to facilitate the management of the staging data related to the staging sound effect. This makes it possible to improve development efficiency, such as suppressing the occurrence of bugs by conducting systematic tests. In addition, by enabling stable games, it is possible to improve the interest of the games.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group that outputs the sound effect of the advance notice effect (AUTO group 1) and a group that outputs the hold-related sound effect (AUTO group 2). The number of sound effects for the preview effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced at the same time. In particular, in the first half of the fluctuation, it may be required to output an effect sound effect exceeding the number of allocated channels, such as executing a pre-reading notice of the pending fluctuation together with the notice of the fluctuation. In such a case, the interest of the game can be maximized by outputting the low-priority effect sound effect while exchanging the high-priority effect sound effect in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1. ..

Further, the change of the hold display of the variable display and the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect sound effect along with the change can greatly increase the expectation of the player, and it is desirable that the effect is surely executed. .. In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect related to the hold display (hold sound) from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the effect sound independently of the advance notice effect related to the variable display. can. In addition, unlike the case of the advance notice effect in the variable display, the number of effect sound effects output at the same time does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to AUTO group 2, so the output of the effect sound effect is stopped. It is less likely to be done. Moreover, even if it is canceled, the output of the low-priority effect sound effect is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by surely executing the highly effective production that raises the expectation of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the channel to which the automatic channel method is applied and the channel to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As mentioned above, in the automatic channel method, a finite number of channels are effectively utilized by searching for vacant channels, and by setting priorities, directing effects and sounds with high importance are given priority and output. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied when the sound is continuously output as in BGM, or when the sound is preferentially output in order to notify a game machine failure or fraudulent activity. In this way, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and application of sound, each channel can be effectively used, and further, appropriate control can be performed according to the sound output situation. For example, in the control to output BGM, the sound may be output to the pre-assigned channel regardless of the game state, and in the control to output the alarm sound, the designated channel is specified without searching for an empty channel. The sound may be output directly to. On the other hand, in the automatic channel system, as described above, it is possible to make the best use of the vacant channels and to preferentially output the sound having a high effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume of each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute the effect having a high priority. In addition, it is possible to continue the effect while being executed while lowering the volume without interruption. At this time, it is possible to return the volume to the original volume as long as the previously executed low-priority effect continues even after the high-priority effect is completed. Further, as described in the embodiment, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized by stopping the other effects and executing the specific effect independently. In this way, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the production and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[15-2. Modification example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset numbers, but in this modification, the automatic channel method is used. A modified example in which the number of set channels and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set is variable will be described.

[15-2-1. Production example]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to temporarily output more sounds of the same type than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of performing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of screens (for example, divided into 9), and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 235 is a diagram showing a screen configuration example of the effect in the modified example of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 235 is a notice effect in the latter half fluctuation after the reach occurs.

In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect of displaying a different scene on each screen (multi-screen effect) is executed. Then, any one of the scenes is selected, and the effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output at the same time. The scene may be selected by lottery or by the player.

The gaming machine of this modified example uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. Also, the default channel allocation is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 229. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (8 channels) of BGM at the maximum at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modified example, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modification, the channels for outputting BGM are reassigned, and the arrangement of the channels is reorganized.

[15-2-2. Channel layout]
FIG. 236 is a diagram showing an example of a playback channel configuration table in sound source control in a modified example of the present embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration at the time of executing a multi-screen effect. The default configuration of FIG. 236 (A) is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 229, as described above.

In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 236 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 236 (B). Specifically, fixed channel type channels for outputting BGM are added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels that have adopted the automatic channel method assigned to AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if a different advance notice effect is executed during the execution of the multi-screen effect.

After the start of the multi-screen effect, all the BGM corresponding to each scene is played while all the scenes are displayed. At this time, if all the BGM is output at a normal volume, the volume becomes too loud, so the volume is output in a state where the volume is lower than usual. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (second half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to the normal volume, and the playback of other BGM is terminated. .. When the player selects a scene, for example, the BGM of the selected scene is set to another BGM until the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine is selected and the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the volume of the BGM of other scenes may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 237 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modified example of the present embodiment, (A) is the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) is the volume change of each effect sound effect. Is shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, when the execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement changes from the default state (FIG. 236 (A)) to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 236 (B). )) Is changed to. After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), a reach occurs and the second half fluctuation is started. After the start of the latter half fluctuation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 235, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display area, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

When the multi-screen effect is started, the BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change is output to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 236 (B)). At this time, the volume V_1, which is smaller than the normal volume V_1, is output.

After that, when the scene for which the production is to be continued is selected (time t13), the volume of the BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 237, scene 5 is selected and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the latter half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

After the multi-screen effect is completed, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the output of BGM from channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channels may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at the required timing. For example, in this modification, the arrangement of the channels may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the latter half variation.

Further, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the content of the effect, the channel arrangement may be changed when the game state (for example, the effect mode such as the jackpot state, the time saving state, the background change, etc.) changes.

[15-2-4. effect]
With the above configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to "variable fixed channels" in FIG. 228 (F)) that perform sound control by the fixed channel method and the automatic channels that perform sound control by the automatic channel method (FIG. The number (corresponding to the "variable AUTOch" of 228 (F)) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. This makes it possible to make more notification sounds, BGM or sound effects playable depending on the situation, for example, to output more types of notification sounds in a situation where the game is not played. It is possible to take flexible measures such as increasing the number of BGM and sound effects that should be reproduced in the production by suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds.

[16. Control for sound being output on other channels]
In the embodiment described above, an example has been described in which channels are grouped and output sounds are managed by associating them with each group. In addition, when the number of sounds that can be assigned at the same time in the same group is exceeded, the output of the sound being sounded is stopped and a new sound is output based on a predetermined condition, or the output of a new sound is stopped. Then, the control for the sound in the output belonging to the same group was explained. Here, when a sound is newly assigned to a channel and output, a case where control such as changing the volume of the sound being output by another channel is performed will be described.

After the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, in the state before the reach occurs (during the first half fluctuation), the output of the sound effect by the predetermined sound effect and the sound output by the playing BGM or other effects are regulated (silenced) for a predetermined time. A typical effect of performing such control is a blackout effect that regulates the output of sound effects and darkens the screen. In the blackout effect, after a predetermined time has passed after restricting the output of the sound effect, the darkening of the screen is canceled and the output of the sound by BGM or another effect is resumed, so that the newly output sound (the sound concerned). It is possible to draw the player's attention by highlighting the effect including the output of the above, and to increase the player's expectation for the fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a new sound is assigned to an empty channel and output instead of canceling the assignment of the channel on which the sound effect is output and assigning a new sound. In this case, in order to return the output of the BGM or the like to the state before the regulation, the volume may be returned without considering the processing such as reassigning the sound to the channel. Hereinafter, specific embodiments will be described.

[16-1. Control when different groups of sounds are being output]
In the present embodiment, the channels are grouped and the priority is set for each group. Then, when the sound is output on the channel belonging to the low priority group, the case where the sound is newly output on the channel belonging to the high priority group will be described.

[16-1-1. Volume control table by channel group]
FIG. 238 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each channel group showing the priority of volume control for each group in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, each channel is divided into a fixed channel (fixed channel) 1, a fixed channel (fixed channel) 2, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 1, an automatic channel group (AUTO group) 2, and an automatic channel group (AUTO group). It is divided into 5 groups of 3.

Group volume priority and suppression volume value are set for each group. The group volume priority indicates the priority between groups, and the smaller the value, the higher the priority. In the present embodiment, a numerical value of 1 or more is set, and "1" has the highest priority.

The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an mode in which the volume of another sound being reproduced is changed when the sound is reproduced in a channel belonging to a group having a low priority. Specifically, when "-1" is set, the sound reproduction is continued as it is without changing other sounds being reproduced. When "0" is set, it is controlled to mute other sounds being played. When a numerical value other than "0" is set, for example, when "50" is set, the volume of other sounds being reproduced is suppressed to 50%. That is, when a numerical value from 1 to 100 is set, the volume is changed with the unit as%. A numerical value of 100 or more may be set to control the volume to be larger than usual.

Further, when each set value is described with reference to FIG. 238, the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system channels are mixed in the present embodiment as in the above-described embodiment. In the fixed channel, sounds such as notification sounds and BGM that are preferentially output or are always output are assigned. In the automatic channel, effect sound effects grouped according to the type and importance of the effect are assigned.

In the fixed ch1, the group volume priority is set to "1", which is the highest. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when the sound is reproduced on the fixed ch1, all the other sounds being reproduced are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed ch1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of the amusement park as shown as a reference reproduction sound. It may be an alarm sound to notify that a failure has occurred in the game machine, or a notification sound such as a ball jam. That is, when the sound is output from the fixed channel 1, since the occurrence of fraudulent activity or failure is a factor, the output of the staging sound effect or the like is stopped and only the notification sound is output. Further, while the notification sound is output from the fixed channel 1 having the highest priority, the output of other sounds having a relatively low priority is restricted.

In the fixed ch2, in FIG. 238, the group volume priority is set to "4", which is the lowest. Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "-1", even if the sound reproduction is started on the fixed ch2, the other sound being reproduced is not affected. The sound reproduced on the fixed channel 2 is mainly the BGM in the game, and in the normal game, the effect sound effect that attracts the player's attention in response to the execution of the variable display of the special symbol while the BGM is output, etc. Is output.

In AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "0", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 1, all the sounds being reproduced other than the notification sound output from the fixed ch1 are muted. That is, the sound output by the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the production, and the other sounds are muted and output independently.

Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 1 include a jackpot confirmation sound, a blackout sound effect, and a V winning sound, as shown in the reference reproduced sound. The jackpot confirmation sound is a sound that notifies that the result of the variable display becomes a jackpot at a predetermined timing such as when the start prize is won, and is a production sound effect that maximizes the expectation for the player. The V winning sound is a sound for notifying that the game ball has won a prize in the V zone and, for example, it is confirmed that the game ball will shift to the high probability state, and like the jackpot confirmation sound, the expectation of the player is greatly improved. Can be made to.

The blackout sound effect is a sound effect that suppresses the output of other effect sound effects when the above-mentioned blackout effect is executed and is output in a silent state. At this time, the display on the effect screen is also dimmed. At this time, an effect of emitting a flash on the screen may be executed together with the output of the blackout sound effect. The jackpot confirmation sound and V winning sound are suppressed in a short time after the sound is output in order to suppress the output of other sounds so that the player does not miss the output of these sounds. Is restarted. On the other hand, in the blackout sound effect, the player's attention is focused on the blackout effect by setting the state in which the sound effect by another effect is not output for a predetermined time even after the blackout sound effect is output. Further, after the blackout effect is executed, the effect linked to the blackout effect may be executed with the fluctuation. For example, the blackout effect is executed with the first half variation and the corresponding effect is executed with the second half variation. You may do it.

In AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is set to "3". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "50", when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 2, all the playing sounds of the group having the priority "4" or less are halved (50%). It is suppressed by the output). For example, the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 is halved because the group volume priority is "4" as described above, and the sound of the AUTO group 2 is output at a normal volume. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that attracts the player's attention while continuing the flow of the game without completely muting the BGM. Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 2 include, for example, a first half warning sound effect and a second half warning sound effect.

In AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is set to "2". Further, since the suppression volume value is set to "50" as in the case of the AUTO group 2, when the sound is reproduced in the AUTO group 3, the group having the priority of "3" or less is being reproduced. All sounds are halved. For example, when the warning sound effect is output from AUTO group 2, the volume of the warning sound effect is halved. At this time, if the volume of the BGM output from the fixed channel 2 has already been halved, the volume may be continued without being changed, or the volume may be halved (1/4 of the initial volume). You may.

Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning, a holding change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and a button pressing sound notifying that the effect button has been pressed. be. In the present embodiment, when the group volume priority is the same, the sound is output as it is at the normal volume. Therefore, even if the blackout effect of the AUTO group 2 is executed and the output of BGM or the like is restricted, the sound belonging to the AUTO group 3 is output. For example, when a game ball enters the starting winning opening, a holding winning sound is output even while the blackout effect is being executed.

[16-1-2. Group volume control processing]
Subsequently, the procedure of volume control in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a group volume control process for performing sound control corresponding to a group to which the output sound of the present embodiment belongs. The group volume control process is executed in the sound data creation process (step S1032) in the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95) of the peripheral control unit power-on process. The group volume control process will be described below.

When the group volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1401). If there is no request to reproduce the new sound (the result of step S1401 is "No"), the processes of step S1420 and subsequent steps are executed.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU1511a specifies a channel group from the sound number of the sound for which the reproduction request is made when there is a reproduction request for a new sound (the result of step S1401 is "Yes"), and the volume control table for each channel group. From (FIG. 238), the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority corresponding to the channel group are acquired (step S1402).

Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppressed volume value is “-1” (without suppression control) (step S1403). When the acquired suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "Yes"), that is, when the control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processes after step S1406 are executed.

When the acquired suppressed volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1403 is "No"), that is, when controlling the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a further controls the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether or not the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority have been registered in the work area (step S1404). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority have already been registered (the result of step S1404 is "Yes"), the processes of step S1406 and subsequent steps are executed.

If the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority have not been registered (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1511a has the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the sound requested to be reproduced. The rank is held in the work area (step S1405). In this work area, the parameters (sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority) of the sound having the highest priority during current playback are recorded.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not there is a sound already being reproduced (step S1406). When there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1407). On the other hand, when there is already a sound being reproduced (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processing after step S1410.

Explaining the control for the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a sound parameter for suppressing the output of the sound being reproduced is registered in the work area (step S1410). If the parameter of the sound that suppresses the output of the sound being reproduced is not registered (the result of step S1410 is "No"), the output of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is set (step S1407).

Explaining the sound control executed in step S1410 or later, if a sound that suppresses the output of the sound being played is registered (the result of step S1410 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a is a new playback request. The group volume priority of the existing sound is compared with the group volume priority held in the work area (step S1411).

If the group volume priority of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is lower than the group volume priority already held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the peripheral control MPU1511a requests new playback. The volume of the sound is reduced based on the suppressed volume value of the work area (step S1414).

Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is higher than the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the peripheral control MPU1511a newly reproduces the sound. The work area is overwritten with the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority of the requested sound (step S1412), and the volume of the newly requested sound is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413). ).

Further, when the group volume priority of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is equal to the group volume priority held in the work area (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the peripheral control MPU1511a is set to the work area. While maintaining the content, the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1413).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the group volume priority of the sound already being reproduced is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (step S1415). When the group volume priority of the sound being played is lower than the group volume priority recorded in the work area (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the volume of the sound being played is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1416).

When the processing of step S1415 and step S1416 is executed for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1417), or after the processing of step S1407 is completed, the peripheral control MPU1511a has the suppression volume value and the group volume priority work. It is determined whether or not it has been registered in the area (step S1420). If the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority have not been registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is "No"), this process ends.

When the suppressed volume value and the group volume priority are registered in the work area (the result of step S1420 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. It is determined whether or not the process is completed (step S1421). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1421 is “No”), this processing is terminated.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1421 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the group volume priority in the work area. (Step S1422). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values set in advance (step S1423, step S1424), and this process is terminated.

The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound being reproduced when the reproduction of the new sound in the present embodiment is requested. Next, sound volume control will be described in chronological order. FIG. 240 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 240 shows the execution timing of the effect, and FIG. 240 shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 240 describes an example of executing the advance notice effect and the blackout effect.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the gaming is started, and normally BGM is output on a fixed channel (fixed channel 2). As shown in FIG. 238, the fixed ch2 has a group volume priority of "4" and a suppressed volume value of "-1". Since the suppression volume value of the normal BGM is "-1", the sound is reproduced without recording the sound number, group volume priority, and suppression volume value of the normal BGM in the work area.

When the game ball wins the start winning opening (here, the sound output at the time of holding winning is omitted), the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, and the first half notice A is started (time t21). The effect sound effect of the first half notice A is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 2, the group volume priority is "3", and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result of step S1402 and step S1403 is "No"). .. Since the parameter was not recorded in the work area at the start of the first half notice (the result of step S1404 is "No"), the parameter of the effect sound effect of the first half notice is recorded in the work area (step S1405).

At the start of the first half notice A, normally BGM is output (the result of step S1406 is "Yes"), and the sound number of the effect sound effect of the first half notice A is registered in the work area (the result of step S1410 is). "Yes"). At this time, since the group priority of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made and the group priority of the work area are the same (the result of step S1411 is "="), the volume of the sound for which the new reproduction request has been made is set in advance. The defined volume value is set (step S1413).

At this time, since the BGM is normally playing and the group volume priority is lower than the effect sound effect of the first half fluctuation (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), the sound is based on the parameter of the effect sound effect of the first half notice A. Output is suppressed (step S1416). Specifically, the volume of BGM is usually reduced (suppressed) to 50% output.

After that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the blackout effect is executed (time t22). The sound effect of the blackout effect is output on the channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the group volume priority is "2", and the suppression volume value is "0" (step S1402). At this time, the parameter of the first half notice A is recorded in the work area, but since the group volume priority is higher in the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is “>”), the content of the work area is blacked out. (Step S1412), and a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1413).

Further, since the group priority of the normal BGM and the effect sound effect of the first half notice A during playback is lower than that of the blackout effect sound effect (the result of step S1415 is "Yes"), these The volume of the sound effect is reduced (step S1416). In the blackout effect, the sound is muted because the suppression volume value is 0.

Further, the second half notice B is started during the execution of the blackout effect (time t23). At this time, since the group volume priority of the second half notice B is lower than the group volume priority of the blackout effect (the result of step S1411 is "<"), the second half notice B is started in a mute state, and the blackout effect is produced. Continue until is finished.

After that, when the game ball wins the start winning opening, the hold winning sound is output (time t24). The hold winning sound is output on the channel belonging to the AUTO group 3, the group volume priority is "2", and the suppression volume value is "50". In the present embodiment, when the group volume priorities are the same (the result of step S1411 is “=”), the parameters recorded in the work area are maintained, and the parameters are output at a predetermined volume. Therefore, the hold winning sound is output as usual even during the execution of the blackout effect.

Then, when the blackout effect is completed (time t26), the parameter of the blackout effect recorded in the work area is erased (step S1422), and the regulated volume is returned to the predetermined volume (step S1423). .. Specifically, the volumes of the normal BGM, the first half notice A, and the second half notice B are returned to the predetermined volumes. After that, the sound output of the first half notice A and the second half notice B ends (time t27, t28).

As described above, in the present embodiment, while the sound effect having a high group priority is output, the output of the sound effect having a low group priority can be suppressed to make a specific effect stand out. Furthermore, by volume control by the suppression volume value, the player can be made to recognize that multiple effects are progressing at the same time, and the group of effect sound effects that greatly increase the player's expectation, such as the jackpot confirmation sound. By setting a high priority, it is possible to execute without impairing the effect of the effect.

Further, when a new high-priority sound is output and the output of the effect sound effect during reproduction is suppressed, in the above-described embodiment, the volume of the effect sound effect during reproduction is immediately output based on the suppression volume value. Was controlled to decrease, but from the timing when the sound with high priority is output, the volume of other production sound effects is gradually lowered to the target value (volume based on the suppression volume value) and faded out. May be good. In this case, the start value (volume currently being played), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be specified, or up to the target value based on the effect content such as the length of the reproduction time of the effect sound effect. The time to reach and the amount of change may be set. For example, if the output of the new production sound effect is short, the time to reach the target value may be set short to make the production sound effect stand out, or if the output of the new production sound effect is relatively long, the target. It is also possible to set a long time to reach the value to reduce the discomfort that may occur when the effect sound effect is switched.

For example, if the newly output sound effect is a short-time output such as a jackpot confirmation sound or a V winning sound, the output of the production sound effect during playback such as BGM is faded out in a relatively short time. It is possible to make the newly output production sound effect stand out more without breaking the tempo of the game.

Furthermore, when the output of the new effect sound effect ends and the output of the other effect sound effect is resumed, the volume of the other effect sound effect is immediately returned to the target value (predetermined volume value). Instead, the start value (volume under regulation), the time to reach the target value, and the amount of change may be specified and controlled to fade in. For example, the output of the normal BGM is suppressed to 50% when the sound effect of the first half notice A is played, but when the output of the normal BGM is restarted, the normal volume is set as the target value and the start value (the volume currently being played. Here. Then, the volume is suppressed to 50%), and the fade-in is controlled based on the specified time and the amount of change. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the discomfort of the player while making the switching of the effect sound effect stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, although the present embodiment has been described by taking the effect sound effect as an example, it can be similarly applied to the alarm sound and the notification sound. As an example, when outputting a notification sound with high importance (priority) (for example, an alarm sound due to fraudulent activity), not only the effect sound effect but also the notification sound with relatively low importance (priority) (for example, For example, the output of the ball jam notification sound) may be restricted. On the other hand, if a fraudulent act is performed while the notification sound of low importance (priority) is being output, the output of the notification sound is interrupted and the notification sound (alarm) of high importance (priority) is interrupted. Sound) may be given priority for output.

Note that the alarm sound and the notification sound are not set to have a sound output time like the effect sound effect, but the sound output is continued until the cause of the alarm or notification is eliminated. Therefore, when multiple types of alarm sounds and notification sounds are output, the sound with the highest priority is output, and after the cause of outputting the sound is eliminated, other notification sounds are output. .. At this time, the sound having the next highest priority may be output to regulate the output of the remaining sounds, or all the remaining sounds may be output at the same time.

[16-2. Volume control by sound output time (long and short)]
The control of the sound that is output in duplicate according to the priority between the groups has been explained above. Next, a control example for controlling the volume of the sound based on the output time (long or short) of the sound will be described.

[16-2-1. Volume control table by sound effect]
FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a volume control table for each sound effect that shows volume control for each total playback time (output time) of the sound in the present embodiment. The playback channel (ch) used, the total playback time, and the suppression volume value are set for each sound effect.

Similar to the example shown in FIG. 238, the used reproduction channel is divided into five groups of fixed ch1, fixed ch2, AUTO group 1, AUTO group 2, and AUTO group 3.

The total playback time is the time from the start to the stop of the sound effect output. When -1 is set for the total playback time, the sound effect is output at a preset volume without being affected by the suppression control by other output sound effects. At this time, the volume of the sound effect is controlled so as not to be suppressed.

When 0 is set for the total playback time, the loop playback is repeated and the output is continued until another sound effect is assigned to the same channel. When the numerical value set for the total playback time is a number other than this (positive number), it is the playback time of the sound effect. The unit of total playback time is milliseconds (ms).

The suppression volume value is a numerical value indicating an mode in which the volume of other sound effects output at the same time is changed, as in the example shown in FIG. 238. Specifically, in the case of "-1", the sound being played is continued as it is without changing the sound being played, and in the case of "0", the sound effect being played (in the total playing time- Suppress (mute) the output of (excluding the sound effect for which 1 is set). In the case of a numerical value other than "0", for example, when "50" is set, the volume of the sound being reproduced is suppressed to 50%.

Subsequently, each sound effect will be described with reference to FIG. 241. Similarly to the above-described embodiment, the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system channels are mixed in the present embodiment, and the assigned sound effect is also the same. Is. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 241, the suppression volume value is set for each channel group, but it may be set for each sound effect.

Since the total playback time is set to "-1" and the suppression volume value is set to "0" for the sound effects assigned to the fixed ch1, when these sound effects are played, other sound effects being played are set. All sounds are muted. The sound reproduced on the fixed channel 1 is a notification sound for notifying the outside such as a player or an employee of the amusement park, and is a sound effect that is output because it is caused by a fraudulent act or a failure. The volume of the sound effect cannot be suppressed, and the output of other sound effects during playback is forcibly suppressed (stopped or muted).

Since the total playback time is set to "0" and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" for the sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2, the sound effect is repeatedly output from the start of output. These sound effects are designed so that they do not affect other sounds being played. The sound effect assigned to the fixed ch2 is mainly BGM in the game.

For the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 1, the total playback time is set for each sound effect (playback time), and the suppression volume value is set to "0", so the notification sound output from the fixed ch1. All other sounds being played are muted. That is, the sound output by the AUTO group 1 is output with the highest priority in the production, and the other sounds are muted and output independently. Specific sounds output by the AUTO group 1 include a jackpot confirmation sound, a blackout sound effect, and a V winning sound, as shown in FIG. 238.

For the sound effects assigned to AUTO group 2 and AUTO group 3, the total playback time is set to a value (playback time) set for each sound effect, and the suppression volume value is set to "50", so that in AUTO group 2. When a sound is reproduced, the output of all other sounds being reproduced is halved (suppressed to 50% output). As a result, for example, as specific sounds output by AUTO Group 2, which can halve the output of BGM and make the production stand out while continuing the flow of the game, for example, the first half notice sound effect and the second half notice effect Specific sounds output by AUTO Group 3 include, for example, a hold winning sound at the time of starting winning, a holding change sound indicating that the hold display has changed, and pressing the effect button. It is a button press sound to notify.

[16-2-2. Volume control processing]
In the present embodiment, the output of the sound effects to be reproduced in duplicate is controlled by the reproduction time of the sound effects. 242A and 242B are flowcharts showing a procedure of volume control processing for performing sound control based on parameters set for each sound effect of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the procedure for controlling the output of the sound effect in this embodiment will be described.

When the volume control process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1501A). If there is no request to reproduce the new sound (the result of step S1501A is "No"), the processes after step S1530A are executed.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU1511a specifies the sound effect name based on the sound number of the sound for which the reproduction request is made when there is a reproduction request for a new sound (the result of step S1501A is "Yes"), and the volume for each sound effect. The suppression volume value and the total reproduction time are acquired from the control table (FIG. 241) (step S1502A).

Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the acquired suppressed volume value is “-1” (without suppression control) (step S1503A). When the acquired suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "Yes"), that is, when the control for the sound being reproduced is not performed, the processes after step S1506A are executed.

When the acquired suppressed volume value is not "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "No"), that is, when controlling the sound being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a further controls the sound requested to be reproduced. It is determined whether or not the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time have been registered in the work area (step S1504A). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), the processes after step S1506A are executed.

If the sound number, suppression volume value, and group volume priority have not been registered (the result of step S1504A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1511a determines the sound number, suppression volume value, and total reproduction time of the sound requested to be reproduced. Is held in the work area (step S1505A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not there is a sound already being reproduced (step S1506A). When there is no sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "No"), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1507A). On the other hand, when there is already a sound being reproduced (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"), sound control is performed based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound in the processes after step S1510A.

Explaining the sound control based on the parameters stored in the work area and the parameters of the new sound, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not the total playback time of the sound for which the new playback request has been made is "-1". (Step S1510A). When the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "Yes"), as described above, an alarm sound is output when an abnormality occurs, and the new sound is output. Suppression of the volume of the reproduced sound is prohibited, and the output of other sound effects during reproduction is forcibly suppressed.

The peripheral control MPU1511a sets a predetermined volume value for the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1511A). Further, the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time for which a new playback request has been made are overwritten in the work area (step S1512A).

Then, the peripheral control MPU1511a suppresses the volume of the sound effect being reproduced based on the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made (step S1513A). When the volume of all the sound effects during reproduction is suppressed, the processes after step S1530A are executed (step S1514A).

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request is made is not "-1" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is not "-1". It is determined whether or not "-1" or a sound number is set in the work area (step S1520A). If the total reproduction time of the sound held in the work area is "-1" or the sound number is not set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "Yes"), the processes after step S1530A are executed.

If the total playback time of the sound held in the work area is not "-1" and the sound number is set in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "No"), the peripheral control MPU1511a It is determined whether or not the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (step S1521A).

When the suppression volume value of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is smaller than the suppression volume value held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a is set to the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made. The work area is overwritten with the number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time (step S1522A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the total reproduction time of the sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is shorter than the total reproduction time held in the work area (step S1523A). If the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request is made is shorter than or the same as the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is "Yes"), the volume of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is set. A predetermined volume value is set (step S1524A). On the other hand, when the total playback time of the sound for which a new playback request has been made is longer than the total playback time held in the work area (the result of step S1521A is "No"), the volume of the sound for which the new playback request has been made. Is set to a reduced volume value based on the suppressed volume value of the work area (step S1525A).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the suppression volume value is smaller or the same as the suppression volume value recorded in the work area for all the sounds being reproduced (step S1526A). Then, when the suppressed volume value of the sound being reproduced is larger than the suppressed volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is “No”), the volume of the sound being reproduced is recorded in the work area. It is reduced based on the suppression volume value (step S1527A).

When the peripheral control MPU1511a performs the processes of steps S1526A and S1527A on all the sounds being reproduced, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the processes after step S1530A (step S1528A).

When the volume control for the newly requested sound and the sound being reproduced is completed (step S1507A, step S1514A, step S1524A, step S1525A, step S1528A), the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total reproduction time. Determines whether or not has been registered in the work area (step S1530A). If the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time are not registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is "No"), this process ends.

When the sound number, the suppressed volume value, and the total playback time are registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a reproduces the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area. Is determined (step S1531A). If the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is not completed (the result of step S1531A is “No”), this processing is terminated.

When the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU1511a transfers the sound number, the suppression volume value, and the total reproduction time from the work area. Erase (step S1532A). Finally, all the sounds being reproduced are returned to the original volume values set in advance (step S1533A, step S1534A), and this process is terminated.

The above is the process of controlling the volume of the sound based on the total reproduction time of the sound effect in the present embodiment. Subsequently, the volume control of the sound will be specifically described in chronological order. FIG. 243 is a timing chart for explaining the procedure for controlling the volume in the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 243 shows the execution timing of the effect, and FIG. 243 shows the volume of each effect. FIG. 243 describes an example of executing the first half notice effect and the blackout effect.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the gaming starts and normally BGM is output. Normally, the BGM is output on the fixed channel 2, and the suppression volume value is set to "-1" as shown in FIG. 241. Further, the normal BGM is a loop reproduction in which the reproduction is repeated until the BGM is switched, and 0 is set for the total reproduction time. Since the suppressed volume value is "-1" (the result of step S1503A is "Yes"), the BGM parameter is not normally registered in the work area. Then, a preset volume value is set, and a normal BGM is output (step S1507A).

After that, when the game ball wins the start winning opening and the variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the output of the sound effect of the first half notice A is newly requested in order to execute the first half notice A. (Time t31). The sound effect of the first half notice A is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 2, the total playback time is set to 15000 ms, and the suppression volume value is set to 50 (the result of step S1503A is "No").

Further, since the parameter is not registered in the work area at this point (the result of step S1504A is "No"), the sound number, the total playback time, and the suppression volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A are held in the work area ( Step S1505A).

Further, at the start timing of the first half notice A, the BGM is normally playing (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"), the total playback time of the first half notice A is 15,000 ms (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the new The parameters of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which the reproduction request was made are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1520A is "No", the result of step S1521A is "No", and the result of step S1523A is "Yes". ). Therefore, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice A for which a new reproduction request has been made is set to a predetermined volume value (step S1524A).

Subsequently, since the normal BGM is playing at this point and the volume has not been suppressed yet, the suppressed volume value is "100", which is larger than the suppressed volume value "50" of the first half notice A recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is "No"), and the volume of the normal BGM is reduced to 50% based on the suppression volume value "50" of the first half notice A (step S1527A).

Subsequently, since the parameter of the sound effect of the first half notice A is already registered in the work area (the result of step S1530A is "Yes"), the first half notice A is continued (the result of step S1531A is "No"). , This process ends.

After that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the blackout effect is executed, and a new sound reproduction request for the blackout effect sound effect is received (time t32). The blackout effect sound effect is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 1, the total playback time is "8000", and the suppression volume value is "0" (the result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the sound effect of the first half notice A are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), and the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output (step S1506A). The result is "Yes").

Further, the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of "8000" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area. Is "15000" (the result of step S1520A is "No").

Next, since the suppressed volume value of the sound effect of the first half notice A held in the work area is "50", and the suppressed volume value of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made is "0" (step). The result of S1521A is "Yes"), the sound number of the blackout effect sound effect for which a new reproduction request has been made, the suppression volume value "0", and the total reproduction time "8000" are overwritten in the work area (step S1522A).

Further, since the total playback time (8000 ms; a1) of the sound effect of the blackout notice effect is shorter than the total playback time (15000 ms) of the sound effect of the first half notice A (the result of step S1523A is “Yes”), the blackout A predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the warning effect sound effect (step S1524A).

Subsequently, the suppression volume value of the sound being played is usually "50" for BGM, "100" for the sound effect of the first half notice A, and the suppression volume value "0" for the blackout notice effect sound effect recorded in the work area. (The result of step S1526A is "No"), so that the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM and the first half notice A is set to "0" (step S1527A).

After that, when the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening during the execution of the blackout effect, a new sound reproduction request for the pending winning sound is received (time t33). The hold winning sound is output on a channel belonging to AUTO group 3, the total playback time is "2000", and the suppression volume value is "50" (the result of step S1503A is "No"). At this time, the parameters of the blackout effect sound effect are already registered in the work area (the result of step S1504A is "Yes"), and the blackout effect sound effect, the normal BGM, and the sound effect of the first half notice A are being output. Yes (the result of step S1506A is "Yes"). At this time, the output of the normal BGM and the sound effect of the first half notice A is suppressed.

Further, the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made has a total reproduction time of "2000" (the result of step S1510A is "No"), and the total reproduction time of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is "8000". (The result of step S1520A is "No").

Next, since the suppression volume value of the blackout effect sound effect held in the work area is "0" and the suppression volume value of the pending winning sound for which a new reproduction request has been made is "50" (the result of step S1521A is). Since “No”), the work area is not overwritten, but the total playback time (2000 ms; a2) of the pending winning sound is shorter than the total playback time (8000 ms; a1) of the blackout effect sound effect (the result of step S1523A is). “Yes”), a predetermined volume value is set in the volume of the hold winning sound (step S1524A). Further, since the work area has not been updated, the suppressed volume value of the sound being reproduced is the same as the suppressed volume value recorded in the work area (the result of step S1526A is "Yes"). Then, even if the output of the hold winning sound is completed (time t34), since the parameters of the blackout effect sound effect are recorded in the work area, the output of the blackout effect sound effect is continued.

After that, when the blackout effect is completed (time t35), the reproduction of the sound corresponding to the sound number registered in the work area is completed (the result of step S1531A is “Yes”), so that the blackout stored in the work area is completed. The parameter of the effect sound effect is erased (step S1532A). Then, the volume of the sound effect of the normal BGM whose sound reproduction is suppressed (the volume is reduced) and the sound effect of the first half notice A is returned to a predetermined volume value (step S1533A). At this time, the normal BGM was suppressed during the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice A, but the normal volume is restored.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to mute the volume of other sound effects during playback to make a specific effect (for example, a blackout effect) stand out, and at the same time, the effect sound effect is produced during the mute period. Even when the output ends, it is possible to provide the player with a production opportunity. Specifically, when the output of the sound effect is completed during the muffling period, the sound effect is output even while the output of the sound effect of another effect is suppressed by executing a specific effect. While notifying the player, if the output of the sound effect is continued until the end of the mute period, the output of the sound effect of the effect during the mute period is suppressed to emphasize the execution of a specific effect. be able to.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the number of channels is finite, a new sound is produced when there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is assigned (the number of vacant channels is 0). When the data allocation condition is satisfied, one of the sound outputs must be discarded, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the appearance of an unintended sound output mode in the production design.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when a new sound data allocation condition is satisfied when there is no vacancy in the channel (the number of vacant channels is 0), it is set in advance. By controlling the less important sound output to be selectively discarded based on the priority, it is possible to avoid the appearance of an unintended sound output mode in the production design and reduce the interest of the game. Proposed to be suppressed. However, it can be said that it is also important to devise technical measures in terms of how to make it difficult for the channel itself to appear when there is no vacancy in the channel (the number of vacant channels is 0).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various types that are not output as long as an appropriate game is performed in order to enable allocation of more channel resources to the effect sound effect (effect sound). As for the notification sound of, it is possible to adopt a channel-saving control structure that can appropriately notify abnormal contents etc. with only a single channel. Hereinafter, an example of a case where a channel-saving control structure is adopted for the output of various notification sounds will be described.

FIG. 244 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) among a finite number of channels prepared as sound control by a fixed channel method for various notification sounds (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the production sound. An example of a sound definition table is shown when the process of outputting only in (say) is realized. In this sound definition table, the definitions of priority for playback, left / right pan initial value, top / bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound name. is doing. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the definitions of the other notification sounds and the effect sounds are omitted. Regarding the production sound, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 209, the definition by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. 213 is defined for each channel except the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds is assigned to the channel X to be output when a plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions, and the numerical value of the priority is the numerical value of the priority. The high notification sound is assigned and output to the channel X regardless of the allocation state of the notification sound having a low priority value to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned to the channel X first is given priority, and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output after the output of the notification sound is completed. Will be done.

The left and right pan initial values represent the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers, which are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. For example, when "0x00" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). For example, when "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of the upper and lower pan is the sound image localization of the sound by the upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the upper and lower pan settings during sound playback, the volume output from the upper and lower speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference which is individually output from the upper and lower speakers which are a combination of these. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xFF" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the pair of lower speakers 921.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be determined, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 245 is a table showing, for each of the notification sounds illustrated in FIG. 244, the notification content, the notification mode, the notification time, and the conditions (cancellation conditions) for ending the notification, for each type of the notification sound. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for each notification sound, but this is a free channel as much as possible in order to effectively utilize a single channel X. This is a measure to maintain the state and refrain from the subsequent output of the notification sound.

As shown in FIG. 245, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is in a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed). It notifies that there is. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Magnetism has been detected"". ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. In addition, the notification time is 60 seconds (corresponding to 6 repetitions of notification sound) from the time when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected". On the other hand, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the execution is continued until the release condition "power cycle" is satisfied. It has become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), there is a high possibility that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (a fraudulent act due to a slapstick act is performed). Notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that notifies that it is in the state), and count sensor 4005 (first big winning opening sensor or second big winning opening sensor) even though it is not in the big hit game state (the state where the big winning opening is open) A notification sound that notifies that the detection by the winning opening sensor) is being performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act of forcibly opening the closed large winning opening to win a game ball) has been performed. 3 (abnormal grand prize) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are those. The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a boo-boo vibration has been detected" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example). , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively, and detected by the vibration sensor 2405 as the notification time. While the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) is completed, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps With regard to lighting by, the execution will be continued until the release condition "returning the power" is satisfied. Further, in the notification sound 3 (large prize abnormality), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a boo-boo large prize abnormality has been detected" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "a large prize abnormality has been detected") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the notification time is set. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated in 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for 6 times) from the time when the count sensor 4005 detects it, it is within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display and lighting by various lamps will continue to be executed until the release condition "power cycle" is satisfied.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). Further, regarding the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing, a notification sound such as "boo-boo" that plays a role of notifying that the notification sound belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed) 1 A combination of the alarm sound used in any of the above 3 and the message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying the individual identification of which content of the notification is adopted is adopted. The alarm sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning meaning under a tense fraudulent situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to clarify the distinction from other alarm sounds. It is desirable to be done.

That is, when notifying an item belonging to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent activity has been performed), the hall side responds to the fraudulent activity rather than specifying which notification type it is. It is important to speed up the initial action of. In this regard, according to the above configuration, only the notification sound of "boo-boo" and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and those belonging to the first notification group (cheating). Since it is possible to recognize that the situation has been performed), it is expected that the initial response to the fraudulent activity on the hall side will be expedited. Furthermore, a message sound for notifying which notification type is to be output following the notification sound of "boo-boo", and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial movement for the hall side will be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is a state in which the door frame opening switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open to the main body frame 4 (there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is performed by opening the door). However, there is a possibility that the door has been opened due to the abnormal response measures taken by the hall side). Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "door is open ping pong ping pong" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "door is open"). ”) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. In addition, the notification time is 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 3 times) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong". ), But for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the release condition is "door closure detection (door frame opening switch 618 to the main body frame 4). On the other hand, the execution is continued until the "detection that the door frame 3 is closed)" is satisfied.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door opening), it is detected that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619 (the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2). Although there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed by opening the main body frame, there is a possibility that the main body frame has been opened due to an abnormality response measure by the hall side). , It is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a moderate possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity has been performed and this cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are notified of them. The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 5 (frame open), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, and the main body frame open switch is used as the notification time. While the loop process for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated in 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) from the time when the detection by 619 is detected, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, And the lighting by various lamps is continued until the release condition "frame closing detection (detection that the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619)" is satisfied. It will be.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group for the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged in the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps are necessarily lit) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be an embodiment). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) in the case of belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) in the case of belonging to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sound that is the target of loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification of which content of the notification is, and a sound that belongs to the second notification group (cheating). A combination of sequential output with an alarm sound used in any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 such as "ping pong ping pong", which plays a role of notifying that there is a moderate possibility that There is.

In other words, when notifying those who belong to the second notification group (a state in which there is a moderate possibility that cheating has been performed), while not making the person who is playing the proper game feel disgusted. It is important to be able to take corrective action on the hall side as quickly as possible. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, a message sound for notifying which notification type is used is output as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later. Therefore, it is expected that those who are playing proper games will not feel disgust. On the other hand, in order to make it difficult for those who are playing proper games to feel disgust, an alarm sound such as "ping pong ping pong" follows the message sound, although it is a different alarm sound from the case of belonging to the first notification group. It is output when it belongs to the third notification group although it has a different lighting mode from the case where it belongs to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel disgust. It is expected that the measures for dealing with abnormalities on the hall side will be expedited to some extent by notifying by lighting various lamps that are not displayed.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is generated by the game ball at the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a even though the time is not shortened. It is in a state where the passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is performed in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and it should be corrected to the game in the proper mode (left-handed)). It informs that. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed"). ") And are to be executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, both the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is designed to be completed in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), the lower plate 322 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 to be full in the game ball (lower plate). A notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) for notifying that the game ball in 322 is in a state where the ball should be removed) is provided to guide the game to proceed properly, although the possibility of fraud is low. It is regarded as belonging to the third notification group when it is in the state to be expected, and for the notification sounds belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and cancellation condition should be set to the same ones. It is said.

For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance), as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "please pull out the ball of the lower plate" and a loop process in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display (for example, "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate") is executed, and the notification sound such as "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" is repeatedly output as the notification time, and the game board. Both of the displays in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 are completed in 20 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of two notification sounds) from the time when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects the display. ..

However, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) are detected by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279 when they are completed in 20 seconds. When the 279 is still in the detection state, the notification process (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sound is output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly speaking, for example, after the message sound for 5 seconds is output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. The data is assigned to channel X and the corresponding sound is output (silence output), and a loop process that repeats the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and silence data as a set is performed. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are designed to output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group. Even on the hall side, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group simply by checking the silent data part instead of the message sound part that is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. It is desirable that the silent data is prepared in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including the message sound, and the loop processing is performed with this assigned to the channel X.

By the way, there may be silence in the notification sound used in the first notification group and the second notification group (between the alarm sound and the message sound, etc.), but these are very short to have a "pause". It is clear that it is time-based and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned silent portion having a relatively long time (third notification group) having a group identification function.

According to such a configuration, alarm sounds such as "boo-boo" and "ping-pong ping-pong" are not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence time in between. It becomes possible to notify the game guidance without causing disgust.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 244 and 245, the same priority is set for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group, but the priority is different among the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. Further, as the reproduction type setting, it is decided to adopt loop reproduction in which the target sound is repeatedly reproduced, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and 1SHOT reproduction in which the target sound is reproduced once may be adopted. .. In addition, "Boo Boo", which is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, and "Ping Pong Ping Pong", which is commonly used for the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, have a connection with the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and sound data in which the message sound and the alarm sound are combined is created at the time of output. You may then assign it to a channel.

FIG. 246 (a) shows processing when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 246 (a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 where no notification sound is output at present, it is mainly In the control MPU 1310a, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so that it is indicated that the magnetic detection has occurred. Next, the information indicating that the magnetic detection has occurred is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the magnetic detection has occurred based on the state of the updated notification flag is output externally and managed in the hall computer, and the step. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after that) in which no notification sound is output, the magnetic detection information. In the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to the channel X, and the notification mode thereof is determined. (Here, the loop of "boo-boo magnetic detection is detected") is started, and a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is set.

When assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c for peripheral control. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp is continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is repeatedly executed from the timing tα1 for 60 seconds, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetism is detected"). ”) And lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group) will be executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (a), in the timing tα2 in which 60 seconds have not passed from the timing tα1 and the notification sound such as “boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is in the loop playback state, step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. 94). In this respect, in the main control MPU 1310a, as in the case of the timing tα1 where the magnetic detection was performed, first, the state of the notification flag is updated so as to indicate that the vibration detection was performed. Next, the information indicating that the vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the vibration has been detected based on the state of the updated notification flag is output externally and managed in the hall computer, and the step. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the vibration detection information is included, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). I don't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection is not set at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not processed in the state of not being assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) ends and the timer (60 seconds) is not timed up, the sound corresponding to the vibration detection The generation schedule data is set, and the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is assigned to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Boo-boo vibration detected"). It is supposed to perform playback.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, although the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection and the vibration detection are not set. By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the above from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display and lamp These are executed for lighting.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is lit, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection is already set and the priority order is the same. The lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection that has already been set will be reflected in each of the various lamps, and the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection will be various. It is not reflected by the lamp emission. Similar to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the magnetic detection and the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the vibration detection have the same data contents, any of them can be used. Even if it is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at the timing tα3 where 60 seconds have passed from the timing tα1, the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is repeated based on the time-up of the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly). The loop processing to be executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is set to time. At the up timing tα3, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo-boo magnetism has been detected” has been played 6 times.

At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and the rest. By allocating the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boo-boo vibration”). The notification sound is played back in the loop of "Detected".

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set and is set when the timing tα3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tα3, the notification sound of “Boo-boo vibration has been detected” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is timed up, “Boo-boo vibration is detected”. It is possible to urge the loop processing to be terminated and not to be played back at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as "boo-boo vibration") among the notification sounds such as "was done".

According to such a configuration, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced (Fig. 246 (a)), the 6th alarm sound (here, "boo-boo") and the 6th message sound (here, "magnetic detection") have finished playing, and the 7th alarm sound (here) Then, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "boo-boo") was reproduced. As a result, "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" and "Boo Boo vibration was detected" are connected at strange points, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent notifications in a tense situation (for example). If the notification sound 1 ends with "boo-boo magnetism" and the notification sound 2 starts with "movement detected", a meaningless notification such as "boo-boo magnetism has been detected" It becomes a content, and it becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of (which may confuse the site).

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 time-ups at the warning sound of “boo-boo” and ends, resulting in a message sound. Even if it is not played back, it is possible to recognize that some kind of abnormality detection has occurred at the same time because the loop processing is terminated at a halfway timing and it is no longer played back (only magnetic anomaly). If it is a notification, the notification sound will end at a good point). As a result, when the notification sound is cut off at a halfway timing, it is prompted to check the display on the liquid crystal, and the display on the liquid crystal shows "magnetism detected" and "vibration detected", respectively. By displaying the display, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection have been performed.

FIG. 246 (b) shows processing when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. 246 (a). ) And the above-mentioned processing (processing when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. ) Is almost the same.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), at the timing tβ1 in which no notification sound is currently output, the frame opening detection by the main body frame opening switch 619 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so that it is indicated that the frame opening detection has occurred. Next, the information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information that the frame opening detection has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame opening detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after that) when no notification sound is output, the frame opening detection is detected. When it is grasped that the information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 5 (frame opening) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned (set) to the channel X and the notification is made. A timer (30 seconds) is set to start the notification sound reproduction in the mode (here, the loop of "the frame is open ping pong ping pong") and to measure the notification time of the notification sound 5 (frame open). ..

When assigning the notification sound 5 (frame opening) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and peripheral. It will be set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Will be.

At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection are transferred from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display and lamp lighting are also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp is continuously executed until the frame closing detection, which is the release condition of the frame opening detection, is performed.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "frame is open ping pong ping pong" is repeatedly executed from timing tβ1 for 30 seconds, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "frame is open"). "It is open") and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group) are executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), in the timing tβ2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tβ1 and the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is in the loop playback state, step S110 Alternatively, it is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 within the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, in the main control MPU 1310a, the state of the notification flag is first updated so as to indicate that the door opening detection has been performed, as in the case of the timing tβ1 in which the frame opening detection has been performed. Next, the information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected is output externally based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door open detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that) when the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is grasped that the information of the door opening detection is included, the notification sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. Not assigned. That is, since the notification sound 5 (frame opening) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side already assigned is preferentially reproduced and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the sound generation schedule data itself according to the door opening detection is not set at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not processed in the state of not being assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) that has not been set yet. ) Was set, and when the timer (30 seconds) was not timed up when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) was completed, the door open detection was responded. Schedule data for sound generation is set, notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop) is used. The notification sound is played back.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is not set, but the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection and the screen generation schedule data are set. By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the door opening detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the inside of the liquid crystal described above These are executed for the display and the lighting of the lamp.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the door opening appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the frame opening is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is lit, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the door opening detection is set, but the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority order is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection that has already been set is reflected in each of the various lamps, and the lighting mode data for generating the light emitting mode according to the door opening detection is lit. The mode is not reflected in each of the various lamp emissions. Similar to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the detection of opening the frame and the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode according to the detection of opening the door have the same data contents. No matter which one is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

After that, at the timing tβ3 where 30 seconds have passed from the timing tβ1, a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" is emitted based on the time-up of the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times.

At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection and sets the schedule data. By allocating the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from the timing tβ2 to the timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door” is used. Is open. Ping Pong Ping Pong "loop) will be used to play the notification sound.

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set at the timing tβ2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the door opening detection is not set and is set when the timing tβ3 is reached. Therefore, at timing tβ3, the notification sound of "door is open ping pong ping pong" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up, "door is open". It will be possible to urge the loop processing to end and stop playing at halfway timing (for example, timing such as "door is open") among the notification sounds such as "ping pong ping pong".

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (FIG. FIG. 246 (b)) When the third message sound (here, "the frame is open") and the third alarm sound (here, "ping pong ping pong") have finished playing, the fourth message sound (here, "ping pong ping pong") Here, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "the door is open") was played. As a result, "the frame is open ping pong ping pong" and "the door is open ping pong ping pong" are connected at strange places, and it becomes impossible to recognize the notification content in a tense situation. The occurrence can be suppressed suitably.

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the door open detection is shortened, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it becomes possible to surely grasp that the door is open.

FIG. 246 (c) shows the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 246 (c), at the timing tγ1 in which no notification sound is output, the game is played in spite of being in a non-time saving state in the processing of steps S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). Assuming that the gate sensor 4003 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the region on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the region 5a (right-handed detection in a non-time saving state), it is mainly In the control MPU 1310a, the information that the right-handed hit is detected in the non-time saving state is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-handed detection in the time saving state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Will be. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU1310a, and the information is not output to the hall computer externally.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after that) in which no notification sound is output, the result is in a non-time saving state. When it is grasped that the right-handed detection information is included, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) shown in FIG. 245 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer (set) for starting the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Please return to left-handed") and timing the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) (set). 20 seconds) is set.

Regarding the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state, in this embodiment, the information to that effect is output as a command from the main control MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the gate unit 2003 is played from the main control MPU 1310a. Only the information that the sphere has passed is detected by the gate sensor 4003 is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU1511a determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed in a non-time saving state. Is performed, and processing related to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state.

When assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is copied to various control data of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Will be.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and schedule data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting the storage area 1511 cage, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display is also executed. Execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes the notification end (time-up of the timer (20 seconds) for timing the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance)), which is the release condition of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). It will continue to run until. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, which has a low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid hindering the progress of the production, and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set. Will not be done.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is repeatedly executed from the timing tγ1 for 20 seconds, and the display of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. Display within the area (for example, "Please return to left-handed") will be executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (c), at the timing tγ2 in which 20 seconds have not passed from the timing tγ1 and the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is in the loop playback state, step S110 or It is assumed that the lower plate full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, in the main control MPU 1310a, as in the case of the timing tγ1 in which the right-handed hit is detected in the non-time saving state, the information that the lower plate full tank is detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the information (detection of full lower plate) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that) when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), a command is issued in the reception command analysis process in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is found that the information of the lower plate full tank detection is included, the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) shown in FIG. 245 is channeled in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). It is not assigned to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) should not be newly assigned to the channel X. By setting the setting, the playback of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already assigned is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data itself for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not processed in the state of not being assigned to the channel X.

However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (20) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) that has not yet been set. Set this for (seconds), and when the timer (20 seconds) is not timed up when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ends, the lower plate is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, "Pull out the ball in the lower plate". The notification sound is reproduced in the loop).

Further, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), although the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set, the screen is generated according to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate. By extracting the schedule data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned in-liquid crystal display is executed. There is.

In the liquid crystal display, the display corresponding to the ball removal guidance appears separately at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become.

After that, at the timing tγ3 where 20 seconds have passed from the timing tγ1, a notification sound such as "Please return to the left-handed" is emitted based on the time-up of the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). The loop processing to be repeatedly executed will be terminated. Here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" has been played twice.

At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is not in the time-up state, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the detection of the lower plate full tank. Then, by allocating the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here). Then, the notification sound is reproduced in the loop of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate").

That is, while the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is set at the timing tγ2, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the full tank of the lower plate is not set and is set when the timing tγ3 is reached. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound of "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is timed up. , "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate", the loop processing is terminated at the halfway timing (for example, the timing of "Pull out the ball of the lower plate") and it is not played. You will be able to encourage.

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (FIG. FIG. 246 (c)) When the second message sound (here, "Please return to left-handed") has finished playing, the third message sound (here, "Please pull out the ball on the lower plate") is heard. It becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if it was reproduced. As a result, "Please return to left-handed" and "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" are connected at strange points, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the notification content cannot be recognized. You will be able to do it.

Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the corresponding sound is output (silence output). It has become like. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played, silence data for 5 seconds is inserted. Since the message sound of another notification sound is reproduced in, it is preferable to generate a situation in which two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized. You will be able to avoid it.

FIG. 247 (a) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 247 (a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, the said. Regarding the processing according to the magnetic detection (magnetic anomaly processing), the same processing as in the case described with reference to FIG. 246 (a) is performed. Therefore, at the timing t-1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is started, and the timing when the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is timed up. In t-3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been reproduced for 6 times. In addition, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), 60 seconds have not passed from the timing t-1, and the notification sound such as "boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is in the loop playback state at the timing t-2. In step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94), it is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) in response to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection (see FIG. 244). ), Even if the door open detection occurs, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

And usually, for the processing on the lower priority side, as in the case where the processing of the same priority side described with reference to FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (c) overlaps, the notification sound on the lower priority side A process is performed in which only the timer is set and the schedule data for sound generation itself is not set.

However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after a magnetic anomaly occurs is different from the case where only the door is opened, and there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being carried out. It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the "second notification group" with a medium possibility of fraud. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (a), at the timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data are set. , Only set the flag according to the door open detection. Then, at the timing t-3, based on the setting of the flag, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are set, respectively. At the same time as setting, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to the channel X to start the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "door is open ping pong ping pong"). .. The execution of the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting in response to the door opening detection is started from the timing t-2.

According to such a configuration, even though the door frame opening switch 618 detected the door opening while the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" was playing in the loop, "Boo Boo magnetism was detected." From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound such as "Door is open", the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the door open detection is played in full for 30 seconds, and "Door is open Ping Pong Ping Pong". The loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as is played three times. In this way, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more polite notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority, so that the notification belonging to the second notification group is reproduced. Although it is the content (here, the "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop), it is expected to raise awareness that the situation is highly likely to be fraudulent.

In addition, after the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism has been detected", the notification content will start from the message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group is in the most tense situation. It will be possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification to which it belongs has been completed. On the other hand, by reproducing the alarm sound of "ping pong ping pong" after the message sound, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the notification does not belong to the third notification group.

FIG. 247 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 247 (b), it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 in which no notification sound is output. As for the process corresponding to the door open detection (door open process), the same process as the "frame open detection process (frame open process)" described with reference to FIG. 246 (b) is performed. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tδ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), at the timing tδ2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tδ1 and the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, the step is taken. It is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects a right-handed hit in a non-time saving state in the process of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door open detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore (see FIG. 244), the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is continuously performed even when the right-handed detection occurs in the non-time saving state.

That is, as described above, for the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as in the case where the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (c) overlaps. The process is performed so that only the timer of the above is set and the schedule data for sound generation itself is not set.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (b), at the timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set, while the sound generation corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state Schedule data is not set. Then, at the timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is not timed up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X for the number of minutes, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the loop of "return to left-handed").

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times, and the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" is not included at a good timing. Will be reproduced, so that it becomes possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the message sound has been output, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X, and the corresponding sound is output (silence output). It has become like. Therefore, even with such silent data, the notification sound of the type that has been reproduced up to that point has ended, and it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. Will be.

FIG. 247 (c) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 247 (c), it is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tε1 in which no notification sound is output. As for the process corresponding to the door open detection (door open process), the same process as the "frame open detection process (frame open process)" described with reference to FIG. 246 (b) is performed. Will be. Therefore, at the timing tε1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tε3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), at the timing tε2 in which 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tε1 and the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop playback state, step S112 It is assumed that there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of FIG. 94 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door open detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) in response to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (See FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed in both the sound and the lamp lighting. The output content will not be reflected as the operation of each actuator. As for the display in the liquid crystal, since each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during execution of the notification having a low priority. Even when a high-ranked notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator in both the sound and the lamp lighting, the timing tε2 has been set up to that point. The process of canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection from the set state may be performed.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emitting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are obtained. Is kept in the set state, and the schedule data for sound generation, the schedule data for screen generation, and the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection, which have higher priorities than the respective data, are set respectively. Put it in a state. Then, the allocation for the channel X and various lamp operations is assigned based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound generation schedule data and light emission mode generation according to the magnetic detection. By switching to the content based on the schedule data for use, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 can be output in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), at the timing tε2, no operation is performed on the process on the lower priority side in the execution state (door open process). It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process, magnetic anomaly process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (c), at the timing tδ2, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “boo-boo magnetism has been detected” is started, and the timer for the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is started. The loop processing will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" has been played 6 times in accordance with the time-up of (60 seconds). In addition, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic anomaly.

According to such a configuration, immediately after the magnetic detection that is likely to be fraudulent occurs, the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is processed in any of the sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp lighting. The output content will be reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, since an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" is first reproduced as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has been changed to a tense situation is promptly transmitted to the hall side. Will be expected.

FIG. 247 (d) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being played. It shows.

As shown in FIG. 247 (d), at the timing tζ1 in which no notification sound is output, right-handed detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state is detected in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If so, the process corresponding to the right-handed strike detection in the non-time saving state (left-handed strike guidance process) is the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 246 (c). Therefore, at the timing tζ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Please return to the left-handed” is started, and the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up at the timing tζ3. Then, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" has been played twice. In addition, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guidance, is set.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), at the timing tζ2 in which 20 seconds have not passed from the timing tζ1 and a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is being played in the loop, step S110 or It is assumed that the door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 244), priority is given to the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection, and the output content of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) processing is reflected as the actuator operation. It will be prevented from being done. As for the display in the liquid crystal, since each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during execution of the notification having a low priority. Even when a high-ranked notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, as a method of preventing the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, right-handed detection in the non-time saving state set up to that point at timing tζ2. It is also possible to perform a process of canceling the sound generation schedule data according to the set state from the set state.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state but also the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state. In addition to the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection, which has a higher priority than this, the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door open detection are also maintained in the set state. Set each generation schedule data. Then, the allocation to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection. Therefore, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) in response to the door opening detection is made so that the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp lighting.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 247 (d), at the timing tζ2, no operation is performed for the processing on the lower priority side (left-handed guidance processing) in the execution state. It becomes possible to change the notification content based on the priority between two different processes (left-handed guidance process and door opening process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 247 (d), at the timing tζ2, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is started. The loop processing will be completed at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times in accordance with the time-up of the timer (30 seconds). In addition, the liquid crystal display and the lamp lighting are continuously executed until the door closing detection, which is the condition for releasing the door opening, is performed.

According to such a configuration, immediately after the door opening detection with a medium possibility of fraudulent activity occurs, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is processed by sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. In any of the above, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound, the message sound (the door is open) is played first, so that the person who is playing the proper game does not feel disgusted, but after that. The alarm sound of "Ping Pong Ping Pong" is used to notify the second notification group, and it is expected that the hall will be notified that the situation has changed to the situation where there is a possibility of fraud. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of each notification sound shown in FIG. 244 should be output, various above-mentioned processes are performed according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents and game guidance (channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of fraud may be higher than the medium depending on other detection situations. It is hard to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority of.

In addition, the notification sound is output not only when there is an abnormality detection with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, but also when there is an abnormality detection with a low possibility of fraudulent activity. be. That is, if an abnormality is detected with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state is continued. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained due to the convenience of the hall side (recovery of various errors, etc.), so even if the detection state is continued, the output of the notification sound is not necessarily output. It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1, such as not being required to continue.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each of the situations illustrated in FIGS. 248 to 253, in addition to the control based on the above-mentioned priorities, special conditions are also taken into consideration to further change the state of the gaming machine. It is intended to realize notification in a manner that can be appropriately expressed. Hereinafter, the special notification process will be described separately for each situation with reference to FIGS. 248 to 253.

In the example shown in FIG. 248, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also generated. It is set. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will play for a second.

On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the door opening detection is maintained until the timing tα16 when the door opening is not detected by the door frame opening switch 618 arrives.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 248, at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection is completed and the channel X is in the vacant state, the magnetic detection in which the priority regarding the notification is relatively high is relatively high. Magnetic detection by the sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission corresponding to the door open detection started from the timing tα11, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, but the allocation for various lamp operations is At the timing tα13, the mode of lamp light emission corresponding to the magnetic detection is switched.

That is, at the timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection are also set. They are put into a set state. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. Will be played over.

On the other hand, as for the display in the liquid crystal and the light emission of the lamp according to the magnetic detection, the display and the light emission are maintained unless the power is turned off.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 248, the magnetic detection sensor is in a situation where the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is completed and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing. Magnetic detection by 4024 is occurring. In such a situation, a person who intends to perform some kind of fraudulent work opens the door frame 3 to open it, and then waits for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection to end. It is assumed that the magnet may have entered the detection range of the magnetic detector 4024 momentarily when trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious. Since it is such an act, there is a concern that it is not sufficient as a countermeasure only by performing the notification sound processing according to the magnetic detection. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is already turned off, magnetic detection cannot be used as an opportunity to take some measures.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing tα14 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection ends is reached, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued. Based on this, the "sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection" in which the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is set to channel X. Special processing will be performed to reassign to. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection", which causes a great sense of discomfort in the hall. It is expected that it will be generated and attract everyone's attention. Also, as a person who commits fraud, he is already relieved that "when the magnetic notification is finished, all the notification sound reproduction is finished, and it is finally possible to make the fraudulent act inconspicuous." Since the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that should have ended is played, the notification situation becomes unexpected, so it is expected that further fraudulent activities will be recognized as being too risky. Will be.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period during which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period during which the notification processing belonging to the second notification group is being performed, other channels are used. It is decided to perform a process of suppressing the volume of the assigned effect sound during the symbol change and other game sounds (process of reducing the volume to a specific value). The specific value may be a volume of 0. During the period during which the notification processing belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the other game sounds assigned to the other channels is not suppressed.

Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period during which the volume is suppressed) is whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality). It is a period during which the condition of whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being played (whether the notification sound is being played) is satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 248, the symbol variation is based on the fact that the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16 are during the period in which the notification process by the first notification group is being performed. Processing to suppress the volume of the production sound inside and other game sounds (processing to reduce the volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period from timing tα13 to tα14, notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. Based on the period during which the processing is being performed, processing for suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol fluctuation and other game sounds (processing for reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

In this embodiment, both the first notification group and the second notification group perform notification processing during the period (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16) in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed. It was decided to reduce the volume of the effect sound during the symbol fluctuation and the other game sounds to the same value during the period, but both the first notification group and the second notification group perform notification processing. During the period, the process may be performed to reduce the value to a lower value than during the period during which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states just by checking the effect sounds other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be made faster.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 248, when the timing tα16 at which the door opening detection is terminated is reached, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the volume of other game sounds is terminated. However, if the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that was already in the terminated state is played in a form connected to "reproduction of the notification sound according to magnetic detection", it is possible that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even when the timing tα16 at which the door opening detection ends is reached, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the volume of other game sounds may be continued without being suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 248, as is clear from the processing corresponding to the door opening detection, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the door opening detection is displayed during the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is reproduced. The period during which the lamp is emitted and the period during which the lamp emits light in a manner corresponding to the door opening detection are the same at the start time, but the end times are all different. In this way, by operating them so that the notification sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp emission have different roles, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds. In spite of this, it will be possible to appropriately notify the contents of abnormalities and game guidance.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 249, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, right-handed detection by the gate sensor 4003 occurs at the timing tα23 in a non-time saving state. I'm assuming a case. However, in this example, unlike the case shown in FIG. 248, since it is unlikely that an extremely malicious act is being performed, the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is terminated. At the timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated is not reproduced again. Further, in the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the mode of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and the other game sounds is not changed. By the way, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection is finished, even if the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003, it is extremely malicious. Since it is unlikely that such an act has been performed, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been terminated will not be reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is completed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 250, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) corresponding to the door open detection is completed, as shown in FIG. 248. Same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 250, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is completed at the timing tα34 within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 250, at the timing tα35 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is terminated, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection already in the terminated state is referred to as “notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection”. It will not be played in a connected manner. That is, even in the example shown in FIG. 250, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 248, after a person who intends to perform some kind of illegal work opens the door frame 3 to open it, the door open detection is performed. Waiting for the corresponding notification sound to finish playing, the magnet momentarily falls within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 while the squirt is cold. It is assumed that there is a possibility that the situation has entered. However, after the timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is closed and the magnetic detection is not generated in a non-illegal state, the magnetic detection is performed even though the door frame 3 is in such a non-illegal state. It is considered that the notification sound plays a sufficient role as the notification sound processing only by continuously playing the notification sound until the timing tα35 arrives, and the channel X is vacated in case further notification sound processing is required. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 250, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, it becomes possible to appropriately notify abnormal contents, game guidance, and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 251, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, which is shown in FIG. 248. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 251, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 251 it was waited for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection to be completed, and an attempt was made to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the squirt was cooled. Occasionally, a magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and despite the fact that a magnetic abnormality notification sound is reproduced in response to this, the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is maintained without being distracted by such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is being repositioned, and there is a possibility that more malicious cheating has been carried out. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state, while the notification sound 1 The process of resetting the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is performed.

According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection for a longer time from the time when the first magnetic detection is made to the time when 60 seconds from the timing tα44 where the second magnetic detection is made elapses. Will be able to be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is continuously reproduced without interruption during the period from the timing tα43 to the timing tα45. And finally, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected" does not end the loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop processing ends at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected". It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a big sense of discomfort in the hall.

Furthermore, at the timing tα44 where 60 seconds have passed from the timing tα44 where the second magnetic detection was performed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds). The special process of resetting the "sound generation schedule data according to the detection" and reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection", and also in the middle such as "inspecting the boo-boo magnetism". It will be reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetic detection" in which the loop processing is completed at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been completed becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection was stopped in the middle, and the notification mode appears in the hall. It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 252, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, which is shown in FIG. 248. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 252, it is assumed that the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs at the timing tα54 within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is reproduced.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 252, when waiting for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection to end and trying to secretly place a magnet for fraudulent purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the squirt is cold. Even though the magnet momentarily entered the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the notification sound of the magnetic abnormality was reproduced in response to this, the pachinko machine 1 was shaken greatly without being distracted by such a situation. It is assumed that more malicious fraud is being carried out. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is completed, the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection is reproduced in a form connected to the “notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”, and then the notification sound is reproduced. At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is terminated, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been terminated is reproduced in a form that is further connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection". ing.

Moreover, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the timer (60) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) without setting the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection. Seconds) are set, and at the timing tα55 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is finished, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. ..

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo vibration has been detected" does not end its loop processing at a good timing. For example, the loop is performed at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo vibration is detected". Since the processing will be completed, it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a great sense of discomfort in the hall.

Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the vibration detection is completed, the notification sound reproduction has already been notified for the notification time (30 seconds) for the “sound generation according to the door open detection”. The special process of setting the "schedule data" again and reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening), the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been terminated is further connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection" that is connected to the "notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection". In addition to being reproduced in, it will be reproduced in a form connected to "reproduction of notification sound according to vibration detection" in which the loop processing is completed at a halfway timing such as "inspecting boo-boo vibration". Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been completed becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of vibration detection was stopped in the middle, and the notification mode appeared in the hall. It is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a greater sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 253, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) corresponding to the frame opening detection is completed instead of the door opening detection. I'm assuming.

Even in the example shown in FIG. 253, it can be said that the situation in which the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the frame opening detection is performed is a situation in which there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed. However, on the other hand, if the magnet is used for the purpose of fraudulent activity, the door frame 3 should be in the open state, and even if the main body frame 4 is in the open state, it is beneficial to arrange the magnet. Since there is no such thing, it can be assumed that the hole side may have mistakenly detected the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when using a magnet to clear the ball clogging in the ball tank or the payout passage.

Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 253, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound corresponding to the frame opening detection already in the end state is "notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection". By regenerating in a form connected to "regeneration" (timing tα64 to tα65), it is expected that everyone's attention will be gathered by causing a great sense of discomfort in the hall. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed, not only each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) corresponding to the frame opening detection but also magnetic detection is performed. For each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp), special processing for terminating them is also performed.

According to such a configuration, while the function for fraudulent activity is appropriately performed, when the hall side is erroneously detected, the notification process corresponding to the frame opening detection and the magnetic detection is performed by simply closing the main body frame 4. Since it will be possible to terminate all notification sounds, liquid crystal display, lamps), it is expected that the hall side will respond quickly to false detections and maintain a suitable atmosphere in the hall. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 253, even when the main body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is completed while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, lamp) according to the frame open detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, in-liquid crystal display, lamp) according to the magnetic detection. You may want to perform a special process to end.

By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a player-side volume adjusting function.

For example, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in the process of step S1108 (see FIG. 217), it is monitored whether or not the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated, and the effect selection left button 331 is operated. When it is determined that the speaker volume is reduced, the player sets the speaker volume (player set value), and when it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 is operated, the player sets the speaker volume. Performs processing to increase the value (player set value). In addition, when the player setting value is lowered and the actually lowered volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pi!") Is output at the lowered volume value. On the other hand, when the player setting value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Pip!") Is output at the increased volume value. , It is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completed sound, the same sound may be output depending on whether the volume value is lowered or raised. By the way, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority as described above when there are no more empty channels (for example, "20" which is the same as the button press sound), and the output volume of the production sound (for example, the output volume of the production sound ("20"). It is possible to more reliably convey that the change in audible sound volume).

Then, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, such a volume adjustment process is performed during a period (demo display, etc.) before the game is started because the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination has not yet been performed. Not only during the period when the game can be performed), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol change according to the jackpot judgment is executed, the reception by the player is allowed, and a more important effect has appeared. By making it possible to change the volume value flexibly at times, the game is maintained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in a situation where channels of various production sounds are assigned according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation, the pachinko machine is concerned. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as a magnetic anomaly or a door opening, a process is performed in which a specific notification sound corresponding to the detection content among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output. Further, at this time, it is possible to execute the effect progress notification process for reducing the output volume to a specific value without stopping the channel allocation itself of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound among a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel allocation of various production sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not stopped. Therefore, as long as the channel allocation of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state is completed, the effect can be enjoyed again by appropriately restoring the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

However, in the above-mentioned notification process under the progress of the production, since the channel allocation of various production sounds according to the progress of the display production itself is not stopped, the amount of the specific notification sound assigned to the channel is normal ( More channels will be used than in the non-notification state), and there will be no empty channels to which sound data is not assigned before the end of the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound. The risk tends to be high. Then, if there is no free channel to which sound data is not assigned before the end of channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound, one of the sound data at that time. Since one channel allocation has to be discarded, even if the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed after that, the discarded sound data that cannot be assigned to the channel is reproduced. It is not possible, and there is a concern that the interest in games will decline.

Regarding the concern about empty channels related to the production sound, there is no direct adverse effect when the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the notification sound. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be decided from the viewpoint of the design of the game and the production. Therefore, regardless of which channel method is adopted, the above-mentioned effect progress notification process is used. It is important to prepare a processing structure that allows a common processing program to be adopted in order to reduce the cost and improve the reliability of the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the production sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound (“pi!” Or “pipi!”) Even if there is an operation by the player while the effect progress notification process is being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the channel will have a margin to reduce the risk of running out of free channels.

However, despite the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the volume value when a more important effect appears, the output volume is set while the effect progress notification process is being executed. If the change is not possible, when the notification process under the production progress is executed due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.), the appropriate volume value is set according to the content of the production progress. It is inevitable that the game interest will decline due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed to. In addition, as a result of the progress of the production during the period during which the notification processing under the progress of the production is performed, if a large deviation occurs between the appropriate volume value and the actual set value according to the content of the production, the output volume (possible). Since it became possible to change the setting of (listening sound volume), it is necessary to accept multiple operations in order to change the volume to an appropriate value, but in this case, the channel is occupied by the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. As a result, even though the notification process under the progress of the production is finally completed, there is a concern that the entertainment of the game will be deteriorated due to the lack of free channels and the inability to properly output the production sound.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the value drops to a specific value. The output volume of the produced sound (volume of the audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) itself is allowed to be changed, and the above When the notification process (the process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume is changed to the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point.

According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the set value (player set value) according to the progress of the effect while the notification process under the progress of the effect is being executed, a new operation is performed. When the effect progress notification process is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) can be changed all at once to reflect all the operations up to that point. In this way, by allowing the player to accept changes in the set value (player set value) even during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being executed, the effect progress notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in games until the game is played. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a plurality of stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and a situation occurs in which a vacant channel is insufficient due to the volume adjustment completion sound each time. Will also be preferably avoided.

According to the above configuration, when the batch change of the output volume to the player set value is executed when the effect progress notification process is completed, the game during the period during which the effect progress notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of times the user setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound will be played only once at the volume after the batch change. The sound may be output in a special mode different from that of the above (for example, "Bee!").

Furthermore, in order to more preferably solve the shortage of free channels when the effect progress notification process is completed, it depends on the number of changes of the player set value and the player during the period during which the effect progress notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of operations, it is desirable not to play the volume adjustment completion sound itself when changing the output volume (audible sound volume) all at once as the production progress notification process ends. .. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the notification process under the production progress due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) is finally completed, an appropriate production is performed due to a shortage of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the person cannot enjoy the door.

Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of such an effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume) will be described.

FIG. 254 is a diagram for explaining the content of the notification process under the progress of the effect separately for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1.

First, prior to explaining the process from the execution of the effect progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume), the content of the effect progress notification process is described with reference to FIG. 254. Will be briefly explained. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 244 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 254, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression modes (first volume suppression mode and second volume suppression mode) are prepared as volume suppression modes of the effect sound. For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (player set value) regarding the volume, the output volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the range of "20" to "50" is changed. Among the possibilities, the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "0". Therefore, the second volume suppression mode has a higher degree of suppression than the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this explanatory example, although the processing itself related to the output is performed, the production sound is silenced. It is illustrated as a thing to make.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud When the notification process relating to any of these is executed, the process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode, which is the side with the higher degree of suppression. Moreover, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even if the abnormality detection is turned off, From the time when the abnormality is detected until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses, the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode, which is the side with the higher degree of suppression. ) Is not terminated, but is continued.

In this explanatory example, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, grand prize abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound). The period during which the process of suppressing the volume) is continued is the same as the period from the playback of the notification sound (magnetic anomaly, vibration anomaly, grand prize anomaly) corresponding to the abnormality detection to the end of this. Is set to.

On the other hand, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door opening, frame opening) belonging to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud is executed among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the degree of suppression is high. The process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed in the first volume suppression mode, which is the lower side of the sound. However, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, that time point. Then, the process of suppressing the output volume (volume of the audible sound) of the effect sound is terminated in the first volume suppression mode on the side where the degree of suppression is low.

On the other hand, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guidance, ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance is executed among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the effectability The emphasis is on maintaining the sound, and no processing is performed to suppress the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound).

In this explanatory example, the suppression mode is different depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is not always necessary to make the difference, and the output volume of the effect sound is produced in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. A process for suppressing (volume of audible sound) may be performed. However, the termination condition of the process to be suppressed is different in the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is stricter than the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to be able to do it.

FIG. 255 shows the contents of the process related to the volume adjustment accompanying the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process related to the notification sound has not been executed. It is a figure explaining.

In this explanatory example, the player setting value is changed by "1" within the range of "1" to "5" by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. The smaller the value, the lower the volume of the effect sound. Further, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is set by the player when the above-mentioned suppression mode (first volume suppression mode, second volume suppression mode) is not set for the production sound. It is set as a value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this explanatory example, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is made variable in the range of "20" to "100" by the operation by the player.

Now, as shown in FIG. 255 (A), the player setting value regarding the volume of the effect sound is "3" out of "1" to "5", and no notification flag is set. , It is assumed that the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is set to "60", which is 20 times that volume. Further, assuming that the decorative symbol SZ is in the stopped state and the jackpot determination is not performed and the start winning prize is awaited, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect selection left button 331 is imitated. The displayed display image 331a and the display image 332a imitating the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guidance display OAH indicating that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that makes it possible to recognize which of the current player setting values "1" to "5" is is also executed. NS. The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed at all times, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect which is a reach effect executed in a state where the background image is changed. At least one of the first volume value display OH1 and the second volume value display OH2 described later may appear when the player operates the image. Further, regarding the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, it is not always necessary to display both of them, and one of them may be omitted and only the other may be displayed.

In such a situation shown in FIG. 255 (A), when an operation is performed by the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332, the player setting value is set to "1" each time the operation is performed. The output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20" accordingly. In addition, each time the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") Is reproduced at the volume after the change.

At this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a gauge display indicates which of the current set values is in the range of the player set values "1" to "5". The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 255 (C)) will be executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, which will be described later.

If the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player set value is "1", neither the player set value nor the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is lowered, and the game is played. The person setting value remains "1" (the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) remains "20"). Therefore, even if the effect selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel, the volume is set to "1". It is desirable to prevent audible output by setting it to "0". This also applies when the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player set value is “5”.

On the other hand, when a start winning prize is generated and a big hit judgment is made, as shown in FIG. 255 (B), the decorative symbol SZ fluctuates in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit judgment and the type of the fluctuation pattern. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is advanced, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In this regard, in the volume adjustment process according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 255 (A) (the period during which the demo display or the like can be performed) but also the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination after the game is started. It is designed to allow reception by the player even during the execution period, and the volume value is agile when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. 255 (C) appears. As described above, the configuration is such that the setting can be changed.

That is, FIG. 255 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice as the reach effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 255 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", and the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is 20 times that of "60" →. Under the setting change to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played at the changed volume "80", and in the second operation, the player setting is performed. The value has been changed from "4" to "5", and the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) has been changed from "80" to "100", which is 20 times that value. At "100", which is the volume after the change, the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played.

Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player set value is changed by such an operation, it is within the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value. The second volume value display OH2, which indicates which is the current set value by the gauge display, is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH. This is to clarify which of the current setting values is for the range of the player setting values "1" to "5", even in a tense situation where a more important effect appears. , The purpose is to prevent an operation error such as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". In the gauge display, the numerical range of "1" to "5" is constantly displayed as blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased or decreased according to the change of the player set value. Is displayed to indicate the current player setting value.

The second volume value display OH2 is displayed from the time when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 255 (C) as shown in FIG. 255 (D). It is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, and then the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in such a manner that the player set value does not change (the operation for the effect selection right button 332 when the player set value is the maximum value "5"), the effect selection left button 331 Alternatively, as long as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation is performed in such a manner that the player set value does not change (the operation for the effect selection right button 332 when the player set value is the maximum value "5"). When is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is hidden is reset. As a result, it is more preferably promoted to prevent an operation error such as the operation for the effect selection right button 332 being repeatedly executed even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". become.

On the other hand, in FIG. 256, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the door opening detection is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation and the processing related to the notification sound corresponding to the detection is executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process related to the volume adjustment accompanying this.

The situation shown in FIG. 256A is a situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 255A. When a start winning prize is generated and a jackpot determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 256B, the result and variation of the jackpot determination are the same as in the situation described with reference to FIG. The decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is advanced, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed accordingly. More specifically, loop processing (30 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "" "The door is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively.

Further, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group is generated and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed during the fluctuation period of the symbol, the first volume suppression mode is used. The effect progress notification process that suppresses the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (B), the player setting value is maintained at "3", which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 256 (A), but the effect is produced. The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, "10"), which is lower than the original value (20 times the player's set value). The content of the production will be developed based on the volume value.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is performed while such the effect progress notification process is being executed, the first identification is performed. The output volume (audible sound volume) of the production sound, which has been lowered to the value (here, "10"), is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) regarding the volume is this. Accepting changes to itself, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (process to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point As mentioned above, it is changed all at once.

That is, FIG. 256 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice as the reach effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 256 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, "10"), which is lower than the value set by the person (20 times), is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the production content is advanced with the volume of the first specific value.

At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is first specified. Since the value (here, "10") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, "10"), the volume adjustment completed sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, the second volume value display OH2 indicating by the gauge display that the current set value is "4" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value is The volume adjustment guidance display is executed in place of the OAH, and the value is changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, so that the second volume value has been received. In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value. Even in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

After that, the door frame 3 is closed while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is returned to the state of being executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) and the notification processing under the production progress (output volume up to a specific value). When each of the lowering process) is completed, as shown in FIG. 256 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is reached according to the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and "5" according to the second operation during the execution period of the effect progress notification process. Since it has changed, the output volume (audible sound volume) should normally be "80" from the first specific value (here, "10") according to the first operation, and the second operation. Where it should be gradually changed to "100" according to the above, the first specific value (here, "10") will be changed to "100" in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

In this way, by allowing the player to accept changes in the set value (player set value) even during the period during which the effect progress notification process is being executed, the effect progress notification process ends. It will be expected to suppress the decline in the interest in games until the game is played. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage or no margin in the vacant channel. The occurrence of such a situation will also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, when the output volume (volume of the audible sound) is changed all at once (“10” → “100”) as the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, the output volume changes. Nevertheless, the channel allocation of the volume adjustment completed sound itself is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the notification process under the production progress due to false detection or notification due to the hall side convenience (door opening, etc.) is finally completed, an appropriate production is performed due to a shortage of free channels. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the person cannot enjoy the door.

On the other hand, in FIG. 257, when the state detection generated in FIG. 256 is a magnetic anomaly instead of opening the door, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection is performed while the processing related to the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is being executed. It is a figure explaining the content about the process related to the volume adjustment accompanying the operation of the right button 332.

The situation shown in FIG. 257 (A) is a situation before the symbol change is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (A). When a start winning prize is generated and a jackpot determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 257 (B), the result and variation of the jackpot determination are the same as in the situation described with reference to FIG. 256 (B). The decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variablely displayed, the predetermined effect is advanced, and the effect sound corresponding to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

In the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to the magnetic detection is executed. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism has been detected" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetic detection"). And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively.

Further, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group is generated during the fluctuation period of the symbol and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is executed in response to the magnetic detection, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. The effect progress notification process that suppresses the sound output volume (audible sound volume) will be performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (B), the player setting value is maintained at "3", which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (A). The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, "0"), which is lower than the original value (20 times the player's set value). The content of the production will be developed based on the volume value (here, mute).

In this regard, even when the effect progress notification process is executed in response to such a magnetic anomaly, when the operation for the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is performed, the second specific value (here, "0") is performed. The output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound (mute in this case)) that has been lowered to () is not variable and is maintained, while the player's setting value (player setting value) itself regarding the volume. The change reception is allowed, and when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (process to reduce the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is displayed. As mentioned above, the changes are made all at once.

That is, FIG. 257 (C) shows a state after the player has performed the operation with the effect selection right button 332 twice as the reach effect is executed in the state shown in FIG. 257 (B). Even though the player setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the second specific value (here, "0 (silence)"), which is lower than the value set by the person, is maintained. Therefore, even if the player performs the operation by the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound is until the above-mentioned effect progress notification process (process of reducing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the production content is advanced with the volume of the second specific value.

At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) is specified second. Since the value (here, "0") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, "0"), the volume adjustment completed sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, the second volume value display OH2 indicating by the gauge display that the current set value is "4" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value is The volume adjustment guidance display is executed in place of the OAH, and the value is changed from "3" to "4" and displayed on the first volume value display OH1 as well.

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and the player operation for adjusting the volume has been accepted, so that the second volume value has been received. In the display OH2, the gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value. Even in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

Incidentally, in this explanatory example, in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (C), the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detection state. However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the production sound (volume of the audible sound) in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses after the magnetic detection occurs. The notification process under the progress of the production is continuously executed.

After that, a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) has elapsed since the magnetic detection was performed while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH was returned to the state of being executed again, and the effect progress notification process (output volume was specified). When the process of lowering to the value) is completed, as shown in FIG. 257 (D), the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point is reached according to the completion of the process. Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and "5" according to the second operation during the execution period of the effect progress notification process. Since it has changed, the output volume (audible sound volume) should normally be "80" from the second specific value (here, "0") according to the first operation, and the second operation. Where it should be gradually changed to "100" according to the above, the second specific value (here, "0") will be changed to "100" in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

When the notification process corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process corresponding to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 257 (D), the game board side effect display device. The display in the display area of 1600 (here, "magnetic detection") and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are still executed. There is. That is, in the notification processing according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is finished, the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, and the production sound is excluded from the suppression target and corresponds to the player set value. On the other hand, in the notification processing according to the opening of the door, even if the notification sound ends, the production sound remains the suppression target while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued. It is supposed to be.

In this way, even if a magnetic anomaly occurs, the player is allowed to change the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. , It will be expected to suppress the deterioration of the game interest until the notification processing under the progress of the production is completed. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages immediately after the notification process under the progress of the production is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound each time causes a shortage or no margin in the vacant channel. The occurrence of such a situation will also be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this explanatory example, the output volume (audible sound volume) is also output when the output volume (audible sound volume) is changed all at once (“0” → “100”) when the effect progress notification process due to the magnetic anomaly is completed. Even though the volume changes, the channel allocation of the volume adjustment completed sound itself is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, a situation in which an appropriate production cannot be enjoyed due to a shortage of free channels even though the notification processing under the production progress caused by the notification due to the false detection is finally completed. Can be suitably suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 244, the initial volume of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening such as "the door is open ping pong ping pong" and the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic abnormality such as "boo-boo magnetism was detected". Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the third byte of the value, the sound is always played at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player set value.

Further, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is executed, the notification processing under the progress of the production is not executed. Therefore, the player is set during the execution of these notifications. It is possible to appropriately change both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound). However, as shown in FIG. 244, these notification sounds 6 and 7 are also set to "1" (0x1FF) in the third byte of the initial volume value, regardless of the player setting value. It will always be played at the volume set by the initial value.

Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) belonging to the third notification group, "1" is not set in the third byte of the initial volume value, and "1" is not set. It may be included in the target of volume adjustment by the player.

Further, for each process described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257, the state is detected not only during the execution period of the symbol change but also before the start of the symbol change and in a form straddling the start and end timings of the symbol change. Even when the notification process according to the above is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

Further, in each of the processes described with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257, after the effect progress notification process is completed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button is the same as before the effect progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation by 332, the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, each time the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") Is reproduced at the volume after the change.

Further, the processing described with reference to FIG. 256 and the processing described with reference to FIG. 257 are made to have different suppression modes of the production sound during the period during which the production progress notification processing is being performed, but the suppression mode is not necessarily the same. It is not necessary to make them different, and the output volume (audible sound) of the effect sound is produced in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the process of suppressing the volume of the sound) may be performed.

Further, in the effect progress notification process, the output volume (volume of audible sound) of various game sounds is suppressed, and among these game sounds, the game ball is placed at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Some game sounds, such as the sound played according to the winning (winning sound), may be played at the default volume without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is being continued even though the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1 has occurred. In this sense, some sounds (winning sounds), such as sounds played in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 when the effect progress notification process is being executed. It is desirable that the game sound be reproduced as a special sound that cannot be output when the effect progress notification process is not executed.

As described above, in FIGS. 244 to 257, there is no vacancy in the channel by adopting a channel saving type control structure that can appropriately notify the abnormal content etc. with only a single channel for various notification sounds. (Situation where the number of free channels is 0) It was proposed to make technical ingenuity in terms of how to make it difficult to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation where there is no space in the channel to which the effect sound effect (effect sound) is assigned (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), and the effect design Concerns remain about the emergence of the above unintended mode of sound output.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various technical techniques are required for channel allocation of the production sound at a stage prior to the occurrence of a situation where there is no vacancy in the channel (a situation where the number of vacant channels is 0). I try to devise it. Hereinafter, various technical measures made regarding the output of the production sound will be described in sequence. In adopting these technical devices as the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned channel-saving control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents and the like with only a single channel for various notification sounds is not necessarily adopted. You don't have to. Further, in each of the examples described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. Further, when the automatic channel method is adopted, it is not always necessary to adopt the control based on the above-mentioned priority, and when all the channels are in use, a process of discarding a new sound may be performed. good. In addition, the examples described below can be implemented in appropriate combinations.

[Channel reservation processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not a specific action such as "an act of holding a hand over the pachinko machine 1 to pray" or "a button operation" has been performed. It can be detected by the detection means. When it is detected that such a specific action has been performed, for example, a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation, such as a sound corresponding to silent data composed of only silent sound (output sound with a volume of 0). By executing a process of assigning a sound to a channel for a predetermined time (channel reservation process), the channel is kept from being used by another sound. On the other hand, while the channel reservation process is being performed in this way, even if a special production condition such as a jackpot confirmation effect or a look-ahead effect is satisfied as a result of the game ball being accepted in the specific winning opening, that is the case. At this point, the special sound corresponding to the effect is not assigned to the channel. Then, after waiting for the channel reservation process to be completed, it is possible to execute an effect of assigning a special sound to a channel and playing it (post-announcement effect).

That is, in this case, at least one of the channels that can be assigned the special sound is reserved in advance (channel reservation) by a predetermined sound that does not show any expectation due to the specific action by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a special sound cannot be output due to a lack of channels even though a special result is obtained in the judgment according to the winning.

Regarding the special sound, for example, in addition to the big hit confirmation sound that is executed only when the big hit is won by the big hit judgment according to the prize, the production mode based on the big hit judgment according to the prize is highly expected (for example). , High-expected advance notice effect performed during execution of reach effect) is selected, and pre-reading is performed when a predetermined judgment result is obtained by pre-reading judgment according to winning. It is possible to exemplify a look-ahead notification sound that is executed as an effect, but the point is that it is assigned to a channel and output when a special judgment result is obtained by a judgment by a predetermined judgment means according to a prize. Anything that can be done will do.

FIG. 258 shows, prior to outputting a special sound (for example, a cure) that matches the so-called look-ahead effect as a “special sound” when the game ball wins a prize at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A channel to which a special sound can be assigned is in a state in which the special sound has not been output (more accurately, a determination to output a special sound (a determination to perform a look-ahead effect) has not yet been made). It is a time chart which shows an example about the channel reservation processing which is reserved in advance from time to time.

First, prior to explaining an example of the channel reservation process, first, a general pre-reading effect, which is a well-known technique, will be briefly described.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a prize is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out based on the prize. , The first and second starting port winning processes (steps S5231 to S5234) shown in FIG. 134 are performed. In the first and second starting port winning processes (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the starting port (first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004). As described above, when it is determined that a prize has been won, a process of increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1 is performed.

Further, as described above, in the first and second starting port winning processes (FIG. 134: steps S5231 to S5234), a look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the winning starting port side is also executed (FIG. FIG. 135: Step S5245, FIG. 136: Step S5255).

Here, as described above, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. be. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information on winning for pre-reading determination, symbol type for pre-reading determination). Information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information on a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side suggests the judgment result (or the degree of expectation) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol, as described above. It is a production to do. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information on a stage before the final determination, such as an SP reach group, a normal reach group, a latent hit group among the symbol types, and a small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, the information (pre-reading command) obtained from the read-ahead command when the determination process of whether or not the jackpot has been won and the symbol variation thereof have not been digested and they are put on hold Expectations as to whether the jackpot judgment that has been put on hold will obtain a special result based on the information related to the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side and the information related to the look-ahead effect on the second special figure side). It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests the degree in advance.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a start-up prize has occurred, and when in that situation, controls the hold display and the look-ahead effect according to the start-up prize. After that, by updating the processing flag of the special symbol based on the grasped game situation, the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing, fluctuation pattern setting processing, fluctuation processing, big hit game processing, and small hit establishment time shown in FIG. 256 are performed. Perform one of the processes. Among these, in the control related to the look-ahead effect, for example, a new hold display according to the start winning prize is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, blue with relatively low expectation and red with relatively high expectation). When it is determined whether or not to perform a specific look-ahead effect that suggests the expectation of look-ahead depending on whether it is displayed, and it is determined that the mode (for example, blue, red, or no look-ahead effect is not performed) according to the result of the determination. The process of performing the hold display is performed in the normal display mode). As a result, until the jackpot determination corresponding to the hold display is digested, the look-ahead effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is suggested in advance by the display mode is executed.

By the way, in such a look-ahead effect, when a hold display (including a hold display for confirming a big hit) appears in a highly expected manner, a special sound (for example, a cure) may be output in accordance with the look-ahead execution. many. However, since such a special sound (pre-reading effect) is played at the timing of winning the game ball that occurs irregularly, the winning of the game ball occurs at the timing when there is no space in the channel, and the pre-reading judgment is made. If there is a chance of winning, the player can recognize that the special sound is not played even though the look-ahead judgment is won, and the hold display appears in a mode with high expectation (blue or red). There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline without it.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 258, as described above, the special sound is output before the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 is made to win the game ball and the special sound (look-ahead effect) is output. The channel that can be assigned is prior to the time when the special sound is not output (more accurately, the judgment to output the special sound (the judgment to perform the look-ahead effect) has not been made yet). It is possible to execute the channel reservation process reserved in.

For example, at the timing tY10 shown in FIG. 258, the number of jackpot determinations (number of holds) currently in the hold state is 0, and the normal background display appears in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Assuming that the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the player usually wins a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in order to increase the number of holdings. The game (handle operation) is performed so as to be performed. As a result, when a game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a maximum of four jackpot determinations are put on hold according to the winning, and the jackpot determinations are made. Each time it is put on hold, processing related to hold display and look-ahead effect according to the winning is performed.

Here, as a look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (first prize) in the order of winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. If the third prize (third hold) and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. Then, when the pre-reading determination is won and the pre-reading effect is performed, a special sound (for example, a cure) is output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (each timing when the winning pre-reading determination is performed) and a specific mode. The hold display with will appear.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed is also, for example, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (first prize) in the order of winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. If the third prize (third hold) and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occur, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. However, when the look-ahead judgment is won and the look-ahead effect is performed, a special sound (for example, a cure) is not output at the timing when the corresponding hold occurs (the timing when the prize is won), but this is maintained in the state of waiting for execution. The special sound (for example, cure) is output after waiting for the channel targeted for the channel reservation process to become free. The hold display having a specific mode may be made to appear at the timing when a special sound (for example, a cure) is output, or may be made to appear at the timing when the hold that wins the look-ahead determination occurs. good. However, when the hold display with a specific mode appears at the timing when the hold that wins the look-ahead judgment occurs, the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is executed and the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed In any of the look-ahead effects, it is desirable that only one mode (for example, only red) can appear as a specific mode.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a hand is held near the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a non-contact type sensor (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) (for example, an ultrasonic sensor or an infrared sensor) (not shown) is used. Detects this as an object and triggers the channel reservation process to start.

For example, at the timing tY11 shown in FIG. 258, the player holds his / her hand near the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and this is detected as an object. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a prayer effect mode based on the detection. In this prayer production mode, first, the prayer mode background display in which the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as a background image in the display area of the game board side production display device 1600 is performed, and "countdown A process of assigning "audio" to a predetermined channel and playing it is performed. The countdown voice starts from "30", counts down every second, and ends when the countdown reaches "0". Further, even during the period in which the prayer mode background display is displayed in this way, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect in which the decorative design is variablely displayed in a predetermined effect pattern is continuously executed.

However, the player holds his hand over the front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 for the "shrine torii (pray mode background display)" in such a display area and the "countdown sound" in the predetermined channel. This can be generated as an opportunity (detection by the sensor) only by itself, and it is not related to the production content (production that suggests the degree of expectation) that is progressing within the ongoing symbol fluctuation. It does not depend on the result of the jackpot judgment. Therefore, the display and sound generated when the player holds his hand may be changed to different contents as appropriate, but by performing such processing, a predetermined time (30 seconds) is determined. It is now possible to keep the channel in use (here, the state of use by "countdown voice" that does not show any expectation), and until this predetermined time (30 seconds) elapses. It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which another sound that does not know when it ends is assigned to a predetermined channel (channel reservation processing).

Then, until the predetermined time (30 seconds) in which the channel reservation process is executed elapses, the player plays a game so that the game ball is won in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. (Handle operation) will be performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 258, the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), the third prize (third hold), and the fourth prize (fourth hold) occurred. Then, the process related to the look-ahead effect is performed at each timing when the hold occurs. However, as described above, while the "countdown sound" is being played (while the channel reservation process is being executed), the judgment result (look-ahead winning) that the look-ahead effect is performed as the result of the judgment according to the winning is Even if it is obtained, a special sound (for example, a cure) is not assigned to the channel at the time of winning, and this is stored as a waiting state for execution. The special sound (for example, cure) that is in the waiting state in this way is output as a post-notification sound that is output after the winning time at the timing tY12 when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed from the timing tY11. Become.

On the other hand, a prize is generated between the time when the player holds his hand and starts the playback of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation processing) by his own will and the time when this is finished (timing tY11 to tY12). If there is no prize, or if a special judgment result is not obtained although a prize is generated (the pre-reading effect is not won), it is special even if the timing tY12 at which the playback of the "countdown sound" ends is reached. No sound is played.

According to such a configuration, between the time when the player holds his hand and starts the playback of the "countdown sound" (channel reservation processing) by his own will and the time when this is finished (timing tY11 to tY12). If a prize is generated and a special judgment result (look-ahead winning) is obtained by the judgment according to the prize, the special sound (cue) is not output at that time and the "countdown voice" is output. It will be executed as a post-notification effect to output at the timing when the channel is finished and a vacancy occurs. Therefore, even though a special determination result (pre-reading winning) is obtained, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the special sound cannot be output due to the absence of a free channel. Further, no matter which timing between timings tY11 to tY12, a special determination result (pre-reading winning) is obtained, a special sound (cuein) corresponding to the special sound (cuein) is provided at one timing at which at least one channel has a vacancy. Since the playback is aimed at tY12, a special judgment result (pre-reading) within a relatively long time of timings tY11 to tY12 is required as long as it is confirmed whether or not a special sound (cure) is generated at timing tY12. You will be able to easily recognize whether you have won).

When the special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-notification sound, it may be assigned to any of the channels that are vacant at the timing tY12 and played. However, if the special sound (cuein) is selectively assigned to the predetermined channel to which the "countdown voice" has been assigned so far, the channel reservation process and the corresponding post-announcement effect can be performed with only one channel. It can be said that it is beneficial in that it can be realized and the range of production can be expanded within a limited number of channels.

Further, in this embodiment, regarding the prayer mode background display in which the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as the background image, the timing tY12 at which the playback of the "countdown sound" ends and the playback of the special sound (cuein) are performed. It is designed to continue to be displayed even after the timing of termination has arrived. This is based on the fact that those who request the execution of such a channel reservation process tend to hold their hands to re-occur the channel reservation process each time the number of reservations decreases, and before holding their hands. Considering that it seems that there is a benefit when you hold your hand over the "Torii of the shrine" as a background image (the probability that the special sound will be played at the timing of the later announcement will increase). Yes, the prayer mode background display is continued until a specific condition unrelated to the channel reservation process is satisfied (for example, a button release operation). However, in reality, the player holds his hand over even if the "Torii of the shrine" is displayed as the background image or the "Torii of the shrine" is not displayed as the background image. When this is detected, the process of maintaining the predetermined channel in the allocated state for a predetermined time is only performed by the predetermined sound (countdown sound). Therefore, the timing tY12 at which the reproduction of the “countdown sound” is terminated. Alternatively, the display may be returned to the normal background display at the timing when the reproduction of the special sound (cuein) as the post-notification sound is finished.

Further, when the player holds his hand again during the period of timings tY11 to tY12 and this is detected, the playback time of the "countdown voice" is from the timing when a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds) elapses from the re-detection. May be extended to output a special sound according to the pre-reading winning when the timing is reached.

In addition, such a prayer effect mode is executed based on the fact that a specific action by the player is detected not only when the symbol fluctuation is in the fluctuating state but also when the symbol fluctuation is not in the fluctuating state. You may try to do it. Further, the specific action may be an action to be detected by the contact type sensor, such as a predetermined button operation, in addition to the action to be detected by the non-contact type sensor.

However, when the special sound (cuein) is output as such a post-notification sound, the first prize (first hold) and the second prize (second prize) are compared with the case where the special sound (cuein) is output at the time of winning. Since it is difficult to know which of the 2nd hold), the 3rd prize (3rd hold), and the 4th prize (4th hold) has obtained the special judgment result (look-ahead winning), the look-ahead winning There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the pending digestion without recognizing that the pending is held. On the other hand, the content reproduced as a special sound is not a uniform sound (here, "cuein"), but the first prize (first hold), the second prize (second hold), and the third prize (first prize). It is also conceivable to make the difference depending on which hold of the 4th prize (4th hold) is pre-read and won. However, with this, the content of the sound played in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed (here, "Kyuin") changes, so it is possible to grasp that the look-ahead was won. There is concern that it will disappear.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a special determination result is obtained for any timing between the timings tY11 to tY12 (first hold, second hold, third hold, fourth hold). A process of varying the reproduction time of the special sound (here, "cuein") starting from the timing tY12 is performed depending on whether (pre-reading winning) is obtained.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 258, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the first winning (first hold) of winning at an extremely early timing between timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound (here, "cuein") is reproduced for 3 seconds from the timing tY12.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 259, a case where a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the second winning (second hold) in which the winning is made at a relatively early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. Assuming, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 6 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, and if a special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 6 seconds, "Kyuin" is played twice. Then, a sound in the form of "cure cue in" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 260, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the third winning (third hold), which is won at a relatively late timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 9 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, if a special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 9 seconds, "Kyuin" is 3 It is played back in batches and a sound in the form of "cure cue cue in" is output.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 261, it is assumed that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) is obtained in the fourth winning (fourth hold) in which the winning is performed at an extremely late timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced for 12 seconds from the timing tY12. Here, since the time required to play "Kyuin" once is 3 seconds, if a special sound (here, "Kyuin") is played for 12 seconds, "Kyuin" is 4 It is played back in batches and outputs a sound in the form of "Kyuin Kyuin Kyuin Kyun".

According to such a configuration, when a special sound is output at the timing tY12, it is possible to grasp that a special determination result (look-ahead winning) has been obtained between the timings tY11 to tY12, as well as the timing. It becomes possible to predict at which timing between tY11 and tY12 a special determination result (look-ahead winning) was obtained by winning a prize. In this example, it is suggested that the shorter the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more the special judgment result (look-ahead winning) was obtained by the winning that occurred at the earlier timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. Therefore, the longer the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12, the more it is suggested that the special judgment result (look-ahead winning) was obtained by the winning that occurred at the later timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. ..

In this example, it can be assumed that only the first prize is generated between the timings tY11 to tY12 and a special determination result is obtained according to the prize, but also in this case, depending on the timing when the prize is generated. Therefore, the length of the reproduction time of the special sound from the timing tY12 is changed as described above. However, instead of this, considering that the number of holds is limited to 4 at the maximum, if a special judgment result is obtained in the first prize, the special sound is "cue" 1 regardless of the prize timing. Set the playback time for the second prize, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the second prize, set the special sound to the playback time for the second "Kyuin" regardless of the winning timing, and make a special judgment in the third prize. If a result is obtained, the special sound is set to the playback time for 3 times of "Kyuin" regardless of the winning timing, and if a special judgment result is obtained in the 4th winning, the special sound is set regardless of the winning timing. May be set to the playback time for four "cueins".

Further, in this embodiment, when a look-ahead winning is obtained, "cuein" is played as a special sound, but the first judgment result (for example, a relatively high degree of expectation) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment when a prize is won. The reproduced content as a special sound may be changed depending on whether a low look-ahead winning (low look-ahead winning) or a second determination result (for example, a relatively high expectation look-ahead winning) is obtained. For example, if the first judgment result (for example, a look-ahead winning with a relatively low expectation) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment when a prize is won, "Kyuin" is played as a special sound, whereas the look-ahead when a prize is won is played. When the second judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the judgment, if "Dokan" is reproduced as a special sound, it occurs at any timing between timings tY11 to tY12. In addition to predicting whether or not a pre-reading win was obtained by winning, the first judgment result (relatively low expectation pre-reading winning) and the second judgment result (relatively high expectation pre-reading winning) It will also be possible to make predictions about which one was obtained. In this case, it is desirable to reproduce "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound according to the determination result even in the look-ahead effect when the channel reservation process is not executed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 262, the first judgment result (pre-reading winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) is performed in the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) in which the winning is performed at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. ) Is obtained, and the second judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively high expectation) is obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the fourth winning (fourth hold) that won the prize at an extremely late timing. However, in this case, the special sound is reproduced in the "cure" mode for 3 seconds from the timing tY12, and then the special sound is reproduced in the "dokan" mode for another 9 seconds.

According to such a configuration, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the "cure" mode is 3 seconds, the first prize is won at an extremely early timing among the timings tY11 to tY12 (1st prize). It becomes possible to predict that the first determination result (pre-reading winning with a relatively low degree of expectation) has been obtained by the look-ahead determination in the first hold). In addition, by confirming that the playback time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), it was possible to win the pre-reading in the pre-reading judgment in the 4th prize (4th hold), which was won at an extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp. Further, in response to the fact that the first judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation) was obtained in the pre-reading judgment in the first winning (first hold) in which the prize was won at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the form of "dokan" after the one "cure" that has been played is completed, the second pre-reading judgment in the fourth prize (fourth hold) is the second. It will be possible to predict that a judgment result (pre-reading winning with relatively low expectation) has been obtained.

Alternatively, when the first judgment result (first look-ahead winning on the first special figure side) is obtained by the look-ahead judgment according to the winning of the first start port 2002, "cuein" is reproduced as a special sound. , When the second judgment result (the look-ahead winning on the second special figure side) is obtained by the look-ahead judgment according to the winning of the second start port 2004, "Dokan" may be reproduced as a special sound. .. In this case, even in the pre-reading effect when the channel reservation process is not executed, either the pre-reading determination according to the winning of the first starting port 2002 or the pre-reading determination according to the winning of the second starting port 2004 is performed. Depending on the presence, it is desirable to play "cuein" or "dokan" as a special sound.

According to such a configuration, for example, when the situation shown in FIG. 262 occurs, by confirming that the reproduction time of the special sound in the "cure" mode is 3 seconds, the timings tY11 to tY12 can be set. The first prize (first hold) that won the prize at an extremely early timing is the prize to the first starting port 2002 side, and the first judgment result (the first special figure side) is the pre-reading judgment corresponding to this. It will be possible to predict that the look-ahead winning) has been obtained. In addition, by confirming that the playback time of the special sound itself was performed for 12 seconds (3 + 9 seconds), the look-ahead was won even in the look-ahead judgment in the 4th prize (4th hold), which was won at an extremely late timing. It is possible to grasp that. Further, according to the fact that the first judgment result (first look-ahead winning on the first special figure side) is obtained in the look-ahead judgment in the first prize (first hold) in which the prize is won at an extremely early timing between the timings tY11 to tY12. By confirming that the special sound is being played in the form of "dokan" after the one "cure" that has been played is completed, the fourth prize (fourth hold) is on the second starting port 2004 side. It becomes possible to predict that the second determination result (the look-ahead winning on the second special figure side) has been obtained by the look-ahead judgment corresponding to the winning prize.

As described above, in this embodiment, as an example of channel control in the case where a special determination result is obtained based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening while the channel reservation process is being executed. , The case where the look-ahead winning in the look-ahead effect is obtained is illustrated. However, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262 is, in short, a gaming machine in which a determination process is performed when a game ball is received in a specific winning opening, and the determination process is special. Channel control (channel reservation processing, etc.) that makes it possible to avoid a channel shortage that occurs when a special sound is output when a judgment result is obtained and cannot be output. Therefore, it is clear that the application example is not necessarily limited to the look-ahead winning in the look-ahead effect.

[Channel usage restrictions]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment monitors the number of vacant channels as the game progresses, and when the number becomes less than a predetermined number, at least a part of the game sounds of the various game sounds is recorded. The ratio of restricting the execution of output-related processing is increased (channel usage restriction). That is, in this case, at least for some game sounds, the execution of the processing related to the output is restricted from the stage before the number of free channels becomes 0, and is executed as the number of free channels approaches 0. Since the rate of restriction becomes high, it becomes possible to make it difficult to reduce the number of free channels to zero.

More specifically, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, each time the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested (every time the start condition is satisfied), the digested symbol variation Determine the availability of channels during the execution period. As a result, when there is a margin in the availability of the channel, the ratio of channel use restriction (channel restriction level) is lowered at least until the symbol variation to be determined is completed, and the channel is vacant. When there is no room in the situation, the ratio of channel use restriction (channel restriction level) is increased at least until the symbol variation that is the judgment target is completed, and the channel restriction with such symbol variation as one unit is set. By executing this, the occurrence of a situation in which the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution period of the symbol variation targeted for determination is suppressed. As will be described later, a plurality of level values are prepared as the channel restriction level, and the higher the level value, the higher the ratio of restricting the execution of the process related to the output of the game sound.

FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the process related to the setting of such a channel restriction level.

It is assumed that it is determined that the pattern command (variation pattern) has been received from the main control board 1310 in the process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, as shown in FIG. 263, the value of the previously set channel limit level is reset as the process of step S3101. The reset process (step S3101) may be performed when the symbol variation is completed.

Next, as the process of step S3102, based on the type of the effect pattern of the first half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, the period of the first half of the variation (for example, the period from the start of the symbol variation to the start of the reach effect, or the symbol Specify "X", which is the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) based on the timing when the channel becomes the least vacant within the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the symbol without starting the reach effect. do. Further, as the process of step S3103, based on the type of the effect pattern of the latter half of the variation corresponding to the received variation pattern, the channel is channeled within the period of the latter half of the variation (for example, the period from the start of the reach effect to the stop of the symbol variation). Specify "Y" which is the number of free channels (minimum number of free channels) based on the timing when the most free channels are exhausted.

However, when the effect pattern in which the symbol is stopped without starting the reach effect from the start of the symbol change is selected, the symbol change corresponding to the "second half of the change" is not performed. In this case, the next step process is performed without performing the process itself of step S3103, or the maximum value that can be set as the number of free channels "Y" in the process of step S3103 (a value that is not subject to channel restriction). Will be set.

Next, as the process of step S3104, the "X" specified in the process of step S3102 is compared with the "Y" specified in the process of step S3103, and among these "X" and "Y" Based on the value on the side where the minimum number of free channels is small (the side where there is no margin in the number of free channels), the channel restriction level is set at least until the symbol variation to be determined is completed. As a result, from the start to the end of the symbol variation targeted for determination, the execution of processing related to the output of the game sound can be restricted based on the set channel restriction level. , It is expected that the number of vacant channels will not be reduced to 0, and that the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the appearance of an unintended production mode will be suppressed.

In this embodiment, when setting the channel restriction level, the "minimum number of free channels" used for the determination is specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation (step S3102) and the second half of the fluctuation (step S3103). It is supposed to be. This means that the production content of the first half of the fluctuation (the period from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the start of the reach production, etc.) is shared by a plurality of production patterns (for example, long reach, super reach A, super reach B, etc.). Therefore, if the minimum number of free channels is specified in units of the first half of the fluctuation, the amount of data required to specify the minimum number of free channels can be reduced. ..

However, the minimum number of free channels used to determine the channel limit level setting does not necessarily have to be specified separately for the first half of the fluctuation and the second half of the fluctuation. With the pattern as a unit, the number of vacant channels (minimum number of vacant channels) may be specified based on the timing when the channels are most vacant within the period in which the effect pattern is executed.

In addition, the "minimum number of free channels" here refers to sounds (BGM-related, symbol stop-related according to big hit judgment, big hit judgment) that are automatically generated when the production pattern (effect content) to be judged progresses. It shows how many channels are left as free state when they are assigned to each channel only for the corresponding sound effect related). Therefore, button press sounds (sounds associated with effects generated based on button operations, etc.), volume adjustment completion sounds, various notification sounds, block winning sounds (sounds associated with winning a general winning opening), and pending winning sounds (first) The production patterns (production contents) to be judged, such as the sound associated with winning the starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004) and the normal electric production sound (sound associated with the production according to the judgment of the normal symbol), have been developed. Various sounds that are not always executed just by squeezing are not included as the judgment target.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing a value of a channel restriction level separately set for the “minimum number of free channels” specified in the process of step S3104, and showing an example of the restriction content separately determined for the channel restriction level. ..

As shown in FIG. 264, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, first, among various game sounds, the block winning sound (winning to the general winning opening) is used as the sound to be restricted from using the channel. (Sounds associated with), hold winning sounds (sounds associated with winning a prize at the first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004), Fuden production sounds (sounds associated with production according to the judgment of a normal symbol), volume adjustment completion sound Is illustrated. Therefore, during the execution period of the symbol variation in which there is no room in the vacant channel, at least for these game sounds (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) among various game sounds. Restrictions on channel usage can occur.

More specifically, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is 12 or more, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 264. Set to "0". That is, in this case, it is assumed that there is a margin in the vacant channel, and the sound that is subject to channel use restriction (block winning sound, hold winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) is executed. None of these are restricted, and if there is a prize in the general winning slot during the execution of the symbol variation, the block winning sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played, and the first starting port 2002 or the first starting port 2002 or during the execution of the symbol variation. If there is a prize in the second starting port 2004, the hold prize sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played, and when the effect according to the judgment of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol change, the normal symbol corresponding to the effect is used. The electric effect sound is assigned to a predetermined empty channel and played back, and when the volume adjustment is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the corresponding volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to the predetermined empty channel and played back.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 6 to 11, in the process of step S3104, channel restriction is performed based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 264. Set the level to "1". That is, in this case, assuming that the vacant channel is in a situation where the symbol fluctuation is executed with a slight margin, the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric effect sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction Of the sounds), the channel use limit (25% limit) is generated for the block winning sound. That is, in this case, when there is a prize in the general prize opening during the execution of the symbol change and this is detected, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize is paid out, but this is specified for the block prize sound. It will be processed so that it will not be assigned to a free channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data according to the winning of the general winning opening and not to reproduce the block winning sound itself.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is any of 2 to 5, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is set based on the association shown in FIG. 264. Set to "2". That is, in this case, assuming that the vacant channel is in a situation where the symbol fluctuation is executed with a relatively small margin, the four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment) that are subject to channel use restriction are applied. Of the completed sounds), channel use restrictions (50% restrictions) are generated for two sounds, the block winning sound and the holding winning sound. That is, in this case, in addition to the above-mentioned restriction on the block winning sound, when there is a winning in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the symbol variation and this is detected, the quantity corresponding to the winning. Although the prize balls for the minutes are paid out and the above-mentioned first and second starting port winning processes are performed, the pending winning sounds are processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. At this time, it is desirable not to set the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and not to reproduce the reserved winning sound itself.

On the other hand, when the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 is either 0 or 1, in the process of step S3104, the channel restriction level is based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 264. Is set to "3". That is, in this case, assuming that there is no room for symbol fluctuation in the vacant channel, four sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completed) that are subject to channel use restriction. A channel usage limit (100% limit) is generated for all of the sound). That is, in this case, in addition to the above-mentioned restrictions on the block winning sound and the holding winning sound, even if the effect according to the judgment of the normal symbol is performed during the execution of the symbol variation, the normal electric effect sound is not included. Will be processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined free channel. In addition, when the player performs a volume adjustment operation during the execution of the symbol variation, the volume adjustment itself is performed according to the volume adjustment operation, but the volume adjustment completed sound is processed so as not to be assigned to a predetermined empty channel. It will be. At this time, do not set the corresponding sound generation schedule data for the Fuden production sound and volume adjustment completed sound, and do not play the Fuden production sound or volume adjustment completed sound itself. Is desirable.

According to such a configuration, when a symbol change is executed in which the number of vacant channels in a state where no sound is not assigned becomes less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of vacant channels is predetermined. Compared to the case where the symbol variation which is not less than the number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds among the various game sounds becomes higher. That is, in this case, some game sounds (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound) are output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0. Since the execution of related processing is restricted and the ratio of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases, the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of the symbol variation. It is expected that the occurrence of such a situation will be suitably suppressed.

Further, in the above configuration, among various game sounds, the sound for which channel use is restricted is not the most important "directing sound related to jackpot determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but other "sounds associated with winning". , "Direction sound related to normal judgment", and "Sound related to volume adjustment". That is, even if the channel use is restricted during the execution of the symbol variation, the effect of whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation is not restricted and is appropriately executed. Therefore, during the execution of the symbol variation. The decline in game interest when channel usage is restricted will be suppressed.

In addition, in the above configuration, a plurality of types of sound types that are candidates for channel use restriction target among various game sounds are prepared (block winning sound, holding winning sound, general electric production sound, volume adjustment completion sound). As the channel restriction level becomes higher (the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation), the number of sound types that are subject to channel usage restriction is increased. However, a method that limits the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0, and increases the ratio of execution restrictions as the number of free channels decreases. The method is not limited to this, and for example, the method described below with reference to FIG. 265 may be adopted.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing another example of the restriction content separately determined for the channel restriction level.

As shown in FIG. 265, in this alternative example, the channel is used according to the "minimum number of free channels" specified in the process of step S3103 and the channel restriction level specified in the process of step S3104. A restricted lottery will be held as to whether or not restrictions will be applied. However, here, when a plurality of sounds that are candidates for channel use restriction are not prepared and a determination result indicating that the restriction is applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, one game sound (for example, volume adjustment completion sound) is obtained. The restriction processing related to the channel use is performed only for (etc.).

For example, in this alternative example, when the channel restriction level is 0 (the minimum number of free channels is 12 or more), the probability of obtaining a determination result that the restriction is applied in the restriction lottery is set to 0/100, and the channel is used. The channel usage restriction process is not executed for the specific game sound to be restricted (for example, the volume adjustment completion sound).

However, when the channel restriction level becomes 1 or more, the probability that a judgment result indicating that the restriction is applied in the restriction lottery is obtained increases as the value increases, and the channel restriction level is 1 (minimum free channel). The same probability is 25/100 when the number is 6 to 11), and the same probability is 50/100 when the channel limit level is 2 (minimum number of free channels is 2 to 5), and the channel limit level. Is 3 (the minimum number of free channels is 0, 1), and the same probability is 100/100. Then, in this alternative example, when the determination result that the restriction is applied is obtained in the restriction lottery, the restriction processing related to the channel use is executed with the same contents regardless of the channel restriction level.

Even with such a configuration, if the number of vacant channels in which no sound is assigned is less than a predetermined number while the game is progressing, the number of vacant channels is increased. Compared with the case where the symbol variation which does not become less than a predetermined number is executed, the ratio of restricting the execution of the processing related to the output of at least a part of the game sounds among the various game sounds becomes higher. That is, in this case, for some of the game sounds (volume adjustment completion sounds), there is a limit to the execution of processing related to the output from the stage before the number of free channels actually becomes 0. Since the ratio of execution restriction increases as the number of free channels decreases and the number of free channels decreases, it is preferable that the number of free channels becomes 0 during the execution of the symbol variation. It will be expected to be suppressed.

Further, according to the above configuration, by confirming whether or not a specific sound (volume adjustment completed sound) is played during the execution period of the symbol variation, the minimum free channel during the execution period of the symbol variation is confirmed. It will be possible to guess the possibility that the number will run out, and it will be possible to promote game progress (winning, button operation, etc.) commensurate with the guess.

In the configuration illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265, the minimum number of free channels is specified from the occurrence status of the notice effects after the determination processes related to the various notice effects are executed based on the effect patterns, and the specified minimum space is specified. We decided to set the channel limit level based on the number of channels, but this is not always the case. For example, since it is possible to predict in advance how many sounds will be allocated to the channel at the same time during the symbol fluctuation period for each production pattern, the susceptibility to channel shortage is classified in advance according to the production pattern. I will do it. Then, when the effect pattern is determined, the higher the likelihood of channel shortage in which the effect pattern is pre-classified, the higher the channel restriction ratio may be. That is, in this case, when a specific type of production pattern that tends to use many channels at the same time is executed, many channels are not used without actually performing button operations or various prizes are generated, and empty channels are not used. Even if there is a margin in the number of, there may be a situation where the execution of the processing related to the output of the game sound may be restricted during the execution of the symbol variation, but the free channel can be performed only by performing a simple processing. It is extremely beneficial in that it becomes possible to avoid the number of beings becoming 0, and even when such a process is executed, "the number of free channels during the symbol fluctuation is relatively large. When the number is small, the rate at which the execution of processing related to the output of the game sound is restricted is high, and when the number of free channels during symbol variation is relatively large, the rate at which the execution of processing related to the output of the game sound is restricted is high. Only a phenomenon such as "becomes low" appears, and since it is a phenomenon that does not give a feeling of strangeness to the player, it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. Further, in this case, by confirming whether or not the sound is restricted, it becomes possible to infer the possibility that the effect pattern is likely to cause channel shortage.

Further, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265 and other examples thereof, the channel restriction is executed with the symbol variation as one unit, but the channel is developed as the production content progresses within one symbol variation. The restriction level may be varied, and channel restriction may be executed according to the channel restriction level each time. Alternatively, when a predetermined restriction condition is satisfied, such as when a specific effect mode is executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, the channel restriction level is made unchanged by a specific value over a plurality of symbol fluctuations, and the channel restriction level is set to the channel restriction level. Channel restriction may be performed accordingly.

By the way, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265 and other examples thereof, the sound to be restricted from using the channel is not the most important "directing sound related to the jackpot determination" in the pachinko machine 1, but other than that. It was decided to use only "sounds associated with winning", "directing sounds related to normal judgment", and "sounds related to volume adjustment". However, since some of these sounds occur less frequently than the production sounds, in order to realize the restriction processing that makes it possible to secure free channels more effectively, "related to the jackpot determination". It is desirable to adopt "directed sound" as a restriction target. However, on the other hand, if the above-mentioned restriction processing is executed for the "directing sound related to the jackpot judgment", there is a concern that the directing sound will not be reproduced and the production will be lacking in excitement. If the jackpot symbol is stopped in some cases, the game interest may deteriorate.

In this regard, in the configurations illustrated in FIGS. 264 and 265 and other examples thereof, among the "directing sounds related to the jackpot judgment", only the "directing related to the symbol fluctuation that is in the pending state and will be digested in the future" is produced. If the use of sound channels is restricted (for example, if it is adopted as a specific game sound to be restricted in FIG. 265 or another example), the effect related to the result of the symbol change during execution can be obtained. Therefore, it will be possible to adopt production sounds that occur frequently as restrictions without any restrictions.

For example, if a prize is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 during the period when the symbol change is being executed and the jackpot determination corresponding to the winning is put on hold, the hold is usually made. Performs a determination process as to whether to perform a look-ahead effect on the jackpot determination in the state. As a result, when a special result is obtained, a look-ahead effect (effect display, effect sound) that suggests in advance the degree of expectation as to whether the pending jackpot judgment is a jackpot win is performed. Become.

However, in a situation where the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about availability (such as a state in which a symbol fluctuation with a minimum number of available channels of 0 or 1 is being executed), the channel usage is restricted to "pending state". If "the sound produced according to the effect related to the symbol fluctuation that will be digested in the future" is targeted, a prize will be generated for the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the jackpot judgment corresponding to this will be suspended. Even if the state is set, the determination process itself for the look-ahead effect is not executed for the jackpot determination put in the hold state, and both the look-ahead effect and the corresponding effect sound are not performed.

According to such a configuration, when the number of channels used increases and anxiety arises about the vacancy, the channels that are assigned to the production related to the future symbol fluctuations, which are not the ongoing symbol fluctuations, are being executed. Since it will be possible to supply the production sound related to the fluctuation of the pattern, the production sound that occurs frequently will be restricted without any adverse effect on the production related to the result of the symbol fluctuation during execution. You will be able to. In addition, the effect to be restricted is only "the effect related to the symbol change for the future that is in the unexecuted state", and even if the symbol change is restricted, it will be restricted when it is put on hold in the future. Since the effect during the change of the symbol (the content of the effect according to the effect pattern) that is not set is always executed, the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the restriction target of the effect can be preferably suppressed.

In addition, when "directing sound related to jackpot judgment" is targeted for restriction, if only the directing sound of the directing (directing display, directing sound) is targeted for restriction (no sound output), the production lacks excitement. In the above configuration, if the number of channels used increases and there is anxiety about the vacancy, a prize will be won and the jackpot judgment will be put on hold. Sometimes, the judgment process for the look-ahead effect itself is not executed, and both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not performed. Therefore, a special result (pre-reading winning) cannot be obtained in the look-ahead judgment. Only the same effect situation as at that time (hold display when the look-ahead effect is not executed) is obtained, and it becomes possible to preferably avoid a decrease in the game interest due to the effect execution lacking in excitement.

When the "effect sound related to the jackpot judgment" is restricted, the judgment process itself for the look-ahead effect is not executed when the prize is won and the jackpot judgment is put on hold. I tried not to do both with sound, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the "directed sound related to the jackpot judgment" is restricted, the pre-reading effect is judged when a prize is won, but even if a special result is obtained, until a specific timing during the symbol change arrives. Does not execute both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect, but limits them, and when a specific timing arrives during the symbol change, only the effect display and the effect sound are restricted. May be released to do this. That is, in this case, the effect display related to the look-ahead effect is performed in a dedicated mode (timing), which is different from the case where the "effect sound related to the jackpot judgment" is not restricted (normal time), and is special. Since the pre-reading effect is executed after making it appear as if the result (pre-reading winning) was not obtained, the pre-reading effect is suppressed while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to not outputting the effect sound corresponding to the pre-reading effect. It becomes possible to perform favorably.

In addition, as processing related to future production under the situation where channel use is restricted, ・ Judgment processing for pre-reading production is performed when a prize is won, but even if a special result is obtained, a specific timing during symbol fluctuation has arrived. Until this is done, both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not executed, and these are restricted. The first restriction processing is a configuration in which only the restriction is released and this is performed.
-The game proceeds when the second restricted processing is such that the judgment process itself for the look-ahead effect is not executed when a prize is won, and both the effect display and the effect sound related to the look-ahead effect are not performed. Among them, when the symbol variation is executed in which the number of free channels in the state where no sound is not assigned is less than the predetermined number, compared with the case where the symbol variation in which the number of the same empty channels is not less than the predetermined number is executed. Therefore, the rate at which either the first restricted processing or the second restricted processing is executed is increased, and within the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the first restricted processing is performed. The expected value of the number of channels used in is "A", and the expected value of the number of channels used in the symbol variation that was in the execution state when the second restricted processing is performed is "B". At that time, it is more desirable to execute either the first restricted processing or the second restricted processing so that the relationship becomes "A <B". That is, in this case, as the number of channels used increases and the vacancy causes greater anxiety, both the effect display and the effect sound are restricted instead of the first restricted processing that limits only the effect sound. Since the ratio of channel restriction applied by the second restriction processing is increased, it is expected that anxiety when the number of channels used increases is more preferably suppressed.

[Channel special opening process]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a plurality of game sounds are assigned to different channels and are in the output state, the volume of at least some of the game sounds is lowered. A process of terminating the allocation of the specific game sound to the channel can be performed in the state where the volume is lowered (suppressed state). Then, after the assignment of the specific game sound to the channel is completed in this way, it is possible to execute the process of increasing the volume of the other game sounds for which the allocation to the channel is continued (channel special opening process).

According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize that a change has occurred in the channel allocation mode of the game sound (a state in which the volume of the game sound is lowered (suppression state)). It will reduce the number of channels in (increase the number of free channels). Therefore, for example, even if the number of channels in use is reduced prior to this in order to more reliably output important game sounds, the number of channels in use is reduced. It becomes difficult to notice what has been done, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that a specific game sound is no longer output.

FIG. 266 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a channel special opening process is performed.

As shown in FIG. 266, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tk11, a predetermined effect pattern is produced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "normal BGM reproduction" corresponding to the above is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and corresponds to the effect A displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "effect A reproduction" is assigned to the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), among the sounds in these reproduction states (normal BGM reproduction, effect A reproduction), the sound of "effect A reproduction" is in the stage where a predetermined effect pattern is in the middle of production. At the timing tk13 (during the execution of the symbol variation), the playback channels 08 and 09 are removed and the playback is terminated. In this way, even if the predetermined production pattern is in the middle of the production, the production content of the predetermined production pattern can be obtained by finishing the allocation of the production sound from the channel and promptly changing it to an empty channel. It becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a free channel becomes insufficient and a new sound cannot be assigned and played as it progresses.

However, as described above, when the predetermined effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment is in the middle of the effect (during the execution of the symbol variation) and the effect sound is removed from the channel and changed to an empty channel, The number of effect sounds in the reproduced state is reduced, and there is a concern that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear in the effect pattern is lowered by the decrease.

Therefore, in this explanatory example, as shown in FIG. 266 (a), first, before the timing tk13 for removing the sound of the “directed A reproduction” from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and ending the reproduction arrives. From the "timing tk12" to the arrival of the "timing tk14" after the timing tk13, the sound of the "effect B reproduction" corresponding to the effect B displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced. Allocate to playback channels 08 and 09 to bring them into a playback (here, stereo playback) state. Then, as shown in FIG. 266 (b), during the period (timing tk12 to tk14) in which the sound of the “effect B reproduction” is put into the reproduction state, the timing tk13 at which the “effect A reproduction” is terminated. Along with the arrival of the above, it is decided to perform a process (volume suppression process) of reducing the volume of each of the plurality of effect sounds including the sound of the "effect B reproduction" while keeping them assigned to the channels.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 266 (c), the sound of "production B reproduction" in this explanatory example is output as a production sound corresponding to the step production in which the production content can be developed up to 4 times. After the production content has been developed three times (step 1, step 2, step 3), the production is performed as to whether the production content is further developed according to step 4. Therefore, a process of lowering the volume (volume suppression process) is performed while keeping a plurality of effect sounds including the sound of "effect B reproduction" corresponding to the step effect assigned to the channel. If a high-expected production mode that further develops into the production content according to step 4 appears when the volume suppression process is completed and the volume is returned to the normal volume (a production with a relatively high degree of expectation). While the specific production sound corresponding to the production content of the step 4 is output as the sound of the "effect B reproduction", the effect content according to the step 3 is used without developing into the production content according to the step 4. When a low-expected production mode in which the production is completed appears (a production with a relatively low degree of expectation), a production sound different from the specific production sound is output as the sound of the “production B reproduction”.

According to such a configuration, an effect design is made in which the timing tk13 arrives aiming at the time when the volume suppression process is performed on a plurality of effect sounds, and the “effect A” is performed while the volume suppression process is performed. Since the sound of "playback" is removed from the playback channels 08 and 09 and the playback is terminated, the number of channels in use has decreased (the sound of "effect A playback" is in the non-playback state. It will be possible to make it difficult to notice what was done).

In particular, in the examples shown in FIGS. 266 (a) to 266 (c), the production content having a relatively high expectation (the production content developing to step 4) and the production content having a relatively low expectation (step). Within the period in which the production content (the production of whether or not it develops to step 4) that leads to any of the production content (the production content that does not develop to 4) appears (the period in which it is unclear whether or not it develops), the above-mentioned The volume suppression process is executed to remove the sound of "effect A reproduction" from the reproduction channels 08 and 09 and end the reproduction. According to such a configuration, not only the volume of the production sound is lowered, but also the player's interest itself is strongly attracted to the production B (the sound of "production B reproduction"). Since the production A (sound of "production A playback") is terminated at, the volume of the production sound that was the target of volume suppression including the sound of "production B playback" was returned. Occasionally, even if the sound of "Direction A playback" is prevented from being reproduced, the production content with a relatively high degree of expectation (the production content that develops to step 4) and the production content with a relatively low degree of expectation (the production content with a relatively low degree of expectation). It becomes possible to attract interest in which of the production contents that do not develop into step 4) appears, and to make it difficult to notice that the sound of "Production A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

Moreover, in the volume suppression process according to this explanatory example, although the volume is lowered while a plurality of production sounds including the sound of "production B reproduction" are assigned to the channels, all the production sounds are reduced. The volume is not lowered, and a specific effect sound (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is continuously reproduced at the normal volume. That is, in this case, the volume of some of the production sounds (the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is reduced while being reproduced as usual without suppressing the volume, and thus the sounds can be distinguished. Since the reproduction of the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is terminated while the sound is made more difficult, it can be made more difficult to notice because the sound of "Production A reproduction" is no longer reproduced. Will be.

Furthermore, in this explanatory example, the sound reproduction of the "effect A reproduction" is not terminated immediately after the volume suppression processing is performed on the plurality of production sounds, and a predetermined time has passed since the volume suppression processing was started. After waiting for the elapsed timing tk13 to arrive, the reproduction of the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is terminated. That is, immediately after the volume suppression process is started, the player may be attracted to the effect sounds A and B in which the change of "volume decrease" occurs, but the volume decreases to a specific value. When the state of not changing at the specific value is maintained for a predetermined time, it is assumed that such interest has already diminished. Therefore, the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is aimed at such a timing. By ending the reproduction of the sound, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to notice because the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

In particular, in this explanatory example, the volume of the effect sound that is the target of the volume suppression process is gradually reduced, and the reproduction of the sound of "effect A reproduction" is terminated after the volume becomes 0 (silence). As a result, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to notice because the sound of "Direction A reproduction" is no longer reproduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 266, the sound of "effect B reproduction" is started to be reproduced while the sound of "effect A reproduction" is being reproduced, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the sound of "Production B playback" is being played back, the sound of "Production A playback" is started to be played back, and while the sound of "Production B playback" is being played back in the suppressed state, "Production A playback" is played. The reproduction of the sound of "" may be terminated.

Further, the effects A and B do not necessarily have to be an effect accompanied by an effect display on the game board side effect display device 1600, and may be executed as an effect of only sound, for example.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the timing tk12 for reproducing the sound of "effect B reproduction" is assumed to be reached by the development of the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination. Not limited. For example, the sound of "effect B reproduction" is started to be reproduced based on the operation for a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.), and the sound of "effect A reproduction" is reproduced while the sound of "effect B reproduction" is reproduced. You may end the reproduction of the above-mentioned embodiment.

Further, it is not always necessary to gradually reduce the volume of the effect sound that is the target of the volume suppression process. On the contrary, as a process for returning the volume of the effect sound, the volume may be returned stepwise. In addition, the volume does not necessarily have to be set to 0 (silence), and if the volume is suppressed to a lower volume than usual, it is difficult to notice that the sound reproduction of "Direction A reproduction" has ended. Is possible.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the specific production sound according to the production pattern (here, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction") is excluded from the volume suppression processing, and the normal volume remains unchanged. Although the playback is continued, the volume of all the production sounds may be lowered when the volume suppression process is performed. On the contrary, with respect to the sound of "Direction A reproduction", it is possible to maintain the volume without necessarily lowering the volume when the volume suppression process is performed. Even in such a case, the volume is lowered. While attracting the player's interest in the sound of "Production B playback" in the state of being played, the playback of the sound of "Production A playback" is terminated, and then the sound of "Production B playback" is included. Even if the sound of "Production A playback" is not played back when the volume of multiple production sounds that were targeted for volume suppression is returned, the production content with relatively high expectations (step 4). The sound of "Direction A playback" is reproduced, attracting interest in which of the production content that develops into (the production content that develops into) and the production content that has relatively low expectations (the production content that does not develop into step 4) appears. You will be able to make it harder to notice that it is no longer being done.

In addition, during the period during which the effect pattern for reproducing the sounds of "effect A reproduction" and "effect B reproduction" is performed, at least while the volume suppression process is performed (after the volume of "effect B reproduction" is lowered from the normal value). (Until it is returned to the normal value), even if a prize is generated in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, in order to maintain the interest in the sound of "Direction B reproduction" more favorably. It is desirable not to play the corresponding hold winning sound. Further, even if a special result (pre-reading winning) is obtained in the pre-reading determination when a prize is won in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the effect sound corresponding to the pre-reading effect is not reproduced. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 266, the sound reproduction of "effect A reproduction" is terminated within the period when the volume of the effect sound is reduced, and when the period ends, the sound is assigned to the channel in the state of volume decrease until then. We decided to raise the volume of the production sound that had been used (return to the original volume value), but in addition to this, at the end of the period, a special production sound that was not previously assigned to the channel will be added to the channel. It may be newly assigned and played (played at the normal volume). With such a configuration, it became interesting to see if a special production sound was played when the volume was returned, and it was further noticed that the sound of "Production A playback" was no longer played. You will be able to make it difficult. Moreover, if the number of channels used after the volume is restored is reduced compared to before the volume is lowered, there is a concern that the expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation may be lowered, but a special production sound. Is newly assigned to the channel and played back (played at the normal volume), so that the same or more sound before the volume is lowered and after the volume is restored (two or more production sounds are sent to the channel). Since it will be possible to use the channel of (when newly assigned), it is also preferable that the player feels as if the expectation level has decreased. It will be avoided. In this case, the special production sound may or may not be played when the volume is returned, suggesting that the expectation is relatively high when the special production sound is played. It is desirable to do.

If you want to newly assign a special production sound that was not assigned to the channel when the volume is returned and play it, the channel that became vacant due to the sound assignment of "Production A playback" being removed. It is desirable to assign a special production sound to. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to realize a wide range of production with a small amount of channel resources.

Further, such a channel special opening process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern, and for example, a restriction target in the process described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265. As "Production A" is adopted as, the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the more the channel is specially opened (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol fluctuation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The rate at which the processing is performed may be increased. According to such a configuration, in a situation where there is a margin in the number of free channels so as not to make people feel uneasy about running out of channels, it is possible to continuously output "Direction A" without ending it in the middle. become.

[Operation sound output processing under suppression]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, from the start to the end of the symbol variation. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns and reproduces the sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel. Perform the process of causing. Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is left assigned to the predetermined channel and output in a suppressed mode or silently ( When the volume of "BGM playback" is lowered to a specific value and output) and an operation for a predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.) is detected in this state, the jackpot symbol (corresponding to the symbol) is caused by the symbol fluctuation. A special production sound suggesting the degree of expectation that a special display mode) appears in the production pattern is output in an unsuppressed mode (operation sound output processing under suppression). The degree of expectation suggested by the special production may be 100%.

That is, in this case, when the special effect sound is output in response to the operation detection, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but is output in a suppressed mode or silently. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere in which the usage status of the channel seems to be affordable. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the player with an operation opportunity to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". This will prevent the decline in game entertainment.

By the way, when it is attempted to output a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (sound of "BGM reproduction") to a channel in a suppressed mode or silently, it is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that a process of suppressing the volume of the existing sound (sound of "BGM reproduction") (a process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such volume suppression processing is performed prior to giving the player an operation opportunity (generating a valid period for the production reception), a sound corresponding to a specific production pattern ("" It is possible to give the player an operation opportunity (generate a valid period of the production reception) after setting the sound of "BGM reproduction") in a suppressed mode or in a state of being silently output.

However, as is well known, when giving an operation opportunity to a player, the valid period of the production reception is generated over a predetermined time, but the operation (production reception) is performed at any timing within this valid period. It is indefinite (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if the volume suppression process can be terminated and the volume returned to the initial value when the operation (effect reception) is performed within the valid period, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so that the sound corresponding to this is started to be reproduced at an indefinite timing.

In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when there is an operation by the player, the sound data of "BGM playback" is switched to the sound data of "BGM playback dedicated to special production sound playback" and this is used. It is also conceivable to perform a process of regenerating. However, since the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced according to the content of various effects until the symbol is stopped and ended, the timing of the symbol stop, etc., the sound of "BGM reproduction" is within the valid period. While it is uncertain (depending on the player) at what timing the operation (production reception) will be performed, if the operation (production reception) is used as an opportunity to newly reproduce the sound of "BGM playback". However, there is a concern that so-called sound deviation may occur between the timing of various productions and the timing of stopping the design after that, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, the sound data at the first half of the super reach production, the sound data at the second half of the super reach production, etc.) are determined according to the time series specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data. Performs the process of sequentially assigning to channels. Then, among the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, the specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. When the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel according to the time series, the sound is assigned to the predetermined channel and the playback is started from the timing before the valid period of the production reception occurs in the specific production pattern, and the valid period ends. The assigned state for a predetermined channel is maintained for a long period of time until the timing after the sound is played.

In this regard, in a part of the section (special period) when the above-mentioned specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in chronological order, the process is suppressed or silently applied to the sound output as compared with the other sections. When the data content that regulates that is performed is preset and the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in the time series specified by the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data, a part of the section (special). It is designed to have a time-series relationship in which the valid period of the production reception occurs within the period). In addition to this, regardless of the timing of the operation by the player within the valid period of the above-mentioned production reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) to the special period The sound of "BGM playback" is a special production sound according to the production reception, straddling the two sections in the specific sound data with the period (other section) after the end of (partial section). The sound is reproduced in an unsuppressed manner on a channel other than the assigned predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data stored as "BGM reproduction" sounds corresponding to a specific effect pattern (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of the super reach effect, super). Only the process of sequentially allocating the sound data in the latter half of the reach production) to the predetermined channels according to the time series specified by the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to these, without adjusting the volume from the initial value. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a "suppressed mode or a state of being output silently (special period)". In addition, when an operation by the player is received for production in the "suppressed mode or silent output state (special period)" created in this way, it is special in a non-suppressed mode by a highly immediate process triggered by this. While the production sound is set to start playing, the sound of "BGM playback" that is in the playback state on the predetermined channel is "output in a suppressed mode or silently (special period) regardless of the production reception. Is maintained for a predetermined time. After that, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (suppression mode or silent sound output) is completed in the form of being mixed in with the special production sound being reproduced. Since the data contents of other sections (unsuppressed sound output) will be reproduced, it will be possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the unsuppressed mode. It will be possible to provide a production sound that does not give a sense of discomfort. That is, in this case, when the operation by the player is received in the suppressed mode or in the state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in silence, the special directed sound is not suppressed by the highly immediate processing triggered by this. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of sound deviation between various effects and the timing of stopping the symbol after that, while the reproduction is started at.

FIG. 267 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when such a suppressed operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, a specific example when executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described with reference to FIG. 267.

As shown in FIG. 267 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ts11, the effect is advanced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the effect pattern of is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data) over the entire period of the symbol variation from the start to the end of the symbol variation when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed. The sound material) may be reproduced based on the schedule data for sound generation, or the entire period of the symbol variation is divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each period is obtained. It may be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 267, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the entire period (a part of the symbol variation period) in the figure including the timing ts11. Is assigned to channels 02 and 03 and is in the playback state.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 267 (a) and 267 (b), one sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in the reproduction state is special. At the timing ts12, which is before the timing ts13 when the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception), which gives the operation opportunity to trigger the generation of the production sound, is reached, the silent data content is set. It is designed to be in the playback state in some sections. As a result, even if the volume of the "BGM reproduction" sound is not adjusted from the initial value, it can be output silently while being assigned to a predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, at the timing ts13, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the reproduction state within a part of the section set as the silent data content, and it seems that there is a margin in the usage status of the channel. While the atmosphere is provided, it becomes possible to generate an operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity. This provides an operation opportunity for the player to output the special production sound while removing the anxiety that "maybe there is no space in the channel and it may not be possible to output the special production sound". It will be possible to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest of the game.

Moreover, the operation valid period according to this explanatory example is the timing ts16 at which a part of the section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is terminated even if there is no operation by the player. At the timing ts15, which is before the arrival of, the period is terminated so that the operation by the player is not accepted for the production. Therefore, regardless of the timing of the operation validity period when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM playback" is in the playback state within a part of the section set as the silent data content. It will be possible to generate a special production sound according to the operation by the player while providing an atmosphere in which the usage status of the cage channel seems to be affordable. The operation valid period ends not only when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, but also when the operation by the player is accepted for production. When the timing ts15 arrives without the operation by the player, the special effect sound may be generated as in the case where the operation by the player is performed at that timing.

Then, in this explanatory example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, and the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned based on the reception of the effect. Special production sounds are assigned to channels 08 and 09, which are different from those of, 03, and played back.

In this regard, in this explanatory example, the maximum time (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) from the start to the end of the operation valid period is set to "SY", and the operation valid period ends at this maximum time. When the time (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) until the end of a part of the section in which silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" is set to "BF", it is within the operation valid period. Regardless of which timing the player operates, the special production sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time of "SY + α (> BF)" and played.

According to such a configuration, the timing ts16 will always arrive when the special effect sound is in the playback state, regardless of the timing during which the operation is valid. The sound of "BGM reproduction" can be output as an unsuppressed mode so as to be mixed in with the special production sound. That is, in this case, although the time from the start of the reproduction of the special production sound to the output of the "BGM reproduction" sound as the non-suppressed mode is variable according to the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted. , The buffer period for restoring the output period of the special production sound in the non-suppressed manner of the "BGM reproduction" sound (the sound of the "BGM reproduction" is restored in the non-suppressed manner by being mixed with the special production sound). By making it function as a period that makes it difficult to notice that, when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM playback" is not restored as a non-suppressed mode, but the discomfort caused by returning it after a predetermined time is created. You will be able to make it difficult to remember.

Then, after the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored as the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the effect sound for BGM reproduction in this way, when the timing ts17 arrives, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in the unsuppressed mode. Playback of the special production sound will be terminated while in the state.

In the above explanatory example, the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started" and the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended" are operated by the player as shown in FIG. 267 (b). It will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted arrow according to the accepted timing, but regardless of which timing they correspond to, the timing ts16 arrives when the special production sound is in the playback state. , It is clear that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppressed mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, "a feeling of strangeness caused by not returning the sound of" BGM reproduction "as a non-suppressed mode but returning it after a predetermined time when the operation by the player is accepted" is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound to be larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, the sound of BGM reproduction can be secretly shifted to the reproduction state in the normal section while the special production sound having a large initial volume value is attracting attention.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, when the operation by the player is received as an effect, a special effect sound is generated based on the effect reception, but a specific effect according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the jackpot determination is generated. The special production sound may be generated based on the reception of the production only when the conditions are satisfied. Even when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, an operation valid period is generated at the timing ts14, and when the player's operation is received within the operation valid period, the effect is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.) is reproduced. Then, regardless of the timing within the operation valid period, the sound of BGM reproduction is secretly brought into the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.) is in the reproduction state. It is desirable to make the transition to the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 267.

However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the reproduction time is shortened as compared with the case where the special effect sound is put into the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect) is reproduced. The sound of BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of (sound, etc.) is completed. In this case, regardless of the timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the BGM playback sound is returned to the playback state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined production sound (failure production sound, etc.). Will be set to arrive after the end. According to such a configuration, there is a silence period (depending on the operation timing) between the end of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) and the return of the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. The period in which the length is variable) can be generated as the buffer period. In addition, if a revival effect that raises the degree of expectation (which may be 100%) can occur during this silent period, it is expected that the game will be maintained.

Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the symbol variation is stopped in a lost manner without returning the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. May be good. In this case, at the timing ts12, the allocation of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated and this may be made an empty channel.

In addition, when generating a special effect sound, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction by also performing a movable effect of operating a predetermined movable body based on the effect reception. It is desirable to secretly shift the reproduced sound to the reproduced state in the normal section.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently in a part of the section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound is suppressed more than the sound of "BGM reproduction" in other sections. It suffices if it is output by. Here, as the suppressed mode, in addition to a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered, a mode in which the vibration frequency of the speaker cone per unit time is reduced can be exemplified.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, the sound data of the "BGM reproduction" assigned to the predetermined channel itself is set to the suppression mode or the time-series period in which the sound is silenced, so that the "BGM reproduction" can be performed. It is possible to create a state (special period) in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently by simply playing it back without adjusting the volume of the sound. However, it is not always necessary to set a time-series period in which the sound data of the "BGM reproduction" assigned to the predetermined channel is suppressed or silenced. For example, at the timing ts12, the sound of the "BGM reproduction" Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (which may be muted). That is, in this case, even if the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, the process of raising the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" from the specific value (the process of returning to the initial volume value) is performed with the reception of the effect as an opportunity. Try not to. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (processing to return to the initial volume value) will be performed. On the other hand, when a specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified while a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is being reproduced, as in the other example described above. A process of increasing the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to a specific value in a state where the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is completed. The process of increasing from the value (processing of returning to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the symbol variation may be terminated without increasing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) from a specific value. good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 267, a restriction process for making it difficult for a new sound allocation to occur for an empty channel is performed at least for a period from a predetermined timing before the arrival of the timing ts12 to the timing ts16. It is desirable to. It should be noted that such restriction processing has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a jackpot symbol appears due to a symbol fluctuation during execution, such as a block winning sound, a holding winning sound, a general electric effect sound, and an adjustment sound. It is desirable that a specific game sound is targeted for restriction, and that the specific game sound subject to this restriction is not played without being newly assigned to a channel.

Further, when it is decided to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is used on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. (It is desirable that it is a production sound such as a sound effect or dialogue, not music) so that it does not overlap with the sound of It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppressed mode or silently. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed into the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or the silent state. It should be noted that the reproduction state of a specific effect sound should be terminated before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. However, it is desirable to alleviate the anxiety that the special production sound is not output.

Further, when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern as a symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the sound of BGM reproduction is emitted from the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output the effect sound in a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the state of being silenced ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of production sounds including special production sounds are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the sound of BGM reproduction into those production sounds, and the sound of BGM reproduction is usually mixed. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

Further, such a suppressed operation sound output process does not necessarily have to be performed when it is determined to execute a specific effect pattern, and for example, in the process described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265. "BGM playback sound" is adopted as the restriction target, and the smaller the minimum number of free channels is, the smaller the symbol variation (when the minimum number of free channels in the symbol variation is less than the predetermined number, compared to when it is not less than the predetermined number). The ratio of the operation sound output processing under the suppression may be increased. According to such a configuration, the sound of BGM reproduction is output without being suppressed or silenced in a situation where there is a margin in the number of free channels so as not to cause anxiety that the special production sound is not output due to lack of channels. You will be able to do it.

[Channel allocation cancellation operation]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a process of changing at least one of the channels to which sound data is assigned to an empty channel to which sound data is not assigned is triggered by detection by the detection means. It is made executable (channel allocation cancellation operation). That is, in this case, since an empty channel is created by the operation by the player, the empty channel is created by the operation by the player at the timing immediately before the player's favorite directing sound or special sound is generated. By securing in advance, it becomes possible to reliably output the player's favorite directing sound or special sound through the empty channel secured in advance.

The operation (channel allocation cancellation operation) in this explanatory example is not limited to the “button operation”, and an act of holding a hand over the pachinko machine 1 and praying is exemplified with reference to FIGS. 258 to 262. It may be a specific action that has been performed, in short, by a contact-type or non-contact-type predetermined sensor that can detect some state change that occurs when such a specific action to be detected (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed. It suffices that the sound assigned to the channel is removed from the channel and the reproduction is terminated when the detection is detected.

FIG. 268 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when processing related to such a channel allocation cancellation operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 268, during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tw11, a predetermined effect pattern is produced by the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM1 reproduction" (for example, the effect sound effect reproduced during the execution of the super reach effect) corresponding to the above is assigned to the reproduction channels 00, 01 and reproduced (here, stereo reproduction), and The sound of "BGM2 playback" according to the production mode (for example, one song that is continuously played over multiple fluctuations in a time-saving game state, etc.) is assigned to playback channels 02 and 03 and played back (here, stereo playback). ) Is in the situation.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 268 (a) and 268 (b), among the sounds in these playback states (BGM1 playback, BGM2 playback), the sound of "BGM2 playback" is a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation). Is targeted for forcibly terminating the channel allocation when is detected, and when the timing tw12 is reached during the period during which the symbol change is being executed, the production reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is received. The permissible reception period can be generated up to the timing tw13. In the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13, a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) to be detected such as "operate a button to secure an empty channel" in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An operation instruction image prompting the user to perform the above is displayed.

Here, FIG. 268 (a) shows the allocation status of each channel when the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is not performed within the reception period of timing tw12 to timing tw13 and the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed. Shown.

As shown in FIG. 268 (a), if the detection by the predetermined detection means is not performed before the timing tw13 arrives, the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is removed from the reproduction channels 02 and 03. Without this, this is continuously reproduced even after the timing tw13 arrives. Further, at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, the operation instruction image (operate the button to secure an empty channel) displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is hidden.

Further, at the timing tw13, a process of assigning a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) to an empty channel (reproduction channels 10 and 11) and reproducing the sound is performed. In this explanatory example, even if the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are not changed to empty channels by detection by a predetermined detection means, the other channels (reproduction channels 10 and 11) are reserved in advance, so that the vacancy is obtained. It is possible to assign a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) to a channel and reproduce it. However, if vacancy is not secured in advance for other channels, there is no vacant channel to which a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) can be assigned, and this cannot be played back and output. Concerns will arise.

FIG. 268 (b) shows the allocation status of each channel when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at timing tw12a and detection is performed by a predetermined detection means in the reception period from timing tw12 to timing tw13. Shown.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), if detection is performed by a predetermined detection means before the timing tw13 arrives, the reproduction channels 02 and 03 are performed at the timing tw12a where the detection is performed. The sound of "BGM2 playback" will be removed from. As a result, it becomes possible to secure in advance an empty channel (reproduction channel 02, 03) that can function as an allocation target of a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) until the timing tw13 arrives. , The concern that a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) cannot be reproduced and output will be resolved. Further, when the detection by the predetermined detection means is performed, the playback state of the sound of "BGM2 playback" is forcibly terminated. In this case, the music or dialogue as the sound of "BGM2 playback" is completed (or Since the playback will end at a halfway point without being played back (up to a good point), I feel that a free channel has been secured in advance by a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by the player. It becomes possible to make it easier, and it becomes possible to wait with confidence at the timing when a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is reproduced.

At the timing tw12a where the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means, the reproduction state of the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" is forcibly terminated, and the operation instruction image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. (Operate the button to secure a free channel) will be hidden, and the acceptance period for which production acceptance of a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted will end.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), in the timing tw13, not the playback channels 02 and 03 reserved in advance as free channels, but other channels (playback channels 10, playback channels 10,) which have been regarded as free channels before that. A predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is assigned to 11) and played back. However, if there is no space in the other channels at the timing tw13, a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is assigned to the playback channels 02 and 03 secured in advance and played.

Alternatively, when the production sound is removed from the specific channel based on the fact that the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is performed at the timing tw12a and the detection is performed by the predetermined detection means, there is a vacancy in the other channel. However, a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) may be assigned to the specific channel for reproduction. That is, in this case, when a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmed sound) is assigned to a specific channel and reproduced, an effect sound different from the predetermined effect sound (here, here) is assigned to the specific channel. , BGM2) is assigned, but one channel (specific channel) is assigned because the allocation status is canceled at that point when a specific action detection such as a button operation (channel allocation cancellation operation) is triggered. Just by using it, it becomes possible to reproduce the sound of "BGM2 reproduction" and the predetermined production sound (here, the jackpot confirmed sound), respectively, and it becomes possible to effectively use the reproduction channel which is a finite resource. ..

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), a predetermined effect sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound) is reproduced at the timing tw13 when the reception period ends, but the timing is later than the timing tw13. It is also possible to reproduce a predetermined production sound (here, a jackpot confirmation sound).

Further, as the predetermined effect sound, in addition to the jackpot confirmation sound, the effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol appears, or the effect sound suggesting that the jackpot has been lost may be used. It is desirable that these effect sounds are selectively output based on the type of effect pattern that appears due to the symbol variation. Alternatively, in the case of suggesting that the jackpot has been lost, even if the timing tw13 arrives, no directing sound may be output and the empty channel may not necessarily be used.

On the other hand, the sound whose channel allocation is terminated when a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is detected is not output in any of a plurality of modes, but is output in only one mode. It is desirable to execute it as a specific sound. That is, in this case, even if the content of the specific sound is missed when the playback state is forcibly terminated, the content can be easily predicted and there is no problem. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest when the state is forcibly terminated.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 268 (b), when a predetermined timing within the symbol variation arrives, it is decided to generate a reception period in which the production reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted. Not limited to. For example, at least during the period when the specific sound to be excluded from the channel allocation is in the playback state, the acceptance of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is allowed, and the channel allocation of the specific sound is based on the acceptance. May be resolved. In this case, for example, after maintaining the state of the vacant channel secured in advance for a predetermined time, such as a predetermined timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the specific sound was put into the playback state, another sound is output to the vacant channel. It is desirable to be assigned and played.

Further, as a method of canceling the channel allocation of the specific sound to be forcibly terminated, in addition to the method of making the channel to which the specific sound is assigned an empty channel at that time, a predetermined sound (for example, 0. It is also possible to cancel the channel allocation of a specific sound by allocating an extremely short allocation cancellation reception sound (such as 1 second) to the same channel. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to cancel the channel allocation of the specific sound at an earlier stage when the specific action is accepted and forcibly terminated than when the specific action is not forcibly terminated.

In addition, at least in the period from when the production reception of the specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) is permitted until the reproduction of the predetermined production sound using the vacant channel created by the production reception is completed, a new sound is produced. Specific game sounds (for example, winning sound, hold change sound, volume adjustment sound) that have nothing to do with the effect of whether the jackpot symbol appears within the symbol fluctuation so that the channel is not wasted due to the occurrence of , Look-ahead production sound, etc.), it is desirable not to output it.

In addition, the specific sound (sound of "BGM2 playback") that is the target of forced termination is played as a non-loop production sound such as a song or dialogue that is played only for a predetermined time without looping. It is desirable to make it easier to remember the feeling that a free channel has been secured in advance by a specific action (channel allocation cancellation operation) by the player so that the playback ends at a halfway point without being played to the end. ..

[Abnormal notification while the production is being performed according to the production pattern]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not necessarily assigned to the channel and output, and the specific abnormal state is not necessarily output. Is assigned to a channel and output on the condition that it occurs in a specific situation. That is, in this case, when a specific abnormal state occurs, a specific notification sound corresponding to the specific abnormal state is not always output, so that the risk of running out of free channels is promoted by giving a margin to the channel. Will be expected.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined movable decorative body is not at the specific position (origin position) even though the timing should be at the specific position (origin position). Is detected by a predetermined sensor (movable body abnormality), it is determined that an abnormality (movable body abnormality) has occurred in the predetermined movable decorative body. Then, when such a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, an output of a notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality (for example, "a movable body abnormality has occurred") and a game It is possible to execute an abnormality display (for example, "an abnormality has occurred in the back-middle movable effect unit 3200") in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600. It is desirable to display an abnormality in the display area so that it is possible to identify which of the plurality of movable decorations the abnormality has occurred. However, the plurality of movable decorations are grouped and used. It may be an aspect of identifying which of the groups the movable decorative body belongs to has an abnormality. For example, as a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 side and a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the back front decorative unit 3100 and the like). , Back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back right movable production unit 3400, back top movable production unit 3500, back bottom movable production unit 3700, etc.) An abnormality is displayed in the display area in a manner capable of identifying which side of the decorative body or the movable decorative body on the board side the abnormality has occurred. It should be noted that the plurality of movable decorative bodies refer to movable decorative bodies having a relationship in which the drive sources are different from each other and are provided separately.

However, such an abnormality of the movable body is basically caused by a failure of the movable decorative body, and there is a high possibility that the player will not make any mistakes. Therefore, if various games (such as symbol fluctuations and big hit games) according to the jackpot judgment are being executed, the notification process may be executed openly during the execution period. On the other hand, it will have an adverse effect, which is a pleasure for the player. Not only that, there is no room for the number of free channels as much as the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is output, which may give the player anxiety that it will not be possible to output a new sound. , There is concern that the interest in games will decline.

However, on the other hand, a failure of the movable decorative body usually occurs when the movable decorative body operates, and there is also an aspect that it is difficult to assume a situation in which a sudden failure occurs when the movable decorative body does not operate at all. Then, when a movable body abnormality occurs when the movable decoration body is not operating at all, it is abnormal because the movable decoration body is removed from a specific position (origin position) due to a cheating act or a fraudulent act such as wire entry. There is a possibility that it is in a detected situation, and even under such a situation, if the notification sound corresponding to the moving body abnormality is not output, it may promote cheating, and it is legitimate. From the perspective of a good player, there is concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, such a movable body abnormality occurs during a period in which various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, and this is detected. Even in such a case, the pachinko machine 1 can execute the notification process (output of the notification sound, display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.). However, during the period in which various games (design variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are executed, at least the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern (effect pattern)). If an abnormality is detected in the movable body while the movable decorative body is being operated based on the effect pattern during the big hit game, the pachinko machine 1 notifies (outputs the notification sound). , Display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed. It should be noted that the external output (hall side notification) of the information that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is not performed openly and does not adversely affect the production, and therefore may be performed regardless of the situation.

According to such a configuration, even during the period in which various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) according to the big hit determination are executed, the movable decorative body is unlikely to break down (according to the peripheral control board 1510). Movable body abnormality in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control (the situation where the movable body drive process of operating the movable decorative body based on the variable pattern (effect pattern) or the effect pattern during the big hit game) is not performed) In the event of an abnormality, the pachinko machine 1 can perform notification processing such as an abnormality notification sound, but at least in a situation where the movable decoration is prone to failure (during the production operation of the movable body), the movable body abnormality occurs. When it occurs, the pachinko machine 1 does not perform notification processing such as an abnormal notification sound, so that a person who commits a fraudulent act is restrained from committing the fraudulent act, but a legitimate game is played. It will be expected that the person will avoid having an adverse effect on the production being performed.

For example, even if a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510, the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect sound allocation control to the channel, and the abnormality occurrence occur. Since the light emission control of the light emitting part including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body is executed as it is in the same manner as when the movable body abnormality is not detected, it has an adverse effect on the effect during execution. It will be suppressed. However, even if the effect timing for operating the movable decorative body again comes after the movable body abnormality is detected, the movable decorative body is operated while the movable decorative body has not been recovered from the abnormal state. No production is performed.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to this embodiment, when a movable body abnormality is detected, whether or not the pachinko machine 1 performs notification processing such as an abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality. Regardless of this, it is possible to execute a restoration process for causing the movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation (an operation of moving the movable decoration to a specific position (origin position)) in order to recover the movable decoration from an abnormal state. This restoration process may be executed with different contents depending on the type of the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state during the execution period of the symbol variation in which the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decoration is performed, the specific movable effect is started. If the specific movable decoration is recovered from the abnormal state in the earlier stage, the specific movable effect for operating the specific movable decoration can be executed.

The movable decorative body is specified within a predetermined time even though the restoration process for causing the corresponding movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation (movement to a specific position (origin position)) is executed. If the player does not return to the position (origin position), the game or production will proceed while maintaining the abnormal state, assuming that the recovery has failed.

FIG. 269 shows the allocation status of each channel when an abnormality in the movable body is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination during the period in which the symbol is changed. It is a time chart showing an example of the situation on the movable decorative body side.

As shown in FIG. 269 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, the game board side effect display device 1600 is used. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern in which the effect is being produced is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing ti12, the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity may occur over a period up to the timing ti14 at the maximum. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If the operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing ti14. Alternatively, the effect control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 269, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ti13. Therefore, at the timing ti13, based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received, the movable body drive process is executed to perform the movable effect of producing the specific movable decorative body (FIG. 269 (b). (Refer to), the production sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and played back (see FIG. 269 (a)).

Here, as the movable body driving process, for example, when operating a specific movable decorative body, it is first determined whether or not the abnormality history is stored. As a result, when the abnormality history is stored, the restoration process has failed and the restoration cannot be expected. Therefore, the moving body drive process is terminated without performing any drive. On the other hand, when the abnormality history is not stored, information from a predetermined sensor is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a specific movable decorative body is in a specific position (original position) based on the information. As a result, if the specific movable decorative body is in the specific position (original position), the specific movable decorative body is operated in the manner determined by the effect pattern. In such an operation, the specific movable decoration is finally returned to the specific position (original position), and when the driving for the specific movable decoration is completed, the information from the predetermined sensor is acquired. When it is determined that the vehicle has been returned to the specific position (original position) based on the information, the movable body driving process is terminated. However, if it is determined that the specific movable decoration is not in the specific position (original position) within the movable body drive process, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed. After that, the movable body drive process is terminated. At this time, if the restoration process fails, the abnormality history is stored in a predetermined storage area.

By such a movable body drive process, the specific movable decorative body performs the effect operation from the timing ti13, but in this explanatory example, the specific movable decorative body is set to the specific movable decorative body at the timing ti15 within the period in which the effect operation is performed. It is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and this cannot operate. In FIG. 269 (b), the dotted range indicates the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti17 after the drive for the specific movable decorative body (drive for the effect operation) is completed, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is not in the state of being returned to the specific position (original position) (movable body). Abnormality is determined), and based on the determination, a restoration process for causing a predetermined restoration operation to be performed on a specific movable decorative body is executed.

However, as described above, the situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decorative body while the specific movable decorative body is operating based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is movable. Since it can be said that the situation is likely to have been caused by the failure of the decorative body, in this explanatory example, the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is not assigned to the channel and reproduced. That is, in this case, the movable body abnormality is caused by the display control in the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect sound allocation control to the channel, and the light emission control of the light emitting unit including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs. Since it is executed as it is in the same manner as when it was not detected, it is possible to suppress adverse effects on the effect being executed.

At the timing ti18, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration is completed, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decoration has returned to the specific position (origin position). In that case (when it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), the memory of the abnormality history is deleted, and after that, it becomes possible to execute the normal movable effect. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 269 (b), it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (it is determined that the movable body abnormality has been resolved), and the recovery fails. If this is done, after that, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the game and the production will proceed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation. That is, in this case, even if the timing for executing the movable effect using the specific movable decorative body based on the effect pattern arrives within the same symbol variation or within the symbol variation after the next time, the specific movable decorative body The effect operation is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played. Including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality has occurred, various light emitting units are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. However, in particular, even if the movable decorative body itself does not operate, the actuator (lamp) mounted on the movable decorative body itself is operated (light-emitting) in the mode of operation, so that the movable effect is not performed. It is expected that the game will be suppressed.

In this way, during the period in which the symbol changes, at least when a movable body abnormality is detected in the process of operating the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination, the movable body By not allocating the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality to the channel and not playing it, it is possible to suppress the adverse effect on the effect being executed.

On the other hand, even when an abnormality occurs in the same movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body) within the same fluctuation pattern (specific effect pattern) as in the example shown in FIG. 269, this movable body abnormality is caused. When it occurs at a timing different from that when the specific movable decorative body is operated by the effect control (effect pattern), the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality is assigned to the channel and reproduced.

In FIG. 270, during the period in which the symbol is changed, the movable body abnormality occurs not in the process of operating the movable decorative body according to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) according to the jackpot determination, but in a process different from this. It is a time chart which shows an example about the allocation situation of each channel at the time of detection, and the situation on the movable decoration side.

As shown in FIG. 270 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing ti11, as described above, the game board side effect. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the specific effect pattern being produced by the display device 1600 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

And, as described above, in this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), when the timing ti12 is reached, the operation valid period (effective period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity is the maximum timing ti14. Can occur over a period of time. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing ti12 to timing ti14), the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the specific movable decorative body moves by some external force at the timing ti11a before the timing ti12 at which such a specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation (movement without being based on the effect pattern). Therefore, it is assumed that a specific movable decorative body is not detected at a specific position (original position) at the timing ti11b that should be at a specific position (original position) (movable body abnormality). Also in FIG. 270 (b), the dotted range indicates the period during which the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing ti11b, the restoration process for causing the specific movable decoration body to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred.

At the timing ti13a, the restoration process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration is completed, but at this time, it is detected that the movable decoration has returned to the specific position (origin position) (movable body). If it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved), the memory of the abnormality history will be deleted, and after that, it will be possible to execute the normal movable effect without any abnormality notification. Become so. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 270, the operation effective period (timing ti12 to timing ti14) is generated so as to straddle such timing ti13a. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from the timing ti12 to the timing ti13a in the operation valid period, the specific movable decoration is still in the abnormal state, so that the effect operation of the specific movable decoration is performed. The display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the operation effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and played back, and an abnormality occurs. Various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period from the timing ti13a to the timing ti14 within the operation valid period (timing ti12 to timing ti14), the abnormal state of the specific movable decoration is caused by the restoration process. If it is resolved, the usual effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) will be executed, including the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body. In this explanatory example, it is assumed that a movable body abnormality occurs only in a specific movable decorative body (one movable decorative body) and the restoration process corresponding to the abnormality is executed. .. That is, when a plurality of movable decorations including a specific movable decoration are executing the restoration process, even if the operation by the player is accepted within the period of timing ti13a to timing ti14, it is specific. The effecting operation of the movable decorative body is not always performed, but this will be described later with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 270, it is assumed that at the timing ti13a, it is not detected that the movable decorative body has returned to the specific position (origin position) (determination that the movable body abnormality has been resolved) and the recovery fails. is doing. Therefore, after the timing ti13a, as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued, the game and the effect are advanced while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

Further, as described above, a situation in which an abnormality (movable body abnormality) occurs in the specific movable decoration body even though it is not the timing when the specific movable decoration body is operated based on the effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It can be said that there is a possibility that an abnormality has been detected because a specific movable decorative body has been removed from a specific position (origin position) due to a fraudulent act such as a rattling act or a wire entry. Moreover, the timing ti13a is a situation in which the abnormality of the movable body is not resolved by some external force even in the restoration process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body, and there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed. It can be said that it is increasing more and more.

Therefore, at this timing ti13a, although the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) is being executed, the notification process according to the abnormality of the movable body is executed. That is, in this case, in the channel, in addition to the various effect sounds corresponding to the specific effect pattern being assigned and reproduced according to the progress of the effect content, the abnormal notification sound is played over the predetermined time on the reproduction channels 00, 01. It will be assigned to and played. Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to the display effect corresponding to the specific effect pattern being developed and executed as it is, the display at the time of abnormality corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body (for example, " "An abnormality has occurred in the movable production unit 3200 in the back") will be executed. In addition, in various light emitting parts, as a mode corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, some light emitting parts are made to emit light in an abnormal mode, and the other light emitting parts are made to emit light in a normal manner according to the progress of the production content. It will emit light.

According to the examples of FIGS. 269 and 270, even if the same movable body abnormality occurs during one symbol change, at least the period during which the control related to the effect operation of the movable decorative body based on the change pattern is executed. When the movable body abnormality occurs during the process, it is unlikely that a fraudulent act has been performed, and there is a possibility of a failure during the effect operation. Therefore, the effect is output with priority over the abnormality notification. .. On the other hand, if the movable body abnormality suddenly occurs when the control related to the effect operation of the movable decorative body based on the fluctuation pattern is not executed, there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed and the abnormality is more than the effect. It has a characteristic configuration assuming that it may be more important to output a notification.

In the example shown in FIG. 270, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed at the timing ti11b, and the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is performed at the timing ti13a in which the restoration process is executed but the movable body abnormality is not resolved. I decided to do. However, in the timing ti11b, the movable body abnormality is detected even though the specific movable decorative body cannot operate based on the effect pattern, and even this alone causes a fraudulent act such as a rattling act or a wire entry. Since it can be said that there is a high possibility that the wire has been damaged, the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body may be started to be output at this timing ti11b. At this time, the notification by the display or the notification by the lamp may also be performed.

The point is that, regarding the notification processing according to the abnormality of the movable body, within the period when the symbol is changed, "the specific movable decorative body does not perform the directing operation based on the directing pattern, but the specific movable decorative body does not perform the directing operation. An abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration as a necessary condition, and "an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration while the specific movable decoration is performing the production operation based on the effect pattern". It is important that the above is not executed as a sufficient condition, so that the person who commits the cheating is restrained from committing the cheating, but the legitimate player is being executed. It will be expected to avoid adversely affecting the production of. In addition, as a condition for performing the notification processing according to the movable body abnormality within the period in which the symbol is changed, "the specific movable decoration is not performing the effect operation based on the effect pattern, but the specific movable decoration is not performed. After adopting at least "an abnormality has occurred in the body", for example, "failure in the restoration process performed in response to the abnormality" or "occurred when the abnormality occurred under a specific situation". Etc. can be adopted as further conditions.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration within the process of operating the specific movable decoration according to the effect pattern. However, if an abnormality occurs when operating a specific movable decorative body according to the effect pattern, the notification process according to the movable body abnormality is not performed as a trigger, so that the specific movable body is movable. It may not be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decorative body in the process of operating the decorative body according to the effect pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time when the movable decorative body is visited regularly.

Further, the method for detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to detecting the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 269, an actuator such as a motor that operates the movable decorative body is overloaded at the timing ti17, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected. Further, in the example of FIG. 270, an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded at the timing ti11b, whereby the movable body abnormality is detected.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, a specific movable decorative body is produced and operated at a timing when the player operates it, but the specific movable decorative body is produced at a specific timing determined by the effect pattern. May be produced.

In addition, among the notifications corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and played for a predetermined time, but during this playback period, the volume of the effect sound is up to a specific value (0). You may perform the process of lowering.

If the abnormality notification is not executed under the sufficient condition that "an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration while the specific movable decoration is performing the production operation based on the effect pattern", the abnormality notification is not executed thereafter. However, even if the abnormal state is not resolved and remains, it is desirable that the abnormality notification is not performed at least as long as the RAM is not cleared and the power supply is continued. In addition, it is desirable that the game and the production proceed while maintaining the abnormal state without performing a predetermined restoration operation.

[Restoration processing of multiple movable ornaments]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the judgment by the judgment means according to the winning, there is no space in the channel to which the sound data is assigned. In (the situation where the number of free channels is 0), it is not possible to assign a special sound according to the special result obtained to the channel, and there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated due to the inability to output this. Therefore, conventionally, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in any of a plurality of movable decorative bodies (movable decorative bodies having different drive sources and are provided separately), common abnormal sound data (one abnormality). By assigning (sound data) to channels and playing them, it is possible to prevent the number of channels used from becoming unnecessarily large even in a situation where movable body abnormalities occur simultaneously for multiple movable decorative bodies. rice field. It should be noted that the movable body abnormality is a state in which the movable body cannot operate properly, and is the same as that illustrated in "Abnormality notification while the production according to the production pattern is being performed". be.

However, in recent years, the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on a gaming machine has increased, and simply associating common abnormal sound data (one abnormal sound data) with all movable decorative bodies is sufficient for the game. It is becoming difficult to properly notify the state of the machine. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of movable ornaments are divided into two or more groups, and an abnormality notification sound different depending on which of those groups the movable ornaments belong to has an abnormality is transmitted to the channel. By assigning and making it playable, it is possible to appropriately notify the state of the pachinko machine 1 even when the number of movable decorative bodies mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is increasing.

In this example as well, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as described in the above-mentioned example of "abnormality notification while the effect is being performed according to the effect pattern" (see FIGS. 269 and 270). Is processed. Therefore, also in this example, even if various games (design fluctuation, big hit game, etc.) occur during the period of execution and this is detected, the pachinko machine 1 notifies (output of the notification sound). , Display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side, lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) can be executed. Similarly, during the period in which various games (design variation, jackpot game, etc.) according to the jackpot determination are executed, at least the process of operating the movable decorative body by the effect control by the peripheral control board 1510 (variation pattern). If an abnormality is detected in the movable body while the (effect pattern) or the movable body drive process for operating the movable decorative body is performed based on the effect pattern during the big hit game, the pachinko machine 1 notifies (the effect process). The output of the notification sound, the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the lighting at the time of abnormality by various lamps, etc.) are not performed.

However, in this example, when a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies at the same time, only one abnormal sound data assigned to the channel and set to the playback state corresponds to a specific group among the above groups. On the other hand, it is decided to execute a process of causing the restoration operation to be performed on all of the plurality of movable decorative bodies in which the abnormality has occurred. According to such a configuration, even if a movable body abnormality occurs in a plurality of movable decorative bodies, it is expected to reduce the risk of running out of empty channels by giving a margin to the channels. In addition to this, it will be possible to quickly recover from abnormalities for each movable decorative body, and it will be expected that the channel usage time will be reduced through the efficiency of processing itself when an abnormality occurs. .. Regarding the contents of the restoration process and each process at the time of success or failure, the above-mentioned example of "abnormality notification while the effect is being performed according to the effect pattern" (see FIGS. 269 and 270). ) Is the same.

Here, as a mode for dividing the plurality of movable decorative bodies into two or more groups, it is required that the mode is suitable for notifying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and is provided on the door frame 3 side, for example. A plurality of frame-side movable decorations (not shown) and a plurality of board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back) When divided into two groups (right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500, back lower movable effect unit 3700, etc.), the frame side movable decorative body that can be contacted without opening the door frame 3 is abnormal. It is possible to transmit to the hall side depending on the type of abnormality notification sound, whether an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body on the board side, which is difficult to contact unless the door frame 3 is opened. become. In other words, if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body on the board side, it can be said that there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed to the extent that contact is more difficult than in the case where the movable decorative body on the frame side has an abnormality. Therefore, by outputting the notification sound based on such grouping, the notification sound corresponds to the abnormality of the moving body, but depending on the type, the player does not notice it (unpleasant feelings). It becomes possible to secretly notify the hall side that the pachinko machine 1 is in a situation where the degree of possibility of fraud is high.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a movable body abnormality occurs, as a notification process by the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the output of the above notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, the game board side effect display is also performed. As described above, it is possible to execute the display at the time of abnormality in the display area of the device 1600. In this regard, in this explanatory example, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into two or more groups as a notification mode by display on the game board side effect display device 1600 among the notification processes according to the abnormality of the movable body, and any of those groups. It is desirable to display different notifications depending on whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body belonging to. However, the above-mentioned "notification by display" is inferior to the diffusion function for the occurrence of an abnormality as compared with the case of the above-mentioned "notification by sound", whereas the information transmission function for notifying the abnormality contents in more detail is excellent. It has the above-mentioned properties. Therefore, in the above-mentioned "notification by display", the above-mentioned grouping is performed in a manner different from the case of the above-mentioned "notification by sound" in a manner in which the information transmission function is more exerted, by utilizing the difference in its nature. Therefore, it is desirable to display differently depending on which of the movable decorations belonging to the independently divided groups has an abnormality.

That is, in this case, for example, when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body A and when a movable body abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B, the movable decorative bodies A and B are grouped into either group. Depending on the presence, "While the abnormality notification sound to be reproduced is the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs, the notification content displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is Is the first notification mode in which different displays are performed, and the second notification mode in which the abnormal notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are the same regardless of which movable body abnormality occurs. , And "a third notification mode in which the abnormal notification sound to be reproduced and the notification content to be displayed are different from each other regardless of the occurrence of any movable body abnormality". Therefore, it becomes possible to provide a more detailed notification mode by the notification based on the two different contents of the sound and the display.

FIG. 271 shows an example of the allocation status of each channel and the situation on the movable decoration side when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorations at a specific timing during the period in which the symbol changes. It is a time chart.

As shown in FIG. 271 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation (specific effect pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination is being executed, at the timing tj11, the game board side effect display device 1600 The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to a specific effect pattern in which the effect is being produced is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already reproduced (here, stereo reproduction).

In this symbol variation (specific effect pattern), at the timing tj13, the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) in which the player is given an operation opportunity may occur for a period up to the timing tj15 at the maximum. Then, when an operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is detected within this period (the period from timing tj13 to timing tj15), the operation valid period (valid period of the production reception) is terminated with this as an opportunity. The effect control for operating a specific movable decorative body is executed. If the operation by the player (for example, the operation button 410) is not detected within the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception), the effect control for operating the specific movable decorative body is executed after the timing tj15. Alternatively, the effect control itself for operating a specific movable decorative body may not be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing tj14. Therefore, at the timing tj14, originally, based on the operation received by the player, the movable body drive process is executed to perform the movable effect of producing the specific movable decorative body, and the channel is performed. The effect sound corresponding to the movable effect is assigned to 08 and 09 and played back.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, at the timing tj11, the plurality of movable decorative bodies move (operate without being based on the effect pattern) due to some external force, and the above-mentioned specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation more than the timing tj13. It is assumed that those movable body abnormalities are detected at the previous timing tj12. In addition, in FIG. 271 (b) and FIG. 272 (b) described later, the dotted range indicates the period during which each movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. Therefore, at the timing tj12, the above-mentioned restoration process for causing each movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred to perform a predetermined restoration operation is executed based on the determination that the movable body abnormality has occurred. Therefore, in relation to this restoration process, even if the operation by the player is received at the timing tj14, the specific movable decorative body is not necessarily operated. In the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body A provided on the game board 5 side, the board-side movable decorative body B provided on the game board 5 side, and the board-side movable decorative body C provided on the game board 5 side. , The frame-side movable decorative body D provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative body E provided on the door frame 3 side, and the frame-side movable decorative body F provided on the door frame 3 side have abnormal movable bodies. It is assumed that each situation has occurred.

More specifically, in the restoration process according to the example shown in FIG. 271, first, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side and the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side. The processing mode is different from that of D, E, and F. For example, with respect to the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are arranged in a relatively narrow space, and if they operate simultaneously, interference due to contact with each other may occur. Therefore, after the timing tj12, the restoration process is performed based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap with each other. On the other hand, the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side operate by utilizing the space outside the pachinko machine 1, and the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. Since there is no concern that they will interfere with each other due to their movements, including the relationship with the above, the restoration process is performed at the same time at the timing tj12 so that the movable decorative body can be quickly restored to an abnormal state.

In such a configuration, the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side is performed for a long time from the timing tj12 to the timing tj18, whereas the door frame 3 side In the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided in the above, the restoration process can be completed in a relatively short time from timing tj12 to timing tj16.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side is provided until the operation valid period (valid period of the effect reception) that gives the player an operation opportunity ends. It is assumed that none of the restoration processing of A, B, and C and the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side are completed. Therefore, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the above operation is effective. Regardless of the timing of the production reception within the period (valid period of the production reception), the production is processed so as not to perform the production operation triggered by the production reception.

That is, in this case, if the effect reception occurs within the period during which the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is executed, it is clear that the specific movable decoration cannot be operated by the effect. Even if the production reception occurs after the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is completed, it is possible to move with each other with other board-side movable decorations that are still in the stage of executing the restoration process. There is a concern that it will interfere. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, any of them within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if the operation by the player is accepted at the timing of, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the channel is displayed. On the other hand, the effect sound (operation effect sound) when the movable effect is performed is assigned and reproduced, and the movable effect is performed by various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs. It will only emit light in the manner in which it emits light. In short, if a specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the relevant restoration process is completed after all the restoration processes are completed (all restoration processes are completed successfully). Only when the timing for performing the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body has arrived, the execution of the effect operation is permitted.

On the other hand, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, it corresponds to any of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, and the above. It is processed so that whether or not to perform the production operation triggered by the production reception is changed depending on the timing of the production reception within the operation validity period (valid period of the production reception). Will be.

That is, in this case, first, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body E, the timings tj13 to tj15 at which the specific movable decorative body can perform the effect operation after the restoration process is completed (successful in the restoration process). Will definitely arrive, and even if the other movable ornaments A to C, D, and F are in the process of being restored, there is no concern that they will interfere with each other. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the frame-side movable decorative body E, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if this is the case, the effect operation of a specific movable decorative body is performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed by the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) when the operation is performed is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting parts including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs are in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. It will emit light.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body D, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) is generated so as to straddle the timing at which the restoration process is completed. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period before the restoration process is completed, the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state, so that the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state. The body effect operation is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the effect sound when the movable effect is performed is assigned to the channel and reproduced. Therefore, various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the abnormally generated movable decorative body are only emitted in the light emitting mode when the movable effect is performed. On the other hand, when the operation by the player is accepted within the period after the end of the restoration process (successful restoration process) in the operation valid period, the other movable decorative bodies A to C, F perform the restoration process. Since there is no concern of interfering with them even during the execution of, the normal effect control (movable body, display effect, effect sound, light emission) including the effect operation of a specific movable decorative body. Will be executed.

On the other hand, if the specific movable decorative body is the frame-side movable decorative body F, the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15) does not come after the restoration processing is completed (successful restoration processing). .. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, when the specific movable decorative body corresponds to the board-side movable decorative body F, the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period (timing tj13 to timing tj15). Even if it is performed, the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body is not performed, the display effect when the movable effect is performed is executed in the game board side effect display device 1600, and the movable effect is performed for the channel. The effect sound (operation effect sound) of the time is assigned and reproduced, and various light emitting units including the lamp mounted on the movable decorative body in which the abnormality occurs are emitted in the light emission mode when the movable effect is performed. Will stay in.

Here, the notification processing according to the example shown in FIG. 271 will be described. In this example, when the notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is notified, a plurality of board-side movable decorative bodies A and B provided on the game board 5 side are described. , C and a plurality of frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F provided on the door frame 3 side are divided into two groups, and the abnormally generated movable decorative body belongs to any of these groups. Different notification sounds are output depending on the presence.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it is assumed that the movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in the board-side movable decorative body and the frame-side movable decorative body. However, such a situation cannot usually occur while the proper game is in progress, and cannot occur as a result of cheating. Therefore, the hall side is required to check the operation of the accessory and repair it. It is likely that you are in a special situation, such as manually tampering with all movable ornaments. In any case, in such a special situation, the notification process itself may be troublesome, and it is required to terminate the notification state at an early stage.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, it was detected that the movable body abnormalities occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively. In the timing tj12, the restoration process on the board side movable decoration side and the restoration process on the frame side movable decoration side are started at the same time as described above, whereas the notification sound output is frame side movable. The abnormal notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the decorative bodies D, E, and F is not assigned to the channel, and the abnormal notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C on the board side is assigned to the channel. I try to keep it output.

That is, the time during which the abnormality notification sound corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body is reproduced is the time until the abnormality of the movable decorative body to be notified is resolved, or a predetermined predetermined time after the abnormality notification sound is output. It is set as the time until the time (for example, 30 seconds common to the board side and the frame side) elapses. Therefore, of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, the side that takes a long time to complete the restoration process is "board-side movable decoration A, By assigning only the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the B and C sides" to the channel, the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the movable decorative bodies A, B and C on the board side" can be generated. It is now possible to end the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F during playback, and "Abnormality notification common to the board side corresponding to the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C". After the output of "sound" is completed, it is possible to avoid being required to output the "abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side". The notification process can be terminated in a simpler manner.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 271, while the restoration processing is performed on the board-side movable decorations A, B, C and the frame-side movable decorations D, E, F, the board-side movable decoration A, The "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorations A, B, C side" is assigned to the channel and played over the period until the timing tj18 when all the restoration processes of B and C are completed. Therefore, the "abnormality notification sound common to the frame side corresponding to the frame side movable decorative bodies D, E, F side" is not reproduced. At this time, as described above, the control of assigning the effect sound to the channel is performed as usual.

On the other hand, in the notification mode based on the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 among the notification processes according to the abnormality of the movable body, the above-mentioned "notification by sound" is performed by utilizing the difference in properties from the above-mentioned notification sound. The above grouping is performed in a mode different from that in which the information transmission function is more exerted, and different display is performed depending on which of the independently divided groups the movable decorative body belongs to. ing. That is, in this case, for example, if the frame-side movable decorative body E is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body F, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body E is completed, it corresponds to this. The "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body F is completed. Similarly to this, for example, if the board-side movable decorative body A is grouped with the frame-side movable decorative body D, even if the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body A is completed, this will be applied. The corresponding "notification by display" is maintained, and the "notification by display" is terminated at the timing when the restoration process of the frame-side movable decorative body D is completed. Therefore, even if the restoration process of the specific movable decoration is completed first, depending on the execution status of the restoration process of the movable decoration grouped with the specific movable decoration, the restoration process may be higher than that of the specific movable decoration. It is possible that the "notification by display" corresponding to the movable decorative body for which the restoration process has been completed will be terminated first.

According to the example of FIG. 271, as the notification sound corresponding to the movable body abnormality, a plurality of notification sounds according to the type of the movable decorative body in which the movable body abnormality has occurred are prepared. Then, when a movable body abnormality occurs simultaneously in a plurality of movable decorative bodies corresponding to each of the notification sounds, only one of the plurality of notification sounds can be reproduced, but the restoration process is in the reproduction state. Not limited to the movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in, the movable decorative body not corresponding to the notification sound is also executed during the reproduction period. Moreover, as a movable decorative body corresponding to the notification sound in the reproduced state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, these movable decorative bodies are individually restored according to a predetermined order. On the other hand, as a movable decorative body that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduced state, when a plurality of movable decorative bodies are in an abnormal state, the restoration process applied to these movable decorative bodies is executed at the same time. As a result, for the movable decoration that does not correspond to the notification sound in the reproduction state, the total time required for the restoration process can be shortened as compared with the movable decoration that corresponds to the notification sound in the reproduction state, and a plurality of movable decorations can be shortened. While one of the notification sounds is being played, all the movable ornaments can be returned from the abnormal state to the normal state, and the second notification sound is output. It will be possible to avoid it.

That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of movable decorative bodies are divided into a board-side movable decorative body and a frame-side movable decorative body, and restoration processing according to each group is performed at the same time. Not limited to. In short, a plurality of movable decorative bodies (A to F in the above example) can be operated in two or more groups (in the above example, the board side) that can be operated without being affected by the operating conditions of the movable decorative bodies belonging to other groups. The plurality of movable decorations (DF) belonging to at least one group (frame side in the above example) can be classified into the frame side) and the restoration process can be executed independently for each group. If all of them can be restored and operated at the same time by selecting them as movable decorative bodies that can operate without being influenced by each other's operating conditions, refer to FIGS. 271 and 272. It is possible to configure it so that the described effects are obtained.

In the example shown in FIG. 271, it is desirable that the determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body is performed at a predetermined timing or at a predetermined time when the movable decorative body is visited regularly. Further, the method for detecting a movable body abnormality is not limited to detecting the position of the movable decorative body to be detected. For example, when an actuator such as a motor for operating the movable decorative body is overloaded, the movable body abnormality is detected. Other methods such as detection may be adopted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, a specific movable decorative body is produced at a timing when the player operates it, but the specific movable decorative body is produced at a specific timing determined by the effect pattern. It may be something to make.

In addition, among the notifications corresponding to the abnormality of the movable body, the abnormality notification sound is assigned to the channel and played for a predetermined time, but during this playback period, the volume of the effect sound is up to a specific value (0). You may perform the process of lowering.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, movable body abnormalities occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C and the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, respectively, during the period in which the symbol variation was executed. Although the explanation is based on the assumption of the situation, the symbol change does not necessarily have to be executed. That is, during the execution period of the jackpot game or when the game of the special symbol is waiting for progress (for example, in the demo screen), the board-side movable decorations A, B, C and the frame-side movable decoration D, Even when a movable body abnormality occurs in E and F, each process according to the movable body abnormality is performed in the same manner as the example described with reference to FIG. 271.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, all of the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C provided on the game board 5 side are restored based on a predetermined order so that the operation periods do not overlap with each other. And said. However, if a plurality of movable decorative bodies that do not interfere with each other due to contact with each other even if they operate simultaneously are included in the board-side movable decorative body, the board-side movable decorative body shall be arranged in a predetermined order. During the restoration process, the restoration process may be performed at the same time only for some movable decorative objects that do not cause interference due to contact with each other.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 271, the timing at which it is determined whether or not a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, and the timing at which the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F have a movable body abnormality. It is assumed that the timing at which the occurrence is determined is the same, but these timings may be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 272, after it was determined that a movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, a movable body abnormality occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F. Even if it is determined to that effect, the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F is completed at a timing earlier than the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C is completed. As long as there is a relationship, after the output of the "abnormality notification sound common to the board side corresponding to the board side movable decorations A, B, C side" is completed, "the frame side movable decoration bodies D, E, F side It can be avoided that the output request of "corresponding abnormal notification sound common to the frame side" is required.

Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 271, after it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F, a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. The processing structure may be set so as to determine that the processing has been performed. However, in this case, when it is determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F, notification processing according to the movable body abnormality and restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, F are performed. After waiting for it to be determined that a movable body abnormality has occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are supported. It is desirable to perform the restoration processing of the board-side movable decorations A, B, and C and the restoration processing of the frame-side movable decorations D, E, and F, respectively, while the notification processing is performed. As a result of waiting for the process of determining whether or not the movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, no movable body abnormality occurred in the board-side movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this case, the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F are restored while the notification processing corresponding to the frame-side movable decorative bodies D, E, and F is performed.

[Automatic multiple operation function (automatic repeated hit function)]
By the way, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly hitting an operation button 410) to a predetermined operation means may be urged to perform a plurality of operation effects corresponding to each of these operations. However, in recent years, during a predetermined validity period in which an operation opportunity for such a plurality of operations (such as repeated hits) is given, the predetermined operation means (operation button 410) does not have to be operated a plurality of times. An automatic multiple operation function (auto) that allows the effect mode to appear when the operation is performed multiple times by simply performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press, etc.) to maintain the operation state for a relatively long time. It is becoming more and more equipped with a continuous hit function).

In such an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous striking function), a single operation (one operation in a short time) is performed within a relatively short time when an operation in a long mode such as a so-called long press is performed. ) Is repeated (such as the feeling that fast repeated hits are being made) to make the player remember, which is a player who is not good at multiple operations (slow continuous hitting speed). It can be said that it is important to suppress the deterioration of the game interest of (players, etc.) and to encourage various players to use the function. However, if the effect is simply changed (for example, the operation sound) when the effect is received every time a relatively short time elapses when the player is in the operation state, the player can do the same. Even if you intend to perform an operation by a single push, the short operation time (the time that the operation state is slightly maintained by a single push) becomes slightly longer or shorter, so that the production reception is multiple times. It may occur (multiple operation sounds are generated), or the production reception may occur only once (one operation sound may be generated), and the number of production receptions for one single operation is stable. There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline due to the discomfort caused by not doing so.

In this regard, in the conventional automatic continuous striking function, when an operation by a so-called long press is performed, first, as in the case where an operation by a single press is performed, an effect change (for example, an operation sound) due to the reception of the effect Etc.) is generated only once. Then, after the first effect change (for example, operation sound) is generated, a new effect reception (operation sound) is not generated until a predetermined interval time longer than a predetermined short time elapses. After waiting for the predetermined interval time to elapse, the effect change (operation sound) when the effect reception is made is repeatedly generated every time the predetermined short time elapses. That is, in this case, since there is a time allowance between the generation of the first production reception (operation sound) and the generation of the second production reception (operation sound), a single push is performed. Whether the operation is repeated within a relatively short time just by performing the so-called long press operation, while avoiding the occurrence of discomfort due to the unstable number of production receptions when the operation is performed by It will be possible to create a production that looks like this.

However, from the player's point of view, it is necessary to allow time between the first production reception (operation sound) and the second production reception (operation sound). It is useless in terms of operation and production, and the number of times the production reception (operation sound) is generated per unit time is reduced by the amount of such wasted time (pseudo repeated hits when a so-called long press operation is performed). There is a concern that the game will be less enjoyable due to the fact that the speed will be slower.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is performed only once in the mode of one-shot operation, the operation for the operation means is long. As in the case where the operation (long press, etc.) is performed, the specific sound associated with the operation on the operation means can be output intermittently. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operating means, it feels as if a single operation (one operation in a short time) is repeatedly performed within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode. It will be possible to make the player remember (such as the feeling that a fast continuous hit is being performed). As a result, all operation modes are adopted while stabilizing the responsiveness of the effect (whether it is a single effect change or multiple effect changes) when the operation is performed by a single push. Even if there is, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the number of occurrences of the effect change (for example, operation sound) per unit time.

FIG. 273 is a time chart showing an example of control contents for realizing such an automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous striking function). Here, it is assumed that the operation button 410 is adopted as the operation means. Further, also in other drawings including FIG. 273, the white specific sound output in the figure indicates the specific sound generated based on the effect reception corresponding to the operation of the button 410. The black specific sound output in the figure indicates the specific sound generated following the white specific sound output in the figure while the production reception is not occurring when the operation button 410 is not operated. Is. It is desirable that the volume and timbre of these specific sounds are the same without any difference.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the operation state is maintained only for a short time at the timing tx11 in the predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of the multiple operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given (single operation). It is assumed that one operation is performed in. Therefore, at the timing tx11, the detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the output of the specific sound accompanying the operation on the operation button 410 is the same as the output. The process of starting the output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) accompanying the operation is performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the specific sound (for example, "picone") associated with the operation of the operation button 410 is output at the timing tx11, the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410. Even if no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the specific sound (for example, "picone") associated with the operation of the operation button 410 is interrupted in the situation. It can be output as a target.

For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is now terminated at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state). Then, even if no operation by the player is detected until the grace time TY1 elapses, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is generated every time the automation time TY2 shorter than the grace time TY1 elapses. ") Is output so that a specific sound (for example," picone ") associated with the operation of the operation button 410 can be output intermittently.

Here, in the grace time TY1 and the automation time TY2 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), 5 times (N times) between the start of the grace time TY1 and the elapse of the grace time TY1. It is set to have a time length that allows a specific minute sound (for example, "picone") to be output. As a result, even if the operation is performed in the form of a single operation within a predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of multiple operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given, a specific sound (sound according to the production reception) associated with the operation. Is output for at least 5 times (N times) (one specific sound output at the timing of operation detection, and 4 times (N-) output every time the automation time TY2 elapses even if there is no operation thereafter. It will be output intermittently over one time) and the total number of specific sounds).

In particular, in this embodiment, the grace time TY1 is terminated in the middle of the output of the specific sound (for example, “picone”) (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the grace period is in the middle of the output of the fifth specific sound). Even when the timing tx13) at which the time TY1 ends arrives, a process (output interruption process, etc.) that cuts off the specific sound being output at that timing tx13 (for example, “pico”)) (Such as overwriting with the sound of) is not performed, and even after the timing tx13 arrives, the specific sound that has been output up to that point (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the 1st to 4th specific sounds) The output (sound type) in the same mode appears. That is, if the specific sound accompanying the operation is interrupted in the middle, it becomes ambiguous whether the operation is received multiple times or not, and in the end, the operation feeling as if the operation was performed multiple times. There is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to remember (it will make you think that it is just a specific sound that is simulated in a non-operation state), but with such a configuration, such a concern is raised. It is expected that the problem will be solved favorably.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the predetermined validity period ends and a new operation is not accepted for production between the start of the grace time TY1 and the elapse of the grace time TY1. Until the grace time TY1 is completed, a specific sound (for example, "picone") is output every time the automation time TY2 arrives. That is, in this case, since the specific sound can be output intermittently even after the predetermined valid period has expired, it is necessary to avoid that the number of times of receiving the production is not stable when the operation by the single push is performed. Not only that, it becomes possible for the player to remember the feeling as if the operation was performed within the period exceeding the predetermined validity period, and it is expected that the game interest will be improved. In this sense, a display (such as a display of the remaining time during which the validity period is continued) is performed so that the player can recognize whether the predetermined validity period is continued or terminated. It can be said that it is more desirable to output the specific sound for the remaining number of times (1 to 4 times) while it is recognizable that the state has been completed.

Regarding the "specific sound output associated with the operation" in the figure, the volume waveform of the specific sound (other sound output) that is output each time the automation time TY2 elapses, rather than the signal waveform associated with the specific sound output. This is a conceptual representation of the excluded waveform). As is clear from the figure, in this embodiment, the automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the specific sound of the previous output to finish being output to the end elapses, and the specific sound of the previous output is converted to the specific sound of the previous output. On the other hand, the sound data of the new specific sound is output in the form of being overwritten on the specific channel, which makes it possible to output the specific sound continuously and intermittently, as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed. It will be expected that the player will remember the feeling.

By the way, as the reproduction type of the specific sound, in addition to the mode in which 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) for reproducing the target sound once is executed every time the automation time TY2 elapses, the target sound is used. It may be a loop reproduction (corresponding to “LOOP” in the figure) that is repeatedly reproduced each time the automation time TY2 elapses. Further, the mode may be such that a plurality of specific sounds that are continuously and intermittently output are reproduced as one sound data. In the mode of reproducing a plurality of specific sounds as one sound data, not all the specific sounds are necessarily output as the same single sound, but are sequentially output as a plurality of different single sounds. There may be.

On the other hand, among the examples shown in FIG. 273 (a), regarding the display output of the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 is also displayed after the operation time display pattern accompanying the operation with respect to the operation button 410 is displayed at the timing tx11. Even if the player's hand is separated from the player and no operation is performed (in the figure, the period from timing tx12 to tx13), the display content of the operation display pattern is advanced multiple times in the situation. It has become something that can be done.

For example, it is assumed that the operation state (detection state) from the timing tx11 is now terminated at the timing tx12. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set based on the end of the operation state (detection state), as described above. Is. In this regard, in this embodiment, a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order from the timing tx11 until the grace time TY1 set above is timed up. By executing, the display content of the operation display pattern can be advanced.

The contents of each of the display scenes 1 to 5 can be set, for example, as the mode shown in FIG. 274. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 274, "display scene 1" is a moving image depicting a ally character holding a sword and trying to pull out the sword, and "display scene 2" is a ally. It is a video that depicts how the character pulls out the sword and cuts off the sword, and "Display Scene 3" is a video that depicts the ally character having a sword fight with the enemy character in the first mode. , "Display scene 4" is a video depicting a ally character having a sword fight with an enemy character in the second mode, and "display scene 5" is a video in which the ally character has a third with the enemy character. This is a video that depicts a sword fighting in a mode.

After displaying the operation display pattern accompanying the operation of the operation button 410 at the timing tx11, while the specific sounds are output intermittently, these display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially displayed, so that the ally character becomes an enemy. It becomes possible for the player to remember the feeling that the production content of fighting the character is progressing in response to a plurality of operations. Note that each display scene 1 to 5 does not necessarily have to be a moving image, and may be a still image. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, in addition to displaying the operation display pattern, various effect displays (hold display, operation instruction image, etc.) may be displayed. As one of the effect displays, an image that changes the effect (color change, etc.) each time the effect reception occurs due to the operation by the player may be included, but it recognizes whether or not the effect reception has occurred. To make it difficult, it is important to display the image as a smaller image than the display pattern during operation.

Here, in the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 273 (a), between the start of the grace time TY1 and the elapse of the grace time TY1. It is set to have a time length such that at least 5 (M) display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) can be sequentially displayed. As a result, even if the operation is performed in the mode of one-shot operation within a predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) is given, at least 5 (M) display contents of the operation display pattern are displayed. ) Minutes (one display scene 1 displayed at the timing of operation detection, and four (M-1 times) display scenes 2 to 5 that are sequentially displayed (progressed) even when there is no operation thereafter. The displayed content will be advanced over (the total number of and).

In particular, in this embodiment, the timing at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene (in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), the timing tx13 at which the grace time TY1 ends during the output of the display scene 5). When is arrived, unlike the case of the specific sound, the display scene 5 is not displayed to the end, but is interrupted in the form of being chopped at that point to end the operation display pattern. That is, unlike the case of a specific sound without progress, the display content at the time of operation, which has progress in the production content, is displayed if the operation is continued by intentionally interrupting the display scene in the middle of the display scene. It is expected to give the player the impression that he may have been able to make further progress, thereby encouraging further operations by the player. In this sense, regarding the relationship between the operation display pattern (each display scene) and the grace time TY1, all the display scenes 1 to 5 are not displayed from the start to the end of the grace time TY1. It can be said that it is more desirable to set to to encourage the player to perform further operations. In order to encourage the player to perform further operations, only a part of all the display scenes 1 to 5 should be displayed between the start and the end of the grace time TY1. Is more desirable.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the predetermined validity period ends between the start of the grace time TY1 and the elapse of the grace time TY1, and a new operation is not accepted for production, the predetermined validity is performed. At the end of the period (the state where the remaining time of the grace time TY1 is left), the display scene in the output state is interrupted to display the result as the operation display pattern. , This will be described later.

It should be noted that the display scenes 2 to 5 are sequentially displayed and progressed according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the mode of operation after the display scene 1 is displayed. May be preset according to the time from the output of the specific sound to the re-output (automation time TY2), or is set regardless of the time (automation time TY2). It may be a thing. In this sense, display changes such as switching to another display or the occurrence of a new display in the content of each display scene itself (in the example of FIG. 274, display scene 1 states that "from the state where the sword is held, There is a display change due to "video description to the state where the sword is pulled out", and there is a display change due to "effect generation while the ally character fights the enemy character" in the display scene 3). It can be said that it is more desirable. By using a display scene having such a display change, it is possible to make it appear as if the display change in each display scene was caused by the production reception, so that the output timing of the specific sound and the switching timing of the display scene can be made. It is expected that the discomfort will be eliminated even if the above is not strictly matched. Further, as the operation display pattern, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of display scenes, and the same display scene may be repeatedly displayed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), the operation button 410 is operated for a relatively long time at the timing tx21 in the predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of the operation (continuous hitting, etc.) is given a plurality of times. It is assumed that the operation is performed in a long mode to be maintained in. Therefore, also in the timing tx21, as in the case of the timing tx11, the detection (determination) that the operation has been performed on the operation button 410 is performed, and based on the detection (determination), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed. The process of starting the output of the specific sound and the output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) associated with the same operation is performed.

Further, even in the operation maintenance period in which the operation state from the timing tx21 to the timing tx22 is maintained, it is specified every time the automation time TY2 elapses, as in the case of the above-mentioned non-operation period (the period from the timing tx12 to tx13). A sound (for example, "picone") can be output intermittently, and a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order for operation. The display content of the time display pattern can be developed in the same manner as the example shown in FIG. 273 (a).

That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, first, during the operation maintenance period (the period from the timing tx21 to tx22), it is determined whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is continued (operation state). Periodic monitoring (determines whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed (for example, detection of a falling edge in a detection signal)). Then, as long as the operation state is continued, the grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is not set, and while regular monitoring is performed, "every time the automation time TY2 elapses". It is decided to perform "a process of outputting a specific sound (for example," picone ")" and "a process of sequentially outputting a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) according to a predetermined time and order". In other words, in the operation maintenance period (the period from timing tx21 to tx22), "every time the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is in the operation detection state, and it is determined that the operation is in the operation detection state. Based on this, a process such as "outputting a specific sound (for example," picone ")" or "every time the automation time TY2 elapses, it is determined whether or not the operation is in the operation detection state, and the operation detection state is in effect. No processing such as "advancing the display content based on the judgment" is performed, and "regular monitoring (judgment) of whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is in a continuous state (operation state)" is performed. And "a process to output a specific sound (for example," picone ") every time the automation time TY2 elapses" and "a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order". "Processing to make" is performed respectively. The "regular monitoring (judgment) of whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is in a continuous state (operation state)" is executed as a process executed a plurality of times while the automation time TY2 elapses. Is to be done.

After that, as a result of "regular monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (operation state)", the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (the operation button 410). When the timing tx22 for determining that the operation state) has been completed arrives, the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment first sets a predetermined time length based on the result of the determination. Set the grace time TY1 you have. However, at this time, "a process of outputting a specific sound (for example," picone ") each time the automation time TY2 elapses" and "a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are output according to a predetermined time and order". The "process of sequentially outputting" is continuously executed even after the timing tx22 at which the operation state ends has arrived, over the period until the timing tx23 until the grace time TY1 ends. That is, in this case, from the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx21 to x22) to the situation where the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx22 to x23). In a specific period (timing tx21 to x23) that straddles the timing of the transition, the specific sound can be output intermittently in a single processing mode that is only output again each time the automation time TY2 elapses. In addition, the operation display pattern can be continuously output in one processing mode in which a plurality of display scenes 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

According to such a configuration, in producing the output mode of the specific sound at the time of the single operation shown in FIG. 273 (a) and the output mode of the specific sound at the time of the long press operation shown in FIG. 273 (b), respectively. , It becomes possible to standardize the processing mode (program) related to the output of a specific sound among them. Similarly to this, the output mode of the operation display pattern during a single operation shown in FIG. 273 (a) and the output mode of the operation display pattern during a long press operation shown in FIG. 273 (b) are shown. In producing, it becomes possible to standardize the processing mode (program) related to the output of the display pattern at the time of operation among them. That is, in this case, in the example of FIG. 273 (a), as a result of "regular monitoring (determination) of whether or not the operation for the operation button 410 is in a continuous state (operation state)" at the timing tx12. It is determined that the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed. Further, the situation where the operation on the operation button 410 is continued (timing tx11 to x12) changes to the situation where the player's hand is separated from the operation button 410 and no operation is performed (timing tx12 to x13). In a specific period (timing tx11 to x13) that straddles the timing, the specific sound is intermittently output in one processing mode that is only re-output every time the automation time TY2 elapses, and a plurality of display scenes. The operation display pattern is continuously output in one processing mode in which 1 to 5 (display contents) are sequentially output according to a predetermined time and order.

As a result, even if the operation on the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-shot mode, the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in the same manner as in the so-called long-press mode. A specific sound associated with the operation of the operation button 410 will be output intermittently. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed on the operation button 410, the single press (one operation in a short time) is repeated within a relatively short time regardless of the operation mode (single press, long press). It becomes possible to make the player remember the feeling as if it is being performed (such as the feeling as if a fast continuous hit is being performed). This stabilizes the responsiveness of the effect (whether it is a single effect change or multiple effect changes) when the operation is performed by a single push, and which operation mode (single push, single push,) is performed. Even if long press) is adopted, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the number of occurrences of the effect change (specific sound) accompanying the operation per unit time.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 273, the operation of the operation button 410 is performed only once in the single-shot mode (FIG. 273 (a)) and in the so-called long-press mode (FIG. 273). Although the same effect change is generated in (b)), in reality, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), one effect reception is performed at the timing tx11, and the white outline in the figure is specified accordingly. In contrast to the sound output for only one time, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (b), four times of production reception are performed according to the elapse of the automation time TY2 from the timing tx11, and the white in the figure corresponding to them. The specific sound output without the sound is output four times. Therefore, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined valid period, at least a specific number of production receptions are required, or a production lottery is performed each time the production reception is performed, and a specific production result is specified according to the result. When a type of production that causes the production result to appear is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 273 (a), since only one production reception is substantially generated, a specific production result is produced. That is not very promising. However, with the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment, by intentionally outputting the specific sound in black in the figure even when the production reception is not occurring, so many production receptions actually occur. Even if it is a situation where you can not expect a specific production result to appear, you can operate it multiple times by creating a production situation as if many production receptions are occurring. Even when a player who is not good at playing a game (such as a slow continuous hitting speed) performs a single operation, it becomes possible to preferably suppress a decrease in the game interest.

In this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much the production reception is generated only by checking the specific sound output each time, but from the start of the operation to the end of the operation. By confirming how many specific sound outputs have been made, it is possible to give a star of how many production receptions have occurred.

Further, in the operation display pattern according to this embodiment, after the display scene 1 to the display scene 5 are sequentially output, the display scene 3 is output again, and after that, the grace time TY1 is timed up. By repeatedly outputting the display scenes 3 to 5 until the predetermined validity period ends or the production conditions are satisfied and a specific production result appears within the predetermined validity period, the ally character becomes the enemy character and the sword. I am trying to make a depiction of a single-minded meeting. Therefore, it is desirable that the specific effect result describes how the ally character wins over the enemy character as a result of such a sword-based meeting, and the specific effect result is within a predetermined valid period. When does not appear, it is desirable to display the effect result at the time of failure, which describes how the ally character is defeated by the enemy character as a result of having a meeting with such a sword at the end.

As described above, the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is performed only once in the mode of one-shot pressing (FIG. 273 (a)) and the case where the operation for the operation button 410 is performed in the mode of long pressing (FIG. FIG. In any case of 273 (b)), the specific sound associated with the operation is intermittently output multiple times, and the operation display pattern associated with the operation is sequentially displayed according to a predetermined schedule and progressed. By doing so, even a player who is not good at operating multiple times can be encouraged to perform the operation with peace of mind. However, in reality, during the above-mentioned predetermined validity period, the operation button 410 is often operated as a continuous striking operation in the mode of a single push, and when such a continuous striking operation is performed, 1 It is important for the player to remember the feeling of operation that each production reception is generated by each operation in order to improve the interest of the game. However, if the operation feeling that the production reception is generated by each operation is completely reflected as the production, the player who is good at multiple operations is more advantageous than the player who is not good at multiple operations. Since the color rendering will be as if it were there, it is necessary to balance the production elements (operation feeling, production fairness) that have such a trade-off relationship.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in order to secure the operation feeling that the effect reception is generated by each operation, the pachinko machine 1 is operated as an immediate effect for the operation. Focusing on the fact that "whether the sound is generated (or changed) when operated" is a more important parameter than "whether the display is generated (or changed)", the operation buttons are used for a predetermined validity period. Each time the operation on the 410 is performed in the mode of a single push, a specific sound corresponding to the production reception is output according to the operation timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 275 (a), an operation on the operation button 410 is performed as a plurality of continuous striking operations in a single-shot pressing mode during the period of timings tx31 to tx32 within a predetermined valid period. Suppose. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, each time an operation on the operation button 410 is detected, a new specific sound is generated with respect to the specific sound of the previous output (specific sound in the output state). A new specific sound is output in such a way that the sound data is overwritten on the specific channel. In this way, even when the operation of the operation button 410 is performed only once in the mode of one-shot pressing, such output is performed while intermittently outputting the specific sound multiple times. When the operation button 410 is operated again while the operation button 410 is being operated, a new specific sound is output in a manner in which the specific sound in the output state is intentionally cut off (interrupted) in the middle of the operation. It becomes possible to explicitly suggest that a specific sound is newly output and the production is accepted at the timing when is performed.

In this embodiment, even if the operation button 410 is operated only once in the mode of one-shot pressing or the operation is performed by long-pressing, the specific sound of the previous output is output to the end. The automation time TY2 is digested before the time required for the above elapses, and the sound data of the new specific sound is overwritten on the specific channel for the specific sound of the previous output. That is as described above. However, in this case, the specific sound is output with an accurate rhythm at regular time intervals (automation time TY2), whereas the operation button 410 is operated as a continuous striking operation in the mode of a single press. In that case, every time the operation timing by the player arrives irregularly, the specific sound in the output state is cut off and a new specific sound is output. It becomes possible for the player to appropriately remember the operation feeling that the production reception is occurring.

Incidentally, also in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), each time the operation button 410 is operated during a predetermined valid period, it is periodically determined whether or not the operation is continued (operation state). Monitoring (determining whether or not the operation state (operation detection state) has been completed) is performed. In this regard, in the period of timing tx31 to tx32 in which the operation button 410 is operated as a continuous striking operation in the mode of one-shot pressing, the operation is continued each time the operation button 410 is operated. As a result of periodical monitoring of whether or not the operation state is in (operation state), it is immediately determined that the continuation of the operation state has been completed, and a predetermined time length is provided accordingly. The grace time TY1 will be set (not shown).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, when a new operation is performed on the operation button 410 before the grace time TY1 ends (time up), the setting of the grace time TY1 is canceled. Therefore, it is returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation of the operation button 410 is in the continuous state (operation state) is performed. Therefore, in the period of timing tx31 to tx32, every time the operation button 410 is in the operation state or is not in the operation state, the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state is performed. , The state transition is performed rapidly with the state in which the grace time TY1 (not shown) having a predetermined time length is set.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), after the continuous striking operation for 6 times is performed between the timings tx31 to tx32, the repeated striking operation is tired, and after that, the repeated striking operation is performed. It is assumed that the time required will be significantly longer. For a player who is not good at such multiple operations, after timing tx32, it is not possible to perform multiple repeated hit operations well, so the number of production receptions is larger than that of a player who is good at multiple operations. There is a concern that the number of games will be reduced and the interest in games will decline. However, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, a specific sound is emitted each time the automation time TY2 elapses even if the operation by the player is not detected until the grace time TY1 elapses after the operation state is terminated. As described above, the process of outputting is performed. Therefore, according to the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, even if the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, at least the grace time TY1 after the previous operation state is completed. As long as the repeated operation can be performed within a shorter time than that, the player can be made to feel as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed by continuously and intermittently outputting a specific sound accompanying the operation. Will be.

For example, if it is determined at the timing tx33 that the continuation of the operating state is completed as a result of periodic monitoring of whether or not the operating state from the timing tx32 is continued, based on the determination. , A grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is set. After that, although the time required for repeated operations will be significantly longer, a specific sound will be output each time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where the player is not operating. By performing the process of causing the operation, the specific sound accompanying the operation is continuously and intermittently output. However, these specific sounds are output as black-out specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) in the figure under the condition that the production reception is not generated.

In this regard, the black specific sounds (7th to 9th specific sounds) in the figure can be generated only until the grace time TY1 elapses after the end of the previous operation state. However, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), with respect to the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33, the operation button 410 is operated again at the timing tx34 before the grace time TY1 elapses. Based on the operation, the setting is canceled (time does not increase). Along with this, at the timing tx34, the white specific sound (10th specific sound) in the figure is output due to the occurrence of the production reception in the form of cutting (interrupting) the specific sound that was in the output state. At the same time, it is returned to the state in which the process of periodically monitoring whether or not the operation state is continued is performed.

However, such an operation state is also terminated when the timing tx35 is reached, and a determination to that effect is made as a result of the above monitoring, and based on the determination, a grace time TY1 having a predetermined time length is obtained. It will be set again. Then, every time the automation time TY2 elapses in a situation where the player is not operating, the black specific sound (11th to 14th specific sound) in the figure is output again, and the grace period is reached. When the operation by the player is finally performed at the timing tx36 before the time TY1 is timed up, the black specific sound (14th specific sound) in the output state is cut off (interrupted). In the form, the white specific sound (15th specific sound) in the figure is output.

In this way, even if the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32, the repeated operation can be performed at least within a time shorter than the grace time TY1 after the end of the previous operation state. If it can be done, the specific sound in white in the figure at the timing when the operation by the player is performed, and the specific sound in black in the figure when the operation by the player is not performed regularly. By outputting each of these, the player can be made to feel as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed by making it possible to continuously and intermittently output a specific sound accompanying the operation. Therefore, according to the mode related to the output of such a specific sound, it is possible to secure the operation feeling that the effect reception is generated by one operation at a time, and the player who is not good at the multiple operations. Even if there is, the specific sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state makes it possible to output the specific sound accompanying the operation continuously and intermittently, so there is a trade-off relationship (operation feeling). , Production fairness) will be expected to be compatible.

However, even when a specific sound is output in such a manner, the operation display pattern that plays a role of notifying the effect result based on the operation within a predetermined valid period is performed a plurality of times. If the mode of progress of the displayed content is significantly different between the player who is good at the operation and the player who is not good at the multiple operation, in the end, the player who is not good at the multiple operation is better than the player who is not good at the multiple operation. It may be possible for a player who is good at multiple operations to have an advantage, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the display content of the operation display pattern is not gradually advanced according to the timing of generation of a specific sound accompanying the operation, but the grace time TY1 is timed up. Until the end timing (specific end timing) arrives, the display content can be advanced by a predetermined dynamic display output regardless of the mode of operation.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), as described above, it is assumed that the time required for the repeated operation becomes significantly longer after the timing tx32 within the predetermined validity period. However, until the set grace time TY1 is timed up, the operation button 410 is operated again to cancel the setting of the grace time TY1. Therefore, the timing (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is timed up and ended within the predetermined valid period does not come.

When the operation is performed in the manner shown in FIG. 275 (a), the display of the operation display pattern (game board side effect display device 1600) is started based on the operation by the player at the timing tx31. After that, the display scenes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 274 are predetermined as the operation display patterns regardless of the operation status even though the speed of the continuous striking operation is significantly changed as described above. It is only displayed and progressed in sequence according to the set schedule, which makes it appear that the production fairness between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations is maintained. You will be able to do it.

However, even if the display content as the display pattern at the time of operation is developed in the same manner, the number of times that the effect reception is actually generated due to the operation is the number of times that the player who is not good at the operation is operated multiple times. It is inevitable that there will be differences with the players who are good at. Therefore, in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined valid period, at least a specific number of production receptions are required, or a production lottery is performed each time the production reception is performed, and a specific production result is specified according to the result. When a type of production that causes the production result to appear is performed, it is easier for a player who is good at multiple operations to produce a specific production result, which is an effect of performing the operation multiple times. Significance will be maintained. In other words, while maintaining such a dramatic significance, the fairness of the production is maintained between the player who is not good at multiple operations and the player who is good at multiple operations in terms of production such as sound and display. It can be said that there is a technical feature in that it is possible to prevent a player who is not good at operating multiple times from deteriorating the game interest by making it look like it is being played.

Further, according to such a configuration, even if the continuous striking operation is performed earlier than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect is received when the operation is performed by long-pressing, the mode in which the display pattern at the time of operation progresses is Since it is the same, it is expected to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the button deterioration is accelerated due to the repeated hitting operation being performed too quickly.

Incidentally, the example shown in FIG. 275 (b) assumes a case where the operation button 410 is not operated in time until the grace time TY1 set at the timing tx33 elapses. That is, in this case, within the predetermined valid period, the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 is timed up and ended comes, and at the timing tx37 (specific end timing), the timing tx31 is started. Dynamic display output (process of sequentially displaying and advancing display scenes 1 to 5 according to a predetermined schedule) is interrupted and terminated at that point.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, regarding the output of a specific sound (for example, “picone”), the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends when in the output state has arrived. Even if this is done, processing that cuts off a specific sound in the output state at that timing tx37 (for example, "pico")) (output interruption processing, processing that interrupts by overwriting with another sound, etc.) is performed. As described above, the output (sound wave type) in the same mode as the specific sound that has been output up to that point is made to appear even after the timing tx37 arrives. Therefore, regarding the output of the specific sound, even after the timing tx37 (specific end timing) at which the grace time TY1 ends has arrived, the last specific sound (the tenth specific sound in the figure) is the output. If the operation button 410 is operated before the sound is muted, the player can feel as if a fast continuous striking operation is being performed by continuously and intermittently outputting a specific sound accompanying the operation. It is possible to let them do it.

In fact, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), before the black specific sound (10th specific sound) in the figure output across the timing tx37 (specific end timing) is muted, After the white specific sound in the figure is generated twice in the form of interrupting the 10th specific sound output, the black specific sound in the figure is intermittently output again, so that the specific sound associated with the operation is generated. It can be seen that is being output continuously and intermittently. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 275 (b), the specific sound is continuously and intermittently output in this way, whereas in the operation display pattern, the progress of the display content is temporarily terminated at the timing tx37. .. After that, it is clear that the progress of the display content is redone from the first display scene (display scene 1) in accordance with the timing tx38 when the white specific sound in the figure is output again.

FIG. 276 shows a predetermined validity period in which the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the automatic multiple operation function (auto continuous striking function) described with reference to FIGS. 273 to 275 is provided with an operation opportunity for the multiple operation (continuous striking, etc.). It is a time chart which shows the effect example which appears when the operation is performed within the predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48) when the specific effect pattern which generates the above-mentioned is executed.

As shown in FIG. 276, at the timing tx41, a predetermined valid period in which the operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given occurs, and the player determines the timing tx42 within the predetermined valid period. Assuming that the operation is started, also in this production example, based on the detection of the operation, the output of the specific sound associated with the operation for the operation button 410 and the output of the display (display pattern at the time of operation) associated with the operation are output, respectively. The process of starting is to be performed.

However, in this production example, when an operation for the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined valid period, a specific sound output in white in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is produced with a predetermined probability. It is possible to execute the process of outputting.

That is, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the specific sound output in black in the figure is generated even in a situation where the operation button 410 is not operated and the effect reception is not generated. The black specific sound output in this figure is difficult to distinguish from the white specific sound output in the figure that occurs at the timing when the production reception occurs (the same mode in this production example). ) Is output. Further, as described above, the operation display pattern appearing on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that the display content is advanced according to a predetermined schedule regardless of the operation mode. Therefore, from the player's point of view, even if the operation is performed by long-pressing or multiple times within the predetermined validity period, it is recognized how many production receptions are generated by these operations. It can be said that it is in a difficult situation. Therefore, in this production example, when an operation for the operation button 410 is received within a predetermined valid period, a specific sound output that is outlined in the figure is generated, and a special sound different from the specific sound is generated with a predetermined probability ( For example, by performing a process of outputting at 50% or the like), it is possible to predict to some extent how many production receptions have occurred through the output status of such special sounds.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 276, when the predetermined validity period is in a relatively early period (timing tx41 to tx45), the two consecutive hit operations at the timing tx42 and tx43 and the timing tx44 By performing each of the long press operations of, a total of 9 production receptions are generated, and the specific sound output in white in the figure corresponding to these is continuously generated 9 times (1st to 9th in the figure). The number of times the production reception occurs per unit time is relatively large. On the other hand, in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined valid period is started, the operation in the mode of single-shot operation requires a long time that cannot be said to be repeated hits, and the timing tx46 , Tx47 is performed twice, so that the production reception for two times is generated, and the specific sound output in white in the figure corresponding to these is generated twice with a time interval (10th in the figure). , 11th white specific sound), the number of times the production reception occurs per unit time is relatively small.

However, when checking the output status of the specific sound and the output status of the display pattern during operation, the specific sound is compared after the predetermined valid period is started by the above-mentioned blackened specific sound output. It is continuously output in both the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), and the operation display pattern is also compared after the predetermined effective period is started. Since the display scenes are only switched according to a predetermined schedule in both the early period (timing tx41 to tx45) and the relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48), these progresses. It can be seen that it is difficult to determine whether the number of times the production reception occurs per unit time is high or low just by checking the output status.

In this regard, when checking the output status of the special sound that is output with a predetermined probability when the white specific sound output in the figure occurs, it is a relatively early period (timing) after the predetermined effective period is started. In tx41 to tx45), the number of occurrences per unit time is larger than that in a relatively late period (timing tx45 to tx48) after the predetermined validity period is started, so such a special sound It will be possible to predict to some extent how many production receptions have occurred through the output status of. Further, according to such a special sound output mode, it is possible to conceal to some extent whether the specific sound output shown in white in the figure or the specified sound output shown in black in the figure is generated. Therefore, it is expected that the game interests of players who are not good at multiple operations will be maintained favorably. In this sense, the special sound can be generated when the specific sound output is generated, but is output based on the condition that the output condition different from the occurrence of the specific sound output is satisfied. Even if the specific sound output is generated, it is required to output the special sound in such a manner that the special sound is not necessarily generated.

Further, the predetermined probability of whether or not to generate a special sound when the production reception occurs may be changed according to the number of production receptions that have occurred within the predetermined valid period. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict which of the white specific sound output in the figure and the black specific sound output in the figure is occurring.

Further, considering that the output frequency of the special sound is lower than that of the specific sound, the time from the output of the specific sound to the mute and the time value longer than the automation time TY2 are obtained. It is desirable to set it as a thing. In this example, the time value is set to be twice the "automation time TY2". Further, when outputting a new special sound when the previous special sound is being output, it is desirable to cut off (interrupt) the previous special sound and output the new special sound.

However, in such a pachinko machine 1, the number of players who perform the operation multiple times is reduced because the same effect as when the operation is performed multiple times can be enjoyed only by performing the operation by long-pressing. However, there is a concern that the significance of the production as requiring multiple operations will be lost. Therefore, in the production example shown in FIG. 276, the operation by the player is a mode of long pressing in the period after the operation by the player is started at least in the timing tx42 within the predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48). A state in which the image is continuously performed (timing tx44 to tx45) and a state in which the single operation is performed (timing tx42 to tx44, tx45 to tx48). The display of a specific image (specific display) can be permitted only when there is and a specific display condition is satisfied.

That is, in this case, in order to confirm a specific image, it is required to perform the operation as a single-shot operation rather than at least a long-press operation. It will be possible to give meaning to the production by performing the round operation (continuous hitting, etc.), and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

Moreover, in this production example, in order to confirm the specific image, only the operation as a mode of the one-shot operation is not a condition, and the specific image is not necessarily displayed unless the specific display condition is satisfied. That is, in this case, since the appearance difficulty of the specific image itself becomes high, each time a predetermined valid period occurs, the automatic continuous hitting (automatic multiple times operation) function is not used and the operation is performed multiple times (continuous hitting, etc.) ), It seems that you are trying to display a specific image that is difficult to appear, and you dare to operate it multiple times without using the automatic repeated hit (automatic multiple operation) function. It is expected to promote the understanding of others about what to do.

In the production example shown in FIG. 276, a specific non-operation time (here, twice the time of "automation time TY2") has elapsed without a new production reception occurring from the timing when the previous production reception occurred. The display of a specific image within a predetermined validity period is defined as the above-mentioned "specific display condition" that a production hit is obtained in a predetermined production lottery performed when the specific non-operation time has elapsed. Specific display) will appear. In this regard, in the predetermined production lottery, when the jackpot is won by the jackpot judgment (or, depending on the operation mode within the predetermined validity period, the success display can be displayed (the jackpot expectation is high). In the case of (in the production situation), there is a 70% chance that the production hit will be obtained, but when the jackpot is rejected in the jackpot judgment (or the operation is performed within the predetermined validity period). In the production situation where the success display cannot be displayed no matter how much it is done (when the production situation has a low expectation of big hit), the production hit can be obtained only with a probability of 30%. Therefore, when the display of the specific image (specific display) appears within the predetermined validity period, it is suggested that the expectation that the jackpot symbol appears is high, and the game entertainment can be preferably maintained. The above "specific display condition" is not limited to this, and "a specific non-operation time (here," automation time TY2 "" without a new production reception occurring from the timing when the previous production reception occurred. When only one of "the time has passed twice as much as" and "the production hit was obtained in the predetermined production lottery" is adopted as the "specific display condition" and this is satisfied. The display of a specific image (specific display) may be made to appear, or other conditions may be adopted as "specific display conditions".

In addition to the types described above, the predetermined production lottery mode is, for example, a production situation in which a success display can appear depending on the operation mode within a predetermined validity period (a production situation in which a jackpot expectation is low). Occasionally, there is a 0% chance that a production hit will be obtained (or the production lottery itself will not be performed), but no matter how many operations are performed within a predetermined validity period, the success display cannot be displayed. When the player is in a production situation where the expectation of a big hit is low, the effect may be obtained with a probability of 60%. According to such an aspect, it is definitely shown that the success display does not appear when the specific display appears, so that there is no need to perform a barren operation for making the specific display appear. Will be recognizable within a predetermined validity period. In this case, it is desirable to use the same display content as the failure display that appears when the predetermined validity period ends without the success display appearing as the specific display.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 276, when a new effect reception occurs while the specific image is being displayed (specific display) (timing tx46), the specific image is specified at that time. The display is hidden, and the output is continued on condition that the state in which the player is not operating (the state in which a new production reception is not generated) is maintained. There is.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 276, in order to make a specific production result (success display) appear within a predetermined valid period (timing tx41 to tx48), it is required that at least a specific number of production receptions occur. The appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 when the 11th production reception (11th white specific sound output) occurs, and the display scene 3 that was in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of making the success display appear as the operation display pattern is performed in the form of (interruption). The content of this success display is the production content of the part (display scenes 3 to 5) that is repeated in the operation display pattern, such as destroying the enemy character that was having a sword fight in the display scenes 3 to 5. It is desirable that it is related. In addition, when a success indication appears, it is desirable that the jackpot judgment suggests that the expectation of winning the jackpot is high.

In addition, when the appearance condition is satisfied at the timing tx47 when the 11th production reception (the 11th white specific sound output) occurs, the predetermined validity period is terminated at that time and a new production reception is performed. It will be prevented from occurring. Therefore, at a timing after the timing tx47, no new specific sound or special sound outlined in the figure is generated, and no new specific display appears.

FIG. 277 is executed under the same processing conditions as the production example shown in FIG. 276, but the operation in the mode of one-shot operation by the player is shorter than the grace time TY1. It is a time chart showing an example of an effect that appears when it is repeated for a long time that cannot be said.

As shown in FIG. 277, even when the operations in the mode of single-shot operation by the player are repeated over a long period of time, as long as those operations are repeated at intervals shorter than the grace time TY1. After the timing tx52 when the operation is started within the predetermined valid period (timing tx51 to tx56), the specific sound is continuously and intermittently output, and the operation display pattern is the display content according to a predetermined schedule. Will be developed. According to such an effect mode, even if the operation is performed only four times within a predetermined valid period, it is possible to create an effect situation as if the continuous striking operation is performed about 20 times. become able to. However, in this case, there is a concern that the person who is seriously performing the continuous striking operation cannot understand the meaning of the continuous striking operation, and the interest in the game is lowered.

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the length of the predetermined valid period is "Tx1", the length of the grace time TY1 is "Tx2", and a specific effect result (success display) is displayed within the predetermined valid period. When the minimum number of production receptions required for appearance is "EU", each of these numerical values is set so that the relationship ["Tx1 / Tx2" <EU] is established. According to such a configuration, even if the operation is repeated at the last minute when the grace time TY1 elapses to create a production situation in which the specific sound and the display pattern at the time of operation are continuously output, the operation causes the operation. The number of production receptions that occur will be less than the minimum number of production receptions (EU) required for a specific production result (success display) to appear within a predetermined valid period. That is, in this case, when the operation is performed in such a malicious manner, it becomes possible to prevent a specific effect result (success display) from appearing. It will be expected that the amusement interests of those who are in the game will be maintained favorably. In order to obtain such effects more reliably, the minimum number of production receptions (EU) required to produce a specific production result (success display) within a predetermined valid period is set. Strictly speaking, it is required to set the numerical value calculated by "Tx1 / Tx2" as a numerical value larger than the integer value when it is rounded up to an integer.

In this regard, in this production example, the minimum number of production receptions (EU) required to make a specific production result (success display) appear within a predetermined valid period is calculated by "Tx1 / Tx2". Since it is set to "11 times", which is more than twice the integer value when the numerical value is rounded up to an integer, a failure display is displayed at the timing tx56 when the predetermined validity period ends. Become. That is, in this case, since the failure display appears due to the insufficient number of operations, the production situation is such that it is not possible to recognize whether the jackpot expectation is low or high.

Furthermore, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this embodiment, the display of a specific image can appear only when it is in a state of being performed as a mode of one-shot operation and a specific display condition is satisfied. Is. In this regard, in this production example, when the above-mentioned "specific non-operation time" required for displaying a specific image is "Tx3", the relationship ["Tx1 / Tx3" <EU] is established. Each of these numerical values is set so as to be performed. In such a configuration, if an attempt is made to make a specific display appear each time the operation is performed once within the predetermined validity period, the number of production receptions that occur within the predetermined validity period is within the predetermined validity period. In, the number of production receptions (EU) required to produce a specific production result (success display) will be less than the minimum. That is, in this case, a directing selection function of whether to make an attempt to make the specific display appear even at the risk that the specific effect result (success display) does not appear is played, and the specific display is displayed. It is expected that the game will be improved because it will not be possible to casually make repeated attempts to make it appear, which will enhance the color rendering index when the attempt is made. Will be.

Further, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 277, when the timing tx55a at which the predetermined valid period ends without the success display appearing, the display scene 4 that was in the display state at that time is cut off ( The process of making a failure display appear as a display pattern during operation is performed in the form of (interruption). The content of this failure display is the production content of the part (display scenes 3 to 5) that is repeated in the operation display pattern, such as being defeated by the enemy character who was having a sword fight in the display scenes 3 to 5. It is desirable that it is related. In addition, when a failure display appears, it is desirable that the jackpot determination suggests that the expectation of winning the jackpot is low.

On the other hand, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, a specific sound that is in the output state when the predetermined valid period ends regardless of whether the success display or the failure display appears. It is designed not to be chopped (interrupted), but this is as described above. However, even if these specific sounds are output intermittently after that, those specific sounds will be muted while the success display or failure display is being performed, and then the success display or failure display will be displayed. The relationship is set to be hidden.

In this embodiment, the grace time TY1 is set after the operation state by the player ends, and the specific sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state is output until the grace time TY1 elapses. Although it was decided to perform it at least four times or more, the number of times of "specific sound output in black in the figure" that occurs in the non-operation state is not limited to this. For example, if the grace time TY1 is set as a time having at least twice as long as the automation time TY2, the specified sound output in black in the figure in the non-operation state is at least twice or more. Since it will occur, it is possible to make the player feel as if the continuous striking operation (multiple operations) was continued even in the non-operation state.

Further, in this embodiment, after the display scenes 1 to 5 are sequentially output as the operation display pattern, the display scenes 3 to 5 are repeatedly output so that the display scenes 1 and 2 are not displayed. So, the depiction of the ally character having a sword fight with the enemy character appears. Therefore, in at least one of the display scenes 1 and 2, a specific display in which the jackpot expectation degree is shown may be performed. According to such a configuration, if a specific display is overlooked, it cannot be reconfirmed unless the non-operation state is continued until the grace time TY1 elapses. Therefore, a predetermined validity period However, it becomes possible to provide a directing effect of which one to select between the demerit that the specific display is wasted and the demerit that the specific display cannot be confirmed.

Further, in this embodiment, it is allowed to perform a continuous striking operation in such a manner that the effect reception occurs at an interval shorter than the interval (automation time TY2) at which the effect reception occurs when the operation by long pressing is performed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a highly flexible operation operation effect by the player (see FIG. 275). However, on the other hand, even when such a high-speed continuous striking operation is performed, the progress mode of the display scene in the operation display pattern is the same as when the operation is performed by long-pressing. Therefore, it is possible to make it less attractive to perform high-speed continuous hitting operation, which is expected to suppress excessive operation of the operation button 410 and reduce the risk of damage etc. Will be done.

In addition, in the case of performing a type of production that requires at least a specific number of production receptions in order to make a specific production result appear within a predetermined valid period, only a long press operation is performed within the predetermined valid period. It is desirable to set the value of the specific number of times so that the effect reception is performed more than the specific number of times. More preferably, it is desirable to set the value of the specified number of times so that the effect reception is performed more than the specified number of times only by performing the operation by long pressing for half the period of the predetermined valid period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 276 and 277, twice the time (specific non-operation time) of the "automation time TY2" has elapsed since the timing of the previous production reception without the occurrence of a new production reception. It was decided that the display of a specific image (specific display) would appear at the time of this, but the specific non-operation time is not limited to this. For example, as a specific non-operation time, any time value within the range of twice or more of the "automation time TY2" and the grace time TY1 as the upper limit value (grace time TY1 or less) is used. , While the specific sound in black in the figure is output twice or more when in the non-operation state (as if the repeated hitting operation is being performed when in the non-operation state), It is possible to produce an effect as if the display of a specific image (specific display) appears based on the number of simulated operations (the number of times of output of a specific sound in black in the figure) in the non-operation state reaches a predetermined value. It is possible.

[Amusement machine equipped with multiple production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the gaming machine provided with the effect operation unit 400 in the plate unit 320, which can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player, has been described. A gaming machine capable of further increasing the player's motivation to operate will be described with reference to FIGS. 278 to 329. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 278 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 279 is a right side view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged on the door frame 3 of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1 will be described, and the same reference numerals will be given to the same configurations as described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided in front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword effect operation unit 5000 houses the sword portion 5010 having the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, the collar portion 5013 sandwiched between the blade portion 5011 and the handle portion 5012, and the blade portion 5011 of the sword portion 5010. It constitutes a sword ornament 5001 composed of a sheath portion 5020 capable of being capable of being used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a sheath portion 5020 movably provided on the door frame 3 in the left-right direction in the front view. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword pulling direction and the sword delivering direction. The sword portion 5010 is usually in a sword-delivered state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and the sword-drawing operation makes the sword blade portion 5011 visible to the player in the sword-drawing effect. Then, the sword portion 5010 in the sword-drawn state can function as an operation means for receiving the sword-delivering operation by the player and returning to the sword-delivering state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 280, an opportunity to execute a sword drawing effect accompanied by movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. FIG. 280 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword extraction effect can be executed, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of a sword extraction preparation transition effect according to the type of variation pattern. Shown, and (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of the sword-drawing effect.

The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed after the sword-drawing preparation transition production is executed, a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed without performing the sword-drawing preparation transition production in advance, and a sword-drawing preparation transition production in advance. In spite of this, there are patterns in which the sword-drawing production is not performed, and there are patterns in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed and the sword-drawing production is not performed. Two patterns are provided, one with an aura member and the other without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 280 (A), whether or not to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is drawn according to the type of variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for a large hit fluctuation at the time of a big hit, a fluctuation pattern for a small hit fluctuation at the time of a small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for a missed fluctuation at the time of a miss, and the fluctuation results in an advantageous result for the player. It is set so that the higher the pattern, the higher the probability that the sword preparation transition effect will be executed. Specifically, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of a fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuations, a probability of 30% in the case of a fluctuation pattern for small hits, and a fluctuation pattern for missed fluctuations. It is executed with a 20% probability. It should be noted that the probability of the variation pattern at the time of deviation fluctuation may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword removal preparation transition effect is executed is higher when the reach effect is performed than when it is not performed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 280 (B), whether or not the sword-drawing main effect is executed is drawn according to the type of the variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect. Even if the type of variation pattern is the same, when the sword preparation transition effect is executed, the probability that the sword preparation transition effect is executed is higher than when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed increases as the variation pattern results in an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the fluctuation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is higher when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the variation pattern for out-of-order fluctuation, the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is higher than in the case where the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed in the variation pattern for small hit variation. In the case of a variable pattern for jackpot fluctuation, the sword-drawing main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect.

In addition, when the sword-drawing effect is executed, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the more the variation pattern is advantageous for the player, the higher the probability that the sword-drawing effect with the aura member is executed. Is set to be. Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the sword-drawing effect of the form with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of aura member due to sword pulling action of sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 281 to 284, the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword pulling effect (sword drawing preparation transition effect and sword drawing book effect) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 281). FIG. 282) and the aura member 5035 are provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is united with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operations of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described with respect to the case of forming an integral decorative body (FIGS. 283 and 284).

FIG. 281 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword pulling operation of the sword ornament body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself, and is a state transition diagram of (A) sword delivery state and (B) first. The sword-drawn state and (C) the second sword-drawn state are shown. FIG. 282 is a vertical cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that FIG. 282 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

As shown in FIG. 281 (A), the sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sword-delivered state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. As shown in FIG. 281 (B), in the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling preparation transition effect, only the part of the habaki 5011a fitted to the hand of the sword blade part 5011 is pulled out from the sheath part 5020 and can be seen by the player. It becomes the first sword pulling state. Then, as shown in FIG. 281 (C), in the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling main production, the blade portion 5011 is further pulled out from the sheath portion 5020, and most of the second sword is visible to the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state can function as an operation means capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently of the blade pulling operation of the blade portion 5011. In the case where the sword decoration body 5001 has an aura member, the aura member 5030 has a sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sword delivery state (FIG. 281 (A)) to the first sword removal state (FIG. 281 (B)). The movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum movement) from the closed state (FIG. 282 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 282 (B)) inside the portion 5020 to deform the blade portion 5011. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in the process of changing the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state (FIG. 281 (C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be located below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even if it operates at the maximum, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first sword-drawn state.

The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. 282 (A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. It has a pinion 5033 and. In the aura member 5030, the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), so that the rotational force is converted into linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and in the left direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 stop at positions (open state) protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011, respectively.

Further, below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030).

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword part 5010) changes from the sword delivery state to the first sword withdrawal state, it changes from the closed state to the open state, and the movement of the aura member 5030 causes the blade part 5011 The sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state after being deformed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start the operation (deformation) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means (not limited to the form in which the maximum operation is performed, but also the form in which the operation is stopped in the middle). ).

FIG. 283 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020, and is a state transition diagram of (A) sword delivery state, (B) first sword pulling state, and (C). Indicates the second sword withdrawal state. FIG. 284 is a vertical cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that FIG. 284 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in FIGS. 282 and 283 described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 283 (A) to 283 (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) is the above-mentioned sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided in itself can move in the left-right direction, it can move in the up-down direction. Further, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 has an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade portion 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword delivery state (sword delivery state). ⇔ 1st sword withdrawal state ⇔ 2nd sword withdrawal state). This makes it possible for the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) to be united with the member on the frame side (aura member 5035) to appear as an integral decorative body.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. 284 (A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end thereof is below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the completely housed state, and the hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011 and the enclosure aura member 5036. It has a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow portion of the above, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in the front view by the driving means (not shown), the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in the front view, and both pinions mesh with each other, so that the rotational force is on the rack right. It is converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. 284 (B), the enclosure aura member 5036 stops at a position where it merges with the blade portion 5011 to form a second sword pulling state. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the enclosure aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) up to the upper limit of the range of motion.

Further, although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be light-emittingly decorated.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion maintains a relative positional relationship according to the state change (sword delivery state ⇔ first sword extraction state ⇔ second sword extraction state) of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010). An example of combining with 5011 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (combination) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means (not limited to the complete appearance state in which the maximum movement is performed, but the movement is stopped in the middle and appears in the middle. It suffices if it can be in a state with an aura member). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state.

(Example of sword drawing using a sword ornament)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 285 to 290, a sword drawing effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword ornament 5001) will be described. In the following, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the figure), the sword-drawing main effect is not executed ((X6) and (X7) in the figure). The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described with respect to the effect patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the sword drawing main effect is executed. 285 to 289 are effect transition diagrams of the sword drawing effect. FIG. 290 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation validity period related to the operation means.

In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol that were variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (here, "7"), and only the central decorative symbol is variablely displayed. It begins by forming a reach state (Fig. 285 (X1)). Subsequently, the decorative symbol in the reach state is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display area, and in the central display area, an effect image suggesting the execution of the sword pulling effect (movable of the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed. Specifically, after the image of two samurai facing each other and starting the Iai (Fig. 285 (X2)) is displayed, the image of one samurai holding the handle and holding the sword in the sheath (Fig.) 285 (X3)) is displayed. Here, the effect suggesting that the sword decoration body 5001 is movable is performed by the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this period, the sword decorative body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword delivery state (FIG. 281 (A)).

Next, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed by a lottery based on the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 286 (X4) and (X5). When started, the face of the samurai holding the sword with his eyes closed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed with the passage of time. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state, so that the sword-drawn preparation transition effect is performed. It should be noted that when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, the sword-drawing main effect is more likely to be executed after that than when it is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is an expectation level effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the sword-drawing book effect is executed by moving the sword decoration body 5001. In the sword-drawing preparation transition production, by swinging the sword decoration 5001 in the first sword-drawing state up and down, even if the player is expected to change the sword decoration 5001 to the second sword-drawing state. good. The vertical swing of the sword decoration body 5001 in the first sword drawing state is performed so that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visible to the player in the form with the aura member. On the other hand, when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decoration body 5001 may maintain the sword-delivered state so that the image shown in FIG. 285 (X3) described above continues to be displayed.

Here, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the subsequent sword drawing main effect is in the form of having an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of the sword extraction preparation transition effect (FIG. 282 (A). )) To move the range of motion as much as possible (maximum movement) from the open state (FIG. 282 (B)) to deform the blade portion 5011. At this time, in the sword decorative body 5011 in the first sword withdrawal state, the portion from the hand of the blade portion 5011 to the portion of the habaki 5011a can be visually recognized by the player, but as described above, the aura member 5030 is the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011. Since it is provided below, there is no possibility that the aura member 5030 will be visually recognized by the player even if the aura member 5030 operates at the maximum. Further, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the timing at which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state. Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player, and at the same time, the degree of expectation is determined by the form of the operating portion (sword portion 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

Then, after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is completed, if the sword-drawing main effect is not executed by lottery based on the type of variation pattern and the presence / absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat oozes on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 286 (X6)), and the central decorative design that was displayed in a variable manner stops. At the timing when the samurai gives up the Iai, the central decorative design is on the left side of the screen. And the stop mode different from the right decorative symbol, that is, the stop mode (here, "6") is displayed as a stop (FIG. 286 (X7)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword-delivered state from the first sword-drawn state at the time of FIG. 286 (X6), and maintains the sword-delivered state. That is, the reach effect is completed without the sword decoration body 5001 functioning as an operating means.

On the other hand, when the sword-drawing main effect is executed, after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is completed, an image of the Iai slashing being performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is the second sword-drawing effect. It becomes a state. Here, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state includes a form with an aura member that can be visually recognized in a form in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030, and the aura member 5030 is invisible. A form without an aura member is provided so that the undeformed blade portion 5011 can be visually recognized.

First, with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288, a case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword drawing state is in the form without an aura member will be described. When the sword-drawing production starts, in the display area of the production display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and his eyes become sharp is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 287 (A1)), an image of pulling out the sword that was being held and slashing the opponent's samurai is displayed (Fig. 287 (A2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state at the time of FIG. 287 (A1), and the sword blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player.

Next, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword extraction state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player, that is, the handle portion 5012 of the sword portion 5010 in which the player protrudes from the sheath portion 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting the operation of grasping and pushing the sword blade portion 5011 downward so as to fit in the sheath portion 5020, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword having the same shape as the second sword withdrawn state of the sword ornament 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!" (FIG. 287 (FIG. 287). A3)). In the sword decoration body 5001, the LED of the internal LED substrate 5011c blinks to indicate that the operation is valid. Further, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably an image related to a series of Iai, so that the operation effect image is displayed in the foreground so as to be superimposed on the immediately preceding Iai slashing scene image (FIG. 287 (A2)). It may be (see FIG. 293 (G2) described later).

Then, during the valid operation period, the player grabs the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 and performs a sword delivery operation in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. The post-operation effect is performed according to the degree of expectation that gives an advantageous result, and the effect is terminated with the notification of winning the symbol type (FIG. 288). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, the cut effect image is displayed flashily in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 288 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed. At the timing when the opponent's samurai is defeated and Iai is settled, the central decorative symbol stops in the same stop mode as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, that is, the jackpot mode (here, "7") in the center of the screen. It is displayed (FIG. 288 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is out of alignment, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly than in the case of a big hit (FIG. 288 (D1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed is displayed. At the timing when the stop is displayed, the center decorative symbol is different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol in the center of the screen together with the image that the opponent's samurai cannot be defeated and the Iai cannot be settled. Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 288 (D2)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 289, a case where the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword drawing state is in the form of having an aura member will be described. When the sword-drawing production starts, in the display area of the production display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and his eyes become sharp is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 289 (B1)), an image of pulling out the sword that was being held and slashing the opponent's samurai is displayed (Fig. 289 (B2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 changed from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state at the time of FIG. 289 (B1), and the sword blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 (right aura member 5031 and left aura member 5032). Becomes visible to the player. Here, the blade portion 5011 is already deformed by the aura member 5030 at the time when the state changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, even if only the blade portion 5011 is visible to the player after the second sword is pulled out, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state and the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form a form with an aura member. It is often sufficient that the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member in the second sword-drawn state by the start of the operation validity period. However, since the sword decoration body 5001 is already in the second sword extraction state in which the player can operate the sword, the appearance of the aura member 5030 can surely recognize the change in the degree of expectation, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern that the player may induce an erroneous operation. Therefore, when the aura member 5030 is made recognizable by the player while a series of movements from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state are performed as in this example, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword withdrawal state. It is preferable that the operation validity period is started promptly.

Further, the images of FIGS. 289 (B1) and (B2) are the same as the images of FIGS. 287 (A1) and (A2) described above, and the player can see whether the sword decoration body 5001 has an aura member just by looking at the images. It is not possible to judge whether or not it is. By actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001, the player can grasp whether it is a form with an aura member or a form without an aura member. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 can be attracted attention even before the sword decoration body 5001 is made to function as the operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation means and enjoy the operation effect without any confusion. Can be done. The image displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time does not have to be the same as described above, and may be an image similar to the extent that the player can be directed to see the sword decoration body 5001. .. For example, there may be some differences in the samurai image (differences in eye color and effect effect).

Then, when the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player reaches the effective operation period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the same aura member as the sword decoration body 5001. It will be displayed (Fig. 289 (B3)). Subsequent production is the same as in FIG. 288 described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In the case of the form with the aura member, the effect images in FIGS. 288 (C1) and (D1) described above may be displayed more flashily than in the form without the aura member.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 290, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation validity period in the sword drawing effect in which the sword preparation transition effect and the sword drawing main effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 290, when the reach effect is started (time t0), the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The state changes to the state of pulling out the sword (time t1). At this time, when the effect pattern in which the aura member is attached is set, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state, but even in the open state, the aura member 5030 is in the game in the first sword drawing state. It is provided so that it cannot be seen by a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first sword withdrawal state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 further changes to the second sword withdrawal state, and if so, whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. Can't. However, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the sword-drawing main effect is executed, and there is a high possibility that the form has an aura member, so that the player's expectation can be increased. Further, even if the sword-drawing main effect is not executed, the sword movement suggestion effect (FIG. 285 (X3)) is executed by the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, the state change (movable) of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state can be captured.

Then, when the sword preparation transition effect is completed, the sword extraction main effect is subsequently started, and the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (time t2). Then, after a predetermined period has elapsed, the operation valid period is started, and the sword ornament 5001 functions as an operation means (time t3). When the operation valid period is reached, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of Iai effects is performed. Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period (time tx), the post-operation effect is performed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 returns from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword withdrawal state by the sword delivery operation by the player. Then, when the preset operation valid period ends, the reach state ends (time t4), and the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that a series of Iai effects ends (a series of Iai effects). Time t5). The operation validity period may be terminated by the detection of the operation by the player, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure. If no operation is detected during the operation valid period, the sword ornament 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation valid period.

Here, the predetermined period (time t3-t2) from the time when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword pulling state to the start of the operation valid period is the mode (aura member) in which the player is in the second sword pulling state of the sword decoration body 5001. A period longer than the operation valid period (time t4-t3) is secured as an aspect confirmation period during which it is possible to confirm whether or not the form is attached, a light emitting mode, and the like. That is, even if the operation unit (sword part 5010) that can be operated by the player reaches the operation position (second sword withdrawal state) that functions as the operation means, the operation acceptance is immediately started (the operation validity period is generated). Instead, the player is allowed to operate after confirming the final mode of the operation unit at the operation position. As a result, the player confirms the final mode before operating the sword ornament 5001, and raises expectations for the subsequent development (for example, in the case of the form with an aura member, the expectation increases), and prepares the mind. As soon as the second sword is pulled out, the operation validity period starts and there is a concern that the interest of the game will be reduced by rushing to the operation production without confirming the mode of the operation means. Can be wiped off.

Further, the sword pulling effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed in a series of Iai effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is a movable effect (time t0 to t3). An operation effect (time t3 to t4) as an operation means is defined as an effect related to the operation effect. As a result, the player can be impressed with the unexpectedness and variety of productions in switching the functions of the sword decoration body 5001, so that the deterioration of the game interest caused by the uniform production by the conventional operation means can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the above-mentioned production example, the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself and the sword blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 has been described. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 is provided on the 5020 and is united with the member on the frame side (aura member 5035) to form an integral decorative body.

As described above, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes an operating means capable of changing (deforming or combining) the mode of the members (sword portion 5010 and aura member 5030) of the same system as the decorative movable body having a general appearance. is doing. The mode of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword delivery state, first sword withdrawal state, second sword withdrawal state, form without aura member and form with aura member) is a game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is determined based on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 280). Therefore, the sword decoration body 5001 can suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display will be an advantageous result for the player due to the change of its own mode, and raises the interest of the player's operating means (sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, before the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword extraction state (operation position) that can be operated by the player, the expectation level is suggested by changing the state of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword delivery state to the first sword extraction state. is doing. In addition, the aura members 5030 and 5035 appear in the state change from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state, suggesting the degree of expectation. In this way, the sword ornament 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (first sword withdrawal state and appearance of aura member) in the process of changing from the sword delivery state to the second sword withdrawal state (operation position). , The player becomes strongly interested in the operating means until the operating means becomes operable. Further, when the state change of the operating means and the expectation degree suggestion are performed separately, specifically, when the operation to the operation position is performed after the expectation degree suggestion is performed in advance, the expectation degree is high. In the aspect, there is a concern that the player may operate the sword decoration body 5001 even though the operating means is not yet in the operable operation position when the player grasps the sword decoration body 5001. Since the state change to the position and the expectation degree suggestion proceed at the same time, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned erroneous operation.

In the above-mentioned first sword pulling state, only the habaki 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be visible in the one-drawn state. At this time, make sure that the amount of sword drawn in the first sword-drawn state is less than the maximum sword-drawn amount in the second sword-drawn state (operating position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is in the completely appearing state when the second sword is pulled out. Since the player can see a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the expectation is high from the first sword withdrawal state, the player can have a higher expectation at the time of the first sword withdrawal state. You can increase your interest in subsequent changes.

In addition, when the player can see a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first sword withdrawal state, it is determined that the aura member is attached at the stage of the sword withdrawal preparation transition effect (high expectation). Since the player can grasp it and have high expectations, the disappointment when the sword-drawing production is not executed in the subsequent development becomes very large. Therefore, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, the player's emotions are greatly shaken depending on the presence or absence of the sword-drawing book effect, and it is possible to provide a highly playful effect.

(Transformation example 1-Sword drawing effect using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 291 to 294, when the sword pulling effect is executed in the reach effect, the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword drawing effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Will be described. FIGS. 291 to 293 are examples of the effect transition diagram of the sword drawing effect of the modified example 1. FIG. 294 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 of the modified example 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. The same description as the above-mentioned sword pulling effect (FIGS. 285 to 290) will be omitted as appropriate.

Here, the production patterns ((Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2) in the figure) in which neither the sword-drawing preparation transition effect nor the sword-drawing main effect is performed, and after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed. The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 for the effect patterns ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4) in the figure) in which the sword-drawing effect is performed. The transition and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described.

When the reach effect is started, the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 291 (Y1)), and the effect suggests the operation of the operation button 410 by displaying the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 291 (Y2)). Then, when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, an image display of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation valid period are performed, and an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate is performed (FIG. 291 (FIG. 291). Y3). At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is lit, and the operation button for image display is also displayed in the same light emitting mode. Therefore, the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. It is possible to detect that the operation button 410 is emitted, and the light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when the operation by the player is detected.

If the sword-drawing preparation transition effect and the sword-drawing main effect are not performed and the result is off, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the reach effect is finished in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image notifying the result of the loss (“767”) is displayed (FIGS. 292 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is completed. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation button 410.

Further, when the sword pulling main effect is performed after the sword pulling preparation transition effect is executed, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the first sword pulling state when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected. A sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed (FIGS. 292 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the white characters of "Tenchu" are displayed on the blackout screen (Fig. 292 (F1)), and the image of the samurai on the side trying to touch the sword is displayed. (Fig. 292 (F2)). Next, the sword-drawing effect in which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (a form with an aura member) is started (FIGS. 292 (F3), 293 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (a form with an aura member) due to the sword extraction main effect, FIG. 292 (F2) immediately before and immediately after. Unlike the samurai Iai image shown in FIG. 293 (G1), an image of a lightning bolt running is interrupted and displayed on the blackout screen as shown in FIG. 292 (F3), and the mode of the sword decoration 5001 (whether or not it has an aura member). The degree of expectation to win (hit) Iai is shown by the strength of the lightning bolt.

Subsequent production is the same as in FIGS. 287 (A2), (A3) and 288 described above. In order to function as an operation means that can effectively accept the operation of, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Then, the player is urged to perform the sword delivery operation within the operation valid period (FIG. 293 (G2)), and the symbol type (hit or miss) is notified by the player's sword delivery operation (FIG. 293 (G3) or G4)).

Subsequently, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 294, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts the state change of the sword decoration body 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), the operation valid period of the operation button 410 occurs at an early stage, and the operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the operation button 410 is performed (time t1). Then, when the player operates the operation button 410 within the operation valid period (time t1 to t2) (time ty), the sword decoration body 5001 starts to change the state, and the sword is first pulled out from the sword-delivered state. Here, in the first sword-drawing state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state (time t2), and after a predetermined time elapses, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in order to make the sword decoration body 5001 function as an operation means. When the validity period occurs, an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 (time t3), and when the player operates the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation validity period (time t3 to t4) (time t3). At time tx), the decorative symbol in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). If the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the operation validity period of the operation button 410 set in advance (time t1 to t2), the sword decoration body 5001 is in the final form (first form) when the operation validity period ends. (2) A form with an aura member in a sword-drawn state) may be deformed and changed at once. Further, the timing of the state change from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state is changed to the second sword withdrawal state after a certain period of time has passed from the first sword withdrawal state, that is, according to the operation of the player's operation button 410. It may be. If the player does not detect the operation of the sword decoration 5001 within the preset operation validity period (time t3 to t4), the sword decoration 5001 becomes the second when the operation validity period ends. It is returned from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state.

In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. The timing for starting the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the timing for starting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (time tk). In this way, the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is reversed (sword pulling operation and sword delivery operation) depending on which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated, so that the mutual operation is effective. The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operating means is operated during the operation valid period of one operating means, it becomes invalid.

As described above, in the first modification, the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the operation of the operation button 410 by the player determines the form (final form) when the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operating means (for example, the form with an aura member by deforming and changing the state of the sword decoration body 5001). It can be made to look like the second sword is pulled out. As a result, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's motivation for operation can be increased.

Further, based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect images corresponding to the deformation and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (FIGS. 292 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. Since (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

(Modification example 2-Stage aura withdrawal effect using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 295 to 299, the degree of appearance of the aura member 5035 in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 with the aura member, specifically, the combination of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011, based on the modification 1. A case where the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of operations of the operation button 410 by the player will be described. FIGS. 295 to 299 are examples of the effect transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modified example 2. The same effects as described above will be omitted as appropriate.

The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 stages. Aura level 0 indicates a completely housed state (FIG. 284 (A)) in which the aura member 5035 is not visible to the player. Aura level 3 is a completely appearing state in which the aura member 5035 is united with the blade portion 5011 in the second sword-drawn state while maintaining a relative positional relationship in the sword-delivered state, so that the player can see the maximum. 284 (B)) is shown. The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visibly appearing to the player by 1/3 of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visibly appearing to the player for only two-thirds of the complete appearance state.

Here, there is no sword preparation transition effect with the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the figure) in which neither the sword preparation transition effect nor the sword main effect is performed. Is the case where the sword-drawing production is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 becomes the final form (the form with the aura member in the completely appearing state (aura level 3)) by operating the operation button 410 once (in the figure). (Z1)-(Z3)-> (I1) and (I2)-> (G1)-(G4)), multiple operation of the operation button 410 is required, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise. Regarding the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4) in the figure), the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the sword decoration body. The operation transition of 5001 will be described.

In the above-mentioned modification 1, the final form (form at the time of operation) of the sword decoration body 5001 is found by operating the operation button 410 once, but in the modification 2, the operation button 410 is operated a plurality of times in stages. It is characterized in that a step operation effect is performed in which the aura member 5035 is combined with the blade portion 5011 to change the aura level of the sword decoration body 5001.

First, in the production pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword extraction main effect is not performed, that is, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 does not change even if the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. (Y1) to (Y3) → Follow the same effect transition as in FIGS. 292 (E1) and (E2) (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3) → FIGS. 296 (H1) and (H2)).

In addition, there is no sword preparation transition effect, but the sword extraction main effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member) by operating the operation button 410 once. ), After the same effect as in FIGS. 291 (Y1) to (Y3) of the above-described modification 1 (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)), the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. Then, the sword ornament 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword ornament 5001 is united with the blade portion 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the blade portion 5011 in the sword delivery state, and completely appears when the sword ornament 5001 is in the second sword extraction state. The state (aura level 3) is reached (Fig. 296 (I1)). The above-described modification 1 of the sword decoration body 5001 with an aura member is composed of the aura member 5030, and the modification 2 is composed of the aura member 5035. FIG. 292 (F1) (F2) → follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 293 (FIGS. 296 (I1) (I2) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

Further, in the case where there is no sword preparation transition effect but the sword extraction main effect is performed, the operation of the operation button 410 is required a plurality of times, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise. The same production transition as before is followed up to the operation of the operation button 410 for the first time (FIGS. 295 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword decoration body 5001 after the first operation is in the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state. However, the aura member 5035 is in a completely contained state (aura level 0) in which the player cannot see it. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as in FIG. 296 (I1) described above (FIG. 297 (J1)).

Next, the second operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emitting and decorated. Is performed (Fig. 297 (J2)). Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura levels 0 to 3.

First, when the set aura level is "0" (that is, in the case of the form without the aura member), the aura member 5035 maintains the completely accommodated state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, the step operation effect is terminated (there is no operation request for the operation button 410 thereafter), and it is notified that the sword extraction effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword extraction state is returned. An image (here, white characters of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed (Fig. 297 (J3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 follows the same production transition as in FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. 293 of the above-mentioned modification 1 in the production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 0 in the form without the aura member. (FIG. 297 (J4) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)).

On the other hand, when the set aura level is any of "1" to "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 appears in 1/3 from the completely housed state. Become. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 297 (J5)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is luminescently decorated in green indicating aura level 1.

Next, the third operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emitting and decorated. Is done. At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 298 (K1)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be green indicating the aura level 1. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is "1", the aura member 5035 maintains the 1/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( After that, there is no request to operate the operation button 410), and an image (here, "Iza" is displayed on the blackout screen) indicating that the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state is returned to the sword-drawing effect (Iai effect). White characters) are displayed, and an image showing aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K2)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a state where 1/3 appears, and in an effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. A similar effect transition is followed (FIG. 298 (K3) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "2" or "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 1/3 appearance state to the 2/3 appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 298 (K4)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is luminescently decorated in red indicating the aura level 2.

Next, the fourth operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with an image showing the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promotion effect that is luminescent and decorated is performed (Fig. 298 (K5)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be red, which indicates aura level 2. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is "2", the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (Since then, there is no request to operate the operation button 410), and an image notifying that the player returns to the sword-drawing effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state (here, "Iza" is displayed on the blackout screen. White characters) are displayed, and an image showing the aura level is displayed (FIG. 299 (M1)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a state where 2/3 appears, and in an effect mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. A similar effect transition is followed (FIG. 299 (M1) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the complete appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 299 (L1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is luminescently decorated in a rainbow color indicating an aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect is finished (after that, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and the sword extraction effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword extraction state is performed. An image notifying the return (here, white characters of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed, and an image showing the aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 299 (L2)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is the same as FIG. 292 (F2) → FIG. The production transition is followed (FIG. 299 (L3) → FIGS. 293 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In the above description, the degree of integration of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 is changed each time at the operation timing when the aura level rises to widen the range visible to the player (increasing the degree of appearance). Not limited to. Even if the aura level rises, the aura confirmed when the aura level is confirmed (specifically, when the white letters "Iza" are displayed on the blackout screen) without increasing the appearance of the aura member 5035. A stock type combination may be performed in which the aura member 5035 is united with the blade portion 5011 at once so that the appearance degree according to the level is obtained. Further, the target for increasing the appearance degree stepwise is not limited to the aura member 5035, and the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) may be targeted. For example, the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) may be changed in a stepwise state from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state.

As described above, in the second modification, the player is requested to operate the other non-movable operation button 410 while the sword decoration body 5001 functioning as the operation means is in the movable state, which is a surprising novelty. It is possible to provide various operation effects, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game as compared with the first modification. In addition, since the player is given multiple operation opportunities to develop the production step by step, it is possible to impress the player with a great deal of involvement in the production and prevent the interest in the production from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is recognizable in the subsequent production, the player can feel the afterglow of the operation production.

(Other production patterns 1 using the sword decoration body 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 300 to 302, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 will be described. FIGS. 300 to 302 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword-delivered state functions as an operating means, and operates and detects the sword pulling operation by the player. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in the front view, and the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state is the effect display device 1600. It can operate up to the center of the front.

When the fluctuating symbol forms a reach state, the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 300 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 300 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the front view, and a part of the bamboo blind is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) visible to the player. There is. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in the sword-delivered state.

In the princess reach effect, an image of the princess heading to the back of the blind is displayed (FIG. 300 (A3)), and then an operation effect suggestion image suggesting the operation effect is displayed (FIG. 300 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, the operation validity period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to pull out the sword decoration body 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 301 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved in small steps in the vertical direction from the display of the operation effect suggestion image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period. May be good. Then, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword pulling operation by the player refers to an operation of pulling out the sword blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020 so that the player grasps the handle portion 5012 of the sword ornamental body 5001 in the sword-delivered state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward. When the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword pulling state, the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection / notification operation may be an operation in which the sword portion 5010 (or the handle portion 5012) moves up and down, such as movement or vibration, and an operation different from the own sword pulling operation can be felt through the handle portion 5012 grasped by the player. Just do it. Further, the detection / notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases his / her hand from the handle portion 5012. For this reason, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, so that unnecessary contact with the sword decoration body 5001 (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) is reduced, and failure or damage of the movable body is prevented. Can be done.

In the sword pulling operation by the player here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but depending on the degree of expectation, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player pulls out the sword. You may do so.

When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY is stationary above the display area without overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (initial stage). The state) is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (FIG. 301 (C1)). Then, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the detached mode "767" (FIG. 301 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 301 (C2) is notified, but not limited to this, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword delivery state at the timing when the detection notification operation is finished. You may do so.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (shadow) is placed in the center of the front surface (below the display area) that overlaps with the display area of the effect display device 1600. Only the hold display area can be dropped and moved to a visible state (total fall state) (FIG. 301 (D1)). Next, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body The 5001 maintains the second sword-drawn state (FIG. 301 (D2)). At this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided, for example. By differentiating the color of the shadow, the size of the shadow, and the comment displayed after that, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the lottery result by the princess reach (the degree of expectation of winning, the game profit when it is a hit, etc.). ..

Then, after a predetermined period has passed since the sword decoration body 5001 was put into the second sword pulling state by the player's sword pulling operation, that is, after the shadow of the princess was projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword pulling state was reached. The sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 301 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility is displayed. An image of a surprised princess is displayed with the blinds removed (Fig. 302 (D4)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the position where the original sword pulling operation was performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the variable display this time is a hit, the hit is notified together with the smiling princess. An image is displayed (FIGS. 302 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying the detachment is displayed together with a sad princess in the case of the detachment (FIGS. 302 (F1) (F2)).

When the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but the sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center of the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player cannot move due to being grasped when executing, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. The production itself proceeds even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration 5001, but the sword decoration 5001 is operated by the player at the left-right movable production timing (FIG. 301 (D3)) of the sword decoration 5001. If it is held at the position where it was performed, it will cause a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the movable effect in the left-right direction of the sword decoration body 5001 is executed, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) are progressing. Since it is configured to do so, the progress of the game will not be stagnant. The sword decoration body 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration body 5001, or may be configured not to perform a movable effect. You may.

In this way, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (operation effective) of the sword decoration body 5001 is dropped and moved by the sword pulling operation (up and down direction movement) of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved in the forward direction (at the operation position) of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3. On the other hand, it can be moved to the left). That is, based on the sword pulling operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword pulling operation was performed, increasing the operation value of the player and motivating the player to operate. It is possible to suppress the decline of. In addition, since one operating means can be operated in a stepwise different mode (vertical direction during operation, horizontal direction after operation) by the operation by the player, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. It is possible to increase the operating value of the operating means as compared with the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

The left-right movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is an effect display for the purpose of integrally producing an effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and a specific decorative member SDY (a sword accessory). The operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after performing the sword pulling operation with the sword decoration body 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved so as to be located outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. A movable effect in the left-right direction may be performed so as to displace to the left direction (the left end of the frame). Further, since the operation by the player of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example is an operation in the vertical direction (a sword pulling operation of pulling up the sword portion 5011 from the bottom to the top), the sword decoration body 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration body 5001 operates in a direction (horizontal direction or the like as in this example) different from the operating direction (here, the vertical direction) when the player operates.

Further, when the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player is performed, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be judged. Further, since the detection notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm it for a certain period of time, it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and delaying the subsequent movable production of the sword decoration body 5001 or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Further, if the movable effect cannot be executed due to contact with the sword decoration body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to the player to let go, and the operation is required during the operation valid period. Since even contact with the operating means is prohibited after the detection / notification operation is completed, the operating value of the operating means can be increased.

(Other production patterns 2 using the sword decoration body 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 303 to 305, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. FIGS. 303 to 305 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the effect effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410 used in many ways. be. Here, as the operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern ((A) (B) → N in the figure) in which the expectation degree suggestion effect suggesting the expectation degree that the fluctuation during execution becomes a big hit and the operation of the operation button 410 are performed. As an effect, a pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and developed will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 303 (A)), first, the operation validity period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. The operation promotion effect is performed to urge the player to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 303 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emittingly decorated. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sword-delivered state. Then, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern.

First, in the pattern in which the expectation suggestion effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Later (FIG. 303 (N1)), an image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed (FIG. 304 (N2)). After that, the result of this variation display (big hit, missed) is notified (FIG. 304 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expected degree suggestion effect for the variable display during execution. For example, it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image showing the expected degree (FIG. 304 (N2)). A character that changes the held display may appear.

Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and expanded by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. FIG. 303 (M1) shows an effect image suggesting that an operation effect requesting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the start image of the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the message of the title "sword pulling chance" and the operation explanation "I want you to put the sword") is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The sword decoration body 5001 at this time is a form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 305 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period elapses in the second sword withdrawal state and the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 begins, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state to produce an effect. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 305 (M3)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, an effect based on the result of the variation display this time is performed.

When the result of this variation display is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 305 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative pattern) is displayed (FIG. 305 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of order, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) only stops moving in small steps in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image for notifying the disconnection (decorative symbol stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 305 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effect of the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001) become possible, and the player can perform the operation button 410. It is not possible to identify subsequent deployments at the time of manipulating. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for operation and a decrease in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotonous effect after the operation.

In addition, in a series of reach effects, the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) are different operation modes (pressing operation and sword delivery operation) for the first time. The player is requested based on the operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the player in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotonous operation that does not look good.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 may be an effective operation. The operating means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower expectation than the first sword decoration 5001. Is desirable.

(Other production patterns 3 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 306 to 310, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. FIGS. 306 to 310 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not movable and is displayed in the detached mode based on the pressing operation of, the player is given an operation opportunity again by re-variating from the symbol display in the detached mode. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) in the figure → Q when the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given / R when the operation opportunity of the operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 306 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, here). , "You can move the movable body with a single button stroke") is displayed (Fig. 306 (B)), then the operation validity period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. An operation promotion effect is performed to encourage (FIG. 306 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emittingly decorated. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sword-delivered state. Then, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to a single blow (once), but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) to be moved by the operation. You may do so. Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state at this point.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is movable and becomes a big hit, when the player detects the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is completely dropped from the initial state. (Fig. 307 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (decorative symbol) for notifying a big hit is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is released. The stop mode "777", the message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 307 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not movable, when the player detects the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is only stopped to move in small steps and can be dropped. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative symbol in a misaligned mode (“767”) is oscillatedly displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 308 (P1). It is developed into a pattern (FIG. 308 (P2)) in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in an detached mode (“767”), or a resurrection pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the resurrection start image (referred to as "yet") indicating that the fluctuation display has not yet ended from the swing display of the decorative symbol in the detached mode of FIG. 308 (P1). (Samurai image) is inserted (Fig. 308 (P3)), the decorative design is again in the reach state and reduced to the upper right of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the center of the screen. An operation valid suggestion image (a face with closed eyes of a samurai ally) is displayed (Fig. 308 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed samurai's eyes are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 308 (P5)). As a result, the player raises the expectation that the production using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) will be performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be light-emitting decorated in a high-speed blinking mode, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state and moved up and down. Then, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operation effective operation means according to the set effect pattern, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001. The production of (Katana) is performed. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set so that the degree of expectation is lower than the pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which sweat oozes on the samurai's forehead of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button is displayed. 410 is luminescently decorated (FIG. 309 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is continuously moved in small steps and the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated, the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, and an operation for prompting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 309 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, the operation button 410 is not decorated with light emission when it is operated a necessary number of times.

Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (FIG. 309 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed so as to be visible to the player in the lower right corner of the screen. As in the case of the above (FIG. 305 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the aspect of the decorative symbol at this point. Next, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again from the completely dropped state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released is a screen. An image notifying the big hit (message of the stop mode "777" of the decorative symbol, "superb") is displayed in the center (FIG. 309 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is out of alignment, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, the decorative symbol of the misaligned mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 309 (R5)).

When the sword decoration body 5001 is used as the operation means, the image of the samurai who has closed his eyes and sharpens his eyes (sword decoration body) of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state in the form with an aura member (FIG. 310 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be light-emitting decorated. The player can grasp from the image of the display area that the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation instead of the operation button 410, but at this point, the form such as whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is being moved in small steps, when a predetermined period has passed since the second sword was pulled out and the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 started, the display of the effect display device 1600 was displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 310 (Q2)).

Then, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIGS. 309 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 310 (FIG. 310). Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of alignment, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 309 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 310 (Q5)).

In this way, since the expectation level is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the expectation level is more powerful than the expectation level suggestion by the image. Suggestions can be provided, and the decline in game interest can be suppressed. Further, even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped and moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given an opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. Will be done. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest, which is a concern because the operation effect is monotonous without shining instead.

Although three examples of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword decoration body 5001 are shown in FIGS. 300 to 310 described above, various effect modes may be combined. As a result, a wide variety of productions can be provided, and the game entertainment can be further enhanced.

(Pseudo-continuous production using sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 325, a pseudo-continuous effect using the sword ornament 5001 that changes the form stepwise according to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) will be described. The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variable, and is performed in response to the pseudo-continuous variation along with the pseudo-continuous variation in which the temporary stop and the re-variation are repeated once or multiple times. Etc. are shown. Here, the above-mentioned temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears to have stopped, but actually swings slightly and continues to fluctuate. In this example, when a variation pattern that performs pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 1310, the pseudo-continuous effect of the effect pattern that can be selected by the lottery of the effect contents by the peripheral control board 1510 is described below. Explain to.

(Form of sword decoration)
First, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 311. There are two types of the sword decoration body 5001 described above, one with an aura member and the other without an aura member. Here, the sword portion 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle portion 5012. Are provided in two types.

FIG. 311 is a diagram illustrating a form of the sword decoration body 5001 used for the pseudo-continuous production. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so as to be able to change its shape in two stages by deforming the handle portion 5012, and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3, and the player is provided from the left and right sides of the sheath portion 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly in the door. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 like the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction like the aura member 5030 described above. FIGS. 311 (A) to 311 (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the sword ornaments 5001 in the sword-delivered state, and show the sword 0 to step 3 morphologies in order. The sword ornament 5001 takes any form from stage 0 to stage 3 depending on the effect.

As shown in FIG. 311 (A), the step 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to those of FIGS. 281 (A) and 283 (A) described above, and no operation is required for any of the constituent members at the initial stage. Shows the morphology. As shown in FIG. 311 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side surface of the sheath portion 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 311 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle portion 5012 expands and moves from the center so as to be divided into two parts from the center to the left and right, and the first decorative portion 5012a appears from the inside. show. As shown in FIG. 311 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative portion 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle portion 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative portion 5012a. Shows the morphology. Here, the step 1 form to the step 3 form enable the morphological change without putting the sword ornament 5001 into the second sword drawing state. Further, since the sword portion 5010 capable of accepting the operation by the player and the non-operating sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integral decorative body as the operation unit of the operation means, it is possible to provide a more powerful operation means. Can be done.

(Example of pseudo-continuous production)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 312 to 325, an example of the effect transition will be described with respect to the effect pattern for performing the pseudo-continuous effect. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. 320. FIG. 320 is a diagram illustrating the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 320 (A), the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern depending on the main control board 1310. When any of the six types of variation patterns of the pattern is selected, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. The production patterns for performing pseudo-continuous production include basic production patterns (sword LV1 weak production pattern, sword LV1 strong production pattern, sword LV2 weak production pattern, sword LV2 strong production pattern, sword LV3 weak) corresponding to each of the six types of fluctuation patterns. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern), a specific effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern) is provided. When the fluctuation pattern is a sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), a sword LV1 weak production pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is selected. When the fluctuation pattern is the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern). ), Either the sword LV3 weak production pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern, or the pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern) Be selected.

The effect patterns include the number of times the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) continues (1 to 3 times), whether or not the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity according to the number of continuations, and when the operation opportunity is given. The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is set (see FIG. 320 (B)). The effect pattern names "LV1" to "LV3" correspond to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of 1 to 3 times. Further, "weak" and "strong" correspond to the drop positions (half drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). In addition, the "pseudo-sword LV1" gives the sword decoration body 5001 a selection operation opportunity for the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), and the player makes a selection not to operate, so that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continues. It is shown that it is a production that can acquire. In addition, the "pseudo-revival sword LV1" follows the same production transition as the sword LV1 weak production pattern, which is the basic production pattern that gives the sword decoration body 5001 an operation opportunity for the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). Fluctuation Indicates that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed again after the drop effect of the special decorative member SDY (sudare) based on the first operation opportunity. The details of the production contents of each production pattern will be described later.

Here, the basic effect pattern is set so that the higher the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, the higher the degree of expectation as the morphological change of the sword decoration body 5001 progresses, and further, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare role) is set. The lower the drop position of the object), the higher the expectation is set. However, when the drop position of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is half-drop, the number of continuation of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 1. It is set so that the drop position of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is the same as the case where all the drops are made with a few production patterns. Specifically, the expectation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once and the half-falling sword LV1 weak production pattern is 29%, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continuation once and the full-falling sword. The expectation of the LV1 strong production pattern is 40%, the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 2 times, and the expectation of the half-falling sword LV2 weak production pattern is 40%, the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 2. The expectation of the sword LV2 strong production pattern of times and full fall is 50%, the expectation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 3 times, and the expectation of the sword LV3 weak production pattern of half-fall is 50%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). The expectation of the LV3 strong production pattern of the sword LV3 strong production pattern of the sword LV3 strong production pattern of the sword LV3 strong production pattern is set to be 65%. Further, the specific effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation differs depending on the selected fluctuation pattern even if the effect pattern is the same, and the higher the degree of expectation is, the higher the degree of expectation is set. The expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53%, respectively, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern and the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, respectively. It becomes. Further, the expected degree of the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is 47% and 74%, respectively, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern and when the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is used. Further, the expectation of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set to 100% regardless of the variation pattern.

In the following, the pseudo continuous effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 320 (B) will be described with reference to the effect transition example shown in FIGS. 321 to 319 and the effect execution timing chart shown in FIGS. 321 to 325. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an effect transition example of the pseudo continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. FIGS. 313 to 315 are diagrams showing a transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given while the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is being performed. Further, FIG. 316 is a diagram showing a transition example of the post-operation effect (drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare)) of the sword decoration body 5001 during the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the effect patterns. be. Further, FIGS. 317 and 318 are diagrams showing examples of effect transitions that are characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. Further, FIG. 319 is a diagram showing an example of an effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern. Further, FIGS. 321 to 325 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sword accessory) in the pseudo continuous production, and FIG. 321 is a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). , FIG. 322 is a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern), FIG. 323 is a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern), and FIG. , FIG. 325 shows a pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern. In the following, an example of an effect transition in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the effect before the variable display is started and the reach state is reached will be described.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 312 (A), when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind) does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view, and a part of the blind is visible to the player above the display area (initial state). ) Is stationary. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in the sword delivery state in the stage 0 form (initial form).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 312 (B) and 312 (C), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous effect (effect content notification "great chance if 100 bodies can be defeated" message, samurai An image that accumulates the aura) is displayed, suggesting to the player that the pseudo-continuous production will start. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 312 (D), the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the decorative symbols are re-variated to the player. Notify that. Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous fluctuation number) of the sword ornament 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-continuous variation). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001, but the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). ), A sword image showing the form of the sword ornament 5001 (stage 1 form) in advance is displayed. In this way, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is notified at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) starts, so that the player Can grasp and face the stage of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Then, when the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started, as shown in FIG. 312 (E), it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of FIG. 312 (D) described above. The pseudo-sword symbol is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative symbol is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The morphological change of the sword decoration body 5001 at this time is the timing when the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decoration body 5001 from the effect display which is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started. That is, it is performed after the start of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). The morphological change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), for example, at the time of FIG. 312 (D) described above, it may be performed together with the display of the pseudo-continuous sword symbol, and then. Pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 312 (F), the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is enlarged and displayed, and the sword is changed from the delivered state to the second sword drawn state. , The sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 312 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is it possible to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state in which the player can operate the sword as an operating means? An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) indicating whether or not, that is, whether or not to give the player an operation opportunity is displayed. Subsequent productions include a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective (a production pattern with "LV1" in the name) and a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is not operation-effective (name) according to a preset production pattern. Branches to an effect pattern with "LV2" or "LV3" attached to. In the following, an example of the effect transition will be described in order for the nine types of effect patterns.

(Katana LV1 weak production pattern / sword LV1 strong production pattern)
First, with reference to FIGS. 313 and 316, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that enables the sword decoration body 5001 as an operating means in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is set. An example of the effect transition in the case will be described. When these effect patterns are set and the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is set to the above-mentioned FIG. 312 (G). An operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in) is displayed (FIG. 313 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity to request an active operation is displayed (FIG. 313 (T2)). .. Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (stage 1 form), which is the same as the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (FIG. 313 (T3)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern.

Here, when the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 (U1), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) ) Is moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned from the fully dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 312 (B) described above. An expectation notification image (“100 bodies destroyed!”) That notifies the expectation of the variation display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous production shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the full-fall state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the half-fall state described later. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001. Here, the display of the expected degree notification image enables the player to grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Further, when the set effect pattern is a "weak" effect pattern, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) Is moved to fall from the initial state to a semi-falling state. The semi-falling state means a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the fully falling state and overlaps with the upper half area of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view. .. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 316 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned from the semi-dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 312 (B) described above. An expectation notification image (“50 defeated!”) That notifies the expectation of the variable display result is displayed in a manner corresponding to the start image of the pseudo-continuous effect shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001. Then, as in the "strong" effect pattern, the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) by displaying the expected degree notification image at this time.

If the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001, the set effect pattern is regardless of whether it is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an escape image ("enemy, escape!") Showing that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) has ended without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Then, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed, as shown in FIG. 316 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative symbol of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started. NS. Regarding the reach effect at this time, the reach effect of the same effect content is executed in the "weak" effect pattern and the "strong" effect pattern. In this way, by operating the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword delivery operation is required, the player can perform a reach effect after grasping the degree of expectation based on the drop position of the specific decoration member SDY (sudare). I can welcome you. Therefore, even if the subsequent reach production is the same, it is possible to have different expectations each time, so that the decrease in the motivation of the player to operate is suppressed, and further, the deterioration of the game interest for the uniform production is suppressed. can do.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 321 the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form is operated during the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. Enable as a means and give the player an opportunity to operate. Then, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If there is no operation by the player, the fall effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 321, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( See FIG. 312 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (Fig. 312 (G) → Fig. 313 (T1) → (T2). ), The operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expected degree notification of the expected degree corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

(Katana LV2 weak production pattern / Katana LV2 strong production pattern)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 313 and 314, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern that enables the sword ornament 5001 as an operating means in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is set. An example of the effect transition when there is a case will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given at the timing of giving the operation opportunity of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). After following the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to 312 (G), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is not provided with an operation opportunity from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 312 (G). A continuous image (an image with the samurai's eyes closed) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 that was in the second sword-drawing state is returned to the sword-delivered state while maintaining the morphology in the stage 1 morphology (Fig. 313 (S1)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 313 (S2)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous fluctuation number) of the sword ornament 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-continuous variation). Then, a sword image showing in advance the form (step 2 form) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is displayed on the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Will be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001. In addition, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) are displayed at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) starts. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) and face it.

Then, when the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 313 (S2) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the step 1 form to the step 2 form in which the handle portion 5012 is split left and right so that the first decorative portion 5012a can be visually recognized (FIG. 313 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (FIG. 313 (S4)). The morphological change timing of the sword ornament 5001 from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form and the state change timing from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state may be set to be simultaneous. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration body 5001 changes at once when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword decoration body 5001. It can impress the powerful movement and attract the attention of the player.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword drawing state (stage 2 form) in which the player can operate the sword as an operation means, that is, the game An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of deciding whether or not to give the person an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 314 (V1)).

Here, when the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the second pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 314 (V1) is displayed (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened). FIG. 314 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity to request an active operation is displayed (FIG. 314 (V3)). .. Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (stage 2 form), which is the same as the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (Fig. 314 (V4)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. If the player's sword-delivery operation is not detected during the operation validity period, the effect display device 1600 is used regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area, an escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Showing that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed (Fig.). 318 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 322, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given during the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. In the period T2 in which the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 2 form is enabled as an operation means, and the player is given an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 322, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( See FIG. 312 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see FIG. 312 (G)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament body undergoes a second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not, after enhancing the player's feeling of excitement and making the player fully recognize the sword decoration 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 314 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 314 (V4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expected degree notification of the expected degree corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T2.

(Katana LV3 weak production pattern / Katana LV3 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 314 and 315, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern that enables the sword ornament 5001 as an operating means is set in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). An example of the effect transition when there is a case will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the sword decoration is at the timing of giving the operation opportunity of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) shown in FIG. Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → 313 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1), the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a continuous image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are closed) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 314 (V1), and the second sword is pulled out. The sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword-delivered state while maintaining the morphology in the stage 2 morphology (FIG. 314 (V5)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 314 (V6)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous fluctuation number) of the sword ornament 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-continuous variation). Then, a sword image showing in advance the form (step 3 form) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is displayed on the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Will be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001. In addition, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. In this way, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous variation) of the sword ornament 5001 in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are displayed. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) and face it.

Then, when the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 314 (V6) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decorative portion 5012b protrudes above the first decorative portion 5012a so that both decorative portions can be visually recognized as an integral decorative body (. FIG. 314 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (Fig. 314 (V8)). The morphological change timing of the sword ornament 5001 from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form and the state change timing from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state may be set to be simultaneous. Further, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 does not have to be changed each time according to the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, and when the final stage is reached, the form may be changed collectively for a plurality of stages. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration body 5001 changes at once when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword decoration body 5001. It can impress the powerful movement and attract the attention of the player.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword drawing state (stage 3 form) in which the player can operate the sword as an operation means, that is, the game. An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of deciding whether or not to give the person an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 315 (X1)).

Here, when the set effect patterns are the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the third pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 315 (X1) is displayed (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened). FIG. 315 (X2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity to request an active operation is displayed (FIG. 315 (X3)). .. Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (stage 3 form), which is the same as the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (Fig. 315 (X4)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 316 described above, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. If the player's sword-delivery operation is not detected during the valid operation period, the effect display device 1600 is used regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area of, an escape image ("enemy, escape!") Showing that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed ("Enemy, escape!") ( See FIG. 318 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variable display result. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 323, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed and the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are In the period T2 in which the sword decoration is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is not given an operation opportunity, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the game Give the person an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 323, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( See FIG. 312 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see FIG. 312 (G)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 313 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament body undergoes a second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S2)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 314 (V1)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament reaches the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and is the operation effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and the expected degree notification of the expected degree corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T3.

(Pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern / Pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 317 and 318, the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled as an operating means in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), but the pseudo-continuous variation is made by the player selecting not to operate. An example of the effect transition when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can acquire the continuation (level-up effect) of (re-variation) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given at the operation opportunity grant timing of the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation). .. However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for asking the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIG. 313 (T1), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided with the operation opportunity of FIG. 313 (T1). An operation selection image (“may be an opportunity !?” message) indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity for the player to select whether or not to operate from the operation confirmation image indicating that the operation is to be performed is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z1)). )). Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promotion effect for prompting the selection of the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (stage 1 form), which is the same as the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed, and the operation direction and the operation validity period are shown together with the message "Please choose whether to put the sword". The image is displayed (FIG. 317 (Z2)).

Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is a variation of either the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern or sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern). Subsequent production transitions differ greatly depending on whether the production pattern is set based on the pattern.

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player can perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period. When it is detected, it follows the same effect transition (FIG. 316) as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern.

On the other hand, if the sword-delivering operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 317 (Z2) is shown regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the valid period of the operation is completed, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the second sword drawing state of the stage 1 form to the sword delivery state of the initial form, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has this selection operation opportunity. An image (“Is it an opportunity ...”) indicating that it was an opportunity to operate is displayed (FIG. 318 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an escape image ("enemy, escape!"" Showing that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) has ended without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) being performed. ) Is displayed (FIG. 318 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative symbol of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 318 (W3)).

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the player can perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period. When it is detected, FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 316 (U1) →) in the same manner as when the operation is detected at the operation opportunity in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern. After following the effect transition of (U2)), the remaining effect period (total period of the periods T2 and T3) is varied and displayed by the decorative symbol in the normal mode (not shown). Then, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the normal mode at the same timing as a predetermined timing in the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 316 (U5)). reference).

On the other hand, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. 317 (Z2) described above is not observed regardless of the set effect pattern (“weak” or “strong”). When the operation validity period in which the operation is performed ends, the operation pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continued by acquiring the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time shifts from the above-mentioned FIG. 317 (Z2) to a continuous image (FIG. 313 (S1)) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given at the first operation grant timing, that is, the continuation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. After that, similarly to the sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern) of the basic production pattern, FIGS. 313 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. 314 (V1) → FIGS. 314 (V5) to (V8) described above. )-> FIGS. 315 (X1) to (X4)-> FIG. 316 (U1)-> (U2) or (U3)-> (U4)-> FIG. 316 (U5).

As described above, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) greatly differs in the effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control board 1310. When the selected fluctuation pattern is a sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player should choose to operate at the selection operation opportunity, and when operating at the selection operation opportunity, the basic effect pattern and Similarly, you can grasp the degree of expectation and face the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, not only will you not be able to obtain the level-up effect described later, but you will also reach the reach effect without being able to grasp the degree of expectation that you would have known if you were originally operating it. .. Further, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the player should choose not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If you do not operate at the selection operation opportunity, you can enjoy the production by continuing the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) as in the basic production pattern. On the other hand, if you operate it, you will miss the effect of continuing the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) that you could have acquired if you did not operate it (the morphological change of the sword decoration 5001 due to the level-up effect) and the initial form of the sword decoration 5001 It will return to the form. As for the operation in the selection operation opportunity, the operation effect obtained according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, which the player does not know, is exactly the opposite, and the operation in the operation valid period in which the operation is effectively accepted is the game. It provides a novel production that brings a disadvantageous operation result to the person. In addition, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent production development than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation at the selection operation opportunity with a sense of tension and anticipation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation for operation and a decrease in the interest in the game caused by a uniform operation effect.

In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the first pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) occurs. When the player operates the sword decoration body 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the level of the stage 3 form is lowered from the stage 1 form at the time of the selection operation opportunity to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword decoration body 5001, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, the level is raised to the stage 3 form, and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, a preset number of operations is required in the effect pattern, but in this example, two operation opportunities (LV1 and L3) can be given in advance, but one operation is performed by the player. The grant will end at the opportunity, and it is possible to provide a novel production that more reflects the player's intention. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to operate the operation effect that does not look good and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

In other words, even if the effect pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 can be changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set by the variation pattern selected by the main control board 1310, the initial form to the stage 1 form is set depending on the operation of the player. Only the changes up to can be seen, leading to reach production. Since the player can be made to select the operation without being caught by the selected fluctuation pattern (set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player the feeling that his / her own operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (sudare). .. If you do not operate the sword decoration body 5001, you will not be able to grasp the degree of expectation and you will end up, and the form will change (level up) further, and you will operate it at the operation opportunity given after becoming the stage 3 form. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). In this way, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the non-operation selection produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or a higher effect than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to be higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 320 (A), the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the degree of expectation of the same production pattern may be constant regardless of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in order to provide an appropriate effect more suitable for the player's own sense of selection, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 324, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing of is described.

As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form Is enabled as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the fluctuation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern, three pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) are originally provided so that the specific decoration can be performed. After the drop effect of the member SDY, the symbol variation in the normal mode is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern. Then, when the fluctuation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern, the second and third pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) are continued, and the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation is continued. In the period T2 where (re-variation) is performed, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 where the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated. And give the player an opportunity to operate. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 324, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). (See FIG. 312 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation is enabled by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (Fig. 312 (G) → Fig. 313 (T1) → Fig. 317). (See (Z1)), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 317 (Z2)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, although not shown, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continues (when the sword is set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state at the end of the operation validity period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 313 (S1)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 313 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 313 (S4)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 314 (V1)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 314 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament reaches the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 314 (V6)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 314 (V7)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 314 (V8)), and is the operation effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 316 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 316 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T3.

In addition, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is not continued (when the sword is set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

(Pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 319, the same production transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern is followed, and after making it appear as if the reach production is started as it is, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is revived. An example of the effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

The pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 1510 when the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is selected by the main control board 1310.

When the set effect pattern is a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern, similarly to the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the above-mentioned FIGS. 312 (A) to (G) → FIGS. 313 (T1) to (T3). Follow the production transition. Then, when the operation by the player is detected in the first operation opportunity, the same effect as in FIGS. 316 (U3), (U4) and (U5) described above is performed regardless of the type of the fluctuation pattern. After following the production transition of UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo-continuous fluctuation by the pseudo-continuous sword symbol is restarted again. If no operation by the player is detected at the first operation opportunity, the sword decoration 5001 changes to the initial form of the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, as in the case of other production patterns. Instead of FIG. 319 (UA1) → (UA2) described above, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)).

The resumption of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is centered among the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7 ↓ 7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 319 (UA3) described above. Temporary stop display with a pseudo-sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, a pseudo-sword symbol that indicates the form and effect level (number of pseudo-sequential fluctuations) of the sword decoration body 5001. This is notified to the player (Fig. 319 (UA4)). On the pseudo-sword pattern at this time, the sword image of the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form and the effect level 3 are displayed. At this point, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001, and the initial form (sword delivery state) is maintained. As described above, in the pseudo-recovery sword LV1 production pattern, when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 of the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of the temporary stop display (FIG. 319 (UA4)) immediately before the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the stage 3 form starts, the form and the effect level of the sword ornament 5001 in the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) and face it.

Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 319 (UA4) is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display acts on the sword decoration body 5001. It is moved and displayed toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decoration part 5012a and the second decoration part 5012b operate to make both decoration parts visible as an integral decoration body. (Fig. 319 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-continuous sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (Fig. 319 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form at once from the initial form to the stage 3 form for a plurality of stages, it is possible to impress a powerful movement and attract the interest of the player.

After that, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 3 form), which enables the player to operate the sword, is enabled as an operation means, and the above-mentioned FIGS. If an operation by the player is detected after following the effect transition of, although not shown, the specific decorative member SDY (not shown) depends on the presence or absence of the operation detection at the first operation opportunity regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern. The type of drop effect of the bamboo blind is determined. If the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is once in a half-falling state, so the level is raised to the above-mentioned FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2). → The same as (U5), the expectation level notification effect is performed by the total drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), and the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ends. On the other hand, if the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the expectation level due to the semi-falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) as in FIG. 316 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) described above. The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends.

If the operation by the player is not detected at the operation opportunity to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword pulling state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the operation valid period ends as in the other effect patterns. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state to the initial form of the sword delivery state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 does not perform the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) occurs. An escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Showing that the process has ended is displayed (see FIG. 318 (W2)), and the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ends.

In this way, in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 production pattern, the same production transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern is followed, and when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored again, the level of the stage 2 form is skipped and the stage 3 form Since the same development as the production of the level of (the production of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the basic production pattern) is performed, the player is surprised and has a stronger expectation than other production patterns to reach the production. Can face. In addition, even if the player is given an operation opportunity by the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) or the subsequent drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is half-fall, he / she will not be disappointed. You can enjoy the game in anticipation of the revival of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 320 (B) and 325, the operation execution timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) when the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 320 (B), in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form is enabled as an operating means during the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed. Give the player an operation opportunity. At this time, regardless of the selected fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. (Direction) is performed. If there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

Then, after the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed and the display returns to the variation display of the decorative symbol in the normal mode, the period during which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed in another effect pattern. Pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed using the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the form changes to the step 3 form. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the player is given an operation opportunity. At this time, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped during the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the player's operation (expectation notification). (Direction) is performed. In addition, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped during the period T1 during the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped by the player's operation. A production (expectation notification production) is performed. If there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation notification effect) is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 325, when the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). (See FIG. 312 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 312 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (Fig. 312 (G) → Fig. 313 (T1) → (T2). ), The operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 313 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 319 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 319 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expected degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (FIG. 318). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decorative symbol in the normal mode (see FIG. 319 (UA3)), but the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restored (FIG. 319 (UA4)). )reference).

Then, at the same time as the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restarted, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 319 (UA5)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 319 (UA6)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after making the player fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 315 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 315 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped in the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is changed from the initial state to the total drop state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 316 (U1)). Then, at the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to the entire drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped in the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) starts from the initial state. It changes to the half-fall state (see FIG. 316 (U3)), and the expected degree notification image of the expectation degree corresponding to the half-fall is displayed (see FIG. 316 (U4)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 318 (W2). )), The player recognizes the end of period T3.

In this way, in the pseudo-continuous production using the sword decoration body 5001, in the sword LV2 production pattern and the sword LV3 production pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed a plurality of times, the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is 2 and 3 times, respectively. If it is less than, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state for each pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) so that the player can operate it, but an operation validity period is provided. It is characterized by returning to the sword-delivered state without giving the player an operation opportunity. For this reason, the player is expected to have an expectation as to whether or not the operation is effective even when the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operable, so that the player is interested in the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for operation and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is characterized in that the sword ornament 5001 returns to the initial form when the player operates the sword ornament 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect that provides a useful effect for the player by the operation of the player. Make the player's operation selection careful. Therefore, it is possible to make the sword decoration body 5001 interested in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for operation and a decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, since the sword decoration body 5001 can change its form stepwise until an operation opportunity is given (until the operation validity period occurs), the expectations and interests of the player are gradually raised, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. It should be noted that the period from when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operation state and in the second sword withdrawal state (operation position) until the operation effective period is generated is the operation mode (form, light emission, movable) in the operation position by the player. Etc.) should be provided for a period in which it can be sufficiently confirmed. As a result, the player can confirm the operation mode before operating the sword decoration body 5001, so that the operation valid period is generated as soon as the second sword is pulled out, and the mode of the operation means cannot be confirmed. It is possible to dispel the concern that the interest in the game will be reduced by shifting to the operation production in a hurry.

The step change of the sword decoration body 5001 described above is shown in the form, but the present invention is not limited to this. Each effect mode, such as a change in the light emitting mode or the operation mode of the sword decoration body 5001, may be changed stepwise according to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation).

(Application to look-ahead production)
Although the sword-drawing effect in the pseudo-continuous reach effect has been described above, it can also be executed as a look-ahead effect. The case of applying to the look-ahead effect will be described below. In the following, a case where the third hold is the target of the look-ahead effect and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the look-ahead effect pattern will be described as an example.

When the hold to be the look-ahead effect occurs as the third hold 3, the same effect as in FIGS. 312 (B) to 312 (F) described above is performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. The sword decoration body 5001 is different in that the second sword withdrawal state is limited to the time when the operation opportunity is given (the operation validity period is generated). Then, in the next variation display (that is, the variation display of the hold 1 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in FIG. 312 (G) → FIGS. 313 (S1) to (S4) described above is performed. Further, in the next variation display (that is, the variation display of hold 2 when hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in FIGS. 314 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIGS. 315 (X1) to (X3) described above is performed. Will be. As described above, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state in the look-ahead effect only when the operation valid period occurs. Here, the operation valid period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 which is the target of the look-ahead effect is started, and the operation promotion effect and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword delivery state) shown in FIG. 315 (X4) described above are started. The second sword is pulled out from). After that, the same effect transition as in FIG. 316 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the look-ahead effect is completed.

The state change of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state is limited to the timing of occurrence of the operation valid period, but the gradual change of form is performed at the end of the variable display, but the next variable display It may be done at the start. The look-ahead effect has the same effect as the pseudo-continuous reach effect.

(Pre-operation suggestion effect using specific decorative member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 329, the pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation valid period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is effective among the plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). .. Specifically, as a suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory), the operation valid period is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) positioned at the initial position. There is a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation validity period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated from the initial position to the suggestion position. When the operation is valid, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) that generates the operation validity period with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) positioned at the initial position even during the operation validity period. When is performed, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 becomes effective with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes effective with an operation of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)) in which the operation validity period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed. Has a 70% probability (including a step-up pattern) that the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, and a 30% probability that the operation button 410 is effective for operation. An example of the effect transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect will be described below.

(1st suggestion pattern)
326 and 327 show either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. Is a diagram showing a transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 326 (A)), the operation buttons are determined in advance to be valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for any of the operating means of 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. It is displayed (FIG. 326 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Further, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001.

Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is maintained at the initial position, an operation valid period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that is determined to be valid for operation is generated. Let me. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled for operation, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is considered to be more effective than the sword decoration 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

When the operation button 410 is operated and enabled, as shown in FIG. 326 (C), the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Let me. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although the ratio is lower than that of the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 326 (D), the operation valid period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura member), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible.

If an operation on an operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that is effective for operation is detected in FIG. 326 (C) or (D) described above, and the result of this variation display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped and moved so as to be in a completely dropped state from the initial state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of alignment, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the deviation. An image (the stop mode "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 328 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that the operation of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is valid during the reach effect, as in the case of the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect to be executed. In FIG. 329, although the second suggestion pattern was performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 was once enabled for operation without the sword decoration body 5001 being effective for operation, and then the sword decoration was performed. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern which makes the body 5001 operation effective.

As shown in FIG. 328 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 which is determined in advance to be valid for operation by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. It is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, the operation effect suggestion image is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed. It operates in a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small steps in the direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated at the suggested position, the operation valid period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) which is determined in advance to be effective is set. generate. In this example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in the suggested position, the sword decoration body 5001 is considered to be operation effective at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

When the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operating at the suggested position. To generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible. Further, even when the operation button 410 is activated, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 328 (AA2), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved from the state of being operated at the suggested position to the initial state. Further, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) may be moved from the state of operating at the suggested position to the fully dropped state or the initial state without being returned to the initial state.

Then, when an operation on the operation effective operating means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is detected in FIG. 328 (AA2) or (AA3) described above, the above-mentioned FIG. 326 (C) or (D) Similarly, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped and moved so as to be in a completely dropped state from the initial state (FIG. 327 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of alignment, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the deviation. An image (the stop mode "767" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 327 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

The operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggested position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the sword decoration body 5001 has a different ratio of effective operation, the player's interest in the motion can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern that the operation validity period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed and the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operation valid, In addition to the basic pattern that follows the effect transition from FIG. 328 (AA1) to (AA3) described above before the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operational effective, the operation button 410 is once enabled for operation, and then the sword decoration body 5001 is operated. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 329 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 which is determined in advance to be operation-effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is generated, that is, before the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) described above is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the same operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) as in FIG. 328 (AA1) described above is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps (FIG. 329 (BB1)). ). Next, the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated at the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (Fig. 329 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation valid period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 327 is not performed, and the switching suggesting the switching of the operation effective operation means. Suggested images (most blackout images) are displayed (FIG. 329 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state (a form with an aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the operation means for which the operation is effective is the operation button 410 to the sword decoration body 5001. A switching notification image (messages of "chance to pull out the sword" and "I'm sorry to have you pay the sword") is displayed (Fig. 329 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in a state of operating at the suggested position. Then, when the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 328 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect (FIG. 327) in the above-mentioned second suggestion pattern.

Note that, at the time of FIG. 329 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the operation of the button operation 410 (without the operation promotion effect). It would be good if the player's interest could be directed to the button operation 410 and then the sword decoration body 5001 could be operated. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is used before the operation valid period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is effective is generated. ) Can be changed, and the operation means that is effective for the operation is suggested depending on the position. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 326 (B)) in which the operation valid period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operation effective. In the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1), the sword ornament 5001), in which the operation validity period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the suggestion position. Is highly expected to be effective for operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in order to grasp which operation means is effective for operation. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Since the operation effect (fall effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is also used for the result notification (FIG. 327) after the operation of the operation means, a series of drop effects are performed from the vertical small movement of the pre-operation suggestion effect. It can be shown as a production of the game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body will be effective, is not limited to this, and the character is shown during the pre-operation suggestion effect. It may be displayed to suggest the degree of expectation. Further, when the operation means for which the operation is effective is determined, not only the operation button 410 is lit or the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the second sword withdrawal state, but also the operation means for which the operation is effective is moved by vibration or the like. You may do it.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the operation button 410 is once enabled for operation (or pretended to be valid for operation) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the suggested position. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation of the sword decoration body 5001. As a result, the player is interested in both operating means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to expect that the sword decoration body 5001 may become effective after that, so that the motivation for operation is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation valid period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is effective is displayed. At the same timing (FIG. 326 (B)), as in the case of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 328 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is viewed from the initial position in front view of the display area of the effect display device 1600. It may operate in a small drop state (suggested position) overlapping the upper portion, and may be moved in small steps in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. After that, when the operation valid period is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the movement in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the sword decoration body 5001 to be effective even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is executed. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation valid period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated at the suggestion position. It is possible to improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 has a specific effect. Perform the production with a pattern. In the production period in which a specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (valid period) that establishes a specific production execution condition can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. And, based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition, a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for granting a privilege) can be executed. The degree of expectation for giving a privilege suggested as a result of a specific operation effect may be 100% or 0%.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is operated as an operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for giving benefits when operated). In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further provide another operating means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), this There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) (a case where a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating another operation means). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given is generated even if the operation is not performed at the operation opportunity. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for granting the privilege is higher than the case where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation for giving the privilege suggested when the operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the operation corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) is performed. It will be possible to improve the interest of the game when the production is in the pre-stage where it has not been performed yet and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, the desired production result (such as the production result suggesting that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is high) does not appear in the operation-time production according to the operation for another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). Even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), it is possible to improve the game entertainment through such operation-related production. Become.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) having such a directing property. When doing so, it is possible to execute a common operation-related effect when giving those operation opportunities.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, at least, as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect acceptance period) in which the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted), at least
-The operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted) after the "specific operation-related effect" that can appear even when the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is enabled (the effect can be accepted). The first production mode that generates the valid period (effect reception period) to be performed, and the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled without the production of the "specific operation-related production" being started (the production can be accepted). A plurality of production modes such as a second production mode that generates an effective period (effect reception period) to be performed are prepared, and by executing any of these production modes, the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (effect). It is designed to generate a valid period (production reception period) that can be accepted.

According to such a configuration, there may be a period in which the operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be received. Regardless of whether there is a period during which the operation means different from the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can accept the effect, it is common (specification) prior to the occurrence of those periods. ) Operation-related effects will be made feasible, so it will be possible to have an interest in whether a specific operation means or another operation means can accept the effects. By performing the operation while the above is performed, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the effect, it corresponds to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). The production reception period will be generated, but at least when the production is started, which of those operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) corresponds to the production reception period will occur. Should be kept secret.

Hereinafter, some effect modes that can be adopted when carrying out such a common (specific) operation-related effect will be sequentially described. In each of the following explanatory examples and other examples thereof, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means targeted for common (specific) operation-related effects. The type of the operating means is not limited to these, and three or more operating means may be prepared as a plurality of operating means to be targeted for a common (specific) operation-related effect. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show the production contents when any of the production reception periods occurs after the common (specific) operation-related production is executed, and the common (specific) production is shown. ) Operation-related effects If any of the effect reception periods occurs without being executed, the effect contents may be omitted. However, when any of the production acceptance periods occurs without the common (specific) operation-related production being executed, the production contents are as shown in FIGS. 206 (E) and 206 (G), for example. .. That is, in this case, the operation instruction image for prompting the operation for the operation button 410 appears, or the operation instruction image for prompting the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 appears without executing the specific operation-related effect. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach effect is performed. A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period during which is being executed, or is common during the execution period of the jackpot game. (Specific) operation-related effects may be generated.

It should be noted that each of the effects described below can be appropriately combined and executed with each of the effects of each of the other examples described later, and can also be appropriately combined and executed with each of the above-mentioned effects. It is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined by substituting a part of each effect of another example described later, and when the first effect pattern is executed, each effect described below is performed. Therefore, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to perform each of the different examples described later. The same can be said for each of the different productions described below.

[First production mode]
In FIGS. 330 and 331, at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is a figure which shows the production example (the first production mode) to be performed.

In FIG. 330 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 330 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 330 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 330B, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display is made to move within each. In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means in the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword It is suggested that the operation for any of those operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will soon be possible for the production reception, while it is unclear which of the decoration body 5001 can be received for the production. You will be able to.

In FIG. 330 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 330 (b) has progressed, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "operate" and a production reception) prompting the user to operate any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) while each is stopped and displayed in the area. A bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period) appears to indicate the production status.

According to such an effect mode, although it is possible to receive an operation on at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, those operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). It will be possible to make it unclear which of the above can be accepted for production. This is the same effect mode (FIG. 330 (c)) in both the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is capable of accepting the effect and the situation where the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is capable of accepting the effect. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this production example (first production mode), a plurality of operation means are performed before the operation for at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) can be received. Common (specific) operation-related as shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and (c) for a period until the operation for at least one of (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) can be accepted for production. I try to perform the production.

Therefore, in addition to this production example, in each production example described below and other examples thereof, the production content of the specific operation-related production is limited to the content shown in FIGS. 330 (b) and 330 (c). do not have. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is after that (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). It suffices if it occurs in (middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) remains unclear as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can accept the effect. It is possible to suggest that the operation for one can be accepted for production. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time, and the button image BTG and sword decoration are not necessarily displayed at the same time. It is possible that none of the image SYGs appear and an effect image different from any of them appears as a specific operation-related effect.

However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be received for the production, there is a case where the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and the production for the sword decoration body 5001 It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution (start of production) of specific operation-related effects to the occurrence of those effect reception periods, depending on the case where the reception period occurs.

In addition, as an operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation for any of the operation means ("Operate". , Etc.), or always operate a specific operating means among the plurality of operating means, regardless of how the plurality of operating means are allowed to receive the effect. May be displayed to prompt the user. In short, as an operation instruction, the same production mode appears in both the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is possible for the production and the situation where the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is possible for the production. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the production.

Further, in the production example (first production mode) shown in FIG. 330 (c), it is kept secret as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated to receive the production. , Even when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of accepting the production, and when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not capable of accepting the production (in any of the first to third situations described later). However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a light emitting state to prompt the operation of the operation button 410. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a light emitting means may be provided on the sword decoration body 5001 side to provide the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

Here, in this production example (first production mode), the production situation in which the image shown in FIG. 330 (c) appears is only the operation for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. Whether it is in the first situation where the production can be accepted, or in the second situation where only the operation for the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted for the production, or the operation for the operation button 410 and the operation for the sword decoration 5001 Both of them are set to be in one of the third situations where the production can be accepted. In addition, when the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001) occurs among these a plurality of situations, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 The expectation for granting benefits is higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the rate at which the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs within the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable that the rate is lower than the rate at which

Then, in this effect example (first effect mode), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in any of the first situation (operation button 410) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). (Whether "FF" is developed in the figure), or in either the second situation (sword decoration 5001) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). When the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed (when the "GG" in the figure is advanced), the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the operation (FIGS. 331 (d) and 331 (f)). Is supposed to be done.

In the operation-time effect, in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and 331 (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 performs a predetermined display effect. ("Chance !!") is supposed to be executed. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "chance !!" which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and "super heat !!" which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of production modes such as, and displaying one of these production modes according to the reception of the production, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided by providing an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes appears in response to the effect reception. , The degree of expectation for granting benefits may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Moreover, in the operation-time production according to this production example (first production mode), the production is accepted by the operation by the player in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 331 (d) and 331 (f). Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute the control to put the operating means into the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 331 (d), even though the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the operation is performed in response to the effect reception. It is possible to execute the control to reciprocate the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that has not been performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which the effect reception is generated as a result of the player's operation on the operation button 410 and the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, "operation Even if the sword decoration body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated without operating the button 410, the production reception may have occurred and the production on the sword decoration body 5001 side may have been executed. It will be possible to appeal the possibility to the player.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword pulling operation on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body 5001 is delivered to the sword position according to the production reception. It is possible to execute control to maintain the sword at the sword withdrawal position (sword withdrawal state) instead of returning to the (sword withdrawal state). As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the sword delivery position (sword delivery state) to the sword extraction position (sword extraction state) based on the operation by the player, and is maintained in such a sword extraction state. Occasionally, the production will be performed during operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is executed between the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body at that time. By confirming the operating state of the 5001, it becomes possible to feel that the operation-time effect caused by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 side is being executed.

Then, after the operation-time effect (FIGS. 331 (d) and (f)) is performed in this way, a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 331 (e). However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation time effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side is available. Even if it is executed, when a predetermined time elapses (at a stage before the reach effect is started), the sword decoration body 5001 is not operated (sword delivery position (sword delivery state)). It will be controlled to return to. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword decoration body 5001, at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating operation or maintenance in the sword-drawn state) for the period of. Further, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 330 and 331, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body) among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration body 5001) is used. Regardless of whether 5001) is allowed to accept the effect or not, the common (specific) operation-related effect is started, and the common (specific) effect is started. While the operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is not allowed to accept the effect, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is not allowed to accept the effect. Since the operation button 410 can receive the effect, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can receive the effect respectively. It will be possible to give an operation opportunity in a state where it is kept secret.

In this production example (first production mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can receive the production, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) produces the production. Regardless of whether the operation button 410 can accept the effect without being able to accept it, when the operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 Coupled with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of receiving the production, the sword decoration body 5001 is said to be capable of receiving the production. You will be able to mislead as if you weren't there. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to prompt the operation of the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the production with a relatively high expectation is performed when the production is accepted. It is expected that it will be interesting to know which operation means should be operated when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, when the operation means of the side that cannot accept the effect (the side that does not have the effect acceptance period) is operated while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the production reception period is exhausted by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

However, if the operation means on the side that is not allowed to accept the effect (the side that does not have the effect acceptance period) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the above operation is performed. Although the effect reception required for executing the effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the detection of the operation itself is to be performed, and the operation on the side where the effect can be accepted based on the detection itself. Control may be performed to end the effect reception period for the means at that time. With such a configuration, there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost. Therefore, it is recommended to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the production and to operate it carefully. become able to.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is obtained between the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side. Although it is made to be executed, these operation-time effects may be different from each other. For example, in the operation-time effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, in addition to the effect-time effect performed on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 may emit light. , A unique production sound is generated, etc.), it is possible to more appropriately improve the game entertainment when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received.

Further, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other effect mode. The production reception period is not set when the production reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) and the production reception period related to the occurrence of the other production mode is not set. An effect reception period is set for the second operation means (for example, if the first operation means is the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001 is used, and if the first operation means is the sword decoration body 5001, the operation button 410). In either case, when there is an operation on the first operating means in the situation shown in FIG. 330 (c), an operation-time effect may be performed. That is, in this case, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and an operation for the first operation means is performed while the effect acceptance period related to the occurrence of the other effect mode is set, While another effect mode is executed as an operation-time effect, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed and the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set (No. 1). When there is an operation for the first operation means (when the effect reception period for the second operation means is set), another effect mode is not executed as the operation time effect, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation will be produced. In short, when the effect reception period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation-time effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. It is set for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when another effect mode appears as the operation time effect, the second operation mode is not made to appear in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation time effect on the second operation means side. The operation-time effect may be performed as an effect content different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

In the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related production is being performed is the situation where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are used. The first situation where only the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted for the production, the second situation where only the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 can be received for the production, and the operation for the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 It is set so that both the operation and the operation for are corresponding to any of the third situations in which the production can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect is displayed when the effect reception is performed, whereas in the third situation, the operation time is different from that of both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that the effect or the above-mentioned other effect mode (different from the operation-time effect of the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the above-mentioned production example, the above-mentioned third situation is not always necessary.

Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-mentioned production example is not provided as an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means. In the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), even in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (f), the player does not perform the operation as in the production situation shown in FIG. 331 (d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be enabled. In such control, it is important to at least operate the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player, and at this time, the operating means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately. However, regarding the control to operate the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player, the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side is set at an earlier stage than before returning to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to end the operating state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source.

[Second production mode]
FIGS. 332 to 335 show that the specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect showing the process of the effect until either the first effect result or the second effect result appears. It is suggested that when the first effect result appears as a result of the above, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and when the second effect result appears as a result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the production example (second production mode) which suggests that the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs.

In FIG. 332 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 332 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 332 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 332 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed simultaneously in the image, and the lightning bolt image IZ is depicted acting on those images BTG and SYG. In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means in the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword It is suggested that the operation for any of those operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will soon be possible for the production reception, while it is unclear which of the decoration body 5001 can be received for the production. You will be able to.

In FIG. 332 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 332 (b) is advanced, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed as effects. An effect is performed in which the other party is pushed out of the display area by pushing each other within the display area of the device 1600.

That is, in the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) related to this effect example (second effect mode), "the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG press each other, and these images are pressed. It is executed as an effect such as "Which of BTG and SYG is left in the display area", and when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Therefore, in this production example (second production mode), the production shown in FIGS. 332 (b) and 332 (c) is either "the production reception period for the operation button 410 or the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001". Corresponds to "a specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods" even when

The left side of FIG. 332 (c) depicts the predominant situation in which the button image BTG remains in the display area, and the right side shows the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts how the situation is predominant to remain in the territory. In a specific operation-related production, the situation of such inferiority / superiority changes from moment to moment with the passage of time.

In FIG. 333 (d), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the sword decorative image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the button image BTG is left in the display area. Is being performed (first production result). When the content of the effect is developed, the period for accepting the effect for the sword decoration body 5001 does not occur, and only the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c)) is executed, which suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 333 (d)). Is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be received for the effect (the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 occurs).

At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, a plurality of instruction displays (character display such as "press" and bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) are displayed. Among the operation means of the above, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 is in a state where the effect reception is possible (during the effect reception period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this production example, the operation of the operation button 410 is promoted by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 to the light emitting state.

It should be noted that the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) does not go through the specific operation-related effect, except when the effect is progressed through the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c), etc.). The effect progress (for example, the effect progress from the effect state shown in FIG. 332 (a)) may be achieved. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than that.

Further, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 333 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the specific operation-related effect is performed. The rate at which the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than that when the effect (FIG. 333 (d)) in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity is performed without going through. Is desirable to be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest due to the effectary delay described later when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

In FIG. 333 (e), as a result of performing an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is being performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed. It depicts how the production is being performed during operation.

The operation effect shown in FIG. 333 (e) is the same as that shown in FIG. 331 (d). That is, in the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 executes a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”). It has become. At this time, even though the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is placed in the first position and the second position according to the production reception. The same applies to the fact that control for reciprocating operation with the position (control for setting the operating state) can be executed. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "chance !!" which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and "super heat !!" which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of production modes such as, and displaying one of these production modes according to the reception of the production, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided with an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes appears according to the effect reception. Then, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Then, after such an operation-time effect (FIG. 333 (e)) is performed, a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 333 (f). However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword ornament 5001 is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, the reach effect is started when a predetermined time elapses after the operation effect is executed. Control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-operated state (sword delivery state)) at a stage earlier than that. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword decoration body 5001, at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating operation or maintenance in the sword-drawn state) for the period of. Further, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 334 (g), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is in the display area. A production that depicts the remaining state is being performed (second production result). When the content of the effect is advanced, the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the period for accepting the effect for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c)) is executed, which suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 334 (g)). Is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be received for the production (the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs). ..

At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display (character display such as "sword pull out" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is possible to receive the effect (during the effect reception period on the sword decoration body 5001) among the plurality of operation means. In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit having the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 (the sword decoration body 5001 itself may be made to emit light) is set to the light emitting state. By doing so, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is encouraged.

It should be noted that the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) does not go through the specific operation-related effect, except when the effect is progressed through the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c), etc.). The effect progress (for example, the effect progress from the effect state shown in FIG. 332 (a)) may be achieved. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than that. Furthermore, when the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) is performed after the specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than in the case, and the expectation for granting benefits is lower than when the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is performed after a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

In FIG. 334 (h), as a result of performing an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operating means while the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g) is being performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed in response to the operation. It depicts how the production is being performed during the operation.

The operation-time effect shown in FIG. 334 (h) is basically the same as the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), and the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and the effect display device. At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. Here, a production mode such as "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high degree of expectation, is displayed according to the production reception, but it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. "Chance !!" may be displayed. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided with an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes appears according to the effect reception. By doing so, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

However, in the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 334 (h), the effect mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself is changed to one of the above-mentioned plurality of modes based on the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 ( (Change from stage 0 form shown in FIG. 311 to any of stage 1 form to stage 3 form), and depending on which of these modes appears, the degree of expectation for granting benefits such as big hits The height has come to be suggested.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 334 (i), even if the operation-time effect (FIG. 334 (h)) is completed and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driving position), The sword ornament 5001 is not returned to the sword-delivered state, but is maintained in the sword-drawn state. That is, in this production example, although the illustration is omitted, the sword decoration body 5001 is kept in the sword-drawn state, and then the sword decoration body 5001 is put into the sword delivery state (during the period when the reach production is performed, etc.). The operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and in that case, the operation time effect according to the operation to the sword delivery state can be further executed.

According to such a configuration, one operation means (sword ornament 5001) is given an operation opportunity in two stages, and the first stage operation (operation to the sword withdrawal state) and the second stage operation. Since the effect at the time of operation is performed according to each operation (operation to the sword delivery state), not only when the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is being operated, but also the first stage. It is expected that the game interest for the operation will be maintained favorably even during the non-operation period from the operation (operation to the sword withdrawal state) to the second stage operation (operation to the sword delivery state). Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (here, operations in opposite directions). Further, it is desirable that the operation-time effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation-time effect according to the second-stage operation are different from each other.

Further, when the operation-time effect (FIG. 334 (h)) corresponding to the first stage operation is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the sword-drawn state, and is not maintained in the sword-drawn state. In that case, it is desirable not to give the second stage operation opportunity. Whether to maintain the sword ornament 5001 at a position (sword withdrawal state) that allows the second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state) can be given in the operation time production according to the first stage operation. It may be executed as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not. That is, when the sword ornament 5001 is not maintained in the sword-drawn state and is returned to the sword-delivered state, it is practically impossible to give a second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state). It is clear that it will be. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

If the sword decoration body 5001 is not maintained in the sword-drawn state as a result of performing the operation-time effect (FIG. 334 (h)) according to the first-stage operation, when a predetermined time elapses (reach effect). The control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-driven state (sword delivery state)) before the start of the operation. However, in this case, the operating state (reciprocating) of the sword decorative body 5001 is at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the movement (or maintenance with the sword pulled out). Further, regarding the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than the specific decorative member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 335 (j), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the sword decorative image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 333 (d). Therefore, an effect is performed that depicts how the button image BTG is left in the display area. That is, in this production example (second production mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the production shown in FIG. 332 (c) is performed, the production shown in FIG. 333 (d) or the production shown in FIG. 334 (g) Either the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) or the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) appears. It is said that which effect content appears has been determined in advance in the effect pattern determination process according to the result of the jackpot determination.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), unlike the case of the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the effect performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b), (c)). (Here, the lightning bolt image IZ) is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning bolt image IZ may cause some change in the button image BTG.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), the instruction display (character display such as "press" or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation is not displayed, and also in that FIG. 333 (d). ) Is different from the case of the production shown in. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the button image BTG is left in the display area, but the production acceptance period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes recognizable that there is.

In FIG. 335 (k), as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j), the lightning bolt image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in the mist MY, and even the outline description thereof is lost. There is a production that will be broken.

That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), all the effect elements (button image BTG) suggesting that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted for the effect are removed. Therefore, although it is once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) that the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k) appears. As a result, it becomes possible to raise a suspicion as to whether or not the production reception period for the operation button 410 will actually occur.

Even in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the mode of the lightning bolt image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is definitively shown which of the plurality of operating means the production reception period will occur is reduced. It suggests that.

In FIG. 335 (i), as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the outer shape of the mist MY is closer to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). A production that depicts the appearance of the sword is being performed.

According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, it is suggested that the outer shape of the mist MY may cause an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410. You will be able to.

Further, also in the effect shown in FIG. 335 (i), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the aspect of the lightning bolt image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) as compared with FIG. 335 (k), and until it is definitively shown which of the plurality of operating means the effect reception period occurs. It suggests that the remaining time of is even less.

Then, in this production example (second production mode), when the production shown in FIG. 335 (i) is further advanced and the mist MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. 334 is displayed. The production shown in (g) is performed.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Even in the case of this (FIG. 333 (d), FIG. 335 (j)), there is a possibility that the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 will occur, so that the interest of the game should be maintained. Will be able to.

In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIGS. 333 (d), 335 (j)). By confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning bolt image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 332 (b) and (c)) is still continued, the effect on the sword ornament 5001 It is possible to grasp whether there is a possibility that a reception period will occur, and this will also make it possible to maintain the interest of the game.

In this production example (second production mode), the button image BTG is hidden by the haze MY when the production shown in FIG. 335 (j) appears (FIG. 335 (k)), and further. When the production is advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the production shown in FIG. 334 (g) is sure to occur. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600, but contrary to such display contents, the sword decoration It can also be said that the production suggests that the production reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY is not necessarily close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is prevented. ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 335 (j) and 335 (k) also hides which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

Further, even in the production situation shown in FIG. 334 (h) in the above production example (second production mode) after providing the operation button 410 as an operable operation means, FIG. 333 (e) Similar to the effect situation shown in the above, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed may be enabled. In such control, it is important to at least operate the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player, and at this time, the operating means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source.

[Third production mode]
336 to 339 are diagrams showing an effect example (third effect mode) that is basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but is different from the second effect mode. Is.

In FIG. 336 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 336 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 336 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 336 (b), in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. Suggests that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will soon be ready for production.

In particular, in this production example (third production mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated respectively. As a result, it is easy to make it possible for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 to be able to receive the effect soon after the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. It is made recognizable. Here, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are controlled to be operated from the initial position to the operation position, but compared to the case where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated to the operation positions when the operation opportunity is given. I try to operate each at a slow speed.

According to such a configuration, it is also an operation means in which time is still left before the production reception period occurs, or an operation means in which the production reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol change is completed. Regardless of this, each of these operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will operate. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time left before the production reception period occurs, or the situation where the production reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol change is completed, the game entertainment for those operations can be enjoyed. It becomes possible to maintain it favorably.

Then, in this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is generated by each operation (FIG. 336 (b)) by the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the effect display in the effect display device 1600. After the start, basically, the same production progress as the above-mentioned second production mode is performed.

For example, first, among the effects shown in FIG. 336 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. , The production content is as described with reference to FIG. 332 (b).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. It has become. The effect shown in FIG. 336 (c) suggests that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 can be accepted for the effect even by such a movable effect.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c), the operation buttons 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are located at positions different from the initial positions (positions when not driven) after the specific operation-related effects are started. In addition, it is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operating position when the operating opportunity is given.

That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is delayed as compared with the case where the operation-related effect is not performed and the operation opportunity is immediately given, but it is movable. When the operation means is adopted, even if such an operation-related effect is finally completed, it is necessary to operate the operation means on the side where the effect can be accepted to at least the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related production is further delayed by the time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such a delay may reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, in this production example (third production mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are placed at both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position during the period when the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is positioned in a different position (for example, an intermediate position) as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is completed and the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period has occurred is operated to the operation position in a shorter time, and the effect reception period does not occur. It becomes possible to operate the operating means on the other side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the extension of the operation-related production. In addition, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operating state at a position different from the operation position, so that the production reception period is in the operating state. It will be possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 336 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 has the button image BTG "movable operation button". Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to "410", the production content is as described with reference to FIG. 332 (c). However, in the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 332 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are placed at the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position, respectively. It is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from any of the above.

In the effect shown in FIGS. 336 (b) and 336 (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 show the mode when they are in the initial position (non-driven position). While the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in a simulated manner, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driven position). In this way, by intentionally making the modes of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 different from the modes of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, their matching will be achieved in the near future. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is changed, or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) occurs.

Further, when the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) is performed as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. Except that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 333 (d).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (d), the operation button 410 is in the operating position, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the (non-driving position) and the operating position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 is moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position at the time of non-driving) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Become so.

As the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), first of all, "a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a manner of moving to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed". After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (character display such as "press" or effect) that prompts the operation by generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 is performed. A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", whereas the operation button at the time of the display is displayed. 410 will be different from the "mode of moving to the operation position". In this way, by displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing the specific operation-related effect as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, the deviation of those modes will be filled soon. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e), the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 333 (e) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 337 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 333 (e), the operation button 410 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driving position). In addition, the sword ornament 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operating position.

After such an operation effect (FIG. 337 (f)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 337 (g). Is also as described with reference to FIG. 333 (f).

On the other hand, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is performed, the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is an operation of the sword decoration body 5001. Except that the instruction content regarding is "pushed in" and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", the production as explained with reference to FIG. 334 (g). It is the content.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in an operating state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in an operating state. That is, in this case, since the sword decoration body 5001 is moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Will be done.

As the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), "a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a mode of moving to the operation position)". First, after performing the display effect, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (characters such as "push"" that prompts the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. A display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decorative image SYG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", whereas the sword at the time of the display is displayed. The decorative image SYG is different from the "mode of moving to the operation position". In this way, by displaying the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of executing the specific operation-related effect as a mode different from the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, the deviation of those modes can be prevented. It will be possible to suggest in advance that it will soon be filled (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h), the effect shown in FIG. 338 (i) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 334 (h) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 338 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 334 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. The sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the operating position to the initial position (non-driving position).

After such an operation effect (FIG. 338 (i)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 338 (j). Is as described with reference to FIG. 333 (f).

On the other hand, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 336 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 has the button image BTG "at the operation position". Except that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 335 (j).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operating position. It is suggested that the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and the possibility that the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 still occurs is left even by setting such an operation state. You will be able to do it.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k), the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (k) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. Both are in a state of operating at different positions.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 335 (l) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 335 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. Both are in a state of operating at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the mist MY is closer to the sword decoration body 5001 when it is in the operating position than the sword decoration body 5001 when it is in the initial position.

When the effect shown in FIG. 339 (m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 338 (h) is sure to occur. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 339 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600, but contrary to such display contents, the sword decoration It can also be said that the production suggests that the production reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 339 (l) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY is not necessarily close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is prevented. ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 337 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 339 (k) and 339 (l) also hides which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

In this production example (third production mode), the driving source that applies the driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source that applies the driving force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different driving sources. It may be the same drive source.

In each of the above-mentioned effect modes and other examples thereof, when "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" appears as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, it is basic. Is given an operation opportunity only to the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the operation time effect on the button side is performed. Become. Further, when the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001" appears as a result of the production in which the specific operation-related effect is performed, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. Of the body 5001, the operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received, the operation time effect on the sword accessory side is performed. In this regard, in the effect at the time of operation on the button side, the effect at the time of success (operate the specific decorative member SDY) and the effect at the time of failure (do not operate the specific decorative member SDY) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot judgment. While it is supposed that either one will appear, even in the operation time production on the sword character side, success production (operate the specific decorative member SDY) and failure production based on the result of the production lottery according to the big hit judgment (The specific decorative member SDY is not operated), and the contents of their production are the same. Therefore, when an operation opportunity is given to an operation means on a side different from the side desired by the player among the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, in the operation-time effect on the button side and the operation-time effect on the sword accessory side, in addition to the effect on whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates, the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600 is the same as each other. It may be the content.

Further, in each of the effect examples described above with respect to the specific operation-related effect, it is decided to perform an effect as to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side according to the result is used. On the other hand, operation opportunities are given. However, there are cases where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the effect content that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means regardless of which effect result appears, such as pushing each other with each other. It may be.

For example, in any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword ornament 5001 in the sword-delivered state is brought into the sword-drawn state, or an operation in which the sword ornament 5001 in the sword-drawn state is brought into the sword-delivered state) with respect to one operating means It is possible to give an effect as to whether or not the operation opportunity is given by (operation), and the operation opportunity may be given to the operation means in a manner corresponding to the result. In this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in a state different from the sword-delivered state and the sword-drawn state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to operate the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state or the sword-drawn state when the effect result of making the sword is shown.

In addition, when the symbol variation in the pending state is digested, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the symbol variation is in the pending state (digested before this). It is also possible to perform the effect suggested from (within the execution period of the symbol change). According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is not given are provided. For both, it will be possible to sustain the game interest related to operation for a longer period of time. In addition, as such an effect, when the symbol variation in which the specific operation-related effect is performed is in the pending state (within the execution period of the symbol variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is used. It is desirable to operate each of the plurality of operating means provided.

In the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, as a specific operation-related effect, a plurality of images (button image BTG,) corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) are used. Although it was decided to display the sword decoration image SYG), these images do not necessarily have to be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, either the effect reception period for the operation button 410 or the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 may occur after that. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the production reception period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001, those operations are performed until the production reception period occurs. It will be possible to keep secret which of the means the production reception period will occur. Therefore, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and sword decoration. It is possible that none of the image SYGs appear and an effect image different from any of them appears as a specific operation-related effect.

However, even when the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed at the same time is adopted while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation-related effect is completed. Either BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operation means the production reception period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. By executing the specific image (for example, lightning bolt image IZ, etc.) as the effect content, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs for the specific operation-related effect. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive effect. For example, a specific operation-related effect may be executed as an effect of dropping a lightning bolt toward one of two rocks, and when a lightning bolt falls on one side of the rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock and the other side. By making the sword decorative image SYG appear from the rock when lightning strikes the rock on the side, it is possible to advance the production to the production shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 334 (g). .. Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping a lightning bolt toward one rock, and when the lightning bolt falls on the rock, either a button image BTG or a sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. Therefore, it is also possible to advance the production to the production shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 334 (g). In short, it is desirable to advance the production as the production content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the production result of the specific operation-related effect.

Further, in the second and third production modes described above, and in another example thereof, there are specific cases where the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and the production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of the operation-related effects (start of the effects) to the occurrence of those effect reception periods. Further, it is desirable to set so that the effect reception period occurs for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, a plurality of production modes are prepared as specific operation-related productions, and a production reception period during which a specific production (operation-time production) can be generated depends on which of these production modes the production is performed. The ratio set for the specific operating means among the plurality of operating means may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, the operation was not performed based on the operation with respect to the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect. When operating the operating means on the side (such as FIG. 333 (e)), control is performed to return the operating means on the non-operated side to the initial position after a lapse of a predetermined time based on the time when the operation was performed. It may be. However, it is not based on the time when the operation is performed, and depending on at which timing of the production reception period the operation is performed, from the operation of the operation means on the non-operated side to the end of the operation. It is desirable to make the time lengths different.

That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated and the remaining time of the effect reception period is short, the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has a conflict as to whether to operate the operation means on the side that was not shown in the specific operation-related effect. Therefore, depending on the timing of the operation during the production reception period (depending on the high possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that did not operate is operated and then the operation is terminated. Time length up to ("Even if the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect may have been executed." By making the length of time that appeals to the player different), it becomes possible to maintain the game interest appropriately.

Further, if none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect acceptance period ends. May be made to work.

Further, between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.), the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. A predetermined effect suggesting the ratio at which the effect image (sword decorative image SYG) is displayed may be performed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body (here, a specific movable body) that operates based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed. , The specific movable body can be operated more reliably based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed by operating the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY). Desirable to enable.

In addition, it corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the effect result between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.). An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period for a specific effect (an effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY). While the related effects are being performed, the effect reception period is intentionally generated only on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operation means. As a result, it becomes possible to create a special production mode as if the production result is shown and the production is completed even though the production is in the middle of a specific operation-related production, and the production is performed. It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment preference during the period. In addition, when an operation for one side of those operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is received while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a predetermined effect is performed based on the effect reception. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side with high expectation is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Here, as the specific operation means to which the operation opportunity is given during the execution of the specific operation-related effect, the degree of expectation is relatively high among the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game interest when the player understands that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related production. ..

Further, when the effect reception period is intentionally generated only for the operation button 410 of the operation means while the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects related to the plurality of operation means are being performed, the effect reception period is within the effect reception period. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, for example). Regardless of which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) appears as the effect result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to lose the effectability as the specific operation-related effect between the time when the specific operation-related effect is started and the time when the effect result is shown. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side with a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is granted more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side having the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production reception periods, normally, when an operation is performed by the player, the production is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the production reception period elapses. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation was performed before. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect at the time of operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. Then, when the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set, the effect acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even if there is, the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated is executed without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

However, even if it is set to the automatic button effect state described later, the effect acceptance period is only for the operation button 410 of those operation means while a specific operation-related effect is being performed. In the case of generating the above-mentioned special operation effect, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period (so that the automatic button function does not function). After that, even if an effect acceptance period for any of the above-mentioned plurality of operation means occurs as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect acceptance period. It is desirable that the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed (so that the automatic button function functions) without doing so. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function functions, and it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be expected to suppress the decrease in.

It should be noted that the setting change related to the on / off of the automatic button effect state can be changed not only during the period when the symbol change is not executed but also during the period when the symbol change is executed by operating the operation button 410, for example. It is desirable to be. For example, if the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is not generated when the automatic button effect state is off, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state, and the automatic button can be changed. When the effect state is on, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, the operation time effect corresponding to the operation is performed and the automatic button effect state is set. It is possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be a case where it is desired to generate an operation effect by an operation by the player while maintaining the on state of the automatic button effect state, for example, the automatic button effect state is turned on. During the effect reception period for the operation button 410 at the time, when the operation for the operation button 410 as well as the operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled and the operation is performed for the other operation means, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is maintained in the on state to cause a change in the effect being executed. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

The operation mode may be different depending on whether the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state or from the on state to the off state.

Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or a sword decoration body 5001 is imitated. It was decided to give an operation opportunity corresponding to the displayed sword decorative image SYG, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (first display mode and second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed, an operation opportunity (effect reception) is given to the operation button 410. The first display mode and the second display mode are provided as long as the period) is given and the operation opportunity (effect reception period) is given to the sword decoration body 5001 when the second display mode is displayed. Any display content may be adopted.

For example, in the above-mentioned second and third production modes, the production image CG (first) shown in FIG. 340 (a) is replaced with the production image shown in FIGS. 333 (d) and 337 (e). Display mode) is displayed, and the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b) is displayed instead of the effect image shown in FIGS. 334 (g) and 338 (h). May be good. According to such a configuration, while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the background image other than that (the part displayed before the specific operation-related effect is started). Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (almost the entire effect in the display area). Since it can be replaced), a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) in the display area shown in FIGS. 333 (d), 334 (g), 337 (e), and 338 (h). Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the granting of operation opportunities is performed using almost the entire display area (until other effect images such as the background part where the degree of expectation can be suggested are hidden). By doing so, it is expected that the game will be more enjoyable for operation.

In the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (a), the first display mode has a shield (button image BTG imitating the operation button 410) incorporating the operation button 410 in the design. The character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 340 (b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is possessed. The second character is displayed so as to implicitly suggest which operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) should be operated. As described above, it is not necessary to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as effect images imitating the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 itself. , It is desirable to display as an effect image incorporating at least a part of the shape and a part of the design of the operating means.

Further, regarding the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this way, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG It may also be performed with an effect suggesting a different degree of expectation depending on which of (second display modes) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. In addition, a plurality of production modes (different colors, etc.) are prepared as the production image CG (first display mode) and the production image TG (second display mode), and it depends on which of these production modes is displayed. It may suggest the degree of expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. It may be.

Further, regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (preferably, it is desirable that the effect situation has a relatively high degree of expectation). When the operation-related effect is displayed without being executed (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not a specific operation-related effect, is executed) (it is desirable that the effect is a relatively low expectation situation). It may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not the specific operation-related effect, is executed). If it is displayed, the production acceptance period is also applied to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG and another operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) not corresponding to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. In the production situation where the expectation is relatively high, it becomes possible to give a different kind of fun to the operation than when the button image BTG appears, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment. Another operating means may be a different operating means from the sword decoration body 5001.

In addition, when a button image BTG appears in a production situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation for another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period. When the effect is accepted, the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, "a specific operation-related effect is executed and relatively It is desirable to suggest that the production situation has a higher degree of expectation than when the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production situation with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Here, when the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period. When 410) is operated, the effect reception period for another operation means that is occurring at the same time is also terminated so that the special operation effect is not executed, and the operation for the operation means (operation button 410) is performed. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation is executed.

On the other hand, when a button image BTG appears in a production situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, what is the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period? When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means may be terminated so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the operation is performed. Even though an operating means other than the means is being operated, the operation-time effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operating means (operation button 410) are operated may be executed.

If a specific operation-related effect is executed while the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even if the effect reception period occurs for the operation means of, the same operation time effect as when the operation means is operated is executed within the effect reception period without operating the corresponding operation means. It is desirable to make it work (make the automatic button function work). However, when the button image BTG appears without executing the specific operation-related effect when the above-mentioned automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is used. Even when the effect reception period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means different from the operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is provided even if no operation is performed. It is desirable that only the same operation effect as when the operation is performed is executed, and the special operation effect that may appear only when another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG is executed is not executed.

However, during the effect reception period, another effect before the specific timing at which the operation-time effect (effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) appears by the above-mentioned automatic button function is different. When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed according to the effect reception, and a specific timing has arrived. However, it is desirable that the effect during operation (the effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) does not appear. In this case, the above-mentioned automatic button function does not substantially function during the effect reception period, but the automatic button effect state is continued in the on state even after the effect reception period ends. Is desirable.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and then each of the above-described effects (operation-time effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not the specific operation-related effect, is executed). When the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect). In addition to the operation means corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG (sword decoration body 5001), another operation means not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG (for example, the operation button 410) is also subjected to the effect reception period. It becomes.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and in another example thereof, as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" or When any of the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001" is displayed, and when the production is accepted by the operation means on the displayed side, it is relative. The first operation-time effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content suggesting that the expectation is relatively low. It is possible to make one of the second operation-time effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate). That is, in this case, when the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the degree of expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation-time effect, which is the effect content suggesting the above, will be executed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period generated after the specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is the button image BTG (first). The effect reception for the sword decoration body 5001 when the operation button 410 is executed based on the effect reception for the operation button 410 when the display mode) is displayed and when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when it was executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, there is a case where an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) on the side having a relatively low expectation is displayed as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect, the effect image (sword decoration) on the side with relatively high expectations as a result of the effect in which the specific operation-related effect is performed Compared with the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, there is no demerit in the effect result, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the timer effect described above (FIGS. 148 to 207), it is possible to set "granting an operation opportunity to the operating means" as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes targeted by the timer). be. That is, in the timer effect for which "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means" is the effect target, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means. This makes it possible to enjoy the production during operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the effect of the timer effect, when the operation for the operation means is performed, the effect result is advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery. Allow any of the unfavorable production results to appear. However, when the "operation opportunity for the operating means" is given as the effect target of the timer effect, the ratio of the effect result advantageous to the player is higher than that of the case where the effect target of the timer effect is not set. It is more desirable to be. The ratio may be 100%.

In this regard, when an effect pattern for executing a timer effect for the effect of "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001)" appears, the "operation opportunity for the operation means" that is the effect target appears. A specific operation-related effect using "grant" may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decorative image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect as to whether the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG appears is executed.

According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001). It will be possible to improve the game entertainment when it is played.

However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001) until just before that. However, there is a concern that it will not be possible to understand which production should be watched, distracted attention, and conversely reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. 341. , Until the count display of the specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the "specific operation-related effect" is set to the unexecuted state, and the count value is set. It is desirable to start the production of the "specific operation-related effect" after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0").

FIG. 341 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001). The following timer effect corresponds to the above-mentioned advance notice side timer effect, and is executed as a result of performing various processes according to the timer effect.

In FIG. 341 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

In FIG. 341 (b), the timer effect is started (here, the countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 341 (a). It shows the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 341 (b), the "specific operation-related effect" has not yet been executed, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is intended for. There is.

That is, in the timer effect related to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (1), while it remains unclear which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed. Here, the count "0") is reached so that it is displayed. Then, after "0 (predetermined value)" as the count value is displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 341 (d), the "specific operation-related effect" is started to be produced. At the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is hidden.

According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode). A specific operation-related effect as to which of and is displayed will be executed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), those effects are sometimes performed. Since it is possible to avoid overlapping in a series, it becomes possible to enjoy each different production.

However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0") when the specific operation-related effect is in the unexecuted state, the timer effect targets any effect. There is a concern that it will not be possible to recognize whether it was done as a game, and the interest in the game will decline. Therefore, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), between the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) and the time when a specific operation-related effect is started, An effect that suggests an effect type (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001) that the timer effect is intended for is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the effect display device 1600 first displays “sword”. This suggests that the timer production was intended to "provide an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by" sword ") to the sword decoration body 5001".

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 341 (d), the effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“sword delivery). In the production situation where the player recognizes that the operation opportunity is given by "", the production of "specific operation-related production" will be started, so that the game entertainment can be improved. become. When the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the count display (count "0") is displayed when the effect display device 1600 displays "sword". It may be displayed continuously.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the sword ornament 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, the count “0”). It is designed to perform reciprocating movements in the vertical direction), and this also means that "giving an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by" sword ") to the sword decoration 5001" is the target of the timer production. I try to suggest it.

It should be noted that the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is counted not only when the timer effect targets "giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001" but also when another effect is the production target. It may be performed when becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 does not function as an effect suggesting the effect type that the timer effect is intended for, but functions as an effect suggesting that the count display has become 0. It becomes. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0, before the production to be the production target is started, and the timer production is the production target. It is said that the effect that suggests the type of effect is being executed at the same time as or before the start of the effect that suggests the type of effect, and that the effect that suggests the type of effect that the timer effect is targeting is also being executed during the execution state. It can be said that it is important to be done.

FIG. 341 (d) shows an effect situation in which the “specific operation-related effect” is started.

In this effect situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type for which the timer effect is the effect target is hidden. In addition, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is also in a completed state. However, it is important to execute the effect suggesting the type of effect that the timer effect is intended for, and the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started. The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect of is started.

Then, after the "specific operation-related production" is started in this way, the production progresses in the order of FIGS. 341 (e) to 341 (h). ), FIGS. 334 (g) to (i), or FIGS. 336 (d) and 338 (h) to (j), which are substantially the same as those described above, and thus details are omitted.

As the timer effect performed in connection with the specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. 341 or the timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery. It may be made feasible. That is, in another timer effect, the point that a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 341, but the specific operation-related effect is produced. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, "0") according to the start timing (strictly, a little earlier than this), and the specific operation-related effect is to be continued even after the effect is started. It has become. In this case, regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the privilege is given (the privilege is given (the second display mode). Expectations for (big hit) are the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but when the effect situation in which the effect is developed at the same time appears, the specific operation-related effect is produced. Regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, their effect value is the same (the degree of expectation for the privilege grant (big hit) is the same. The same). That is, in this case, since the directing property of the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously produced, any of the effects is produced. It will be possible to avoid the situation where the person cannot understand whether to pay attention to the timer and is distracted. However, in order to improve the interest of the game, when a production pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect appear at the same time appears, a privilege is given as compared with the case where the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341 appears. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 341 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the effect display device 1600 first indicates the type of the effect target (in this case, the display suggests the type of the effect target. Although "sword delivery") is performed, such a display suggesting an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as the effect target as a timer effect. However, when a specific effect is targeted by the timer among a plurality of effects that can be targeted by the timer, the display suggesting which effect is the target of the timer effect may not be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and in another example thereof, the operation opportunity is given to any of the operation means prior to giving the operation opportunity to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether or not it would be granted. However, the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the production reception period). Does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 (prior to the production reception period). An effect pattern such as performing a second precursor effect may appear. When performing these precursory effects (first precursory effect, second precursory effect), the time required for the effect (precursor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the time required is set to be shorter. It is desirable to reduce the degree of expectation for granting benefits when a production appears in order to enhance the interest of the game when a specific operation-related production is performed.

Here, as the precursor effect, for example, before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) imitating the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears, for example, fog is generated. Display a specific image, such as expressing the state of being stuck. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position on the layer, behind the specific image) that is difficult to see due to overlapping with the specific image. After that, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (increasing the transmittance, reducing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.). It is possible to execute it as an effect to make it exposed to the public. An example of a specific depiction mode related to such a precursory effect will be described later.

At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, blue button image BTG, red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectations for granting benefits (big hit), As the precursory effect in which the button image BTG is gradually exposed progresses, it becomes possible to have an interest in which display mode the button image BTG appears.

It should be noted that the first precursor effect that appears when the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration body 5001 is not given an operation opportunity, and the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration is provided. The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. It is important that each of them is executed as a different production content. Further, it is desirable that not only the content of the effect but also the time required for the effect is different.

Such a precursory effect is the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" in the sense that "when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, the effect is performed as an effect related to the granting of the operation opportunity". It can be said that it is a higher-level concept that includes. Then, with respect to the precursory effect including the "specific operation-related effect", as described below with reference to FIG. 342, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and the precursory effect is performed in any of the effect modes. By suggesting how long the production reception period that occurs in response to the precursory effect is, depending on what was done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the precursory effect is performed. It is more desirable to plan.

FIG. 342 is a time chart for explaining an example of the effect contents for each type of the effect when a plurality of types (precursor effects A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the precursor effect.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (a) (precursor effect A), the precursor effect A is started when the first predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. This precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the precursor effect is executed. When A is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (a) (precursor effect A), when the precursor effect A is performed, the same time length is provided regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The production reception period (valid period) T1 that you have will occur.

In the production reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor effect A. ) Is displayed. Then, when the production reception is performed by the operation for the specific operation means within the production reception period (valid period) T1, the above-mentioned operation-time production (for example, FIGS. 331 (d), (f)) is performed based on the production reception. , FIG. 333 (e), FIG. 334 (h), FIG. 337 (f), FIG. 338 (i), and the like) are executed, and the process of ending the period T1 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (b) (precursor effect B1), when the first predetermined time elapses, not when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation, when the second predetermined time elapses. Precursor production B1 is being produced. This precursor effect B1 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) when an operation opportunity is given (specific operation). It is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to the means), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set. Is to occur.

In the production reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B1. Will be done. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation for a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation time effect different from the above-mentioned operation time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process of ending the period T2 at that time is performed.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor production B1 is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and 342 (b). (Validity period) It occurs as a period having a time length (here, a short time length) different from that of T1. This suggests how long the effect reception period generated in response to the precursor effect is, depending on which mode (precursor effect A, precursor effect B1) the precursor effect is performed. It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment taste when the precursory effect is performed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (c) (precursor effect B2), the precursor effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. Like the precursor effect B1, this precursor effect B2 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to the time when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). (Those that are not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the precursor effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a time length different from the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1 Production reception period) T3 is to be generated.

In addition, even in this effect reception period (valid period) T3, an instruction display (character display such as "press" and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation to the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2 are displayed. Display) is displayed. Further, when the production reception is performed by the operation for a specific operation means within the production reception period (valid period) T3, the operation time production different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the production reception. Is executed, and the process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the precursor production B2 is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and 342 (c). (Validity period) It is designed to occur as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even though the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low expectation for giving a privilege (big hit) is executed, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high expectation is executed. Since it is suggested that a long production reception period (valid period) T3 will occur, a production situation will be created as if a specific operation-related production was performed, and the precursor production B2 It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment taste when it is performed. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege differs between when the production reception period (valid period) T2 occurs and when the production reception period (valid period) T3 occurs.

It should be noted that the precursory effects B1 and B2 can be specified by making the same effect mode appear from the start of the effect until the timing in the middle of the effect, and making a different effect mode appear after the timing has passed. The operation means of the above may be provided with a color rendering property as to whether to generate the effect reception period (valid period) T2 or the effect reception period (valid period) T3. However, it is not always necessary to have such a directing property, and even when the precursory effects B1 and B2 are started to be produced, the effect is started when a different time elapses from the start of the symbol variation. Alternatively, the precursor effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths from each other.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (d) (precursor effect C), the precursor effect C is started when the third predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation. This precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the precursor effect is executed. When C is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 342 (d) (precursor effect C), when the precursor effect C is performed, the same time length is provided regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The production reception period (valid period) T4 that you have will occur.

Even in the production reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display (a character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor effect C. ) Is displayed. Then, when the production reception is performed by the operation for the specific operation means within the production reception period (valid period) T4, the above-mentioned operation-time production (for example, FIGS. 331 (d), (f)) is performed based on the production reception. , FIG. 333 (e), FIG. 334 (h), FIG. 337 (f), FIG. 338 (i), and the like) are executed, and the process of ending the period T4 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the precursor production C is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. 342 (a) and 342 (d). (Validity period) It is designed to occur as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than that of the precursor effect A, if the precursor effect is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect". Since it is suggested that the production reception period (valid period) T4 having the same time length as that of the precursor production A is generated, the game entertainment taste when the precursor production C is performed is preferably maintained. You will be able to.

In the production example shown in FIG. 342, the production reception period is associated with the types of precursor productions A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship with the length of the production reception period (valid period). The length of (validity period) is suggested. However, by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific production reception period (for example, production reception period T2, etc.) having a predetermined time length to be different for each type of precursory production, the production reception period (valid period) ) May be suggested.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and in another example thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is subjected to. When the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operating means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as the state of the specific operating means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 337 (e), the operation button 410 is in the operating position, but the button image BTG is also displayed in the operating position in accordance with this. In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operating position (sword withdrawal state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as the state in which it is operated in the operation position (sword withdrawal state). Has been done.

However, a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, button image BTG) that imitates the appearance. If this happens, the range of the production will be significantly narrowed when displaying the result of the production even though a specific operation-related production with a relatively high expectation is being performed, and the interest in the game will be reduced. I am concerned.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) is described below with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344. Regarding BTG), it is desirable not to necessarily express the state of the specific operating means at that time as it is, but to display it as a state different from the specific operating means at that time.

FIG. 343 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and an effect content when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed.

First, FIGS. 343 (a) to 343 (c) show the content of the effect when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, in the normal game state, the effect display device 1600 is performing the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination while the number of hold is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 343 (a), it corresponds only to the sword decoration 5001 side of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 instead of the "specific operation-related production". Assuming that the precursory effect is executed, it becomes recognizable that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity. In addition, in the precursor effect (the same applies to the precursor effect in other examples), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is to be given soon is made, an effect image imitating the operation means. Does not necessarily have to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity from the time when the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the production reception period is not yet displayed. Will be.

In the precursory effect shown in FIG. 343 (a), the sword decorative image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation and the sword decorative image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content as to which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this production situation, although it is recognizable that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity, the sword decoration image SYG, which has a low expectation as the sword decoration image SYG, or the sword decoration image SYG of the degree of expectation. Which of the high sword decorative images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

FIG. 343 (b) shows the final production result of the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura, and as a result, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a relatively highly expected production situation. It will be suggested that there will be a production reception period for. In the display shown in FIG. 343 (b), the final effect suggesting that the sword decorative image SYGb wearing a red aura does not change to another effect image (sword decorative image SYGa, etc.) is displayed. ..

FIG. 343 (c) shows an example of the effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“pushing in”) prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to operate. , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. In addition, when the production acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYGb also changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state accordingly. I try to change the state to the state. When the production reception is performed within the production reception period, the production at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the production reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword delivery state. Be maintained. In addition, a process is performed to end the production reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when a precursory effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is performed, when the effect acceptance period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, here). , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (sword removal state) as the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side at that time. Become so. In particular, during the production reception period related to this production example, the production image imitating the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) and the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001) Are all in a state of being stopped at a predetermined position.

On the other hand, FIGS. 343 (d) to 343 (g) show the contents of the effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal game state, the effect display device 1600 is performing the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination while the number of hold is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 343 (d), if the precursor production as the "specific operation-related production" is started, either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 It will be recognizable that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the crab.

FIG. 343 (e) shows a production situation in which the precursory production as a “specific operation-related production” has progressed and the production result has appeared. In this production situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in order to suggest that the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity as a production result of the "specific operation-related production". Has been done. In the display shown in FIG. 343 (e), a final effect suggesting that the sword decoration image SYG does not change to another effect image (button image BTG or the like) is displayed.

FIG. 343 (f) shows an example of the effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“pushing in”) prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to operate. , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Further, when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword removal state.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 343 (f) and 343 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword withdrawal state during the production reception period (sword decoration image SYG). The sword ornament 5001 is designed to slowly and continuously perform upward displacement until the end of the production reception period, and is in a different state from each other. I am trying to do it.

In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decoration body 5001, the production reception will be performed when the operation target accessory 141 is operated to the sword delivery state. Based on the reception, a predetermined operation effect is performed, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword delivery state. In addition, a process is performed to end the production reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception period occurs after a specific operation-related production, one side of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is used for the production. On the other hand, the other side does not work and can play the role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the examples of FIGS. 343 (f) and 343 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the production reception period, but the sword is not limited to this. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated to stop the sword decoration body 5001.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 343, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed during the effect reception period (FIG. 343 (c)) that occurs without going through a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stopped state, during the effect reception period (FIG. 343 (f)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is stopped. On the other side, this is continued as a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when the production reception period occurs after a specific operation-related production, the range of the production can be expanded, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU1511a, the operation is performed when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs after a specific operation-related effect. While the button 410 itself is stopped, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is set to be a dynamic state and the depiction is continued, a specific operation-related effect is obtained. It is expected that the width of the effect when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs will be greatly improved.

Either the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a precursor effect other than a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effectability as to which of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 appears, any one of them. When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode having a relatively high degree of expectation or a display mode having a relatively low degree of expectation. It will be possible to further provide the directing effect of. The method may be appropriately adopted in each of the above-mentioned production modes and other examples thereof, in addition to the production example of FIG. 343.

Then, in the case of giving such two effects to a specific operation-related effect, first, which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is produced as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. It is in a state where it appears or can be recognized, and it is unknown whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side has a high degree of expectation (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the outline is shown. Make the display state recognizable) appear as the production progresses. After that, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side appearing as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the white outline of the effect image imitating the operation means). It is desirable that the state is released so that the color can be confirmed) in sequence as the production progresses. Further, when the button image BTG is displayed through such an effect progress, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has a high degree of expectation under a predetermined condition (for example, an operating means). After making the imitated production image white out, etc.), the button image BTG is further hidden, and it is recognizable that the sword decoration image SYG appears as the production result of the specific operation-related production. To a state where it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decorative image SYG is highly expected (for example, the sword decorative image SYG is outlined so that only the outline can be recognized). It is also possible to generate an effect pattern that further advances the effect. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decorative image SYG that appears as a result of the production of a specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the white state of the sword decorative image SYG). To make it possible to check the color, etc.). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the high expectation side (for example, red), it is higher than the display mode on the low expectation side (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

FIGS. 344 (a) to 344 (e) are diagrams showing another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 343 (d) to (g) as an effect content when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 344 (a), the precursor effect as the "specific operation-related effect" is started, but the precursor effect has a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410. A second character holding a first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a sword imitating the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) It is depicted that they are facing each other, and it is suggested which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am trying to do it.

FIG. 344 (b) shows a production situation in which the production result of the precursory production as the “specific operation-related production” appears. In this production situation, the first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed and the second character (sword decoration) is not displayed in order to suggest that the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. The effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 344 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 340 (b) (the instruction display for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is hidden), and is specific. While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect part (confrontation between characters) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the start of the specific operation-related effect) are the relevant. It is suddenly replaced with an effect image (display image shown in FIG. 344 (b)) as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

FIGS. 344 (c) to 344 (e) show an example of the effect when the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs, and when the effect acceptance period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 344 (c). An instruction display (a character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the sword decoration body 5001 to operate.

Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 344 (c), the sword decoration body 5001 starts the operation from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state when the production reception period occurs. As shown in FIG. 344 (d), the sword ornament 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword-delivered state to the sword-drawn state only after a relatively short time has passed since the production reception period started. It is designed to do. After that, as shown in FIG. 344 (e), unless there is an operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in a sword-drawn state at least until the end of the production reception period, and the player (Operation from the sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state) will be waited for.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 344 (c) to 344 (e), the movement (swing in the rotation direction) is completely different from the movement (movement in the linear direction) of the sword decoration body 5001. In the lowering motion), the second character is depicted as swinging down the sword decoration image SYG, and even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-drawn state, the sword decoration image SYG continues. It is designed to operate. The sword decoration image SYG related to this production example loops a series of displays from the start (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. 344 (e)) of the swing-down operation within the production reception period. It is designed to be repeated by processing.

However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by the loop processing, and the display change progresses by the amount according to the passage of time. Further, the sword ornament 5001 is also brought into the sword-pulled state while a series of displays from the start (FIG. 344 (c)) to the end (FIG. 344 (e)) of the swing-down operation are performed. However, even if the loop processing is performed, it will be maintained in the sword-drawn state without being affected by it. It should be noted that when the operation target accessory 141 is operated to the sword-delivered state within the production reception period, the production reception is performed, and the predetermined operation production is performed based on the production reception, and the above-mentioned The loop processing is completed, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword delivery state. In addition, a process is performed to end the production reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG operate within the effect reception period. The movement modes (movements that play a role in accurately transmitting the current situation (movements until moving to the operation position), loop movements used for the production) are different from each other, and the movements of the sword decoration body 5001 are completed. Even after that, the sword decoration image SYG will continue its operation without ending. As a result, when the effect reception period (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) that occurs after the specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is continued until after the effect reception period occurs ( It will be possible to expand the range of the production, such as making it feasible by continuing the background), and it will be possible to maintain the amusement interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 344, the effect content (display in which the characters face each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 344 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect is performed. The effect (FIGS. 344 (c) to (e)) is executed when the effect reception period occurs in a form that changes both the background image and the background image. In particular, during the production reception period related to this production example, the production image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) that imitate the operation means are specified differently from each other under the display of the dedicated background (full moon). Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image) and the image), it is possible to improve the effectability during the effect reception period. In this sense, even in the precursory production, it is possible to perform the production using at least one of the production image (sword decorative image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable to have a directing connection between them to further improve the directing effect. Further, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes having different expectations for granting benefits, and may be displayed by any of the display modes.

In addition, in the precursory production as a specific operation-related production or the production within the production reception period, a plurality of production modes are prepared as those productions, and the production reception is performed according to which of the production modes appears. It is also possible to suggest whether or not a mode with a high degree of expectation appears as an operation-time production when the production reception is performed during the period. The background image that appears when the precursory effect is performed may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 344, when a precursor production as a specific operation-related production is performed, the production reception is performed by changing both the production content and the background image appearing in the precursor production. It was decided to execute the production within the period, but when the above-mentioned precursor production that is not a specific operation-related production is being performed, both the production content and the background image that appeared in the precursor production are changed. It is also possible to execute the production when the production reception period occurs in.

In the production example shown in FIG. 344, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. The operation of the sword decoration body 5001 started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately communicating the current situation). The performed operation may be completed before the production reception period occurs), and then the stopped state may be maintained.

Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), the background image may be changed when the effect reception period occurs or the background image may be changed. It may be possible that the display to be displayed may not be performed. In this case, if the display for changing the background image is performed when the production reception period occurs, the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the production reception period occurs. It is desirable to.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes, and in another example thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the production reception is performed, it is decided to operate the specific decorative member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) as an operation operation based on the production reception. At this time, for example, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 331 (d), 333 (e), and 334 (h), the sword decoration body 5001 (or the operation button) is provided as a movable body on the door frame 3 side. By making 410) also operate, it is possible to improve the effectability of the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed. In this way, in order to improve the effectability of the operation-related effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is performed depends on the result of the effect. Then, the production situation at the time of success in which both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) are activated appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side is movable. While the effect situation at the time of failure in which both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, the operation-time effect (for example, a specific operation-related effect) performed without going through a specific operation-related effect. In the operation-time effect after the precursor effect, which is not an operation-related effect, either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side depends on the result of the effect. It is possible to show the production situation at the time of success when only operates, or to show the production situation at the time of failure when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate. desirable.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and the specific operation-related effect related to the other examples thereof, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, when the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than that. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 345 (a), the button is in a mode in which the princess character is added (specific effect mode). The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a production result of a specific operation-related effect. If the value is set to be high, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment taste when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Further, the mode in which the princess character is displayed (specific production mode) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 345 (b). In this case, when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the normal mode.

Further, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern (FIG.) in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed). 345 (a)) and the second effect pattern (FIG. 345 (b)) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect. )) And may be prepared respectively. In this case, the expectation for granting the privilege is set to be the same when the first effect pattern appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect and when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interest as to whether the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, as well as the button image BTG and the sword. Regardless of which of the decorative image SYG appears, it becomes possible to provide completely different fun such as whether or not a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in the case where such a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 345 (c), when the production result of the specific operation-related production (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared in the specific production mode. (For example, from the time when a specific operation-related effect is being produced), this may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decorative image SYG appears is in the stage of being performed, a specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed). The button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (same degree of expectation). That is, in this case, since the rendering property of the specific operation-related effect itself is lost, it is said that "a precursory effect by the princess character" even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be possible to provide a completely different color rendering index.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the sword portion (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 301, a second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and in another example thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration body 5001 provided as one operation unit? The above-mentioned specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect of the above. Both the sword part (handle part 5012, sword blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) are supported by one main body support part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 so as to be movable (operable). Even if one side of the sword part (handle part 5012, blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in the state of being operated (operated), the other side has a structure that can be operated (operated). It is formed.

However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears, and the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not possible. Since there is no change, there is a concern that there is a high possibility that an operation error will occur on the player side. In particular, regardless of whether the operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, an effect image (and its effect) that imitates the sword portion of the sword decoration body 5001. When the instruction display prompting the operation) is displayed, there is an increasing concern that an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side. Become. That is, in this case, as the remaining time of the production reception period is decreasing moment by moment, let the player first perform the operation for correcting the operation error, and then further perform the operation in the original correct mode. It is difficult to do so, and if the production reception period ends before the production reception is done even though a specific operation-related production with relatively high expectations has been performed. , There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

Further, in the sword decoration body 5001, there are modes such as "movement in the vertical direction" by the sword part and "movement in the lateral direction" by the sheath part, and a plurality of complicated operations not having such a reversal relationship. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the operation on the wrong side is performed when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the operation on the proper side, and the production reception period ends. Therefore, it can be said that the risk of losing operation opportunities is increased.

Therefore, when performing the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration body 5001 provided as one operation unit. , As will be described below with reference to FIGS. 346 and 347, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is desirable that the effect reception is properly performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed.

FIGS. 346 and 347 show an example of an effect when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure.

In FIG. 346 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 346 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 346 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346 (b), the first effect imitating the first operation mode in which the sword portion of the sword ornament 5001 is operated from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state. The image OX and the second effect image TX that imitates the second operation mode in which the sheath portion of the sword decoration 5001 is operated so as to move in the lateral direction are provided in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time to suggest that an operation opportunity by any of these operation modes will soon be available for production. In this respect, in the first production image OX, although the image portion imitating the sword part of the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed larger than the second production image TX, the first production image OX and the first production image OX In each of the second effect image TX, the sword portion is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

FIG. 346 (c) shows the development of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 346 (b), the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, and the second effect image OX corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX and the effect image TX are pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area. When the effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, the effect acceptance period for the first operation mode occurs, and the effect result in which the second effect image TX is left (second effect) When the result) appears, the effect acceptance period for the second operation mode is generated.

In the specific operation-related effect related to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 346 (c), when the first effect image OX is left in a predominant situation, a display such as "push" can be visually recognized. The display such as "slide" can be visually recognized when the second effect image TX is left in a predominant situation. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the situation of the production. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a concern that they may be mistakenly recognized as prompting an operation at the timing when the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

In FIG. 346 (d), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 346 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is in the display area. A production that depicts the state left in is being performed (first production result). When the content of this effect is developed, even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed, the effect at the time of a specific operation (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) does not occur, and the effect in the first operation mode is used. When the operation is performed, the effect reception is performed, and a specific operation-time effect (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 346 (d), the effect reception period related to the specific operation time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Therefore, in the production reception period, in addition to the first production image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting the operation (character display such as "push" and the remaining time of the production reception period are shown. Bar display) will be displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 operates from the sword-delivered state to the sword-drawn state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

In FIG. 347 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) by the second operation mode is not the first operation mode. It shows the production situation when it is performed by the player.

That is, in this effect example, even if the effect reception period related to the specific operation time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the first The operation detection of the operation mode 2 itself is enabled. Then, when the operation in the second operation mode is detected during the effect reception period, it is assumed that there is an operation error by the player, and the specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the first operation mode is received in the effect is specified. (Here, "it is fine as it is") is done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 347 (f), the content of such a specific notification changes with the passage of time so that the player can regain his / her calmness (here, “calmly push in”). It has become like. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it is possible to sequentially notify in short words, so that even if the player side is in a panic state, this is preferable. It will be expected to be suppressed. As a result, even if the sword decoration body 5001 in the state of the second operation mode is operated by the first operation mode as it is, the player side is informed that the effect is properly received. You will be able to recognize it.

In FIG. 347 (g), the operation on the proper side (first operation mode) is performed in the production status (effect reception period when the operation is erroneous) in FIGS. 347 (e) and 347 (f). As a result of this, it is a depiction of how the production reception is performed and the above-mentioned operation-time production corresponding to the operation is performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is separated from the sword decoration body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decoration body 5001 is in a non-operated state (normal state) from the state of the second operation mode. ) Will be returned.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs on the player side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if it is performed from the state (state of operation error), since the production reception is properly performed, the deterioration of the game interest when the operation error occurs can be suppressed.

In the above-mentioned production example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, it is decided to notify that the operation should be performed as it is without correcting the operation error, but the content (the operation is performed as it is without correcting the operation error). It is not always necessary to provide detailed notification for the purpose of (should). That is, as described above, since the player may be in a panic in a situation where an erroneous operation is performed, it may be counterproductive to notify the complicated contents. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in an appropriate manner is received, the notification is not displayed by a message but by an effect or sound only. It is desirable to make a simple notification such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that the operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed in which a specific notification is performed based on the operation and no effect is performed during the operation. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to fully expect that the operation is switched to the proper operation.

On the other hand, depending on the player (particularly, an elderly player, etc.), it is possible that a situation may occur in which the operation is mistakenly performed even before the production reception period occurs in the specific operation-related production. For example, when the operation instruction for the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not given, but the operation for the second operation portion (such as lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed, the first operation unit is performed. It is assumed that a situation may occur in which a production reception period related to a specific operation production is generated only for the operation unit (for example, the sword part) side of the above, and in this case as well, how the player operates it. There is a concern that it will not be recognized whether it is good or not.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect as to which of the first operation unit (sword part) and the second operation part (sheath part) is given the operation opportunity is performed, the first operation-related effect is performed. The second operation unit is in a situation where the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is not given to the operation unit side of the second operation unit (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 346 (b) and 346 (c)). Even when the operation for is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in an appropriate manner is received. The specific notification may be "a message display indicating that the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity is given soon should be operated while maintaining the operation state", or a message display may be used. Instead, it may be an effect or a simple notification such as a notification using only sound. In any case, by confirming a special situation such that a specific notification is performed based on the operation and no effect is performed at the time of operation even though the operation is performed, the operation is subsequently performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect that it will be a chance to go.

In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is being operated (for example, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to the left) while the operation is being performed on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion). , Even if the production reception period related to the production during a specific operation occurs only on the side of the sword part), the state in which the operation on the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) is being performed (sword decoration body). When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state in which the 5001 is moved to the left), the effect reception is performed and the above-mentioned operation effect according to the operation is performed. It becomes.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the same state, the production reception will be performed properly, so that the operation error occurs before the production reception period occurs. Even when the above occurs, the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed.

However, of the period during which a specific operation-related effect as to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is given an operation opportunity is performed, the effect result is shown and the effect acceptance period is shown. If the above-mentioned specific notification is performed in the period immediately before the occurrence of the above-mentioned, the information will be mixed with the content to be notified (instruction display, etc.) within the production reception period, which will further confuse the player. There is a concern that it will end up. Therefore, in the specific operation-related effect in which the effect result suggesting that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is finally displayed, in the period until the effect result is displayed. , The above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the above-mentioned specific notification is not executed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and after the first period and the second period are sequentially passed, the above-mentioned first period is performed. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operation unit of 1.

In the above-mentioned production example, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested when the specific notification is performed. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the production mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the above-mentioned plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 311). It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in the above to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form). In this regard, after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to one of the plurality of modes described above, and the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may let it. Alternatively, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed to any of the plurality of modes described above when the effect reception period occurs after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In this case, in the production display device 1600 during the production reception period, an instruction display (character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration body 5001 The sword decoration image SYG imitating the above is displayed, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration body 5001 at that time (stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 311). It will be.

However, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to add some fun to confirm the sword decoration image SYG. However, the performance is poor when it is in the production reception period. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a manner different from that of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure the performance during the production reception period.

At this time, it is necessary to make the aspect represented by the sword decorative image SYG have a higher degree of expectation than the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001, which makes the effectability during the effect reception period more effective. It is desirable to ensure that it is suitable. For example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form instead of the stage 1 form. To display. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher by confirming the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG. Therefore, the game entertainment during the production reception period will be preferably maintained.

In order to obtain such an effect, the number of production modes on the sword decoration image SYG side may be larger than the number of production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side may be one. Further, when a plurality of production modes are prepared as the sword decoration body 5001, the plurality of production modes do not necessarily have to change the form.

However, if the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 and the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG are simply different from each other in this way, some players may feel uncomfortable because they are falsely displayed. There is concern, which may reduce the interest in playing games. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decorative image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects prepared as the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form shown in FIG. 311). When the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, thereby displaying the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword. It is desirable to make the appearance of the decorative image SYG different from each other. Regarding the special aspect, the outer shape may be changed by further deforming and combining the sword decoration image SYG, or the sword decoration image 5001 may operate in a mode that does not appear in the sword decoration body 5001. It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

According to such a configuration, the structurally difficult staging expression of the sword decoration body 5001 is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, so that the concern that the sword decoration is falsely displayed is suppressed. In addition to being able to do this, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved by providing a directing effect beyond the player's imagination when looking at the structure of the sword decoration body 5001.

Even when the sword decorative image SYG is provided with a special aspect in this way, each aspect of the sword decorative image SYG prepared as an aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, FIG. 311 is shown). It is desirable to be able to perform the display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form). That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special mode. When the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to suggest that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the other mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Regarding the method for displaying the sword decorative image SYG in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, for another effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 312 to 319). It may be applied.

For example, assuming that the production situation shown in FIG. 315 (X1) is present, the next production progress destination is the production situation shown in FIG. 315 (X2) and the production situation shown in FIG. 348 (a). The production pattern will be prepared. Then, when the effect is developed into the effect pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 348 (a), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 315 (X1). A continuous image (an image with the samurai's eyes closed) indicating that no opportunity is given is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 that was in the second sword drawing state is in the sword delivery state while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Be returned.

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 348 (b)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous fluctuation number) of the sword ornament 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-continuous variation).

However, here, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the fourth pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). A sword image showing (special aspect) is displayed, but this special aspect can appear only in the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area, and the sword decoration Body 5001 itself is immutable. The special mode according to this production example is a mode in which the sheath portion is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 348 (c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to a special mode in the display area, the sword decoration body 5001 has a stage 3 form. It will change from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state while maintaining.

After that, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword extraction state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 which is a special mode is displayed. An image (bar display) showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!" (FIG. 348 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 348 (e), when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped according to the set effect pattern. Along with the expectation notification effect, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when the symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is subjected to the symbol variation. It is possible to execute the first precursor effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration body 5001. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. It makes it possible to execute the second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given. Further, when the design is changed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third precursor that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. The effect (specific operation-related effect) can be executed.

In this respect, these precursory effects are executed as different effect contents from each other, and as those effect contents, for example,
-A specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area where the effect image appears before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area.
-After that, an effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed at a position where it is difficult to see by the specific image.
-After that, it is common in that the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to non-display (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased, the area where the specific image is displayed is decreased, etc.). It may be made to change. For example, in the first precursor effect, a display effect by "cloud effect" is performed as a specific image (display effect that gradually makes it easier to see the effect image imitating the operation means), and in the second precursor effect, "flame" is performed as a specific image. Display effect by "effect" (display effect that makes it easier to see the effect image that imitates the operation means gradually, and in the third precursor effect, display effect by "water effect" as a specific image (effect image that imitates the operation means) By making the types of specific images different, such as by gradually making the display effect easier to see, it is possible to make those precursor effects different from each other. That is, in this case, the "cloud effect" is used. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, and the display effect by the "flame effect" is performed. At that time, it is recognizable that the second precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decoration body 5001, and when the display effect by the "water effect" is performed, the operation is performed. It becomes possible to recognize that the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect) as to which of the button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given the operation opportunity is performed.

Then, when the precursory effect (at least one of the first precursory effect, the second precursory effect, and the third precursory effect) is to be performed with such an effect content, an effect image that imitates the operation means by a specific image is used. It is desirable to generate the effect reception period for the operating means during the period when it is difficult to see. When such a configuration is applied to either the first precursor effect or the second precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operating means has a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) and a low expectation. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when it is uncertain which of the display mode (for example, blue) is displayed, the effect is produced during the effect reception period. You will be able to improve your sex. In addition, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), the conviction as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when the player cannot have the effect, the effectability during the effect reception period can be improved.

FIG. 349 is a diagram showing an effect example when the first precursor effect is performed with such an effect content, and FIG. 350 is an effect example when the first precursor effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart shown. Hereinafter, an example of the effect when the first precursor effect is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 349 and 350. However, this example of the effect is not the first precursor effect but the second precursor effect and the third. It can also be applied to precursory effects.

In FIG. 349 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 349 (b) shows an effect situation in which the first precursor effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 349 (a).

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 349 (b), the display effect by the "cloud effect" is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such a "cloud effect" gradually changes from the display area to non-display after the effect is started at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 350 (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased). Or, the area where a specific image is displayed is reduced, etc.).

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 350, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set at the timing t2 in which the display effect by the “cloud effect” is gradually changing to non-display. Along with the occurrence, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and an instruction display (bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 are displayed, respectively ( FIG. 349 (c).

In this effect example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, red) is displayed. , Blue), the ratio of the operation-time effect being performed in a manner with high expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), it is uncertain whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". However, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect during operation is executed in a form in which the effect content is switched from such a precursor effect, so that the button image BTG is the first display mode and the first display mode. It becomes possible to advance the production without being sure of which of the two display modes is displayed.

Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 349 (c), it is not possible to be sure whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. Despite this, the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 keeps changing the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined time elapses from the occurrence of the production situation shown in FIG. 349 (c) at the timing t3, the production reception period generated at the timing t2 is continued, and the “cloud effect” is obtained. Is completely hidden (Fig. 349 (d)). In such a situation, the operation button 410 can be operated while it is easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the operation-time effect is executed in such a way that the effect content is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 349 (d).

According to such a configuration, in the production reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period from the display of the button image BTG until the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t2 to t3). ), It becomes possible to provide the effectability by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to see.

In addition, in order to enhance the color rendering index during the production reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period during which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform an effect display that is not performed during the period of the above timings t2 to t3. In this production example, a message such as "press" is displayed during the period (timing t3 to t4) in which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden. For example, at timings t2 to t3. If the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period is dynamically displayed in the period from timing t3 to t4, the effectability in the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more preferably enhanced. Will be able to.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 349, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the production reception period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the "cloud effect" is performed, the effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to see first appears, and after a predetermined time from that situation, the effect situation is set to be difficult to see. Until then, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and an instruction display for prompting the operation for the operation button 410 appears.

At this time, when the button image BTG is in a production situation where it is difficult to see before the production reception period occurs, the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with higher expectation (third precursor). In the case of the production, the production pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, the more difficult it is to see the button image BTG, the more interesting it is to pay attention to the button image BTG. It becomes possible to maintain it favorably.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 349, the button image BTG is made difficult to see by the "cloud effect", but the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is affected by the "cloud effect". It was decided to display so that the visibility would be maintained without receiving it. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the change in the visibility of the button image BTG with peace of mind while grasping the remaining time of the production reception period.

However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 may be affected by the "cloud effect" so that it is difficult to see until the timing t3. That is, in this case, it is possible to give the player a conflict as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without being sure of the display mode while the remaining time of the production reception period cannot be grasped well. It will be possible to provide an unprecedented novel color rendering.

In addition, when such a directing property is applied to any of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operation means is clear after the precursor effect is started. Even if the length of time until the specific image is made visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clear after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the time until the specific image becomes visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) at the same time. Further, when such an effect is applied to any of the precursor effects of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect, the effect imitating the operation means after the precursor effect is started. Regarding the length of time until the image is clearly visible (time until the specific image is hidden), prepare multiple of these so that multiple effects with different expectations are given. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set it to the time.

Further, as a method of making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, the effect image imitating the operation means is made to appear in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to see due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself that imitates the operation means, and then relative. It may be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operating means appears in a display mode that is relatively difficult to see may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, the appearance itself in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a precursor effect, or while another display is performed as a precursor effect, an effect image imitating an operation means is made to appear in a display mode that is relatively difficult to see. May be good.

Further, when a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination is executed, the specific operation-related effect described with reference to FIGS. 330 to 350 will be described in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later. ) May occur only when it occurs. That is, at the time when a specific operation-related effect is started, it is kept secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and as a result of the progress of the effect, a plurality of operation means are available. Since the production reception period corresponding to only one of the operating means will occur, if there is a delay in deciding which of the plurality of operating means should be operated, it is better than being operated by the player. It is possible that the production reception period will end after all the remaining time has been exhausted. In this regard, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is generated, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed. During the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as a result of the production of a specific operation-related effect, the player operates the operation means on the side to be operated and the automatic effect function. Since the production is accepted by any of the above and the post-operation production is always executed, it is possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when a specific operation-related production is performed.

[Automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) is controlled to this automatic button effect state. When the effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more accurately, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, the effect reception period is within the effect reception period. Even if the operation by the player is not received for the production, the process (automatic production function) that causes the same change as when the operation by the player is received for the production can be executed within the production reception period. There is. According to such an automatic button effect state, even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, the effect after the operation is generated when the operation is performed, so that the deterioration of the game interest due to forgetting to operate is suppressed. You will be able to. As for the automatic effect function, when the operation is performed, the same effect reception as when the operation actually occurs may be generated, so that the processing according to the effect reception may be performed, or the effect reception may be generated. The same processing as when there is a production reception may be performed without letting it.

In the embodiment relating to the "automatic effect function" described below, the above-mentioned operation-related techniques, effects, settings, and the like may be appropriately combined or replaced.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operating means a plurality of times during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. The setting to the production state can be made. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The "Various settings" screen is selected so that the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) for the operation button 410. When the "setting of automatic button effect state" displayed in is selected, the setting to the automatic button effect state is made. It should be noted that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or the operation for the operation button 410 and the operation for a different operation means may be operated a plurality of times.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by operating it once. By simplifying such an operation, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state. It is possible to set the automatic button effect state while keeping an eye on the progress of the effect while the pattern is changing. However, some players want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the validity period has occurred, and from such a person, the operation button 410 is used. If the automatic button effect state is set just by operating it, the game interest may be reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state for the operation button 410 is set for a predetermined time ( Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode maintained for 2 seconds (so-called "long press mode"). As a result, even if the operation button 410 is actively operated regardless of whether or not the valid period has occurred during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state, the automatic button effect state is entered. It becomes possible to make it difficult for it to be set incorrectly. It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is not set even if the operation is performed in the long press mode when at least the effect reception period occurs during the period in which the symbol change is in the execution state. ..

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even as a method of canceling the setting when the automatic button effect state is set, a demo screen in which the symbol change is not executed is displayed. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

That is, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol change has not been executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, it is displayed in the menu screen by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The "Various settings" screen is selected so that the "Various settings" screen is displayed, and the "Various settings" screen is displayed by the third operation (or an operation means different from the operation button 410) for the operation button 410. When "Release of automatic button effect state" displayed in is selected, the setting of automatic button effect state is canceled.

On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation button 410 only once. It is possible to cancel the setting of the automatic button effect state while keeping an eye on the progress of the effect while the pattern is changing. However, unlike the case of setting the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is positioned in the operation state even if the operation state for the operation button 410 is not maintained for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long-pressed). The automatic button effect state is canceled only when it is detected (just operated in a single operation mode). That is, it can be said that the fact that some operation is performed on the operation button 410 means that the desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410 appears. Therefore, when the operation is performed, the automatic button effect is produced. By canceling the setting of the state and returning to the normal production state at an early stage, it is expected that the game entertainment interest will be maintained favorably.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is configured to include a plurality of operation means including the operation button 410. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the jackpot determination when it is in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. Production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operating means (for example, sword decoration body 5001 or the like) (more accurately, a predetermined production pattern in which the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 or the like is set) Is generated, and even if the operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration body 5001) is not received during the production reception period, the operation by the player (operation on the sword decoration body 5001) is performed during the production reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic production function) that causes the same change as when the production is received. According to such a configuration, is there a period during which the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be received, or another operation means (for example, for example). , When the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350)) regarding whether or not the operation for the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect occurs, the effect result. Regardless of which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted for production, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate it, so that such a specific operation-related production can be enjoyed with peace of mind. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-When the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target among the plurality of operation means occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). , When the operation for the first operating means is not performed within the first side effect reception period, it is possible to execute an automatic process that causes the same change for the effect as when the operation for the first operating means is performed. Yes (first automatic production means),
-When controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the second side effect reception period in which the second operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) is set as the operation target among the plurality of operation means is set. When it occurs, when the operation for the second operation means is not performed within the second side effect reception period, an automatic process for causing the same change as when the operation for the second operation means is performed is executed. It is possible (second automatic production means)
Regardless of whether the first-side production reception period or the second-side production reception period occurs, when the same specific time elapses after the period occurs, the first (1) Automatic processing by the automatic effect means or automatic processing by the second automatic effect means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first side effect reception period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target and the second operation means are the operation targets. Regardless of which of the second-side production reception period set as is occurring within the execution period of the symbol change, the automatic production function can function when the same specific time elapses from the occurrence of those periods. Therefore, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

However, when the first-side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as the operation target occurs, when a specific time elapses after the first-side effect reception period occurs. The automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed and when a time different from the specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs. As in some cases, the production progress within the symbol variation may be performed. According to such a configuration, it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic production means would be executed when a specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs, but the timing is different from this. Since the production is accepted and the production is automatically generated after the operation, it can function as a surprise production.

It should be noted that when the control is performed in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operation means within the symbol variation period as compared with the case where the control is not performed in the specific effect state (auto button effect state). The ratio of the production reception period to be performed may be increased. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period increases, so that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the production reception period also increases, but even if the operation is forgotten, the automatic production is performed. Since the post-operation effect is executed by the functioning of the function, the effect reception period can be generated more frequently while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the frequent occurrence of forgetting to operate. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable that the rate of occurrence of both the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means is high. However, it is more desirable that the degree of increase in the occurrence rate differs between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-If the production reception conditions are met within the production reception period, the post-operation production can be executed (post-operation production execution means).
-It is possible to execute the process of establishing the production reception condition based on the operation performed by the player within the production reception period (player operation reception means).
-When the operation by the player is not performed within the production reception period, it is possible to execute the process of satisfying the production reception condition without receiving the operation by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception means). )
However, regarding the specific timing within the production reception period, it is set so that it will not arrive until at least half of the time set as the production reception period has elapsed from the start of the production reception period. I'm supposed to do it. As a result, a sufficient margin for the player to operate by himself / herself will be given before the automatic production function functions, and there will be an option to generate the production reception by the operation by the player. , It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment hobby.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs. When the production progress within the symbol variation is performed so that the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means may be executed when a time different from the above "specific time" or the above "specific time" is used. Any of the "time different from" will be set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side production reception period.

Here, if the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol change when the automatic button effect state is controlled, and the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period, the effect is received. , The process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

Similarly, during the execution period of the symbol variation when controlled to the automatic button effect state, an effect reception period for an operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) different from the operation button 410 occurs, and the effect reception Even if the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the period, the process of generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception and the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state are to be executed respectively. Is desirable. Also in this case, regarding the "post-operation production according to the production reception", the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button production state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed within the production reception period. The operation on the body 5001 is executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect executed when the effect is received.

That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (specific effect). The desire to end the condition) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which the player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation to end a specific production state and the operation to allow the operation reception to be performed, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the interest in games may decline. In this regard, in the above configuration, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button is given an operation opportunity within the effect reception period. A process for terminating an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and a process that can cause a change in the effect by performing an operation on the 410 or the sword ornament 5001 only once (only by operating in a single operation mode). (Processing to execute the effect after operation) is performed respectively, so the desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and advance the effect depending on the player's own operation is accepted. Even if it occurs within the period, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the production state.

However, regarding the setting change related to the automatic button effect state (change of setting to automatic button effect state or cancellation of setting of automatic button effect state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (state in which the symbol change is not executed). , The setting can be changed without requiring an operation on the sword decoration body 5001. That is, the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity less frequently than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the operation opportunity is given by that amount, a big hit is expected than the operation button 410. The degree is increased. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not allowed only for the purpose of changing the setting related to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and thereby the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to increase the premium feeling at the time and maintain the game entertainment. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the operating means (operation buttons) other than the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operating means. By operating 410 or another operating means) a plurality of times, it is possible to set or cancel the setting to the automatic button effect state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol change when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the sword decoration body 5001 does not need to be operated to enter the automatic button effect state. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long press mode", it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. The operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not allowed for the purpose of.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting related to the automatic button effect state can be changed by the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is the pattern when the automatic button effect state is controlled. Only when the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs during the execution period of the variation, the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the production reception period, and the post-operation production corresponding to the production is received. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button effect state by operating the sword decoration body 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Will be.

In addition, as a plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the automatic button effect state is set, "automatic operation for generating an operation effect even if the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) is not operated within the effect reception period" In addition to the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) that can be the target of the "effect function", the special operation means that is not the target of the "automatic effect function that generates an operation effect even if it is not operated during the effect reception period". May further be included. That is, in this case, when the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs when the symbol variation is in the execution state, and the operation for the special operation means is received within the effect reception period, the effect is received. The post-operation production according to the production reception suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. However, even if the automatic button effect is controlled, if the operation for the special operation means is not received within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the above effect is accepted will appear. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is received does not appear, but if the effect is different from the effect when the effect is received, it may appear.

Further, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the mode of long press), the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. Not only when, but also the effect reception period for the operation means other than the operation button 410 (the effect reception period where the expectation is suggested when the sword decoration 5001 is operated, and the expectation is suggested when the special operation means is operated. It is desirable that this is not allowed even if there is a production reception period, etc.). That is, when the operation button 410 is within the effect reception period for an operation means different from that of the operation button 410, the automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operation in a long-pressed manner). In the middle of the production reception period, the "automatic production function that generates the production during operation without operating during the production reception period" is enabled to operate the original production reception (operation means different from the operation button 410). The production reception when the operation button is performed) may occur without any operation, and for a player who is not familiar with such an automatic button production state, is there a production reception period for the operation button 410, or the operation button 410? This is because it may be confusing whether the production reception period for the operation means different from the above has occurred, and there is a concern that this may reduce the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the precursor effect can be executed prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period, but it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A precursor effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the production reception period when it is not performed, and a precursor effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the production reception period when controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). It may be possible to execute it as a display mode different from the above. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize in advance whether or not the automatic production function can function within the specific production reception period, and the production can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment displays a specific image suggesting the remaining time (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) during the effect reception period. However, when the production reception period occurs, the specific image is specified so as to go to the specific area where the specific image is displayed at least until the specific image (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which a lightning bolt falls toward a specific area) may be displayed (precursor effect) outside the area. That is, in this case, when the production reception period occurs, by confirming the movement of the production image different from the specific image, the "specific image suggesting the remaining time" in the hidden state is watched to the place where it will appear in the future. Since it becomes possible to prompt the player, it becomes possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation by the player is not in time and the specific production reception period ends. Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the automatic effect function, so that it is expected that the game enjoyment is appropriately maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation by the player. Based on the progress of the game or the effect, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state, or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled. As an example in which the state can be set or canceled according to the progress of the game or the effect, for example, "While it is controlled to the normal game state, it is controlled as an automatic button effect state, but it is a big hit game state. And the control mode such as "The automatic button effect state is canceled when the state shifts to the high probability time saving state" and "The automatic button effect state is generated within the execution period of the symbol change, and the symbol change in the execution state ends. A control mode such as "generate an effect pattern that cancels the setting when a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence" or "generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which a plurality of symbol fluctuations are executed". It is possible to adopt a control mode such as, etc. Further, the pachinko machine 1 may be constantly controlled to the automatic button effect state, and in this case, the automatic button effect state is not canceled.

Further, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions may be a predetermined timing when the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted or after that, or the remaining time of the production reception period is left. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted, or when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a predetermined timing after that, the post-operation production is performed as if the production reception was performed after the production reception period was completed. It will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at an intermediate timing (specific timing) in which the remaining time of the production reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic production function functions as in the case of actual operation. At that point (specific timing), the effect reception period ends and the effect is executed after the operation.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the post-operation effect will occur even if the operation is not performed while the automatic button effect state is controlled, until the effect reception period ends (effect reception). It is important to make the above-mentioned automatic effect function function at a specific timing within the period) to start the post-operation effect corresponding to the function. That is, in this case, when the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function even though the specific timing within the production reception period has arrived, the post-operation effect is generated by the player himself / herself operating after the specific timing has arrived. It is also possible to make it feel uneasy when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state (for example, it is mistaken that it is controlled to the automatic button effect state even though it is not controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is recognized and you may not be able to check the post-operation effect "," The automatic effect function may not work due to some trouble, and you may not be able to check the post-operation effect ", etc.) You will be able to.

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in order, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-mentioned production examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. It may be used in an appropriate combination.

In explaining each of the following characteristic techniques, as a premise, in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is not normally controlled. When an effect reception period occurs, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot judgment) that can be executed only when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared. When a specific valid period related to this is generated while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific valid period. You may do it. According to such a configuration, the effectability when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is enhanced (improvement of the effectability by allowing the generation of a specific display effect). Of course, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) occurs, the automatic effect function may not work during another effect reception period set when a specific display effect is not performed. On the other hand, during a specific valid period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function functions so that you can enjoy the feeling of VIP by saving the trouble of operating it. Therefore, it is expected that the hobby of the game will be enhanced. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to prevent the automatic production function from functioning in all of the other production reception periods set when a specific display production is not performed, and the automatic production is performed in at least a part of the production reception period. If the function cannot be functioned, the above-mentioned effect and effect when a specific valid period occurs while a specific display effect is being performed (when an effect reception period in which the automatic effect function always functions occurs). It is possible to expect. Further, even when such a specific valid period occurs, if there is no operation by the player before the specific timing within the specific valid period arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the post-operation production according to this.

Further, as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, at least the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect are prepared.
-If the first specific valid period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-mentioned automatic effect occurs at the timing when the first predetermined time elapses after the first specific valid period occurs. While the function functions to end the first specific validity period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding to this,
-If a second specific valid period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time after the second specific valid period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing when the above-mentioned has elapsed, the second specific valid period is terminated, and the post-operation effect corresponding to this is generated.
-If a third specific valid period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific valid period is controlled even though it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the end of the operation, the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed may be performed when each process is in a specific effect state, such as preventing the appearance of the post-operation effect. According to such a configuration, even if the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first effect is from the time when the effect acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function may function when the predetermined time has elapsed, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function may not function until a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time has elapsed. Even if the production reception period ends, the above-mentioned automatic production function may not be able to function in the first place. Therefore, even if it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurred. For example, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function even though the first predetermined time has elapsed, the above-mentioned is described when the second predetermined time elapses. It becomes possible to advance the production with a sense of tension, such as whether the automatic production function of the above works or the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work in the first place. The first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period are all when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in the operating state (so-called). When a single operation is performed), the effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated.

The first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can be executed only when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled. There may be. In this way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed. If this is the case, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the gaming interest when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is provided. Does not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects generated when the effects are received in the first specific valid period, the second specific valid period, and the third specific valid period may have different production contents.

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function, at what timing within the effect reception period the automatic effect function functions (which is the effect reception period when the effect is received). The automatic production function worked for the bar display (display that changes the image (here, the area changes) with the passage of time) showing the remaining time of the production reception period so that it can be recognized (whether only the time was left). It is also possible to generate the post-operation effect in the state where this is displayed instead of being hidden at the time point. According to such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed when the automatic effect function is activated, the effect acceptance period is the first specific valid period ( A relatively early stage after the production reception period occurs, the period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time elapses) and the second specific valid period (relatively after the production reception period occurs). It becomes possible to recognize which of the later stage, the period during which the automatic effect function operates when the second predetermined time elapses).

In this sense, when the first specific valid period (the period during which the automatic production function functions when the first predetermined time elapses after the production reception period occurs) and the second specific valid period (the period when the automatic production function functions) occur. The jackpot expectation is different from when the second predetermined time elapses after the production reception period occurs (for example, the second specific validity period is more advantageous). It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, if the first specific display effect or the second specific display effect is executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. It functions so that the degree is different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function may be hidden. As in the case where is functioning, the "bar display" may not be hidden and the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the "bar display" is displayed. The post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is, for example, executed as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. May be good.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function, the player does not participate in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the operation target after the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated to generate a post-operation effect, first, an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation means to be operated within the effect reception period (for example, an operation to be operated). In addition to displaying an image display that imitates the means), even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the post-operation effect is generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed without being hidden. It is desirable to. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target. It suffices if it is possible to recognize which was the case even in the state where the effect is generated after the operation. On the other hand, if the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic operation may be hidden. As in the case where the effect function is functioning, the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden. Whenever the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned first specific valid period or when the automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned second specific effective period, It is also possible to generate the post-operation effect in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden.

At this time, if the post-operation effect is generated while the operation target suggestion image is displayed in any of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect are both generated. Will be able to be confirmed at the same time, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, the post-operation effect does not have to be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and is executed, for example, as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable decorative body. There may be.

Further, when an effect that generates an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is referred to as an "operation system effect", the operation system effect is related to this. It may be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, etc.) that does not have. However, in this case, when the "operation system effect" is executed but the "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to this" are not executed. It is desirable that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is higher than that in the case where the "specific effect" is performed in parallel. That is, when the "operation system production" and "another specific production unrelated to this" are in parallel, it is assumed that the production reception is not performed in the "operation system production" and the post-operation production is not executed. However, since "another specific effect that has nothing to do with this" is in the execution state, the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed, while the "operation system effect" is executed but "another effect that has nothing to do with this". When the "specific effect" is not executed, if the effect is not accepted in the "operation system effect" and the effect is not executed after the operation, no effect will be executed. Therefore, it is inevitable that the interest in games will decline. Therefore, when the "operation system effect" is executed but the "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to this" are not executed. By increasing the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning compared to the case where the "effect" is performed in parallel, it is possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment when the operation system effect occurs. become. The ratio may be 100%. By the way, the precursory production that is performed before the production reception period occurs, the production in which the operation means to be operated operates, etc. are executed as the "operation system production" or the related production. It can be said that it is a thing. Further, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably a precursor effect), it is suggested in advance that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning increases. You will be able to. In this case, it is desirable that the effect is executed as an effect that ends after the end of the effect reception period (preferably the post-operation effect). On the other hand, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is executed as an effect that occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably a precursor effect) and ends before the end of the effect reception period. It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether or not the above-mentioned automatic effect function is in a high rate of functioning, and it becomes possible to provide the effect in a tense atmosphere. In this regard, if the "other specific effect" is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably the precursor effect), the "other specific effect" is performed a plurality of times within one symbol variation. If it is performed, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function functioning when "another specific production" is executed is high. It will be possible to give a sense of tension as to whether the production reception period will occur.

In addition, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times in succession. Until the 1000th loss fluctuation) is reached, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) based on the result of the jackpot determination may occur with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the effect reception period occurs, the above-mentioned automatic effect function may or may not function when there is no operation by the player. On the other hand, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive loss variations are executed). Then, when the 1000th loss variation) is reached, in the symbol variation (effect pattern) that reaches the specific value, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated and the player operates within the production reception period. It is also possible to execute a process that always generates the same post-operation effect as at the time. According to such a configuration, when the number of continuous executions of the loss fluctuation reaches a specific value, "the player should be operated every time the production reception period occurs while the loss fluctuation is continuously executed. Even though I was urging them to do so, I couldn't get any results. ”As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functions the automatic production function. Since it is realized as a directing effect, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment taste. At this time, in the production reception period that occurs when the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th loss fluctuation), the loss fluctuations are sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, "operate") that is different from the display image (for example, "operate") that appeared during the production reception period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, loss fluctuation up to 999 times). It is desirable to make "If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf" etc.). In addition, even after the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has reached a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is consumed each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a big hit game state) is satisfied. In the (effect pattern), a special display image (for example, "for example," "is always generated during the production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf. "Etc.") will appear, and even if there is no operation by the player within the production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function will be activated and the production reception will be accepted. It is desirable to execute the process that always generates the effect after the operation.

In addition, when in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions is a specific value (for example, the loss variation is executed 999 times in succession. The number of remaining fluctuations until the 1000th loss fluctuation) may be displayed.

In addition, while the symbol is in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first operation is performed during the symbol change until the loss variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches the specific value. Both the effect reception period for the means and the effect reception period for the second operation means can occur, but in the symbol variation when the loss variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value. , Only one of the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side may advance the effect so that it cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is preferably suppressed that the production reception period occurs and the expectation is given to itself. You will be able to get it. However, this production example "has achieved some results even though it has urged the player to operate each time the production reception period occurs while the loss fluctuation is being executed continuously. There was no such thing. ”As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as a production that always functions the automatic production function, so it is transient. A production acceptance period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the degree of expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low so as not to have any more expectations, and the second operation means (for example, for example) It is desirable not to generate the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, the first effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It can occur both when it is not and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but it is the second operation means among the plurality of operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001). The second effect reception period, in which an operation opportunity is given to the object, cannot occur when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be made possible when it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effectability when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is reached. You will be able to maintain the color rendering index of.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination,
-Displays a copy image (operation target suggestion image that suggests the operation target to be operated) that imitates the operation means (model image display means),
-After the production reception period occurs, if an operation is performed by the player while the image is displayed, the post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means).
-After the production reception period occurs, if a specific timing arrives without the player performing the operation while the image is displayed, the post-operation production can be executed without receiving the operation by the player ( Automatic production reception means)
However, the image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which the post-operation effect is executed in the "player-friendly mode" when the effect is received is different. It is desirable to be able to do it. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized regardless of whether the post-operation effect is generated by the player operation receiving means or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic effect receiving means. It will be possible to generate an effect after the operation.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function, the player does not participate in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the operation target after the operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is to be activated to generate a post-operation effect, first, a copy image (an operation target suggestion image suggesting an operation target to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, and the operation target suggestion image is displayed. Even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is generated in the state where the copied image is displayed without being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color, transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation effect occurs, and the operation means that was the operation target. It suffices if it is possible to recognize which was the case even in the state where the effect is generated after the operation. On the other hand, if the post-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-mentioned automatic operation may be hidden. As in the case where the effect function is functioning, the post-operation effect may be generated in the state where the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden. The post-operation effect may be performed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area where the image is displayed, or a light emitting or movable decorative body by a lamp provided on the game board 5. It may be executed as an operation by.

At this time, if the image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes having different expectations, the expectation (image) suggested within the effect reception period even when the effect is generated after the operation. Display mode) can be confirmed.

The image that is continuously displayed in this way is hidden after the effect is generated after the operation. However, what is the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic production means is executed when a specific time elapses after the first side production reception period occurs, and the specific time after the first side production reception period occurs? The time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the image is hidden is also different from the case where the automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed when different times elapse. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when a specific time elapses or the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic process when a time different from the specific time elapses. Even if it does not exist, by checking the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the model image is hidden, it becomes possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred. ..

In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the specific time elapses, and when the post-operation effect is generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time elapses, the big hit is determined by the big hit judgment. The degree of expectation obtained may be different.

Further, when the effect reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. Any of the modes (for example, a low expectation display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation, a high expectation display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation) can appear, and a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) can appear. ) Appears, even if the operation is not performed within the production reception period, the production reception (automatic production function always functions) is performed and the post-operation production according to the production reception is executed, but the low expectation display is displayed. When an aspect (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when the operation is not performed within the effect reception period, the effect reception (automatic effect function functions) is performed and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. In some cases, the effect is not accepted (the automatic effect function is functioning) and the effect is not executed after the operation. That is, if a high-expected display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears and the operation is forgotten, it is inevitable that the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed, but the low expectation is low. When the display mode (for example, the blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that the game interest does not deteriorate so much even if the operation is forgotten, so that the highly expected display mode (for example, the red operation image) appears. Occasionally, if you forget to operate, the automatic production function must be activated within the production reception period to avoid the deterioration of the game entertainment due to forgetting to operate, but the low expectation display mode (for example, blue operation). If you forget to operate when the image) appears, make sure that the automatic production function does not function within the production reception period so that you can feel the tension in playing so that you do not forget to operate it. It will be expected to raise the player's participation consciousness. When not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears. It may not be possible to appear. Further, during the production reception period, any one of three or more display modes may appear.

Then, in each of the characteristic techniques described below, another example relating to these automatic button effect states may be appropriately applied and implemented.

[Suggestion of expectations by automatic production function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not perform the operation within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period), the said It is possible that a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed on the effect can be executed. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not received during the effect reception period, the same change as when the effect is received. It is possible to generate an effect pattern in which the process (automatic effect function) that causes the effect is not executed. At this time, in the automatic button effect state, when the operation by the player is not received within the effect reception period and the automatic effect function does not function, the symbol changes as compared with the case when the automatic effect function functions. In, it is possible to execute a process in which the effect within the symbol variation is advanced so that the degree of expectation (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears is low. At this time, the degree of expectation (ratio) at which the jackpot symbol appears may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation for the operation button 410 is intentionally not performed within the effect reception period. By confirming whether or not it functions, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that a directing demerit may occur, a novel directing property such as forcing the player to exercise a directing selection such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the directing reception period". It is expected that the game will be maintained favorably.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to receive an operation on the operation button 410 among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like). The above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 330 to 350)) regarding whether a period occurs or whether an operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect occurs. )) Is executable. In this respect, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period that occurs in response to such a specific operation-related effect, those effects are compared with the effect reception period that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to execute a process in which the effect is advanced within the symbol variation so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is increased when there is no operation (effect reception) within the reception period. At this time, the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions may be 100%.

According to such a configuration, the execution of a specific operation-related effect before the effect acceptance period occurs itself also functions as an effect suggesting that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a high rate. Since it becomes possible to do so, it becomes possible to more preferably improve the game entertainment when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

Further, as described above, in the specific operation-related effect, the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 more than when it is shown that the operation button 410 is given the operation opportunity as the effect result. When it is shown that it is given, it is set so that the expectation that the big hit symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state is higher. However, in the automatic button effect state, the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function to function when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period generated in response to a specific operation-related effect is set to the operation button 410. On the other hand, it is more desirable to set the ratio so that the ratio is the same when it is shown that the operation opportunity is given and when it is shown that the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001.

According to such a configuration, a production situation with a relatively low expectation (suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as a production result of a specific operation-related effect. However, since the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is not changed by this (the effect result of a specific operation-related effect), this is the expectation that the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of expectation level by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effect results can be performed in parallel to enhance the interest of the game.

Hereinafter, specific examples of the effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353.

FIG. 351 (a) shows that the number of holds is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production situation being performed. As shown in the figure, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state (here, "auto button"). "Setting") appears continuously.

FIG. 351 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 351 (a). As shown in the figure, during a specific effect reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, "press"). ”And a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

Here, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is used as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. In addition to producing the effect (such as), there are multiple modes with different expectations within the display area (for example, "chance!" With relatively low expectations, "super heat!" With relatively high expectations, etc.). Either will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period ends when the effect is received without exhausting the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the ratio is 60%. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%.

That is, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 351 (c), the operation for the operation button 410 is not received within the specific effect acceptance period. As a result, the post-operation effect that should have occurred as long as the effect reception is performed is not executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 351 (d), even though the operation button 410 was not operated within the specific effect reception period. , The post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation is performed within the specific production reception period and the production reception is performed will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs depending on the operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode of being displayed in the display area is the same as that of the case where the effect is generated after the operation due to the function of the automatic effect function. After that, as shown in FIG. 351 (e), the production progresses in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific effect reception period is generated as "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", or "the above-mentioned automatic effect function". It is decided (selected) based on the result of the jackpot judgment when executing the symbol change as to whether or not it is generated as the "non-functional production reception period", and as a result, 60% in the specific production reception period. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 40%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, "the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. "Period" or "Production reception period when the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work" will be generated, and when a big hit is lost as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to, and the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" or the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60% and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40% during a specific effect reception period.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific effect reception period is generated as the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions", "the above-mentioned Which of those periods should be generated so that the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when it is generated as the "effect reception period in which the automatic effect function does not work". Is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

According to such a configuration, the automatic production function functions when the production reception period occurs, in which it is determined that a highly expected mode (such as "super heat!") Appears as a post-operation production when the production is accepted. While the ratio of performing is relatively high, when the production reception period occurs, it is decided that a mode with low expectation (such as "chance!") Will appear as a post-operation production. The percentage of functions that work will be relatively low. Therefore, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, whether or not the automatic effect function functions when the operation for the operation button 410 is intentionally not performed within the effect reception period is determined. By confirming it, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the executing state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, "the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period, cannot be confirmed". While there is a risk that a directing demerit may occur, a novel directing property such as forcing the player to exercise a directing selection such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the directing reception period". It is expected that the game will be maintained favorably.

However, as shown in FIG. 351 (d), even if the automatic effect function functions when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect reception period, it is expected as a post-operation effect. Since low-level modes (such as "chance!") Can also appear, even if it is suggested that the automatic effect function has a relatively high degree of expectation, this The suggestion of continuous expectations (suggestion by the function of the automatic production function, suggestion by the mode of post-operation production) will realize the performance that will not let you down, and it will be possible to maintain the game entertainment hobby. You will be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 351 (c), even if the automatic production function does not function when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the production reception period, the production reception is performed. If this is done, there is a possibility that a highly expected aspect has appeared in the post-operation production that should have appeared, so it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably. However, when the effect situation shown in FIG. 351 (c) (the situation in which the automatic effect function does not function and the effect does not appear after the operation) appears, the effect situation (automatic effect function) shown in FIG. 351 (d) appears. Worked, but it is desirable that the expectation is lower than when the post-operation effect shows a mode with low expectations).

In FIGS. 352 and 353, when the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) occurs in the automatic button effect state, the effect suggests the degree of expectation by the automatic effect function. A concrete example is shown.

FIG. 352 (a) shows that the number of holds is 3 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production situation being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the figure, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state (here, the display indicates that the automatic button effect state is controlled). , "Auto button is being set") appears continuously.

FIG. 352 (b) shows an effect situation in which the specific operation-related effect illustrated in FIGS. 332 to 335 is started while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 352 (a) is being executed. .. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 332 to 335, there are cases where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and cases where an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. A common display effect is performed in the above, and while the common display effect is being performed, it is kept secret whether the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is given an operation opportunity. .. However, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of a specific operation-related effect, a production situation indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a first effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation. As a result of the second effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, an effect state indicating that the sword decoration body 5001 should be operated appears, so that the operation button 410 with a relatively low degree of expectation and the relatively high degree of expectation appear. It will be shown which of the high sword ornaments 5001 is given the operation opportunity.

FIG. 352 (c) shows that the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low expectation as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 352 (b). The effect status indicating that the effect has been received for the operation button 410 has appeared. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, "press" etc.) is displayed. Character display and bar display showing the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410.

Here, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c), the specific decorative member SDY (such as a bamboo blind) is used as the post-operation effect according to the effect reception. One of a plurality of modes (for example, "chance!" With relatively low expectation, "super heat!" With relatively high expectation, etc.) with different expectations in the display area while operating the effect. It will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period ends when the effect is received without exhausting the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned ratio is 20%. The automatic effect function of is not functioning, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning at a rate of 80%.

That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is enabled, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect acceptance period. There is a possibility that the operation cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect reception period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 352 (c)), the effect occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)), the effect within the symbol variation is increased so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning when there is no operation (effect reception) within the effect reception period is increased. Makes it possible to carry out the processing that progresses. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing anxiety such as "the proper operation cannot be performed within the production reception period and the production corresponding to the operation may not appear". It becomes possible to provide anxiety about which of the bodies 5001 is activated through the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect. In order to obtain such an effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic effect function has functioned.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period controlled to the automatic button effect state, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until the end, as shown in the figure, the display indicating that the production status is such that the ratio of the automatic production function functioning is high (here, "auto button high accuracy") continues. It has come to appear as a target.

If the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, it is assumed that the operation for the operation button 410 is not received within the effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 352 (d). As long as the effect reception is performed, the post-operation effect that should have occurred is not executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function. In this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if not.

Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 352 (e), the effect is produced even though the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period. The post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed within the reception period and the production reception was performed will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs depending on the operation within a specific effect reception period. In both cases, the mode of being displayed in the display area is the same as that of the case where the effect is generated after the operation due to the function of the automatic effect function. After that, as shown in FIG. 352 (f), the production is advanced in such a way that a reach state is formed after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

On the other hand, FIG. 353 (g) shows a state in which the sword decoration body 5001 should be operated as a second effect result having a relatively high expectation as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 352 (b). It shows that the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 has occurred due to the appearance of the production status indicating that there is. In this production situation, as shown in the figure, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, "" A character display such as "Pay the sword" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the operating state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410 and shifts the sword decoration body 5001 from the operating state to the original position. Will be allowed to operate.

Here, assuming that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c). The same post-operation effect as when it was done will be executed. However, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (g), the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c). Among multiple modes with different expectations (for example, "chance!" With relatively low expectations, "super heat!" With relatively high expectations, etc.), the mode with high expectations is The rate of appearance in the display area is high. This ratio may be 100%. In addition, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received within the production reception period, the automatic button production state is canceled and the normal production state is returned, and the remaining time is exhausted during the specific production reception period. The point that the production is terminated when there is no production reception is the same as in the case of the production reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period in the production situation shown in FIG. 353 (g) (the production reception does not occur). In the case), although the production situation has a higher degree of expectation than when the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c) occurs, the production reception occurs in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c). As in the case of not doing so, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation (FIG. 352). Even if (see (c)) appears, the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning is not changed by this (the effect result of the specific operation-related effect). It will be possible to suitably maintain the expectation that the function will function. In this way, two different productions that are not affected by each other's production results (specific operation-related production, suggestion of expectation level by the automatic production function) are paralleled, and a disadvantageous production result appears in one side of the production. It will be possible to suppress the decline in the interest in playing games. However, in this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 352 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. In this case, in the production situation shown in FIG. 353 (g), when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated. Expectations will be lower than if it worked.

If the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work at a rate of 20%, it is assumed that the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not received within the effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 353 (h). , The post-operation effect that should have occurred as long as the effect reception is performed is not executed. After that, the production is progressed in the form of forming a reach state after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 353 (g), when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is not performed within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function functions. Even if it does not exist, in the production situation shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the above-mentioned automatic production function is activated. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if it did not work.

Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 353 (i), even though the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 was not performed within the effect reception period, as shown in FIG. 353 (i). The post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed and the production reception was performed within the production reception period will be executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!" Or "super heat!") Is displayed, but when the post-operation effect occurs according to the operation within the effect reception period. In both cases, when the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function, the modes displayed in the display area are the same. After that, as shown in FIG. 353 (j), the production progresses in a form in which a reach state is formed after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production.

It should be noted that the production reception period (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is generated as the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions", or "the above-mentioned". As for whether or not it is generated as the "effect reception period in which the automatic production function of the above does not work", as in the case of the production reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)) in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed, the symbol variation At the time of execution, it is decided (selected) based on the result of the jackpot judgment, and as a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function can function at a rate of 20% during the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect. Instead, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, "the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. "Period" or "Production reception period when the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work" will be generated, and when a big hit is lost as a result of the big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to, and the selection table for the time of the loss is referred to. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" or the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, during the production reception period (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related production, the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function at a rate of 20%, and 80%. The above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning at the ratio of.

Similarly, the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) is also generated as the “effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions”. In that case, the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when it is generated as the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work". , Which of those periods should be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

Regarding the post-operation-related effect, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 352 (c) and 353 (g)) and the specific operation-related effect are not executed. It may be executed as a different effect from the case of the effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)). However, even when the effects are executed as different effects, it is desirable that any of a plurality of modes having different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, the sword decoration body 5001 used in the production example shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 may be the sword decoration body 5001 of the type shown in FIG. 311. Further, in FIGS. 352 and 353, it has been described as an example in which the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied to the specific operation-related effect shown in FIGS. 332 to 335, but the "automatic effect" is described. The “effect using function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effect shown in FIGS. 330 to 350.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 352 and 353, when a specific operation-related effect is executed without being controlled by the automatic button effect state, the effect acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is performed. In addition to preventing the setting operation to the automatic button effect state from being accepted, the state of "the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted" is before the effect acceptance period occurs. It is desirable to generate the effect from at least the effect situation shown in FIG. 352 (b) (the effect state in which a specific operation-related effect is started) so that this can be continued until the effect reception period. According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to perform a setting operation to the automatic button effect state after confirming that a specific operation-related effect has been started, this will not be accepted. Therefore, the automatic button effect state It has become possible to provide "production using the automatic production function" only to those who are continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button production state, and the game is continuously performed while maintaining the automatic button production state. You will be able to provide dramatic value for what you do.

In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, and an effect reception period (FIG. 352 (c), FIG. 353 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect). ), The first display mode (for example, blue button image BTG and blue sword decoration image SYG) and the second display mode (for example, green button image BTG and green sword decoration). The image SYG) can be made to appear, and when the second display mode appears, the "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" occurs as compared with the case when the first display mode appears. It is desirable to have a high percentage of.

In addition, an effect reception period (see FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect, and an effect reception period (FIG. 352 (c), FIG. 353 (g) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect). )), A third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decorative image SYG) can be made to appear, and when the third display mode appears, "the above-mentioned automatic effect". It is also possible to ensure that the "effect reception period" in which the function functions occurs.

According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, it becomes impossible to confirm the post-operation effect itself, which should have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation for the operation button 410) was performed within the effect reception period. While there is a risk that a directing demerit such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the directing reception period", it is necessary to provide a judgment material as to whether or not to exercise a directing selection such as "do not dare to operate the operation button 410". Will be possible, and it will be expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied, the effect acceptance period corresponding to each "specific operation-related effect" exemplified in FIGS. 330 to 350 and FIGS. 352 and 353. It is desirable to generate the above-mentioned effect as a period having a longer time than the effect reception period (such as FIG. 351 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect. That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled, and as a result, it is appropriate within the effect acceptance period. There is a possibility that the operation cannot be performed, but by giving a long time to the production reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related production", it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring. Will be expected.

In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 352 and 353, it is considered that the ratio of the automatic effect function to function is set to be relatively high during the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect". For example, whether or not the automatic production function works by setting the production reception period to have a longer time than the production reception period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related production". It can be said that it is desirable to maintain the directing performance of the game for a long time and to improve the game entertainment. In this case, the timing at which the automatic effect function functions is reached when the first hour has passed since the period occurred in the effect reception period in which the "specific operation-related effect" is not executed. On the other hand, in the production reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related production", the automatic production function is to make it arrive when the second time, which is longer than the first time, elapses after the period occurs. It is important to maintain the effect of whether or not the function works for a long time.

In addition, there is a production reception period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect" and a production reception period that corresponds to the "specific operation-related effect", and the time from the start to the end of those periods. Even if the items are different, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period will be displayed in the same mode (bar display of the same length), and the remaining gauge amount will be reduced. It is desirable to only have different speeds. That is, in this case, even if the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect" occurs, the period is continued for the same period as the effect acceptance period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect". Since it will be possible to make people think that it is, the effect of whether or not the automatic effect function works is preferably maintained, coupled with the "frustration" caused by the fact that it is continued for a longer period than expected. You will be able to make it.

According to the example shown in FIGS. 351 to 353, the first effect reception period (effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Is generated, and even if the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period, the processing by the first automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily performed. Although it is not always executed, the specific display effect occurs without being executed during the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time elapses after the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed. The first when the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period rather than the effect reception period for 1 (the effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)). The ratio of processing by the automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is increased.

In this regard, in such an automatic button effect state, the ratio of the automatic effect function functioning (“60% -40%”, “20% -80%”) differs depending on the type of effect reception period as described above. When the set automatic button effect state is set to the "first automatic button effect state", the ratio of the automatic effect function functioning differs depending on the type of effect reception period ("50% -50%", "10". % -90% "), which is set differently in the" second automatic button effect state ", and when the effect reception period occurs, the automatic effect function is set to always function regardless of the type of period. A third automatic button effect state to be generated may be further prepared so that any of these effect states can be set, including a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. In addition, a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function is not prepared, and the game is always played in the automatic button effect state (first automatic button effect state, second automatic button effect state, third automatic button effect state). Or the production may be executed.

Further, the production examples shown in FIGS. 351 to 353 may be modified and implemented as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function functions in the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the timing when the first predetermined time elapses after the first effect reception period occurs (first). The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at (timing within the effect reception period) to end the first effect reception period and generate a corresponding post-operation effect. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 351 (b), the timing at which the first predetermined time has elapsed since the first effect acceptance period occurred (the first). The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at the timing within the effect reception period of 1), and then the first effect reception period is ended without the post-operation effect being executed (the post-operation effect is not executed after that). ). On the other hand, if the automatic production function functions during the second production reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c) or the third production reception period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the second production reception period or The above-mentioned automatic production function functions at the timing when the second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses after the third production reception period occurs, and the second production reception period or the third production reception period or the third The production reception period is terminated and the post-operation production is generated accordingly. However, if the automatic production function does not function within the second production reception period shown in FIG. 352 (c) or the third production reception period shown in FIG. 353 (g), the second production reception period or The above-mentioned automatic production function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time elapses after the third production reception period occurs, and then the second production reception period or the third production reception period or the third production without the post-operation effect being executed. End the production reception period of (After that, the production after operation is not executed).

According to such a configuration, the automatic effect function can function at a relatively early stage in the first effect reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function functions is low, and the automatic effect function can function. Even if it does not function, there will be enough time for the player to receive the production by his / her own operation before the end of the first production reception period. You will be able to play games with your heart. On the other hand, in the second production reception period or the third production reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic production function functioning is high, the automatic production function can function only at a relatively late stage, and the automatic production function can be used. Since there is not much time left for the player to operate when it does not function, even though the ratio of the automatic production function functioning is high, providing a game with a sense of tension. Will be able to.

Regarding the above modification, in the first effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function may or may not function at the timing when the first predetermined time elapses (timing within the first effect reception period). However, in the second production reception period and the third production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time elapses (timing within the second production reception period). You may do so. Even with such a configuration, the automatic production function can only function at a relatively late stage, and if the automatic production function should not function (due to some trouble), it is time for the player to operate it. Since it is considered that the player delusions that there is not much room left, it can be expected that the same action and effect will be produced.

Further, in addition to the above-described effect examples with reference to FIGS. 351 to 353, in other effect examples, the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by the operation by the player. For example, it may be controlled based on the result of the jackpot determination, or may be constantly controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Further, the setting itself to the automatic button effect state is not performed, and the automatic effect function may always be provided as a gaming machine capable of functioning at a predetermined ratio.

[Unified operation control when in the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (end the automatic button effect state). Desire) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which the player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the interest in games may decline.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the effect reception is received. After the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the operation according to the effect reception, only by performing the operation once for the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is given within the period. Each effect (process that can cause a change in the effect) is performed (operation unified control in the automatic button effect state). As a result, even if there is a desire to end the automatic button production state and advance the production depending on the player's own operation within the production reception period, the loss of operation opportunity is avoided and the production mode is switched. Will be able to be performed smoothly.

As described above, when the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting operation is permitted only for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. ..

On the other hand, as described above, when the automatic button effect state is canceled when the symbol change is in the execution state, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is performed in the state where the effect reception period has not occurred. The operation for canceling the setting is allowed only for the button 410. On the other hand, in the state where the effect reception period has occurred, when the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is given is operated within the effect reception period. , The process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect (process that can cause a change in the effect) according to the effect reception are performed respectively (operation unified control). Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is operated while the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 has occurred, the operation is not accepted and the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

However, some players play games with a selfish game technique such as "while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), operate by yourself only when you like to advance the effect". It can be assumed that some people want to do that. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 is further provided with a special operation means (button for continuing the automatic mode) different from both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated within the effect reception period related to the specific effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect is performed. The process of ending the state (specific effect state) and the process of causing a change in the effect are performed respectively (operation unified control in the automatic button effect state), but the control is performed in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). If an operation is performed on the above-mentioned special operation means within the effect reception period related to the specific effect, the process of ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not performed and the effect changes according to the operation. The processing that can cause the above is performed.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state is terminated and it is desired to actively perform the operation game after that, the operation button 410 (or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated within the effect reception period. As a matter of fact, if you want to perform only rare operations while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode), you should operate the special operation means within the effect reception period. It becomes possible to realize the game desired by the player only by properly using the operation means.

Hereinafter, the operation unified control in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 356.

FIG. 354 (a) shows that the number of holds is 1 in the automatic button effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. In the production situation being performed, it is shown that the production reception period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred while the reach state is formed. As shown in the figure, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the period controlled by the automatic button effect state (here, "auto button"). "Setting") appears continuously.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area even during this effect reception period, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, below). An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light emitting state, which also prompts the operation of the operation button 410. However, in reality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 in which no change has occurred is allowed to be operated.

In FIGS. 354 (b) to 354 (d), although the operation button 410 was not operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, so that the effect reception period It shows how the post-operation production with the same contents as when the operation was performed and the production was accepted is being executed. When the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated, the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a) is terminated, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and the special operation means (described as "PUSH" in the figure) Any operation opportunity for the button) 1410 will be lost.

That is, in the post-operation effect according to this effect example, a stepwise effect progress appears, and any of the effect results of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 354 (c) and 354 (d)) having different expectations can be obtained. Even if it is decided at the start of the symbol variation (determined based on the result of the jackpot determination) that the final appearance is made, first, as shown in FIG. 354 (b), a specific effect image (here, an explosion). Smoke image) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 354 (c), a specific production image (here, an explosion) shown in FIG. 354 (b). As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 354 (b) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 354 (d). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed.

Then, the flow of the effect shown in FIGS. 354 (a) to 354 (d) appears as a basic effect progress when the effect reception period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function Even after the post-operation effect (FIGS. 354 (b) to 354 (d)) is executed, the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless the player performs the operation. ..

However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), the desire to return to the normal production mode in which the production can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (automatic button production state). The desire to end) may occur. Such a desire often occurs when a production reception period occurs in which the player is given an operation opportunity, but a limited time from the start of the production reception period to the end of the production reception period. Within, it is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button effect state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If there is, the interest in games may decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), it is detected that the operation has occurred. Based on the fact that (detection that the operation button 410 is located at the operation position), the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect according to the effect reception are performed (automatically). Operation unified control in the button effect state). When the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a) ends, the above-mentioned automatic effect function cannot function, and the special operation means (special operation means (a). In the figure, the operation opportunity for the button (button) 1410 described as "PUSH" will also be lost.

Even if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the operation is performed within the effect reception period and the effect is received as shown in FIG. 355 (e). As a post-operation effect according to the situation, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 355 (f), a specific production image (here, an explosion) shown in FIG. 355 (e). As the smoke image) gradually disappears, a production image (here, "Kichi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 355 (e) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 355 (g). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed.

However, if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is also performed based on the operation. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 355 (e) to 355 (g), after the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display shown (here, "auto button is being set") will be hidden. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. The suggestive display (here, "auto button release") is to appear (see FIG. 355 (e)).

Further, as described above, during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state but also the special operation means in which no change has occurred (in the figure, "PUSH" is described. The operation on the button) 1410 is also allowed. Then, this special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 "operates by itself only when it is desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without causing the effect mode switching). As mentioned above, it is prepared to enable a selfish game technique such as "progressing the production."

Therefore, even when the operation for the special operating means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is performed within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), as shown in FIG. 356 (h). In addition, as a post-operation effect according to the operation being performed within the effect reception period and the effect reception being performed, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 356 (i), a specific production image (here, an explosion) shown in FIG. 356 (h). (Smoke image by) gradually disappears, and a production image (here, "Kichi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation will be displayed, which is relatively expected. When the production progresses to a high degree of production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 356 (h) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 356 (j). In the process, a production image (here, "Nakayoshi" fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively high degree of expectation will be displayed. When the operation for the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is received, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a) is terminated, and the above-mentioned automatic effect is performed. The function cannot be functioned, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is also lost.

However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the automatic button effect state is based on the operation. The process of terminating is not performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 356 (h) to 356 (j), even after the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the automatic button effect state is controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The indicated display (here, "auto button is being set") will be continuously displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operating means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is used within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a). A special case that cannot appear when an operation is performed, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions (Fig. 354 (b)), or when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 (Fig. 355 (e)). The production is made to appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like, but in the effect example shown in FIG. 356 (j), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions in the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears in the case (FIG. 354 (b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 355 (e)), a glittering effect display is additionally displayed. I am trying to do it. Instead of the glittering effect display, an additional effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like may be performed.

According to such a configuration, the change content of the effect caused when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period related to the fortune telling effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). And, when controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), an operation was performed on the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 within the effect reception period related to the fortune telling effect. The contents of the changes in the effect that occur in some cases will be different from each other. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (here, a glittering effect display) appears, "the operation means is operated and the post-operation effect according to the effect reception appears, but the automatic button effect state is It becomes possible to recognize that the setting is not canceled and this is continued while enjoying the effect after the operation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 356 (i), even when displaying a production image (here, “Kichi” fortune) suggesting that the production result has a relatively low degree of expectation, it is special. The production (here, the effect display that shines brilliantly) can appear.

Further, such a special effect (here, a glittering effect display) is made to appear additionally to the above-mentioned post-operation effect at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the special effect. When an additional effect appears, it is desirable that the ratio of the big hit symbol appearing due to the symbol variation is higher than when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it is beneficial for the player to operate the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 instead of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 There is a concern that the operation for will not be performed. Therefore, when the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), the special effect (here, glitteringly shines). If the effect display) does not appear, any effect result will appear by operating the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), or by operating the above-mentioned automatic effect function. It is desirable that the ratio of jackpot symbols appearing due to the symbol fluctuation is lower than in the case of.

According to such a configuration, "the operation on the operation means is performed by the operation on the special operation means (button described as" PUSH "in the figure) 1410, and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception appears. , In order to create a state in which the automatic button effect state is not canceled and this is continued, there is a demerit such as "it can be suggested that the rate of big hit symbols appearing due to symbol fluctuations is extremely low". Since there is a risk of being vulnerable, it is expected that the player will be able to exercise such a directing selection in a suitable manner to maintain the interest of the game.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 356 (i), although the same effect mode as that in the example shown in FIG. 355 (f) appears, the above-mentioned effect demerit has occurred. Therefore, it is recognizable that the proportion of jackpot symbols appearing due to the symbol variation is lower than in the examples shown in FIGS. 354 (c) and 355 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 356 (i), the effect mode is shown in FIGS. 354 (c) and 355 (f) while making it possible to recognize that the situation has a low degree of expectation. By making it the same as the case, the third party who does not operate the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is in a production situation where the production selection fails. It is difficult to grasp the above, and it is expected that this will suppress the decline in the interest in games.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of which effect selection is made within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), FIGS. 354 (b) and 355 ( Although it was decided to display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) as shown in e), FIG. 356 (h), etc., the specific effect image is relatively as a post-operation effect. It may be displayed in either a plurality of modes in which a high-expected production mode (here, the fortune-telling of "Nakayoshi") appears, or a ratio in which a special production appears is different.

Further, regardless of which of the production selections is made within the production reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), this is omitted without displaying a specific production image, and the production modes having different expectations are obtained. (Here, "Kichi" or "Nakayoshi" fortune) may be made to appear directly as a post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp that the production situation is present when the production situation (FIG. 356 (i)) in which the production selection fails appears, the production mode with different expectations ( Here, when either "Kichi" or "Nakayoshi" fortune) is made to appear as a post-operation effect, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion).

In addition, the production that suggests the degree of expectation can be performed even within the production reception period generated in FIG. 354 (a), so that it can be used for determining whether or not to take the above-mentioned production risk. You may.

Further, the special operating means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operating means for continuing the state when the automatic button effect state is in effect. Alternatively, it may be carried by another operating means already prepared.

Further, during the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 354 (a), is there a period during which the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be received for the effect? Alternatively, the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350)) is executed as to whether or not an operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can be accepted for the effect. It may occur as a result of the above.

In addition, during the effect reception period in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity, the first effect is also given an operation opportunity for the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410. Even if the reception period (see FIG. 354 (a)) and the second production reception period in which no operation opportunity is given to the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are included. good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 354 (a)) occurs, the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 330 to 350) described above is higher than when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable that the ratio of (see) appearing before the symbol fluctuation is stopped is high. According to such a configuration, the ratio of the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350) appears depending on whether the first effect reception period or the second effect reception period occurs. It will function as a suggested production.

[Stable side automatic production processing]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, there is a special case such as "a plurality of operating means can be received for directing, and different directing is executed depending on which operating means is operated". It is possible to generate the production reception period of. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and for any operation means within the special effect reception period. Which of the multiple operating means should the automatic effect function be enabled when there is no operation (which of the multiple operating means causes the same change as when the effect is received)? Is a problem.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operation means can be accepted for effect, and a different effect is executed depending on which operation means is operated". When the production acceptance period of is generated, "whether or not there is a possibility that a production result with a lower degree of expectation will appear" instead of "whether or not there is a possibility that a production result with a higher degree of expectation will appear". Is the standard, and the process of enabling the automatic effect function for an operation means different from the "operation means on the side that can generate an effect that may produce an effect with a lower expectation" (automatic effect on the stable side). Processing) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, the production mode with the lowest expectation among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is performed for any of the plurality of operation means within the special production reception period is Since it will not be possible to appear when the automatic production function functions, a situation such as "when the automatic production function forgets to operate, the production mode with the lowest expectation will appear by the automatic production function" will occur. It becomes possible to avoid it preferably.

Hereinafter, the stable side automatic effect processing in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 357 to 359.

First, an example of an effect when a special effect acceptance period occurs when the effect is not controlled by the automatic button effect state and is in the normal effect state will be described. In FIG. 357 (a), the number of holds is 3 in the normal effect state, and the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. In the production situation being performed, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 while the reach state is formed. It shows the production situation where the production display suggesting that the special production reception period is started. In this production situation, although neither the production reception for the operation button 410 nor the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 has been activated yet, the operation button 410 and the sword have been in this situation. The operation button 410 is in a light emitting state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state of being moved to the sword pulling position in order to prompt the determination of which of the decoration body 5001 should be operated. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed, respectively.

FIG. 357 (b) shows the player using either the special effect reception period (pressing operation of the operation button 410 or sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 357 (a). It shows the production status in which the production reception period) that can be selected by the side has occurred. In this effect situation, at least a part of the effect display (here, button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG) in the effect display device 1600 that has appeared since the effect state shown in FIG. 357 (a), and operation buttons. While the state of 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is kept to be continued, an instruction display prompting the operation of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed. Correspondingly, the downward arrow displayed and the bar display indicating the remaining time of the special production reception period, etc.) are displayed.

Here, in the production situation shown in FIG. 357 (b), a character image such as "stable" is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as "disturbance" is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Has been done. However, instead of this, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operating means are capable of accepting the effect.

That is, in this effect example, when the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 357 (b), the effect reception for the operation button 410 is first performed as the effect after the button side operation. After it is displayed that it has been done (Fig. 357 (c)), it is suggested that the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation, and the larger the number of defeats, the higher the expectation. And the effect of making any one of "100 defeated" appear based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIGS. 357 (d) and 357 (e)) is executed. For example, in the post-button operation effect when a big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (d) appears at a rate of "40%", and in FIG. 357 (e) at a rate of "60%". The effect mode shown is made to appear, and in the effect after the button side operation when the jackpot is lost, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (d) appears at a ratio of "60%", and the ratio of "40%". It is possible to make the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (e) appear.

On the other hand, when the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 is made within the special production reception period, as the production after the sword side operation, it is first displayed that the production reception for the sword decoration body 5001 has been made ( FIG. 358 (f)) shows that the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation, and the larger the number of defeats, the higher the expectation. An effect (FIGS. 358 (g) to 358 (i)) in which any one of "777 defeated" appears based on the result of the jackpot determination is executed. For example, in the post-operation effect on the sword side when a big hit is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (g) appears at a rate of "10%", and in FIG. 358 (h) at a rate of "50%". The effect mode shown appears, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (i) appears at a rate of "40%". In the post-operation effect on the sword side when the jackpot is lost, the rate of "40%" appears. The effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (g) appears, the effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (h) appears at a rate of "50%", and the effect shown in FIG. 358 (i) appears at a rate of "0%". It is possible to make the aspect appear.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the number of defeats is small regardless of whether the effect after the button side operation or the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Has a lower degree of expectation than a production mode in which the number of defeats is large. Further, when the number of defeats is the same (for example, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (e), the effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (h), and the effect mode shown in FIG. 359 (e) described later). , Expectations may be different, but it is desirable that they be the same.

In such a configuration, a special effect reception period is generated to allow the effect reception for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means), and the special effect reception period is generated. Since it is possible to generate different operation effects (effect after button side operation, effect after sword side operation) depending on the type of operation means on the operated side within the production reception period, one operation means can be operated. The monotonous directing performance will be improved, and it will be possible to improve the game entertainment.

In particular, the same expectation is not shown by operating either the operation button 410 (first operating means) or the sword decoration body 5001 (second operating means), but the sword decoration body 5001 (first operating means). Only when the operation means (2) is operated, a specific effect mode (here, FIG. 358 (g)) is shown, which suggests that the jackpot symbol is unlikely to appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state). Since we have made it possible for the production mode of "defeating one body" to appear, we would like to see the production (effect after operation of the sword side) on the side of the sword decoration body 5001 (second operating means) even if we take such a risk. It is expected that the game will be maintained by giving conflicts and stimuli to the game.

In this case, the post-operation effect on the button side is "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation" among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. (Here, the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 358 (g)) "is eliminated, and it functions as a relatively stable post-operation effect. In addition, the post-operation effect on the sword side is "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here)" among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period. Then, in the sense that there is a risk of appearance of the “one-body defeat” effect mode) shown in FIG. 358 (g), it functions as a post-operation effect that includes relative turbulence.

Furthermore, in this production example, from the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 357 (a) to the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 357 (b) (here, within the special production reception period), The effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (ab) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears, it is more than when the effect mode does not appear. , When the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed, the appearance rate of "the specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, the production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 358 (g))" is low. It is possible to carry out the production progress in the form of a sword. This ratio may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, there is a risk that "a specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, a production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 358 (g))" may appear. As a material for determining whether or not the operation should be performed on the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410, it becomes possible to use the effect result of whether or not the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (ab) appears. , It is expected that the game entertainment will be suitably improved when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 357 (b) occurs.

In the normal production state, when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 357 (b) occurs but no production reception is performed within the special production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production is performed. The function does not work, and the effect is advanced without executing both the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation.

On the other hand, FIGS. 359 (a) to 359 (e) show an example of an effect when such a special effect acceptance period occurs while the automatic button effect state is controlled.

As shown in FIGS. 359 (a), 359 (ab), and 359 (b), even when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the automatic button effect state is controlled. Except for the fact that a display indicating that effect (here, "auto button is being set") appears continuously on the effect display device 1600, an effect display suggesting that a special effect acceptance period will start appears. From 1 to the end of the special production reception period, the production is performed with the same contents as in the above-mentioned normal production state (FIGS. 357 (a), 357 (ab), and 357 (b)). Be progressed.

However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the special production reception period shown in FIG. 359 (b), "a production result with a lower degree of expectation (here, FIG. The automatic effect function is enabled for the operation button 410, which is different from the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that can generate the effect that may cause the effect of "defeating one body" shown in 358 (g). It is possible to execute the process of making it (stable side automatic effect process).

That is, in this case, even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword decoration body 5001 was operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 359 (b), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is enabled. As a result, the same change as when the operation for the operation button 410 is received within the special effect reception period is generated for the effect. Therefore, as a post-operation effect on the button side, first, after it is displayed that the effect reception for the operation button 410 has been made (FIG. 359 (c)), the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation and the larger the number of defeats. As an effect suggesting that the degree of expectation is higher, either "50 defeated" or "100 defeated" appears based on the result of the jackpot judgment (Fig. 359 (d), Fig. 359 (e)). ) Will be executed.

According to such a configuration, the expectation is the lowest among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is performed for any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 within the special production reception period. Since the effect mode (here, the effect mode of "defeating one body" shown in FIG. 358 (g)) cannot appear when the automatic effect function is activated, "when you forget to operate". It becomes possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as "the automatic effect function causes an effect mode with the lowest expectation to appear."

Here, due to the convenience of the automatic effect function, there is a concern that the player will not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button effect state. However, as described above, within the special effect reception period, the effect mode shown in FIG. 359 (ab) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears. , "The specific production mode with the lowest expectation (here, the production mode of" one body defeat "shown in FIG. 358 (g))" appears at a low rate, and the production after the sword side operation is performed. Since the opportunity to enjoy the sword is given, it is expected that the sword decoration body 5001 is preferably encouraged to operate.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, a special period in which the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the production and the period for which the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received for the production are simultaneously generated and terminated at the same time. Although it was decided to control it as the production reception period, it is not always necessary to generate these periods at the same time. For example, if the period in which the operation for the operation button 410 is received for the effect and the period in which the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received for the effect overlap in a part of them, those periods are separated. It may be generated at the timing.

In addition, when a specific effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the jackpot determination, "a plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and the effect differs depending on which operation means is operated. May be executed without fail. That is, in this case, "Which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and further, a special effect reception period occurs" at a relatively early stage from the time when the symbol variation is started with a specific effect pattern. You will be able to think about a production strategy that assumes that a special production reception period will occur, such as "Should the setting operation to the automatic button production state be performed before doing?" .. For example, it will be possible to confirm "how much notice production was performed in what production mode (expectation degree)" before the special production reception period occurs. It has become possible to use the result as a judgment material for "which of a plurality of operating means should be operated within the special production reception period", and the game until the special production reception period occurs. It will be possible to maintain this as well as the interest.

However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when there is an operation on the operation button 410, when there is an operation on the sword ornament 5001, and even when there is an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 within the special effect reception period, the automatic effect function Which effect mode appears when is functioning is determined by a lottery (judgment) based on the result of the jackpot judgment at the start of the symbol change or when the effect reception occurs (or when the automatic effect function is functioning). It is desirable to do so.

Further, even if there is a production situation in which the special production reception period has not yet occurred, the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001. When there is an effect display (Fig. 357 (a), Fig. 359 (a)) that suggests that a special effect reception period will start, it is permissible to set the automatic button effect state. It is desirable to control this as a prohibited period so that it will not be done. According to such a configuration, it is suggested that a special effect reception period in which the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started. Even if you try to set the automatic button effect state after confirming that "effect display" has started, this will not be accepted, so you can continue playing the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state. It has become possible to provide "stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state" only for those who are, and it is an effect for continuously playing the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state. Value can be provided.

Further, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the button side operation is performed on the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation (FIG. 358 (g)") that may appear when the production after the sword side operation is performed. It was decided to execute it as a unique production mode that is different from any of the production modes that may appear when the post-production is performed, but for the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation", the post-button operation production is performed. It may be executed in the same mode as the effect mode that may appear when it is performed (for example, (for example, "defeating 50 bodies" shown in FIG. 357 (d)). In this case, the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Even if "a specific production mode with the lowest expectation" appears as a result of the performance, the same mode as the production mode that can appear when the effect after the button side operation is performed appears for the purpose of seeing. Therefore, it is difficult for a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated to recognize that the production situation is such that the degree of expectation is extremely low. It becomes possible to do so, and it is expected that the deterioration of the game entertainment will be suppressed. That is, in this case, in the effect display device 1600, one such as "a specific effect mode is displayed based on the effect reception". Even though the effect status only appears, the symbol changes depending on whether the effect situation is generated by the operation on the operation button 410 or the operation on the sword decoration body 5001. Since the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear differs depending on (the fluctuation of the symbol in the execution state), it becomes possible to further enhance the fun as an effect using a plurality of operation means.

However, this is a case where the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation" in the post-operation on the sword side is executed as the same mode as the production mode that can appear even when the post-operation on the button side is performed. However, the "special production mode with the highest expectation" in the post-operation on the sword side is a unique production mode (for example, different from any of the production modes that can appear when the post-operation on the button side is performed. (It is desirable to execute as (“777 body defeat” shown in FIG. 358 (i)). According to such a configuration, “a specific production mode with the lowest expectation” in the post-operation effect on the sword side. When appears, it is difficult to recognize that the degree of expectation is extremely low for a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated. On the other hand, when the "special production mode with the highest expectation" appears in the production after the operation on the sword side, even a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated. It becomes possible to easily recognize that the production situation is extremely high in expectation. Therefore, as a player, he / she takes the above-mentioned risk without worrying about the eyes of a third party. You will be able to enjoy the production on the side of the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) (effect after operation on the sword side). In addition, regarding the "special production mode with the highest expectation", a third party Anything that is recognizable may be used, and for example, uniqueness with other production modes may be ensured by performing a movable body operation or lamp emission.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the effect mode of "defeating 777 bodies" as a result of performing the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 358 (f) to 358 (i)) (FIG. 358 (Fig. i)) can appear, and when the effect mode (FIG. 358 (i)) of the "777 body defeat" appears, any other effect mode (FIG. 357 (d), FIG. 357 (e)) appears. , FIG. 358 (g), FIG. 358 (h)) has a higher rate of appearance of the jackpot symbol due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state). This ratio may be 100%. However, it is not always necessary to make the effect mode (FIG. 358 (i)) of the "777 defeated body" appear, and in this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (d) is shown in FIG. 358. The appearance rate of the effect mode shown in FIG. 358 (h) is higher than the appearance rate of the effect mode shown in FIG. 357 (e) by the amount of lowering the expectation of the effect mode shown in (g). It becomes.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the effect after the button side operation (FIGS. 357 (c) to 357 (e)) and the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 358 (f) to 358 (i)) are shown. ), A common effect mode (here, the effect mode of "defeating 100 bodies") can appear, but the common effect mode does not appear. May be good. Further, in the post-operation effect on the button side, only the display change appears, whereas in the post-operation effect on the sword side, in addition to the display change, the movement of the movable body, the light emission of the lamp, and the like may be enabled. Further, the effect after the operation on the button side and the effect after the operation on the sword side do not have commonality as the effect contents regarding the number of defeats, and the effect contents themselves may be executed as different effects from each other.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, when the effect reception occurs, including when the effect is received by the function of the automatic effect function, first, for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. Although it was decided that a display (FIG. 357 (c), FIG. 358 (f), FIG. 359 (c)) suggesting whether the production was accepted was made to appear here, the degree of expectation was suggested without making the display appear. It is also possible to execute an effect that causes the effect result to appear.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, the effect mode of "defeating 777 bodies" as a result of performing the effect after the sword side operation (FIGS. 358 (f) to 358 (i)) (FIG. 358 (FIG. 358 When i)) appears, it is more related to the specific operation described above than when any other production mode (FIG. 357 (d), FIG. 357 (e), FIG. 358 (g), FIG. 358 (h)) appears. The rate at which the effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) appears before the symbol variation is stopped, and when the specific operation-related effect appears, the operation means (sword decoration) on the higher expectation side. It is desirable that the ratio of operation opportunities given to 5001) is high. According to such a configuration, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 357 to 359, it is possible to preferably encourage the sword decoration body 5001 on the side having a high production risk to perform an operation.

[Production reception processing according to display type]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
-The first display effect can be displayed within the effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 is operated while the first display effect is displayed. And, the process of generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect that suggests the degree of expectation) based on the effect received by the operation, and the effect reception that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. The second display effect can be displayed within the period, and when an operation is performed on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is displayed, the above-mentioned first display effect is received based on the operation. It is possible to execute a plurality of processes related to a plurality of different operation effects, such as a process of generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested) different from the expected effect of 1.

In such a configuration, the type of effect as the expected effect (post-operation effect) that appears at the time of operation differs depending on the display effect (first display effect, second display effect) displayed within the effect reception period. Therefore, not only the game entertainment when the operation is performed can be enhanced, but also the game entertainment from the production reception period to the operation can be preferably enhanced.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed within the effect reception period. When the effect status in which the first display effect is displayed or the effect status in which the second display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, the effect reception Even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the period, the same expected effect (here, the first expected effect or the second expected effect) is generated as when the operation button 410 is operated. Is feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect situation in which the first display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period. The first display effect will be executed regardless of whether or not it has been performed, and when the effect situation in which the second display effect is displayed appears within the effect reception period, whether or not the operation button 410 has been operated is determined. Regardless, the second display effect will be executed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed within the effect reception period, there is a concern about forgetting to operate. You will be able to enjoy the production without having to.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the first display effect can be displayed only when the effect acceptance period for generating the post-operation effect occurs. However, the second display effect can be displayed even when the effect reception period for generating the effect after the operation does not occur. and,
-The production status in which the production reception period is controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state) and the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410 is allowed, and the first display production is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the process of generating the first expected effect (effect after operation) and the process of ending the automatic button effect state are performed, respectively (the effect shown in FIG. 360 described later). See progress),
-The production status in which the automatic button production state (specific production state) is controlled, the production reception period for allowing the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has occurred, and the second display production is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the process of generating the second expected effect (effect after operation) is performed, but the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not performed (shown in FIG. 361 described later). See production progress),
-An effect that is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), does not have an effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410, and the second display effect is displayed. When the operation button 410 is operated in the situation, neither the process of generating the first expected effect (post-operation effect) nor the process of generating the second expected effect (post-operation effect) is performed, and the automatic button is performed. The process of terminating the production state is also prevented (see the production progress shown in FIG. 362 described later).
-The effect reception period that is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 has not occurred, and the first display effect and the second display effect When an operation is performed on the operation button 410 in an effect situation in which none of the above is displayed, a process for generating a first expected effect (post-operation effect) and a process for generating a second expected effect (post-operation effect). Each process, such as the process of terminating the automatic button effect state, is executed according to each effect situation (effect reception process according to the display type).

According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is operated when the first display effect appears and the second display effect does not appear, and when the first display effect appears. The type (second post-operation effect) as the expected effect (post-operation effect) according to the operation (effect reception), depending on whether the operation button 410 is operated while the second display effect is appearing. Not only the expected effect of 1 and the expected effect of 2) are made different, but the expected effect (effect after operation) itself does not appear even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears. There is a possibility, and the process of ending the automatic button effect state will not be performed. Therefore, the variety of the effect using the operation button 410 can be ensured, and the game entertainment when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed can be suitably improved.

Hereinafter, the effect reception process according to the display type in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 364.

In FIG. 360, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 360 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410). An example of the effect when the first effect pattern that can be set as "the effect acceptance period that allows the above" is executed is shown.

In this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, as shown in FIG. 360 (b), the effect display device 1600 , The button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display (here, a downward arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) appear to prompt the operation of the operation button 410. (First display effect).

Then, assuming that the operation for the operation button 410 is received at the timing tb12 before the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 360 (c), the symbol variation (execution state) based on the effect reception. The first post-operation effect (in the figure, the fortune of "Nakayoshi") that suggests the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation) is executed (the first expected effect). At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state based on the effect reception, and the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 also has the effect reception without exhausting the remaining time. It will be terminated at that point. Therefore, at the timing tb12 when the effect is received, the display indicating that the effect is controlled to the "auto button effect state" (here, "auto button is being set") has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600. ) ”Will also be hidden.

However, in this case, regardless of whether the effect is received within the period of timing tb11 to tb13, in the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 360 (d), the first post-operation effect generated by the effect reception ( The first expected production) has not been completed yet, and it is in the state of being executed so that the game entertainment interest is suitably maintained for the period of timings tb11 to tb13 regardless of the timing when the production reception is performed. It is desirable to do.

In FIG. 361, while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the period tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 361 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410). An example of the effect when the second effect pattern that can be set as "the effect acceptance period that allows the above" is executed is shown.

In this second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, as shown in FIG. 361 (b), the effect display device 1600 , "Haunted OBK with a present box" will be introduced (second display production).

Here, when "Haunted OBK with a present box" is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation is always generated when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 does not appear.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 361, the ghost OBK holding the present box can be displayed within the period of timings tb21 to tb23, and the ghost OBK is displayed before the timing tb23. When the operation button 410 is operated at the timing tb22, the effect is received, and as shown in FIG. 361 (c), the jackpot symbol is generated by the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state) based on the effect reception. The second post-operation effect (displaying the characters "super heat" in the figure) that suggests the degree of expectation that appears is executed (second expected effect).

However, at this time, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb21 ends when the effect reception is received without exhausting the remaining time, whereas the automatic button effect state is not canceled. I am trying to maintain this. Therefore, at the timing tb22, the "display indicating that the control is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here," auto button is being set ")" that appears in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues to be displayed. Will be done.

Regardless of whether the effect is received within the period of timing tb21 to tb23, in the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 361 (d), the second post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) generated by the effect reception is performed. (Expected production) is not finished yet, and it is in the middle of execution so that the game entertainment can be appropriately maintained for the period of timings tb21 to tb23 regardless of the timing when the production is accepted. Is desirable.

FIG. 362 is for generating a second post-operation effect during the period of timings tb31 to tb33 (see FIG. 362 (a)) in the execution period of the symbol variation while being controlled to the automatic button effect state. An example of the production when the third production pattern for displaying "Haunted OBK with a present box" is executed even though the production reception period of the above has not occurred is shown.

In this third effect pattern, when the timing tb31 arrives, as shown in FIG. 362 (b), the effect display device 1600 causes a ghost OBK with a present box to appear (second display effect).

However, as described above, in the production situation where the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the post-operation production that suggests the degree of expectation even if the operation button 410 is operated is performed. Since it is not always generated, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 does not appear.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 362, the ghost OBK holding the present box can be displayed within the period of timings tb31 to tb33, but as shown in FIG. 362 (a), the ghost OBK is displayed. During this period, the "effect reception period that allows the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 361 (a) and 361 (c), even if the operation button 410 is operated while the ghost OBK holding the present box is displayed, after the operation corresponding to the operation. The effect (first post-operation effect, second post-operation effect) does not appear, and the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed over the period of timings tb31 to tb33.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect does not occur. In this case, basically, the process of ending (cancelling the setting) of the automatic button effect state is performed, but it is shown in FIG. 362 even when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect does not occur. If an operation is performed on the operation button 410 while in such a production situation (a production situation in which a ghost OBK holding a present box is displayed), a process for generating a post-operation effect and an automatic button effect state are displayed. The production will be advanced so that neither of the ending processes will be performed.

Therefore, the second operation shown in FIG. 361 (c) is displayed when the aspect (ghost OBK with a present box) shown in FIG. 362 (b), which is the same aspect as in FIG. 361 (b), is displayed. Even if the operation button 410 is operated in the expectation that a post-effect (second expected effect) will occur, the effect will not change, but the automatic button effect state will not be canceled. You will be able to continue this. At this time, as a method of not canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state,
-Even when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect has not occurred, only the detection of whether or not the operation button 410 has been performed is enabled, and when the effect reception period related to the post-operation effect does not occur, the detection is performed. If there is a detection, it is determined whether or not the timing of the detection is "within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33 when the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed", and the "hold the present box". When the timing of displaying the ghost OBK is within the period of tb31 to tb33, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state is prevented, and the timing of displaying the ghost OBK with the present box is prevented. A method for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state when it is not "within the period of tb21 to tb23" (the period of timing tb31 to tb33 is set as a prohibition period for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state. Method)
-During the period tb21 to tb23 when the ghost OBK with the present box is displayed, a method such as detecting whether or not there is an operation on the operation button 410 and not performing the operation itself should be adopted. Is possible, and any method for realizing the above may be used.

In FIG. 363, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period tb11 to tb13 (see FIG. 363 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. An example of an effect is shown when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb11 to tb13, although the above-mentioned first effect pattern that can be set as the “allowable effect acceptance period” is executed.

As described above, in this first effect pattern, when the timing tb11 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, the effect display is as shown in FIG. 363 (b). In the device 1600, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, an arrow display in the downward direction and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) are displayed. Display) appears (first display effect).

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 363, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of timings tb11 to tb13, but when the timing tb12'before the timing tb13 arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function Is now functioning, which causes the same changes to the effect as when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 363 (c), at the timing tb12', the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the above-mentioned automatic effect function functioning. The suggested first post-operation effect (in the figure, the fortune of "Nakayoshi") is executed (first expected effect). However, at this time, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb11 ends when the automatic effect function functions without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is not canceled and continues. Become. Therefore, at the timing tb12', the "display indicating that the control is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here," auto button is being set ")" that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues. It will be displayed.

Further, even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing tb12', at the timing tb13, as shown in FIG. 363 (d), the first post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function occurs. It is desirable that the expected production of the above) is not completed yet and is in the state of being executed in order to preferably maintain the game entertainment interest during the period of timings tb11 to tb13.

In FIG. 364, while the automatic button effect state is controlled, the period tb21 to tb23 (see FIG. 364 (a)) of the execution period of the symbol variation is set to “the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. An example of an effect is shown when the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of the timings tb21 to tb23, although the above-mentioned second effect pattern that can be set as the “allowable effect acceptance period” is executed.

As described above, in this second effect pattern, when the timing tb21 for generating the “effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410” arrives, the effect display is as shown in FIG. 364 (b). In the device 1600, a "ghost OBK with a present box" will be introduced (second display production).

Here, as described above, when "ghost OBK with a present box" is displayed, unlike the case where the button image BTG is displayed, the degree of expectation is suggested when the operation button 410 is operated. Since it is not always possible to generate the effect, an instruction display (a downward arrow display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) that prompts the operation of the operation button 410 appears. There is no.

In this regard, in the effect example shown in FIG. 364, the operation button 410 is not operated within the period of timings tb21 to tb23, but when the timing tb22'before the timing tb23 arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function Is now functioning, which causes the same changes to the effect as when the operation button 410 is operated. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 364 (c), at the timing tb22', the degree of expectation that the jackpot symbol will appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state) based on the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function. The suggestion second post-operation effect (in the figure, the character display of "super heat") is executed (second expected effect). However, even in this case, the effect reception period generated from the timing tb21 ends when the automatic effect function functions without exhausting the remaining time, but the automatic button effect state is not canceled and continues. It becomes. Therefore, at the timing tb22', the "display indicating that the control is controlled to the automatic button effect state (here," auto button is being set ")" that has appeared in the display area of the effect display device 1600 continues. It will be displayed.

Further, even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing tb22', at the timing tb23, as shown in FIG. 364 (d), the second post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) generated by the above-mentioned automatic effect function is performed. It is desirable that the expected production of the above) is not completed yet and is in the state of being executed in order to preferably maintain the game entertainment interest during the period of timings tb21 to tb23.

By the way, although the illustration is omitted, although the above-mentioned third effect pattern (see FIG. 362) is executed while being controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is relative to the operation button 410 within the period of the timing tb31 to tb33. When the operation is not performed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function cannot function and the automatic button effect state is also canceled because the effect acceptance period for generating the second post-operation effect has not occurred in the first place. It goes without saying that it will continue (that is, no change will occur).

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, the first display effect shown in FIG. 360 and the second display effect shown in FIGS. 361 and 362 execute effects that are developed with different contents from each other. , The type as the post-operation effect when the operation button 410 is performed when either the first display effect or the second display effect is displayed (first). The expected effect (the second expected effect) is made different, and even if the operation is performed only when the second display effect appears, the expected effect (post-operation effect) itself may not appear. It will be prevented from being processed to end the automatic button effect state. Therefore, the variety of the effect using the operation button 410 can be ensured, and the game entertainment when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed can be suitably improved.

Regarding the first display effect, there are a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and it may be possible to execute the first display effect in any of these effect modes. Further, the second display effect also has a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first display effect and the second display effect are executed as display contents having no relation to each other. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, in the first display effect, an instruction display prompting the operation of the button image BTG or the operation button 410 is displayed, whereas in the second display effect, the button is displayed. Neither the image BTG nor the instruction display prompting the operation to the operation button 410 is displayed, and a specific background image (a ghost with a present box) that is not displayed when the first display effect is being performed is displayed. It has become.

Further, regarding the first expected effect, there may be a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and the first expected effect may be executed in any of these effect modes. Further, the second expected effect also has a plurality of effect modes having different expectations, and may be executed in any of these effect modes. However, it is important that the first expected production and the second expected production are executed as production contents having no relation to each other. In the production example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, the fortune-telling image is displayed in the first expected production, whereas the fortune-telling image is not displayed in the second expected production, and the degree of expectation by character display is displayed. Is being suggested. By executing either the first expected effect or the second expected effect as a movable effect or a lamp display effect, the contents may not be related to each other.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, as an effect pattern for causing the second display effect to appear within the execution period of the symbol variation, when the second display effect appears, "the effect for the operation button 410". A second effect pattern and a second display effect appear in which it is determined in advance (for example, in the judgment process performed at the start of the symbol variation) that a "effect reception period that allows reception (operation)" will occur. When the third effect pattern is set, it is determined in advance (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of the symbol variation) that the "effect reception period for allowing the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. I decided to prepare. However, after preparing a second effect pattern in which it is predetermined that a "effect acceptance period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" will occur when the second display effect appears. Based on the fact that the production reception is performed within the production reception period that allows the production reception (operation) for the operation button 410, a determination (lottery) is made as to whether or not to generate the second expected production, and the result is determined. By generating a second expected effect when a specific result is obtained in the determination and not generating a second expected effect when a specific result is not obtained in the determination, FIG. 360 ~ The production example shown in FIG. 364 may be realized. Further, apart from the second effect pattern according to such another example, when the second display effect appears, the "effect acceptance period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410" does not occur. The above-mentioned third effect pattern, which is determined in advance (for example, in the determination process performed at the start of the symbol variation), may be further prepared.

If the second expected effect is generated as a result of receiving (operating) the effect on the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, the first display effect is being performed. It is possible to make the rate at which the jackpot symbol appears in the symbol variation (symbol variation in the executing state) higher than when the first expected effect occurs as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410. desirable.

Further, when the second display effect is performed, the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350) is stopped until the symbol variation is stopped, as compared with the case where the first display effect is performed. It is desirable to increase the rate of appearance between. According to such a configuration, even if the second expected effect does not occur as a result of the effect reception (operation) for the operation button 410 while the second display effect is being performed, a specific operation is performed. It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation that the related effects (see FIGS. 330 to 350) will be performed, and it will be possible to suitably suppress the game entertainment.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the first display effect (see FIG. 360 (b)) is displayed and when the second display effect (FIG. 361 (b), FIG. 362) is displayed. (Refer to (b)) is displayed, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated. However, even if there is an operation, the second expected effect does not always occur. When the second display effect (see FIGS. 361 (b) and 362 (b)) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect is displayed. When the effect function is enabled, when the second display effect (see FIGS. 361 (b) and 362 (b)) is displayed, the operation is performed by leaving it to the above-mentioned automatic effect function. There is concern that it will disappear. Therefore, when the first display effect (see FIG. 360 (b)) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, but the second display effect (FIGS. 361 (b) and 362 (b)) is displayed. (See) is displayed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is disabled, and when the second display effect is displayed, even if it is operated, the second expected effect will occur, but at least it must be operated. For example, the second expected effect may not occur.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the ghost OBK is displayed, a "effect reception period that allows the effect reception (operation) for the operating means" is generated while the ghost OBK is displayed. You may do so. Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 360 to 364, when the ghost OBK is displayed, the automatic production function may function within the "effect reception period that allows the production reception (operation) for the operation means", or the player may use it. Even if the operation is performed, the ghost OBK may not be hidden, and the effect of displaying the ghost OBK may be continued even at the timing tb23 and the timing tb33.

[Auto repeated hit function in the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 prompts a plurality of operations (such as repeatedly hitting the operation button 410) to a predetermined operation means, generates an effect reception every time there is such an operation, and performs a multiple operation effect corresponding to the operation. May be struck. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, how to make the above-mentioned automatic effect function function when such a specific effect reception period in which the operation effect is performed a plurality of times occurs becomes a problem.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined operation means (for example, an operation button 410) is provided during a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (continuous hits, etc.) is given. Is not required to be operated multiple times, but an effect when the operation is performed multiple times simply by performing an operation in a long mode (so-called long press, etc.) for maintaining the predetermined operating means in the operating state for a relatively long time. It is equipped with an automatic multiple-time operation function (auto-continuous hitting function) that allows the mode to appear, and the automatic multiple-time operation function (auto-continuous hitting function) functions when an operation is performed on a predetermined operating means in a long-operation mode. When this is done, the effect is received every time a predetermined time elapses while the operation state is maintained, and it is possible to execute a process of generating the post-operation effect a plurality of times according to these.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity of a plurality of operations (such as repeated hits) is given when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When the specific effect reception period occurs, even if the operation means is not operated within the specific effect reception period, the operation means is automatically performed in the long operation mode within the specific effect reception period. Similar to when the multiple operation function (automatic continuous hitting function) functions, the process of generating the effect according to the effect reception is executed every time a predetermined time elapses (automatic effect function).

According to such a configuration, there is a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic continuous striking function is enabled when a so-called long press operation is performed within a specific effect reception period in which an operation opportunity of multiple operations (continuous striking, etc.) is given. Therefore, at least when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the same effect mode as when the automatic continuous striking function is enabled appears even if the operation by long pressing is not performed within the specific effect reception period. Therefore, even if the automatic effect function is activated when a specific effect reception period that requires multiple operation receptions occurs in the automatic button effect state, the specific effect (operation reception) within the specific effect reception period. Players will not be dissatisfied with the frequency of occurrence of, and will be able to enjoy the production.

FIG. 365 (a) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (continuous hitting, etc.) on the operation button 410” during the timings ct11 to tk13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. A specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed, and the operation button 410 is operated a plurality of times in a single-shot operation mode in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively short time within the specific effect reception period. It shows an example of the production when it is performed over.

As shown in FIG. 365 (a), in this production example, every time the operation button 410 is operated in the mode of the single-shot operation within the specific production reception period (timing tk11 to tk13) (the operation button 410 is the original). Every time it is detected that the position is changed from the position to the operation state (here, the rising is detected), the effect reception is performed according to the operation, and the specific effect (post-operation effect) is executed according to the effect reception. .. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times the operation is detected (effect reception) for the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is received. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested is made to appear according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without exhausting the remaining time. ..

Here, although omitted in the figure, within the specific effect reception period (timing tk11 to tk13), the specific time from the start to the end of the specific effect (post-operation effect) according to the effect reception. A new production reception (operation detection) may be made within. In such a case, the specific effect (post-operation effect) that is in the process of being executed at the time when the effect is received is interrupted, and a new specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception is generated. Therefore, it is desirable to suitably maintain the operation feeling (effect reactivity) when the player operates it. It should be noted that the newly generated specific effect (post-operation effect) is terminated when a specific time elapses from the start, unless a new effect reception is generated again during the execution of the specific effect. Become.

FIG. 365 (b) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) on the operation button 410” during the timings tc11 to tk13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. A specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed, and the operation is performed in a long mode (so-called long press) in which the operation state is maintained for a relatively long time within the specific effect reception period. An example of the effect when the operation for the button 410 is performed is shown.

As shown in FIG. 365 (b), the operation button 410 is in the operation state while the operation state for the operation button 410 is maintained in the mode of long pressing during the specific effect reception period (timing tk11 to tk13). A process to generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time a predetermined time t1 elapses after the first specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated based on the operation detection (effect reception) at the time. Auto repeated hit function) is to be executed. As this process (automatic continuous striking function), for example, "operation detection (effect reception) is performed on condition that the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and the operation detection (effect reception) is performed. It is possible to execute it as a process such as "generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) based on the reception). Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times the operation is detected (effect reception) for the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is received. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested is made to appear according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without exhausting the remaining time. ..

FIG. 366 (a) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) on the operation button 410) during the timings ct11 to tk13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when controlled to the automatic button effect state. An example of an effect when a specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period to which is given" is executed and no operation is performed within the specific effect reception period is shown.

First, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing ct11 to tk13) when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect is not executed even once and the timing ct13 is reached. When it reaches, the specific production acceptance period will end.

On the other hand, if no operation is performed during the specific effect reception period (timing tk11 to tk13) while the automatic button effect state is controlled, it is specified as shown in FIG. 366 (a). The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing ct12 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the effect reception period has occurred. That is, in this case, after the first specific effect is generated at the timing t12, the automatic effect function performs a new specific effect every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, as in the case where the above-mentioned automatic continuous striking function functions. The process of generating the effect after the operation) will be executed.

As this process (automatic effect function), for example, "operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time a predetermined time t1 elapses, and a new specific effect (effect reception) is performed based on the operation detection (effect reception). It is possible to execute it as a process such as "generating a post-operation effect)". Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing tc12, the automatic continuous striking function is activated so that "operation detection (effect reception) is performed every time the predetermined time t1 elapses, and these operation detections are performed. A process such as "generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) based on (effect reception)" may be performed. Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, such as the number of times the operation is detected (effect reception) for the operation button 410 reaches a specific number of times, or a specific result is obtained by a lottery when the effect is received. , A production mode in which the degree of expectation is suggested is made to appear according to the satisfaction of the specific production condition, and the specific production reception period is terminated at that time without exhausting the remaining time. ..

FIG. 366 (b) shows an operation opportunity of “multiple operations (repeated hits, etc.) on the operation button 410” during the timings ct11 to tk13 in the execution period of the symbol variation when controlled to the automatic button effect state. A specific effect pattern that can be set as a "specific effect reception period" is executed, and the operation button 410 is pressed and held while the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning during the specific effect reception period. An example of the production when it is performed is shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (b), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the timing tk12, as in the effect example shown in FIG. After the generation of The process of causing it to be executed.

However, in this effect example, it is assumed that the operation for the operation button 410 is performed in a long-pressed manner at the timing tc12a when the process by the automatic effect function is being executed. Therefore, in the timing tc12a, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished) when the operation for the operation button 410 is detected while the automatic button effect state is in the state. However, in this production example, even though the operation by the player is detected at the timing tc12a, the production reception is not performed. Then, after preventing the specific effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to the effect reception from occurring at the timing tc12a, the process (predetermined time t1) executed before the automatic button effect state is canceled is set. The process of generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) is continued without ending each time.

According to such a configuration, in the automatic button effect state, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect reception period, a long press operation is performed at any timing in the state. Even if is started, there is no longer a delay in the progress of the production due to changes in the rhythm and tempo related to the generation of the specific production (effect after operation) triggered by the operation, and it is already in the execution state. The process (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed in a form that is inherited until after the operation mode by long pressing is started. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning within the specific effect reception period, the player can operate the operation without worrying about adverse effects on the effect in the executed state. It becomes possible to perform the operation, which facilitates the operation by the player. That is, although the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (b) is different from the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (a) in that the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, The same mode will appear as the mode of the specific effect that appears within the specific effect reception period.

It should be noted that the process already in the execution state (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is inherited until after the operation mode by long pressing is started. It is possible to execute in the form of an auto continuous hit function that works when a long press operation is performed within the specific production reception period, and a function when the operation is not performed within the specific production reception period. Regardless of which of the automatic effect functions to be performed, the same process (process to generate a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is executed. It is nothing but from.

However, after the long press operation by the player is started at the timing tc12a, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the operation state every time the predetermined time t1 is digested, indicating that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. On the condition that the judgment is made, the process executed from the time when the automatic button effect state is set (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) every time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is continued. It will be. Therefore, if the operation button 410 is not in the operating state when the predetermined time t1 based on the previously executed specific effect is exhausted, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated at that time. Instead, the process that has been executed since the state of the automatic button effect (the process of generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) each time the predetermined time t1 elapses) is terminated.

In the production example using the automatic continuous striking function shown in FIG. 365 (b) and the automatic effect function shown in FIGS. 366 (a) and 366 (b), the predetermined time t1 is set based on the timing when the specific effect is completed. After the lapse of time, a process (automatic continuous striking function, first aspect as an automatic effect function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) was executed, but instead of this, the timing at which the specific effect started was used as a reference. As a result, a process (automatic continuous striking function, second aspect as an automatic effect function) for generating a new specific effect (post-operation effect) may be executed after the elapse of a predetermined time t2. In this case, the predetermined time t2 may be longer than the specific time required from the start to the end of the specific effect, but is preferably from the start to the end of the specific effect. Set so that it is shorter than the specific time required for. According to such a configuration, when the specific effect is in the middle of execution, a new specific effect is executed in the form of interrupting the specific effect. It becomes possible to make the player feel as if he / she is repeatedly performing a single operation at high speed even though he / she has not performed any operation, and it is expected that the game entertainment will be maintained favorably.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 366 (b), when the operation button 410 is operated before the timing ct12 at which the automatic effect function functions (within the period of timings tc11 to tk12), it is at that time. The setting of the automatic button effect state will be canceled (finished). At this time, the first specific effect is generated in response to the operation of the operation button 410, and thereafter, if the operation is a long press mode, every time the predetermined time t1 (or the predetermined time t2) elapses. A process (automatic continuous striking function) for generating a new specific effect (effect after operation) is executed, and if the operation is a single-shot press mode, it is detected that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. A new specific effect (effect after operation) will be generated each time.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 365 and 366, when the effect reception is performed while the specific effect is in the state of being executed, the effect reception is performed in the form of interrupting the specific effect in the state of being executed. Although it was decided to generate a new specific effect, it is also possible to generate a new specific effect according to the effect reception in parallel with the specific effect in the state of being executed without ending it.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 365 and 366, when a new single-shot operation is performed and the effect is accepted while the previous specific effect generated by the single-shot operation is in the middle of execution, the effect is described. When a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is generated according to the effect reception, while the previous specific effect generated by the automatic effect function (or auto continuous hit function) is in the middle of execution. Even if it is detected that the operation button 410 has entered the operation state from the original position due to a single operation or a long press operation, a new specific effect (post-operation effect) is not generated at the time of the detection, and the operation button 410 is already in the execution state. It was decided to continue the process (process to generate a specific effect every time a predetermined time elapses). After that, if the operation state is maintained when the predetermined time based on the previous specific effect elapses (in the case of a long press operation), the process that is already in the execution state (the specific effect is performed for the specified time). Since the process (process generated each time elapses) is further continued, the player can end the automatic button effect state while preferably continuing the operation system effect that has been in the execution state since the state of the automatic button effect state. It becomes possible to shift to a state in which the operation system production is performed by the operation by, and it is expected that the player's participation consciousness will be raised by this.

[Setting processing related to the automatic button effect state according to the type of effect pattern]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation, the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operation button 410) can be operated by the operation. It is possible to set and cancel the automatic button effect state, and by simplifying such operations, it is possible to set and cancel the automatic button effect state while maintaining attention to the progress of the effect while the symbol is changing. I am trying to do it.

However, if the automatic button effect state is set or canceled during the execution period of the symbol change, the processing load increases due to the setting change that was not expected at the start of the symbol change, and at the start of the symbol change. There is concern that it will adversely affect the decided production progress. In this regard, the types of the "effect pattern executed based on the result of the jackpot determination" include, at least, "the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set" and "the operation. Since a "second effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period cannot be set" in which a prompting instruction display appears is prepared, depending on the type of effect pattern, the setting or cancellation of the automatic button effect state is not always executed promptly. In some cases, no problem will occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the symbol variation is in the execution period depending on which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is in the execution state. By making the setting and the processing mode for canceling the automatic button effect state different, the increase in the processing load during the execution period of the symbol variation is suppressed.

FIG. 367 shows a symbol variation in the "first effect pattern in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set" when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is three. Is started, and is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation. .. The first effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation.

As shown in FIG. 367, when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is three, "a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in the "effect pattern". Then, although the symbol change is being executed, the effect progress as the first effect pattern is made while the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is allowed). ..

Then, in this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td11 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Will be done.

Further, in this effect example, after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way, the operation for the operation button 410 (the operation button 410 is in the operation state) is performed at the timing td12 within the specific effect reception period shown in the figure. ) Is detected. When the operation for the operation button 410 is detected within the specific effect reception period, the effect is received, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed, and the specific effect reception period ends without exhausting the remaining time. Will be done. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is not set, the effect is received when the operation button 410 is operated. It will not be accepted as a setting operation to the automatic button effect state. On the other hand, in the specific effect reception period when the automatic button effect state is set, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect is received, the post-operation effect is executed, and the automatic button effect state is released. It is also accepted as an operation, and the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled (finished).

Furthermore, in this production example, it is assumed that the setting operation by the player is detected at the timing td13 shown in the figure after the specific production reception period is completed in this way, although the design is changing. , The automatic button effect state is set based on the detection of the setting operation. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol variation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) when the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It is supposed to be executed when it is detected. However, instead of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change may be executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state.

Then, in this effect example, when the symbol variation is stopped after the setting to the automatic button effect state is made, the symbol variation is put on hold after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the symbol variation is stopped. The next symbol change is digested (change starts). Then, during the period in which the next symbol change is being executed, the effect progresses in the state set in the automatic button effect state unless the player performs the release operation.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 367, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the first effect pattern is executed, the specific effect is specified during the period in which the first effect pattern is executed. When the operation button 410 is operated when the reception period is not set, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed while the first effect pattern is in the execution state. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the symbol variation is started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" can be set while the automatic button effect state is controlled. However, by performing the release operation before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is possible to make the specific effect reception period occur in the state where the automatic button effect state is canceled, and the player himself operates it. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the amusement hobby when the desired desire arises. In the effect example shown in FIG. 367, it is assumed that the release operation is accepted before the specific effect reception period starts, but the release operation is performed after the specific effect reception period ends. It is also possible to end the automatic button effect state within the period of one effect pattern.

Further, according to the above configuration, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is performed during the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears can be set". Is also allowed. In the production example shown in FIG. 367, it is assumed that the setting operation is accepted after the specific production reception period ends, but the setting operation by the player within the period before the specific production reception period starts. Is performed, the setting operation is accepted. Therefore, when the symbol variation is started in the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" is started without being controlled by the automatic button effect state, the specific effect reception period occurs. By operating the operation button 410 so that the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is detected in the period before, the specific effect reception period is generated in the state set to the automatic button effect state. It is also possible, and the automatic effect function makes it possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment when one wants to enjoy the effect after operation.

In order to obtain such an effect, when the first effect pattern is selected at the start of the symbol variation, any effect determination result regarding the determination (lottery) relating to the effect content in the first effect pattern. Even if is obtained, it is desirable to make sure that this occurs during the specific production reception period. In addition, the specific effect display can appear within the period of the symbol change, and when the specific effect display appears, the specific effect acceptance period always occurs until the symbol change in the execution state is completed. It is desirable to make the production progress in this way. According to these configurations, by confirming the effect content that appears within the execution period of the symbol variation, it becomes possible to recognize that the specific effect reception period occurs, and until the specific effect reception period occurs. You will be able to select whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

At this time, regarding the above-mentioned specific effect display, it is possible to suggest whether or not there is a high possibility that the post-operation effect will be performed in a manner with high expectation when the effect is received within the specific effect reception period. , If it is performed by any one of a plurality of modes, it is expected that it will be used for a judgment regarding selection as to whether to cancel or set the automatic button effect state.

Furthermore, the specific effect display has at least a first specific effect display and a second specific effect display, and when the first specific effect display appears, the first specific effect display appears. It may be permissible to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player between the time when the specific effect reception period occurs, but when the second specific effect display appears, the said. If it is not allowed to set (or cancel) the automatic button effect state by the operation by the player between the appearance of the second specific effect display and the occurrence of the specific effect reception period, the specific effect can be set. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment interest from the appearance of the display to the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

FIG. 368 shows a second effect pattern (loss variation) in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is three. ) ”, And a processing example when an operation for canceling the automatic button effect state (release operation) or an operation for setting (setting operation) is performed within the execution period of the symbol change. It is a time chart which shows.

As shown in FIG. 368, when the automatic button effect state is controlled and the number of holds is three, "a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears cannot be set. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in "2 production pattern". Then, also in this effect example, as in the case shown in FIG. 367, although the symbol variation is in the execution period, the automatic button effect state can be released (the release operation is allowed). The production progress as the second production pattern will be made.

Then, in this effect example, it is assumed that the release operation by the player is detected at the timing td21 shown in the figure, and the automatic button effect state is released based on the detection of the release operation. It is supposed to be (finished). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state. Will be done.

That is, it seems that there is little merit in ending the automatic button effect state when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is in the execution state. When it appears, there is a high possibility that the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set" will appear when the symbol variation in the pending state is digested. At this time, there may be a desire to return to the normal production mode (a desire to end a specific production state) in which the production can be advanced depending on the player's own operation.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, not only during the period in which the first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set is executed, but also in the period in which the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed. However, the automatic button effect state can be terminated by the operation by the player. Therefore, when the "first effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is set" is still in the hold state, the automatic button effect state can be terminated in advance, whereby in the "first effect pattern". It is possible to avoid a situation in which the automatic button effect state is terminated immediately before the specific effect reception period is set and the operation means (operation button 410) must be operated without hesitation.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, it is assumed that the player performs the setting operation at the timing td23 shown in the figure after the automatic button effect state is canceled in this way. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the second effect pattern is being executed, which is not controlled to the automatic button effect state and the specific effect reception period is not set. Even if an operation is performed by the player (even if the operation button 410 is moved from the original position to the operation state and the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds)), at least the second effect pattern The setting operation by the player is not accepted (the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed) within the period during which is being executed. Instead of this, even if the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is executed based on the detection that the operation button 410 is in the operation state, the said During the period when the second effect pattern is being executed, the setting operation by the player is not accepted.

That is, even if "setting from the normal effect state to the automatic button effect state" is performed immediately before the specific effect reception period occurs, it is necessary to perform any operation within the specific effect reception period. However, even if the operation is performed, the production is accepted and the production is executed after the operation. In view of these facts, it is necessary to promptly set the automatic button effect state even if the setting operation is performed during the period when the second effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed. It is considered that no problem will occur if the automatic button effect state is set before the start of the specific effect reception period that may occur after the next symbol change is digested.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIG. 368, during the period in which the second production pattern (loss variation) in which the specific production reception period is not set is being executed, the setting operation is performed by the player within the period. Even so, the automatic button effect state is not set until the end of the period (while the symbol variation is being executed), the symbol variation according to the second effect pattern is completed, and the symbol is stopped (loss). When it is in the state of (design stop) (timing td24 in the figure), the setting to the automatic button effect state is made based on the setting operation. In this way, within the period in which the symbol variation of the second effect pattern is executed, even if the player performs an operation, the setting to the automatic button effect state is not allowed, and the set timing is set to the symbol. Since it is carried over after it is stopped, the processing load increases because the setting change related to the effect state that was not determined at the start of the symbol change occurs during the execution of the symbol change (by the operation by the player). Such things can be suitably suppressed.

Then, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses after the symbol variation is stopped, the automatic button effect state is set and the hold state is set. The next symbol change that was there is being digested (change start). Then, during the period in which the next symbol change is being executed, the effect progresses in the state set in the automatic button effect state unless the player performs the release operation.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, in the state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled and the second effect pattern is executed, the second effect pattern is in the execution state during the period. Regardless of the timing at which the operation button 410 is operated, the control to the automatic button effect state is not executed while the second effect pattern is in the execution state, and the second effect pattern ends. After that, the control to the automatic button effect state can be executed. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress an increase in the processing load due to a setting change related to the effect state, which was not determined at the start of the symbol variation, during the execution of the symbol variation (by an operation by the player). Will be.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 368, it is assumed that the next symbol change in the pending state is started after the symbol change of the second effect pattern for which the specific effect reception period is not set is stopped. However, even if the next symbol change is not in the hold state at the time when the symbol change of the second effect pattern is stopped (lost symbol stop), the automatic button is in the state of the symbol stop (loss symbol stop). The setting to the production state will be made.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 368, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect reception period is not set is executed, the second effect pattern is performed. The automatic button effect state is set when the symbol fluctuation of is stopped, but it is not always limited to this, and the point is that the automatic button is set within the period when the second effect pattern is executed. It suffices that the setting to the effect state is not allowed, and the set timing is carried over after the symbol is stopped. For example, it is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set when the symbol is stopped (lost symbol stopped) or during the period when the next symbol change is executed. That is, if there is an effect situation such as "it is decided to change the setting related to the effect state within the symbol change" at the time when the next symbol change is started, the effect is performed according to the determined schedule. Since it is only necessary to make progress, it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in the processing load due to an unintended state change during the execution of the symbol variation.

In this case, even if the next symbol variation is executed as the second effect pattern (the same effect pattern as the previous one), the symbol is stopped (lost symbol stop) or the next symbol variation is executed. It is desirable that the automatic button effect state is set within the specified period. According to such a configuration, when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period in which the symbol variation is executed in the second effect pattern, it is determined in which effect pattern the next symbol variation is executed. It becomes possible to carry over the timing when the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed after the symbol is stopped without performing.

Further, when the operation button 410 is put into the operation state within the period in which the second effect pattern is executed in order to set the automatic button effect state, at least a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the second effect pattern. The automatic button effect state may be set only after that. That is, in this case, when the second effect pattern is terminated while the next symbol change is in the pending state, the automatic button effect state is set within the execution period of the next symbol change, but the next symbol change If the second effect pattern is terminated while is not in the hold state, the automatic button effect state can be set when the symbol is stopped (lost symbol stop).

In addition, apart from the "second effect pattern (loss variation) in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set", the "specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears cannot be set". "3 effect pattern (hit variation)" is further prepared, and when the setting operation is performed by the player within the period during which the symbol variation is executed in the third effect pattern, the symbol is stopped or the execution period of the big hit game is executed. The setting to the automatic button effect state may be made within.

[Prohibition period for setting the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation, the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operation button 410) can be operated by the operation. It is possible to make settings related to the automatic button effect state, and by simplifying such operations, it is possible to make settings related to the automatic button effect state while maintaining attention to the progress of the effect during symbol fluctuations. ing.

However, if the specific processing related to the effect such as the effect setting is allowed at any time by the operation by the player during the execution period of the symbol change, including the setting process to the automatic button effect state, the feeling of tension is felt. The lack of directability may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, among the periods in which the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is executed, at least when the specific effect reception period has not occurred, the specific processing related to the effect such as the effect setting is performed by the operation by the player. In a permissible gaming machine, it is desirable that a prohibited period in which the specific processing related to the above-mentioned effect is not allowed can be started to occur between the start of the symbol change and the occurrence of the specific effect reception period. That is, in this case, since there is a concern that a prohibited period will occur, even in a state where a specific effect reception period has not occurred, the operating means (operation button 410, etc.) has not occurred while the prohibited period has not occurred. ) Will be required to be performed, and it will be possible to suitably maintain the player's participation consciousness in the game and the production.

Hereinafter, an example of an effect in which "setting process for setting an automatic button effect state" is adopted as "specific process related to effect" will be described in detail, but the "specific process related to effect" is not limited to this, and for example, an effect mode ( It may be applied as another process such as a process of changing the effect mode in which the first character plays a leading role to another effect mode (effect mode in which the second character plays a leading role).

In FIG. 369, when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the symbol variation is started in the “third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period (specific valid period) in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears” can be set, and the symbol is shown. FIG. 370 is a time chart showing a processing example when an operation for setting the automatic button effect state is performed within the execution period of the fluctuation, and FIG. 370 is an effect example when the effect is progressed in the third effect pattern. It is a figure which shows. The third effect pattern may be either a hit variation or a loss variation, and may be the same as the above-mentioned first effect pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370 (a), a third effect in which a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set when the effect is not controlled by the automatic button effect state. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in "Pattern". Then, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the effect progress as the third effect pattern is made while the state can be set to the automatic button effect state (the state in which the setting operation is allowed). ..

However, in this effect example, when the symbol is changed in the "third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" is performed, the timing te11 (before the specific effect reception period occurs) (See FIG. 369), the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state, or the prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 370 (b), in this prohibited period, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed. In the specific effect (prohibited image) shown in FIG. 370 (b), an image in which the chain is attached to the padlock is displayed, and a button lock effect such as "auto setting invalid" is displayed. Has been done.

The prohibition period generated in this way ends when the timing te12, in which the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) has elapsed from the timing te11, arrives. However, no matter how much the operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIGS. 370 (c) and 370 (d), the above-mentioned specific effect (prohibited image) ) Is designed so that no change occurs.

Then, when the prohibition period ends at the timing te12, the specific effect (prohibited image) is hidden, and the setting process for the automatic button effect state is returned to the allowable state. After that, when the above-mentioned "precursor effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 370 (e)), a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears appears at timing te13. (See FIG. 370 (f)). In the example shown in FIG. 370 (f), the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 is set, but the effect reception in which the operation button 410 is given the operation opportunity. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIGS. 369 and 370 (f), since the specific production reception period occurs in the state where the automatic button production state is not set, the specific production reception period is within the specific production reception period. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a specific timing. However, even when the "third effect pattern in which the specific effect reception period in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears" is executed in the effect situation shown in FIG. 369, it is before the prohibition period is started. If you set the automatic button effect state to, it is possible to make the specific effect reception period occur while the automatic button effect state is set. In this case, the specific effect can be set. The above-mentioned automatic effect function can be activated at a specific timing within the reception period.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting to the automatic button effect state during the symbol change is not the timing when the operation button 410 is in the operation state, but the operation button 410 is in the operation state. It may be executed when it is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) after becoming. However, in this case, if the operation button 410 is put into the operation state and maintained for 2 seconds within a period of less than 2 seconds before the timing te11 shown in FIG. 369 arrives, after the timing te11 occurs. It is possible to allow the setting to the automatic button effect state. Therefore, the specific effect (prohibited image) is not generated at the timing te11 when the prohibited period is started as in the effect example shown in FIG. 369, but is generated after the timing te11. Is desirable.

FIGS. 371 and 372 are diagrams showing a modified example of the prohibited period (here, the prohibited period related to the setting of the automatic button effect state) related to the “specific process related to the effect such as the effect setting”.

That is, as described above, in the above-mentioned production example with reference to FIGS. 369 and 370, when the prohibition period occurs at the timing te11 (see FIG. 369), the first specific time (for example, 25) after the prohibition period occurs. No matter how many operations (operations for the operation button 410) are performed until the elapse of seconds) and the end of this, the setting operation is not accepted and the above specific effect (prohibited image) is used. Is designed so that no change occurs.

However, in the following modification described in detail with reference to FIGS. 371 and 372, the prohibition period is "a first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) is required from the occurrence to the end". Is the same, but when the second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) shorter than the first specific time elapses after the prohibition period occurs, an operation (operation button) by the player to end the prohibition period early. It differs from the above-mentioned production example described in detail with reference to FIGS. 369 and 370 in that a process capable of allowing the operation for 410) can be performed.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 371 and 372 (a), a specific effect reception period in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears can be set when the effect is not controlled by the automatic button effect state. It is assumed that the symbol change is started in "3 production pattern". Then, even in this modified example, although it is during the execution period of the symbol variation, the effect progresses as the third effect pattern while it is in a state where it can be set to the automatic button effect state (a state in which the setting operation is allowed). Will be made.

Further, at the timing te11 (see FIG. 371) before the specific effect reception period occurs, the operation reception itself for setting the automatic button effect state or the setting process to the automatic button effect state is allowed. In addition to starting to generate a prohibited period that is not prohibited, a specific effect (prohibited image) that can appear only when the prohibited period occurs is displayed in FIGS. 369 and FIG. It is the same as the above-mentioned production example with reference to 370.

However, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 371, among the prohibited periods, the period from the timing te11 to the arrival of the timing te11a in which the second specific time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed (the period during which the cancellation is not possible). Then, no matter how many operations (operations for the operation button 410) are performed within the period, no change is caused in the specific effect (prohibited image) (FIG. 372 (c)). (Refer to), in the period from the timing te11a to the arrival of the timing te12 (the timing when the first specific time (for example, 25 seconds) elapses after the prohibition period occurs) (the period during which the release is allowed), the operation by the player When (operation for the operation button 410) is performed, it is possible to execute a process in which the prohibition period can be terminated early.

More specifically, when the timing te11a arrives and the prohibited period can be terminated early by an operation by the player (operation for the operation button 410), the timing te11a first arrives in the effect display device 1600. A special image that did not appear in the period up to (the period that cannot be canceled) is displayed. In this modification, as shown in FIG. 372 (d), the image NJG suggesting the remaining time as the prohibited period is displayed as the special image.

That is, in the prohibition period related to this modification, when the timing te11a arrives, such an image NJG will appear (see FIG. 372 (d)), so that the prohibition period cannot be canceled (see FIG. 372 (d)). It can be suggested that the timing te11 to te11a) has shifted to the period in which the prohibition period is allowed to be lifted (timing te11a to te12), and the prohibition period is shown while the remaining time is shown. Will be able to function as an effect on whether to end early.

Then, when the first operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the prohibition period is allowed to be released, the operation button 410 is put into the operation state. Based on the fact, the process of terminating the prohibited period early is executed. As a result, after the first operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed, the setting operation by the player can be accepted even if the timing te12 has not yet arrived.

Here, in this modification, when the prohibition period is terminated early by the first operation (operation for the operation button 410) by the player, the effect display device 1600 also changes the effect based on the first operation. It is possible to execute the process that causes the above. In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 372 (e), the image in which the chain is attached to the padlock is destroyed and the characters such as "successful release" are displayed to cause a change in the effect. As a result, the specific effect (prohibited image) is also hidden before the timing te12 arrives.

Then, in the state where the prohibition period is terminated early in this way, when the second operation (operation for the operation button 410) is performed within the period before the timing te12 arrives, as shown in FIG. 371, the operation is performed. When the second operation is performed (here, when the operation state is maintained for 2 seconds), the setting process for the automatic button effect state can be performed. Then, in this case, in the effect display device 1600, a display (here, "auto button setting in progress") is displayed according to the effect setting.

After that, when the above-mentioned "precursor effect" or "specific operation-related effect" is performed (see FIG. 372 (f)), a specific effect acceptance period in which an instruction display prompting the operation appears appears at timing te13. (See FIG. 372 (g)). In the example shown in FIG. 372 (g), the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 is set, but the operation reception is given to the operation button 410. It may be set as a period.

In this regard, in the production example shown in FIGS. 371 and 372 (g), since the specific production reception period is generated in the state of being set to the automatic button production state, it is within the specific production reception period. If no operation is performed by the player before the specific timing arrives, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function. However, even in the production example shown in FIGS. 371 and 372 (g), the invalid period is first set by performing the first operation within the period (timing te11a to te12) in which the invalid period is allowed to be canceled. In the case of the effect example shown in FIGS. 369 and 370 (f), unless the setting process for the automatic button effect state is performed by performing the early end and performing the second operation in the early end state. It goes without saying that the same production situation as above will appear.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, the specific effect reception period is generated after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the "prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is completed. A specific effect reception period may be generated immediately after the "prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is completed (in a form connected to the prohibition period). That is, in this case, if the prohibition period occurs when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, the specific effect reception period will occur while the setting opportunity to the automatic button effect state is prohibited. It becomes possible to raise the player's participation consciousness when the production reception period has not occurred.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, in the "prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button production state is not allowed", when the production reception is performed within the specific production reception period that occurs thereafter. As the post-operation effect, any one of a plurality of effect modes having different ratios such as the rate at which a relatively high expectation effect mode appears and the rate at which a big hit symbol appears due to a symbol variation in the execution state may be made to appear.

Further, in the production example shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, based on the result of the jackpot determination,
-When the effect image of FIG. 372 (e) is in the third state, a plurality of third effect modes (for example, "padlock") in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which the jackpot symbol appears due to the symbol variation in the execution state are different from each other. Appear one of "multiple production modes with different destruction conditions of the image with the chain attached to it")
When the effect image of FIG. 372 (d) is in the second state, when the third state is reached, "a specific third effect mode (plural third effect)" is selected from the plurality of third effect modes. Of the modes, a plurality of second effect modes (for example, "a plurality of effect modes having different colors of the image NJG") in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which the "third effect mode most advantageous to the player" appears is different. Make one appear,
When the effect images of FIGS. 372 (b) and 372 (c) are in the first state, when the second state is reached, "a specific second effect mode (plural)" is selected from the plurality of second effect modes. Of the second production modes of the above, a plurality of first production modes (for example, a plurality of production modes in which the color of the background image is different) in which the ratio (expectation degree) at which the "second production mode most advantageous to the player" appears is different. It is desirable to execute processing such as making one of) appear. According to such a configuration, while the production progresses within the prohibition period or the process of ending the prohibition period early is executed, the degree of expectation can be suggested step by step by the productions related to each other. Therefore, it is expected that the player's interest in the game during the prohibited period can be appropriately maintained, and that the player's participation consciousness is raised by promoting the early termination of the prohibited period. In this sense, the first effect mode and the second effect mode are executed as an effect in which the movable decorative body cannot operate, and only the third effect mode that directly leads to the early end of the prohibited period is movable. It is desirable to be able to execute it as an effect mode for operating the decorative body. A predetermined movable decoration is operated when a specific third effect mode appears among the plurality of third effect modes, and a predetermined movable decoration appears when a third effect mode different from the specific third effect mode appears. You may not move your body.

Further, with respect to the effects illustrated in FIGS. 370 (e) and 370 (f) and FIGS. 372 (f) and 372 (g), the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) is used. The above-mentioned effect (specific operation) as to whether the operation can be received for the effect or the operation for another operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) can be accepted for the effect. It may be executed as a related effect (see FIGS. 330 to 350).

Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, it has been described that the specific effect reception period is always generated after the “prohibition period in which the setting process for the automatic button effect state is not allowed” is generated. However, it is not always necessary to generate the specific effect reception period, and after the "prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed" is generated, the symbol change stops without the specific effect reception period occurring. You may prepare a production pattern that can be done.

Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 369 to 372, regarding the "prohibition period in which the setting process to the automatic button effect state is not allowed", the effect pattern with a relatively low jackpot expectation (for example, the super reach state). It is desirable that the appearance rate of the effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern in which the super reach state occurs) is higher than that of the effect pattern in which the jackpot expectation is relatively high. That is, in this case, even though the effect pattern with a relatively high expectation of big hit appears, the opportunity to execute the setting process to the automatic button effect state for a predetermined period is forcibly lost. It will be possible to encourage players to participate in the operation, and it is expected that the player's awareness of getting a big hit will increase.

However, if the process of setting the automatic button effect state is completely prohibited for a predetermined period of time, it is inevitable that the player who desires the automatic button effect state will lose his or her interest. As shown, after a certain amount of time has passed, the player can cancel the prohibited period early, and when it is canceled, the player can return to the state where the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is allowed again. Is desirable.

Regarding the setting operation to the automatic button effect state, the operation target to be set by the operation by the player may be an operation button 410, a touch panel, a sword decoration body 5001, a cross key, or another operation means. Further, the prohibition period may be terminated early by operating an operation target different from the operation target used when setting the automatic button effect state, or when setting the automatic button effect state. The prohibition period may be terminated early by manipulating the operation target used. However, if the prohibited period is to be terminated early by operating the operation target used when setting the automatic button effect state, the mode of operation (single press, long press, etc.) should be different from each other. Is desirable.

As described above, FIGS. 369 to 372 show an example of an effect in which the "setting process for the automatic button effect state" is adopted as the "specific process related to the effect", but this is referred to as the "specific process related to the effect". Not limited to. However, with regard to the "specific processing related to the effect", regardless of the type of effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination, the operation means is subjected to the operation means within the execution period of the symbol variation. It is desirable that it can be performed by an operation.

[Automatic production function for movable operation means]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect reception period (when the above alternative example is applied, the first specific valid period or the second specific valid period). Even if the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation, the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operation button 410) can be operated by the operation. It is possible to make settings related to the automatic button effect state, and by simplifying such operations, it is possible to make settings related to the automatic button effect state while maintaining attention to the progress of the effect during symbol fluctuations. ing.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as an operation means, in addition to the operation button 410, a movable operation is operably provided between the original position and the operation position by a predetermined driving force. The means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is provided, and in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the player performs the effect reception period for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Even when the operation is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed can be executed.

By the way, when the effect reception period for such a movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. 293 (G2), the movable operation means is placed in its original position by a predetermined driving force. The player may be given an operation opportunity to operate the movable operation means in the moved state by first moving from the to the operation position. In this operation opportunity, the effect reception may be performed not by the operation of returning from the operation position to the original position but by the operation of moving from the operation position to a position different from the original position.

However, when such an effect reception period occurs, there is a possibility that some abnormality or failure has occurred in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), and thereby the movable operating means (here, here, the movable operating means). If the sword decoration body 5001) cannot be driven from the original position to the operation position, the operation opportunity as shown in FIG. 293 (G2) cannot be properly given, and the production reception desk There is a concern that the production after the corresponding operation cannot occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, some abnormality / failure has occurred in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), and as a result, the movable operating means (here, here Even if the effect reception period as shown in FIG. 293 (G2) occurs without being able to drive the sword decoration body 5001) from the original position to the operation position, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. At that time, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when a specific operation by the player from the operation position is detected in the effect within the effect reception period can be executed. ..

According to such a configuration, even if some abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and it becomes inoperable, it can be moved by using the automatic effect function. It becomes possible to properly appear the post-operation effect using the operation means.

However, when the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state where it cannot operate due to some abnormality or failure, the operation itself for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) itself Since it is a difficult situation, if an operation on the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is required in order to set the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button is used. It is not possible to set the effect state (specific effect state), and in the end, the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) cannot be generated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, first, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) are used. Regardless of which of the above, the effect reception period occurs, the same effect change as when the operation means (here, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is operated is generated. Processing can be executed (automatic production function). On top of this, the setting to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed only by operating the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). I am trying to be.

That is, in this case, not the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the side where there is a concern that the operation cannot be performed when an abnormality or failure occurs, but only the operation with the general push-type operation button 410 is required. It becomes possible to generate an automatic button effect state (specific effect state) corresponding to both the operation button 410 and the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, even if an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) during the execution period of the symbol variation, the operation to the operation button 410 sets the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). By performing the above, it becomes possible to appropriately generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001).

In order to adequately ensure operability in the event of such an abnormality or failure, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) provided for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is used. It is important that it is provided as an operation means that is basically non-driven (to the extent that it vibrates even if there is a drive system) so that it is not subject to the above-mentioned restoration processing in the event of an abnormality or failure. I can say.

However, even if the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality / failure, as long as the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) maintains the stopped state, the abnormality / failure occurs. Since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the player is in the state, it cannot be expected that the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is set.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol variation. , The restoration process for returning the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to the normal state (original position) is executed. The restoration process can be executed as the above-mentioned processing content. For example, a restoration operation (operation for 5 seconds) for returning the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) to the original position is performed. , It is repeated up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) until it returns to the original position properly.

According to such a configuration, the movable operation is performed by confirming that the restoration process is started for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at the start timing (or end timing) of the symbol variation. The player can recognize that the means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state of being abnormal or malfunctioning. Furthermore, by confirming whether or not the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has been properly returned to the original position as a result of executing the restoration process, the movable operating means (here, the sword). The player side decides whether the restoration process for the decorative body 5001) has succeeded and the state in which the abnormality / failure has occurred has been resolved, or whether the restoration process has failed and the state in which the abnormality / failure has occurred continues. You will be able to recognize it. That is, in this case, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed and the state in which the abnormality / failure has occurred continues, the operation to the operation button 410 causes the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). By setting the above, even if the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is in a state of being abnormal or malfunctioning, the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is provided. It becomes possible to properly generate a post-operation effect according to the effect reception.

However, after confirming that the restoration process for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred has failed, the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Even if this is done, the effect acceptance period for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) occurs before the automatic button effect state occurs (for example, during the execution period of the restoration process). If there is, there is a concern that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) cannot be properly generated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of special production reception periods in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can be generated. Regardless of which of the effect patterns is selected and executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, the maximum time required for the restoration process for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) (restoration operation (5)). Addition time between the time when the operation per second) is repeated up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 3 times) and the time required for the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) (here, 2 seconds). It is possible to execute the process of advancing the production so that the special production reception period does not occur only after the lapse of time.

According to such a configuration, when the symbol variation is started in the effect pattern that can generate the special effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the movable operation is performed. Even if the means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality / failure, the player recognizes that the abnormality / failure has occurred before the special production reception period occurs. However, since it becomes possible to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the post-operation effect according to the effect reception for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is appropriate. Will be able to generate. That is, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), even if the special effect reception period occurs in a state where the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality or a failure, the special effect is produced. The same change as when the operation for the movable operation means is performed within the reception period will be generated for the production.

FIG. 373 is a time chart showing an example of such an effect processing.

As shown in FIG. 373, in the example related to this effect processing, when an abnormality or failure occurs in the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the movable operating means (here) is performed at the start timing of the symbol variation. Then, the restoration process for returning the sword ornament 5001) to normal is executed for a maximum of 15 seconds. In addition, it takes 2 seconds to set the automatic button effect state. In addition, the special production reception period can be continued for a maximum of 3 seconds, and the operation for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) can be used for the post-operation production according to the production reception. It takes 10 seconds.

In view of each of these time setting values, first, as the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period, 15 seconds (restoration process), 2 seconds (setting operation), and 3 seconds (special effect reception). A time longer than "30 seconds", which is the sum of "period" and 10 seconds (post-operation effect), is assigned, and "17", which is the sum of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation). Unless the production is advanced so that the special production reception period is generated at a timing later than "seconds", the design changes (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is abnormal or malfunctioning. It is not possible to ensure the above-mentioned effectability when the effect pattern that can generate the special effect reception period) is started.

Therefore, in the figure, as a plurality of effect patterns that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot determination, effect patterns A to E to which different times (symbol variation time of 11 seconds to 60 seconds) are assigned are exemplified. However, in the production patterns A to C in which a time shorter than the above-mentioned addition time of "30 seconds" is allocated, only the production progress in which the special production reception period cannot occur is executed. .. On the other hand, in the effect patterns D and E to which a time longer than the above-mentioned addition time of "30 seconds" is assigned, a special effect reception period can be generated, but the symbol variation is started. By making sure that only the production progress that the special production reception period cannot occur is executed at the timing before "17 seconds (15 seconds (restoration processing) and 2 seconds (setting operation) addition time)". To ensure the above-mentioned effect when the symbol variation (the effect pattern that can generate the special effect reception period) is started in the state where the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) has an abnormality or a failure. I have to.

In the example of this effect processing, the special effect reception period can be generated in all of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than the above-mentioned addition time of "30 seconds" is assigned. The special effect reception period may be generated only in a part of a plurality of effect patterns to which a time longer than "30 seconds" is assigned.

However, in reality, the restoration process fails if the special production reception period occurs immediately after the addition time of 15 seconds (restoration process) and 2 seconds (setting operation) has passed since the symbol change started. If you do not perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) immediately after recognizing that you have done so, the special effect reception period will be generated with the setting changed to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It is not realistic because it cannot be done. That is, when the player recognizes that the restoration process has failed, it usually takes time to determine whether or not to perform the setting operation to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can be said that the above-mentioned effects are not effective unless the above-mentioned time setting values are designed on the assumption of such time values.

In this respect, what is designed to include such a time value is a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8) in which a plurality of operations are received and a post-operation effect is generated each time the effects are received. Seconds) or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) in which the effect is received and the post-operation effect is generated when the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given is maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time or longer. In the valid period (effect reception period), even if the operation is started later than the occurrence of the valid period, multiple operations or long presses are performed a proper number of times and a proper time until the valid period ends. It is possible to do it over.

In view of these facts, among the above time settings, instead of 2 seconds (setting operation), a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) or a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) should be used. It is desirable to. That is, in this case, as the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period, "15 seconds (restoration process)", "8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period)", A time longer than "36 seconds" or "38 seconds", which is the sum of "3 seconds (special effect reception period)" and "10 seconds (post-operation effect)", is allocated, and "15 seconds". (Restoration process) ”and“ 8 seconds or 10 seconds (multiple operation valid period or long press valid period) ”are added to generate a special production reception period at a timing later than“ 23 seconds ”or“ 25 seconds ”. As a result, only the effect pattern E among the effect patterns A to E can be executed as an effect pattern satisfying the condition.

It should be noted that the multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and the long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds) do not necessarily occur in the effect pattern (variation pattern) that can generate the special effect reception period. It may be generated by a production pattern different from this. Further, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) may generate only one of a plurality of operation valid periods (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds). In this case, Will set the length of the valid period on the generating side instead of 2 seconds (setting operation). Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) is capable of generating both a multiple operation valid period (for example, 8 seconds) and a long press valid period (for example, 10 seconds), those valid periods. It is desirable to set the long side instead of 2 seconds (setting operation).

Further, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is effective, it is required to digest the symbol fluctuations one after another in a shorter time. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is effective, each of the above time settings is set. It is not always necessary to carry out the design related to. However, in this case, there is a concern that a special effect reception period will occur during the period in which the restoration process is being executed for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, even during the period when the restoration process is being executed for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the player controls the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) by the setting operation. It is desirable to be able to get it. According to such a configuration, even though the restoration process is being executed for the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001), the post-operation effect as an effect using the movable operation means. Can be made feasible, and an efficient process in which both the restoration process for the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) and the post-operation effect can be performed in parallel can be realized. Note that this process is not limited to the gaming state in which the time saving function is enabled, and may be applied to the gaming state in which the time saving function is not enabled. In this case, the design required for each time setting described above is applied. Will not be done.

Further, in the example related to the effect processing described with reference to FIG. 373, the effect using the movable operating means may be executed as any of the effects shown in FIGS. 279 to 350. .. When a specific operation-related effect is executed, the "effect using movable operation means" shown in the figure is realized as an effect in which a specific operation-related effect, a special effect acceptance period, and a post-operation effect are sequentially performed. The Rukoto.

In addition, a special effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) is not generated only when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled. When the special effect reception period occurs, even if the operation is not performed, the effect reception for the movable operation means is always performed within the special effect reception period, and the post-operation effect may appear. When the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not controlled, there is an opportunity to operate the movable operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) at least during the symbol change in the normal game state. Although the special production reception period to be granted does not occur, the production reception period in which an operation opportunity is granted to the operation means (here, the operation button 410) that is not subject to the above-mentioned restoration processing in case of abnormality / failure is generated. Is possible. The effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to an operation means (here, operation button 410) that is not subject to the above-mentioned restoration process in the case of an abnormality or failure is controlled to an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). It can also occur when you are. When such a configuration is adopted, the design for each time setting described above may be performed, but the movable operating means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) does not have to be designed for each time setting described above. It becomes possible to secure the above-mentioned effectability when an effect pattern that can generate a special effect reception period is started in a state where an abnormality or failure has occurred.

Further, in the example related to this effect processing, the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled by the setting operation by the player, but the control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is performed. Is not necessarily performed by the operation by the player, for example, it is controlled based on the result of the jackpot judgment, or the setting to the automatic button effect state itself is not performed, and the automatic effect function always functions. It may be provided as a playable gaming machine.

[Movable production triggered by the establishment of conditions other than the conditions for design games]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), when the game ball is accepted at the starting port (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), a determination regarding hit is made. As a result, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game in which a large number of game balls can be acquired is executed after executing the symbol variation in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, and after the jackpot game, it is advantageous to the player. It is possible to control the game state (time saving state, probability change state). Further, while such a symbol game is performed, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, various notice effects such as a timer effect, an operation effect, a look-ahead effect, etc., in addition to the effect pattern, are produced according to the result of the determination regarding the hit. Etc.) are made feasible, and as mentioned above, the game is maintained in the interest of the game until the big hit game is performed.

However, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 and the back middle movable effect unit 3200, specific There is a concern that the decorative member SDY (sudare) and the like will become monotonous, and it will be difficult to maintain the pachinko machine 1 at a high operating rate for a long period of time.

Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, even when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (start condition of the symbol game) is satisfied, the display content and movement on the effect display device 1600 are possible. It is possible to execute a process that can change the behavior of the decoration. That is, in this case, the display change and the movement of the movable body appear in a mode beyond the category of the symbol game, and the monotony is eliminated, so that the pachinko machine 1 is maintained at a high operating rate for a long period of time. Can be expected.

Here, when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (start condition of the symbol game) is satisfied, the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body change. As a method for causing the above, for example, each method listed below can be assumed. In addition, in order to change the display contents on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, any of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a method different from any of the methods listed below may be adopted, but a situation in which the symbol variation is not executed tentatively (the processing flag shown in FIG. 256 is "0" and the number of pending numbers is set. Is "0"), the above-mentioned other conditions must be satisfied, and even if the other conditions are satisfied in the situation, the display contents on the effect display device 1600 and the display contents It must be capable of causing changes in the behavior of the movable ornament.
-A method in which a production lottery that has nothing to do with symbol fluctuation is regularly executed, and the fact that a specific result is obtained in this production lottery is regarded as "the establishment of another condition" described above.-The cumulative number of operations for a specific operation means The time is measured (for example, when the power is turned on) by the calculation process in the RTC (real-time clock) function or the peripheral control MPU1511a (or the main control MPU1310a). (Measure the time from), and the above-mentioned "satisfaction of another condition" is defined as the time when the measured time reaches a predetermined time.

Generally, in pachinko machines, when the time measured by using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, it is assumed that another condition is satisfied, and the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed. Is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is adopted, if the display content or the behavior of the movable body is changed when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, until the change timing is reached. Since it is common to take a relatively long time (at least several hours, etc.), it is possible to change the display contents or the behavior of the movable ornament in spite of such a long time. If something that cannot be done occurs, there is a concern that the interest in playing games will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, RTC state) in which the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set in advance is set as a start condition of the symbol game. Can be generated based on the fact that another specific condition (for example, the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time) is satisfied. Then, in a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, a situation in which the movable decorative body should be in the in-situ position but is not in the in-situ position) and a specific state has not occurred, the symbol changes. When the corresponding restoration operation time arrives, it is possible to start the process of causing the movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation, whereas the movable decoration is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, it is possible to start a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state without starting a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation even when a predetermined restoration operation time arrives. ..

That is, in this case, in the specific state that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol change side is prohibited. Since it is possible to start the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state, a movable body abnormality can be detected by a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution status of the symbol change. It is expected that the movable decoration will be restored and the operation in a specific mode (the operation when another condition is satisfied) will be executed more reliably.

Hereinafter, an example of the processing content when the movable decorative body is operated when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described with reference to FIG. 374. In the example shown in FIG. 374, for convenience of explanation, "RTC state in which a display content different from the previous one appears when it is determined that the elapsed time from power-on has reached a predetermined time by using the RTC function (RTC state). It is described as "a process that can execute a process of generating a specific state) and sequentially operating three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C according to the occurrence timing of the RTC state (specific state)". As described above, the method of causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the start condition of the game is satisfied is not limited to this. As is the case, it is possible to appropriately adopt each of the techniques described below even when other methods are adopted.

Assuming that the state is before the RTC state (specific state) occurs, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, first, the remaining time until the elapsed time from the power-on reaches a predetermined time (until the RTC state occurs). The remaining time) will be updated regularly. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at the timing Rt2, the elapsed time from the power-on reaches a predetermined time to generate the RTC state (specific state), and the RTC state (specific state) is generated. Based on the above, it is possible to execute the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this way, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated based on the establishment of a condition unrelated to the situation of the symbol change (the establishment of the second condition), so that the flow of the game so far can be changed. You will be able to have a sense of expectation as if it will change. At this time, the display content of the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

In order to more preferably raise the expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is made to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes), and the effect is produced. If a big hit is won between the time when the period (RTC state) occurs and the time when it ends, the production progress by the production character that cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) does not occur (normal state) It is more desirable to have a production privilege such as enabling a special production mode).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, a condition irrelevant to the state of symbol fluctuation is satisfied even at the timing Rt1 slightly before the timing Rt2 (for example, 5 seconds before). Based on the condition satisfaction (the first condition is satisfied), the pre-display indicating that the RTC state is about to occur (the second condition is satisfied) can be executed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU1511a according to this example, it is determined whether or not the timing Rt1 has arrived in addition to the timing Rt2 by periodically checking the passage of time since the power is turned on. When it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, the pre-display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, the process (behavior of the movable decoration) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed. .. The "pre-display" can be executed, for example, as a display such as "soon RTC state" or a countdown display toward the timing Rt2.

According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated according to the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movements of these movable bodies are the result of the jackpot determination. Since it is suggested to the player in advance that it is not based on (does not have any jackpot expectation), it is preferable to avoid a decrease in the game interest due to a recognition error by the player. You will be able to.

In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at least during the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, only the display (display that does not conform to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. The decorative pattern (effect pattern) itself is hidden so that it is not displayed. That is, in this case, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated while only the display (display that does not conform to the symbol variation) that does not show any degree of expectation appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600. Since the process of causing the game to be started is started, it is expected that the player's misrecognition will more preferably prevent the game from being deteriorated.

Here, "pre-display appearing at timing Rt1" and "moving body movement appearing at timing Rt2" correspond to "display not conforming to symbol variation" and correspond to "behavior of movable decorative body not conforming to symbol variation", respectively. Is what you do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body occur regardless of the execution status (including the execution status) of the symbol variation at those timings. However, depending on the execution status of the symbol change, the preparations for operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are not ready (the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are in the original positions even though the timing Rt2 has arrived). There is a concern that the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be sequentially operated even though the timing Rt2 has finally arrived.

For example, when any one of several fluctuation patterns is selected as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the movable decorative body A or the movable decorative body B, within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, A movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed, but during the execution of such a movable effect, the movable body operation time (here, when the RTC state occurs) in the above-mentioned RTC state comes. In some cases, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the process of being executed cannot be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". Can be assumed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, not only the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C but also various movable pachinko machines 1 are provided. It is possible to perform movement abnormality determination such as whether or not the decorative body is in the original position (normal state). Then, when it is determined (abnormality determination) that there is a movable decorative body that is not in the normal state in this movable abnormality determination, a predetermined movable decorative body is determined for the movable decorative body that is the determination target, following the processing of the abnormality determination. By executing the restoration process that performs the restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.), it is possible to quickly restore the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. Therefore, it is possible that the movable body operation time in the RTC state described above comes in the middle of executing the restoration process for causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.). If there is, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the middle of the restoration operation cannot be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". Can be assumed.

The "restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation" includes, for example, the start timing of the symbol variation (the timing of acquiring the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation starts) and the symbol variation. It is possible to execute (execute the restoration process based on the acquisition of the command) as at least one of the stop times (the time when the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side is acquired when the symbol fluctuation is stopped). Is.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (peripheral control MPU1511a), first, at least "after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs" arrives, the movable decorative body is specified according to the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in the mode, the movable decorative body (movable decorative body A, movable decorative body B) used within the period is reached. , Movable decoration C) is prohibited so that it is not used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol change side, so that the movable body movement in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable decoration not conforming to the symbol change) It is possible to suppress the situation where the behavior of the body) cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol change side.

However, at this time, even though the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed, there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated if the movable effect is not executed within the effect pattern. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (peripheral control MPU1511a), at the timing Rt1, only the display (display that does not conform to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. That is mentioned above.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, when there is a symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) that is in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives, "what kind of expectation" was displayed until then. The display that does not show the degree (display from timing Rt1) ”is not hidden at this point, and this is displayed over the period until the timing Rt2a when the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) is stopped. I try to maintain it.

According to such a configuration, although the RTC state (specific state) is generated at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a and the symbol is actually changed, the effect display device 1600 is decorated. The effect pattern by the design is hidden, and only the display that does not show any expectation will appear. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable decorative body (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is advanced. It is expected that the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the movable effect corresponding to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a is preferably suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 374, when the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is terminated (stopped) (when the timing Rt2a arrives). , Even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the "display that does not show any expectation (display from timing Rt1)" that was displayed until then is hidden at this point. Then, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started, the symbol variation is responded to even if it is within the operation period of the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state. The display showing the degree of expectation such as the production pattern and the advance notice production is started as usual.

However, even if a new symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed in this way, the "RTC state (specific state) occurs timing Rt2 has arrived. At least as long as it is in the period from then until the movable decoration finishes operating in a specific mode (here, the three movable decorations A, B, and C sequentially operate) depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. Needless to say, the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, the movable effect on the symbol changing side is prohibited, but since the movable body movement corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game by prohibiting the movable effect on the symbol changing side. The decline in interest will be suppressed.

As such a prohibition process, it is determined whether or not the situation should be prohibited at the start of the symbol variation (C variation in the figure), and when it is determined that the situation should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol variation (figure). Among them, C variation) itself may be set as a prohibited target of the movable effect (at least the movable effect using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs is reached in the middle of the corresponding symbol change (C change in the figure), the movable decorative body is moved depending on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state. Even if the "period until the operation in a specific mode (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed" is completed, the movable effect (in this case, the movable effect (in this case, until the symbol variation is completed) is completed. At least, the execution of the movable effect using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C) becomes unacceptable.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the timing for causing the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is set to the timing Rt2a later than the original timing Rt2. There is a concern that the number will decline. However, although the RTC state itself occurs at timing Rt2, the effect privilege due to the occurrence of the RTC state (if a big hit is won between the occurrence and the end of the RTC state, it is controlled to the special effect mode. Etc.) does not occur at timing Rt2, and only the symbol fluctuations (C, D fluctuations in the figure) after the first digested symbol fluctuation after the RTC state occurs are targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to make a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

By the way, before the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is completed (stopped) (until the timing Rt2a arrives). ), "After the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, It can be assumed that the period until the end of the sequential operation by C) elapses. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which the "display without any expectation (display from the timing Rt1)" appears is maintained. This is in the example shown in FIG. 374, in which the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after the timing Rt2) is subject to the RTC effect privilege. This is because it is not.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (peripheral control MPU1511a), at least after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body is a specific mode depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed, even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation comes, the restoration process is triggered by this. By prohibiting this so that (a process of causing a movable decorative body in an abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation) is prohibited, the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (not according to the symbol variation). The behavior of the movable decorative body) can be suppressed from being unable to be performed due to the restoration process on the symbol change side.

According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation is performed according to the symbol change side. Since the process of causing the operation is prohibited and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed, the influence of the execution status of the symbol change It is expected that the movable body abnormality will be restored by a predetermined procedure in the RTC state (specific state) without receiving the above, and the movable ornament will more reliably perform the operation in the above specific mode. ..

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 374, when the game is controlled to the normal gaming state and the symbol variation (A variation (loss) in the figure) according to the jackpot determination is in the middle of the process. It is assumed that the timing Rt1 is reached. Then, as described above, first, at the timing Rt1, as a display that does not conform to the symbol variation, for example, a display such as "RTC state" appears in the background display on the effect display device 1600. Then, the symbol variation (A variation (loss) in the figure) is completed between the display such as "RTC state soon" and the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, and a new symbol is created. Fluctuation (fluctuation B (loss)) is started. Then, the timing Rt2 arrives when the symbol change is in the middle of the process, and at the timing Rt2, three movable ornaments behave in a manner that does not conform to the symbol change. The process of operating the decorations A, B, and C in sequence is executed. The "display not conforming to the symbol variation" from the timing Rt1 is continued for a period until the new symbol variation (variation B (loss) in the figure) is stopped.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 374, "three movable decorative bodies A, depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs" has arrived. In the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5') ", at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, among various movable decorative bodies, It is prohibited to perform both the movable effect on the symbol variation side using C and the restoration process on the symbol variation side. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, even though the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) is executed during the period of timings Rt2 to Rt2a, the effect display on the symbol variation side (the effect display on the symbol variation side (loss)). It is controlled as a period in which neither the display showing the degree of expectation, the movable effect on the symbol change side (movement of the movable body showing the degree of expectation), or the restoration process on the symbol change side is executed (No. 1). One limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 374, during the period from timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display showing the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expected). The movement of the movable body whose degree is indicated) and the restoration process on the symbol change side are both controlled as a period during which they are not executed (second limitation).

It should be noted that such control at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a (neither the effect display on the symbol variation side (display showing the expectation degree) nor the movable effect (movable body movement showing the expectation degree) is executed) Even if the symbol change during the period is not a loss change but is performed based on the winning of a big hit (big hit change), it is executed. That is, in this case, when no expected effect is executed and the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C reaches the timing Rt2a in the middle of execution, the jackpot symbol suddenly appears. Therefore, as a player who expected to be in the RTC state, he / she will be able to enjoy the fun as a surprise production that exceeds the expectation. After the jackpot symbol appears in this way, the jackpot gaming state occurs while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operating.

Further, as described above, as for the display from the timing Rt1 (only the display in which the decorative symbol is not changed and no expectation is shown), the symbol fluctuation that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is present. It will be hidden at the stop timing Rt2a, and instead, a specific background (such as "in RTC state") after the RTC state has occurred will be displayed. In addition, when a symbol variation (variation pattern C in the figure) is newly started while a specific background (such as "in RTC state") is displayed, an effect display (expectation degree is shown) according to the variation pattern. Will be displayed as usual. However, regarding the movable effect on the symbol change side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, unless the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed, after the timing Rt2a arrives. Will be maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, even if an effect pattern for performing the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination, the movable effect is performed. Although the display in the liquid crystal, the sound, and the lighting of the lamp are performed as usual, the movable decorative body is prevented from operating.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 374, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs arrives, the three movable decorative bodies A and B depend on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state. In the period until the sequential operation by C and C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5') ", the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation (here, the start of the symbol fluctuation). Even if the time (time, stop time) arrives, it is prohibited to perform the restoration process (the process of causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform the predetermined restoration operation). .. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at the timing Rt2a, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) and the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the figure) )) The start time (restoration operation time) has come, but in these restoration operation times, even if there is a movable decoration in an abnormal state, it is restored to the movable decoration. No processing is performed.

However, during the period of timing Rt2 to Rt5 (when abnormal, timing Rt2 to Rt5'), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol change side in this way, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state. Judge whether or not it is. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body A is, for example, after moving the movable decorative body A in the original position to a predetermined effect position (first position), the movable decorative body A is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body A is moved to the original position.

Next, at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is completed, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body B is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body B is, for example, after moving the movable decorative body B in the original position to a predetermined effect position (second position), the movable decorative body B is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body B is moved to the original position.

Then, at the timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is completed, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body C is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C is, for example, after moving the movable decorative body C in the original position to a predetermined effect position (third position), the movable decorative body C is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body C is moved to the original position.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (e), when the timing Rt5 after each operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) occurs at the time of occurrence. The "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" is terminated, and the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state by any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, a process of causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation. Is executable. However, while executing a series of movable body movements (here, sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) when the RTC state occurs, the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is predetermined. If the player feels that the restoration operation is being performed, it will be annoying, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed by a series of movable body operations (here, three movable bodies) when the RTC state occurs. It is not executed independently as an operation different from the operation (sequential operation by the decorative bodies A, B, and C), but is executed as an operation of a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. .. That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation itself for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be made to appear as if it is an operation incorporated as a part of the operation when the RTC state occurs. , The deterioration of the game interest when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be preferably avoided.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), it is assumed that the movable decorative body B is determined to be in an abnormal state at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is completed. However, based on the result of the abnormality determination, it is not a process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation), but an abnormal time including an operation of returning (restoring) the movable decorative body B. It is possible to execute the process of operating (special operation) in the operation mode of. After that, the restored (restored) movable decorative body B is not re-operated (normally operated) in the normal operating mode, and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. 374 (e) is not performed. Similar to (timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is completed), it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state, and when the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, the movable decoration is movable. The process of operating the body C in the normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for the normal operation by the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation by the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

According to such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the RTC state occurs (for example, during the operation of the movable decorative body A), the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality occurs Until the timing to operate is reached, it will be left in an abnormal state regardless of the situation on the symbol change side. Then, when the timing for operating the movable decorative body B arrives, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the normal operation mode. Therefore, "three It becomes possible to restore the abnormally generated movable decorative body B while preferably maintaining the effect mode when the RTC state occurs, such as "sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C". That is, in this case, since it is possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as the operation when the RTC state occurs is executed, a predetermined restoration operation is performed for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. The deterioration of the game interest when performing the game will be preferably avoided.

The symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a is sequentially executed by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. It is started when it is in the middle stage and continues until after the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. Therefore, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the figure) and the start time (restoration operation time) of the next symbol fluctuation (D fluctuation (loss) in the figure) have arrived. At that time, the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol change side has already been released. Therefore, when a movable decoration body in an abnormal state exists at that time, the restoration process is executed for the movable decoration body. The Rukoto.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374 (f), when the movable decorative body B is operated in the "special mode including the restoration operation", the "special aspect including the restoration operation" is described in the "normal operation". The movable decorative body B may be restored (returned to the original position) by an operation mode different from the "mode", and may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, at the timing Rt1, only the display (for example, "soon RTC state" or the like) that does not show any expectation level appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600. Then, the display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display content is different based on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, "RTC preparation state"). You may switch to. However, even when the display content is switched at the timing Rt2 to make a new display appear, the display content on the effect display device 1600 does not show any expectation during the period of the timing Rt2 to Rt2a (design variation). It is important to make sure that the display does not conform to.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the case where an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B has been described, but when the movable decorative bodies A and C are operated, even if an abnormality determination is made, the operation mode in the normal state can be obtained. Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special mode including a restoration operation.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, the operation time of the movable body for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set as the occurrence time of the RTC state (specific state). However, the operation time of the movable body may be set at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the RTC state (specific state) occurred.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, based on the arrival of the timings Rt1 and Rt2 in which the conditions are satisfied based on the function (RTC function) that does not conform to the symbol variation on the peripheral control MPU1511a side, "not conforming to the symbol variation". It was decided to start "display" and "behavior of movable ornaments that do not conform to pattern fluctuations". However, instead of this, based on the command transmitted based on the function that does not conform to the symbol variation on the main control MPU1310a side, "display that does not conform to the symbol variation" and "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". May be started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 374, "after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode depending on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state (here, 3). This is prohibited so that the restoration process on the symbol change side is not performed when it is in the period until the end of the sequential operation by the two movable ornaments A, B, and C. The movement of the movable body in a specific mode (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) in the (specific state) is less likely to occur due to a conflict with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration process is set to the execution state. In this situation, the RTC state (specific state) may occur, and eventually the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state) may come. That is, in this case, the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) causes the movable body to move in a specific mode (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) in the RTC state (specific state). There is a concern that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 374, even during the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration processing for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. It is desirable to prohibit this so that it will not be executed.

FIG. 375 is a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 374, in which "in the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko machine 1 are It differs from the example shown in FIG. 374 in that the restoration process is not executed.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 375, in the period from the arrival of the timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timings Rt1 to Rt2), an abnormality determination (or an abnormality determination) is made for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. , Restoration process) I am trying not to execute this itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while the display does not conform to the symbol variation (such as "RTC state soon"), this is restored. There is no such thing, and it will be left in an abnormal state.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 375, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs arrives, first, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are executed prior to executing the process related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state. It is decided to perform an abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) as to whether or not any of the above is in an abnormal state.

As a result of the above abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it is assumed that the movable body operation time (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived, and FIG. The above-mentioned processing (processing related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state) will be performed with reference to. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are operated in sequence, the abnormality determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body to be operated is executed again individually, indicating that there is no abnormality. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 374 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 374 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is executed prior to the start of the process related to the movable body movement in the RTC state, and the process related to the movable body movement in the RTC state is started. Even after that, the second abnormality determination is executed prior to operating the movable decorative body B.

On the other hand, as a result of performing the above abnormality determination prior to executing the process related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state, it is determined that there is an abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. At that time, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed in a form of delaying the arrival of the movable body operation time in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is "a situation in which the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the movement of the movable decorative body in a specific mode has not yet started". By restoring the movable decorative body in an abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation of the movable decorative body in a specific mode can be performed in the "normal mode" instead of the above-mentioned "special mode". Become so.

For example, as shown in FIG. 375 (f), at the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, "the movable body operating time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode. It is assumed that it is determined that there is an abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as a result of performing the abnormality determination when "is not yet started". Then, while maintaining the "state in which the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the movement of the movable decoration in a specific mode has not yet started", the movable decoration determined to be abnormal Will be restored.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 375 (e) and 375 (f), in the RTC state, as compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal. The arrival of the movable body operation time is delayed (delay from timing Rt2 to timing Rt2b in the figure), and the period created by such a delay (timing Rt2 to Rt2b in the figure) should be used. Then, after the movable decorative body that has been determined to be abnormal is restored, the movable body operation time in the RTC state can be reached. After that, when the movable body operation time in the RTC state arrives, the processing as described above is performed with reference to FIG. 374.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 375 (f), it is assumed that when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies. is doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C operate in sequence in the manner described with reference to FIG. 374 (e). Then, when the timing Rt5b arrives after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have been sequentially operated in the normal mode, the "movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is reached. Behavior ”is terminated, and the prohibited state (prohibited state over timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 375 (g), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing). It is assumed that after the abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) in Rt2 is performed (or after the restoration), a new abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C operate in sequence in the manner described with reference to FIG. 374 (f). Then, after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have been sequentially operated in a mode corresponding to each determination result (the movable decorative bodies A and C are normal modes and the movable decorative body B is a special mode). When the timing Rt5b arrives, the "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is terminated, and the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side (prohibited state over timings Rt1 to Rt5b). ) Will be canceled. That is, in this case, for example, when an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B even in the first abnormality determination, the restoration process (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination are performed. Each of the operations in a special mode will be executed.

According to such a configuration, even if a movement abnormality occurs during the movement of the movable body immediately before or immediately after the start of the RTC state, a series of movements of the movable body at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (here, three). (Sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) can be appropriately executed, and the expectation that the RTC state has occurred can be suitably maintained.

In the example shown in FIG. 375, when there is an abnormality in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration process for the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state is sequentially executed, and then the RTC state is set. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body movements (here, sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence. In this case, a series of movable body movements when the RTC state occurs (here, sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored is increased. ) Will be delayed over a longer period of time, but it will be possible to perform a series of moving body movements in the normal mode when the RTC state occurs. Restoration operations for a plurality of movable ornaments may be executed in parallel. In this case, it is possible to suppress the delay time until a series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs. become.

However, even in the example shown in FIG. 375, if the player feels that the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is performing a predetermined restoration operation, it becomes an excitement. There is a concern that the number will decline. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 375 (f) and 375 (g), when the "restoration operation" is completed, the "sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C" is executed (sequential execution). ), So that the series of movable body movements up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be seen as "a series of moving body movements when the RTC state occurs". It is made difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormality occurrence situations, it is possible to display (error code, etc.) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body. In the example shown in FIGS. 375 (f) and 375 (g) as well as the example shown in 374 (f), during the period during which the restoration operation (restoration process) is executed for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. An error occurs in the movable decoration during (during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality judgment) or during the period when the movable decoration B is operated in the special mode (during the operation in the special mode according to the second abnormality judgment). There is no indication (error code, etc.) that indicates that the game is being played. Further, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is completed, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is completed, and further, FIG. 375 ( At the timing when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C start the sequential operation after the restoration operation shown in f) and (g) is completed, the display content on the effect display device 1600 is triggered by the occurrence of these timings. Does not cause any change. These things also make it appear that "a series of movable body movements when the RTC state occurs" is performed, and that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. It can be said that it is important to make it difficult to recognize.

In addition, in FIG. 374 and its alternative example, and in FIG. 375 and its alternative example, as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. The movable decorative body (one, two, or three or more, etc.) used in the movable effect on the symbol change side is based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (starting condition). It suffices as long as it operates in a specific mode at the time when the movable body operates in the specific state in which it occurs.

Further, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, provided so as to be movable). Operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc., and board side movable decoration body provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) ) Etc.) may be used respectively.

However, for example, in FIG. 374 and another example thereof, and in FIG. 375 and another example thereof, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in the RTC state (specific state), as an operating means. When the frame-side movable decoration body (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) that is also used is used, the frame-side movable decoration body that is also used as such an operation means even after the timing Rt2a arrives. There may be a situation in which "operations that do not conform to symbol fluctuations" are being performed.

That is, as described above, in the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the display "display that does not show any expectation (from the timing Rt1)" "Display)" is hidden at this point, and a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation is responded to. It was also mentioned above that the display showing the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the advance notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, during the period in which such a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is performed, the frame-side movable decorative body (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) that is also used as an operating means is used. Even though it is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame-side movable decorative body which is also used as an operation means depending on the effect pattern. A situation that causes confusion in the production can occur. In the period of timings Rt2 to Rt2a (furthermore, the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2 before that), only the display that does not conform to the symbol variation (the display that does not show any expectation) appears. Even if the symbol changes (C change (loss) in the figure), the operation opportunity is not given within the period.

Therefore, even though the specific operating means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the specific operating means is subjected to the result of the jackpot determination. When it is time to give an operation opportunity, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific display (operation instruction image) for prompting the specific operation means to perform an operation. Even if a specific operating means in a state of performing a specific operation is operated, it is desirable not to accept the effect. According to such a configuration, when a specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed, the game is in a situation where an operation opportunity is originally given to the specific operation means. It is possible to make appropriate suggestions to the person. In addition, by not accepting the effect of the operation for the specific operation means, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of failure or abnormality due to the operation being performed on the specific operation means in the operating state. It will be expected.

However, during the execution period of the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted even though the specific display prompting the operation for the specific operation means is performed. If such a thing happens frequently, the game entertainment may be reduced due to the lack of progress in the production. Therefore, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be movable, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like), the operation effect is performed within the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination. The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high generation rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, during the operation period of the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in which the generation rate of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively high. When it is given, it is desirable that the display related to the operation instruction image and the effect reception (predetermined effect according to the effect reception) at the time of operation are executed as usual.

That is, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be movable (for example, vibration), the sword decorative body 5001 and the like), the design changes according to the jackpot determination. A movable decorative body capable of operating a specific operating means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) having a relatively low rate of occurrence of an operation effect within the movable body at the time when the movable body operates in the RTC state (specific state). By using it as one, the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, but the movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body (for example)). For example, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production time for giving an operation opportunity according to the result of the jackpot determination is reached for the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (preferably a specific operating means in which the rate of occurrence of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively low) is a movable body in the RTC state (specific state). When it is used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the time of operation, when the RTC state occurs, the operation is independent of the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. It is desirable that the operation is performed by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). According to such a configuration, a special operation (see FIG. 374) or a restoration operation (see FIG. 375) is executed for any one of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. However, it becomes possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the symbol variation due to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being affected by (delay, etc.) due to these operations. In this case, it is desirable that all of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C be used as board-side movable decorative bodies. As a result, even if any of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in the restoration operation, the possibility of interference with the movable decorative body is eliminated, and the door frame 3 side is provided. The operation by the frame-side movable decoration can be executed in parallel.

Then, on this, after the RTC state (specific state) is generated, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, the specific operating means (for example, the sword decorative body) in which the occurrence rate of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively low is relatively low. When the time required to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation according to 5001)) (the operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) is set as the "specific time", any of the effect patterns according to the jackpot judgment is executed. Even in this case, as long as at least a "specific time" does not elapse after the symbol variation starts (the effect pattern starts), a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the effect pattern (here, the frame side movable decoration). It is desirable to set each effect pattern (timing for giving an operation opportunity) so that the body (for example, the operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001) does not arrive.

According to such a configuration, in FIG. 374 and its alternative example, and in FIG. 375 and its alternative example, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, the symbol variation is within the symbol variation. By the time the operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decoration body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state) Since the operation) has already been completed and the effect can be accepted, the effect when the RTC state occurs can be enhanced without sacrificing the effect on the symbol change side.

Further, as described above, in view of the fact that the usual effect control is allowed only for the symbol variation after the symbol variation that is first digested after the RTC state occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, , The operation that does not conform to the symbol variation due to the sword decoration 5001) (the operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the symbol variation that is first digested after that is forced to start later than this, the frame-side movable ornament (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is corresponding to the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ) Allows a margin to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation in advance.

Further, when the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In executing this, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is performed instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to execute the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the operation of the above, or to perform the operation of the normal mode after performing the restoration operation. In this case, the "special mode including the restoration operation" also restores (returns to the original position) the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) by an operation mode different from the "normal operation mode". It may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001).

Then, the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is the "normal mode", the "special mode including the restoration operation", and the "restoration operation". Regardless of which mode of "the mode of performing the operation of the normal mode in the subsequent manner", unless the operation is completed, the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is used. It is more desirable to make settings related to each effect pattern so that the timing at which the operation opportunity is given does not come. According to such a configuration, regardless of which of the effect patterns corresponding to the jackpot determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). Regardless of whether the operation is executed in the normal mode or the mode when an abnormality is determined, the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is provided only after the operation is completed. On the other hand, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity.

Further, when an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is received, at least one of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the effect reception. You may make it possible to execute a specific movable effect. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation by the frame-side movable decoration (RTC). Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state) has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the above three movable ornaments A, B, and C may still be in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is given. It will not be possible to accept productions, and there is concern that the interest in games will decline. Therefore, when the time from the timing Rt2 required to complete the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in the normal state is set as the "special time", the jackpot determination is made. Regardless of which of the effect patterns according to the above is executed, as long as neither the above "specific time" nor the "special time" elapses after the symbol variation starts (the effect pattern starts). , Each effect pattern (inside operation opportunity grant timing) so that a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the effect pattern (here, an operation opportunity for the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) does not come). It is desirable to make the settings related to.

When the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is restored. It is desirable to prohibit the timing Rt2 so that the timing Rt2 arrives while maintaining the abnormal state.

On the other hand, among the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, this is the case for a specific movable decorative body (for example, a movable decorative body A having a fast operation order, a movable decorative body having a long time required for a restoration operation, and the like). When an abnormal state occurs within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is prohibited, but the movable decoration different from the specific movable decoration (for example, the operation order is slow). For movable decorative body B (or movable decorative body C) or movable decorative body that requires a short time for restoration operation), if this is in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, restoration for the movable decorative body is performed. The process (restoration operation) may be performed without being prohibited. For example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration body B (or the movable decoration body C) does not need to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decoration body A moves when the RTC occurs. This is because if it can be completed during the period, the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be executed in the normal state mode.

Further, the timing at which the series of operations of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the RTC state is generated, and the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) are started. It may be different from the timing.

[Restoration processing for movable abnormalities with less influence on movable effects]
As described above, this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) responds to symbol fluctuations when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately, a situation in which a specific state has not occurred). When the restoration operation time (for example, the start time or the stop time of the symbol variation) arrives, it is possible to execute a process of causing the specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the situation of the production, it will be a pleasure and there is a concern that the interest of the game will be deteriorated.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "start time of symbol change" is set as "restoration operation time corresponding to symbol change". Then, as shown in FIG. 376, assuming that the timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation is started has arrived in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, at least the following processes are performed in the peripheral control MPU1511a. Will be executed.
-Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation is started, the effect pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is set, and the set effect pattern is changed. Processing to advance the production ・ Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation), it is specified. Processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body of

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 376, it is assumed that "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the effect progress related to the "specific effect pattern capable of operating the specific movable ornament at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable ornament A situation will appear in which the processing to be performed is parallel to each other.

In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern can be executed, an effect pattern (relatively expected degree) that has an effect paired relationship with the specific effect pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. Then, in the effect pattern having a pair relationship (the effect pattern with a relatively low expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, but the specific timing tm2 is reached. It is made so that the same mode of production as in the case of "a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation (a production pattern with a relatively high expectation)" is performed. NS. In this way, by preparing two effect patterns (an effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body and an effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body) that are in a paired relationship in a directing manner, the specific timing tm2 is reached. (For example, the predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect having a color rendering property of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the specific movable ornament operates). Will become feasible, and the game entertainment will be suitably maintained by such a color rendering index.

However, if there is a case where the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is still in the execution state even when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the symbol variation is started, the specific timing is specified. Despite the arrival of tm2, it becomes clear that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where it cannot perform a directing operation. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the color rendering index will decline.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 376, among the effect patterns, the effect progress related to "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2" and a predetermined effect for the specific movable decorative body. When a situation appears in which the process of performing the restore operation (restoration process based on the restore operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation) is performed in parallel, "specific" The process of causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation "is completed. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation", but in the following explanation, "whether the abnormal state is resolved or not" The process in which the restoration operation for a specific movable ornament is repeatedly performed until a predetermined upper limit is reached ”will be described.

More specifically, with respect to the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation", the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decoration is abnormal. The time required for this to be done will be different. For example, when the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decoration, "a predetermined restoration for a specific movable decoration" is performed. The timing tx at which the "processing to perform the operation" is completed also arrives at a relatively early time, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for a specific movable ornament fails and is restored (restored) is performed. As the number increases, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed is postponed in a delayed manner. And at the latest, when the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration has failed and has not been restored (restored) yet, but the timing tx is exceeded when the restoration operation is executed again, the specific movable decoration By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while keeping the body in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation until the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoration status is completed. Will be.

In addition, when it is assumed that x time is required to perform the restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body once, one symbol is established so that the relationship "x time x n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2" is established. The upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is terminated even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed when the upper limit number n is reached. By doing so, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation may be completed before the arrival of the specific timing tm2 regardless of the restoration status.

According to such a configuration, the effect progress related to the specific effect pattern capable of operating the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. When a certain situation appears, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation is completed before the arrival of the specific timing tm2 regardless of the restoration status. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decoration is restored before the arrival of the specific timing tm2, but also when the specific movable decoration is not restored, the specific timing tm2 is specific. Since the movable decorative body is brought into a stopped state, it is possible to suitably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decoration is stopped at a position different from the original position, some behavior may occur when the specific timing tm2 arrives, or the movable decoration does not operate. Even so, it is possible to give hope that the lamp of the movable decoration may emit light (if the lamp of the movable decoration emits light when the effect operation by the movable decoration is performed). ..

However, in reality, if a specific movable decorative body is performing a restoration operation while the above-mentioned predetermined effect is being performed, it has a color rendering property as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the restoration status. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the game entertainment.

As a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result hit by an attack) appears in the super reach effect, and operates if the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as "not", it is possible to exemplify "a display effect that appears in advance in a form that incites whether or not a specific display result appears", and a specific movable decorative body is "a display effect". When it is provided as "a thing that operates based on the fact that the effect is accepted by the operation by the player (or the effect is accepted but does not operate)", "an effect that causes a specific display that encourages the player to operate" appears. Can be exemplified.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 376, the specific movable decoration recovers (restores) from the abnormal state at the timing tx when the "process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed. It is assumed that it will be in a normal state. In this way, even if the state is abnormal at the start of the fluctuation (or the "restoration operation time" such as when the symbol was stopped last time), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation arrives after the state is restored to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to produce and operate a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, at the timing tx when the "process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the specific movable decoration cannot recover (restore) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more accurately, the timing tx) until the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation time arrives. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to produce the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. You will be able to do it.

However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to be provided with movable ornaments that have a more complicated structure and perform multi-step movements, and such movable ornaments have a longer time to complete as a restoration process. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or an effect pattern that is in a pair relationship with the specific effect pattern, when those effect patterns are started. Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, it is within a time shorter than the time required from the start of the symbol variation to the arrival of the specific timing tm2 (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. That is, in this case, every time a specific movable decoration becomes abnormal, it can be restored only in a simple and first-aid manner, which accelerates the deterioration of the specific movable decoration. It can also be.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and when the symbol variation is started, the main control MPU1310a side When the special effect pattern is selected based on the command to be sent, a specific movable state is performed while the special effect pattern is produced (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special effect pattern is performed). It is controlled so that the decorative body is not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the decorative body is operated) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 377 (a) and 377 (d), as a result of the arrival of the timing tm11 at which the symbol variation is started in the situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the effect progress related to the special effect pattern. And when a situation appears in which the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation is performed in parallel, at least while a special effect pattern is being performed (the period until the symbol is stopped). Allows this to continue without terminating the restore process.

More specifically, in the restoration process started from the timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body. Even in this case, the restoration process is not terminated at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is executed for the entire period thereof.

According to such a configuration, when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process in a more full-scale manner (for example, normal diagnosis even after restoration) is performed aiming at the time when the above-mentioned special effect pattern is performed. Since it will be possible to perform additional operations, etc.), this special effect pattern will function as an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and the player will be carefully restored in this way. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent production with peace of mind by watching the situation. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special production pattern so that it can be selected only when the player loses the prize in the big hit judgment. In addition, it is desirable that a unique display mode such as "This is an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while" appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 377 (a) and 377 (d), the timing tm11 arrives when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not terminated and is continued even after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern is terminated. According to such a configuration, the restriction that "even though an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol is changed" is eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern ends, if the hold digestion is not interrupted and the effect pattern corresponding to the new symbol variation is performed, the next restoration operation time (here, the next time) The time to start changing the design) will come. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still being continued, it is determined that the specific movable ornament is still in an abnormal state (not located in the original position, etc.). Will be done. Then, based on the determination, if the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol change is performed. Since only the restoration process can be performed, the content of the process is naturally limited, and the inability to adequately deal with the abnormality may accelerate the deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. ..

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 377 (b) and 377 (d), the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. Occasionally, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) arrives, the restoration process in the running state is not terminated and this is continued in a form that straddles the next restoration operation time. .. According to such a configuration, no matter what the situation is when the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is being executed, "despite the fact that an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration". Since the restriction that "the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol changes are performed" is eliminated, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

However, as shown in FIGS. 377 (c) and 377 (d), the new symbol variation is started as a result of the start of the new symbol variation while the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. As a result, "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 377 (a) to 377 (c), it is started from the timing tm11 regardless of the game and the production status (further, the restoration status, etc.) after the special production pattern is completed. With respect to the timing tx at which the “process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation” is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol variation arrives (more preferably). It is desirable to finish within a shorter time than (the time until the predetermined production is performed). Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (time required for digesting the special effect pattern), the specific movable time is relatively long until the time of timing tm12 to tx ends. It will be possible to continue the restoration process for the ornament.

If a situation appears in which the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed after the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is completed, the effect is described. The restoration process is not completed within the new special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and the restoration process is straddled three or more times (effect pattern). One restoration process may be continued in a form (the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods).

In the example shown in FIG. 377, at the timing tx when the "process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the specific movable decoration is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. It is assumed that it will be in a state. In this way, by continuing one restoration process across the next restoration operation period (here, the next symbol change start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be made recoverable, and it becomes possible to produce a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, despite the fact that one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation period (here, the next symbol change start time), a specific movable ornament is abnormal at timing tx. When the state cannot be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained until the symbol variation is completed from the timing tx and the next restoration operation time is further reached. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to produce the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. You will be able to do it.

In a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, the specific movable decorative body is specified each time the restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) comes. If the restoration process for the movable decoration is started many times, if the specific movable decoration is irreparably damaged, the specific movable decoration cannot be restored, but the specific movable decoration cannot be restored. There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline as the restoration process for the body is repeated. Therefore, even though the restoration operation time has reached a predetermined upper limit after the specific movable decoration is put into an abnormal state (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decoration) reaches the predetermined upper limit). However, when it has not been restored from the abnormal state, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration process for a specific movable ornament even if a new restoration operation time comes after that.

However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is put into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the above predetermined upper limit number of times. , When a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed, a predetermined upper limit number of special effect patterns and their One restoration process may be continued in a form straddling the next production pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is put into an abnormal state, it means that the restoration operation time has reached a predetermined upper limit number, but the restoration operation time has not been restored from the abnormal state. Even when the "+1" th restoration operation time arrives, the restoration process for a specific movable ornament is continued without being completed. In this way, with respect to the mode in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation period, the predetermined upper limit number may be reached no matter how many times the restoration operation period arrives while the one restoration operation is continued. It is desirable that the count is treated as one restoration process so that the restoration process is not completed so that the restoration process in a more full-scale manner is not hindered.

By the way, regarding such a restoration process (a restoration process performed based on a restoration operation time corresponding to a symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100 or a back) provided on the game board 5 side is provided. In addition to the medium movable production unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.), the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the same manner as described above. NS. However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative bodies (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be movable, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like) that are also used as the operating means are , It is possible to restore (return) in a manner different from the case of the specific movable decorative body (board side movable decorative body) described above.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, a movable operation for giving an operation opportunity to give an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the period when the symbol is changed. A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 341) is prepared. And, as described above, in such an operation opportunity granting effect, "a process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 341 (f))". "Process to generate the production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))", and "display prompting the operation (character display such as" push "and bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period". ) (See FIG. 341 (f)) ”. As a result, when the sword decoration body 5001 that has been moved to the operation position is operated (here, a pushing operation) and the production is received, the "specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory)" is received based on the production reception. ) And the process of producing a movable decorative body on the board side (see FIG. 341 (g)) and the process of causing a change in the displayed contents (see FIG. 341 (g)). Become. The board-side movable decorative body that is produced by this process may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377.

However, among such operation opportunity granting effects, the "process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force" is not executed normally when the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state. While it is possible to execute when it is in the state, the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state for the "process to generate the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001" and the "process to display the operation prompting". It is made feasible at both a certain time and an abnormal state. Therefore, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player who sees the "display prompting the operation" operates the sword decoration body 5001 and receives the effect, the effect is received. "Processing for producing a movable decorative body on the board side such as a specific decorative member SDY (sudare)" and "processing for causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600" are performed, respectively. Not only that, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration body 5001 receives an external force by such an operation by the player and the operation part operates, so that the abnormal state. Can occur in some cases.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 provided so as to be movable, a sword decorative body 5001 or the like) that is also used as an operating means is used. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377, a return process for applying a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) to the original position when an abnormal state occurs. The restoration process) is performed at each timing of "the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of the symbol variation)" and "after the production is received by the player in the production pattern of the movable operation system". It is made feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable body can be moved by aiming at the timing at the start or stop of the symbol fluctuation (more strictly, after the start or stop). While the process of returning the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing at the start and stop of the symbol change, but also a different unique timing (during the change period). Of these, the frame-side movable decoration (operation) is aimed at the timing when an external force (operation by the player) is applied to the frame-side movable decoration (operation means) and the abnormal state may be resolved). Since the process of restoring (returning) the means) will be performed, it is expected that the return to the original position of the frame-side movable decoration (operating means) in an abnormal state can be realized at an early stage. ..

FIG. 378 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration body 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration body (operating means). be.

As shown in FIG. 378, the effect pattern of the movable operation system (the effect pattern in which the operation opportunity granting effect for giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 is executed during the period when the design is changed) is executed. It is assumed that the "process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position" is executed at the timing tm21. Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operating position, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001" and "a display prompting the operation (character display such as" push "and the effect reception period". If the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player and the production is accepted (timing tm22) while the remaining time of the sword decoration is being executed (timing tm22), "Processing for producing a movable decorative body on the board side" and "processing for causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600" are performed, respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 378, the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377 is operated as the board-side movable decorative body based on the reception of the effect.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 378, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration body 5001 at the timing tm22 when the production reception is received, and the sword decoration body 5001 cannot be returned to the original position. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (movable decoration on the board side) and this cannot be returned to the original position. At this time, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decoration body, but an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration body. Regarding the determination to that effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is executed, and the specific notification sound and display are accompanied by the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001. It is desirable that at least one of the notifications be made. This is because the sword decoration 5001 is "placed within the reach of the player (door frame 3)", and if it is notified that this has become an abnormal state, repair work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be done by the player, the specific movable ornament is "placed out of reach of the player (game board 5)", and this has become an abnormal state. This is because, as a player, nothing can be helped by notifying the player, and simply emphasizing that the movable effect is not executed may promote a decline in the interest of the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 378, an abnormality is found in the specific movable decorative body while performing the "process for producing and operating the specific movable decorative body" based on the fact that the effect is received at the timing tm22. Although it will occur, by allowing this to be executed as usual for the "process that causes a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600", it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is advanced while the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are both in an abnormal state, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm23. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 378, at the timing tm23, the symbol fluctuation already in the pending state is immediately digested (started) (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is started. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 376 is executed as the effect pattern according to the fluctuation. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is produced at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation, but the restoration operation time (here, at the start of the symbol variation). The timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, which is started in (), is within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration status). As described above, it is finished by (until the predetermined production is started).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the sword decoration body 5001 is also "specifically movable decoration" based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (here, when the symbol change starts). It is possible to execute a process of causing the body to perform a predetermined restoration operation and at least a part of the operations in parallel so as to return the operation to the original position (giving a driving force). Moreover, the timing at which such a "process for causing the sword decoration 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is also the same, regardless of the restoration situation, within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, a predetermined effect). It is made to end by (until it starts).

According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable ornament is resolved and the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is performed at the timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of excitement when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

In the example shown in FIG. 378, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable ornament body is started / ended and the timing at which the restoration process for the sword ornament body 5001 is started / ended are the same. However, only one of those timings may be the same, or all of those timings may be different.

Further, regarding the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation", as described with reference to FIG. 377, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. Not only can it be continued after the special effect pattern ends, but also the symbol fluctuations that are on hold after the special effect pattern ends are immediately (for example, 0.6 seconds later) digested (started). In such a situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is crossed, the processing (one restoration processing) can be continued without being completed. It is desirable that the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation can be performed in the same manner as this (the mode described with reference to FIG. 377). That is, in this case, also for the "process of causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation", when a special effect pattern appears, the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is straddled. It will be executed in the form, but it should be terminated regardless of the restoration situation between the start of the next symbol change and the elapse of the time required for the timing tm2 to arrive. Become.

Also, for the sword ornament 5001, after this is made abnormal, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times, and then a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed. When a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis is executed, the special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. Form The restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 may be continued.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 378, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable ornament and the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 are completed at the timing tx, but the restoration fails in both cases. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are both in an abnormal state, and the specific production pattern is produced and advanced without performing the movable production by the specific movable decoration body. Therefore, the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm24.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force (does not apply a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within a period of timings tx to tm2 within a specific effect pattern. Even if it is returned to the original position (returned to the normal state) by the above, the effect operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within the period of timing tx to tm2, which itself is an abnormal situation. Even if a specific movable decorative body is used to perform an effect in such an unreliable situation, there is a high possibility that it will fail. Therefore, avoiding this will prevent a decline in the interest of the game. It can be said that it is desirable to do so.

Further, when the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 fails and the abnormal state is restored again, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed. That is, if the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 fails and a notification is given each time the abnormal state is restored, it gives a misunderstanding as if the player is responsible for not eliminating the abnormal state. Since there is a possibility, the above-mentioned notification (at least one of the specific notification sound and the display notification) should be performed only when the first abnormality that changes from the normal state to the abnormal state occurs to encourage the player to perform the repair work. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 378, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are subjected to the restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) that arrives after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body recovers from the abnormal state. Now, while only the sword decoration body 5001 is in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. 378, the sword decoration body 5001 that was in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 Assuming that the production is accepted by the operation by the player, it is possible to expect that the abnormality generated in the sword decoration body 5001 has been resolved by such an operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decoration body 5001 that was in an abnormal state at the timing tm25 is received for production by the operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is subsequently used. It is possible to apply a driving force to return it to the position (retain it in the original position). At this time, in view of the fact that the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is performed based on the effect reception, the period during which the process of applying the driving force to return the sword ornament 5001 to the original position is performed (once). (Period when the return operation is successful) is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is finished (the specific movable ornament is returned to the original position). It is desirable to terminate the process before it is executed in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, in view of the fact that there is a rare chance that the sword decoration body 5001 that could not be returned by such an external force (operation by the player) has a high possibility of recovery, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed in its original position. If the process of applying the driving force to return to the sword decoration body (returning operation to the sword decoration body 5001) fails, the sword decoration body 5001 is used until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body is completed. By continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position (the return operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is executed again), the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation. It is desirable to encourage help. However, even if this restoration process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 378, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decoration body 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) is successful, and after that, it is assumed. , The sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are both in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is produced and progressed, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm26.

As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 378, the frame-side movable decoration (sword decoration 5001), which is also used as the operating means, is set with respect to the board-side movable decoration (specific movable decoration). In addition to the restoration operation time (at the start of symbol fluctuation) to be performed, the restoration operation time (timing after the production is accepted) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as an operating means, is likely to be in an abnormal state due to direct contact by the player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, the original state Since a large number of opportunities for returning to the position are given and various modes (a mode of returning only by applying a driving force, a mode of returning by using at least an external force) are used as the returning method, the abnormal state is eliminated. There is a high possibility that the game will be less enjoyable.

Regarding the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state is received for the production by the operation by the player, the symbol variation starts. A driving force may be applied to the sword decoration body 5001 with contents (different operation modes) different from the restoration process performed when the time (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the processing is to restore the sword decoration body 5001 by using an external force (operation by the player), it is necessary to perform the processing differently from the processing when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the processing will be executed in a simple manner so that the restoration processing will be completed within the symbol fluctuation regardless of the restoration status, and if the restoration fails, it will be more serious at the next restoration operation time. It is desirable to ensure that the return processing is performed properly.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 378, the restoration operation time (here, the symbol fluctuation start time) has reached a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 has been executed for that number of times. Nevertheless, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) arrives, it is movable when the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 is not newly started. Even when the production pattern of the operation system is started and the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state at the timing tm25 is received by the operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed after the production reception is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (retain in the original position). That is, as described above, the return process after the production is accepted is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decoration body 5001 that could not be returned by an external force (operation by the player) is increasing. Therefore, even in the above-mentioned situation where the return without external force is given up, it is desirable to execute the process without giving up. Therefore, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 341 (f))" and "a display prompting an operation (a character display such as" push "and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period". It is important that the process of performing the display) (see FIG. 341 (f)) ”is also performed as usual even in the above-mentioned situation where the recovery without an external force is given up.

Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is given a first operation opportunity so as to be pushed in while being positioned at the operation position (operate to a specific detection position), and when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the original position, it is pushed (to a specific detection position). When the operation means is provided so as to give a second operation opportunity so as to operate), even if a production reception occurs at the second operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not given, but the driving force for returning to the original position is given only when the production reception occurs at the first operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the effect is received when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of movement of the operation part is relatively small, so it is expected that the possibility that the abnormal state has been resolved is naturally low.

Further, the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state is received by the operation by the player is not necessarily the production reception. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been performed. For example, it may be executed after the production reception period ends.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 374 to 378, the symbol change start time (further, the timing after the reception of the production) is illustrated as the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change. , It may be a predetermined timing that arrives on condition that the symbol change is executed at least, and may be used as at least one of the symbol change start time and the symbol change stop time, for example. When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration process is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped, and this start. The restored process is terminated before the timing tm2 in the specific effect pattern that has been held and digested arrives, or is executed so as to straddle until after the end of the special effect pattern that has been reserved and digested. Each of the above-mentioned processes will be performed.

Further, the frequency of appearance of the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may be different depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special effect state in which the movement frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is more likely to occur as the operation frequency is increased. Therefore, in the special effect state, the normal effect state is generated. It is desirable to enable the game so that the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than that in the case of.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) or a specific movable decorative body, which is also used as an operating means, is in an abnormal state. Occasionally, when the above-mentioned special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. 377, the abnormal state is reached for a period from the start of the effect pattern according to the next symbol variation. One restoration process for the movable ornaments in is continuously feasible. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, a symbol change start time) arrives while one restoration process is continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is again performed. Since it is not started and the restoration process that is already in the execution state is continued without being terminated, it is movable different from the movable decoration that is the target of the restoration process. The problem is when to start the restoration process for the other movable decorative body when the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 377, the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is a new restoration operation time (next) after the arrival of the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern ends. It is designed to be continuously executed without ending even when straddling (the start time of the symbol change). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body other than the specific movable decorative body between the time when the timing tm11 elapses and the time when a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) arrives. In the case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3 or "both method 1 and method 2" or "both method 1 and method 3" is adopted to perform restoration processing on the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to execute.

Method 1: Specify at least when there is a relationship such as "a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, whereas the other movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body". When a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives while one restoration process for the movable ornament is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) ) Has arrived, and a new restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is started.

According to such method 1, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable ornament that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as effective for another movable decoration (frame side movable decoration) for which the restoration process has not yet been executed, and the other movable decoration will be triggered by the timing (new restoration operation time). It becomes possible to newly start the restoration process for the body (frame side movable decoration body). That is, in this case, a situation appears in which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are executed at the same time. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of the movable ornaments is expected.

Method 2: If there is at least a relationship such as "a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations", one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decoration (frame side movable decoration) is not started at that time, and a specific restoration process is performed. After waiting for one restoration process for the movable decoration to be completed, another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for the body) is newly started.

According to such method 2, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable ornament that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as effective for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) for which the restoration process has not yet been executed. In this regard, when starting the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body), we waited for the completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of these movable ornaments is expected.

Method 3: If there is at least a relationship such as "a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations", one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for a specific movable decoration is not executed, but another movable decoration (frame side movable) is triggered by the restoration operation time that arrives after waiting for the restoration processing for a specific movable decoration to be completed. The restoration process for the ornament) is newly started.

According to such method 3, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state and another movable decoration that is not in the execution state yet. It will be treated as invalid for any of the restoration processing for, and unless one restoration processing for a specific movable decoration is completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decoration, the said No processing will be executed for the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even if another movable decoration becomes an abnormal state while one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is in the execution state, the movable decorations can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, and it is expected that the rate of deterioration of these movable decorative bodies will be suppressed.

(Operation button operation check period)
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a), as an effect according to the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a, it is possible to operate by driving the operation button 410 and the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001). As described above, it has become possible to perform an operation-time effect using a drive-type operation means (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for granting benefits by driving as well as operation). However, although it is possible to execute such an operation effect, if some abnormality occurs in these operation means and various operation means cannot operate normally, the player can experience the operation effect in the manner intended by the designer. There is a concern that it will be difficult to make it, and as a result, it will lead to a decline in the interest in the game. Therefore, in this pachinko machine 1, as a part of maintenance related to whether or not the effect during operation can be executed, an operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period and automatic operation confirmation period) described later is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It has been confirmed that the player can experience the operation-time effect of the mode intended by the designer, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Specifically, the operation confirmation period during which the operation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 can be confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. 379. Hereinafter, for convenience, the operation confirmation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described, but the same operation confirmation period may be provided for the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000. The operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword decoration body 5001 may be generated in parallel or sequentially. Further, in order to realize more reliable confirmation work for each member, no overlapping period is provided between the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword decoration body 5001 (avoid overlapping periods). It is preferable to generate them sequentially. FIG. 379 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period and automatic operation confirmation period).

As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed into a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. At that time, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position in the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The effect operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state, and the operation button 410 is projected in a predetermined state. If the operation to return to the normal state is not performed until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is normally operated by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, if the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state, and in such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position. On the other hand, when a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in a protruding state. In such a case, the protrusion position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a push detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is pressed. By such detection of the pressure detection sensor 440, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is pressed in the normal state and that the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state. ..

Further, as the effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are provided. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, for example, during the execution of the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed or repeatedly hit according to the instruction. The pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. On the other hand, in the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, for example, during the execution of the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state, and the effect is changed. By pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state according to the instruction, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with higher expectation than in the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 379, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the operation confirmation period, the operator (player or hall) confirms the operation of whether or not the operation button 410 normally operates in a state of protruding from the normal state. It can be realized at the discretion of the administrator). Specifically, when the condition for generating the operation confirmation period described later is satisfied, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is started, and the operation button 410 is in a normal state for a predetermined time (10 seconds in this embodiment) which is the occurrence period. When the press detection status (operation detection status) is monitored and the press (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is detected, the operation button 410 is projected based on the press detection (operation detection). Change to. On the other hand, even after the condition for generating the arbitrary operation confirmation period was satisfied (while generating the arbitrary operation confirmation period), the pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state for a predetermined time was not detected. In that case, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is terminated when the predetermined time elapses. According to this, for a player or a hall manager who wants to confirm whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, the operation button 410 may be pressed during the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and by pressing the operation button 410, the operation button 410 may be pressed. It is possible to give confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operate, and to execute and provide the operation operation effect using the operation button 410 with peace of mind.

Then, when it is detected that the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed and pressed to the normal state before the predetermined time elapses after the operation button 410 is pressed to bring it into the protruding state. To return to the normal state again, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, if the pressing of the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not detected before the predetermined time elapses, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state by driving after the elapse of the predetermined time. It will be returned. After the arbitrary operation confirmation period is generated, the operation button 410 is pressed to make it in a protruding state, and when the operation button 410 is pressed again to return to the normal state, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is terminated. In such a case, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary time from occurring until a predetermined time elapses after confirming that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated.

The above-mentioned operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) is generated when a predetermined generation condition is satisfied. In this example, the generation condition of the operation confirmation period is configured so that the generation condition is satisfied when the demo effect is executed in order to avoid duplication with the operation operation effect. Specifically, in the demo effect, there is no entry into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for a certain period of time after the effect set in the variable pattern is completed, and the effect set in the variable pattern is It is an effect of waiting for customers when it is not started (information on the progress of the symbol game by the main control MPU 1310a is not received on the peripheral control MPU1511a side for a certain period of time), and is suitable for avoiding duplication with the operation operation effect. In this way, by using the execution time of the demo effect to generate an arbitrary operation confirmation period in the confirmation operation period, the boring time that the effect set in the fluctuation pattern is not started can be set by the operation button 410. Can be changed to a meaningful confirmation time of whether or not is detected and operated normally.

The start of the demonstration effect is an instruction by the main control MPU1310a (for example, the demonstration effect) when the ball has not entered the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for a certain period of time while the symbol game is not in progress. The start command) may be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU1511a side, and the confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) may be generated on the peripheral control MPU1511a side by receiving the transmission. Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, an instruction by the main control MPU 1310a (for example, a demo production start command) is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU1511a side, and by receiving the instruction, the peripheral control MPU1511a side confirms the operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation). Period) may be generated, thereby avoiding duplication with the operation during operation, and confirming whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated before the player starts the game. It is possible to execute and provide an operation-time effect using the operation button 410 with greater peace of mind.

Further, LEDs (each LED of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button) are mounted on the operation button 410, and whether or not an arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred and the progress stage of the arbitrary operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period). The light emitting mode is changed in a plurality of stages according to the state of the operation button 410 in the above. Specifically, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned off. Then, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is set to a specific color (for example, red) and a predetermined amount of light (a light emission mode A for the confirmation period suggesting that the arbitrary operation is possible). ) To emit light. As a result, it is possible to notify the outside that the arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred and that the operation button 410 is requested to be pressed. Then, when the operation button 410 is pressed to make it protrude after the arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is the same color as the case where the operation button 410 is not pressed even once. However, the light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is increased by one step (light emission mode B for a confirmation period suggesting that the vehicle is operating arbitrarily). As a result, even after the operation button 410 is pressed to bring it into a protruding state, it is possible to notify the outside that the operation button 410 is further requested to be pressed. After that, when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state by pressing the operation button 410, the LED of the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are pressed even once until at least the remaining arbitrary operation confirmation period (predetermined time) elapses. Although the color is the same as when the button is not pressed, the light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is weaker than the above-mentioned light emitting modes A and B for the confirmation period (light emitting mode C for the confirmation period suggesting that the arbitrary operation has been completed). As a result, it is possible to notify the outside that the confirmation work in the arbitrary operation confirmation period has been normally performed. Even when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred, the operation button 410 may be made to emit light in a predetermined mode. For example, the operation button 410 may be made to emit light in a mode different from any of the light emitting modes A to C for the operation confirmation period. Such things can be exemplified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 379, after a predetermined waiting period elapses after the arbitrary operation confirmation period ends, the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the player's pressing, and the operation button 410 is in the normal position. There is an automatic operation confirmation period for confirming the origin so that it is located at. In the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is operated so as to move up and down several times near the normal state, and the normal position sensor can detect that the operation button 410 in the normal state is in the normal position. Checking the origin. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is set to a protruding state, and the operation button 410 is operated so as to return to the normal state from the protruding state. At this time, by detecting that the operation button 410 is in the normal state by the normal position sensor, it is possible to grasp that the operation button 410 is operating in the normal position. According to this, it is possible to ensure that the operation button 410 operates at a normal position, and it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from being displaced when the effect is executed using the operation button 410.

Further, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is set to be longer than the automatic operation confirmation period. Specifically, while the arbitrary operation confirmation period is set to a predetermined time of "10 seconds" as described above, the automatic operation confirmation period is a short time of "5 seconds" as the time required for a series of operations. Is set. In the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 operates regardless of the player's pressing to confirm the origin, in other words, the operation confirmation of the drive system proceeds automatically. On the other hand, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period, if the player does not press the operation button 410 in the normal state, the operation button 410 does not change to the protruding state, and if the player does not press the button in the protruding state, The protruding state is maintained until the arbitrary operation confirmation period elapses. Therefore, by making the arbitrary operation confirmation period longer than the automatic operation period, the operation button 410 is not missed, and the appearance of the operation button 410 in the protruding state is changed by driving. While it is possible to have the player and the hall manager carefully check for a long period of time in the absence of such a situation, it is possible to quickly end the operation check (automatic operation period) of the drive system, which does not require such a long-term check. It is possible, and the efficiency of a series of confirmation work of the driven operation means can be improved.

In the waiting period between the arbitrary operation confirmation period and the automatic operation confirmation period, the frame side lens 417 or the second frame side lens 417 provided on the periphery of the operation button 410 is operated by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332. A peripheral confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the button decoration portion 411b (LEDs of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423) is turned on. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided on the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 as described above, and the player's operation can be accepted at the time of presenting the effect. Further, in the peripheral confirmation period, when any of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are lit. Depending on the situation, the mode in which the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b are lit (for example, the mode of light emission such as brightness and color) is different. Therefore, in the peripheral confirmation period, by pressing the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, it is possible to confirm whether or not the pressing is normally recognized, and the frame side lens 417 and the first It is possible to confirm whether or not the two-button decoration part 411b lights up normally, and the drive-type operation means itself is confirmed by a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period, peripheral confirmation period, automatic operation confirmation period). Not only that, it is also possible to check the related members around it.

Further, if the operation button 410 is not pressed during the arbitrary operation confirmation period and the state is not projected, the peripheral confirmation period may not be provided after that. In such a case, even if the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b do not light up, and the series of operation confirmation period is shortened. It becomes.

Further, before the series of operation confirmation periods, a vibration confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm the vibration of whether or not the vibration motor 424 provided in the effect operation unit 400 is operated by operating the operation button 410. There is. In the vibration confirmation period, when the operation button 410 is pressed, the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 vibrates. Therefore, during the vibration confirmation period, by pressing the operation button 410, it is possible to confirm whether or not the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 vibrates normally. In addition, by generating a series of operation confirmation periods at a time that does not overlap with the vibration confirmation period, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the series of operation confirmation periods from being hindered by the vibration of the vibration confirmation period, and various confirmation operations can be performed efficiently. realizable.

Further, when the predetermined protrusion start condition that is satisfied in the progress process of the symbol game is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state, but due to some abnormality, the operation button 410 is moved by the normal position sensor. The operation button 410 may not be in the normal position because it has not been detected as a normal state. The cause is, for example, when a problem occurs when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state when a predetermined protrusion end condition is satisfied, or the player does not intentionally return the operation button 410 to the normal state. It is possible that this is the case. In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, and control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 380 (A), except for a series of operation confirmation periods, a special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game at the start of fluctuation (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) and a special corresponding to the end of the symbol game. Whether the operation button 410 is abnormally protruding at the end of the fluctuation of the symbol (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern) and at the timing of the start of the above-mentioned demo production (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods). If it is determined whether or not (whether or not it is in the normal position) and it is determined that the state is abnormally protruding (not in the normal position), control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state. Demonstration. According to this, even when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state at a timing unrelated to the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern It prevents the misunderstanding that the operation button 410 may have been operated as a part of the production based on the above. Further, even if an effect using the operation button 410 is performed after the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, it is guaranteed that the operation button 410 operates normally, and the effect is lowered. It prevents you from doing so.

If it is set to generate an arbitrary operation confirmation period in the confirmation operation period by using the execution time of the demo production as described above, the operation button 410 is abnormal when the demo production is started. When the operation button 410 is in a protruding state and control for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state (control for returning to a normal position) is performed, the start of a series of operation check periods may be delayed. For example, if the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state at the start timing of the demo production (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), the operation confirmation period is even at the start timing of the series of operation confirmation periods. When the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (control to return to the normal position) is given priority, and the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (when the operation button 410 returns to the normal position). Based on this, the entire series of operation check periods may be delayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 380 (B), in the series of operation confirmation periods, it corresponds to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) and the end of the symbol game. At the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), it is not determined whether the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether it is not in the normal position), and it is abnormal. Even in the case of the protruding state (not the normal position), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed at that time. This is to give priority to the operation confirmation as to whether or not the operation button 410 is pressed in the arbitrary operation confirmation period described above to be in a protruding state, and the operation button arbitrarily generated in the arbitrary operation confirmation period is given priority. This is to maintain the protruding state of 410 so as not to be terminated by the progress of the symbol game. In this way, when the operation button 410 is abnormally projected during the operation confirmation period, the operation is performed at the end of the operation confirmation period, as in the case where the player presses and protrudes. Control is performed to return the button 410. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state before the predetermined period as the operation check period elapses, the abnormality does not have to wait for the predetermined period to elapse. The operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state.

(Abnormality detection of sword decoration)
Next, although the sword blade portion 5011 (see FIGS. 278 to 281) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the above-mentioned sword effect operation unit 5000 should be in the sword-delivered state, the abnormality is not in the sword-delivered state. The detection will be described with reference to FIG. 381. FIG. 381 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword decoration body 5001 and the abnormality detection.

The sword decoration body 5001 can be changed into a sword-delivered state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed and a sword-drawn state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is exposed (second sword-drawn state). In the above-mentioned production example, a state between the sword delivery state and the sword withdrawal state (first sword withdrawal state) was used as the production using the sword decoration body 5001, but in this example, such a state is used. It will not be used. The sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a sword delivery position sensor capable of detecting that the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword delivery state and a sword removal position sensor capable of detecting that the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword delivery state. ing. Further, the sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the sword blade portion 5011 from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state. In this example, the sword-delivered state corresponds to an operable state in which the player can pull out the blade portion 5011, and the sword-drawn state corresponds to an inoperable state in which the player cannot pull out the blade portion 5011. ..

Further, as an effect set in the variable pattern, an effect using the sword decoration body 5011 is set. As shown in FIG. 381 (A), in the production using the sword decoration body 5001, an operation acceptance period in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state can be pulled out is generated within the production time. During the operation acceptance period, the blade portion 5011 in the sword-delivered state is brought into the sword-drawn state according to the instruction in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 (for example, the display of "sword-pulled"), thereby producing a predetermined effect. You can get the result. Then, when the player pulls out the sword decoration body 5001 and puts the sword blade portion 5011 in the sword-drawn state within the operation acceptance period, the control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword-delivered state is performed at the end of the production time. Will be done. Further, if the player does not pull out the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation acceptance period and the sword blade portion 5011 is left in the sword delivery state, the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword delivery state at the end of the operation acceptance period. To hold. It should be noted that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using at least the operation button 410 in the normal state among the effects using the operation buttons 410 described above. There is. That is, when the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 can be pulled out with higher expectation than when the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed.

As shown in FIG. 381 (B), the blade portion 5011 should be in the sword-delivered state except during the operation acceptance period, but the period other than the operation acceptance period when the sword is not in the sword-delivered state is a predetermined period (in this example). When it is determined that the sword decoration body 5001 has reached an abnormality (2 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state is performed. That is, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 when the blade portion 5011 is in the sword-pulled state or in the state between the sword-drawn state and the sword-delivered state other than the operation acceptance period. It has become. In this example, from the time when the detection state of the above-mentioned sword delivery position sensor is in the OFF state (the state in which the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword delivery state), the above-mentioned predetermined period (the sword delivery state other than the operation acceptance period) The measurement is to be started for a period that is not.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 381 (C), during the operation acceptance period, the blade portion 5011 should be in the sword-delivered state unless the player pulls out the sword ornament 5001. When it is determined that the predetermined period (2 seconds in this example) has been reached, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state is performed. Will be done. That is, during the operation acceptance period, when the player pulls out the sword decoration body 5001, the sword blade portion 5011 is located in the sword pulling state. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in 5001, and in this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated so that the detection state of the sword delivery position sensor is ON (the state in which the blade portion 5011 is in the sword delivery state). .. In this example, the processing time of one cycle for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword-delivered state by the sword-delivered restoration control is set to "0.5 seconds".

Further, the operation acceptance period is set to be longer than the time until it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 (4 seconds in this example). During the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, the sword restoration control for returning the sword blade 5011 to the sword delivery state is performed, but the operation reception is performed after returning to the sword delivery state. The remaining period of the period is likely to occur, and in the remaining period, the player can pull out the sword ornament 5001. Therefore, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation acceptance period, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of pulling out the sword decoration body 5001 from being hindered.

As described above, the determination of whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in the normal position) is determined at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the fluctuation pattern). At the start of the production), at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), and at the timing of the start of the above-mentioned demo production. That is, during the operation acceptance period of the operation button 410 in which the operation button 410 can be pressed, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in the normal position). Not. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 even during the operation acceptance period in which the sword decoration body 5001 can be pulled out. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation acceptance period, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player cannot pull out the sword decoration body 5001 as much as possible. Further, the production using the sword decoration body 5001 has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the production using at least the operation button 410 in the normal state among the productions using the operation buttons 410. , It is possible to prevent overlooking the production result in such a highly expected production.

In this example, the period during which the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword-delivered state reaches a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example) except when the player pulls out the sword ornament 5001 within the operation acceptance period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, but it is said that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 only when the blade part 5011 is not in the sword delivery state at the start of the operation acceptance period. You may decide. For example, the blade portion 5011 is in the sword delivery state at the start of the operation acceptance period, and after the start of the operation acceptance period, it is not known whether the player should completely remove the sword decoration body 5001, and the blade portion 5011 is removed. There is a possibility that the sword is left in a state between the state and the sword delivery state for a predetermined period, but in such a case, it is possible to prevent it from being determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001. ..

In addition, when giving an instruction in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 or the like regarding the removal of the sword of the sword decoration body 5001, the instruction is continued regardless of the occurrence or elimination of the abnormality of the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation acceptance period. You may want to do it. For example, during the operation acceptance period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, the sword restoration control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state is performed, but the "sword restoration control is completed". The instruction in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 and the like is continued even during "until the process" and "the remaining period of the operation acceptance period after the blade portion 5011 is returned to the sword delivery state". In addition, if the player pulls out the sword ornament 5001 in accordance with the instruction "until the sword restoration control is completed", the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword-drawing state, and the sword is restored. The control is forcibly terminated and the instruction is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the timing of participation in the effect of pulling out the sword decoration body 5001 from being hindered by the abnormality of the sword decoration body 5001.

Further, in this example, although the sword restoration control is performed to return the sword blade 5011 to the sword delivery state, it is possible that the sword blade 5011 cannot be returned to the sword delivery state due to a foreign object being caught. In this case, one cycle of sword restoration control, which should be completed in "0.5 seconds", may be repeated for a plurality of cycles (for example, 10 cycles). In this case, the sword restoration control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state will continue beyond the operation acceptance period, but in such a case, the operation is performed while the sword restoration control is being performed. The result effect may be derived at the end of the reception period, and the sword restoration control may be continued even after the result effect is derived. As a result, even in a situation where the abnormality of the sword decoration body 5001 cannot be resolved, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the game entertainment is lowered without hindering the progress of the production.

(Abnormality judgment timing of operation buttons)
Next, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 382. FIG. 382 is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body provided on the operation button 410 and the game board 5. In this example, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player will be described in comparison with the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body that the player cannot operate.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. ), And can be changed to. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. At that time, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position in the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 382 (A), at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), and at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (variation pattern). At the timing of the start of the demo production described above), the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state without satisfying the predetermined protrusion start condition. It is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in the normal position), and when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (not in the normal position), the operation button 410 is determined. Is controlled to return to the normal state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, it is returned to the normal state at least when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. Therefore, an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the fluctuation pattern. It is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 from being hindered when the operation button 410 is pressed.

In the game board 5, around the game board side effect display device 1600, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, and the back bottom A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) that stands by around the game side effect display device 1600 and a game side effect display device. It is possible to change to the operating state (display position) that appears in front of the display area of 1600. Further, these movable decorative bodies change from a non-operating state to an operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

In addition, the movable decorative body is not included in the back lower rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back upper middle movable production unit 3400, and the back lower front movable production unit 3500. A standby position sensor that can detect that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is not operating in the back lower rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back upper middle movable production unit 3400, and the back lower front movable production unit 3500. A drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for operating between the operation state and the operation state is provided.

As shown in FIG. 382 (B), at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), and at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (variation pattern). (At the end of the production based on), at the timing at the start of the demonstration production described above, the movable decorative body should be located in the non-operating state without satisfying the predetermined operation start condition. When it is judged whether or not the movable decorative body is in the non-operating state (whether or not it is in the normal position) and it is judged that it is not in the non-operating state (not in the normal position), it is said that an abnormality has occurred. Control is performed to determine and return the movable ornament to the non-operating state. In this way, when the movable decorative body is not in the non-operating state due to the occurrence of an abnormality, it is returned to the non-operating state at least when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. When this is performed, the movable decorative body does not move, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the production from being lost. Further, if the movable decorative body remains positioned in front of the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 due to the occurrence of an abnormality during the execution of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, the visibility of the display area is hindered. However, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation by returning to the non-operating state at least when the special symbol starts to fluctuate.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be touched by the player, and the player can hinder the change to the normal state or the protruding state at the timing of controlling the state. It is a member that the player cannot touch, and the player cannot hinder the change to the non-operating state or the operating state at the timing of controlling the operating state. Therefore, the operation button 410 is more likely to be abnormal than the movable decorative body. In this respect, the operation button 410 has more chances of abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body, so that even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it can be performed at an early stage. It is possible to return to the normal position. Therefore, although there is a high possibility that an abnormality will occur in the operation button 410, participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 when the effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the fluctuation pattern is participated in. It can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, as the effect set in the variable pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and an effect using the movable decorative body are performed. However, the effect using the operation button 410 has a higher appearance rate than the effect using the movable decorative body. For this reason, the operation button 410 tends to be used more frequently than the movable decorative body. For example, the operation button 410 may have a problem at the timing of controlling the operation button 410 to a normal state or a protruding state. There is a high possibility that an abnormality will occur. However, as described above, the operation button 410 has more opportunities for abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body. Therefore, although the operation button 410 is frequently used, when the operation button 410 is used as an effect based on the fluctuation pattern, the occurrence of an abnormality hinders participation in the effect. Can be prevented.

(Abnormal occurrence of operation buttons in production during operation)
Next, an operation-time effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 383 and 384. FIG. 383 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in the operation time effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and FIG. 384 is the operation time effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button 410 in.

As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed into a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. At that time, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position in the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The effect operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state, and the operation button 410 is projected in a predetermined state. If the operation to return to the normal state is not performed until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is normally operated by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, if the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state, and in such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position. On the other hand, when a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in a protruding state. In such a case, the protrusion position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a push detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is pressed. By such detection of the pressure detection sensor 440, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is pressed in the normal state and that the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state. ..

Further, as the effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are provided. It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with higher expectation than in the normal state.

First, when executing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation acceptance period in which the detection of the push detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the normal state, that is, whether or not it is in the normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 383 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, the operation button in the normal state is in the normal state. Change 410 to a protruding state. Further, during the operation acceptance period, as the instruction effect A at the time of the projecting operation instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the projecting state, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, projecting). A display that imitates the operation button 410 in the state, a message display of "press the protruding operation button!", And a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, the voice of "press the protruding operation button!") Are combined.

In the above-mentioned operation acceptance period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. As described above, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the protruding operation button 410 is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period. Will be done. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the instruction effect A at the time of the protruding operation described above may be terminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 383 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (not in the normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state. Further, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation is performed during the operation acceptance period at the same timing as when the abnormality has not occurred. The instruction effect B at the time of this protrusion operation informs the player that the position is equivalent to that of the normal protrusion although the protrusion is abnormal. For example, the instruction effect B is indicated by the display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600. (For example, a display that imitates the operation button 410 in a protruding state, a message display that says "This is a real protrusion! Press the operation button without worrying about it!"), Or a voice instruction from the speaker (for example) , "This is a real protrusion! Push the operation button without worrying about it!") Is combined. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation of changing the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state is not performed, so that the operation is changed to the normal state. It is not possible to recognize whether an effect using a certain operation button 410 or an effect using a protruding operation button 410 is being performed, and further, an operation in a protruding state. There is a risk that the player may hesitate to operate the button 410. However, when the display in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 and the instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation are performed by the voice from the speaker, the operation button 410 which is at least in a protruding state from the display or the voice is pressed. It is possible to recognize that the effect used is being performed. That is, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the degree of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 from being hindered. It should be noted that the instruction effects A and B at the time of the protrusion operation are not limited to those composed of different production contents as described above, and the player is informed that the instruction effects A and B are positioned equivalent to the normal protrusions although they are abnormal protrusions. If this is possible, the instruction effects A and B may be configured with the same effect content.

Further, when executing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed at the end of the operation reception period. Control is performed to return to the state. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation described above may be terminated.

Next, when executing the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation acceptance period in which the detection of the push detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated, and the operation acceptance period is generated. At the start of, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the normal state, that is, whether or not it is in the normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 384 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is in the normal state. To maintain. Further, during the operation acceptance period, as the instruction effect C at the time of normal operation instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the normal state, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 (for example, a normal operation). A display that imitates the operation button 410 in the state, a message display of "press the operation button!", Etc., and a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, the voice of "press the operation button!") Are combined. It is said. Further, during the operation acceptance period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the instruction effect C at the time of the normal operation described above may be terminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 384 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (not in the normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state. Further, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the above-mentioned instruction effect D at the time of normal operation is performed during the operation acceptance period at the same timing as when no abnormality has occurred. The instruction effect D for normal operation informs the player that the current protrusion is not in the same position as the normal protrusion. For example, an instruction by display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 ( For example, a display that imitates the operation button 410 in the normal state, a message display "This protrusion is irrelevant, but press the operation button!", Or a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, "This protrusion is irrelevant"). (Press the operation button! ”, Etc.) are combined. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an unnatural situation occurs in which the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, but the display in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600 occurs. In addition, by performing the instruction effect during normal operation by the voice from the speaker, it is possible to recognize from the display and voice that the effect using at least the operation button 410 in the normal state is being performed. .. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the instruction effect D at the time of the normal operation described above may be terminated. It should be noted that the instruction effects C and D during normal operation are not limited to those composed of different effect contents as described above, and it is possible to inform the player that the current protrusion is not in the same position as the normal protrusion. If this is the case, the instruction effects C and D during normal operation may be configured with the same effect content.

Further, when executing an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. However, unlike the time of executing the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation is performed. The button 410 is not locked by the locking mechanism, and its abnormally protruding state is maintained. Further, even at the end of the operation acceptance period, the control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state to the normal state is not performed.

As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, when the effect is executed using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed within the operation acceptance period. When pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returned to the normal state. On the other hand, when the effect is executed using the operation button 410 in the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period. It is not locked by the mechanism and its abnormally protruding state is maintained. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, is the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state performed from the appearance of the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state? , It is not possible to recognize whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is being performed, but it will eventually return to the normal state when the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed. It is possible to recognize whether or not the production of is being performed.

In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in an abnormally protruding state other than the operation reception period is used in the same manner as the operation reception period when the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed to a normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, as will be described later, at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), the symbol game At the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end (at the end of the effect based on the variation pattern), the operation button 410 is controlled to return to the normal state at the timing of the start of the demo effect described above.

Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the above-mentioned instruction effect during the normal operation is performed during the operation acceptance period when the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed. However, it is possible not to perform such an instruction effect at the time of normal operation. This is because the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state has a lower expectation than the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, so that the instruction effect during the normal operation is performed. This is because even if the degree of expectation for the production cannot be confirmed by not being able to do so, the player hardly suffers any disadvantage.

Further, in this example, when the operation button 410 is abnormally generated, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is in the normal state during the operation acceptance period when the effect using the protruding operation button 410 is executed. When pressed to, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. However, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism. It may be prevented from being locked by the device and the abnormally protruding state may be maintained. That is, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the abnormal protrusion is performed regardless of whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state or the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is performed. When the operation button 410 in the pressed state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 may not return to the normal state. This is because the operation button 410 has an abnormality, such as when the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to the normal state when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state. However, until the control timing for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state arrives, the operation button 410 is left with a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred, so that such an actor can be treated. It can call attention.

(Notification when an error occurs in the operation button)
Next, a notification mode performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 385. FIG. 385 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the operation button 410 and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. ), And can be changed to. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. At that time, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position in the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 385 (A), when an effect is executed using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation acceptance period is generated in which the detection of the push detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed. However, at the start of the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state. Then, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

However, if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, but the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality, the normal state is restored. Dont return. In such a case, the operation button 410 is abnormally projected, but at the end of the operation acceptance period, control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state. Even if the protruding operation button 410 is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period. Will be done.

Further, even if the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation acceptance period, the normal operation button 410 is also performed. It does not return to the state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state after the end of the operation acceptance period, as will be described later, at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the fluctuation pattern). Timing at the start of the production), at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), and at the start of the demo production described above (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods) Then, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed again.

As described above, if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period, the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is repeated after the end of the operation acceptance period. Will be done. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period, the effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not performed as described later. That is, during the operation acceptance period, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 due to the operation of the operation button 410, and there is a high possibility that the player has not intentionally operated the operation button 410. Therefore, the operation button 410 has an abnormality. We are trying to eliminate the abnormality of the operation button 410 without making what has occurred noticeable.

On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 other than the operation reception period, the response is different from the case where the operation button 410 has an abnormality in the operation reception period. For example, in addition to the operation acceptance period, when the above-mentioned demo effect is executed, the above-mentioned automatic operation confirmation period is also provided, and during the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the player's pressing. , The origin is confirmed so that the operation button 410 is located at the normal position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 385 (B), during the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is first operated so as to move up and down several times in the vicinity of the normal state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is moved. The origin is confirmed by the normal position sensor so that it can be detected as being in the normal position. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is brought into a protruding state, and the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism by operating so as to return from the protruding state to the normal state.

However, if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is operated to return to the normal state within the automatic operation confirmation period, but the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality, It does not return to the normal state. In such a case, the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, and unless the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state returns to the normal state, the abnormally protruding operation button 410 is returned to the normal state. Control is repeated. Then, when the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is performed a plurality of times (five times in this example), if the operation button 410 does not return to the normal state, The automatic operation confirmation period ends, and after the automatic operation confirmation period ends, control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period and the abnormality continues after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period, the symbol is as in the case after the end of the operation acceptance period described above. At the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the game (at the start of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), the demonstration effect At the start timing (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state to the normal state is not performed.

Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is performed. Specifically, notification by display in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 (for example, display of "an abnormality has occurred in the operation button") and blinking of the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4. (For example, the lamp / LED blinks more violently than during normal production) to appeal to the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410.

As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period is performed. Not done. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is performed. That is, other than the operation confirmation period, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred due to the player operating the operation button 410 even though the operation of the operation button 410 is not required as in the automatic operation confirmation period. Since there is a high possibility that the player is intentional, the operation button 410 is left with a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred, and attention is given to such an actor.

In this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period, the effect of notifying the occurrence of the abnormality in the operation button 410 is not performed, but such an effect is to be performed. It may be. However, in such a case, it is preferable to suppress the degree of appeal to the outside during the automatic operation confirmation period, rather than the effect of notifying when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. As a result, even after the operation acceptance period ends, the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not hindered, and the effect related to the progress of the game (the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) can be focused on. can.

(Confirmation effect when an abnormality occurs in a movable decorative body)
Next, a confirmation effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 386. FIG. 386 is a time chart showing the flow of the effect when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body.

In the game board 5, around the game board side effect display device 1600, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, and the back bottom A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the front movable effect unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) that stands by around the game side effect display device 1600 and a game side effect display device. It is possible to change to the operating state (display position) that appears in front of the display area of 1600. Further, these movable decorative bodies change from a non-operating state to an operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

In addition, the movable decorative body is not included in the back lower rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back upper middle movable production unit 3400, and the back lower front movable production unit 3500. A standby position sensor that can detect that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is not operating in the back lower rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back upper middle movable production unit 3400, and the back lower front movable production unit 3500. A drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for operating between the operation state and the operation state is provided.

As shown in FIG. 386, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), and at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (based on the fluctuation pattern). (At the end of the production), at the timing at the start of the above-mentioned demo production (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), the predetermined operation start condition should not be satisfied and the movable decorative body should be located in the non-operation state. However, at those timings, it was determined whether or not the movable decorative body was in the non-operating state (whether or not it was in the normal position), and it was determined that it was not in the non-operating state (not in the normal position). In that case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state.

However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, if the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state even though the control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state is performed, the movable decorative body is movable. An effect is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the decorative body. Specifically, the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the displayed contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image that have been displayed are changed to non-display. In addition, the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 blinks violently. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, it is appealed to the outside that the abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body.

In addition, when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, in addition to the effect of notifying that the movable decorative body has an abnormality, it is confirmed whether or not the game proceeds in the state where the abnormality has occurred. A confirmation effect is performed. Specifically, in the display area of the game-side effect display device 1600, a display such as "Please press the operation button when ending the abnormality notification and continuing the game" is displayed. Then, unless the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, not only the movable decorative body does not operate, but also the display contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image are left hidden in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600. , The lighting of the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 and the sound from the speaker are prevented from being produced according to the display contents.

On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body and a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. To end. Then, after pressing the operation button 410 in the confirmation effect, there is no change in that the movable decorative body does not operate, but the display contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed in the display area of the game side effect display device 1600. Then, the lamps / LEDs provided on the main body frame 4 are turned on, and the sound from the speaker is produced according to the displayed contents. For example, when the effect of operating the movable decorative body is performed after pressing the operation button 410 in the confirmation effect, the display of the display area, the lamp, and the lamp are compared with the case where no abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body. Although there is no change in the lighting of the LED and the sound from the speaker, the movable decoration does not operate at the operation timing of the movable decoration. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, a confirmation effect is performed, and the game is advanced after recognizing that the movable decorative body does not operate when the effect using the movable decorative body is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the movable decorative body not operating. In addition, the same confirmation effect is performed not only when the movable decorative body in the operating state does not return to the non-operating state, but also when an abnormality such as the movable decorative body stops operating from the non-operating state occurs. It has been.

In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that the movable decorative body can operate by pressing the operation button 410 is performed. However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the operation is performed during the operation acceptance period (the period during which the detection of the push detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed) in the effect using the operation button 410. Even if the button 410 is pressed, the movable decorative body does not operate from the non-operating state to the operating state. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 can be pressed by performing an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body and a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed when the effect used is performed, it is possible to recognize that the movable decorative body does not operate.

In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect capable of deriving a predetermined effect result without operating the movable decorative body by pressing the operation button 410 is also performed. Even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration as described above, the display in the display area, the lighting of the lamp / LED, and the sound from the speaker are not affected, so that the movable decoration can operate. If there is no effect, the same effect as when no abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body can be performed.

Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, and when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body There is an effect to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the game and a confirmation effect to confirm whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. You may try to produce a different effect. In such a case, after the start of the confirmation effect, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state. For example, if the movable decorative body returns to the non-operating state during the execution of the confirmation effect, the movable decorative body is returned to the non-operating state. The confirmation effect may be terminated even before the operation button 410 is pressed.

(Interference avoidance operation of multiple movable bodies)
Next, an interference avoidance operation when an abnormality occurs in one of a plurality of movable bodies that can interfere with each other will be described with reference to FIG. 387. FIG. 387 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the operation button cover 419 and the operating state of the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening / closing member for whether or not the operation button 410 can be operated. The case where it is possible will be described.

The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and operates the operation button 410 in a closed state in which the operation button 410 is sealed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated. The operation button 410 can be changed to an exposed state so that it can be changed. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the operation button cover 419 from the open state to the closed state.

Like the operation buttons 410 other than this example, the operation button 410 can be changed into a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. It has become. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. At that time, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position in the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

Further, as an effect set in the fluctuation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 is set. As shown in FIG. 387 (A), in the effect using the operation button 410, an operation acceptance period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation acceptance period occurs, The operation button cover 419 in the closed state is changed to the open state. Then, when it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state. During the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state according to the instruction.

If the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the normal state is restored, but the operation button 410 in the protruding state is in the normal state. If the button is not pressed until, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state at the end of the operation acceptance period. Further, at the end of the operation acceptance period, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state.

In this example, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is opened, the operation button 410 in the normal state is in a protruding state, and the operation button 410 in the protruding state can be pressed. However, when the operation button cover 419 is opened, a problem such as the operation button cover 419 stopping between the closed state and the open state may occur. That is, the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 are in a relationship of interfering with each other if they operate at the same time. In such a case, if the operation button 410 is controlled to be in a protruding state without the operation button cover 419 being opened, the operation button 410 to be projected and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other, and the operation button Further problems may occur between the 410 and the operation button cover 419. Therefore, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened, control is performed to avoid the interference so that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 do not interfere with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 387 (B), when the operation acceptance period occurs, the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is controlled to be in the open state, but when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, control is performed. If it is determined that there is no such condition, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is not controlled to be in a protruding state (control to make the operation button 410 in a protruding state). Is prohibited). As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 from interfering with each other when the operation button cover 419 is not opened. Even if the operation button cover 419 is stopped between the closed state and the open state before the operation reception period occurs, unless the operation button cover 419 is in the open state when the operation reception period occurs. Does not control the operation button 410 in the normal state to be in the protruding state (the control to make the operation button 410 in the protruding state is prohibited).

Further, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of the operation acceptance period, but the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own finger after that. , It is determined that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 has been resolved, and the operation button 410 is allowed to be in the protruding state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is controlled to be in the protruding state. In this way, even though the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 are in a situation of interference, when the interference situation is resolved by the contact, the operation button 410 is brought into a protruding state. Therefore, it is possible to press the operation button 410 in the protruding state during the remaining period of the operation reception period. Therefore, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419 at the time of the operation acceptance period, the player presses the operation button 410 in the protruding state by the self-help effort of the player. Participation can be prevented from being hindered. After pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which the abnormality has occurred to the closed state, the operation button cover 419 is returned to the normal state, and then the operation is performed. It is possible to prevent the situation where the button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other from occurring again.

If the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of the operation acceptance period, but the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own finger touch, it is normal. The operation button 410 in the protruding state is in the protruding state, but if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are sequentially displayed at the end of the operation acceptance period. The operation button cover 419 is forcibly returned to the normal state. Specifically, at the end of the operation acceptance period, control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state, and after that, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, the operation button in the open state is set. Control is performed to return the cover 419 to the closed state. This prevents the situation where the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other from occurring again later.

On the other hand, if the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of the operation acceptance period and the player is left in that state after that, the operation button 410 in the normal state is not in a protruding state. In such a case, it is not possible to participate in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state. Further, at the end of the operation acceptance period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which the abnormality has occurred to the closed state so that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 is resolved, and later, the operation button 410 It is prevented that the operation button cover 419 interferes with the operation button cover 419.

(Operation when an abnormality occurs in the operation buttons according to the game state)
Next, the operation when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 when the standby position of the operation button 410 is changed according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. 388. FIG. 388 is a time chart showing an operating state of the operation button 410 when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the non-time saving state and the time saving state. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening / closing member for whether or not the operation button 410 can be operated. The case where it is possible will be described.

The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and operates the operation button 410 in a closed state in which the operation button 410 is sealed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated. The operation button 410 can be changed to an exposed state so that it can be changed. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the operation button cover 419 from the open state to the closed state.

Like the operation buttons 410 other than this example, the operation button 410 can be changed into a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. It has become. The effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism. In this example, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude in the non-time saving state (normal state), and is positioned in the normal state, whereas the lock mechanism is locked in the time saving state. The operation button 410 is positioned so as to protrude due to the spring mechanism. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

In this example, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state can be performed. In the production using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and the operation in the closed state occurs when the operation reception period occurs. By changing the button cover 419 to the open state, it is possible to press the operation button 410 in the normal state. Then, during the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state according to the instruction. At the end of the operation acceptance period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state.

Further, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 should be in the closed state and the operation button 410 should be in the normal state except for the operation acceptance period. However, as shown in FIG. 388 (A), when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state and the operation button 410 is in the protruding state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After returning the operating button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state, control is performed to return the operating button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, only the control for returning the open operation button cover 419 to the closed state is performed. Is done. Further, the predetermined abnormality determination timing is the same as in this example, when the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts to fluctuate (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), and the special symbol corresponds to the end of the symbol game. At the end of the fluctuation (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), it is the timing at the start of the above-mentioned demo production.

On the other hand, in the time saving state, the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state can be performed. In the production using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and when the operation reception period occurs, the operation reception period is in the protruding state. By pressing the operation button 410 to a normal state according to the instruction, a predetermined effect result can be obtained. As long as the time is shortened, even if the operating button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is returned to the protruding state without being locked by the lock mechanism. Become.

Further, in the time saving state, the operation button cover 419 should be in the open state and the operation button 410 should be in the protruding state. However, as shown in FIG. 388 (B), when the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After returning the closed operation button cover 419 to the open state, control is performed to return the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state. Only done.

As described above, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state, whereas in the time saving state, the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. At the same time, the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. As described above, it is determined that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 stand by at different positions in the non-time saving state and the time saving state, but any one of the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 When the above abnormality occurs, the position of the return destination of the member in which the abnormality has occurred is changed so that the operation button can be used when the operation button 410 is used at the position corresponding to the game state. It is possible to prevent the participation in the production of operating the 410 from being hindered.

[18. Production control by scheduler]
In the gaming machine, various effects are performed during the game by sound output, lighting / blinking of lamps, display of images, etc., and various elaborate effects are being attempted in order to enhance the interest of the game. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control device, based on the command output from the main control board 1310, and executes the effect according to the game state of the game. do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in one direction.

In order to execute a plurality of types of effects in cooperation with each other, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-313649 discloses a control technique for realizing various effects displays by using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which the symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially defined in chronological order. By preparing a control process that realizes a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying designated symbols according to this scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of effect displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. It is also possible to include the BGM designation in the scenario data. In this case, by outputting the designated BGM by the sound source IC, it is possible to output the sound corresponding to the display screen.

However, in gaming machines, more elaborate production is required. With the above-mentioned conventional technique, it has been difficult to perform various effects by interlocking a plurality of effect devices such as audio output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, it was not possible to change the BGM while executing the image display according to the scenario data. Further, when the sound effect is output in response to the user's operation during the image display, the image display and the BGM output are stopped and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effect was completed, the BGM and the image display were restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM was played, which gave a sense of discomfort. The lighting and blinking of the lamps are controlled by individual programs according to the game state, regardless of the content of the image display, and it is difficult to realize a wide variety of lighting and blinking linked to the image display. there were.

[18-1. Software configuration in the peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes the production of the game. In the present embodiment, each configuration for executing the effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but it may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, the configuration and outline of the functions for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment will be described, and then the details of each function will be described.

[18-1-1. Configuration and outline of each function]
FIG. 389 is a functional block diagram illustrating a configuration and an outline of a function for executing the effect control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1530 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. It is equipped with 5080.

The input command analysis unit 5010 receives the input of the main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines the block control information (effect block number). Explaining the layers, in the present embodiment, layers are set for each effect category such as a background and characters, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are superimposed and displayed to display an image on a liquid crystal display device. Is output. Thereby, for example, if only the background is different and the display (operation) of the character is the same, it is possible to standardize the layers for displaying the character. As a result, the capacity of the production data (scheduler data) can be reduced and the development efficiency can be improved. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying the effect for each layer.

The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires the effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect. The scheduler data stores a plurality of functions in the order in which they should be executed among a plurality of processes required according to the effect device in order to control the effect in each effect device. It is data. The effect block data includes "liquid crystal effect block data" for executing an effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, "liquid crystal symbol block data" for variablely displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device, and sound (sound). There are three types of "sub-effect block data" for controlling lamps, accessories, and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes the scheduler control information including the effect block data to the scheduler execution unit 5060.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data included in the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, the function corresponding to each effect device is called, and the effect device control information is transmitted to the output module unit 5080.

The output module unit 5080 receives the effect device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits the effect device drive data to each effect device based on the effect device control information. Each effect device performs an operation based on the effect device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the effect control unit 5020 is configured by software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the effect control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. It is realized by. In addition, it may be configured as hardware by being configured by the effect control unit 5020 and another arithmetic circuit.

[18-1-2. Module configuration]
Subsequently, the details of the configuration of the module or the like that realizes each of the above-mentioned functions will be described. FIG. 390 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a module or the like in the peripheral control unit 1530 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1530, but a part or all of the configuration may be configured as hardware.

In the present embodiment, the system module 5100 for driving each effect device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1530. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a drive device module 5700, and the like as modules related to the effect. Further, the effect control unit 5020 for creating the effect device control information for driving each effect device based on the main command is included.

The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module 5200. In this embodiment, the main command is 3-byte one-set information, which is a command status value, a command mode value, a command status and a checksum value of a mode value in order from the first byte, and is divided into three times of 8 bits each. The main command buffer 5110 that is output receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and if the received command is not determined to be correct, discards the received command and sets it as the correct command. If it is determined, it is handed over to the command analysis module 5200.

The main command includes information indicating the content related to the production among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, the main command can include whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the starting winning opening, the result of the special figure lottery, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and the like. Further, when this embodiment is applied to a slot machine, sensor output such as opening a door, operation of a start lever or a stop button, rotation or stop of a reel, success or failure of a combination at the time of stop, and the like can be mentioned. The commands listed here are examples, and various commands can be included depending on the model of the gaming machine and the content of the production.

The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the contents of the main command, and determines whether or not the command is related to the production. If it is determined that the command is related to the production, it is handed over to the production control unit 5020.

The effect control unit 5020 specifies the layer to be controlled by the effect from the layer data table based on the analysis result of the main command. Then, the block data number (effect block number) is acquired from the specified layer, and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control unit 5040.

The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 and a sub effect block control unit 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines the control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub-effect block control unit 5320 determines the control information for executing the sound output, the lighting / blinking of the lamp, the operation of the accessory, and the like.

When the effect block number is determined, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The liquid crystal effect block data is block data for executing the liquid crystal display effect, and includes one or a plurality of drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification symbols, and the like are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) target, and executes the drawing scheduler data included in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effects elements such as a background and characters, and a liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying an identification symbol. included.

The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed in a frame cycle (1f = about 33.334 milliseconds), which is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the drawing scheduler, and the liquid crystal module 5400 generates a liquid crystal display list command. The liquid crystal display list command is passed to the effect display device (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460) via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120.

The sound source built-in VDP1540a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 and outputs the display data to the effect display device (game board side effect display device 1600, door frame side liquid crystal display device 460). The display data is generated, for example, by expanding the character data specified by the liquid crystal display list command to the specified position on the frame buffer.

When the effect block number is determined, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 executes the sub-effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub-effect block data is block data for executing each effect of the lamp, the sound, and the motor, and includes one or a plurality of sub-effect scheduler data. By executing the sub-effect scheduler data, each effect device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs the operation defined in advance in the sub-effect scheduler data.

The sub-effect block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of the various effect devices, and executes the sub-effect scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various effect devices includes a sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the effect device at 1 frame intervals and a sub effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the effect devices at 1 millisecond intervals. included. In this way, by providing the scheduler execution unit according to the execution interval, it is possible to execute the effect according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the effect device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the update interval of drawing, it is possible to synchronize the sound output, the operation of the accessory, and the like with the liquid crystal display. Further, if the detection interval of the sensor is in units of 1 ms, it is possible to quickly respond to a problem in the operation of the accessory.

The sub-effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than the liquid crystal display. In the present embodiment, for example, three types of effect control: sound output, lamp lighting / blinking, and accessory operation. explain. The effect control by the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described as being the same except for the execution cycle without any particular distinction. The outline of the control according to the type of the effect device will be described below.

First, a case of executing an effect by sound output will be described. If the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for sound output, the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts the scheduler for sound output and executes the scheduler data. Then, when a function for sound output (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 generates sound source drive data (sound source command) based on the specified parameters. It is possible to start multiple schedulers. For example, by controlling the output of BGM and the effect sound effect with different schedulers, sound source drive data can be generated in parallel and the sound can be output at the same time. .. The sound source built-in VDP1540a reads the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b, and outputs the sound source data from the speakers 921 and 573 by the audio data transmission IC 1540c.

Next, a case of executing the effect by the lamp will be described. If the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for lamp control, the scheduler execution unit starts the lamp scheduler and executes the scheduler data. Then, when the lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. As in the case of sound output, it is possible to start a plurality of schedulers, and it is possible to control a plurality of lamps and layers in parallel.

The lamp module 5600 creates lamp drive data every cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) and outputs the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores the lamp drive data generated by the lamp module 5600, and outputs the lamp data output buffer 5130 to the serial control IC 5150. By making the lamp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously create and output lamp data in a single cycle. By configuring in this way, the output of the lamp data is output to the next operation of creating the lamp data in response to the increase in the processing time of the lamp control due to the increase in the lamp system or the superposition of the lamp layers. By setting the cycle, it is sufficient that the processing related to the creation of the lamp data is completed within the processing cycle.

Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously created lamp drive data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output, the lamp drive data created last time is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA, and each lamp is turned on and blinked. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The case of controlling the lighting / blinking of the LED is the same as that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise specified.

Finally, a case of controlling a driving device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating an accessory will be described. If the sub-effect block data includes the scheduler data for driving device control, the scheduler execution unit activates the driving device scheduler (motor scheduler) and executes the scheduler data. Then, when the drive device control function (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the drive device module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. As in the case of sound output, it is possible to start a plurality of schedulers, and it is possible to control a plurality of drive devices in parallel.

The drive device module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs the motor drive data to the motor data output buffer 5140. In this embodiment, motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs the motor drive data to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU1511a regardless of DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data in each drive device is not the same timing as the output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output in the next cycle of all motor data transmission. It is outputting. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the serial transmission of all motor data is completed, so as the serial transmission time of the motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed becomes an overhead, and the total processing time for each frame cycle becomes longer. This is because there is not enough. In the present embodiment, the waiting time until the completion of serial transmission is set to 0 by shifting the timing of the latch signal output corresponding to the motor data serial transmission, but a plurality of DMAs can be used depending on the CPU to be used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using DMA, and the latch signal is output by the DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed can be set to 0 in the same manner. Further, at the same time as the output of the motor drive data, the effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU1511a). Each effect-driven photo information is received by serial communication via a parallel serial control IC.

[18-2. Data structure]
In the present embodiment, the scheduler data can adopt various structures. For example, a call function for fetching other scheduler data as a part of the scheduler data may be provided. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, once executes other scheduler data specified by the call function, and then continues the processing of the original scheduler data. Will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to utilize general-purpose production contents in various situations in the same way as calling a subroutine in a general program.

This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has an effect peculiar to a gaming machine as shown below. In the gaming machine, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players can find subtle differences in the content of the production during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the general-purpose production contents can be utilized in various situations by the call function, such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. It is possible to prevent the game from being spoiled.

As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branch function that switches the effect content according to the game state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, determines the game state based on the main command when executing the conditional branch function, and executes the effect content according to the game state. .. By doing so, it is possible to deal with a wide variety of game states with one scheduler data. Examples of the gaming state used for conditional branching include the result of a lottery performed during the game and the presence or absence of an operation of a button or the like by the player. In the rotating drum type gaming machine, the stopped state of the rotating reel may be used, and in the pachinko machine, the winning state of the starting winning opening may be used. In addition, conditional branching may be made depending on whether or not an error occurs during the game.

Various configurations are possible for the content of the effect after the conditional branching. For example, after the conditional branching, the configuration may be completely separated into two or more processes. Further, after performing a predetermined process by conditional branching, the process may be configured to return to the process before branching. According to the latter aspect, for example, after executing a process of temporarily outputting a sound effect when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous effect without discomfort.

As described above, the gaming machine can include various effect devices, and as an example, a display device for displaying an image can be included. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, and a plasma display can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing device is a device that develops a bitmap of an image according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, it can be configured by a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like in which a character or the like to be displayed on the screen is prepared by a bitmap.

[18-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 391 is an explanatory diagram showing a basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, the case where the main effect control is executed by executing the scheduler data including the function will be described, and in particular, the sound output will be described as an example.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 (sub-effect scheduler execution unit 5320) activates the scheduler 5502 of the type and number according to the effect device when the effect is executed. The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data specified in the sub-effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

Sound functions executed at the time of sound output include "SPLAY" for playing a phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping a phrase being played, and "VOL_PH" for setting a volume level during phrase playback. These sound functions are processed by the sound module 5500, and the control specified by the parameters and the like is executed. When the sound module 5500 accepts the execution of the sound function, it generates sound source drive data and outputs the sound source drive data to the sound source built-in VDP1540a.

The function processed by the sound module 5500 controls the output of the sound corresponding to the specified channel. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the number of channels will be described as 4 for easy understanding. Further, the sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. The speakers [1] to [4] illustrated here schematically represent the outputs of each channel Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. It does not mean that it is.

The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channel is managed by the channel management works 5507 [1] to 5507 [4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated in the lower right of the figure. The phrase number, stereo reproduction flag, output volume, and loop attribute are stored in the work 5507. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being played. The stereo playback flag indicates whether or not to output in stereo. The output volume is the volume for each channel. The loop attribute specifies whether or not to play repeatedly. This information is specified by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

As described above, FIG. 391 shows the basic concept of the effect control in the present embodiment by taking the sound output control as an example. The sub-effect scheduler execution unit starts the scheduler specified by the sub-effect block data, and executes the scheduler data on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, the function that controls each effect device is called and processed by the modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to each effect device.

[18-4. Data flow in production control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the production control of the gaming machine has been described above. Next, the flow of effect control from receiving the main command to acquiring the scheduler data will be described.

[18-4-1. Acquisition of data required for production control]
FIG. 392A is a diagram illustrating a configuration up to acquisition of data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. When the effect control unit 5020 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 as described with reference to FIG. 390, the effect control unit 5020 analyzes the command analysis module 5200 and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

Based on the layer data table, the effect control unit 5020 provides each layer, a variable pattern layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the variable pattern), a hold layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the hold effect), and a game instruction layer (a game instruction layer). Based on the analysis result by the command analysis module 5200 for each of the layer to perform), the communication error layer (layer to notify the communication error), the notification layer (layer to notify various notifications), and the abnormality notification layer (layer to notify the abnormality). , Acquires and updates the corresponding production block data numbers for each layer. Further, the acquired effect block data number is handed over to the effect block control unit 5040. For example, in the case of a variation pattern layer, the effect block number is a liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern, a liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table for each variation pattern, and sub-effect block data for each variation pattern based on the variation pattern number. Determined from the combination number table. The unit of division of the effect block is divided into a predetermined unit (block) that is a common effect in a series of effects (for example, an effect executed from the start to the stop of the change of the special symbol). In addition, block data including control information such as effect content and effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. By controlling the effect in units of the effect block based on the effect block number, the effect by each effect device can be synchronized. Further, the arrangement of the layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display, and in the present embodiment, the variable pattern layer is the rearmost layer and the abnormality notification layer is the frontmost layer. It is a configuration for.

When the effect block control unit 5040 receives the block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, the effect block control unit 5040 receives the scheduler control unit (liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, sub-effect block) corresponding to each layer. The control unit 5320) acquires the corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053). As described above, each block data includes scheduler data for executing the effect.

For example, when the main command is the start winning command, the hold layer is specified, and the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for performing the hold display on the liquid crystal display screen and the sub effect block data for outputting the sound effect at the time of the start prize are output. 5053 is acquired. Further, when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, a fluctuation start command or the like is transmitted to specify the fluctuation pattern layer. Furthermore, a command is sent to notify the occurrence of an error or a warning, and the abnormality detection layer is identified. Further, by performing the effect for each layer, it is possible to perform a plurality of effects at the same time.

When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal effect block data number, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 displays the liquid crystal. Production 1f Start the scheduler. The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071 on the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal effect schedule data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes a function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and outputs the display list command to the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

Further, when the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 acquires the liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 The liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is started by. The liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 further acquires the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. Then, by executing the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072 on the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol schedule data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes a function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP 1540a, outputs the display list command to the VDP 1540a, and outputs the display list command to the game board. An image is drawn on the side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The processing in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

When the sub-effect block control unit 5320 acquires the sub-effect block data 5053, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 specifies the execution cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub-effect block data 5053. Then, when the execution cycle is 1 frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 activates the sub-effect 1f scheduler, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 activates the sub-effect 1ms. Start the scheduler.

Further, the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 acquires the sub-effect schedule data 5073 and executes it on the corresponding scheduler. The sub-effect schedule data 5073 does not differ depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the scheduler of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, and reduces the data capacity. In addition, it is possible to quickly respond to changes in the execution cycle of the effect device. In addition, the same schedule data can be executed simultaneously by different schedulers, which enables sharing of scheduler data, prevents the same type of problems from occurring at multiple locations, and reduces data capacity. can.

Here, a specific example of executing the same schedule data simultaneously by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 392B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. Four types of step-up notices 1 to 4 can be executed for the step-up notice, and by executing the effect that gradually develops the effect content, the player is expected to display the variation of the symbol. Suggest degree.

In the step-up notice 1, the notice effect ends when the step-up 1 effect is executed. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and the notice effect ends after the end of the step-up 2 effect. The same effect is executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and the notice effect ends after the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect are completed, respectively.

In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also perform the step-up notice in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. Since different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up effect in the sound effect, four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each stage of the effect. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, since the same lamp pattern is displayed at each stage of the step-up effect, one type of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

When the liquid crystal effect of the step-up notice develops to the next stage, the next step-up notice is started just before the end of the step-up notice at the current stage, so that a plurality of step-up effects are temporarily performed at the same time. There is a period of time. As described above, in the lamp effect, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for the subsequent step-up effect, but in the present embodiment, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously by a plurality of schedulers. It has become. Therefore, when the same effect is executed at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the execution periods of the effects overlap.

Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 effect, the same step-up occurs when the step-up 2 effect that starts just before the end of the step-up 1 effect occurs. The warning lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data is executed at the same time (duplicate) without defining the same scheduler data in duplicate, so that the same pattern of effects can be produced in parallel in a series of effects. It is realized to execute.

The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls the modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and defines them in the sub-effect schedule data 5073. Instructs the processing of the function. Each module processes a function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates data necessary for driving the effect device, and outputs the drive data to the effect device.

[18-4-2. Outline of execution of scheduler data]
FIG. 393 is a diagram illustrating a flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of the present embodiment. The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect content based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and uses the sound source built-in VDP1540a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700 to control various effect devices. Control. FIG. 393 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 referenced to set this command.

In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number designated by the effect block control unit 5040 and stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b. The correspondence between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect number is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table includes an effect management pointer indicating the storage address of the scheduler data. Although the number of effect management pointers corresponding to the effect number is prepared, only five are illustrated here. In the example of the figure, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the effect management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

In the present embodiment, the effect number uses the address value of the effect management pointer. In the example of FIG. 393, the effect numbers 01H, 02H, and the like represent storage addresses of the effect management pointers [1], [2], and the like, respectively. The effect number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may be configured so that the effect number and the effect management pointer are associated with each other, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for the effect management pointer using the effect number as a key, and then obtains the scheduler data. The process may be performed. Further, if the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number, the amount of data in the effect management table can be reduced, and the above-mentioned search becomes unnecessary, so that the load required for processing the scheduler data can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 393, each command constituting the scheduler data 5401 is composed of a function and a parameter in principle. As described above, the function is an instruction for controlling the effect device, for example, for instructing each module to operate the effect device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify parameters may be provided.

Functions are grouped into groups such as sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors (driving devices) and users. The sequence control is a basic function for performing the effect control, and the lamp, the sound, and the motor are functions for controlling each effect device. The user is a function that does not belong to these groups. A specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS. 396 to 398.

In the example shown in FIG. 393, the "call" function is specified at address A2. The "call" function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and then sets the address specified by the parameter to the effect management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 can temporarily move to the address specified by the parameter to process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous processing based on the above-mentioned saved pointer value.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the "call" function after the address A2. A liquid crystal command is set at the address A31, a voice operation number is set at A32, a lamp operation number is set at A33, and a return is made at A3n. When the effect command finishes these processes, the "call" returns to the designated address A2 and proceeds to the process of the next address A3.

In this way, by utilizing the "call" function, it is possible to incorporate the contents of the series of blocks BL3 specified by the addresses A31 to A3n into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, the amount of scheduler data can be reduced and the load of creating the scheduler data can be reduced. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lottery and the like are held during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players can find subtle differences in the content of the production during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present invention, since general-purpose production contents can be utilized in various situations by calling, such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. , It is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

Although it is possible to use the "call" function in this way, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the instruction contents to other schedulers such as "feature operation number set", "voice operation number set", and "ramp operation number set". This is because it merely specifically indicates a very limited function that can be realized by the scheduler execution unit 5060.

In the example shown in FIG. 393, NOP (wait) is then executed at address A3. In the "NOP" function, the process of the scheduler data is continued after waiting for the specified number of frames. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is waited until the time specified by the parameter Prm [031] elapses. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the process is repeatedly executed by the timer interrupt. Therefore, in the "NOP" function, the scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily ends the processing of the scheduler data without performing the subsequent processing unless the value of the parameter Prm [031] is 0, and if this value is 0, the scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily ends the processing of the scheduler data. , Performs the process of moving to the function of the next address.

In the present embodiment, the voice operation number and the like are specified by using the work of the same format as the work area 5301 shown in FIG. 392A. The work area 5301 used by the system event and the work used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores the voice operation number and the like in the work according to the designation of the scheduler data. Further, the layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is also provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 392A). Also in the work for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel from these layers.

Similarly, the scheduler data is defined by the function and the parameter after the conditional branch address A11. In the example shown in FIG. 393, the conditional branch is not provided from the address A11 of the conditional branch to the end of the effect (address An). Since this range is the block BL2 different from the block BL1 described above, the accessory command (address A22), the voice operation number (address A21), and the like can be specified without considering the conflict with the block BL1. .. Instead of these settings, the block BL3 and the like may be captured by the "call" function.

In the scheduler data, conditional branching and a "call" function may be used in combination. For example, a random number for switching the effect content may be generated, and different addresses may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 393, if the condition "random value value ≤ Th1?" Is added to the address A2, the effects of the addresses A31 to A3n are executed when this condition is satisfied. Further, if the address A41 (not shown) is called with the condition "Th1 <random number value ≤ Th2?" Next to the address A2 (address A2 + 1), the address A31 or later is assigned according to the random number value. Will perform different effects. In this way, if different addresses are called by conditional branching according to a random number, the production content can be randomly switched by the random number, and it is possible to enhance the fun of the game. Hereinafter, switching the production contents in this way is referred to as a "production lottery" in the present specification.

In the production lottery, the display, sound, lamp, and drive device may all be switched, or only a part of them may be switched. To switch all, specify all the display, sound, and lamp contents in the scheduler data called by the "call" function. When switching only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and specify the other parts uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

Further, in the scheduler data, it may be specified that different scheduler data is called according to the random number for the effect lottery by using the conditional branch and the "call" function. In this case, as a result of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the driving device independently performing the effect lottery, the effect mode realized by the combination becomes very diverse, and there is an advantage that the interest can be further enhanced.

However, regardless of the results of the display, sound, lamp, and drive device effect lottery, it is preferable that these effects are completed at the same time in order to realize a natural effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected in the effect lottery has the content that the effect is completed at the same time. It should be noted that it is not an indispensable requirement that the production is completed at the same time, and these production times do not have to be the same.

The effect lottery using the scheduler data has an advantage that the content of the effect can be varied and the lottery mode can be switched according to the display, sound, lamp, and output status of the drive device. For example, when the drive device is executing the figure-eight distribution operation at the time when the effect lottery is instructed and other operations are restricted, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the effect lottery related to the drive device. You may. Similarly, with respect to the display, sound, and lamp, the production lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the production lottery is instructed. Further, in the production lottery prohibition, the production lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting the selection of some scheduler data.

As described above, in the effect lottery, the effect content is switched by the control process of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this way, it is possible to realize a variety of effects than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and it is possible to further enhance the interest.

[18-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module that controls the sound output will be described. FIG. 394 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the sound module 5500 of the present embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and outputs audio. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for voice. Further, each scheduler 5502 is provided with a work 5507 for operation management. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice operation number table is a table in which a sound pointer and a sound layer are associated with a voice operation number. In the present embodiment, the voice operation number corresponds to the storage address of the voice operation number table. Arbitrary identification information can be used for the voice operation number, but as in the case of the effect number described above, it is better to correspond to the storage address to reduce the capacity of the voice operation number table and reduce the processing load when referring to the table. Has the advantage of enabling.

The sound pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In the present embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the sound output will be described later in FIGS. 397 and 398.

In the example shown in FIG. 394, a "call" function is defined at address SA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown), and then processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

At address SA3, phrase reproduction is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads the phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H specified by the parameter and reproduces the phrase data 5508.

Further, a structural example of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. 394. The phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. In the present embodiment, arbitrary identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

The channel is the output channel specified during phrase playback. The left / right pan pot and the top / bottom pan pot are the left / right / top / bottom output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. The volume is an output volume. The song number is an identification number of the sound to be played. When the song number is notified to the sound source built-in VDP1540a, the sound source built-in VDP1540a reads the sound source data corresponding to the song number from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM 1540b, and reproduces the sound. The loop specifies whether or not to repeatedly play the sound. Stereo is a specification of whether or not to output in stereo.

A work 5507 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5502. Various information shown in the figure is stored in the work 5507. The operating state indicates whether or not each layer is operating. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5505 being executed by the scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 394, as the processing progresses, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data 5505, and is sequentially subtracted with the passage of time. The sound module 5500 executes the next function when this value becomes 0.

The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of calls and loops that are multiplely specified by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, in the processing after the address SA31 called by the "call" function (first call) of the address SA2, when the scheduler data 5505 of another address is further called by the "call" function (second call), the call nesting is performed. The number will be 2. After finishing the second call and returning to the first call, the number of call nests is reduced to 1. The same is true for loops. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repeat count. The loop start address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[18-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 395 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the lamp module 5600 of the present embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lamp lighting / blinking control. Like the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 is provided in association with a lamp layer for a lamp. Further, each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the lamp operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the lamp operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5601 to be executed. The lamp operation number table is a table in which a lamp pointer and a lamp layer are associated with a lamp operation number. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Arbitrary identification information can be used for the lamp operation number, but as in the case of the effect number described above, using the storage address reduces the capacity of the lamp operation number table and reduces the processing load when referring to the table. It has the advantage of making it possible.

The lamp pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In the present embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters as in the production data (FIG. 393). The function used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG. 397.

In the example shown in FIG. 395, a "call" function is defined at address LA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address LA31 (not shown), and then processes the address LA3 next to the address LA2.

The address LA3 defines the gradation pattern setting. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored at the address LA11 specified by the parameter. Each of the lamp schedulers 5602 is provided with a gradation scheduler 5604 in association with each other. The lamp is turned on with the specified gradation data 1, and when the time specified by the timer value elapses, the lamp with the gradation data 2 is used. Turn on. Here, an example in which two types of gradation data are specified is shown, but even when three or more are specified, the lamp is turned on while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after the address LA12, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between the gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processes of addresses LA11 to LA1n, the lamp ends lighting. The lamp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601, and executes the processing of the next address until it is stopped (address LAN).

A work 5603 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5602. Various information shown in the figure is stored in the work 5603. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is running or not. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data, and is subtracted sequentially with the passage of time. The ramp executes the next function when this value reaches zero. The gradation data timer represents the waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 395, when the gradation data defined in the address LA11 is executed, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data 1 shifts to the gradation data 2. Then, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of the address LA11 is terminated and the process proceeds to the processing of the address LA12.

The ramp pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5601 being executed by the scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 395, the value of the lamp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3 as the processing progresses. The gradation data pointer is the address of the gradation pattern data 5606 executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example in the figure, as the processing progresses, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12. The number of loops is the number of times the loop is repeated, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, loops may be allowed to nest.

[18-4-5. Overview of drive unit control]
Subsequently, the function of the drive device module 5700 that controls the operation of the drive device will be described. The drive device is, for example, a stepping motor. Since the control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600, the illustration is omitted. The drive unit module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the drive unit. The drive unit module 5700 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers and perform processing.

The control items of the drive device include, for example, the amount of movement (rotation step angle of the stepping motor), the movement time, the movement speed (rotational speed of the motor), the excitation method, the trapezoidal drive, and the rotation direction. In addition, an instruction to execute a return operation to return to the origin position and an instruction to stop the mechanical end (when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited, stop it while being urged to the limit position of the movable range). included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed by a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function at the start and stop of rotation.

Scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data to control the drive unit will be described later with reference to FIG. 398.

[18-5. function]
The example of using the function in the module used for the effect control has been described above. Here, other functions will be described. 396 to 398 are diagrams showing an example of a function in the effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As mentioned above, the functions are divided into groups of sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors and users. Hereinafter, the functions belonging to each group will be described.

[18-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
Functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of production. FIG. 396 shows an example of a sequence control function. The outline of each function will be described below.

"STOP" is a function representing the end of scheduler data. "NOP" is a weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by designating the number of executions as a parameter. The time according to the number of executions differs depending on the processing cycle in which the "NOP" function is executed. If the "NOP" function is executed in a frame cycle, one frame is about 33.334 milliseconds in the present embodiment, so that the number of executions is If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is executed in a 1 ms cycle, if the number of executions is also specified as 30, it will wait for about 30 ms. "NOP_F_VALUE" has the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value as parameters, and when the conditions based on the scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value are satisfied, the "NOP_F_VALUE" function is terminated and the condition is changed. If it is not satisfied, it is a conditional weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

"MEMW" is a function that writes a specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area with the target scheduler work number and value as parameters. "LOOPST" is a function for performing iterative processing (loop), specifies the beginning of the loop, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. When "0" is set for the number of loops, an infinite loop occurs. "LOOP" is a function for designating the end of iterative processing (loop).

"RET" is a function for returning the process to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the effect management table. "CALL" is the above-mentioned "call" function, which executes processing from a designated address (block), and sets information for specifying a call destination such as an address value or a label as a parameter. In "CALL", the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the callee is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after executing the process of the callee, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

The "SUBC" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and the branch table specified in the parameter, and executes the selected process. That is, it executes the "call" function based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBC" will be described later with reference to FIG. 401. When the process of the callee is completed by the "SUBC" function, the process returns to the process of the caller (the next process of the "SUBC" function).

"SUBJ" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and the table specified in the parameter, and executes the selected process. That is, the "JUMP" function described later is executed based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBJ" will be described later with reference to FIG. 402. The process of the caller who executed the "SUBJ" function is not returned, and the process of the callee is continued as it is. "JUMP" sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer, and continues processing from the specified address and label.

"REF" is a function for invoking another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using "REF" will be described later with reference to FIG. 403. Like "REF", "REF" is a function for starting another scheduler specified by the parameter, and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. It is prohibited to start. In "REF", control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REFF" can execute the processing of the scheduler data to be executed independently for a specified period. For example, in the case of initialization of the accessory, other scheduler data for operating the accessory is executed and controlled. It is possible to prevent it from becoming impossible.

[18-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
Functions belonging to the group of lamps are functions for controlling the flow of lamp effects. FIG. 397 gives an example of a function related to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"HPLAY" is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process for lighting a lamp based on the gradation data specified by a parameter. In "HPLAY", even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, the lamp is reset and the reproduction of the lamp is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

Similar to "HPLAY", "KPLAY" is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "KPLAY", when the lamp is reproduced with the same gradation data, the reproduction of the running lamp is continued without resetting.

"HPLAY2" is a function that executes a lamp gradation data reproduction process by designating a layer in addition to the gradation data by a parameter. The processing is the same as that of "HPLAY". Similar to "HPLAY2", "KPLAY2" is a function that specifies a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter and executes a lamp gradation data reproduction process. The processing is the same as that of "KPLAY".

“HPLAY” and “KPLAY” execute the designated lamp gradation data reproduction process for reproducing the lamp gradation data specified in the parameter. If the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning at the time of reproduction by "HPLAY", and the lamp gradation data is reproduced at the time of reproduction by "KPLAY". Continue playing without interruption. That is, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed by using "KPLAY" while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

The processing of "HPLAY2" is the same as that of "HPLAY" except that, in addition to the above-mentioned "HPLAY" function, the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

The processing of "KPLAY2" is the same as that of "KPLAY" except that, in addition to the above-mentioned "KPLAY" function, the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

[18-5-3. Function details (sound)]
Functions belonging to the group of sounds (sounds) are functions for controlling the sound output. An example of a function related to sound control is given in FIGS. 397 and 398, and an outline of each function will be described.

"SPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound having the same phrase number is being reproduced, the sound is reset and the sound reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. Like "SPLAY", "SXPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is reproduced, the reproduction of the sound is continued without resetting. "STOP_PH" is a function for executing a phrase stop process for stopping the reproduction of the sound based on the phrase number specified by the parameter.

"PAN_PH" uses the transition time and panpot end coordinate position specified by the parameter from the audio output coordinate position at the start of execution of the "PAN_PH" function for the playing phrase specified by the parameter, and panpot ends. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position to the coordinate position at the specified transition time. In addition to the function of the "PAN_PH" function, "PAN_PH2" can also specify the panpot start coordinate position with a parameter, and like the "PAN_PH" function, the audio output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of function execution. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position whose position is specified by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position at the specified transition time.

"VOL_FADE_PH" is specified from the volume value at the start of execution of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameter. This is a function for increasing / decreasing the volume value at the transition time. In addition to the function of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, "VOL_FADE_PH2" can also specify the fade start volume value with a parameter, and like the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase is a parameter at the start of function execution. This is a function for increasing or decreasing the volume value at the specified transition time from the fade start volume value specified in.

"VOL_PH" is a function that increases or decreases the volume value of the phrase being played, which is specified by the parameter, with the volume value specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" is a function that mutes the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" is a function for canceling mute of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

"SCPLAY" and "SXCPLAY" execute a designated channel song reproduction process for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel. If the same phrase has already been played, the playback of the phrase is interrupted and the same phrase is played from the beginning during playback by "SCPLAY", and the playback of the phrase is continued without interruption during playback by "SXCPLAY". That is, even if the same phrase is executed by using "SXCPLAY" while the phrase is being played, no particular process is executed.

In "PAN_CH", the above-mentioned "PAN_PH" performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas a panpot for a ch (channel) is performed. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "PAN_PH". Regarding "PAN_CH2", the above-mentioned "PAN_PH2" performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas a panpot for ch is performed. "PAN_PH2" except that ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. The process does not change.

"VOL_FADE_CH" is "VOL_FADE_PH" except that the above-mentioned "VOL_FADE_PH" fades for a phrase, whereas ch fades for ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. The process does not change. Regarding "VOL_FADE_CH2", while the above-mentioned "VOL_FADE_PH2" fades for a phrase, it fades for ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. The process does not change.

In "VOL_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_PH" increases / decreases the volume value for the phrase, whereas the volume value increases / decreases for ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" mutes (mute) the phrase, whereas mute the ch, ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" cancels the mute (mute) for the phrase, whereas the mute (mute) for the ch is canceled. The process is the same as "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" except that is changed to ch.

[18-5-4. Function details (motor)]
Functions belonging to the group of motors are functions for controlling the output of motors and solenoids. FIG. 398 gives an example of a function related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. “MMPLAY” executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor specified in the parameter to reproduce the operation based on the motor data number. “SOL_ON” executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to execute an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. “SOL_OFF” executes a solenoid OFF process that causes the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[18-5-5. Function details (user)]
The function belonging to the user's group is a function for executing the control not belonging to the group described above. An example of these functions is given in FIG. 398, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MBUF_SET" executes the motor output buffer scheduler work value setting process that sets the scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. “COMMAND” and “COMMAND0” are processes for issuing a command from within the scheduler. In "COMMAND", a command is issued to VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. For example, a command for starting drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by "COMMAND0" is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. The "MEMC" executes a scheduler memory copy process that copies the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[18-6. Scheduler]
Next, a scheduler that calls each function will be described. The scheduler is used to execute scheduler data, which is a data string that defines the functions required to execute a series of processes in the order of execution. One or more schedulers are provided for each purpose for management purposes, but all functions can be executed by all schedulers, and functions related to lamps can be executed by the sound scheduler, or by the accessory scheduler. There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) in the schedulers provided for each purpose, which can execute the functions for sound, and it is also possible to execute all the functions in a mixed manner. In addition, there is no limit to the number of schedulers that can be executed, and multiple registered schedulers can be executed at the same time.

FIG. 399 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler definition of the present embodiment. The scheduler can be conveniently classified according to the state transition and the device to be controlled. The outline of typical types of schedulers will be described below.

First, an example of a scheduler related to state transitions will be described. There are special figure state schedulers (special figure state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data that controls the transition of game states of the entire game. In the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the gaming state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

Further, there are sub-state schedulers (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls the transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state transitions to another state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when a player operates an effect button, wins a lottery for executing an effect, or when a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation. do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

The scheduler for sound includes a background that controls the output of the sound that is output along with the background display and the variable display of the symbol, a scheduler (SND_SCH01) for executing the symbol sound scheduler data, and is output when the advance notice effect is executed. There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) that controls the output of the sound, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of the sound when the advance notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

Similar to the sound-related scheduler, the related scheduler for the lamp includes the background that controls the lighting and blinking of the lamp according to the background display and the fluctuation display of the symbol, and the scheduler for executing the symbol lamp scheduler data (LMP_SCH01). ), A scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) that controls the lighting / blinking of the lamp when the notice effect is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) that controls the lighting / blinking of the lamp when the advance notice is executed by the accessory. The processing cycle of the scheduler for the lamp is 1f (frame).

In addition, a scheduler that controls the sound and the lamp in conjunction with each other is also defined. Such a scheduler has a sound / lamp notification layer that outputs sound and lights / blinks lamps in order to notify the outside of notifications such as ball burnout and ball jamming and alarms due to abnormality detection by magnetic sensors. There is a scheduler (INF_SCH01 to 03) for executing scheduler data for each layer. In addition, there is a sound / lamp general-purpose scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01-05) that is generally used to execute an effect in which sound output and lamp lighting / blinking are linked. The processing cycle of these schedulers is 1f (frame).

The scheduler for the motor includes a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing system operation, and a scheduler for executing motorram clear scheduler data for setting at the time of RAM clear (MOTSYS_SCH). MOTRAM_SCH), motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the arrangement of accessories, etc. (MOTINI_SCH), motor accessory correction scheduler data for executing the position correction of accessories There is a scheduler (MOTO_SCH) of the above, and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing the operation of the accessory by the production and the like.

The scheduler for executing the operation of the accessory by the production or the like is a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH01-05) for controlling the operation of a specific accessory or a general-purpose scheduler used regardless of the type of the accessory. There is a scheduler (MOT_SCH05-10).

The processing cycle of the scheduler targeting the motor is 1 ms (millisecond), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler targeting the management of the gaming state and the sound and lamp (1f of the present embodiment = about 33.334 ms). It has become.

Although the number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, the number of schedulers may be controlled to be dynamically increased or decreased according to the gaming state or the advance notice. As a result, it is possible to start each scheduler independently of the number of characters and the like provided in the gaming machine and the number of effects, and it is possible to reduce the restrictions for executing the effects.

[18-7. Application example of scheduler data (Production 1)]
The functions used in the production control and the types and functions of the scheduler that perform a series of control by combining these functions have been described above. However, the scheduler data and specific application examples of the functions will be described below with reference to the drawings. explain.

[18-7-1. Outline of production]
FIG. 400A is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the accessory controlled by using the scheduler data of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 400A, the game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a logo accessory 5001, a star accessory 5002 (left star accessory 5002a, a middle star accessory 5002b, a right star accessory 5002c), and a hatchet accessory 5003. Is placed.

The logo accessory 5001 is arranged at the upper left of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it falls (moves) from the initial position (upper stage position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the production is completed. Further, the logo accessory 5001 can move in the vertical direction as well as vibrate in the vertical and horizontal directions before and after the movement.

The star accessory 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star accessory 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star accessory 5002b is arranged in the center, and the right star accessory 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star accessory 5002 can operate independently, and one or a plurality of star accessories 5002 operate at predetermined timings depending on the content of the effect.

The left star accessory 5002a moves to the lower left, and can move to a position slightly lower to the left in the center of the game area. Further, the middle star accessory 5002b moves downward, and can move to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star accessory 5002c moves to the lower right and can be moved to a position slightly lower to the center of the game area. Each star accessory 5002 may be stopped before moving to the final arrival position, or may be returned to an intermediate position and stopped after reaching the final arrival position.

The hatchet 5003 is arranged above the center of the game area. The hatchet 5003 can be dropped (moved) from the initial position (upper position) to the intermediate position and the lower position. Depending on the operation of the production button by the player and the lottery result of the hatchet notice production, it moves from the initial position to the intermediate position and stops temporarily, then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once. The operation mode to do is set. Similar to the logo accessory 5001, the hatchet accessory 5003 can also be produced to vibrate up, down, left and right before and after movement.

Next, the flow of the advance notice effect executed by one symbol change will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 400B, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star character notice, and a button (BTN) logo character fall notice will be described. The flow of the advance notice effect including the hatchet advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 410.

FIG. 400B shows an example of the execution timing of the advance notice effect executed in the series of fluctuation display from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and is a diagram for explaining the scheduler and the scheduler data used at this time. be. In the series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 400B, a step-up notice and a button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, a group notice, a star character notice, and a button (BTN) logo character fall notice are executed. In each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lighting of a lamp, sound output, image output, operation of an accessory, and the like is executed.

Hereinafter, a part of the scheduler data for executing each notice effect will be extracted, and the functions controlled and configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" (Fig. 401) that controls the lamp in the step-up notice, the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (Fig. 402) that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice, and the star character in the star character notice. The motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" (FIGS. 403 to 405) for controlling the operation of the 5002 and the motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (FIG. 406) for controlling the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory fall notice will be described.

[18-7-2. Lamp control in step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp is controlled to change stepwise according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the step-up notice). As shown in FIG. 400B, the step-up notice lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" belongs to the notice group 01 and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) "LMP_SCH02".

FIG. 401 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” that controls the lighting and blinking of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is started, the function "SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP" is first executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP". The lottery result value of the step-up notice is stored in the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP", and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP".

The step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is processed, and by preparing an address for the dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. .. SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are the addresses of scheduler data for executing the step-up notice corresponding to the number of step-ups (1 to 4).

In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice having the number of step-ups of 4, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" specifies gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step, executes lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and waits 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Execute the process. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinked in the corresponding gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the background and symbol lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH01".

After that, when the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4", the process returns to the processing of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP" is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice having the number of step-ups of 4, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" specifies the lamp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up and executes the lamp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Wait processing is executed. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinked in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the advance notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH02".

After that, when the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4", the process returns to the next processing of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is terminated.

The step-up notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" will be described. The first is that it is possible to call the scheduler data for a lottery result with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (preliminary lottery result value in this embodiment). be. Depending on the content of the notice, the range of the lottery result value may be several hundreds, and in the case of two branches such as the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for the judgment becomes too complicated and it becomes difficult to manage corrections and the like. On the other hand, in "SUBC", the above problem is easily solved by indexing the contents of the work memory. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of call address tables for branching are one each other, but a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by making both of them a plurality. Secondly, since it takes the form of "CALL", it is possible to execute common scheduler data after executing the "SUBC" function, and it is not necessary to describe the scheduler data after branching for the number of branches, which is only. By describing one scheduler data, the same process can be executed after all branches. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branching process may not be performed and the "SUBC" function may be terminated.

That is, the function "SUBC" can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, and call the selected scheduler data. In simple conditional branching, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set the scheduler data of the branch destination, but in the function "SUBC", it is possible to easily add or delete branch destinations. , It is possible to easily add / change the production contents and improve the development efficiency.

[18-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of the present embodiment is started in the first half of the fluctuation, and the notice is executed until the end by accepting the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp is controlled according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

The button cut-in notice belongs to the notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) "LMP_SCH03" as shown in FIG. 400B. Since it belongs to a notice group different from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, it is possible to execute the notice in parallel.

FIG. 402 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is started, first, the function "KPLAY: LMP_SCH03: PTA_CUT_STA" is executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated lamp lights (blinks) for 1 second based on the gradation pattern data "PTA_CUT_STA". At this time, the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. Since one frame corresponds to one loop, 90 loops correspond to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, the functions from "LOOPST" indicating the start of the loop to the function "LOOP" indicating the end of the loop are executed up to a specified number of times. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". Button ON_OFF The operation state of the effect button is stored in the work area "YKK_BTN", "0: button OFF" when the effect button is not operated, and "1: button ON" when the effect button is operated. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Further, the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" are rewritten by a program for button processing outside the scheduler data.

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" when the button cut-in notice button is OFF is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". NS. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" of the calling scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (function "LOOP"). Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processes, the loop process is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" when the button cut-in notice button is ON in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" is the function "SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT", and the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" has the target scheduler work number "YKK_CUT" and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP". Is executed as a parameter.

The button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" stores the address of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBJ_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is processed, and by preparing an address for the dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. .. SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are the addresses of the scheduler data for executing the lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area "YKK_CUT" stores the lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. In the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4", first, the lamp is turned on in red (gradation data pattern "PTA_CUT_RED") by the lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and then the wait processing of 150 frames is executed to continue for 5 seconds. Let me. At this time, the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used to drive the scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the advance notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH03".

Since the call of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is not CALL but JUMP, the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function "STOP" and returns to the calling scheduler "SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT". do not. Therefore, there are two types of termination of the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT": when the "STOP" function included in "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed, and when the "STOP" function included in "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed from the scheduler "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1". There is.

The button cut-in notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" will be described. The first is that it is possible to call the scheduler data for a lottery result with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (preliminary lottery result value in this embodiment). Depending on the content of the notice, the range of the lottery result value may be several hundreds, and in the case of two branches such as the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment becomes too complicated and it becomes impossible to manage corrections. .. In "SUBJ", the above problem is easily solved by indexing the contents of the working memory. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of call address tables for branching are one each other, but a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by making both of them a plurality. Secondly, since it takes the form of "JUMP", it is possible to execute different processes for each branched scheduler data after executing the "SUBJ" function. Further, as in the case of "SUBC", in order to deal with a program defect, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branching process is not performed and the "SUBC" function is terminated. You may do so.

That is, the function "SUBJ" selects the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, like the function "SUBJ", and the selected scheduler data. It is possible to shift the process to, and the same effect as that of the function "SUBC" can be obtained.

Further, unlike the function "SUBJ", the function "SUBJ" continuously executes the processing of the schedule data of the callee and does not return to the processing of the caller, so that it is suitable for selectively executing the processing. ing. For example, when the content of the effect to be executed differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to prevent duplicate effects from being executed by using the function "SUBJ". On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the processing by the scheduler data of the caller, it is possible to execute the common post-processing after the processing of the callee is executed, and the processing can be simplified.

Therefore, by using the function "SUBC" and the function "SUBJ", it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and to flexibly support processing branching. Furthermore, since it becomes easy to respond to additions and changes simply by changing the branch destination of the table format, it becomes easy to improve the development efficiency and to respond to the specification change of the gaming machine.

[18-7-4. Motor control in star character notice]
Next, the control of the star character advance notice executed in the latter half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. When a reach occurs in the variable display of the special symbol and the transition to the latter half of the fluctuation occurs, a group notice is generated, and the star character notice is executed independently of the group notice. As for the star character notice, a plurality of types of star character 5002 (in this embodiment, three types of left star character 5002a, middle star character 5002b, and right star character 5002c) that can be operated by a driving body (motor) By operating, the degree of expectation of symbol fluctuation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of star characters 5002 appearing, the higher the degree of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 400B, the star character advance notice of the present embodiment is executed by driving the star character advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH02" (scheduler for left star character scheduler data). Will be done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02 to 04) for operating the star accessory 5002 is provided in advance, but a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09) can also be used. ..

FIGS. 403 to 405 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the scheduler data for controlling the motor in the star character advance notice of the present embodiment. FIG. 403 is the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” that controls the overall flow and the left star accessory 5002a, FIG. 404 is the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” that controls the right star accessory 5002c, and FIG. 405 is the scheduler that controls the middle star accessory 5002b. It is a figure explaining the data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is started, the function "SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA" is executed first. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star accessory advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated star accessory advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the star accessory advance notice work area "YKK_HYA". .. The lottery result value of the star character notice branch is stored in the star character notice work area "YKK_HYA", and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star character notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA".

The address of the star character appearance scheduler data is stored in the star character advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA". Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is processed, and by preparing an address for the dummy call, it is possible to make the accessory inoperable when the advance notice is not won. There is. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are the addresses of the scheduler data for executing the star character advance notice. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is the left star character 5002a only, and SUBC_MOT_HYA2 is the left star character 5002a SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star characters 5002.

In the present embodiment, a lottery result value indicating that the star character advance notice for causing the left star character 5002a, the middle star character 5002b, and the right star character 5002c to appear in the star character advance notice work area "YKK_HYA" is executed. "3" is stored, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In addition, when only the left star character 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star character notice is "1", and when the left star character 5002a and the right star character 5002c are operated, the lottery of the star character notice is drawn. "2" is set in the result value.

The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" first specifies the parameter "PTA_HYA_LEF" indicating the appearance operation pattern of the left star accessory 5002a, and executes the function "MPLAY" corresponding to the motor regeneration process. At this time, the function "MPLAY" is executed by the motor scheduler "MOT_SHC02" in which the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is executed.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" by the function "RQ". The function "REF" is a function for executing the scheduler data specified by the parameter by the scheduler also specified by the parameter. Here, the right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star accessory 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03". Similarly, the function "RQ" executes the middle star accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" using the middle star accessory 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04". In the present embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function "MPLAY") for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the middle star accessory 5002b is executed in the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star accessory 5002a. ing. As described above, by executing the scheduler data for operating each star accessory 5002 with different schedulers, each star accessory 5002 can be controlled in parallel.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the weight processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this weight time, the left star accessory 5002a operates in the specified mode. After the weight processing is completed, the function "RET" is executed, the caller's star character advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is returned, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is completed by the function "Stop".

Next, the control of the right star accessory 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. 404. The right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star accessory 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03" specified at the time of execution by the function "RQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is started, as shown in FIG. 404, the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed by designating the parameter "PTA_HYA_RGT" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the right star accessory 5002c. .. Subsequently, the weight processing "NOP: 300" of 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This weight time is the operating time of the right star accessory 5002c. After the weight processing is completed, the processing is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

Finally, the control of the middle star accessory 5002b will be described with reference to FIG. 405. The middle star accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is executed using the middle star accessory 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04" specified at the time of execution by the function "RQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is started, as shown in FIG. 405, the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed by designating the parameter "PTA_HYA_MID" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the middle star accessory 5002b. .. Subsequently, the weight processing "NOP: 300" of 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This weight time is the operating time of the middle star accessory 5002b. After the weight processing is completed, the processing is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star accessory 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star accessory 5002b are combined with the function "RQ". By executing using, it is possible to operate each accessory in parallel. That is, the operations of each accessory can be executed in parallel without any special control by executing the scheduler data defined individually as needed. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is that a single accessory operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when performing multiple operations corresponding to the notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, the scheduler data becomes complicated, and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, the minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called for easy control. In the present embodiment, an example in which three types of accessories are operated in parallel has been described, but more accessories can be executed in parallel as long as the operation of the accessories is not hindered. From the above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of accessories in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize a variety of effects.

[18-7-5. Motor control for logo accessory fall notice]
Subsequently, the control of the logo accessory fall notice executed in the latter half of the variation in the present embodiment will be described. The logo character fall notice is executed independently of the group notice and the star character notice. The logo accessory fall notice is a notice effect in which the logo accessory 5001 imitating the logo of the gaming machine operates so as to fall vertically in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a larger hit than usual Indicates that is high.

As shown in FIG. 400B, the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment is driven by driving the logo accessory fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" (logo accessory scheduler data scheduler). Will be executed. It is also possible to operate the logo accessory 5001 with a general-purpose scheduler (MOT_SCH05-09).

FIG. 406 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that controls the motor in the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is started, the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_GAT" is first executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_LGO_GAT". Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 rattles. At this time, the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. NS.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", and based on the contents of the button logo accessory notice work area "YKK_LGO", sets the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify. The button logo character fall notice execution lottery result is stored in the button logo character fall notice work area "YKK_LGO", and if the button logo character fall notice execution lottery is missed, "0: not executed", button Execution of logo fall notice If the lottery is won, "1: Logo fall notice execution" is set. The result of the execution lottery of the button logo accessory fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO".

While "0: Not executed" is set in the button logo character notice work area "YKK_LGO", in the button logo character fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the logo character fall notice not executed motor scheduler The data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" of the calling scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP"). Therefore, if the execution lottery for the button logo accessory fall notice is missed, the loop processing is executed 90 times, the loop processing is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. ..

On the other hand, when "1: Logo fall notice execution" is set in the button logo character notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when the button logo character fall notice execution lottery is won, the button logo character falls. In the notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" at the time of executing the logo accessory fall notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" has the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo accessory fall notice button branch call address table. It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall warning button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and if the effect button is not operated, "0: button OFF" and the effect button are operated. If so, "1: Button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory fall notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO".

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" when the logo character fall warning button is OFF. Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" of the calling scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the button logo accessory fall notice is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function "STOP" is released from the loop processing. It is executed and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the motor scheduler when the logo character fall warning button is ON in the button logo character fall warning button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO". The data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" is selected. As for the contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON", first, the function "COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON" is executed. The function "COMMAND" is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The command "COM_LGO_ON" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_DOWN" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_LGO_ON". The parameter "PTA_LGO_DOWN" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes weight processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds). At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs a falling operation for 3 seconds, and stops at the falling position for the remaining 1 second.

Further, by executing the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_INI", the logo accessory 5001 is moved from the drop position to the initial position. Subsequently, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), during which the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the weight processing is completed, the execution of the logo character drop operation is completed, so the function "MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0" is executed, the button logo character notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", and the caller's scheduler It returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" of the data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". It returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO", but since the button logo character notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" that drops the button logo character is executed. The remaining number of loops is processed, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is terminated by the function "STOP".

As described above, by internally issuing a command when dropping the logo accessory 5001, the effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal only when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped and at the timing when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function "COMMAND", it is possible to link a plurality of types of production devices and execute them as needed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to execute a more interesting production. ..

In this embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is used to display the effect on the liquid crystal on the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. However, by processing the command issued by the function "COMMAND" on the program side, the control can be changed from the scheduler to the program. By returning once, performing complicated processing that cannot be handled by function commands, and writing the processing results to the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, it is possible to perform processing that cannot be controlled by function commands. In addition, the merit of issuing a command in the scheduler data is that the command issuance timing is used as the processing timing as it is, so that time management and execution judgment by a program are not required. In addition, it is possible to interactively process external inputs (buttons, jog dials, touchpads) by the user that are not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation, issue commands using the function "COMMAND", and perform the processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the function "COMMAND" has a function of transmitting a fixed value command, but a work area is specified instead of a fixed value, and the contents of the work area are transmitted as a command. You may.

[18-8. Scheduler data application example (when the power is turned on)]
Subsequently, the scheduler data executed on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the gaming machine is turned on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine to the start of the game and the start of the first variation display will be described.

[18-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 407 is a drawing for explaining scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is turned on. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 receives the power-on command, the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" drives the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON".

When the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" is executed, the sub-internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub-game state (sub-internal state) is started. With the progress of the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", the liquid crystal display screen displays a screen corresponding to the sub-internal state, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc. as shown in FIG. 407. Will be done. At this time, the main game state is the standby state. When the waiting state ends, the game is started, and when the game ball wins the starting winning opening, the main game state and the sub internal state transition to the changing state.

[18-8-2. Power-on control]
Next, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 408 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for processing commands and scheduler data on the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment and the relationship between these configurations.

As described above, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on or when a predetermined event occurs in the game control on the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. NS. As described with reference to FIG. 390, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100, and is analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module. The command analysis module identifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process, starts the corresponding scheduler, and executes the scheduler data.

Further, when the function "COMMAND0" (Fig. 397) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis process in the same manner as the main command. Will be done.

When the main command or the command output by the function "COMMAND0" is received, the command for executing the control on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by the main command analysis process. The generated commands include commands for starting the scheduler and commands for controlling various production devices (commands for sub-internal output).

The command to start the scheduler includes, for example, the scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change in the gaming state on the main control board 1310 and the change in the sub-internal state due to the progress of control on the peripheral control board 1510, and the main control board such as the start winning prize. The scheduler data for executing the effect corresponding to the event notified from 1310, the scheduler data defined so that the various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, in addition to starting the scheduler directly from the command, it is possible to start another scheduler by the function "RQ" included in the scheduler data.

On the other hand, the command for controlling the effect device (sub-internal output command) is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command to control the effect device is output by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where it is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. The commands that control the effect device are temporarily stored in the sub-internal output command buffer, and are processed in the order in which they are stored from the beginning of the buffer.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by further invoking another scheduler from the scheduler, it is possible to execute a plurality of schedulers in a hierarchical combination by receiving one main command. As a result, various controls on the peripheral control board 1510 can be made into parts for each scheduler data, and by combining the schedulers, various effects can be realized while implementing multiple types of effects in parallel. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of gaming machines, such as streamlining debugging work.

Further, in the present embodiment, the command analysis process can be standardized by the command output by the function "COMMAND0". This makes it possible to standardize the scheduler data selection logic and function parameter determination logic by command analysis, which causes problems such as the need to manage a huge number of scheduler data combinations in a table. Can be suppressed.

Subsequently, activation of the scheduler and execution of scheduler data when a command at power-on is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 409 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when the power of the present embodiment is turned on.

As described with reference to FIG. 408, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis process, and the scheduler The sub-state scheduler is started by the start process, and the corresponding scheduler data is executed in sequence. In executing each scheduler data, the function "COMMAND0" is executed and a command is issued to create a sub-internal state, and if necessary, a lamp or sound is output corresponding to the sub-internal state. ..

To specifically explain the scheduler to be executed, first, the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" is used to execute the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON". In the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" in the standby state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", the standby state is set for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues the command "COM_STS_MDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_MDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" is executed. As a result, the lamp lighting is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the manufacturer demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 300", the standby state is set for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" is executed. As a result, the lamp lighting is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" in the model demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", the standby state is set for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_GOTO" is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data "PTA_LAMP_GOTO" in the anti-goto state. Further, by executing the function "SPLAY: PTA_SND_GOTO", sound reproduction is started based on the sound data "PTA_SND_GOTO" in the anti-goto state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 450", the standby state is set for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" that transitions to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed. The gaming machine is in a playable state at this stage, and loops in this standby state until the game is started and the gaming ball wins a prize.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND0" can be controlled as if the main control board 1310 issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have a fixed parameter value, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function "COMMAND0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is particularly effective when the capacity of the game control program is limited.

[18-9. Application example of scheduler data (effect 2)]
Next, an example of executing the hatchet accessory fall notice instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo accessory fall notice will be described. The hatchet fall notice is divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation with each other. At this time, control different from the control described so far is performed in that control such as inheriting the parameters used in the first half notice to the second half notice is performed.

[18-9-1. Outline of production]
FIG. 410 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect in a series of variation display from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and FIG. 410 (A) shows the effect executed from the start to the end of the variation and the effect. The scheduler data for executing the effect and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory fall notice.

In the series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 410 (A), the step-up notice and the button (BTN) hatchet first half fall notice, which is the first half of the hatchet fall notice, are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, a group notice is executed in the latter half of the fluctuation, and a hatchet character second half fall notice is executed following the button hatchet character first half fall notice that has been continued from the first half. In each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lighting of a lamp, sound output, image output, operation of an accessory, and the like is executed. The content of the step-up notice is as described above.

Next, the contents of the hatchet fall notice will be described with reference to FIG. 410 (B). As described above, the hatchet fall notice is divided into a button (BTN) hatchet first half fall notice and a hatchet second half fall notice.

In the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the first half, the notice effect proceeds by operating the effect button. Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice is won, the drop effect of the hatchet accessory 5003 is not executed unless the effect button is operated. On the other hand, in the latter half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, the effect is executed based on the result of the execution lottery of the hatchet accessory second half fall notice, regardless of the operation of the effect button.

When the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice is won and the effect button is operated at a predetermined timing, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the middle position. Further, if the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped to the middle position and the execution lottery for the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped to the lower position. That is, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the upper part (upper stage position, initial position) to the center (middle stage position) in the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, and falls to the lower part (lower stage position) in the latter half. In addition, if the execution lottery of the hatchet accessory second half fall notice is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 will fall to the lower part regardless of the position. Further, when the hatchet accessory fall notice is completed, the hatchet accessory 5003 returns to the upper part (initial position).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 410 (B), the hatchet accessory fall notice is produced in six different patterns. Specifically, if the result of the lottery for executing the first half of the button hatchet fall notice is non-winning, it does not depend on the operation of the production button, so that the second half of the hatchet role fall notice is not won (Pattern 1). There is a case of winning (Pattern 2). In the case of the pattern 1, since the button hatchet accessory first half fall notice and the hatchet accessory second half fall notice are not won, the hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall and is maintained without moving from the upper part. In the case of pattern 2, the hatchet accessory 5003 is located at the upper part without falling in the hatchet accessory fall notice, while the hatchet accessory 5003 is located from the top to the bottom because the execution lottery was won in the hatchet accessory second half fall notice. It falls at a stretch.

Execution of the button hatchet first half fall notice When the lottery is won, the effect mode of the button hatchet first half fall notice differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated. Therefore, the hatchet accessory fall notice can be executed in four patterns depending on whether or not the effect button is operated and the result of the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory fall notice.

If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet and do not operate the production button, and if the result of the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet is not won, the hatchet 5003 will not fall. It remains located at the top (Pattern 3). If the result of the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice is won and the effect button is operated, and the result of the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice is not won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is operated when the effect button is operated. Will fall from the top to the middle and remain in the middle until the hatchet fall notice is completed (Pattern 4).

If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet and do not operate the production button, and if you win the lottery for the second half of the hatchet fall notice, you have not operated the production button, so the hatchet role The hatchet accessory 5003 is located at the upper part without falling until the second half fall notice of the object is started, and falls from the upper part to the lower part in the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory (pattern 5). If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet, operate the production button, and then win the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet, the hatchet 5003 will start from the top when you operate the production button. It falls to the middle, and further falls from the top to the bottom in the notice of the fall of the hatchet in the second half (Pattern 6).

As described above, in the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment, six patterns of effect modes can appear, and the scheduler data for controlling the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory fall notice will be described below. Specifically, the button hatchet first half fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the button hatchet first half fall notice shown in FIG. 410 (A) and the hatchet accessory second half. The latter half of the hatchet accessory fall advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the fall notice will be described.

[18-9-2. Various controls for hatchet fall notice]
FIG. 411 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that controls the motor in the button hatchet first half fall notice, which is the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment. .. As described above, when the execution lottery of the first half fall notice of the button hatchet accessory is won, the operation of the effect button is accepted for 3 seconds by the function "LOOP", and the hatchet accessory 5003 is operated when the effect button is operated. Perform the production to make. Execution of the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice If the lottery is not won, and the effect button is not operated even if the lottery is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 ends without operating. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" for the first half of the button hatchet.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA1_STA" is executed, and the drawing of the effect when the hatchet accessory 5003 is rattled on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_GAT" is executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_NTA_GAT". Specifically, the hatchet accessory 5003 rattles.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" uses the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" as parameters. Will be executed.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", and based on the contents of the button hatchet first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the start address of. Button hatchet first half fall notice The work area "YKK_NTA1" stores the result of the execution lottery for the button hatchet first half fall notice, and if the lottery for the button hatchet first half fall notice is not won, "0:: "Non-winning", "1st half of the hatchet character fall notice execution" is set when the lottery is won. The result of the execution lottery of the button hatchet first half fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1".

Button hatchet first half fall notice When "0: Non-winning" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1", the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is selected when the first half fall notice is not executed. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is only the function "STOP", and the result of the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery is "non-winning". End the execution of.

On the other hand, when "1: Hatchet first half fall notice execution" is set in the button hatchet first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, when the button hatchet first half fall notice execution lottery is won. , Button hatchet first half fall notice Lottery result In the branch call table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" at the time of executing the hatchet fall notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button hatchet first half drop notice button branch address. It is executed with the table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" for the first half of the button hatchet, and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". .. As in the case of the button cut-in notice and the button logo accessory fall notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and when the effect button is not operated, "0: button OFF". , "1: Button ON" is set when the effect button is operated. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet first half fall notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1".

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", the button hatchet first half fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1", the button hatchet first half fall notice Button OFF motor scheduler The data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the calling scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button hatchet is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function "STOP" is exited from the loop processing. Is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button hatchet first half fall notice button is turned ON in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1". The hour motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" is selected. As for the contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON", first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the hatchet is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-MID" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to an intermediate position. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes weight processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 falls to an intermediate position.

Finally, by executing the function "MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 1", "1" is written in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, and it is recorded that the hatchet accessory 5003 has moved to the intermediate position. After that, the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is terminated by the function "STOP".

Button, which is the first half of the hatchet character fall notice When the hatchet character first half fall notice is completed, the hatchet character second half fall notice, which is the second half, is started. FIGS. 412 and 413 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the hatchet second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that controls the motor in the hatchet second half fall notice, which is the latter half of the hatchet fall notice of the present embodiment. be. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the hatchet character second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" in the same manner as the button hatchet character first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA" is executed, and drawing of an effect suggesting whether or not the hatchet 5003 falls on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. .. After that, the weight processing "NOP: 90" for 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectation of a big hit increases when the hatchet 5003 falls, the player's expectation is increased by drawing the effect for 3 seconds.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2". In the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA2" and the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as parameters. ..

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2", and based on the contents of the hatchet second half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the start address. The result of the execution lottery for the hatchet second half fall notice is stored in the work area "YKK_NTA2", and if the hatchet second half fall notice execution lottery is not won, "0: non-winning" If the lottery is won, "1: Execution of the hatchet second half fall notice" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the hatchet second half fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2".

Hatchet second half fall notice 2 When "0: Non-winning" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2", the hatchet second half fall When the notice is not executed, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result Branch based on.

When "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half fall notice is not announced in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". The run-time motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When "0: initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected when the hatchet second half fall notice is not executed in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". NS. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2". After that, the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler is overwritten with "0: initial position", and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is terminated.

On the other hand, when "1: Intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" shows the hatchet first half drop. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is selected when the advance notice is executed and the second half fall notice is not won.

In the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" when the hatchet first half fall notice is executed and the second half fall notice is not won, the weight process "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is first executed. In the weight processing executed here, as will be described later, when the hatchet accessory 5003 is in the lower position, it becomes a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position. Here, since the hatchet accessory 5003 is originally in the intermediate position, it waits for 4 seconds.

After the weight processing is completed, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP" is executed to return the hatchet 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Further, in order to secure the operation time of the hatchet 5003, the weight processing "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is restored by the function "RET".

In addition, when "1: hatchet second half fall notice" is set in the hatchet second half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" Motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of winning the second half fall notice of the accessory. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the hatchet fall notice 2 branch call address table "TBL_ ..

When "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" has not been announced. Execution / second half drop notice At the time of winning, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 413), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP: 240" executes weight processing for 240 frames (about 8 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 has reached the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), and continues drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter "PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the hatchet 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

Subsequently, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" described above is called to return the hatchet 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

On the other hand, when "1: Intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" shows the hatchet first half drop. Notice execution / second half fall notice At the time of winning, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 413), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_MID-END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_MID-END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes weight processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 has reached the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), and continues drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Here, in order to match the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position and the operation to start the operation of returning the hatchet accessory 5003 to the initial position, 120 frames (about 120 frames) are used by the function "NOP: 120". Weight processing for 4 seconds) is executed. This time is the time until the hatchet accessory 5003 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position.

After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed in the same manner as in the case of "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" to return the hatchet 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function "CALL: SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the hatchet 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When the hatchet 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2", the function "MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler is set to "0: initial position". And terminates the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

In the hatchet fall notice, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the hatchet 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, it is possible to specify the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 by writing the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 using the function "MEMW" in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the second half. .. As a result, the amount of movement of the motor can be determined for each position of the hatchet accessory 5003, and it is possible to execute the effect according to the operation result of the effect button by calling the corresponding scheduler data.

Further, even in the return operation to the initial position after the operation of the hatchet 5003, the common scheduler data is called by the movement from the intermediate position to the initial position, so that the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

The function "MEMW" can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area when executing the scheduler data and referencing it when executing other scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to specify a value indicating a state that changes due to the execution of a plurality of scheduler data at the time of executing each scheduler data. The process can be completed only by defining the scheduler data without creating scheduler data in. As a result, even if the scheduler data requires different processing depending on the state, the required number can be suppressed to the minimum, the creation and debugging of the scheduler data can be made more efficient, and the management can be facilitated. Further, in the present embodiment, the function is to write a fixed value, but by specifying the work name as a function parameter instead of the fixed value, data can be passed from the program side and processing based on command information can be performed. Can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed on the scheduler. A peculiar feature of the function "MEMW" is that even information that has not been determined at the start of execution of scheduler data including the function "MEMW" can be processed if the information is determined by the time the function "MEMW" is executed. This enables control of the effective time and interactive control.

[18-10. Scheduler data configuration example (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of advance notice effects has been described above. The execution content of such a series of advance notice effects is drawn by lottery based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, specific production contents are drawn for each notice production.

Hereinafter, the procedure for controlling the execution of a series of advance notice effects based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the basic effects related to these series of advance notice effects and variation patterns (regardless of the lottery other than the advance notice effects). The structure of the scheduler data for executing the background effect and the effect related to the pattern effect, which are produced and are one-to-one with the variable pattern, will be described.

In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the change is managed in block units (effect sections) divided into predetermined constituent units. The block is, for example, from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the occurrence of reach, or until the symbol stops when no reach occurs (first half fluctuation), and from the occurrence of reach to the stop of the symbol (second half fluctuation). ), From the stop of the symbol to the end of the change. In addition, a time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is assigned to each block, and the execution timing and execution time of the advance notice effect within the allotted time are defined. The time corresponding to each block and the data related to the basic effect to be executed are combined to form block data.

In addition, the block division rule divides the same basic effect part as common block data and the part with a difference in the basic effect of the liquid crystal display as block data when comparing the basic effects related to fluctuations in a plurality of fluctuation patterns. do. With reference to FIG. 414A, in the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern that stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment, the variation pattern "10H01H" is normally varied for 6 seconds. It is a loss, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then the design of the loss is produced. Since the 6-second effect of normal fluctuation and the loss stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns, they are divided into the 6-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) of normal fluctuation and the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) of stop loss.

The fluctuation pattern "10H02H" is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the design of the loss is produced. Since the 12-second effect of normal fluctuation is also used for other variation patterns, it is divided as the 12-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD03_BLK) of normal variation, and the pattern effect of loss is exactly the same as the variation pattern "10H01H". As the liquid crystal effect block data for stopping loss, the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) for stopping loss, which is divided into liquid crystal display blocks according to the fluctuation pattern "10H01H", is commonly used. Similarly, for other fluctuation patterns, the parts that have already been converted into block data for the basic effect are used in common, and the parts that are different are newly converted into block data.

As described above, by blocking, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data, and for all fluctuation patterns and basic effects such as jackpots other than fluctuations, by combining unique liquid crystal effect block data. , It is possible to realize basic effects such as all fluctuation patterns and jackpots other than fluctuations. It is also important that the total amount of production data to be created is significantly reduced, but the main purpose of blocking is a liquid crystal production that includes a specific basic production when there is a change in a specific basic production. The change is reflected in all fluctuation patterns that use block data.

Regarding the liquid crystal display in this embodiment, since the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source is controlled, the format and function are completely different from the scheduler data of sound, lamp, and accessory in this embodiment, but the basics are for each block data. The configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for the effect and the drawing scheduler data for the advance notice effect are combined is the same as the sub-effect block data that controls the sound, the lamp, the accessory, and the like. In addition, the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and video material IDs, display position information, enlargement / reduction information, rotation angle information, and colors related to the effects related to pictures and movies displayed in the background and patterns. It is composed of functions that can specify control information for generating a display list command for the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source, such as information and alpha information, and also indicates the type and execution timing of the effect related to the advance notice effect that occurs in the block data. Information to be shown is embedded.

Further, in the present embodiment, the block data for variablely displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device is defined as the liquid crystal symbol block data separately from the block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. As a result, the control for variable display of the identification symbol can be made independent of the control of other liquid crystal effects. For example, even when the shape of the identification symbol is changed and variable display is performed, a common notice effect can be obtained. It can be executed on a liquid crystal display device. The drawing scheduler data for displaying the symbol has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal effect. Further, the configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for the basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for the advance notice effect related to the design are combined for each block data has the same configuration as the sub-effect block data and the liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the mode of variable display of the identification symbol is embedded.

FIG. 414A is a diagram for explaining a liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, which stores combinations of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 414B is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal symbol block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern that stores a combination of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 415 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment.

The liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern is a table that holds information indicating a combination of liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern. For example, with respect to the variable pattern number, unique numbers that specify the constituent liquid crystal effect block data are held in chronological order. For example, when the fluctuation pattern number is "10H03H", it is composed of "LCD03_BLK" indicating a normal fluctuation for 12 seconds in the first half fluctuation, "LCD04_BLK" indicating a normal short reach in the second half fluctuation, and "LCD02_BLK" indicating a stoppage. Will be done. At this time, "LCD03_BLK", "LCD04_BLK", and "LCD02_BLK" are stored in this order. In this way, the configurations of the basic effect and the advance notice effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 414, the same liquid crystal effect block data is used in the same effect section. For example, when the first half fluctuation is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the content of the advance notice effect that is actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal effect block data can be realized by a unique number corresponding to the type of fluctuation, and the liquid crystal effect block data can be uniquely specified for each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 414B, the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating the combination of block data for each fluctuation pattern, similarly to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern. .. Further, the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined with a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data of the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Further, as shown in FIG. 415, the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each fluctuation pattern provides information indicating the combination of block data for each fluctuation pattern, similarly to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each fluctuation pattern. Hold. Further, the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined with a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data having the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Next, a procedure for executing the advance notice effect based on the scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern will be described. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the advance notice effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, the outline of the procedure for executing the effect control based on the liquid crystal effect block data, the effect control based on the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the effect control based on the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 416 is a diagram illustrating an outline of effect control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

When the fluctuation pattern command (main fluctuation-related command) "10H03H" is received from the main control board 1310, the fluctuation pattern number "10H03H" is specified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 is notified. Notice.

As described with reference to FIG. 392A, the effect control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and sets each variation pattern number “10H03H” based on the determined block number. The corresponding block data number is acquired from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, and the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern. do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to each effect device to the same number, it is possible to execute all the effects of each effect device in synchronization.

Then, the effect control unit 5020 transmits block data numbers for the total number of layers to the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and the sub effect block control unit 5320.

After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 is the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is the sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit. According to 5333 (5334), the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 has a normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data "LCD03_BLK" corresponding to the first half fluctuation, and the liquid crystal symbol 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5332 has a normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal symbol block data "ZUG03_BLK". , The sub-effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for 12 seconds, which is a normal fluctuation.

When the processing of the liquid crystal effect block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal effect 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, specifies parameters according to the content of the effect, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits a DISPLAY list to the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source to draw a drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

Further, when processing the liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data according to the variation display mode of the identification symbol is executed. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as that for processing the liquid crystal effect block data.

On the other hand, when the processing of the sub-effect block data is started, one or a plurality of sub-effect 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub-effect block data are started, and the scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As described above, the scheduler data includes an effect data designation function for controlling an effect device such as a lamp (“KPLAY”), a speaker (“SPLAY”), and an accessory (“MPLAY”). It is configured to execute the specified effect by sequentially executing the effect data specification functions in the defined order. The effect data designation function is transmitted to modules (lamp module 5600, sound module 5500, drive device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and each module executes the effect by various effect devices.

It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function "REF, EQUF". It is possible to control various effect devices by executing the effect data designation function in the scheduler data called at this time. Further, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND0", it is possible to control by a command instead of a function. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data designation function that controls the operation of the accessory, the operation and drawing of the accessory are linked as in the above-mentioned hatchet accessory fall notice effect. It is possible to carry out the production that has been done.

Here, a procedure for executing the effect control using the sub-effect block data will be described. FIG. 417 is a flowchart showing a procedure of sub-effect block data control start processing for each variation pattern related to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

The effect block control unit 5040 selects a variation pattern layer in the effect control unit 5020 based on the variation pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and changes the control of the block data number for each variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern. Control is started using the sub-effect block data combination number table for each pattern (FIG. 415). The row position of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 415) is set in the row index of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step S7001). For example, in the table shown in FIG. 415, if the fluctuation pattern number is "10H01H", "0" is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern number is "10H03H". Since it is the third row, “2” (row-1) is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern.

Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern with “0” (step S7002). It starts from the sub-effect block data corresponding to the first column of the specified row (sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 executes the sub-effect block data control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (step S7003). As a result, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is started, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

FIG. 418 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control activation process for each variation pattern of the present embodiment.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the variation pattern sub-effect block data combination number table based on the row and column indexes (step S7011). Further, the sub-effect block data number table row index is initialized with "0" (step S7012). As a result, the processing is started from the first record of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern specified from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern (step S7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub-effect block data number table (FIG. 420 (B)) for each variation pattern. Specifically, based on the sub-effect block data number table row index, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) is obtained from the sub-effect block data number table. get. One or more scheduler data is registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice), and the corresponding scheduler is defined for each scheduler data. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or a plurality of scheduler data are associated with each other based on the lottery result of the advance notice.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub-effect block data number table row index when all the scheduler data defined in the sub-effect block data has been started, and the sub-effect block data number table row index has a fluctuation pattern. It is determined whether or not the number of elements in the row of the separate sub-effect block data number table has been exceeded (step S7014). When the number of elements in the row of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is exceeded (the result of step S7014 is “YES”), the sub-effect block data control activation process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of sub-effect block data number table row elements for each variation pattern is not exceeded (the result of step S7014 is "NO"), the next sub-effect block data is processed.

FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern of the present embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control update process for each fluctuation pattern, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the sub-effect block data number table for each fluctuation pattern is included. This is a process for executing the next sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern when the execution of all the scheduler data of is completed. The sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is executed periodically, and the execution status of the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is monitored.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern by using the row and column indexes of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. (Step S7021). As a result, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is specified and defined in the sub-effect block data. It is determined whether or not the scheduler being executed is being executed (step S7022). If it is being executed (the result of step S7022 is "YES"), the execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub-effect block data control update process is terminated.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all the schedulers of the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) defined in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. When is completed (the result of step S7022 is “NO”), the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each fluctuation pattern is incremented, and whether or not the next column data is the end data (“DATA_END”). Is determined (step S7023). If it is end data (the result of step S7023 is "YES"), since a series of effects have been completed, the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is terminated.

On the other hand, when the next column data is not the end data (the result of step S7023 is "NO"), the scheduler execution unit 5060 starts executing the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern corresponding to the next column data. , Sub-effect data block control scheduler activation processing for each fluctuation pattern is executed (step S7024).

As described with reference to FIGS. 414A, 414B, and 415, the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing. By making the execution time of each block data the same, it is possible to synchronize the effect control by the drawing scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers. In addition, by blocking, if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the number of activations of the effect block and the scheduler defined in the effect block will always be the same regardless of the combination of effects and the appearance of the effect, and the program The complexity of the can be reduced and, as a result, the quality can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the effect control by one or more drawing schedulers and sub-effect schedulers, it is possible to link the operations of various effect devices, and various effects without discomfort are executed. can do. In addition, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data that controls various production devices should be independently developed and operation confirmed for each production device and block data. Is possible, and development efficiency can be improved.

FIG. 420 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for executing the basic effect and the advance notice effect of the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment, and FIG. 420A is a diagram showing the timing of executing the basic effect and the advance notice effect and the said. The execution time of the advance notice effect, (B), shows the structure of the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern. The sub-effect block data for each variation pattern includes background sub-effect block data and notice sub-effect block data for executing the background effect and the notice effect. In FIG. 420 (B), two types of sub-effect block data, background block data and advance notice block data, are combined, but the number of sub-effect block data can be varied.

As shown in FIG. 420, the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern constituting the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” are “SCH03_BLK” (normal fluctuation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), and “SCH02_BLK” ( Loss stop). The sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the left symbol and the right symbol. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to a period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to the period in which the middle symbol is stopped, the result of the variation display is confirmed as a loss, and the confirmed symbol is displayed.

In the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 420 (A), the sub-effect block data related to the step-up notice, the BTN logo accessory fall notice, and the symbol stop notice notice, and the sub-effect related to the background. Block data is defined. Further, in the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK", the sub-effect block data of the cut-in notice and the group notice and the sub-effect block data related to the background are defined. Further, in the sub-effect block "SCH02_BLK", the advance notice effect sub-effect block data is not defined, but the sub-effect block data related to the background is defined. In the figure, the execution of the advance notice effect is not duplicated, but a plurality of advance notice block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of advance notice effects are duplicated. The contents of each notice effect shown in FIG. 420 are as described above.

Hereinafter, the effect control by each sub-effect block data will be described. As shown in FIG. 420 (B), two types of sub-effect block data in the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern will be described.

In the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background, normally variable 12-second background sub-effect block data is defined. The sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12-second background are defined in the normal fluctuation 12-second background sub-effect block data. Since the background sub-effect block data with a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as that of the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK". Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" is completed.

The sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice defines the function "NOP", the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the BTN logo accessory fall notice sub-effect block data, and the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to perform a sub-effect according to the liquid crystal effect. In the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data. The BTN logo accessory fall notice sub-effect block data defines the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo accessory fall notice. The BTN logo accessory fall notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the BTN logo accessory fall notice liquid crystal effect block data. As the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice are defined. The symbol stop notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notice liquid crystal effect block data. The sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-mentioned sub-effect block data.

By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub-effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

At this time, from the start of fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal effect block data (step-up notice), the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal notice effect from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect. Function until the start of, and from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the last liquid crystal notice effect (design stop notice) to the end of the execution of the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern. "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub-effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the scheduler block for each fluctuation pattern by the function "NOP", the scheduler is sequentially executed at the execution timing of each advance notice effect by a program or the like. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effect of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal advance notice effect at the designated timing. Further, it is assumed that the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern does not have to be.

The execution time of the advance notice effect set by the scheduler data that controls the effect device such as the lamp, the sound, and the accessory is defined as a common time for each advance notice effect. As a result, the time from the start of the control by the sub-effect block data to the execution of each advance notice effect is uniquely determined, so that the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

Further, the time information at the time of executing the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is managed as a relative value from the start of executing the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, not from the start of the fluctuation. As a result, when the same sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern has an effect start time from the start of the variation for each variation pattern. Although it will be different, since the time value is relatively managed in the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, it can be processed without any problem. The liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is also managed by the relative value from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each fluctuation pattern is also managed as a relative value from the start of execution. It is managed by the relative value from the start of data execution.

Next, the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern will be described. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to the normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub-effect block data are executed in parallel.

Normal short reach background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. In the normal short reach background sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined. Since the normal short reach background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern is completed.

The function "NOP", the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, and the group notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal effect scheduler, and is defined to execute a sub-effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in notice are defined. The cut-in notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal effect block data. In the group notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the group notice are defined. The group notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the group notification liquid crystal production block data. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-mentioned sub-effect block data.

By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub-effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

Further, the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern has the same number of sub-effect block data columns as the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern, but the number of sub-effect block data columns may increase or decrease. no problem.

Finally, in the sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" for each variation pattern, since the effect related to the advance notice is not performed, only the loss stop background sub-effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. The sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normally fluctuating 12-second background are defined in the loss stop background sub-effect block data. Since the loss stop background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as that of the sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" is completed.

FIG. 421 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment. The liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern differ only in the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub-effect block data. Since the data format and the control method are common to each other, the description thereof will be omitted.

Subsequently, the configuration of the sub-effect block data will be described by taking the step-up effect described with reference to FIG. 392B as an example. First, an outline of creating liquid crystal display scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 422 is a diagram showing an image of creating a drawing data file for each step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect to 4 effect) by using a video composition / motion creation graphic tool for the step-up notice for the liquid crystal display of the present embodiment. be.

The drawing data file is created in units of step-up effects, and is composed of a series of effects that combine still images and moving images. Further, as shown in FIG. 422, the drawing data file is converted into the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the present embodiment by the tool in step-up effect units.

The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-to-one with the liquid crystal notice effect (step-up notices 1 to 4) is that, for example, when only the step-up 1 effect is changed, four types of step-up notices as in the present embodiment are used. If is feasible, it is necessary to change the drawing data files for 4 lines, and considering the work time required for the change and the risk of omission of correction, the drawing data files are created in a unique number for each step. This is because it is more efficient to realize the notice in combination.

FIG. 423 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the effect block data of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. (A) shows the structure of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, and (B) shows the structure of the step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, four types of step-up notices can be executed in the present embodiment, but step-up notices 1 and 2 are shown in (A) and (B). In the step-up notices 3 and 4, the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect are executed at predetermined timings.

Explaining the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data, first, it is decided whether to execute any of the step-up notices 1 to 4 based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice acquired at the start of the fluctuation. NS. If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is not won, the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is not executed, so that the step-up notice is not executed and drawing is not performed on the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 1, the step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 2. Step-up notice Step-up notice 2 of the liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 is terminated because the data to be executed next is "DATA_END".

Further, the function "NOP" is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02, the weight is performed for the time specified by the parameter, and then the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed. Step-up 2 After the liquid crystal effect scheduler data execution is completed, the next data to be executed is "DATA_END", so the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is terminated.

As described above, by combining the effect scheduler data of the advance notice in the minimum configuration unit, it is possible to realize a plurality of variations of a single advance notice.

Subsequently, the step-up notice sub-effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 423 (B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured such that the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data has a one-to-one correspondence with the block configuration and the execution time. As a result, it is possible to dynamically synchronize all the effect devices with respect to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result of the advance notice, and it is possible to realize the effect with a sense of unity.

The step-up notice sub-effect block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the function executed by the sub-effect scheduler data. Since the data format and the control method are common, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub-effect block data stored in the data access order is acquired from the sub-effect block data combination table "SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO" for each fluctuation pattern. Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub-effect block data according to the data access order, it is possible to execute the basic effect and the advance notice effect defined in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. ..

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data that controls various effect devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data that is executed at the same timing is defined at the same execution time, so that the various effect devices can be used. The production can be synchronized. Further, when the execution of the scheduler data is started, a predetermined operation is subsequently performed at the timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, only by executing the corresponding block data based on the information that identifies the effect content such as the fluctuation pattern, the scheduler data defined in a layered manner is automatically acquired, and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to do.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be started and schedule data can be executed independently by each scheduler, it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, which greatly improves development efficiency. Can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler is configured to analyze the scheduler data described in a predetermined format and control the effect device. Therefore, even if the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic unit included in the peripheral control board 1510) is updated, a common schedule can be obtained by installing a scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common schedule data on different platforms, and it is possible to utilize software assets related to production control of gaming machines for a long period of time.

The scheduler in this embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is realized by software, the scheduler started when the scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use to free up the used area of the memory. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, it may be released when a predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the schedule data is completed, or it may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler when the gaming machine is in the customer waiting state.

[19. LCD production scheduler data production control]
Subsequently, the details of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data is composed of a combination of functions that control the effect target, like the sub effect block data. In the sub-effect block data, sound output, lamp lighting, operation of the drive device, etc. were controlled targets, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, drawing on the liquid crystal display device is controlled.

[19-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
First, a function (liquid crystal effect scheduler function) that constitutes liquid crystal effect scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal effect scheduler function is an effect control command (function, command) described in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data described above, and a command is sent to the sound source built-in VDP1540a by the liquid crystal effect scheduler function. Send and perform the production. In addition, when executing the liquid crystal effect scheduler function, the attributes of the displayed object (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) can be changed by specifying parameters.

[19-1-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
FIG. 424 is a diagram showing an example of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function of the present embodiment. The outline of each liquid crystal effect scheduler function will be described below.

Each liquid crystal effect scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and subscheduler setting.

First, the functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is for setting the liquid crystal display object by designating the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, for example. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display object.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ" specify the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position, respectively, and set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" specifies the X-axis coordinate position, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target object.

Next, the group to which the function for scaling (scale setting) the display target (still image, moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling is, for example, setting the center of a designated display area to be enlarged or reduced when displaying on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or moving image stored on the CGROM, or converting the unit of coordinates. It is to do. By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing the drawing process, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" belong to the scale setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX" specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ" specifies the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

Next, the group to which the function for setting the angle when rotating and displaying the liquid crystal display object belongs will be described. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and displaying it by specifying the angle, it is not necessary to store a plurality of the rotated liquid crystal display objects, and the increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. can.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X-axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y-axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. Further, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" specifies an X-axis value, a Y-axis value, and a Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object.

Next, other functions will be described. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA" is an α setting process, and specifically, the α value is specified to set the transparency of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value indicating transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not allow the background color to pass through at all.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME" is a frame setting process, and specifically, a frame value which is a drawing update interval of a liquid crystal display object is set. The frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval for redrawing the liquid crystal display object during animation processing.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z index is a hierarchy for displaying the liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object is displayed on the front side or moved to the back side on the screen. For example, when the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so that it is drawn on the backmost surface.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" belong to the effect SW setting group for setting information about the effect SW. Although the details will be described later, the effect SW is information incorporated in the control information for drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back and the effect content is switched. , Perform another production. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW" sets the effect SW information in the still image index number on the CGROM and the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW" sets the frame effect SW information in the entire LCD effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" sets the SW information that defines the special control information described later in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH" is a function for calling the subscheduler. By defining highly versatile processing as a subscheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, it is possible to simplify the processing and improve the development efficiency.

[19-1-2. Scheduler function parameters for LCD production]
The example of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described above. Next, the parameters specified when the liquid crystal effect scheduler function is executed will be described with an example. 425 and 426 are diagrams showing an example of parameters for the liquid crystal effect scheduler function in the present embodiment.

The parameters of the liquid crystal effect scheduler function are managed for each group in the same manner as the liquid crystal effect scheduler function. The liquid crystal effect scheduler function group and the parameter group are divided into different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, sub-effect scheduler function, and the like.

The sequence control parameter groups include "AAD_FRAME", "AAD_POS", "AAD_POS2", "AAD_POS3", "AAD_ALPHA", "AAD_ANGLE", "AAD_ENTRY", "AAD_ENTRY_B", "AAD_SKIP", "AAD_SKIP_B", "AAD_SCALE", "AAD_SCALE", "AAD_SCALE", and "AAD_SCALE". ] Etc. are included. Hereinafter, each parameter will be described.

"AAD_FRAME" is a parameter for specifying a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS" is a parameter for specifying the X-axis coordinate position, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS2" is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, each having a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS3" is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, each having a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_ALPHA" is a parameter for designating the α value, which is the transparency of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. "AAD_ANGLE" is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY_B" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

"AAD_SKIP" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SKIP_B" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped during liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

"AAD_SCALE" is a parameter that specifies a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE2" is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE3" is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SIZE" is a parameter that specifies the size of the liquid crystal display object on the XY2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

The parameter group of the effect SW includes "AAD_LCDSWENTRY", "AAD_LCDSW", "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM", "AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY", "AAD_KICKLCDSW", "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY", "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" and the like.

"AAD_LCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered production SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_LCDSW" is a parameter for designating the number of the effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit length numerical values. "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_KICKLCDSW" is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit length numerical values. "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of footage setting parameters includes "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY", "AAD_SEQFOOT" and the like. "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SEQFOOT" is a parameter that specifies the index number of the still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. "AAD_ZUGARA" is a parameter for designating the symbol index number and has a length of 16 bits.

The parameter group of the sub-effect scheduler function includes "AAD_SUBENTRY", "AAD_SUB", and the like. "AAD_SUBENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of subscheduler function parameters and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SUB" is a parameter that specifies the subscheduler function number and has a length of 16 bits.

[20. Callback control based on image information]
Conventionally, the effect control in a gaming machine has been realized by executing a combination of a program for individually controlling various effect devices and a program for linking a plurality of effect devices. These programs were described by program codes representing the operation contents and control procedures of the effect device for each content of the notice in addition to the commands related to the fluctuation pattern, and were created by a programmer having advanced technology. In the liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data is called in the frame in which the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawings (background, pattern, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

However, in recent game machines, in order to improve the performance of hardware and the interest of the game machine, it is required to execute a wide variety of productions, and it is necessary to realize complicated production control. As a result, advanced technology is required for individual programmers, development man-hours increase, and it becomes difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Further, as the total amount of the program code of the effect control program increases, the man-hours required for the test for the purpose of confirming the operation of the gaming machine and improving the quality also increase.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, it may be possible to realize the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) by the program code. Instead, the program data for the game machine is output by the tool that creates the liquid crystal drawing effect, and the effect is controlled based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving the quality.

Specifically, by allocating images and moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in chronological order, a tool capable of creating data for executing a liquid crystal drawing effect is used. In this tool, a single production drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one production block, and the production blocks are grouped according to the state such as fluctuation pattern and big hit to create a production common block. By combining multiple production common blocks, a series of production drawing such as fluctuation patterns and big hits is realized.

However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, the display or non-display of the effect related to the lottery, the replacement of the effect and the design, and the interactive effect for the external input by the player occur, so the combined effect common block is simply executed as it is. Then, it is impossible to realize all the productions.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the effect common block is created by the above-mentioned tool, the effect switch (effect SW) for calling a program for executing the effect at a predetermined timing or executing a predetermined control is performed. ) Can be set (embedded). The effect SW is a flag on the RAM and is set to ON or OFF. When the effect SW set in the effect data for drawing is set, a callback always occurs regardless of whether the effect SW is "ON" or "OFF". Further, when the effect SW is ON in the function of the callback destination, predetermined control is performed based on the defined effect SW information corresponding to the effect SW. The effect SW is set to ON by a command issued inside the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. The effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 executes and analyzes the effect block included in the effect common block at the time of liquid crystal drawing and detects the incorporated effect SW, the program function is dynamically called based on the detected effect SW (callback). do). Then, a display list command can be created based on the information processed by the called back program function, and the effect display can be turned ON / OFF and the effect can be replaced. In addition, in the program function called by the callback, it is also possible to execute an effect other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of a lamp, operation of an accessory, etc.). In addition, it is possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting a flag and updating data in a predetermined area. As described above, by calling the program function by detecting the effect SW, it is possible to display or hide the drawing by a plurality of effect blocks, replace the effect and the design, and realize an interactive effect for the external input by the player. ..

The program functions for turning on / off the liquid crystal effect and replacing the effect, which are called by the callback, are built in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and do not need to be newly created. Therefore, by setting the production SW so that a designer or a plan creator who does not have advanced program knowledge calls a predefined program function while setting production elements such as images and videos at the time of production design. It is possible to realize complicated production specifications. Furthermore, by creating a production block (liquid crystal production scheduler data) for each production configuration unit using the production creation tool, it is possible to significantly shorten the development period, and in addition, the production content is based on random lottery results. By performing the test using the effect SW without performing the test, the test process can be simplified and the time required for the test can be significantly reduced.

[20-1. Composition of production switch]
Subsequently, the configuration of the effect switch (SW) will be described. FIG. 427 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of an effect switch according to the present embodiment. The effect SW is uniquely identified by the effect SW number, and is associated with information necessary for replacing the effect, a program function called by a callback, and the like.

The effect SW group ID, the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW attribute, the effect SW start command address, the effect replacement information table address, and the like are associated with the effect SW number.

The effect SW group is a set of effect SWs grouped according to the execution mode of the effect, and the effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group and defines which effect SW group it belongs to. The effect SW reset group has the same configuration as the effect SW group, and by specifying the effect SW reset group ID, the effect SW group belonging to the effect SW reset group is set to OFF, and the effects belonging to the effect SW group are collectively set to OFF. Can be hidden. The effect SW reset group ID is an identifier of the effect SW reset group. Since the effect SW group ID and the effect SW reset group ID have a bit configuration, a plurality of effect SW groups can be specified.

FIG. 428 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect SW group of the present embodiment. Further, as described above, there are active and passive effect SWs, and the effect SW group is composed of one or a plurality of active effect SWs and passive effect SWs. Specifically, the head group number of the active effect SW and the number of active effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group, and the head group number of the passive effect SW and the number of passive effect SWs are included.

The effect SW attribute is information indicating the attribute of the effect SW, and specifically, includes liquid crystal effect SW full reset information, replacement information, special control information, passive / active information, and the like. The liquid crystal effect SW full reset information is information that specifies whether or not to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. The replacement information is information that specifies whether or not to call the callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call a default callback function when evaluating the effect SW. The passive / active information indicates a method of evaluating the effect SW. Passive evaluates the effect SW statically, and active evaluates the effect SW dynamically.

The effect SW start command address is the address of the effect SW start command table. The effect SW start command is a command sequence for setting the effect SW to ON, and a command for setting the effect SW to ON is defined in the effect SW start command table. FIG. 429 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW activation command table of the present embodiment. FIG. 429 illustrates the effect SW start command table “lcdsw_cmd_en_ykk_b051_crs_charenge_suc” and the effect SW start command table “lcdsw_cmd_act_b056_cmc_su3_out_red”. Each table is composed of data for the number of commands and the number of judgment commands.

[20-2. Control by production switch in step-up notice production]
Next, the effect control using the effect switch will be described by taking a step-up notice effect as an example. FIG. 430 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice in the present embodiment, (A) shows a stage in which the step-up notice effect is executed, and (B) is a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device at each stage. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 430 (A), the step-up notice of the present embodiment can be executed up to four stages, and at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the next stage is executed. .. If the step-up notice develops, the next step-up notice effect is continuously executed, and if it does not develop, the step-up notice ends as it is.

Here, variations of the step-up notice production at each stage will be described. In the step-up notice 1, which is the first stage after the start of the step-up notice effect, the effect that the display screen is filled with ink is executed. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested by the color of the ink and the pattern of filling. For example, when the color of black ink is black, the degree of expectation is low, and the degree of expectation is high in the order of white, red, and rainbow color. Further, as the filling pattern, the higher the number of positions where the filling is started, the higher the degree of expectation, and the degree of expectation may be changed at the position itself where the filling is started. For example, if the fill is started from only one place on the lower left, the expectation is low, if the fill is started from two places on the lower left and upper left, or if the fill is started from three places on the lower left, upper left and upper right. Expectations are higher in order, and highest when filling is started from the four corners.

Further, as described above, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage, the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage is executed. In the development production, the production is executed in a common manner halfway in order to raise the expectation of the player regardless of whether or not it actually develops to the next stage. Explaining the case of the step-up notice 1, first, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with the combination of the black color and the fill pattern determined by the lottery. After that, when the screen is completely filled, the ink gradually fades (becomes lighter), and the characters to be displayed in the step-up notice 2 emerge. When the step-up notice 2 is developed, the ink is applied as it is and the characters are displayed darker, and the production is continued. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the characters are not displayed darkly and are inked and hidden.

In the step-up notice 2, characters are displayed according to the degree of expectation. Expectations for the character pattern increase in the order of "change," "ossu," "spirit," "continuation," and "one-shot deadly." In the effect mode of the step-up notice 2, first, the screen is filled while expanding the area to be filled with the combination of the black color and the fill variation in the step-up notice 1 in the state where the characters are displayed. After that, when the screen is completely filled with ink, the process proceeds to step-up notice 3. On the other hand, if the development effect fails, the ink is gradually removed before the screen is completely filled with ink, and finally the ink is completely removed and the displayed characters disappear. It will end up.

In the step-up notice 3, the liquid crystal display screen is filled with black ink by the step-up notice 2, and the effect of gradually removing the black ink is executed from this state. At this time, the degree of expectation is suggested according to the pattern of ink sticking. For example, if the ink is applied from only one place on the lower left, the expectation is low, and if the ink is applied from two places on the lower left and upper left, the ink is applied from three places on the lower left, upper left, and upper right. The degree of expectation is higher in the order of going, and the degree of expectation is highest when the ink is drawn from the four corners. If the characters are displayed in the process of removing the ink and the characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the characters are removed, the development effect is successful and the process shifts to the step-up notice 4. On the other hand, if no characters are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen after all the ink has been removed, it means that the development effect has failed.

The step-up notice 4 is the final stage of the step-up notice, and the degree of expectation is suggested by the content (pattern) and color of the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. For example, the character pattern has higher expectations in the order of "game", "opportunity", "development", "enthusiastic fight", "fierce heat", and "happiness". In addition, the character color is expected to be higher in the order of black, white, red, and rainbow. In the effect mode of the step-up notice 4, an animation or the like in which the displayed characters are enlarged is executed.

Subsequently, a procedure for executing the step-up notice described above by the effect SW will be described. FIGS. 431 to 433 are diagrams for explaining the execution procedure of the step-up notice using the effect SW in the present embodiment. FIG. 431 is a diagram showing the correspondence between all the effect contents and the effect SW in the step-up notice 1. FIG. 432 (A) shows the step-up notice 1 for executing the step-up notice 1 to be filled with black ink from the four directions of the screen. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data and drawing image, and (B) shows the red ink from the upper right and lower left of the screen. Step-up notice 1 for executing the step-up notice 1 to be filled with. The liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the drawing image are shown. FIG. 433 is a diagram showing the relationship between the effect SW for replacing the effect related to the step-up notice 1 and the effect.

FIG. 431 is all the effects produced in the step-up notice 1, and is divided into each drawing (lower left of ink drawing, upper left of ink drawing, lower right of ink drawing, upper right of ink drawing, character failure, character success). The name of the effect SW and the content of the effect are described in correspondence with each category. The total number of step-up effects shown in the figure is a total of 16 effects with 4 effects for each of the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right drawing categories, and a total of 10 effects with 5 effects for each of the character failure and character success drawing categories, for a total of 26 effects. It has become. In addition, only one effect can be executed at the same time in each drawing category, and only one of the drawing categories "character failure" and "character success" is executed. Therefore, the maximum effect to be executed at the same time in step-up notice 1. The number is 5 effects in total, including the drawing category "lower left", the drawing category "upper left", the drawing category "lower right", the drawing category "upper right", and the drawing category "character failure" or the drawing category "character success".

In addition, a method for determining the effect of each drawing category will be specifically described according to the advance notice lottery result value of the step-up notice 1. First, a lottery for step-up notice 1 is performed to determine the content of the production related to ink drawing. Specifically, the production contents related to ink drawing are the selection of the position where the ink appears from the drawing divisions "lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right", and the color of the ink appearing from the selected ink appearance place. Become. In addition, it is either the drawing category "character failure" or the drawing category "character success" and the content of the character displayed at this time.

Next, the configuration of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control will be described with reference to FIG. 432 (A). .. As mentioned above, the total number of effects of step-up notice 1 is 26, but the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal production scheduler data includes one for each drawing category of lower left, upper left, lower right, upper right, character failure, and character success. Only the production data of is defined. When the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed without any control, that is, when all the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed at the same time, as shown in the figure of the step-up notice 1 drawing image. Black ink spreads from the lower left, upper left, lower right, and upper right of the screen at the same time, and the characters "change" are displayed lightly in the drawing category "character failure" and the drawing category "character success", and then the drawing category "character". "Failure" erases the "change" character, and at the same time, the "change" character is clearly displayed in the drawing category "character success".

Further, in FIG. 432 (B), according to the lottery result of the step-up notice 1, the drawing category “lower left” is “red”, the drawing category “upper left” is “none”, the drawing category “lower right” is “none”, and drawing. Issue a command with the category "upper right" being "red", the drawing category "character failure" being "spirit", and the drawing category "character success" being "none". As a result, in the drawing image, red ink spreads from the drawing category "lower left", red ink spreads from the drawing category "upper right", and the characters "spirit" are displayed lightly in the drawing category "character failure". , The character of "Ki" is deleted in the drawing category "Character failure".

At this time, the effect SW corresponding to the corresponding effect is set to ON according to the content of each issued lottery command. Specifically, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower left" is set to "red", "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON, and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "upper right" is set to "red". Then, "LEDSW_RIGUP_S1_RED" is set to ON, and "LEDSW_MOJI_NGS1_KIA" is set to ON for the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "character failure is enthusiastic". On the other hand, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "upper left" is "none", the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower right" is "none", and the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "character success" is "none". Since the command "" is not produced, none of the effect SWs is set to ON and is set to OFF.

As a result, red ink spreads from the drawing category "lower left" and red ink spreads from the drawing category "upper right" from all the effects of step-up notice 1, and the drawing category "character failure" is "spirit". It is realized that the effect SW corresponding to the case of displaying characters is set to ON according to the command based on the lottery result of the step-up notice 1.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 433, the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data of FIG. 432 (A) is used to perform an effect according to the lottery result of the step-up notice 1 of FIG. 433 (B). The mechanism for replacing the production will be explained.

FIG. 433 is a diagram for explaining the master data defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each drawing category in the present embodiment and the effect SW corresponding to the replacement data to be replaced with the master data. More specifically with reference to the lower left ink effect replacement group in FIG. 433, the effect SW corresponding to the master data of the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left. It becomes the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to. On the other hand, the production SW corresponding to the replacement data corresponds to the index number on the CGROM of the video in which white ink spreads from the lower left, the corresponding production SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI", and the index number on the CGROM of the video in which red ink spreads from the lower left. The production SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" and the production SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_REI" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which the rainbow ink spreads from the lower left. The replacement data is not defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data, but is separately defined in the lower left ink effect replacement table. Further, the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the moving image in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data is defined in both the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table.

The liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 analyzes and executes the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the process of creating a display list command to draw the effect, and is defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Using the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" as a trigger (when detected), a callback is generated, and control is transferred from the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 to a program function for effect replacement.

In the replacement program function called by the callback, the lower left ink effect replacement table is referred to, all the effect SWs registered in the lower left ink effect replacement table are determined, and the effect SW set to ON is specified. do. In the present embodiment, the step-up notice 1 lottery command drawing category "lower left" is "red", and the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_RED" is set to ON. The moving image number on the CGROM of "red ink" is specified.

The replacement program function called by the callback delivers the moving image number on the red black CGROM from the specified lower left to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 and ends the execution. When the control returns to the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 again, the liquid crystal effect 1f drawing scheduler execution unit 5331 corresponds to the moving image in which black ink appears from the lower left defined in the step-up notice 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Instead of creating a display list command using the above video number, use the video number on the CGROM corresponding to the video in which red ink appears from the lower left handed over from the replacement program function. create.

The features of the replacement of the effect by the callback of the present embodiment are the low-level control structure (in this embodiment, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the data structure that is easy to change and suitable for tooling) to the high-level control structure (the present embodiment). By calling a program function for replacement (a program function that is unsuitable for change but enables complicated processing) by calling back, it is possible to separate the detection of the timing of replacement and the replacement control, which is simple. It is possible to perform complicated processing using the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, which is a data structure.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier for the callback (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW in the present embodiment). Instead of executing the same control as the effect control of this embodiment by calling back, a structure for performing complicated control on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side is incorporated, and the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side has a complicated liquid crystal effect scheduler. When the effect control is realized by analyzing and executing the data, the complexity of the program code processed on the liquid crystal 1f drawing scheduler execution unit side increases, and when adding a new function or changing the function, be sure to do so. It is necessary to change the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In this case, it is necessary to change both the program code and the data, and not only the problem occurs due to the control change, but also the function that was operating normally before the change is affected and a new problem occurs. There is a risk that it will end up.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the execution of the callback is always executed by the callback regardless of the identifier for calling back (ON / OFF setting value of the effect SW), and a plurality of times executed by the callback are executed. Judge whether execution is possible or the processing content in the callback function of. By creating the corresponding callback function to realize a single function, it is not necessary to change the liquid crystal effect scheduler data structure even when adding a new function or changing the function, and the call corresponding to the new function This can be achieved by creating a back function or modifying an existing callback function. Therefore, the range of influence due to the change or addition of the function is limited to the callback function to be newly added or changed, and the possibility of affecting other callback functions and causing a malfunction is reduced. Also, compared to the case where the execution analysis of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is centrally executed by a single large program, the person who performs the execution analysis by using multiple callback functions and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data to realize each function. However, the structure and structure of the program can be simplified.

In the present embodiment, the description is focused on the replacement of the effect, but the control mechanism by the callback of the present embodiment is not only the replacement of the effect, but also the replacement of the symbol, the control of the display or non-display of the effect, and the drawing target. It can also be applied to conversion of drawing data, execution of scheduler data of other effect display devices, and conversion of scheduler data.

Here, about the purpose of defining the effect SW "LEDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK" corresponding to the index number on the CGROM of the video in which black ink spreads from the lower left of the master data in both the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the lower left ink effect replacement table. explain. If the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is not defined in the effect replacement table, the relationship between the master and the replacement target, that is, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW is always the liquid crystal effect scheduler. It exists only on the data, and the replacement effect SW corresponding to the master and the index number on the corresponding CGROM exist only in the effect replacement table. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect replacement table and the effect SW are each defined in the thousands. Consistency between the index number of the video (image) on the CGROM and the production SW under the circumstances where the game specifications are frequently changed or the game specifications are added between the planning and development of the game machine and the introduction to the market. Is extremely difficult to maintain.

Regarding the relationship between the index number on the CGROM and the effect SW, the index number on the CGROM corresponding to the master effect SW may be erroneously defined in the effect replacement table, or conversely, the CGROM corresponding to the replacement effect SW. It is possible that the above index number is mistakenly registered in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. In this case, there is a difference between the command value of the effect lottery and the number of data of the effect SW on the replacement table and the index number on the corresponding CGROM, and the effect is replaced with an effect different from the effect selected in the effect lottery. .. Since the degree of expectation is set for each production, it is possible that a production dedicated to big hits that does not appear due to fluctuations in the deviation may appear, which is a fatal problem for a gaming machine. By defining the effect replacement table including the master effect SW and the index number on the corresponding CGROM as in the present embodiment, it is possible to confirm the consistency by comparing the total number of effects with the replacement table. Become. In addition, since the liquid crystal effect scheduler data operates without any problem regardless of which data in the replacement table is defined, it is a control method that is extremely unlikely to cause a problem. In the present embodiment, even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is drawn as a result of the effect lottery, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used and is always replaced. A display list command is created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the table, and the effect is drawn.

In the step-up notice 3, as described above, the black ink is gradually erased from a part or all of the vertices of the display area from the filled state, and the characters emerge when the development effect is successful. On the other hand, when the development effect fails, the characters are not displayed and the ink is completely erased, and the step-up notice ends as it is. In both success and failure, the effect of gradually erasing the ink from the vertices of the display area is executed, so the effect SW flags for four types of drawing patterns that gradually erase the ink for each vertex. (Layer) is defined. In addition, two types of effect SW flags (layers) corresponding to the result of the development effect are defined.

The composition and control method of the upper left ink replacement group, the lower right ink replacement group, the upper right ink replacement group, the character failure effect replacement group, and the character success effect replacement group other than the lower left ink replacement group shown in FIG. 433 are the same as those of the lower left ink replacement group. Is.

In the step-up notice 4, since the step-up notice is not continuously executed thereafter, the effect SW flag (layer) may be defined according to the mode in the animation of the displayed characters, or one type of effect SW flag (layer) may be defined. Only the layer) may be defined, and the type of character animation may be set by the parameter.

As described above, in the present embodiment, different types of effects can be produced by individually defining the drawing effect patterns for each ink appearance position or character content and setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the effect to be executed to ON. It can be executed or a combination of effects can be executed. Since switching and combining the effects only requires individual switching of the effect SW flag settings, the planners who configure the effects without the need for technology such as creating a new program simply set the parameters with the tool. It is possible to realize various variations of production. For example, in step-up notice 1, it is possible to realize dozens of drawing patterns simply by combining four types of drawing patterns depending on the appearance position of black ink and two types of display patterns as a result of development effect. As a result, the types of programs to be developed can be minimized, the development efficiency of the production control program of the gaming machine can be improved, and the inspection of the developed production control program can be made more efficient to improve the quality. Can be done.

[20-3. Overview of control based on production switch]
Next, an outline of control based on the effect switch will be described. FIG. 434 is a diagram for explaining the control procedure by the effect switch of the present embodiment, and in particular, shows the evaluation procedure for setting the effect SW to ON. In the present embodiment, first, when a main command (main control command) that triggers the start of production is received from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1530 issues a peripheral control internal to the configuration in the peripheral control board 1510. The issue command is generated. The peripheral control internal issuance command is a command for executing a notice lottery or executing an effect by the peripheral control unit 1530.

The effect SW command analysis module of the peripheral control board 1510 evaluates the analyzed main control command and the received sub-internally issued command, and sets the corresponding effect SW to ON. Specifically, it is compared with the effect SW determination data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and it is determined whether or not the data matching the received command is registered. It is determined whether or not data matching the received command is registered in the command sequence of the effect SW determination data, and if there is matching data, peripheral control is performed based on the effect SW number corresponding to the command sequence. The effect SW flag stored in the RAM 1530c is set to ON.

The effect SW determination data is composed of two types of information, and the first information is an effect SW determination command sequence for turning on the effect SW. The effect SW judgment command sequence is not a fixed length, and it is possible to combine multiple command values, main control command values and sub-internal command values, and peripheral control internal issuance command values and peripheral control internal command values. .. For example, the fluctuation start specification command value and the probability state specification command value transmitted from the main control board 1310 are defined side by side, or the background specification command of the peripheral control internal issuance command value and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice are defined side by side. It is possible.

By defining multiple commands side by side, for example, if the mini characters that are produced and displayed for each background are different even for the same mini character notice, the background command value is determined, and after the background is specified, the mini character command value is determined. For the first time, it will be possible to identify the production of the mini character corresponding to the background, but it will be necessary to make multiple judgments for the number of commands. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by defining the background designation command and the command value of the lottery result of the mini character notice side by side, the effect SW corresponding to the command value can be a mini character corresponding to the background. It is not necessary to judge a plurality of times, and even for an effect defined by a combination of a plurality of commands, a corresponding effect can be specified in the same manner as an effect defined by a single command. Further, since it is possible to define a plurality of effect SWs for the same command value, it is possible to activate a plurality of effect SWs at the same time with a single command value.

The second information of the effect SW determination data is the effect SW number, which is the index number of the effect SW flag array. The effect SW determination data is registered for all the effect SWs by combining the effect SW determination command value and the effect SW number.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 434, when the command "0x103001" is received, the effect SW number 100 "LCDSW_LEFDW_S1" is registered in the effect SW determination data, so that the effect SW flag stored in the RAM is stored. Set lcdsw_flg [LCDSW_LEFDW_S1] to ON.

As described above, by setting the effect SW flag corresponding to the command, as shown in FIGS. 431 to 433, a predetermined process is called when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for executing the corresponding advance notice effect is executed. Is done.

Further, in the effect SW command analysis module, a function for executing an effect based on the effect SW is defined. An example of these functions will be described below. FIG. 435 is a diagram illustrating an example of a function defined in the effect SW command analysis module of the present embodiment. Each function takes an effect SW number (LEDSW number) as an argument.

LEDSW_TST is a function that determines whether or not the effect SW number is ON from a steady-state program or a called-back program. LEDSW_SET is a function for turning on the effect SW from a steady program or a called back program, instead of activating the effect SW by a command.

LEDSW_OFF is a function that turns off the effect SW from a steady-state program or a callback program. If the attribute of "all reset" is defined in the attribute of the effect SW, the reset target effect SW is based on the "reset target effect SW group ID" of the "effect SW information table" corresponding to the effect SW number. Set all effect SWs belonging to the group to OFF.

LEDSW_GET is a function that acquires the attribute information of the target effect SW from the steady-state program or the called back program. LCDSW_AMIMER is a function that acquires the frame time from the activation of the active effect SW from the steady-state program or the called back program.

[20-4. Implementation example of production switch]
Next, an implementation example of control using the effect switch will be described. 436 to 441 are diagrams showing a part of the program code for executing the control using the effect switch in the present embodiment. The program code shown in each figure is written in C language.

As described above, the effect SW is set for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal layer table, the liquid crystal effect common block, the liquid crystal effect block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Since the effect SW is set for all the effect blocks, the process based on the effect SW is always called back when the effect block is executed. Even if it is not necessary to execute a specific process, the callback is executed, the judgment that the specific process is not performed is made in the callback function, and the callback function is terminated.

FIG. 436 is a diagram for explaining the details of the configuration of the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) is an example of a program code for defining the effect SW information table, and (B) is a bit assignment of the effect SW control information. , (C) is a diagram showing an example of the production SW group.

The effect SW information table is configured based on the effect SW information table management structure shown in (A), and is an effect SW group ID, an effect SW group ID to be reset, an effect SW control information (effect SW attribute), and an effect SW. Includes command information address and effect replacement information table information.

The effect SW group ID is identification information of the effect SW group to which the corresponding effect SW belongs. The production SW group is grouped by functions such as a production SW for performing the same (similar) notice production, a production SW for hold display, and a production SW for notification. ing. The effect SW group ID is represented by bits, and one effect SW can belong to a plurality of effect SW groups.

The reset target effect SW group ID is identification information for designating the effect SW group for setting the effect SW to OFF when "reset all effect SW" is specified in the "attrib bit assignment" described later. As a result, it is possible to collectively specify the effect SWs that cancel (reset) the processing at the same time when the effect SWs are switched. The effect SW group ID to be reset is represented by bits like the effect SW group ID, and it is possible to specify a plurality of groups.

The effect SW control information is information that defines the function of the effect SW, and specifically includes liquid crystal effect SW full reset information, replacement information, special control information, and passive / active information. Further, the effect SW control information is composed of 16 bits, and each bit defines the function of the effect SW. The bits corresponding to the function of the effect SW are as shown in FIG. 436 (B), and the contents will be described below.

The passive (PASSIVE) / active (ACTIVE) information indicates the evaluation method of the effect SW, and is "PASSIVE" when the bit is "0" and "ACTIVE" when the bit is "1". In the passive mode, even if the command to activate the effect switch is received multiple times during the period in which the effect switch is defined, the drawing effect corresponding to the effect switch is performed only once, and in the active mode, the effect is produced in the period in which the effect switch is defined. When the command to activate the SW is received multiple times, the effect is re-executed for the number of times the corresponding effect is received. Active is used when the drawing effect corresponding to the button press is displayed when the button is pressed multiple times within the button validity period.

The special control information (special control behavior) is information that specifies whether or not to call a default callback function when evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is set to "1", the callback function on the user side is called instead of the callback function on the system side.

The replacement information is information that calls a callback function for effect replacement when evaluating the effect SW. When the bit is set to "1", the predefined replacement callback function is called at the time of the effect SW evaluation defined for each display target, still image, and moving image in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Is done.

The liquid crystal effect SW full reset information is information that specifies whether or not to set the effect SW belonging to the effect group designated at the time of evaluation of the effect SW to OFF. When the bit is set to "1", the effect SWs belonging to all the groups set in the "reset target effect SW group ID" are set to OFF at the time of the effect SW evaluation.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 436 (A). As the effect SW command information address, the defined command information is output when the effect SW is set to ON at the time of the effect SW evaluation. The output command is stored in the reference destination of the effect SW command information address, and the output command executes the control or effect of a new effect SW.

The effect SW replacement table information is a replacement table in which the data to be replaced is defined when "1" is set in the replacement information bit of the effect SW control information (when "with replacement" is specified). Address is stored. Details of the replacement table will be described later with reference to FIG. 439.

Next, the effect SW group will be described. In the present embodiment, it is managed as an effect group, such as when a plurality of related effect SWs are set. The effect group includes an effect SW group ID, an active effect SW head ID, an active effect SW number, a passive effect SW head ID, and a passive effect SW number.

The effect SW group ID is an identifier of the effect SW group. In the effect SW group, the active effect SW and the passive effect SW are stored in a continuous area. The active effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head of the active effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of active effect SWs is the number of active effect SWs arranged from the effect SWs corresponding to the active effect SW head ID. The passive effect SW head ID is identification information of the effect SW located at the head of the passive effect SW belonging to the effect SW group. The number of passive effect SWs is the number of passive effect SWs arranged from the effect SWs corresponding to the passive effect SW head IDs. As described above, by defining the effect SW group ID as the effect SW group ID to be reset, when "effect SW full reset" is specified in the "attrib bit assignment", the continuous effect belonging to the effect SW group ID. It is possible to set a plurality of passive effect SWs and a plurality of continuous active effect SWs to OFF at the same time.

FIG. 437 is a diagram showing an example of a program code that defines an effect SW number corresponding to the effect SW in the present embodiment. In the program code shown in FIG. 437, a specific numerical value is defined for the effect SW number by using an enumeration type (enum). In the present embodiment, the work area and the effect information table can be referred to by using the effect SW number as an index.

By defining the effect SW number as an enumeration type in this way, it is not necessary to directly handle the effect SW number as a numerical value when setting or referring to the effect SW number in the program, and the readability of the program can be improved.

Next, the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table will be described. FIG. 438 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the effect SW flag and the effect SW information table of the present embodiment, (A) shows the effect SW flag, and (B) shows the effect SW information table.

The effect SW flag is a flag indicating whether or not (ON / OFF) the processing based on the corresponding effect SW is executed on the callback function side that has called back. As shown in (A), the effect SW flag is stored in a byte-type array variable, and the index of the array corresponds to the effect SW number. “1” (ON) is set when the effect SW corresponding to the effect SW number is executed, and “0” (OFF) is set when the effect SW is not executed.

The effect SW information table is defined by the effect SW information table management structure shown in FIG. 436 (A), and each element of the effect SW information table is read at the time of program execution and is not updated unless the program data is changed. It has become. Further, the effect SW information table is stored in an array indexed by the effect SW number as in the effect SW flag, and data corresponding to all the effect SWs is stored.

Subsequently, the effect SW replacement table information and the effect SW replacement table for performing the effect replacement will be described. The effect SW replacement table information is included in the effect SW information table as shown in FIG. 436 (A). FIG. 439 is a diagram showing an example of the effect SW replacement table information included in the effect SW information table of the present embodiment and the program data defining the effect SW replacement table, and FIG. 439 shows the effect SW replacement table information, (B). ) Indicates the effect SW replacement table.

FIG. 439 (A) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table information “lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1”. The effect SW replacement table information stores the address of the effect SW replacement table, the effect SW master data, and the effect SW replacement data. The address of the effect SW replacement table is the address of the table in which the actual replacement material number is stored.

The effect SW master data is the effect SW data defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and in the case of "lcdsw_cchanege_info_lefdw_s1", the case where the black color is black corresponds to this (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_BLK). The replacement data is information indicating the material to be replaced from the master data. For example, there is a case where the color of ink is replaced with white (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI), and the material information is replaced with the corresponding replacement data by evaluating the effect SW.

FIG. 439 (B) is program data showing the configuration of the effect SW replacement table “lcdsw_cchanege_lefdw_s1”. In the effect SW replacement table, first, the number of columns and the number of rows of the material number defined in the replacement table are defined, and in the present embodiment, the number of columns is 1 and the number of rows is 4. After defining the number of columns and the number of rows, information indicating the replacement material is stored. In the present embodiment, the replacement information has a one-dimensional table structure, but there is no problem with a two-dimensional or three-dimensional table structure.

As a specific replacement method, first, the effect SW replacement table information is referred to, and all the effect SW effect switch master data and the effect SW replacement data defined in the effect SW replacement table information are evaluated. At this time, one of the effect SWs defined in the effect SW replacement table information is set to ON by the command issued as a result of the effect lottery. Here, it is assumed that the effect SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) is set to ON. The same row of the effect SW replacement table is specified by using the number of rows of the effect SW set to ON in the effect SW replacement table information as an index. The material number (CG_MOVE_LEFDW_S1_WHI) corresponds to the line of the production SW replacement data (LCDSW_LEFDW_S1_WHI) in the production replacement data, and the material number to be replaced is specified. The material number is an index number that identifies a still image or moving image on the CGROM.

[21. Layer configuration]
Next, the layer for displaying images and moving images will be described. By dividing the liquid crystal display object into a plurality of areas (layers, layers) and drawing the layer, the display result can be used for general purposes. For example, by separating the background layer, it is possible to draw in a common method even if the displayed character is changed.

In the present embodiment, by individually storing and managing a table (layer information table) for storing layer information, it is configured so that even if a part of the layer is changed, the other layers are not affected. Can be done.

FIG. 440 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, (A) is a list storing addresses for storing each layer information table, and (B) is a layer information table (background). For). The above-mentioned effect SW is also defined in the layer information table, and the callback function is called with the effect SW as a trigger, and whether or not to execute the corresponding liquid crystal layer table based on the information of the effect SW in the callback function is determined. decide. For example, when the effect SW (LEDSW_BG_RIV) is ON, the river background layer table (direct_layer01_common0002) is executed. Further, FIG. 441 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the layer information table of the present embodiment, (A) is the content of the layer information table (first half of the notice 1), and (B) is the layer information table (notice). The contents of the first half 2) are shown. Both the layer information tables 1 and 2 in the first half of the notice determine the layer table to be executed by the effect SW, like the layer information table for the background.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 440 (A), a layer information table for a background, a symbol display, a first half notice, a big hit effect, an accessory operation, a hold display, and the like is defined.

Further, FIG. 440 (B) shows a layer information table for the background. In the production in the present embodiment, the sea background, the mountain background, and the river background are defined, and further, the background according to the game state (time reduction). Medium background, high accuracy medium background) are also defined. Furthermore, variations such as changing a part of the background color can be added by the effect SW.

FIG. 441 (A) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice 1, in which a roulette notice, a blackout notice, and a window notice are defined, and a command for clearing the notice is also defined. FIG. 441 (B) shows a layer information table for the first half of the notice 1, in which a step-up notice, a button mini character notice, and a conversation notice are defined, and a layer table for clearing the notice is defined as in the case of the first half of the notice 1. Is also defined. The layer table for clearing the notice is used to end the drawing of the notice executed in the layer table of each notice defined in the layer information table of each notice. Specifically, the effect SW group ID of the notice layer is defined in the effect SW group ID to be reset of the effect SW control information of the effect SW described above, and the “effect SW full reset” is defined in the “attrib bit assignment”. Then, when the effect SW (LEDSW_YKK_CLR) is set to ON, all the advance notice effect SWs belonging to the effect SW group ID defined in the effect SW group ID to be reset are set to OFF, and the drawing corresponding to the effect SW is set. Is closed and hidden. The layer table for clearing the notice is empty data because it does not produce anything.

A record for termination judgment is stored at the end of the area allocated to the list for storing the layer table and the table for storing layer information, and when the record for termination judgment is detected, it is determined that the data reading has been completed. It becomes possible to do. This makes it possible to dynamically change the amount of data (number of records) without setting the number of elements for each list or table in advance.

[22. Implementation example of step-up notice]
Subsequently, an implementation example of the advance notice effect using the liquid crystal effect block data (common block) will be described by taking a step-up advance notice effect as an example.

[22-1. Production layer table / LCD production block data]
FIG. 442 is a diagram showing an example of program data defining the liquid crystal layer table and the liquid crystal effect common block in the present embodiment, (A) is the liquid crystal layer table of the step-up notice effect, and (B) is the liquid crystal effect common block. The configuration of is shown.

As shown in FIG. 442 (A), in the liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the step-up notice effect, the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks are the same as the liquid crystal effect common block. It is defined as a pair with the total number of drawing frames and the effect SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (580) frames, the effect SW “LCDSW_STEPUP”, and the common block “LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP” are defined. It is determined whether or not to execute the callback based on the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP" and execute the common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" based on the information of the effect SW "LCDSW_STEPUP" in the callback function.

The liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is defined in the order of effect SW, total number of drawing frames, loop start frame position, playback time, and liquid crystal effect block. As shown in FIG. 442 (B), when there are a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks, a plurality of lines are defined in the same format. After the step-up notice 4, a terminal is set so that the number of steps can be increased or decreased by adding or deleting the liquid crystal effect block. For example, when adding the step-up notice 5, data corresponding to the step-up notice 5 may be added between the step-up notice 4 and the end.

The effect SW controls whether or not the corresponding liquid crystal effect block can be executed based on the set value, similarly to the effect SW defined in the layer table. The total number of drawing frames defines the total number of production frames of the liquid crystal effect block. Explaining using the step-up notice 1 on the first line, it is defined that the liquid crystal effect block of the step-up notice 1 is reproduced in (150) frames. The loop start frame position is a frame position for determining which display data frame to return to after the reproduction of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" on the first line is completed.

The playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". The relationship between the total playback time, the loop start frame position, and the playback time is the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1". Therefore, after the playback of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is completed, the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is displayed again. When loop reproduction is performed from the beginning or the middle of, the number of frames to be looped is added to the reproduction time, and the added number of frames is defined as the total reproduction time. Step-up notice 1 Since the playback time of the LCD production block of "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is (150) frames, if the latter 50 frames are looped twice after the playback of the liquid crystal production block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" is completed, it will be played back at the total playback time. This can be achieved by defining (250) frames of time (150) frames + loop playback time (50 × 2) frames and defining (100) frames at the loop start frame position. By using the loop playback function, it is possible to achieve an effect in which the symbol is not fixed and fluctuates during a pseudo-continuous effect.

Further, the reason why the loop start frame is defined as the frame immediately before the end of playback even though the total playback time and the playback time of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" of the present embodiment are the same is due to some problem. If the next production common block is not executed, the drawing will not be updated, and in order to prevent the LCD screen from stopping, the drawing is repeated based on the loop start point when the total playback time is exceeded.

In the present embodiment, when the effects from step-up notice 1 to step-up notice 3 are executed, the control by the liquid crystal display common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP" is performed after executing the lottery of the notice related to the effect on the peripheral control board 1530. Peripheral control internal commands related to the notice production, step-up notice 1 command, step-up notice 2 command, and step-up notice 3 command are issued. Subsequently, the step-up 1 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1”, the step-up 2 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2”, and the step-up 3 effect SW “LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3” are set to ON in response to the issued command. On the other hand, the step-up 4 effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" remains set to OFF because the step-up notice 4 command has not been issued.

After setting the effect SW, the callback is executed based on all the effect SWs defined in the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP", and the callback function is called. In the called callback function, it is determined whether or not each effect SW is set to ON, and the liquid crystal effect block corresponding to the effect SW set to ON is executed. In the LCD production common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_STEPUP", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU1", "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU2", and "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU3" are set to ON, so the LCD production blocks "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1" and "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2" and "LCD_YKK_STEP_SU2" are executed, respectively. On the other hand, since "LEDSW_YKK_STEP_SU4" is set to OFF, "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU4" is not executed. As described above, since it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal effect blocks in the liquid crystal effect common block and control whether or not to execute the liquid crystal effect block by using the effect SW, it is possible to execute a combination of a plurality of notices. In addition, it is possible to switch the display / non-display of each effect.

Next, the contents of the liquid crystal effect block of each step in the step-up notice will be described. FIG. 443 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines the liquid crystal effect blocks (LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU1 to 4) of each step of the step-up notice.

As for the contents of the liquid crystal effect block, first, the total number of data defined in the liquid crystal effect block is defined. The number of execution frames, the function, or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data The functions used in the liquid crystal effect block are two types, "LCD_NOP" and "LCD_NULL", and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. "LCD_NOP" is a function that waits for the number of execution frames, and "LCD_NULL" is a function that indicates the end of the liquid crystal effect block.

Subsequently, the liquid crystal effect block will be specifically described. Explaining with reference to the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2", the first (3) indicates that "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is composed of three lines of data (the number of steps is three). In the next line, since the number of execution frames (120) is specified as "LCD_NOP", weights are given from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block to (120) frames. (120) After waiting between frames, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" is executed for the number of frames corresponding to the number of execution frames (175). After that, "LCD_NULL" for which the number of execution frames (1) is specified is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block "LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2" is completed.

As explained in FIG. 430, at the end of the step-up notice of each stage of the step-up notice, it is realized by using the weight of "LCD_NOP" to realize the execution of the development effect to the step-up notice of the next stage. is doing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal display block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1" does not perform weighting, and starts executing the liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1". The liquid crystal display block "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" executes the weight by "LCD_NOP", waits for (120) frames, and then starts the execution of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" to generate the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU1". The liquid crystal display scheduler data "LCD_DIR_STEPUP_SU2" starts execution when (120) frames have elapsed since the execution was started. As a result, at the end of the step-up notice 1, it is possible to repeatedly execute the development effect to the step-up notice 2 of the next stage.

Further, it is possible to define a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect block in chronological order, and when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is continuously defined, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the period of the number of execution frames. Is executed, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data of the next line is executed.

In the effect scheduler data of the step-up notice effect 2, after the total number of functions is defined, the function NOP for waiting while executing the step-up notice effect 1, the function LCD_YKK_STEPUP_SU2 for executing the step-up notice effect 2, Finally, the function LCD_NULL that indicates the end of scheduler data is defined. The step-up notice 3 and the step-up notice 4 are also described in the same manner.

[23. Implementation example of button mini character production]
The liquid crystal production scheduler data for the step-up notice production has been explained above. Subsequently, an effect in which a mini character appears on the liquid crystal display screen by prompting the operation of the effect button during the fluctuation of the design and operating the effect button within a predetermined period will be described.

[23-1. Button mini character production mode]
FIG. 444 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the button mini character effect of the present embodiment. The button mini character effect is executed when an execution lottery is performed when the main command is received or when the fluctuation starts, and when the winner is won. In the button mini character production, when the production button is operated during the reception period of the button operation input, a predetermined character (mini character) is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. In addition, the first half valid period and the second half valid period are set as the button operation input acceptance period, and the mini characters are displayed in different modes.

To explain further, when the execution lottery for the button mini character production is won and 90 frames (f) have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the first half of the button mini character is valid. The valid period of the first half of the button mini character is 90 frames, and an image (moving image) prompting the button to be pressed is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen at the start of the valid period of the first half of the button mini character. Button mini character If you operate the button during the first half of the validity period, the mini character will be displayed. Specifically, as will be described later, when the button is operated during the valid period of the first half of the button mini character, the effect SW for displaying the mini character is set to ON, and the corresponding liquid crystal effect block is executed by the callback.

If you operate the button during the second half of the button mini character, the mini character will be displayed in the same way as the first half of the second half of the button mini character. In FIG. 378, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character, but it may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character. The characters may be displayed in different modes as long as possible.

If you operate the button during the second half of the button mini character validity period, the mini character will be displayed in the same way as the first half of the button mini character. In FIG. 444, the character is displayed in a mode different from the case where the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character, but it may be displayed in the same mode, or when the button is operated during the first half valid period of the button mini character. The characters may be displayed in different modes as long as possible.

[23-2. LCD production common block]
FIG. 445 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines a liquid crystal layer table corresponding to the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 445, the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" corresponding to the button mini character effect has the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks registered in the liquid crystal layer table and the number of liquid crystal effect common blocks is the total drawing frame of the liquid crystal effect common block. It is defined as a pair with the number and the production SW. In this embodiment, the total number of drawing frames (180) frames, the effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIBEF", and the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" are defined. Subsequently, the total number of drawing frames (150) frames, the effect SW "LCDSW_BTN_MINIAFT", and the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" are defined. In the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002", first, the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF" is executed during the (180) frame. After that, during the (150) frame, the liquid crystal effect common block "LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT" is executed, and the execution of the liquid crystal layer table "direct_layer05_common0002" is completed.

Next, the configuration of the common block for each liquid crystal effect of the button mini character effect will be described. FIG. 446 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines individual common blocks for the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect common blocks “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_COMMONBLK_MINIAFT” of FIG. 446 are the same as those of the effect layer table and the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. 442. The effect SW "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" that call the callback function to determine whether to execute the LCD effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" are active effects that define the active attribute in the effect SW control information. It becomes SW. Therefore, the drawing effect (effect block) corresponding to the effect SW is executed as many times as the number of times the button is operated.

[23-3. LCD production block data]
FIG. 447 is a diagram showing an example of program data that defines liquid crystal effect block data for executing the button mini character effect in the present embodiment.

The configuration and control method of the liquid crystal effect block data “LCD_YKK_MINIBEF” and “LCD_YKK_MINIAFT” shown in FIG. 447 are the same as those of the liquid crystal effect block data described in FIG. 377. Explaining the processing by each liquid crystal effect block data, first, in the first half of the effect, "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is executed, and the weight is waited for (90) frames from the start of fluctuation. .. Subsequently, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" corresponding to the first half valid period of the button mini character is executed in (90) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIBEF" is completed. In the latter half of the production, the "LCD_NOP" defined at the beginning of the liquid crystal production block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" corresponding to the latter half of the button mini character is executed, and the weight is waited for (30) frames from the start of the fluctuation. After that, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" corresponding to the latter half valid period of the button mini character is executed for (120) frames, and the execution of the liquid crystal effect block data "LCD_YKK_MINIAFT" is completed.

As described above, since the production SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are active production SWs, the production SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are set to ON while the liquid crystal production scheduler data "LCD_DIR_MINIBEF" and "LCD_DIR_MINIAFT" are being executed. When the command to be executed is issued multiple times, the drawing effects corresponding to the effect SWs "LEDSW_YKK_MINIBEF" and "LEDSW_YKK_MINIAFT" are executed as many times as they are issued. In addition, the effect SW always generates a callback every frame, and the corresponding callback function is called. The control when the button is pressed is executed in the called callback function, and the callback is executed every frame even after the button press control is completed until the liquid crystal effect scheduler data execution is completed. Control that the period during which the callback is executed is set as the button valid period without separately determining the button valid period by creating the liquid crystal effect scheduler data that draws the effect during the button valid period and controlling it with the active effect SW. Is possible. For example, by repeatedly hitting a button, the number of times of repeated hits can be counted, and an effect corresponding to the number of times can be executed. In addition, the lamp can be turned on in response to a button operation by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including the function that controls the lamp in the callback function. Further, by calling the sub-effect scheduler data including the function that controls the accessory, it is possible to execute the scheduler data that operates according to the number of button operations and returns to the initial position after the button operation valid period ends. The procedure for returning the accessory to the initial position is, for example, to wait by "LCD_NOP" until the button operation valid period ends, and then execute an effect block including a function to return the accessory to the initial position.

[24. LCD effect scheduler for designs]
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect is executed, it is possible to replace the drawing contents according to the game state and the expected degree of the variable display game to be the notice target. Similarly, it is also possible to replace the identification symbol to be variablely displayed in the variable display game when a predetermined condition such as a gaming state is satisfied. The outline of the procedure for replacing the identification symbol will be described below.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the variable display of the identification symbols is stopped in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and reels in which the identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined order are assigned to each row. An identification symbol is drawn on each reel in a mode corresponding to the game state, and each reel is defined for each mode. The variable display of the identification symbol is realized by sequentially displaying the identification symbol drawn on each reel together with the background image.

The display of the identification symbol is updated for each frame and the effect SW is assigned, as in the case of the advance notice effect. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying the identification symbol, the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image for displaying the identification symbol and the effect SW corresponding to the index number on the CGROM are defined as master data. .. A reel number is defined in the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol. The reel number represents a unique identification number displayed for each game status and effect. For example, if the identification symbols displayed on the mountain background, river background, and sea background are different, the left symbol on the mountain background is R0, the middle symbol is R1, the right symbol is R2, and the left symbol on the river background is R3, middle symbol. Is R4, the right symbol is R5, the left symbol of the mountain background is R6, the middle symbol is R7, and the right symbol is R8. By using the reel number, it is possible to individually correspond to the game state and the effect, and it is also possible to specify the display position of the identification symbol.

In addition, the reel number includes a reel index number. The reel index number is defined for each number of reels of the identification symbol. The reel arrangement is the design of the identification symbol and the identification symbol when the identification symbols are displayed in the order of 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0 and then returned to 1 after 0. The reel index defines the total number and the display order of the identification symbols. Multiple reel indexes can also be defined.

Further, the table for replacing the identification symbol includes a replacement table for the identification symbol corresponding to the reel number and the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, and a reel replacement work number table for reel replacement. In the replacement table of the identification symbol, the index number on the CGROM of the still image or the moving image corresponding to the reel arrangement is defined for each reel index.

The identification symbol is replaced by using the reel index replacement work number table in addition to the identification symbol replacement table. In the reel index replacement work number table, work numbers for reel replacement on one or more RAMs corresponding to each reel index are defined. It is displayed on the reel replacement work when it can be recognized that the identification symbol is stopped or stopped by the player, such as the temporary stop symbol number value of the identification symbol related to the pseudo-continuous fluctuation and the finalized symbol number value of the identification symbol. The identification symbol number value is stored in advance by the peripheral control program at the start of fluctuation according to the effect content.

Explaining the specification of the data for replacing the identification symbol, when the callback is executed based on the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol, the reel index number corresponding to the reel number is set in the callback function for replacing the identification symbol. Based on this, the target reel index replacement work number is specified from the reel index replacement work number table. Further, the identification symbol number value stored in the reel index replacement work is taken out, and the reel index replacement work number is corrected based on the number of the identification symbols displayed in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. Similarly, based on the reel index number corresponding to the reel number, the corresponding replacement table is specified in the replacement table of the identification symbol, and the index number on the CGROM of the still image or moving image to be replaced in the specified table is corrected. Specify using the index replacement work number.

Further, in the replacement of the identification symbol, the index number on the CGROM of the master on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is not used even if the master effect defined on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is selected in the same manner as the effect replacement. , The display list command is always created using the index number on the master CGROM defined in the replacement table, and the effect content is drawn.

Further, by replacing the identification symbol every frame, it is possible to immediately return to the normal display even if an erroneous identification symbol is displayed due to the generation of noise or the like. In addition, by setting the reel according to the game state, the player can grasp the game state regardless of the content of the identification symbol even if a problem occurs in the replacement of the identification symbol due to an error. , It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

[25. Callback Timing]
Subsequently, the timing of occurrence of the callback when the effect SW is detected will be described. In the present embodiment, the drawing division can be determined by the parameters passed to the function in the callback function to be called back.

FIG. 448 is a diagram showing an example of a drawing division that can be determined in the callback function at the time of executing the callback by the effect SW of the present embodiment.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_A" causes a callback before the liquid crystal A drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_A" causes a callback after the liquid crystal A drawing starts. Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_LCD_B" causes a callback before the liquid crystal B drawing starts, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_LCD_B" causes a callback after the liquid crystal B drawing starts. Liquid crystal A and liquid crystal B are separate liquid crystals, and by making it possible to determine the completion of drawing before the start of drawing of each liquid crystal, drawing is performed on the liquid crystal B when the drawing of the liquid crystal A is completed, or the drawing of the liquid crystal B is completed. With this as an opportunity, it becomes possible to draw on the liquid crystal A.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before all drawing is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after all drawing is completed. By making a judgment before the start of drawing, the frame buffer can be initialized with the required background color before drawing, and by making a judgment at the end of drawing, it is possible to instruct other production devices to execute the production when the drawing is completed. It will be possible.

"LCD_EFF_BEF_ANIM" causes a callback before the drawing of the corresponding layer is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_ANIM" causes a callback after the drawing of the corresponding layer is completed. A predetermined process can be executed before or after the drawing of a specific layer is started or completed. For example, if a plurality of notifications are generated at the time of drawing the notification layer by performing the determination before the start of layer drawing, the display of the notification having a high priority can be enlarged and drawn. In addition, by making a judgment after the start of layer drawing, the effect is drawn around the symbol drawn at the timing when the symbol with high expectation stops before the symbol layer drawing starts, so that the symbol with high expectation is drawn. It is possible to display the effect around the symbol only when is stopped.

As described above, the drawing division can be specified and a predetermined process can be executed before or after the drawing is started or completed. It is also possible to generate a callback for each common block. As shown in FIG. 448, "LCD_EFF_BEF_COMBLK" can generate a callback before the common block drawing is started, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_COMBLK" can generate a callback after the common block drawing is completed. By making a judgment before the start of drawing the common block, the execution of a specific liquid crystal effect block corresponding to a single effect constituting the liquid crystal effect common block can be stopped to stop drawing the effect, or the liquid crystal effect common block can be stopped. By making a determination after the drawing is completed, it is possible to execute a liquid crystal effect common block different from the liquid crystal effect common block determined in advance at the start of the fluctuation.

In addition, "LCD_EFF_BEF_DIR" generates a callback before the start of drawing the liquid crystal effect block in the liquid crystal effect common block, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_DIR" generates a callback after the drawing of the liquid crystal effect block is completed. Liquid crystal effect block By making a determination before the start of drawing, it is possible to change the liquid crystal effect block to be executed based on the result of external input by the player. Further, by making a determination after the start of drawing the liquid crystal effect block, it is possible to add a new drawing to the content drawn by the liquid crystal effect block based on the drawing content of the liquid crystal effect block that draws a single effect. Further, "LCD_EFF_BEF_CAST" can generate a callback before the start of drawing the still image and the moving image in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and "LCD_EFF_AFT_CAST" can generate the callback after the drawing of the still image and the moving image is completed. Various effects can be replaced by making a judgment before the start of drawing a still image or a moving image. Further, by making a determination after the drawing of the still image or the moving image is completed, it is possible to add the drawing of the effect according to the replacement contents of the various effects.

As described above, since the control that can be realized differs depending on the drawing division, it is very important to determine the drawing division in the various callback functions that have been called back.

[26. Production switch group management]
As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of procedures (functions) are managed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for each liquid crystal effect block, and an image or a moving image is drawn for each layer based on the state of the gaming machine and the division of the effect. Will be done. Further, as described above, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer.

When the effect is executed, an image or the like is drawn in parallel on a plurality of layers, and a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data are executed in parallel. For example, in the step-up notice effect, when the step-up notice 1 is executed, the background layer background is drawn, and the identification symbol is drawn on the symbol layer. Further, the advance notice layer (notice_first half 1 layer) is drawn by the step-up notice 1. FIG. 449 is a diagram showing an example of drawing results of individual layers and drawing results of all layers at the time of executing the advance notice effect of the present embodiment.

At this time, one or a plurality of effect SWs are set for each layer, but if it is attempted to manage these effect SWs individually, the processing may become complicated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect SWs are grouped and managed for each layer, the state of the gaming machine, and the division of the effect.

For example, the effect SW assigned to each layer is grouped. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 449, the effect SW group background, the effect SW group symbol, and the effect SW group notice are configured corresponding to the background layer, the symbol layer, and the notice layer. These effect SW groups may be further grouped and managed, and the effect SW may be managed for each state of the gaming machine and the division of the effect.

By grouping and managing the effect SWs in this way, individual effect elements can be collectively controlled. For example, when changing the currently displayed background and the symbol display and hold display that match the background to another background when a new fluctuation starts, the background layer, the symbol layer, and the hold layer are divided according to the background. The effect SWs are grouped, and the effect SWs belonging to the group are collectively set to OFF in the callback function using the callback. This makes it possible to hide the symbol display and hold display according to the current background together with the background, and by performing the symbol display and hold display according to the new background in the corresponding layers, a plurality of patterns can be displayed. It is possible to switch the drawing only for the necessary effect display from the plurality of effect displays displayed by superimposing the layers.

In addition, in the effect that spans the game state, for example, in the big hit effect from the start of the change to the end of the change, the design is hidden and the background is changed to the big hit effect. It is also possible to display continuously. In such control, the effect group to be hidden is defined in the reset target effect SW group ID, and the effect SW for which all the effect SW resets are specified is set to the liquid crystal effect common block at the start of fluctuation. It can be realized by defining it as a block common to the liquid crystal effect at the start of the big hit effect.

[27. Exception common block]
In the present embodiment described so far, in order to enhance the interest of the player, in order to improve the efficiency of controlling the complicated game production, all the productions are managed as common blocks in block units of a certain length. As a result, the production block is selected according to the fluctuation pattern and the result of the advance notice lottery, and by drawing based on the selected production block, a series of productions such as a variable display of the symbol and a big hit are realized, and complicated control is performed. The control to synchronize the drawing contents with the sub-effects such as the characters, lamps, and sound output was realized without doing so. In the common block, a period divided at a predetermined timing is set from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the finalization of the symbol, and these periods are assigned to the fluctuation pattern, for example, corresponding to the first half fluctuation and the second half fluctuation. It was set according to the fluctuation time of the symbol.

With this configuration, the common block can be used for general purposes in a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Furthermore, by ensuring the independence between the advance notice effect executed in the first half variation and the advance notice effect executed in the second half variation, the degree of freedom in combining common blocks can be increased.

However, since the common blocks are separated by a predetermined period as described above, it is difficult to realize an effect that continues from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the change simply by combining the effect blocks of a certain length. When executing such an effect that spans a plurality of periods, in addition to the fact that the preceding common block and the succeeding common block are associated with each other and the versatility is reduced, each common block is executed independently. Therefore, there is a possibility that the control becomes complicated in order to maintain the continuity of the production. Therefore, in order to realize such an effect, it is necessary to individually create and control the program code instead of setting the program data.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in the present embodiment, not only the effect blocks of a certain length are combined in all the effects to perform a variable display of the symbol and a series of big hit effects, but also the length of the effect blocks. Is exceptionally configured to allow the production block length according to the production period, not a fixed length. Further, by making it possible to draw a combination of effect blocks having different effect times and drawing an effect block that straddles the combined effect blocks at the same time, it is possible to realize a drawing effect that continues from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation.

An effect that spans a plurality of periods includes, for example, a countdown effect that counts down a number when the symbol starts to fluctuate and continues the countdown display from the first half fluctuation to the second half fluctuation. FIG. 450 is a diagram illustrating an example of a common block spanning a plurality of periods of the present embodiment, (A) is a symbol display and execution timing of a notice effect, (B) is a liquid crystal notice effect block by a common block, and , The configuration of the liquid crystal notice effect block by the common block spanning a plurality of periods is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 450, the first half fluctuation is "normal fluctuation 12 seconds" and the second half fluctuation is "normal short reach" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "10H03H". As shown in FIG. 450 (A), in the first half fluctuation, the step-up notice and the BTN logo accessory fall notice are executed, and in the second half fluctuation, the cut-in notice and the group notice are executed. The contents of each notice production are as described above. In addition, the countdown notice is executed from the start of the step-up notice to the end of the group notice.

In FIG. 450 (B), the liquid crystal effect block data of the notice effect (step-up notice, BTN logo character fall notice, cut-in notice and group notice) using the common block, and the group notice from the start of the step-up notice. It shows the structure of the production block of the countdown notice that is executed until the end. The block data corresponding to the common block is as described above.

The effect block of the countdown notice is composed of a function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts, a liquid crystal effect notice block data, and a function NOP that waits until the latter half fluctuation ends after the end of the liquid crystal effect notice block data. .. The function NOP that waits until the liquid crystal effect notice block data starts is the NOP that is executed before the step-up notice starts, and the function NOP that waits until the second half fluctuation ends is the NOP that is executed after the group notice ends. The same waiting time is set.

As described above, by making it possible to set an exception in the execution period of the effect block, it is possible to operate the common block more flexibly. Further, by setting the waiting time before and after the start of the effect, it is possible to minimize the influence of the execution timing of other effect blocks being shifted due to the exception setting. Note that the control of the exception common block is also controlled by the callback function using the effect SW as in the case of other common blocks.

[28. Image conversion]
For the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game and shortening the processing time related to drawing, the drawing data for one screen of the liquid crystal display is taken out from the frame buffer and stored in the storage area for capture of the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source separately from the frame buffer. So, processing processing such as reuse of images and transformation / additional drawing was performed. In this way, by temporarily storing the drawing data in another area and using it for drawing the next frame, various production expressions have been efficiently realized.

FIG. 451 is a diagram illustrating a conventional configuration in which an image is written in the frame buffer by writing the image written in each layer. As shown in FIG. 451, conventionally, the image drawn on each layer is superimposed on the frame buffer and written, and then output to the display device.

Specifically, first, the moving image or still image displayed on the background layer is written on the frame buffer by using the display list command. Next, the moving image or still image displayed on the symbol layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using the display list command. Furthermore, the moving image or still image displayed on the preview layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using the display list command. Finally, the moving image or still image related to the reserved layer is overwritten on the frame buffer by using the display list command, and the drawing data for one frame is created.

After that, the peripheral control board 1530 copies the drawing data for one frame to be displayed created in the frame buffer to the capture buffer separately allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP1540a. After adding a new effect around the pattern to the drawing data stored in the capture buffer, it is written back to the frame buffer to create drawing data for one frame for the next display.

By doing so, it is possible to easily create the drawing data to be displayed in the next frame simply by adding an effect to the created drawing data. However, in such image conversion by the conventional technique, only image conversion for one frame of drawing data can be realized, and in addition to the addition of new drawing elements for one frame of liquid crystal drawing screen, one frame of drawing data can be realized. It is limited to enlarging or reducing the entire LCD drawing screen. It is not possible to perform image conversion on the drawing elements drawn on each layer on the capture buffer or each drawing element in the layer.

The reason why the image conversion cannot be performed for each drawing element is that the drawing elements in each production, such as the background, the pattern, and the notice, are overwritten on the frame buffer in the layer order. It will be overwritten by the drawing element of the layer drawn from. Also, since the drawing element is a set of colored dots (dots) when it is drawn on the frame buffer, even if you try to take out the drawing element with a rectangle, it will be overwritten by another drawing element. This is because the data of the drawing element of the overwritten part is lost.

Nowadays, due to the improvement of VDP processing capacity, it is less necessary to reuse the image data for one screen of the drawn liquid crystal display, but the expression of the production is diversified for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. Therefore, it was expected that the load would increase in order to execute the complicated drawing process.

In the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and perform a more diverse effect, the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display of the created frame buffer is captured, and the captured image is deformed or newly drawn. When drawing new image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display instead of adding, the image can be dynamically changed during drawing for each effect display unit that composes the image data for one screen of the liquid crystal display. A complex production expression is realized by adding a new drawing.

Specifically, a single effect drawing data (notice, background, design, hold, etc.) is defined as one effect block, and the effect SW is included in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for displaying by the effect block. Incorporate. Then, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed and analyzed at the time of drawing the liquid crystal, and the process (program function) is dynamically called (callback) based on the information of the effect SW incorporated in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

When changing the image, instead of drawing the corresponding effect block in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the recalled program function on the frame buffer, it was assigned to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP1540a separately from the frame buffer. Draws on the off-screen buffer (temporary storage of image display information). Then, after changing the image or adding a new image to the image on the off-screen buffer, the image is written back to the frame buffer. By configuring in this way, in addition to changing the image only for a specific notice, adding a new image, and replacing the effect only for the background, the image can be changed for the image in which multiple effects are superimposed, and the new image can be changed. Additions can be realized.

Hereinafter, a configuration in which the image drawn in each layer is stored in the off-screen buffer, the image stored in the off-screen buffer is converted, and the image is written in the frame buffer will be specifically described. FIG. 452 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of converting an image file stored in the off-screen buffer and then writing it to the frame buffer in the present embodiment.

As described above, one or a plurality of image conversion buffers called off-screen buffers, which are different from the frame buffer, are allocated to the RAM of the sound source built-in VDP1540a. Then, image conversion is performed by the image conversion buffer, and complicated image conversion is possible by combining the image converted on one or a plurality of off-screen buffers and the image drawn on the frame buffer.

Further explaining, the effect SW is embedded in the liquid crystal effect block data constituting each layer corresponding to the effect and each liquid crystal effect scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal effect block data, and is embedded when creating the display list command at the time of liquid crystal drawing. The callback function is called by the callback based on the effect SW, and the image conversion is performed in the callback function.

In FIG. 452, first, before starting drawing of the background layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the background layer, a display list command for enlarging each effect element of the background layer is created and transmitted to the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. By doing so, each enlarged background is drawn on the off-screen buffer A.

Subsequently, before starting the drawing of the symbol layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer A and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the drawing timing of each effect element of the symbol layer, an effect is added to the symbol drawn on the background drawn on the off-screen buffer A in the function called back based on the effect SW. Create a display list command. By transmitting this display list command, an effect can be added to the background and the pattern drawn in the off-screen buffer A, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer A is overwritten in the frame buffer.

Subsequently, before starting the drawing of the advance notice layer, the drawing target is switched from the frame buffer to the off-screen buffer B and drawn in the function called back based on the effect SW. Next, at the timing when the drawing of all the effect elements related to the advance notice layer is completed, the display list command for rotating the advance notice drawing of each effect element of the advance notice layer is executed in the function called back based on the effect SW. create. By transmitting this display list command, each notice rotated in the off-screen buffer B is drawn, and the image drawn in the off-screen buffer B is overwritten in the frame buffer.

Finally, all the effect elements of the hold layer are written to the frame buffer, and a liquid crystal drawing screen for one frame to be displayed this time is created.

By the above procedure, unlike the conventional image conversion described above, the image conversion is not performed on the entire screen, but on each layer drawing unit, the drawing element unit constituting the layer, and the image conversion regardless of the order of drawing in the frame buffer. It can be performed.

The present embodiment is characterized in that a callback based on the same effect SW is performed a plurality of times at each drawing timing within the period from the start of drawing of the liquid crystal screen for one frame to the end of drawing. The details of the types of drawing timing are as described with reference to FIG. 448 described above.

Further, by performing image conversion by callback, it is not necessary to determine or monitor whether or not the image being drawn is the target of image conversion. Furthermore, instead of starting a series of fluctuation-related drawing, the image is based on the lottery result value of the advance notice lottery and the result of the interactive operation by the user's external input at the timing of creating the display list command that draws the image to be converted. It becomes possible to determine the conversion method.

[29. RAMless transfer]
Conventionally, a display list command is created based on the animation data stored in the CGROM, and the created display list command is processed by the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source to perform drawing at the time of executing the game production. At this time, the display list command created while analyzing the animation data stored in the CGROM is stored in the buffer allocated to the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and after the display list command creation for one screen is completed, the external request DMA (transfer means) Was used to send the contents of the buffer to the VDP.

However, at present, as the production specifications become complicated and the processing load increases, the processing time such as the advance notice lottery processing at the start of fluctuation increases, while the lamp lighting data layer synthesis processing due to the increase in the number of lamp systems and the motor system The processing time of the motor data creation process due to the increase in the number is also increasing. Since the processing time of peripheral control such as production is executed in a predetermined cycle, if the above-mentioned high-load processing is executed in duplicate, there is a possibility that the processing cannot be completed within the cycle. ..

Exceptionally, if the processing cannot be completed within the cycle, if the processing cannot be completed within the cycle steadily, the game control by the main control device and the effect control by the peripheral control device should be synchronized based on the processing cycle. There was a risk that the progress of the game and the production of the game by each production device would be separated from each other, and the interest of the game would be significantly reduced.

Therefore, it is necessary to shorten the processing time of the peripheral control processing by reducing the time required for the processing having a high load in the peripheral control processing such as the effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drawing process having a relatively high load in the peripheral control process, particularly the above-mentioned processing time for analyzing the animation data on the CGROM and creating a native display list command that can be processed by the sound source built-in VDP1540a is set. A means for reducing the processing time and shortening the processing time of the entire peripheral control processing will be described.

First, a conventional procedure for transferring a display list command group for displaying an image on a liquid crystal display device to a VDP1540a with a built-in sound source will be described. FIG. 453 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for temporarily storing the display list command group in the peripheral control RAM 1530c and then transferring the display list command group to the sound source built-in VDP1540a.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 453, first, various liquid crystal effect scheduler data are acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1530b by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list control module, and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group. The purpose of converting the liquid crystal effect scheduler data to the VDP native display list command group is that the liquid crystal effect scheduler data includes information (parameter values corresponding to the VDP register number and register number) related to the display list command to be transmitted to the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. Therefore, it is necessary to convert the liquid crystal effect scheduler data into a VDP native display list command that can be executed by the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. The converted VDP native display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. Further, when the callback function called by the effect SW is executed when the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group as necessary, and stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

Then, the peripheral control MPU1511a sets the display list transfer to the external request DMA in the process of processing the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. As a result, the VDP native display list command group stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c is acquired from the peripheral control RAM 1530c by the external request DMA and transferred to the sound source built-in VDP 1540a.

When the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source receives the transferred VDP native display list command, it temporarily stores it in the display list FIFO. The sound source built-in VDP1540a processes the display list stored in the display list FIFO from the beginning, and outputs an image (moving image) to the liquid crystal display device.

As described above, the display list command group for one frame is stored in the buffer of the peripheral control RAM 1530c, and the display list command group is changed from the buffer to VDP1540a by using the external request DMA in the next processing cycle in which the display list command group is created. Drawing is realized by sending. However, the process of analyzing and converting the enormous amount of liquid crystal effect scheduler data for one screen into the VDP native display list command group is a heavy processing load. If a single gaming machine is configured to have multiple VDPs from different manufacturers, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, which is an intermediate data format, is analyzed and converted into a VDP native display list command group corresponding to the VDP of each manufacturer. It becomes possible.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is applied in which a part or all of the display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. FIG. 454 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for transferring the display list command group in the present embodiment to the sound source built-in VDP1540a without storing it in the peripheral control RAM 1530c.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 454, first, the display list transfer setting is set to the external request DMA by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module. The external request DMA acquires the set display list command group not from the peripheral control RAM 1530c but from the peripheral control ROM 1530b.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b stores the liquid crystal effect scheduler data in the same manner as when the display list command group is temporarily stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c, but each liquid crystal effect scheduler data is the converted VDP native display list command group. And it is composed of interrupt display list commands.

The external request DMA acquires the designated liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the peripheral control ROM 1530b and transfers it to the sound source built-in VDP1540a based on the transfer setting by the liquid crystal effect scheduler display list selection management module. The sound source built-in VDP1540a temporarily stores the transferred VDP native display list command and interrupt display list command in the display list FIFO.

The built-in sound source VDP1540a extracts the VDP native display list command from the display list FIFO, analyzes and executes the extracted VDP native display list command, and writes an image to the frame buffer. Further, the analysis of the display list is interrupted when the interrupt display list command transferred together with the VDP native display list command group is analyzed and executed, and a transfer interruption request is generated for the external request DMA. After that, an interrupt is generated for the peripheral control MPU1511a.

When the peripheral control MPU1511a detects an interrupt from the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source, the interrupt processing module determines that the interrupt factor is an interrupt by an interrupt display list command, and executes a callback. In the callback function, the display is replaced and the symbol is replaced by referring to the callback information table corresponding to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The method of replacing the effect is the same as the explanation using FIG. 439 and the like described above, and the method of replacing the symbol is also the same as the explanation using FIG. 439 and the like described above. In the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding callback information table, the number of interrupt display list commands defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the corresponding effect SW are defined. The replacement information is confirmed by the callback function, a display list command is created based on the confirmed replacement information, and the command is transmitted to the sound source built-in VDP1540a. After that, the peripheral control MPU1511a transmits a displaylist command for restarting the displaylist analysis to the VDP1540a with a built-in sound source. The sound source built-in VDP1540a analyzes the display list command for restarting the display list analysis, generates a transfer restart request for the external request DMA, and restarts the analysis of the display list command.

By processing only the replacement part of the effect using the callback function as described above, the peripheral control RAM 1530c (temporary storage means) can be used without any conversion of the VDP native display list related to all the effects other than the replacement. Instead, it is possible to transfer from the peripheral control ROM 1530b to the sound source built-in VDP1540a using an external request DMA (transfer means).

With the above configuration, the VDP native display list command group can be transferred to the sound source built-in VDP1540a without being stored in the peripheral control RAM 1530c. As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the peripheral control MPU1511a associated with the display of the image, and it is possible to speed up the image processing. Further, since the used area of the peripheral control RAM 1530c can be saved, the storage area can be effectively used.

The peripheral control ROM 1530b may store only the frequently used VDP native display list command group, and the infrequently used VDP native display list command group may be processed by the conventional procedure. As a result, the processing of the frequently used display list command can be shortened, so that the processing speed can be increased as a whole and the increase in the capacity of the peripheral control ROM 1530b can be suppressed. In addition, the display list command corresponding to a highly versatile image (video) is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1530b, and the development efficiency is improved by processing different images depending on the model and version by the conventional procedure. Is also possible.

[30. Alignment adjustment]
The processors (CPU, MPU) used in the game control and peripheral control (effect control) of the gaming machine can basically handle integer type and floating point type data types. The integer types that can be used in a 32-bit CPU are char (character, character) type, int (integer) type, and long (long integer) type, each of which has a size of 1 byte, 2 bytes, and 4 bytes. .. The floating-point type is a float (single precision) type and a double (double precision) type, and has sizes of 4 bytes and 8 bytes, respectively.

Regardless of whether the processor used for peripheral control of the game machine is a CISC processor or a RISC processor, the data stored in the memory (ROM, RAM) in 1-byte units can be read and written at all addresses. It is a machine. The address for reading and writing multiple bytes of data is not limited to this. When the processor reads a plurality of bytes of data, the data is always read from the byte boundary, and an alignment violation occurs when the access is made so as to cross the byte boundary. The behavior when an alignment violation occurs depends on the processor, but for example, program execution is delayed due to multiple memory accesses instead of being able to continue processing, or processing is interrupted due to the occurrence of a runtime exception. Relax.

However, in the current development of gaming machines, when a program that controls a game is executed, a data structure composed of a plurality of pieces of information on a memory (ROM, RAM) is created without being aware of alignment. There were many things. Therefore, an alignment violation may occur during program execution, and the program execution speed may decrease. In the peripheral control of the gaming machine, it is necessary to complete all the processes within a predetermined processing cycle, so that the decrease in the execution speed of the program may become a big problem. In particular, since the production of a gaming machine is composed of a plurality of elements, it is necessary to collectively manage various information related to each element, and various information is stored in different types of data types. The data structure is adopted.

In order to solve the above problems, in the game machine according to the present embodiment, in the data structure composed of a plurality of information used for game control, each information is stored in the memory when the data corresponding to the data structure is stored. Explicitly embed empty data between or at the end of the area that stores. This adjusts the data access start position by the processor and arranges the information so that the processor always accesses from the byte boundary address to prevent alignment violations and prevent the program execution speed from slowing down. Can be done. Adjusting the alignment for the data structures on all ROMs and RAMs is a huge task, so the load on the processor is heavy and the processing time is long. It is desirable to adjust the alignment with the data structure on the ROM and RAM related to the conversion process, the control process related to the drawing of the liquid crystal, the lamp control process, and the like. In addition, there is no problem in adjusting the alignment other than the above-mentioned processing.

[31. Configuration to display multiple identification symbols]
By the way, in recent years, since a wide variety of productions have been required in order to enhance the interest of the game, the production contents on the production display device have become complicated and the drawing contents have become diversified. In the embodiments described so far, only one set of identification symbols for notifying the result of the variable display is displayed, and a relatively wide variety of effects are added to the variable display of the set of identification symbols for the game. Although it was mainly to proceed, there are some players who do not like a wide variety of productions, and it is an issue to develop a game machine that meets a wide range of player needs. In a configuration in which a wide variety of productions frequently appear, there is a risk of degrading the interest of the game. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that meets a wide range of player needs, a configuration capable of displaying a plurality of sets of identification symbols having a peculiar aspect will be described below. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 allocates a plurality of display areas for variable display of the identification symbol to one or a plurality of display devices (display screens), and any player needs among different player needs. In order to deal with the above, it is decided to simultaneously proceed with the variable display of the identification symbol of another set. Each display area is common in that the result of the variable display is notified by the identification symbol, but the display is performed in a different effect mode such as the variation mode of the identification symbol.

[31-1. Mode of display area of identification symbol]
FIG. 455 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration having a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of sets of identification symbols in a variable display under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a in the present embodiment. (A) is a configuration example in which the display area A and the display area B of the identification symbol are provided on one display screen of the effect display device 1600, and (B) is a configuration example in which the identification symbol is displayed on each display screen when the two display screens are provided. This is a configuration example having a display area A and a display area B.

In the example shown in FIG. 455 (A), a display area A and a display area B of the identification symbol are provided on one screen, the display area A is assigned to the upper part of the screen, and the display area B is assigned to the lower part of the screen. The first identification symbol 8010 is displayed in the display area A, and the second identification symbol 8020 is displayed in the display area B. In the example shown in FIG. 455 (A), the display area A and the display area B are configured as display areas of the same size, and the display area A and the display area B are separated by a wavy boundary toward the center lateral direction. Has been done. Further, the first identification symbol 8010 is composed of three-digit symbols of the first left symbol 8010a, the first middle symbol 8010b, and the first right symbol 8010c. Similarly, the second identification symbol 8020 is based on the three-digit symbols of the second left symbol 8020a, the second middle symbol 8020b, and the second right symbol 8020c, in accordance with the fact that the first identification symbol 8010 is a three-digit symbol. It is composed. The sizes of the display areas A and B are not limited to the same, and may be different.

The first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 start the variable display at the same time and stop at the same time. The stop timing of each symbol (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol is arbitrary, but the timing at which the stop mode of all identification symbols is finally determined is the same. In addition, the final stop symbol is a combination of the same stop symbols (lottery result) so as not to misidentify or give a sense of discomfort even if the player recognizes any of the identification symbols. For example, when the winning result is derived as a result of the lottery, the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 are all the same symbol combination (for example, "777"), and the second identification symbol is synchronized with the combination. The individual identification symbols of the identification symbol 8020 also have the same symbol combination (such as "777" equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010). Further, when deriving a non-reach loss result as a result of the lottery, a symbol combination (for example, "135") in which the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 do not form a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same), (Such as "224"), and in synchronization with it, the individual identification symbols of the second identification symbol 8020 do not form a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same), and the symbol combination (equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010). "135", "224", etc.). In addition, when deriving the result with or without reach as a result of the lottery, the individual identification symbols of the first identification symbol 8010 constitute the reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same), but all of them are not the same. In addition to being a combination (for example, "131", "242", etc.), the individual identification symbols of the second identification symbol 8020 do not form a reach display (the left symbol and the right symbol are the same), and the symbol combination (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol are the same). It becomes "135", "224", etc. equivalent to the first identification symbol 8010).

The first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area B may be in a symbol display mode in which the player can recognize that they are equivalent symbol combinations. For example, in one display area, a symbol display mode consisting of "Kanji numerals" (such as "123") is configured to display a combination of symbols, while in the other display area, a symbol consisting of "alphanumeric characters" or the like is displayed. It may be configured to display the symbol combination in the display mode (such as "123"). Further, the symbol combination may be displayed in both display areas in the same type of symbol display mode (for example, "123" is displayed in any display area). Further, when displaying the same type of symbol display mode, the display style (font) may be the same or different. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is set to 3 digits, but it is possible to show the player an equivalent symbol combination as the finally derived symbol combination. For example, the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 may be composed of two digits, or the number of digits of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 may be four. It may be composed of the same number of digits or more. Although details will be described later, in the first identification symbol 8010, the number of digits may be the same as that of the second identification symbol 8020 when the stop mode of the second identification symbol 8020 is finally determined. 1 In the variable display process of the identification symbol 8010, the number of digits may be temporarily changed to a number different from the final number of digits.

In the present embodiment, the same type of symbol display mode (alphanumeric number symbols in this embodiment) is adopted in both the display areas of the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, but each identification symbol is used. The mode of the additional decorative display added to each pattern is different. Specifically, the first identification symbol 8010 has an additional decorative display for each identification symbol, which has an impact on each identification symbol itself, and various effects are executed by the additional decorative display (these additional decorative symbols). Highly decorative dynamic display). On the other hand, the second identification symbol 8020 does not have an additional decoration display like the first identification symbol 8010, or at least has a simpler additional decoration display than the first identification symbol 8010 (low). Decorative dynamic display).

Further, the types of symbols constituting the first identification symbol 8010 and the types of symbols constituting the second identification symbol 8020 do not necessarily have to be exactly the same or have a strictly one-to-one correspondence. For example, the first identification symbol 8010 may have a number symbol (0 to 9) and a character symbol (for example, a symbol imitating an airplane) as symbols that are variablely displayed in each identification symbol according to the effect mode. The second symbol may be only a number symbol (0 to 9). Further, in this case, when the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped at the character symbol, the symbol is re-variated and the final stop symbol is controlled to be a numerical symbol. It is conceivable that the character symbol contains a special game element different from the number symbol, and while the number symbol is directly linked to the final lottery result, the character symbol is not the final lottery result but exclusively. It can be positioned as being used specifically for the production in the process of variable display.

In the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A, various effects are performed up to the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variation display (symbol variation) (highly decorative dynamic display). For example, in the variable display of the identification symbol, the high-speed display mode in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the content of the identification symbol is switched to the low-speed display mode in which the player can recognize the content of the identification symbol at a predetermined timing. Specifically, as described above, by executing the callback based on the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol, the identification symbol replacement table is based on the stop symbol or the symbol stop timing at the identification symbol switching timing. And the reel index replacement work number table is used to replace the identification symbol, and the identification symbol is finely decorated until just before the stop, and the player who pays attention to the first identification symbol 8010 is given fun until just before the stop. It is supposed to be.

The first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A can change all or part of the identification symbols constituting the first identification symbol 8010 depending on the game state, the effect mode, or the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol. Therefore, the first identification symbol 8010 is variously changed in the progress of the game depending on the game state, the effect mode, or the type of the variation pattern of the special symbol. Specifically, a plurality of symbol string data of the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A are provided (for example, symbol string data of 0 to 9, symbol string data of 0 to 9, etc.), and the game state. When switching, switching the effect mode, or selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol, the symbol string data selection effect SW corresponding to each of these multiple symbol string data types (for example, the symbol corresponding to the symbol string data 0 to 9) By setting the column data selection effect SW1 and the symbol row data selection effect SW2) corresponding to the symbol column data of 0 to 9 to ON and setting the other effect SW to OFF, it is used for displaying the first identification symbol 8010. The symbol sequence data can be changed in various ways, making it possible to execute various effects.

Further, as described above, in the first identification symbol 8010, on the premise that the number of digits is the same as that of the second identification symbol 8020 when the final determination is made, the final digit is obtained in the variation display process. It may be configured to temporarily change to a number of digits different from the number. For example, although it will be 3 digits in the end, it will be displayed in 2 digits only for a specific period during variable display (for example, a reach fanning period that fuels whether or not the left symbol will reach after it has stopped). Etc. can be exemplified. This may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern or the like. For example, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern or the like may be executed. As the defined effect SW, the digit number data selection effect SW corresponding to the digit number data (for example, the digit number data selection effect SW1 corresponding to the 3-digit digit number data, and the digit number data corresponding to the 2-digit digit number data). When displaying two digits using the selection effect SW2, etc.), a variety of effects can be executed by setting the digit number data selection effect SW2 to ON and setting the other effect SW to OFF. ..

In the first identification symbol 8010, not only the identification symbol itself is changed to change the display mode, but also an effect using the additional decorative display made on the identification symbol is performed as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 455 (A), by displaying the star-shaped additional decoration 8011 on the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010, a lottery result (hit, etc.) that is advantageous in the variable display during execution can be obtained. It may be suggested that it is likely to be derived. At this time, the degree of expectation may be notified according to the number and color of the additional decoration 8011 or the type of operation (for example, the number of the additional decoration 8011 is 1 → 3 → 5). Make it higher, make the color of the additional decoration 8011 higher in the order of white → blue → red, make the operation of the additional decoration 8011 higher in the order of stationary → vibration operation → rotation operation. Or). In addition, by displaying the same additional decoration 8011 on the right identification symbol 8010c, the player is made to pay more attention to the effect of the first identification symbol 8010, and it is more clearly suggested that the degree of expectation has increased. May be good. Further, different additional decorations may be applied to each identification symbol to notify the degree of expectation for deriving a more advantageous lottery result to any one of the first identification symbols 8010.

Further, as another example, an effect display control is performed in which a flame effect image (white, blue, red), which is an additional decoration display different from the above-mentioned star-shaped additional decoration 8011, is superimposed on each symbol included in the first identification symbol 8010. It may be executed and an effect of changing the color of the flame according to the degree of expectation may be executed (for example, the degree of expectation is high in the order of white → blue → red). In this way, when a plurality of additional decorative displays are provided for the first identification symbol 8010, a lottery is performed to determine which additional decorative display the peripheral control board 1510 displays based on the winning lottery result, and the like. Reflecting the determination result, the execution may be performed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern or the like.

In the display area A, the additional decorative display added to the first identification symbol 8010 is drawn on a layer different from the layer on which the identification symbol is displayed. As a result, the display control of the identification symbol can be a common control regardless of the presence or absence and type of the additional decorative display. In addition, by drawing the identification symbol and the additional decoration display on different layers, it is possible to specify whether to display the additional decoration display on the front side or the back side of the identification symbol, which is set by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. If this is done, it can be automatically controlled when the production is executed. Further, as described above, whether or not to display the additional decoration display is determined at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern or the like, and the corresponding process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more effective effect without complicating the effect control.

Further, in the display area A where the first identification symbol 8010 is displayed, the character effect display may be executed independently of the identification symbol. For example, in the reach state where the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped at the same symbol, the effect of displaying the character according to the degree of expectation (the possibility that an advantageous lottery result can be derived depending on the type and action of the character). It is also possible to execute the suggestive design effect).

Further, the background display of the display area A may be changed according to the degree of expectation of the lottery result in the variable display (a symbol effect suggesting that an advantageous lottery result may be derived depending on the type of background display). Further, instead of changing the background display itself, an effect of changing only the background display color may be executed (for example, the degree of expectation is high in the order of white → blue → red).

As described above, in the display area A, the character effect display and the background display are also drawn on a layer different from the layer on which the identification symbol is drawn so that the identification symbol is drawn on the front side of the identification symbol. It is possible to specify whether to display or display on the back side (for example, the character effect display is on the front side, the background display is on the back side, etc.), and if they are set in advance in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, when the effect is executed. It can be controlled automatically. As a result, the control for performing the variable display of the identification symbol can be made independent regardless of the mode of the character effect display, the presence or absence of the change in the background display, and the type of the background display.

As another effect mode in the display area A, an operation instruction image of the operation unit is displayed on the front layer of the first identification symbol 8010 independently of the first identification symbol 8010, and the player operates the operation unit. An operation effect is executed according to the mode (a symbol effect suggesting the possibility that an advantageous lottery result can be derived from an operation-compatible image or the like). For example, when the player presses the effect button after displaying the button operation instruction image, the character is displayed according to the degree of expectation and the operation effect for performing a specific action is executed.

Further, in the display area A, an effect linked to the movable body provided in the game board 5a may be executed (an effect suggesting that an advantageous lottery result may be derived by the movement of the movable body). For example, by moving a movable body arranged at the upper part of the game area 5a to a position where a part or all of the first identification symbol 8010 is blocked from the player's line of sight, it is suggested that the expectation is high. May be good.

Subsequently, the display area B will be described. When the second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area B receives the variation start command and the variation display of the identification symbol is started, the variation display of the identification symbol is displayed after receiving the variation stop command or after the variation time elapses. Exits and stops at the specified stop symbol. While the identification symbol is variablely displayed, the display mode is such that it is difficult for the player to recognize the content of the identification symbol, and the stop symbol is displayed after the variation time elapses (low). Decorative dynamic display).

In the display area B, an additional decorative display made on the first identification symbol 8010, a character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during the variable display of the identification symbol, and an operation effect are executed. There is no. Further, unlike the first identification symbol 8010, the control for changing the display mode of the second identification symbol 8020 from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode is not executed. Further, even when the first identification symbol 8010 temporarily stops and re-variates, the variation display of the second identification symbol 8020 continues.

Therefore, in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for display control of the second identification symbol 8020, the effect SW for changing the display mode such as replacement of the symbol is not defined, and the scheduler data is extremely simple. Since the effect control program only sequentially executes the contents defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, the same effect control as in the case of highly decorative dynamic display is executed even with such simple scheduler data. Therefore, the execution of the effect by the effect SW or the like is only skipped.

The mode of the second identification symbol 8020 may be changed as long as the display mode is not changed during the variable display. For example, the mode of the second identification symbol 8020 corresponding to the gaming state and the effect mode may be prepared in advance, and the mode corresponding to the start of fluctuation may be selected.

Further, as for the background display, the background display (background other than the display area A) for the display area B may be drawn. In this case, a background corresponding to the game state and the effect mode may be prepared. In order to simplify the control surface, the background portion of the display area B is made transparent, and the background display of the display area A is enlarged so that the background display common to the display area A is performed. You may.

As described above, unlike the first identification symbol 8010, the variation display of the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B is different from that of the first identification symbol 8010, and after the fluctuation starts, a callback is executed based on the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol, or additional decoration is performed. Various effects such as display are not performed, but it is a simple one that specializes in waiting for which symbol combination is stopped and displayed. For this reason, in the display area B, the player is not overwhelmed by the types of various effects, and the game progresses with a game-like nature of watching over which symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the display area B, an additional decorative display made on the first identification symbol 8010, a character effect display for notifying the degree of expectation during the variable display of the identification symbol, and an operation effect can be executed. Since it is not necessary to do so and the background display may be set to be transparent, various layer settings such as the first identification symbol 8010 (display area A) are not required.

Further, in the upper left part of the screen shown in FIG. 455, a fourth symbol 8030 different from the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 is displayed. The fourth symbol 8030 indicates that the fluctuation of the special symbol is from the start to the stop, and during the variation display of the special symbol, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 are displayed. In the variable display, the special symbol variation is clearly displayed to indicate that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped or stopped, the first identification symbol is displayed. While the 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 are stopped and displayed, a special symbol stop explicit display indicating that the special symbol is stopped is performed. For example, even if the identification symbol is apparently stopped (temporary stop), the special symbol variation is clearly displayed in the fourth symbol 8030 until the result display of the variation display is completed. While the special symbol variation explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, the triangular symbol is rotated by 90 degrees at predetermined intervals and displayed as vertical stripes. Further, while the special symbol stop explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030 is being performed, the triangular symbol is displayed in a state of being filled with a predetermined color. The fourth symbol 8030 is drawn on a higher layer independent of the layer for drawing on the display area A or the display area B described above. Further, unlike the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020, the fourth symbol 8030 in the present embodiment is displayed so as to be recognizable from the outside under all circumstances including the waiting state for customers. In the example shown in FIG. 455, the fourth symbol 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display area A, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to such a form, and the fourth symbol 8030 is provided so as to overlap the display area B. Alternatively, a display device (lamp device) other than the effect display device 1600 may be used to perform control corresponding to the special symbol variation explicit display and the special symbol stop explicit display of the fourth symbol 8030.

As described above, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 tell the player what kind of lottery result was obtained, including the circumstances (hits, no reach, no reach, etc.). While it plays a role of transmitting, the fourth symbol is a game that tells what kind of game situation it is (whether it is in the variable display of the special symbol, in the stop display, or in the waiting state for customers). It plays a role of communicating to the designer and the game machine manager (or the player). That is, although the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 have similar roles, they have a role that cannot be played by the fourth symbol in terms of transmitting the details of the lottery result to the player. There is. Further, as will be described in detail later, the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 may be temporarily erased or hidden during the variable display of the special symbol or the waiting state for customers. On the other hand, the fourth symbol may be temporarily erased or hidden during the variable display of the special symbol or the waiting state for customers in terms of always transmitting the game situation to the player. It has a role that cannot be played by the 1 identification symbol 8010 and the 2nd identification symbol 8020.

Further, a hold storage display 8040 is drawn at the lower part of the screen shown in FIG. 455. In the present embodiment, the hold storage display of the first special symbol is drawn in the lower left part of the screen, and although not shown, the hold storage display of the second special symbol is drawn in the lower right part of the screen. Further, in FIG. 455 (A), the hold storage display 8040 overlaps the display area B, but there is no problem as long as it does not overlap with the identification symbol. As described above, the hold storage display 8040 is drawn on an independent layer and is arranged on the front side of the layer corresponding to the display area B. As with the fourth symbol 8030, the present invention is not necessarily limited to such a form, and the hold storage display 8040 may be replaced by a display device (lamp device) different from the effect display device 1600.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the layer is defined for each display area. As a result, it is possible to execute the drawing effect independently for each display area, and the high-decorative dynamic display with a high effect effect executed in the display area A and the low-decorative dynamic display executed in the display area B. And can be executed in any combination. Since the combination of the high-decoration dynamic display and the low-decoration dynamic display can be defined by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, it is not necessary to change the effect control program itself, and the effect configuration can be easily created and changed. ..

Next, an example in which the identification symbol display area A and the display area B are provided on each display screen when the two display screens are provided with reference to FIG. 455 (B) will be described. In FIG. 455 (B), display areas are assigned to physically different display devices, and the display area A and the display area B are composed of display devices of the same size. The same reference numerals are given to the configurations having the same functions as the example shown in (A), and the description thereof will be omitted. The sizes of the display area A and the display area B are not limited to the same, and may be different.

In the example shown in FIG. 455 (B), a plurality of effect display devices are provided on the game board 5, a display area A is assigned to the main liquid crystal display device, and a display area B is assigned to the sub liquid crystal display device. In the display area A, the first identification symbol 8010 is displayed, and the fourth symbol 8030 and the hold storage display 8040 are drawn. On the other hand, the second identification symbol 8020 is displayed in the display area B.

The entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device may not be set as the display area A, but the area for displaying the fourth symbol 8030 and the hold storage display 8040 may be set as an area different from the display area A. Further, the fourth symbol 8030 and the hold storage display 8040 may be assigned to the display area B.

In the example shown in FIG. 455 (B), the first identification symbol 8010 is in the reach state, and the decoration 8011 is drawn on the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c. Further, a preview image 8050 is displayed, which suggests that there is a high possibility of deriving an advantageous lottery result in the fluctuation.

Further, in the second identification symbol 8020, all the identification symbols are displayed in the high-speed display mode during the variable display, so that the player cannot recognize all the identification symbols. In the display area A, the first identification symbol 8010 is in the reach state, and a notice effect such as displaying the notice image 8050 is executed. However, in the display area B, the second identification symbol is not executed and the second identification symbol is not executed. It only continues the low-decorative dynamic display of 8020.

[31-2. Display area emphasis mode]
As described above, in the present embodiment, the display area A and the display area B perform variable display of the identification symbol in different display modes. In the following, while the variable display of the identification symbol displayed in each display area is executed in parallel, a selection operation is performed by the player (a switching operation unit (not shown) is operated), and one of them is performed. A control for displaying a variable display executed in the display area of (highlight mode, large setting) will be described.

FIG. 456 is a diagram for explaining a mode of emphasizing the display area for executing variable display of the identification symbol in the present embodiment, and FIG. 456 shows the display area A and the display area B in a standard mode (specified size). The normal pattern to be displayed, (B) is the emphasis pattern A for displaying the display area A in the emphasis mode, and (C) is the emphasis pattern B for displaying the display area B in the emphasis mode. In the present embodiment, the display area on the non-emphasized side is set to a reduced wipe display (small setting, suppression mode), and the display area on the non-emphasized side is also in a state where the player can recognize it during the progress of the game. There is. It should be noted that the display area to be highlighted can be switched by operating a predetermined switching operation unit (switching button, etc.), and the special symbol changes even when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to switch even during display.

By operating the switching operation unit, the player can sequentially switch between (A) normal pattern, (B) emphasis pattern A, and (C) emphasis pattern B. As a switching mode, each time the player operates the switching operation unit, (A) normal pattern, (B) emphasis pattern A, and (C) emphasis pattern B may be switched in a predetermined order. However, the player may be able to immediately select the desired display pattern. As a configuration that allows the player to immediately select the desired display pattern, for example, a display pattern of the switching destination is set so as to correspond to each of a plurality of types of operation modes for the switching operation unit by the player. It is configured so that the player can immediately switch to the display mode desired by the player depending on the operation mode for the switching operation unit. Specifically, while setting a normal pattern for the display pattern of the switching destination corresponding to the first operation for the switching operation unit (for example, long press for 5 seconds or more), the second operation for the switching operation unit (for example, less than 2 seconds). The display pattern of the switching destination is emphasized in response to (short press), and the switching destination is displayed in response to the third operation (for example, long pressing of 2 seconds or more and less than 5 seconds) for the switching operation unit. Emphasize the pattern Set the pattern B. For example, when the game is progressing in the emphasis mode (emphasis pattern B) of the display area B shown in FIG. 456 (C) by performing the third operation on the switching operation unit, the low decorative dynamic display is displayed in a large area. The symbol change will progress due to. At this time, as shown in FIG. 456 (C), in the display area A displayed on the wipe, a display corresponding to a highly decorative dynamic display is performed, and a "unusual effect" is performed in the display area A. When the player recognizes that the pattern has been changed, the switching operation unit is subjected to the second operation, so that the emphatic pattern A can be immediately changed at the player's will. An example of the "unusual effect" is a notice effect in which the character symbol (airplane) is temporarily stopped at the middle identification symbol 8010b, and when the character symbol can be confirmed in the display area A displayed on the wipe. By performing the second operation of the switching operation unit, it is possible to immediately change to the emphasis mode (emphasis pattern A) of the display area A. In addition, when shifting to the emphasis pattern A, the character effect and the accessory movement that were not displayed in the reduced area may be performed (FIGS. 456 (C) → (B)).

Further, even when the display area A as shown in FIG. 456 (C) is reduced (wipe) and displayed, it may be possible to execute an operation effect requiring a player operation in the display area A. .. When the display area A is reduced (wipe) and displayed, it is considered that the operation is performed after the specified time from the start of the operation effect even if the player does not actually operate the switching operation unit. , The operation effect may be automatically advanced in the same manner as when the switching operation unit is operated. On the other hand, when the display area A as shown in FIG. 456 (C) is reduced (wipe) and displayed, an effect of driving an accessory corresponding to the display area A, for example, an identification symbol is temporarily displayed. Since it is necessary to change the operation mode of the accessory and the control becomes complicated in the effect of shielding and making it visible at a predetermined timing, the execution is suppressed (stopped).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 456 (B), when the mode for emphasizing the display area A (emphasis pattern A) is selected, the reduced (wipe) displayed display area B has a low decorative dynamic display and the symbol changes. As the process progresses, the above-mentioned "unusual production" will not be performed. Therefore, when the emphasis pattern A is selected, the background of the display area B is made transparent, and the effect of the display area A is also executed by performing the effect of the display area A together with the background of the display area B. May be improved. Since it is necessary to maintain the visibility of the identification symbol in the display area B even when the display area B is wipe-displayed, the layer on which the identification symbol is drawn in the display area B is an image related to the display area A. It is preferable to set it as a higher layer than the displayed layer.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect sound effect is output corresponding to the variable display of the identification symbol in each display area. Specifically, since the first identification symbol 8010 in the display area A is variablely displayed with various effects, the effect sound effect based on the effect mode, the game state, the variation pattern, etc. is output according to the various effects. Will be done. Here, the sound (BGM, effect sound effect) output in association with the variable display of the identification symbol in the display area A and the effect to be executed is managed as one AUTO group, and the sound is controlled by the automatic channel method. As a result, even when the effects in the display area A are executed in duplicate, the upper limit of the channels used is limited, so that it is possible to suppress the consumption of resources due to the execution of the effects of the gaming machine. Further, since it is possible to automatically output a sound having a high priority, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the effect control.

On the other hand, the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B is subjected to variable display in a high-speed display mode, and the output effect sound effect is also simple (variable BGM, stop sound only). Therefore, when neither the display area A nor the display area B has a normal pattern (FIG. 456 (A)) that is not reduced (wipe) and displayed, the effect sound effect corresponding to the display area B is not output or the effect sound effect is not output. The output sound is controlled in such a manner as to suppress the output of the effect sound effect corresponding to the display area B by reducing the output sound. When one of the display areas is displayed in the emphasized pattern, only the effect sound effect in the display area displayed in the emphasized pattern is output, and the effect sound effect in the reduced (wipe) display area is output. Is not output, or the output sound is reduced to suppress the output of the effect sound effect corresponding to the display area that is reduced (wipe).

In the standby state in which the variable display of the symbol is not performed (starting memory is not held), one of the display areas is not reduced (wipe) as shown in FIGS. 456 (B) and 456 (C). , Each display area is displayed in a normal pattern as shown in FIG. 456 (A). This is because there is little significance in emphasizing one of the display areas when the variable display of the identification symbol is not performed, and the screen for attracting customers is designed on the premise of full-screen display.

In addition, when the power is turned off while the special symbol variation display is being performed and then the power is turned on, each identification symbol is displayed in a predetermined manner. For example, it may be a highlight pattern A that highlights the display area A, or it may be a normal pattern. At this time, the symbol combination to be displayed is set to the symbol combination for the initial state (for example, "123") regardless of the result of the immediately preceding fluctuation. If the power is turned off without the symbol changing and then the power is turned on, the normal pattern is used without the wipe display (without displaying with the emphasized patterns A and B) until the symbol change starts. Display the identification symbol. This is because, as described above, there is little significance in highlighting one of the display areas when the symbols are not displayed in a variable manner.

In this embodiment, as described above, each display area is composed of different layers. In each display area, the area to be drawn differs depending on whether it is drawn in the emphasized mode or the reduced display. Specifically, the size of the entire layer is the same as the size of the entire display screen, and drawing is performed in the designated display area (for example, display area A). At this time, by converting the coordinate system of the drawing area, it is possible to draw by a common means even if the size of the area is different. Therefore, the display area is the same regardless of whether it is displayed in the default size (normal pattern), enlarged (emphasized), or reduced (wipe). Even if the actual size of is different, it can be drawn by a common means (program or data).

Therefore, a new object may be drawn only when a specific object (for example, a decorative image) is displayed in a specific display mode (for example, only the emphasis mode). For example, when a decorative image is added to the identification symbol, a new layer for drawing the decorative image may be prepared and combined with the layer for drawing the identification symbol. At this time, by setting the priority of the layer on which the decorative image is drawn higher than the priority of the layer on which the identification symbol is drawn, the decorative image can be arranged on the front side of the identification symbol when each layer is combined. can.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a common program or data is used for an object (for example, an identification symbol) to be displayed with the same image regardless of whether it is displayed in the emphasized mode or reduced. On the other hand, when the decorative image is superimposed on the identification symbol, a layer having a higher priority than the identification symbol is prepared, and the decorative image is drawn on the layer to be on the front side of the layer of the identification symbol. By arranging it, the emphasis mode is drawn. As a result, for objects such as identification symbols that have the same drawing content in each display mode, it is not necessary to prepare programs and data individually for each display mode, and it is possible to use common programs and data. It suffices to prepare the minimum program and data that will be the difference. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the increase in image data due to the diversification of the effect contents, suppress the complexity of the effect control, and suppress the increase in the storage capacity.

[31-3. Screen transition]
Subsequently, the mode of the variation display of the identification symbol from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol will be described. FIG. 457 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transitions in which the variation display of the identification symbol of the present embodiment is performed in the display area A and the display area B, respectively, and the variation of a part of the identification symbol is stopped in the display area A. An example is shown in which the fluctuation of the identification symbol stops in the display area B in conjunction with the above. FIG. 458 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transitions of a configuration in which the variation display of the identification symbol of the present embodiment is performed in the display area A and the display area B, respectively, and when the variation is stopped regardless of the display mode of the display area A. An example of displaying all the stop symbols in the display area B is shown. Each of the screens shown in FIGS. 457 and 458 is a screen showing the same state, and both are displayed in a normal mode. Each screen will be described below.

(A) shows the state immediately after the variation display of the symbol is completed in the state where the starting memory number is 3. At this time, as described above, the triangular fourth symbol 8030 is stopped and displayed in a filled state. Further, both the first identification symbol 8010 displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 displayed in the display area 2 are stopped and displayed with the identification symbol set to "125".

(B) is a state in which the start memory is digested (start memory number 3 → 2) and the variable display of the symbol is started. The first identification symbol 8010 in the display area A and the second identification symbol 8020 in the display area B are each displayed in a high-speed display mode. When the variation display of the symbol is started, the triangular fourth symbol 8030 changes from a fill to a vertical stripe and is rotated and displayed.

(C) shows a state in which the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped. In FIG. 457 (C), when the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped, the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020 is also stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in FIG. 458 (C), even if the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped, the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020 continues to be displayed in a variable manner. Further, the variable display is stopped after the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 changes from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode. On the other hand, when the left identification symbol 8020a of the second identification symbol 8020 is stopped, the stop display is performed without shifting to the low-speed display mode. This is because the variable display of the identification symbol in the display area B is intended to notify the player that the identification symbol is changing rather than to enhance the effect of the effect, and to clearly display the stop symbol.

(D) shows a state in which the right identification symbol 8010c of the first identification symbol 8010 is further stopped from the state of (C). At this time, the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c are stopped at the same symbol and are in the reach state. In the display area A, the reach effect according to the variation pattern is executed, while in the display area B, the variation display of the second identification symbol 8020 is continued without executing a special effect.

(E) shows a state in which the middle identification symbol 8010b of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped (temporarily stopped) at the symbol (airplane) of the character (airplane) in the reach state. Here, the design of the airplane is a design indicating that the fluctuation display is restarted, and indicates the execution of so-called pseudo continuous fluctuation. Therefore, even when the middle identification symbol 8010b is stopped, the variable display of the fourth symbol 8030 continues, and as shown in FIG. 457 (E), the middle identification symbol 8020b of the second identification symbol 8020 is The variable display is continued in the high-speed display mode. When the first identification symbol 8010 continues to be temporarily stopped for a predetermined time, then, as shown in (F), the first identification symbol 8010 and the second identification symbol 8020 start to re-variate. In the example shown in FIG. 458, the variation display of the second identification symbol 8020 by the high-speed display mode is continued regardless of the display mode such as the re-variation of the first identification symbol 8010.

(G) shows a state in which the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010 is stopped after the re-variation of the first identification symbol 8010 is started. At this time, the decoration 8011 is overlaid on the left identification symbol 8010a, and it is notified that there is a high possibility (expectation) that an advantageous lottery result can be obtained in the variation. As for the second identification symbol 8020, the effect according to the degree of expectation is not particularly executed, and in FIG. 457 (G), the left identification symbol 8020 is identified by the symbol corresponding to the left identification symbol 8010a of the first identification symbol 8010. The symbol 8020a is stopped, and in FIG. 458 (G), the variable display according to the high-speed display mode is continued.

(H) indicates a state in which the right identification symbol 8010c of the first identification symbol 8010 is further stopped from the state of (G). At this time, the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c stop at the same symbol (“5”) to enter the reach state, and the decoration 8011 is also displayed on the right identification symbol 8010c. After that, as shown in (I), the middle identification symbol 8010b also stops at the same symbol (“5”) as the left identification symbol 8010a and the right identification symbol 8010c, and when the stop symbol is confirmed, the second identification symbol 8020 also becomes the first. It stops at the symbol corresponding to the identification symbol 8010, and the jackpot effect is executed.

When the identification pattern is displayed by the highly decorative dynamic display, it is possible to realize a variety of effects and enhance the interest of the game. On the other hand, when the identification symbol is displayed by the low-decorative dynamic display, it is possible to avoid the splendid production and maximize the expectation for the symbol variation. In the present embodiment, a display area A for variablely displaying the identification symbol in a highly decorative dynamic display and a display area B for variablely displaying the identification symbol in a low decorative dynamic display are provided, and either one is selected or both are provided. By executing the variable display according to the display mode of the above in parallel, the player can play the game in a mode that suits his / her taste.

Further, since the player can freely switch between the high-decorative dynamic display and the low-decorative dynamic display during the variable display, for example, an effect of notifying the degree of expectation is executed when a reach occurs. By highlighting the area A and highlighting the display area B in other states, the game can be played according to the situation.

In the above-described embodiment, the high-decorative dynamic display and the low-decorative dynamic display are executed in parallel, and the game is advanced in a manner that can be visually recognized by the player. You may. For example, while performing high-decorative dynamic display and low-decorative dynamic display in parallel, the player can see only one side of the display that the player wants. A movable body or the like (one-side concealing means) having a function of concealing the display so as not to be visible or difficult to see may be provided, and the display on the other side may be concealed by such a movable body. For example, the covering position that overlaps all or at least a part of the display area A in FIG. 455 (A) and the area where the movable body overlaps the display area A are smaller than the covering position, so that the effect display performed in the display area A is easy to see. An upper covering movable body that can be moved to a retracted position (a position above the display area A), a covering position that overlaps all or at least a part of the display area B in FIG. 455 (A), and a display area rather than the covering position. There is little area where the movable body overlaps with B, and the display is provided with a movable undercover movable body at the retracted position (lower position of the display area B) where the effect display performed in the display area B is easy to see. When the covering condition A that hides the area A is satisfied (the first specific operation for the switching operation unit by the player, etc.), the covering condition B that hides the display area B by moving the upper covering movable body to the covering position is satisfied. This (a second specific operation for the switching operation unit by the player, etc.) can be exemplified to move the undercoat movable body to the coating position. As a result, for example, the game can be advanced by concentrating only on the display on one side desired by the player without complicated control such as switching of the effect display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the progress process of the game, the high-decorative dynamic display and the low-decorative dynamic display are executed in parallel. It is not necessary to execute the high-decorative dynamic display and the low-decorative dynamic display in parallel during the period in which the high-decorative dynamic display is performed. The decorative dynamic display may be erased. For example, as shown in FIG. 456 (A) of the above-described embodiment, the game progress in the normal pattern of displaying the display area A and the display area B in a standard mode (specified size) is completed, and the customer waits after a predetermined time. Examples include erasing the display area B while leaving the display area A, erasing the display area B, and expanding the display area A to a large area when shifting to the state. If a new start condition is satisfied while waiting for a customer, the display of the display area B, which is a low-decorative dynamic display, may be restored.

[32. Application of production blocks to productions that continue over multiple fluctuations]
Next, an example of applying the effect block to the effect that continues over a plurality of fluctuations will be described. In the above-mentioned example, the period from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the symbol is divided into a predetermined period, and the effect block corresponding to each period is defined. Then, by combining these production blocks, it is possible to suppress the complexity of production control while realizing various productions. In addition, an example was explained in which it was possible to define an effect block that exceeds a predetermined period, but it is limited to an effect block that fits within one variation, and for an effect that is executed over multiple variations. It was not enough to apply the production block.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, an example of applying the effect block to a series of effects executed over a plurality of fluctuations will be described. This is a mini character effect that is executed as a series of effects that are executed over multiple fluctuations, such as a timer effect and background effect that are executed as a look-ahead effect (advance notification effect) at the time of starting prize, and when the effect mode is switched, and continue until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Will be described.

[32-1. Control of look-ahead effect (advance notification effect)]
Before explaining the timer effect and the background effect that are executed as the look-ahead effect at the time of starting winning, the control of the look-ahead effect will be supplementarily explained.

When the game ball wins the starting winning opening, the main control board 1310 executes the first starting opening passing process (FIG. 135) or the second starting opening passing process (FIG. 136) according to the starting winning opening, and starts. A random number value is extracted (acquired) as a memory (steps S5241 and S5251). Then, in the first special figure look-ahead process (S5245) or the second special figure look-ahead process (S5255), the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command or the special symbol is based on the extracted random number value or the lottery result based on the random number value. 2 The memory look-ahead effect command (see FIG. 90, hereinafter, “special figure look-ahead effect command”) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the special figure look-ahead effect command, it determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the received command. The command from the main control board 1310 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (FIG. 98). Then, the received command is analyzed by the reception command analysis process (S1022) of the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 95).

Upon receiving the special figure look-ahead effect command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the look-ahead effect control process in the receive command analysis process. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect for changing the start memory display and a process for executing the timer effect and the background effect described above are executed. Note that the look-ahead effect control process may be called by the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95) by setting a flag indicating that the look-ahead effect command has been received in the receive command analysis process. good.

In the process for executing the normal look-ahead effect for changing the start memory display, a lottery is performed based on the special figure look-ahead effect command, and the mode of the start memory display after the change is selected based on the lottery result. At this time, the mode of the start memory display may be changed only when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the special figure look-ahead effect command shifts to the reach state. The mode of the start memory display changes, for example, a color or a shape. Then, the normal look-ahead effect setting process for changing the mode of the start memory display is executed. In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, a setting is made to change the display color of the start memory display, and a setting is made to output a sound effect, turn on a lamp, or move an accessory at the timing of the change. .. The processing for executing the timer effect and the background effect will be described later.

[32-2. Timer production]
The timer effect is a pre-suggestion effect that indicates by a countdown display that the execution time of the suggestion effect that suggests the lottery result or the possibility of winning for a specific start memory is approaching. There are roughly two types of timer effects, which are controlled as one of the above-mentioned look-ahead effects, and the variation display for a specific start memory is displayed before the variation display for the specific start memory is started. A timer effect that spans multiple fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as a look-ahead timer effect) that counts down the period up to a predetermined timing of the above, and is controlled based on a fluctuation pattern unlike the above-mentioned look-ahead timer effect, and is a specific start memory. A timer effect that does not span multiple fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as a timer effect within fluctuation) that counts down the period from a predetermined timing after the fluctuation display for is started to another timing of the fluctuation display for this specific start memory. ,have. That is, both the look-ahead timer effect and the in-variation timer effect are advance notification effects in which the symbol variation for a specific start memory is not completed, and a countdown display is performed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the count display is 0. However, the look-ahead timer effect is different from the in-variation timer effect in that the countdown display is performed on the display screen over a plurality of symbol fluctuations. In addition, various values may be set for the initial value of the countdown display performed in the look-ahead timer effect and the in-variation timer effect, but the average value of the initial values used in the look-ahead timer effect is used because it spans multiple fluctuations. The value is relatively larger than the average value of the initial values used in the variable timer effect. Since the present embodiment includes a characteristic element for the look-ahead timer effect, the look-ahead timer effect will be described in detail below.

In the process for executing the look-ahead timer effect, first, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead timer effect. Since the look-ahead timer effect is a look-ahead effect that can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations as described above, it is sufficient to execute the look-ahead timer effect before the variation display corresponding to the received special figure look-ahead effect command is started. Determine if the time is secured. That is, it is determined whether the total of the fluctuation times of all the start memories held before the fluctuation is started is the specific time or more (40 seconds or more in this embodiment). Further, the effect content is determined together with whether or not the look-ahead timer effect can be executed, based on the hit of the start memory of the effect execution target and the fluctuation pattern of the start memory. Further, when the effect content is determined, the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is also determined. The execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is, for example, at the start of fluctuation corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory of the look-ahead effect target, or before the start memory of the look-ahead effect target. Either at the start of the reach of the variation corresponding to the stored start memory, or at the end of the variation corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory of the look-ahead effect target is set.

The look-ahead timer effect is composed of a timer count effect that displays a countdown and a timer end effect that is executed when the time is up. The timer counting effect and the timer end effect are executed continuously. Further, although the execution time of the timer counting effect, that is, the execution timing of the timer end effect differs depending on the length of the timer counting effect, it is in the process of changing with respect to the start memory that is the read-ahead target, and is before or after the reach occurs. It will be various timings.

When the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, first, the execution time of the timer counting effect is determined. The execution time of the timer counting effect is determined based on the time from the start winning to the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead effect target. For example, in the present embodiment, 10 seconds is added to the total fluctuation time of the start memory held before the start memory of the look-ahead effect target, and it is set as the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect. The predetermined time calculated by subtracting the time based on the time is set as the execution time (initial value of the countdown display) of the timer counting effect. Further, the content of the effect to be executed as the timer counting effect (the effect pattern during the countdown) is set. As the effect pattern during the countdown, for example, a pattern 1 in which the light emitting mode of a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 is gradually changed to a high-speed blinking as the countdown display progresses, or a specific pattern 1 provided on the game board 5 is provided. Examples include pattern 2 in which the emission color of the lamp is changed as the countdown display progresses, pattern 3 in which a specific movable body provided on the game board 5 is operated as the countdown display progresses, and these patterns 1 to 3 are pre-reading. It corresponds to the degree of expectation of fluctuations in the production target, and is set by lottery. For example, the hit expectation is set to increase in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3, pattern 1 is more likely to be selected in the case of hit than in the case of hit, and pattern 2 is out of the case of hit. In both cases, both cases are selected at the same rate, and it is easier to select the case of hitting than the case of missing pattern 3.

After setting the content of the effect to be executed as the timer counting effect (effect pattern during countdown), the content of the effect of ending the timer (effect pattern after countdown) is set. In the timer end effect, for example, the characters "End !!" are superimposed on the identification symbol in the color corresponding to the degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation increases in the order of black → blue → red) on the display screen. Display for a predetermined time to make sure that the player knows that the time has been reached. As the effect pattern after the countdown, for example, the pattern 1 in which the character color of "End !!" is black, the pattern 2 in which the character color of "End !!" is blue, and the character color of "End !!" A red pattern 3 and the like can be exemplified. These patterns 1 to 3 correspond to the hit expectation of the fluctuation of the look-ahead effect target, and are set by lottery. For example, the hit expectation is set to increase in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3, pattern 1 is more likely to be selected in the case of hit than in the case of hit, and pattern 2 is easier to select in the case of hit and miss. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and pattern 3 is easier to be selected in the case of hit than in the case of off. The post-countdown effect pattern is not limited to this, and not only the character color but also the character may be decorated or the character may be displayed, and the content of the message may be different for each. It may correspond to different expectations.

As described above, after making various settings related to the look-ahead timer effect, the look-ahead timer effect is executed (started) based on the condition that a predetermined start condition (the arrival of the start time of the look-ahead timer effect) is satisfied. As described above, the look-ahead timer effect is composed of the timer count effect and the timer end effect, and the effect blocks corresponding to the timer count effect and the timer end effect are individually defined. These effect blocks are defined in advance, and when the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, the effect block of the timer count effect and the effect block of the timer end effect are selected based on the execution time and the degree of expectation of the timer count effect. The effect block of the timer counting effect and the effect block of the timer end effect may be selected individually, or the effect block of the timer counting effect and the effect block of the timer end effect are managed as a set and selected for each set. It may be. When the effect block of the timer counting effect and the effect block of the timer end effect are selected, the effect block of the timer counting effect is executed, and after the end of the effect block, the effect block of the timer end effect is executed.

Further, in the effect block of the timer counting effect, only the effect content is defined and the execution time can be set variably. As a result, it is not necessary to duplicate the effect blocks having the same content but different only in the execution time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity due to the diversification of the effect content. The look-ahead timer effect is not an effect in which the execution timing and the end timing are strictly determined as in the effect block corresponding to the fluctuation time described above, but is based on the execution time calculated based on various conditions as described above. Therefore, it is possible to flexibly respond to the calculated execution time of the effect. Specifically, the calculated execution time of the effect may be stored in a predetermined storage area, and the execution time of the effect stored in the predetermined storage area at the start of the effect block of the timer counting effect may be read out.

Further, if the execution time of the timer counting effect can be covered, an effect block may be prepared in advance so as to cover the execution time of the timer counting effect. Since the execution time of the timer counting effect may be within a predetermined range, it may be possible to limit the number of effect blocks to a realistic number even if all patterns are covered based on the number of holds and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). be. For example, if the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is one pattern, the time from the start winning to the start of the change of the look-ahead effect target is set as the lower limit, and the change time of the change is added to this time. Further, the range of the execution time of the timer counting effect can be specified by setting the upper limit of the time obtained by subtracting the execution time of the timer end effect. Since it is sufficient that at least one effect block having an execution time included in this range exists, there is a possibility that a minimum number of effect blocks may be prepared. Further, only the effect blocks having a high execution frequency may be prepared in advance, and the number of effect blocks to be managed may be suppressed as the effect blocks in which the fluctuation time can be variably set for the effect blocks having a low execution frequency.

FIG. 459 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect block of the look-ahead timer effect of the present embodiment. FIG. 460 is a diagram showing an execution example of the look-ahead timer effect of the present embodiment. An execution example of the look-ahead timer effect shown in FIG. 460 corresponds to FIG. 459.

FIGS. 459 and 460 show an example in which the look-ahead timer effect is executed across the fluctuation 1 and the fluctuation 2. Fluctuation 1 is "normal fluctuation" in the first half and there is no reach, and fluctuation 2 is "normal fluctuation" in the first half and becomes a big hit after the reach occurs. It should be noted that the case where the effect is executed within each variation is as described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 460 (A), when the variation 1 is started, the variation display of all the identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of pending symbol changes is 0. As described above, the variation 1 is a normal variation in which reach does not occur.

Further, the variable display of the symbol is continued, and the variable display of the left symbol is stopped at a predetermined timing. After that, a starting prize is generated, and the number of pending symbol changes becomes 1. At the time of starting winning, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading timer effect can be executed, and here, the execution of the pre-reading timer effect is determined, and the timer counting effect block and the timer end effect block are selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 460 (B), only the left symbol is stopped and the other symbols are in the state of variable display, and the timer display unit is arranged at the lower right of the screen (time t1). In FIG. 460 (B), "START" indicating the start of the timer effect is displayed instead of the remaining time of the look-ahead timer effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 460 (C), the variation 1 ends, and the stop symbols of all the identification symbols are fixed (time t2). At this time, the timer counting effect continues, and the remaining time of the look-ahead timer effect (timer counting effect) is displayed on the timer display unit.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 460 (D), the variation 2 to be read ahead is started, and the remaining time displayed on the timer display unit is continuously updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 460 (E), when the execution of the timer counting effect is completed, the remaining time "0.00" is displayed on the timer display unit, the timer end effect block is executed, and the timer end effect is started. Is done (time t3). At this time, as the timer end effect, a message "end !!" indicating the end of the timer effect is displayed on the screen, or a notice image such as a character is displayed. As described above, the character color of the message displayed here is set according to the degree of expectation of the fluctuation. In addition, the content of the message may be set according to the degree of expectation of the fluctuation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 460 (F), while the timer end effect is continuing, the timer stops at the same symbol "5" of the left symbol and the right symbol, and reach occurs. Further, as shown in FIG. 460 (G), the fluctuation of the middle symbol is stopped after the timer end effect is completed, and all the symbols are fixed. After that, as shown in FIG. 460 (H), it shifts to the jackpot state.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 459 and 460, the timer end effect is executed before the reach occurs, but the timer end effect may be executed after the reach occurs. At this time, since the reach effect and the timer end effect are executed in duplicate, the content of the timer end effect may be determined based on the content of the variation of the reach effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced due to the overlapping execution of the effect.

As described above, it is possible to define the effect to be executed over a plurality of fluctuations by the effect block, and it is possible to operate the common block more flexibly. By defining the effect that is executed as the look-ahead effect at the time of starting prize, such as the look-ahead timer effect, as in the common block described above, it is possible to standardize and simplify the effect control, and the development of the gaming machine is efficient. Can be transformed into.

Further, the control of the effect block that spans a plurality of fluctuations is also controlled by the callback function using the effect SW as in the case of other common blocks. As a result, it is possible to move the accessory and output the sound according to the progress of the look-ahead timer effect, and it is possible to realize a variety of effects.

[32-3. Background production]
Next, as with the look-ahead timer effect, a background effect, which is a pre-notification effect that suggests a lottery result for the start memory for which the symbol variation has not been completed, will be described. As an outline of the background effect, the background of the display screen is changed over a plurality of symbol variations, and the background effect is ended at a predetermined timing during the change of the look-ahead target. In the present embodiment, the background is restored at the time of reach development during the change of the look-ahead target.

FIG. 461 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect block for the background effect of the present embodiment. FIG. 462 is a diagram showing an execution example of the background effect of the present embodiment. The execution example of the background effect shown in FIG. 462 corresponds to FIG. 461.

FIGS. 461 and 462 show an example in which the background effect is executed across the variation 1, the variation 2, and the variation 3. Fluctuations 1 and 2 develop into reach when the first half fluctuation is "normal fluctuation" and no reach, and fluctuation 3 develops into reach when the first half fluctuation is "normal fluctuation". The description of the latter half of fluctuation 3 is omitted. As with the look-ahead timer effect, the case where the effect is executed within each fluctuation is as described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 462 (A), when the variation 1 is started, the variation display of all the identification symbols is started (time t0). At this time, the number of pending symbol changes is 1. As described above, variation 1 is a normal variation in which reach does not occur. After that, the variable display of the symbol is continued, and the left symbol is stopped. Then, a start prize is generated at time t1, and the number of pending symbol changes is 2. Here, the execution of the background effect is determined at the time of the start winning, and the background effect block is selected. At this time, as shown in FIG. 462 (B), the background is changed from "mountain" to "sea".

After that, as shown in FIG. 462 (C), the variation 1 ends, and the stop symbol is determined (time t2). Further, as shown in FIG. 462 (D), variation 2 is started, and variation display of the identification symbol is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 462 (E), the variation 2 ends, and the stop symbol is determined (time t3). During this time, the background changed by executing the background effect is continuously displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 462 (F), the variation 3 to be read ahead is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 462 (G), the background effect is completed and the background of the “sea” is restored to the background of the “mountain” (time t4).

The effect block for executing the background effect is selected and executed when the start winning prize to be read ahead occurs, as in the timer effect. The end timing is the timing when the fluctuation to be read ahead develops into reach, that is, the remaining time of the fluctuation being executed at the time of the start winning, the total fluctuation time of the fluctuation executed until the fluctuation of the look-ahead target is started, and the look-ahead. The total value of the first half fluctuation time of the target fluctuation may be calculated and set. Further, the execution time may not be set in the effect block for executing the background effect, and the background effect may be continuously executed until the end condition is satisfied. The end condition in this case is to detect that the reach state has been developed due to the fluctuation of the look-ahead target. The determination of the end condition is performed by a callback, and when the end condition is satisfied, the process for ending the background effect is called.

As described above, in the background effect of the present embodiment, the background display is continuously changed from the start of the background effect to the development of the reach in the fluctuation that is the target of the look-ahead effect. The player recognizes that the expectation of the fluctuation is high because the background returns to the original when the reach develops, and the attention to the latter half fluctuation becomes high.

On the other hand, if a reach occurs due to a change before the start of the change that is the target of the look-ahead effect, the background is temporarily restored when the reach occurs, and after the change is completed, the background display is switched and the background is displayed. Resume the production. As a result, even if the player is disappointed after the reach occurs, the expectation can be raised again, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[32-4. Mini character production]
Next, the mini character production that is started when the production mode is switched will be described. The mini character production is a production in which a character (mini character) corresponding to the production mode appears. Since the mini character displayed at this time is displayed only during the symbol change, the mini character is hidden when the symbol change ends while the number of held changes is 0. The hidden mini character may be displayed again when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the mini character is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations until it shifts to the customer waiting state. Hereinafter, the mini character production will be described with reference to FIG. 463.

FIG. 463 is a diagram showing an example of the mini character production of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 463 (A), the game is continued in the "mountain" mode. In this state, as shown in FIG. 463 (B), when the "mountain" mode is changed to the "sea" mode, the mini character "whale" is displayed in the center left of the screen. To change the mode, switch the mode by operating an operation unit (effect button) (not shown).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 463 (C) and 463 (D), the reserved symbol change is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 463 (E), when all the reserved symbol changes are completed, the state shifts to the customer waiting state, and the displayed mini character is hidden.

Since the execution condition of the mini character effect is that the symbol change is continuous, the mini character effect is continued as long as the symbol is changing even if there is no pending change. The execution condition of the mini character effect may be not only when the mode is changed, but also when a start prize is generated after the customer waiting state continues for a predetermined period. By controlling in this way, a mini character appears even when the mode is not changed, giving the player unexpectedness and enhancing the interest. Further, the game state may be added to the determination condition as the execution condition of the mini character effect. For example, in a gaming state in which the probability state is not clearly notified, if the probability state is high, it is possible to suggest the current gaming state to the player by facilitating the appearance of a mini character.

Further, the end condition of the mini character production may be, for example, a case where the display of the mini character continues for a predetermined time, in addition to the case where the state shifts to the customer waiting state. With this configuration, a premier feeling can be created in the appearance of the mini character.

The mini character production is defined by the production block, and the end condition of the mini character production is determined by the callback during the execution of the mini character production, and when the end condition is satisfied, the mini character production is terminated. With this configuration, it is not necessary to set the duration of the mini character production in advance, and it is possible to flexibly determine whether or not the mini character production can be continued depending on the conditions such as the transition to the customer waiting state and the game state. In this way, since the end condition of the mini character effect can be dynamically determined by the callback, it is not necessary to individually define the effect block according to the execution time of the mini character effect, and the effect block is defined for each character. It can be easily managed.

It should be noted that the effect blocks for the effects that may span a plurality of fluctuations such as the look-ahead timer effect, the background effect, and the mini character effect described above may be set in duplicate. Will be executed. Further, a plurality of effect blocks for an effect that can span a plurality of fluctuations may be overlapped at different timings. In that case, the start memory to be read ahead in the look-ahead timer effect and the background effect may be different, or the same start memory may be used. Even so, it is possible to make the start timing of each effect different. As a result, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for subsequent fluctuations even after one of the effects is completed, and when the same start memory is a look-ahead target, the sense of expectation for the fluctuation is further increased. be able to.

Further, when the automatic channel method is applied to output the production sound effect in the production that spans a plurality of fluctuations, the production sound effect is different from the production sound effect that is output in the production executed by one fluctuation (for example, the reach production). The AUTO group may be assigned. For example, by setting the AUTO group that can assign the effect sound effect of the effect executed by one variation to more channels, the output of the effect sound effect of the variation can be prioritized, but it is composed of a small number of channels. The sound effect of the effect that spans multiple fluctuations in the AUTO group (for example, the sound of "start!" Which is the start sound of the look-ahead timer effect, the counting sound which is the sound during countdown (chitchitch, etc.), and the timer end effect sound. It is possible to prevent many channels from being occupied for a long period of time by assigning (such as the sound of “end!”).

Further, a different AUTO group may be set for each type of the effect that spans a plurality of fluctuations. For example, an AUTO group composed of two channels for the look-ahead timer effect and an AUTO group composed of two channels for the mini character effect are defined. As a result, even when the look-ahead timer effect and the mini character effect are executed in parallel, the effect sound effect of each effect can be output without being hindered. Since the effect sound effect in the background effect is constantly output during the continuation of the effect like BGM, or is only output when the background is switched, the AUTO group for the background effect is not set for BGM. Channel (AUTO group) may be used instead.

It is possible to control the output of the effect sound effect, the operation of the movable accessory, the lighting of the lamp, etc. in the effect that spans multiple fluctuations such as the look-ahead timer effect, the background effect, and the mini character effect, according to the liquid crystal display by the effect SW. Is. In particular, when the end timing of the effect cannot be specified at the start of the effect, it is difficult to control the effect device at a timing preset by the sub-effect block data. Therefore, the effect switch cooperates with the liquid crystal display to control the effect device. It is possible to realize a production with a sense of unity by controlling. In addition, when outputting the production effect sound for which the end timing of the production is not specified at the start of the production, the sub-effect block data for outputting the corresponding production sound effect is repeatedly executed during the continuation of the production, and at the end of the production. The execution of the sub-effect block data may be stopped.

On the other hand, when the end timing of the effect can be specified at the start of the effect, such as the look-ahead timer effect, the liquid crystal effect block data for displaying the effect and the sub-effect block data for producing the effect with sounds or characters are displayed in parallel. It is possible to execute. As a result, it is possible to independently define the display effect and the effect by sound, an accessory, or the like, and it is possible to configure the effect by freely combining various effect block data. For example, multiple types of liquid crystal effect block data that defines the display mode of the timer in the timer counting effect and sub-effect block data that defines the notification sound output when the timer counting effect is executed are prepared and freely combined. You can diversify the variation of the production with.

[33. Configuration to display multiple identification symbols 2]
By the way, in recent gaming machines, a wide variety of effects are executed in the effect display device 1600 in order to enhance the interest of the game, but the identification symbols are displayed in order to make the player surely visually recognize the variable display of the identification symbols. There was a risk that the production area would be narrowed depending on the area being created. In order to prevent this, the area for displaying the identification symbol was temporarily reduced. However, continuing the variable display while changing the display area of the identification symbol may complicate the control or increase the load on the control. Further, it is necessary to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game by making the mode of reducing or enlarging the identification symbol suitable for the content of the production.

Therefore, the effect display device 1600 is configured to provide a plurality of display areas for displaying the variable display of the identification symbols so that the variable display of the plurality of sets of the identification symbols can proceed at the same time. The configuration for displaying a plurality of sets of identification symbols in different modes (highly decorative dynamic display, low decorative dynamic display) in order to meet the needs of the player has been described with reference to FIG. 455 and the like, but will be described below. In the embodiment, the variation display of the identification symbol is configured so that the player can visually recognize the variation display of the identification symbol in at least one of the display areas during the symbol variation. At this time, the decoration mode of the identification symbol in each display area may be the same or different.

[33-1. An example of a configuration in which identification symbols are displayed simultaneously in multiple areas]
FIG. 464A is a diagram showing an example in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed in each of the plurality of display areas of the present embodiment. The display area A occupies about 70% of the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 from the upper part. Further, the display area B occupies the lower right area when viewed from the front of the entire display area. In addition, the hold display is arranged at the lower left of the screen. Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but is displayed by a light emitting body such as an LED or a lamp (not shown).

In the example shown in FIG. 464A, first, as shown in (A), the starting memory is digested and the variable display of the identification symbol is started. At this time, the variable display of the first identification symbol is started in the display area A (first display area), and the variable display of the second identification symbol is started in the display area B (second display area). In the present embodiment, the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A and the second identification symbol displayed in the display area B are displayed in substantially the same manner, but the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A is displayed. The second identification symbol displayed in the display area B may be any symbol display mode in which the player can recognize that the symbol combination is the same.

Further, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol start the variable display at the same time and stop at the same time, and the timing at which the stop mode of all the identification symbols is finally determined is the same. In the present embodiment, the stop timings of the individual symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of each identification symbol are also set at the same time, but if the confirmation timing of the symbols is the same, the stop timing of each symbol is arbitrary. May be good.

The screen layer shown in FIG. 464A is composed of a background layer, a symbol layer (first identification symbol), a symbol layer (second identification symbol), a notice layer, and the like. In the present embodiment, since the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol are displayed in the same manner, it is possible to divert other drawing information by changing the coordinates and size for displaying the identification symbol. As a result, drawing data can be shared, and the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to standardize the drawing process, and it is possible to prevent the program structure from becoming complicated.

Similar to the above-described example, the first identification symbol is subjected to various effects up to the result display (derivation of the lottery result) of the variation display (symbol variation, dynamic display). For example, when the identification symbol is switched from the high-speed display mode to the low-speed display mode, the identification symbol can be replaced by executing a callback based on the effect SW for replacing the identification symbol, and the identification symbol can be decorated until just before the stop. can. Further, in the present embodiment, the second identification symbol is also variablely displayed in the same effect mode as the first identification symbol, but the effect content can be changed according to the display area. Further, the display mode of the second identification symbol may be changed based on the effect SW defined in the first identification symbol. As a result, the variable display of the first identification symbol and the variable display of the second identification symbol can be smoothly linked.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the symbol is started, the left identification symbol, the right identification symbol, and the middle identification symbol are stopped in this order. FIG. 464A (B) shows a state in which the left identification symbol of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol is stopped. At this time, the notice character in the shape of an airplane is displayed on the upper right side of the display area, and the notice character in the shape of a tree is displayed in the lower part of the display area. Each notice character is drawn on a different layer, and the image can be changed or deleted individually. As a result, it becomes possible to independently execute a plurality of advance notice effects according to the degree of expectation of the variable display.

The character of the airplane displayed as a notice effect is displayed while being enlarged by executing an effect in which the character of the airplane is visually recognized as approaching the front of the screen according to the expectation of the big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 464A (B), the character of the airplane is displayed in a reduced state in the upper left portion of the display area, and is gradually enlarged as the variable display progresses. FIG. 464A (C) shows a state in which the variation display of the right identification symbol is stopped and reach is generated. The character of the airplane has moved to the upper center and is displayed larger than the character shown in FIG. 464A (B). After that, as shown in FIG. 464A (D), in the reach state, the advance notice effect in which the additional decorative display is made on the first identification symbol is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 464A (E), the display of the character of the airplane is further enlarged and displayed on the front side of the first identification symbol. At this time, the middle identification symbol of the first identification symbol is hidden by the character of the airplane, and then the character of the airplane is further enlarged, and the display of the first identification symbol is interrupted as shown in FIG. 464A (F). Will be done. At this time, the variable display of the first identification symbol may be continuously displayed on the back side of the enlarged airplane character without stopping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 464A (G), the variable display of the identification symbol ends, and the final display is obtained. Further, as shown in FIG. 464A (H), the result of the variable display becomes a big hit, and the game shifts to the big hit game state.

Subsequently, further explaining the second identification symbol, as shown in FIGS. 464A (A) and 464A (B), the second identification symbol is also subjected to variable display as in the case of the first identification symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 464A (C), when the left identification symbol and the right identification symbol stop at the same identification symbol “5” and reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 464A (D), the first identification symbol Similarly, the second identification symbol is also provided with an additional decorative display.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 464A (E) and 464A (F), even if the player cannot see the first identification symbol due to the advance notice effect in the variation display after the reach occurs, the variation display of the second identification symbol is performed. Is in a state where the player can visually recognize.

In the present embodiment, at least one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol can be visually recognized by the player during the variable display of the identification symbol. Therefore, even if the first identification symbol or the second identification symbol cannot be visually recognized, the additional decoration is displayed on the second identification symbol in the same manner as the first identification symbol, so that the decoration mode of the identification symbol changes. The expected degree of big hit can be surely notified to the player.

Further, the additional decoration of the first identification symbol and the additional decoration of the second identification symbol may be different. For example, the number of stars of the additional decoration is 5 for the first identification symbol having a wide display area, and the display area is narrow. In the second identification symbol, the maximum number of stars of the additional decoration may be set to 3 to make it easier for the player to recognize. It is also possible for the player to determine that a notice image with a high degree of expectation is displayed such that the first identification symbol is hidden while only the second identification symbol is displayed, and the second identification symbol can be displayed. If there is no additional decoration of the symbol, even if a preview image that hides the first identification symbol is displayed, it may be judged as a so-called ghost effect with a low degree of expectation.

The first identification symbol and the second identification symbol may be drawn on the layer corresponding to each display area by using common image data, and the additional decoration may be set for each display area. In this way, by variablely displaying the identification symbol in a plurality of areas and sharing a part of the image data required for the variable display, the capacity for storing the image data can be saved and the variety of effects can be achieved. Can be done.

Further, not only the image data but also the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for variablely displaying the identification symbol in each display area may be shared. For example, by parameterizing the display position (coordinates) of the identification symbol, layer-related information, etc. and processing them in a common procedure, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the production-related program and flexibly respond to changes in the production specifications. Is possible. Further, whether or not to display the additional decoration is only determined at the time of execution based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern or the like, and the corresponding process is executed. It is possible to realize a more effective production without complicating the production control.

In the example shown in FIG. 464A, the notice image (character) is displayed on the front side of the identification symbol so that the visibility of the identification symbol is hindered. The same applies even when the visual recognition of the variable display of the identification symbol is hindered by the operation of the accessory. For example, the movable area of the accessory may be set so that the display area B can be visually recognized even when the accessory moves to the front side of the display area and it becomes difficult to see the accessory except for the lower part of the screen.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a period in which it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the first identification symbol due to the advance notice effect, and only the second identification symbol can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, a callback is executed based on the identification symbol replacement effect SW of the second identification symbol, and the identification symbol replacement table and the reel index replacement work number are executed based on the stop symbol and the symbol stop timing at the identification symbol switching timing. By replacing not only the second identification symbol but also the first identification symbol using the table, the identification symbol is decorated until just before the stop. As a result, the decoration for the first identification symbol and the decoration for the second identification symbol can be executed at the same timing or at the timing of interlocking with each other, the effect of the effect can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the display area B for displaying the second identification symbol does not have to be fixed. The arrangement of the display area B may be changed according to the type of the advance notice effect, and the position where the second identification symbol is displayed may be changed. For example, the coordinates of the layer corresponding to the display area B are set to a value corresponding to the advance notice effect. Further, a plurality of layers corresponding to the display area B may be prepared. At this time, a plurality of types of layers are prepared corresponding to the position where the second identification symbol is displayed, the parameter for displaying the corresponding layer according to the type of the advance notice effect is set to ON, and the parameter of the layer not to be displayed. Is set to OFF. With this configuration, it is possible to display the second identification symbol at a preset position, and it is also possible to display the identification symbol separately from the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol. By setting the parameters of all layers to OFF, it is possible to display only the first identification symbol.

The display of the layer corresponding to the display area may be executed based on the effect SW defined in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data selected based on the fluctuation pattern, the advance notice effect, and the like. For example, if the movable accessory moves to the front left of the screen, making it difficult to see the left side of the screen, the effect SW for setting the display area B on the right side of the screen is set to ON to display the second identification symbol. Then, the effect SW displayed at another position may be set to OFF.

Further, the effect sound effect is output corresponding to the variation display of the identification symbol in each display area, but in the present embodiment, the variation display of the first identification symbol and the variation display of the second identification symbol are executed in a similar manner. Therefore, a common effect sound effect may be output. In addition, when only the display area B having a narrow area is displayed due to the advance notice effect being executed in the front, the volume of the effect sound effect is lowered, the output of the effect sound effect is stopped, or the like. , The output related to the advance notice effect may be prioritized and the output of the sound related to the variable display may be suppressed.

Furthermore, the sounds related to the variable display of the identification symbol (BGM, effect sound effects) are managed as one AUTO group, and the sounds related to the advance notice effect (BGM, effect sound effects) are managed as other AUTO groups, and the automatic channel system is used. Sound control is performed by. At this time, by setting a high priority of the AUTO group that outputs the sound related to the advance notice effect, it is possible to automatically give priority to the output of the sound output by the advance notice effect, which complicates the effect control. Can be suppressed. As described above, by setting parameters such as sound output availability and volume suppression value, it is possible to suppress the output of other effect sound effects that are output while the sound related to the advance notice effect is being output. can.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the identification symbol during the variable display due to the advance notice effect or the like, the identification symbol is variablely displayed in a plurality of display areas. Since it is sufficient for the player to visually recognize the variable display of the identification symbol, it is possible to relax the limitation of the area where the advance notice effect is executed. In addition, it is possible to relax the restrictions on the range in which the movable accessory operates.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the variable display in the plurality of display areas is executed in the same manner, it is possible to draw using a common program or image data. On the other hand, even when the decorative image is superimposed on the identification symbol for each display area, a layer to be displayed on the front side of the identification symbol is prepared for each display area, and only the program and image data corresponding to the decorative image are prepared. Can be realized with. As a result, it is only necessary to prepare the minimum programs and data that will be the difference, and it is possible to suppress the increase in image data due to the diversification of the production contents, suppress the complexity of the production control, and suppress the increase in the storage capacity. Can be done.

[33-2. Modification example 1] of the configuration in which the identification symbol can be displayed in multiple areas at the same time.
In the above-described configuration example, the identification symbols are variablely displayed in the display area A and the display area B in the same manner from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the identification symbol, but here, the identification symbols are displayed in an independent manner in each display area. An example in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed and the variable display is performed in the same manner (synchronized) in each display area when a predetermined condition is satisfied will be described.

FIG. 464B is a diagram showing an example in which the identification symbols are independently variablely displayed in the plurality of display areas of the present embodiment and are variablely displayed in the same manner at a predetermined timing. In this modification, the variable display of the identification symbol is started at the same time in each display area, but as shown in (B), even if the left symbol is stopped in the display area A, the left symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area B. The variable display is continued without being done. Similarly, as shown in (C), even if the right symbol stops in the display area A and the left and right symbols form a reach mode, the variable display of all the identification symbols continues in the display area B.

Subsequently, after the reach mode is formed in (C), after the reach effect for a predetermined period has progressed, the identification symbols are revariated as shown in (D) in order to revariate all the symbols on the left, middle, and right. The symbol (“Next”) indicating the above is displayed in the middle symbol, and as shown in (E), the variable display of all the identification symbols is restarted. Subsequently, as shown in (F), the left and right symbols stop so as to form a reach mode. At the timing of this reach, the reach mode is not formed in the second identification symbol in the display area B. As described above, after the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A forms the reach mode, the symbol indicating the re-variation of the identification symbol is displayed in the middle symbol, so that the re-variation is performed. Therefore, when the first identification symbol displayed in the display area A reaches the reach mode, the second identification symbol does not form the reach mode when the second identification symbol changes again, and the second identification symbol does not change again. When the symbol forms a reach mode, it becomes possible to determine whether or not the player is re-variated by looking at the display of the second identification symbol, which may lead to a decrease in interest (particularly, the above-mentioned re-variable symbol). It is necessary to maintain as much as possible the interest that players may be re-variated because of the game specifications that raise the expectation of big hits by stopping and repeating re-variation). Therefore, in this modification, such a problem is solved by preventing the second identification symbol from forming the reach mode at the timing when the first identification symbol forms the reach mode. Then, after the reach mode is formed in the first identification symbol and a predetermined period of time elapses (for example, when a high expectation effect reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit is performed after reaching the reach), as shown in (G), the second The display of the identification symbol is set to the reach mode as in the mode of the first identification symbol, and thereafter, the display area B is additionally decorated in the same manner as the display area A, and the display area B is also in the same display mode as the display area A. The identification symbol is displayed. (H) and (I) are the same as (G) and (H) in FIG. 464A. In FIG. 464B, for example, after the timing when the high-expected reach effect is performed, the display of the second identification symbol in the display area B has the same mode as that of the first identification symbol (in other words, the first identification symbol has the same mode as that of the first identification symbol. For a predetermined period after reaching the reach, the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol have different display modes), and the display area B is also provided with the additional decorative display as in the display area A. , This timing can be triggered by other predetermined conditions.

The predetermined condition may be, for example, the time when the last re-variation is started while the temporary stop of the identification symbol is repeatedly executed, or the start timing of the re-variation after the last temporary stop in the pseudo-ream. You can also do it. Further, the start timing of the reach effect may be the timing at which the display modes of the respective display areas are the same.

As another predetermined condition, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when the advance notice effect by the specific movable accessory is executed, for example, when a part of the display area may not be visible. At this time, the display mode of each display area may be made the same from the beginning assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied from the start of the fluctuation, or may be matched with the execution timing of the advance notice effect by the specific movable accessory. The execution timing of the advance notice effect is, for example, the elapsed time from a specific timing such as the start of fluctuation. Further, when the movable accessory is operated by the operation of the effect button, the display mode of each display area may be controlled to be the same with the operation of the effect button as a predetermined condition.

Further, when the expectation of a big hit is high, a predetermined condition may be satisfied. This is because there is a high possibility that a flashy production will be performed in addition to the production by the movable accessory. Also in this case, it may be assumed that the predetermined conditions are satisfied from the start of the fluctuation. Further, the various timings described above may be combined, and for example, it may be the timing at which the reach effect with high expectation of a big hit is executed or the timing at which the final provisional fluctuation is started when the effect by the movable accessory is executed. ..

As described above, according to the present modification, the display mode of the identification symbol in each display area is made equivalent while maintaining the effect of relaxing the limitation of the area in which the advance notice effect is executed, as in the above-described embodiment. By adjusting the (synchronizing) timing, it is possible to realize various effects. In addition, in the first half, when the frequency of performing effects by movable accessories is low, the control load is reduced by simplifying the display mode of a part of the display area (low-decoration mode), and in the second half, when highly expected effects are performed. By setting the same display mode (highly decorative mode) in all display areas, it is possible to suppress restrictions on the content of the production such as restrictions on the operating range of the movable accessory, which enhances the interest of the game. Can be done.

[33-3. Modification example 2 of the configuration that can display the identification symbol in multiple areas at the same time]
In the example described above, the identification symbols are variablely displayed in the same display mode in each display area, and then stopped and displayed with the same symbols. On the other hand, in the modification described here, it is possible to stop and display the identification symbol in a different mode (symbol) after the variable display of the identification symbol is performed in each display area.

FIG. 464C is a diagram showing an example in which the identification symbols are variablely displayed in each of the plurality of display areas of the present embodiment and stopped at different symbols. Since (A) to (F) are the same as the example shown in FIG. 464A, the drawings from (C) to (E) are omitted. It should be noted that the identification symbol may be variablely displayed in the same manner as in the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 464B, and the stop symbol in each display area may be different as in the present modified example 2.

In this modification, when a plurality of types of hit types are prepared and the stop display is performed in the same mode (identification symbol) in each display area, "first hit" is shown, but different modes are shown in each display area. When the (identification symbol) is stopped and displayed, a "second hit" (for example, a "small hit") different from the "first hit" is indicated. As shown in FIG. 464C (G), in the display area A, the identification symbols are all stopped and displayed at the same "5", "5", and "5", while in the display area B, the middle symbols are different and the identification symbols "5". "V" "5" is displayed as a stop. In this modified example, when, for example, a small hit is prepared as the second hit, as shown in FIG. 464C (H), the result of the symbol variation becomes the "second hit", and when the "second hit" is won, The game ball can be accepted in the V zone arranged in the game area. When a game ball wins in the V zone, for example, it becomes possible to shift to a high probability state.

As described above, according to the present modification, it is possible to notify the player of the detailed contents of the hit by indicating the type of hit by the combination of the identification symbols stopped and displayed in the plurality of display areas. .. For example, it is also possible to indicate whether or not the stop symbol in the display area A is "hit" and the type of "hit" in the stop symbol in the display area B.

Further, the combination of the stop symbols in each display area makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand the result of the variable display. Specifically, when a "hit" is indicated by the stop symbol in the display area A, the stop display is displayed with the same identification symbol so that the player can clearly recognize that the hit is a hit. It is better not to misidentify the display area B as well. For example, when the result of the variable display is "off", the display area B may be stopped and displayed with the same identification symbol so as not to be misidentified by the player. In the case of so-called "big hit", the same identification symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area A, while in the case of "small hit", which is given less game value than the "big hit", the same identification is made only in the display area B. It may be stopped and displayed by a symbol.

When suggesting the type of "hit" depending on the display mode of the display area B, for example, when the display is stopped and displayed with the same identification symbol as the display area A, it is regarded as a "probability variation big hit", or the same as the display area A. When the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be set as a "normal jackpot" that does not shift to the probabilistic state. Further, only the middle symbol may be used as another identification symbol to recognize the type of jackpot, and as described above, if the middle symbol is "V", it may be shown that the game ball can be accepted in the V zone. , The number of rounds may be suggested by stopping the symbol corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot game in the medium symbol.

Further, the display area B may be hidden when the identification symbol is stopped so that the player can have a sense of expectation without notifying the type of "hit" while notifying that it is a "hit". For example, the player's expectation may be increased by making it ambiguous whether or not the probability fluctuates after the big hit. Further, the display area B may indicate an advantageous gaming state (probability fluctuation state, time shortening state, etc.) to be generated after the end of the big hit game.

Further, after notifying the player that the player is a big hit in the display mode in the display area A, the display of the identification symbol may be continued only in the display area B. If the display of the display area B is continued, the player can recognize that it is a big hit, and after notifying the big hit, the identification symbol in the display area A is hidden to perform the subsequent effect. The area can be secured. Further, in this case, the display that was set to "5", "V", and "5" at the start of the big hit in the display area B was displayed in the display area A from the middle of the big hit game, "5", "5", and "5". It may be displayed so as to match. Further, this display may be displayed until the jackpot game ends and the identification symbol starts to fluctuate in the game after the jackpot game ends, or the display may be stopped at a predetermined timing in the middle of the jackpot game. .. However, even if the display is stopped in the middle of the big hit game, it is preferable that the display corresponding to the hit symbol is displayed in the display area A or the display area B when the game after the big hit game is started. In this case, for example, in the display area B, "5", "V", and "5" are displayed at the hit timing, but after the big hit game is finished, they may be changed to "5", "V", and "5", and the big hit. The display may be changed to "5", "5", and "5" with the game in between.

According to this modification, as in the above-described embodiment, by performing variable display of the identification symbol in a plurality of display areas, it is possible to relax the limitation of the area for executing the advance notice effect, and the stop symbol in the plurality of display areas. By the combination of the above, it is possible to notify the player of the result of the game in detail, and further, it is possible to realize various notification modes. As a result, the expectation of the player can be raised, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[34. Substrate that is a component of the decorative body]
By the way, in recent game machines, in order to realize a wide variety of effects, the number of accessories (decorative bodies) mounted on the game machines has been increased, and the game has been improved by increasing the size and deformation. However, since the size of the gaming machine is set to a predetermined size, the gaming area is limited, and the size and arrangement of the accessory are limited due to factors such as the increase in size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, there is a risk that the production will be monotonous and the interest in the game will be reduced. The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a means for increasing the size of the accessory and improving the flexibility of arrangement.

The accessory provided in the gaming machine is visible from the player or the front side, and a decorative part rich in decoration is arranged to enhance the interest of the game, and a light emitting body such as an LED is provided inside. , It emits light in a mode according to the game state and the expected degree of variation display. If the illuminant is arranged on a substrate like an LED, the decorative portion includes a transmissive portion capable of transmitting the light output from the illuminant. The transmitting portion may be, for example, a transparent member capable of transmitting light, or may have holes formed in a mesh pattern so that light can pass through the holes.

On the other hand, by providing the transmissive portion, the player can visually recognize the substrate on which the electronic component such as the LED or the resistor is mounted through the transmissive portion. Usually, the substrate is equipped with electronic components necessary for exerting the effect of effect, and is not premised on being visually recognized by the player. However, in the decorative portion having a transmissive portion through which light can pass, the substrate arranged inside the decorative portion may be visually recognized by the player, and the decorative effect may be reduced.
On the other hand, if the substrate is made invisible by reducing the transmittance of the transmissive portion or by using a material that reflects light from the outside on the surface of the transmissive portion, the expected effect may not be obtained. be. Further, if the LED is arranged at a position where the player cannot see from the outside of the decorative portion or the transparent portion, the size of the decorative portion may be unintentionally increased.

Therefore, an object of the present embodiment is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the decorative effect even if the substrate is visually recognized from the transparent portion constituting the decorative portion.

[34-1. Game board]
FIG. 465 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game board 5 of the game machine according to the present embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 465, the effect display device 1600 (on the game board side) is arranged in the central portion of the game area 5a. Further, although not shown, in the game area 5a, similarly to the game board 5 described above, a plurality of general winning openings and a plurality of general winning openings that are always open so that the hit game ball can be received, and a plurality of general winnings. The mouth is a start port that is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, a gate portion that detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball to the first start port or the second start port. It is equipped with a large winning slot that allows you to accept game balls according to the result of the lottery.

Further, in the upper right portion of the game area 5a, a character accessory 9100 having a character shape of "super heat" is arranged. FIG. 466 is a perspective view showing the shape of the character accessory 9100 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 466, the character accessory 9100 is a plate-shaped accessory that imitates the character shape of "super heat". The effect of the character accessory 9100 is executed in a manner according to the degree of expectation of the symbol variation. For example, the light emission mode may be changed, such as emitting light in a color according to the degree of expectation, or repeating lighting and extinguishing in a predetermined pattern. In addition, "Geki" and "Heat" are turned on alternately, and when the degree of expectation is high, both letters are turned on to notify the big hit, and finally both letters are turned off, so-called Gase effect is executed. You may do it.

As will be described later, the character accessory 9100 has a cover member (cover body) 9110 that is visible to the player, and is composed of a transparent portion 9111 and a non-transparent portion 9112. It is configured to be capable of emitting light from the transmitting portion 9111 by a light emitting body provided inside. In the present embodiment, the transparent portion (first region) 9111 is a portion corresponding to the character, the non-transparent portion (second region) 9112 is the outer edge portion of the character, and the transparent portion 9111 is substantially colorless and transparent. .. The non-transparent portion 9112 may also have transparency, and may be colored with a transparency different from that of the transmission portion 9111, for example. The details of the character accessory 9100 will be described with reference to the drawings after FIG. 468.

A part of the character accessory 9100 overlaps the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, and the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 is applied to the back surface side of the character accessory 9100. At this time, by making the back surface side of the character accessory 9100 a reflective member, it is possible to execute an effect combined with the effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Further, a part of the character accessory 9100 may be configured to be able to transmit light, and the effect that the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 transmits the character accessory 9100 may be executed.

Further, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a on the front side, and a snowman accessory 9200 imitating the shape of a "snowman" on the lower left front side of the effect display device 1600. Is placed. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed in the shape of a three-dimensional doll, and the player can visually recognize a part of the side surface and the back surface side of the snowman accessory 9200 from the side.

FIG. 467 is a perspective view showing the shape of the snowman accessory 9200 according to the present embodiment, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed of a member having a transparent appearance, and exerts an effect by transmitting the light of the light emitting body (LED) provided inside to the outside.

The snowman accessory 9200 is apparently composed of a hat portion, a head portion, and a body portion. The head and body are made of transparent members so that the player can see the inside. The hat part is in the shape of a bucket and is provided on the upper side of the head. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in the present embodiment, the light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can be transmitted. The details of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described with reference to the drawings after FIG. 480.

Similar to the character accessory 9100, the snowman accessory 9200 is executed in a mode according to the degree of expectation of the symbol variation. For example, it may emit light in a color according to the degree of expectation, or may be repeatedly turned on and off. Further, only the head may be lit, or only the body may be lit. Further, at the first stage of the advance notice effect, only the hat portion may be lit to raise the player's expectation, and the head portion may be lit sequentially from the head portion to the body portion.

[34-2. Character character (super heat)]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the character accessory 9100 will be described. FIG. 468 is an exploded perspective view of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment. The character accessory 9100 is a cover member (cover body) 9110 arranged on the front side visible to the player, and a character accessory substrate arranged on the back side of the cover member 9110 and equipped with a light emitting body 9301 such as an LED. It is composed of a 9120, a cover member 9110, and a base member 9130 attached to the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120.

[34-2-1. Cover member]
The cover member 9110 has a peripheral wall portion 9113 formed on the outer periphery thereof so as to project rearward, and the character accessory substrate 9120 can be accommodated in the space on the back surface side surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113. FIG. 469 is a view of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment as viewed from the back surface side. The state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is housed will be described later with reference to FIG. 471. As described above, the cover member 9110 is formed by a transmissive portion 9111 capable of transmitting light imitating the characters "extreme heat" and a non-transmissive portion 9112 formed on the periphery of the transmissive portion 9111 and difficult to transmit light. ing.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 9113 forming the outer peripheral portion of the character accessory 9100 is made of a material that does not easily transmit light like the non-transmissive portion 9112, and may be the same member as the non-transmissive portion 9112. When the characters are individually lit, it is necessary to provide a peripheral wall portion 9113 between the characters in order to separate the characters. At this time, the character accessory substrate 9120 may be prepared for each character, or the substrate may be integrated.

The transparent portion 9111 is made of a colorless and transparent material so that the inside of the character accessory 9100 can be visually recognized. At the time of executing the production, the light emitting body 9301 provided inside transmits the light to the transmitting portion 9111 and the non-transmitting portion 9112 blocks the light to make the characters of "super heat" stand out and raise the expectation of the player. be able to. Further, not only the light from the light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the character accessory substrate 9120 can be transmitted, but also the character accessory substrate 9120 itself can be visually recognized by the player. ..

In the present embodiment, a light diffusing portion for diffusing light is formed in the non-transmissive portion 9112 on the back surface side of the cover member 9110. Instead of forming the light diffusing portion, a light guide member may be provided between the cover member 9110 and the character accessory substrate 9120, and the diffusing member is provided by guiding the light from the light emitting body 9301 to the transmitting portion 9111. The same effect as in the case of A modification using the light guide member will be described later.

With the above configuration, the light inside the accessory can be efficiently aggregated with a small number of light emitters, so that the number of light emitters 9301 arranged on the character accessory substrate 9120 can be reduced or light emission can be achieved. The degree of freedom in arranging the body 9301 can be increased.

Further, the non-transmissive portion 9112 may be formed of a transparent material having a lower transmittance than the transmissive portion 9111 without forming the light diffusing portion. For example, by using a colored material having transparency, the character accessory 9100 is made to emit light as a whole, and the effect is different from that when the light diffusing part is used while making the character part stand out due to the difference in transparency. be able to.

[34-2-2. Character accessory board]
FIG. 470 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 471 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is housed in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 470 and 471, the character accessory substrate 9120 is not in the general rectangular shape, but in the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. It has a similar shape. Further, the surface of the character accessory substrate 9120 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color). Although various information is displayed on the character accessory substrate 9120, it may be displayed by silk printing or the like, or may be displayed by etching characters.

Further, the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120 is blocked by the base member 9130 when it is attached to the game board 5, so that the player cannot see it. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the color of the substrate to a specific color, but it is necessary to compare the cost of the material with the manufacturing cost for processing the front surface and the back surface separately, and decide whether to apply the resist only on the front surface or on both sides. You just have to decide.

As described above, the character accessory substrate 9120 is visible from the transmission portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. Therefore, if the color of the substrate does not match the decorative mode of the accessory, the decorative effect may be reduced, or the decorative effect may be hindered by the electronic components arranged on the substrate. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the character accessory substrate 9120 itself is used as one of the decorative elements. For example, the character accessory substrate 9120 may be colored (specific color) according to the decoration mode of the accessory instead of the general green color, or the electronic components mounted on the character accessory substrate 9120 may have the pattern of the accessory. Arrange so as to make. The color according to the decoration mode of the accessory is, for example, a color related to a character or a theme appearing in the production of the accessory (game machine). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings.

First, a specific mode for using the shape and color of the substrate provided on the decorative body such as an accessory as a decorative element will be described. Since the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment has the transmission portion 9111 as described above, the character accessory substrate 9120 provided inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, by coloring the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 to a specific color that matches the decoration mode of the character accessory 9100, the entire color of the character accessory 9100 is configured. For example, when the surface of the character accessory substrate 9120 is blue, the entire accessory is blue when the light emitting body 9301 does not emit light, and the light emitting color of the light emitting body 9301 is used when the light emitting body 9301 emits light. Can be given to a person. In particular, when the area occupied by the transparent portion 9111 in the entire accessory is large, a larger effect can be obtained.

[34-2-3. Light emitter / electronic component]
A plurality of light emitting bodies (LEDs) 9301 are arranged on the surface (front surface) side of the character accessory substrate 9120. The light emitting bodies 9301 may all have the same light emitting color, or a plurality of different types of light emitting colors may be prepared. The light emitting body 9301 may be turned on according to the progress of the game, and the lighting location may be different depending on the content of the effect. When there are different types of emission colors, the colors may be emitted according to the degree of expectation, or different types of emission colors may be emitted at the same time.

Then, in the present embodiment, as described above, the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is colored to a specific color. Therefore, since the color changes depending on the combination of the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 and the light emitting color of the light emitting body 9301, it is possible to realize various effects by making the light emitting body 9301 emit light in a plurality of kinds of colors. It will be possible.

Further, when the light emitting body 9301 is turned off, the character character board 9120 is recognized as a colored specific color. Therefore, even if the light emitting body 9301 is blinked, the character character board 9301 can be used as one effect expression. The specific color colored in 9120 and the emission color of the illuminant 9301 can be alternately recognized as different colors. For example, when the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is colored blue as described above, when the light emitter 9301 is slowly blinked in red, the red character accessory and the blue character accessory are alternately given light and dark. It can be recognized as a character with a completely different color.

Electronic components other than the light emitter 9301 are mounted on the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120. Specifically, it is a resistor 9302, an IC 9303, and a connector 9304. In the present embodiment, since these electronic components cannot be visually recognized by the player, the arrangement may be such that there is no technical problem. Further, as shown in FIG. 471, information on the light emitting body 9301 arranged on the front surface side is printed on the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120, and electronic components arranged on the front surface side even from the back surface side. Can recognize information about. The information indicating the position of the light emitter 9301 is indicated by a dotted line to prevent misunderstanding.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 470, only the light emitting body 9301 is arranged on the surface side, and the information on the electronic component is not displayed. This is to prevent the decorative effect from being reduced by the player's visibility of the silk-printed characters (for example, the part number of the electronic component (“LED1” in FIG. 471)), but the assembly work. If necessary, the information may be displayed in a color that is difficult for the player to see. For example, when the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is colored blue as described above, a similar color such as light blue with identifiable shade adjustment is adopted as the information display, and silk printing is performed. Just do it. Alternatively, the information may be formed by etching characters.

Further, in the character accessory 9100 in the present embodiment, since the electronic parts other than the light emitting body 9301 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate which the player cannot see, the electronic parts such as the resistor 9302 and the IC 9303 are black. .. When the electronic components must be arranged on the front side, at least a part of the electronic components such as the back side of the non-transparent portion 9112 may be arranged so as to be difficult for the player to see, or a color or a color that is difficult for the player to see. Electronic components of shape may be adopted. For example, if it is an electronic component having the same color as a specific color, it may be arranged on the front side.

On the other hand, as described above, in the present invention, the player can visually recognize the substrate provided inside the accessory. Therefore, an example of using the electronic component arranged on the substrate as a decorative element of the accessory will be described.

An electronic component is arranged on the surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120 at a position visible to the player from the transmission portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. At this time, the electronic components are arranged so as to form a character pattern displayed by the character accessory 9100. For example, electronic components are placed in regular positions so that they can be used as decorations for letters.

Further, by arranging the light emitting body 9301, the player may not be able to recognize the character pattern at the time of light emission. Further, by selecting and emitting light from the light emitting body 9301 at a position where the electronic component can be recognized even at the time of light emission and the light emitting body 9301 at a position where the electronic component cannot be recognized at the time of light emission, the pattern can be emitted. It may be configured so that the presence or absence can be switched.

Further, an electronic component other than black may be arranged on the surface side to serve as a decorative element. Although the transmitting portion 9111 is colorless and transparent, it may be possible to transmit light as a lens member or a diffusing member, and at the same time, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the electronic component as a pattern by making it impossible to clearly distinguish the electronic component. As for the mode in which the decorative effect is exhibited by arranging the electronic components, another specific example will be described with reference to the snowman accessory 9200, which will be described later.

It is also possible to use the characters printed on the surface side of the substrate as a pattern. Instead of printing characters in colors that are difficult for the player to recognize in order to prevent the decorative effect from being hindered, the characters that indicate information on electronic components and boards can be recognized by the player as decorative elements. It may be printed in an aspect (color, shape). As a result, it is possible to make the pattern of the accessory into a more complicated form, or to change the color by printing in a color different from that of the cover member 9110, and it is possible to enhance the decorative effect. In addition, by aggregating the characters to be printed on the substrate, the player is made to recognize that a region having a color different from that of the cover member 9110 and other parts on the substrate is formed on the substrate, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the entire accessory. You may try to increase it.

[34-2-4. Arrangement of illuminants]
Subsequently, the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 will be described. FIG. 472 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting body 9301 is also arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 and a position behind the non-transmissive portion 9112 that is difficult for the player to see. Here, the light emitting body 9301 arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 is referred to as a light emitting body 9301a, and is referred to as a light emitting body 9301b arranged on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112.

For example, when it is desired to emit strong light, the light emitting body 9301a is arranged at a position visible from the transmitting portion 9111 so that the light is directly irradiated to the outside. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 469, since the light diffusing portion is provided on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112, the light is diffused and softened by arranging the light emitting body 9301b on the back side of the non-transmitting portion 9112. It is possible to emit light with light.

In this way, the position of the light emitting body 9301a may be determined according to the type of the accessory, and by selecting the light emitting body 9301 to emit light, it is possible to switch the light emitting mode with one accessory. Specifically, when it is desired to emit strong light from the entire accessory, only the light emitting body 9301a or all the light emitting bodies 9301 may be emitted, and when it is desired to emit light with soft light, only the light emitting body 9301b is emitted to diffuse the light. Just do it.

Further, the transmittance of the transmissive portion 9111 may be adjusted so that the light emitting body 9301a is slightly difficult to see without making it completely colorless and transparent. For example, the transmittance of the transmitting portion 9111 may be slightly lowered (colored transparent, for example, light blue) to make it difficult to see the inside, or the surface of the transmitting portion 9111 may be processed (for example, textured) to diffuse light. In this way, the inside may be made difficult to see. With such a configuration, the light emitting body itself becomes difficult to see, but it is possible to emit light more strongly than when it is arranged on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112. Further, since the degree of freedom in the position of the light emitter 9301 is increased, the degree of freedom in design is increased and the development efficiency can be improved.

Further, the character accessory substrate 9120 itself may not be a direct decorative element, but may indirectly enhance the effect. For example, when the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is white, it is possible to increase the reflectance even when the arranged light emitting body 9301 is not lit, and when the light emitting body 9301 is lit, it is possible to increase the reflectance. Of course, by reflecting the light from the outside, it is possible to prevent the inside of the character accessory 9100 from becoming too dark.

Further, since the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is white, the character color of the character accessory 9100 can be recognized as white as a feature when the light is turned off. In this case, if a full-color LED (R, G, B color LED) is used for the light emitting body 9301, the character color can be expressed as various colors, but the light from the light emitting body 9301 and the back side of the non-transmitting portion 9112 side. By overlapping and fusing the light reflected (diffused) from the light diffusing part provided in the above and the light reflected from the surface of the substrate, it is possible to perform a fantastic effect that cannot be expressed by a single type of light emitting body 9301. can. At this time, since various effects can be realized without using a plurality of types of light emitters 9301, the cost can be reduced.

As described above, in the character accessory of the present embodiment, the color of the substrate and the mounted electronic components are used as decorative elements so that the player can see them, so that the substrate is hidden. Since there is no need to do so, the degree of freedom in design can be improved. Further, electronic components that do not serve as decorative elements may be arranged on the back surface side of the substrate, and by arranging electronic components other than the light emitting body such as LEDs on the back surface side, only the color of the substrate may be used as the decorative element.

[34-2-5. Base member]
The base member 9130 has the same shape as the cover member 9110 when viewed from the front at the time of attachment. The peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are brought into contact with each other and fixed by a mounting member (not shown). At this time, the character accessory substrate 9120 may be fixed to the cover member 9110 or the base member 9130, or the character accessory substrate 9120 may be accommodated in a space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 without being fixed. You may try to do it. The wiring for transmitting a signal or supplying electric power to the character accessory board 9120 is not shown. For example, a hole for wiring is provided in the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the base member 9130 and the cover member 9110. It may be formed.

It should be noted that the cover member 9110 may be provided with a mounting portion so as to be directly mounted on the game board 5 without using the base member 9130. In this case, the character accessory substrate 9120 is attached to the cover member 9110.

[34-3. Modification example of character accessory 1]
Subsequently, the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 does not completely resemble the shape of the character accessory 9100, and the outer edge of the character accessory substrate 9120 matches the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. The case where it is not performed will be described. In this case, since the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged on the entire character accessory 9100, the light guide member 9140 is arranged between the cover member 9110 and the character accessory substrate 9120, and the light emitting body is diffused by diffusing the light. The shortage of the amount of light in the portion where the 9301 is not arranged is compensated. The cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are the same as those described above.

FIG. 473 is a diagram showing an example of a light guide member 9140 that diffuses light from a light emitting body 9301 in the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment. The light guide member 9140 is surrounded by a peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 in the same manner as the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 described above in order to diffuse light over the entire back surface side of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100. The shape is similar to the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the outer shape of the space.

FIG. 474 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of the modification 1 of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 475 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is housed in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the modification 1 of the present embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120. The configuration other than the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 is the same as that of the above-described embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 474 and 475, the character accessory substrate 9120 is formed with a cutout portion 9122 in which a part of the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 is missing. Further, a mounting hole 9121 for fixing to the base member 9130 is formed in the central portion of the character accessory substrate 9120. As shown in FIG. 475, the mounting portion of the cover member 9110 is mounted on the base member 9130 through the mounting hole 9121.

Similarly, the light guide member 9140 is also formed with a mounting hole so that the mounting portion of the base member 9130 can be inserted therethrough. If the proportion of the cutout portion 9122 is small and the position of the substrate does not shift, the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 may be sandwiched and fixed without providing a mounting configuration.

FIG. 476 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of the modified example of the present embodiment. In this modification, since the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged in the cutout portion 9122, the entire character accessory 9100 is made to emit light by guiding the light by the light guide member 9140. At this time, a light diffusing portion may be provided on the back surface side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 to assist the light guide member 9140.

Therefore, in the character accessory 9100 of this modification, a portion to be decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120 and a notch portion 9122 are formed by using the color of the character accessory substrate 9120, electronic parts, and the like as decorative elements. Therefore, there will be a mixture of parts that are not decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120. At this time, the decoration effect can be maintained by performing light decoration by the light diffusing portion provided on the back surface side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the light guide member 9140 and the cover member 9110.

As described in this modification, the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 does not have to be similar to that of the character accessory 9100, and the portion not decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120 includes a light guide member 9140, a light diffusing portion, and the like. The reduction of the decoration effect may be suppressed by providing the light decoration. Further, the reduction of the decorative effect may be suppressed by making the color of the base member 9130 the same as the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120. This makes it possible to make the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 a relatively simple shape without making it a complicated shape, and by increasing the degree of freedom in the size of the substrate, the manufacturing cost such as processing of the substrate can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

Further, instead of using the base member 9130, the light emitting decorative portion arranged on the back surface side of the character accessory 9100 allows the light from the decorative portion to be transmitted through the notch 9122 to produce the effect. good. For example, when the character accessory 9100 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 as in the present embodiment, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and the character combination are displayed by displaying an image in the upper right part of the screen. An effect that is integrated with the light emission effect by the object 9100 may be executed. Further, the same effect can be performed by using a transparent member for the base member 9130. An example using the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described in more detail in Modification 2.

[34-4. Modification example of character character 2]
In the first modification, the notch 9122 is formed in a part of the substrate, but in the second modification, an example in which the above-mentioned character accessory substrate 9120 is about half the size of the character accessory 9100 will be described. Further, the cover member 9110 is configured to directly attach the game board 5 without using the base member 9130, and the configuration of the character accessory 9100 in this modification is the cover member 9110, the character accessory substrate 9120, and the light guide. It is composed of members 9140.

In this modification, as in the first modification, the light guide member 9140 guides light to a portion where the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged to perform light decoration. Further, in this modification, since the base member 9130 is not provided, if a light emitting body is provided on the back surface side of the character accessory 9100, the light of the light emitting body can be transmitted.

FIG. 477 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of the modification 2 of the present embodiment of the present embodiment, in which the character accessory substrate 9120 and the light guide member 9140 overlap. Indicates the state. Further, FIG. 478 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is housed in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the modification 2 of the present embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 477 and 478, the character accessory substrate 9120 is configured to occupy about the upper half of the character accessory 9100. Therefore, when the character accessory 9100 of this modification is attached to the game board 5, the upper half is decorated with a specific color colored on the character accessory board 9120, but the lower half is not decorated with the character accessory board 9120. It becomes. On the other hand, since the lower half of the character accessory 9100 is transparent from the transparent portion 9111, the back surface side of the character accessory 9100 may be set to a specific color to suppress a sense of discomfort.

Further, different effects may be executed in the upper and lower regions. For example, in the case of a character accessory in which characters are written in two stages, a character accessory substrate 9120 is arranged on the upper stage side, and a light emitting body is arranged on the back surface side on the lower stage side to execute different effects in the upper stage and the lower stage. Further, if this accessory is movable, it is possible to perform different effects for each stop position by arranging different light emitters for each stop position on the back surface side.

Further, the light emitting body may be not only an LED or a lamp but also a liquid crystal display device 1600 as described above. For example, an LED is arranged as a light emitting body on the upper part of the game board 5 and the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged. When the light is moved downward to, the effect can be executed by transmitting light from the lower part of the accessory by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

As the image to be displayed on the back side of the character accessory 9100, regardless of the transparent portion 9111 and the non-transparent portion 9112, the same color (character combination) imitating the character accessory 9100 including the lower half (notch portion in the modified example 1) is included. It is preferable to display an image having the same shape as the specific color for the portion where the object substrate 9120 is shown). This is because the image is displayed even when the character accessory 9100 has some trouble, so that the game can be advanced without giving the player anxiety due to the trouble.

With the above configuration, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of production with one character, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 479, a part of the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized by the player via the character accessory 9100. Therefore, in addition to the light guided by the light guide member 9140, the light from the image (video) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed from the back surface side of the character accessory 9100, and the light emission effect by the character accessory substrate 9120. And, it becomes possible to execute the display effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600 in cooperation with each other. With this configuration, the lower side portion of the character accessory substrate 9120 becomes a boundary, and it can be an element constituting the decoration.

FIG. 479 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory 9100 of the second modification of the present embodiment is attached to the game board 5. The upper part of the character accessory 9100 diffuses the light from the light emitter 9301 mounted on the character accessory substrate 9120 by the light guide member 9140. On the other hand, the lower part of the character accessory 9100 diffuses the light (displayed image) output by the liquid crystal display device 1600 by the light guide member 9140. At this time, by fusing the light from the light emitting body 9301 and the light from the liquid crystal display device 1600, it is possible to execute an effect in which the effect by the character accessory 9100 and the effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600 are integrated.

It should be noted that an effect other than the character accessory 9100 and the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be fused. For example, when the game board 5 is made of a transparent member and a light emitting body is arranged on the back surface side or a sticker or the like is attached to enhance the decorative effect, the game board 5 is visually recognized and combined through the transparent portion of the accessory. Can further enhance the decorative effect.

[34-5. Snowman character]
Next, the snowman character 9200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 467, the snowman accessory 9200 is an accessory (decorative body) that imitates a snowman, and has a spherical head resting on a spherical body slightly larger than the head. It has become. Furthermore, a bucket-shaped hat is placed on the head in an inclined state. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in the present embodiment, the light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can be transmitted.

FIG. 480 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. The snowman accessory 9200 accommodates a substrate (snowman substrate 9220) on which electronic components including a light emitting body 9301 such as an LED are mounted inside a cover member 9210 divided into a front side cover member 9210a and a back surface side cover member 9210b. Will be done.

The snowman accessory 9200 is used in an effect executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and for example, an effect such as causing an internal illuminant to emit light according to the expected degree of symbol variation is executed. Further, since the cover member 9210 is made of a material that allows light to pass through and is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect of transmitting or reflecting the displayed image is executed. May be good. Hereinafter, each configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be specifically described.

FIG. 481 is a view of the front side cover member 9210a of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. FIG. 482 is a diagram showing a back surface side cover member 9210b of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. FIG. 483 is a diagram showing the front side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 484 is a diagram showing the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment of the present embodiment.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a, back side cover member 9210b) of the snowman accessory 9200 is almost colorless and transparent except for a part, and has transparency, and the substrate (snowman substrate 9220) housed inside from the front. ) Can be visually recognized on the surface side.

As shown in FIGS. 483 and 484, the snowman substrate 9220 has the shape of the snowman accessory 9200, and has a very design-rich shape. Further, the snowman substrate 9220 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color) in the same manner as the character accessory substrate 9120. In addition, the configuration of the substrate itself is the same as that of the character accessory substrate 9120, and various electronic components are mounted on the front surface side and the back surface side. As for the code of the electronic component on the substrate, the same code as that of the character accessory 9100 is used.

In the present embodiment, the shape of the snowman substrate 9220 is such that the inside of the snowman accessory 9200 is occupied so that the back surface side of the snowman accessory 9200 cannot be visually recognized from the front. As a result, the entire snowman accessory 9200 is recognized as a specific color colored on the snowman substrate 9220, and the color of the entire accessory is determined. On the other hand, a notch or a hole may be formed in a part of the snowman substrate 9220 so that the back surface side of the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized. At this time, an image may be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1600 from the rear of the snowman accessory 9200, or a decorative body such as a light emitting body may be arranged to increase the variety of effects.

Further, the snowman accessory 9200 has a three-dimensional shape, and the player can visually recognize the side surface of the snowman accessory 9200 by slightly tilting the line of sight from the front. Since the cover member 9210 has transparency, the player can visually recognize the snowman substrate 9220 beyond the side surface to the back surface. In the character accessory 9100, which is configured so that the substrate cannot be visually recognized from the back surface side, it is not necessary to set the back side of the substrate to a specific color, but the snowman substrate 9220 is also colored to a specific color on the back surface side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the decorative effect even when the player approaches the liquid crystal display device 1600 and visually recognizes the snowman accessory 9200 from the side. As a result, the degree of freedom in the form of the accessory can be improved, the effect of the effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Since the player can visually recognize the snowman substrate 9220 beyond the side surface to the back surface, the light emitter 9301 may be arranged on the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 to make the entire snowman accessory 9200 emit light from the back surface side. .. Further, by coloring the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 in a color different from that of the front surface side, it is possible to give the player an impression different from that when only the light emitting body 9301 on the front surface side emits light. The same effect can be expected by arranging the illuminants 9301 having a common and different emission color of the snowman substrate 9220. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode of the accessory and enhance the fun of the game.

As shown in FIG. 480, an opening is provided in the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200, and a cord for transmitting electric power or a signal is inserted into the snowman substrate 9220 housed inside the snowman accessory 9200. There is. Various effects are executed by causing the light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the snowman substrate 9220 to emit light by the supplied electric power and the signal from the effect control device.

Further, as described above, the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200 is colored (for example, red) and has transparency. The transparency of the hat portion is lower than that of other parts of the snowman accessory 9200, making it difficult to see the inside. Therefore, the connector 9304 arranged on the snowman board 9220 and the cord connected to the connector 9304 are arranged on the hat portion to make it difficult for the player to see.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a) is formed with a transparent portion B9211b having different transmittance at a portion corresponding to the eyes of a snowman when viewed from the front by the player. The transmissive portion other than the hat portion is the transmissive portion A9211a. In the present embodiment, the transmission portion B9211b is configured so that the inside of the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized in a blurred state with aberrations remaining like a soft focus lens. Therefore, the outline of the electronic component arranged on the snowman substrate 9220 housed inside the snowman accessory 9200 can be blurred and visually recognized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 483, in the present embodiment, electronic components (resistors 9302) are integrated and arranged on the snowman substrate 9220 corresponding to the portion corresponding to the eyes of the snowman accessory 9200. The resistor 9302 is a black electronic component and is densely arranged in a circular shape. When the player sees the snowman accessory 9200 during the game, the outline of the electronic component appears to be blurred because it is visually recognized through the transparent portion B9211b. As a result, the electronic components (resistors 9302) that are aggregated and arranged on the substrate are recognized as the black eyes of the snowman, and can form a decorative element.

In addition, the part numbers of electronic parts (part numbers silk-printed such as "R1") are silk-printed in the same color as white, which is the same specific color as the resist of the snowball substrate 9220, so that they can be identified. There is. In the present embodiment, since the resistors 9302 are printed densely, they can be identified and function as reflecting light due to the dense printing.

In the present embodiment, the part number of the electronic component (the part number silk-printed such as "R1") may be silk-printed in black in the same manner as the resistor. As described above, due to the effect of the lens, the resistance 9302 can be recognized as a snowman's eye.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 484, an electronic component (IC9303) that does not form a decorative element on the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 and at a position outside when the snowman accessory 9200 is installed on the game board 5. Etc.) are arranged. As a result, the electronic component having a low decorative effect or a possibility of reducing the decorative effect is placed at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the reduction of the effect. .. At this time, by directing the snowman substrate 9220 toward the center side of the gaming machine, it is possible to make the electronic components arranged on the back surface side more difficult to see.

Here, the configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described focusing on the cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a, rear surface side cover member 9210b). The front cover member 9210a and the rear cover member 9210b do not have to be evenly divided in the front-rear direction. For example, even if one of the front cover members 9210a is formed beyond the snowman substrate 9220 toward the rear. good. Hereinafter, an example in which one (inside) of the front side cover member 9210a is formed beyond the snowman substrate 9220 toward the rear will be described with reference to FIG. 485.

FIG. 485 is a top view of the horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 485, when the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a is formed so as to extend rearward beyond the side surface of the snowman substrate 9220, most of the appearance of the snowman accessory 9200 visible to the player. Will be composed of the front surface side cover member 9210a. As a result, the attachment location of the front cover member 9210a to the back cover member 9210b (the joint between the front cover member 9210a and the rear cover member 9210b) is on the back side behind the snowman substrate 9220, which is highly decorative. It is possible to realize a cover.

Further, since the colorless and transparent (or substantially colorless and transparent) front side cover member 9210a extends to the rear of the snowman substrate 9220, the snowman substrate 9220 colored in white (specific color) is a snowman accessory 9200 not only on the front surface but also on the back surface. Is decorated in white. It is desirable that both sides are white as in the present embodiment, but since the player mainly sees from the front side, only the front side may be white.

Further, FIG. 485 shows a mode in which only the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a extends rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220, but depending on the decoration of the accessory to be adopted, only the outer side may extend rearward of the substrate. A mode may be adopted in which both the inside and the outside extend to the rear of the substrate.

Further, a configuration for attaching each configuration of the accessory to each other and attaching the accessory to the game board will be described. In the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 485, the snowman substrate 9220 is attached by the substrate mounting portion 9213 and the mounting member 9214 formed on the back surface side cover member 9210b. At this time, it is preferable that the board mounting portion 9213 is provided on the outside of the snowman accessory 9200, which is difficult for the player to see. Further, the front surface side cover member 9210a is attached to the back surface side cover member 9210b by a cover attachment portion (not shown), but it is preferable that the cover attachment portion is provided on the outside of the snowman accessory 9200 as in the substrate attachment portion 9213. Further, it is preferable that the back surface side cover member 9210b is attached to the structure of the game board 5 (not shown), and the attachment portion with the structure is provided on the outside of the snowman accessory 9200 as in the board attachment portion 9213. In this way, by arranging the attachment portion of each configuration of the accessory and the attachment portion of the accessory and the game board 5 on the outside which is difficult for the player to see, it is possible to prevent the decorativeness of the accessory from being hindered. Can be done.

It should be noted that not only the outside of the accessory, but also a portion that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a portion made of a colored member (a hat portion in the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment), a lens cut for decoration, etc.) provide visibility. By providing a mounting portion at a place where it is lowered, a part where the shape of the accessory is bent (the boundary portion between the head and the body portion in the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment), etc. Can be suppressed from being impaired.

In the example shown in FIG. 485, the front side cover member 9210a and the back side cover member 9210b are used to form the snowman accessory 9200. However, as shown in FIG. 486, one cover member 9210 forms the shape of the snowman. You may do so. FIG. 486 is a top view of the horizontal cross section of the snowball accessory 9200 in the modified example of the present embodiment.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 486, the cover member 9210 and the snowman substrate 9220 are attached to the game board 5 via the base body 9230. In this modified example as well, as in the example shown in FIG. 485, it is preferable that both sides of the snowman substrate 9220 are white, but only the front surface side may be white.

In this modification, the inner cover member is provided not only extending rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 but also extending rearward beyond the base body 9230, so that not only the snowman substrate 9220 but also the base body 9230 is provided by the player. Will be visible from. Therefore, in this modification, the base body 9230 can also be configured as a decoration by using a specific color (for example, white) similar to that of the snowman substrate 9220. Regarding the attachment of the cover member 9210 and the snowman substrate 9220 to the base body 9230, as described above, the attachment portion is provided in a place where it is difficult for the player to see, and the attachment portion is attached by the attachment member or the like. It is possible to prevent the decorativeness from being impaired.

In this modification, only the inner side of the cover member 9210 extends rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 and the base body 9230, but the outer side of the cover member depends on the decoration of the accessory to be adopted. Only the mode extending to the rear of the substrate or the base body or the mode extending to the rear of the substrate or the base body may be adopted both inside and outside.

[34-6. Effect, etc.]
Generally, an electronic circuit board has a raw board of a basic size, and the cost is greatly affected by how many boards can be taken from one raw board based on this raw board. Although it is designed to have a square shape in a very simple way, the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment has a very well-designed shape. In other words, it can be said that all the elements that make up the substrate, from the resist and the color of the substrate to the electronic components, are used as the decorative performance of the accessory.

It should be noted that the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory described above has a substantially square shape. Compared to the snowman board 9220, it has a shape that fits into a simple design, but it can be said that the cover body that covers the board has more functions to have a design.

As described above, the substrate in which an electronic circuit composed of not only a light emitting body (LED) but also an electronic component for controlling the light emitting body is formed inside the accessory, which has been seen in recent years, has almost the shape of the accessory. It is also provided. Wiring that electrically connects the electronic components that make up the electronic circuit is drawn on the substrate on which the electronic circuit is formed, and a protective film (protective film) is applied to the surface of the substrate to prevent oxidation of the wiring. It is covered with a resist).

Therefore, we focused on the color of the resist, which is the protective film, that is, the color of the substrate, as a color of the accessory. Even so, when the transmissive portion is provided on the front side, there is a risk that the decorative effect as an accessory may be reduced by visually recognizing the electronic components mounted on the substrate from the transmissive portion. As illustrated in the object 9100 and the snowman accessory 9200, the color of the board, all the elements that make up the board, and the mounted electronic components themselves are also used as decorative elements to prevent the reduction of the decorative effect and play the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

In a gaming machine, a plurality of boards on which electronic components are mounted are mounted. Of these, the main board and the payout control board provided on the back side of the gaming machine are generally housed in a colorless and transparent case, and their inspection and confirmation are easy. On the other hand, in the light emitting decorative substrate used for the movable or non-movable decorative member mounted on the game board panel, the surface facing the player side on the front side is a lens that reflects and scatters the light from the light emitting decorative substrate. Members and the like are provided, and the rear surface side is attached to the game board panel in a state facing the effect display device attached to the game board panel. Further, on the rear surface side of the light emitting decoration substrate, in order to realize the function of light emitting decoration, a connector, a control element, a driver, a resistor, a capacitor, etc. for connecting a flat cable for receiving a control signal etc. from peripheral control means, etc. Electronic components are mounted. When such a gaming machine is installed in a gaming store, it is difficult to confirm whether or not a defect has occurred in the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the light emitting decorative substrate in the installed gaming machine. .. This is because the rear surface of the light emitting decorative substrate faces the surface forming the display area of the effect display device. Therefore, the means for solving such a problem is shown below.

FIG. 487 is a diagram showing the entire game board 5 in this embodiment. The game board 5 includes a game panel 1100 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and a game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the game panel 1100 includes a game area 5a, a rail member 5950, and a game panel opening 1100a. The game panel opening 1100a is formed by providing a punched physical opening in the game panel 1100. A space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 on the front side, and a plurality of accessories are arranged in layers in this space. Specifically, from the front side, at a position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back grass role 6800, the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second A cloud accessory 6750 is provided. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. There is. Further, a first grass accessory 6470 and a second grass accessory 6475 are provided behind them, a rabbit accessory 6000 is provided behind them, and a mountain accessory 6500 is provided behind them, and a mountain accessory is provided. A game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind the 6500. By arranging a plurality of accessories in layers in this way, a sense of depth can be obtained.

FIG. 488 (A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 488 (B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 488 (C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. The rabbit accessory 6000 is composed of a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030 as a unit. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b as the face light emitting unit 6023 on the front surface. Further, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped to imitate the mouth of a rabbit. The left and right front legs of a rabbit are imitated on the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, and the first arm portion 6016 and the second arm portion 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached. Further, at the lower end of the face substrate 6020, a body portion 6030, which is a plate-shaped member made of a white opaque synthetic resin, is provided to imitate the body portion of a rabbit.

FIG. 489 (A) is a front view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. 489 (B) is a rear view of the face substrate 6020. The face substrate 6020 is a plate-shaped member composed of a printed circuit board, and the front surface and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting an electric circuit provided on the surface. .. Further, the LED constituting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the LED constituting the second face light emitting unit 6023b are on the front side of the face substrate 6020, and the control element 6025, the driver 6026, and the first are on the rear surface side of the face substrate 6020. Resistors 6027a to 6th resistors 6027f, a first capacitor 6028a, a second capacitor 6028b, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted.

As shown in FIG. 489 (A), the face substrate 6020 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and two rectangular portions extend upward as the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 on the upper side forming the rectangle. It has a rectangular shape. The horizontally long rectangular portion imitates the face of a rabbit, and the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 imitate the ears of a rabbit. In the state where the face cover portion 6010 is attached to the face substrate 6020, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are not covered by the face cover portion 6010, and the face substrate 6020 is exposed.

The first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 have a first ear decoration portion 6021a and a second ear decoration portion 6022a that imitate the inside of a rabbit's ear, respectively. The first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are formed by printing with brown ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and are visible areas in brown. ing. In the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, the regions other than the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are covered with the white protective film described above. Further, electronic components such as the control element 6025 are not mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, and the printed circuit board is used only for decoration. ..

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b. Specifically, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are each composed of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the face substrate 6020. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b can emit light under the control of the peripheral control substrate 1510, but the details will be described later.

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a mouth decoration portion 6024. Specifically, the mouth decoration portion 6024 is formed by printing with pink ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and the shape imitating the mouth of a rabbit can be visually recognized in pink. It has become. On the front surface of the face substrate 6020, the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are brown, the mouth decoration portion 6024 is pink, and the other regions are white so that they can be visually recognized.

FIG. 489 (B) is a view showing the rear surface side of the face substrate 6020. As described above, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting the circuit as well as the front surface of the face substrate 6020. On the upper left and right of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are located at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided on the front side. The dotted line indicating the mounting location and the character strings "LED1" and "LED2" indicating the name of the mounted member are formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink, respectively. .. Further, a driver 6026 is surface-mounted between the character string "LED1" and the character string "LED2". Further, under the driver 6026, the character string "DR1" is formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink.

A capacitor 6028 (first capacitor 6028a and second capacitor 6028b) is surface-mounted between the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the second face light emitting unit 6023b. Further, corresponding to the first capacitor 6028a and the second capacitor 6028b, the character strings "C1" and "C2" are formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink.

Resistors 6027 (first resistance 6027a to sixth resistance 6027f) are surface-mounted on the lower left side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. Further, corresponding to the first resistance 6027a to the sixth resistance 6027f, the character strings "R1" to "R6" are formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink.

A control element 6025 made of a microcomputer is surface-mounted on the right side of the region where the resistor 6027 is mounted. Further, corresponding to the control element 6025, the character string "IC1" is formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink. The control element 6025 drives the driver 6026 based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and controls the lighting of the LED constituting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the LED constituting the second face light emitting unit 6023b.

The connector 6029 is surface-mounted on the lower right side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. Further, corresponding to the connector 6029, the character string "CN1" is formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink. The control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the control element 6025 via the connector 6029, and the power from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the face board 6020. The electric power supplied to the face substrate 6020 via the connector 6029 is supplied to the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the LEDs constituting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b, and the like.

The control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 each have a black main body and a metal terminal. Further, the metal terminals included in the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 are surface-mounted on the face substrate 6020 by soldering. In FIG. 489 (B), the main body of these electronic components is shown in black, and the metal terminals and solder included in these electronic components are shown in white.

FIG. 490 is a perspective view of the face cover portion 6010. The face cover portion 6010 has a box-shaped shape with an open rear portion, and is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The face cover portion 6010 includes a face cover portion front portion 6011 forming the front surface, a face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 forming the upper surface, a face cover portion right surface portion 6013 forming the right surface, and a face cover forming the lower surface. It is composed of a lower surface portion 6014 and a left surface portion 6015 of the face cover portion forming the left surface.

As shown in FIGS. 488 to 490, on the front side of the face cover portion front portion 6011 forming the front surface of the face cover portion 6010, a first face light scattering portion 6011a and a second face light scattering portion 6011a imitating a rabbit's eyes A face light scattering unit 6011b is provided. The first face light scattering unit 6011a is provided at a position where it overlaps the first face light emitting unit 6023a provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in front view. Further, the second face light scattering unit 6011b is provided at a position where it overlaps the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in front view. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 488 (A), the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b are viewed in front of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b, respectively. The outer shape of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b in front view is surrounded by the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b, respectively. It is configured as follows.

The first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b emit light from the first face by forming a fine lens cut or performing a satin finish on the front side of the front surface portion 6011 of the face cover portion. When the light emitted from the portion 6023a or the second face light emitting portion 6023b is incident, it is formed by a rough surface capable of diffusely reflecting the light. The front portion 6011 of the face cover portion is the light incident on the portions other than the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b, such as the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b. There is no structure that diffusely reflects light, and the face substrate 6020 located at the rear is configured to be directly visible from the front. In the face substrate 6020, the rectangular portion forming the region excluding the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 and the rectangular portion forming the face cover portion 6010 have the same vertical and horizontal flow, and are exactly overlapped in the front view. It is provided at the position. The face substrate 6020 is screwed from behind to the screw holes provided in the upper surface portion 6012 of the face cover portion, the right surface portion 6013 of the face cover portion, the lower surface portion 6014 of the face cover portion, and the left surface portion 6015 of the face cover portion. It is attached with.

The rear surface of the face cover portion front portion 6011 and the face light emitting portion 6023 are provided at a predetermined distance (about 1-2 mm). With such a configuration, it becomes easy to dissipate the heat generated in the face light emitting unit 6023, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the face light emitting unit 6023 breaks down due to the heat generated by itself. Become. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted in relation to the light emitting portion and the member such as the cover provided corresponding to the light emitting portion.

As described above, the rabbit accessory 6000 is composed of a face substrate 6020, a face cover portion 6010 that covers the front of the face substrate 6020, and a body portion 6030 provided at the lower end of the face substrate 6020. LEDs functioning as the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b are surface-mounted on the front side of the face substrate 6020, and the face cover portion constituting the front side of the face cover portion 6010 covering the front side, respectively. The first facial light scattering unit 6011a and the second facial light scattering unit 6011b provided on the front surface portion 6011 are configured to irradiate light. Further, on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, electronic components such as a control element 6025, a driver 6026, a resistor 6027, a capacitor 6028, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted.

A flat cable (not shown) is connected to the connector 6029, and a control signal for driving the LEDs constituting the face light emitting unit 6023 mounted on the front surface of the face board 6020 is received from the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the flat cable supplies electric power for driving each electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020. The control element 6025 controls the driver 6026 based on the control signal received from the peripheral control board 1510 to control the light emitting mode of the LEDs constituting the face light emitting unit 6023.

The LED constituting the face light emitting unit 6023 is formed by encapsulating three of an LED chip capable of emitting light in red, an LED chip capable of emitting light in green, and an LED chip capable of emitting light in blue with a colorless and transparent resin. .. Further, the LED constituting the face light emitting unit 6023 is provided with three metal terminals serving as anodes and three metal terminals serving as cathodes of each LED chip. Further, when a current flows from the driver 6026 to the anode of each LED chip, each LED chip can be made to emit light. Specifically, by controlling the current flowing through each LED chip by the driver 6026, it is possible to emit red, green, and blue independently.

Further, a resistor 6027 is provided between the circuit connecting the driver 6026 and the anode of each LED chip as a limiting resistor for adjusting the current flowing through the LED chip. Specifically, the first resistor 6027a to the third resistor 6027c form the driver 2026 and the face light emitting unit 6023b between the circuits connecting the anodes of the LED chips included in the LED constituting the driver 2026 and the face light emitting unit 6023a, respectively. A fourth resistor 6027d to a sixth resistor 6027f are provided between circuits connecting the anodes of the respective LED chips included in the LED. By providing the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f corresponding to the anode of each LED chip in this way, the current flowing through each LED chip is adjusted, and if a short circuit occurs inside the LED, the circuit is overloaded. It prevents the flow of electric current.

Further, the first capacitor 6028a is provided in parallel with the power supply terminal provided in the control element 6025, and the second capacitor 6028b is provided in parallel with the power supply terminal provided in the driver 6026, so that the control element 6025 and the driver 6026 are stable. It has a function to operate.

The rabbit accessory 6000 is controlled so as to be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) between the standby position on the lower front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the movement position near the center on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to do. This drive mechanism is also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the predetermined game content is notified to the player according to the moving mode and the light emitting mode of the rabbit accessory 6000. For example, the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, and the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b mounted on the face substrate 6020 with the rabbit accessory 6000 in the moving position. Is lit in red, and the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b are lit in red, so that the stopping mode of the changing decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit. It may be configured to suggest that expectations are higher than normal. In addition, also in another embodiment, an example is shown in which a part of the accessory or a member constituting the accessory is moved, or the light emitting portion included in the accessory is controlled to a predetermined light emitting mode. May function as an effect, and a configuration may be adopted that suggests that the stopping mode of the changing decorative symbol is expected to be stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit.

As described above, in the light emitting decorative substrate (face substrate 6020) included in such a decorative member (rabbit accessory 6000), there is a possibility that a defect may occur in the light emitting function. For example, in the process of surface mounting on the printed circuit board constituting the face board 6020, the amount of solder on the solder surface was insufficient, and the circuit on the printed circuit board and the electronic components to be mounted were not properly electrically connected. In some cases, or when the electronic component is mounted on the back surface side of the printed circuit board during assembly at the factory, there is a risk that the mounted electronic component may be missing due to contact with other members or tools. In addition, there is a risk that electronic components may break down due to deterioration over time after the gaming machine is installed in a gaming store.

For example, in an LED that functions as a face light emitting unit 6023 capable of full-color light emission by emitting three colors of red, blue, and green in multiple gradations by a driver 6026, one of six metal terminals is electrically operated. When the connection is lost, one of the three colors is intended to emit light in a controlled manner, but in reality, only two colors are emitted and one color is emitted. Will cause a non-light emitting state. Such a state may occur when the LED chip fails and current does not flow, or when the resistor 6027 functioning as a limiting resistor is missing from the face substrate 6020 and the circuit is disconnected. ..
Such a situation may give the player who plays the game the impression that the movable decorative member does not look good. In particular, when a plurality of LEDs are controlled to emit light in the same color, there is a possibility that only the defective LED emits light in different emission colors. In addition, there is a risk of causing a misunderstanding of the player regarding the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 provided on the face board 6020 is bent many times due to the repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative member, so that the strength of the predetermined portion of the flat cable deteriorates. It is also conceivable that the flat cable will be disconnected and the signal transmission and power supply to the rabbit accessory 6000 will not be performed properly. Alternatively, it is conceivable that the connector 6029 may be damaged due to repeated stress applied to a part of the connector 6029 due to the repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this case, an unintended control signal is sent to the rabbit accessory 6000, and an unintended light emitting mode is shown to the player, or the power supply is completely stopped. In that case, the face light emitting unit 6023 provided in the rabbit accessory 6000 moves from the standby position to the moving position or moves from the moving position to the standby position in the off state without taking the lighting mode. There is a risk that the appearance of the rabbit will be poor.

Therefore, in the present invention, when the gaming machine is turned off, the display area of the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is visible in black, and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 located in front is reflected on the surface thereof. It is configured to be reflected. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is configured to mirror-reflect the incident light. Alternatively, a colorless and transparent reflector (reflective sheet) is installed in the vicinity of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to cover the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, the reflector may be configured to mirror-reflect the incident light. With such a configuration, when there is some abnormality in the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 located in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 located in the rear The content of the abnormality can be confirmed by visually recognizing. Alternatively, it can be confirmed whether or not an abnormality has occurred.

FIG. 491 (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 491 (A), the rabbit accessory 6000 is provided in the game machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An example is shown.

In this example, the rabbit accessory 6000 is arranged on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the front surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the face board 6020 provided on the rabbit accessory 6000. It is configured so that it is located at a predetermined distance (specifically, about several cm) from the back surface. In the example shown in FIG. 491 (A), a part of the driver 6026 mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020, the first resistor 6027a, and the entire second resistor 6027b are the display areas of the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows the state reflected in.

Although FIG. 491 (A) shows the rabbit accessory 6000 viewed diagonally from the upper right, it is also possible to visually recognize the mounting mode of other electronic components by looking into the rabbit accessory 6000 from another angle. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is visually recognized as looking into the center in the left-right direction from above, it is possible to visually recognize the entire driver 6026, the entire first capacitor 6028a, and the entire second capacitor 6028b. Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is visually recognized from diagonally upper left, it is also possible to visually recognize the entire connector 6029 or the flat cable connected to the connector 6029. In this example, it is difficult to confirm the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, but this point will be described later.

FIG. 491 (B) is a perspective view showing a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 491 (B), the rabbit accessory 6000 is provided in the gaming machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An example is shown. In this example, it is difficult to see electronic components such as the control element 6025, the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, and the entire driver 6026 and the first capacitor 6028a It is possible to confirm the mounting mode only for a part and a part of the second capacitor 6028b. The method of visually recognizing the electronic components mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 will be described later.

As described above, in the gaming machine in the power-off state, the back surface of the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 as a decorative means is configured to be reflected in the display area of the gaming board side effect display device 1600. , The status of the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face board 6020 can be confirmed even after the gaming machine is installed in the gaming store. Further, since the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a white protective film and can be visually recognized in white, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is visually recognized in black can be visually recognized. It is structured so that it is easy to use.

An example is shown in which the entire surface and the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are covered with a white protective film, but the circuit is configured to cover the circuit on the face substrate 6020 with a light-colored protective film such as cream, not limited to white. You may. This is because the difference between light and dark is clearer when the light-colored protective film is used than when the dark-colored protective film is used with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is black. Therefore, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 becomes easy to see.

In the process of coloring the face board 6020, after creating a circuit structure by copper plating on the printed circuit board, a white protective agent is adopted as a protective agent to protect the wiring structure, and a place where a through hole is provided is provided. Except for this, it is desirable that a white protective film is formed by applying this protective agent to the entire surfaces of both sides of the printed circuit board to make the entire surface of the face substrate 6020 white. When a protective agent other than white is used as the protective agent to protect the wiring structure, white ink is applied on the non-white protective agent so that the surface of the face substrate 6020 becomes white. You may. Alternatively, by combining these aspects, a white protective agent is applied to form a protective film, and then a white ink is applied onto the white protective film to make the surface of the face substrate 6020 whiter. It may be configured as follows. By forming the face substrate 6020 in such an embodiment, the face substrate 6020 can be made visible in white. The same method can be adopted not only when the substrate is white but also when it is desired to be visible in other colors such as black and green. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the substrate has a specific color.
An example is shown in which both sides of the face substrate 6020 are white, but only a part of the region where the color of the face substrate 6020 is white may be used. Only a predetermined area on which the electronic component on the rear surface is mounted may be white. The back of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a thin plate-shaped cover, and the cover is provided with a punch-shaped opening so that the electronic component whose mounting mode is to be confirmed can be visually recognized. Therefore, the rear surface of the face board 6020 and a specific electronic component for which the mounting mode is to be confirmed may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. When a colorless and transparent cover is used, light is diffusely reflected on the surface of the cover, and the visibility of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is lowered. Further, when a colored opaque cover is adopted as such a cover, the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are hidden by the cover, and it becomes extremely difficult to confirm the mounting mode. .. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a punch-shaped opening so that at least a part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized. With such a configuration, while protecting the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 with a cover, it is possible to confirm the mounting mode from the opening provided in the cover for the electronic components whose mounting mode is to be confirmed. can. Further, by providing such an opening, it is possible to release the heat generated from the electronic component mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 to the outside, and the mounted electronic component may be damaged or deteriorated by the heat. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. It is preferable that the electronic components do not protrude from the opening in a state where the electronic components protrude rearward from the surface forming the back surface of the cover. Further, the cover color may be black opaque or dark opaque. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize the white face substrate 6020 exposed from the cover.

It is desirable that the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 is different from the color of the protective film covering the face substrate 6020. Specifically, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be a bright color such as white or cream, and the color of the electronic components mounted on the face substrate 6020 may be a dark color such as black or dark blue. With such a configuration, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be easily visually recognized with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is black. Further, since the face board 6020 is light-colored and the mounted electronic components are dark-colored, the face board 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted on the face board 6020 and the face board 6020. It becomes visible by distinguishing it from the electronic parts.

The LED capable of multicolor light emission is formed of a white member in order to increase the reflectance. In this case, if the color of the face substrate 6020 is white or bright, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mounting mode of the LED mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. As described above, when the mounted electronic component is white, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be black or dark. In this case, the face board 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 is difficult to see, but the LED mounted on the face board 6020 is easy to see. Alternatively, the mounted electronic component or the electronic component before mounting may be coated with black or dark ink so that the electronic component is mounted on the white or light-colored face substrate.

In the present specification, white refers to a color that becomes visible when an object is uniformly diffusely reflected (about 100 to 80%) with respect to visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light. Further, the bright color refers to a color that can be visually recognized as, for example, cream or light gray by absorbing a specific wavelength region to some extent and diffusely reflecting the remaining wavelength region. On the other hand, black refers to a color that becomes visible when an object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light and diffusely reflects a part (about 20 to several%). There is. In addition, the dark color is black because most of the visible light of all wavelengths is uniformly absorbed and only a part (about 20 to several%) is diffusely reflected, but the light absorption rate is different in a specific wavelength region. It refers to a color that is close to it, for example, a color that becomes visible as dark blue.

The rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIGS. 491 (A) and 491 (B) may be configured so that it can be manually moved from the standby position to the upward moving position. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not immovable by the lock mechanism at the time of power failure, and the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is not provided with a so-called light guide plate. It is configured as follows.

As a configuration for manually moving the rabbit accessory 6000, first, the immovable state will be described. Generally, when the movable decorative body is configured to be freely movable between the moving position and the standby position, when a large acceleration is applied to the movable decorative body when the gaming machine is transported or installed in a game store. In addition, the movable decorative body may be damaged. Therefore, a mechanism is provided to lock the movable decoration when the movable decoration is in the standby position when the power is on, and when the power is turned off while the movable decoration is locked, the movable decoration is provided by the lock mechanism. A method of immobilizing the body is considered. However, when such a lock mechanism is provided, it becomes difficult to move the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative body by hand. Therefore, it is possible to move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand by configuring it so as not to provide such a lock mechanism.

Next, a light guide plate will be described as a configuration for manually moving the rabbit accessory 6000. The light guide plate is a plate-shaped decorative member that allows a player to visually recognize a mode in which a predetermined pattern is shining by diffusely reflecting light incident from a side surface in a predetermined pattern provided on the surface. Further, such a light emitting pattern is configured to be visible to the player as a predetermined effect. However, when such a light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100, it becomes difficult or impossible to move the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative body by hand. Therefore, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved by hand by configuring the opening 1100a of the game panel so as not to provide such a light guide plate.

With such a configuration, the clerk can directly move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand through the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 at the time of power failure, and the face substrate. It is possible to reflect different areas on the rear surface of the 6020 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 491 (A), after moving the rabbit accessory 6000 upward by hand, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visually recognized so as to look into the rabbit accessory 6000 from below. This makes it easy to confirm the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which were difficult to see until then. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 491 (B), by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 upward by hand, the control element 6025 mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, which was previously invisible, Electronic components such as the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f can be visually recognized.

An example is shown in which the light guide plate is not provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100, but when the light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a, the entire game panel opening 1100a is covered with the light guide plate. Instead, it may be configured to cover only a part of the game panel opening 1100a. Specifically, when the standby position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is the lower front of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is the center front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the guidance is provided. It is preferable to arrange the light plate so that only the upper half of the game panel opening 1100a is covered. In this way, even if the light guide plate is provided, since a part of the game panel opening 1100a is not covered with the light guide plate, the function of exerting the effect of the light guide plate and the rabbit character By manually moving the 6000, it is possible to achieve both functions such that the area in which the face substrate 6020 is reflected can be changed with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600.

An example was shown in which the reflected area of the face substrate 6020 was changed by directly moving the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand, but the area of the game panel opening 1100a that was not covered by the light guide plate was guided so that the hand could not be inserted. The light plate may be enlarged, in which case the rabbit accessory may be moved by an article smaller than the hand. For example, a rod-shaped member having a diameter of about 5 mm or a thin plate-shaped member having a width of about 1 cm and a thickness of about 1 mm can be inserted into a region of the game panel opening 1100a not covered by the light guide plate to move the rabbit accessory 6000. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate may be set to a size that allows such a rod-shaped member or a plate-shaped member to be inserted. It suffices if an opening of about 0.0 cm and a length of about 1.0 cm is provided. With such a configuration, the area covered by the light guide plate of the game panel opening 1100a can be widened, and the area where the effect using the light guide plate can be produced can be expanded.

If the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not provided with a lock mechanism that makes it immovable at the time of power failure, and if the game panel opening 1100a is not provided with a light guide plate, the clerk is hand or elongated. An example is shown in which the rabbit accessory 6000 can be directly moved by the member, but when the accessory in the standby position is made immovable by the lock mechanism at the time of power failure, or the game panel opening 1100a is completely covered. When the light guide plate is provided as described above, the rabbit accessory 6000 cannot be manually moved, and the area in which the face substrate 6020 is reflected is changed with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Can't. Such a problem is a big problem in the case where the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 are not reflected at all or hardly reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the rabbit accessory is in the standby position. It becomes.

Therefore, in such an example, by turning off the power switch provided on the gaming machine while the initial check of the movable decorative body executed when the power is turned on is being performed, the control unit and the driving unit of the gaming machine are turned off. When a state is forcibly created in which power is not supplied to the pachinko machine, the movable ornament in a position other than the standby position does not return to the standby position due to its own weight, and the power switch is turned off. It is preferable to configure the machine to stop at a position slightly moved by its own weight from the position where. A specific example is shown below.

At the time of the initial check, the lock mechanism of the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is first released to move from the immovable state to the movable state, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 starts moving to the upper moving position. do. After the rabbit character 6000 completes the movement to the upper movement position, it stays in the movement position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds), then starts moving to the lower standby position, and then the rabbit character 6000 waits. It stops at the position, and the lock mechanism changes the movable state to the immovable state, and the initial check is completed. Even when the game is started and the rabbit character 6000 is moved as a production according to the start prize, the rabbit character 6000 in the standby position first changes from the immovable state to the movable state, and then the rabbit character 6000. Is controlled to move between the standby position and the moving position in a predetermined movement mode, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 is controlled to be moved to the standby position, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the unlocked state to the locked state. And.

In a gaming machine having such a configuration, by intentionally generating a power failure state, the clerk does not move the rabbit accessory 6000 directly by hand, but is mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000. Electronic components can be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, since the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to stay in the moving position for a predetermined time at the time of the initial check, the rabbit accessory 6000 is forcibly turned off at the timing when the rabbit accessory 6000 stays in the moving position. Can be stopped at the moving position as it is, and the timing of turning off the power switch provided in the gaming machine to turn off the power is not severe. Further, since the rabbit accessory 6000 can be stopped at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face substrate 6020.

In the initial check, not only stays at the moving position for a predetermined time, but also when moving from the waiting position to the moving position, a predetermined position between the waiting position and the moving position (for example, between the waiting position and the moving position) is used. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to move to the moving position after staying for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) at the position), and when it is in the predetermined position, the power switch provided on the gaming machine is turned off to cause a power failure. If so, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to stay in a predetermined position. With such a configuration, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be easily stopped at different positions, and the electronic components reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from different angles. It becomes. Further, since the rabbit accessory 6000 can be stopped at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face substrate 6020.

At the time of the initial check, an example in which the rabbit accessory 6000 stays at the moving position or a predetermined position for a predetermined time is shown. In these examples, the face substrate 6020 is in a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 stays at the moving position or the predetermined position. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided in the above may be configured to light in a predetermined mode. Alternatively, at the start of the initial check, the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, and the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are lit in a predetermined manner before starting the movement to the moving position. You may. For example, as a light emitting mode, it is preferable to light the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b in the same color. In this case, white is desirable as the emission color. With such a configuration, the clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emitting mode of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b, and if there is an abnormality in the light emitting mode, the rabbit. It is possible to visually confirm what kind of abnormality has occurred by visually observing the back surface side of the face substrate 6020 with the gaming machine in which the accessory 6000 is in the predetermined position or the moving position in the power-off state. In addition, when a player complains about the light emitting mode, the cause of the abnormality can be quickly identified.

Although an example of lighting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b in the same color has been shown, it is preferable to provide three or more face light emitting units 6023 and configure each to emit light in the same color. Further, the emission color at this time may be configured to include at least white. In such a configuration, if any of the resistors provided corresponding to the plurality of face light emitting units 6023 is missing, one face light emitting unit 6023 is different from the other plurality of face light emitting units 6023. When a resistor provided in series with an LED chip capable of emitting green light is missing, the LED can emit only blue and red, and is a mixture of those colors. Since the aspect of emitting light in reddish purple can be visually recognized, it is possible to easily identify the defective face light emitting portion by the emission color.

When the power failure state is forcibly generated, the rabbit accessory 6000 is located in a state where it is not in the standby position. When the power is turned on in such a state, it is preferable to control the rabbit accessory 6000 to be once moved to the standby position and then to start the initial operation check as described above from the beginning. With such a configuration, it is possible to stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at an appropriate position where the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be easily visually recognized.

Various embodiments can be considered for the mode of the rabbit accessory 6000 itself, the mode of movement of the rabbit accessory 6000, and the positional relationship between the rabbit accessory 6000 and the game board side effect display device 1600. A plurality of examples are shown below.

FIG. 492 shows an embodiment of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the area of the face substrate 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 is changed by moving the rabbit accessory from the lower standby position to the upper moving position. In this example, the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020 constitute the rabbit accessory 6000, and although the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved between the standby position and the moving position, the body portion 6030 is a game panel. It is configured not to move relative to 1100. FIG. 492 (A) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In this state, only the upper half of the back surface of the face board 6020 is reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600. .. Further, the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f are not reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 because the body portion 6030 is located immediately behind these electronic components. FIG. 492 (B) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position. In this state, almost the entire back surface of the face substrate is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is.

When the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to slowly rotate about the front-rear direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be manually rotated about the front-rear direction. With such a configuration, it is extremely easy to visually recognize the control element 6025, the fifth resistor 6027e, and the sixth resistor 6027f, which are originally located below the face substrate 6020 and whose mounting mode is difficult to confirm. Become.

FIG. 493 shows an example of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are provided as separate bodies with respect to the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000. The first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 have a vertically elongated rectangular shape. During the operation of the rabbit accessory 6000, the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020 do not move, and the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 move to the upper moving positions to perform a predetermined effect. Will be done.

FIG. 493 (A) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the standby position. Only a part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 in a state of being hidden by the second ear portion 6022 is reflected. FIG. 493 (B) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the moving positions. In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 is provided with substantially the back surface of the face substrate 6020. The whole area is reflected. By moving the member between the member whose mounting mode of the electronic component is desired and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this way, the visual mode of the member whose mounting mode of the electronic component is to be confirmed is changed. Is possible. Although aspects of the rabbit accessory 6000 have been described in other examples, these aspects may be applied to the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 in the example shown in FIG. 493.

FIG. 494 shows an embodiment of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the body portion 6030 of the rabbit accessory 6000 is vertically elongated. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the body portion 6030 makes the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the rabbit accessory 6000 invisible, and when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position, the body portion The rabbit accessory 6000 will be located above 6030. In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so that almost the entire back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected.

Although the area of the face cover portion 6010 of the rabbit accessory 6000 does not change in the embodiments described so far, the member corresponding to the face cover portion 6010 is composed of an opaque member in the state of being moved to the moving position. In addition, in the movable decorative member in which the area seen in the front view is increased by deploying in the horizontal direction with respect to the game panel 1100, the area seen in the front view is increased, so that the effect display device 1600 on the game board side is used. A situation may occur in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize the reflection of the substrate on the display area. Therefore, when such a movable decorative member is adopted, the area of the front view may be manually reduced in a state where the power is forcibly cut off at the time of the initial check. Alternatively, the state before the area when viewed from the front is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) so that the area when viewed from the front does not increase when the area is moved to the moving position during the initial check. Later, it may be configured so that the area when viewed from the front is large. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to confirm the reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is cut off.

An example is shown in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. On the other hand, it is not preferable for the player to visually recognize the state in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected. For example, when an effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is executed as an effect indicating that the jackpot expectation is high, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 by the player. The parts will be visible, and there is a risk that the player will be in a state of disappointment even though he is trying to excite by performing the production. In addition, when the decorative symbol stops in a manner showing a loss after forming a reach state, that is, when a so-called reach loss occurs, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is used for the purpose of dividing the game. Even when the effect of darkening almost the entire surface is executed, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 are visually recognized by the player, and the player is in a disappointing state of being out of reach. In addition, there is a risk that the player will be in a state of disappointment.

Therefore, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is located in the standby position at the timing of executing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, such reflection is visually recognized. It is advisable to adopt a structure that suppresses. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 493, since the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are located between the face substrate 6020 and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6021 are located. It is hidden by the ear portion 6022, and the reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is suppressed. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 494, since the body portion 6030 is located at a position intermediate between the face substrate 6020 and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is hidden by these members and is hidden by the game board side effect display device 1600. The reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area is suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 492, when performing an effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the driver 6026, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, and the like are used by the player. There is a risk of being visually recognized. Therefore, by performing some kind of display only in the lower front part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is excited in accordance with the effect of darkening the display area. It becomes. In front of the lower part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, it is preferable to display a decorative pattern, display the number of holds, or display the hold image indicating the expected degree of jackpot related to the change. .. In this case, it may be configured so that the color of the image is usually darker or the size of the image is smaller than when the decorative pattern, the number of holdings, or the holding image is displayed. Moreover, instead of displaying these statically, they may be displayed dynamically like an animation. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the reflection generated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 inconspicuous during the game.

After the darkening effect is started, the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 492 (A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 492 (B) while the darkening effect is being performed. The first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6022 may be moved from the standby position shown in 493 (A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 493 (B), or from the standby position shown in FIG. 494 (A) to FIG. 494 (B). It may be configured to move the rabbit accessory 6000 to the moving position shown in 1. However, in this case, the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 are easily visible.

Therefore, when performing an effect of moving the rabbit accessory 6000 from the lower standby position to the upper moving position, the area overlaps with the rabbit accessory 6000 in the front view in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The reflection suppression image that suppresses the reflection may be displayed. In this way, when the rabbit accessory 6600 moves, it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize the reflection of the face board 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. By displaying the image in the display area of the device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is excited.

The size of the reflection suppression image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same size as the rabbit character 6000 in front view, or one size larger (about 1-2 cm) than the rabbit character. It is assumed that the outer shape of the reflection suppression image and the outer shape of the rabbit accessory 6000 completely overlap each other in the front view, or the reflection suppression image is displayed in a manner of protruding 1-2 mm around the rabbit accessory in the front view. It is good to do it. Further, the reflection suppression image may be composed of white or bright color. By making it white or bright, it is possible to make the reflection inconspicuous. In addition to white or light color, black or dark color may be used to form the reflection suppression image. Further, the reflection suppression image may be an image that is dynamically displayed.

The timing for starting the display of the reflection suppression image may be before the start of the darkening effect, at the start of the darkening effect, or when the rabbit accessory 6000 starts moving during the darkening effect. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, the reflection suppression image may be configured to be moved while maintaining the positional relationship with the rabbit accessory 6000. The reflection suppression image may be displayed until the darkening effect is completed. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is stopped at the standby position during the darkening effect, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image. After that, even when the rabbit accessory 6000 returns from the standby position to the moving position, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image as long as the darkening effect is performed.

It should be noted that a plurality of modes of such a reflection suppression image are prepared, different jackpot expectations are assigned to the modes of the reflection suppression image, and one of the reflection suppression images is displayed when the rabbit character moves. Then, it may be configured to function as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, it is preferable to prepare blue and red as the colors of the reflection suppression image, and to indicate that the red reflection suppression image has a higher expectation of a big hit. In this case, since the player pays attention to the display mode of the reflection suppression image itself, even if some electronic components are reflected, it is possible to make such reflection less noticeable. ..

Although the point of displaying the reflection suppression image when moving the rabbit accessory 6000 has been described, the above-described embodiment may be applied even when the first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6022 are moved. good.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 493, it is desirable that the colors of the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are black or dark. Further, it is desirable not to mount electronic components on the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022. When the electronic components are mounted on the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, it is desirable that the electronic components are dark colored. With such a configuration, the rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, which are members for suppressing the reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are the game board. Even if the reflection is reflected in the display area of the side effect display device 1600, the reflection can be made difficult for the player to notice.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 494, it is desirable that the color of the back surface of the body portion 6030 is dark. Further, it is desirable that no electronic component is mounted on the back surface of the body portion 6030. When mounting electronic components on the back surface of the body portion 6030, it is desirable to use a dark color. With such a configuration, even if the rear surface of the body portion 6030, which is a member that suppresses the reflection of the face substrate 6020, is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the player due to the reflection. The effect on can be reduced.

The moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 at the time of the initial check may be configured to be in front of the central portion of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In this case, the reflection on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be confirmed from all directions of up, down, left, and right, and the entire area on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, when executing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved to the front of the central portion of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It may be configured to execute this effect after moving to the position. In this case, the rabbit character 6000 is located exactly in the middle of the direction of the player's line of sight and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the player moves his face to forcibly reflect the rabbit character 6000. Unless the aspect is visually recognized, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the state reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visually recognized by the player. When ending the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rabbit accessory 6000 stands by after brightening the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. By moving to the position, the influence of the reflection on the player can be reduced.

As an example of the member reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000 is shown, but the rear surface of the member other than the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000 is played. By reflecting the image on the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, the state of the rear surface of the member may be confirmed. For example, the rear surface of a relay board (not shown) provided for transmitting a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the face board 6020 and supplying power from the power supply board 931 is an effect display on the game board side. It may be configured so as to be reflected in the display area of the device 1600. Further, on the back surface of the relay board, a connector or a control element to which a flat cable used for transmitting a control signal or supplying electric power is connected is surface-mounted. It is preferable to configure these so as to be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is any abnormality in the electronic components mounted on the relay board.

An example is shown in which the relationship between the standby position and the moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the vertical direction. However, the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be movable in the front-rear direction, and is located between the rear standby position and the front moving position. It may be configured to move. Alternatively, the rabbit accessory 6000 provided below the front surface of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 rotates about a rotation axis provided below the rabbit accessory 6000, whereby the rabbit accessory 6000 is rotated. It may be configured to be movable so that the upper part of the 6000 is moved so as to be tilted forward. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be movable between the standby position where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in a positional relationship parallel to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the moving position where the upper part of the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved so as to tilt forward. You may. Even in such a configuration, by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 from the standby position to the moving position, the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be increased. Is possible.

An example is shown in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and the rabbit accessory 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, but the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be fixedly provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable. For example, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable rearward, or the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be rotatable around a predetermined movable axis. Alternatively, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be horizontally movable in the up, down, left, and right directions, and the rabbit accessory 6000 fixedly provided in the moved direction may be positioned. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 even for the fixedly provided rabbit accessory. Become.

An example in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and the rabbit accessory 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the game board side with respect to the fixedly provided rabbit accessory 6000. Although the example in which the effect display device 1600 is movable is shown, both the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to be movable. For example, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to move backward, and the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to move forward. Alternatively, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000, which are not overlapped in the front view, may be moved so as to approach each other in the horizontal direction so as to be in the overlapped state in the front view. good. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Although an example in which one game board side effect display device 1600 is provided is shown, a plurality of effect display devices may be provided. Then, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be reflected in at least one of the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices. Further, the surface formed by the display area of one effect display device and the surface formed by the display area of the other effect display device are configured to face different directions so that the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved to the front side thereof. It may be configured. With such a configuration, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be reflected from different angles in the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices, and it becomes easy to find the cause of the abnormality.

Further, by configuring a plurality of movable effect display devices to be provided and moving the effect display devices, the display area of the effect display device having at least one rear surface of the face substrate 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 or a plurality of effects. It may be configured so as to be reflected in the display area of the display device.

An example is shown in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is forcibly turned off, but the player has not played the game for a predetermined time, that is, during the so-called demonstration. By darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 495 shows a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 487. In this embodiment, the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIGS. 487 to 494 is provided is not in the lower center on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, but on the lower left front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become. Further, a stump accessory 6100 having a shape imitating a stump is provided in front of the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600. As a whole of the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board 5 and the game panel 1100 on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 487, and a plurality of spaces are formed in this space. The accessories are arranged in layers. Specifically, from the front side, at a position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back grass role 6800, the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second A cloud accessory 6750 is provided. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. There is. Further, a first grass accessory 6470 and a second grass accessory 6475 are provided behind them, and a third grass accessory 6480 is provided behind them so as to overlap the third grass accessory 6480 behind them. A fourth grass accessory 6485 is provided, a rabbit accessory 6000 and a stump accessory 6100 are provided behind them, a mountain accessory 6500 is provided behind them, and a game board side effect display is provided behind the mountain accessory 6500. A device 1600 is provided. By arranging a plurality of accessories in layers in this way, a sense of depth can be obtained.

A stump portion 6200 shaped like a stump and a first grass movable portion 6360 and a second grass movable portion 6370 shaped like grass are provided in front of the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the stump portion 6200. The stump accessory 6100 is configured as a unit by the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370.

FIG. 496 shows the stump accessory 6100. The first grass movable portion 6360 is provided on the front left side of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 is provided on the front right side of the stump portion 6200. The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are each formed of a plate-shaped, green transparent synthetic resin. In the first grass movable portion 6360, the surface formed of the green transparent synthetic resin is exposed at the outer edge portion excluding the lower end portion thereof, and the member located at the rear is seen through and can be visually recognized. On the other hand, a first grass decoration portion 6360a coated with green ink is provided on a portion other than the lower end portion and the outer edge, and the rear portion of the first grass decoration portion 6360a is invisible. .. The second grass movable portion 6370 also has the same configuration as the first grass movable portion 6360, and includes a second grass decorative portion 6370a.

The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are shown in a state in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are located in front of the stump portion 6200 as shown in FIG. 496 (A). As shown in 496 (B), the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left from the state where it is located in front of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves to the right from the state where it is located in front of the stump portion 6200. It is possible to take the state of being moved to. The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 can be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

In the state shown in FIG. 496 (A), the end face forming the right end of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the end face forming the left end of the second grass movable portion 6370 are in contact with each other, and the stump portion 6200 located rearward. The lower half is difficult to see. At this time, a part of the stump opening 6210a is provided with a region where the first grass decoration portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360 is not provided and a second grass decoration portion 6370a of the second grass movable portion 6370. It is configured to be visible through the non-existent area. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening 6210a, and the rear wall substrate 6352 provided in front of the rear wall substrate 6352. A part of the wall light emitting unit 6354 is configured to be visible.

In this state, as the first light emitting effect, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set as the light emitting mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is not provided with the first grass decorative portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360. The area and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided are irradiated, and the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and the second grass movable part are movable. The second grass decoration portion 6370a of the portion 6370 may be configured so as to pass through an area not provided and to take a state of being irradiated to the player.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 496 (B), the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left from the state where it is located in front of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 is positioned in front of the stump portion 6200. Since it is in a state of moving to the right from the state of being in a stump portion, the visibility of the lower half of the stump portion 6200 is enhanced. In this state, the stump box portion 6300 is visible from the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump portion 6200. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening 6210a, and the rear wall provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. The light emitting unit 6354 has changed from a state in which it is difficult to see to a state in which it is easy to see, as compared with a state before the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 move.

In this state, as the second light emitting effect, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set as the light emitting mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 passes through the stump opening 6210a and is directed toward the front where the player is located. It may be configured so that it can take a state of being directly irradiated. In the second light emitting effect, the first grass movable portion 6360 passes through the region where the first grass decoration portion 6360a is not provided and the second grass movable portion 6370 passes through the region where the second grass decoration portion 6370a is not provided. Compared with the first light emission effect in which the player is irradiated with light, it is possible to give the player a visually stronger stimulus.

It should be noted that the first gaming state and the second gaming state (for example, the probabilistic gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state) that are more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state). ) Is possible, in the case of the first gaming state, the period during which the first light emitting effect is executed is configured to be longer than the period during which the second light emitting effect is executed, and the period during which the first light emitting effect is executed is configured to be longer than that during the second gaming state. In this case, it is preferable to configure the period in which the second light emitting effect is executed longer than the period in which the first light emitting effect is executed. Alternatively, the first light emitting effect is executed for a relatively long period in the first game state as compared with the second game state, and the second game state is relatively longer than the first game state. The second light emitting effect may be executed during the period. Further, in the first gaming state, only the first light emitting effect is performed, and in the second gaming state, both the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect, or only the second light emitting effect is performed. good. The second light emitting effect, which is visually more stimulating than the first light emitting effect, functions as an effect that gives the player a sense of interest (a production that gives a special feeling), and is therefore used only in an advantageous gaming state. Or, when the game is in an advantageous state, the effect period is used for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In this way, in the second gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, the player will experience a visually strong stimulus for a longer period of time than in the first gaming state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. , It is possible to further increase the excitement of the player who is in an excited state due to the occurrence of an advantageous state.

FIG. 497 (A) shows the stump portion 6200. The stump portion 6200 is composed of a stump plate portion 6210 which is a colored opaque plate-shaped member provided on the front side and a box-shaped stump box portion 6300 provided on the back side. The stump plate portion 6210 is a plate-shaped member having an outer shape imitating a tree stump, and a stump opening 6210a is provided in the center thereof.

FIG. 497 (B) shows the positional relationship between the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump box portion 6300 in a front view. In the figure, the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump opening 6210a are shown by dotted lines. The front side of the stump box portion 6300 is arranged so as to correspond to the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate portion 6210, and imitates a state in which a hole is formed on the side surface of the stump.

FIG. 498 (A) shows the stump box portion 6300. The stump box portion 6300 includes a box upper wall portion 6310 that constitutes the upper wall, a box right wall portion 6320 that constitutes the right wall, a box lower wall portion 6330 that constitutes the lower wall, and a box that constitutes the left wall. It is composed of a left wall portion 6340 and a box rear wall portion 6350 forming a rear wall. The upper wall of the box 6310 and the lower wall of the box 6330 are trapezoidal in plan view, the back side and the front side are parallel, and the length of the front side is longer than that of the back side. It is composed long. The box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are provided so that the front side is inclined outward. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, a sense of depth can be obtained.

FIG. 498 (B) is a diagram showing a state in which the stump box portion 6300 is disassembled. The box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side and a rear wall substrate 6352 located on the rear side. In this figure, a dotted line with respect to the rear wall substrate 6352 schematically shows a location where the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 included in the rear wall cover 6356 is located.

FIG. 498 (C) is a front view of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover 6356 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. A rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 having a shape imitating a root vegetable is formed on the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 is composed of a first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a shaped to imitate the roots of root vegetables and a second rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358b shaped to imitate the leaves of root vegetables.

FIG. 498 (D) is a front view of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall substrate 6352 is a horizontally long rectangular printed circuit board. The front and rear surfaces of the rear wall substrate 6352 are white. A rear wall light emitting unit 6354 formed by surface-mounting a plurality of LEDs is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall substrate 6352 has the same size as the rear wall cover 6356 when viewed from the front. The light emitted from the LEDs constituting the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is emitted toward the front perpendicular to the surface forming the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is provided at a position where it overlaps the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 in front view. Specifically, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a corresponds to the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of root vegetables, and the second rear wall cover light scattering having a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf. A second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is provided corresponding to the portion 6358b. As shown in FIG. 496 (A), in a state where the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are located in front of the stump portion 6200, each LED constituting the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is displayed. 1 It is configured to be provided at a position where it does not overlap with the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the grass movable part 6360 is not provided or the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided. It is good to do it. In this case, even if the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is in the light emitting mode as an effect, the player is not directly irradiated with the light, so that a visually weak stimulus is given to the player.

The rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 are not completely in contact with each other, but are provided at a predetermined interval (about 1-2 mm). At this time, it is desirable to set the distance between the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the rear wall substrate 6352 so that the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b do not come into contact with the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to dissipate the heat generated in the rear wall light emitting unit 6354, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 fails due to the heat generated by itself. It will be possible.

The stump accessory 6100 is used for an effect of notifying the degree of expectation of a big hit in a gaming machine. Specifically, from the state where the stump opening 6210a is difficult to see, the first grass movable part 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable part 6370 moves to the right, so that the stump opening 6210a becomes easy to see. Whether or not, then, when the stump opening 6210a becomes visible, the light emission of the box rear wall 6350 located on the back side of the stump box 6300, which becomes visible through the stump opening 6210a. What is the mode (for example, whether the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 appears to shine red or white, or the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located behind when the light is turned off. It is configured to suggest that the stopping mode of the changing decorative symbol is expected to be stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit, depending on whether it looks white. For example, in each of the light emitting modes of the rear wall substrate 6352, the expected degree of stop display may be set so that the stop mode of the changing decorative symbol indicates a big hit. With such a configuration, the player can be greatly interested in the light emitting mode of the rear wall substrate 6352.

An example was shown in which the light emitting mode of the rear wall substrate 6352 notifies the expectation level of the stop display in a mode in which the stopping mode of the changing decorative symbol indicates a big hit, but the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting Such notification may be performed by setting the light emitting mode different from that of the unit 6354b.

For example, by not emitting light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and causing the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b to emit light lightly in green, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of root vegetables is white. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is shaped like a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be seen by the player. Further, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a is made to emit light weakly in white, and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is made to emit light weakly in green, so that the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of root vegetables is formed. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is white and has a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player. Further, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a is made to emit light lightly in red, and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is made to emit light weakly in green, so that the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of root vegetables is formed. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is red and has a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player.

The reason why the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a emits light weakly is that the light emitted from the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a does not strongly decorate the portion other than the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a. Because. Further, the reason why the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is weakly emitted is that the light emitted from the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b does not strongly decorate the portion other than the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b. Because. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize an effect as if substantially only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is in the light emitting mode.

By adopting such a light emitting mode, it is possible to realize an expression imitating a root vegetable radish in the first light emitting example and the second light emitting example, and a root vegetable carrot in the third light emitting example. Further, in the first light emitting example, the color of the rear wall substrate located behind the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a and the color of the first rear wall substrate, even though the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a is not emitted. The shape of the wall cover light scattering portion 6358a makes it possible to express a predetermined motif (in this example, the root portion of a radish). Further, in the relationship between the second light emitting example and the third light emitting example, a plurality of motifs (radish and carrot in this example) are expressed by making the light emitting colors of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a different. It is possible to do.

An example is shown in which by weakly emitting light from the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b, it is possible to realize an effect as if only the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 is in the light emitting mode. However, in such an effect, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are made to emit strong light, so that the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall are all over the inner surface of the stump box portion 6300. It may be configured so that the light from the light emitting unit 6354b reaches strongly. In this case, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b may be configured to emit light in the same color (for example, white).

Even if the light from the rear wall substrate 6352 is reflected by the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 so as to be visible to the player. good. For example, in the transparent synthetic resin constituting the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, a light scattering unit capable of scattering each inner surface constituting the stump box portion 6300. It may be configured as. Alternatively, in the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, plating for forming a metal thin film such as aluminum on at least each inner surface constituting the stump box portion 6300 may be used. The reflective portion may be formed by performing the treatment. With such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently reflect the light emitted from the rear wall substrate 6352 and radiated to the entire inner surface of the stump box portion 6300 toward the player. Further, in this case, the white rear wall substrate 6352 itself also has a function of diffusely reflecting light forward.

The rear wall substrate 6352 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 is visible in white through the colorless and transparent rear wall cover 6356. Therefore, when the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move to the moving positions and the box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized from the stump opening 6210a, the rear wall light emitting portion Even when the 6354 is turned off, the player can visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as being decorated with the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself. Further, the rear wall cover 6356 is provided with a rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 that imitates the shape of root vegetables, and even when the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is not emitted, the shape of the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 allows the rear wall cover to emit light. The rear wall portion 6350 of the box can be visually recognized by the player as being decorated.

Although the example in which the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 has a shape imitating the shape of a root vegetable is shown, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to be a light scattering portion. Alternatively, in the rear wall cover 6356, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is made into a smooth shape without providing a portion for scattering the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354. May be configured to pass as it is. Even with such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as a decorated state by the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself as in the above example.

An example is shown in which the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 includes a rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and a rear wall cover 6356, but instead of the box rear wall portion 6350, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, Either the box lower wall portion 6330 or the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to have a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 or the rear wall cover 6356. Alternatively, with respect to at least one of the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 constituting the stump box portion 6300. The configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be provided. For example, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330 constituting the stump box portion 6300 may be provided. , The box left wall portion 6340 and the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be provided with a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356. Further, in these examples, when the predetermined wall portion is provided with the configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, the other wall portion is not provided with the configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354. It may be configured to provide only the configuration corresponding to the rear wall cover 6356.

The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 constituting the stump box portion 6300 are formed of transparent or translucent synthetic resin, and the stump plate portion 6210 is transparent or Formed from a translucent synthetic resin, when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are in the standby position, the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is put into a light emitting state, so that the rear wall light emitting part 6354 The rear surface of the stump plate portion 6210 may be illuminated by the emitted light. With such a configuration, the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 passes through the stump plate portion 6210, and the player can visually recognize the state in which the stump plate portion 6210 is decorated with the light. Even if the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the stump plate portion 6210 constituting the stump box portion 6300 are formed of colored transparent or colored translucent synthetic resin. good. For example, these may be formed of a brown synthetic resin. Further, the rear surface of the stump plate portion 6210 may be printed with a wooden pattern shape with brown ink so as to form an opaque or translucent region in a part of the stump plate portion.

Although an example in which the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 is white is shown, other colors may be adopted. For example, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be brown as in the stump plate portion 6210. In such an embodiment, by turning off the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a, it is possible to express the root vegetables to which soil is attached in the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358.

When the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves to the right, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate portion 6210 is exposed, and the box rear wall portion located rearward. An example in which the 6350 is visible is shown, but the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are centered on the left and right directions of the lower ends of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370. It is configured to be driveable so that the upper part falls forward, and when the upper part of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 falls forward, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 is exposed. , The box rear wall portion 6350 located at the rear may be configured to be visible.

An example is shown in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are provided in front of the stump portion 6200, but only one of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 is provided in front of the stump portion 6200. The stump opening 6210a may be exposed by moving to the right or left moving position. Alternatively, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are configured as an integral member, and the member moves to the right or left moving position so that the stump opening 6210a is exposed. It may be configured.

The box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356, but the rear wall cover 6356 may be rotatably configured. Specifically, the upper side of the rear wall cover 6356 is used as a rotation axis, and a drive source (not shown) is configured to rotate the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 so as to be in contact with the inner surface of the box upper wall portion 6310. The left side of the wall cover 6356 may be used as a rotation axis, and a drive source (not shown) may be used to rotate the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 so as to be in contact with the inner surface of the left wall portion 6340 of the box. With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 is located on the front side of the rear wall substrate 6352, and the rear wall substrate 6352 can be visually recognized by the player via the rear wall cover 6356. The box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by the player in any of the embodiments in which the rear wall cover 6356 is not located on the front side of the 6352 and the rear wall substrate 6352 is directly visible. Further, since the stump accessory 6100 is located at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the player's point of view, the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated around the upper side and the left side to rotate the rear wall cover 6356 after the movement. The cover 6356 becomes inconspicuous. It should be noted that the right side or the variable may be rotated as an axis.

The rear wall substrate 6352 may have a shape larger than that of the rear wall cover 6356. For example, the rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured to have the same size and shape as the stump plate portion 6210 so that the outer edges of the rear wall substrate 6352 overlap each other in a front view. In this case, the rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that is enlarged from the original shape to the periphery. In this case, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, it is irradiated from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall are irradiated. The light reflected backward by the unit 6340 or the like can be reflected again toward the player in front.

Further, the light emitting portion may be provided in a portion other than the region covered by the rear wall cover 6356. For example, a light emitting portion is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 behind the portion imitating the root or the portion imitating the cut end of the tree in the stump plate portion 6210 so that the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 emits light at the same time. It may be configured as. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of causing the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 to emit light. Alternatively, such a rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured so that no light emitting portion other than the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is provided. Also in this case, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, the light reflected rearward by the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the like is emitted. It becomes possible to reflect toward the player in front again.

In the example shown with reference to FIG. 498, the box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rectangular rear wall cover 6356 provided on the front side and a rectangular rear wall substrate 6352 provided on the back side. On the other hand, in the example shown below using FIG. 499, the box rear wall portion 6350 is represented by the rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side, the rear wall substrate 6352 located in the middle, and the rear wall plate portion 6380 located on the back side. I tried to compose from. In this example, the rear wall cover 6356 has a shape imitating root vegetables, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having an outer shape imitating the roots of root vegetables, and the second rear having an outer shape imitating root vegetables leaves. A wall cover light scattering unit 6358b is provided. The rear wall cover 6356 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear can be visually recognized.

The rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that imitates a root vegetable as a whole, and is composed of a first rear wall substrate 6352a that imitates the root portion of the root vegetable and a second rear wall substrate 6352b that imitates the leaf portion of the root vegetable. A white protective film is formed on the front surface and the rear surface of the first rear wall substrate 6352a by a white protective agent. Further, a green protective film is formed on the front surface and the rear surface of the second rear wall substrate 6352b by a green protective agent. Four LEDs are surface-mounted on the first rear wall substrate 6352a as the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. Further, two LEDs are surface-mounted on the second rear wall substrate 6352b as the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b. A rear wall cover 6356 is attached to the front surface of such a rear wall substrate 6352. Further, the rear wall plate portion 6380 has a rectangular shape, and a rear wall substrate 6352 is attached to the front surface thereof. Then, in this example, the rear wall of the stump box portion 6300 is formed by the rear wall plate portion 6380.

Even if the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b are configured as separate printed circuit boards and attached to the rear wall plate portion 6380, respectively, the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b can be configured to function as the rear wall substrate 6352. Alternatively, the printed circuit board 1 may be coated with a white protective agent and a green protective agent separately to form the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b.

In the stump box portion 6300 having such a configuration, it is preferable to perform an effect of moving the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 to the moving position as described above. Further, also in this embodiment, as the light emitting mode when the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b are used for the production, a weak light emitting mode that makes it visible as if the root vegetables are emitting light and a weak light emitting mode. A strong light emitting mode that makes it visible as if the entire stump box portion 6300 is emitting light may be adopted.

Further, even when the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are turned off, the color and shape of the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b may cause the stump box portion 6300 to be in the stump box portion 6300. It is possible to express a predetermined motif. In this example, the first rear wall substrate 6352a is white through the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a that imitates the root portion, and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b that imitates the leaf portion. The rear wall substrate 6352b is visible in green. In this way, one decorative body can be configured only by the outer shape of the substrate and the color of the substrate.

In this example, a plurality of grass accessories 6400 are provided on the front side of the rabbit accessory and the stump accessory on the lower front side of the game board side effect display device 1600.

In the example shown in FIG. 495, as described above, the first grass accessory 6470 to the fourth grass accessory 6485 are provided as the grass accessory 6400 between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a. There is. Hereinafter, a plurality of embodiments of such a herbaceous product 6400 will be shown.

The grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 500 (A) is composed of a grass substrate 6420 having a colored opaque, plate-like shape, and an outer shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. The grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is formed by a surface-mounted LED on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Further, the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 500 (B) includes a grass substrate 6420 having a colored opaque, plate-like shape, and an outer shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424. The light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. In the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (A) and 500 (B), the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 imitates grass, and the outer shape itself has a function of decoration. White may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 by causing the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to emit light in green or brown. As the color of the grass substrate 6420, green or brown may be adopted. Green can represent the color of living grass, and brown can represent the color of dead grass. As a result, decoration that imitates grass can be realized by both the color and shape of the grass substrate 6420.

Further, as the LED mounted on the grass substrate 6420, an LED having the same color as the grass substrate 6420 is adopted. Specifically, when the grass substrate 6420 is white, a white LED is used as the LED to be mounted. With such a configuration, the LED mounted on the grass substrate 6420 can be made inconspicuous. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the LED is provided as the light emitting portion on the substrate.

The light emitted from the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is emitted toward the front perpendicular to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the effect that makes the player feel a strong image visually. When the grass front cover 6440, which will be described later, is provided, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is radiated horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. It may be configured to be implemented in. With such a configuration, the light is emitted toward the upper end of the grass front cover 6440, so that the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is transmitted to the entire grass front cover 6440. , The effect as if the entire grass front cover 6440 was shining can be visually recognized by the player. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the light emitting portion is provided on the substrate.

On the other hand, the light emitted from the LED constituting the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is emitted horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the player can visually recognize the effect as if the halo was shining on the grass substrate 6420. When the grass back cover 6460, which will be described later, is provided, light is emitted toward the upper end of the grass back cover 6460. Therefore, the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 extends to the upper end of the grass back cover 6460. The light emitted from the cover is transmitted, and the player can visually recognize the effect as if the entire grass back cover 6460 was shining. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the light emitting portion is provided on the substrate.

Through holes (not shown) constituting an electronic circuit are provided on the front surface and the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. Further, the metal constituting the electronic circuit provided on the printed circuit board is exposed in the through hole, and when copper is used as the metal, the through hole is visually recognized in brown, which is the color of copper. .. Here, if at least a part of the grass substrate 6420 is visible to the player, the through hole may also be visible to the player. In particular, when white is adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420, brown, which is the color of the through holes provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, is visually recognized by the player, and the function as a decoration of the grass substrate 6420. There is a problem that is damaged. Therefore, in order to solve such a problem, the following configuration may be adopted. For example, the through holes may be arranged so as to be scattered on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 instead of being concentrated at a predetermined position on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, by arranging the through holes along the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 or by arranging them on an extension of the contour line forming the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, the through holes have the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. It becomes possible to visually recognize it as if it were a part. By arranging through holes linearly in the same shape as the outer shape inside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, a decorative shape imitating grass may be formed. Further, one or more patterns having a color similar to that of the through holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, one or more patterns having the same shape as the through holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. For example, when the through holes are brown and circular, one or more circular patterns may be formed on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 with brown ink. It is desirable that the above-mentioned example be applied to all the through holes provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, but it may be applied to at least a part of the through holes, and even in that case, the grass substrate 6420 may be applied. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the function as a decoration of the above is impaired. In addition, a through hole may be provided in the substrate provided by the accessory in another example, and the embodiment relating to such a through hole may be applied.

FIGS. 500 (C) to 500 (E) show an example in which the grass front cover 6440 is attached to the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass accessory 6400 is configured by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440. The grass front cover 6440 is made of synthetic resin, and the outer shape is a decorative shape that imitates grass. Further, the portion on which the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 included in the grass substrate 6420 is mounted is configured to be covered by the grass front cover 6440 in front view.

In the example shown in FIG. 500 (C), the size of the grass front cover 6440 is smaller than that of the grass substrate 6420, and a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (D), the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 have the same size, and the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (E), the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440, and the grass is outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. The front cover 6440 is in a protruding state.

In the example shown in FIG. 500 (C), both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 realize a decorative aspect imitating grass. In addition, a sense of depth can be given. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (D) and 500 (E), the grass substrate 6420 located at the rear can be visually recognized by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent or colorless transparent synthetic resin. May be. In that case, a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440. In addition, a sense of depth can be given.

FIGS. 500 (F) to 500 (H) show an example in which the grass substrate 6460 is attached to the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass accessory 6400 is configured by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass poster cover 6460. The grass back cover 6460 is made of synthetic resin, and the outer shape is a decorative shape that imitates grass. Further, the portion on which the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 included in the grass substrate 6420 is mounted is covered with the grass substrate cover 6460.

In the example shown in FIG. 500 (F), the size of the grass substrate 6460 is smaller than that of the grass substrate 6420, and the rear side of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass substrate cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (G), the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate cover 6460 have the same size, and the back of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass substrate cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (H), the size of the grass substrate 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the rear part of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass substrate 6460, and the grass is outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. The rear cover 6460 is in a protruding state. In this example, the outer shape of the grass cover 6460 is visible from the front.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (F) and 500 (G), the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to be rotatable around the vertical direction. For example, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 may be configured to enable the effect that the grass accessory 6400 is rotated 180 degrees and the grass back cover 6460 faces forward. With such a configuration, the visual mode as shown in FIGS. 500 (C) and 500 (D) can be obtained, and the same effect as the example shown in FIGS. 500 (C) and 500 (D) can be obtained. Become. In the example shown in FIG. 500 (H), a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass back cover 6460. In addition, a sense of depth can be given.

FIGS. 501 (A) to 501 (G) show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 500 (C). In these examples, the size of the grass front cover 6440 is smaller than that of the grass substrate 6420, but further, a modified example of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 501 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is smoothly molded without any treatment such as lens cutting or satin finish, and is configured so that the light passing through the grass front cover 6440 passes through without diffuse reflection. There is. The transparent portion 6442 of the grass front cover, which will be described later, is also configured to pass light without being diffusely reflected by the same configuration. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover 6440 can be directly visually recognized.

In this example, by setting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 to a light emitting state, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. For example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is made to emit green light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green.

In the example shown in FIG. 501 (B), the grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The colorless and transparent synthetic resin forms the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a, and the colored transparent synthetic resin forms the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a and the grass front are formed in this way. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colored transparent sticker is attached to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 or a colored transparent printing is applied to the grass front cover colored transparent. Part 6442b may be formed. An example was shown in which a colored transparent portion 6442b was formed by attaching a colored transparent sticker or printing a colored transparent portion on a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, but the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. A colored transparent sticker may be attached to a part of the cover or a colored transparent printing may be performed to form the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover may be the same color as or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420, and in this case, it is possible to make the grass substrate 6420 less noticeable as a printed circuit board. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the colored transparent portion is provided.

In this example, the white grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover. Further, by locating the green grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in front of the white grass substrate 6420, the white grass substrate 6420 can be made to appear green. Further, since the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 become difficult for the player to see, and the front of the grass substrate in the extinguished state. Since the player directly visually recognizes the light emitting unit 6422, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player becomes excited. On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned on, the intensity of the light from the light source is relaxed by the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, so that the player may feel dazzling. It becomes possible to deter. Further, by causing the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 to emit light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be in a state of being decorated with a light emitting color.

FIG. 501 (C) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 501 (B), the grass-front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass-front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass-front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass-front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example transformed into. In this example, when the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the modes of white, green, and white from above in front view.

In the example shown in FIG. 501 (D), the grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover 6440 includes a grass front cover light scattering unit 6444 in this example. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and is composed of a grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a provided at the upper part and a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided at the lower part. Has been done. The grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed by subjecting at least one of the front surface or the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 to a lens cut or satin finish. Preferably, it is desirable to form the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a on the front surface or both the front surface and the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. Since the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is made translucent by performing lens cutting and satin finish, the shape of the member located at the rear is difficult or impossible to see, but its color. Is visible to the player without change. Although an example in which the light scattering portion is formed on the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is shown, the light scattering portion may be formed on the colored transparent synthetic resin. In this case, the member located at the rear is visually recognizable in a manner in which the colors of the colored transparent synthetic resin located at the front are mixed. Further, the color of the colored light scattering portion 6444b of the grass front cover may be the same color as or substantially the same color as that of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, it is possible to make the grass substrate 6420 less noticeable as a printed circuit board. Further, in the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460, a light scattering portion may be provided so as to border the end portion forming the outer peripheral edge when viewed from the front. In this case, the light from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424 can be diffusely reflected at the ends of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460, so that the grass accessory 6400 can be viewed from the front. The outer shape of the can be emphasized. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the light scattering portion is provided.

In this example, since the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a is located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 become difficult to see from the player, and the light is turned off. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player becomes excited by directly visually recognizing the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned on, the light from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a, so that the player feels dazzling. Can be suppressed.

The grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, but with such a configuration, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. Compared to the case where the electronic components are mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, the electronic components (LEDs constituting the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate) appear to be blurred, so that the presence of the electronic components becomes less noticeable and the player It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes annoying. When the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on both the front surface and the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440, an electronic component mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 (LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422). ) Can be made less noticeable. In addition, the color of the grass substrate 6420 at the rear can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and while blurring the shape of the electronic component mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, the color of the grass substrate 6420 is utilized as a decoration. It is a mode that plays the function of.

In the example shown in FIG. 501 (D), FIG. 501 (E) attaches the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a to the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion. This is an example of being transformed into the part 6442a. In this example, when the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the grass in the form of white, green, or white from above in front view.

The example shown in FIG. 501 (F) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (B) is modified. In this example, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided instead of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The colorless and transparent synthetic resin forms the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the opaque synthetic resin forms the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 form the grass front. The cover 6440 may be configured. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a sticker or printing that makes the rear part invisible is applied to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 to form an opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. You may. In addition, by applying a sticker or printing on a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 so that the rear surface cannot be seen, the rear surface is not formed on the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, but a part of the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 rear surface. The grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be formed by applying a sticker or printing that makes it invisible. In this case, in the grass front cover 6440, the mode of the front side of the portion to which the seal or printing is applied becomes visible. For example, when the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, it is possible to make the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin visible while making the rear of the grass front cover 6440 invisible. .. Further, when the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is provided on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is visible and the rear part of the grass front cover 6440 is invisible. Is possible. Yellow or brown may be adopted as the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the opaque portion is provided.

In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white, and the white color of the grass substrate 6420 is indirect through the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover. It is visually recognizable. On the other hand, with respect to the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is visible regardless of the color of the grass substrate 6420. An example of adopting yellow or brown as the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover has been shown, but in this embodiment, it is possible to express an aspect in which snow is piled up on the dead grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in a light emitting state, the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a can be decorated with the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. For example, by adopting green as the emission color, it is possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, and the mode in which grass grows. Can be expressed.

As the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, a silver member capable of mirror-reflecting light may be adopted. For example, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is composed of a synthetic resin entirely plated with an aluminum thin film, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 configured in this way and the grass front cover colorless and transparent composed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. By assembling the part 6442a, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a silver sticker is attached to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, printing is performed with a silver paint, or a part plated with an aluminum thin film is formed. By providing it, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be formed. The opaque portion formed in silver in this way has a function of reflecting light. In addition, a colored paint may be applied to the opaque portion formed in silver, or a colored transparent sticker may be attached. For example, by applying a thin layer of yellow paint, it is possible to make the opaque portion visible in gold. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the opaque portion and the reflective portion are provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 501 (F), the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is made visible in silver. In this case, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the front surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is visible in silver, and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 are visible in white. It is possible to express the mode of frost or snow on the grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is set as the light emitting mode, the light emitted forward from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is reflected rearward by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Furthermore, since the grass substrate 6420 is white, the light reflected rearward at the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is scattered by being incident on the grass substrate 6420, and finally the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Will be decorated. In this way, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate can be efficiently used for decoration. By providing a colored transparent layer on the front layer of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 can be visually recognized in silver and a predetermined color.

FIG. 501 (G) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 501 (F), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. In this example, when the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the grass in the form of white, silver, or white from above in front view.

FIG. 502 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 501 (A). As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass can be expressed by the portion that can be visually recognized in white by the grass substrate 6420 and the green aspect by the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. It has become.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, it is desirable that the light emitting color is the same as or the same as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, for example, green or yellowish green. It is desirable to emit light. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect in a dynamic manner while keeping the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover as it is. Further, the light reflected without passing through the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover decorates the white grass substrate 6420, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized in green.

FIG. 502 (B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b in the example shown in FIG. 502 (A). As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, grass in the form of white, green, or green can be expressed from above. Further, since the grass front cover colored light scattering unit 6444b is located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as a mixture of the white color of the grass substrate 6420 and the green color of the grass front cover colored light scattering unit 6444b. , The light emitting portion 6422 itself on the front surface of the grass substrate is configured to be difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is used as a light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colored light scattering unit 6444b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated. It becomes possible to make it an aspect. Further, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized by the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate.

In FIG. 502 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 502 (B), the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion. This is an example transformed into 6442b. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, grass in the form of white, green, or green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate passes through the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass substrate front cover, and some light does not pass through. It reflects and scatters in the grass front cover light scattering section 6444, and the grass front cover light scattering section 6444 can be used as a decorative mode. Further, the diffusely reflected light reaches the exposed white grass substrate 6420, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized by the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate.

FIG. 502 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 502 (B). As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a white, green, yellow or brown or silver aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set to emit light, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is formed. It can be a decorative mode. Further, the reflected light decorates the exposed white grass substrate 6420, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. , Can express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 502 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 502 (D), the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a white, yellow, brown, silver, or green aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is used as the light emitting mode, the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover can be used as the decorative mode. Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is scattered on the back surface of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover or reflected on the back surface of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, so that the exposed white color is obtained. By decorating the grass substrate 6420, it is possible to decorate the white grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. , Can express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 503 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 501 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a white or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is used as a light emitting mode, the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a can be used as a decorative mode. Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is scattered on the back surface of the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, so that the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate can be decorated. It is possible to decorate the 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with green by the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. It is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 503 (B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 503 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, grass in a white, white, yellow or brown or silver aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is used as the light emitting mode, the light scattering portion 6444 on the front cover of the grass can be decorated by the light reflected on the back surface of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. Further, by scattering light on the back surface of the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. It becomes. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be seen. Can be expressed.

In FIG. 503 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 503 (B), the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is attached to the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is attached to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. This is a modified example. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, grass in a white, yellow or brown or silver or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated by the light scattered by the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, and the white grass. The substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be seen. Can be expressed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 503 (A) to 503 (C), by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent synthetic resin, the grass front cover colored light scattering is replaced with the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Part 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 503 (D) is an example in which the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 503 (C). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a white, yellow, brown, or silver manner can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated by the light reflected on the back surface of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, and the white grass. The substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 501 (A) to 503 (D), the outer shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as decorative shapes. It is configured in. Further, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Although it is provided at a position where only one of the members is covered by the front view, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is configured to be arranged behind the position forming the boundary line between these members. You may. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it less noticeable to the player that the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is mounted on the grass substrate 6420 in the off state.

For example, in the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 501 (B), an LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is provided behind the boundary line formed by the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. When arranged so as to be arranged, the presence of the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 becomes inconspicuous. Therefore, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is made white, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is made green. It is possible for the player to clearly see the image.

Similarly, the relationship between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the relationship between the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored. Relationship with light scattering part 6444b, relationship between grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b and grass front cover opaque part 6446, relationship between grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a and grass front cover opaque part 6446, grass front cover colored light Even in the relationship between the scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, when the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is arranged behind these boundary lines, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 It is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the above inconspicuous.

Further, the relationship between the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover, the relationship between the exposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 and the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, and the grass substrate 6420 are exposed. Relationship between the exposed part and the grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a, the relationship between the part where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front cover colored light scattering part 6444b, the part where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front In relation to the cover opaque portion 6446, when the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is arranged behind these boundary lines, the presence of the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is also present. Can be made inconspicuous.

In the above-mentioned combination, in the combination of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming a boundary line in combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the light of the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is emitted. In combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, it is possible to efficiently transmit to the member forming the boundary line.

The light from the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 may be irradiated perpendicularly to the grass substrate 6420, or the boundary line at the position where the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is mounted. The light may be irradiated in a direction perpendicular to the tangent line of.

For example, when both are members capable of transmitting light, such as a combination of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the LED forming the front light emitting portion 6422 of the grass substrate is used. The light irradiation direction may be configured to irradiate the grass substrate 6420 perpendicularly. On the other hand, in the combination of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary line in combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the boundary line at the position where the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is mounted is It is preferable that the light is emitted in the direction of the member which is perpendicular to the tangent line and which forms the boundary line in combination with the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover.

When a rectangular LED is used as the LED constituting the front light emitting portion 6422 of the grass substrate, the longitudinal direction of the LED coincides with the direction of the boundary line or the close battle of the boundary line at the position where the LED is arranged. It is good to arrange it like this.

When the two parts forming the boundary line are formed by one member, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 does not protrude in the front view at the part corresponding to the boundary line and has a size of about the same width. It may be configured to provide a V-shaped groove. With such a configuration, when the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is visually recognized from the front, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is refracted by the V-shaped groove and visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to make the presence of the LED constituting the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate less noticeable. The shape is not limited to the V-shaped groove and may be a refractable structure. On the other hand, when a boundary line is formed by combining a plurality of members, the LEDs constituting the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate are refracted and visually recognized without providing such a groove. It is possible to make the presence of the LED constituting the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the substrate less noticeable.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 501 (A) to 503 (D), the outer shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as decorative shapes. It is configured in. This gives a sense of depth. Further, in the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. A decorative shape is also formed at the boundary line.

Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, the grass substrate 6420 is decorated by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, and the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated by the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. It is said. In particular, when the grass substrate 6420 is white and the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is irradiated with light of a color other than white, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be changed to the irradiated color so that the light can be visually recognized.

Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is emitted toward the end portion of the grass substrate 6420. Is configured to reflect, so it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Further, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 in different colors can be used as a decorative mode when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off and when the light emitting portion is turned off. By mounting the LED constituting the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate on the grass substrate 6420 so that the light is emitted horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420, the upper part of the grass substrate 6420 is formed. More light can reach the edges.

504 (A) to 506 (D) show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 500 (D). In these examples, the size of the grass substrate 6420 and the size of the grass front cover 6440 are the same, but further, a modified example of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 504 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is smoothly molded without any treatment such as lens cutting or satin finish, and is configured so that the light passing through the grass front cover 6440 passes through without diffuse reflection. There is. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover can be directly visually recognized. Further, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a white form can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color.
For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, expressing the mode in which grass is growing. can.

FIG. 504 (B) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a white or green aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

In FIG. 504 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 504 (B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example transformed into. As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a green or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 504 (D) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a white or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and in green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 504 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 504 (D), the front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is attached to the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is attached to the front cover colorless and transparent portion 6444a. This is an example of modification to the part 6442a. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a white or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and in green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 504 (F) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a white, yellow, brown, or silver manner can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be seen through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 504 (G), in the example shown in FIG. 504 (F), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be seen through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 505 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a green form can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 505 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (D). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a green or green aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 505 (C) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (E). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a green or green aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 505 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (F). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a green, yellow, brown, or silver manner can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 505 (E) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (G). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or green manner can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 506 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a white form can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated in green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 506 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (F). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a white or green, yellow or brown or silver aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated in green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 506 (C) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (G). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light scattering portion 6422, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 are decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 506 (A) to 506 (C), by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent synthetic resin, the grass front cover colored light scattering is replaced with the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Part 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 506 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 504 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a yellow, brown, or silver manner can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover to reach the end forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400. The light reaches and it becomes possible to decorate the end of the grass accessory 6400 with a predetermined color. More specifically, when the grass accessory 6400 is viewed from an angle, the end portion of the grass substrate 6420 appears to be exposed, so that the exposed portion can be visually recognized in a manner shining with a predetermined emission color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the end portion forming the outer circumference of the grass accessory 6400 with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing. In addition, even in the case where another grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided, it can be made visible in such an embodiment.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 504 (A) to 506 (D), the outer shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having the same size as the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized as decorative shapes by the player. It is configured. Further, in the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. A decorative shape is also formed at the boundary line.

Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. At the same time, the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated by the light emitted from the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the color of the grass front cover 6440 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 The decoration is performed by a color in which both of the above are mixed, and further, the decoration is performed on the grass substrate 6420 by the light emitted from the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate.

Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is emitted toward the end portion of the grass substrate 6420. Is configured to reflect, so it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Further, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 in different colors can be used as a decorative mode when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off and when the light emitting portion is turned off.

507 (A) to 509 (D) show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 500 (E). In these examples, the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440, and the grass front cover 6440 is outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. Although it is configured in a protruding state, a modified example of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 507 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is smoothly molded without any treatment such as lens cutting or satin finish, and is configured so that the light passing through the grass front cover 6440 passes through without diffuse reflection. There is. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover can be directly visually recognized. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the grass in a colorless transparent and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, expressing the mode in which grass is growing. can.

FIG. 507 (B) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a colorless transparent, white, or green manner from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

In FIG. 507 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 507 (B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example transformed into. As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a green transparent, green, or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 507 (D) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a colorless transparent, white, or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

In FIG. 507 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 507 (D), the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is attached to the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6444a. This is an example of being transformed into the part 6442a. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a colorless translucent, white, or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and in green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 507 (F) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a colorless transparent, white, yellow or brown or silver form from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be seen through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 507 (G), in the example shown in FIG. 507 (F), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be seen through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 508 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a green transparent or green aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 508 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (D). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in the form of green transparent, green, or green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 508 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 508 (B), the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6444b. This is an example of being transformed into part 6442b. As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a green translucent, green, or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored light diffusing portion 6444b, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 508 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (F). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a green transparent, green, yellow or brown or silver aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 508 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 508 (D), the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example. As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or green manner can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b are decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 509 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the grass in a colorless transparent and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated in green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 509 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (F). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a colorless transparent, white, yellow or brown or silver form from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated in green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 509 (C) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (G). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a are decorated in green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 509 (A) to 509 (C), by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent synthetic resin, the grass front cover colored light scattering is replaced with the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Part 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 509 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 507 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a yellow, brown, or silver manner can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, so that the light reaches the end forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. Is reached, and it becomes possible to irradiate light upward or backward at the upper end of the grass substrate 6420. This makes it possible to decorate other members by irradiating them with light of a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the members located above and behind the end portion forming the outer circumference of the grass substrate 6420 in green. In this example, it can be said that the grass substrate 6420 is provided not to decorate the grass accessory 6400 itself but to decorate other members.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 507 (A) to 509 (D), the outer shape of at least one of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be visible to the player as a decorative shape. Further, in the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. A decorative shape is also formed at the boundary line.

Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself is used for decoration. The light emitted from the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate also decorates the grass substrate 6420. Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is emitted toward the end portion of the grass substrate 6420. Is configured to reflect, so it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Further, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 in different colors can be used as a decorative mode when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off and when the light emitting portion is turned off.

FIGS. 510 (A) to 510 (D) show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 500 (H). In these examples, the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is provided on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. In addition, the size of the grass back cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass board 6420, the front surface of the grass back cover 6460 is covered by the grass board 6420, and the grass back cover 6460 protrudes outside the outer shape of the grass board 6420. Although it is configured, a modified example of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 510 (A), a colorless and transparent back cover 6460 is provided behind the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass cover 6460 is smoothly molded without any treatment such as lens cutting or satin finish. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass posterior cover located behind the grass substrate 6420 can be directly visually recognized. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the grass in a colorless transparent and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, it is possible to decorate the colorless transparent portion 6462a on the rear cover of the grass. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the exposed part of the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass substrate in front view with green, and grass is growing. Aspects can be expressed.

FIG. 510 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass back cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6462b of the grass back cover in the example shown in FIG. 510 (A). As the color of the colored transparent portion 6462b of the grass back cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in a green transparent or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, it is possible to decorate the colored transparent portion 6462b on the rear cover of the grass substrate. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the exposed part of the colored transparent portion 6462b of the grass back cover with green, and grass is growing. Aspects can be expressed.

FIG. 510 (C) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the back cover of the grass is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6464a of the back cover of the grass in the example shown in FIG. 510 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, a colorless translucent, white grass can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, it is possible to decorate the colorless light scattering portion 6464a on the grass back cover. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the exposed portion of the colorless light scattering portion 6464a on the grass substrate in front view with green, and grass grows. Can express the aspect of being.

FIG. 510 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass back cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6466 of the grass back cover in the example shown in FIG. 510 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6466 of the grass back cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a yellow, brown, silver, or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the opaque portion 6466 of the grass substrate cover to light up to the edge forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. It becomes possible to decorate the periphery of the edge of the grass substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the periphery of the end portion of the grass substrate 6420 with green, and it is possible to express an aspect in which grass is growing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 510 (A) to 510 (D), the outer shapes of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass back cover 6460 having a larger outer shape than the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as decorative shapes by the player. It is configured. This gives a sense of depth.
Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, the decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. Further, when the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light in a predetermined color, the light from the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate reaches the upper end portion of the grass rear cover 6460, and the upper end portion of the grass rear cover 6460. The mode in which is decorated with a predetermined color becomes visible.

511 (A) to 512 (G) show a modified example of the example shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 501 (G). Specifically, in the examples shown in FIGS. 511 (A) to 511 (B), the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a grass substrate opening 6426 having a decorative shape imitating the head of a rabbit, and the grass is grass. The rear side is visible through the substrate opening 6426.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 511 (C) to 511 (E) and 512 (A) to 512 (G), the grass front cover 6440 is located in front of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass front cover 6440. Is provided with a decoratively shaped grass front cover opening 6448 that imitates the head of a rabbit, and the grass substrate 6420 is visibly configured through the grass front cover opening 6448.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 511 (F) to 511 (H), the back cover 6460 is located behind the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 has a decorative shape of grass that imitates the head of a rabbit. A substrate opening 6426 is provided and is provided. The grass back cover 6460 is visibly configured through the grass substrate opening 6426.

FIG. 511 (A) is an example in which the grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (A). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a punched-hole-shaped physical opening. The grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape that imitates the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the decorative shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 can be realized. In addition, the rear can be visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426.

FIG. 511 (B) is an example in which the grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (B). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a physical opening in the shape of a punched hole, and a member located rearward through the grass substrate opening 6426 is configured to be directly visible. There is. Substrate grass The substrate opening 6426 has a shape that imitates the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the decorative shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 can be realized. In addition, the rear side can be directly visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426.

FIG. 511 (C) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided with the grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (C). The grass front cover opening 6448 is formed in such a manner that the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a punched-hole-shaped physical opening, and the grass substrate 6420 located rearward is directly visible through the grass front cover opening 6448. It is configured to be possible. The grass front cover opening 6448 has a shape that imitates the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass front cover openings 6448 may be provided. In this example, a grass front cover first opening 6448a and a grass front cover second opening 6448b smaller than the grass front cover first opening 6448a are provided. ing.

The grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a forming a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in front view, and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The first light emitting unit 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is configured to be directly visible via the above. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b is located at a position that does not overlap with the grass substrate front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c forming a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in front view. It is provided. With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 but also the decorative shape of the grass front cover opening 6448 can be realized. Further, it is possible to visually recognize the grass substrate 6420 from the grass front cover opening 6448, and depending on the shape of the grass front cover opening 6448 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 visible from the grass front cover opening 6448. The decoration is done.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the grass exposed at the end face forming the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. The substrate 6420 is directly decorated with the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set to emit light, the end faces forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b are the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c.

FIG. 511 (D) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is modified to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (C). Further, FIG. 511 (E) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (C). In these examples as well, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the same aspect as the grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (C).

FIG. 511 (F) is an example in which the grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 500 (F). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a physical opening in the shape of a punched hole, and the grass posterior cover 6460 located rearward through the grass substrate opening 6426 can be directly visually recognized. It is configured. The grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape that imitates the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. The grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is not provided around the grass substrate first opening 6426a. Further, a grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and a grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b are provided so as to sandwich the left and right sides of the grass substrate second opening 6426b.

With such a configuration, not only the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also the decorative shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 can be realized. In addition, the grass back cover 6460 can be visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426. Further, the decoration is performed by the shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 and the color of the grass back cover 6460 visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426.

When the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting unit 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting unit 6424b are set to emit light, the grass posterior cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b becomes the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting unit 6424a. It is decorated with light emitted from the second light emitting unit 6424b on the rear surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, the grass posterior cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a is decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b, but the grass posterior cover 6460. The amount of light that reaches is smaller than that of the portion exposed from the second opening 6426b of the grass substrate. Therefore, the portion of the back cover 6460 exposed from the first opening 6426a of the grass substrate is decorated with a smaller amount of light than the portion exposed from the second opening 6426b of the grass substrate of the back cover 6460.

It should be noted that the first light emitting unit 6424a on the rear surface of the grass substrate may be turned off, and only the second light emitting unit 6424b on the rear surface of the grass substrate may be turned on in a predetermined color (for example, green). In this case, the portion exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a of the grass cover 6460 is not substantially decorated because the light hardly reaches, and the grass substrate second opening of the grass cover 6460 Only the part exposed from 6426b can be decorated.

FIG. 511 (G) is an example in which the size of the grass back cover 6460 is modified to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (F). Further, FIG. 511 (H) is an example in which the size of the grass back cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (F). In these examples as well, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the same embodiment as the grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 511 (F).

FIG. 512 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided with the grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (A). In this example, a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a forming a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in front view, and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The first light emitting unit 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is configured to be directly visible via the above. On the other hand, the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover does not overlap with the second light emitting portion 6422b on the front surface of the grass substrate and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate, which form a part of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. , Is provided at a position overlapping the grass front cover 6440.

In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the opening 6448 of the grass front cover, and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is displayed. The grass substrate 6420 is visible as white through the interposition. Therefore, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the shape of the grass front cover opening 6448 that imitates a rabbit is not conspicuous. Further, since the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is composed of white LEDs having the same color as the grass substrate 6420, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 stands out. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player notices the existence of the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided is the grass substrate. The mode is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover are exposed at the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. Although the end face of the grass is brown and is decorated, the unexposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set to emit light, the end faces forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b are the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c, the end faces forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b are green. However, the vicinity of the center of the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the grass substrate 6420.

FIG. 512 (B) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided with the grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (B). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by the upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, but the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b has an opening in the grass front cover. 6448 is provided. Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the opening 6448 of the grass front cover, and the green grass front cover colored transparent portion. The white grass substrate 6420 is visible as green through the 6442b. This makes it possible to express the aspect as if there is a white rabbit in the green grass.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided is the grass substrate. The mode is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover are exposed at the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. Although the end face of the grass is brown and is decorated, the white grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized by the player as green on the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover. Alternatively, when green, which is the same color as the colored transparent portion of the grass front cover, is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. Since the end face forming the substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is decorated with a green luminescent color and has the same color as the colored transparent part of the grass front cover, it expresses a mode as if the rabbit was hidden in the grass. be able to.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set to emit light, the end faces forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b are the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c, the end faces forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b are green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

FIG. 512 (C) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 512 (B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example transformed into. In this example, it is possible to express white, green, and white grasses from above in front view. Further, with respect to the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment shown by exemplifying FIG. 512 (A).

FIG. 512 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided with the grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (D). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by the upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, but the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed by the grass front cover. An opening 6448 is provided. In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. The white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white by passing through. This makes it possible to express the aspect as if a white rabbit is hiding in the white grass.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided is the grass substrate. The mode is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover exposed at the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. Although the end face to be formed is green and is decorated, the white grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized by the player as white on the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set to emit light, the end faces forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b are the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c, the end faces forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b are green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate. This makes it possible to express the aspect as if there is a white rabbit in the green grass.

In the example shown in FIG. 512 (D), FIG. 512 (E) attaches the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a to the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion. This is an example of being transformed into part 6442a. In this example, it is possible to express white, white, and white grasses from above in front view. Further, with respect to the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment shown by exemplifying FIG. 512 (A).

FIG. 512 (F) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided with the grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 501 (F). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by the upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower grass front cover opaque portion 6446, but the grass front cover opening 6448 is formed in the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. It is provided. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. In this example, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the grass front cover opening 6448, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is yellow. It is visible in brown or silver. This makes it possible to express the appearance as if a white rabbit is hiding in yellow, brown or silver grass.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided is the grass substrate. The mode is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when yellow or brown is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, or when the blinking mode of white is adopted as the emission mode, the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The exposed grass substrate 6420 and the end face forming the grass front cover first opening 6448a are decorated in a blinking yellow, brown, or white mode. Further, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown or silver, which is the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. As a result, the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 have the same decorative mode, and when the light emitting mode is changed from the above-mentioned extinguished state, it is as if the white rabbit has disappeared. Aspects can be expressed. On the other hand, when white is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover are exposed at the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. The end face of the eggplant is white and is decorated. Further, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown or silver, which is the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. As a result, when the light emitting mode is changed from the above-mentioned extinguished state, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a, which was visually recognized as white only by the color of the substrate, is provided. The white color can also be obtained by the light emitting color of the first light emitting unit 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, and the white rabbit can be expressed in a more emphasized manner.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set to emit light, the end faces forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b are the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, regarding the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c. For example, when white is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c, the opening is bordered on the end face forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b. The grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate. Thereby, the aspect as if the white rabbit is hidden in the yellow, brown or silver grass can be expressed by emphasizing the aspect.

In the example shown in FIG. 512 (F), FIG. 512 (G) deforms the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. In this example, it is possible to represent a white, yellow or brown or silvery, white form of grass from above in front view. Further, with respect to the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment shown by exemplifying FIG. 512 (A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 511 (A) to 512 (G), an opening (grass substrate opening 6426 or grass) having a decorative shape is provided in the decorative member provided in the front (grass substrate 6420 or grass front cover 6440). By providing the front cover opening 6448) so that the member provided at the rear can be visually recognized, the decoratively shaped opening is configured to be visible to the player in a prominent state. Further, since the member provided in the front and the member provided in the rear have different colors, transparency, and the like, the shape of the opening can be further emphasized. Further, it may be configured to use the fact that such an opening is in a decorative state as an effect.
In the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 500 (H) and 501 (A) to 501 (G), a modified example in which an opening is provided is shown in FIGS. 511 (A) to 512 (G). However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 502 (A) to 510 (D), the opening may be similarly provided.

An example was shown in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a punched physical opening to form a grass front cover opening 6448 to form a region in which the rear can be seen. Instead of the method of providing, the outer shape of the visible region may be formed by the boundary line between the region where the rear is invisible or difficult to see and the region where the rear is relatively easy to see.

For example, the outer invisible region may be composed of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the inner easily visible region may be composed of the grass front cover transparent portion 6442. Alternatively, the outer hard-to-see area is made up of the colored grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the inner easy-to-see area is made up of the grass front cover light scattering part 6444, or the outer hard-to-see area is made up of colored grass. The front cover light scattering portion 6444 constitutes an easily visible area on the inside with a colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, and the outside hard-to-see area is composed of a colorless grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 on the inside. The easily visible area of the grass front cover is composed of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the outside difficult-to-see area is composed of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the inner easily visible area is composed of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. It may be configured by. Alternatively, the grass front cover 6440 is included in the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. At least two of them may be provided, and an inner easily visible region may be provided over two or more regions of the two or more regions. Even in such an aspect, it is possible to provide an area having a decorative shape and being easily visible at the rear.

In FIGS. 512 (B) to 512 (G), the location where the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided is 1 such as the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Although only the area was used, the grass front cover opening 6448 may be provided across a plurality of areas constituting the grass front cover 6440. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 has a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion. At least two of the 6446s may be provided, and the grass front cover opening 6448 may be provided across two or more of these areas.
FIGS. 500 (A) to 512 (G) show examples in which the grass accessory 6400 can be visually recognized as a decorative mode in a light-off state or a light-emitting state, and these states are used as an effect in a game. For example, one of these states may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event in the gaming machine. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event by changing when these states change from the above-mentioned certain state to the above-mentioned other state. As a predetermined event, for example, a jackpot expectation degree may be indicated, or a notice indicating that the operation button 410 can be operated may be used.

An example in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420 in FIGS. 500 (C) to 500 (E), FIGS. 501 (A) to 509 (D), and FIGS. 511 (C) to 512 (G). showed that. Further, in FIGS. 500 (F) to 500 (H) and 510 (A) to 510 (D), an example in which the back cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420 is shown, but the front of the grass substrate 6420 is shown. It is configured to combine any one embodiment of the embodiment in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 and any one embodiment of the embodiment in which the grass back cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420. You may.

When combining the embodiments, it is preferable to adopt the same size as the shape of the grass substrate 6420. Further, when the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 are smaller than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500 (C) and 500 (F), the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover 6440 are used. It is advisable to combine the examples with the grass cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 just overlap each other in the front view. Further, when the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass back cover 6460 have the same size as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500 (D) and 500 (G), they are regarded as the same size. , It is good to combine the examples. In this case, in front view, the grass front cover 6440, the grass substrate 6420, and the outer edge of the grass back cover 6460 just overlap. Further, when the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 are respectively larger than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 500 (E) and 500 (H), the grass front cover 6440 is used. It is advisable to combine the examples with the grass cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 just overlap each other in the front view. Further, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 may be made of a synthetic resin of the same color, and when the grass front cover 6440 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the grass back cover 6460 is colorless and transparent. It is preferable to form it from the synthetic resin of. When the grass front cover 6440 is made of a green transparent synthetic resin, the grass back cover 6460 may be made of a green transparent synthetic resin.

When the embodiments are combined, the grass substrate 6420 includes both the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424, but among the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424. One may be configured not to be provided. For example, when the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (E) and 500 (H) are combined, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 are larger than the grass substrate 6420 in front view. Therefore, it is possible to decorate the back cover 6460 with the light from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. It is also possible to decorate the grass front cover 6440 with the light from the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424. In this case, in the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460, it is desirable to provide a light scattering portion so as to border the end portion forming the outer peripheral edge when viewed from the front. It should be noted that both the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424 may not be provided. In this case, the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to have a function of relaying a signal from the peripheral control substrate 1510 to another accessory, for example.

Any one example in the above-mentioned grass accessory 6400 may be applied to each of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 shown in FIG. 496. Specifically, the outer shapes of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are not changed, and the region other than the first grass decorative portion 6360a constituting the outer region of the first grass movable portion 6360 is used. , The member constituting the outer region in any one example of the grass accessory 6400 and the inner region are formed with respect to the first grass decorative portion 6360a forming the inner region in the first grass movable portion 6360. It is good to apply it to the member. Further, with respect to the region other than the second grass decoration portion 6370a forming the outer region in the second grass movable portion 6370 and the second grass decoration portion 6370a forming the inner region in the second grass movable portion 6370. It is preferable to apply the member constituting the outer region and the member constituting the inner region in any one example of the accessory 6400.

Further, any one example of the grass accessory 6400 may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. For example, the example shown in FIG. 510 (B) may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. In this case, the white grass substrates 6420 on the left and right are in contact with each other to form the decorative body 1. In addition, the left and right green transparent grass cover 6460 are in contact with each other to form one decorative body. On the other hand, even when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 move to the left and right, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 and the left and right green transparent grass back covers 6460 each form one decorative body as a single unit. is doing.

In FIG. 495, the third grass accessory 6480 is provided and the fourth grass accessory 6485 is provided behind it, but the left half of the fourth grass accessory 6485 is located in front of the third grass accessory 6485 when viewed from the front. It is configured to be hidden in the grass accessory 6480. Here, any one example in the above-mentioned grass accessory 6400 may be applied to each of the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485. At this time, it is desirable that the size of the grass substrate 6420 included in the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 is the same. Further, one or both of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 that can be provided by the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 are simultaneously produced as a light emitting mode as in the above-mentioned example. It may be configured.

Below, an example is shown in which the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 510 (A) is adopted as the third grass accessory 6480, and the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 507 (E) is adopted as the fourth grass accessory 6485. In this case, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 included in the grass substrate 6420 of the third grass accessory 6480 provided in front is made to emit light, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided in the fourth grass accessory 6485, It is possible to illuminate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the white grass substrate 6420 from the front side. Further, the fourth grass accessory 6485 can efficiently diffusely reflect the light emitted from the third grass accessory 6480 forward and enhance the interest of the player as an effect.

On the other hand, it is possible to decorate the grass back cover 6460 of the third grass accessory 6480 by irradiating light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 included in the fourth grass accessory 6485. At this time, only the peripheral portion such as above the grass back cover 6460 can be visually recognized as a decorated mode by the player, but the light passes through the grass back cover 6460 and is rearwardly viewed by the white grass substrate 6420. It is diffusely reflected and irradiated toward the fourth grass accessory 6485, and decorates the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided in the fourth grass accessory 6485.

In this way, the light is diffusely reflected alternately between the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided in the rear, so that the position of the light source cannot be seen by the player. It is possible to efficiently reflect light forward while arranging it. In particular, when a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light is adopted as the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass rear cover opaque portion 6466, it is possible to reflect light more efficiently.

An example was shown in which the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided in the rear partially overlap each other in a front view, but the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory are shown. It may be configured so that it completely overlaps with 6485 in front view. Further, the third grass accessory 6480 may be configured to be larger than the fourth grass accessory 6485. Then, in front view, the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured to be completely hidden behind the third grass accessory 6480. Alternatively, they may be arranged so as to be arranged at positions where they are adjacent to each other but do not overlap in front view.

One or both of the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided behind may be movable as an effect. For example, an example was shown in which the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided in the rear partially overlap each other in front view. From this state, the third grass accessory 6480 And the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured so as to completely overlap each other in front view. In this case, one of the 3rd grass accessory 6480 and the 4th grass accessory 6485 moves in the left-right direction, so that the 3rd grass accessory 6480 and the 4th grass accessory 6485 completely overlap each other in the front view. The third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 move in the left-right direction so that the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 are viewed from the front. It may be configured so as to completely overlap with. In this case, the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured to be able to move from a state in which they do not overlap at all in front view to a state in which they overlap. Further, the moving direction may be configured to be movable not only in the horizontal direction but also in the vertical direction. In this case, it is preferable to configure the grass so that it can move upward or downward by the height of the grass itself. Even with such a configuration, the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 can be configured to be able to move from a state in which they do not overlap at all in the front view to a state in which they overlap. Then, in a state where the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 are overlapped in a front view, it is preferable to configure the structure so that the light emitting mode as in each of the above-described examples can be taken.

An example in which the grass accessory 6400 can be moved has been shown, but when the grass accessory 6400 moves, the openings (grass substrate opening 6426 and grass front cover opening 6448) are difficult to see or cannot be seen. The change to a visible state may be adopted as an effect. Specifically, in relation to the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided in the rear and provided with the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448, in front view. From the state where the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 provided in the fourth grass accessory 6485 are located behind the third grass accessory 6480, the third grass accessory 6480 is rearward in front view. 4 The grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 provided in the grass accessory 6485 change to a state in which the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 are visible to the player in front view. It is preferable to configure so as to be.

Although the example in which the grass accessory 6400 is movable is shown, the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to be movable as an effect at a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, at this time, a predetermined image may be displayed as an effect in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Specifically, when the grass accessory 6400 moves from below to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the outline of the grass accessory 6400 is imitated in accordance with the movement of the grass accessory 6400. The image may be configured to be moved and displayed upward. At this time, it is desirable to configure the plant so as to move while displaying an image imitating the outline of the grass accessory 6400 slightly above the grass accessory 6400 in the front view. With such a configuration, an image imitating the outline of the grass accessory 6400, the outer shape of the grass accessory 6400 composed of the grass front cover 6440 or the grass substrate 6422 or the grass posterior cover 6460, and the grass front cover 6440 are configured. A plurality of grass-like shapes represented by a grass substrate 6420, which is smaller than the boundary line between a plurality of members or a transparent grass front cover 6440 and can be seen through the grass front cover 6440, from the top to the bottom in a front view. The provided decoration mode can be made visible to the player. In this way, one decorative mode can be realized as an effect by the three of the image displayed on the display device, the outer shape of the accessory, and the shape provided in the accessory. As shown in FIGS. 502 (B) and 507 (B), when the grass accessory 6400 has two shapes in front view, one decoration mode is realized as an effect by a total of four shapes. be able to.

The back surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to mount the same electronic components as those included in the rabbit accessory 6000. Further, the grass substrate 6420 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 are attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive, and power is supplied to the LEDs. Similarly, the wiring to be used may be configured to be attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b so that the wiring is difficult to see from the player. The LED and the wiring may be located behind them. In addition, by printing or engraving a pattern of the same shape as the LED or wiring on the transparent grass substrate 6420, the LED or wiring will be difficult for the player to see while ensuring the transparency of the grass substrate 6420. It may be configured. In this case, by causing the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424 to emit light, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, or the LED A pattern having the same shape as the wiring may be illuminated to be in a decorative state. With such a configuration, both the function of hiding the existence of LEDs and wiring and the function of decoration can be realized by these members.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (C) to 512 (G), 1 grass substrate 6420 and 1 grass front cover 6440, or 1 grass substrate 6420 and 1 grass back cover 6460, or 1 An example of forming 1 grass accessory 6400 with the grass substrate 6420, 1 grass front cover 6440, and 1 grass back cover 6460 was shown, but among the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass back cover 6460. At least one member of the above may be increased to a plurality to form one grass cover 6400. For example, two grass substrates 6440 may be attached to one grass substrate 6420 to form one grass accessory 6400, or two grass substrates 6420 may be attached to one grass substrate 6440. You may make up 1 grass cover 6400. Further, when the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass back cover 6460 are made into a plurality, the embodiments in the examples shown in FIGS. 500 (C) to 512 (G) are independently applied to each of the plurality of members. May be applied. For example, in the mountain accessory 6500 described later, the front cover of 2 is provided on the substrate of 1, and the front cover of 1 is provided with an opening so that the substrate located at the rear can be visually recognized, and the substrate is also opened. This is an example in which a part is provided.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 507 (A) to 509 (D), a grass front cover 6440 larger than the grass substrate 6420 is provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover 6440, but the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is viewed from the front so that the outer edge of the grass substrate 6420 is difficult to see or invisible. The grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are provided at least in front of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion is provided in front of the portion other than the outer edge portion in the grass substrate 6420. 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be provided. Even with such a configuration, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be used for decoration. In this case, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 or the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be provided so as to cover the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 in a band shape. Alternatively, in the example shown in FIG. 507 (D), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is expanded upward, and the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is the grass front cover colorless light scattering. It may be configured to be covered by the portion 6444b. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 507 (E), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is reduced upward, and the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is the grass front cover colorless light. It may be configured to be covered by the scattering portion 6444b. Further, also in FIGS. 507 (F) and 507 (G), similarly, by expanding or contracting the area occupied by the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover upward, the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass front cover. It may be configured to be covered by the opaque portion 6446. Alternatively, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 or the grass front cover opaque portion 6444 or the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 covers at least a part of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 by the decoratively shaped grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 or the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. The same effect can be obtained even when the portion 6446 is provided.

In FIGS. 487 and 495, an example in which the grass accessory 6400 is provided in the area between the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 is shown, but the grass accessory 6400 is provided at a position other than this. It may be configured as follows. For example, the grass accessory 6400 may be provided in the area between the game panel 1100 and the glass unit 190. Alternatively, the member that constitutes the door frame 3 may be configured to be provided with the grass accessory 6400. For example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570 may be configured to provide grass accessories. In addition, not only the grass accessory 6400 but also other accessories may be configured to be provided at the same position as the grass accessory 6400.

In this way, in the grass accessory 6400, it is possible to perform an effect of making it visible in green, white, yellow, brown, silver, etc. by the plurality of members constituting the grass accessory 6400. It is possible to express the appearance of frost and snow on lush grass, dead grass, and dead grass. In addition, it is possible to express how the grass has changed from one of these modes to another.

In the example shown in FIG. 495, the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 are provided in front of the mountain accessory 6500. Further, in these examples, the rabbit accessory 6000 has a face light emitting portion 6023, and the stump accessory 6100 has a first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and a second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b, and light is emitted from these light emitting portions. It is possible to take a directing state by irradiating the front. By the way, in these examples, the light from the light emitting portion is diffusely reflected by the member provided around the light emitting portion, and a part of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is directed backward, and the light from the light emitting portion is emitted. There is a problem that the light cannot be efficiently irradiated forward and the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light is lowered. Therefore, the following is an example in which the utilization efficiency of the light from the light emitting portion can be improved by reflecting the light that has turned backward on the front side of the mountain accessory 6500 which is a decorative body.

FIG. 513 shows a modified example of the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 488 and the like. FIG. 513 (A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 513 (B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 513 (C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. The rabbit accessory 6000 is composed of a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030 as a unit. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b as the face light emitting unit 6023 on the front surface. Further, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped to imitate the mouth of a rabbit. The left and right front legs of a rabbit are imitated on the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, and the first arm portion 6016 and the second arm portion 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached. Further, at the lower end of the face substrate 6020, a body portion 6030, which is a plate-shaped member made of a white opaque synthetic resin, is provided to imitate the body portion of a rabbit. Further, the face cover portion 6010 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering are performed at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b, respectively. A portion 6011b is provided. Up to this point, the configuration is the same as that of the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 488 and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 513 (A), the face substrate 6020 does not include the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, and has a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the face substrate 6020 is concave toward the rear formed by the face cover portion upper surface portion 6012, the face cover portion right surface portion 6013, the face cover portion lower surface portion 6014, and the face cover portion left surface portion 6015 included in the face cover portion 6010. It is attached so that it fits into the part where it is. Further, in the face cover portion 6010, the upper surface of the face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 has a shape that protrudes upward at two positions on the left and right, so that the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are formed. Further, the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are formed by printing on the front surface of the face cover portion 6010 with brown ink.

When the rabbit accessory 6000 takes such an embodiment, the light from the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b is diffusely reflected by the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b. After that, the upper surface portion 6012 of the face cover portion, the right surface portion 6013 of the face cover portion, the lower surface portion 6014 of the face cover portion, the left surface portion 6015 of the face cover portion, the first ear portion 6021, the first ear decoration portion 6021a, and the second ear portion 6022. , The second ear decoration portion 6022a or the like may be reflected many times and the light may be directed backward.

Further, even when the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b included in the stump accessory 6100 shown in FIGS. 496 to 499 emit light, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall emit light. After the light from the light emitting portion 6354b is diffusely reflected by the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330 , There is a risk that light will be reflected and directed backward at the box left wall portion 6340 or the like.

Therefore, an example of improving the light utilization efficiency by reflecting the light that has been directed backward from the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 to the front side of the mountain accessory 6500 again is shown below.

FIG. 514 (A) shows the mountain accessory 6500. The dotted line in the figure indicates the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 are provided. Further, regarding the rabbit accessory 6000, the outer shape of the face substrate 6020 is also shown by a dotted line. The mountain accessory 6500 is composed of a mountain board 6520, a first mountain front cover 6540 provided on the front left side of the mountain board 6520, and a second mountain front cover 6560 provided on the front right side of the mountain board 6520.

The mountain board 6520 is composed of a printed circuit board whose front and rear surfaces are white. Further, on the front surface of the mountain board 6520, a plurality of LEDs constituting the mountain board front light emitting unit 6522 are mounted. Further, a mountain board opening 6524 is provided substantially in the center of the mountain board 6520 in the left-right direction. The mountain board opening 6524 is formed by providing a punched physical opening in the mountain board 6520. Members located rearward can be visually recognized through the mountain board opening 6524.

The first mountain front cover 6540 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, and includes a first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542, a first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544, and a first mountain front cover opening 6548. There is. With such a configuration, the white mountain substrate 6520 can be visually recognized by the color of the first mountain front cover 6540. Specifically, the color of the first Yamamae cover 6540 may be blue. In this case, it is possible to express a mode in which snow is piled up on the mountain or the mountain has a glacier. The first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed by providing a punched physical opening in the first mountain front cover 6540. Further, the first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed so as to straddle the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544. The mountain board 6520 located rearward through the first mountain front cover opening 6548 is visible in white. The second mountain front cover 6560 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and a second mountain front cover colorless light scattering portion 6564. With such a configuration, it is possible to express a mode in which snow is piled up on the mountain or the mountain has a glacier. Further, the mountain board opening 6524 and the first mountain front cover opening 6548 each decoratively express the mode in which a cave is located on the mountain by its shape.

On the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520, the mountain substrate front surface light emitting unit 6522a to the mountain substrate front surface ninth light emitting unit 6522i are provided as mountain substrate front light emitting units 6522. A colored transparent portion 6542 of the first mountain front cover is provided in front of the first light emitting portion 6522a on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A colored light scattering unit 6544 for the first mountain front cover is provided in front of the second light emitting unit 6522b on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A colored light scattering unit 6544 for the first mountain front cover is provided in front of the third light emitting unit 6522c on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a face substrate 6020 provided by the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is further in front of the first mountain front cover colored light scattering unit 6544. is doing. A colored transparent portion 6542 of the first mountain front cover is provided in front of the fourth light emitting portion 6522d on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a face substrate 6020 provided by the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is located in front of the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542. There is. A stump accessory 6100 is located in front of the fifth light emitting unit 6522e on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A stump accessory 6100 is located in front of the sixth light emitting unit 6522f on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover is provided in front of the seventh light emitting portion 6522g on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a stump accessory 6100 is located further in front of the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562. A colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover is provided in front of the eighth light emitting portion 6522h on the front surface of the mountain substrate. In front of the ninth light emitting unit 6522i on the front surface of the mountain substrate, a second mountain front cover colorless light scattering unit 6564 is provided.

The mountain accessory 6500 has a front view where the mountain board 6520 is exposed and is visible in white, and a region where the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the colored transparent portion 6542 of the first mountain front cover and is visible in light blue. The front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the colored light scattering part 6544 of the first mountain front cover and is visible in light blue, and the mountain board 6520 is not located behind the colored transparent part 6542 of the first mountain front cover and is transparent in blue. A region that can be visually recognized in blue, a region that can be seen translucently in blue without the mountain substrate 6520 located behind the colored light scattering portion 6542b of the first mountain front cover, and a mountain substrate opening 6524 that opens the area. The area where the rear member is visible in a hole shape, the area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and is visible in white, and the area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is visible are the first. It is composed of a region covered by the colorless light scattering portion 6564 of the two mountain front covers and visually visible in white, and a region in which the mountain substrate 6520 is not located behind the colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover and is visually visible. ing.

FIG. 514 (B) shows a state in which the above-mentioned rabbit accessory 6000 and stump accessory 6100 are provided in front of such a mountain accessory 6500. Behind the rabbit accessory 6000, there is an area where the mountain board 6520 is exposed and visible in white, and an area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the colored transparent portion 6542 of the first mountain front cover and is visible in light blue. The front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the colored light scattering portion 6544 of the first mountain front cover to provide a region that can be visually recognized in light blue, and the first rabbit accessory 6000 provided in the front in these regions is provided. By diffusely reflecting the light from the face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b toward the front, it is possible to improve the light utilization efficiency. Further, behind the stump accessory 6100, a region where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visually recognized in white, and the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with a colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover and is visually recognized in white. Regions are provided, and in these regions, the light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b provided in the stump accessory 6100 provided in front is diffusely reflected forward. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of light utilization. As described above, in this embodiment, one substrate is configured to include a plurality of reflection regions corresponding to each of the plurality of members including the light emitting portion.

When the mountain substrate 6520 located behind the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 is configured to reflect the light from the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 forward in this way, the rabbit role is used. It is desirable to increase the reflection efficiency in the substrate region hidden by the object 6000 and the stump accessory 6100. Specifically, it is desirable to adopt white or bright color as the color of the mountain substrate 6520. Further, in the substrate area hidden by the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 may be exposed without providing a cover in front, or a colorless and transparent cover may be provided when a cover is provided. It is good to configure it so that it does. In the example shown in FIG. 514 (A), the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed in the region corresponding to the right side of the front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. Further, in the region where the mountain board 6520 is exposed, electronic components such as the mountain board front light emitting portion 6522 are not mounted on the front surface of the mountain board 6520. Further, in the region corresponding to the stump accessory 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is either exposed or covered with the colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover. By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to further improve the light reflection efficiency in the forward direction.

Of the mountain substrate front light emitting portions 6522 provided on the mountain substrate 6520, the mountain substrate front first light emitting unit 6522a and the mountain substrate front fourth light emitting unit 6522d have the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 in front of the mountain substrate. For the front second light emitting unit 6522b and the mountain substrate front third light emitting unit 6522c, the first mountain front cover colored light scattering unit 6544 is in front, and for the mountain substrate front ninth light emitting unit 6522i, the second mountain front cover is in front. A colorless light scattering unit 6564 is provided. In this way, by providing a cover that is colored or scatters light in front of the light emitting portion 6522 on the front surface of the mountain substrate, the light from the light emitting portion is not directly irradiated to the eyes of the player. On the other hand, the fifth light emitting unit 6522e on the front surface of the mountain substrate and the sixth light emitting unit 6522f on the front surface of the mountain substrate are not provided with a cover in the front and are exposed on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520. This is used to illuminate the stump accessory 6100 located in front of the mountain substrate front surface fifth light emitting unit 6522e and the mountain substrate front surface sixth light emitting unit 6522f, and the mountain substrate front surface fifth light emitting unit 6522e, This is because the light from the sixth light emitting unit 6522f on the front surface of the mountain substrate is not directly applied to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the mountain substrate front light emitting portion 6522 inconspicuous. As described above, in the mountain accessory 6500, the mountain board front light emitting portion 6522 is not evenly arranged on the front surface of the mountain board 6500, but the first mountain front cover 6540 located in front of the mountain board front light emitting portion 6522. It is unevenly distributed corresponding to the second mountain front cover 6560, the rabbit accessory 6000, and the stump accessory 6100.

FIG. 514 (C) shows the rabbit accessory 6000 in a state of being moved from the standby position to the moving position by a dotted line. In this state, the third light emitting unit 6522c on the front surface of the mountain board and the fourth light emitting unit 6522d on the front surface of the mountain board, which had been located behind the rabbit accessory 6000 in front view, are configured to be visible to the player in front view. Has been done. The rabbit accessory 6000 can not only emit light in the state of being in the standby position as described above, but can also emit light in a predetermined color as an effect even in the state of being in the moving position. At this time, the game board side effect display device 1600 may display the effect with the same emission color as the emission color of the rabbit accessory 6000. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is made to emit white light, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured to perform an effect of displaying a white line extending radially from the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 is located. May be good.

FIG. 514 (C) shows the rabbit accessory 6000 in a state of being moved from the standby position to the moving position by a dotted line. A third light emitting unit 6522c on the front surface of the mountain substrate and a fourth light emitting unit 6522d on the front surface of the mountain substrate are provided behind the rabbit accessory 6000 when viewed from the front. Even when the 6000 is in the moving position, it is possible to emit light in a predetermined color as an effect. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position, the mountain substrate front light emitting unit 6522 may be configured to emit light in white at the same time as the display of the white line on the game board side effect display device 1600.

When the third light emitting unit 6522c on the front surface of the mountain substrate and the fourth light emitting unit 6522d on the front surface of the mountain substrate are in the light emitting mode as the effect while the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the upper surface portion of the face cover portion of the rabbit accessory 6000 Light emitted from the mountain substrate front third light emitting unit 6522c and the mountain substrate front fourth light emitting unit 6522d passes through 6012, the face cover right surface 6013, the face cover lower surface 6014, and the face cover left surface 6015. , The contour of the rabbit's face is the light emitting mode. At this time, on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000, the light emitted from the mountain substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6522c and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting unit 6522d is diffusely reflected backward. Then, this light is again diffusely reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain accessory 6500. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light.

In the example shown in FIG. 514, the mountain accessory 6500 is configured to be larger than the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 in the area in the front view, but the area in the front view is the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory. An accessory smaller than the object 6100 may be arranged behind the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 so as to exhibit the same function as the mountain accessory 6500. For example, such an accessory may be arranged so as to fit within the region formed by the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump plate portion 6210 of the stump accessory 6100 in the front view. Further, as such an accessory, for example, the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 500 (A), 501 (A), 504 (A), 510 (A) to 510 (D) is white. The front surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be exposed, or the front surface of the white grass substrate 6420 may be covered with the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover. Even in such a configuration, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 or the white grass substrate 6420 whose front surface is covered with the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover from the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100. It is possible to diffusely reflect light forward.

In the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 513, the entire face substrate 6020 is completely accommodated in the face cover portion 6010 when viewed from the front. Such an aspect may be applied to the relationship between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass accessory 6400 described above. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is accommodated in the grass front cover 6440 in a front view. Alternatively, it may be applied to the relationship between the grass cover 6460 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass accessory 6400. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is accommodated in the grass back cover 6460 in a front view. Specifically, for example, a plurality of substrates having a flower-like shape are not overlapped with each other in front view with respect to the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 and the front surface of the grass rear cover 6460, and further, the grass front. It may be configured to be attached to the cover 6440 or the grass cover 6460 so that the entire substrate is completely fitted. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to realize decoration by a combination of the substrate and the grass front cover 6440 or a combination of the substrate and the grass back cover 6460. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the substrate and the cover are provided.

As shown in FIG. 495, in the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. There are multiple accessories in the space. Among these characters, the first giant tree character 6600, the second giant tree character 6650, the first cloud character 6700, the second cloud character 6750, and the board back grass character are located close to the back surface of the game panel 1100. 6800 is provided. These are visible through the colorless and transparent synthetic resin game panel 1100, and have a function of decorating the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant tree accessory 6650 are provided so as to cover the left and right sides of the back surface of the game panel 1100. Specifically, it is composed of a first giant tree accessory 6600 located on the left side of the back surface of the game panel 1100 and a second giant tree accessory 6650 located on the right side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630. The first giant tree trunk board 6610 is composed of a brown printed circuit board, and the first giant tree leaf board 6630 is composed of a green printed circuit board. A plurality of light sources made of LEDs are arranged on the rear surfaces of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the directions of these light sources are to the right. The second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. The second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 is composed of a brown substrate, and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 is composed of a green substrate. A plurality of light sources made of LEDs are arranged on the rear surfaces of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6680, and the directions of these light sources are set to the left. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. However, each of these substrates may be configured to adopt the structure according to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 512 (G).

The first cloud accessory 6700 and the second cloud accessory 6750 are provided so as to cover above the back surface of the game panel 1100. The first cloud accessory 6700 and the second cloud accessory 6750 are each composed of a white printed circuit board. For each of these substrates, the structure according to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 512 (G) may be adopted.

The first giant tree leaf substrate 6630 that constitutes the first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 that constitutes the second giant tree accessory 6650 are from the end of the game panel 1100, within the game area 5a, and further to the game. It is configured to be continuously visible to the player over the panel opening 1100a. Further, the second cloud accessory 6750 is configured to be continuously visible to the player from the outside of the game area 5a, into the game area 5a, and further to the game panel opening 1100a. On the other hand, the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630 constituting the first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 constituting the second giant tree accessory 6650 are placed over the upper left and upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600. The game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so as not to look like a square. The mountain accessory 6500 is also provided so as to catch up with the lower left and lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the game board side effect display device 1600 does not look like a square. Further, the mountain accessory 6500 is provided at a position closest to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the accessories provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 515 shows the board back grass accessory 6800. The board back grass accessory 6800 is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100 so as to cover the lower side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The board back grass accessory 6800 is composed of a board back grass substrate 6820 and a board back grass front cover 6840. The board back grass front cover 6840 may be made of, for example, a colored transparent synthetic resin, and specifically, a green transparent synthetic resin. Regarding the relationship between the board back grass substrate 6820 and the board back grass front cover 6840, the structure related to the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 500 (A) to 512 (G) is adopted. It may be configured to do so. Similarly, the structure related to the grass back cover 6460 may be adopted for the board back grass accessory 6800.

The board back grass accessory 6800 has a passing portion for passing a game ball that has passed through an opening provided in the game panel 1100 by winning a prize in a winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 located on the front side. As a result, a circular board back grass substrate opening 6824 and a board back grass front cover opening 6848 are provided. The game ball that has passed through the board back grass substrate opening 6824 and the board back grass front cover opening 6848 is detected by a sensor provided in the board back grass accessory 6800. Further, the sensor for detecting the game ball is attached below each passing portion and on the back surface of the board back grass substrate 6820. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the existence of the sensor. As shown below, the board back grass substrate first opening 6824a to the board back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d as the board back grass substrate opening 6824 are used as the board back grass front cover opening 6848 to cover the board back grass front cover. The first opening 6848a to the back cover of the board, the fourth opening 6848d, are provided.

The first opening 6824a of the back grass substrate and the first opening 6848a of the front cover of the back grass of the board are circular in the same size, and are provided at positions where they overlap each other in the board back grass accessory 6800 in the front view. Then, the game ball moved to the back surface of the game panel 1100 by winning a prize in the winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass substrate first opening 6824a and the board back grass front cover first opening 6848a. It forms a passing portion for passing through.

The front surface of the board back grass substrate second opening 6824b is not covered with the board back grass front cover 6840, and constitutes a passing portion for allowing the game ball to pass directly through the exposed board back grass substrate 6820.

The board back grass front cover second opening 6848b does not have the board back grass substrate 6820 located behind it, and only the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b constitutes a passing portion for directly passing the game ball. is doing. In this example, the shape of the board back grass substrate 6820 is formed along the contour below the second opening 6848b of the board back grass front cover. With such a configuration, while making the shape of the board back grass substrate 6820 a decorative outer shape, a passage that guides the game ball that has passed through the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b to the sensor located below. It is possible to make it as difficult to see as possible.

The third opening 6824c of the back grass substrate and the third opening 6848c of the front cover of the back grass of the board are circular in the same size, and are provided at positions where they overlap each other in the board back grass accessory 6800 in the front view. Then, the game ball that has moved to the back surface of the game panel 1100 by winning a prize in the winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c. It forms a passing portion for passing through. Then, in this example, two elliptical regions are formed on the board back grass front cover 6840 at the upper part of the passing portion formed by the board back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c. By doing so, the decorative shape that imitates the head of a rabbit can be visually recognized. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as a part of the decorative shape, the existence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the board back grass accessory 6800 can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations such as damage to the above.

The fourth opening 6824d of the back grass substrate and the fourth opening 6848d of the back cover of the board have the same size and shape, respectively, and have a shape in which two elliptical portions protrude above the outer shape of the circular shape. I'm doing it. Further, these are provided at positions where they overlap with each other in the front view of the board back grass accessory 6800. Then, the game ball moved to the back surface of the game panel 1100 by winning a prize in the winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d and the board back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d. It forms a passing portion for passing through. In this example, the shapes of the board back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c are visually recognizable as decorative shapes imitating the head of a rabbit. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as a part of the decorative shape, the existence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the board back grass accessory 6800 can be made inconspicuous. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of situations such as damage to the above.

In addition, it is preferable to arrange a tubular member formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in the passing portion through which the game ball passes so that the game ball can pass through. Further, it is preferable that the tubular member is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, and the color of the synthetic resin is the same as that of the board back grass front cover 6840 or the same color as the board back grass substrate 6820. With such a configuration, the presence of the tubular member can be made inconspicuous, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the decorative function of the board back grass accessory 6800 is impaired. ..

The 1st giant tree accessory 6600, the 2nd giant tree accessory 6650, the 1st cloud accessory 6700, the 2nd cloud accessory 6750, and the board back grass accessory 6800 are attached to the front of the game panel 1100, respectively. It is located behind the game panel 1100 in a manner straddling the rail member 5950. As a result, each accessory can be visually recognized as a decoration without being aware of the existence of the rail member 5950. The entire rail member 5950 may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Alternatively, the rail member 5950 may be composed of a plurality of members in the longitudinal direction, and at least one of the members may be composed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, the visibility of each accessory located behind is improved, and the range in which decoration is performed can be expanded. Further, the rail member 5950 may be formed of a synthetic resin having the same color as the accessory located at the rear. For example, when the board back grass accessory 6800 is visible in green, the rail member 5950 provided at a position where it overlaps the board back grass accessory 6800 in front view may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

When the game ball driven into the game area 5a is charged, an electric discharge is generated at an unintended place, an electronic component is damaged due to a high voltage, or an electromagnetic pulse generated by the electric discharge causes an unintended illegal operation of the control element. There is a risk of control. In particular, a role provided with a printed circuit board on which electronic components are mounted, such as the first giant tree accessory 6600, the second giant tree accessory 6650, the first cloud accessory 6700, the second cloud accessory 6750, and the board back grass accessory 6800. When an object is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, such a situation is more likely to occur in the electronic components mounted on these boards.

Therefore, in those accessories having a front cover, at least a part of the front cover may be configured to have a silver opaque portion formed by the above-mentioned metal thin film. More specifically, it is preferable to provide the front cover so that such an opaque portion is located in front of the portion where the electronic component is mounted on the substrate. Further, each accessory may be provided so that the front surface of each accessory that may be affected by such a charged game ball does not come into contact with the back surface of the game panel 1100. Alternatively, in the area where the charged game ball rolls and falls and overlaps with the game area 5a in front view, at least each accessory is provided so that the front surface of each accessory does not come into contact with the back surface of the game panel 1100. It may be configured.

Further, it is desirable that the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 and the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided on each accessory are as different as possible. For example, a ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 may be finally installed on the island facility via a ground circuit provided on each accessory, or conversely, a ground wire on each accessory may be provided on the game panel 1100. It is not preferable to finally install it in the island facility via the ground circuit. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a ground circuit board having a static elimination function at a predetermined position on the back surface of the gaming machine so that the ground path from the game panel 1100 and the ground path from each accessory merge on the ground circuit board. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the influence of the charged game ball driven into the game area 5a.

In FIGS. 487 and 495, an example in which the board back grass accessory 6800 is provided below the back surface of the game panel 1100 has been shown. The object 6100 may be configured to be provided below the back surface of the game panel 1100. Also in this case, the light diffusely reflected backward from the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 can be reflected forward again to improve the light utilization efficiency. In addition, using the function of reflection of the mountain board 6520, the winning opening unit equipped with other decorative accessories and winning openings should be arranged in front of the mountain accessories in the same manner as the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100. It may be configured as. Even in this case, the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the decorative accessory or the winning school unit and diffusely reflected backward can be reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520.

Further, by providing a plurality of columnar spacers on the back surface of the front cover constituting these accessories, the front surface of the substrate does not come into contact with the top of the spacer and does not come into direct contact with the back surface of the front cover. You may. Specifically, as the structure of each spacer, it is preferable to adopt a columnar structure having a height of about 2 mm and a diameter of about 2 mm perpendicular to the back surface of the front cover. Further, the spacer may be integrally molded with the same material for the front cover. Further, when the front cover has a plurality of regions, the spacer may be configured to be provided in a region where the rear is hard to see. For example, it is preferable to integrally mold the colored transparent portion, the colored light scattering portion, and the spacer of the front cover with a green transparent synthetic resin. At this time, the spacer becomes transparent in green. Further, in this case, it is preferable not to provide a spacer in the colored transparent portion but to provide a spacer in the colored light scattering portion. By providing the spacer having such a configuration, the front cover and the substrate are arranged in parallel with the heights of the spacers separated. With such a configuration, the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100 is decorated by the front cover, and the substrate is decorated at a position several mm behind the front cover. At this time, since the substrate is located at the rear side as compared with the case where the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100 is decorated with the substrate, the decorative effect is exhibited by the color of the substrate and the outer shape of the substrate. However, the presence of through holes and electronic components provided on the substrate can be made less noticeable to the player. Further, by separating the back surface of the game panel 1100 from the substrate, it is possible to reduce the influence of the electric discharge from the charged game ball and the electromagnetic pulse on the substrate.

The board back grass accessory 6800, the first giant tree accessory 6600, the second giant tree accessory 6650, the first cloud accessory 6700, and the second cloud accessory 6750 are each provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100. .. Specifically, it is arranged on the front side of the intermediate position between the surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back surface of the game panel 1100. Also, in the space between the board back grass role 6800, the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the game board side production display device 1600. Is provided with a rabbit accessory 6000 and a stump accessory 6100 as movable accessories. The rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 600 may be provided at the lower part of the game panel 1100 on which the board back grass accessory 6800 is provided.

In the accessory without a front cover, such as the first giant tree accessory 6600, the second giant tree accessory 6650, the first cloud accessory 6700, and the second cloud accessory 6750, a light emitting portion is provided on the front surface of the substrate. In this case, a scattering portion that scatters the light emitted from the light emitting portion may be formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100 that overlaps the light emitting portion in the front view. Alternatively, in these accessories, even when a colored transparent or colorless transparent front cover is provided at a position overlapping the light emitting portion in front view, a scattering portion is similarly formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100. You may.

Although FIGS. 496 to 499 show an example in which the stump accessory 6100 is provided, the members constituting the stump accessory 6100 may be movable as an effect. For example, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 constituting the stump box portion 6300 may be movable as an effect.

In FIGS. 516 (A) to 516 (D), in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 498 (A) and 499 (A), the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are moved from the standby positions. It is a figure which showed the state which moved to a position. FIG. 516 (A) shows an example in which the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved rearward until the front end portion of the box upper wall portion 6310 is in contact with the upper end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. FIG. 516 (B) shows an example in which the box right wall portion 6320 is moved to the left rear until the front end portion of the box right wall portion 6320 is in contact with the right end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. FIG. 516 (C) shows an example in which the box lower wall portion 6330 is moved rearward until the front end portion of the box lower wall portion 6330 is in contact with the lower end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. FIG. 516 (D) shows an example in which the box right wall portion 6320 is moved to the rear right until the front end portion of the box right wall portion 6320 is in contact with the left end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. In addition, only one wall portion of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable as shown, and the other wall portion may be configured to be immovable, or the box upper wall portion may be configured to be immovable. A plurality of wall portions of the portions 6310 to the left wall portion of the box 6340 may be configured to be movable. For example, all of the upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable.

With such a configuration, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall to the stump plate portion 6210, the first grass movable portion 6360, and the second grass movable portion 6370 provided in front of the stump box portion 6300. The mode of irradiating the light from the light emitting unit 6354b can be changed. For example, before moving the box upper wall portion 6310 backward, light is reflected on each inner wall of the stump box portion 6300, and the stump plate portion 6210 is illuminated in a shape corresponding to the front shape of the stump box portion 6300. The Rukoto. On the other hand, in the state where the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved rearward, the light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is not reflected by the box upper wall portion 6310, so that the rear wall emitting light is emitted. The light emitted obliquely upward from the portion 6354 goes straight ahead and illuminates the back side of the stump plate portion 6210. Therefore, in addition to the shape corresponding to the front shape of the stump box portion 6300, the stump plate portion 6210 is also illuminated in the region above the front surface of the stump box portion 6300. By moving the box upper wall portion 6310 in this way, it is possible to change the illuminated area. Even when the box right wall portion 6320 to the box left wall portion 6340 are slid backward instead of the box upper wall portion 6310, the illuminated area is changed according to each moved wall portion. It becomes possible to make it.

Further, the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured so as to be able to move in the front-rear direction while maintaining its inclination. For example, from the state shown in FIGS. 498 (A) and 499 (A), the upper end of the box rear wall portion 6350 is the front end of the box upper wall portion 6310, and the lower end of the box rear wall portion 6350 is the box lower wall portion 6330. The box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable forward so as to be in contact with the front ends. Further, it may be configured to be movable rearward from the state shown in FIG. 498 (A).

Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be rotatable with respect to the box rear wall portion 6350. For example, the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 have a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the side formed by the box right wall portion 6320 and the box rear wall portion 6350, the box left wall portion 6340. It may be configured to be rotatable about the side formed by the box rear wall portion 6350 and the box rear wall portion 6350. Then, by rotating the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 inward, the front surface of the box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be covered by the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340, or the box. By rotating the right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 outward, the box rear wall portion 6350 and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be in a parallel state. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the box rear wall portion 6350 has the same embodiment as the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340. It may be configured to be rotatable with respect to.

An example in which the rear wall portion 6350 of the box can be moved is shown. In the examples shown in FIGS. 498 (A) to 498 (D), the rear wall substrate 6352 provided with the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is fixedly provided and rear of the box. The rear wall cover 6356 constituting the wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable or movable in the front-rear direction in the same manner as the box rear wall portion 6350 described above. When the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated, the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 can be directly irradiated to the stump opening 6210a without passing through the rear wall cover 6356. On the other hand, when the rear wall cover 6356 is moved forward, a distance is created between the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, and the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 spreads radially to the rear wall. It is possible to illuminate the entire cover 6356. When such an aspect is adopted, the region other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b in the rear wall cover 6356 may also be a scattering portion. With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 can be moved in the front-rear direction, so that a part of the rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated and the entire rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated. Can be made visible to the player.

In the example shown in FIGS. 499 (A) to 499 (D), the rear wall plate portion 6380 is fixedly provided, and the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 are attached to the rear wall plate portion 6380 in the above-mentioned box. Similar to the rear wall portion 6350, it may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction.

Examples have been shown in which the fixedly provided members may be movable, but in these examples, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the like after the members have finished moving before they start moving. The second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b may be configured to continuously maintain a predetermined light emitting mode. As a predetermined light emitting mode, for example, a mode in which the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b continue to light, periodically blink, or turn off without emitting light is adopted. You may try to do it. Further, when the light emitting mode of continuously lighting or periodically blinking is executed in this way, it may be configured to continue emitting light in the same color. With such a configuration, the light emitting mode of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is not changed, but the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356. By moving the members such as the above, it is possible to change the effect mode visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, even if the light emitting mode of the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b is changed in the period from the timing when the movement of the member is started to the timing when the movement of the member is finished good. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a more complicated production mode.

An example of moving members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 as an effect is shown from the state shown in FIGS. 498 and 499. By moving the members such as the wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 as an effect, the moved predetermined member 1 may be configured to be in the state shown in FIGS. 498 and 499. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect mode visually recognized by the player.

Although the example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move in the left-right direction and the like is shown, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured not to move. Even with such a configuration, the light emitting mode of the stump accessory 6100 can be diversified by moving members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356. Further, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured as one member. In this case, the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a may be configured as one decoration portion, or may be configured as a plurality of decoration portions. Further, the first grass decoration part 6360a and the second grass decoration part 6370a are made colored and translucent by a method such as painting and sticking a sticker, and when the light from the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is irradiated forward, the first grass The decorative portion 6360a and the second grass decorative portion 6370a may be configured to be in an effect state by being exposed to light.

Further, as shown below, the stump box portion 6300 and the grass plate portion 6381 constitute the stump accessory 6100 without providing the first grass movable portion 6360, the second grass movable portion 6370, and the stump plate portion 6210. It may be configured as.

FIG. 517 shows an example in which the stump plate portion 6210 is not provided in front of the stump box portion 6300, and a fixed grass plate portion 6381 is provided in place of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. Is shown. The grass plate portion may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Further, the grass plate portion 6381 has a plurality of decorative portions. Specifically, a green grass plate colored transparent portion 6381a that imitates the outer shape of grass, a grass plate central decoration portion 6382a that imitates the shape of an animal's face, a grass plate top decoration portion 6382b, a grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, It includes a decorative portion 6382d under the grass plate, a decorative portion 6382e on the left side of the grass plate, and a colorless and transparent grass plate colorless transparent portion 6381b which is a region other than these. The grass plate colored transparent part 6381a, the grass board center decoration part 6382a, the grass board upper decoration part 6382b, the grass board right decoration part 6382c, the grass board lower decoration part 6382d, and the grass board left decoration part 6382e are each made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. It is constructed by printing or attaching a seal to the front surface or the rear surface of the grass plate portion 6381 to be constructed. The shape of the animal's face and ears is linearly formed in the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a, and the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the grass plate upper decoration part 6382b, the grass board right decoration part 6382c, the grass board lower decoration part 6382d, and the grass board left decoration part 6382e have a shape imitating an animal face and are translucent or colored transparent that can transmit light. It is configured in.

In such a configuration, as described above, the members such as the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 are moved. By doing so, it is possible to change the lighting mode of the grass plate central decoration portion 6382a, the grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e. In particular, the grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e were irradiated with light from a state in which almost no light was irradiated until then. It can be changed into a mode, and a shape imitating the face of each animal can be configured to be visible to the player.

The stump box portion 6300 is a box-shaped box having each surface is the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350, and has no front surface. Although it has a shape, it may be configured to change the position, size, and shape of at least one of these members.

FIG. 518 shows a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 517. In this example, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a rectangular shape having the same width as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are relative to the box rear wall portion 6350. By providing the stump box portion 6300 at a right angle, the stump box portion 6300 is formed into a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the stump plate portion 6210 is not provided, and the grass plate portion 6381 is located close to the front of the opening of the stump box portion 6300. is doing. In such a configuration, as described above, as an effect, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set as a light emitting mode, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are used. By configuring it to rotate or slide in the front-rear direction, it is possible to change the irradiation mode of the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 to the grass plate portion 6381. Further, in accordance with the rectangular parallelepiped shape of the stump box portion 6300, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c is moved to the left side and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e is moved to the right side as compared with the example shown in FIG. 517. It is provided at the above position.

519 to 521 show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 518. In the examples shown in FIGS. 519 to 521, the shape and mounting mode of the box rear wall portion 6350 are different from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 519 (A), the rear wall portion 6350 of the box is provided at a position shifted by half to the left in the front view. FIG. 519 (B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 519 (A).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 520 (A), the entire rear wall portion 6350 of the box is configured to be doubled in length in the left direction when viewed from the front. FIG. 520 (B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 520 (A). FIG. 522 (A) is a diagram showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modified example shown in FIG. 520 (A). Further, FIG. 522 (B) is a diagram showing a rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 520 (A).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 521 (A), the rear wall portion 6350 of the box is configured to be reduced to half the size in the left direction when viewed from the front. FIG. 521 (B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 521 (A). FIG. 522 (C) is a diagram showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modified example shown in FIG. 521 (A). Further, FIG. 522 (D) is a diagram showing a rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 521 (A).

Under such a premise, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b included in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 519 (A) and 520 (A) (details are shown in FIG. 499 (A), FIG. 499 (B), FIG. 522 (A), and FIG. 522 (B)) are in a light emitting state, and the grass plate center decoration portion 6382a and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e are illuminated from behind. It becomes possible to. Here, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310 to the rear, it is possible to bring the grass plate upper decorative portion 6382b into a light emitting decorative state. On the other hand, the amount of light emitted to the central decorative portion 6382a of the grass plate is reduced, so that the portion is relatively inconspicuous. Further, when the box right wall portion 6320 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are moved rearward instead of the box upper wall portion 6310, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c and the grass plate lower decorative portion 6382d are placed in a light emitting decorative state. can do. An example in which both the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are made to emit light is shown, but in the example shown in FIG. 520 (A), from the stump box portion 6300 to the left side in front view. In the protruding region, it may be configured so as not to emit light. In this case, only the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a can be in the light emitting decorative state. From this state, as described above, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330 may be configured to be moved rearward.

Further, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b (see FIGS. 522 (C) and 522 (D) for details) included in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIG. 521 (A) are emitted. In this state, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a can be in a light emitting decorative state illuminated from the rear. Here, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310 to the rear, it is possible to bring the grass plate upper decorative portion 6382b into a light emitting decorative state. On the other hand, the amount of light emitted to the central decorative portion 6382a of the grass plate is reduced, so that the portion is relatively inconspicuous. Further, when the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are moved rearward instead of the box upper wall portion 6310, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c and the grass plate lower decoration portion are moved. The 6382d and the left decorative portion 6382e of the grass plate can be put into a light emitting decorative state.

In this way, in the state where the grass plate central decoration portion 6382a is light-emitting decorated, the grass is moved backward by moving the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 to the rear. The upper plate decorative portion 6382b, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decorative portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e can be put into a light emitting decorative state. At this time, the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is put into a light emitting decorative state due to a weaker amount of light than before. In this way, by setting the grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e to the light emitting decorative state, some state in the gaming machine is suggested or notified. It may be configured as follows. For example, when four states having different advantages for the player are occurring or can occur, the decoration portion 6382b on the grass plate is set to the light emitting decorative state corresponding to the most advantageous state, which is the second most advantageous. The grass plate right decorative portion 6382c is set to the light emitting decorative state, and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e is set to the light emitting decorative state corresponding to the third advantageous state. The decorative portion 6382d under the grass plate may be configured to be in a light emitting decorative state. With such an aspect, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation as to which wall portion will move in the state where the grass plate central decorative portion 6382a is light-emittingly decorated.

Alternatively, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are turned off, and the grass plate center decoration portion 6382a is not light emitting decorated. First, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320 are turned off. After a predetermined time has elapsed by moving either the box lower wall portion 6330 or the box left wall portion 6340 to the rear, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are set to emit light. good. With such a configuration, the player can see which of the grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e can be visually recognized. It is possible to notify in advance. In this case, each wall portion is provided in a state of being upright with respect to the front direction, and the player cannot always notice that each wall portion has moved. Therefore, the player who can notice the movement of one of the wall parts has a great expectation and watches the subsequent change to the light emitting decoration mode of any of the decoration parts, which improves the interest of the game. Is possible.

Further, for example, in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (so-called normal gaming state, etc.), the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 is set to the front position (non-operating position), and the front grass plate central decoration portion 6382a Only in the limited shipping decoration mode, the box upper wall part 6310 to the box left wall part only when it is in a state advantageous to the player (for example, a probability fluctuation state, a time saving game state, a jackpot game state). The 6340 may be moved rearward to increase the area in which the decorative portion 6382b on the grass plate to the decorative portion 6382e on the left side of the grass plate are also irradiated with light to form a light emitting decoration mode. As a result, the appearance of the light emitting region can be changed according to the interest of the player, which is improved by shifting from the unfavorable gaming state to the advantageous gaming state.

In the example shown with reference to FIGS. 519 (A) and 521 (A), an opening is provided on the right side of the box rear wall portion 6350. In this case, for example, in the front-rear direction. The moving decorative member may be configured to appear and disappear from the opening.

With reference to FIGS. 519 (A) to 522 (D), an example is shown in which the rear wall portion 6350 of the box is provided by shifting it to the left, or expanding or contracting it. However, it may be configured to be staggered, enlarged or reduced in the same manner. Further, the structure of the stump box portion 6300 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 498, and the example shown in FIG. 499 may be adopted.

Although FIGS. 498 to 499 show an example in which the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are provided on the box rear wall portion 6350, the box upper wall portion 6310 is replaced with the box rear wall portion 6350. ~ At least one wall portion of the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be provided with a configuration related to light emission such as a light emitting portion or a light scattering portion.

Specifically, in the modified example shown with reference to FIGS. 517 (A) to 522 (D), the box upper wall portion 6310 has a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion described with reference to FIGS. 498 and 499. May be provided to illuminate the inside of the stump box portion 6300 and the grass plate portion 6381. At this time, at least one wall portion of the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 is moved rearward as in the example shown in FIGS. 516 (A) to 516 (D). It is good to configure in. With such a configuration, in the grass plate portion 6381, from the state where only the front region corresponding to the opening of the stump box portion 6300 is mainly illuminated, it is added to the front of the opening of the stump box portion 6300. It is also possible to illuminate the right side, the bottom side, and the left side. An example was shown in which a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion were provided on the box upper wall portion 6310 to illuminate the inside of the stump box portion 6300, but instead of the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320 , The box lower wall portion 6330 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be provided with a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion, and the illumination mode may be changed by moving each wall portion.

The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are each configured in a plate shape having the same thickness. The structure may be such that the inner wall of the wall portion is inclined outward so that the thickness of the wall portion becomes thin. With such a configuration, the light reflected in the stump box portion 6300 can be more reflected forward.

In order to move the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 and change the mode of irradiating the grass plate portion 6381 with light as described above, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 is colored and opaque. It is preferable to provide a reflecting portion capable of reflecting light and a scattering portion capable of scattering light by forming the inner wall of the material with a thin film of aluminum. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode in which the mode of irradiating the grass plate portion 6381 with light changes more conspicuous. Even when the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 is formed of a colorless transparent and colored transparent material and the inner and outer walls thereof are made smooth, the mode of irradiating the grass plate portion 6381 with light is changed. It is possible to make it.

As described above, the members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be deformed so as to be movable, but the movable member may be only one of these members. Alternatively, any plurality of members may be movable, or all members may be movable. For example, only the box upper wall portion 6310 may be movable, and other members may be fixedly provided so as not to be movable. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320 may be movable, and other members may be fixedly provided so as not to be movable. .. Further, all of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be movable. Even with such a configuration, the light emitting decoration mode for the grass plate portion 6381 can be changed.

The box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, and the like may be moved by a drive means (not shown) by the peripheral control board 1510. Further, it is preferable that the light emission of the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a, the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b, and the like is also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

By exemplifying FIGS. 487 to 522, various movable bodies (rabbit accessory 6000, stump accessory 6100, etc.) used for directing and decorating the game board 5 included in the pachinko machine 1; hereinafter, movable bodies in the game board. Although the embodiment in which the pachinko machine 1 is provided is shown below, a movable body (hereinafter, may be referred to as a frame movable body) used for directing or decorating the door frame 3 provided in the pachinko machine 1 is shown. An embodiment to be provided is shown.

FIGS. 523 (A) to 523 (E) show the door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3 as a frame movable body with a right ear frame movable body 7100 that imitates the ears of an animal (specifically, a rabbit). An embodiment in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is provided is shown. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can move in the vertical direction, but the specific structure and operation mode will be described later.

523 (A) and 523 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 523 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 523 (D) and 523 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 523 (A), 523 (C), and 523 (D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIGS. 523 (B) and 523 (E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 project upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 523 (D) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570.

In the present embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is provided above the door frame 3. A glass unit 190 is provided in the central portion of the door frame 3, and the game area 5a located behind, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and various movable bodies in the game board are provided through the glass unit 190. (Rabbit accessory 6000, stump accessory 6100, etc.) are visible. A dish unit 320 and a handle unit 300 are provided at the lower part of the door frame 3. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with an operation button 410, and can accept an operation input by a player. In the drawing, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the like are not shown.

The door frame top unit 570 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its upper surface, right side surface, and left side surface are the upper surface, right side surface, and left side surface of the door frame base unit 100 constituting the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. It is provided so that it overlaps when viewed from the front. The door frame top unit 570 is formed of a white, translucent synthetic resin with a thickness of about several mm, and is capable of transmitting light. The door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 corresponding to the right ear frame movable body 7100 that can move up and down, and a door corresponding to the left ear frame movable body 7200 that can move up and down. The frame top unit is provided with an upper left ear opening 7010.

As shown in FIGS. 523 (A) to 523 (E), the door frame top unit 570 according to the present embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. There is. The specific structure and operation mode of these are shown below. Since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have basically the same structure, only the right ear frame movable body 7100 may be described as a representative in the following description.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a front-facing right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and a rear-facing right ear frame movable body second surface 7120. ing. The first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body is made of the inner decorative portion 7112 of the first surface of the right ear frame movable body made of a colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin on the inner side and the white translucent synthetic resin on the outer side. It has a right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. The surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 other than the first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear frame movable body second surface 7120) are outside the first surface of the right ear frame movable body. It is formed of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the decorative portion 7114. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

Inside the right ear frame movable body 7100, a right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116 is provided at a position where it overlaps with the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 in front view. Further, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 is provided at a position where it overlaps with the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 in front view. Specifically, the light emitting portion 7116 inside the movable body of the right ear frame is composed of a printed circuit board coated on both sides with a white protective film, and a light emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player side is mounted on the surface thereof. Has been done. The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting unit 7116 and the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting unit 7118 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode toward the front under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, and the right ear frame can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode. It is possible to illuminate the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 by the movable body inner light emitting portion 7116 and the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 by the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118. Is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are shown in FIGS. 523 (A), 523 (C), and 523 (D), respectively, by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. From the state of being stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 (first state), vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 523 (B) and 523 (E). It is possible to control to a protruding state (second state). The upper surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are formed flush with the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 in a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. Has been done. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a shape imitating an animal ear, and are housed in the door frame top unit 570 and project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to express the state in which the animal's ears move in a decorative manner by taking the state of the door.

In the present embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is formed of a white translucent synthetic resin to a thickness of about several mm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 523 (A), with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 housed in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116 and the right ear frame When the movable body outer light emitting unit 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting unit 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting unit 7218 are made to emit light in a predetermined manner, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is made to emit light vaguely. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state. The same structure may be adopted for the door frame top unit 570 in the other embodiment, and in this case as well, the light emitted from the light emitting portion provided corresponding to the frame movable body is the door frame top. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the door frame top unit 570 in a state where the front surface and the side surface of the door frame top unit 570 are vaguely emitted by light by being reflected and scattered in the unit 570.

On the other hand, in a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118, and the left ear frame When the movable body inner light emitting portion 7216 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7218 are made to emit light in a predetermined mode, the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion having the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110. 7112 and the right ear frame movable body 1st surface outer decoration part 7114, the left ear frame movable body 1st surface 7210 have the left ear frame movable body 1st surface inner decoration part 7212 and the left ear frame movable body 1st surface outer decoration part It is possible for the player to visually recognize the 7214 in a predetermined light emitting effect state.

In this way, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a frame movable body) move, a part of the frame movable body becomes the outer frame 2 or the door frame base unit 100. Since it is located above the upper surface, it occupies more area for the player's view when looking up, and it seems that the volume of the housing has increased, giving the player unprecedented surprise and fun. It becomes possible to give to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B), the game board side is matched with the specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the operation mode of the frame movable body. Display mode of the frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, with respect to the operation button 410 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an operation unit). Operation reception mode of the player, right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116, right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118, left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7216, left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 (hereinafter, frame) An example of the effect of combining the light emitting modes in the movable body light emitting unit) is shown.

FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B) show the operation mode of the frame movable body and the frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, respectively. It is a time chart which showed the state, the acceptance state of the operation part, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the light emission effect state of the frame movable body light emitting part.

In the time charts shown in FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B), t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are described according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effect. The time between each timing is 1 second. Further, these points are shown in the drawings of FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B), 539 (A) to 540 (B), 548 (A) to 549 (B), which will be described later, and these. The same applies to each drawing and the like obtained by modifying.

FIG. 524 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 524 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 525 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 525 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B), the mode in which the frame movable body moves, the mode in which the frame movable body simulated image is displayed, the timing at which the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the operation instruction display are displayed. The timing at which the frame is started and the timing at which the light emitting portion of the movable frame is turned off from the light emitting effect state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body changes from the extinguished state to the light emitting effect state or the specific light emitting effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Hereinafter, specific production examples in each production pattern will be shown with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). It is in a state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state or a standby state). In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise at the same time. Is started (timing t7).

At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image imitating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulated image is composed of an image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. As for the frame movable body simulated image, the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise as the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise. It is dynamically displayed in the manner in which it is used. The frame movable body simulated image is an image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable in accordance with the timing (timing t9) when the ascending of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 ends. The ascent of the image imitating the body 7200 is completed, and after that, it continues to be displayed in a mode indicating a stopped state (timing t9 or later). The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in a state where the ascent is completed at the timing t9 2 seconds after the start of the ascent at the timing t7 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or an ascending state). Become.

On the other hand, at the timing t9, the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of the image instructing the game board side effect display device 1600 to operate the operation unit (hereinafter, may be referred to as the operation instruction display) is started. NS. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string "push !!") is displayed. You may. The operation validity period continues until the operation is accepted by the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at the timing t9, all the frame movable body light emitting units are turned off from the state in which the light emitting effect is performed.

FIGS. 524 (A) and 524 (B) show an effect mode when the operation unit is operated at the timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is effective is started (timing t9). Shown. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t14, and the frame movable body light emitting unit becomes a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 524 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the light emitting unit of the frame movable body is normally turned off from the extinguished state. It becomes a specific light emission effect state different from the light emission effect state. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting unit is in the specific light emitting effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 524 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is out of order, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting unit is normally turned off from the extinguished state. It will be in a light emitting state. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting unit is in the normal light emitting effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In the specific light emission effect state, the player who blinks the light faster, increases the amount of light, or increases the number of colors feels more stimulation than the light emission mode in the normal light emission effect state. It is advisable to adopt a light emitting mode. In this way, the effect state of a specific light emitting mode different from the normal state is visually recognized by the player, so that the player is shown that the special lottery result is a big hit. Specifically, in the specific light emitting effect state, the inner portion of the frame movable body and the outer portion of the frame movable body may be configured to be in the light emitting effect state in different modes. For example, the inner portion of the frame movable body may be configured to be visible in a light emitting mode that is more stimulating than the outer portion of the frame movable body. It should be noted that this definition of a specific light emitting effect state and a normal light emitting effect state may be configured to be applied to other embodiments.

In FIGS. 525 (A) and 525 (B), after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid is started (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period. An effect mode is shown when the operation valid period ends at the timing t18 after a predetermined predetermined time has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t18, and the frame movable body light emitting unit is in a predetermined light emission effect state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 525 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light emitting unit emits a specific light emission different from the normal light emission effect state. It will be in the production state. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting unit is in the specific light emitting effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 525 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is in the normal light emission effect state. .. In this way, when the light emitting unit is in the normal light emitting effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B), the decorative symbols that have changed at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the operation valid period correspond to the special lottery result. Is stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 524 (A) and 525 (A), the doublet mode (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit is used. In the case of the effect pattern shown in FIGS. 524 (B) and 525 (B) when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the reach loss mode (for example, "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is lost. ) Stops the decorative design.

At the timing (timing t22) when 2 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol stopped, the frame movable body is in the ascending position (second state) while maintaining the light emitting mode of either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. ) To the storage position (first state). At the same time, the frame movable body simulated image has a display mode in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are lowered in accordance with the descending motion of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. At the timing (timing t24) when the movement of the frame movable body to the storage position is completed, the frame movable body simulated image becomes a display mode in which the descent is completely completed according to the actual descending motion of the frame movable body. The display ends.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, it is preferable to configure the frame movable body to change the light emitting state from the specific light emitting effect state to the normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the normal light emission effect state is continued, and the next decorative symbol change is started.

526 (A) to 526 (C) show the moving state of the frame movable body when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 524 (A) is executed, the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image, and the reception of the operation unit. The state, the state of the operation instruction display, and the change of the state with the passage of time of the light emitting effect state of the frame movable body are shown schematically. As described above, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 524 (A) is an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit when the special lottery result is a big hit.

FIG. 526 (A) shows the state at the timing t5, the decorative symbol is changing in the reach state, and the frame movable body is located in the storage position (first state) in the normal light emitting effect state. The frame movable body simulated image is hidden, the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 526 (B) shows the state at the timing t8, the decorative symbol is changing in the reach state, and the frame movable body is in the light emitting effect state from the storage position (first state) to the ascending position (second state). The frame movable body simulated image is a display that imitates the state of moving from the storage position (first state) to the ascending position (second state), and the operation unit is invalid. It is a period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 526 (C) shows the state at the timing t11, the decorative symbol is changing in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the ascending position (second state) in the extinguished state, and the frame movable body simulated image is The display imitates the frame movable body located in the ascending position (second state), the operation valid period is started in the operation unit, and the image imitating the operation unit is displayed as the instruction display as the operation instruction display. ing.

FIG. 527 (A) shows the state at the timing t19, the decorative symbol is changing in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the ascending position (second state) in the special light emitting effect state, and the frame movable body is simulated. The image is a display that imitates the ascending position (second state), the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 527 (B) shows the state at the timing t23, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a doublet mode (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The frame movable body is moving from the ascending position (second state) to the storage position (first state) in the special light emission effect state, and the frame movable body simulated image is moving from the ascending position (second state) to the storage position (second state). The display imitates the state of moving to the first state), the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 527 (C) shows the state at the timing t28, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a doublet mode (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The frame movable body is located in the storage position (first state) in the special light emission effect state, the frame movable body simulated image is hidden, the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is hidden. ..

In this way, by displaying the frame movable body simulated image at the timing when the frame movable body starts moving, the light emitting mode changes according to the operation of the frame movable body and the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks. In addition, the frame movable body appears at an unprecedented position in response to the special lottery result (for example, in response to the occurrence of the reach effect), which makes it possible for the player to feel great surprise and fun. In addition, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he / she has decided the special lottery result by changing the light emitting mode of the frame movable body light emitting unit triggered by the operation of the player to the operation unit. It becomes.

528 (A) to 528 (F) show a modified example of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 523 (A) to 523 (E). 528 (A) and 528 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 528 (C) and 528 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 528 (E) and 528 (F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 528 (A), 528 (C), and 528 (E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state). Shown. 528 (B), 528 (D), and 528 (F) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 528 (C) and 528 (E), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state) and are in front of each other. It has a right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 on the side, and by rotating 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, the right ear frame movable body The 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state). In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

529 (A) to 529 (F) show a modification of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 528 (A) to 528 (F). 529 (A) and 529 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 529 (C) and 529 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 529 (E) and 529 (F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 529 (A), 529 (C), and 529 (E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. ing. 529 (B), 529 (D), and 529 (F) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 project upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 529 (C) and 529 (E), the frame movable body has a rotation axis on the back side and rotates 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right side. By doing so, the frame movable body is in a state of being moved from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state). In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

530 (A) to 530 (E) show a modified example of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 523 (A) to 523 (E). 530 (A) and 530 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 530 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 530 (D) and 530 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 530 (A), 530 (C), and 530 (D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. ing. FIGS. 530 (B) and 530 (E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 project upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment, the upper part of the frame movable body is visible in the front view in the standby state (first state). In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure. In this way, in the standby state, since a part of the frame movable body can be visually recognized from the front view, it is possible to remind the player that the frame movable body moves. Further, during a normal game, only the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7218 are set to the normal light emitting effect state, and only when the specific light emitting effect state is set, the inside of the right ear frame movable body is set. The light emitting unit 7116 and the light emitting unit 7216 inside the movable body of the left ear frame may also be configured to emit light. Further, the frame movable body having another structure may be configured to adopt the same light emitting pattern.

531 (A) to 531 (F) show a modified example of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 530 (A) to 530 (E). 531 (A) and 531 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 531 (C) and 531 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 531 (E) and 531 (F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 531 (A), 531 (C), and 531 (E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. ing. 531 (B), 531 (D), and 531 (F) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). ing.

In this embodiment, the left and right frame movable bodies are adjacent to each other in the standby position (first state), and the upper part of the frame movable body can be visually recognized in the front view. In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the upper binaural opening 7040 of the door frame top unit. Further, the frame movable bodies are configured to be movable upward while being separated from each other in the left-right direction. In the state of being moved to the moving position (second state), the player can visually recognize the state as in FIG. 523 (B). In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

532 (A) to 532 (E) show another embodiment in which a frame movable body is provided on the door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3. Although the frame movable body is rotatable in the present embodiment, a specific structure and operation mode will be described later.

532 (A) and 532 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 532 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 532 (D) and 532 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 532 (A), 532 (C), and 532 (D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. 532 (B) and 532 (E) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are clockwise when viewed from the right from the state shown in FIGS. 532 (A) and 532 (D). It shows a state in which the door frame top unit 570 is rotated 90 degrees and protrudes upward.

The door frame top unit 570 is made of white and translucent synthetic resin, and in the stored state shown in FIG. 532 (A), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are viewed from the player in front. It is configured to be invisible. On the other hand, when the player visually recognizes the door frame top unit 570 from diagonally above the front, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized, respectively, as shown in FIG. 532 (C).

As shown in FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E), the door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 and a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010. The shape of the upper right ear opening 7000 of the door frame top unit and the upper left ear opening 7010 of the door frame top unit is a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed in a plan view. Further, in the door frame top unit 570, a right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the left ear frame movable body 7200 Is provided. Except for these points, the door frame top unit 570 in the present embodiment basically has the same structure as that described with reference to FIGS. 523 (A) to 523 (E). ..

As shown in FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E), the door frame top unit 570 according to the present embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. There is. The specific structure and operation mode of these are shown below. Since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have basically the same structure, only the right ear frame movable body 7100 may be described as a representative in the following description.

532 (A), 532 (C), and 532 (D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 is in the retracted state. The right ear frame movable body 7100 in the retracted state has a vertically long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing downward and the right ear frame movable body second surface facing upward. It has 7120 and. The first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body is made of the inner decorative portion 7112 of the first surface of the right ear frame movable body made of a colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin on the inner side and the white translucent synthetic resin on the outer side. It has a right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. On the other hand, the second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body is entirely made of a gray opaque synthetic resin. The other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear frame movable body 7100 are formed of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the outer decorative portion 7114 of the first surface of the right ear frame movable body. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140. Further, the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 is attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. The right ear frame movable body 7100 can rotate about the left-right direction by transmitting power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140. Is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 having the same structure, and the power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is the left ear frame movable body rotating shaft. By being transmitted to the 7240, it is possible to rotate about the left-right direction. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can independently rotate an arbitrary angle clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the right by controlling a pulse motor (not shown). , It is possible to stop at any angle.

As shown in FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E), a right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear frame movable body 7100 is provided in the door frame top unit 570. The right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit is installed in a state of being rotated about 30 degrees clockwise from the horizontal plane when viewed from the right. The right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit is specifically composed of a printed circuit board coated on both sides with a white protective film, and is a movable body of the right ear frame located rearward under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. A light emitting diode capable of irradiating the first surface 7110 with light is mounted on the upper surface thereof. By causing the light emitting diode to emit light in a predetermined color, it is possible to make the first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body a predetermined light emitting effect mode. The left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit also has the same structure as the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are shown in FIGS. 532 (A), 532 (C), and 532 (D), respectively, by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to change from the state of being stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 to the state of being stopped at an arbitrary position rotated by a predetermined angle. FIGS. 532 (B) and 532 (E) are examples thereof, in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right from the stored state and are vertical. In this state, the first surface 7110 of the movable body of the right ear frame and the first surface 7210 of the movable body of the left ear frame are facing the front and stopped. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a shape imitating an animal ear, and are housed in the door frame top unit 570 and vertically from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. By taking and, it is possible to express the state in which the animal's ears are standing in a decorative manner.

Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized by the player in a rotated state by continuously driving a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Is. When rotating in this way, it is preferable to rotate the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 a plurality of times in the same direction at a speed of about one rotation per second. It can be said that FIGS. 532 (B) and 532 (E) show the rotating state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to be rotated a plurality of times clockwise when viewed from the right, or may be rotated a plurality of times counterclockwise when viewed from the right. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 can be alternately visually recognized by the player. Further, the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 are alternately visible to the player.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be stopped or rotated at a predetermined position, and are irradiated from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit. It has been shown that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be brought into a predetermined decorative state by light, and specific examples are shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 532 (A), 532 (C), and 532 (D), the first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear of the left ear frame movable body 7200. When light is emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit with the first surface 7210 of the frame movable body facing downward, the inside of the door frame top unit 570 It is possible to make the entire door frame top unit 570 dimly emit light by the light reflected by. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of white and translucent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 532 (B) and 532 (E), the left ear frame movable body first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 of the left ear frame movable body 7200. When light is emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit with the one surface 7210 facing forward, the light causes the right ear frame movable body first. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the first surface 7110 and the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body are decorated. Also in this case, a part of the light emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit is generated in the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. Since the door frame top unit 570 is illuminated from the inside by the reflected light, the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly vaguely emitted state.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated and light is emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, irradiation is performed. The light generated alternately illuminates the first surface 7110 of the movable body of the right ear frame, the second surface 7120 of the movable body of the right ear frame, the first surface 7210 of the movable body of the left ear frame, and the second surface 7220 of the movable body of the left ear frame. It will be in the state of being. Further, the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a state in which the light is slightly vaguely emitted.

In this way, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are positioned or rotated above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100 in a stopped state. By increasing the area occupied for the field of view when the player looks up and looking as if the volume of the housing has increased, it is possible to give the player unprecedented surprise and fun.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B), the game board side is matched with the specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the operation mode of the frame movable body. Display mode of the frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, with respect to the operation button 410 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an operation unit). An example of the effect of combining the operation reception mode of the player, the light emitting mode of the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit, the light emitting mode of the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, and the like will be shown.

533 (A) to 534 (B) show the operation mode of the frame movable body and the frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, respectively. It is a time chart which showed the state, the acceptance state of the operation part, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the light irradiation mode to the frame movable body.

FIG. 533 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 533 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 534 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 534 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B), the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), and the display of the frame movable body simulated image. The mode, the timing at which the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the timing at which the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body changes from the light emission effect state to the extinguishing state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the rotating state (second state) to another state, the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body changes from the extinguished state to the light emitting effect state or the specific light emitting effect state. The timing may differ depending on the production pattern. Hereinafter, specific production examples in each production pattern will be shown with reference to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). It is in a state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state or a standby state), and specifically, the right ear frame is movable as shown in FIGS. 532 (A), 532 (C), and 532 (D). The first surface 7110 of the body and the first surface 7210 of the movable body of the left ear frame are in a state of facing downward. In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to timing t9. At the same time, the rotation is started, and the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotation state). The rotation direction is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the rotation speed is the speed of one rotation per second.

At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image imitating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulated image is composed of an image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame movable body simulated image is the same as the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 according to the rotation of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. It continues to be displayed dynamically in a direction-rotating manner. The rotation speed of the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 is also rotated at the same speed as the actual rotation speed of the frame movable body (the speed of one rotation per second). Is displayed. As a result, when the first surface 7110 of the movable body of the right ear frame and the first surface 7210 of the movable body of the left ear frame are in the rotating state facing the front as shown in FIGS. 532 (B) and 532 (E), the right ear The image imitating the frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also the image imitating the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear of the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100, respectively. The image imitating the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body of the image imitating the frame movable body 7200 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as a frame movable body simulated image in a front-facing manner.

On the other hand, at the timing t9, the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of the image instructing the game board side effect display device 1600 to operate the operation unit (hereinafter, may be referred to as the operation instruction display) is started. NS. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string "push !!") is displayed. You may. The operation validity period continues until the operation is accepted by the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at the timing t9, the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit that irradiate the movable frame body with light are turned off from the state where the light emitting effect is performed.

FIGS. 533 (A) and 533 (B) show an effect mode when the operation unit is operated at the timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is effective is started (timing t9). Shown. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t14, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light for the frame movable body is emitted. The irradiation mode becomes a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 533 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 is the right ear frame movable body first. A state in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the surface 7110 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body on the front side (hereinafter, may be referred to as a third state). Become. At the same time, the light irradiation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 becomes a specific light emitting effect state different from the normal light emitting effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 533 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is out of order, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 is the right ear frame movable body. A state in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the second surface 7120 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 on the front side (hereinafter, may be referred to as a fourth state). ). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the extinguished state to the normal light emitting effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is changed to the normal light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In FIGS. 534 (A) and 534 (B), after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid is started (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period. An effect mode is shown when the operation valid period ends at the timing t18 after a predetermined predetermined time has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t18, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the frame movable body. The light irradiation mode is set to a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 534 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the right ear frame movable body 7100 presses the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110. The left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body facing the front side (third state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 becomes a specific light emitting effect state different from the normal light emitting effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 534 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 is the second surface of the right ear frame movable body at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends. The left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the 7120 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body on the front side (fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the extinguished state to the normal light emitting effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is changed to the normal light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B), the decorative symbols that have changed at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the operation valid period correspond to the special lottery result. Is stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 533 (A) and 534 (A), the doublet mode (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit is used. In the case of the effect pattern shown in FIGS. 533 (B) and 534 (B) in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the reach loss mode (for example, "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is lost. ) Stops the decorative design.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol was stopped, the frame movable body is the right ear frame movable body while maintaining the light emitting mode of either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. The first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face forward (third state), or the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 face forward. The state is changed from the facing state (fourth state) to the state in which the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face downward (first state). At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image ends.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, it is preferable to configure the frame movable body to change the light irradiation state from the specific light emission effect state to the normal light emission effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the normal light emission effect state is continued, and the next decorative symbol change is started.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulated image to be displayed at the timing when the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the frame movable body is in the rotating state (the frame movable body is in the rotating state (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the fact that the second state) is reached. In addition, in response to the special lottery result (for example, in response to the occurrence of reach effect), the frame movable body appears in an unprecedented position, which makes it possible for the player to feel great surprise and fun. .. In addition, when the player operates the operation unit, the frame movable body is stopped in a predetermined stopped state (third state or fourth state), and the mode of irradiating the frame movable body with light is changed. It is possible to give the player the feeling that the special lottery result has been decided by himself / herself.

535 (A) to 535 (E) show a modified example of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E). 535 (A) and 535 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 535 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 535 (D) and 535 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 535 (A), 535 (C), and 535 (D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state). FIGS. 535 (B) and 535 (E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating (second state).

In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240, respectively, below the right ear frame movable body 7100. Further, the thickness of the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E). Further, the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and the left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 are provided so as to be orthogonal to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. Further, the upper halves of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are located at positions higher than the upper surfaces of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100.

In the state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face each other. positioned. On the other hand, in the rotated state, the first surface 7110 of the movable body of the right ear frame rotates clockwise when viewed in a plan view, and the first surface 7210 of the movable body of the left ear frame rotates counterclockwise when viewed in a plan view. For example, in FIGS. 535 (B) and 535 (E), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed in a plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is viewed in a plan view. It can be said that it shows a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise. In addition, by adopting such a rotation mode, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed in a plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is viewed in a plan view. Compared to the case of rotating it around, even if the player or the clerk of the game store carelessly brings his or her hand or face close to the movable frame, the hand or face is dragged to the rear of the game machine and is injured. Can be suppressed. In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

536 (A) to 536 (E) show a modified example of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 535 (A) to 535 (E). 536 (A) and 536 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 536 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 536 (D) and 536 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 536 (A), 536 (C), and 536 (D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state). FIGS. 536 (B) and 536 (E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated from the door frame top unit 570.

Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided so as to be orthogonal to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, there is a portion where a part of the door frame top unit 570 projects upward so as to cover the upper, left, right, and back of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. is doing. Further, the right ear frame movable body 1st surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 1st surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each colored (specifically pink) transparent composite. It is made of resin. Further, the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each formed of a gray opaque synthetic resin. Also in the present embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be brought into the same state as the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 535 (A) to 535 (E). .. By providing a part that covers the frame movable body in this way, even if the player or the clerk of the game store carelessly brings his or her hand or face close to the frame movable body, the hand or face is behind the game machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as being dragged and injured. In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

537 (A) to 537 (E) show a modified example of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 536 (A) to 536 (E). 537 (A) and 537 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 537 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 537 (D) and 537 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 537 (A), 537 (C), and 537 (D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state). FIGS. 537 (B) and 537 (E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated from the door frame top unit 570.

Also in this embodiment, a part of the door frame top unit 570 projects upward so as to cover the upper, left, right, and back of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upwardly projecting portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100, or the upwardly projecting portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are integrally configured, and after they move forward. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to start rotating. FIG. 537 (D) shows a state before starting the forward movement, and FIG. 537 (E) shows a state in which the forward movement is completed.

Also in the present embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be brought into the same state as the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 535 (A) to 535 (E). .. By providing a part that covers the frame movable body in this way, even if the player or the clerk of the game store carelessly brings his or her hand or face close to the frame movable body, the hand or face is behind the game machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as being dragged and injured. By covering the front of the part protruding upward with a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized, but the player and the clerk of the game store cannot contact each other. It may be configured as follows.

In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B). In this case, the upwardly projecting portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the upwardly projecting portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be moved forward from timing t5 to timing t7, or from timing t7 to timing t7. It may go to the timing t9. Further, an image imitating a portion protruding upward may be used as a frame movable body simulated image, and may be configured to be displayed at the timing when the portion protruding upward starts moving. Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

With reference to FIGS. 523 to 525, an embodiment in which a frame movable body is provided on the door frame top unit 570 and a frame movable body simulated image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown. -See FIG. 540 to show a modified embodiment of this embodiment. In the embodiment shown below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in place of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided.

538 (A) and 538 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Further, FIGS. 538 (C) and 538 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. Further, FIGS. 538 (E) and 538 (F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 538 (A), 538 (C), and 538 (E) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left in the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state in which the movable ear outer frame 7450 is housed (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state). Further, FIGS. 538 (B), 538 (D), and 538 (F) show the door frame top unit 570 to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. It shows a state in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state).

As shown in FIGS. 538 (A) to 538 (F), the door frame top unit 570 according to the present embodiment has the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side when viewed from the front. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. The specific structure and operation mode of these are shown below. The right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350 and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 have basically the same structure. Only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 may be described as representatives.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 538 (A) to 538 (F) and FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E) described later, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be referred to as a frame movable body. Further, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are pointed to the inner frame movable body, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are referred to as the outer frame movable body. There is.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is a movable body having a vertically long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction when the stored state is viewed in a plane. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 has the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 facing upward in the retracted state (first state) and forward in the protruding state (second state), and the stored state (first state). Has a second surface 7320 of the right ear inner frame movable body facing rearward in the protruding state (second state). The first surface 7310 of the movable body of the inner frame of the right ear is formed of a colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin. The surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320) of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 other than the first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body are white translucent synthetic resin. Is formed by. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 also has the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300.

The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is a movable body having a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 facing forward and the right ear outer frame movable body second facing backward. It has a surface 7370. The right ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7360, the right ear outer frame movable body 2nd surface 7370, and other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are white and translucent. It is made of synthetic resin. The left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also has the same structure as the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

Inside the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a rectangular right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 is provided. Further, inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a square-shaped right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 is provided.

The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 are specifically composed of a printed circuit board coated on both sides with a white protective film, and are formed from the door frame top unit 570. A light emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player in the protruding state (second state) is mounted on the surface thereof. The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

The right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 are rotated by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by a peripheral control board 1510 to rotate the right ear medial frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the left ear medial frame movable body. By rotating the shaft 7440 as a rotation axis 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right, the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 538 (A), 538 (C), and 538 (E), respectively. Vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 538 (B), 538 (D), and 538 (F) from the state of being stored in the standby position (first state). It is possible to control to a protruding state (second state).

On the other hand, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved upward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, so that FIGS. 538 (A) and 538 (C), respectively. ), From the state (first state) stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 538 (E) to FIGS. 538 (B), 538 (D), and 538 (F). It is possible to control the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which it projects vertically upward from the upper surface (second state) as shown.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 each project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. When the state (second state) is reached, as shown in FIG. 538 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is located inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 It becomes visible to the player with the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 positioned inside. The right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 have a shape imitating an animal ear, and the door frame top unit 570 By taking the stored state (first state) and the state of protruding vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state), it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move. It has become possible.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are independently housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) and the door frame top unit 570 under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to take a state of protruding vertically upward from the upper surface of the door (second state).

Further, in the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, respectively. In the state (second state), from the state (first state) in which the door frame top unit 570 is independently housed under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to change the state to a state in which it projects vertically upward (second state).

In the present embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of a white and translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 538 (A), the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are housed in the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380, left. When the light emitting portion 7480 of the movable body of the outer ear frame is made to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can visually recognize the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 in a vague state of emitting light.

On the other hand, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame is movable. When the body light emitting part 7330, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7380, the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7430, and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7480 are made to emit light in a predetermined mode, the right ear inner frame The first surface 7310 of the movable body, the first surface 7360 of the outer frame movable body of the right ear, the first surface 7410 of the movable body of the inner frame of the left ear, and the first surface 7460 of the movable body of the outer frame of the left ear are visually recognized by the player in a predetermined light emitting effect state. It is possible to make it.

In the state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). Because the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is located so as to cover the back of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is located so as to cover the back of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. , The light emitted forward from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7480 is the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420. Even if it faces, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 are diffusely reflected backward, and finally, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and Since light is diffusely reflected forward by the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body, the utilization efficiency of the light emitted from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7480. It is possible to increase.

In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 move, and the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100 move. Since it is located above the upper surface, it is possible to give the player unprecedented surprise and fun as compared with the case of moving the movable body in the game board.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B), the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. Display mode of the frame movable body simulation image, which is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the specific operation mode and the operation mode of the frame movable body, and the operation button 410 (hereinafter, (Sometimes referred to as an operation unit), the player's operation reception mode, right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330, right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380, left ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7430, left ear outer frame movable An example of an effect in which the light emitting mode of the body light emitting unit 7480 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a frame movable body light emitting unit) is combined is shown.

539 (A) to 540 (B) show the operation mode of the frame movable body and the frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, respectively. It is a time chart which showed the state, the acceptance state of the operation part, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the light emission effect state of the frame movable body light emitting part.

FIG. 539 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 539 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 540 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 540 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B), the timing at which the inner frame movable body changes from the stored state (first state) to the protruding state (second state), the frame movable body The display mode of the simulated image, the timing at which the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the timing at which the frame movable body light emitting unit changes from the light emitting effect state to the extinguished state are the same. On the other hand, the presence / absence of operation of the outer frame movable body, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, and the timing at which the frame movable body light emitting unit changes from the extinguished state to the light emitting effect state or the specific light emitting effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Hereinafter, specific production examples in each production pattern will be shown with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before timing t0), it is in a state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state or a standby state). In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 The rotation starts in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right (timing t7).

At the same time, the display of a part of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image imitating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulated image is an image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer side. It is composed of an image imitating a frame movable body 7450. The frame movable body simulated image is an image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 according to the rotation of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. The imitated image is dynamically displayed in a rotating manner. Of the frame movable body simulated images, the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have not yet been displayed at this stage. An image imitating the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, in accordance with the timing (timing t9) when the actual right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 finish rising. The display of the rotating mode of the image imitating the above is finished, and after that, the display continues in the mode indicating the stopped state (timing t9 or later). The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 may be in a state where the rotation is completed at the timing t9 2 seconds after the start of the ascent at the timing t7 (hereinafter, the second state and the ascending state). There is).

On the other hand, at the timing t9, the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of the image instructing the game board side effect display device 1600 to operate the operation unit (hereinafter, may be referred to as the operation instruction display) is started. NS. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string "push !!") is displayed. You may. The operation validity period continues until the operation is accepted by the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at the timing t9, all the frame movable body light emitting units are turned off from the light emitting effect state.

539 (A) and 539 (B) show an effect mode when the operation to the operation unit is performed at the timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is effective is started (timing t9). Shown. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t14, and the frame movable body light emitting unit becomes a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 539 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting unit changes from the off state to the normal light emission effect. It becomes a specific light emission effect state different from the state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start ascending from the state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state), and start ascending operation 2 seconds later (timing t16). It becomes the completed state (second state). At the same time, in addition to the image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in the stopped mode on the game board side effect display device 1600, As a new frame movable body simulated image, an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started to be displayed. The image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the same manner as the actual ascending motion of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. From the timing t14 to the timing t16, the display mode showing the stored state changes to the display mode in which the ascending operation is completed. In this way, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed the rotation operation (second state), the state changes from the extinguished state to the specific light emitting effect state, and the extinguished state changes to the specific light emitting effect. The state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) becomes a state in which the ascending operation is completed (second state). , An image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an ascending manner on the game board side effect display device 1600, so that a special lottery is given to the player. The result will be shown to be a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 539 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is out of order, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting unit emits normal light from the off state. It will be in the production state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in the stored state (first state), and no operation is performed. Further, the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, the special lottery result is obtained for the player due to the fact that the frame movable body light emitting portion is in the normal light emitting effect state and that the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate. It will be shown to be a loss.

In FIGS. 540 (A) and 540 (B), after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid is started (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period. An effect mode is shown when the operation valid period ends at the timing t18 after a predetermined predetermined time has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t18, and the frame movable body light emitting unit is in a predetermined light emission effect state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 540 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light emitting unit emits a specific light emission different from the normal light emission effect state. It will be in the production state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start ascending from the state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state), and start ascending operation 2 seconds later (timing t16). It becomes the completed state (second state). At the same time, in addition to the image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in the stopped mode on the game board side effect display device 1600, As a new frame movable body simulated image, an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started to be displayed. The image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the same manner as the actual ascending motion of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. From the timing t18 to the timing t20, the display mode showing the stored state changes to the display mode in which the ascending operation is completed.

In this way, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 have completed the rotation operation (second state), the state changes from the extinguished state to the specific light emitting effect state, and the extinguished state changes to the specific light emitting effect. The state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) becomes a state in which the ascending operation is completed (second state). , An image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an ascending manner on the game board side effect display device 1600, so that a special lottery is given to the player. The result will be shown to be a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 540 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost, and the frame movable body light emitting unit is in the normal light emission effect state at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in the stored state (first state), and no operation is performed. Further, the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, the special lottery result is obtained for the player due to the fact that the frame movable body light emitting portion is in the normal light emitting effect state and that the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate. It will be shown to be a loss.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B), the decorative symbols that have changed at a predetermined timing (timing t24) after the end of the operation valid period correspond to the special lottery result. Is stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 539 (A) and 540 (A), the doublet mode (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit is used. In the case of the effect pattern shown in FIGS. 539 (B) and 540 (B) in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the reach loss mode (for example, "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is lost. ) Stops the decorative design.

At the timing (timing t26) when 2 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol stopped, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. The movement is started from the ascending position (second state) to the storage position (first state) while maintaining the light emitting mode. At the same time, in accordance with the descending motion of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame among the frame movable body simulated images The image imitating the movable body 7450 is the display mode in which the movable body 7450 is descended. At the timing (timing t28) when the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the storage position is completed, the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 The image imitating the above is in a display mode in which the lowering is completed in accordance with the actual lowering motion of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, and the display is finished.

At the timing (timing t30) when 2 seconds have passed since the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the storage position was completed, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame The movable body 7400 starts moving from the ascending position (second state) to the storage position (first state) while maintaining the light emitting mode of either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. At the same time, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 was imitated in the frame movable body simulated image in accordance with the movement of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 rotating and descending. The image and the image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner of descending while rotating. At the timing (timing t32) when the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the storage position is completed, the image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 The image imitating the above is in a display mode in which the descent is completed in accordance with the actual descending motion of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the display is completed.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, it is preferable to configure the frame movable body to change the light emitting state from the specific light emitting effect state to the normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the normal light emission effect state is continued, and the next decorative symbol change is started.

In this way, by displaying the frame movable body simulated image at the timing when the frame movable body starts moving, the light emitting mode changes according to the operation of the frame movable body and the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks. In addition, the frame movable body appears at a position that has never existed in response to the special lottery result, which makes it possible for the player to feel great surprise and fun. Further, after the inner frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the moving state (second state), the outer frame movable body is in the standby state (first state) triggered by the operation of the operation unit by the player. By changing from the moving state (second state) to the moving state (second state), it is possible to give the player a feeling as if he / she has decided the special lottery result. Further, in a situation where the inner frame movable body first enters the moving state (second state) and the player can notice that the moving state has been reached, the player is requested to operate the operation unit. As a result, the player can operate the operation unit with a sense of expectation as to whether or not the outer frame movable body is in the moving state (second state) following the inner frame movable body.

541 (A) to 541 (E) show a modification of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 538 (A) to 538 (F). 541 (A) and 541 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 541 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 541 (D) and 541 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 541 (A), 541 (C), and 541 (D) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left in the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state (first state) in which the movable ear outer frame 7450 is housed. In FIGS. 541 (B) and 541 (E), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shown from the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state of protruding upward (second state).

In this embodiment, in addition to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. By moving upward by a drive mechanism (not shown), the door frame is stored in a standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 541 (A), 541 (C), and 541 (D), respectively. It is possible to control from the first state) to a state (second state) in which the door frame top unit 570 projects vertically upward from the upper surface as shown in FIGS. 541 (B) and 541 (E). be.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7014 on the door frame top unit is provided at the position. In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure. As shown with reference to FIGS. 530 (A) to 530 (E), even in the frame movable body having the structure according to the present embodiment, the upper part of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. In the first state, a part of the door frame may be configured to protrude from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570.

542 (A) to 542 (E) show a modified example of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 541 (A) to 541 (E). 542 (A) and 542 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 542 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 542 (D) and 542 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 542 (A), 542 (C), and 542 (D) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 in the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state (first state) in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is housed. In FIGS. 542 (B) and 542 (E), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shown from the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state of protruding upward (second state).

In this embodiment, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 do not move upward, but move downward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. From the state (first state) stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 542 (A), 542 (C), and 542 (D), respectively, FIG. 542 (B). , As shown in FIG. 542 (E), it is possible to control the door frame top unit 570 so as to vertically project upward from the upper surface or downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). be.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the door frame is located at a position corresponding to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. An upper left ear opening 7010 is provided on the top unit. Further, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7020 is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the door frame is located at a position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. The lower left ear opening 7030 of the top unit is provided.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the above-described effect pattern with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure. In this case, in a state where it is not clear whether or not the result of the special lottery will be a big hit, the inner frame movable body starts moving downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t7), and the result of the special lottery. When is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body can be visually recognized by another player or a clerk of the game store. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is lost, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move, so that the player feels awkwardness and embarrassment due to the result of the special lottery being lost. Can be reduced. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 538 (A) to 538 (F), the animal ears are decoratively represented by the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body, but FIG. 542 In the embodiments described with reference to (A) to FIG. 542 (E), the animal ears are represented by the outer frame movable body protruding upward, and the animal eyes are represented by the inner frame movable body. There is.

543 (A) to 543 (E) and 544 (A) to 544 (E) show FIGS. 541 (A) to 541 (E) and FIGS. 542 (A) to 542 (E). An example of modification of the frame movable body described above is shown. 543 (A), 543 (B), 544 (A), and 544 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 543 (C) and 544 (C) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 543 (D), 543 (E), 544 (D), and 544 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, each frame movable body is in a state of protruding downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state) and a state of protruding upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). It is possible to take.

543 (A), 543 (C), and 543 (D) show a state in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state). There is. 543 (B) and 543 (E) show a state in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state), and the outer frame movable body is the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state (first state) protruding downward from the lower surface of the door. 544 (A), 544 (C), and 544 (D) show a state in which the inner frame movable body protrudes downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state), and the outer frame movable body is shown. Indicates a state (second state) in which the door frame top unit 570 protrudes upward from the upper surface. 544 (B) and 544 (E) show a state in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment, the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 are driven by a peripheral control board 1510 (not shown). It is possible to move and stop each position from the first state to the second state by the mechanism.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7014 on the door frame top unit is provided at the position.

Further, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, the first right ear opening 7022 below the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The lower second right ear opening 7024 of the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the lower first left ear opening 7032 of the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7034 below the door frame top unit is provided at the position.

In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

In this case, in a state where it is not clear whether or not the result of the special lottery will be a big hit, the inner frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570. (Timing t7), the movement is completed at timing t9. 543 (B) and 543 (E) show a state in which the movement of the inner frame movable body is completed. When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). .. 544 (B) and 544 (E) show a state in which the movement of the outer frame movable body is completed (second state). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body can be visually recognized by another player or a clerk of the game store. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is lost, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move, so that the player feels awkwardness and embarrassment due to the result of the special lottery being lost. Can be reduced.

An example has been shown in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward to be in the second state and then the outer frame movable body protrudes upward to be in the second state, but the relationship between the two may be reversed. In this case, the outer frame movable body starts the operation of projecting upward at the timing t7. After that, in the state where the movement is completed (timing t9), the states shown in FIGS. 544 (A) and 544 (D) are obtained. Further, at the timing t14 and the timing 18, the inner frame movable body may be configured to start moving upward. Two effect patterns in which the order of operation of the frame movable body is reversed may be made feasible. Further, it is better to set the jackpot expectation of the effect pattern in which the outer frame movable body operates first than the effect pattern in which the inner frame movable body operates first. For example, when the outer frame movable body operates first. It may be configured to be a big hit without fail.

545 (A) to 546 (B) show a modification of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 538 (A) to 538 (F). 545 (A) and 545 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 545 (C) and 545 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 546 (A) and 546 (B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 545 (A), 545 (C), and 546 (A) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left in the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state (first state) in which the movable ear outer frame 7450 is housed. 545 (B), 545 (D), and 546 (B) show the door frame top unit 570 to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear. It shows a state in which the outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward (second state).

In this embodiment, the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 are all controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is configured to be movable upward by rotating 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right by a drive mechanism that does not.

In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B), the inner frame movable body is in the second state and then the outer frame movable body is in the second state. In the frame movable body described with reference to 545 (A) to 546 (B), the order of movement of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body is reversed, and the outer frame movable body is moved from timing t7 to timing t9. After changing from the first state to the second state, the inner frame movable body may be configured to start changing from the first state to the second state at timing t14 or timing t18. Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

An embodiment in which a frame movable body is provided on the door frame top unit 570 and a frame movable body simulated image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown with reference to FIGS. 532 to 534. -See FIG. 549 to show a modified embodiment of this embodiment. In the embodiment shown below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in place of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided.

547 (A) and 547 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Further, FIG. 547 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Further, FIGS. 547 (D) and 547 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 547 (A), 547 (C), and 547 (D) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left in the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state in which the movable ear outer frame 7450 is housed (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state). Further, FIGS. 547 (B) and 547 (E) show the door frame top unit 570 to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body. It shows a state in which the 7450 protrudes upward (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state).

As shown in FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E), the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000, a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010, and a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7010. It has a light emitting unit 7050 and a left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit. Since these specific structures and functions are the same as those with reference to FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E), description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E), the door frame top unit 570 according to the present embodiment has the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side when viewed from the front. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. The specific structure and operation mode of these are shown below. The right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350 and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 have basically the same structure. Only the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 may be described as representatives.

547 (A), 547 (C), and 547 (D) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is in the retracted state. The right ear medial frame movable body 7300 in the retracted state has a vertically long rectangular shape in a plan view, and has a downward-facing right ear medial frame movable body first surface 7310 and an upward-facing right ear medial frame movable body first. It has two sides 7320. The first surface 7310 of the movable body of the inner frame of the right ear is formed of a colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the second surface 7320 of the movable body of the inner frame of the right ear is formed of a gray opaque synthetic resin. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in the retracted state has a vertically long rectangular shape in which the vicinity of the center is hollowed out so as to surround the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in a plan view, and the right ear outer side facing downward. It has a frame movable body first surface 7360 and a right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 facing upward. The first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body is formed of a white translucent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the second surface 7370 of the right ear outer frame movable body is formed of a gray opaque synthetic resin. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 has a right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 on the right side (inside) in a plan view. Further, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 has a right ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7390 on the left side (outside) in a plan view. Further, the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7390 are located on the same axis. Further, the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7390 are attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350 are powered by a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. By being transmitted to the rotation shaft 7390, it is possible to rotate about the left-right direction as an axis. Further, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have a left ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7440 and a left ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7490 having the same structure, and are peripheral to each other. Power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the control board 1510 is transmitted to the left ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7440 and the left ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7490 to rotate about the left-right direction. It is possible. The right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 are independently controlled from the right by controlling a pulse motor (not shown). It is possible to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise at any angle, or stop at any angle.

As shown in FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E), the right side of the door frame top unit 570 illuminates the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. A light emitting unit 7050, a left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. The specific structures of the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E), and thus are omitted. do.

The right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 are respectively shown in FIG. 547 by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. From the state of being stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 547 (C) and 547 (D), the state of being stopped at an arbitrary position rotated by a predetermined angle. Is possible. 547 (B) and 547 (E) are examples, and the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are stored. From the state, rotate 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right, and in a vertical state, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first It shows a state in which the first surface 7410 and the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body face the front and are stopped. The right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 have a shape imitating an animal ear, and the door frame top unit 570 By taking the state of being stored and the state of being vertical from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the ears of the animal are moving.

Further, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are continuously driven mechanisms (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is also possible to make the player visually recognize the rotating state by driving the body. When rotating in this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated at a speed of about one rotation per second. It is advisable to rotate it multiple times in the same direction. 547 (B) and 547 (E) show the rotating state of the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. It can also be said to indicate. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to be rotated a plurality of times clockwise when viewed from the right, or may be rotated a plurality of times counterclockwise when viewed from the right. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 can be alternately visually recognized by the player. Further, the first surface 7360 of the movable body of the outer frame of the right ear and the second surface 7370 of the movable body of the outer frame of the right ear are alternately visible to the player. Further, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 are alternately visible to the player. Further, the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 are alternately visible to the player.

Right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be stopped or rotated at a predetermined position, inside the door frame top unit. Right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable by the light emitted from the right light emitting part 7050 and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit. It has been shown that each body 7450 can be in a predetermined decorative state, and a specific example is shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 547 (A), 547 (C), and 547 (D), the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 has the right ear medial frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350. The first surface of the right ear outer frame movable body 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 has the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 has the left ear outer frame movable body first surface. When light is emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit with the 7460 facing downward, the light reflected in the door frame top unit 570 causes the door. It is possible to make the entire frame top unit 570 dimly emit light. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of white and translucent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 547 (B) and 547 (E), the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 has the right ear medial frame movable body first surface 7310, and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350 has the right ear lateral. The first surface 7360 of the frame movable body, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are forward. When light is emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit in the facing state, the light causes the right ear inner frame of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300. Movable body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body 7350 has right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, left ear inner frame movable body 7400 has left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, left ear outer side It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body of the frame movable body 7450 is decorated. Also in this case, a part of the light emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit illuminates the door frame top unit 570 from the inside. , The entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a state where the light is slightly vaguely emitted.

On the other hand, with the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 rotated, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door When light is emitted from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the frame top unit, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, and the right ear outer frame movable by the emitted light. Body 1st surface 7360 and right ear lateral frame movable body 2nd surface 7370, left ear medial frame movable body 1st surface 7410 and left ear medial frame movable body 2nd surface 7420, left ear lateral frame movable body 1st surface 7460 The second surface 7470 of the movable body of the outer frame of the left ear is illuminated alternately.

In this way, above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body Since the 7450 is positioned or rotated in a stopped state, it is possible to give the player unprecedented surprise and fun as compared with the case of moving the movable body in the game board. ..

Then, referring to FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B), the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 ( The frame movable body simulation is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the specific operation mode of the frame movable body (hereinafter, may be referred to as a frame movable body) and the operation mode of the frame movable body. The display mode of the image, the operation reception mode of the player with respect to the operation button 410 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an operation unit), the light emitting mode in the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit, the light emitting mode in the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, and the like. An example of combined production is shown.

FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B) show the operation modes of the frame movable bodies (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) provided on the outside, and the game board side effect display, respectively. The display state of the frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the frame movable body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) provided on the outside and provided on the inside of the device 1600. The operation mode of the frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) and the frame movable body (right ear inner side) provided inside displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The display state of the frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the frame movable body 7300, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400), the acceptance state of the operation unit, and the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is a time chart which showed the display state of, and the light irradiation mode to the frame movable body.

FIG. 548 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 548 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 549 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 549 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B), the frame movable body provided on the outside and the frame movable body provided on the inside are changed from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). ), The display mode of the frame movable body simulated image, the timing when the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, the timing when the operation instruction display is started, and the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body are turned off from the light emission effect state. The timing of the state is the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the second state (rotating state) to another state, the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body changes from the extinguished state to the light emitting effect state or the specific light emitting effect state. The timing may differ depending on the production pattern. Hereinafter, specific production examples in each production pattern will be shown with reference to FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B), the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 In the initial state (before timing t0), it is in a state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state or a standby state). Specifically, FIG. 547 (A), FIG. As shown in 547 (C) and FIG. 547 (D), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer side. The first surface 7460 of the frame movable body is in a state of facing downward. In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) between timing t0 and timing t5, the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body and the left ear outer frame are movable. The first surface 7460 of the body starts rotating at the same time at timing t5, and the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotating state). The rotation direction is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the rotation speed is the speed of one rotation per second.

At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image imitating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulated image is an image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer side. It is composed of an image imitating a frame movable body 7450. The frame movable body simulated image is an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 according to the rotation of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The resulting image continues to be dynamically displayed in a manner that rotates in the same direction. The rotation speed of the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also rotates at the same speed as the actual rotation speed of the outer frame movable body (the speed of one rotation per second). Is displayed. As a result, when the first surface 7360 of the movable body of the outer frame of the right ear and the first surface 7460 of the movable body of the outer frame of the left ear are in a rotating state facing the front as shown in FIGS. 547 (B) and 547 (E). The image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 included in the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, respectively. The game board side production display device as a frame movable body simulated image in which the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the imitated image and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 faces the front. Displayed at 1600.

After the rotational state (second state) of the outer frame movable body is continued from timing t4 to timing t9, at timing t9, the inner frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400). Starts rotation at the same time, and the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotation state). The rotation mode of the inner frame movable body and the display mode of the image imitating the inner frame movable body are the same as those of the outer frame movable body, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, at the timing t9, the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of the image instructing the game board side effect display device 1600 to operate the operation unit (hereinafter, may be referred to as the operation instruction display) is started. NS. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string "push !!") is displayed. You may. The operation validity period continues until the operation is accepted by the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (until timing t18). Further, at the timing t9, the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit that irradiate the movable frame body with light are turned off from the state where the light emitting effect is performed.

FIGS. 548 (A) and 548 (B) show an effect mode when the operation unit is operated at the timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is effective is started (timing t9). Shown. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t14, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light for the frame movable body is emitted. The irradiation mode becomes a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 548 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body The 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 are the right ear medial frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear lateral frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear medial frame movable body first surface, respectively. The surface 7410 and the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body are placed on the front side and stopped vertically (hereinafter, may be referred to as a third state). At the same time, a specific light emission effect in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emission effect state. It becomes a state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 548 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame The movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and the left ear inner frame movable body first. The state is such that the two surfaces 7420 and the second surface 7470 of the left ear outer frame movable body are on the front side and stopped vertically (hereinafter, may be referred to as the fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the extinguished state to the normal light emitting effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is changed to the normal light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In FIGS. 549 (A) and 549 (B), after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid is started (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period. An effect mode is shown when the operation valid period ends at the timing t18 after a predetermined predetermined time has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t18, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the frame movable body. The light irradiation mode is set to a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 549 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left. The inner ear frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, respectively. The left ear outer frame movable body is in a state of being stopped vertically with the first surface 7460 facing the front side (hereinafter, may be referred to as a third state). At the same time, a specific light emission effect in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emission effect state. It becomes a state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 549 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost, and at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. , Left ear medial frame movable body 7400, left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 are right ear medial frame movable body second surface 7320, right ear lateral frame movable body second surface 7370, left ear medial frame movable body second surface 7420, respectively. , The left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 is set to the front side and stopped vertically (hereinafter, may be referred to as the fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the extinguished state to the normal light emitting effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is changed to the normal light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In this way, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, each frame movable body stops in the third state, and it is shown that it is a big hit, and when the result of the special lottery is a loss, each The frame movable body stops in the fourth state, and it is shown that the frame movable body is lost.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B), the decorative symbols that have changed at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the operation valid period correspond to the special lottery result. Is stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 548 (A) and 549 (A), the doublet mode (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit is used. In the case of the effect pattern shown in FIGS. 548 (B) and 549 (B) when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the reach loss mode (for example, "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is lost. ) Stops the decorative design.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol stopped, the frame movable body can move the inner frame of the right ear while maintaining the light emitting mode of either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. Body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 facing forward (third state) or Right ear medial frame movable body 2nd surface 7320, right ear lateral frame movable body 2nd surface 7370, left ear medial frame movable body 2nd surface 7420, left ear lateral frame movable body 2nd surface 7470 facing forward ( From the fourth state), the right ear medial frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear lateral frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear medial frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear lateral frame movable body first surface 7460 are downward. The state is changed to the state facing (first state). At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image ends.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, it is preferable to configure the frame movable body to change the light irradiation state from the specific light emission effect state to the normal light emission effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the normal light emission effect state is continued, and the next decorative symbol change is started.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulated image to be displayed at the timing when the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the frame movable body is in the rotating state (the frame movable body is in the rotating state (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the fact that the second state) is reached. In addition, the frame movable body appears at a position that has never existed in response to the special lottery result, which makes it possible for the player to feel great surprise and fun. Further, after the outer frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the inner frame movable body rotates from the standby state (first state) with the start of the operation valid period. The third state or the third state, which indicates that the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body are changed to the state (second state), and further triggered by the operation of the operation unit by the player. By changing to any of the fourth states indicating that the result of the special lottery is lost, it is possible to give the player the feeling as if he / she has decided the result of the special lottery.

550 (A) to 550 (E) show a modified example of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E). 550 (A) and 550 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 550 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 550 (D) and 550 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 550 (A), 550 (C), and 550 (D) show the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. It shows the state in the standby position (first state). FIGS. 550 (B) and 550 (E) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated (FIGS. The second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, the vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E), and the right ear inner frame is movable. The body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are configured to be visible from below.

Near the front end of the door frame top unit, a right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. Further, a left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit can irradiate light toward the rear. As a result, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are located rearward, can be set to a predetermined light emitting effect state. be.

In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B). If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer frame. It is preferable that the first surface 7460 of the movable body is in a stopped state (third state) facing the front as shown in FIGS. 550 (B) and 550 (E). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, the left ear outer frame. It is preferable that the second surface 7470 of the movable body faces the front and is stopped (fourth state). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

551 (A) to 552 (B) show a modification of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E). 551 (A) and 551 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 551 (C) and 551 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 552 (A) and 552 (B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 551 (A), 551 (C), and 552 (A) show the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. It shows the state in the standby position (first state). 551 (B), 551 (D), and 552 (B) show the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. It shows a rotating state (second state).

In this embodiment, the central portion of the door frame top unit 570 is hollowed out in the left-right direction, and can be visually recognized in a U shape when viewed from the right side. At the bottom of the door frame top unit 570 that is hollowed out in the left-right direction, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are placed in the upper part of the door frame top unit 570 that is hollowed out in the left-right direction. Is provided with a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450, respectively.

The right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 are inside the right ear in the standby state (first state) as shown in FIGS. 551 (A), 551 (C), and 552 (A). The first surface 7310 of the frame movable body and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 are located so as to face each other.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have a shape in which a bottomed cylindrical shape in which a part of the side surface of the cylindrical shape is cut is inverted in the vertical direction. In the standby state (first state) as shown in FIGS. 551 (A), 551 (C), and 552 (A), in front of the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400. , Right ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7360, left ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7460 are located facing forward, and right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are located. It is configured to be invisible when viewed from the front. On the other hand, in the first state, when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are visually recognized from diagonally below, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame located inside are visually recognized. It is possible to visually recognize the lower part of the movable body 7400.

Below the door frame top unit 570, a right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. Further, a left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit can irradiate light obliquely forward and upward. As a result, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are located diagonally above the front, can be brought into a predetermined light emitting effect state. It is possible.

In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 548 (A) to 549 (B). If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, as shown in FIGS. 551 (B), 551 (D), and 552 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the left ear inner frame. It is preferable that the first surface 7410 of the movable body faces the front and is stopped (third state). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, it is preferable that the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 are stopped facing the front (fourth state). .. On the other hand, regarding the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, regardless of whether the special lottery result is a big hit or a loss, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear outer frame It is preferable that the second surface 7470 of the movable body faces the player side. Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

553 (A) to 553 (D) and 554 (A) to 554 (B) show a modified example of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 523 (A) to 523 (E). There is. 553 (A) and 553 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 553 (C) and 553 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 554 (A) and 554 (B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 553 (A), 553 (C), and 554 (A) show a state (first state) in which a plurality of frame movable bodies are housed in the standby position. 553 (B), 553 (D), and 554 (B) show a state in which a plurality of frame movable bodies are moved to moving positions (second state).

In the embodiment shown below, instead of the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 is provided, and the door frame side unit right arm portion 7600, the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650, and the curtain plate bottom unit are provided. It includes a right foot movable body 7700 and a curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750.

The door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape that imitates a box composed of two members with a lid, and its right side surface and left side surface constitute an outer frame 2 and a door frame 3, respectively. It is provided so as to overlap the right side surface and the left side surface of the door frame base unit 100 in a front view. Further, the upper surface of the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 is always located above the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit face decoration part 7500 is a lid in a box composed of two members with a lid and a door frame top unit face movable body 7510 which is a lid box to be placed on top of the box composed of two members with a lid. It is composed of a door frame top unit and a lower face 7520, which is a body box to be covered with.

The door frame top unit face movable body 7510 has a lid box shape without a side surface on the back side, is provided so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520, and is controlled by a peripheral control board 1510. It is installed so that it can be moved up and down by a drive mechanism that does not. In addition, the side surface of the door frame top unit on the front side of the movable body 7510 has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is decorated with the right eye of the door frame top unit in a shape that imitates the eyes of an animal robot. A portion 7512 and a door frame top unit left eye decoration portion 7514 are provided. Like the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is provided with a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 that imitate animal ears. Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to be movable in the vertical direction.

The door frame top unit lower face 7520 has a box-like shape with a recess that can accommodate the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and has a door frame similar to the door frame top unit 570. It is provided in a state of being fixed to the upper part of 3. Further, the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 includes a door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 and a door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524.

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 near the center in the left-right direction on the front side surface portion of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520. The door frame top unit, the movable nose under the face 7522, has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, but has a box shape with an open lower surface as if the sliding door of the chest of drawers was turned upside down. The door frame top unit, the movable nose under the face 7522, is movable in the front-rear direction. The door frame top unit lower nose movable body 7522 is a frame movable body that imitates the nose and mouth of an animal robot.

The door frame top unit facial movable body 7522 is provided so as to be covered by a side surface portion on the front side of the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510. Therefore, in the state of being covered by the side surface portion on the front side of the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 (first state), the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is invisible. Further, the door frame top unit, the movable nose under the face 7522, is in a state where it cannot move forward.

When the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 moves upward to enter the second state, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520. The front surface becomes visible from the front, and the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 becomes movable forward.

The door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is provided near the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the bottom surface of the door frame top unit face lower portion 7520. The door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 has a shape like a cylinder cut out in a fan shape, and is fan-shaped when viewed from the right side as shown in FIGS. 554 (A) and 554 (B). The side forming the central angle is provided so as to be located on the right side. The door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 can rotate within a predetermined angle range with the side forming the central angle of the fan shape as the rotation axis. Further, the door frame top unit face lower opening movable body 7524 does not have a curved surface located on the front side. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 553 (B) and 554 (B), when the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is rotated about 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, The inside is configured to be visible.

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 changes from a state provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit lower face 7520 (first state) to a state of moving forward (second state). The door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is rotated about 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side (first state) from the state where the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is housed in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 (first state). By changing to (2 states), it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal robot imitates the state in which the mouth is open.

The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 and the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 are provided below the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 so as to project toward the front from the front of both left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100, respectively. ing.

The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 is composed of a door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, a door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, and a door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630.

The door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 has a box-shaped shape with a gap inside, and inside the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 can be moved. Is. The thickness of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 is about several mm, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 that move inside can be visually recognized.

The door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is formed in a pipe shape by a flexible synthetic resin. The length of the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620 is about 50 cm, and by rotating a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) provided in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It can be rolled up and down. 553 (A) and 554 (A) show a state (first state) in which the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown).

The door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630 is formed of two members in the shape of the alphabet L when viewed from the side and a cylindrical member that imitates the axis that locks them, and imitates a robot manipulator. It has a shape. Further, an end portion of the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is attached to this cylindrical member, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) described above. In the first state), the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is located at the upper part in the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610.

By rotating the reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) in the direction opposite to the winding direction, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is lowered in the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, whereby the door frame side unit right arm is lowered. The lower arm portion 7630 is in a state of being positioned at the lower part in the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 due to its own weight. FIG. 553 (B) shows a state (second state) in which the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is located at the lower portion in the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610. In the second state, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, which was previously invisible, becomes visible.

The door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 has a symmetrical structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm portion 7600. Specifically, the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 has the door frame side unit right arm upper arm. The door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, and has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630. Therefore, detailed description of each member constituting the left arm portion 7650 of the door frame side unit will be omitted.

Further, regarding the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650, similarly to the door frame side unit right arm portion 7600, the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) (first state). By rotating the reel-shaped drive mechanism in the direction opposite to the winding direction, it is possible to take a state of being located at the lower part (second state). For example, FIGS. 553 (B) and 554 (B) show a state in which the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 is located at the lower portion (second state). In the second state, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670, which was previously invisible, becomes visible.

The entire or part of the outside (left side when viewed from the front) of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 and the entire or part of the outside (right side when viewed from the front) of the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 may be formed of opaque synthetic resin. , It may be configured to be formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and then to be attached with a colored opaque sticker or the like. The entire inside of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 (right side when viewed from the front) and the entire inside of the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 (left side when viewed from the front) may be formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

With such a configuration, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620, the door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670, and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 have moved. It becomes difficult for the left and right players to visually recognize the door, and it is possible for only the player playing the game with the pachinko machine 1 to enjoy the operation without the other players knowing that the door has been operated. In addition, when these frame movable bodies are operated for the purpose of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation as described later, even if the special lottery result is lost after these frame movable bodies are operated, other It becomes difficult for the player to see it, and it becomes difficult for other players to feel embarrassed.

The curtain plate member 50 has a curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 on the left side when viewed from the front, and a curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 on the right side when viewed from the front. The curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 are in the standby position (first state) as shown in FIGS. 553 (A) and 554 (A). Each is located below the handle unit 300.

The curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 is composed of a curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710 and a curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720. The shape of the right foot sneak portion 7710 of the curtain plate bottom unit is cylindrical. Further, the right foot tip portion 7720 of the curtain plate bottom unit has a rectangular parallelepiped shape imitating the shape of the foot, and the portion corresponding to the sole of the foot is provided with two circular recesses. The curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 is attached to the front surface of the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710. Therefore, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710 and the curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 operate integrally.

A drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is provided in the lower part of the outer frame 2, and the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710 can be moved in the front-rear direction. Further, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710 can be rotated by a predetermined angle about the longitudinal direction of the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710.

For example, the right foot sneak portion 7710 of the curtain plate bottom unit is moved forward by a predetermined distance from the state (first state) in the standby position shown in FIGS. 553 (A) and 554 (A), and then viewed from the front. It may be configured to rotate 90 degrees clockwise to operate in a stopped state (second state). 553 (B) and 554 (B) show the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710 in the stopped state (second state) in this way.

The curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 has a symmetrical structure and function as the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700. Specifically, the curtain plate bottom unit left foot sneak portion 7760 has the same structure and function as the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710, and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot tip portion 7770 has the curtain plate bottom unit right foot. It has the same structure and function as the front part 7720. Therefore, detailed description of each member constituting the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 will be omitted.

By providing the frame movable body below the game machine in this way, the player does not visually recognize that the frame movable body has moved as in the conventional case, but rather on a part of the body such as the player's arm. When the frame movable body comes into contact with the frame movable body, it becomes possible to give the player an unprecedented perceptual experience such that the player recognizes that the frame movable body has moved.

With reference to FIGS. 553 and 554, an embodiment in which a plurality of frame movable bodies are provided in the pachinko machine 1 and they operate has been shown. Specifically, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522, and the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524. , Door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620, door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630, door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670, door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680, curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700, curtain plate From the state (first state) in which the bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 is in the standby position shown in FIGS. 553 (A), 553 (C), and 554 (A) as the frame movable body, respectively, FIG. 553 (B). ), The state changes to the state (second state) at the moving position shown in FIGS. 553 (D) and 554 (B). Further, each frame movable body can take a first state and a second state by controlling a drive means (not shown) provided corresponding to each frame movable body by the peripheral control board 1510. ..

Further, each frame movable body may be provided with light emitting means controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 so that the normal light emitting effect state and the specific light emitting effect state as described above can be obtained.

Each of such frame movable bodies is subjected to an effect pattern shown in FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B), an effect pattern shown in FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B), or an effect obtained by modifying these effect patterns. It may be applied to a pattern and configured to operate or emit light.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided on the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510. After the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 is placed in the second state located above, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear in the state of being stored in the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 (first state). The frame movable body 7200 may be configured to be in a state of protruding upward (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B) and the time charts of modified examples thereof. Specifically, in each time chart, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is first changed from the first state to the second state, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear correspond to the operation to the operation unit. The frame movable body 7200 may be configured to be in the first state to the second state.

Alternatively, after the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is placed in the second state located above, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body is stored in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 (first state). The 7522 may be configured to project forward (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B) and the time charts of modified examples thereof. Specifically, in each time chart, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is first changed from the first state to the second state, and the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body corresponds to the operation to the operation unit. The 7522 may be configured to go from the first state to the second state.

Further, after the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is configured to be changed from the first state to the second state. May be good. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B) and the time charts of modified examples thereof.

Alternatively, the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is changed from the first state to the second state, and then the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state. May be good. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B) and the time charts of modified examples thereof.

FIGS. 555 (A) to 555 (K) show modified examples of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image applicable to the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). It is a thing. Note that FIG. 555 (A) is a collective representation of each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B).

FIG. 555 (B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t4, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is completed at the timing t6. After that, at the timing t7, the ascending operation of the frame movable body is started.

By configuring such an operation / display pattern as an effect, the display of the frame movable body simulated image serves as a notice that the frame movable body operates. In addition, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image allows the player to recognize how the frame movable body operates, and the player who sees such a frame movable body simulated image can see the frame. The movement of the movable body can be visually recognized from the start of the movement. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the movement of the frame movable body. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body injures a finger or the like. In addition, it can be shown that a player who has placed lightweight luggage or the like on the frame movable body moves them to another position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the luggage falls and the player is injured, or a load is applied to the drive unit that moves the frame movable body.

FIG. 555 (C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the ascending motion of the ear frame movable body is completed at the timing t9, then the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t10, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t12. Is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the movement of the frame movable body to the ascending position (moving position). Therefore, if the player does not notice the movement of the frame movable body, the frame movable body that has completed the movement to the ascending position is suddenly visually recognized by such a player, which is a big surprise. It becomes possible to give to a person. Further, since the frame movable body simulated image is displayed after moving to the ascending position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the moved frame movable body. In addition, the player can know how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 555 (D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t6, then the ascending operation of the frame movable body is started at the timing t7, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t8. Is completed, and the ascending operation of the frame movable body is completed at the timing t9.

With such a configuration, the display of the frame movable body simulated image serves as a notice that the frame movable body moves. It is possible to make the player recognize how the frame movable body operates. The movement of the frame movable body can be visually recognized from the start of the movement. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the movement of the frame movable body. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body injures a finger or the like.

FIG. 555 (E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the ascending motion of the frame movable body is started at the timing t7, then the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t8, and the ascending motion of the frame movable body is completed at the timing t9. At the timing t10, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is completed.

With such a configuration, the frame movable body can start moving unknowingly, and the player can be surprised. In addition, it is possible to notify the player that the frame movable body has started moving.

FIG. 555 (F) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from the timing t3 to the timing t7 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the ascending operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 555 (G) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t9 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the ascending operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 555 (H) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the ascending motion of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from timing t9 to timing t13 (4 seconds). It is said. The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize in detail how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 555 (I) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed from the timing t5 to the timing t7 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed again from the timing t7 to the timing t9. Will be done. On the other hand, the ascending operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The number of times the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed may be three or more times. For example, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed at timings t3 to t5.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 555 (J) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed again from the timing t9 to the timing t11. Will be done. On the other hand, the ascending operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The number of times the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed may be three or more. For example, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed at timings t11 to t13.

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to recognize how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 555 (K) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the actual timing is three times from timing t4 to timing t5, timing t5 to timing t6, and timing t6 to timing t7, which are the timings before the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. The frame movable body simulated image is changed from the display mode imitating the first state to the display mode imitating the second state at twice the speed of the frame movable body. It should be noted that such a display may be performed twice in total from timing t5 to timing t6 and from timing t6 to timing t7, or may be performed only once from timing t6 to timing t7.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize how the frame movable body moves in a short time. In addition, since the simulated frame movable body image is displayed quickly, the eyes become accustomed to seeing the movement of the actual frame movable body, and the player can fully enjoy the movement mode of the actual frame movable body. Is possible. In addition, it is possible to make the player more aware of the operation mode by performing the display a plurality of times.

It is preferable that each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 555 (A) to 555 (K) is executed so as to correspond to a predetermined situation in the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the degree of expectation for the jackpot and the frequency of its appearance may be different for each effect pattern. For example, when a predetermined reach effect occurs, one of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 555 (A) to 555 (K) is selected and executed. good. Further, the effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 555 (A) has the highest frequency of appearance, and the frequency of appearance gradually decreases as the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 555 (B) to 555 (K) is obtained. The effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 555 (A) has the lowest expectation for a big hit, and the degree of expectation for a big hit gradually becomes the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 555 (B) to 555 (K). May be configured so that the effect pattern to be executed is selected based on the jackpot lottery result so as to increase the value. Further, each of the following modified examples may be similarly configured to be executed with a predetermined degree of expectation and frequency of appearance.

With such a configuration, when an effect pattern for a frame movable body different from the normal appears, the degree of expectation for the jackpot from the player is not higher than the effect pattern of the normal frame movable body. It is possible to make you feel like.

It should be noted that some of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 555 (A) to 555 (K) may be combined and executed as an effect. In this case, it is preferable to combine the game board side effect display device 1600 so that a plurality of frame movable body simulated images are not displayed at the same time. For example, by executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 555 (K) from timing t4 to timing t7 and executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 555 (J) from timing t7 to timing t11, the effects produced by both effect patterns. It becomes possible to execute an effect pattern that can play both of the above.

556 (A) to 556 (E) are modified examples of the light emitting mode of the light emitting portion of the frame movable body that can be adapted to the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). It is shown. Note that FIG. 556 (A) is a collective representation of each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B).

FIG. 556 (B) shows an effect pattern in which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is turned off at the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts to move from the standby position to the moving position. Further, in FIG. 556 (C), the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is turned off at a timing (timing t5) before the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts moving from the standby position to the moving position. The production pattern is shown.

In this way, at the timing before the frame movable body is in the second state, the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is turned off, and that state is until the operation unit is operated or the operation valid period ends. By being maintained, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the frame movable body is moving from the standby position to the moving position. Then, in such a situation, when the player operates the operation unit, the frame movable body that has completed the movement to the moving position suddenly emits light from the off state (special light emission effect state or light emission effect). Since it becomes a state), it is possible to give a big surprise to the player.

FIG. 556 (D) shows an effect pattern in which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is put into a state in which light emission is suppressed instead of being turned off at the timing t9. The state in which the light emission is suppressed may be, for example, light emission so that the blinking cycle is longer or the amount of light is reduced as compared with the light emission effect state.

In this way, instead of turning off the light, setting the light emission to a suppressed state can obtain the same effect as when turning off the light.

FIG. 556 (E) shows an effect pattern in which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is put into a specific light emission effect state instead of being turned off at the timing t9. This effect pattern may be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit. At the timing t9 when the frame movable body is in the second state, an example is shown in which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is set to the specific light emitting effect state, but the timing t7 when the frame movable body starts the operation and the frame movable are shown. At the timing t5, which is the timing before the body starts the operation, the light emitting portion of the frame movable body may be set to the specific light emitting effect state.

Instead of turning off the lights, the state of the light emitting portion of the movable frame is suddenly changed to the specific light emitting effect state, so that the player can have a great expectation for the big hit.

FIGS. 557 (A) to 557 (E) show a modified example of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image applicable to the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B). It is a thing. Note that FIG. 557 (A) is a collective representation of each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 533 (A) to 534 (B).

FIG. 557 (B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t7, and then at the timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) are started. Starts rotation and becomes a rotating state (second state).

As described above, the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move at the same speed as the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rotate. Is displayed. Therefore, after the display in which the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated twice between the timing t7 and the timing t9 is executed, the right ear frame movable body 7100 is executed. And the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually starts to rotate. The timing of starting the display of the frame movable body simulated image may be an earlier timing. For example, if the display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t5, the display imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated four times. Later, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually start rotating.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulated image to be displayed before the frame movable body starts to operate, the display of the frame movable body simulated image serves as a notice that the frame movable body operates. .. In addition, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image allows the player to recognize how the frame movable body operates. Then, the player who sees such a frame movable body simulated image can visually recognize the movement of the frame movable body from the start of the movement. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the movement of the frame movable body. In addition, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is repeatedly performed before the frame movable body starts the operation, so that the player can surely recognize how the frame movable body operates. It becomes. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body injures a finger or the like. In addition, it can be shown that a player who has placed lightweight luggage or the like on the frame movable body moves them to another position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the luggage falls and the player is injured, or a load is applied to the drive unit that moves the frame movable body.

FIG. 557 (C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, at the timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start to rotate and enter the rotating state (second state), and then the timing. At t11, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body to display the simulated image of the frame movable body after the frame movable body starts to move, the player notices that the frame movable body has changed to the rotating state (second state). It is possible to make it difficult to remove. Therefore, if the player does not notice the change in the state of the frame movable body, the rotated frame movable body is suddenly visually recognized by the player, which can give the player a great surprise. It becomes.

FIG. 557 (D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t7. From timing t7 to timing t9, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed at a high speed (two rotations per second). After that, at the timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state).

In this way, the frame movable body is configured to rotate and display the frame movable body simulated image at a speed faster than the actual frame movable body (twice the speed) before the frame movable body starts to move. It becomes possible to get used to the operation mode when the rotation state (second state) is changed.

FIG. 557 (E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t5. From timing t5 to timing t9, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed at a low speed (half a rotation per second). After that, at the timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start rotating and enter the rotating state (second state).

In this way, the frame is movable by configuring the frame movable body simulated image to rotate and display at a slower speed (half the speed) than the actual frame movable body before the frame movable body starts operating. It is possible to let the player who feels that the movement mode is too fast when the body changes to the rotating state (second state) know the movement mode of the frame movable body.

A modified example of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image shown in FIGS. 555 (B) to 555 (E), the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 538 to 540, and a modified example of those embodiments. It may be configured to be feasible as an effect pattern by appropriately applying it to the inner frame movable body in the above.

A modified example of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image shown in FIGS. 557 (B) to 557 (E), the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 547 to 549 and the like, and a modified example of those embodiments. It may be applied to either one of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body in the above, or may be applied to both in the same manner and configured to be feasible as an effect pattern.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 539 and 540 and FIGS. 548 and 549, the first frame movable body was changed from the first state to the second state, and then the state was maintained for a certain period of time. Later, the second frame movable body is configured to change from the first state to the second state. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 539 and 540, it is configured to take a predetermined time when changing the first frame movable body from the first state to the second state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the mode in which the frame movable body changes the state.

In the above-described production example with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, FIGS. 533 and 534, 539 and 540, and 548 and 549, respectively, the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. At the same timing as the timing, the frame movable body simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the same mode as the actual frame movable body change mode. As described above with reference to C), FIG. 555 (E), FIG. 555 (H), and FIG. 557 (C), the actual frame is set at a timing before the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started. The movable body may be configured to start an operation of changing from the first state to the second state, or to change from the first state to the second state.

With such a configuration, it is easy for the player who sees the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image to find the moving frame movable body without noticing that the actual frame movable body is moving. It becomes possible to do.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, 539 and 540, and 548 and 549, respectively, the result of the special lottery is obtained by the player's operation on the operation unit during the operation valid period. Depending on the situation, the state of the frame movable body may change from the first state to the second state, or the state of the frame movable body may change from the second state to either the third state or the fourth state. ..

With such a configuration, the player determines the position of the operation unit and the position of the frame movable body whose state may change, and then operates the frame movable body with the line of sight aligned with the frame movable body. It is possible to operate the operation unit at a timing desired by the player without looking at the unit. As a result, it is possible to reliably visually recognize whether or not the state of the frame movable body changes, and if the state of the frame movable body changes, what kind of state it changes.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, 539 and 540, and 548 and 549, respectively, an image instructing an operation to the operation unit is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Although it is configured, an effect pattern for displaying a special operation instruction image that can be displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit may be configured to be feasible in addition to the above example. For example, as the operation instruction image, the image of the frame movable body may be configured to be simultaneously displayed in a manner included in the image of the operation unit.

With such a configuration, when the player visually recognizes the special operation instruction image, the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and it can be recognized that the frame movable body always operates when the operation unit is operated. As a result, the operation unit can be operated while the line of sight is aligned with the movable frame body, and the operation of the movable frame body can be fully enjoyed.

In the above-described examples with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, FIGS. 533 and 534, 539 and 540, and 548 and 549, respectively, the frame movable body includes a light emitting portion or is relative to the frame movable body. A light emitting unit capable of irradiating light is provided separately from the frame movable body, and after the frame movable body changes its state, it is turned off at the same timing as the operation effective period starts, and the operation unit is operated. It is configured to be in a light emitting effect state according to a predetermined light emitting mode according to the timing and the end of the operation valid period, but as described with reference to FIGS. 556 (D) and 556 (E), the operation valid period It is not always necessary to turn off the light, and it may be configured to be in a light emitting state that can be distinguished from the normal light emitting state. For example, by setting only the outer frame movable body to the extinguishing state and setting the inner frame movable body to the specific light emitting effect state, or by setting the right frame movable body to the extinguishing state and setting the left frame movable body to the specific light emitting effect state, a big hit. May be configured to notify that Alternatively, all the frame movable bodies are turned off until the operation valid period, and when the operation valid period occurs, the inner frame movable body is set to the light emitting effect state to notify that the operation valid period has occurred, and then the operation unit is notified. Depending on the operation to or the end of the operation valid period, the light emitting effect state of all the frame-side movable bodies may be set to the light emitting effect state according to the special lottery result.

By changing the light emitting state of the frame movable body to a different state according to the change of the state of the frame movable body in this way, it becomes easier to grasp that the frame movable body has operated by the change of the light emitting mode. In addition, if at least a part of the frame movable body is illuminated, the player is less likely to be injured when the frame movable body moves, as compared with the case where the frame movable body is turned off. be

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, FIGS. 533 and 534, 539 and 540, and 548 and 549, respectively, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the same mode as the actual frame movable body change mode at the same timing as in FIG. 555 (B). ), FIG. 555 (D), FIG. 555 (F), FIG. 555 (G), FIG. 555 (I), FIG. 555 (K), FIG. 557 (B), FIG. 557 (D), FIG. 557 (E). As described above with reference, at a timing prior to the timing of starting the operation of changing the actual frame movable body from the first state to the second state or changing from the first state to the second state. , The dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image may be started.

With such a configuration, the frame movable body can be visually recognized in a state where the frame movable body operates in advance, so that every move of the frame movable body operation mode is overlooked. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation. In particular, such a configuration is effective when the frame movable body operates in a complicated manner as shown in the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 and 540, or 548 and 549.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525 and 539 and 540, respectively, the frame movable body has the same time (2 seconds) as the time when the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (2 seconds). The simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the change mode of the actual frame movable body, but as described above with reference to FIG. 555 (K), the frame movable body simulated image is The speed at which the display mode imitating the first state changes to the display mode imitating the second state may be faster than the speed at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state.

In this way, from the display mode in which the frame movable body simulated image imitates the first state in a time (1 second) shorter than the time (2 seconds) when the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By configuring the display mode to imitate the second state, the eyes become accustomed to the quick movement of the frame movable body simulated image, so that the actual frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. In some cases, it is possible to fully enjoy the movement.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, and 548 and 549, respectively, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state. As described above with reference to the above, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed in a mode of rotating at a higher speed before the frame movable body is in the second state. For example, after displaying the frame movable body simulated image so as to make one rotation or a plurality of rotations at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds, the frame movable body may be configured to be in the second state.

In this way, it is configured to dynamically display the mode in which the frame movable body simulated image makes one rotation in a time (0.5 seconds) shorter than the time required for the frame movable body to make one rotation (1 second). By doing so, the eyes become accustomed to the quick movement of the frame movable body simulated image, and it becomes possible to fully enjoy the rotational movement of the actual frame movable body in the second state.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525 and 539 and 540, respectively, the frame movable body has the same time (2 seconds) as the time when the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (2 seconds). Although the simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the change mode of the actual frame movable body, refer to FIGS. 555 (F), 555 (G), and 555 (H). As described above, the speed at which the frame movable body simulated image changes from the display mode of the state imitating the first state to the display mode of the state imitating the second state is changed from the first state to the second state of the frame movable body. It may be slower than the changing speed.

In this way, the display of the state in which the frame movable body simulated image imitates the first state over a longer time (4 seconds) than the time (2 seconds) when the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By configuring the display mode to change from the mode to the display mode imitating the second state, even if the movement of the frame movable body is felt to be too fast for the player, the frame movable body simulated image is viewed. By doing so, the player can recognize the operation mode.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, and 548 and 549, respectively, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state. As described above with reference to the above, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed in a mode of rotating at a slower speed before the frame movable body is in the second state. For example, after displaying the frame movable body simulated image so as to make one rotation or a plurality of rotations at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds, the frame movable body may be configured to be in the second state.
In this way, it is configured to dynamically display the mode in which the frame movable body simulated image makes one rotation over a longer time (2 seconds) than the time required for the frame movable body to make one rotation (1 second). By doing so, even if the rotation motion of the actual frame movable body in the second state is felt to be too fast for the player, the player recognizes the motion mode by looking at the frame movable body simulated image. It becomes possible.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 524 and 525, and 539 and 540, respectively, the frame movable body simulated image is in the same mode as the mode in which the actual frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. However, the display that dynamically changes from the image showing the state imitating the first state to the image showing the state imitating the second state is performed only once. As described with reference to FIGS. 555 (J) and 555 (K), such a display of the frame movable body simulated image may be performed a plurality of times.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, and 548 and 549, respectively, the frame movable body simulated image is displayed at the same timing as the timing when the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. Is started, and during the period in which the actual frame movable body continues in the second state (rotation state), the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically rotated and displayed in the same manner as the change mode of the actual frame movable body. It is configured. Therefore, the frame movable body simulated image is repeatedly rotated and displayed so as to loop.

In this way, the mode in which the state of the frame movable body changes is dynamically displayed multiple times as a frame movable body simulated image, or when the frame movable body is in a state of periodically changing, it is adjusted to that state. By repeatedly and dynamically displaying the frame movable body simulated image in a mode of periodically changing the frame movable body, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks that the frame movable body has changed from the first state to the second state. Is possible.

558 (A) to 559 (B) show a modified example of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). In the present embodiment, the change from the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) to the state in which the movement is completed (second state) is started in accordance with the start of the operation valid period (timing t9). The point that the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the point that the precursor is displayed from the timing t7 to the timing t9 before the operation valid period occurs, the point that the operation unit is operated (timing t14), or the operation is performed. It is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B) in that the post-operation display is performed when the operation valid period ends (timing t18) without being performed. Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emitting effect state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of the decorative symbol), the effect mode is basically the same, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common is omitted. , The above-mentioned different parts will be mainly described below.

FIG. 558 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 558 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 559 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 559 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 558 (A) to 559 (B), the precursor display, which is a display suggesting that the operation valid period occurs, is started from the timing t7 in the game board side effect display device 1600. .. As a precursor display, the characters "push?" Are displayed as an image, and the operation continues until the timing t9 when the operation validity period starts. At the timing t9, the characters "push !!" are displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation valid period has started and the operation unit is in the reception state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14) or when the operation valid period ends without any operation (timing t18), and instead, "!!" is displayed as a post-operation display. Display characters as an image. The display after the operation is continued for 2 seconds and then ends (timing t16 or timing t20).

On the other hand, at the timing t9, the frame movable body is turned off and the movement starts from the standby position (first state), and at the timing t11, the movement is completed (second state). Become.

In this way, before the frame movable body starts moving or during the movement, the player displays the display (precursor display or operation instruction display) that distracts the player from the frame movable body, so that the player can move to the operation unit. When the operation of is performed, the player's line of sight is guided to the frame movable body by changing from the extinguished state to the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. Then, since the player feels that the frame movable body has changed from the first state to the second state unknowingly, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player. Further, even if it takes time to change the state of the frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the player can change the frame movable body to the second state by the precursor display or the operation instruction display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as feeling annoyed feelings. Further, since the frame movable body can be slowly moved, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured.

FIGS. 560 (A) to 561 (B) show modified examples of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 558 (A) to 559 (B). In the present embodiment, from the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) in accordance with the timing (t14) when the operation unit is operated or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t9). , The point where the change to the completed state (second state) is started, and the point that the frame movable body changes to the second state is only when the special lottery result is a big hit. It is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 559 (B). Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emitting effect state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of the decorative symbol), the effect mode is basically the same, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common is omitted. , The above-mentioned different parts will be mainly described below.

FIG. 560 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 560 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 561 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 561 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 560 (A) and 560 (B), the operation unit is operated by the player while the operation valid period is generated and the operation instruction is displayed (timing t14). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the frame movable body is moved from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement (second state), and is displayed after the operation (). When the special lottery result is lost at timing t14 to timing t16), an effect pattern is shown in which the frame movable body does not change from the standby position (first state) and only the display is performed after the operation. There is.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 561 (A) and 561 (B), when the special lottery result is a big hit at the timing (t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body is in the standby position. The movement is performed from the (first state) to the completed state (second state), and the display is performed after the operation (timing t18 to timing t20). If the special lottery result is lost, the frame movable body An effect pattern is shown in which only the display is performed after the operation without changing from the state in which is in the standby position (first state).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 560 (A) and 561 (A), from the state in which the movement of the frame movable body is completed (second state) to the state in the standby position (first state) at the timing t22. The movement is started, and the movement to the standby position is completed at the timing t24.

In this way, even after the player has operated on the operation unit, the game is played from the frame movable body that changes the state from the first state to the second state by performing the post-operation display instead of the operation instruction display. It is possible to distract the person's consciousness. Then, by ending the display after the operation at the timing when the change of the frame movable body to the second state is completed, the player finally notices that the frame movable body is in the second state, which is large for the player. It is possible to give a surprise. Further, even if it takes time to change the state of the frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the player is irritated by the display after the operation that the frame movable body is in the second state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as feeling emotions. Further, since the frame movable body can be slowly moved, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured.

The timing for changing the frame movable body from the extinguished state to the specific light emitting effect state is configured to be performed at the timing (timing t16) when the frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. You may. With such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice the change in the state of the frame movable body.

562 (A) to 563 (B) show a modified example of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). In the present embodiment, the change from the state in which the inner frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) to the state in which the movement is completed (second state) is performed in accordance with the start of the operation valid period (timing t7). The point to start, the point where the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the point where the precursor is displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t7 before the operation valid period occurs, the point when the operation unit is operated (timing t11) or the operation This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B) in that the post-operation display is performed when the operation valid period ends (timing t16) without performing the above. Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emitting effect state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of the decorative symbol), the effect mode is basically the same, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common is omitted. , The above-mentioned different parts will be mainly described below.

FIG. 562 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 562 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 563 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 563 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B), the precursor display, which is a display suggesting that the operation valid period occurs, is started from the timing t5 in the game board side effect display device 1600. .. As a precursor display, the characters "push?" Are displayed as an image, and the operation continues until the timing t7 when the operation validity period starts. At the timing t7, the characters "push !!" are displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation valid period has started and the operation unit is in the reception state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the operation valid period ends without any operation (timing t16), and instead, "!!" is displayed as a post-operation display. Display characters as an image. The display after the operation is continued for 2 seconds and then ends (timing t13 or timing t18).

On the other hand, at the timing t7, the inner frame movable body is turned off and the movement starts from the state in the standby position (first state), and at the timing t9, the movement is completed (second state). It becomes.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 562 (A) and 562 (B), the player operates the operation unit while the operation valid period is generated and the operation instruction is displayed (timing t11). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the outer frame movable body is moved from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement (second state), and is displayed after the operation. (Timing t11 to timing t13), when the special lottery result is lost, the effect pattern in which the outer frame movable body does not change from the standby position (first state) and only the display after the operation is performed is shown. Has been done.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 563 (A) and 563 (B), when the special lottery result is a big hit at the timing (t16) when the operation valid period ends, the outer frame movable body is in the standby position. Move from the state (first state) to the completed state (second state), display after the operation (timing t16 to timing t18), and if the special lottery result is lost, the frame can be moved. An effect pattern is shown in which the body does not change from the standby position (first state) and only the display is performed after the operation.

After that, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 562 (A) and 563 (A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from the timing t26 to the timing t28. Further, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from the timing t30 to the timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies. Operation ends.

In this way, before or during the movement of the inner frame movable body, the player's consciousness is raised by displaying a display (precursor display or operation instruction display) that distracts the player from the frame movable body. It will be concentrated on the effect display device 1600 on the game board side. Further, even while the outer frame movable body is moving after the player has operated the operation unit, the post-operation display is performed instead of the operation instruction display that has been performed up to that point, so that the player's consciousness is raised. It will continue to be directed to the game board side production display device 1600. With such a configuration, the player feels that both the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body have changed from the first state to the second state before they know it, which is a big surprise to the player. It becomes possible to give. Further, even if it takes time to change the state of the inner frame movable body or the outer frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the inner frame can be moved by the precursor display, the operation instruction display, and the post-operation display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels annoyed when the body or the outer frame movable body is in the second state. Further, since the frame movable body can be slowly moved, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured.

The timing of changing the frame movable body from the extinguished state to the specific light emitting effect state is performed at the timing (timing t13 or timing t18) when the outer frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice the change in the state of the frame movable body.

564 (A) to 565 (B) show a modified example of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). In the present embodiment, from the state in which the inner frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) in accordance with the time when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t11) or the end of the operation valid period (timing t16). , The point where the change to the completed state (second state) is started, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, and the operation validity period is The point where the precursor is displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t7 before the occurrence, the display after the operation when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t11) or when the operation is not performed and the operation valid period ends (timing t16). This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 539 (A) to 540 (B). Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emitting effect state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of the decorative symbol), the effect mode is basically the same, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common is omitted. , The above-mentioned different parts will be mainly described below.

FIG. 564 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 564 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 565 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 565 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B), the precursor display, which is a display suggesting that the operation valid period occurs, is started from the timing t5 in the game board side effect display device 1600. .. As a precursor display, the characters "push?" Are displayed as an image, and the operation continues until the timing t7 when the operation validity period starts. At the timing t7, the characters "push !!" are displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation valid period has started and the operation unit is in the reception state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the operation valid period ends without any operation (timing t16), and instead, "!!" is displayed as a post-operation display. Display characters as an image. The display after the operation is continued for 2 seconds and then ends (timing t13 or timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 564 (A) and 564 (B), the player operates the operation unit while the operation valid period is generated and the operation instruction is displayed (timing t11). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the inner frame movable body changes from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement (second state) (timing t11 to timing t13). , When the outer frame movable body changes from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement (second state) (timing t15 to timing t17) and the special lottery result is lost. An effect pattern that does not change from the state in which the outer frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is shown.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 565 (A) and 565 (B), when the special lottery result is a big hit at the timing (t16) when the operation valid period ends, the inner frame movable body is in the standby position. After changing from the state (first state) to the completed state (second state) (timing t16 to timing t18), the movement is completed from the state in which the outer frame movable body is in the standby position (first state). When the state (second state) is changed (timing t20 to timing t22) and the special lottery result is lost, the effect pattern that does not change from the state where the outer frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is It is shown.

After that, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 564 (A) and 565 (A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from the timing t26 to the timing t28. Further, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 564 (A) and 565 (B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from the timing t30 to the timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies Operation ends.

In this way, when the player operates the operation unit, the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By changing to the state, the player slowly observes the mode in which the frame movable body changes the state, and from the player's point of view, the degree of excitement gradually increases over time.

The effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B) and the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) are executed according to the gaming state. It may be configured.

For example, in the case of a normal gaming state (during non-probability fluctuation, non-time saving, non-electric support, etc.) in which the average fluctuation time of the decorative symbol is relatively long, FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) It is advisable to execute the effect pattern explained with reference to. In this case, since the production is performed in a state where a big hit is unlikely to occur, the player can thoroughly enjoy the movement of the frame movable body.

On the other hand, it is a state that can occur after a big hit occurs once, and the average fluctuation time of the decorative symbol is relatively short compared to the normal gaming state, which is a relatively advantageous gaming state for the player (during probability fluctuation). In the case of (time saving, medium time, electric support, etc.), it is preferable to execute the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B). In this case, the time from the operation of the operation unit to the second state of the frame movable body is short, and the game can be changed to the big hit game state at a good tempo.

In the normal gaming state, only the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) can be executed, and in the state advantageous to the player, FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B). ) May be executed only for the effect pattern described with reference to.
Alternatively, in the normal gaming state, the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) is more than the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B). In a state in which the execution rate is high and is advantageous to the player, FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B) are shown rather than the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B). It may be configured to increase the execution rate of the effect pattern described with reference to.

Further, the timing of executing the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) is configured to be executed at an earlier stage than immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed. May be good. For example, before the decorative symbol forms the reach state, the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) is executed without stopping the decorative symbol, and the inner frame movable body and the outer side are executed. When the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the decorative symbol may be configured to form the reach state. With such a configuration, the player who visually recognizes the mode in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body operate over time is gradually expected to win the result of the special lottery. It becomes possible to increase. It is desirable that the timing at which the decorative symbol forms the reach state is performed when the outer frame movable body is in the second state (for example, timing t24).

Further, after the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) is executed as an effect of whether or not a reach state is formed, immediately before the decorative pattern is stopped. Even if the timing is configured to execute the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B) or the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B). good.

In this way, after the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) is executed as an effect of whether or not a reach state is formed, at the timing immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped. When the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B) and the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B) are executed, the effect pattern is executed. As an effect pattern of whether or not a reach state is formed, as an embodiment of FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B), the frame movable body is simply produced as an effect without accepting an operation on the operation unit by the player. It may be configured to execute a moving effect pattern. In this case, the operation invalid period is continued as the acceptance state of the operation unit, and the precursor display, the operation instruction display, and the post-operation display are naturally not performed. By executing the effect pattern of such a modified mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player finds it troublesome to operate the operation unit in a state where the expectation of a big hit is not so high.

In the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 562 (A) to 563 (B), an example in which the character "push?" Is displayed as an image as a precursor display is shown, and an operation instruction display is performed on this image. It may be displayed so as to move to a position. Further, it is preferable to move the frame movable body away from a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600, as a precursor display, the position directly above or diagonally above the game board side effect display device 1600 is directed toward the central portion. The characters "push?" May be moved and displayed, and may be stopped and displayed in the center. Further, as a post-operation display, the characters "!!" may be configured to move from the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a direction directly below or diagonally below the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to further distract the player's consciousness from the frame movable body above. As will be described later, when the frame movable body is provided below the game board side effect display device 1600, the precursor display and the post-operation display may be configured to move upward in the opposite manner.

In the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 564 (A) to 565 (B), an example in which the characters "push?" Are displayed as an image as a precursor display is shown, and an operation instruction display is performed on this image. It may be displayed so as to move to a position. Further, it is preferable to move the frame movable body so as to approach a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600, the characters "push?" Are moved and displayed from the lower part to the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 as a precursor display. It is preferable to configure it so as to. Further, as a post-operation display, the characters "!!" may be configured to move from the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, the player's line of sight can be guided to the frame movable body, and the player can completely see the entire series of changes of the frame movable body.

Further, as the operation instruction display, the characters "!! Push !!" may be displayed as a special operation instruction display that occurs only when the special lottery result is a big hit. In addition, instead of the character "!!" as the display after the operation, the character "Push !!" which is the operation instruction display and the character "!! Push !!" which is the special operation instruction display continue to be displayed as they are. You may. In addition, in response to the special operation instruction display "!! Push !!", the characters "!!? Push ?!" are displayed as a special precursor display, and "!!!!!" is displayed as a special post-operation display. The characters "!" May be displayed. In this way, the special characters displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit are continuously displayed from before the operation validity period to after the operation of the operation unit, which gives the player a great sense of satisfaction. It becomes possible.

566 (A) to 566 (D), 567 (A) to 567 (C), 568 (A) to 568 (C), see 524 (A) to 525 (B). This is a modification of the effect pattern described above. In these modifications, only one of the right ear frame movable body 7100 (hereinafter, may be referred to as the first frame movable body) and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter, may be referred to as the second frame movable body). The point that the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body may be moved at different timings, and the first frame movable body imitates the first frame movable body. Although the simulated image of the frame movable body is displayed, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is basically not displayed for the second frame movable body, and the frame movable body is irrespective of the operation on the operation unit. The main difference is that the timing at which the frame movable body operates is not limited to the timing immediately before the decorative symbol stops.

The effect patterns shown in FIGS. 566 (A) to 566 (D), 567 (A) to 567 (C), and 568 (A) to 568 (C) are effects performed during the change of the decorative pattern. It is a pattern and indicates a state in which a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, it is assumed that 10 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol at timing t0).

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A), the first frame movable body changed from the first state to the second state from the timing t5 to the timing t7, and maintained the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds). Later (timing t7 to timing t15), the state changes from the second state to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). In addition, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state according to the movement of the first frame movable body, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined time. Then, the state changes from the second state to the second state (timing t5 to timing t17). On the other hand, the second frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position. Further, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B), the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from the timing t5 to the timing t7, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (timing). t7 to timing t15), changing from the second state to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). When the second frame movable body operates, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed. On the other hand, the first frame movable body maintains the first state without moving from the standby position. Further, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body is not displayed.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. Since the image is displayed, the player can easily notice that the first frame movable body has moved. On the other hand, in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B), even when the second frame movable body is operated, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed. , It is difficult for the player to notice that the second frame movable body has moved.

When the 1st frame movable body and the 2nd frame movable body operate, the expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the changing decorative symbol is a big hit is expected, and the 1st frame movable body and the 2nd frame movable body operate. It is preferable to configure the effect pattern so that the effect pattern is selected so as to be higher than the case where the effect pattern is not applied. For example, the degree of expectation when the first frame movable body operates and the degree of expectation when the second frame movable body operates may be set to 10%, respectively. In such a configuration, since the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body is displayed, the first frame movable body is in a state of being operated with the eyes turned to the first frame movable body. The player who notices this will have a sense of expectation for the big hit.

On the other hand, in order to notice the movement of the second frame movable body, it is necessary to look at the second frame movable body by looking away from the game board side effect display device 1600 on which the decorative pattern is displayed. Therefore, when it is frequently checked whether or not the second frame movable body is operating, or when the face is accidentally turned to the direction in which the second frame movable body is provided, the second frame movable body operates. You will notice that you are. In this case, the player feels that he / she can know that he / she has a high expectation for the big hit by his / her own power, and as a part of the production that the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body is displayed. Compared to the case where the one-frame movable body is visually recognized, a great sense of accomplishment is felt.

With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the frame movable body, and the player's interest, which has conventionally been within a predetermined range centered on the game board 5, is directed to the outside. It becomes possible to expand.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 566 (A) and 566 (B), an example is shown in which the expected degree when the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body are operated is the same 10%, but FIG. 566 (B) The expected degree when the second frame movable body operates in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) may be set higher than the expected degree when the first frame movable body operates in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A). .. For example, it is preferable to configure the effect pattern so that the expected degree when the second frame movable body operates is 15% and the expected degree when the first frame movable body operates is 10%. With such a configuration, the player who notices that the second frame movable body is operating will feel a greater sense of accomplishment.

The effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (C) is an effect pattern obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B). In this effect pattern, the time (timing t7 to timing t21) in which the second frame movable body is in the second state is 14 seconds, and in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B), the second frame movable body is the second. It is longer than 8 seconds, which is the time (timing t7 to timing t15) in the state. By making the time during which the second frame movable body is in the second state longer than the time during which the first frame movable body is in the second state, the player can move the second frame movable body to the second state. It becomes easier to notice because it is in two states.

The expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (C) may be higher than the expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B). For example, the effect pattern may be selected so that the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B) is 15% and the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (C) is 25%. .. With such a configuration, the player feels a greater sense of expectation as to how much the second state is maintained from the moment he / she notices that the second frame movable body is operating. The timing at which the player notices that the second frame movable body is in the second state is not constant, and it may not be known when it was in the second state, so the duration of the second state is The longer it continues, the greater the expectation of the player.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (C), the longer the duration of the second frame movable body in the second state, the higher the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit. Although the embodiment in which the value is increased is shown, it may be configured so that three or more effect patterns having different times in the second state are provided. For example, an effect pattern that maintains the second state from timing t7 to timing t27 may be executed, and the degree of expectation of this effect pattern may be set to 30%.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (C), the longer the duration of the second frame movable body in the second state, the higher the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit. Although it was configured to be higher, it was configured to suggest the degree of expectation by the number of times the second frame movable body was in the second state, not by the duration in which the second frame movable body was in the second state. May be good. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (D) shows an example thereof. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (D) shows an example in which the second frame movable body operates twice from the first state to the second state, but the effect pattern in which the second frame movable body does not perform the second operation. Alternatively, an effect pattern in which the third operation is performed after the second operation may be configured to be executable. Further, also at this time, it is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of operations increases. For example, the expectation when the second frame movable body operates only once is 15%, the expectation when the second frame movable body operates twice is 25%, and the second frame movable body operates three times. It is preferable to configure it so that the expected degree when it operates is 35%. In this way, by configuring the structure so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of movements of the second frame movable body increases, the player who notices that the second frame movable body is operating at an early timing is the first. The second frame movable body will be visually recognized with great expectation as to how many times the two frame movable body operates.

The effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A) is an effect pattern obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A). In this effect pattern, the operation mode of the first frame movable body and the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body are the same as the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) (until timing t20). There is no difference in the production mode). On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at the timing t21, and becomes the second state from the timing t23 to the timing t33, and the timing It differs from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) in that it returns to the first state at t35. Further, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A), when the second frame movable body is moved, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

In a gaming machine capable of executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A), one of the effect patterns is executed at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation of the decorative symbol. The first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, then returns to the first state, and then the second frame movable body changes to the first state at the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds) elapses. When the second state is not maintained (when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) is selected) and when the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (FIG. 567 (A)). (When the effect pattern to be shown is selected).

With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight once turns to the first frame movable body during the operation of the first frame movable body, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600, the first Since the two-frame movable body may move, it is possible to make the player who has little game experience recognize that the second frame movable body may move.

The expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A) may be higher than the expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A). For example, the effect pattern may be selected so that the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A) is 25% and the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) is 10%. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The effect pattern shown in FIGS. 567 (B) and 567 (C) is an effect pattern obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A). This effect pattern is different from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) in that the operation of the first frame movable body and the display of the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body are performed a plurality of times.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 567 (B) and 567 (C), the first frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at the timing t2, and the first from the timing t4 to the timing t6. After becoming two states and returning to the first state at timing t8, the change from the first state to the second state is started again at timing t11, the second state is reached from timing t13 to timing t15, and the second state is reached at timing t17. It will be in the state of returning to the 1 state. Further, in synchronization with the operation of the first frame movable body, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body is dynamically displayed.

After that, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at the timing t21, and becomes the second state from the timing t23 to the timing t33, and the timing It returns to the first state at t35. On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (B), the operation of the second frame movable body is not performed.

In a gaming machine capable of executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (C), when one of the effect patterns is executed at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation of the decorative symbol. Is the second frame at the timing (timing t21) when the predetermined time (4 seconds) elapses after the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state and then returns to the first state (timing t17). There may be a case where the movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and a case where the second frame movable body maintains the first state and does not change to the second state.

With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight continues to face the first frame movable body during the operation of the first frame movable body, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600. Since the second frame movable body may move, it is possible to make the player who has little game experience recognize that the second frame movable body may move.

The expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (C) may be higher than the expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (B). For example, the effect pattern may be selected so that the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (B) is 25% and the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (C) is 35%. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the second frame movable body will move after the first frame movable body moves.

The effect patterns shown in FIGS. 568 (A) to 568 (C) are effect patterns obtained by modifying the effect patterns shown in FIG. 566 (A). This effect pattern is different from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 566 (A) in that the second frame movable body may operate at a timing prior to the operation of the first frame movable body.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 568 (A) to 568 (C), the timing at which the first frame movable body operates and the timing at which the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body is displayed are the same. .. Specifically, the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from the timing t21 to the timing t23, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds) (timing t23 to timing t31). ), The second state changes to the first state (timing t31 to timing t33). In addition, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state according to the movement of the first frame movable body, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined time. Then, the state changes from the second state to the first state (timing t21 to timing t33).

On the other hand, in each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 568 (A) to 568 (C), the operation mode of the second frame movable body is different as shown below.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (A), the second frame movable body continues to take the first state during the period from t0 to t39, and does not enter the second state. In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (B), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at the timing t5, becomes the second state from the timing t7 to the timing t15, and becomes the timing t17. In, the state returns to the first state. In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at the timing t5, becomes the second state from the timing t7 to the timing t33, and becomes the timing t35. In, the state returns to the first state. In any of the effect patterns, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

The expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (C) is higher than the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (B), and the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (B) is set to be higher than the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (A). ) May be higher than the expected degree of the effect pattern. For example, the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (A) is 10%, the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (B) is 20%, and the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (C) is 30. It is preferable to configure so that the effect pattern is selected so as to be%.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (B), the player may miss the operation of the second frame movable body when executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (B). be. For the player who can visually recognize the movement of the second frame movable body, the player can recognize that the expectation degree is 20% by the subsequent movement of the first frame movable body. On the other hand, for the player who does not notice that the second frame movable body has moved, even if the first frame movable body moves, the exact degree of expectation is not well understood.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (C), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. The movable body remains in the moving position (second state). Therefore, the player who sees the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body and notices that the first frame movable body is in the second state confirms the state of the second frame movable body. When the second frame movable body is not operating at that time and is in the first state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is not so high. On the other hand, when the second frame movable body is operating at that time and is in the second state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively high.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (B) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (C), when the player notices that the second frame movable body is operating and is in the second state, the second frame is second. The player will be interested in the fact that the first frame movable body may move while the frame movable body is in the second state. Then, when the first frame movable body operates and becomes the second state, the player can recognize that the degree of expectation is high. On the other hand, if the second frame movable body is in the first state before the first frame movable body is in the first state, the player recognizes that the degree of expectation is relatively low. It becomes.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 568 (C), the second frame movable body is set to the first state after the first frame movable body is put into the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the player in a state of high expectation, which is desirable for the player, for a long period of time.

Examples have been described with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 523 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively, but the right ear as shown in FIG. 532 and the like. The frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to execute the above-mentioned effect pattern as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively.

Examples of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 523 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body have been described, respectively, and are shown in FIGS. 538 and 547, respectively. One or both of the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350 as the first frame movable body, and one of the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. Alternatively, both may be used as the second frame movable body. Then, the state in which either or both of the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350 are in the second state is defined as the second state of the first frame movable body, and the left ear medial frame movable body. The state in which either or both of the 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the second state may be set as the second state of the second frame movable body, and the above-mentioned effect pattern may be executed. ..

When the above-mentioned effect pattern is executed in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 538 and 547, one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is in the first state to the second state. Then, the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the first frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state. It may be adopted as an operation to perform. Further, after changing the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 from the second state to the first state, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 Changing one of them from the second state to the first state may be adopted as an operation of changing the first frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

Similarly, when the above-mentioned effect pattern is executed in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 538 and 547, one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is moved from the first state. After the second state, changing the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 from the first state to the second state means that the second frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state. It may be adopted as an operation of two states. Further, after changing the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 from the second state to the first state, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 Changing one of them from the second state to the first state may be adopted as an operation of changing the second frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

In this way, the change in the state due to the continuous operation by the plurality of frame movable bodies may be collectively regarded as the change in the state of one frame movable body.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are used as the first frame movable body to change the state, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are used as the second frame movable body. An example of changing the state is shown, but only one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is configured to operate as the first frame movable body, and the other is not operated and is in a standby state. It may be configured to remain as is. Alternatively, only one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is configured to operate as the second frame movable body, and the other is configured to remain in the standby state without operating. You may.

For example, of the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, only the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 is used as the first frame movable body to change the state, and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 and the left. The outer ear frame movable body 7450 may be configured to change the state as the second frame movable body.

In this case, the visible area differs between the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body depending on the front view or the side view. Specifically, since the first frame movable body is composed of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the visible area is relatively small, and the second frame movable body is the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear. Since it is composed of the outer frame movable body 7450, the visible area is relatively large.

With such a configuration, when the state of the first frame movable body is relatively small, a frame movable body simulated image corresponding to the change in the state of the first frame movable body is displayed when the state is changed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the change in the state of the first frame movable body. On the other hand, when the state of the second frame movable body is relatively large, the state of the second frame movable body is changed by intentionally not displaying the frame movable body simulated image corresponding to the second frame movable body. When the player notices what he is doing, it is possible to give the player a greater surprise.

In the structure of the plurality of frame movable bodies described with reference to FIGS. 553 and 554, the above-mentioned effect pattern may be executed.

For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 may be used as the first frame movable body, and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 may be used as the second frame movable body. Further, the state in which the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 are in the standby positions shown in FIGS. 553 (A), 553 (C), and 554 (A) is set as the first state. , 553 (B), 553 (D), and 554 (B) may be configured to execute the above-described effect pattern with the state at the moving position as the second state.

Alternatively, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630 are used as the first frame movable body, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 are used as the second frame. It may be a movable body. Further, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 are shown in FIGS. C), the state at the standby position shown in FIG. 554 (A) is defined as the first state, and the state at the moving position shown at FIGS. 553 (B), 553 (D), and 554 (B) is defined as the second state. , The effect pattern described above may be executed.

For example, when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A) is executed, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 become the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame. Side unit Right arm Lower arm 7630 is displayed, and after changing from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state), the standby position is displayed. It changes to a certain state (first state), and then the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 are replaced with the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm. After changing from the state in the standby position (first state) to the state in the moving position (second state) without displaying the frame movable body simulated image imitating 7680, the state in the standby position (first state). It will change to the state).

Alternatively, one or both of the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 are set as the first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit face decoration unit 7500 has the door frame top unit on the face. Body 7510, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522, door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 at least one of the second frame movable body May be. Furthermore, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700, the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit under the face. The first state is the state in which the movable nose 7522 and the movable door frame top unit 7524 are in the standby positions shown in FIGS. 553 (A), 553 (C), and 554 (A). B), the state at the moving position shown in FIGS. 553 (D) and 554 (B) may be set as the second state, and the above-described effect pattern may be executed.

For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 may be used as the first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 may be used as the second frame movable body to execute the above-mentioned effect pattern. In this case, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed for the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, which is larger in size than the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700. With such a configuration, when the player notices that the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 (second frame movable body) is changing the state, a greater surprise to the player. Can be given.

In addition to the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also used as the second frame movable body, and the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 is stored below. After completing the upward movement from the vertical position, the movement from the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 is completed. The state may be set as the second state of the second frame movable body.

In this way, the player is provided with the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body at a position facing each other across the game area 5a and the game board side effect display device 1600. Is configured so that when one frame movable body is visually recognized, the other frame movable body is less likely to be visually recognized by the player. In particular, when the effect pattern as shown in FIG. 567 (A) is executed, the player's consciousness is concentrated on the first frame movable body, and the second frame movable body located at a distant position in the visual angle is in the field of view. It will not be able to enter. Then, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player who notices the state after the operation of the second frame movable body that the second frame movable body has changed to an unexpected state.

Although we have shown an effect pattern that does not display a frame movable body simulated image that imitates the second frame movable body when operating the second frame movable body, the frame movable body that imitates the second frame movable body is shown for a short time. It may be configured to display a simulated image. In this case, in a predetermined period in the latter half when the second frame movable body is in the second state, a frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 for a short period (for example, 1 second). It may be configured to be displayed in. For example, it is preferable to display a frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body from timing t30 to timing t31 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the second frame movable body has operated.

Alternatively, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body may be displayed from the timing t33 to the timing t34 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 567 (A).

In such a configuration, the player can visually recognize the state in which the second frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state, and the player can see the second frame movable body. You will feel the regret that you could not enjoy the second state. As a result, in the subsequent games, it is possible to raise the attention consciousness that the second frame movable body may be moving unknowingly.

Although the effect pattern in which the frame movable body operates is shown with reference to FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B), when the frame movable body is moved in this way, the player moves to an unexpected position. When the movable frame body is positioned after the movement, the player may violently bring his / her hand or head into contact with the movable frame body, which may injure the player or damage the movable frame body. On the other hand, in a gaming machine capable of operating a frame movable body, in addition to the operation of the frame movable body, various effects are performed on the game board 5 side, and the effects are executed in an excessive manner for the player. There is a risk that it will end up. The embodiments shown below are intended to solve such problems. 569 and 570, 571 and 572, 573 and 574, 575 and 576, respectively, 524 and 525, 533 and 534, 538 and 540, 548 and 549, respectively. A modified example of the effect pattern described with reference to each is shown.

In each of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 569 and 570, 571 and 572, 573 and 574, and 575 and 576, the volume of the fluctuating effect sound is lowered from the normal state at a predetermined timing. It is configured to be in a suppressed state. The variable production sound is a sound in which a predetermined musical piece is played in accordance with the fluctuation of the decorative pattern and is recognized by the player as background music. For example, a musical composition consisting of a voice sung by a predetermined singer and performance sounds of a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, and during that time, fluctuations in decorative symbols (for example, all the fluctuation results of decorative symbols are non-reach loss and the fluctuation time is 10 on average (In the case of about seconds) is performed multiple times. By outputting such a fluctuating effect sound to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It should be noted that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and the playback of different songs may be started at the timing when the playback of a certain song is completed to the end. Alternatively, in accordance with the change in the gaming state, the music that has been played up to that point may be faded out during playback, and another music that is different from the music that has been played up to that point may be played back. In the present embodiment, by suppressing the volume of such a fluctuating effect sound in accordance with the timing at which the frame movable body operates, a state in which the effect is excessive is suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a special sound that evokes the movement of the frame movable body and the movement of the frame movable body is reproduced for a short time according to the timing of the movement of the frame movable body. .. As a special arousal sound, a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as "ping pong") is played in one second instead of emitting a sound that is recognized as a series of songs that are played for a long time like a fluctuating production sound. Alternatively, it is advisable to play a musical piece that finishes playing in a short period of time (for example, 2 seconds), or play a sound like hitting a drum continuously (for example, a sound such as "dokodokodoko ...") for a few seconds. Further, it is preferable that the sounds constituting the special arousal sound do not include the musical instrument sound used as a part of the variable effect sound. Further, the special arousal sound is output at a predetermined volume without being affected by the output state of the variable effect sound. For example, the special arousal sound is output at a predetermined volume regardless of whether the volume of the variable effect sound is suppressed in the normal state or the volume of the variable effect sound is suppressed. Further, the volume of the special arousal sound may be louder than the volume of the fluctuating effect sound in the suppressed state. In the production pattern described later, the state in which the special arousal sound is output may be maintained for about 10 seconds. In this case, it is preferable to repeatedly play back such a sound effect or a musical piece whose reproduction ends in a short period of time so as to maintain the state in which the special arousal sound is output.

In this way, by suppressing the volume of the fluctuating effect sound according to the movement of the frame movable body and generating a special arousal sound, it is possible to prevent the effect provided to the player from becoming excessive. Become. Further, when the player comes into contact with the movable frame body, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured or the movable frame body is damaged.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569 (A) to 570 (B), the variable effect is produced at the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts moving from the standby position (first state) to the moving position. It is configured so that the state of the sound is suppressed and the special arousal sound is output. Further, the output of the special arousal sound is configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Further, the suppression state of the fluctuation effect sound is also configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 571 (A) to 572 (B), the timing (timing t9) of the frame movable body changing from the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) to the state in which rotation is started (second state). ), The state of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed and the special arousal sound is output. Further, the output of the special arousal sound is configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Further, the suppression state of the fluctuation effect sound is also configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573 (A) to 574 (B), the effect changes at the timing (timing t7) when the inner frame movable body starts moving from the standby position (first state) to the moving position. It is configured so that the state of the production sound is suppressed and the special arousal sound is output. Further, the output of the special arousal sound is configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Further, the suppression state of the fluctuation effect sound is also configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 575 (A) to 576 (B), the timing (timing) at which the inner frame movable body changes from the state in which the inner frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) to the state in which rotation is started (second state). At t5), the state of the fluctuating effect sound is suppressed and the special arousal sound is output. Further, the output of the special arousal sound is configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Further, the suppression state of the fluctuation effect sound is also configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

In this way, at the timing when the frame movable body starts to operate, the output state of the variable effect sound is changed from the normal state to the suppressed state, and the special arousal sound is changed from the non-output state to the output state, so that the effect state becomes excessive. It becomes possible to suppress this.

Further, as shown with reference to FIGS. 573 (A) to 574 (B), when a plurality of frame movable bodies can operate in order, at the timing when the second moving frame movable body starts to operate. , The output state of the variable production sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special arousal sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable production sound required for the production from being excessively stopped.

The timing for returning the output state of the variable production sound from the suppressed state to the normal state and the timing for turning off the output state of the special arousal sound are when the player operates the operation unit or the operation valid period ends. It is the timing that was done. This is because a predetermined time has passed since the frame movable body moved, so it is less meaningful to suppress the fluctuation effect sound. The frame movable body simulated image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. This is because the player notices that the movable body has moved.

On the other hand, the timing of returning the output state of the variable effect sound from the suppressed state to the normal state and the timing of changing the output state of the special arousal sound from the output state to the non-output state may be set when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged when the player comes into contact with the frame movable body. In the case of an effect pattern in which a plurality of frame movable bodies return to the first state at different timings, the output state of the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing when the frame movable body, which is the latest in the first state, returns to the first state. It is advisable to return from the normal state to the normal state and change the output state of the special arousal sound from the output state to the non-output state.

Alternatively, the timing at which the output state of the variable production sound is returned from the suppressed state to the normal state at the timing when the operation unit is operated or the operation valid period ends, while the special arousal sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. May be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged when the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

Alternatively, at the timing when the operation unit is operated or the operation valid period ends, the special arousal sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state, and the output state of the variable production sound is returned from the suppressed state to the normal state. It may be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged when the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

When there are a plurality of frame movable bodies and there are multiple timings at which the frame movable bodies start to operate, as in the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 573 and 574 and FIGS. 575 and 576, respectively, the plurality of frame movable bodies It may be configured to output different special arousal sounds corresponding to each of the above.

In the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 573 and 574, the output state of the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). An example is shown in which the state is changed from the normal state to the normal state and the special arousal sound is set to the non-output state. It may be configured so that the sound output state may be continued.

For example, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 573 (A), the outer frame is movable until the timing t15 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the moving position, the timing t16 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the moving position, or the outer frame is movable. It may be configured to continue the suppression state of the fluctuation effect sound and the output state of the special arousal sound until the timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or the timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the standby position. ..

Further, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 574 (A), the outer frame is movable until the timing t19 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the moving position, the timing t20 when the outer frame movable body is completed moving to the moving position, or the outer frame is movable. It may be configured to continue the suppression state of the fluctuation effect sound and the output state of the special arousal sound until the timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or the timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the standby position. ..

On the other hand, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573 (B) and 574 (B), the effect pattern is not deformed, and in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 573 (B), the effect shown in FIG. In the pattern, at the timing t18, the output state of the variable effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special arousal sound is changed to the non-output state.

In this way, when the outer frame movable body operates (that is, when the special lottery result is a big hit), the suppression state of the fluctuation effect sound and the output state of the special arousal sound are set according to the operation of the outer frame movable body. By configuring it to continue, the player may be injured or injured when the player comes into contact with the outer frame movable body while moving to the moving position or in the state of moving to the moving position (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the outer frame movable body is damaged. In particular, since the outer frame movable body starts moving at the timing when the special lottery result is confirmed to be a big hit, the excitement felt by the player is very large. According to such an embodiment, the player feels a great deal of excitement. It is possible to make the player recognize that the outer frame movable body is operating without making the player excited.

The timing of outputting the special arousal sound may be limited. For example, the special arousal sound is output only during the period when the frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state and the period when the frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state. You may.

For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569 (A) to 570 (B), the frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state (the period from timing t7 to timing t9). Outputs the special arousal sound only during at least one of the periods during which is changing from the second state to the first state (the period from timing t22 to timing t24), and does not output the special arousal sound during the other periods. It may be configured. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

Further, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573 (A) and 574 (B), the period during which the inner frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (the period from timing t7 to timing t9), the inner frame. The special arousal sound is output only during at least one of the periods during which the movable body is changing from the second state to the first state (the period from timing t30 to timing t32), and no special arousal sound is output during the other periods. It may be configured as follows. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

Further, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573 (A) and 574 (A), the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 573 (A), the timing t14 From timing t16, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 574 (A), from timing t18 to timing t20), and from the period when the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (timing t26 to timing t28). The special arousal sound may be output only in at least one period, and the special arousal sound may not be output in the other period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

Further, the period during which the inner frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (the period from timing t7 to timing t9) and the period during which the inner frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state (timing). Period from t30 to timing t32), period when the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 573 (A), the period from timing t14 to timing t16, FIG. 574 (A). In the effect pattern shown, the special arousal sound is emitted only during at least one of the period (the period from timing t18 to timing t20) and the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (timing t26 to timing t28). It may be configured so that it is output and the special arousal sound is not output during other periods. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

In each of the above-mentioned effect patterns, after the state of the variable effect sound is set to the suppressed state, the special arousal sound may be output with a slight delay. For example, the special arousal sound may be output 2 seconds after the variable production sound is suppressed. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569 (A) to 570 (B), the variable effect sound may be suppressed at the timing t7, and then the special arousal sound may be output at the timing t9. With such a configuration, the player can clearly recognize that the variable production sound is in the suppressed state and that the special arousal sound has a property different from that of the variable production sound.

Alternatively, in each of the above-mentioned effect patterns, the state of the variable effect sound may be suppressed at a timing predetermined time before the timing of outputting the special arousal sound. For example, it may be configured so that the fluctuation effect sound is suppressed 2 seconds before the timing of outputting the special arousal sound. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569 (A) to 570 (B), the variable effect sound may be suppressed at the timing t5, and then the special arousal sound may be output at the timing t7. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the variable production sound is in the suppressed state and that the special arousal sound has a property different from that of the variable production sound.

The timing at which the output of the special arousal sound ends may be a predetermined timing. For example, the special arousal sound may be output only for the first 2 seconds after the frame movable body starts to move. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569 (A) to 570 (B), the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing t7 and the output of the special arousal sound is started, and the output of the special arousal sound is output at the timing t9. It may be configured to end. The variable effect sound may end at the timing when the operation unit is operated (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). With such a configuration, the variable production sound continues to be suppressed even after the timing when the output of the special arousal sound ends, so that the player can easily recognize that the special arousal sound has been output.

It may be configured to suppress the fluctuation effect sound and output the special arousal sound before the start of operation of the frame movable body. For example, it may be configured to suppress the fluctuation effect sound and output the special arousal sound at a timing 2 seconds before the frame movable body starts the operation. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 569 (A) to 570 (B), the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing t5 and the output of the special arousal sound is started, and the frame movable body state is set at the timing t7. May be configured to start the operation of changing from the first state to the second state. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the frame movable body moves, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body and is injured.

The operation valid period may be generated at the timing when the operation of the frame movable body is started and the fluctuation effect sound is suppressed. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 573 (A) to 574 (B), the operation valid period is generated at the timing t7, the operation instruction display is started, and the light emission effect state of the frame movable body is turned off. It is good to configure as follows. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the frame movable body moves, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body and is injured.

The time charts shown in FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B) by slowly rotating the frame movable body according to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 532, 535, 536, and 537 by a predetermined angle. Alternatively, it may be operated like the frame movable body in the modified example of the time chart shown in FIGS. 524 (A) to 525 (B). For example, the frame movable body according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 532 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. When moving to the standby position, it is preferable to rotate the frame movable body 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds.

Further, the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 547, 550, 551 and 552, respectively, are shown in the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 and 540 or the time charts shown in FIGS. 539 and 540, respectively. The inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body in the modified example of the time chart shown in the above may be operated. For example, the outer frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 547 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. Furthermore, the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing when the operation unit is operated or the end timing of the operation valid period, it is preferable to rotate the inner frame movable body 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. .. When moving to the standby position, the inner frame movable body is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds, and then the outer frame movable body is counterclockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. Rotate it 90 degrees around it.

The frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 523, 528, 529, 530, and 531 is described with reference to FIGS. 538, 541, 542, 543 and 544, and 545 and 546, respectively. The frame is movable in the state where the outer frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 538, 541, 542, 543 and 544, and 545 and 546 is in the second state. The body or one or both of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body may be configured to continue the vertical movement of about 1 to 2 cm or the rotational movement of about 5 degrees. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to easily notice that the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body have moved to the second state.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 533 and 534, and 548 and 549, respectively, the rotation direction of the frame movable body is clockwise when viewed from the right side. For this reason, compared to the case where the rotation direction of the frame movable body is counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, when the player or the like is placed on the frame, the hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation.

On the other hand, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 533 and 534, and 548 and 549, the frame movable body may be configured to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the right side. With such a configuration, the rotating body is visually recognized as approaching the player, and the frame movable body can be visually recognized by the player in a powerful manner.

In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 533 and 534, and 548 and 549, the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are not rotated by 360 degrees or more in the second state, but are rotated at a predetermined time. Within the range of motion, the rotation operation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the right and the rotation operation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right may be alternately repeated. For example, as shown in FIGS. 532 (B), 532 (E), 547 (B), and 547 (E), the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are centered on an upright state. The frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body may be configured to repeat the rotation operation within a range of 45 degrees to the front side and 45 degrees to the rear side. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570 when the player or the like is placed on the frame.

In the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body shown in FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E), when the inner frame movable body performs a clockwise rotation operation when viewed from the right, it is outside. When the frame movable body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right and the inner frame movable body rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the right, the outer frame movable body rotates when viewed from the right. It may be configured to perform a clockwise rotation operation. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570 when the player or the like is placed on the frame.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 523 and 538, the frame movable body is provided with a light emitting portion, but the frame movable body is illuminated at a predetermined location outside the frame movable body (for example, inside the door frame top unit 570). It may be configured to have a light emitting portion to illuminate the frame movable body by the light emitting portion. Alternatively, both of them may be provided, and the frame movable body may be illuminated by the light emitting portion included in the frame movable body and the light emitting portion outside the frame movable body to bring the frame movable body into a predetermined effect state.

On the other hand, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 532 (A) to 532 (E) and FIGS. 547 (A) to 547 (E), the right side light emission in the door frame top unit corresponds to the frame movable body. Although an example is shown in which the unit 7050 and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit are provided in the door frame top unit 570, the light emitting unit is provided in the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, respectively, or the right ear. By providing light emitting parts in the inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, respectively, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door The frame movable body may be configured to emit light in the same light emitting mode as the left light emitting unit 7052 in the frame top unit. Alternatively, both of them may be provided, and the frame movable body may be illuminated by the light emitting portion included in the frame movable body and the light emitting portion outside the frame movable body to bring the frame movable body into a predetermined effect state.

With reference to FIGS. 523 to 576, examples have been shown in which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, or changes to the third state or the fourth state through the second state. A player or a clerk at a game store pushes the frame movable body in the middle of changing to the second state, or the frame movable body that has completed the change from the second state to the fourth state with his / her hand. It may be configured so that it can be returned to the state where it is located (first state). In this case, when a sensor capable of detecting the position of the frame movable body is provided in a drive mechanism (not shown) for driving the frame movable body, and the frame movable body is positioned at the initial position at a timing when the frame movable body cannot be positioned at the initial position. May be configured so that the frame movable body stays in the initial position so as not to operate the drive mechanism any more, judging that the operation such as pushing by the player or the clerk of the game store has been performed.

With such a configuration, the frame movable body can be returned to the initial position (first state) by the player or the clerk of the game store at an arbitrary timing. Further, even when a heavy article (such as a bag owned by a player) is placed on the frame movable body, the drive mechanism for operating the frame movable body is controlled so as not to operate the frame movable body. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive mechanism. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player or a clerk of a game store is injured.

With reference to FIGS. 523 to 576, a modified example of the basic structure of the frame movable body and the structure of the frame movable body, a modified example of the basic control mode of the frame movable body and the control mode of the frame movable body are shown. However, a predetermined embodiment or modification of the control mode of the frame movable body may be applied to a predetermined embodiment or modification of the structure of the frame movable body. Further, one or more other examples or modifications regarding the structure of the frame movable body may be applied to a predetermined embodiment or modification regarding the structure of the frame movable body. Further, one or more other examples or modifications of the control mode of the frame movable body may be applied to a predetermined embodiment or modification of the control mode of the frame movable body.

Each effect example in the embodiment and each technical matter in each effect example may be combined and applied to form the embodiment. Further, each technical matter in each accessory configuration may be applied in combination to form an embodiment.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described based on the embodiments shown in FIGS. 577 to 604.

[35. Fraudulent measures against obstacle nails]
By the way, a plurality of obstacle nails are installed in the rolling region of the game ball in the game machine, but conventionally, the obstacle nail is illegally bent by a malicious player or the like, and the game ball is won by this. There was a fraudulent act that led many game balls to the winning opening illegally.

For example, a fraudulent act of invading a game store after the store is closed, opening the door frame and bending the obstacle nail directly with a tool, etc., or during the opening business, the piano wire or the like is invaded into the game area during the game to remove the obstacle nail. Fraudulent acts such as bending to guide the game ball in an advantageous direction were performed, and such fraudulent acts caused great damage to the game store. The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a means for preventing fraudulent acts against an obstacle nail.

[35-1. Game board]
FIG. 577 shows a front view of the game board 5'in the second embodiment, and FIG. 578 shows an exploded front perspective view of the game board 5'. As shown in the figure, the game board 5'in the present embodiment is mainly composed of a front unit 2000, a game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is mainly composed of a movable effect unit 3600 that performs a movable effect by various movable members, and a game board side effect display device 1600 that is arranged behind the movable effect unit 3600 and displays game information display, effect display, etc. as an image. Has been done. The effect produced by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the movable effect unit 3600 is configured to be visible to the player through an opening formed in the center of the game panel 1100.

As shown in the disassembled front perspective view of the game board 5'shown in FIG. 578 and the disassembled front perspective view of the game panel 1100 shown in FIG. 579, the panel plate 1110 has a front component 1000 on the front side thereof. The outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 are attached, and a plurality of obstacle nails 1200 and various winning devices (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002) are provided, and an opening extending to the center of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 is fitted into the portion from the front and is fixed to the panel plate 1110 by a screw (not shown) from the front.

[35-2. Panel board]
The panel plate 1110 in the present embodiment is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material having a thickness of about 10 mm. Examples of the material of the panel plate 1110 include a transparent synthetic resin plate such as a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, and a methacrylic resin.

Further, a plurality of obstacle nails 1200 are planted in the panel plate 1110 in the present embodiment, and the left game area 5'a and the right game area 5b correspond to the launch direction of the game ball, and the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of obstacle nails 1200. It is configured on the front. That is, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of FIG. 579, the right side game area 5b is formed as the rolling area of the game ball launched by the player's right-handed strike, and the right side game area 5b is formed from the right side to the center of the panel plate 1110. A panel convex portion 1117 that is convex toward the opening of the panel is integrally formed with the panel plate 1110. Then, as shown in the layout plan view of the obstacle nails in FIG. 582, the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted on the front surface side of the panel convex portion 1117.

[35-3. Table unit]
As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 579, the front unit 2000 in the present embodiment is formed in a substantially annular shape by a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material having a thickness of about 2 mm, and is mainly formed. It is composed of a stage 2530, a warp outlet 2522, a large winning opening 2005, a flow path device 2700, a region cover member 2600 described later, and the like.

Further, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 580 and the disassembled front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 581, the game ball launched by right-handed strike is on the right side of the front view of the table unit 2000. A flow path device 2700 is provided to receive and flow down the flow path device, and the flow path device 2700 is provided with a first flow path forming member 2720a and a second flow path provided in parallel on the left and right sides as shown in FIG. 581. It is composed of a forming member 2720b.

Above the first flow path forming member 2720a and the second flow path forming member 2720b, a first flow path entry port 2710a and a second flow path entry port 2710b for receiving a game ball launched by right-handed hitting are provided, respectively. Further, a first flow path outlet 2730a and a second flow path outlet 2730b are provided at the lower part. Therefore, the game ball launched by right-handed hitting enters the first flow path entry port 2710a or the second flow path entry port 2710b, and is discharged from the first flow path outlet 2730a or the second flow path outlet 2730b. Therefore, the game ball is configured to be discharged to the right game area 5b formed on the panel plate 1110.

[35-4. Right game area]
In the present embodiment, as described above, the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in the panel convex portion 1117 forming the right side game area 5b, and more specifically, the arrangement plan view of the obstacle nails in FIG. 582. Obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in an arrangement manner as shown in the above to form a flow path for a plurality of game balls. That is, three obstacle nails 1201, 1202, 1203 are planted at equal intervals above the panel convex portion 1117 in the left-right direction, and twelve obstacle nails 1204 to 1215 are substantially vertically two below the obstacle nails 1201, 1202, 1203. Obstacle nails are planted in close proximity. Further below, three obstacle nails 1216-1218 are planted in close proximity to each other in a substantially oblique direction. In the present embodiment, the obstacle nails are planted in the above arrangement, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to such an arrangement, and the obstacle nails can be appropriately planted at an arbitrary position. It is possible.

[35-5. Area cover member]
Further, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 580 and the disassembled front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 581, the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment includes the above-mentioned flow path device 2700 and the right side. The area cover member 2600 is attached so as to cover the game area 5b from the front side.

As shown in the figure, the region cover member 2600 of the present embodiment is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate having a thickness of about 2 mm extending in the vertical direction. According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the rolling state of the game ball on the back side through the area cover member 2600 while covering the flow path device 2700 and the right side game area 5b.

The thickness of the area cover member 2600 is not necessarily limited to the thickness in the present embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. The material constituting the area cover member 2600 is also, for example, a polycarbonate resin. It can also be composed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin plate such as a polyarylate resin or a methacrylic resin.

Further, the area cover member 2600 is formed in a substantially flat shape on both the front surface and the back surface, and a penetration portion 2610 including the penetration portions 2611 to 2620 is formed as a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower position in the front view. ing. The penetrating portions 2611 to 2620 are configured to function as accommodating portions capable of accommodating the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 planted in the panel convex portion 1117 of the right game area 5b.

More specifically, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 580 and the disassembled rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 583, the front view circular through portion 2611 of the area cover member 2600. The nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 are housed with respect to ~ 2613, respectively, and the obstacle nails 1204-1209 and 1212-1215, which are adjacent to each other, are accommodated in the elongated through holes 2614 to 2618. The penetrating portion 2619, which is accommodated two by two and has a long hole longer than the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618, is configured to accommodate the nail heads of the three obstacle nails 1216-1218. Further, a penetrating portion 2620 having a notch is formed at the right end portion of the area cover member 2600 in front view, and the nail heads of two adjacent obstacle nails 1210 and 1211 are formed in the penetrating portion 2620. It is configured to accommodate the part.

Further, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 583, a plurality of ball regulation protrusions 2640 are integrally formed on the back side of the area cover member 2600, and the area cover member 2600 is integrally formed. By contacting the ball regulating protrusion 2640 that rolls on the back side of the game ball, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the game ball, prevent ball clogging, and regulate the rolling direction. ..

Further, as shown in the disassembled rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 583, mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are integrally provided on the back side of the area cover member 2600 and can be removed from the front of the game panel 1100. It is fixed by a screw (not shown) on the back side of the area cover member 2600 so as not to be able to do so. Further, as shown in FIG. 583, the screw screwed to the mounting bosses 2630, 2631, and 2633 from the rear of the game panel 1100 so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100. However, the screw screwed to the mounting boss 2632 is blocked by the panel plate 1110 so that the screw cannot be accessed. More specifically, since the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 with screws, the front unit 2000 itself is once removed when the area cover member 2600 is removed. It is configured so that it must be removed from the panel plate 1110. With such a configuration, for example, it becomes difficult for a malicious player or the like to remove the area cover member 2600, and it is possible to suppress an act of illegally bending an obstacle nail.

In addition, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 581, the first flow path entry port 2710a and the second flow path entry port 2710b, the first flow path outlet 2730a and the second flow path outlet 2730b. Each flow path is formed by attaching the area cover member 2600 to the front surface side and covering the area cover member 2600. That is, since the area cover member 2600 is an indispensable component that constitutes a part of the flow path of the game ball, for example, a malicious player or the like removes the area cover member 2600 and plants it in the right game area 5b. Even if the installed obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are illegally bent and the game is played as it is, the game ball cannot move as expected by design when the area cover member 2600 is removed, and the ball is jammed or around. It is configured so that it becomes difficult to play a normal game because it leads to damage of parts and the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove the area cover member 2600 and suppress an act of illegally bending an obstacle nail.

Subsequently, FIGS. 584 (a) to 584 (c) show cross-sectional views of the planted portion of the obstacle nail in the right game area 5b. Specifically, the embodiment in which the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1209 and 1212 to 1218 planted in the panel convex portion 1117 are housed in the penetrating portion 2610 of the area cover member 2600 is illustrated. In, the nail head of each obstacle nail is configured to be accommodated within the thickness of the area cover member 2600.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the thickness of the area cover member 2600 is 2 mm, and the dimension (h) from the front surface of the panel convex portion 1117 where each obstacle nail is planted to the front surface of the area cover member 2600. Is about 18 mm. Further, the separation distance (w) between the center of the nail head of each obstacle nail and the end of each penetration portion 2610 of the area cover member 2600 is about 4 mm. Therefore, since the diameter of the nail head of the obstacle nail is about 4 mm, the gap between the outer peripheral end of the nail head and the open end of each of the penetrating portions 2610 is about 2 mm.

More specifically, the present embodiment will be described. In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 584 (a), a mode of accommodating the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 with respect to the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 is shown in the cross-sectional view. In this case, the gap from the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 to the open end of the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 provided in the area cover member 2600 is about 2 mm as described above. The center of the nail head and the center of each penetrating portion are configured to coincide with each other.

In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 584 (b), the accommodation mode of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 with respect to the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618 is shown in the cross-sectional view. In this case, the gap from the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the pair of obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 adjacent to each other to the open end of the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 provided in the area cover member 2600 is the same as described above. It is about 2 mm.

In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 584 (c), the accommodation mode of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 with respect to the penetrating portion 2619 is shown in the cross-sectional view. In this case, the gap from the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 to the open end of the penetrating portion 2619 provided in the area cover member 2600 is about 2 mm as described above.

As described above, since the gap between the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the obstacle nail and the open end of the penetrating portion 2610 constituting the accommodating portion is only about 2 mm, a tool for bending the obstacle nail is used. It becomes difficult to insert, and even if the obstacle nail is bent improperly in some way, the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the obstacle nail and the open end of the penetrating part 2610 interfere with each other. The degree of bending is very limited, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending an obstacle nail. Further, when the obstacle nail is bent illegally, the center position of the penetrating portion 2610 and the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail are eccentric. It will be possible to discover.

[35-6. Other embodiments]
Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the description of each drawing, the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following embodiment configuration can be changed.

For example, the correspondence between the obstacle nail and the penetrating portion 2610 constituting the accommodating portion of the obstacle nail is as described above based on the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. The shape is not limited to the shape, and the shape of the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610 can be variously changed as follows.

In the example of the penetrating portion 2610a illustrated in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 597 (a) to 597 (c), in the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a, the front side of the region cover member 2600a and the panel plate 1110 side are located at two locations. It forms a convex portion with a small cross section. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted to bend the obstacle nail 1220 illegally, traces such as chips and dents are likely to remain in the convex portion, so that fraudulent activity can be easily detected. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending an obstacle nail.

On the other hand, in the example of the penetrating portion 2610a illustrated in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 598 (a) to 598 (g), a convex portion facing the obstacle nail 1220 is formed in the central portion of the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a. There is. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted to bend the obstacle nail 1220 illegally, traces such as chips and dents remain in the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily detected. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending an obstacle nail. Further, as compared with the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 597 (a) to 5C described above, it is possible to easily process the convex portion to form the convex portion.

Further, in the example of the penetrating portion 2610a shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 599 (a) to 599 (a) to (d) and 600 (a) to (d), the area cover member 2600a in the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a. A convex portion having a small cross section is formed on either the front side or the panel plate 1110 side. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted to bend the obstacle nail 1220 illegally, traces such as chips and dents remain in the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily detected. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending an obstacle nail.

Further, in the example shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 601 (a) to 601 (e), the front side of the area cover member 2600a in the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a is integrally closed with the area cover member 2600a. A storage recess 2670 for accommodating the nail head is formed. According to such a configuration, since the obstacle nail 1220 cannot be accessed from the front side of the area cover member 2600a, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail 1220. Further, when the above-mentioned closed portion is destroyed and a tool or the like is inserted, the trace remains, so that it becomes easy to detect fraudulent acts and it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending an obstacle nail. It becomes.

Further, in the example shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 602 (a) to 602 (c), a rib of about several millimeters may be provided at the open end of the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to access the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220 housed in the penetrating portion 2610a with a tool for illegally bending the obstacle nail, a piano wire, or the like, and the tool is forced. Since traces such as chips and dents remain on the rib when the above is inserted, it is possible to further suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. Further, by providing the rib, the strength of the penetrating portion 2610a can be increased, and the rigidity of the region cover member 2600a itself can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment and the other embodiment described above, various modes of the penetrating portion constituting the accommodating portion of the obstacle nail have been exemplified, but the penetrating portion having a notched portion and the penetrating portion having a plurality of notched portions are various. It is possible to adopt various forms as long as it accommodates all or a part of the obstacle nail in front view, including a penetrating portion having a various shape, and functions as an accommodating portion.

Further, a decorative sticker with a decorative pattern may be attached to the front surface of the area cover member 2600, which can improve the design of the area cover member 2600 itself and the outer periphery of the nail head of the obstacle nail. When a tool or the like is forcibly inserted into the gap between the end portion and the open end portion of the penetrating portion 2610, traces such as scratches and peeling remain on the decorative sticker, which facilitates the detection of fraudulent activity. , It is possible to further suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. By attaching a decorative sticker with a through hole corresponding to the penetration portion 2610 to the surface of the area cover member 2600, the decoration of the game area (so-called game board) is attached at the rear position of the obstacle nail. In contrast to the conventional technology in which the cell sheet is only used for decoration (cell decoration), a decorative sticker with a through hole attached to the area cover member 2600 allows the gaming area close to the obstacle nail at the front position of the obstacle nail. The decoration will be realized. In addition, by adopting a decorative sticker attached to the area cover member 2600 together with the cell decoration, three-dimensional decoration is realized on both the rear side and the front side of the obstacle nail, which is an unprecedented game area. New decoration is possible. In this case, the area cover member 2600 is made of a transparent member, and the decorative sticker attached to the area cover member 2600 has a translucent portion that allows the rear cell decorative area to be visually recognized. It is preferable to do so. In the above embodiment, a sheet-shaped decorative sticker has been described as an example, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to such a sticker, and the game area where the obstacle nail is planted and the area cover member 2600 are painted or plated. The decoration may be directly applied by a method such as processing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the area cover member 2600 is formed by itself and attached to the front side of the front unit 2000, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to the embodiment, and the game panel 1100, for example. It may be formed integrally with various prize-winning devices, decorative members, and the like provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the trouble of attaching the area cover member 2600 in the manufacturing process of the gaming machine.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the area cover member 2600 is configured as a single member covering the flow path device 2700 and the right side gaming area 5b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to the embodiment, for example. The area cover member 2600 may be divided into a member covering the flow path device 2700 and a member covering the right game area 5b so as to be attached to the front unit 2000, respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the flow path device 2700 and the right side gaming area 5b are covered with the area cover member 2600, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to the embodiment, and the left side gaming area 5'a is included. It is also possible to attach the area cover member 2600 to any location.

For example, the area cover member 2600a of the present invention can be attached to the game area shown in the front view of FIG. 594 (a) in the manner shown in the front view of FIG. 594 (b). More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the area cover member 2600a accommodates a substantially square penetrating portion 2651 for accommodating the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231 and the nail head of the so-called life nail 1230. Notch-shaped penetrating portion 2650, notched-shaped penetrating portion 2652 accommodating the nail heads of the two left side guide nails 1232, and elongated hole shape accommodating the nail heads of the four right side guide nails 1233. The through portion 2653 is formed, and the four boss portions 2660 integrally formed with the region cover member 2600a are fixed with screws from the back surface side of the panel plate 1110. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail for each obstacle nail that greatly affects the winning rate of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. Further, since the area cover member 2600a is fixed with screws from the back side of the panel plate 1110, the screws cannot be easily accessed, and it is possible to prevent the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. ing. In this embodiment, the area cover member 2600a is provided so as to accommodate the obstacle nails planted around the first starting port 2002, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other game areas. In addition, the area cover member 2600a may be provided, and further, the entire game area may be covered with a single area cover member 2600a.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. 580, the penetrating portion 2620 having the notched portion formed in the area cover member 2600 is formed by the member forming the outer edge of the game area. Although it is configured so that the cross section of the cutout portion is closed, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and for example, a center accessory arranged in the game area or an outer wall surface of various winning devices is used. , The cutout portion of the penetrating portion may be closed. Further, the cutout portion in the penetrating portion may be provided in any direction of the area cover member 2600. In this case, the cutout portion is another component existing at a position facing the cutout portion. It may be configured to close.

Further, FIG. 603 illustrates the installation mode of the area cover member 2600 in another embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 603 (a), the obstacle nails 1212 and 1213 are accommodated in the penetrating portion 2617 serving as the accommodating portion of the obstacle nail, and a notch portion is provided in a part of the penetrating portion 2617. Is provided.

Then, in the aspect illustrated in FIG. 603 (a), it is shown that all the obstacle nails including the obstacle nails 1212 and 1213 are in the state positions as designed, and there are two penetration portions 2617. By locating the nail head of the obstacle nail 1213 inside the line connecting the notch end portion 2617a, it is possible to visually recognize that the obstacle nail 1213 is in the state position as designed.

On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 603 (b), the obstacle nail 1213 is bent improperly, and the nail head of the obstacle nail 1213 forms a line connecting the two notched ends 2617a. It is configured so that it is possible to easily visually recognize that the obstacle nail is bent illegally by visually recognizing it in the exceeded state. Note that FIG. 603 (a) shows an example in which the obstacle nail 1213 is inside the line connecting the two notch ends 2617a as designed, but the obstacle nail 1213 has two notches. The area cover member 2600 is formed so that the state where the obstacle nail 1213 is located on the line connecting the end portions 2617a (so that the obstacle nail 1213 overlaps the line connecting the two notched end portions 2617a in the front view) is as designed. Even in this case, if the line connecting the two notched end portions 2617a is crossed as shown in FIG. 603 (b), the fraud can be easily detected.

[36. Measures to facilitate nail position confirmation]
By the way, in a pachinko machine as a game machine, the ball ejection rate (winning degree) is greatly affected by the adjustment of the obstacle nails planted on the board surface of the game board. Depending on the ball output rate, the number of customers will change significantly, which will greatly affect the sales of the game hall. Therefore, it is necessary to check the state of the obstacle nails at the time of installation of the gaming machine and at an appropriate timing after the installation, and to adjust the obstacle nails as necessary. Therefore, conventionally, a nail sheet has been used in order to easily and accurately check the state of a plurality of obstacle nails and adjust the nails.

As the nail sheet, a translucent or transparent plastic film or paper material is used, and the nail sheet is formed in the form of a thin sheet. Then, a pattern corresponding to each obstacle nail is printed on the surface of the nail sheet in the same manner as the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails to be planted on the game board.

Then, in order to confirm the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails actually planted on the game board and the design gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet, conventionally, it is printed on the nail sheet together with the above gauge arrangement. Various accessory devices and various winning devices are aligned on the upper surface of various accessory devices and various winning devices that are actually placed on the game board, and then overlapped, and obstacle nails are planted on the game board. I was checking the gauge arrangement of.

However, in general, in addition to obstacle nails, various members such as a plurality of winning devices, windmills, stages, decorative members, etc. are arranged on the game board, and the various members are the amount of protrusion of the game machine in the front-rear direction. Is also various. Then, when the thin and freely deformable nail sheet is arranged on the game board, it is quite difficult even for a skilled person to arrange the nail sheet so that the nail sheet is not twisted due to the unevenness on the back surface of the nail sheet. As a result, there has been a problem that it is not possible to accurately grasp the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails planted on the game board and the gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet.

Hereinafter, embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of relatively easily confirming the position of an obstacle nail.

[36-1. Nail sheet]
FIG. 585 shows a front view of the nail sheet 5000 corresponding to the game panel 1100 in the present embodiment. In the nail sheet 5000, the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nail printing body 5200 and the patterns of various arrangement members around the obstacle nail printing body 5200 are printed in black on the A4 size transparent film sheet 5100.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 585, the first area is printed on the nail sheet 5000 so that the gauge arrangements at a plurality of locations on the game panel 1100 can be confirmed by utilizing the limited range in the nail sheet 5000. The body 5110 and the second area printing body 5120 are printed, and the gauge arrangement corresponding to the two obstacle nail planting areas and the peripheral arrangement member thereof are printed separately.

When confirming the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails actually planted by using the nail sheet 5000 shown in FIG. 585, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 586, the first area printed body 5110 The outer edge of the area cover member 2600 printed on the above and the plurality of through portions 2610 are accurately aligned and overlapped on the game panel 1100, and the printed obstacle nail printing body 5200 and the obstacle nail planted on the back surface. Check if there is any discrepancy with.

[36-2. Area cover member]
As described above, the area cover member 2600 of the present embodiment is shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 580, the arrangement plan view of the obstacle nails of FIG. 582, and the disassembled rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 583. As shown, the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 are accommodated in the front view circular penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 of the area cover member 2600, respectively, and the elongated hole-shaped penetrating portions 2614 to 2618 are accommodated. , Two of the obstacle nails 1204-1209 and 1212-1215 that are close to each other are accommodated, and the penetration portion 2619 having a longer hole than the penetration portions 2614 to 2618 has three obstacle nails 1216. It is configured to accommodate ~ 1218 nail heads. Further, a penetrating portion 2620 having a part of a notch is formed at the right end portion of the area cover member 2600 in the front view, and the nail heads of two adjacent obstacle nails 1210 and 1211 are formed in the penetrating portion 2620. It is configured to accommodate the part.

Further, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of FIG. 583, mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are integrally provided on the back side of the area cover member 2600 so that the area cover cannot be removed from the front of the game panel 1100. It is screwed on the back side of the member 2600. Further, as shown in FIG. 583, the screw screwed to the mounting bosses 2630, 2631, and 2633 from the rear of the game panel 1100 so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100. However, the screw screwed to the mounting boss 2632 is blocked by the panel plate 1110 so that the screw cannot be accessed. More specifically, since the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 with screws, the front unit 2000 itself is once removed when the area cover member 2600 is removed. It is configured so that it must be removed from the panel plate 1110.

Further, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 581, the area cover member 2600 of the present embodiment covers the flow path device 2700 and the right game area 5b in which a plurality of obstacle nails are planted. It is provided on the game panel 1100 in this way, and forms a wide and flat surface on the game panel. Due to such a characteristic configuration, when a very soft nail sheet 5000 is placed on the game panel 1100, it is stacked on the flat surface, which affects various members having different amounts of protrusion forward and obstacle nails. It is possible to stably stack the nail sheet 5000 on the game panel 1100 without receiving the nail sheet, even if the person is not an expert, and without causing further twisting.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in the front view of FIG. 577, the big winning opening 2005 is arranged below the right game area 5b, and the big winning opening 2005 is not shown on the front side of the big winning opening 2005. A mouth cover member is provided. Similar to the area cover member 2600, the large winning opening cover member is formed so that the front side and the back side have flat surfaces, and the area cover member 2600 installed above the large winning opening cover member. It is installed so that the front side is flush with each other. With such a configuration, the area cover member 2600 and the large winning opening cover member make it possible to form a flat surface in a wider range on the game panel 1100, and a nail sheet 5000 is further placed on the game panel 1100. It is possible to stack them stably.

Further, as described above, the area cover member 2600 of the present embodiment accommodates the nail head of the obstacle nail as described above based on the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. 580 and the rear perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 583. A plurality of penetrating portions 2610 having different shapes are formed, and in positioning when the nail sheets 5000 are overlapped, the shape of the penetrating portion printed on the nail sheet 5000 is easily superimposed on the penetrating portion 2610 on the back surface. Moreover, it is possible to accurately align the nail sheet 5000 and quickly confirm the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nail while observing the eccentricity between the obstacle nail and the penetrating portion.

[36-3. Other embodiments]
Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the description of each drawing, the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following embodiment configuration can be changed.

In the above-described embodiment, the area cover member 2600 is configured as a single member covering the flow path device 2700 and the right game area 5b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to the embodiment, and for example, the area cover. The member 2600 may be divided into a member covering the flow path device 2700 and a member covering the right game area 5b, and may be provided on the game panel 1100. That is, even if the area cover member 2600 having a flat surface on the front side is divided and mounted on the game panel 1100, one large flat surface can be formed, so that the nail sheet 5000 can be stably placed on the area cover member. It can be stacked on the front of the 2600.

Further, the area cover member 2600 may be formed large and integrally so as to cover a wider range of game areas, and such a configuration enables the nail sheet 5000 to be more stably stacked on the front surface of the area cover member 2600. Is.

Further, the area cover member 2600 in the above-described embodiment is composed of a single member capable of covering the flow path device 2700 and the right side game area 5b, but in addition, the area cover member 2600 is in the left side game area 5'a. Any range may be configured to be covered by a single area cover member or a plurality of area cover members, for example, a plurality of around the first starting port 2002 as shown in the front view of FIG. 594 (b). An example is the provision of the area cover member 2600a for accommodating the obstacle nail. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily and accurately superimpose the nail sheets 5000 at any place on the game panel 1100, and it is possible to quickly confirm the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails. Become.

(Third Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described based on the embodiments shown in FIGS. 577 to 604.

[37. Measures to visually recognize the condition of obstacle nails]
By the way, in pachinko machines as game machines, a plurality of obstacle nails are installed, but the obstacle nails are illegally bent by a malicious player or the like, and many game balls are illegally won in the winning opening. There was a fraudulent act. For the purpose of preventing such fraudulent activities, a decorative cover is provided on the winning opening device and the decorative cover is provided so that the obstacle nail for the introduction port, which is conventionally planted directly above the winning opening device, is not bent illegally. A concentric regulation part was provided at the position corresponding to the obstacle nail for the introduction port. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-188259).

In general, the ball output rate (winning degree) is greatly affected by the adjustment of the obstacle nails planted on the board of the game board, so many players have obstacles when choosing a game table to play. They are very interested in the direction of inclination of the nail, and if the condition of the obstacle nail is disadvantageous to the game, they tend not to play the game with the game machine.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, for example, as shown in FIG. 8 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-188259, when the player looks into the state of the obstacle nail for the introduction port from the front, the said Since the relative positional relationship between the obstacle nail for the introduction port and the regulation part forming the penetration part is grasped, the player can tell that the obstacle nail for the introduction port is tilted in a disadvantageous direction with respect to the winning of the game ball. When it was recognized, it could lead to a decline in interest.

Hereinafter, embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

[37-1. Area cover member]
In order to deal with the above-mentioned problems, in the present embodiment, as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 587, the area cover member 2600a provided with the penetrating portion 2610a for accommodating the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 is provided. The biggest feature is that.

The area cover member 2600a in the present embodiment exemplified in FIG. 587 has the same basic configuration as the above-mentioned second embodiment, and has the same embodiment as the area cover member 2600 in the second embodiment, and is an obstacle nail 1219. The nail head of 1220 is housed in the penetrating portion 2610a.

On the other hand, the area cover member 2600a in the present embodiment is an obstacle nail 1219 planted in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002, which greatly affects the degree of winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 under the above-mentioned problems. The nail head of 1220 is accommodated in the penetrating portion 2610a.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 587 (a), the area cover member 2600a is attached to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002, and the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 are attached to FIG. It is housed in the penetrating portion 2610a in the manner shown in b).

As a method of attaching the area cover member 2600a to the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 587 (c), it is possible to attach the area cover member 2600a to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002 by using a well-known fixing method. It is possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 587 (d), it is also possible to integrally mold and attach the decorative member of the first starting port 2002.

As an example of this embodiment, FIG. 588 illustrates a plurality of embodiments in which the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a formed in the area cover member 2600a is shifted from the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220. ing.

That is, in order to solve the above-mentioned conventional problems, the center of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 are placed on the area cover member 2600a without bending or adjusting the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 that are actually planted. By forming (eccentricizing) the penetrating portion 2610a centered on the position deviated from the position, is it more advantageous or disadvantageous than the actual planting state of the obstruction nail (bending condition of the obstruction nail, etc.)? It is intended to be visually recognized by the player.

For example, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588 (a), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the right side of the front view is shifted to the left side from the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220. It is possible to make the player who sees the eccentricity think that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is spread outward, and induce the player's willingness to play the game machine.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588 (b), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the left side of the front view is formed by shifting the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a to the right side of the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1219. It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is spread outward, and to induce the player to play the game.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588 (c), the center positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are formed by shifting inward from the center position of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220. It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward, and to induce the player to play the game.

On the other hand, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588 (d), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the right side of the front view is shifted to the right side from the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220. It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is bent inward. The player who sees such an aspect thinks that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed, which is disadvantageous when the game ball is won in the first starting port 2002. Since the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is not bent inward, the game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 at a normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show the player a surprising winning mode and improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588 (e), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the left side in the front view is formed by shifting the center position to the left side from the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1219. It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is bent inward. The player who sees such an aspect thinks that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed, which is disadvantageous when the game ball is won in the first starting port 2002. Since the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is not bent inward, the game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 at a normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show the player a surprising winning mode and improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 588 (f), the center positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are formed so as to be offset outward from the center positions of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220. It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are bent inward. A player who has visually recognized such an aspect thinks that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed, which is disadvantageous when the game ball is won in the first starting port 2002. Since the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are not bent inward, the game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 at a normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show the player a surprising winning mode and improve the interest in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 588 (a) to 588 (f), region cover members 2600a having different formation positions of the penetrating portions 2610a are produced and replaced as appropriate for the first starting port 2002. It is very troublesome because it needs to be attached to the decorative part of. Therefore, in the following, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to manufacture a plurality of area cover members 2600a and the time and effort required to store and replace the plurality of area cover members 2600a on the game store side based on FIGS. 589 (a) to 589 (e). An embodiment will be described.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 589 (a), in the present embodiment, four penetrating portions 2610a are formed in one area cover member 2600a, and two penetrating portions 2610a below are formed as two penetrating portions above. It is formed inside 2610a. When attached to the decorative portion of the first starting port 2002 with the illustrated Δ-shaped mark facing upward, as shown in the front view of FIG. 589 (b), the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides The player can visually recognize the center position and the center position of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides in the same state. Further, when the area cover member 2600a is rotated 180 degrees and the Δ-shaped mark is directed downward, the center positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are determined as shown in the front view of FIG. 589 (c). It can be placed inside the center position of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides, which gives the player the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward. It is possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 589 (d), when the area cover member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the right and the Δ-shaped mark is installed toward the right side, the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is spread outward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 589 (e), when the area cover member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the left and the Δ-shaped mark is placed toward the left side, the right side is provided. It is possible to give the player the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 is spread upward and slightly outward. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the visual mode to the player in various ways with one area cover member 2600a without increasing the number of members of the area cover member 2600a.

[37-3. Other embodiments]
Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the description of each drawing, the present invention is not necessarily limited to the above-described embodiment, and the following embodiment configurations can be changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 590 (a), it is also possible to form an oval-shaped penetrating portion 2610a in the region cover member 2600a and attach it to the first starting port 2002, which is shown in FIG. 590 (b). By moving the area cover member 2600a downward from the installation mode to the installation mode shown in FIG. 590 (c), the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward to the player who is visually recognized from the front. It is possible to make the illusion like this. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the gaming machine.

Further, the shape of the penetrating portion 2610a is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and if the player can visually recognize the relative positional relationship between the penetrating portion 2610a and the obstacle nail, the penetrating portion 2610a may have various shapes. can do. For example, as shown in FIG. 591 (a), the shape of the penetrating portion 2610a can be a substantially square shape in which the R portion is arranged at the corner portion, and is also shown in FIG. 591 (b). It is also possible to make it square.

Further, the penetrating portion 2610a of the present invention is not necessarily limited to a closed shape, and as shown in FIG. 591 (c), a penetrating portion having a notch shape in the horizontal direction is formed to form an obstacle nail 1219. It may be configured to accommodate 1220 nail heads. Further, as shown in FIG. 591 (d), a notched through portion may be formed in an oblique direction to accommodate the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220.

Further, the penetration portion 2610a of the present invention may accommodate a plurality of obstacle nail heads in one penetration portion 2610a from the viewpoint of making the state of the obstacle nail visible. For example, FIG. 592 (a) shows. As shown in the figure, the shape of the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a is an elongated hole, and the nail heads of a plurality of obstacle nails 1221, 1222 (or 1223, 1224) are accommodated in one penetrating portion 2610a. It is also possible to configure it as follows. Then, as shown in FIG. 592 (b), by forming the two elongated through holes 2610a in the area cover member 2600a at the inner position, the obstacle nails 1221 and 1222 can be visually recognized from the front of the player. , 1223, 1224 can be illusioned as being spread outward. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the gaming machine.

Further, in the various embodiments described above, the area cover member is targeted for an obstacle nail planted in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002, such as a so-called life nail that greatly affects the winning rate of the first starting port 2002. Although the installation mode of the 2600a has been described, it is not necessarily limited to the above-mentioned obstacle nails, and any obstacle nails to be planted in the game area can be used. The area cover member 2600a may be installed to accommodate the obstacle nail in the penetrating portion 2610a. That is, the player is made to visually recognize the relative positional relationship between the nail head of the obstacle nail and the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a, and it is disadvantageous whether the state of the obstacle nail is advantageous for the game. If it is possible to recognize whether or not the game is in such a state, it is possible to improve the motivation to play the game machine.

For example, another embodiment illustrated in the front view of FIGS. 594 and 595 shows an installation mode of the area cover member 2600a for accommodating a plurality of obstacle nails planted around the first starting port 2002. More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the area cover member 2600a has a substantially square penetrating portion 2651 for accommodating the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231 and the nail head of the so-called life nail 1230. 2650 with a notch-shaped penetrating portion for accommodating, a notched-shaped penetrating portion for accommodating the nail heads of the two left side guide nails 1232, and a length accommodating the nail heads of the four right side guide nails 1233. A hole-shaped through portion 2653 is formed, and the four boss portions 2660 integrally formed with the region cover member 2600a are fixed with screws from the back surface side of the panel plate 1110.

Then, with respect to the game area shown in FIG. 594 (a), the area cover member 2600a is provided in the manner shown in FIG. 594 (b). The area cover member 2600a provided in FIG. 594 (b) is configured so that the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 can be visually recognized by the player in a state that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous. The nail head of the jump nail 1231 is located at the center of the penetrating portion 2651, and the nail head of the life nail 1230 is located below the penetrating portion 2650.

On the other hand, the area cover member 2600a shown in FIGS. 595 (a) and 595 (b) includes the area cover member 2600a in FIG. 594 (b) and the penetrating portion 2651 that houses the nail head of the jump nail 1231, respectively. The formation correspondence of the penetrating portion 2650 accommodating the nail head of the life nail 1230 is different, and the area cover member 2600a shown in FIG. 595 (a) has a penetrating portion 2651 accommodating the nail head of the jump nail 1231. The penetrating portion 2650 for accommodating the nail head of the life nail 1230 is formed longer by shifting downward. With such a configuration, the player who visually recognizes the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. 595 (a) has the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 as the first from the corresponding positional relationship with each penetrating portion. It is possible to increase the player's motivation to play by illusion that the starting port 2002 is in an advantageous state for winning a prize.

On the contrary, in the area cover member 2600a shown in FIG. 595 (b), the penetrating portion 2651 accommodating the nail head of the jump nail 1231 is shifted upward, and the penetrating portion 2650 accommodating the nail head of the life nail 1230 is accommodated. Are formed short. With such a configuration, the player who visually recognizes the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. 595 (b) prefers the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 from the corresponding positional relationship with each penetrating portion. It is possible to increase the interest of the player in selecting the game machine to be played by the illusion that the player is in a disadvantageous state for winning the starting port 2002. In addition, even if it is visually recognized in a seemingly disadvantageous state, the actual state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 is not bent in a disadvantageous state for winning, so the winning rate to the first starting port 2002 is high. It doesn't go down. Therefore, the player who played the game while visually recognizing that the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 is in a disadvantageous state is unexpected and uplifted with respect to the relatively good winning rate to the first starting port 2002. You can feel the feeling.

Further, the corresponding positional relationship between the life nail 1230 and the penetrating portion 2650 is not limited to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 594 and 595. For example, as shown in the front view of FIG. 604, the life nail 1230 The state of the game nail depends on whether the nail head is located inside the line connecting the ends of the notch portion of the penetrating portion 2650 or outside the line connecting the ends. It can also be configured to be grasped.

Further, the method of installing the area cover member 2600a on the game panel 1100 is not limited to the method of fixing to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002 described above, and for example, the front view of FIG. 592 (c). As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 592 (d) or (e), the area cover member 2600a can be fixed to the panel plate 1110 from the front surface side with screws or the like. As a fixing method, the mounting boss may be integrally molded with the panel plate 1110 as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 592 (d), or the panel plate may be integrally molded as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 592 (e). A screw hole may be provided on the 1110 side, and at that time, as shown in the front view of FIG. 592 (c), the mounting portion is arranged below the obstacle nail so as not to interfere with the rolling of the game ball. It is preferable to do so.

Further, the mounting mode of the area cover member 2600a to the panel plate 1110 is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIGS. 593 (a) and 593 (b), the area cover member 2600a is screwed from the back side of the game panel 1100. It is also possible to fix the area cover member 2600a, and because of such a configuration, the area cover member 2600a cannot be easily removed from the front side of the gaming machine, so that the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail is prevented. It is possible to prevent it.

In addition, in this embodiment and the other embodiment described above, various modes of the penetrating portion constituting the accommodating portion of the obstacle nail have been exemplified, but the penetrating portion having a notched portion and the penetrating portion having a plurality of notched portions are various. It is possible to adopt various forms as long as it accommodates all or a part of the obstacle nail in front view, including a penetrating portion having a various shape, and functions as an accommodating portion.

[38. Frame movable body]
By the way, in the gaming machines described with reference to FIGS. 523 to 576 and the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-093655, the progress state of the game is shown to the player by the display contents in the predetermined display means, and the player is shown. By operating the movable decorative means provided on the frame that constitutes the outer shape of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing, it is possible to make the player feel the interest. However, some players find it troublesome to move their line of sight from a predetermined display means to the movable decorative means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine, and do not move their line of sight to the movable decorative means that has operated. In such a case, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to fully feel the interest of operating the movable decorative means.

Below, the player finds it troublesome to move his or her line of sight to the movable decoration means provided on the frame that constitutes the outer shape of the gaming machine, and the movable decoration provided on the frame that constitutes the outer shape of the gaming machine. An embodiment of a gaming machine capable of making a player feel a sufficient interest even when the line of sight is not moved to the means will be described.

605 and 606 show embodiments that are modified from the embodiments described with reference to FIG. 523. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 605 and 606, in the door frame top unit 570, in addition to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, a frame movable body having a shape imitating a root vegetable is formed up and down. It is configured to have a root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that can move in a direction.

605 (A), 605 (B), 606 (A), and 606 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 605 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 605 (D) and 605 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 606 (C) is a front view showing the internal structure of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. In FIGS. 605 (A), 605 (C), and 605 (D), the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are placed in standby positions in the door frame top unit 570. It shows the stored state. FIG. 605 (B) shows a state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved to the moving position. There is. FIG. 606 (A) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved to the moving position. There is. 605 (E) and 606 (B) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are moved to the moving positions.

As shown in FIG. 606 (C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 that imitates a root vegetable leaf on the right side when viewed from the front. Further, it has a root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 that imitates the root of root vegetables on the left side when viewed from the front. The root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 are each made of white translucent synthetic resin, and the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810 is provided inside.

As shown in FIGS. 605 (A), 605 (B), and the like, the lower end portion of the right side connecting linear member 7820 is attached to a predetermined position on the left side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 when viewed from the front. Further, the lower end portion of the left side connecting linear member 7830 is attached to a predetermined position on the right side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 when viewed from the front. On the other hand, the upper end of the right side connecting linear member 7820 is connected to the right side vertical movement drive mechanism 7825. Further, the upper end of the left side connecting linear member 7830 is connected to the left side vertical movement drive mechanism 7835. The right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 are string-shaped and have a predetermined length.

Specifically, the right side connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 are composed of a tubular cable, and inside the cable, a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. A signal line (not shown) and a feeding line (not shown) for supplying electric power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are provided. The signal line and the feeding line may be provided inside either the right side connecting line member 7820 or the left side connecting line member 7830. In addition, instead of transmitting a signal or supplying electric power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 by wire, a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 wirelessly. A loop antenna or the like may be used to supply power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 from the door frame 3 side in a non-contact manner.

The right-side vertical movement drive mechanism 7825 and the left-side vertical movement drive mechanism 7835 each have a rotation mechanism (not shown), and by rotating this rotation mechanism based on the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510, a tubular cable is used. It is possible to wind up and down the right side connecting linear member 7820 and the left side connecting linear member 7830.

An opening (not shown) is provided on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, and by passing through the opening, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved downward from the state of being stored in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to set the state of being located on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, or to set the state of being stored in the door frame top unit 570 from the state of being located on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. be. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 605 (A), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is located at the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570, and the rotation mechanism is rotated in a predetermined direction. As shown in FIG. 606 (A), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be moved so as to be located at a moving position in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, by rotating the rotation mechanism in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is located at the front moving position of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 606 (A). It can be moved so as to be located at the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 shown in 605 (A).

As shown in FIG. 606 (C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 inside. Specifically, the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810 has a shape along the outer shape of the root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 constituting the front surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. It consists of a white printed substrate. As a specific configuration of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810, for example, the configuration described above may be adopted for the face substrate 6020. By driving and controlling a plurality of light sources (for example, full-color LEDs) mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board by the peripheral control board 1510, the root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 can be controlled. It is possible to make the light emitting decoration mode of a predetermined light emitting color.

As the light emitting mode of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810, the rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured to adopt the same light emitting mode as the above-mentioned light emitting mode. For example, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a portion imitating the root of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810, are made to emit white light, and the root vegetable frame movable body No. 1 is a portion imitating a leaf. By emitting light in green from a plurality of light sources corresponding to one cover portion 7802, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be made into a light emitting decoration mode imitating a radish. On the other hand, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a part imitating a root, are made to emit red light, and a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802, which is a part imitating a leaf. By making the light source of No. 1 emit light in green, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be made into a light emitting decoration mode imitating a carrot.

An example in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is provided by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 523 is shown. However, FIGS. 528 to 532, 535 to 538, 541 to 547, and 550 to 550. In the embodiment described with reference to 554, the embodiment in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is provided may be used. Further, in such an embodiment, it may be configured to execute the following effect modes. In the embodiment in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be operated, among these frame movable bodies. The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to move in response to the movement of at least one frame movable body (movement from the standby position to the moving position, change from the stopped state to the rotating state, etc.).

Hereinafter, an effect mode using the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 607 and 608. 607 (A) and 607 (B) show the moving state of the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), and simulated images imitating the first movable decorative means. It is a time chart which showed the display mode, the moving state of the 2nd movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). Further, FIGS. 608 (A) to 608 (C) are front views showing the state of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing of such an effect mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 607, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are described according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effect. The time between each timing is 1 second. These points are the same in the time charts shown in the drawings of FIGS. 611, 613, 614, 618 to 622, etc., which will be described later, and in the effect mode obtained by modifying them.

FIG. 607 (A) shows an effect mode using the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606. First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbol starts to change in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4").

At timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward moving position by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. do. At the same time, at timing t7, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying simulated images imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200.

FIG. 608 (A) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is in the reach state and the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is started at the timing t7. The display of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 starts immediately after this (0.1 seconds later, etc.).

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the moving position. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the mode in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the moving position is dynamically displayed.

At the timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete the movement to the moving position. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also displayed in a mode imitating the state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

FIG. 608 (B) shows a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable in a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have completed the movement to the moving position at the timing t9. It shows a state in which a simulated image imitating the body 7200 is displayed in a mode imitating a state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the state in which it is stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At the timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display position of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view. It will be positioned in a stationary state. At the same time, at the timing t14, the display of the simulated images imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200, which have been displayed so far, is completed.

In FIG. 608 (C), at timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 displays a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows the state of moving to a position where it overlaps with the position where it was in front view.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at the timing t22, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. From timing t22 to timing t24, drive control is performed in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the standby position. At this time, the simulated image that imitates the mode in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the moving position is not displayed. At the timing t24, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t24, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the decorative symbol in the center, which has been changing, is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 607 (B) is a game in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 described with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606 is provided with a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 that can be rotated as shown in FIG. 532 and the like. It shows the effect mode when applied to the machine.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbol starts to change in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. It will be in reach. At the timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the stopped state in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. At the same time, at timing t7, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying simulated images imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the state in which it is stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At the timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display position of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view. It will be positioned in a stationary state. At the same time, at the timing t14, the display of the simulated images imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200, which have been displayed so far, is completed.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. At the timing t24, the states of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570.

At a predetermined timing after timing t24, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the decorative symbol in the center, which has been changing, is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

During the game, the player keeps watching a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in which the effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is performed. A simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means is displayed on a predetermined display means in accordance with the drive control of the provided first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200). As a result, the player is notified that the first movable decoration means is drive-controlled, so that the player does not notice that the first movable decoration means is drive-controlled. , The situation that the player cannot feel the interest due to the drive control of the first movable decoration means, or the player carelessly contacts the first movable decoration means and is injured. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

On the other hand, a player who is reluctant to visually recognize the drive control of the first movable decorative means due to feeling tired directly indicates that the first movable decorative means is driven and controlled. Instead of visually recognizing, it is possible to virtually experience the operation of the first movable decorative means by seeing a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means displayed on a predetermined display means.

Further, since the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves to a position that overlaps with the display position of the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means in the front view, the first movable To impose a burden such as moving the line of sight on a passive player who does not move the line of sight to the first movable decorative means even though he / she is aware that the decorative means is driven and controlled. Instead, it is possible to have people feel the excitement of moving the second movable decoration means. In addition, it is possible for such a passive player to regain his positive attitude toward the game.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 607 (A) and 607 (B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured to move in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 at timing t13. , In addition to the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 does not move to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame. An effect mode that continues to be located in the standby position in the top unit 570 may also be configured to be feasible. With such a configuration, after displaying the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 makes the right ear frame movable body 7100. An effect mode in which the simulated image and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to a position where they overlap with each other in front view, and an effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 continues to be located in the standby position. And can be executed.

Further, the expectation that a big hit state will occur is higher when the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves is executed than when the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 does not move is executed. It may be configured.

With such a configuration, after displaying a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7200) is displayed. The first effect mode in which the 7800) is driven and controlled to move to a position that overlaps the display position of the simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means in the front view, and the second movable decorative means are on standby. Since the second effect mode that continues to be located at the position is executed, the player is interested in whether or not the second movable decorative means moves.

In addition, when the first effect mode is executed and when the second effect mode is executed, the state where the first effect mode is executed is more advantageous to the player (big hit state). When configured to increase the degree of expectation that occurs, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the movement of the second movable decorative means.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 607 (A) and 607 (B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600 from timing t13 to timing t14. Although it is configured, a plurality of operation modes when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be provided. For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is temporarily stopped at a position intermediate between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then returned to the standby position (timing t15). Alternatively, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is temporarily stopped at a position intermediate between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then moved to the moving position (timing t15). May be configured to execute. In this case, it is preferable to configure the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 so that the expectation that a big hit state will occur is higher when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the moving position.

Alternatively, during the period (timing t14 to timing t18) from the completion of the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the game board side effect display device 1600 to the start of movement into the door frame top unit 570, the root vegetable frame movable body In addition to the mode in which the 7800 is stopped in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, it may be configured to move in a predetermined operation mode within the range in front of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to provide a plurality of operation modes when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves into the door frame top unit 570 and returns. For example, in addition to the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 returns from the moving position to the standby position from the timing t18 to the timing t19, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is temporarily stopped at a position intermediate between the standby position and the moving position. (Between timing t18 and timing t19), and then returning to the standby position (timing t20) may be configured to execute the effect mode.

The mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the standby position to the moving position, the mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves, and the mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the moving position to the standby position are shown. The operation mode combining the above operation modes may be adopted as a plurality of operation modes for operating the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. Further, the degree of expectation that a big hit state may occur may be different depending on the plurality of operation modes.

With such a configuration, in addition to whether or not the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves, if it moves, drive control is performed in one of a plurality of operation modes. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the second movable decorative means moves, the player is interested in how the second movable decorative means moves.

Further, when the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) is generated differs depending on the operation mode, the player determines in what mode the second movable decorative means moves. It is possible to raise the expectation of.

The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to be turned off until the movement of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the front is completed, and to be in a light emitting decoration state when the movement to the moving position is completed. .. Specifically, from timing t13 to timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is turned off, and at the timing t14 when the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is set to the light emitting decorative state. , It is preferable that the light emitting decoration state is continued until the timing t18 when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving to the storage position. Alternatively, it is preferable that the light emitting decoration state is continued until the timing t19 when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes the movement to the storage position. As the light emitting decoration state, either one of the above-mentioned light emitting mode in which the radish is imitated and the light emitting mode in which the carrot is imitated may be selected based on the special lottery result.

In this way, after moving the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) to the moving position in front of the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in the off state, the light emitting decoration is performed at the moving position. By making it in a state, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player. In addition, by setting the light emitting decoration state based on the special lottery result, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the special lottery result will be in an advantageous state (big hit) for the player. Further, when the second movable decoration means is stored in the standby position, the light emitting decoration state is continued, so that the interest in the first movable decoration means located on the extension line in the moving direction of the second movable decoration means is raised. It is possible to make the player hold it.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 607 and 608, at the same time as the operation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is started, in the display area substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. , The display of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 is started. Further, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607 (A), at the same time as the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the moving positions is completed, the game board side effect display device 1600 In the display area substantially in the center, the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to be displayed to complete the movement to the moving position. Further, the right ear frame is movable from the standby position to the moving position as in the timing t9 to the timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 607 (A) and the timing t7 to the timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 607 (B). In the same manner as the operating states of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 located in the standby position from the non-rotating state to the rotating state, in these periods. , It is preferable to display a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200.

With such a configuration, the first movable decorative means is changed from the first state (the state of being located in the standby position) to the second state (the state of being located in the moving position or the state of being rotated). The state of (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) can be accurately grasped by visually recognizing a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600).

On the other hand, in a mode different from the operating states of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed. It may be configured to do so.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 607 (A), a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move and appear from timing t7 to timing t9. Although the target display is performed, the dynamic display may be configured to be performed again from the timing t9 to the timing t11, and further from the timing t11 to the timing t13.

In this way, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving state). Even after the change, the player can move the first movement by dynamically displaying a simulated image imitating the operation mode of the first movable decoration means on the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). It becomes possible to get interested in the operation of the decorative means. In the above-mentioned example, such re-dynamic display is performed twice (the period from timing t9 to timing t11 and the period from timing t11 to timing t13), but the number of times of dynamic display may be one. It may be 3 times or more.

Further, at the timing t9 in the example shown in FIG. 607 (A), the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, and the game board side effect display device. It may be configured to start moving upward in the display area of 1600 and then ascend in the display area to complete the movement out of the display area at timing t11. Further, from timing t11 to timing t13, a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to perform the same dynamic display. FIG. 609 (A) is a diagram showing the state of the timing t10 in such an embodiment, and the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570. It shows the state of moving upward.

In this example, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body is changed from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving position). After changing to the positioned state), in a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear). A simulated image simulating the frame movable body 7200) is configured to move in a predetermined direction suggesting a position where the first movable decorative means is provided. Further, the first movable decorative means is configured to be located on an extension line in the moving direction of the simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means in the front view.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decoration means operates from the first state to the second state. In addition, the position where the first movable decoration means is provided can be directly suggested, and the player can be interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. Further, an operation that cannot be an actual operation of the first movable decorative means is performed by a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means, and in this respect as well, the player is interested in the operation of the first movable decorative means. It will be possible to have it brought to you.

Alternatively, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the example shown in FIG. 607 (A), a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed on the door frame top unit 570. It may be configured to dynamically display the imitated simulated images so that they appear alternately. FIG. 609 (B) shows a state in which the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is half stored with respect to the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570.

In this example, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body is changed from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving position). After changing to the positioned state), in a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear). (Simulated image imitating the frame movable body 7200) is configured to be displayed in a mode of reciprocating and moving in a predetermined direction. Further, the first movable decorative means is configured to be located on an extension line in the direction of reciprocating movement in the front view.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decoration means operates from the first state to the second state. In addition, it is possible to suggest the position where the first movable decoration means is provided, and it is possible to make the player interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. In addition, the comical display of the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means makes it possible for the player to be interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 609 (A) and 609 (B), the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body is used. After changing from the first state (standby state) to the second state (state located at the moving position), in the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), the first movable decorative means is the first. In a mode different from the mode of changing from the state of the above to the second state, a dynamic display of a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (ear pops out upward, ear moves flutteringly, etc.) is performed. It is configured.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in what the actual operation mode of the first movable decorative means is.

On the other hand, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the production mode shown in FIG. 607 (A), a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are dynamically displayed in predetermined colors. It may be configured to do so. For example, in a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100, after displaying an image in which the part imitating the inside of the ear is red and the part imitating the outside of the ear is white, the colors are changed and the ear is replaced. The display operation of displaying an image in which the part imitating the inside of the ear is white and the part imitating the outside of the ear is red may be repeated a plurality of times (for example, the color is changed every second for a total of 5 times). .. Further, such a display operation may be simultaneously performed in a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. FIG. 610 (A) shows a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It is a figure which showed the state which displayed the image which the imitated part is red.

On the other hand, the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to continue to be displayed in a predetermined color without changing the colors. FIG. 610 (B) shows, as simulated images imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100, an image in which both the part imitating the inside of the ear and the part imitating the outside of the ear are pink, and the left ear frame movable body 7200. As a simulated image simulating the above, it is a figure which showed the effect mode which continuously displays the image which both the part which imitated the inside of an ear and the part which imitated the outside of an ear are pink.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in what the actual light emitting effect mode of the first movable decorative means is.

The degree of expectation that a big hit state may occur may be different depending on each effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 609 and 610. For example, the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 609 (A) is configured so that the expectation that a big hit state will occur is higher than the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 609 (B). May be good. Further, the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 610 (A) is configured so that the expectation that a big hit state will occur is higher than the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 610 (B). May be good.

Further, it may be configured to execute an effect mode in which the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 609 and the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 610 are combined. For example, the effect described with reference to FIG. 609 (B) is more than the effect mode in which the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 609 (A) and the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 610 (A) are combined. An effect mode in which the aspect and the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 610 (B) are combined may be configured so that the degree of expectation that a big hit state will occur is higher.

Further, it is preferable to configure the effect mode in which the expectation that the big hit state is generated is higher so that the rate of execution of the effect mode is lower. For example, the ratio of the number of executions of the effect mode having a low expectation that a big hit state occurs to the number of executions of the effect mode having a high expectation that a big hit state occurs is 9: 1. It is good to set the execution ratio.

With such a configuration, a simulated image (simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100) that imitates the first movable decorative means displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). By having a plurality of display modes (simulated images imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200), the monotony as an effect is eliminated, and it becomes possible for the player to have an interest in the first movable decorative means. .. In addition, the act of directly visually recognizing the operation of the first movable decorative means and the act of visually recognizing a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means to know the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur. It is possible to provide the player with an interest in which action to enjoy.

In addition, the display mode of the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means indicates to the player the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) will occur, so that the first movable decoration means is visually recognized. In particular, it is possible for a passive player to recognize the presence of the first movable decorative means again.

In addition, the higher the expectation that a player-favorable state (big hit state) will occur, the lower the rate at which the effect mode will be executed. Although many modes are visually recognized, in rare cases (for example, once in 10 times), it is surprising to see a production mode in which the degree of expectation is high and the execution rate is low. Then, the player who visually recognizes the latter effect mode is more interested in the first movable decorative means, coupled with the excitement that it is shown that the degree of expectation is high.

The light emitting state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is emitted so as to be recognized in the same manner as the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It may be configured to allow. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 610 (A), the outside of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be made to emit red light, or in the state shown in FIG. 610 (B), the right ear. The frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to emit light in pink.

In this way, the light emitting mode in the second state (state located at the moving position) of the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body is determined. Simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200) displayed on the display means (game board side effect display device 1600). By making it the same as the image color of the image), when the player who has visually recognized the predetermined display means tries to visually recognize the first movable decoration means, he / she can quickly recognize the first movable decoration means. Is possible.

In the display area substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved in a configuration in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in an manner according to the result of the special lottery after the decorative symbols start to change. It may be configured as follows.

For example, when operating the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the decorative symbol starts to change at the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the decorative symbol is changing from the state of being changed. Is moved to the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600, and is displayed in a variable manner in a reduced size. In the display area substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100. And may be configured to start displaying a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200.

After that, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the display area substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and further root vegetables are moved from a position overlapping the display area substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. After moving the frame movable body 7800 in the direction of storing it in the door frame top unit 570, the decorative pattern displayed on the upper right until then is moved to approximately the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and then the original size. It is preferable to expand to the above to continue the variable display and finally stop the display in a manner suggesting the lottery result.

When such a variation mode of the decorative symbol is adopted, the variation of the decorative symbol is repeated a plurality of times at substantially the center of the game board side effect display device 1600.

With such a configuration, the line of sight of the player stays at a predetermined position of a predetermined display means (approximately the center of the game board side effect display device 1600), and the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable). For a passive player who feels stress in visually recognizing the drive control of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200), a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means and the second movable The movement of the decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) makes the player feel that the movement of the line of sight is forced, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels stress.

The decorative symbol starts to fluctuate at the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and is smaller than the decorative symbol displayed at the approximately center of the game board side effect display device 1600 at the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600. The game board side is in a state where the change of the decorative pattern is started and the change display of the changing decorative pattern is continued at the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 from the state where each decorative pattern is changed. The display of the decorative pattern displayed in the substantially center of the effect display device 1600 is temporarily terminated, and in the approximately center of the game board side effect display device 1600, a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body It may be configured to start displaying a simulated image imitating the 7200.

After that, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the display area substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and further, the root vegetable frame is movable from a position overlapping the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600. After moving the body 7800 in the direction of storing it in the door frame top unit 570, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the approximately center of the game board side effect display device 1600 is resumed, and finally together with the decorative symbol displayed in the upper right. , The lottery result may be stopped and displayed in a manner suggesting the result of the lottery.

When such a variation mode of the decorative symbol is adopted, the variation of the decorative symbol is repeated a plurality of times in the substantially center and the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600.

With such a configuration, the line of sight of the player stays at a predetermined position of a predetermined display means (approximately the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 on which a relatively large decorative pattern is displayed). , The first movable decoration means for a passive player who feels stress in visually recognizing the drive control of the first movable decoration means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200). By displaying a simulated image imitating the above and moving the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), it makes the player feel that the movement of the line of sight is forced, and the occurrence of a situation where the player feels stress is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

An example of displaying a small decorative pattern on the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown, but the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured to be displayed on the lower right or lower left of the game board side effect display device 1600. The period of moving from the standby position to the moving position (timing t13 to timing t14 in FIGS. 607 (A) and 607 (B)), the period of moving from the moving position (timing t14 to timing t18), and the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. During the period of moving from the position to the standby position (timing t18 to timing t19 in FIG. 607 (A) and FIG. 607 (B)), the small decorative pattern is configured so as not to be hidden by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. You may. Specifically, during these periods, it is preferable to configure the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 so that the small decorative design does not overlap in the front view.

In this way, the movement of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) causes the game board side effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined position (a relatively small decorative pattern is displayed) of the predetermined display means. By configuring the decorative symbols displayed in the lower right and lower left) so as not to be hidden, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a passive player feels that the production is excessive.

In the effect mode described later with reference to FIGS. 613, 614 and the like, these display methods may be adopted when displaying a simulated image and a decorative pattern imitating a modeled body on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Corresponding to the display of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200, when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves in the game board side effect display device 1600. It may be configured to display the indicated waiting time. Hereinafter, a plurality of display modes will be shown with reference to FIGS. 611 (A) and 611 (B). FIG. 611 (A) shows a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607 (A). Further, FIG. 611 (B) shows a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607 (B).

As the display of the standby time, for example, in the display area between the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200, it is referred to as "1" from timing t8 to timing t9. The numbers are displayed, the number "2" is displayed from timing t9 to timing t10, the number "3" is displayed from timing t10 to timing t11, and the number "4" is displayed from timing t11 to timing t12. From the timing t12 to the timing t13, the character string "GO !!" (note that the notation is abbreviated as "GO" in FIG. 611 (A)) may be displayed. In addition to displaying such numbers and letters, from timing t7 to timing t8, the character string "If root vegetables fall ...?" Is displayed as a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame. It may be configured to be displayed in the display area between the simulated image imitating the movable body 7200.

Alternatively, from timing t7 to timing t13 without displaying such numbers and letters, the character string "If the root vegetables fall ...?" Is displayed as a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame. It may be configured to be displayed in the display area between the simulated image imitating the movable body 7200.

Images suggesting the waiting time until the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates in this way (“1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “GO !!”) By adopting a configuration in which the display is performed by a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) is visually recognized. A game in which the player can recognize the timing at which the second movable decoration means operates, and the line of sight is moved to the first movable decoration means by displaying a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person overlooks the operation of the second movable decorative means. Further, for a passive player who does not move his / her line of sight with respect to the first movable decorative means, the operation timing of the second movable decorative means is suggested, so that the line of sight is moved from the predetermined display means. It is possible to make the operation of the second movable decorative means wait without causing the movement.

Further, an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means operates at a predetermined timing at the same timing (timing t7) as the timing of displaying the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means (“Root vegetables fall off”). By displaying "B ...?"), The player can simultaneously recognize that the first movable decoration means has operated and the second movable decoration means has operated, and moves the line of sight. In particular, the aggressive player has moved his or her line of sight to the first movable decorative means first, and has not noticed that the display suggesting that the second movable decorative means operates is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the second movable decorative means is overlooked.

Further, by displaying an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates adjacent to the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means, the player can perform the second movable decoration. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an image suggesting a waiting time until the means operates is not noticed.

An example of displaying an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decorative means operates in the display area between the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. However, the second movable decorative means operates so as to overlap one or both of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It may be configured to display an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates or an image suggesting that the second movable decoration means operates.

By adopting such a configuration, an image suggesting that the player waits until the second movable decorative means operates and an image suggesting that the second movable decorative means operates are displayed. It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of situations such as not being aware of the situation.

Corresponding to the display of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200, when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves in the game board side effect display device 1600. Although an example of displaying the waiting time to be shown is shown, the same suggestion may be made by sound instead of or in addition to such a display. For example, in the display area between the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200, as shown in FIGS. 611 (A) and 611 (B), the timing The voice "Ichi" is output from t8 to timing t9, the voice "ni" is output from timing t9 to timing t10, the voice "san" is output from timing t10 to timing t11, and the voice "san" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. The voice "Yon" may be output, and the voice "Go" may be output from the timing t12 to the timing t13. Alternatively, from timing t7 to timing t13, the line "If you want to make a mistake" is output as a voice, or some kind of melody (a melody of about 6 seconds that is completed at least at timing t13) is output. It may be configured.

By adopting a configuration that outputs a sound suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates in this way, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100) is adopted. , The player who wants to visually recognize the left ear frame movable body 7200) can visually recognize the timing at which the second movable decorative means operates even when the line of sight is moved to the first movable decorative means. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the operation of the first movable decoration means until just before the operation of the second movable decoration means.

Further, in the case of a player who does not move his / her line of sight with respect to the first movable decorative means, he / she visually recognizes a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in which an effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is performed. As for the act itself, it is not always possible to continue to visually recognize the predetermined display means by operating a mobile phone or a smartphone, but the operation timing of the second movable decorative means is audibly indicated to the player by sound. Therefore, it is possible to restore the motivation to visually recognize the predetermined display means and the second movable decoration means.

With reference to FIGS. 607 (A) and 607 (B), an embodiment in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to a position where it overlaps with a simulated image imitating the left and right ear frame movable bodies in front view is shown. After moving the frame movable body 7800 to the moving position, the frame movable body 7800 may be configured to be periodically moved up and down at the moving position. For example, in 4 seconds from timing t14 to timing t18, such an up-and-down movement may be repeated a total of 4 times by performing an operation of moving up once per second and then moving down. .. In the movement at this time, at least a part of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is viewed from the front in the area where the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed. It is preferable to configure it so that it moves within the range where it overlaps with.

In this way, the position where the simulated image imitating the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) and the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) was displayed. After moving to a moving position that overlaps with the front view, at least a part of the second movable decoration means moves so as to overlap with the area where the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a passive player feels stress due to the movement of the second movable decorative means after the movement to the moving position.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606, since the player can directly contact the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the player is injured by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that has fallen downward. Alternatively, the player may pull the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 downward and destroy the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 or the like. Therefore, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 605 and 606 will be described below with reference to FIG. 612. In this embodiment, it is difficult for the player to come into contact with the root vegetable frame movable body 7800.

612 (A) and 612 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 612 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 612 (D) and 612 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. In FIGS. 612 (A), 612 (C), and 612 (D), the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are placed in standby positions in the door frame top unit 570. It shows the stored state. 612 (B) and 612 (E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved to the moving positions of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800.

As shown in FIG. 612, in the present embodiment, the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 that covers the moving area of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is provided. The root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 is provided in front of the door frame base unit 100 and below the door frame top unit 570, and includes a cover unit frame 7852 having a square shape when viewed from the front and a right triangle shape when viewed from the side. The front portion 7854 of the cover unit that covers the square portion formed on the front surface by the cover unit frame 7852, the right side portion 7856 of the cover unit that covers the right triangle-shaped portion formed on the left and right sides by the cover unit frame 7852, and the left side portion of the cover unit. It is composed of a surface portion 7858.

The cover unit frame 7852 is made of a colored (specifically green) opaque synthetic resin. The cover unit frame 7852 may be made of metal in order to increase its strength. Further, the cover unit frame 7852 has a function of holding the cover unit front surface portion 7854, the cover unit right surface portion 7856, and the cover unit left surface portion 7858.

The front surface portion 7854 of the cover unit, the right surface portion 7856 of the cover unit, and the left surface portion 7858 of the cover unit are each formed of a flat, colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The front portion 7854 of the cover unit is configured to be attached to the cover unit frame 7852 in a state where the upper portion thereof is tilted toward the front side in a side view. The right side surface portion 7856 of the cover unit and the left side surface portion 7858 of the cover unit are provided so as to face each other at the left and right end portions of the gaming machine.

The player can visually recognize the operating state of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 via the colorless and transparent cover unit front portion 7854. Further, a player who plays a game on an adjacent gaming machine can visually recognize a state in which the game board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are operated via the cover unit right side surface portion 7856 and the cover unit left surface portion 7858. It is possible.

In a gaming machine adopting such a configuration, the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 607 and the like may be executed.

In this way, the protective members (cover unit front portion 7854, cover unit right surface portion 7856, cover unit left surface portion 7858) are arranged so as to surround the moving area of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). By making it difficult for the player to come into contact with the second movable decorative means and adopting a configuration in which the player can see the second movable decorative means via the transparent protective member, the second is used. While maintaining the visibility of the movable decorative means of the above and the impact given to the player when the second movable decorative means is operated, the situation where the player is injured by the movement of the second movable decorative means, and so on. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the second movable decorative means is destroyed by the player.

An example in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 are provided by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 523 is shown. -In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 547 and 550 to 554, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 may be provided. Further, in such an embodiment, each effect mode described in the present specification may be configured to be executed.

An example is shown in which the cover unit frame 7852 holds the cover unit front portion 7854, the cover unit right surface portion 7856, and the cover unit left surface portion 7858, but one or both of the cover unit right surface portion 7856 and the cover unit left surface portion 7858 may be used. It may be configured not to be provided. For example, the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front portion 7854, or the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front portion 7854 and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858.

In this way, the protective member (cover unit front portion 7854, or cover unit front portion 7854 and cover unit right surface portion 7856, or cover unit front) so as to surround the moving area of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). The portion 7854 and the left side surface portion 7858 of the cover unit) are arranged to make contact with the second movable decorative means from the side (from the right side and the left side, or from the left side only, or from the right side only). By making it possible and adopting a configuration in which the player can see the second movable decorative means via the protective member, the visibility of the second movable decorative means and when the second movable decorative means operates. A situation in which the player is injured by the movement of the second movable decorative means while maintaining the impact on the player, or a situation in which the player impulsively destroys the second movable decorative means. Can be suppressed. Further, since it is possible to contact the second movable decorative means from the side surface where the protective member is not provided, even if some abnormality occurs in the second movable decorative means, maintenance such as repair can be performed by the clerk of the amusement store. Etc. can be done.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 605 to 612 and the like, the player is allowed to fully feel the interest of operating the movable decorative means provided on the frame body constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine. Even if this is not possible, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels less entertaining.

[39. Frame movable body]
By the way, in the gaming machines described with reference to FIGS. 523 to 576 and the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-093655, the progress state of the game is shown to the player by the display contents in the predetermined display means, and the player is shown. By driving the shaped body provided on the frame body constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing, it is possible to make the player feel the interest. However, there is room for improvement in the production mode when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided on the frame body.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a gaming machine capable of making a player feel a sufficient interest even if the frame has a plurality of driveable shaped bodies will be described.

The gaming machines in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 541 and the like are the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 (hereinafter, “the ear medial frame movable body”, which are frame movable bodies that imitate the inside of the ear. (Sometimes referred to as "body"), right ear lateral frame movable body 7350 and left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "ear lateral frame movable body"), which are frame movable bodies that imitate the outside of the ear. These four frame movable bodies can independently take a state of being positioned in the standby position and a state of being located in the moving position.

Hereinafter, a first effect mode using the outer ear frame movable body and a second effect mode using the inner ear frame movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 613, 614, 615, and 616. .. 613 and 614 are time charts for the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and FIGS. 615 and 616 are front views showing the state of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing of such an effect mode. ..

Hereinafter, the first effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 613 (A) and 615. The production mode shown in FIGS. 613 (A) and 613 (B) has a movable inner ear frame movable body and an outer ear outer frame movable body, as in the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 541. The production mode applicable to the gaming machine is shown.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbol starts to change in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4").

At timing t8, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upper moving position by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. To start. At the same time, at timing t8, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying simulated images imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

FIG. 615 (A) shows a state in which the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is started at the timing t8. The display of the simulated images imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is started immediately after this (0.1 seconds later, etc.).

From timing t8 to timing t10, drive control is performed in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 move to the moving position. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the mode in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 moves to the moving position and a simulated image simulating the mode in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves to the moving position are dynamically displayed. Will be done.

Next, at timing t10, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 complete the movement to the moving position. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are also displayed in a mode imitating the state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

FIG. 615 (B) shows a simulated image and a left image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in a state where the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have completed the movement to the moving position at timing t10. It shows a state in which a simulated image imitating the movable body 7450 of the lateral frame of the ear is displayed in a mode imitating the state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

From the timing t10 to the timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 continue to be positioned at the moving positions. At the same time, the display of the simulated image in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is located in the moving position and the simulated image in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is located in the moving position is also continued.

Next, at the timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are dynamically displayed in a mode of starting the movement to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 move to the standby position. A simulated image that imitates the mode in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 moves to the standby position and a simulated image that imitates the mode in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. ..

At the timing t18, the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the standby position is completed, and the door frame top unit 570 is housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the simulated image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 becomes the display mode in which the movement to the standby position is completed. Specifically, after the state in which only the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is displayed is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t18, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the decorative symbol in the center, which has been changing, is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, the second effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 613 (B) and 616. First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbol starts to change in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4").

At the timing t5, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400.

FIG. 616 (A) shows a state in which the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is started at the timing t5. The display of the simulated image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is started immediately after this (0.1 seconds later, etc.).

A simulated image that imitates a mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to a moving position and a simulated image that imitates a mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to a moving position from timing t5 to timing t7. Is displayed dynamically.

At the timing t7, the simulated image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a mode imitating the state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

FIG. 616 (B) imitates the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in a state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are still housed in the door frame top unit 570 at timing t7. It shows a state in which the simulated image and the simulated image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a mode imitating the state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

Next, at timing t8, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are moved from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward moving position by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. Start moving.

Next, at the timing t10, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 complete the movement to the moving position.

FIG. 616 (C) shows a simulated image and left of the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 in a state where the movement to the moving position is completed at the timing t10. It shows a state in which a simulated image imitating the movable body 7400 of the inner ear frame is displayed in a mode imitating a state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

From the timing t10 to the timing t16, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are continuously positioned at the moving positions. At the same time, a simulated image in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is located in the moving position and a simulated image in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is located in the moving position are displayed.

Next, at the timing t16, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are dynamically displayed in a mode of starting the movement to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 move to the standby position. A simulated image that imitates the mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to the standby position and a simulated image that imitates the mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. ..

At the timing t18, the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the standby position is completed, and the door frame top unit 570 is housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 becomes the display mode in which the movement to the standby position is completed. Specifically, after the state in which only the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is displayed is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t18, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the decorative symbol in the center, which has been changing, is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 that are driven and controlled in the second production mode are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7350 that are driven and controlled in the first production mode. Compared with the body 7450, the area of the front view in the state of being moved to the moving position is smaller. Therefore, in the second production mode, after starting to display a simulated image imitating the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image imitating the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the inside of the right ear By controlling the drive of the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the volume feeling as an effect is supplemented.

It should be noted that the first effect mode and the second effect mode shown in FIGS. 613 (A) and 613 (B) are movable bodies in the inner ear frame, as in the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 541. Although an example of application to a gaming machine having a movable ear outer frame is shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 542. In this case, since the inner ear frame movable body moves from the upper standby position to the lower moving position, the simulated image of the inner ear frame movable body is also displayed from above in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display mode moves downward. Further, it may be applied to the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 543 and 544. In this case, since the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear outer frame movable body are moved from the lower standby position to the upper moving position, respectively, the simulated images of the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear outer frame movable body are also played. The display mode moves from the bottom to the top within the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600. Alternatively, the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear outer frame movable body are moved from the upper standby position to the lower moving position, respectively, and the simulated images of the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear outer frame movable body are also on the game board side. The effect mode may be such that the display mode moves from the upper side to the lower side in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Hereinafter, the first effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 614 (A). The effect mode shown in FIGS. 614 (A) and 614 (B) can be applied to a gaming machine having a rotatable inner ear frame movable body and an outer ear outer frame movable body as shown in FIGS. 547 and 550. The production mode is shown.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbol starts to change in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4").

At the timing t8, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 change from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. .. At the same time, at timing t8, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying simulated images imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a dynamic manner imitating a rotated state.

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotational state of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, and the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left in the game board side effect display device 1600. The display of the simulated image imitating the movable ear outer frame 7450 is continued.

At the timing t18, the state of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the rotating state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t24, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the decorative symbol in the center, which has been changing, is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, the second effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 614 (B). First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbol starts to change in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4").

At the timing t5, the game board side effect display device 1600 starts displaying a simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a dynamic manner imitating a rotated state.

At the timing t8, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 change from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. ..

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotational state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left in the game board side effect display device 1600. The display of the simulated image imitating the movable inner frame of the ear 7400 is continued.

At the timing t18, the state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 changes from the rotating state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t24, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the decorative symbol in the center, which has been changing, is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 that are driven and controlled in the second production mode are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7350 that are driven and controlled in the first production mode. Compared to the body 7450, the maximum area that can be visually recognized in the front view in the rotated state is smaller. Therefore, in the second production mode, after starting to display a simulated image imitating the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image imitating the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the inside of the right ear By controlling the drive of the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body, the volume feeling as an effect is supplemented.

In this way, the first modeled body provided on the frame (right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450) and the second modeled body provided on the frame body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300). In a game machine capable of driving and controlling the left ear inner frame movable body 7400), the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) starts displaying a simulated image imitating the second modeled body. It is configured to start driving the second modeled body at the timing when time has passed. As a result, even when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided on the frame body, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume in the production using the second shaped body. Further, by displaying a simulated image imitating the second model in advance on the predetermined display means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the drive control of the second model. ..

In addition, among a plurality of shaped bodies (first modeled body and second modeled body) provided in the game machine, the size of the modeled body itself and the amount of visual change when the modeled body is driven and controlled are relative. In performing the drive control of the second model, which is small and inconspicuous in the drive control, the second model is formed at the timing when a predetermined time elapses after the display of the simulated image imitating the second model is started. It is configured to start driving the model. As a result, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume in the production using the second model, in which the size and the amount of visual change when the drive is controlled are small and the drive control is inconspicuous. Become. Further, since a simulated image imitating the second model is displayed in advance on the predetermined display means, the drive of the second model is likely to be overlooked due to its relatively small size and the like. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the control.

Further, at the timing corresponding to the drive of the first modeled body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450), a simulated image imitating the first modeled body is displayed by a predetermined display means (game board). By displaying on the side effect display device 1600), it is possible to show the player that the first modeled body is drive-controlled.

Hereinafter, a modified example of the first effect mode and the second effect mode described with reference to FIG. 613 will be described with reference to FIG. 617.

FIG. 617 (A) shows a modified example of the display mode of the simulated image of the first modeled object in the first effect mode described with reference to FIG. 613 (A). In the first modification, the display for changing the simulated image of the first modeled object from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t7 to timing t9. Further, in the second modification, the display for changing the simulated image of the first modeled object from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t9 to timing t11. Further, in the third modification, the display for changing the simulated image of the first modeled body from the first state to the second state is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9, and then the display simulating the second state is performed. Ends at the timing t11, and displays the simulated image of the first modeled object from the first state to the second state from the timing t11 to the timing t13.

As described above, the timing of starting the display of the simulated image imitating the first modeled body may be slightly different from the timing of starting the drive control of the first modeled body. Alternatively, the timing at which the display of the simulated image imitating the first modeled body is finished may be set before the timing at which the first modeled body is in the first state. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

FIG. 617 (B) shows a modified example of the display mode of the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second effect mode described with reference to FIG. 613 (B). In the first modification, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t8. Further, in the second modification, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t9.

In this way, as a simulated image of the second modeled body, an image simulating the state in which the second modeled body is driven and controlled to be in the second state is suddenly displayed, and the drive control of the second modeled body is performed. It may be configured to continue displaying until the start timing. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

Hereinafter, a modified example of the first effect mode and the second effect mode described with reference to FIG. 614 will be described with reference to FIG. 618.

FIG. 618 (A) shows a modified example of the display mode of the simulated image of the first modeled object in the first effect mode described with reference to FIG. 614 (A). In the first modification, the simulated image of the first model is displayed from timing t7 to timing t18. Further, in the second modification, the simulated image of the first modeled body is displayed from the timing t9 to the timing t18. Further, in the modified example 3, the simulated image of the first modeled body is displayed from the timing t7 to the timing t13.

As described above, the timing of starting the display of the simulated image imitating the first modeled body may be slightly different from the timing of starting the drive control of the first modeled body. Alternatively, the timing at which the display of the simulated image imitating the first modeled body is finished may be set before the timing at which the first modeled body is in the first state. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

FIG. 618 (B) shows a modified example of the display mode of the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second effect mode described with reference to FIG. 614 (B). In the first modification, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t8. Further, in the second modification, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t9.

In this way, as a simulated image of the second modeled body, an image simulating the state in which the second modeled body is driven and controlled to be in the second state is displayed, and the drive control of the second modeled body is started. It may be configured to continue to display until the timing of the display. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 613 (A) and 614 (A), a simulated image imitating the first modeled body in the first effect mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. However, in the first effect mode, the simulated image imitating the first modeled body may not be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a display area in a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), for example, in the vicinity of the center of the predetermined display means without reducing the decorative pattern. It becomes possible to continue to display.

Alternatively, in the first effect mode, instead of displaying the simulated image imitating the first modeled body, a display indicating that the first modeled body is drive-controlled may be performed. For example, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to display "maybe my ears have popped out ?!" or "look up ?!".

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the first modeled body is driven and controlled.

In the first modeled body and the second modeled body, the second modeled body has a smaller area in the front view in the drive-controlled state and is less noticeable. Before the second model is driven and controlled, a simulated image imitating the second model is displayed. However, even when the second model is inconspicuous in other modes, the second model is also displayed. It may be configured to display a simulated image imitating a modeled body.

When the amount of movement in the vertical or horizontal direction when the drive is controlled is shorter in the second model than in the first model, the second model is less noticeable. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 615 and 616, the first modeled body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) is driven and controlled from the standby position upward. When the second model (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) is driven and controlled to move 5 cm upward from the standby position by 10 cm, the drive control of the second model is It is less noticeable than the first model. In such a case, by displaying a simulated image of the second modeled body, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as an effect.

In this way, when the moving distance of the second modeled body is smaller than the moving distance of the first modeled body when the drive is controlled, the second modeled body is prior to the drive control of the second modeled body. By displaying the simulated image of, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as an effect.

Alternatively, if the movement speed when the drive is controlled in the first model body and the second model body is slower in the second model body, the drive is performed in the rotatable first model body and the second model body. When the angular velocity when rotating by control is slower in the second model, when the drive control time in the first model and the second model is shorter in the second model, etc. , The simulated image of the second model may be displayed prior to the drive control of the second model. In this case as well, in the production using the second model, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as the production.

It is configured to dynamically display a simulated image imitating the second modeled body multiple times, and to show the player the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit depending on the number of times of dynamic display. May be good. For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 613 (B), in addition to the dynamic display performed from the timing t5 to the timing t7, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which the same dynamic display is performed from the timing t3 to the timing t5. It may be configured as. Further, from the timing t1 to the timing t3, an effect mode in which the same dynamic display is performed may be configured to be executable. Further, in addition to the dynamic display performed from the timing t5 to the timing t7, an effect mode in which the same dynamic display is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9 may be executable. Further, from the timing t9 to the timing t11, an effect mode in which the same dynamic display is performed may be executably configured.

In this way, the dynamic display of the simulated image imitating the second model is repeatedly executed before or after the drive control of the second model, and a state advantageous to the player occurs depending on the number of repetitions. By making the configuration suggesting the degree of expectation to be performed, in addition to being able to further increase the sense of volume as an effect on the second modeled body, the operation of the second modeled body provided on the frame body. Either the act of directly visually recognizing itself or the act of visually recognizing a simulated image imitating a second model displayed on a predetermined display means to know the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur. It is possible to provide the player with the interest of enjoying the game.

In addition, a plurality of simulated images having different display modes are prepared in advance as simulated images imitating the second model, and the player is expected to win a special lottery result depending on the type of the displayed simulated image. It may be configured as shown. For example, when a large simulated image imitating the second model and a small simulated image imitating the second model are prepared in advance, and a large simulated image imitating the second model is displayed. May be configured so that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is higher. Alternatively, a white simulated image imitating the second model and a red simulated image imitating the second model are prepared in advance, and a red simulated image imitating the second model is displayed. If it is done, the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit may be higher.

In this way, it is possible to execute a plurality of different display modes as the dynamic display mode of the simulated image imitating the second model, and suggests the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur depending on the type of the displayed simulated image. By adopting the configuration, the variation of the display mode of the simulated image imitating the second modeled body is increased, the volume feeling as an effect can be further increased, and the frame body is provided. The act of directly visually recognizing the movement itself of the second modeled body and the expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur by visually recognizing the simulated image imitating the second modeled body displayed on the predetermined display means. It is possible to provide the player with the interest of which act of knowing the degree to enjoy.

In addition, when suggesting the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur depending on the display mode of the simulated image imitating the second model, the second model is driven and controlled. The operation itself of the second model has the same operation mode, but the operation mode of the second model is different, and the expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur depending on the operation mode of the second model. It may be a configuration that suggests.

In the second effect mode, after displaying a simulated image imitating the second model, the second model is driven and controlled, but even if the effect mode that does not display the simulated image is configured to be feasible. good. For example, from timing t5 to timing t18 in the second effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 613 (B) and 614 (B), the display mode of the simulated image of the second modeled body is continued without being displayed. It is good to configure as follows.

In this way, by configuring the third effect mode without displaying the simulated image of the second modeled body in addition to the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the first effect mode can be performed. It is possible to provide the player with an unexpected and tense effect that the second modeled body, which is relatively inconspicuous as compared with the modeled body, is driven unknowingly.

When driving the first modeled body, it may be configured to output a wake-up sound indicating that the first modeled body is driven. For example, in the first effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 613 (A) and 614 (A), the first is from timing t6 to timing t8, which is the timing before the first modeled body is driven and controlled. It is preferable to output a wake-up sound indicating that the modeled body is driven. Alternatively, the arousal sound indicating that the first model is driven is output from the timing t6 to the timing t10 so that the arousal sound is output even after the first model is driven and controlled. It is good to configure. Alternatively, the arousal sound indicating that the first model is being driven is output from the timing t8 to the timing t12 so that the arousal sound is output after the drive control of the first model is started. It is good to configure as follows.

With such a configuration, the player can be driven by driving the first model having a relatively large size and movement amount among the plurality of models (first model and second model). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as When driving the second modeled body, a simulated image imitating the second modeled body is displayed, so that such arousing sound is not output.

An example of outputting a wake-up sound in a predetermined period (timing t6 to timing t8 or timing t6 to timing t10) has been shown with reference to FIGS. 613 (A), 614 (A), etc. As a result, the configuration related to the special arousal sound described above may be adopted with reference to FIGS. 569 and 570.

In driving the second model, as a BGM during fluctuations in either or both of the display period of the simulated image imitating the second model and the period during the drive control of the second model. It may be configured to suppress the volume of the output variable production sound. For example, in the second effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 613 (A) and 613 (B), the variable effect sound is output in the normal mode until the timing t5, and a simulation imitating the second modeled body is performed. In the period from timing t5 to timing t8, which is the period from the display of the image to the start of the drive control of the second modeled body, the variable production sound is output in a mode suppressed from the normal mode. It is good to configure. Alternatively, until the timing t5, the variable effect sound is output in a normal manner, and the period from the display of the simulated image imitating the second model to the end of the drive control of the second model. In the period from the timing t5 to the timing t18, the variable effect sound may be output in a mode suppressed more than the normal mode. In the suppressed state, the volume may be reduced to half or less as compared with the normal state.

By displaying the simulated image imitating the second modeled body in this way and changing the output state of the variable effect sound from the normal state to the suppressed state, a plurality of modeled bodies (the first modeled body and the second modeled body) are displayed. It is possible for the player to concentrate on driving or being driven by the second modeled body, which has a relatively small size.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 613 to 616 and the like, by providing a plurality of shaped bodies in the frame body, the size of each shaped body and the movable range when the individual shaped bodies are driven can be determined. Even if it is restricted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels less entertaining when each modeled body is driven by itself.

[40. Frame movable body]
By the way, in the gaming machines described with reference to FIGS. 523 to 576 and the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-093655, the movable decorative means provided in the frame constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine is operated. This makes it possible for the player to feel the interest. However, if the player does not notice the operation of such a movable decorative means, there is a possibility that the player may injure the player by bringing his head or finger into contact with the movable decorative means. there were.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured by the movable decorative means will be described.

Hereinafter, the first effect mode and the second effect mode applicable to the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 612 will be described with reference to FIGS. 619 (A) and 619 (B). The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 in the present embodiment is provided in the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 as described with reference to FIGS. 612 (A) to 612 (E), and the player comes into contact with the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. Is configured to be difficult.

Hereinafter, the first effect mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIG. 619 (A).

In the first effect mode, first, the change of the decorative symbol is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at the timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center fluctuates.

Then, at the timing t5, the output of the arousal sound notifying that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate is started. Next, at timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward moving position by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. To start.

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the moving position. At this time, the arousal sound is also continuously output.

At the timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete the movement to the moving position. At the same time, the output of the arousal sound that has been continuously output from the timing t5 ends.

Next, at the timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At the timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. From the timing t22 to the timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position where it overlaps with the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at the timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the standby position. At the timing t30, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the decorative symbol in the center, which has been changing, is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, a second effect mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIG. 619 (B). In the second production mode, unlike the first production mode, no arousal sound is output. Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start the operation at the same time.

In the second effect mode, first, the change of the decorative symbol is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at the timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center fluctuates.

Next, at the timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At the same time, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward moving position by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510.

At the timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. From the timing t22 to the timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position where it overlaps with the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view. On the other hand, at the timing t23, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the moving positions is completed.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at the timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the standby position. At the timing t30, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the decorative symbol in the center, which has been changing, is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

Below, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 of the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 612 are described, and the rotatable right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear described with reference to FIG. 532. A first effect mode and a second effect mode that can be applied to a gaming machine having a frame movable body 7200 and that can be executed in the applied gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 620 (A) and 620 (B). do.

Hereinafter, the first effect mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIG. 620 (A).

In the first effect mode, first, the change of the decorative symbol is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at the timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center fluctuates.

Then, at the timing t5, the output of the arousal sound notifying that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are operated is started. Next, at timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the standby state housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. Let me.

At the timing t9, the output of the arousal sound continuously output from the timing t5 ends.

Next, at the timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is stored in the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At the timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. From the timing t22 to the timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position where it overlaps with the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at the timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the state where the rotation is stopped and the left ear frame movable body is stored in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the decorative symbol in the center, which has been changing, is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, a second effect mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIG. 620 (B). In the second production mode, unlike the first production mode, no arousal sound is output. Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start the operation at the same time.

In the second effect mode, first, the change of the decorative symbol is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at the timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center fluctuates.

Next, at the timing t21, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the standby state housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. Let me.

At the timing t21, at the same time, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At the timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. From the timing t22 to the timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position where it overlaps with the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Next, at the timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the state where the rotation is stopped and the left ear frame movable body is stored in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the decorative symbol in the center, which has been changing, is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

In the first and second production modes described with reference to FIGS. 619 (A) and 619 (B), or the first described with reference to FIGS. 620 (A) and 620 (B). In the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the operation mode of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is common. On the other hand, in the first production mode, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate with the output of the arousal sound, and then the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 operates after a lapse of a predetermined time. On the other hand, in the second production mode, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start the operation at the same timing as the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 without outputting the arousing sound. It is configured.

In this way, when the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body operates independently, a wake-up sound is output in advance, so that the game Since the person pays attention to the first movable decoration means, the player may be injured by contacting the first movable decoration means due to the player's careless movement (for example, standing up). It is possible to suppress the occurrence.

On the other hand, when the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is operated together with the first movable decoration means, the arousal sound is not output. This is because the player's consciousness is directed to the vicinity of the predetermined display means by moving the second movable decorative means to a position where the second movable decorative means overlaps the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in front view. This is because it becomes difficult for the player to perform a careless movement, and even if the first movable decorative means provided on the frame body is operating, the player is less likely to be injured.

An example of outputting a wake-up sound in a predetermined period (timing t5 to timing t9) has been shown with reference to FIGS. 619 (A), 620 (A), and the like. It may be configured to adopt the configuration related to the above-mentioned special arousal sound with reference to 570 and the like.

FIG. 621 shows a modified example of the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 619. Further, FIG. 622 shows a modified example of the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 620. In these modified examples, in the second effect mode, at the timing t22 when the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved to the moving position. It is configured to start the move operation.

In this way, at the timing when the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) starts to operate and moves to a position where it overlaps with the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in front view, the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). By starting the operation of the movable decorative means 1 (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200), the player's consciousness is directed closer to the predetermined display means, and the player is careless. It becomes difficult to perform the operation, and even if the first movable decorative means provided on the frame body operates, the player is less likely to be injured.

The second production mode may be configured so that the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit is higher than that of the first production mode. Further, the frequency at which the first effect mode is executed may be higher than the frequency at which the second effect mode is executed. For example, out of 100 special lottery, the first production mode is performed about 5 times (executed with a probability of 5%), and the second production mode is performed about once (executed with a probability of 1%). It may be configured to be done.

In this way, in the first production mode in which the execution frequency is high and the expectation is low, which is a big hit, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear) that frequently occurs by outputting the arousal sound is output. The movement of the frame movable body 7200) is aroused to the player. In particular, since the degree of expectation is low and the player's attention to the first movable decorative means is distracted, it is effective to perform such arousal.

On the other hand, in the second production mode in which the execution frequency is low and the expectation of a big hit is high, the arousal sound is not output, and the operation of the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) together with the first movable decoration means. I'm letting you. In this case, since the expectation of a big hit is high, the player's line of sight is concentrated in the vicinity of the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) to which the second movable decorative means moves, and a careless operation ( Since it becomes difficult to perform (such as standing up), it is not necessary to output a wake-up sound when operating the first movable decorative means.

On the other hand, since the clerk of the amusement store can visually recognize that the first movable decoration means has been operated from a distance, there is a high possibility that a state advantageous to the player (a jackpot state as an example) will occur. Can be recognized, and it becomes possible to provide the player with a predetermined service (exchange of dollar boxes, processing of stopping in a fixed-quantity gaming machine, etc.).

In addition, if the arousal sound is output in a state where the degree of expectation is high, it is possible that the player will be in a state of excitement, but by not outputting the arousal sound, the occurrence of such a situation is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

It is preferable to output the arousal sound in the early stage and the middle stage of the change of the decorative pattern, but not to output the arousal sound in the middle stage of the change of the decorative pattern.

With such a configuration, no extra sound is output at the end of the fluctuation in which the variation result of the decorative symbol is shown, and the player can concentrate on the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the predetermined display means. ..

In the first effect mode, when the arousal sound is output, the variable effect sound may be suppressed. For example, in the period from timing t5 to timing t9 and the period from timing t4 to timing t10 in the first effect mode shown in FIGS. 619 and 620, the output state of the variable effect sound is changed from the normal state to a low volume suppression state. It is good to say.

On the other hand, in the second effect mode, the fluctuation effect sound is suppressed until the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves downward, and the suppression of the variation effect sound is released at the same time as the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 falls and moves. You may. For example, in the period from timing t18 to timing t21 and the period from timing t18 to timing t26 in the second production mode shown in FIGS. 619 and 620, the output state of the variable production sound is changed from the normal state to a low volume suppression state. It is good to say.

With such a configuration, in the first effect mode, the arousal sound is output in a state where the variable effect sound is suppressed, so that the player can operate the first movable decoration means. Will be effectively notified.

Further, in the second effect mode, the movement of the second movable decoration means can be performed by setting the variable effect sound to be suppressed in a predetermined period before the second movable decoration means starts moving. It becomes easier to convey to the player.

An example of suppressing the fluctuating effect sound in a predetermined period is shown with reference to FIGS. 619, 620, etc., but the above-described configuration is described with reference to FIGS. It may be configured to adopt the configuration related to the variable production sound and the special arousal sound.

In the first effect mode, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to indicate that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate. For example, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 609 (A), a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are imitated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display for moving the simulated image upward may be configured to be displayed from timing t5 to timing t9 in the first effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 619 and 620.

On the other hand, in the second effect mode, the game board side effect display device 1600 may not perform such a display when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are operated.

By performing such a display, it is possible to inform the player that the first movable decoration means operates in the first effect mode in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in the second effect mode, by preventing such a display when the first movable decorative means operates, it is possible to prevent the effect around the predetermined display means from becoming excessive. Can be done. It should be noted that the predetermined display means is not limited to the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means, but another image (for example, an image of an upward arrow) is indicated in an aspect of suggesting the position where the first movable decoration means is provided. It may be configured to be displayed in.

In the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that has moved to the moving position is moved to the standby position based on the operation of the player on a predetermined operation unit (push button, lever, etc.). It may be configured so that it can be done. For example, in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, when the player operates the predetermined operation unit at the timing t23, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the moving position from the timing t23 to the timing t24. It is good to move it to the standby position.

In this way, the time during which the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is located at the moving position may be changed according to the operation by the player. As a result, it becomes difficult for other players to notice that the second movable decorative means is operating, and it is highly expected that another player will generate a state advantageous to the player (big hit state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as harassment based on distortion.

In the first effect mode and the modified example of the second effect mode in FIGS. 621 and 622, when the player operates the predetermined operation unit, compared with the case where the player does not operate the predetermined operation unit. The first movable decorative means may be configured to be driven early. That is, in the modified example in FIGS. 621 and 622, the player who repeatedly plays the second movable decorative means whose operation is started before the operation of the first decorative means sees this effect many times. Therefore, we cannot wait for the operation of the first movable decorative means. For this reason, the operation of the second movable decoration means is not always performed for a certain period of time before the first movable decoration means is operated, but the operation of the second movable decoration means is started by operating a button. By making it possible to drive the first movable decoration means at an appropriate timing after that, the first movable decoration means is quickly operated for the player who is watching the same effect many times. It will be possible to give an opportunity to let them do it and suppress the decline in interest. It should be noted that the process of returning the second movable decorative means to the standby position may be started by such a predetermined operation, or even if a predetermined operation is performed, the second movable decoration means may be performed at a predetermined timing. The process of returning the movable decorative means of 2 to the standby position may be started.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 619, 620 and the like, the player's attention can be produced based on the lottery result even if the arousal sound is not output when the first movable decorative means is operated. It is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the vicinity of the predetermined display means to be performed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured by the first movable decorative means.

In the above-described embodiment, the left and right ear frame movable bodies are highly expected to generate a big hit, which is a state advantageous to the player, by executing a predetermined production mode among a plurality of different production modes. Although it was shown that the player is notified by operating the above, the player is configured to be notified of the degree of expectation that other game contents other than the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur. You may.

For example, although it is confirmed that the jackpot will be a big hit, it may be configured to notify the content of the profit given to the player during the jackpot. As the content of the profit, for example, it may be configured to notify the type of profit, or may be configured to notify the amount of profit.

Alternatively, it may be configured to notify the content of the profit given to the player after the big hit. For example, it may be configured to notify the type of profit given to the player after the big hit, or may be configured to notify the amount of profit given to the player after the big hit. ..

In this way, the amount of profit given to the player in the state advantageous to the player (as an example, given to the player) is not limited to the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (a big hit state as an example) occurs. Expectations for the number of balls to be played, the number of times the big winning opening is opened, etc., and the state that is advantageous to the player after the state that is advantageous to the player is completed (for example, the probability change state and the electric chew support) The degree of expectation that a state) will occur, and the type (for example, probabilistic state or electric chew support state) and amount (for example) of the profit given to the player in a newly generated game after the state advantageous to the player ends. As an example, even when it is configured to notify the number of fluctuations in which the probabilistic state is continued and the number of fluctuations in which the electric chew support is continued), the same effect as that of each of the above-described embodiments can be exhibited.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 indicate that there is a high expectation that a big hit, which is a state advantageous to the player, will occur by executing a predetermined production mode among a plurality of different production modes. , Right ear medial frame movable body 7300, right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, left ear medial frame movable body 7400, left ear lateral frame movable body 7450, etc. , It may be configured to include that it is confirmed that the jackpot will be a jackpot as the expectation that a jackpot will occur (100% jackpot will occur). For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the first effect mode is executed, a 50% jackpot is generated, and when the second effect mode is executed, a 100% jackpot is generated. It may be configured to occur.

In the above-described embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7400. When the simulated image imitating the body 7450 and the like is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is also displayed at the same time, but the door frame top unit 570 is displayed. After displaying the simulated simulated image for several seconds (for example, 2 seconds) in advance, the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 to the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 may be started to be displayed. .. For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 607 (A), a simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 may be displayed from timing t5 to timing t7.

Further, the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is not moved while being fixedly displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the right ear frame is movable with respect to the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570. Body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear medial frame movable body 7300, right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, left ear medial frame movable body 7400, left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 It is good to configure it so that it does.

In this way, movable decorative means that can be moved and movable shaped bodies (right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner side). A unit (door frame top unit 570) that stores and holds movable movable decorative means and a movable shaped body, as well as displaying a simulated image imitating the frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450). By configuring to display a simulated image imitating the above, it becomes easier for the player to understand the operating mode and driving mode of the movable decorative means that can be operated and the movable model body that can be driven.

In particular, a simulated image imitating a movable decorative means or a unit (door frame top unit 570) that stores or holds a movable shaped object is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). By displaying the movable decorative means in a fixed manner in a predetermined area, it becomes possible for the player to easily understand the operation mode and the drive mode of the movable decorative means and the driveable model.

In addition, a unit that stores and holds the movable decorative means and the movable model that can be operated before the timing of displaying the simulated image imitating the movable decorative means and the driveable model. By displaying a simulated image imitating (door frame top unit 570), the player's expectation for the operation of the movable decorative means and the driving of the modeled body is increased. Further, since the player can visually recognize the operation of the movable decorative means and the drive of the model body from the timing when the operation of the movable decorative means and the drive of the model body are started, the player can perform the operation of the movable decorative means and the drive of the model body. Can be enjoyed for a longer time.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 may not be displayed.

Instead of the operation of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the rabbit accessory 6000 described with reference to FIG. 487 and the like is configured to operate in the same manner (for example, in the vertical direction), and various production modes described above are executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case as well, it is possible to achieve the same effect as each of the above-mentioned production modes.

Right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are door frame top units. Although an example of operation between the state of being housed in the 570 and the state of protruding upward from the door frame top unit 570 has been shown, the change of such a state is not limited to the change of another state. .. For example, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to operate from a state in which half protrudes from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which all of them protrude from the door frame top unit 570.

In this way, from the first state in which the first movable decorative means is located in the first position (the state in which it is housed in the door frame top unit 570 and the state in which it half protrudes from the door frame top unit 570), it is moved to the second position. The above-mentioned effect can be obtained even when the door frame is configured to operate with the second state (the state in which the door frame top unit 570 is completely protruded from the door frame top unit 570).

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 607 and 619, the state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is housed in the door frame top unit 570 and the front view with respect to the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600. Although an example of operating with a state located at an overlapping position has been shown, the change of the state is not limited to such a change of the state and may be a change of another state. For example, from the state where the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is located at a position where it overlaps with the substantially lower part of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view, it overlaps with the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view. It may be configured to operate in a position where it is located.

In this way, the second movable decorative means overlaps with the substantially lower portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view in the first state (the state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570) in which the second movable decorative means is located in the first position. It is configured to operate from the state of being located at the position) to the second state of being located at the second position (the state of being located at a position that overlaps with the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view). Even if this is done, the above-mentioned effect can be achieved.

As an effect display performed in the display area of the effect display device, a look-ahead effect display performed over a plurality of variable displays of a decorative symbol is known in response to the occurrence of a specific hold. The variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the specific hold that caused the look-ahead effect display is stopped in a manner in which the decorative symbol indicates the occurrence of a jackpot, as compared with the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the look-ahead effect display is not performed. The probability of being displayed is set high. Therefore, the player has a feeling of expectation that a big hit may occur when the look-ahead effect display is executed.

On the other hand, in the display area of the effect display device, a variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, and a plurality of effect displays corresponding to the decorative symbol on which the variable display is performed (for example, the changing decorative symbol indicates a big hit). An effect display indicating the degree of expectation to be stopped and displayed in the mode) is also performed. Therefore, the player has a look-ahead effect display that suggests a variable display result of the decorative symbol several times ahead, as well as a variable display mode of the decorative symbol that is currently changing and the display content of the effect display that corresponds to the decorative symbol that is currently changing. At the same time, it is necessary to visually check.

In such a situation, although the fun as a game can be enhanced, there may be a problem that the player cannot sufficiently grasp the contents pointed out by these effect displays. In particular, since the player is in a situation where he / she pays attention to the variable display of the decorative symbol currently changing and various effect displays corresponding to the variable display, the look-ahead effect display is relatively inconspicuous, and the look-ahead effect display is displayed. There is a problem that the player may not be aware of what is being executed and the fact that the decorative pattern corresponding to the look-ahead effect display is approaching the start of fluctuation.

Therefore, in the following, when executing the look-ahead effect display, it is easy for the player to understand that the look-ahead effect display is being executed and that the timing at which the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the look-ahead effect display is started is approaching. The embodiment is shown.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 623, various images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is performed when the look-ahead effect display is executed, will be described first.
Specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 from the start to the change stop of the change display of the decorative symbol performed when the result of the special lottery performed in response to the winning of the first start port 2002 is lost. An example of the effect in the display area of FIG. 623 (A) to FIG. 623 (F) will be described. In addition, FIG. 623 (A) to Fig. 623 (A) to Fig. 623 (A) to FIG. This will be described with reference to 623 (D), FIG. 623 (G), and FIG. 623 (H).

FIG. 623 (A) shows a state in which the three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, it shows a state in which the reserved image corresponding to the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed is displayed. In addition, it shows a state in which there are three holds corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. Specifically, a decorative symbol with the number "3" as the left decorative symbol and a decorative symbol with the number "5" as the middle decorative symbol are arranged at equal intervals from the left at approximately the center of the display area in the vertical direction. , The decorative symbols with the number "2" as the right decorative symbols are shown in a stopped display state. The decorative pattern has a vertically long rectangular shape and has a background area (white part in the figure) consisting of an image forming the outer shape of the decorative pattern, and a number area consisting of an image showing any number from "1" to "9" (a number area (white part in the figure). It is composed of the black part in the figure). As shown in the figure, the number area is located in the center of the background area.

It is preferable to compose an image having a color different from the color of the background area and the color of the number area constituting the decorative pattern. For example, the color of the background area may be white and the color of the number area may be black. The rectangular contour portion forming the outer shape of the background region may be black.

At the bottom of the display area, the hold display area, the first hold display area, the second hold display area, the third hold display area, and the fourth hold display area are set from the left, and in the figure, the hold display area is set. A state in which the reserved image is displayed in the display area and the reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area is shown. Although the fourth reserved display area is shown by a dotted line in the drawing for explanation, the dotted line is not actually displayed in the display area as the display state, and the reserved image is displayed in the following drawings. Basically, such a dotted line showing the planned position is not shown.

In FIG. 623 (A), the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the decorative symbols of "3", "5", and "2" that are stopped and displayed. Further, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the next variable display performed after the variable display corresponding to the reserved image is completed. Further, the hold image displayed in the second hold display area is a hold image corresponding to the next change display after the change display corresponding to the hold image displayed in the first hold display area is completed. be. Further, the hold image displayed in the third hold display area is a hold image corresponding to the next change display after the change display corresponding to the hold image displayed in the second hold display area is completed. be.

FIG. 623 (B) shows a display state at the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold image displayed in the first hold display area described with reference to FIG. 623 (A).
Specifically, the upper end of the decorative symbol whose display order is one before is below the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol whose display order is one later than the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol. The bottom edge is displayed. In addition, the display of the hold display ends.
The reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are always displayed in front of the decorative symbol. The shape of the reserved image and the reserved image is a perfect circle, and the color is basically white. In addition, the reserved image has a larger circle diameter than the reserved image.

FIG. 623 (C) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are in the variable display. Each decorative symbol is displayed in a manner of scrolling downward and moving in the display area.

Specifically, for a decorative symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, the lower side of the decorative symbol is first displayed on the upper side of the display area, and then the decorative symbol moves downward to the display area. The entire decorative symbol is displayed, and then, after the lower end of the decorative symbol reaches the lower edge of the display area, only a part of the upper side of the decorative symbol is displayed, and finally, the decorative symbol is displayed. The upper end of the decorative symbol reaches the lower edge of the display area, and the decorative symbol is not displayed. In this way, each decorative symbol changes its display state in a flow from a state in which it is not displayed in the display area to a state in which it is displayed in the display area and then a state in which it is not displayed in the display area.

The order in which they are displayed is set for the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol. Specifically, after the decorative symbol with a certain number (for example, "1"), the decorative symbol with the next number (for example, "2") appears in order from the upper side of the display area. It will be displayed in. The order of the numbers attached to the decorative patterns is "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9". .. Next to the decorative symbol with the number "9", the decorative symbol with the number "1" is displayed in the display area. For example, in FIG. 623 (C), as the left decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol with the number "1" on the lower side and the left decorative symbol with the number "2" on the upper side are displayed. Is shown, but both left decorative symbols scroll downward and move, and the left decorative symbol with the number "2" is followed by the left decorative symbol with the number "3". , Will appear from the top of the display area.

Although it has been described with reference to FIG. 623 (B) that the display of the reserved image that has been displayed in the reserved display area up to that point is terminated at the same time as the change of the decorative symbol is started, the display of the reserved image is terminated. At the same time, the hold image displayed in the first hold display area is displayed so as to move to the left while being enlarged, and is displayed as the hold image in the hold display area. At the same time, the hold image displayed in the second hold display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a hold image in the first hold display area. At the same time, the hold image displayed in the second hold display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a hold image in the first hold display area. Such enlargement of the reserved image and movement of the reserved image to the left are executed over a predetermined time (for example, 0.67 seconds). FIG. 623 (C) shows the state after the movement of such a reserved image.

FIG. 623 (D) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and the middle decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the decorative symbol with the number "2" added to the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, it shows a state in which a new hold image is displayed in the third hold display area in response to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002.

Here, the temporary stop display will be described. The temporary stop display is a display mode of a decorative symbol that displays a decorative symbol with a predetermined number as if it had stopped at or near the display position where the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed. Is. Specifically, for example, a decorative symbol with a predetermined number is gently moved up and down so that the number attached to the decorative symbol can be clearly seen with reference to the display position at which the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed. Temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed by displaying it so that it moves or displays it so that it sways. In this way, by performing the temporary stop display, the player can visually recognize the decorative symbol being displayed as if it is stopped, and the player can confirm the number attached to the decorative symbol. .. When the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed, the vertical movement or swaying display is not performed in this way, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state.

When variable display is performed so that the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is the decorative symbol finally displayed as a stop, or the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is moved and displayed so as to scroll downward again. In some cases, the decorative symbols with other numbers may be displayed in a variable manner so as to be the decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed, but the details will be described later.

In FIG. 623 (D), arcuate lines are attached to the upper left and lower right of the left decorative symbol with the number "2", which is the left decoration with the number "2". It is a line indicating that the symbol is in the state of being temporarily stopped. Further, in other drawings, such an arcuate line may be attached to the decorative symbol, which also indicates that the decorative symbol is in a state of being temporarily stopped.

FIG. 623 (E) shows a state in which the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and the middle decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, following the left decorative symbol. Specifically, the decorative symbol with the number "2" as the left decorative symbol and the decorative symbol with the number "4" as the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 623 (F) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. In accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, which had been temporarily stopped until then, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the decorative symbol with the number "2" attached to the left decorative symbol and the decorative symbol with the number "7" attached to the middle decorative symbol are used in the drawing. As for the symbols, the decorative symbols with the number "4" added to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed indicates that the special lottery result was lost. In the state where the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbols displayed above and below each decorative symbol are not displayed during the fluctuation or the temporary stop. The stop display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and after that, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is newly started. NS. The reserved image displayed on the reserved image ends at the same timing as the timing at which the new decorative symbol changes start.

FIG. 623 (G) shows a state in which the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and the middle decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, following the left decorative symbol, from the display state shown with reference to FIG. 623 (D). ing. Specifically, the decorative symbol with the number "2" attached to the left decorative symbol and the decorative symbol with the number "2" attached to the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, indicating that a reach state has occurred. Indicates the state.

FIG. 623 (H) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, which had been temporarily stopped until then, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the decorative symbol with the number "2" attached to the left decorative symbol and the decorative symbol with the number "2" attached to the middle decorative symbol are used in the drawing. As for the symbols, the decorative symbols with the number "2" added to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed indicates that the special lottery result was a big hit. In the state where the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbols displayed above and below each decorative symbol are not displayed during the fluctuation or the temporary stop. After the stop display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is stopped. After that, the jackpot game state is started, and at the timing when the jackpot game state ends, the display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is resumed, and thereafter, it corresponds to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. The variable display of decorative patterns is newly started.

As described above, in the variation display example of the decorative symbol described with reference to FIG. 623, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in response to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. From the state, after the variable display is started, the variable display is performed for a predetermined time, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped in this order, and then the middle decorative symbol is in the stop display state. In addition, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are also stopped and displayed at the same time in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative symbol. In addition, by stopping the decorative symbols with the same numbers as the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the player is shown that the special lottery result is a big hit. Further, by stopping the decorative symbols with different numbers as at least one decorative symbol from the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the player is shown that the special lottery result is lost.

Hereinafter, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 623 will be described with reference to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 624 and 625. FIG. 624 is a diagram showing a time chart in this effect example, and FIG. 625 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing of a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this effect example. In FIG. 625, the variable display mode of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the display mode of the hold image in the hold display area, and the display mode of the hold image in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area are shown. Unless otherwise specified, the display mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 623. It should be noted that these points are the same in other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

FIG. 624 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbol has stopped changing. FIG. 625 (A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which the decorative symbols with the numbers “6”, “4”, and “5” are stopped and displayed from the left. From this state, when the timing t0 is reached, the variable display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is newly started. FIG. 625 (B) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) after the start of the variable display, and shows a state in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner. There is.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 624 (A), t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are described according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effect. The time between each timing is 1 second. It should be noted that these points are the same in other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 624, at the timing t2, the game ball wins the first starting port 2002 and a new hold occurs. Further, with this start winning as an opportunity, the look-ahead effect display is started at the timing t2. In addition, corresponding to the look-ahead effect display, a specific hold image having a shape imitating a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of the normal hold image. The color of the specified reserved image is green. FIG. 625 (C) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the look-ahead effect display is started at the timing t2. In addition, the third reserved display area shows a state in which a specific reserved image having a shape imitating a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of a normal reserved image having a circular shape.

In the look-ahead effect display, the look-ahead effect image that surrounds the display area in a frame shape is displayed in a manner of hiding a part of the decorative symbol that is scrolled downward and displayed in a variable manner. The look-ahead effect image is an image in which a plurality (specifically, six) are arranged so as to project a shape imitating a pine branch with leaves toward the inside of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The color of the look-ahead effect image is green, which is slightly lighter than the color of the specific reserved image.

The display of the look-ahead effect image and the display of the specific reserved image are performed based on the special lottery result acquired when the game ball wins the first starting port 2002, and only the normal reserved image having a perfect circular shape and white color is displayed. The execution ratio as an effect is set so that the probability of a big hit is higher when the pre-reading effect image and the specific reserved image are displayed than when they are displayed. For example, when a normal hold image is displayed, the probability of a big hit is 0.3%, and when a look-ahead effect image and a specific hold image are displayed, the probability of a big hit is 10.0%. It is configured to be.

With such a configuration, the player displays the pre-reading effect image and the specific reserved image, and when the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image is changed, the normal reserved image is displayed. It is expected that the decorative symbol will be stopped and displayed in a stop mode indicating that a big hit will occur as a result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, as compared with the case where the decorative symbol corresponding to the reserved image is changed. You will have a feeling.

From timing t2 to timing t4, while the pre-reading effect image is displayed, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed, but during the variable display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol is displayed. The look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side of the right decorative pattern. Therefore, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner with a part of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol hidden by the look-ahead effect image. The hold image displayed in the hold display area, the normal hold image displayed in the first hold display area, the normal hold image displayed in the second hold display area, and the normal hold image displayed in the third hold display area. The specific reserved image is displayed further in front of each decorative pattern and pre-reading effect image.

At the timing t4, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 625 (D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the context of the display of the look-ahead effect image and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is reversed, and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is in front of the look-ahead effect image. It will be in the state displayed on the side. The hold image displayed in the hold display area, the normal hold image displayed in the first hold display area, the normal hold image displayed in the second hold display area, and the normal hold image displayed in the third hold display area. The specific reserved image is displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image.

At the timing when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols located above and below each decorative symbol are no longer displayed. For example, in FIG. 625 (D), as the left decorative symbol, only the decorative symbol with the number "1" is stopped and displayed, but the number "1" is added until just before the timing t4. The lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is on the upper side of the decorative pattern, and the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9" is on the lower side of the decorative pattern with the number "1". It is displayed. With such a configuration, only the stop-displayed decorative pattern can be visually recognized by the player in a conspicuous state.

The stop display of the decorative symbol is continued from timing t4 to timing t5. Further, during this period, the display mode in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image is continued.

At timing t5, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the context of the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is switched again, and the pre-reading effect image is displayed in front of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol. Display mode.

At the timing when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols located above and below each decorative symbol are no longer displayed, but at the timing when a new variable display of the decorative symbols is started, each decoration is displayed. The display of the decorative symbols located above and below the symbols is also resumed. For example, in FIG. 625 (D), as the left decorative symbol, only the decorative symbol with the number "1" is stopped and displayed, but at the timing t5, the upper side of the decorative symbol with the number "1" is displayed. The lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed, and the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9" is displayed below the decorative pattern with the number "1". The downward movement display of each decorative symbol is instantly started.

After that, similarly, the context of the look-ahead effect image and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is exchanged according to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and the stop of the variable display. For example, in the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the display mode in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image is continued, but the period from timing t9 to timing t10 and timing t14 Similarly, in the period from to timing t15, the display mode in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image is continued.

At the timing t15, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the start winning prize that triggered the display of the pre-reading effect image and the specific reserved image is started. In FIG. 625 (E), at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t16) after the timing t15, the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, and the specific reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area. Indicates the displayed state.

At the timing t25, the decorative symbols with the numbers "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, respectively, and a reach state occurs. At this time, the variable display state in which the intermediate decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved and displayed is maintained. Further, at the timing t25, the display of the pre-reading effect image that has been displayed up to that point ends, and the pre-reading effect image is not displayed. FIG. 625 (F) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state is generated and the display of the look-ahead effect image is completed at the timing t25.

At the timing t33, the intermediate decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in the variable stop state. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the decorative symbol with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol with the number "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol.

FIG. 625 (G) shows a state in which the decorative symbol with the number “3” as the intermediate decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing t33. After that, at the timing t34, the display of the hold image displayed in the hold display area ends. On the other hand, the stop display state of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is continued until the game ball newly wins the first starting port 2002.

On the other hand, FIG. 625 (H) shows a state in which the decorative symbol with the number "2" as the intermediate decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing t33. After that, at the timing t34, the display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol ends with the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, and the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

In the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect image is displayed on the front side of the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design, and the decorative design is displayed on the front side of the pre-reading effect image during the stop display of the decorative design. ing.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, so that the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image can be grasped without confirming the movement of the specific reserved image. It becomes possible to recognize that one has approached the fluctuation display of.

Further, the area occupied by the display area of the look-ahead effect image is larger than the area occupied by the display area of the specific reserved image, and the look-ahead effect image is closer to the stop position of the decorative symbol than the specific reserved image. Since it is displayed, even if the player is focusing on visually recognizing the variation mode of the decorative symbol, it is possible to recognize that one has approached the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the specific reserved image. ..

Further, by displaying the decorative symbol and the look-ahead effect image at overlapping positions, it is possible to increase the size of both the decorative symbol and the look-ahead effect image, and it is possible to improve the utilization efficiency of the display area. Further, the display can be optimized by configuring the image to be displayed on the front side to be switched between the decorative pattern and the look-ahead effect image according to the conditions.

Specifically, during the change of the decorative pattern, the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side, so that the player is greatly affected by the approaching timing of the change display corresponding to the look-ahead effect image. You can have a sense of expectation. On the other hand, while the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, the stop mode of the decorative symbol is not hindered by the look-ahead effect image, and the entire decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed can be clearly shown to the player. ..

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 624 and 625, the size of the look-ahead effect image does not change even if the look-ahead effect image is displayed over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol. , Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 626, 628, and 629, when the look-ahead effect image is displayed over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol, the size of the look-ahead effect image is changed. An example of production is shown.

In this effect example, the first look-ahead effect image that occupies the smallest area with respect to the display area, the second look-ahead effect image that occupies a medium area with respect to the display area, and the area occupies the largest with respect to the display area. It is configured to switch and display a large third look-ahead effect image at a predetermined timing. The first look-ahead effect image to the third look-ahead effect image are arranged in a plurality (specifically, 6 pieces) so as to pop out a shape imitating a pine branch with leaves inside a horizontally long rectangular frame. In the case of the first look-ahead effect image, the size of the shape imitating a pine branch with leaves is the smallest, and in the case of the second look-ahead effect image, the size of a pine branch with leaves is imitated. The size of the shape is medium, and in the case of the third look-ahead effect image, the size of the shape imitating a pine branch with leaves is the largest. The color of the first look-ahead effect image to the third look-ahead effect image is green, which is slightly lighter than the color of the specific reserved image. In the effect example described with reference to FIG. 625, the look-ahead effect image displayed in the display area is the first look-ahead effect image.

First, with reference to FIGS. 626 (A) and 628, an example of an effect in which the look-ahead effect image gradually increases over a plurality of times of variable display of decorative symbols is shown. FIG. 626 (A) is a diagram showing a time chart in this production example, and FIG. 628 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing of a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this production example.

In this effect example, the display of the first look-ahead effect image and the specific hold image is started in response to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002 generated at the timing t2. FIG. 628 (A) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the display of the first look-ahead effect image and the specific reserved image is started at the timing t2.

At the timing t4, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 628 (B) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the context of the display of the look-ahead effect image and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is reversed, and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is in front of the look-ahead effect image. Displayed on the side.

Next, at timing t5, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol. At the timing t6, which is the timing one second later, the second look-ahead effect image larger than the first look-ahead effect image is displayed instead of the first look-ahead effect image. FIG. 628 (C) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after the display of the second look-ahead effect image is started at the timing t6.

Next, at timing t9, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 628 (D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing t9. At the timing when the left decorative symbol-right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the context of the display of the second look-ahead effect image and the left decorative symbol-right decorative symbol is reversed, and the left decorative symbol-right than the second look-ahead effect image. The decorative pattern is displayed on the front side.

Next, at the timing t10, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In this production example, at the timing t11, which is the timing one second later, the second look-ahead effect is replaced with the second look-ahead effect. It is configured to display a third look-ahead effect image larger than the image. FIG. 628 (E) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after the display of the third look-ahead effect image is started at the timing t11.

Next, at timing t14, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 628 (F) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing t14. At the timing when the left decorative symbol-right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the context of the display of the third look-ahead effect image and the left decorative symbol-right decorative symbol is reversed, and the left decorative symbol-right than the third look-ahead effect image. The decorative pattern is displayed on the front side.

Then, at timing t15, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. This variable display is a variable display corresponding to the start winning prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display in this effect example. At the timing t15, the context of the display of the third look-ahead effect image and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is reversed, and the third look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol. FIG. 628 (G) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t16) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing t15.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is pre-read from the decorative symbol in accordance with the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. After displaying the effect image on the front side, the look-ahead effect image that occupies a larger area with respect to the display area than the look-ahead effect image that has been displayed up to that point is displayed instead of the look-ahead effect image that was displayed until then. It is configured in.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variable display, so that the decoration corresponding to the specific reserved image can be performed without having to bother to confirm the movement of the specific reserved image. It becomes possible to recognize that the pattern has approached the variable display.

In addition, the look-ahead effect image that was displayed behind the decorative pattern during the stop display of the decorative pattern and was displayed so as to be partially hidden is immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a larger look-ahead effect. Since the image is switched to and displayed, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the look-ahead effect image as if it were enlarged twice.

Further, in the present embodiment, the size of the look-ahead effect image is configured to gradually increase. Specifically, by displaying a small look-ahead effect image first, the player can be made to recognize that the look-ahead effect has started, and at this stage, the visibility of the changing decorative pattern is not so much hindered. After that, the size of the look-ahead effect image gradually increases.

With such a configuration, it became possible for the player to recognize that the look-ahead effect was started, and then the size of the look-ahead effect image became larger, and it became difficult to see the changing decorative pattern. Even so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot understand the display content in the display area.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 626 (B) and 629, an effect example is shown in which the look-ahead effect image gradually becomes smaller over a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols. FIG. 626 (B) is a diagram showing a time chart in this production example, and FIG. 629 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing of a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this production example.

In this effect example, the display of the third look-ahead effect image and the specific hold image is started in response to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002 generated at the timing t2. FIG. 629 (A) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the display of the third look-ahead effect image and the specific reserved image is started at the timing t2.

At the timing t4, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 629 (B) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the context of the display of the look-ahead effect image and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is reversed, and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is in front of the look-ahead effect image. Displayed on the side.

Next, at the timing t5, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In this production example, at the timing t6, which is the timing one second later, the third look-ahead effect is replaced with the third look-ahead effect. It is configured to display a second look-ahead effect image smaller than the image. FIG. 629 (C) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after the display of the second look-ahead effect image is started at the timing t6.

Next, at timing t9, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 629 (D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing t9. At the timing when the left decorative symbol-right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the context of the display of the second look-ahead effect image and the left decorative symbol-right decorative symbol is reversed, and the left decorative symbol-right than the second look-ahead effect image. The decorative pattern is displayed on the front side.

Next, at the timing t10, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In this production example, at the timing t11, which is the timing one second later, the second look-ahead effect is replaced with the second look-ahead effect. It is configured to display a first look-ahead effect image smaller than the image. FIG. 629 (E) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after the display of the first look-ahead effect image is started at the timing t11.

Next, at timing t14, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 629 (F) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing t14. At the timing when the left decorative symbol-right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the context of the display of the first look-ahead effect image and the left decorative symbol-right decorative symbol is reversed, and the left decorative symbol-right than the first look-ahead effect image. The decorative pattern is displayed on the front side.

Then, at timing t15, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. This variable display is a variable display corresponding to the start winning prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display in this effect example. At the timing t15, the front-back relationship between the first look-ahead effect image and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is reversed, and the third look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol. FIG. 629 (G) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t16) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing t15.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 626 (A) and 628. For example, since the player can clearly visually grasp the start and stop of each variable display, he / she has approached the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image without having to bother to confirm the movement of the specific reserved image. Can be recognized.

Further, by displaying the largest look-ahead effect image first as the look-ahead effect image, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot recognize that the look-ahead effect has started. After that, by gradually reducing the look-ahead effect image, the decoration that is changed and displayed until the start-up prize corresponding to the start-up prize that triggered the display of the look-ahead effect image and the specific reserved image is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot understand the contents of the fluctuation of the symbol.

Further, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 626 (A), 628, 626 (B), and 629, in addition to the large opening provided in the center of the look-ahead effect image, the look-ahead effect image ( The second look-ahead effect image and the third look-ahead effect image) are configured to be provided with a small opening in which the image displayed on the rear side can be visually recognized.

Specifically, in the case of the second look-ahead effect image, a total of 6 openings are provided around the second look-ahead effect image, and in the case of the third look-ahead effect image, a total of 8 openings are provided around the third look-ahead effect image. It is configured to be provided. In addition, openings are provided corresponding to each of the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol so that the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are not difficult to see. For example, in the case of the second look-ahead effect image, there are two openings at the top and bottom corresponding to the left decorative symbol, two openings at the top and bottom corresponding to the middle decorative symbol, and two openings at the top and bottom corresponding to the right decorative symbol. It is provided.

Further, in the case of the third look-ahead effect image, three openings are provided vertically corresponding to the left decorative symbol, two upper and lower corresponding to the middle decorative symbol, and three upper and lower corresponding to the right decorative symbol. It is provided. As described above, during the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the opening at a predetermined timing, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the decorative symbol.

By adopting such a configuration, the pre-reading effect image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is being displayed on the back side of the pre-reading effect image even during the variable display of the decorative symbol. This can be visually recognized by the player through the opening, so that the player cannot understand the display content in the display area while maintaining the impact of displaying the look-ahead effect image on the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation.

An embodiment in which the size of the look-ahead effect image does not change (FIG. 624), an embodiment in which the size of the look-ahead effect image is increased (FIG. 626 (A)), or an embodiment in which the size of the look-ahead effect image is reduced after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (FIG. 626). Although FIG. 626 (B) is shown, it may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the size of the displayed look-ahead effect image.

For example, as the look-ahead effect image, the first look-ahead effect image in which the ratio of the area occupying the display area is small, the second look-ahead effect image in which the ratio of the area occupying the display area is medium, and the third look-ahead effect image in which the ratio of the area occupying the display area is large. The look-ahead effect display can be executed in three display modes of the look-ahead effect image, and the first look-ahead effect image, the second look-ahead effect image, and the third look-ahead effect image are configured so as to have higher expectations in this order, and finally. Depending on the type of the pre-reading effect image that has been displayed, it may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation result of the variation display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the pre-reading effect display will indicate a big hit. .. In this case, the player expects that a larger look-ahead effect image is displayed as the look-ahead effect image.

Alternatively, the pre-reading effect display is configured so that the expectation is higher in the order of the third pre-reading effect image, the second pre-reading effect image, and the first pre-reading effect image, and the pre-reading effect display is displayed depending on the type of the pre-reading effect image finally displayed. It may be configured so that the fluctuation result of the fluctuation display corresponding to the start prize that triggered the start suggests the degree of expectation that indicates a big hit. In this case, the player expects that a smaller look-ahead effect image is displayed as the look-ahead effect image.

627 (A) to 627 (H) show a modified example of the state of the look-ahead effect display in the time chart described with reference to FIG. 626 (A).

FIG. 627 (A) is a diagram for showing the variable state of the decorative symbol, the number of holdings, and which of the symbol and the effect display is preferentially displayed.

In FIG. 627 (B), the first look-ahead effect image showing the low expectation is displayed at the timing t2, the first look-ahead effect image showing the low expectation is continuously displayed at the timing t5, and the medium expectation is shown at the timing t11. 2 It is a time chart which shows the effect example in which a look-ahead effect image is displayed.

In FIG. 627 (C), the first look-ahead effect image showing a low expectation is displayed at the timing t2, the first look-ahead effect image showing a low expectation is continuously displayed at the timing t5, and the first look-ahead effect image showing a high expectation is displayed at the timing t11. 3 It is a time chart which shows the effect example in which a look-ahead effect image is displayed.

In FIG. 627 (D), a first look-ahead effect image showing a low expectation is displayed at timing t2, a second look-ahead effect image showing a medium expectation is displayed at timing t5, and a second look-ahead effect image showing a medium expectation is displayed at timing t11. It is a time chart which shows the effect example which the look-ahead effect image is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 627 (E), the second look-ahead effect image showing the medium expectation is displayed at the timing t2, the third look-ahead effect image showing the high expectation is displayed at the timing t5, and the first look-ahead effect image showing the low expectation is displayed at the timing t11. It is a time chart which shows the effect example which the pre-reading effect image is displayed.

In FIG. 627 (F), the third look-ahead effect image showing a high expectation is displayed at the timing t2, the third look-ahead effect image showing a high expectation is continuously displayed at the timing t5, and the third look-ahead effect image showing a high expectation is displayed at the timing t11. 3 It is a time chart which shows the effect example in which the look-ahead effect image is continuously displayed.

In this way, by configuring the look-ahead effect image to have a higher degree of expectation according to the size of the finally displayed look-ahead effect image, it is possible to further enhance the interest when the look-ahead effect image is displayed.

In the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display, the look-ahead effect image and the decorative symbol may be displayed so as not to overlap.

FIG. 627 (G) is a time chart showing an effect example in which a vertically long bar-shaped image is displayed on the left and right sides of the display area as a look-ahead effect image instead of the third look-ahead effect image showing a high degree of expectation at timing t16. Further, FIG. 627 (H) is a time chart showing an effect example in which a vertically long bar-shaped image is displayed on the left and right sides of the display area as a look-ahead effect image instead of the first look-ahead effect image showing a low expectation at the timing t16. ..

FIG. 629 (H) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t17) after the display of the rod-shaped image is started at the timing t16 of the time chart shown in FIGS. 627 (G) and 627 (H). ing. As shown in FIG. 629 (H), the bar-shaped image is displayed at a position that does not overlap with any of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol in the variable display. In the figure, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner. The color of the rod-shaped image is light green, which is the same color as the first look-ahead effect image and the third look-ahead effect image that have been displayed so far.

As described above, in the present embodiment, instead of the look-ahead effect image displayed over the variation of the decorative symbol a plurality of times, a bar-shaped image that does not overlap with the changing decorative symbol is displayed as a look-ahead effect image having a different shape. It is configured to do.

With such a configuration, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are recognized while the player is aware that the decorative symbols corresponding to the starting prizes that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display are displayed. The mode of appearance of the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of is clarified, and whether or not a reach state occurs, or which number the decorative symbol with which number is temporarily stopped, is determined. It does not interfere with the player's visibility.

In some game stores, the number attached to the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed in the form of doublet indicating a big hit may provide the player with a service unique to the game store (unlimited service by lucky number, etc.). The player can confirm the number attached to the stopped decorative symbol from the time of the temporary stop of the left decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped for the first time in which it can be determined whether or not such a service can be received.

It should be noted that the number attached to the decorative pattern may be configured so that the degree of expectation of a big hit when a reach state occurs differs. For example, in the reach state by the decorative symbol with the number "4" and the reach state by the decorative symbol with the number "7", the latter is configured so that the expectation of becoming a big hit is higher. You should do it. Alternatively, the profit given to the player when a big hit state occurs may be different depending on the number attached to the decorative symbol. For example, when the decorative symbol with the number "4" stops at doublet and becomes a big hit, and when the decorative symbol with the number "7" stops at doublet and becomes a big hit. Then, it is preferable that the latter is configured so that the big winning opening 2005 is opened more during the big hit game and a lot of prize balls are given to the player.

With such a configuration, the player is concerned about which number is attached to the left decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed, but in the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect image is rod-shaped. By displaying the image, the visibility of the decorative pattern is guaranteed.

In the effect example described with reference to FIG. 629 (H), the effect example in which the entire decorative pattern does not overlap with the bar-shaped image which is the look-ahead effect image is shown. Of these, the background area may be allowed to overlap with the bar-shaped image, and the number area may be configured so as not to overlap with the bar-shaped image. In this case, the thickness of the rod-shaped image described with reference to FIG. 629 (H) can be slightly increased in the left-right direction (inner direction in the display area). Even with such a configuration, the numbers attached to the decorative design do not overlap with the look-ahead effect image, so that the visibility of the decorative design is ensured.

In the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 626 to 629, the configuration is such that the result of the variable display shows the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display will be a big hit depending on the size of the look-ahead effect image, but it depends on the size of the look-ahead effect image. Instead of or in addition to showing the degree of expectation, it may be modified to show the degree of expectation to be a big hit by other attributes other than the size in the look-ahead effect image.

For example, an image having the same shape as the first look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. 628 (A) is configured to be displayable in any color of blue, green, or red, and the blue look-ahead effect image is first read ahead. As the effect image, the green look-ahead effect image is used as the second look-ahead effect image, and the red look-ahead effect image is used as the third look-ahead effect image, which can be displayed in the time chart shown with reference to FIGS. 626 and 627. You may. At this time, the expectation level when the blue first look-ahead effect image is displayed is set to the low expectation level, the expectation level when the green second look-ahead effect image is displayed is set to the medium expectation level, and the red number is set to the middle expectation level. (3) The pre-reading effect may be configured so that the expected degree when the image is displayed is the high expected degree.

Further, an example is shown in which an image having the same shape as the first look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. 628 (A) is blue, green, and red, but an image having the same shape as the second look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. 628 (C) is shown. Is blue, green, or red, or an image having the same shape as the third look-ahead effect image shown in FIG. 628 (E) is displayed as blue, green, or red, and similarly, as the first look-ahead effect image to the third look-ahead effect image. It may be configured to do so.

Alternatively, it may be configured to show the degree of expectation by the combination of the size and the color of the look-ahead effect image. For example, the small-sized pre-reading effect image shown in FIG. 628 (A) is defined as the blue first pre-reading effect image, and the medium-sized pre-reading effect image shown in FIG. 628 (C) is defined as the green second pre-reading effect image. As the effect image, the read-ahead effect image having the largest size shown in FIG. 628 (E) is defined as the red third look-ahead effect image, and the expectation level when the first look-ahead effect image is displayed is set to a low expectation level. The expectation level when the two look-ahead effect images are displayed may be set to the medium expectation level, and the expectation level when the third look-ahead effect image is displayed may be set to the high expectation level.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can clearly grasp the start and stop of each variation display by the change in the color of the look-ahead effect image, so that the player does not have to bother to confirm the movement of the specific hold image. It becomes possible to recognize that the display is approaching the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the image.

Even if the color of each decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed is set to the same color or a similar color when the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed while the look-ahead effect image is displayed. good. For example, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol may be configured to be all blue.

Specifically, immediately before the variable display is stopped, the background area and the number area of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are set to blue, and the color is stopped and displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image in the blue state, and then the fluctuation starts. Occasionally, it is preferable to configure the image so that it is displayed behind the look-ahead effect image in a blue state, and to display the variation in the original colors of white and black during fluctuation. Alternatively, from the start of displaying the look-ahead effect image, the color of the background area and the number area of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is set to blue, and the background area of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is set until the display of the look-ahead effect image is completed. Or, the color of the number area may be configured to continue to be blue. The color of the background area and the number area of the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is not limited to blue, but green, red, gray, or the like may be adopted. When the background area and the number area have the same color, it is preferable to provide a black outline portion for the number.

Further, the colors of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol and the color of the look-ahead effect image may be different colors. For example, when blue is adopted as the color of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, it is preferable to adopt a color other than blue (for example, red / green) as the color of the look-ahead effect image.

In this way, at least by making each decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed at the timing when each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed the same color (for example, blue) or a similar color, the left decorative symbol to the right decoration that is stopped and displayed is displayed. In addition to giving a sense of unity of the design, the visual difference from the look-ahead effect image displayed on the background side of the left decorative design to the right decorative design can be further enhanced, and the end and start of the variable display of the decorative design can be achieved. It will be more clearly recognized by the player.

Furthermore, by making the color of each decorative symbol different from that of the look-ahead effect image, it is possible to further enhance the visual difference between the color of each decorative symbol and the look-ahead effect image, and the variable display of the decorative symbol ends. And the start will be more clearly recognized by the player.

In this way, when the colors of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are the same, the color of each decorative symbol is changed to a different color while the look-ahead effect image is being displayed. You may. Such a change in the color of the decorative symbol is performed at the timing when each decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner and is displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image, and each decorative symbol is displayed on the back side of the look-ahead effect image. It is advisable to configure so that the color of the decorative pattern is not changed at the timing when it is set.

For example, the color of each decorative symbol may be changed from blue to green at the timing when each decorative symbol is displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image during the fluctuation of each decorative symbol. In addition, depending on the color of the decorative pattern changed in this way, some state in the gaming machine (for example, the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display will be a variable result indicating a big hit). It may be configured as suggested.

With such a configuration, the player can more clearly recognize the end and start of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The look-ahead effect image may be configured to have characters or symbols indicating the name of the effect. Further, when the decorative symbol is stopped, a part or all of the characters or symbols indicating the name of the effect may be hidden by the stopped-displayed decorative symbol. For example, a character string "pine mark proliferation time" is added to the look-ahead effect image, and a part of the character string "pine mark proliferation time" is displayed by a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image. Or it may be configured so that everything is hidden. Further, in the bar-shaped image shown in FIG. 629 (H), the character string "pine mark proliferation time" may be added as a character indicating the name of the effect.

With such a configuration, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the display priority of the look-ahead effect image and the decorative symbol is switched, the entire name of the look-ahead effect image becomes visible to the player. , It is possible to impress the player that the look-ahead effect image is being performed.

Further, the name of the effect displayed in the bar-shaped image may be different according to the size of the look-ahead effect image (that is, the degree of expectation of big hit) displayed until immediately before. For example, when the first look-ahead effect image is displayed, the character string "pine mark proliferation time (small)" is displayed, and when the second look-ahead effect image is displayed, "pine mark proliferation time (small)" is displayed. When the third look-ahead effect image is displayed, the character string "middle)" may be configured to display the character string "pine mark proliferation time (large)".

With such a configuration, the player can confirm the jackpot expectation degree suggested by the look-ahead effect image while ensuring the visibility of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 624 and the like, when the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display by displaying the specific hold image corresponding to the look-ahead effect image is displayed. It is configured to indicate whether it will be performed, but instead of or in addition to displaying the specific reserved image, a normal white reserved image with a perfect circular shape is displayed, and at the same time as the display of the look-ahead effect image is started, a specific is specified. The effect sound may be output for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second from the timing t2 to the timing t3). Alternatively, it may be configured to display only the look-ahead effect image without outputting such a specific effect sound.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variation display, so that the player can start displaying the look-ahead effect image without confirming the movement of the reserved image. It becomes possible to recognize that one has approached the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the pending hold.

An effect mode is shown in which one of the look-ahead effect image and the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side and the other side is on the rear side. In these examples, at the portion where the image located on the front side and the image located on the rear side overlap, the image located on the rear side is configured to be invisible, but the image located on the front side is half. It may be made transparent so that the image located at the rear can be seen through the image located at the front.

With such a configuration, the visibility of the look-ahead effect image and the decorative pattern can be ensured.

When the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped and the decorative symbol is displayed in front of the look-ahead effect image, the expectation related to the variable display corresponding to the start prize that triggered the start of the display of the look-ahead effect image. It is preferable to configure so that the effect display indicating the expectation degree other than the degree (expectation degree related to the other reserved image) is not performed. For example, if a new hold occurs in response to a prize in the first start port 2002 during the execution of the look-ahead effect display, a normal round and white hold image is displayed regardless of the result of the special lottery. It should be configured to be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by information other than the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect display.

Although the embodiment of displaying the look-ahead effect image on the peripheral edge of the display area is shown in FIGS. 628, 629, etc., the look-ahead effect image may be displayed near the center of the display area.

FIG. 630 shows a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 628 and 629. 630 (A) shows a state in which the first look-ahead effect image is displayed at the timing t2 of the time chart of FIG. 626 (A), and FIG. 630 (B) shows the state of the time chart of FIG. 626 (A) at the timing t6. FIG. 630 (C) shows a state in which the second look-ahead effect image is displayed, and FIG. 630 (C) shows a state in which the third look-ahead effect image is displayed at the timing t11 of the time chart of FIG. 626 (A). Further, FIG. 630 (D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing t14 of the time chart of FIG. 626 (A).

In FIG. 630, the first look-ahead effect image to the third look-ahead effect image are images showing a state in which one to three ingredients are stuck in the skewer of oden. Specifically, the first look-ahead effect image is an image showing a state in which a triangular-shaped konjac is stuck on a skewer, and the second look-ahead effect image is a konnyaku with a triangular shape on a skewer and a quadrangular radish. The third look-ahead effect image is an image showing a state in which a triangle-shaped konjac, a quadrangular-shaped radish, and an oval-shaped paste are stabbed in a skewer.

In this way, the first look-ahead effect image changes to the second look-ahead effect image, and the second look-ahead effect image changes to the third look-ahead effect image at the timing when one second elapses from the start of the change of the decorative symbol. In addition, when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the part representing the ingredients (konjac, radish, paste) is hidden by displaying the decorative pattern on the front side in any of the look-ahead effect images, and only the part representing the skewer is displayed. It is visible to the player without being hidden by the decorative pattern.

With such a configuration, the look-ahead effect image can be visually recognized as one image or as seen as a plurality of images when the decorative symbol is changing and when the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the appearance of the look-ahead effect image as if it has changed significantly, and the start and stop of each variation display can be visually and clearly grasped.

Further, only the part hidden by the decorative pattern is a place that can be changed when a certain look-ahead effect image is changed to another look-ahead effect image. Therefore, when the expectation of the jackpot is suggested by the type of the look-ahead effect image, the player can recognize the change stop and the change start of the decorative symbol if he / she pays attention only to the place where the decorative symbol stops. , It becomes possible to recognize the degree of expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the case of performing a variation mode in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are displayed as if they were temporarily stopped and then the variation display is restarted during one variation of the decorative symbol, the look-ahead effect image is used. It is preferable to configure the look-ahead effect image to be displayed in front of the decorative symbol without changing the priority of. For example, in the time chart shown in FIG. 626 (A), the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed from timing t7 to timing t8 or from timing t17 to timing t18, and then the left decorative symbol to right decorative symbol are displayed temporarily. Even when the variable display of the symbol is configured to be restarted, it is preferable to configure the look-ahead effect image to continue to be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol.

With such a configuration, a situation occurs in which the player misunderstands that the variation display ends and a new variation display is started, and that the variation of the decorative pattern, which is suggested by the look-ahead effect image, is approaching. Can be suppressed.

Although an example of displaying the look-ahead effect image around the display area is shown, a plurality of look-ahead effect images may be displayed around the display area.

Hereinafter, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 624 and 625 will be described with reference to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 631, 632, and 633. FIG. 631 is a diagram showing a time chart in this effect example, and FIGS. 632 and 633 are diagrams showing a display state of a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing in this effect example.

The look-ahead effect in the present embodiment includes a look-ahead effect frame image that surrounds the outer circumference of the display area in a frame shape, and a first pine notice image to a sixth pine provided in a display mode of two columns vertically and three rows horizontally in the display area. It is configured to be done by a trailer image.

Specifically, the first pine notice image is on the upper left of the display area, the second pine notice image is on the upper center of the display area, the third pine notice image is on the upper right of the display area, and the third pine notice image is on the lower left of the display area. The 4 pine trailer image is displayed in the lower center of the display area, the 5th pine trailer image is displayed, and the 6th pine trailer image is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area. The first pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image are different in the timing of starting the display and the timing of ending the display, and the display is started and ended independently.

Further, each of the first pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image is an image suggesting that a predetermined effect is performed.

Specifically, the first pine notice image is an image for notifying that the operation on the operation button 410 becomes effective, and is attached with the character string "button preparation".

In addition, the second pine notice image is an image that announces that the movable ear frame provided on the frame changes from the first state to the second state, and the character string "Be careful on the frame!" Is displayed. It is attached.

Further, the third pine notice image is an image that announces that the hold image will change to a hold image indicating that the expectation is higher, and is, for example, attached with the character string "green hold!".

The fourth pine notice image is an image that counts down and displays that some kind of notice or suggestion about the game is performed at a predetermined timing, and a character string that counts down with the passage of time is added. For example, after the display such as "18 seconds later?" Is displayed, every time 1 second elapses, "17 seconds later?", "16 seconds later?", ..., "1 second later?" Is an image that is displayed as a countdown.

The fifth pine notice image is an image that announces that a special reach with a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach state will occur as the reach state, and is attached with the character string "SP reach".

Similar to the 4th pine notice image, the 6th pine notice image is an image that counts down and displays that some notice or suggestion regarding the game is performed at a predetermined timing.

The color of the look-ahead effect frame image and the first pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image is green. The first pine trailer image to the sixth pine trailer image have an outer shape bordered with a color other than green (for example, black). As a result, it is possible to make a visual difference from the look-ahead effect frame image displayed behind the first pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image. In addition, the 1st pine notice image to the 6th pine notice image may continue to be displayed even after the corresponding notice or suggestion is executed, but in that case, they are displayed in gray instead of green. The characters attached to the 1st pine trailer image to the 6th pine trailer image are black.

FIG. 631 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbol has stopped changing.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 631, at the timing t2, the game ball wins the first starting port 2002 and a new hold occurs. Further, with this start winning as an opportunity, at the timing t2, the display of the look-ahead effect frame image, the third pine notice image, the fourth pine notice image, and the sixth pine notice image is started as the look-ahead effect display.

FIG. 632 (A) shows the display state immediately after the pre-reading effect display is started at the timing t2. Specifically, a look-ahead effect frame image that surrounds the display area in a square shape is displayed on the front side of the changing decorative pattern, and the third pine notice image and the fourth pine are displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect frame image. It shows the state in which the preview image and the 6th pine preview image are displayed. It also shows the state in which the reserved image is displayed in the foreground side. The reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area is a normal reserved image in white.

The word "green hold!" Is attached to the third pine notice image, which is a new white hold caused by the game ball winning the first starting port 2002 at timing t2. It shows that it changes to a green hold indicating that the jackpot expectation is higher at a predetermined timing.

Further, the 4th pine notice image is attached with the character string "18 seconds later?", And the 6th pine notice image is attached with the character string "23 seconds later?". This indicates that some notice or suggestion regarding the game will be given 18 seconds later (timing t20) and 23 seconds later (timing t25), respectively.

Next, at timing t4, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 632 (B) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the context of the display of the 3rd pine trailer image, the 4th pine trailer image, the 6th pine trailer image and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is reversed. The left decorative design to the right decorative design are displayed on the front side of the third pine notice image, the fourth pine notice image, and the sixth pine notice image. The hold image displayed in the hold display area and the normal hold image displayed in the first hold display area to the third hold display area are displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect frame image.

Then, at timing t5, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the new variation display of the decorative design is started, the context of the 3rd pine notice image, the 4th pine notice image, the 6th pine notice image and the left decorative design is changed again, and the left decorative design is changed. The display mode is such that the third pine notice image, the fourth pine notice image, and the sixth pine notice image are displayed on the front side of the right decorative pattern.

Then, at the timing t7, the display of the fifth pine notice image is started. FIG. 632 (C) shows the display state immediately after the display of the fifth pine notice image is started at the timing t7. Specifically, it shows a state in which the fifth pine notice image with the characters "SP reach!" Is displayed on the front side of the changing decorative pattern. The 5th pine notice image has the characters "SP reach!", Which is a decorative pattern corresponding to the newly generated hold due to the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 2002 at timing t2. It shows that the fluctuation of is a special reach.

Next, at timing t9, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 632 (D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing t9. At the timing when the left decorative design to the right decorative design are stopped and displayed, the context of the display of the 3rd pine notice image, the 4th pine notice image to the 6th pine notice image and the left decorative design to the right decorative design is reversed. The left decorative design to the right decorative design are displayed on the front side of the third pine notice image and the fourth pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image.

Then, at timing t10, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the new variation display of the decorative design is started, the context of the 3rd pine notice image, the 4th pine notice image ~ the 6th pine notice image and the left decorative design ~ the right decorative design is replaced again, and the left decorative design ~ The display mode is such that the 3rd pine notice image and the 4th pine notice image to the 6th pine notice image are displayed on the front side of the right decorative pattern.

Then, at the timing t11, the display of the second pine notice image is started. FIG. 632 (E) shows the display state immediately after the display of the second pine notice image is started at the timing t11. Specifically, it shows a state in which a second pine notice image with the characters "Caution on the frame!" Is displayed on the front side of the changing decorative pattern. The second pine notice image has the character string "Be careful on the frame!", Which corresponds to the newly generated hold due to the game ball winning the first starting port 2002 at timing t2. It is shown that the movable ear frame provided on the frame changes from the first state to the second state at a predetermined timing in response to the fluctuation of the decorative pattern.

Next, at timing t13, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area changes to a green reserved image. At the same time, the display of the third pine preview image, which has foretold that the white reserved image will change to the green reserved image, ends. FIG. 632 (F) shows a state immediately after these indications are made at the timing t13.

Next, at timing t14, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 632 (F) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing t14. At the timing when the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the context of the display of the 2nd pine preview image, the 4th pine preview image to the 6th pine preview image and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is reversed. The left decorative design to the right decorative design are displayed on the front side of the second pine notice image and the fourth pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image.

Then, at timing t15, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the new variation display of the decorative design is started, the context of the 2nd pine notice image, the 4th pine notice image ~ the 6th pine notice image and the left decorative design ~ the right decorative design is replaced again, and the left decorative design ~ The display mode is such that the 2nd pine notice image and the 4th pine notice image to the 6th pine notice image are displayed on the front side of the right decorative pattern. Further, the variation of the decorative symbol is a variation corresponding to the hold caused by the game ball winning the first starting port 2002 at the timing t2, and is the variation display that is the target of the look-ahead effect display.

Then, at the timing t17, the display of the first pine preview image is started. FIG. 632 (G) shows the display state immediately after the display of the first pine notice image is started at the timing t17. Specifically, it shows a state in which the first pine notice image with the characters "button preparation" is displayed on the front side of the changing decorative pattern. The character string "button preparation" is attached to the first pine notice image, which indicates that the operation on the operation button 410 becomes effective at a predetermined timing.

Then, at the timing t20, the character attached to the fourth pine notice image changes from the character "01 seconds later?" To the character "chance!". At the same time, the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area changes to the red reserved image. FIG. 633 (A) shows the state immediately after these displays are performed at the timing t20. The 4th pine notice image was green until then, but it becomes gray because the notice corresponding to the 4th pine notice image (change to the red reserved image) is performed.

Then, at the timing t22, the display of the fourth pine notice image with the characters "chance!" Ends.

Then, at the timing t25, the character attached to the sixth pine notice image changes from the character "01 seconds later?" To the character "chance!". At the same time, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to fall toward the front side of the display area. At the same time, the left decorative symbol with the number "2" and the right decorative symbol with the number "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and a reach state occurs. As for the intermediate decorative symbol, the variable display state of scrolling downward and moving is continued. FIG. 633 (B) shows a state immediately after these indications are made at the timing t25. The 6th pine notice image was green until then, but it becomes gray because the notice corresponding to the 6th pine notice image (movable of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800) was performed.

Next, from timing t25 to timing t29, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (falling state), and then maintains the second state for a predetermined time, and then the second state (the second state (standby state). It changes from the dropped state) to the first state (standby state). Further, at the timing t27, the display of the sixth pine notice image with the characters "chance!" Ends.

Then, at the timing t30, the size of the decorative symbol changes and a special reach occurs. Specifically, the left decorative symbol with the number "2", which had been temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the left side of the display area in the vertical direction, is reduced to a square shape and temporarily stopped at the lower left of the display area. It will be in the stopped display state. Similarly, the right decorative symbol with the number "2", which was temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the right side of the display area in the vertical direction, was reduced to a square shape and temporarily stopped and displayed at the lower right of the display area. It becomes a state. Further, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are displayed from the state of being displayed behind the look-ahead effect frame image to the state of being displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect frame image. At the same time, the size of the intermediate decorative pattern in the horizontal direction is about doubled, and the variable display is performed. At the same time, the display of the 5th pine notice image with the characters "SP reach!" Ends. FIG. 633 (C) shows a state immediately after these indications are made at the timing t30.

Next, at the timing t35, the movable ear frame changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moved state to the moving position or rotated state). In addition, the characters attached to the second pine notice image change from the characters "Be careful on the frame!" To the characters "Operating on the frame!". FIG. 633 (D) shows a state immediately after the character attached to the second pine notice image is changed to the character “Operating on the frame!” At the timing t30. The second pine notice image was green until then, but it becomes gray when the notice corresponding to the second pine notice image (change of state of the movable ear frame) is performed.

Then, at the timing t41, the operation to the operation button 410 changes to a valid state. In addition, the characters attached to the first pine preview image change from the characters "button preparation" to the characters "press OK!". In addition, an image imitating a button with the characters "PUSH" is displayed at the center of the lower part of the display area in the left-right direction. FIG. 633 (E) shows a state immediately after the character attached to the first pine notice image is changed to the character “press OK!” At timing t30. The first pine notice image was green until then, but it becomes gray when the notice corresponding to the first pine notice image (change to the state in which the operation to the operation button 410 is valid) is performed.

Although not shown, the player operates the button from the timing t41 to the timing t43 to display some indication of the expectation of a big hit. For example, it is preferable to configure the display area to display the character string "may not hit ..." or the character string "may hit ..." for 1 second immediately after the button operation according to the button operation. .. In this case, if the character string "Maybe it hits ..." is displayed, the expectation of big hit is higher than when the character string "Maybe it hits ..." is displayed. good.

Next, at timing t45, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in either a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a loss or a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. Will be done. FIG. 633 (F) shows a display state in which the special lottery result is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the result is a loss. Further, FIG. 633 (G) shows a display state in which the special lottery result is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. At this time, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, which have been reduced and displayed in the corners of the display area, return to their original sizes and are stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the display area in the vertical direction. In addition, the width of the intermediate decorative symbol is also restored, and the display area is stopped and displayed at a position substantially in the center of the display area in the vertical direction.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the first pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image while the decorative symbol is fluctuating, and the first is displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The pine notice image to the sixth pine notice image are configured to be displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variation display, so that the start can be an opportunity to display the 1st pine notice image to the 6th pine notice image. It is possible to recognize that the decorative pattern corresponding to the winning image has approached the variable display without having to bother to confirm the movement of the holding image corresponding to the winning.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 631, an production example in which all of the 1st pine notice image to the 6th pine notice image are displayed is shown, but instead of displaying all the pine notice images, the special lottery result is displayed. Based on this, only some pine trailer images may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable to display the pine notice image from a predetermined timing before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed to a predetermined timing after the start of the new variable display. For example, in the production example shown in FIG. 631, the pine trailer image is displayed in the period from timing t3 to timing t6, the period from timing t8 to timing t11, and the period from timing t13 to timing t16. It is good to do it.

For example, when displaying only the first pine notice image with the characters "button ready!", The first pine notice image is configured to continue to be displayed at least during the period from timing t3 to timing t16. good. In addition, when displaying only the second pine notice image with the characters "Caution on the frame!", The second pine notice image should be continuously displayed at least during the period from timing t3 to timing t16. It is good to configure. The same applies to the 3rd pine preview image to the 6th pine preview image.

By displaying a plurality of pine trailer images, any pine trailer image may be displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t16. For example, in the production example shown in FIG. 631, the third pine preview image with the characters “green hold!” Is not displayed from the timing t13 to the timing t16. Further, the fifth pine preview image with the characters "SP reach!" Is not displayed from timing t3 to timing t6. However, if both the third pine notice image and the sixth pine notice image are displayed, the pine notice image will be displayed in the period from the timing t3 to the timing t16. In this way, it is also possible to display a plurality of pine notice images having different display start timings and display end timings.

The size of the look-ahead effect frame image is configured to display a look-ahead effect frame image larger than the effect example shown in FIGS. 632 and 633, and the decorative symbols stopped and displayed overlap the front side of the look-ahead effect frame image. You may do so. In this case, the width of the look-ahead effect frame image, which is a shape surrounding the display area, is increased, and the left and upper sides of the left decorative symbol and the upper side of the middle decorative symbol are displayed in the state where the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. , It is preferable to configure the upper side and the right side of the right decorative pattern so as to overlap with the look-ahead effect frame image. Further, in this case, the numerical area of each of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed may be configured so as not to overlap with the look-ahead effect frame image. FIG. 634 (A) is a display example immediately after the timing t2 of the pre-reading effect frame image having a widened width, and FIG. 634 (B) is a table immediately after the timing t4 of the pre-reading effect frame image having a widened width. It is an example.

With such a configuration, even if none of the pine trailer images is displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t16, the look-ahead effect frame image is behind the decorative symbol when the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped. The player can visually and clearly grasp the start and stop of each variation display.
Further, even when the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold that triggered the display of the pine preview image is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed in front of the look-ahead effect frame image.

FIG. 635 is a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 624 and 625. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 635, the hold display area and the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area are provided from the lower left position of the display area to the diagonally upward right side. FIG. 635 (A) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the look-ahead effect display is started in FIG. 624. Further, FIG. 635 (B) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing t4 in FIG. 624. Further, in FIGS. 635 (A) and 635 (B), the hold display area, the first hold display area, and the second hold display area are circular and white, and the third hold display area is a normal hold. , Indicates a state in which a blue reserved image indicating that the jackpot expectation is high is displayed. The number of holds is three, and the fourth hold display area is indicated by a dotted line.

In the present embodiment, the reserved image is displayed in front of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol during the variable display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol. On the other hand, at the timing when the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the context of the display of the reserved image and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is reversed, and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is in front of the reserved image. Displayed on the side.

In this way, when the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, a part of the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area and all of the fourth display area are temporarily hidden by the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol. It will be in the state of being. Further, as the third display area, the second display area, and the first display area approach the reserved display area, the area of each display area hidden by the decorative symbol decreases, and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol The visibility of each reserved image at the time of stop display will gradually increase, and the player's expectation for a big hit will increase at an accelerating rate.

With reference to FIGS. 636 and 637, the variable display result of the decorative symbol becomes the variable display result indicating a big hit depending on the point displayed in the display area corresponding to the predetermined effect display during the variable display of the decorative symbol. An example of production that shows the degree of expectation is shown.

Specifically, as the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 4 times) in response to the expectation that the result of the variable display will be a big hit. The expectation of a big hit is suggested by the temporary stop display effect. An example of the effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 637 (A) to 637 (H).

FIGS. 637 (A) to 637 (H) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode from the start to the end of the "oden x shopkeeper time!" Production.

The "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Production is one of the display productions performed based on the special lottery result acquired when the game ball wins the first starting port 2002. In this production example, after the oden effect image display effect pattern described later is executed four times, it is expected that the result of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is variablely displayed by the oden image and the oden point described later will be a big hit. Degree is suggested.

FIG. 637 (A) is a diagram showing a state immediately after the first start of the oden effect image display effect pattern described later is started with the start of the “oden × shopkeeper time!” Effect. In addition, immediately after the display state in the effect mode display area, the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area, and the display area of the cumulative oden point display area, which will be described later, is started, the left decorative symbol to the right decoration It shows the state in which the variable display of the symbol is started.

In this state, a rectangular-shaped effect mode display area having a long side equal to the vertical length of the display area is provided at the right end of the display area. The production mode display area will be displayed as the "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Production starts, and will not be displayed when the "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Production ends. .. The name of the effect state being executed is written vertically in the effect mode display area. In this production example, as shown in FIGS. 637 (A) to 637 (H), the character string "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Is added.

The display area is provided with three oden effect image display areas: a left oden effect image display area, a middle oden effect image display area, and a right oden effect image display area. Each oden effect display area is a display area on which an oden effect image, which will be described later, is displayed.

The left oden effect image display area is at the position where the left decorative symbol is stopped and temporarily stopped, and the middle oden effect image display area is at the position where the middle decorative symbol is stopped and temporarily stopped, and the right oden effect image display area. Is provided at the position where the right decorative symbol is displayed as a stop display and a temporary stop display, respectively.

Further, each oden effect image display area is provided inside the peripheral portion of the decorative pattern displayed at the corresponding position.

The number area located in the center of the background area in each of the decorative symbols from the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 637 (A) in the special production including "Oden x shopkeeper time!" In this production display example. ) To As shown in FIG. 637 (H), it is displayed in the lower left portion of the background area to be smaller than that in the normal effect. As a result, the visibility of the numerical region is ensured even when the oden effect image, which will be described later, is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol in the state where each decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.

The oden effect image is an image displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area, and is provided with two types, an oden image and an angry face image.

The oden effect image is displayed at a position overlapping the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, and is displayed in front of each decorative symbol in the variable display that scrolls downward. On the other hand, for each decorative symbol in the temporary stop display, the oden effect image is displayed in front of each decorative symbol in the temporary stop display, and each decorative symbol in the temporary stop display is in front of the oden effect image. The display mode may be the case where it is displayed on the side.

The oden image is one of the images showing the addition / subtraction points of the oden points, which will be described later, displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. The oden image is an isosceles triangle-shaped image that imitates the konjac of the oden species.

The angry face image is one of the effect images displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area and showing the addition / subtraction points of the oden points described later. The angry face image is a perfect circular image that imitates an angry face of a shop owner who sells oden.

FIG. 636 shows 15 oden effect image display effect patterns that define combinations of oden effect images to be displayed in each image display area from the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area. Each oden effect image display effect pattern will be described below.

The oden effect image display effect pattern 01 is an effect pattern in which the oden effect image is not displayed.

The oden effect image display effect pattern 02 and the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 are effect patterns in which one oden effect image is displayed. As shown in FIG. 636, when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area. Further, when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is executed, an angry face image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area. Hereinafter, although the description is omitted, in each effect pattern, whether or not the oden effect image is displayed in each of the left oden effect image display area, the middle oden effect image display area, and the right oden effect image display area, oden. If the effect image is displayed, it is defined whether the oden image or the angry face image is displayed.

The oden effect image display effect pattern 04 to the oden effect image display effect pattern 07 is an effect pattern in which two oden effect images are displayed.

The oden effect image display effect pattern 08 to the oden effect image display effect pattern 15 are effect patterns in which three oden effect images are displayed.

In this production example, first, as shown in FIG. 637 (A), the Oden production image display production is performed as the first time of the Oden production image display production pattern with the start of the “Oden × shopkeeper time!” Production. Execution of pattern 04 is started.

FIGS. 637 (A) and 637 (B) show the display state displayed when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed. FIG. 637 (A) shows a state in which the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area and the oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the oden effect image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. Indicates no state.

At the lower left end of the display area, a rectangular-shaped cumulative oden point display area having a long side about half the length of the display area in the vertical direction is provided. In the cumulative oden point display area, as the "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Production starts, the character string indicating the cumulative oden points will be displayed, and the "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Production will end. As a result, the character string indicating the cumulative oden points is not displayed. The cumulative oden points will be described later.

A character string such as "XX points!" Is vertically written in the cumulative oden point display area. Cumulative oden points are displayed in the "XX" part of this character string. If the oden point is a negative value, a "-" sign is added and displayed. The method of calculating the cumulative oden points will be described later. In addition, the value of the cumulative oden points is "0" in the state where the "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Production is started.

In FIG. 637 (A), the initial value of the cumulative oden points is "0" points, and the oden points are not added or subtracted, so that the character string "0 points!" Is displayed. The state attached to the cumulative oden point display area is shown.

FIG. 637 (B) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 637 (A).

Oden effect image display When a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) elapses from the timing when the execution of the effect pattern 04 is started (display state shown in FIG. 637 (A)), the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are displayed. It moves so as to scroll downward and changes from the display state in which the variable display is displayed to the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. Specifically, the decorative design with the number "5" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "6" as the middle decorative design, and the decoration with the number "6" as the right decorative design. The symbols are moved so as to scroll downward, and the display state is changed from the variable display state to the temporary stop display state.

Further, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area and the middle oden effect image display area, respectively.

As a result, the oden image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol in the temporarily stopped display state, and the oden image is displayed on the front side of the middle decorative symbol in the temporarily stopped display state. Become.

Further, when a predetermined time (specifically, 1.5 seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. 637 (A), the intermediate decoration symbol in the state of being temporarily stopped is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area. It will be in the state of being displayed on the front side of the oden image in the state of being in the state.

Here, the acquired oden point display area will be described. The acquired oden point display area is three horizontally long rectangular display areas provided above the display area. The three acquired oden point display areas are arranged in the left-right direction, and are provided in the order of left-to-left acquired oden point display area, middle-acquired oden point display area, and right-acquired oden point display area. In addition, the three acquired oden point display areas correspond to the oden effect image display area, the left acquired oden point display area is above the left oden effect image display area, and the left acquired oden point display area is above the middle oden effect image display area. A middle-acquired oden point display area is provided, and a right-acquired oden point display area is provided above the right oden effect image display area.

In addition, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the arbitrary oden effect image display effect pattern, the oden effect is placed on the front side of each decorative symbol in the temporarily stopped display state. When an image is displayed, an arbitrary oden point increase / decrease image is displayed in the acquired oden point display area corresponding to the oden effect image display area in which the oden effect image is displayed.

Next, the oden point increase / decrease image will be described. The oden point increase / decrease image is an effect image showing the addition / subtraction of oden points displayed in the left-acquired oden point display area to the right-acquired oden point display area. ing.

For example, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02, the oden image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol in the state of being temporarily stopped. If it is displayed, the left-acquired oden point display area corresponding to the oden production image display area where the oden image is displayed is an oden showing a symbol and number such as "+1" indicating that the oden points have increased by 1 point. The point increase image is displayed.

Further, for example, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03, anger is placed on the front side of the left decorative pattern in the state of being temporarily stopped. When a face image is displayed, a symbol such as "-1" indicating that the oden points have decreased by 1 point in the left-acquired oden point display area corresponding to the oden production image display area where the angry face image is displayed. An image showing the number of Oden points is displayed.

It should be noted that, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern, the oden effect is placed on the front side of each decorative symbol in the temporarily stopped display state. If the image is not displayed, the oden point increase / decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

In this effect example, a temporary stop display is displayed at a timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 637 (A). Since the oden image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative pattern in the state, in FIG. 637 (B), a symbol such as "+1" indicating that the oden points have increased by 1 point in the left acquired oden point display area. The oden point increase image showing the number is displayed.

Here, a method of calculating the cumulative oden points displayed in the cumulative oden point display area will be described. Predetermined Oden effect image display At the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the effect pattern, the Oden point increase / decrease image appears in the left acquired oden point display area to the right acquired oden point display area. If it is displayed, the added / subtracted acquired oden points are calculated by adding the oden points shown in the oden point increase / decrease image. If the calculated addition / subtraction earned oden points are a value other than "0", the cumulative oden points indicated by "XX" in the character string such as "XX points!" Attached to the cumulative oden point display area will be compared. By adding the addition / subtraction earned oden points, the value obtained by the addition becomes a new cumulative oden point. The new cumulative oden points are attached to the cumulative oden point display area at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern. It is displayed as the value of the new cumulative oden points indicated by "XX" in the character string such as "!".

It should be noted that, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) elapses from the start of execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern, the oden points increase / decrease in the left acquired oden point display area to the right acquired oden point display area. When the image is not displayed, the cumulative oden points displayed in the cumulative oden point display area do not change.

In addition, at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern, the oden points increase / decrease in the left-acquired oden point display area to the right-acquired oden point display area. Increase / decrease of oden points on which the image is displayed When the added / subtracted acquired oden points calculated by adding the oden points shown in the image are "0" (for example, one oden point increase image and the oden point decrease image are When one is displayed), the cumulative oden points displayed in the cumulative oden point display area do not change.

In this effect example, the left oden effect image is displayed at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 637 (A). By displaying the oden point increase / decrease image in any of the display areas from the area to the right oden effect image display area, the oden points indicated by the oden point increase / decrease image are added. The displayed oden point increase / decrease image is only the oden point increase image showing a symbol and a number such as "+1" displayed in the left oden effect image display area.

Further, since the value of the cumulative oden points is "0", the character string attached to the cumulative oden point display area is "0 points!".

As a result, the addition / subtraction oden point value "+1" is added to the cumulative oden point value "0", so that the new cumulative oden point value becomes "+1".

As a result, in the display state shown in FIG. 637 (B), a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 637 (A) was started. , The character string attached to the cumulative oden point display area is "1 point!".

The display state at the timing when the predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is started is the timing when the predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) is continued. Execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is completed.

In this effect example, the display state at the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 shown in FIG. 637 (A) is shown in FIG. 637 (A). The display state shown in B), and after the display state shown in FIG. 637 (B) is continued for a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second), the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed. Is the end.

When the next predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is executed after the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is completed, the oden image display effect interval extends over a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second). Will be done.

Specifically, at the same time as the oden image display effect interval is started, the oden effect image in the oden effect image display area is displayed according to the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern whose execution is completed. Then, the oden point increase / decrease image in the acquired oden point display area is not displayed.

In addition, at the same time as the oden image display effect interval is started, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, which are temporarily stopped and displayed by the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern whose execution is completed, are displayed below again. It will be displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in the direction. The variable display resumed in the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is displayed by scrolling the decorative symbol downward until the execution of the next predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is executed and the temporary stop state is reached. The variable display state is maintained.

In this effect example, the oden image display effect interval is started when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is completed. At the same time as the oden image display effect interval is started, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area and the oden point increase image in the left acquired oden point display area are displayed as shown in FIG. 637 (B). It will be in a state where it is not.

Further, at the same time as the oden image display effect interval is started, the oden effect image display effect pattern 04, which has been executed, causes the decorative pattern with the number "5" as the left decorative pattern to be replaced with the number "5" as the middle decorative pattern. The decorative symbol with "6" and the decorative symbol with the number "6" as the right decorative symbol were temporarily stopped, and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol were all displayed in a variable manner. Is resumed.

In the variable display resumed in the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, each decorative symbol shown in FIG. 637 (D) is temporarily stopped after the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 shown in FIG. 637 (C) is started. Until the state is reached, the variable display state in which the decorative symbol is scrolled downward and displayed is maintained.

FIG. 637 (C) shows a state immediately after the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09, which is the second time of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09, in the “oden × shopkeeper time!” Production is started.

At this time, since the oden effect image display effect pattern is the oden effect image display effect pattern 09, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the right oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area. An angry face image is displayed in the effect image display area on the front side of each decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner.

Further, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are maintained in a variable display state in which the decorative symbol scrolls downward and is moved and displayed. Further, as the production of "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Is started in the state shown in FIG. 637 (A), the character string "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Attached in the production mode display area continues. The displayed state is maintained. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 637 (B), the character string "1 point!" Attached to the cumulative oden point display area is continuously displayed. In addition, the oden point increase / decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

When a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 shown in FIG. 637 (C), the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner. From the state, the temporary stop is displayed. Specifically, the decorative design with the number "3" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "4" as the middle decorative design, and the decoration with the number "4" as the right decorative design. Each symbol changes from the variable display state to the temporary stop display state. At this time, in the state shown in FIG. 637 (C), each oden effect image displayed in each oden effect image display area is displayed on the front side of each decorative symbol in the state of being temporarily stopped. The state is continuing.

Further, among the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed when a predetermined time (specifically, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 637 (C). The decorative symbol with the number "3" as the left decorative symbol is displayed in front of the oden image displayed in the left oden effect image display area. As a result, in the oden effect image display area, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area becomes invisible, the angry face image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the angry face image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. It will be in the state of being.

Further, when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. 637 (C), in the oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the right oden effect is produced. Corresponding to the state where the angry face image is displayed in the image display area, in the acquired oden point display area, the medium acquired oden point display area indicates that the oden points are reduced by 1 point "-1". The oden point reduction image showing symbols and numbers such as "-1" is displayed in the right acquisition oden point display area, respectively, indicating that the oden points are reduced by 1 point. It becomes.

At this time, the oden point increase / decrease image displayed in the acquired oden point display area is the oden point decrease image showing "-1" in the middle acquired oden point display area and "-1" in the right acquired oden point display area. The value of the addition / subtraction acquisition oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 is "-2", which is the sum of "-1" and "-1".

In addition, since the calculated value of the added / subtracted acquired oden points is "-2" and is a value other than "0", the value of the accumulated oden points shown in the cumulative oden point display area is added. .. In the state shown in FIG. 637 (C), since the character string attached to the cumulative oden point display area is "1 point!", The value of the cumulative oden point is "1", and this value is used. On the other hand, by adding "-2", which is the value of the addition / subtraction acquisition oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 09, the new cumulative oden point value becomes "-1".

As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 637 (D), which is the timing at which a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. 637 (C), the cumulative oden point display area is assigned. The character string is "-1 point!".

FIG. 637 (D) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 shown in FIG. 637 (C). There is.

Specifically, in the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the decorative symbol with the number "3" as the left decorative symbol and the decorative symbol with the number "4" as the middle decorative symbol are the right decorative symbols. The decorative symbols with the number "4" are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Further, in the oden effect image display area, an angry face image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and an angry face image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area.

In addition, in the earned oden point display area, the oden point reduction image showing a symbol and a number such as "-1" indicating that the oden point is reduced by 1 point is displayed in the right earned oden point display area in the middle earned oden point display area. Is in a state in which a symbol such as "-1" indicating that the oden points are reduced by 1 point and an oden point reduction image showing a number are displayed respectively.

Further, in the cumulative oden point display area, a character string such as "-1 point!" Is attached.

After the display state shown in FIG. 637 (D) is continued for a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second), it is the second time of the oden effect image display effect pattern in the "oden x shopkeeper time!" Production. The execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 ends.

After the display state shown in FIG. 637 (D) is continued for a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second), the oden image display effect interval becomes longer as the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 ends. To be started.

At the same time as the oden image display effect interval is started, the angry face image in the middle oden effect image display area, the angry face image in the right oden effect image display area, and the middle acquisition shown in FIG. 637 (D). The oden point reduction image in the oden point display area and the oden point reduction image in the right acquired oden point display area are not displayed.

Further, at the same time as the oden image display effect interval is started, the decorative pattern with the number "3" as the left decorative pattern is changed to the number "3" as the middle decorative pattern by the oden effect image display effect pattern 09 whose execution is completed. The decorative symbol with "4" and the decorative symbol with the number "4" as the right decorative symbol were temporarily stopped, and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol were all displayed in a variable manner. Is resumed.

In the variable display resumed in the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, each decorative symbol shown in FIG. 637 (F) is temporarily stopped after the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 shown in FIG. 637 (E) is started. Until the state is reached, the variable display state in which the decorative symbol is scrolled downward and displayed is maintained.

FIG. 637 (E) shows a state immediately after the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10, which is the third time of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 in the “oden × shopkeeper time!” Production, is started.

At this time, since the oden effect image display effect pattern is the oden effect image display effect pattern 10, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the right oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area. In the effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the front side of each decorative pattern displayed in the variable display state.

Further, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are maintained in a variable display state in which the decorative symbol scrolls downward and is moved and displayed. Further, as the production of "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Is started in the state shown in FIG. 637 (A), the character string "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Attached in the production mode display area continues. The displayed state is maintained. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 637 (D), the character string "-1 point!" Attached to the cumulative oden point display area is continuously displayed. In addition, the oden point increase / decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

When a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 shown in FIG. 637 (E), the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner. From the state, the temporary stop is displayed. Specifically, the decorative design with the number "1" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "2" as the middle decorative design, and the decoration with the number "2" as the right decorative design. Each symbol changes from the variable display state to the temporary stop display state. At this time, in the state shown in FIG. 637 (E), each oden effect image displayed in each oden effect image display area is displayed on the front side of each decorative symbol in the state of being temporarily stopped. The state is continuing.

Further, among the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed when a predetermined time (specifically, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 637 (E). The decorative symbol with the number "2" as the intermediate decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the angry face image displayed in the intermediate effect image display area. As a result, in the oden effect image display area, the angry face image in the middle oden effect image display area becomes invisible, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. It will be in the state of being.

Further, when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. 637 (E), in the oden effect image display area, the left oden effect image display area is the oden image, and the right oden effect image is displayed. Corresponding to the state where each oden image is displayed in the display area, in the acquired oden point display area, the left acquired oden point display area has a symbol such as "+1" indicating that the oden point increases by 1 point. The oden point increase image showing a number is displayed, and the right acquisition oden point display area is in a state where a symbol such as "+1" indicating that the oden point is increased by 1 point and an oden point increase image showing a number are displayed respectively.

At this time, the oden point increase / decrease image displayed in the acquired oden point display area shows the oden point increase image showing "+1" in the left acquired oden point display area and "+1" in the right acquired oden point display area. Along with the oden point increase image, the value of the addition / subtraction acquisition oden point in the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is "+2" which is the sum of "+1" and "+1".

Further, since the calculated value of the added / subtracted acquired oden points is "+2" and is a value other than "0", the value of the accumulated oden points shown in the cumulative oden point display area is added. In the state shown in FIG. 637 (E), the character string attached to the cumulative oden point display area is "-1 point!", So that the value of the cumulative oden point is "-1". By adding "+2", which is the value of addition / subtraction oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 10, to the value, the new cumulative oden point value becomes "1".

As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 637 (D), which is the timing at which a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. 637 (E), the cumulative oden point display area is assigned. The character string is "1 point!".

FIG. 637 (F) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 shown in FIG. 637 (E). There is.

Specifically, in the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the decorative symbol with the number "1" as the left decorative symbol and the decorative symbol with the number "2" as the middle decorative symbol are the right decorative symbols. The decorative symbols with the number "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Further, in the oden effect image display area, the left oden effect image display area is displayed with the oden image, and the right oden effect image display area is displayed with the oden image.

Also, in the acquired oden point display area, the left acquired oden point display area is the oden point increase image showing a symbol and number such as "+1" indicating that the oden point is increased by 1 point, and the right acquired oden point display area is the oden point. A symbol such as "+1" indicating that is increased by 1 point and an oden point increase image indicating a number are displayed respectively.

Further, in the cumulative oden point display area, a character string such as "1 point!" Is attached.

After the display state shown in FIG. 637 (F) is continued for a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second), it is the third time of the oden effect image display effect pattern in the "oden x shopkeeper time!" Production. The execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is completed.

After the display state shown in FIG. 637 (F) is continued for a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second), the oden image display effect interval is set as the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is completed. To be started.

At the same time as the oden image display effect interval starts, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area, the oden image in the right oden effect image display area, and the left acquired oden point shown in FIG. 637 (F). The oden point increase image in the display area and the oden point increase image in the right acquired oden point display area are not displayed.

Further, at the same time as the oden image display effect interval is started, the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 whose execution is completed causes the decorative symbol with the number "1" as the left decorative symbol to be replaced with the number "1" as the middle decorative symbol. The decorative symbol with "2" and the decorative symbol with the number "2" as the right decorative symbol were temporarily stopped, and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol were all displayed in a variable manner. Is resumed.

In the variable display resumed in the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, each decorative symbol shown in FIG. 637 (H) is temporarily stopped after the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 shown in FIG. 637 (G) is started. Until the state is reached, the variable display state in which the decorative symbol scrolls downward and is moved and displayed is maintained.

FIG. 637 (G) shows a state immediately after the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08, which is the fourth time of the oden effect image display effect pattern, in the “oden × shopkeeper time!” Production is started.

At this time, since the oden effect image display effect pattern is the oden effect image display effect pattern 08, the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed in the middle oden effect image display area, and the right oden effect is produced in the middle oden effect image display area. In the image display area, the oden image is displayed in the front side of each decorative pattern displayed in the variable display state.

Further, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are maintained in a variable display state in which the decorative symbol scrolls downward and is moved and displayed. Further, as the production of "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Is started in the state shown in FIG. 637 (A), the character string "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Attached in the production mode display area continues. The displayed state is maintained. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 637 (F), the character string "1 point!" Attached to the cumulative oden point display area is continuously displayed. In addition, the oden point increase / decrease image is not displayed in the acquired oden point display area.

When a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) has elapsed from the start of execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 shown in FIG. 637 (G), the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner. From the state, the temporary stop is displayed. Specifically, the decorative design with the number "6" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "7" as the middle decorative design, and the decoration with the number "7" as the right decorative design. Each symbol changes from the variable display state to the temporary stop display state. At this time, in the state shown in FIG. 637 (G), each oden effect image displayed in each oden effect image display area is displayed on the front side of each decorative symbol in the state of being temporarily stopped. The state is continuing.

Further, when a predetermined time (specifically, 1.5 seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. 637 (G), an effect in which an arbitrary decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the oden effect image is displayed. By continuing the display state of each oden effect image display area without being performed, the left oden effect image display area is the oden image, the middle oden effect image display area is the oden image, and the right oden effect image display area is the oden image. Each is displayed.

Further, when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. 637 (G), in the oden effect image display area, the left oden effect image display area is the oden image, and the middle oden effect image. Corresponding to the state where the oden image is displayed in the display area and the oden image is displayed in the right oden effect image display area, the left acquired oden point display area has 1 oden point in the acquired oden point display area. An oden point increase image showing a symbol and number such as "+1" indicating an increase, and an oden point increase image showing a symbol and number such as "+1" indicating that the oden point is increased by 1 point in the medium acquisition oden point display area. However, in the right-acquired oden point display area, a symbol such as "+1" indicating that the oden points are increased by 1 point and an oden point increase image indicating a number are displayed respectively.

At this time, the oden point increase / decrease image displayed in the acquired oden point display area shows the oden point increase image showing "+1" in the left acquired oden point display area and "+1" in the middle acquired oden point display area. Along with the oden point increase image and the oden point increase image showing "+1" in the right acquisition oden point display area, the values of the addition / subtraction acquisition oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 are "+1" and "+1". Is the sum of "" and "+1", which is "+3".

Further, since the calculated value of the added / subtracted acquired oden points is "+3" and is a value other than "0", the value of the accumulated oden points shown in the cumulative oden point display area is added. In the state shown in FIG. 637 (G), the character string attached to the cumulative oden point display area is "1 point!", So that the value of the cumulative oden point is "1". On the other hand, by adding "+3", which is the value of addition / subtraction oden points in the oden effect image display effect pattern 08, the new cumulative oden point value becomes "4".

As a result, in the state shown in FIG. 637 (H), which is the timing at which a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) elapses from the state shown in FIG. 637 (G), the cumulative oden point display area is assigned. The character string is "4 points!".

FIG. 637 (H) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 shown in FIG. 637 (G). There is.

Specifically, in the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the decorative symbol with the number "6" as the left decorative symbol and the decorative symbol with the number "7" as the middle decorative symbol are the right decorative symbols. The decorative symbols with the number "7" are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Further, in the oden effect image display area, the left oden effect image display area displays the oden image, the middle oden effect image display area displays the oden image, and the right oden effect image display area displays the oden image. There is.

Also, in the acquired oden point display area, the left acquired oden point display area is the oden point increase image showing a symbol and number such as "+1" indicating that the oden point is increased by 1 point, and the middle acquired oden point display area is the oden point. Oden point increase image showing a symbol and number such as "+1" indicating that is increased by 1 point, right acquisition Oden point display area is an oden showing a symbol and number such as "+1" indicating that Oden points are increased by 1 point Each point increase image is displayed.

Further, in the cumulative oden point display area, a character string such as "4 points!" Is attached.

After the display state shown in FIG. 637 (H) is continued for a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second), this is the fourth time of the oden effect image display effect pattern in the "oden x shopkeeper time!" Production. The execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 ends.

When the execution of the next predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is not performed after the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is completed, the oden image display effect end interval is set to a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second). ).

Specifically, at the same time as the oden image display effect end interval is started, the oden effect image in the oden effect image display area is displayed by the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern whose execution is completed. Then, the oden point increase / decrease image in the acquired oden point display area is not displayed.

In addition, as the production of "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Is started, the character string "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Attached in the production mode display area is continuously displayed.

In addition, when the execution of the next predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is not performed after the execution of the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern is completed, the "XX points!" Attached to the cumulative oden point display area. The character string "" is continuously displayed.

In addition, at the same time as the end interval of the oden image display effect is started, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, which are temporarily stopped and displayed by the predetermined oden effect image display effect pattern whose execution is completed, are decorated. The state in which the symbol is displayed in a variable manner is resumed. In the variable display resumed in the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, as the reach state occurs, the decorative symbol with the same arbitrary number as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. Until then, the variable display state in which the decorative symbol scrolls downward and is moved and displayed is maintained.

In this effect example, when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 is completed, the next oden effect image display effect pattern is not executed, so that the oden image display effect end interval is started. At the same time as the end interval of the oden image display effect is started, the oden image in the left oden effect image display area and the oden point increase image in the left acquired oden point display area are displayed as shown in FIG. 637 (H). It will be in a state where it will not be done.

Further, as the production of "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Is started in the state shown in FIG. 637 (A), the character string "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Attached in the production mode display area continues. The displayed state is maintained.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 637 (H), the character string "4 points!" Attached to the cumulative oden point display area is continuously displayed.

Further, at the same time as the end interval of the oden image display effect is started, the decorative symbol with the number "6" as the left decorative symbol is changed to the number as the middle decorative symbol by the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 whose execution is completed. The decorative symbol with "7" and the decorative symbol with the number "7" as the right decorative symbol were temporarily stopped, and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are all variable. The state that has been done is resumed.

The oden image display effect end interval is continued for a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second). At the timing when a predetermined time (specifically, 1 second) elapses after the end interval of the oden image display effect is completed, the decorative symbol with a predetermined number is displayed as a temporary stop from the state in which the decorative symbol with a predetermined number is displayed in a variable manner as the left decorative symbol. It will be in a state of being. Next, when a predetermined time (specifically, 2 seconds) elapses after the end interval of the oden image display effect ends, the same predetermined time as the one in which the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol. The decorative pattern with the number is changed from the variable display state to the temporary stop display state, and the reach state occurs. Further, at the timing when the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state in which the middle decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved is maintained.

When a predetermined time (specifically, 5 seconds) elapses after the reach state occurs, the state in which the decorative symbol is changed and displayed changes to the state in which the change is stopped.

Specifically, if the result of the special lottery that triggered the start of "Oden x Shopkeeper Time!" Is lost, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed as the middle decorative symbols. The decorative symbol with a number that is not the same as the decorative symbol with the predetermined number of the state is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decoration with the same number as the decorative symbol with the predetermined number in the state of being temporarily stopped displayed in the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol as the middle decorative symbol. The symbol is stopped and displayed.

With reference to FIGS. 637 (A) to 637 (H), an example of an effect in which the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed four times and "4" is finally displayed as the value of the cumulative oden points has been described. , It is advisable to configure the jackpot expectation to be suggested by the player by the value of the cumulative oden points.

Specifically, based on the result of the special lottery, whether or not to execute the "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Production, and what the final value of the cumulative oden points will be at the end of the "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Production. First determine if the value will be. Next, how many times the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed, in what order the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed, and in each oden effect pattern, the oden effect image (oden image) is displayed when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped. , Angry face image) should be displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern so as to be determined based on the final value of the cumulative oden points.

The higher the final value of the cumulative oden points, the higher the expectation of a big hit. The final value of the cumulative oden points may be configured to be, for example, a value from "-3" to "10". In this case, when the value of the cumulative oden points is "-3" to "0", the decorative symbol may be configured to be stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss without forming a reach state. Further, when the value of the cumulative oden points is "1" to "10", the decorative symbol forms a reach state, and the value obtained by multiplying the cumulative oden points by 10 indicates that the formed reach state is a big hit. It may be configured so that the expected degree is stopped and displayed as a result. For example, when the final value of the cumulative oden points is "4", the jackpot expectation of the reach state that occurs thereafter may be configured to be 40%.

The number of times the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed may be determined up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times). When the upper limit of the number of times to execute the oden effect image display effect pattern is set to 4, the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed once, the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed twice, and the oden When the effect image display effect pattern is executed three times, or when the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed four times, one of the cases is selected based on the special lottery result.

At the start of the "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Production (for example, the display state shown in FIG. 637 (A)), the player displays the number of times the Oden production image display production pattern is executed in the display area. It may be configured to notify the user. In this case, the more times the oden effect image display effect pattern is executed, the higher the final value of the cumulative oden points may be, so the player has a large number of times this effect is executed. You will have a sense of expectation. It should be noted that the more the number of times the oden effect image display effect pattern is actually executed, the larger the final value of the cumulative oden points may be.

With such a configuration, the jackpot expectation can be specifically known from the number of displayed points. The number of points increases or decreases each time the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol.

Although the embodiment in which the oden image and the angry face image are displayed as the oden effect image is shown with reference to FIGS. 636 and 637, only the oden image or only the angry face image is displayed as the oden effect image. An embodiment in which the effect is executably modified will be described below with reference to FIGS. 638, 639, and 640.

Since the various embodiments described below are basically modifications of FIGS. 636 and 637, the modified configurations will be particularly described, but the configurations not described will be basically described in FIGS. 636 and 637. It is the same as the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 637.

FIG. 638 (A) is a diagram showing a table in which an effect pattern capable of executing the “super oden time!” Effect, which is an effect in which only the oden image is displayed as the oden effect image, is defined. Further, FIG. 639 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area when the “super oden time!” Effect is executed. Specifically, FIGS. 639 (A) to 639 (H) show display examples in chronological order when "Super Oden Time!" Is executed as an effect corresponding to the hold. That is, FIGS. 639 (A), 639 (B), 639 (C), 639 (D), 639 (E), 639 (F), 639 (G), 639 (H). The production progresses in order.

As shown in FIG. 638 (A), in the "super oden time!" Production, only the oden image is displayed as the oden production image.

639 (A) and 639 (B) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" Effect.

Further, FIGS. 639 (C) and 639 (D) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" Production.

Further, FIGS. 639 (E) and 639 (F) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" Production.

Further, FIGS. 639 (G) and 639 (H) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" Production.

In this way, the cumulative oden points may not be reduced. In this case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the cumulative oden points are reduced and the player is discouraged.

FIG. 638 (B) is a diagram showing a table in which an effect pattern capable of executing the “storekeeper rage time!” Effect, which is an effect in which only an angry face image is displayed as an oden effect image, is defined. Further, FIG. 640 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area when the “store owner rage time!” Effect is executed. Specifically, FIGS. 640 (A) to 640 (H) show display examples in chronological order when "storekeeper rage time!" Is executed as an effect corresponding to the hold. That is, of FIGS. 640 (A), 640 (B), 640 (C), 640 (D), 640 (E), 640 (F), 640 (G), and 640 (H). The production progresses in order.

As shown in FIG. 638 (B), in the "storekeeper rage time!" Production, only the angry face image is displayed as the oden production image.
FIGS. 640 (A) and 640 (B) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the “store owner rage time!” Production.
Further, FIGS. 640 (C) and 640 (D) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the “store owner rage time!” Production.
Further, FIGS. 640 (E) and 640 (F) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is selected in the “store owner rage time!” Production.
Further, FIGS. 640 (G) and 640 (H) are production examples when the oden production image display production pattern 04 is selected in the “store owner rage time!” Production.

In the "Storekeeper Rage Time!" Production, the display in the cumulative oden point display area starts from "10 points remaining!", And the angry face image is displayed in front of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped. It is structured so that the cumulative oden points gradually decrease.

In this way, the cumulative oden points may not be increased. In this case, the player will visually recognize the "storekeeper rage time!" Production, hoping that the cumulative oden points will not be reduced.

Although the embodiment in which the oden effect image is displayed a predetermined number of times during the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is shown with reference to FIGS. 636 and 637, the effect that the oden effect image is displayed a predetermined number of times during the stop display of the decorative symbol is shown. An embodiment in which the above is practically modified will be described below with reference to FIGS. 641, 642, and 643.

In this embodiment, "Oden x shopkeeper time!", "Super oden time!", And "shopkeeper rage time!" Are implemented as a look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning of the game ball for the first starting port 2002. is doing.

Specifically, it may be configured to determine whether or not to perform these look-ahead effects based on the result of the special lottery that is obtained and acquired by the winning of the game ball for the first starting port 2002.

FIGS. 641 (A) to 641 (H) are tables in the case where the “oden × shopkeeper time!” Production is executed as a look-ahead effect for a predetermined hold (third hold in the figure of FIG. 641 (A)). The examples are shown in chronological order. That is, FIGS. 641 (A), 641 (B), 641 (C), 641 (D), 641 (E), 641 (F), 641 (G), 641 (H). The look-ahead production progresses in order.

FIGS. 641 (A) and 641 (B) are production examples when the oden production image display production pattern 04 is selected in the “oden × shopkeeper time!” Production.

When executing the "Oden x shopkeeper time!" Production as a look-ahead effect, the oden effect image is always displayed in front of the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the oden is displayed while the decorative pattern is stopped. The effect image is displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern, the oden point increase / decrease image is displayed according to the display mode of the oden effect image, and the cumulative oden points are updated according to the displayed oden point increase / decrease image. It should be configured as follows. 641 (A), 641 (C), 641 (E), and 641 (G) show the display state in which the decorative symbol is changing, as shown in FIGS. 641 (B), 641 (D), and 641 (G). F) indicates a display state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 641 (H), each decorative symbol is in a temporary stop state, and from this state, each decorative symbol fluctuates again to form a reach state, and then a display mode showing a big hit or a display mode showing a loss. It will be in the state of being stopped and displayed with.

Further, FIGS. 641 (C) and 641 (D) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 14 is selected in the "oden x shopkeeper time!" Production.

Further, FIGS. 641 (E) and 641 (F) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is selected in the "oden x shopkeeper time!" Production.

Further, FIGS. 641 (G) and 641 (H) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 08 is selected in the "oden x shopkeeper time!" Production.

It should be noted that the final value of the cumulative oden points should be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect will be a display mode indicating a big hit. ..

In this way, by increasing or decreasing the cumulative oden points over a plurality of variable displays, it is possible to make the player interested in the stop mode of the decorative symbol.

FIGS. 642 (A) to 642 (H) show a display example when "Super Oden Time!" Is executed as a look-ahead effect for a predetermined hold (third hold in the figure of FIG. 642 (A)). It is shown in chronological order. That is, the look-ahead effect proceeds in the order of FIG. 642 (A), FIG. 642 (B), FIG. 642 (C), FIG. 642 (D), FIG. 642 (E), FIG. To go.

FIGS. 642 (A) and 642 (B) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" Effect.

When the "Super Oden Time!" Production is executed as the look-ahead effect, the oden effect image is always displayed in front of the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the oden effect is performed while the decorative pattern is stopped. The image is displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern, the oden point increase / decrease image is displayed according to the display mode of the oden production image, and the cumulative oden point is updated according to the displayed oden point increase / decrease image. It is good to configure in. 642 (A), 642 (C), 642 (E), and 642 (G) show the display state in which the decorative symbol is changing, as shown in FIGS. 642 (B), 642 (D), and 642 (G). F) indicates a display state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 642 (H), each decorative symbol is in a temporary stop state, and from this state, each decorative symbol fluctuates again to form a reach state, and then a display mode showing a big hit or a display mode showing a loss. It will be in the state of being stopped and displayed with.

Further, FIGS. 642 (C) and 642 (D) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the "super oden time!" Production.

Further, FIGS. 642 (E) and 642 (F) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" Production.

Further, FIGS. 642 (G) and 642 (H) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" Production.

It should be noted that the final value of the cumulative oden points should be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect will be a display mode indicating a big hit. ..

643 (A) to 643 (H) are display examples when "storekeeper rage time!" Is executed as a look-ahead effect for a predetermined hold (third hold in the figure of FIG. 643 (A)). It is shown in chronological order. That is, the look-ahead effect progresses in the order of FIG. 643 (A), FIG. 643 (B), FIG. 643 (C), FIG. 643 (D), FIG. 643 (E), FIG. 643 (F), and FIG. 643 (G). To go.

FIGS. 643 (A) and 643 (B) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the “store owner rage time!” Production.

When executing the "storekeeper rage time!" Production as a look-ahead effect, the oden effect image is always displayed in front of the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the oden effect is performed while the decorative pattern is stopped. The image is displayed on the front side or the back side of the decorative pattern, the oden point increase / decrease image is displayed according to the display mode of the oden production image, and the cumulative oden point is updated according to the displayed oden point increase / decrease image. It is good to configure in. 643 (A), 643 (C), 643 (E), and 643 (G) show the display state in which the decorative symbol is changing, as shown in FIGS. 643 (B), 643 (D), and 643 (G). F) indicates a display state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 643 (H), each decorative symbol is in a temporary stop state, and from this state, each decorative symbol fluctuates again to form a reach state, and then a display mode showing a big hit or a display mode showing a loss. It will be in the state of being stopped and displayed with.

Further, FIGS. 643 (C) and 643 (D) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the “store owner rage time!” Production.

Further, FIGS. 643 (E) and 643 (F) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is selected in the "store owner rage time!" Production.

Further, FIGS. 643 (G) and 643 (H) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the “store owner rage time!” Production.

It should be noted that the final value of the cumulative oden points should be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the start winning that triggered the start of the look-ahead effect will be a display mode indicating a big hit. ..

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 636 to 643, when the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped or stopped is displayed on the front side of the oden effect image, the entire oden effect image is displayed by the decorative pattern. Although it was configured to be hidden, when these embodiments are modified to display a decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped or stopped displayed on the front side of the oden effect image, a part of the oden effect image is displayed. May be configured to be visible.

644 (A) to 644 (C) show embodiments that are modified from the embodiments described with reference to FIG. 643. This embodiment shows the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in the “store owner rage time!”.

FIG. 644 (A) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started, and FIG. 644 (B) shows a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 644 (A). Then, at the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the display state in which all the angry face images are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area is shown. ing. Further, in FIG. 644 (C), the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display are displayed at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 644 (A) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the area, the display state in which all the angry face images are displayed behind the decorative pattern is shown.

As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, even when the angry face image is hidden by the stop-displayed decorative pattern, a part of the angry face image is visible to the player.

644 (D) to 644 (F) show embodiments that are modified from the embodiments described with reference to FIG. 642. This embodiment shows the display state when the Oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in "Super Oden Time!".

FIG. 644 (D) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started, and FIG. 644 (E) shows a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 644 (D). Then, at the timing when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the display state in which all the oden images are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area is shown. There is. Further, in FIG. 644 (F), the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display are displayed at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the display state of FIG. 644 (D) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the area, the display state in which all the oden face images are displayed behind the decorative pattern is shown.

As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, even when the oden image is hidden by the decorative pattern displayed as a stop, a part of the oden image is visible to the player.

By adopting such a configuration, how many angry face images or oden images are displayed in the left oden effect image display area to the right oden effect image display area before the temporary stop display or the stop display of the decorative pattern is performed. It becomes possible for the player to confirm whether or not it was displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, when the oden image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped or stopped, the oden point increase image is displayed and the cumulative oden point value is increased by "1". When an angry face image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped or stopped, the oden point reduction image is displayed and the cumulative oden point value is reduced by "1". Although the embodiment is shown, the cumulative oden points may be changed when the oden image or the angry face image is displayed behind the decorative symbol which is temporarily stopped or stopped.

645 (A) to 645 (F) show embodiments that are modified from the embodiments described with reference to FIG. 641. FIGS. 645 (A) to 645 (C) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 05 is executed in "oden x shopkeeper time!" In the present embodiment. Further, FIGS. 645 (D) to 645 (F) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is executed in "oden x shopkeeper time!" In the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, when the oden image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. In addition, when the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed, the cumulative oden points are increased by 3.

Further, when the oden image is displayed behind the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. In addition, when the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed, the cumulative oden points are reduced by 1.

Further, when the angry face image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, the oden point reduction image with the character string "-3" is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. In addition, when the oden point reduction image with the character string "-3" is displayed, the cumulative oden points are reduced by 3.

Further, when the oden image is displayed behind the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. In addition, when the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed, the cumulative oden points are increased by 1.

FIG. 645 (A) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 05 is started.

In FIG. 645 (B), an angry face image is decorated in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 645 (A) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is displayed on the front side of the design, and shows the display state in which the oden point reduction image with the character string "-3" attached to the left acquired oden point display area is displayed. Also, in the middle oden production image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquisition oden point display area. Shows the displayed state. In addition, it shows the display state where "-4 points!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 645 (C), the angry face image is displayed as a decorative symbol in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 645 (A) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is displayed on the back side of, and shows the display state in which the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. Also, in the middle oden production image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquisition oden point display area. Shows the displayed state. It also shows the display state in which "0 points!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 645 (D) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 10 is started.

In FIG. 645 (E), the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 645 (D) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is displayed on the back side of, and shows the display state in which the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" attached to the left acquired oden point display area is displayed. Also, in the middle oden production image display area, the angry face image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-3" is displayed in the middle acquisition oden point display area. Indicates the display status that has become. In addition, in the right oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. Indicates the display status. It also shows the display state in which "-1 point!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 645 (F), the oden image is displayed as a decorative symbol in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 645 (D) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is displayed on the back side of, and shows the display state in which the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" attached to the left acquired oden point display area is displayed. Also, in the middle oden production image display area, the angry face image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the middle acquisition oden point display area. Shows the displayed state. Also, in the right oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. Shows the displayed state. It also shows the display state in which "-1 point!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In the present embodiment, the cumulative oden points are increased or decreased even when the oden effect image is displayed behind the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed. For this reason, the player pays attention to the display mode of all the displayed oden effect images, and it is possible to further improve the interest when the decorative design is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the oden image or the angry face image is hidden by the stopped-displayed decorative pattern, a part of the oden image or the angry face image can be visually recognized by the player. Further, the shape of the visible portion enables the player to determine whether the hidden oden effect image is the oden image or the angry face image.

It should be noted that the decorative pattern displayed as a stop may be configured to hide the entire oden image or angry face image.

646 (A) to 646 (F) show an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 642. FIGS. 646 (A) to 646 (C) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed in the "super oden time!" In the present embodiment. Further, FIGS. 646 (D) to 646 (F) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in the "super oden time!" In the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, when the oden image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. In addition, when the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed, the cumulative oden points are increased by 3.

Further, when the oden image is displayed behind the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. In addition, when the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed, the cumulative oden points are reduced by 1.

FIG. 646 (A) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started.

In FIG. 646 (B), the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 646 (A) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is displayed on the front side of, and shows the display state in which the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, it shows the display state in which "3 points!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 646 (C), when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 646 (A) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the oden image is the decorative symbol in the left oden effect image display area. It shows the display state in which the oden point reduction image is displayed on the back side and the character string "-1" is added to the left acquired oden point display area. It also shows the display state in which "-1 point!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 646 (D) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started.

In FIG. 646 (E), the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 646 (D) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is displayed on the front side of, and shows the display state in which the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. Also, in the middle oden production image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquisition oden point display area. Shows the displayed state. Also, in the right oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. Shows the displayed state. In addition, it shows the display state in which "1 point!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 646 (F), the oden image is displayed in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 646 (D) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is displayed on the back side of, and shows the display state in which the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" attached to the left acquired oden point display area is displayed. Also, in the middle oden production image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquisition oden point display area. Shows the displayed state. Also, in the right oden effect image display area, the oden image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. Shows the displayed state. It also shows the display state in which "-3 points!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In the present embodiment, when the oden image is displayed behind the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, the cumulative oden points are reduced. For this reason, the player pays attention to the display mode of all the displayed oden images, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in how many oden images are displayed and how many of the displayed oden images are displayed in front of the stopped-displayed decorative pattern. ..

647 (A) to 647 (F) show embodiments that are modified from the embodiments described with reference to FIG. 643. FIGS. 647 (A) to 647 (C) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed in the "store owner rage time!" In the present embodiment. Further, FIGS. 647 (D) to 647 (F) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in the "store owner rage time!" In the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, when the angry face image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed, the oden point reduction image with the character string "-3" is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. .. In addition, when the oden point reduction image with the character string "-3" is displayed, the cumulative oden points are reduced by 3.

When an angry face image is displayed behind the stopped-displayed decorative pattern, an oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the acquired oden point display area. In addition, when the oden point decrease image with the character string "+1" is displayed, the cumulative oden points are increased by 1.

FIG. 647 (A) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started.

In FIG. 647 (B), an angry face image is decorated in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 647 (A) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is displayed on the front side of the design, and shows the display state in which the oden point reduction image with the character string "-3" attached to the left acquired oden point display area is displayed. In addition, it shows the display state in which "7 points remaining!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 647 (C), the angry face image is displayed as a decorative symbol in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 647 (A) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is displayed on the back side of, and shows the display state in which the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. In addition, it shows the display state in which "11 points remaining!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 647 (D) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started.

In FIG. 647 (E), an angry face image is decorated in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 647 (D) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is displayed on the front side of the design, and shows the display state in which the oden point reduction image with the character string "-3" attached to the left acquired oden point display area is displayed. Also, in the middle oden production image display area, the angry face image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the middle acquisition oden point display area. Shows the displayed state. Also, in the right oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. Shows the displayed state. In addition, it shows the display state in which "9 points remaining!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In FIG. 647 (F), an angry face image is decorated in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 647 (D) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is displayed on the back side of the design, and shows the display state in which the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area. Also, in the middle oden production image display area, the angry face image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the middle acquisition oden point display area. Shows the displayed state. Also, in the right oden effect image display area, the angry face image is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and the oden point increase image with the character string "+1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. Shows the displayed state. In addition, it shows the display state in which "13 points remaining!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In the present embodiment, when an angry face image is displayed behind the stopped-displayed decorative pattern, the cumulative oden points are increased. Therefore, the player pays attention to the display mode of all the displayed angry face images, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in how many angry face images are displayed and how many of the displayed angry face images are displayed behind the stopped display decorative pattern. It becomes.

FIG. 648 shows an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 642.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 642, only the oden image imitating konjac is displayed as the oden effect image, but in the present embodiment, the oden effect image is on a skewer. It is configured to display an image of a mode in which different types of oden are stabbed. In this embodiment, the production contents other than the oden effect image may be configured in the same manner as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 642.

In the present embodiment, when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started, an oden image imitating konjac is displayed in the left oden effect image display area. In addition, a horizontally long skewer image imitating a skewer is displayed behind the oden image imitating konjac. In FIG. 649 (A), the oden effect image displayed when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started is shown.

When the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started, an oden image imitating konjac is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, and a square-shaped radish is imitated in the middle oden effect image display area. The oden image is displayed. In addition, a horizontally long skewer image imitating a skewer is displayed behind the oden image imitating konjac and the oden image imitating a radish. In FIG. 648 (A), the oden effect image displayed when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started is shown.

When the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started, an oden image imitating konjac is displayed in the left oden effect image display area, and a square-shaped radish is imitated in the middle oden effect image display area. The oden image is displayed, and the oden image that imitates the oden-shaped paste is displayed in the right oden effect image display area. In addition, a horizontally long skewer image imitating a skewer is displayed behind an oden image imitating konjac, an oden image imitating a radish, and an oden image imitating a paste. In FIG. 648 (E), the oden effect image displayed when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is started is shown.

FIGS. 648 (A) to 648 (H) show a display example when "Super Oden Time!" Is executed as a look-ahead effect for a predetermined hold (third hold in the figure of FIG. 648 (A)). It is shown in chronological order. That is, the look-ahead effect progresses in the order of FIGS. 648 (A), 648 (B), 648 (C), 648 (D), 648 (E), 648 (F), and 648 (G). To go.

FIGS. 648 (A) and 648 (B) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the “super oden time!” Effect.

In addition, FIG. 648 (A), FIG. 6485 (C), FIG. 648 (E), and FIG. 648 (G) show the display state in which the decorative symbol is changing, in FIGS. 648 (B), 648 (D), and FIG. 648 (F) indicates a display state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 648 (H), each decorative symbol is in a temporary stop state, and from this state, each decorative symbol fluctuates again to form a reach state, and then a display mode showing a big hit or a display mode showing a loss. It will be in the state of being stopped and displayed with.

Further, FIGS. 648 (C) and 648 (D) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 03 is selected in the “super oden time!” Production.

Further, FIGS. 648 (E) and 648 (F) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the "super oden time!" Production.

Further, FIGS. 648 (G) and 648 (H) are production examples when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is selected in the “super oden time!” Production.

In the present embodiment, the image of the oden type and the image of the skewer can be visually recognized by the player as one effect display. Moreover, even if the image of the oden seed is hidden by the decorative pattern, the image of the skewer has a length corresponding to the number of oden seeds. With such a configuration, it is possible to know how many oden species were displayed before the decorative symbol was stopped and displayed even after the decorative symbol was stopped and displayed.

649 (A) to 649 (F) show an embodiment in which the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 646 is applied to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 648.

FIGS. 649 (A) to 649 (C) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is executed in the "super oden time!" In the present embodiment.

Further, FIGS. 649 (D) to 649 (F) show the display state when the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is executed in the "super oden time!" In the present embodiment.

FIG. 649 (A) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 02 is started.

FIG. 649 (B) shows an oden imitating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 649 (A) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the display state in which the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area is shown. In addition, it shows the display state in which "3 points!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 649 (C) shows an oden image imitating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 649 (A) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" attached to the left acquired oden point display area is displayed. It also shows the display state in which "-1 point!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 649 (D) shows the display state at the timing when the execution of the oden effect image display effect pattern 04 is started.

FIG. 649 (E) shows an oden imitating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 649 (D) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern, and the display state in which the oden point increase image with the character string "+3" is displayed in the left acquired oden point display area is shown. In addition, in the middle oden production image display area, an oden image imitating a radish is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquisition point display area. It shows the display state that has come to be displayed. In addition, in the right oden production image display area, an oden image imitating a paste is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. It shows the display state that has come to be displayed. In addition, it shows the display state in which "1 point!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

FIG. 649 (F) shows an oden imitating konjac in the left oden effect image display area at the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses from the display state of FIG. 649 (D) and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern, and the display state in which the oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" attached to the left acquired oden point display area is displayed is shown. In addition, in the middle oden production image display area, an oden image imitating a radish is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the middle acquisition point display area. It shows the display state that has come to be displayed. In addition, in the right oden production image display area, an oden image imitating a paste is displayed behind the decorative pattern, and an oden point reduction image with the character string "-1" is displayed in the right acquired oden point display area. It shows the display state that has come to be displayed. It also shows the display state in which "-3 points!" Is displayed in the cumulative oden point display area.

In the present embodiment, when the oden image is displayed behind the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, the cumulative oden points are reduced. For this reason, the player pays attention to the display mode of all the displayed oden images, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to make the player interested in how many oden images are displayed and how many of the displayed oden images are displayed in front of the stopped-displayed decorative pattern. ..

In the display area provided by the display means, the effect corresponding to the changing decorative symbol and the look-ahead effect may be performed at the same time. In this case, the change result is shown first during the change. The player's consciousness is directed toward the effect corresponding to the decorative pattern, the look-ahead effect becomes less noticeable, and the impact of the look-ahead effect is diminished. In particular, when the mode of the look-ahead effect is changed, there is a possibility that the player may overlook the changed mode. As described above, the look-ahead effect that suggests the degree of expectation by changing the display mode tends to lack impact, and it is required to enhance the impact as the effect of the look-ahead effect.

In the embodiment shown below, at least a part of the predetermined effect image to be displayed is hidden by displaying another image on the front side once, and then the entire predetermined effect image is displayed on the front side of the other image. It is configured to change the display mode of a predetermined effect image in the state of being displayed in.

With such a configuration, the predetermined effect image becomes smaller, then becomes larger, and is visually recognized by the player in the order of changing the display mode, so that the change in the display mode has an impact. As a matter of fact, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the image.

An example of the effect of the present embodiment is shown below with reference to FIGS. 650 and 651. FIG. 650 is a diagram showing a time chart in this effect example, and FIG. 651 is a diagram showing a display state of a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing in this effect example. There is no notice about the variable display mode of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the display mode of the hold image in the hold display area, the display mode of the hold image in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area, and the like. As long as it is the same as the display mode described with reference to FIG. 623.

FIG. 650 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbol has stopped changing. FIG. 651 (A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which the decorative symbols with the numbers “3”, “5”, and “2” are stopped and displayed from the left.

Further, the hold display area has a circular shape and a white hold image, the first hold display area has a perfect circular shape and a blue hold image, and the second hold display area has a perfect circular shape and a white hold image. The reserved image of No. 3 shows a state in which a white reserved image having a perfect circular shape is displayed in the third reserved display area. The white reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the decorative symbol with the numbers "3", "5", and "2" that are stopped and displayed.

In the present embodiment, as the reserved image, in addition to the white reserved image, the blue reserved image indicates that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is higher than the white reserved image. It is possible to display a green hold image and a red hold image. Also, the expectation when the blue hold image is displayed is the low expectation, the expectation when the green hold image is displayed is the medium expectation, and the expectation when the red hold image is displayed. Is configured to have a high degree of expectation.

When the timing t0 is reached from the state in which the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 651 (A) is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is newly started.

At the timing t7, a plurality of images imitating pine branches with leaves are displayed in an overlapping manner at the lower part of the display area and at the center in the left-right direction. Specifically, an image imitating a pine branch with three leaves at the bottom, two at the middle, and one at the top is displayed. Hereinafter, all of these will be referred to as a pine mark group image.

The pine mark group image is displayed at a position overlapping the intermediate decorative symbol, and is displayed in front of the intermediate decorative symbol in the variable display or the stop display. Further, the pine mark group image has three transparent regions (openings) in which the image located on the rear side can be visually recognized. Further, the pine mark group image is displayed at a position overlapping the hold display area and the first hold display area. As will be described later, the pine mark group image and the hold image and the hold image displayed in the first hold display area are the case where the pine mark group image is displayed on the front side and the hold image and the first hold display. The display mode may be a case where the reserved image displayed in the area is displayed on the front side.

When the display of the pine mark group image is started at the timing t7, the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. FIG. 651 (B) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the pine mark group image is started at the timing t7, and the pine mark group image is the reserved image. It also shows a state in which the image is displayed on the front side of the hold image displayed in the first hold display area.

In this state, the blue reserved image is hidden by the pine mark group image, and only a part of the blue reserved image is visible. Specifically, in the three transparent regions of the pine mark group image, the blue reserved image located behind the pine mark group image is divided into three and can be visually recognized.

Further, the hold image displayed in the first hold display area is hidden by the pine mark group image, and only a part of the hold image displayed in the first hold display area is visible. Specifically, in one transparent area of the pine mark group image and the outer area of the pine mark group image, the hold image displayed in the first hold display area is divided into two and can be visually recognized. ..

At timing t9, the display priority of the pine mark group image and the hold image and the hold image displayed in the first hold display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the hold image and the first hold display area. The state in which the reserved image is displayed in front of the reserved image is changed to the state in which the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

FIG. 651 (C) shows a predetermined timing (timing) after the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image at the timing t9. It is a figure which showed the display state at a predetermined timing) between t9 and timing t10. In this state, the entire blue reserved image is visible. In addition, the entire hold image displayed in the first hold display area is visible.

At the timing t10, the green reserved image is displayed instead of the blue reserved image that has been displayed so far. FIG. 651 (D) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t11) after changing to a state in which the green reserved image is displayed instead of the blue reserved image at timing t10. Is.

At timing t17, the display priority of the pine mark group image and the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is switched, and the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are pine. The state in which the pine mark group image is displayed on the front side of the mark group image changes to the state in which the pine mark group image is displayed on the front side of the hold image and the hold image displayed in the first hold display area.

FIG. 651 (E) shows a predetermined timing (for example,) after the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area at the timing t17. , T18), showing a state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. In this state, a part of the green reserved image located behind is visible in the three transparent areas of the pine mark group image. In addition, a part of the hold image displayed in the first hold display area is visible.

At timing t19, the display priority of the pine mark group image and the hold image and the hold image displayed in the first hold display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the hold image and the first hold display area. The state in which the reserved image is displayed in front of the reserved image is changed to the state in which the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image. FIG. 651 (F) shows a predetermined timing (timing) after the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image at the timing t19. It is a figure which showed the display state at a predetermined timing) between t19 and timing t20. In this state, the entire green reserved image is visible. In addition, the entire hold image displayed in the first hold display area is visible.

At the timing t20, the red reserved image is displayed in place of the green reserved image that has been displayed so far. FIG. 651 (G) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t21) after changing to a state in which the red reserved image is displayed instead of the green reserved image at timing t20. Is.

At the timing t25, the decorative symbols with the numbers "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, respectively, and a reach state occurs. At this time, the variable display state in which the intermediate decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved and displayed is maintained. Further, at the timing t25, the display of the pine mark group image that has been displayed up to that point ends. FIG. 651 (H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at the timing t25 and the display of the pine mark group image ends.

At the timing t33, the intermediate decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in the variable stop state. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the decorative symbol with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol with the number "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the special lottery result is lost, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started from the timing t34, and if the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative symbol is new after the big hit game is completed. Fluctuations begin.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 650 (B) to 650 (E), another effect example regarding the display mode of the hold display will be shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 650 (B), at the timing t10, the display of the blue reserved image is continued without changing the blue reserved image that has been displayed so far. Further, at the timing t20, the green reserved image is displayed instead of the blue reserved image that has been displayed so far.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 650 (C), at the timing t10, the green reserved image is displayed instead of the blue reserved image that has been displayed so far. Further, at the timing t20, the green reserved image that has been displayed up to that point does not change, and the green reserved image continues to be displayed.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 650 (D), at the timing t10, the green reserved image is displayed instead of the white reserved image that has been displayed so far. Further, at the timing t20, the red reserved image is displayed instead of the green reserved image that has been displayed so far.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 650 (E), at the timing t10, the display of the white reserved image is continued without changing the white reserved image that has been displayed so far. Further, at the timing t20, the display of the white reserved image is continued without changing the white reserved image that has been displayed so far.

It is preferable that the effect example of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIGS. 650 (A) to 650 (E) can be executed based on the special lottery result.

In this way, based on the special lottery result, at a predetermined timing (timing t10, timing t20), the holding image suggesting that the jackpot expectation is higher is displayed instead of the currently displayed holding image. Alternatively, the display may be continued at predetermined timings (timing t10, timing t20) without changing the currently displayed reserved image.

The mode of change of the reserved image described with reference to FIGS. 650 (A) to 650 (E) is only an example. Specifically, at the timing t10, the white hold image, the blue hold image, the green hold image, and the red hold image continue to be displayed as they are, or the hold image has a higher expectation. It may be configured to change the display mode. Further, at the timing t20, the white hold image, the blue hold image, the green hold image, and the red hold image continue to be displayed as they are, or the display mode is changed to the hold image with higher expectation. It may be configured to change.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a part of the reserved image (for example, the blue reserved image) suggesting the predetermined jackpot expectation is visually recognized in a manner temporarily hidden by the predetermined image (pine mark group image). After it becomes possible, the entire reserved image becomes visible again, and the reserved image in which the entire reserved image becomes visible again becomes a reserved image suggesting a higher jackpot expectation (for example, the green reserved image). It is configured to switch and display.
With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the change mode of the reserved image as having a more impact.

Further, a part of the reserved image (the reserved image, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area) is hidden by a predetermined image (pine mark group image), and a part of the reserved image is not hidden by the predetermined image. As a result, the player can visually recognize what kind of hold image the hidden hold image is (what color it is).

With such a configuration, it is possible to know the degree of expectation for a big hit in a state where the hold state is hidden.

It should be noted that the entire reserved image (the reserved image, at least one of the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area) may be configured to be hidden by a predetermined image (pine mark group image).

In the present embodiment, an effect example is shown in which the display mode of the reserved image can be changed twice, but the display mode of the reserved image may be changed only once. Alternatively, it may be configured to occur a plurality of times (three times or more).

With such a configuration, as long as a predetermined image (pine mark group image) is displayed, the opportunity to change the display mode of the hold image continues, so that the player can change the display mode of the hold image. It is possible to have a sense of expectation that it will be done.

An example is shown in which the display mode of the reserved image can be changed at a predetermined timing (timing t10, timing t20) when a predetermined image (pine mark group image) is displayed, but the predetermined image is displayed. In some cases, the image may be configured to always change to a hold image (green hold image, red hold image) having a higher expectation of a big hit than the currently displayed hold image (blue hold image).
With such a configuration, since the predetermined image is displayed, it is possible to give the player a great expectation for the change in the display mode of the reserved image.

Further, the length of the period (timing t7-timing t9, timing t17-timing t19) in which the pine mark group image is displayed on the front side of the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is the said. After the hold image and the hold image displayed in the first hold display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image, the hold image can be changed to the hold image in another display mode. It is longer than the length of the period (timing t9-timing t10, timing t19-timing t20) until the appropriate timing.

Further, after the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image, the reserved image is changed to the reserved image in another display mode. The length of the period until the timing that may change is the period (timing t10-timing t17) in which the reserved image and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image. , Timing timing t19-timing t25) is longer than the length.

As described above, the length of the period in which the reserved image is displayed on the front side (for example, 6 seconds and 7 seconds) is the length of the period in which the reserved image is displayed on the rear side (for example, 2 seconds). Is longer than. With such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the period during which the player is maintained in a state in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the degree of expectation suggested by the reserved image.
In addition, the length of the period from when the reserved image is displayed on the front side to when the reserved image changes (for example, from the length of the period when the reserved image is displayed on the rear side (for example, 2 seconds)). 1 second) is shorter. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize the change in the display mode of the reserved image as a series of effects.

The second reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are configured so as not to be hidden by the pine mark group image.

With such a configuration, whether or not the hold is likely to be maximized (it can be determined by visually recognizing the second hold display area and the third hold display area), and whether or not the hold is maximized (the first). 4 It is possible to confirm the hold status well when the player visually recognizes the second hold display area and the fourth hold display area in an attempt to confirm (which can be determined by visually recognizing the hold display area). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels stress, such as a start-up prize being generated even though the number of reserved pieces is the maximum (4 pieces). If it can be confirmed that the number of holds is likely to be the maximum or the number of holds is the maximum, the player operates the handle 302 to change the handle 302 to a state in which the game ball is not fired. Will be made to.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 650 (A) to 650 (E) and FIG. 651, the variation mode of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area has been described, but the first reserved display area has been described. In the reserved image displayed on the screen, the display mode may be changed in the same manner. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as when changing the display mode of the reserved image is obtained.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650 (A), an embodiment in which the hold display area and the first hold display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. In the time chart shown in 650 (A), the hold display area is not hidden by the pine mark group image, and the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image. Embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 652.

In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbol has stopped changing. FIG. 652 (A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which the decorative symbols with the numbers “3”, “5”, and “2” are stopped and displayed from the left.

Further, the hold display area has a circular shape and a white hold image, the first hold display area has a perfect circular shape and a blue hold image, and the second hold display area has a perfect circular shape and a white hold image. The reserved image of is displayed in the third reserved display area, and the blue reserved image having a perfect circular shape is displayed in the third reserved display area. The white reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the decorative symbol with the numbers "3", "5", and "2" that are stopped and displayed.

At the timing t7, the display of the pine mark group image is started in the lower right portion of the display area. When the display of the pine mark group image is started, the pine mark group image is on the front side of the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area. Is displayed.

FIG. 652 (B) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the pine mark group image is started at the timing t7, and the pine mark group image is first reserved. It shows a state in which the white reserved image displayed in the display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are displayed on the front side. In this state, the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area and the blue hold image displayed in the second hold display area are hidden by the pine mark group image and displayed in the first hold display area. Only a part of the white reserved image and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are visible.

At timing t9, the display priority of the pine mark group image, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed. From the state of being displayed in front of the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area and the blue hold image displayed in the second hold display area, the white hold displayed in the first hold display area. The image and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area change to a state in which they are displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

In FIG. 652 (C), the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area at timing t9 are displayed in front of the pine mark group image. It is a figure which showed the display state at the predetermined timing (the predetermined timing between the timing t9 and the timing t10) after changing to the state. In this state, the entire white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are visible.

At the timing t10, the green reserved image is displayed instead of the blue reserved image previously displayed in the second reserved display area. FIG. 652 (D) shows a predetermined timing (for example, timing t11) after the timing t10 changes to a state in which the green reserved image is displayed instead of the blue reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area. It is a figure which showed the display state in).

At timing t17, the display priority of the pine mark group image, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is switched, and the first reserved display area is switched. The white hold image displayed in and the green hold image displayed in the second hold display area are displayed in front of the pine mark group image, and then the pine mark group image is displayed in the first hold display area. It changes to a state in which it is displayed in front of the white reserved image and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area.

FIG. 652 (E) displays the pine mark group image in front of the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area at timing t17. It is a figure which showed the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t18) after changing to a state, and the pine mark group image is the white hold image and the second hold display which are displayed in the 1st hold display area. It shows the state displayed in front of the green reserved image displayed in the area.

At timing t19, the display priority of the pine mark group image, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed. From the state of being displayed in front of the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area and the green hold image displayed in the second hold display area, the white hold displayed in the first hold display area. The image and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area change to a state in which they are displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

In FIG. 652 (F), the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area at timing t19 are displayed in front of the pine mark group image. It is a figure which showed the display state at the predetermined timing (the predetermined timing between the timing t19 and the timing t20) after changing to the state. In this state, the entire white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the green reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are visible.

At the timing t20, the red reserved image is displayed instead of the green reserved image previously displayed in the second reserved display area. FIG. 652 (G) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t21) after changing to a state in which a red hold image is displayed instead of a green hold image at timing t20. ..

At the timing t25, the decorative symbols with the numbers "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, respectively, and a reach state occurs. At this time, the variable display state in which the intermediate decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved and displayed is maintained. FIG. 652 (H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at the timing t25.

At the timing t33, the intermediate decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in the variable stop state. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the decorative symbol with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol with the number "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the special lottery result is lost, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started from the timing t34, and if the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative symbol is new after the big hit game is completed. Fluctuations begin.

An example of an effect of changing the display mode of the hold image in the second hold display area has been shown, but the area for changing the display mode of the hold image is not limited to the second hold display area, and the first hold display area to In any of the display areas of the fourth hold display area, the display mode of the hold image may be changed as in the present effect example.

In the present embodiment, the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area can be hidden by the pine mark group image. In addition, the reserved display area is configured so as not to be hidden. In this way, by configuring the plurality of reserved display areas to be hidden by a predetermined image, it is possible to make the player feel an interest in which reserved image changes. In addition, by configuring the reserved display area so that it is not hidden by a predetermined image, it is possible to prevent the player from being able to confirm the degree of expectation regarding the stop mode of the latest decorative symbol. It becomes possible.

It should be noted that the display mode of the reserved image may be changed. In this case, the display of the pine mark group image ends during the change of the decorative symbol of the reserved image, and the pine mark group image is not displayed and is displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area. In a state where the display mode of the reserved image cannot be changed, the display mode of the reserved image may be changed to continue the variation of the decorative symbol corresponding to the reserved image.

With such a configuration, even when the pine mark group image is displayed, it is possible to change the display mode of the reserved image and make the player feel the interest. Further, since the timing at which the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area can change the display mode and the timing at which the reserved image changes the display mode are different timings, the player can change the display mode. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as causing confusion in the production.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650 (A), an embodiment in which the hold display area and the first hold display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. In the time chart shown in 650 (A), an embodiment modified so that the hold display area to the fourth hold display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image will be described with reference to FIG. 653.

In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbol has stopped changing. FIG. 653 (A) is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which the decorative symbols with the numbers “3”, “5”, and “2” are stopped and displayed from the left.

Further, the reserved display area has a circular white reserved image, the first reserved display area has a circular blue reserved image, and the second reserved display area has a circular white reserved image. However, in the third hold display area, a state in which a white hold image having a circular shape is displayed is shown. The white reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the decorative symbol with the numbers "3", "5", and "2" that are stopped and displayed.

At the timing t7, the display of the pine mark group image is started at the lower part of the display area. When the display of the pine mark group image is started, the pine mark group image is the blue hold image displayed in the hold display area, the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area, and the second hold display. It is displayed in front of the white reserved image displayed in the area.

FIG. 653 (B) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the pine mark group image is started at the timing t7, and the pine mark group image is the hold display. Indicates a state in which the blue reserved image displayed in the area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are displayed on the front side. ing. In this state, the blue reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area are marked with a pine mark. A part of the blue hold image hidden by the group image and displayed in the hold display area, the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area, and the white hold image displayed in the second hold display area. Only each is visible.

At timing t9, the pine mark group image, the blue hold image displayed in the hold display area, the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area, and the white hold displayed in the second hold display area. The display priority with the image is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the blue hold image displayed in the hold display area, the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area, and the second hold display area. From the state of being displayed in front of the white reserved image to the blue reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the second reserved display area. The displayed white hold image changes to the state where it is displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

FIG. 653 (C) shows the blue hold image displayed in the hold display area at the timing t9, the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area, and the white hold displayed in the second hold display area. It is a figure which showed the display state at a predetermined timing (the predetermined timing between the timing t9 and the timing t10) after the image is changed to the state which is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image. In this state, the entire blue hold image displayed in the hold display area, the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area, and the white hold image displayed in the second hold display area are visible. It is possible.

At the timing t10, the green reserved image is displayed in place of the blue reserved image previously displayed in the reserved display area. FIG. 653 (D) shows a predetermined timing (for example, timing) after the timing t10 changes to a state in which the green reserved image is displayed instead of the blue reserved image displayed in the reserved display area. It is a figure which showed the display state in t11).

At timing t17, the pine mark group image, the green hold image displayed in the hold display area, the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area, and the white hold displayed in the second hold display area. The display priority with the image is switched, the green hold image displayed in the hold display area, the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area, and the white hold image displayed in the second hold display area. Is displayed in front of the pine mark group image, the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the first 2 The image changes to a state in which the image is displayed in front of the white image on hold displayed in the hold display area.

FIG. 653 (E) shows the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the second reserved display area in which the pine mark group image is displayed at the timing t17. It is a figure which showed the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t18) after changing to the state which is displayed on the front side from the white hold image, and the pine mark group image is the hold display area. Indicates a state in which the green reserved image displayed in is displayed in front of the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the white reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area. There is.

At timing t19, the pine mark group image, the green hold image displayed in the hold display area, the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area, and the white hold displayed in the second hold display area. The display priority with the image is switched, and the pine mark group image is displayed in the green hold image displayed in the hold display area, the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area, and the second hold display area. From the state displayed in front of the white reserved image to the green reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the white reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, and the second reserved display area. The displayed white hold image changes to the state where it is displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

FIG. 653 (F) shows a green hold image displayed in the hold display area at timing t19, a white hold image displayed in the first hold display area, and a white hold displayed in the second hold display area. It is a figure which showed the display state at a predetermined timing (the predetermined timing between the timing t19 and the timing t20) after the image is changed to the state which is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image. In this state, the entire green hold image displayed in the hold display area, the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area, and the white hold image displayed in the second hold display area are visible. It is possible.

At the timing t20, the red reserved image is displayed in place of the green reserved image previously displayed in the reserved display area. FIG. 653 (G) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t21) after changing to a state in which the red reserved image is displayed instead of the green reserved image at timing t20. Is.

At the timing t25, the decorative symbols with the numbers "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, respectively, and a reach state occurs. At this time, the variable display state in which the intermediate decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved and displayed is maintained. Further, at the timing t25, the display of the pine mark group image that has been displayed up to that point ends. FIG. 653 (H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at the timing t25 and the display of the pine mark group image ends.

At the timing t33, the intermediate decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in the variable stop state. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the decorative symbol with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol with the number "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the special lottery result is lost, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started from the timing t34, and if the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative symbol is new after the big hit game is completed. Fluctuations begin.

Although an example of an effect of changing the display mode of the hold image in the hold display area is shown, the area for changing the display mode of the hold image is not limited to the hold display area, and the hold display area to the fourth hold display area to the fourth hold. In any of the display areas of the display area, the display mode of the reserved image may be changed as in the present effect example.

In the present embodiment, the hold display area to the fourth hold display area can be hidden by the pine mark group image. In this way, by configuring the plurality of reserved display areas to be hidden by a predetermined image, it is possible to make the player feel an interest in which reserved image changes.

FIG. 654 shows an example of production in a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 652.

In the present embodiment, two triangular band-shaped images are displayed above and below the display area, and the band-shaped image displayed below the display area (hereinafter, may be referred to as "lower band-shaped image") is used for the first. The 1st hold display area to the 4th hold display area are hidden. In the present embodiment, the hold display area is provided at the lower left of the display area, and the first hold display area, the second hold display area, the third hold display area, and the fourth hold display area are provided from the left in the right side of the display area. Each hold display area is provided.

The lower strip-shaped image does not overlap with the hold display area, but overlaps with the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area. Further, as the first hold display area, the second hold display area, the third hold display area, and the fourth hold display area become, the area overlapping with the lower strip-shaped image becomes larger. For example, about 1/4 of the lower side of the 1st hold display area overlaps with the lower band-shaped image, but about 3/4 of the lower side of the 4th hold display area overlaps with the lower band-shaped image. It is configured in.
FIGS. 654 (A) to 654 (D) show display examples in chronological order when the effect is executed for a predetermined hold (third hold in the figure of FIG. 654 (A)). That is, the production progresses in the order of FIG. 654 (A), FIG. 654 (B), FIG. 654 (C), and FIG. 654 (D).

In FIG. 654 (A), the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner, a white reserved image having a circular shape is displayed in the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area, and a band-shaped image is displayed above and below the display area. Is displayed. In the figure, the lower strip-shaped image is located at a position overlapping the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area, and is more than the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area. The display state displayed on the back side is also shown.

FIG. 654 (B) shows a display state in which the lower strip-shaped image is displayed on the front side of the hold image displayed in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area.

FIG. 654 (C) shows a display state in which the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are displayed on the front side of the lower strip-shaped image.

FIG. 654 (D) shows a display state in which a blue reserved image is displayed instead of the white reserved image displayed in the third reserved display area.

The display of the strip-shaped image as shown in FIGS. 654 (A) to 654 (D) may be configured to be displayed instead of the pine mark group image in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 650. ..

An example of an effect of changing the display mode of the hold image in the third hold display area has been shown, but the area for changing the display mode of the hold image is not limited to the second hold display area, and the first hold display area to In any of the display areas of the fourth hold display area, the display mode of the hold image may be changed as in the present effect example.

When the lower band-shaped image is displayed in front of the reserved image, the ratio hidden by the lower band-shaped image in the area of the reserved image differs depending on the area where the held image is displayed. .. Specifically, the reserved image is not hidden by the lower band-shaped image in the first place, the area of about 20% of the lower side is hidden for the first reserved image, and about 40% of the lower side is hidden for the second reserved image. The area is hidden, about 60% of the lower side area is hidden for the third reserved image, and about 80% of the lower side area is hidden for the fourth reserved image. As described above, the closer to the fourth reserved display area, the higher the concealment ratio of the reserved image by the lower band-shaped image.

With such a configuration, it is possible to strengthen the impact of the pending change in the hold in which the variable display is started later.

Although the lower strip-shaped image has a triangular shape, the lower strip-shaped image may be deformed in a stepped shape as shown in FIGS. 654 (E) and 654 (F). Specifically, it is preferable to combine lines perpendicular to the display area and horizontal lines to provide a plurality of horizontal steps so as to be inclined upward to the right as a whole.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 654 (E) and 654 (F), a plurality of reserved images can be hidden in one horizontal step. For example, about 30% of the area below the reserved image and the first reserved image is hidden by one horizontal step, and about 60% of the area below the second and third reserved images is one. It is hidden by a horizontal step, and for the fourth reserved image, the entire image is hidden by one horizontal step.

Alternatively, the band-shaped image formed in a stepped manner in this way does not hide the reserved image by the lower band-shaped image, hides an area of about 20% of the lower side of the first reserved image, and hides the area of about 20% of the lower side of the second reserved image. About 40% of the area on the lower side is hidden, about 60% of the area on the lower side is hidden for the third reserved image, and about 80% of the area on the lower side is hidden for the fourth reserved image. It may be configured.

Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the impact of the pending change in the hold in which the variable display is started later.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650 (A), the embodiment in which the hold display area and the first hold display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment in which the hold display area to the fourth hold display area are modified so that they may be hidden by the pine mark group image will be described with reference to FIGS. 655 and 656. Note that FIG. 655 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 656 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

In the state of timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold display area has a circular shape and a white hold image, the first hold display area has a perfect circular shape and a blue hold image, and the second hold display area has a perfect circular shape and a white hold image. In the third reserved display area, a white reserved image having a perfect circular shape is displayed.

At the timing t7, the display of the pine mark group image having a shape surrounding the display area is started. The pine mark group image in the present embodiment is composed of 16 green images in the shape of imitating a pine branch with leaves. An image imitating a pine branch with leaves is labeled with one of the letters "N", "E", "X", and "T". When the display of the pine mark group image is started, the pine mark group image is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area.

FIG. 656 (A) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after the display of the pine mark group image is started at the timing t7, and the pine mark group image is the hold display. It shows a state in which the image is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in the areas to the third reserved display area. In this state, each hold image displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area is hidden by the pine mark group image, and each hold image displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area is displayed. Only a part is visible.

At the timing t9, the display priority of the pine mark group image and each hold image displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is changed from the hold display area to the third hold display area. From the state in which each of the reserved images displayed in is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in, to the state in which each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. It changes with.

FIG. 656 (B) shows a predetermined timing after each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image at the timing t9. It is a figure which showed the display state at (a predetermined timing between timing t9 and timing t10). In this state, the entire reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is visible.

At the timing t10, the green reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area instead of the blue reserved image previously displayed in the first reserved display area. In addition, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol that have been scrolled downward and moved are temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the display area includes a left decorative symbol with the number "4", a medium decorative symbol with the character string "continue", and a right decorative symbol with the number "4". At substantially the center of the vertical direction, the character strings "4" and "continuation" of the numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed in a visible manner.

FIG. 656 (C) shows a predetermined timing (for example, timing t10 and timing t11) after the green reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area instead of the blue reserved image at the timing t10. It is a figure which showed the display state at a predetermined timing (between). In this state, the entire reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is visible.

In the present embodiment, the pine mark group image is temporarily not displayed during the period from timing t11 to timing t13. In addition, during this period, the character string "x2" is displayed so as to overlap the upper right portion of the right decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped. FIG. 656 (D) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) between the timing t10 and the timing t13. In this state, the entire reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is visible.

At the timing t13, the display of the pine mark group image is started again. At this time, the pine mark group image is displayed on the front side of each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. Further, at the timing t13, the display state in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol scrolls downward and moves, which was the state of the temporary stop display until then, is changed. FIG. 656 (E) shows a state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area at the timing t13. It is a figure which showed the display state at the later predetermined timing (for example, timing t14).

At timing t19, the display priority of the pine mark group image and each hold image displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area is switched, and the pine mark group image is changed from the hold display area to the third hold display area. From the state in which each of the reserved images displayed in is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in, to the state in which each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. It changes with.

FIG. 656 (F) shows a predetermined timing after each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image at the timing t19. It is a figure which showed the display state at (a predetermined timing between timing t19 and timing t20). In this state, the entire reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is visible.

At the timing t20, the red reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area instead of the green reserved image previously displayed in the first reserved display area. In addition, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol that have been scrolled downward and moved are temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the display area includes a left decorative symbol with the number "7", a medium decorative symbol with the character string "continue", and a right decorative symbol with the number "7". At substantially the center of the vertical direction, the character strings "7" and "continuation" of the numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed in a visible manner.

FIG. 656 (G) shows a predetermined timing (for example, timing t20 and timing t21) after the red reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area instead of the green reserved image at the timing t20. It is a figure which showed the display state at a predetermined timing (between). In this state, the entire reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is visible.

In the present embodiment, the pine mark group image is not displayed at the timing t21. Further, from the timing t21 to the timing t22, the character string "x3" is displayed so as to overlap the upper right portion of the right decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed during this period. FIG. 656 (H) is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t22) between the timing t21 and the timing t23. In this state, the entire reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is visible.

At the timing t23, the display state in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, which had been temporarily stopped until then, scrolls downward and moves.

At the timing t25, the decorative symbols with the numbers "7" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, respectively, and a reach state occurs. At this time, the variable display state in which the intermediate decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved and displayed is maintained. FIG. 656 (H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at the timing t25.

At the timing t33, the intermediate decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in the variable stop state. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the decorative symbol with a number other than "7" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol with the number "7" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the special lottery result is lost, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started from the timing t34, and if the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative symbol is new after the big hit game is completed. Fluctuations begin.

An example of an effect of changing the display mode of the hold image in the second hold display area has been shown, but the area for changing the display mode of the hold image is not limited to the second hold display area, and the first hold display area to In any of the display areas of the fourth hold display area, the display mode of the hold image may be changed as in the present effect example.

In the present embodiment, the hold display area to the fourth hold display area can be hidden by the pine mark group image. In addition, the reserved display area is configured so as not to be hidden. In this way, by configuring the plurality of reserved display areas to be hidden by a predetermined image, it is possible to make the player feel an interest in which reserved image changes. Further, the reserved image is configured so that the display mode can be changed at the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, as compared with the case where the decorative symbol is displayed so as to scroll and move, the player can pay attention to the change of the reserved image, and the player is distracted by the movement mode of the decorative symbol. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the change mode of the reserved image cannot be confirmed.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650 (A), the embodiment in which the hold display area and the first hold display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment modified so that the hold display area may be hidden by the operation instruction image will be described with reference to FIGS. 657 and 658. Note that FIG. 657 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 658 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

In the state of timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, the reserved display area has a circular blue reserved image, the first reserved display area has a circular white reserved image, and the second reserved display area has a circular white reserved image. However, in the third reserved display area, a circular and white reserved image is displayed.

At the timing t5, the operation instruction image indicating that the operation to the operation button 410 is effective starts the frame-in from the lower center in the left-right direction to the upper side of the display area. The operation instruction image has a horizontally long elliptical shape, and the character string "PUSH" is added in the image.

At the timing t6, the frame-in to the display area of the operation instruction image is completed. The operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image. In addition, the operation instruction image continues to move upward even after the frame-in is completed. FIG. 658 (A) shows a state in which the operation instruction image moves from the bottom to the top and the frame-in to the display area is completed.

At the timing t7, the operation instruction image completes the upward movement. At the same time, the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image changes to the state in which the reserved image is displayed behind the operation instruction image. At the same time, the operation reception for the operation button 410 changes from an ineffective state to a valid state. The operation validity period for the operation button 410 continues for 2 seconds from timing t7 to timing t9. FIG. 658 (B) shows after the operation instruction image is changed from the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image to the state in which the hold image is displayed behind the operation instruction image at the timing t7. It is a figure which showed the display state at a predetermined timing (timing t8) of.

FIG. 658 (C) shows the case where the operation is performed during the operation valid period (for example, when the player operates the operation button 410 at the timing t8 during the operation valid period), or when the operation valid period ends. It is a figure which showed the display state displayed in (when the player did not operate the operation button 410 during the operation valid period). Specifically, the timing when the operation button 410 is operated by the player during the operation valid period (for example, timing t8), or the timing when the operation valid period ends without the player performing the operation (timing t9). ), The blue reserved image is displayed behind the operation instruction image, and the operation instruction image is displayed behind the blue reserved image.

At the timing t10, the green reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area instead of the blue reserved image previously displayed in the reserved display area. FIG. 658 (D) shows a predetermined timing (for example, between timing t10 and timing t11) after the green reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area instead of the green reserved image at timing t10. It is a figure which showed the display state at a predetermined timing).

At the timing t11, the display of the operation instruction image displayed behind the reserved image ends.

At the timing t15, the operation instruction image indicating that the operation to the operation button 410 is effective starts the frame-in from the lower center in the left-right direction to the upper side of the display area. The operation instruction image has a horizontally long elliptical shape, and the character string "PUSH" is added in the image. Further, it is larger than the operation instruction image displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t11.

At the timing t16, the frame-in to the display area of the operation instruction image is completed. The operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image. In addition, the operation instruction image continues to move upward even after the frame-in is completed. FIG. 658 (E) shows a state in which the operation instruction image moves from the bottom to the top and the frame-in to the display area is completed.

At the timing t17, the operation instruction image completes the upward movement. At the same time, the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image changes to the state in which the reserved image is displayed behind the operation instruction image. At the same time, the operation reception for the operation button 410 changes from an ineffective state to a valid state. The operation validity period for the operation button 410 continues for 2 seconds from timing t17 to timing t19. FIG. 658 (F) shows after the operation instruction image is changed from the state in which the operation instruction image is displayed behind the reserved image to the state in which the hold image is displayed behind the operation instruction image at the timing t17. It is a figure which showed the display state at a predetermined timing (timing t18) of.

FIG. 658 (G) shows the case where the operation is performed during the operation valid period (for example, when the player operates the operation button 410 at the timing t18 during the operation valid period), or when the operation valid period ends. It is a figure which showed the display state which is displayed (when the player did not operate the operation button 410 during the operation valid period). Specifically, the timing when the operation button 410 is operated by the player during the operation valid period (for example, timing t18), or the timing when the operation valid period ends without the player performing the operation (timing t9). ), The green hold image is displayed behind the operation instruction image, and the operation instruction image is displayed behind the green hold image.

At timing t10, instead of the green hold image previously displayed in the hold display area, the hold is red in the hold display area and larger than the green hold previously displayed (specifically,). (Double diameter) Hold image will be displayed. FIG. 658 (H) shows a predetermined timing (between timing t20 and timing t21) after the red reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area instead of the green reserved image at the timing t10. It is a figure which showed the display state at a predetermined timing).

At the timing t21, the display of the operation instruction image displayed behind the reserved image ends.

At the timing t25, a decorative symbol having the same number (for example, “2”) as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state occurs. At this time, the variable display state in which the intermediate decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved and displayed is maintained.

At the timing t33, the intermediate decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in the variable stop state. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the decorative symbol with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol with the number "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the special lottery result is lost, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started from the timing t34, and if the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative symbol is new after the big hit game is completed. Fluctuations begin.

By exchanging the context of the operation instruction image and the hold image in this way, it is possible to produce an impactful effect on the change of the hold image. Further, since the characters attached to the operation instruction image are hidden by the reserved image, it is possible to give a great impact to the player.

In the present embodiment, two types of operation instruction images having different sizes can be displayed. However, when the operation instruction image is large, only the color of the hold image changes and the color of the hold image changes. In addition, the size of the reserved image may change. Further, the color of the reserved image does not change, and the size of the reserved image may change. For example, at timing t20, the size of the green reserved image is not changed and only the color is changed to obtain a red reserved image, or both the size and color of the green reserved image are changed to obtain a large red reserved image. Or, the color of the green reserved image may not be changed and only the size may be changed to obtain a large green reserved image. Further, when the size of the reserved image becomes large, it is preferable to configure the system so that the expectation is higher for the jackpot than when the size of the reserved image is not increased.

With such a configuration, the enlarged hold image is visually recognized by the player so as to hide the operation instruction image, so that the effect of changing the hold image can be made more impactful.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650 (A), the embodiment in which the hold display area and the first hold display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment in which the hold display area to the fourth hold display area are modified so that they may be hidden by the decorative symbol during the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 659 and 660. Note that FIG. 659 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 660 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

At the timing t0, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In FIG. 660 (A), after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing t0, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing t1), and the number of pending balls is set. Indicates a state in which the upper limit is four.

In the present embodiment, the reserved images are not displayed horizontally at the bottom of the display area, but are displayed vertically at the left side of the display area. Specifically, on the left side of the display area, a fourth hold display area, a third hold display area, a second hold display area, a first hold display area, and the hold display area are provided from the top.

Further, instead of using a circular hold image as the hold image, an image in which the ingredients of oden are stuck on the skewer (hereinafter, may be referred to as "oden hold image") is configured to be used as the hold image. There is. The oden hold image is composed of a part that imitates a skewer and a part that imitates an ingredient. The number of ingredients is from 1 to 10, and the larger the number of ingredients, the longer the skewer length. In addition, the larger the number of ingredients in the image (when looking at the entire oden hold image, the longer the oden hold length is), the more the decoration pattern variation result is executed or executed in response to the hold image. Is configured to increase the expectation that will indicate a big hit. Further, the oden hold image in the present embodiment is basically displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern.

Below, according to the number of ingredients in the oden hold image, one oden hold image with one ingredient is an oden hold image, and two oden hold images with two ingredients are oden hold. Image, Oden hold image with 3 ingredients, Oden hold image with 3 ingredients, Oden hold image with 4 ingredients, Oden hold image with 4 ingredients, Oden hold image with 5 ingredients 5 oden hold images, 6 oden hold images, 6 oden hold images, 7 oden hold images, 7 oden hold images, 8 oden hold images The image is called an oden hold image with 8 ingredients, the oden hold image with 9 ingredients is called an oden hold image with 9 ingredients, and the oden hold image with 10 ingredients is called an oden hold image with 10 ingredients.

In the period from the timing t0 to the timing t13 when the decorative symbol starts the variable display, the oden hold image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 660 (A), there are four oden hold images in the hold display area, one oden hold image in the first hold display area, and two oden hold images in the second hold display area. , The state in which one ingredient Oden hold image is displayed in the third hold display area and the fourth hold display area is shown.

At timing t13, the display priority of the oden hold image and the decorative symbol is switched, and the state in which the oden hold image is displayed in front of the decorative symbol is changed to the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in front of the oden hold image. It changes with. FIG. 660 (B) shows a predetermined state after the oden holding image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol at the timing t13 to the state where the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the oden holding image. The display state at the timing (for example, timing t14) is shown.

At timing t15, the display priority of the oden hold image and the decorative symbol is switched, and the decorative symbol is displayed in front of the oden hold image to the state in which the oden hold image is displayed in front of the decorative symbol. It changes with. In FIG. 660 (C), the display priority of the oden holding image and the decorative symbol is switched at the timing t15, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the oden holding image, and the oden holding image is on the front side of the decorative symbol. Indicates a display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between the timing t15 and the timing t16) after the change to the state displayed in.

At the timing t16, in the hold display area, the state is changed so that the oden hold image of 6 ingredients is displayed in place of the 4 oden hold image displayed so far, and in the second hold display area, the state is changed. Instead of the two-ingredient-holding image that was displayed until then, the three-ingredient-holding image is displayed. FIG. 660 (D) changes to a state in which the 6-ingredient oden-holding image is displayed in place of the 4-ingredient-old oden-holding image previously displayed in the hold display area at the timing t16. In the second hold display area, at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t17) after changing to a state in which the three oden hold images are displayed instead of the two oden hold images that have been displayed so far. Indicates the display status.

At timing t19, the display priority of the oden hold image and the decorative symbol is switched, and the state in which the oden hold image is displayed in front of the decorative symbol is changed to the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in front of the oden hold image. It changes with.

FIG. 660 (E) shows a predetermined state after the oden holding image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol at the timing t19 to the state where the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the oden holding image. The display state at the timing (for example, timing t20) is shown.

At timing t21, the display priority of the oden hold image and the decorative symbol is switched, and the decorative symbol is displayed in front of the oden hold image to the state in which the oden hold image is displayed in front of the decorative symbol. It changes with.

In FIG. 660 (F), the display priority of the oden holding image and the decorative symbol is switched at the timing t21, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the oden holding image, and the oden holding image is on the front side of the decorative symbol. Indicates a display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between the timing t21 and the timing t22) after the change to the state displayed in.

At the timing t22, in the hold display area, the state is changed so that the oden hold image of 10 ingredients is displayed instead of the 6 oden hold image displayed so far, and in the second hold display area, the state is changed. Instead of the 3 oden hold image of 3 ingredients that was displayed until then, the state changes to display the 6 oden hold image of 6 ingredients.

In FIG. 660 (G), at the timing t22, in the hold display area, the state in which the 10 oden hold image of the ingredients is displayed instead of the 6 oden hold images of the ingredients displayed up to that point is displayed. In the second hold display area, at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t23) after changing to a state in which the oden hold image of 6 ingredients is displayed instead of the oden hold image of 3 ingredients previously displayed. Indicates the display status.

At the timing t25, a decorative symbol having the same number (for example, “2”) as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state occurs. At this time, the variable display state in which the intermediate decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved and displayed is maintained.

At the timing t33, the intermediate decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in the variable stop state. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the decorative symbol with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol with the number "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is lost, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started from the timing t34. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a big hit, at the timing t34, the hold image is not displayed once in the hold display area to the fourth hold display area, and after the big hit game is completed, the decorative symbol is newly added. The display of the hold image in the hold display area to the fourth hold display area is restarted at the same timing as the start of the variable display.

In the present embodiment, for a normal oden holding image (one ingredient oden holding image) having a low jackpot expectation, even if the decorative design is displayed on the front side of the oden holding image, the decorative design is displayed. It is configured so that it does not overlap with.

Therefore, when the player tries to visually check the current number of holds, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of holds cannot be confirmed.

On the other hand, the decorative design of the oden hold image (1 ingredient oden hold image to 10 oden hold image), which has a higher expectation for big hits than the normal oden hold image (1 ingredient oden hold image), is oden. When it is displayed on the front side of the reserved image, it overlaps with the decorative symbol, and the oden reserved image is configured to be visually recognized by the player as if it is hidden by the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the oden hold image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern and the display mode is changed to another oden hold image, the player visually recognizes the oden hold image as if it were enlarged twice. , It is possible to give a big impact to the player.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650 (A), the embodiment in which the hold display area and the first hold display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment in which the hold display area to the fourth hold display area are modified so that they may be hidden by the decorative symbol during the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 661 and 662. Note that FIG. 661 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 662 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

At the timing t0, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In the period from the timing t0 to the timing t7 when the decorative symbol starts the variable display, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 662 (A) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing t0. In the figure, the blue hold image is in the hold display area, the white hold image is in the first hold display area, the white hold image is in the second hold display area, and the white hold is in the third hold display area. The state in which the image is displayed is shown. Further, it is shown that each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol. In the present embodiment, the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area is basically displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol.

At timing t7, the display priority of each reserved image and decorative symbol displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is decorated. The state in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the symbol changes to the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of each of the reserved images displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area.

In FIG. 662 (B), from the state in which each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol at the timing t7, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. 3 Indicates a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t8) after changing to a state displayed on the front side of each hold image displayed in the hold display area.

At timing t9, the display priority of each of the hold images and decorative symbols displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area is switched, and the decoration symbols are displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area. The state in which the image is displayed on the front side of the image is changed to the state in which each of the hold images displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 662 (C), the display priority of each reserved image and decorative symbol displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched at timing t9, and the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. The state in which each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed in front of the decorative symbol changes from the state of being displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in. The display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between the timing t9 and the timing t10) is shown.

At the timing t10, in the hold display area, the green hold image is displayed in place of the blue hold image that has been displayed so far.

FIG. 662 (D) shows a predetermined timing (D) after the timing t10 changes to a state in which the green reserved image is displayed in place of the blue reserved image that has been displayed so far in the reserved display area. For example, the display state at the timing t11) is shown.

At timing t17, the display priority of each reserved image and decorative symbol displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is decorated. The state in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the symbol changes to the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of each of the reserved images displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area.

In FIG. 662 (E), from the state in which each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol at the timing t17, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. 3 Indicates a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t18) after changing to a state displayed on the front side of each hold image displayed in the hold display area.

At timing t19, the display priority of each of the hold images and decorative symbols displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area is switched, and the decoration symbols are displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area. The state in which the image is displayed on the front side of the image is changed to the state in which each of the hold images displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 662 (F), the display priority of each of the reserved images and the decorative symbols displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched at the timing t19, and the decorative symbol is the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. The state in which each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is displayed in front of the decorative symbol changes from the state of being displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in. The display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between the timing t19 and the timing t20) is shown.

At the timing t20, in the hold display area, the red hold image is displayed in place of the green hold image that has been displayed so far.

FIG. 662 (G) shows a predetermined timing (G) after the timing t20 changes to a state in which the red reserved image is displayed in place of the green reserved image that has been displayed so far in the reserved display area. For example, the display state at the timing t21) is shown.

At the timing t25, a decorative symbol having the same number (for example, “2”) as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state occurs. At this time, the variable display state in which the intermediate decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved and displayed is maintained.

At the timing t33, the intermediate decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in the variable stop state. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the decorative symbol with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol with the number "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is lost, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started from the timing t34. On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a big hit, at the timing t34, the hold image is not displayed once in the hold display area to the third hold display area, and after the big hit game is completed, the decorative symbol is newly added. The display of the hold image in the hold display area to the fourth hold display area is restarted at the same timing as the start of the variable display.

In the present embodiment, after the reserved image to be displayed in the reserved display area is drawn by the decorative symbol, the display mode of the reserved image is changed while the reserved image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the impact of pending changes.

During the period (timing t7 to timing t9, timing t17 to timing t19) in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the reserved image, it may be difficult to visually recognize the reserved image. Therefore, it is preferable to scroll the decorative symbol downward at a variable speed at which the reserved image can be visually recognized from the gap between the decorative symbol displayed on the upper side and the decorative symbol displayed on the lower side.

Specifically, at least once during the period when the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the reserved image, the reserved display area to the first is from the gap between the decorative symbol displayed on the upper side and the decorative symbol displayed on the lower side. 4 It is preferable to configure the hold display area so that it can be visually recognized. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of holds cannot be confirmed when the player tries to visually check the current number of holds.

With reference to FIGS. 661 (A) and 662 (A) to 662 (G), an example is shown in which the display mode of the reserved image is changed during the variable display in which the decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved. Below, with reference to FIGS. 661 (B) and 662 (H), an embodiment in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and is modified so as to change the display mode of the reserved image during the temporary stop display is shown. .. Note that FIG. 661 (B) is a time chart showing an example of the effect of the fluctuating state of the decorative symbol in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 662 (H) is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

In the present embodiment, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed in the period from timing t7 to timing t11 and the period from timing t17 to timing t21.

In the present embodiment, in the period from timing t7 to timing t9 and the period from timing t17 to timing t19, the decorative symbol is on the front side of each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. It is in the state displayed in. In this state, the upper half of each of the reserved images displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is hidden by the decorative symbol and is visually recognized by the player.

Further, at timing t11 and timing t21, the display priority of each reserved image and decorative symbol displayed in the reserved display area to the third reserved display area is switched, and the decorative symbol is moved to the reserved display area to the third reserved display area. Each hold image displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area changes from the state displayed in front of each displayed hold image to the state displayed in front of the decorative symbol. .. In this state, the entire hold image displayed in the hold display area to the third hold display area is visually recognized by the player.

FIG. 662 (H) shows a predetermined timing after the timing t10 changes to a state in which the green reserved image is displayed in place of the blue reserved image that has been displayed so far in the reserved display area. The display state at a predetermined timing (predetermined timing) between the timing t10 and the timing t11 is shown.

In this way, even when the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped is used to hide a part of the reserved image and then the entire reserved image is visible during the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the reserved image is displayed. It is possible to make an impact on the mode of change.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 650 (A), an embodiment in which the hold display area and the first hold display area may be hidden by the pine mark group image has been described with reference to FIG. An embodiment in which a display effect for counting down the time displayed during display is modified so that it may be hidden by a decorative symbol during variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 663 and 664. Note that FIG. 663 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 664 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

At the timing t0, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, a left countdown image is displayed behind the left decorative pattern. The color of the left countdown image is green at this time.

The countdown image is an image having a diamond-shaped outer shape. The countdown image is an image showing that a predetermined effect display is executed at a predetermined timing. Specifically, the number attached to the countdown image indicates the remaining time (the number of seconds remaining) until the predetermined effect is executed. When the number attached to the countdown image becomes "00", the predetermined effect display is executed. Three countdown images are provided, a left countdown image, a middle countdown image, and a right countdown image, corresponding to the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol. Each countdown image is displayed on the front side or the back side of each decorative symbol in the upper part of the display area.

FIG. 664 (A) shows the display state at the timing t5. In the figure, the state in which the left countdown image is displayed behind the left decorative symbol is shown. The number "20" is attached to the left countdown image. The number attached to the left count image is decremented by 1 every second from this state, and at timing t25, the number "00" is displayed, but the number "00" At the timing when is displayed, a predetermined effect display (for example, any one of a plurality of characters showing different jackpot expectations is displayed in the display area) is started. Note that these points are not limited to the left countdown image, but are the same for the middle countdown image and the right countdown image, which will be described later.

At timing t8, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative symbol is switched, and the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative symbol. ..

In FIG. 664 (B), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative symbol is switched at the timing t8, and the countdown image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol from the state where the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the countdown image. It shows the display state immediately after the change to the state.

From the timing t9 to the timing t12, the middle countdown image appears from the rear to the right side of the left countdown image. FIG. 664 (C) shows the display state at the timing t10 when the medium countdown image is appearing. In the figure, the middle countdown image is appearing from the back side to the right side of the left countdown image. In addition, the countdown image moving to the right has the character string "??" instead of a number.

At the timing t12, the movement of the middle countdown image to the right side is completed, and the middle countdown image and the middle decorative symbol are overlapped. The medium countdown image is displayed on the front side of the intermediate decorative pattern. At the same time, the number "30" is added instead of the character string "??" attached to the medium countdown image. Even in the medium countdown image, the attached numbers are counted down and displayed according to the passage of time. Further, at the timing t12, the left countdown image, which was green, changes to red.

FIG. 664 (D) shows the state immediately after such a change in the display mode is performed at the timing t12.

At timing t13, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative symbol is switched, and the countdown image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the countdown image. ..

In FIG. 664 (E), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative symbol is switched at the timing t13, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the countdown image from the state where the countdown image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol. It shows the display state at the timing t14, which is the timing after the change to the state.

At timing t15, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative symbol is switched, and the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative symbol. ..

In FIG. 664 (F), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative symbol is switched at the timing t15, and the countdown image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol from the state where the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the countdown image. It shows the display state immediately after the change to the state.

At the timing t17, the display of the right countdown image is started. The right countdown image does not start to be displayed by sliding like the middle countdown image, but is suddenly displayed at a position overlapping the right decorative symbol. The number "60" is attached to the right countdown image.

FIG. 664 (G) shows the display state immediately after the display of the right countdown image is started.

At timing t18, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative symbol is switched, and the countdown image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the countdown image. ..

In FIG. 664 (H), the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative symbol is switched at the timing t18, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the countdown image from the state where the countdown image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol. It shows the display state at the timing t19, which is the timing after the change to the state.

At timing t23, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative symbol is switched, and the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in front of the countdown image changes to the state in which the countdown image is displayed in front of the decorative symbol. ..

At the timing t25, the display of the left countdown image ends at the same time when the number attached to the left countdown image becomes “00”. At the same time, a predetermined display effect is started in the display area.

At timing t26, the display priority of the countdown image and the decorative symbol is switched, and the countdown image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the countdown image. ..

For the middle countdown image and the right countdown image, the same display effect as that of the left countdown image is executed in the period before and after the timing when the attached number becomes "00".

After a predetermined display effect corresponding to the right countdown image is executed, the decorative symbols with the same numbers (for example, "2") as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state occurs. At this time, the variable display state in which the intermediate decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved and displayed is maintained.

After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the occurrence of the reach state, the intermediate decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result becomes the variable stop state. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the decorative symbol with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol with the number "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is lost, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started from the timing t34. After the jackpot game is over, a new variable display of the decorative design is started.

In the present embodiment, the color of the countdown image (for example, green or red), the length of the countdown period (for example, 25 seconds, 30 seconds, or 60 seconds), and the number of displayed countdown images (only the left countdown image). It is preferable that the jackpot expectation is suggested by at least one aspect of (1), 2 of the left countdown image and the middle countdown image, and 3 of the left countdown image to the right countdown image). Alternatively, as the effect display displayed when the count reaches "00", a plurality of effect displays having different jackpot expectations are provided, and any of the effect displays can be displayed in response to such a mode in which the countdown image can be taken. It may be configured to suggest to the player whether it will be executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the image to be displayed in the countdown is changed, the countdown image is temporarily hidden by the decorative pattern, the whole is made visible again, and then the display mode of the countdown image is changed. It is configured to let you. With such a configuration, it is possible to make an impact on the change mode of the countdown image.

An example of the effect in which the color of the countdown image changes from green to red is shown, but the color may not change in some cases.

The reserved image may be configured to change over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative pattern. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 665 (A) and 666, the decorative symbol is held while switching the display priority between the held image corresponding to the predetermined hold and the pine mark group image over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol. An embodiment modified to change the image is shown. Note that FIG. 665 (A) is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 666 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

At timing t0, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

At the timing t2, the display of the pine mark group image is started. The pine mark group image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern. Further, at this stage, the white hold image displayed in the first hold display area, the white hold image displayed in the second hold display area, and the blue hold image displayed in the third hold display area. It is displayed behind. The pine mark group image displayed in this embodiment is the same pine mark group image as that used in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 652.

FIG. 666 (A) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the display of the pine mark group image is started at the timing t2.

At the timing t4, the decorative symbol changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is lost. Specifically, the decorative design with the number "2" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "5" as the middle decorative design, and the number "4" as the right decorative design. The decorated pattern is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the display priority of each hold image displayed in the first hold display area to the third hold display area and the pine mark group image is switched, and each hold displayed in the first hold display area to the third hold display area is switched. From the state where the image is displayed on the front side of the pine mark group image to the state where the pine mark group image is displayed on the front side of each hold image displayed in the first hold display area to the third hold display area. It changes with.

In FIG. 666 (B), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing t4, and the pine mark group image is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area. The display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between the timing t4 and the timing t5) after the change to the changed state is shown.

At the timing t5, the hold image displayed in the hold display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative symbol changes from the stopped display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the hold image previously displayed in the first hold display area. The variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the display priority of each hold image displayed in the first hold display area to the third hold display area and the pine mark group image is switched, and the pine mark group image is changed to the first hold display area to the third hold display area. From the state displayed in front of each displayed hold image to the state in which each hold image displayed in the first hold display area to the third hold display area is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. It changes with.

In FIG. 666 (C), at the timing t5, the decorative symbol changes from the stopped display state to the variable display state, and each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area is obtained from the pine mark group image. Also shows the display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the front side.

At timing t5, the hold images displayed in each hold display area start moving toward the adjacent left hold display area at the same time, and at timing t6, the hold images are moved to the adjacent left hold display area. Complete at the same time. Specifically, the hold image previously displayed in the first hold display area is moved while expanding to the left, so that the hold image is displayed in the hold display area. In addition, the reserved image previously displayed in the second reserved display area moves to the left and is displayed in the first reserved display area. In addition, the blue reserved image previously displayed in the third reserved display area moves to the left and is displayed in the second reserved display area. Further, at the timing t6, the green reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area instead of the blue reserved image that has completed the movement to the second reserved display area.

In FIG. 666 (D), the movement of each reserved image is completed at the timing t6, and instead of the blue reserved image that has completed the movement to the second reserved display area, the green reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after being displayed.

At the timing t9, the decorative symbol changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is lost. Specifically, the decorative design with the number "6" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "9" as the middle decorative design, and the number "1" as the right decorative design. The decorated pattern is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the display priority of each hold image displayed in the first hold display area to the second hold display area and the pine mark group image is switched, and each hold displayed in the first hold display area to the second hold display area is switched. From the state in which the image is displayed in front of the pine mark group image to the state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of each reserved image displayed in the first hold display area to the second hold display area. It changes with.

In FIG. 666 (E), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing t9, and the pine mark group image is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area. The display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between the timing t9 and the timing t10) after the change to the changed state is shown.

At the timing t10, the hold image displayed in the hold display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative symbol changes from the stopped display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the hold image previously displayed in the first hold display area. The variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the display priority of each hold image displayed in the first hold display area to the second hold display area and the pine mark group image is switched, and the pine mark group image is changed to the first hold display area to the second hold display area. From the state displayed in front of each displayed hold image to the state in which each hold image displayed in the first hold display area to the second hold display area is displayed in front of the pine mark group image. It changes with.

In FIG. 666 (F), at the timing t10, the decorative symbol changes from the stopped display state to the variable display state, and each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area is obtained from the pine mark group image. Also shows the display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the front side.

At timing t10, the hold images displayed in each hold display area start moving toward the adjacent left hold display area at the same time, and at timing t11, the hold images are moved to the adjacent left hold display area. Complete at the same time. Specifically, the hold image previously displayed in the first hold display area is moved while expanding to the left, so that the hold image is displayed in the hold display area. In addition, the green hold image previously displayed in the second hold display area moves to the left and is displayed in the first hold display area. Further, at the timing t11, the red reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area instead of the green reserved image that has completed the movement to the first reserved display area.

In FIG. 666 (G), the movement of each reserved image is completed at the timing t6, and instead of the green reserved image that has completed the movement to the first reserved display area, the red reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after being displayed.

At the timing t14, the decorative symbol changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is lost. Specifically, the decorative design with the number "4" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "1" as the middle decorative design, and the number "2" as the right decorative design. The decorated pattern is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the display priority of the red hold image displayed in the first hold display area and the pine mark group image is switched, and the red hold image displayed in the first hold display area is on the front side of the pine mark group image. The state in which the pine mark group image is displayed changes to the state in which the pine mark group image is displayed in front of the red hold image displayed in the first hold display area.

At the timing t15, the hold image displayed in the hold display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative symbol changes from the stopped display state to the variable display state, and the red hold image displayed in the first hold display area until then is changed to the red hold image. The variable display of the corresponding decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the display priority of the red hold image displayed in the first hold display area and the pine mark group image is switched, and the pine mark group image is on the front side of the red hold image displayed in the first hold display area. The red hold image displayed in the first hold display area changes from the state displayed in the above to the state displayed in front of the pine mark group image.

At the timing t15, the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area starts moving toward the reserved display area, and at the timing t16, the movement of the red reserved image to the reserved display area is completed. Specifically, the red reserved image previously displayed in the first reserved display area is moved while expanding to the left, so that the red reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area.

At the timing t25, the decorative symbols with the numbers "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, respectively, and a reach state occurs. At this time, the variable display state in which the intermediate decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved and displayed is maintained. The display of the pine mark group ends at the same time as the reach state occurs.

FIG. 666 (H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at the timing t25.

At the timing t33, the intermediate decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in the variable stop state. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the decorative symbol with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol with the number "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the special lottery result is lost, the decorative symbol will continue to be stopped and displayed until the game ball wins the first starting port 2002 and a new special lottery result is obtained, and the special lottery result will be displayed. If it is a big hit, a new change of the decorative pattern is started after the big hit game is completed.

In this way, the display mode of the reserved image may be changed over a plurality of stop displays of the decorative symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an impact on the change mode of the reserved image.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 665 (B) and 667, the reserved image is displayed while switching the display priority between the reserved image corresponding to the predetermined hold and the decorative symbol over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol. An embodiment modified to change is shown. Note that FIG. 665 (B) is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. Further, FIG. 667 is a diagram showing a display state in the display area.

At timing t0, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, at the timing t0, the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area start moving toward the adjacent left reserved display area at the same time, and at the timing t1, the first reserved display area to the first reserved display area. The movement of the hold image displayed in the fourth hold display area from the hold display area to the third hold display area is completed at the same time.

FIG. 667 (A) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t2) after the movement of the reserved image is completed at the timing t1. In this state, a blue hold image is displayed in the third hold display area.

At the timing t4, the decorative symbol changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is lost. Specifically, the decorative design with the number "2" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "5" as the middle decorative design, and the number "4" as the right decorative design. The decorated pattern is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area and the decorative symbol is switched, and each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area is changed. The state in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol changes to the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of each of the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area.

In FIG. 667 (B), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing t4, and the decorative symbol is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area. The display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between the timing t4 and the timing t5) after the change to the state is shown.

At the timing t5, the hold image displayed in the hold display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative symbol changes from the stopped display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the hold image previously displayed in the first hold display area. The variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the display priority of each of the reserved images displayed in the 1st reserved display area to the 3rd reserved display area and the decorative symbol is switched, and each of the decorative symbols displayed in the 1st reserved display area to the 3rd reserved display area. The state in which each of the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area changes from the state of being displayed in front of the reserved image to the state of being displayed in front of the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 667 (C), at the timing t5, the decorative symbol changes from the stopped display state to the variable display state, and each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area is in front of the decorative symbol. It shows the display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the side.

At timing t5, the hold images displayed in each hold display area start moving toward the adjacent left hold display area at the same time, and at timing t6, the hold images are moved to the adjacent left hold display area. Complete at the same time. Specifically, the hold image previously displayed in the first hold display area is moved while expanding to the left, so that the hold image is displayed in the hold display area. In addition, the reserved image previously displayed in the second reserved display area moves to the left and is displayed in the first reserved display area. In addition, the blue reserved image previously displayed in the third reserved display area moves to the left and is displayed in the second reserved display area. Further, at the timing t6, the green reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area instead of the blue reserved image that has completed the movement to the second reserved display area.

In FIG. 667 (D), the movement of each reserved image is completed at the timing t6, and instead of the blue reserved image that has completed the movement to the second reserved display area, the green reserved image is displayed in the second reserved display area. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t7) after being displayed.

At the timing t9, the decorative symbol changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is lost. Specifically, the decorative design with the number "6" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "9" as the middle decorative design, and the number "1" as the right decorative design. The decorated pattern is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the display priority of each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area and the decorative symbol is switched, and each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area is changed. The state in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol changes to the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of each of the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area.

In FIG. 667 (E), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing t9, and the decorative symbol is displayed in front of each of the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area. The display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between the timing t9 and the timing t10) after the change to the state is shown.

At the timing t10, the hold image displayed in the hold display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative symbol changes from the stopped display state to the variable display state, corresponding to the hold image previously displayed in the first hold display area. The variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the display priority of each of the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area and the decorative symbol is switched, and each of the decorative symbols displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area. The state in which each of the reserved images displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area changes from the state of being displayed in front of the reserved image to the state of being displayed in front of the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 666 (F), at the timing t10, the decorative symbol changes from the stopped display state to the variable display state, and each reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the second reserved display area is in front of the decorative symbol. It shows the display state immediately after changing to the state displayed on the side.

At timing t10, the hold images displayed in each hold display area start moving toward the adjacent left hold display area at the same time, and at timing t11, the hold images are moved to the adjacent left hold display area. Complete at the same time. Specifically, the hold image previously displayed in the first hold display area is moved while expanding to the left, so that the hold image is displayed in the hold display area. In addition, the green hold image previously displayed in the second hold display area moves to the left and is displayed in the first hold display area. Further, at the timing t11, the red reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area instead of the green reserved image that has completed the movement to the first reserved display area.

In FIG. 666 (G), the movement of each reserved image is completed at the timing t6, and instead of the green reserved image that has completed the movement to the first reserved display area, the red reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area. It shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12) after being displayed.

At the timing t14, the decorative symbol changes from the variable display state to the stop display state in a display mode indicating that the special lottery result is lost. Specifically, the decorative design with the number "4" as the left decorative design, the decorative design with the number "1" as the middle decorative design, and the number "2" as the right decorative design. The decorated pattern is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the display priority of the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the decorative symbol is switched, and the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed in front of the decorative symbol. The state changes from the state to the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the red hold image displayed in the first hold display area.

At the timing t15, the hold image displayed in the hold display area is no longer displayed, and the decorative symbol changes from the stopped display state to the variable display state, and the red hold image displayed in the first hold display area until then is changed to the red hold image. The variable display of the corresponding decorative pattern is started. At the same time, the display priority of the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area and the decorative symbol is switched, and the decorative symbol is displayed in front of the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. The state changes from the state to the state in which the red hold image displayed in the first hold display area is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol.

At the timing t15, the red reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area starts moving toward the reserved display area, and at the timing t16, the movement of the red reserved image to the reserved display area is completed. Specifically, the red reserved image previously displayed in the first reserved display area is moved while expanding to the left, so that the red reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area.

At the timing t25, the decorative symbols with the numbers "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, respectively, and a reach state occurs. At this time, the variable display state in which the intermediate decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved and displayed is maintained. The display of the pine mark group ends at the same time as the reach state occurs.

FIG. 667 (H) shows the display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state occurs at the timing t25.

At the timing t33, the intermediate decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in the variable stop state. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the decorative symbol with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol with the number "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the special lottery result is lost, the decorative symbol will continue to be stopped and displayed until the game ball wins the first starting port 2002 and a new special lottery result is obtained, and the special lottery result will be displayed. If it is a big hit, a new change of the decorative pattern is started after the big hit game is completed.

In this way, the display mode of the reserved image may be changed over a plurality of stop displays of the decorative symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an impact on the change mode of the reserved image.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 666 and 667, a new variable display of the decorative symbol has been started, and each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area has completed the movement to the adjacent reserved display area. An example of changing the display mode of the reserved image to a different display mode at the timing (timing t6, timing t11) has been shown, but the display mode of the reserved image is configured to be changed to a different display mode at other timings. May be good.

For example, at the timing (timing t5, timing t10) when a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the display mode of the hold image is changed to a different display mode in the display state before the movement of the hold image is started. It may be configured. Alternatively, a period (from timing t5 to timing t6, timing t10 to timing) until a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started and each reserved image displayed in the reserved display area completes the movement to the adjacent reserved display area. In t11), the display mode of the reserved image may be configured to be gradually changed to a different display mode.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 650 to 664, the display modes such as the hold image, the oden hold image, and the countdown image are changed during one change of the decorative symbol. As shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 665 and 667, the hold image, the oden hold image, the countdown image, etc. in the embodiment of the above are displayed behind the decorative symbol when the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped. In addition to being configured to be displayed, it is configured to be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol in accordance with the start timing of a new variable display of the decorative symbol, and after being displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example,). After 1 second), the display mode of the hold image, the oden hold image, the countdown image, and the like may be changed.

Conventionally, when displaying a hold image, image data indicating that the hold display area has a hold, image data indicating that the hold display area and the first hold display area have a hold, and the hold display area Image data indicating that there is a hold in the first hold display area to the second hold display area, image data indicating that the hold display area and the first hold display area to the third hold display area have a hold, and the hold display. A total of five image data of the area and the image data indicating that there is a hold in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area are stored in advance in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b, and the number of holds changes as the game situation progresses. Correspondingly, drawing data of an image to be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 was generated based on any of the image data.

Specifically, when the screen data indicating that the number of holds has increased by one from the peripheral control MPU1511a to the sound source built-in VDP1512a is output at the timing when the start winning to the first starting port 2002 occurs, the sound source built-in VDP1512a , Based on the screen data output from the peripheral control MPU1511a, instead of the image data indicating the number of holds used to generate the drawing data, the image data having one more hold is used for the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b. A display method was adopted in which the data was read from and used to generate drawing data.

Similarly, when the fluctuation display corresponding to the held image ends and a new fluctuation display is started, screen data indicating that the number of holds has decreased by one is output from the peripheral control MPU1511a to the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. Based on the screen data output from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source displays image data with one less hold number instead of the image data indicating the number of hold numbers used for generating drawing data. And a display method of reading from the sound control ROM 1512b and using it for generating drawing data has been adopted.

However, in recent years, an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved image from the normal display mode to a different display mode has been performed. In this case, in addition to the above-mentioned five patterns, image data in which the reserved image is displayed in different display modes is prepared in advance in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b, but a plurality of different display modes may be provided for the reserved image. As the variation of the display mode of the hold image is increased, for example, a plurality of hold images are displayed in different display modes at the same time, the amount of image data prepared in advance increases in an isobaric manner, and the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b There is a problem that the data size of the image stored in is large.

In addition to changing the display mode of the hold image, the image data when starting the display of the hold image, the image data for moving the hold image to the adjacent hold display area, and the image when ending the display of the hold image. As the number of production modes for the reserved image such as data is increased, it becomes necessary for the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to prepare image data corresponding to those production modes in advance, and the image data is stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. There is a problem that the size of the image data becomes large.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the sound source built-in VDP1512a, layers are individually prepared for each of the hold display area to the fourth hold display area, and image data corresponding to the hold display area of 1 is arranged in one layer. Each layer is combined to generate drawing data.

The following shows an embodiment in which a plurality of layers having different display priorities are used, image data is arranged for each layer, and the arranged plurality of images are superimposed and displayed. ..

The number of vertical and horizontal pixels is predetermined for each layer. This number of pixels is the same as the number of pixels in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a game board-side effect display device 1600 having a display area of 1280 pixels in the horizontal direction and 800 pixels in the vertical direction, the number of pixels of each layer is 1280 pixels in the horizontal direction and 800 pixels in the vertical direction as in this display area. .. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the game board side effect display device 1600 having a display area of 1280 pixels in the horizontal direction and 800 pixels in the vertical direction is provided. The number of pixels in the display area of the game board side effect display device is not limited to 1280 pixels in the horizontal direction and 800 pixels in the vertical direction. For example, a display device having a display area of 1920 pixels in the horizontal direction and 1080 pixels in the vertical direction is adopted. It may be configured as.

In the display area, the horizontal axis is the x-axis, the vertical axis is the y-axis, and the origin is provided in the upper left. The coordinates of the origin are (0,0), the coordinates of the lower left of the display area are (0,799), the coordinates of the upper right of the display area are (1279,0), and the coordinates of the lower right of the display area are (1279,799). be. An image stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b can be arranged on each layer by designating arbitrary coordinates in the layer. The image that can be arranged with respect to the layer has a rectangular shape, and the image is arranged so that the upper left pixel of the image is positioned with respect to the specified coordinates. FIG. 671 (A) is a diagram showing a state of a layer on which no image is arranged.

A display priority is set for each layer, and the image data arranged in the high-priority layer is combined so as to be displayed in front of the image data arranged in the low-priority layer. Drawing data is generated.

For example, when the image data arranged in the low priority layer and the image data arranged in the high priority layer are in the overlapping position, the image data arranged in the high priority layer gives the priority. Drawing data is generated in which the image data arranged on the lower layer is hidden.

In each layer, the image data can be arranged only in a part of the layer, or the image data can be arranged in the entire layer. For example, when the image data is arranged only in a part of the layer having a high priority, the drawing data in a mode in which the image arranged in the layer having a low priority can be visually recognized is generated from the area where the image data is not arranged. It will be. On the other hand, when the image data is arranged in the entire layer having a high priority, even if some image data is arranged in the layer having a low priority, the image arranged in this layer having a low priority is visually recognized. Drawing data in an aspect that cannot be performed will be generated.

The image data arranged on the layer may be configured so that the transparency can be set. In this case, it is preferable that the transparency can be set for each pixel of the image data arranged on the layer. In this embodiment, the transparency can be set in the range of 0% to 100%. When the transparency is 0%, the pixel is displayed opaque, when the transparency is 50%, the pixel is displayed semi-transparently, and when the transparency is 100%, the pixel is displayed transparent. In the present embodiment, unless there is a particular mention of transparency, the transparency of the pixel or its image is 0%, that is, it is opaque.

By configuring the pixels of the image data arranged on the layer to be transparent, it is possible to make both images visible even when the images arranged on the layers having different priorities overlap each other. Is. For example, when the transparency of all the pixels of the image data arranged in the high priority layer is set to 50% and the transparency of all the pixels of the image data arranged in the low priority layer is set to 0%. Is to visually recognize the image arranged in the low priority layer in a display mode in which the image arranged in the high priority layer becomes translucent and the image arranged in the high priority layer is transparent. Can generate drawing data.

Hereinafter, an embodiment in which a plurality of such layers are set and a hold image corresponding to one hold is arranged in each of the plurality of layers will be described with reference to FIGS. 668 and 669.

In the embodiment shown below, the upper limit of the number of holds related to the first starting port 2002 is four. In addition, in the order of winning the first starting port 2002, the hold and a maximum of four holds (in the order in which the corresponding decorative symbol changes are started, the hold, the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the third hold are as follows. An image indicating that there is (4 may be called hold) is displayed.

FIG. 668 is a diagram showing display priority set for the layer used for display processing and image data arranged in the layer in the present embodiment, and display priority is given from layer L00, which is the layer having the highest display priority. A part of the layers up to layer L99, which is the lowest degree layer, is shown in the figure. Of these, layer L40, layer L45, layer L50, layer L55, and layer L60 are layers on which the reserved image is arranged.

Note that layer L00 is a layer on which an error notification image indicating that some error has occurred in the gaming machine is arranged. Further, the layer L35 is a layer on which the decorative symbol during the stop display is arranged. Further, the layer L65 is a layer on which the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is arranged. Further, the layer L99 is a layer on which the background image is arranged.

In the present embodiment, basically, the hold image corresponding to the hold is arranged on the layer L40. Further, a hold image corresponding to the first hold is arranged on the layer L45. Further, a hold image corresponding to the second hold is arranged on the layer L50. Further, a hold image corresponding to the third hold is arranged on the layer L55. Further, a hold image corresponding to the fourth hold is arranged on the layer L60.

FIG. 669 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 670 is a diagram showing an arrangement mode of the reserved image on the layer in the present embodiment.

The reserved image in the present embodiment has a square shape with 320 pixels in the horizontal direction and 320 pixels in the vertical direction. The reserved image is composed of pixels forming a circular shape portion having a diameter of 320 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion having a circular shape having 100% transparency. Further, in the pixels forming the perfect circular shape portion, the outline of the circle is composed of black pixels, and the inner portion of the black outline is composed of white pixels. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels). By arranging such a reserved image at a predetermined coordinate of a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which the hold is visually recognized in a perfect circular shape.

In this embodiment, FIG. 670 (A) shows an example in which the reserved image is arranged at the coordinates (480, 440) of the layer L40.

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape with 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction. The reserved image is composed of pixels forming a circular shape portion having a diameter of 160 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion having a circular shape having 100% transparency. Further, in the pixels forming the perfect circular shape portion, the outline of the circle is composed of black pixels, and the inner portion of the black outline is composed of white pixels. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels). By arranging such a reserved image at a predetermined coordinate of a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which the hold of a perfect circular shape is visually recognized.

FIG. 670 (B) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction and having a square shape is arranged as the first reserved image at the coordinates (760, 600) of the layer L45.

FIG. 670 (C) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in width and 160 pixels in length and having a square shape is arranged as a second hold at the coordinates (880,600) of the layer L50.

FIG. 670 (D) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in width and 160 pixels in length and having a square shape is arranged as a third hold at the coordinates (1000,600) of the layer L55.

FIG. 670 (E) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction and having a square shape is arranged as the fourth reserved image at the coordinates (1120, 600) of the layer L60.

Further, FIG. 670 (F) shows the layers (for example, layers L40 to L60) described with reference to FIGS. 671 (B) to 671 (F) and the layer L65 in which the decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner are arranged. An example of drawing data generated by synthesizing is shown.

In the present embodiment, in a layer structure capable of performing such display, it is possible to perform a display process of arranging each reserved image on a different layer as shown below.

FIG. 669 is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. At timing t1, timing t2, timing t3, timing t8, and timing t10, a start prize is generated for the first start port 2002, and the hold image corresponding to the hold and the first hold correspond to the layers L40 to L60. Hold images corresponding to 1 to 4 Hold images corresponding to the fourth hold are arranged respectively.

FIG. 670 (F) is a diagram showing a display state at the timing t11. In this state, the display priority of the reserved image is the highest, and the display priority of the reserved image corresponding to the fourth hold is the lowest.

At the timing t13, the reserved image corresponding to the hold is arranged on the layer L60, the reserved image corresponding to the first hold is arranged on the layer L55, and the reserved image corresponding to the second hold is arranged on the layer L50. The hold image corresponding to the 3 hold is arranged on the layer L45, and the hold image corresponding to the 4 hold is placed on the layer L40. The coordinates arranged at this time are not changed.

FIG. 670 (G) is a diagram showing a display state at the timing t14. In this state, the display priority of the reserved image is the lowest, and the display priority of the reserved image corresponding to the fourth hold is the highest.

At the timing t16, the hold image corresponding to the hold and the hold image corresponding to the first hold to the hold image corresponding to the fourth hold are arranged for the layers L40 to L60, respectively, and are arranged before the timing t13. Return to the state.

At the timing t19, the reserved image corresponding to the hold arranged on the layer L40 is arranged on the layer L50, and the reserved image corresponding to the second hold arranged on the layer L50 is arranged on the layer L40. The coordinates arranged at this time are not changed.

FIG. 670 (H) is a diagram showing a display state at the timing t20. In this state, the display priority of the hold image corresponding to the second hold is the highest. Further, the display priority of the hold image corresponding to the first hold is lower than the display priority of the hold image corresponding to the second hold, and the display priority of the hold image corresponding to the first hold corresponds to the hold. The display priority of the reserved image is the lowest.

At the timing t22, the hold image corresponding to the hold and the hold image corresponding to the first hold to the hold image corresponding to the fourth hold are arranged for the layers L40 to L60, respectively, and are arranged before the timing t19. Return to the state.

At the timing t25, the reserved image corresponding to the hold that was placed on the layer L40 again is placed on the layer L50, and the hold image corresponding to the second hold placed on the layer L50 is placed on the layer L40. ..

At the timing t28, the hold image corresponding to the hold and the hold image corresponding to the first hold to the hold image corresponding to the fourth hold are arranged on the layers L40 to L60, respectively, and are arranged before the timing t25. Return to the state.

In this way, by switching the display priority of the reserved image while the decorative symbol is changing, it is possible to easily change the appearance of the entire reserved image. In addition, it is possible to make a specific reserved image stand out more than other reserved images.

An example is shown in which the display priority of the reserved image is the lowest and the display priority of the reserved image corresponding to the fourth hold is the highest from the timing t13 to the timing t16, but once during the change of the decorative pattern. Not only that, the same display may be performed a plurality of times.

From timing t19 to timing t22 and from timing t25 to timing t28, the display priority of the hold image corresponding to the second hold is raised twice to make the hold image corresponding to the second hold stand out. , Such a display mode may be configured to be performed only once, or may be configured to be performed three or more times. Further, not only the hold image corresponding to the second hold, but also the hold image corresponding to the first hold, the hold image corresponding to the third hold, and the hold image corresponding to the fourth hold are configured to perform the same display. You may.

It can be said that the display mode shown in FIG. 670 (G) makes the hold image corresponding to the fourth hold stand out more than the other hold images. It should be noted that such a display may be configured to be executed according to the look-ahead result of each hold. For example, by increasing the display priority of a specific hold as in the present production example, it is preferable to configure so as to show that the jackpot expectation of the hold is high.

In addition, in this embodiment and each of the embodiments described later, the reserved image corresponding to the change of the decorative pattern currently being performed, the reserved image corresponding to the first hold to the hold image corresponding to the fourth hold are specially displayed. Sometimes referred to. The special display includes a special display in which only the hold image is displayed, a special display in which the hold image and the hold image corresponding to the first hold are displayed, the hold image, the hold image corresponding to the first hold, and the second. A special display in which the hold image corresponding to the hold is displayed, a special display in which the hold image, the hold image corresponding to the first hold, the hold image corresponding to the second hold, and the hold image corresponding to the third hold are displayed, There is a special display in which the hold image, the hold image corresponding to the first hold, the hold image corresponding to the second hold, the hold image corresponding to the third hold, and the hold image corresponding to the fourth hold are displayed. The special display makes it possible to indicate to the player the number of changes in the decorative symbol from 1 to 5 times, including the number of changes in the decorative symbol that is currently changing.

Instead of the normal white hold image displayed as the hold image corresponding to the hold and the hold image corresponding to the first hold to the hold image corresponding to the fourth hold, the blue color indicating that the jackpot expectation is higher. , Green, red, and other reserved images of a specific color may be arranged on the layer.

In this production example, in the state where the display priority is not changed and the state where the display priority is changed, a hold image of a specific color such as blue, green, or red is arranged instead of the white hold image. It is advisable to configure the probability of becoming different.

For example, when the hold image corresponding to the second hold is arranged on the layer L50 having a relatively low display priority (for example, timing t16 to timing t19), the hold image corresponding to the second hold is placed on the layer L40 having a relatively high display priority. When arranged (for example, timing t19 to timing t22), when arranged on a layer having a high display priority, a specific color such as blue, green, or red is used instead of the white reserved image. It may be configured so that the probability that the reserved image of the above will be arranged is high.

The timing for arranging the reserved image of a specific color is a predetermined timing between the time when the display priority is changed and the time when the display priority is changed again (for example, 2 seconds after the display priority is changed). It is good to set it to. For example, when the hold image corresponding to the second hold is arranged on the layer L50 having a relatively low display priority (for example, timing t16 to timing t19), the hold image corresponding to the second hold is replaced with the white hold image at timing t18. It may be configured to arrange a reserved image of a specific color. Further, when the image is arranged on the layer L40 having a relatively high display priority (for example, timing t19 to timing t22), the reserved image of a specific color is arranged instead of the white reserved image at the timing t21. It may be configured as follows.

Further, only when the image is arranged on the layer L40 having a relatively high display priority (for example, timing t19 to timing t22), the red color suggesting that the jackpot expectation is higher instead of the white reserved image. It may be configured so that the reserved image can be arranged.

In this way, as the layer on which the 1 hold image is arranged, there are a layer having a high display priority and a layer having a low display priority, and depending on the layer to be arranged, a specific hold is performed instead of the arranged hold image. It is configured so that the probability of image placement is different. With such a configuration, when the display priority of the reserved image changes, the player expects that the reserved image may change to a display mode suggesting that the jackpot expectation is higher. It is possible to embrace it.

In the time chart, the hold image corresponding to the second hold has been described, but this is an example, and the hold image corresponding to the hold, the hold image corresponding to the first hold, and the third hold correspond to the third hold. The same display processing may be performed on both the hold image and the hold image corresponding to the fourth hold.

Further, in the time chart, an example of the effect in which the number of holds is four has been described, but the case is not limited to the case where the number of holds is four, the case of only the hold, the case of the hold and the first hold, the hold and the first hold. When there are 1 hold and 2nd hold, and even when there are the hold and the 1st hold to the 3rd hold, the same effect display may be performed. If there is only the hold, it is not necessary to switch the layers, so the display may be configured to change the hold image to a hold image of a different color without switching the layers. The same configuration may be adopted in other embodiments.

Further, as described above, the reserved image in which the layer to be arranged is changed at a predetermined timing (for example, 2 seconds later) after the layer in which the reserved image is arranged is changed in another embodiment described later. It may be configured to change the display mode of the reserved image.

At the timing of changing the layer on which the reserved image is arranged (for example, timing t13, timing t16, timing t19, timing t22, timing t25, timing t28), an effect display indicating that the layer on which the reserved image is arranged has been changed. May be configured to be executed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, each of the displayed reserved images may be configured to move in the vertical direction as a whole. Alternatively, only the hold image having the highest priority, such as the hold image corresponding to the second hold in the effect example, may be configured to move in the vertical direction.

The timing of performing such an effect display is a predetermined timing (for example, timing t12, timing t15, timing t18, timing t21, timing t24, timing t27) prior to the timing of changing the layer on which the reserved image is arranged. It may be a predetermined timing (for example, timing t14, timing t17, timing t20, timing t23, timing t26, timing t29) after changing the layer on which the reserved image is arranged.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the layer on which the reserved image is arranged has been changed. In addition, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the display mode of the predetermined reserved image may change.

Hereinafter, another embodiment in which a plurality of such layers are set and a hold image corresponding to one hold is arranged in each of the plurality of layers will be described with reference to FIGS. 668 and 671.

In the present embodiment, when a start winning prize is first generated in the first starting port 2002 after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, a reserved image is arranged on the layer L40. Next, when a start prize is generated for the first start port 2002, the reserved image is arranged on the layer L45. Next, when a start prize is generated for the first start port 2002, the reserved image is arranged on the layer L50. Similarly, the layers L55, the layer L60, and the layer on which the reserved image is arranged are switched according to the occurrence of the start winning prize in the first start port 2002. If a start prize is generated in the first starting port 2002 after the reserved image data is arranged in the layer L60, the reserved image is arranged in the layer L40, and similarly, the layers L45, the layer L50 ... Then, when the start winning prize to the first start port 2002 occurs, the layer on which the reserved image data is arranged is cyclically changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 671, a mode of arranging the image on a predetermined layer will be described with reference to the reserved layer and the reserved image. FIG. 671 (A) is a diagram showing a state of a layer on which no image is arranged. As shown in the figure, the number of pixels of the layer in this embodiment is 1280 pixels in the horizontal direction and 800 pixels in the vertical direction. The origin (0,0) is provided at the upper left of the layer as shown in the figure.

The reserved image in the present embodiment has a square shape with 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction. The reserved image is composed of pixels forming a circular shape portion having a diameter of 160 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion having a circular shape having 100% transparency. Further, in the pixels forming the perfect circular shape portion, the outline of the circle is composed of black pixels, and the inner portion of the black outline is composed of white pixels. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels). By arranging such a reserved image at a predetermined coordinate of a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which the hold is visually recognized in a perfect circular shape.

In this embodiment, FIG. 671 (B) shows an example in which the reserved image is arranged at the coordinates (560,600) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L40).

The reserved image in this embodiment has a square shape with 80 pixels in the horizontal direction and 80 pixels in the vertical direction. The reserved image is composed of pixels forming a circular shape portion having a diameter of 80 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion having a circular shape having 100% transparency. Further, in the pixels forming the perfect circular shape portion, the outline of the circle is composed of black pixels, and the inner portion of the black outline is composed of white pixels. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels). By arranging such a reserved image at a predetermined coordinate of a predetermined layer, it is possible to generate drawing data in which the hold of a perfect circular shape is visually recognized.

FIG. 671 (C) shows an example in which the reserved image is arranged as the first hold at the coordinates (760, 680) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L45). FIG. 671 (D) shows an example in which a reserved image is arranged as a second hold at the coordinates (880,680) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L50). FIG. 671 (E) shows an example in which a reserved image is arranged as a third hold at the coordinates (1000,680) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L55). FIG. 671 (F) shows an example in which a reserved image is arranged as a fourth hold at the coordinates (1120, 680) of a predetermined layer (for example, layer L60).

Further, FIG. 671 (G) shows an example of drawing data generated by synthesizing each layer (for example, layers L40 to L60) described with reference to FIGS. 671 (B) to 671 (F). There is. In FIG. 671 (G), the background image and the decorative pattern are not shown, but in reality, all the layers including these images are combined to generate drawing data.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold image corresponding to the hold and the hold images corresponding to the first hold to the fourth hold are arranged at predetermined coordinates of different layers, and the layers are combined. It is configured as follows.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 672 and 673, an effect example of displaying the drawing data thus generated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 will be shown.

FIG. 672 is a time chart showing how the reserved image is assigned to the layer in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 673 is a display example in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, it is described below as hold A to hold G according to the order of occurrence of hold. In addition, such a notation may be used in other embodiments as well.

At the timing t1, the hold A is generated in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize to the first start port 2002, and at the same time, the hold image corresponding to the hold A is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L40. As described above, the reserved image has a square shape with 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction, and is an image visually recognized as a white perfect circle.

Until the timing t1, the number of holds is 0 and the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize.

FIG. 673 shows a display state at a predetermined timing (a predetermined timing between the timing t1 and the timing t2) after the start winning of the first starting port 2002 occurs at the timing t1.

At the timing t2, the hold B is generated in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in the first start port 2002, and at the same time, the hold image corresponding to the hold B is arranged at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45. As described above, the reserved image has a square shape with 80 pixels in the horizontal direction and 80 pixels in the vertical direction, and is an image visually recognized as a white perfect circle.

At the timing t3, the hold C is generated in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize to the first start port 2002, and at the same time, the hold image corresponding to the hold C is arranged at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50.

At the timing t4, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold A becomes the stop display state.

At the timing t5, the hold image corresponding to the hold A previously placed on the layer L40 is not placed on the layer L40.

Further, at the timing t5, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold B is started. At the same time, the reserved image arranged at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45 is no longer arranged, and instead, the reserved image corresponding to the reserved B is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L45.

Further, at the timing t5, the reserved image arranged at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50 corresponding to the reserved C is no longer arranged, and instead, the reserved image corresponding to the reserved C is the layer L50. It is arranged at coordinates (760,680).

As described above, in the present embodiment, five layers for holding display are prepared, and when the holding occurs in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize at the first starting port 2002, the layers are used in order. It is configured in.

At the timing t9, the hold image corresponding to the hold E is arranged on the layer L60, and then at the timing t11, the hold image corresponding to the hold F is placed on the layer L40 where the hold image corresponding to the hold A is placed. Will be done. Similarly, at the timing t17, the hold image corresponding to the hold B and the hold image corresponding to the hold G are arranged on the layer L45 on which the hold image is placed.

In this way, by arranging only one reserved image in one layer, even if it is desired to change the display mode of the reserved image, the reserved image is not considered in the display state in the other layers. It is possible to change the display mode of.

An example is shown in which a square-shaped image having a width of 80 pixels and a height of 80 pixels is arranged as a hold image, and a square-shaped image having a width of 160 pixels and a length of 160 pixels is placed on a predetermined layer. It may be configured to be enlarged twice in each of the vertical direction and the horizontal direction so as to be used as the reserved image. Further, the reserved image may be reduced to 1/2 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction to be used as the reserved image.

With such a configuration, it is not necessary to create at least one image data of the reserved image and the reserved image in advance, and it is possible to reduce the size of the image data stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b. Become.

The white portion of the reserved image may be configured to be a color other than white such as blue, green, and red. In this case, the white reserved image was composed of pixels forming a circular white portion having a diameter of 160 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of a circular shape having 100% transparency. It is preferable to generate the reserved image in which the pixels forming the portion are blue in advance and store it in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b. Similarly, the reserved image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the circular shape are green and the reserved image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the circular shape are red are generated in advance and stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b. It is good to keep it. Then, the blue reserved image, the green reserved image, and the red reserved image may be arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) instead of the white reserved image.

Depending on the display mode of the reserved image, the jackpot expectation may be indicated. In this case, as described above, the jackpot expectation may be higher in the order of white, blue, green, and red.

Similar to the reserved image, the reserved image may be configured so that the white portion of the reserved image is a color other than white such as blue, green, and red. In this case, the white reserved image was composed of pixels forming a perfect circular white portion having a diameter of 80 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion of a circular shape having 100% transparency. It is preferable to create a reserved image in which the pixels forming the above are blue in advance and store it in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b. Similarly, if a reserved image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the perfect circular shape are green and a reserved image in which the pixels forming the white portion of the perfect circular shape are red are created in advance and stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b. good. Then, the blue reserved image, the green reserved image, and the red reserved image are replaced with the white reserved image, and the coordinates (760,680), coordinates (880,680), and coordinates (1000,680) are replaced. ), The coordinates (1120, 680) may be arranged.

Depending on the display mode of the reserved image, the jackpot expectation may be indicated. In this case, as described above, the jackpot expectation may be higher in the order of white, blue, green, and red.

In this way, a plurality of images having different display modes are created in advance as the reserved image or the reserved image, and one of the images as the reserved image or the reserved image is arranged on a predetermined layer based on the special lottery result. It may be configured. The timing of arranging the reserved image or the reserved image having a different display mode on the predetermined layer is the timing of first arranging the reserved image or the reserved image corresponding to the predetermined hold on the predetermined layer (for example, FIG. 672). The timing t1) in which the hold A in the time chart shown in the above is arranged on the layer L40 may be used.

Alternatively, it may be the timing at which the predetermined time has elapsed after being arranged on the predetermined layer (for example, the timing t6 which is the timing after the timing t2 where the hold B in the time chart shown in FIG. 672 is arranged on the layer L45).

Alternatively, the timing at which the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the reserved image ends and each reserved image is rearranged at the adjacent left image arrangement position (for example, the layer corresponding to the reserved D in the time chart shown in FIG. 672). The timing t10) may be used when the image arranged at the coordinates (880, 680) of L55 is arranged at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L55.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the holding image or the holding image can be switched to the holding image or the holding image having a different display mode at an arbitrary timing without significantly increasing the storage capacity of the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b. It becomes possible to execute.

When a game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 2002 and a new hold occurs, a new hold image will be placed on a layer where nothing has been placed until then, but the hold as described above The reserved image may be arranged first at a predetermined coordinate that is a predetermined pixel above the arrangement position of the image, and the arrangement coordinate of the reserved image may be dynamically changed so that the reserved image moves downward.

At the timing t1 when the hold A described with reference to FIG. 672 occurs, the hold image is placed at the coordinates (560,520) and moved downward by 4 pixels for each frame to 20 frames (about 0.67 seconds). ), The reserved image corresponding to the reserved A may be arranged at the coordinates (560,600) by moving the image downward by 80 pixels. In this case, after the reserved image is displayed above the radius of the reserved image in a perfect circle, the player can visually recognize the display mode in which the reserved image moves downward by the radius over about 0.67 seconds. It will be.

Further, at the timing t2 when the hold B described with reference to FIG. 672 occurs, the hold image is arranged at the coordinates (760, 640) and moved downward by 2 pixels in one frame to 20 frames (about 0.67). It is preferable to move the image downward by 40 pixels over seconds) so that the hold image corresponding to the hold B is arranged at the coordinates (760, 680). In this case, after the reserved image is displayed above the radius of the circular reserved image, the player can visually recognize the display mode in which the reserved image moves downward by the radius over about 0.67 seconds. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, the reserved image or the reserved image arranged at a predetermined position on the layer is a single still image that does not move as an image, but the display mode changes at a predetermined cycle. The image to be visually recognized may be configured to be arranged at a predetermined position on the layer. For example, image data consisting of 30 still images is created in advance, and one of the 30 still images is repeatedly arranged in order with respect to a predetermined position of the layer for each frame. You may. With such a configuration, it is possible to dynamically display the reserved image with a period of 1 second.

In the above-described embodiment, the reserved image is suddenly arranged at the position on the left side of 120 pixels on the layer at the start of the new variation display. In this case, the player may visually recognize the reserved image as if it were suddenly displayed, and may not be able to understand the game situation.

Therefore, at the start of a new variation display, the coordinates for arranging the reserved image on the predetermined layer may be gradually changed so that the mode in which the reserved image moves in the lateral direction can be visually recognized. For example, in the coordinates where the reserved image is placed, the y coordinate is not changed, the x coordinate value is reduced by 6 for each frame, and the x coordinate value is reduced by 120 in 20 frames (about 0.67 seconds) (that is,). It may be configured to move 120 pixels to the left). With such a configuration, the reserved image can be dynamically moved over 0.67 seconds.

In the display process of moving the arrangement position of the reserved image by 120 pixels over 20 frames in this way, image data consisting of 20 still images is created in advance, and 20 still images are created for each frame. May be configured to be arranged in order. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the display mode in which the display mode is changed while the reserved image is moving.

While the decorative pattern is changing, up to four reserved images can be visually displayed, but the coordinates at which each reserved image is arranged and the distance between the coordinates are equal between the images arranged adjacent to each other. It is set to 120 pixels). In this case, the process of dynamically moving the hold image using the image data consisting of 20 still images, the second hold is moved to the left, the third hold is moved to the left, and the third hold is moved to the left. 4 It may be configured to be used in each case of moving the hold to the left. By setting the arrangement coordinates of the reserved images at equal intervals in this way, the image data can be used in common.

Regarding the coordinates for arranging the reserved image, the y coordinate was not changed, and only the x coordinate was subtracted by a fixed value for each frame. However, the reserved image in the present embodiment is the reserved image. The diameter is twice (160 pixels) as compared with the diameter (80 pixels) of. The following is a modified example of the embodiment in which the reserved image arranged as the first hold is arranged as the hold. Specifically, image data consisting of 20 still images is created in advance, and the coordinates (760, 680) of the reserved image arranged as the first hold image are the coordinates (560) which are the arrangement coordinates of the reserved image. , 600), the arrangement coordinates of each still image may be determined so as to move linearly over 20 frames, and the still image may be arranged for each frame. The 20 still images are configured so that the number of pixels in the vertical direction and the number of pixels in the horizontal direction are gradually increased.

An example was shown in which image data consisting of 20 still images was created in advance and displayed in sequence, but the reserved images arranged on the layer as the first hold were gradually enlarged over 20 frames. Then, the 20th frame may be configured so as to be finally enlarged to twice the size in the vertical and horizontal directions.

With such a configuration, it is not necessary to create image data consisting of 20 still images in advance, and it is possible to reduce the size of the image data stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b.

By arranging the reserved images individually on different layers in this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect mode of the reserved images and reduce the size of the image data stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b. It becomes.

Further, although a plurality of modified examples of the reserved image and the display mode of the reserved image have been shown, these modified examples may be applied to each embodiment described later. Further, when applied to each of the embodiments described later, the above-mentioned effects will be obtained.

Next, an embodiment in which the display method using the layer described with reference to FIG. 668 and the like is modified will be described with reference to FIGS. 674 and 675. FIG. 674 is a diagram showing display priorities set for each layer in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 675 is a time chart of an effect example using the layer structure in the present embodiment.

FIG. 674 is a diagram showing the display priority set for the layer used for the display process in the present embodiment and the image data arranged on the layer. Similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 668, in this embodiment as well, the layer L35, the layer L40, the layer L45, the layer L50, the layer L55, and the layer L60 are layers on which the reserved image is arranged. In the present embodiment, the hold image displayed as the hold is arranged on the layer L40, the hold image indicating the first hold is placed on the layer L45, and the second hold is shown on the layer L50. The reserved image is arranged, the reserved image indicating the third hold is arranged on the layer L55, and the reserved image indicating the fourth hold is arranged on the layer L60.

In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the reserved image arranged on the layer L40 is terminated at the timing t5 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed.

On the other hand, at the timing t5, the hold image is placed at the coordinates (560,600) of the layer L45 instead of the hold image that was placed as the hold image indicating the first hold at the coordinates (760,680) of the layer L45. do. At this time, using the display method described above, the hold image arranged at the coordinates (760, 680) as the first hold on the layer L45 is moved over 20 frames, and the coordinates are used as the hold image. It may be configured to be arranged at (560,600).

Further, at the timing t5, the hold image arranged as the hold image indicating the second hold at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50 is replaced with the hold image showing the first hold at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L50. Place as. At this time, using the display method described above, the hold image arranged at the coordinates (880, 680) as the second hold on the layer L50 is moved over 20 frames to be used as the first hold image. It may be configured to be arranged at coordinates (760,600).

At the timing t6, as the image indicating the hold, the hold image arranged at the coordinates (560,600) of the layer L45 is arranged at the coordinates (560,600) of the layer L40, and the hold at the layer L45. The placement of the image is finished. When the layers are switched without changing the coordinates arranged in this way, there is no difference in the appearance of the hold from the player.

Further, at the timing t6, as the image indicating the first hold, the hold image arranged at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L50 is arranged at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45, and is placed on the layer L50. The placed state ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new hold occurs, the hold image corresponding to the newly generated hold is placed in the layer having the highest display priority among the layers on which the hold image is not arranged. Be placed. In addition, at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the predetermined hold is finished and the variable display of the new decorative symbol is started, the coordinates of the reserved image arranged in each layer are changed in that layer. After that, it is configured to be rearranged in the layer with high display priority.

Further, the coordinates for arranging the reserved image may be configured to be gradually moved by using a plurality of frames. In the present embodiment, at a timing one second after the start of the variable display of the new decorative symbol, the layer on which each reserved image is placed is set to a layer having a high display priority without changing the coordinates to be placed. It is configured to be rearranged. In this way, when displaying such that the reserved image gradually moves, it is preferable to configure the reserved image so that the movement of the reserved image is completed before the reserved image is arranged on the layer having a high display priority.

With reference to FIGS. 674 and 675, with respect to the reserved image that was arranged at the predetermined coordinates of the predetermined layer at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the arrangement coordinates are changed in the layer, and then the arrangement coordinates are maintained. An embodiment of arranging in a layer having a high display priority is shown in.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 674 and 676, the reserved image arranged at the predetermined coordinates of the predetermined layer at the start of the variation of the decorative symbol is first arranged on the layer having the higher display priority, and then the layer. Hereinafter, an embodiment modified so as to change the arrangement coordinates will be described. FIG. 674 is a diagram showing a layer structure in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 676 is a time chart of an effect example using the layer structure in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the reserved image arranged on the layer L40 is terminated at the timing t5 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed.

On the other hand, at the timing t5, instead of the hold image arranged as the image showing the first hold at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L45, as the image showing the hold at the coordinates (760, 680) of the layer L40. Place the reserved image once. After that (for example, after one frame), the reserved image of 160 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L40.

At this time, using the display method described above, the reserved image arranged at the coordinates (760, 680) on the layer L40 is moved over 20 frames, and the coordinate (560, 600) is used as the reserved image. It may be configured to be arranged in.

Further, at the timing t5, the hold image arranged as the hold image indicating the second hold at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50 is replaced with the hold image showing the first hold at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L45. Place as. After that (for example, one frame later), the reserved image is placed at the coordinates (760,600) of the layer L45.

At this time, using the above-mentioned display method, the reserved image arranged at the coordinates (880, 680) on the layer L45 is moved over 20 frames, and the coordinates (as the reserved image indicating the first hold) are used. It may be configured to be arranged at 760,600).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new hold occurs, the hold image corresponding to the newly generated hold is placed in the layer having the highest display priority among the layers on which the hold image is not arranged. Be placed. Further, at the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the predetermined hold is completed and the variable display of the new decorative symbol is started, the reserved image arranged in each layer is arranged in the layer having a high display priority. After re-arranging, the coordinates for arranging the reserved image are changed in each newly arranged layer.

Further, the coordinates for arranging the reserved image may be configured to be gradually moved by using a plurality of frames. In the present embodiment, it is preferable that the movement of the reserved image is completed by the time when one second elapses from the timing when the variation display of the new decorative symbol is started.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 674 and 675, and the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 674 and 676, the hold image indicating the hold, the hold image showing the first hold, and the second hold are included. The display priority is set to decrease in the order of the hold image shown, the hold image showing the third hold, and the hold image showing the fourth hold. The display method of the reserved image using the display priority set in this way will be described below.

FIG. 677 shows an example of an effect in which in the display process using the layer described with reference to FIG. 674, when the reserved images overlap each other, the overlay mode of the reserved images is automatically determined.

FIG. 677 (A) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction and having a square shape is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L40.

FIG. 677 (B) shows a state in which the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the hold image is arranged as the first hold at the coordinates (680, 680) of the layer L45. Specifically, this reserved image has an elliptical shape having a transparency of 100%, a pixel forming an elliptical white portion of 240 pixels in the horizontal direction and 80 pixels in the vertical direction inscribed in the rectangle. It consists of pixels that form the outer part. In this production example, this hold, which is visually recognized in an elliptical shape, is set to have a higher expectation of a big hit than other holds, which are visually recognized in a perfect circle shape.

FIG. 677 (C) shows a state in which the above-mentioned hold image having a horizontal shape and a vertical shape of 80 pixels and a square shape is arranged as a second hold at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50.

FIG. 677 (D) shows a state in which the above-mentioned hold image having a horizontal shape and a vertical shape of 80 pixels and a square shape is arranged as a third hold at the coordinates (1000,680) of the layer L55.

FIG. 677 (E) shows a state in which the above-mentioned hold image having a horizontal shape and a vertical shape of 80 pixels and a square shape is arranged as a fourth hold at the coordinates (1120,680) of the layer L60.

FIG. 677 (F) schematically illustrates drawing data generated when the layers shown in FIGS. 677 (A) to 677 (E) and the layer L65 on which the changing decorative pattern is arranged are superimposed. It is shown as a target. Further, FIG. 677 (G) shows a state in which one hold is digested from the state shown in FIG. 677 (F), and a hold image having a horizontally long rectangular shape is arranged at coordinates (400, 600) as the hold image. ing. In the drawing, the portion where the transparency is 100% on the outside of the circular shape portion and the elliptical shape portion is omitted.

In this way, in the layers in which the display priorities are set in a predetermined order, by arranging only one reserved image on one layer, as shown in the figure, the display mode of the reserved image is increased. However, even if the parts of the reserved image whose transparency is not 100% overlap each other, one of the reserved images is automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority. Become.

The horizontally long rectangular-shaped reserved image shown in FIGS. 677 (B) and 677 (G) may be configured to arrange the horizontally long rectangular-shaped reserved image on the layer from the time when the start winning is generated. At the time of starting winning, a square-shaped hold image is placed on the layer, and a square-shaped hold image is placed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the first hold changes to the hold and the decorative symbol starts to change). Instead of, a horizontally long rectangular shape of a reserved image may be arranged.

FIG. 678 shows an example of an effect in which in the display process using the layer described with reference to FIG. 674, when the reserved images overlap each other, the overlay mode of the reserved images is automatically determined.

FIG. 678 (A) shows a state in which the reserved image having a width of 320 pixels and a height of 320 pixels and a square shape is arranged at the coordinates (480, 440) of the layer L40. The reserved image is composed of pixels forming a circular shape portion having a diameter of 320 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion having a circular shape having 100% transparency. Further, in the pixels forming the perfect circular shape portion, the outline of the circle is composed of black pixels, and the inner portion of the black outline is composed of white pixels. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels).

FIG. 678 (B) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction and having a square shape is arranged as the first reserved image at the coordinates (760, 600) of the layer L45.

FIG. 678 (C) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction and having a square shape is arranged as a second hold at the coordinates (880,600) of the layer L50.

FIG. 678 (D) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction and having a square shape is arranged as a third hold at the coordinates (1000,600) of the layer L55.

FIG. 678 (E) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction and having a square shape is arranged as the fourth reserved image at the coordinates (1120, 600) of the layer L60.

FIG. 678 (F) schematically illustrates drawing data generated when the layers shown in FIGS. 677 (A) to 677 (E) and the layer L65 on which the changing decorative pattern is arranged are superimposed. It is shown as a target. In the figure, the portion of the circular shape portion having 100% transparency on the outside is not shown.

In this way, in the layers in which the display priorities are set in a predetermined order, by arranging only one reserved image on one layer, as shown in the figure, the transparency of the reserved images is 100. Even if the parts that are not% overlap each other, one of the reserved images is automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority.

In this way, by arranging only one hold on one layer, the color of the hold image can be changed, the size of the hold image can be increased, the hold image can be moved, and the hold can be held adjacent to each other. Even in the case of displaying a reserved image in which images can overlap with each other, it is possible to generate drawing data related to the reserved image without considering the display status of other reserved images.

In the drawing data shown in FIGS. 677 (F), 677 (G), and 678 (F), although a part of the other reserved images may be hidden by the reserved image of 1, the whole of the other reserved images Is a size that is not completely hidden. With such a configuration, the player can accurately recognize the reserved number.

FIG. 679 shows the layer structure in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 674, which is modified so as to reverse the order of the display priorities of the layers on which the reserved images to the fourth reserved images are arranged. It is a figure which shows. In the layer structure shown in FIG. 679, a hold image indicating a fourth hold is arranged on the layer L40, a hold image showing a third hold is placed on the layer L45, and a second hold is placed on the layer L50. The reserved image shown is arranged, the reserved image indicating the first hold is arranged on the layer L55, and the reserved image displayed as the hold is arranged on the layer L60.

FIG. 680 is a time chart of an production example using such a layer structure. The time chart shown in FIG. 680 is the same as the production example described with reference to FIG. 675, except for the priority of the layers such as the variation time of the decorative symbol and the timing of the start winning. In the effect example shown in FIG. 680, as in the effect example described with reference to FIG. 675, the reserved image is moved and displayed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol until one second elapses. .. On the other hand, at the timing when one second has elapsed from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol (for example, timing t6 or timing t11), the display process of arranging the reserved image on the layer having one lower display priority is performed.

FIG. 681 is a time chart of an production example using such a layer structure. The time chart shown in FIG. 681 is the same as the production example described with reference to FIG. 676, except for the priority of the layers such as the variation time of the decorative symbol and the timing of the start winning. In the effect example shown in FIG. 681, the reserved image arranged at the predetermined coordinates of the predetermined layer at the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is first arranged in the layer having the lower display priority, and then arranged in the layer. Display processing to change the coordinates is performed.

In addition, various modification examples in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 674 to 676 may be applied to the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 679 to 681.

FIG. 682 shows an example of an effect in which in the display process using the layer described with reference to FIG. 679, when the reserved images overlap each other, the overlay mode of the reserved images is automatically determined.

FIG. 682 (A) shows a state in which the above-mentioned hold image having a horizontal shape and a vertical shape of 80 pixels and a square shape is arranged as a fourth hold at the coordinates (1120, 680) of the layer L40.

FIG. 682 (B) shows a state in which the above-mentioned hold image having a horizontal shape and a vertical shape of 80 pixels and a square shape is arranged as a third hold at the coordinates (1000,680) of the layer L45.

FIG. 682 (C) shows a state in which the above-mentioned hold image having a horizontal shape and a vertical shape of 80 pixels and a square shape is arranged as a second hold at the coordinates (880, 680) of the layer L50.

FIG. 682 (D) shows a state in which the horizontally elongated rectangular shape of the hold image is arranged as the first hold at the coordinates (680, 680) of the layer L55. Specifically, this reserved image has an elliptical shape having a transparency of 100%, a pixel forming an elliptical white portion of 240 pixels in the horizontal direction and 80 pixels in the vertical direction inscribed in the rectangle. It consists of pixels that form the outer part. In this production example, this hold, which is visually recognized in an elliptical shape, is set to have a higher expectation of a big hit than other holds, which are visually recognized in a perfect circle shape.

FIG. 682 (E) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction and having a square shape is arranged at the coordinates (560, 600) of the layer L60.

FIG. 682 (F) schematically illustrates drawing data generated when the layers shown in FIGS. 682 (A) to 682 (E) and the layer L65 on which the changing decorative pattern is arranged are superimposed. It is shown as a target. Further, FIG. 682 (G) shows a state in which one hold is digested from the state shown in FIG. 682 (F) and a horizontally long rectangular shape hold image is arranged at coordinates (400, 600) as the hold image. ing. In the drawing, the portion where the transparency is 100% on the outside of the circular shape portion and the elliptical shape portion is omitted.

In this way, in the layers in which the display priorities are set in a predetermined order, by arranging only one reserved image on one layer, as shown in the figure, the display mode of the reserved image is increased. However, even if the parts of the reserved image whose transparency is not 100% overlap each other, one of the reserved images is automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority. Become.

FIG. 683 shows an example of an effect in which in the display process using the layer described with reference to FIG. 679, when the reserved images overlap each other, the overlay mode of the reserved images is automatically determined.

FIG. 683 (A) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction and having a square shape is arranged as the fourth reserved image at the coordinates (1120, 600) of the layer L40.

FIG. 683 (B) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction and having a square shape is arranged as the third reserved image at the coordinates (1000,600) of the layer L45.

FIG. 683 (C) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction and having a square shape is arranged as the second reserved image at the coordinates (880,600) of the layer L50.

FIG. 683 (D) shows a state in which the above-mentioned reserved image having 160 pixels in the horizontal direction and 160 pixels in the vertical direction and having a square shape is arranged as the first reserved image at the coordinates (760, 600) of the layer L55.

FIG. 683 (E) shows a state in which the reserved image having a width of 320 pixels and a height of 320 pixels and a square shape is arranged at the coordinates (480, 440) of the layer L60. The reserved image is composed of pixels forming a circular shape portion having a diameter of 320 pixels and pixels forming an outer portion having a circular shape having 100% transparency. Further, in the pixels forming the perfect circular shape portion, the outline of the circle is composed of black pixels, and the inner portion of the black outline is composed of white pixels. The contour portion has a width of about several pixels (for example, 3 pixels).

FIG. 683 (F) schematically illustrates drawing data generated when the layers shown in FIGS. 683 (A) to 683 (E) and the layer L65 on which the changing decorative pattern is arranged are superimposed. It is shown as a target. In the figure, the portion of the circular shape portion having 100% transparency on the outside is not shown.

In this way, in the layers in which the display priorities are set in a predetermined order, by arranging only one reserved image on one layer, as shown in the figure, the transparency of the reserved images is 100. Even if the parts that are not% overlap each other, one of the reserved images is automatically displayed on the front side based on the set display priority.

In this way, by arranging only one hold on one layer, the color of the hold image can be changed, the size of the hold image can be increased, the hold image can be moved, and the hold can be held adjacent to each other. Even in the case of displaying a reserved image in which images can overlap with each other, it is possible to generate drawing data related to the reserved image without considering the display status of other reserved images.

Instead of or in addition to changing the display mode of the hold image, the specific image corresponding to the hold image is placed on a layer having a higher display priority or a lower display priority than the hold image to decorate the hold image. You may. Further, by arranging such a specific image, it may be configured to indicate that the variation result of the decorative pattern related to the reserved image is highly expected to be a big hit.

Hereinafter, an embodiment in which a specific image can be arranged on a predetermined layer corresponding to the reserved image will be described with reference to FIG. 684.

FIG. 684 is a diagram showing the display priority set for the layer used for the display process and the image data arranged in the layer in the present embodiment, and the display priority is given from the layer L00, which is the layer having the highest display priority. A part of the layers up to layer L99, which is the lowest degree layer, is shown in the figure.

The layer L37 is a layer on which the reserved image, the reserved image corresponding to the first hold, and the specific image corresponding to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth hold are arranged.

The layer L39 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the reserved image is displayed. The layer L40 is a layer on which the reserved image is arranged. The layer L41 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the reserved image is displayed.

The layer L44 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the first hold is displayed. Layer L45 is a layer on which a hold image corresponding to the first hold is arranged. The layer L46 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the first hold is displayed.

The layer L49 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the second hold is displayed. The layer L50 is a layer on which a hold image corresponding to the second hold is arranged. The layer L51 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the second hold is displayed.

The layer L54 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the third hold is displayed. Layer L55 is a layer on which a hold image corresponding to the third hold is arranged. The layer L56 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the third hold is displayed.

The layer L59 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the fourth hold is displayed. The layer L60 is a layer on which a hold image corresponding to the fourth hold is arranged. The layer L61 is a layer on which a specific image corresponding to the fourth hold is displayed.

The layer L63 is a layer on which the reserved image, the reserved image corresponding to the first hold, and the specific image corresponding to the reserved image corresponding to the fourth hold are arranged.

Further, the layer L00 is a layer on which an error notification image indicating that some error has occurred in the gaming machine is arranged. Further, the layer L35 is a layer on which the decorative symbol during the stop display is arranged. Further, the layer 65 is a layer on which the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is arranged. Further, the layer 99 is a layer on which the background image is arranged.

FIG. 685 is a diagram showing an example of production in a gaming machine adopting the layer structure described with reference to FIG. 684. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 685 (A) to 685 (G), the circular hold image corresponding to the hold is arranged on the layer L40, and the round hold image corresponding to the first hold is arranged on the layer L45. Is arranged, a perfect circular hold image corresponding to the second hold is placed on the layer L50, a perfect circular hold image corresponding to the third hold is placed on the layer L55, and a perfect circular hold image corresponding to the fourth hold is placed on the layer L60. The reserved image is in the arranged state.

FIG. 685 (A) is an effect example in which a specific image visually recognized in a horizontally long ellipse corresponding to the first hold is arranged on the layer L46. In addition, corresponding to the hold and the second hold to the fourth hold, a horizontally long elliptical specific image may be arranged on each corresponding layer.

In FIG. 685 (B), a specific image having a perfect circular shape corresponding to the hold is arranged on the layer L41, a specific image having a perfect circular shape corresponding to the first hold is placed on the layer L46, and a second hold is placed on the layer L51. This is an example of an effect in which a specific image having a perfect circular shape corresponding to is arranged, and a specific image having a perfect circular shape corresponding to the third hold is arranged on the layer L56.

FIG. 685 (C) is an effect example in which a specific image having a horizontally long rectangular shape is arranged on the layer L37 so that the lower half of the reserved image located on the rear side is hidden.

FIG. 685 (D) is an effect example in which a specific image having a horizontally long rectangular shape and a transparency of 50% is arranged on the layer L37 so that the entire reserved image located on the rear side can be visually recognized semitransparently.

FIG. 685 (E) is an effect example in which a specific image having a horizontally long rectangular shape is arranged on the layer L65 so as to overlap the lower half of the reserved image located on the front side.

In FIG. 685 (F), a specific image having a vertically long elliptical shape with a transparency of 50% is arranged on the layer L39 so that the hold image corresponding to the hold located on the rear side can be visually recognized semi-transparently. This is an example of an effect in which a specific image having a vertically long elliptical shape with a transparency of 50% is arranged on the layer L49 so that the hold image corresponding to the second hold located on the rear side can be visually recognized semi-transparently.

FIG. 685 (G) is an effect in which the arrangement mode of each specific image described with reference to FIG. 685 (B) and the arrangement mode of each specific image described with reference to FIG. 685 (F) are simultaneously executed. This is an example.

In this way, by providing a layer on which a specific image can be arranged corresponding to each reserved image, it is possible to execute various display modes for the reserved image while maintaining the visibility of each reserved image. ..

As shown in FIGS. 685 (A), 685 (B), 685 (F), and 685 (G), by displaying the specific image corresponding to the predetermined hold, the corresponding specific image can be obtained. It may be configured to indicate that the jackpot expectation is higher than the hold that is not displayed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 685 (C) to 685 (E), by displaying the specific image corresponding to the displayed hold (the hold to the fourth hold in the figure), the specific image can be obtained. It may be configured to indicate that the jackpot expectation of any of the displayed holds is higher than that of the hidden hold. Further, such an effect mode may be applied to the above-described embodiment. For example, when changing the hold image for the first hold, the display mode as shown in FIG. 685 may be executed.

FIG. 686 is a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 684. In such a layer structure, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 685 may be practicable.

Not limited to the display of decorative patterns and the display of reserved images, it is possible to realize diversification of effects by arranging a plurality of characters on a plurality of layers having different display priorities. Hereinafter, an embodiment modified so as to effectively utilize the display processing by a plurality of layers to produce a display effect will be described.

FIG. 687 (A) shows a first car image, a second car image, a first medal image, a second medal image, and a third medal image displayed in the display area in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 687 (B) is a diagram schematically showing an arrangement mode of the medal image with respect to the vehicle image. FIG. 688 shows the layer structure in the present embodiment and the arrangement mode of the image on the layer in the plurality of effect patterns.

First, a car image (first car image, second car image) and a medal image (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) will be described with reference to FIG. 687 (A).

The first car image is a horizontally long rectangular image having 280 pixels in the horizontal direction and 200 pixels in the vertical direction. The first car image is an image imitating a light van type cash transport vehicle. The first car image is an area consisting of black pixels representing the car body and tire parts, and an area consisting of other pixels with 100% transparency (the upper left part of the image and the left and right parts of the tire part). It is composed of and.

The second car image is a horizontally long rectangular image having 280 pixels in the horizontal direction and 200 pixels in the vertical direction. The second car image is an image imitating a truck with an open type loading platform. The second car image is an area consisting of black pixels representing the car body and tires, and an area consisting of other pixels with 100% transparency (upper left part of the image, upper right part of the image, tire part). It is composed of the left and right parts of).

The first medal image is a square-shaped image having 80 pixels in the horizontal direction and 80 pixels in the vertical direction. The first medal image is located inside an annular perfect circle, which is a region consisting of black pixels representing an annular perfect circle having a width of several pixels (for example, 3 pixels) inscribed in a square of 80 pixels wide and 80 pixels vertically. It is composed of an area consisting of black pixels representing the Chinese character "gold" and an area consisting of other pixels having 100% transparency.

The second medal image is a square-shaped image having 80 pixels in the horizontal direction and 80 pixels in the vertical direction. The second medal image is located inside an annular perfect circle, which is a region consisting of black pixels representing an annular perfect circle having a width of several pixels (for example, 3 pixels) inscribed in a square of 80 pixels wide and 80 pixels vertically. It is composed of an area consisting of black pixels representing the Chinese character "silver" and an area consisting of other pixels having 100% transparency.

The second medal image is a square-shaped image having 80 pixels in the horizontal direction and 80 pixels in the vertical direction. The third medal image is located inside an annular perfect circle, which is a region consisting of black pixels representing an annular perfect circle having a width of several pixels (for example, 3 pixels) inscribed in a square of 80 pixels wide and 80 pixels vertically. It is composed of a region consisting of black pixels representing the Chinese character "copper" and a region consisting of other pixels having 100% transparency.

The medal image and the car image are arranged on different layers. This will be described below with reference to FIGS. 687 (B) and 688. As shown in FIG. 688, the car effect pattern 01 to the car effect pattern 05 are provided as the effect patterns in the present embodiment. In each car effect pattern, a display is executed in which the car image and the medal image move the lower part of the display area from the right end to the left end. Further, the car image and the hold image, and the medal image and the hold image may have an overlapping positional relationship, which will be described in detail later.

In the vehicle effect pattern 01, one of the medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) is on the layer L39, and the car image (first car image, second car image) is on the layer L41. Either is placed. The layer L40 is a layer on which the reserved image corresponding to the hold is arranged.

In the vehicle effect pattern 02, one of the medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) is on the layer L44, and the car image (first car image, second car image) is on the layer L46. Either is placed. Note that layer L45 is a layer on which a hold image corresponding to the first hold is arranged.

In the vehicle effect pattern 03, one of the medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) is on the layer L49, and the car image (first car image, second car image) is on the layer L51. Either is placed. The layer L50 is a layer on which a hold image corresponding to the second hold is arranged.

In the vehicle effect pattern 04, one of the medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) is on the layer L54, and the car image (first car image, second car image) is on the layer L55. Either is placed. Note that layer L56 is a layer on which a hold image corresponding to the third hold is arranged.

In the vehicle effect pattern 05, one of the medal images (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) is on the layer L59, and the car image (first car image, second car image) is on the layer L60. Either is placed. The layer L61 is a layer on which a hold image corresponding to the fourth hold is arranged.

The relative positional relationship between the car image arranged on the predetermined layer and the medal image arranged on the predetermined layer is the positional relationship in which the medal image is located at the rear of the car image when the layers are superimposed. It has become. Further, the positional relationship between the car image and the medal image does not change when the car image is moved in the car effect pattern 01 to the car effect pattern 05, and even if the car image is moved, the relative positions of both images are not changed. The relationship will continue to be maintained.

FIG. 687 (B) shows a car image (first car image, second car image) arranged on a predetermined layer and a medal image (first medal image, second medal image, third medal image) arranged on a predetermined layer. It shows the relative positional relationship with the medal image). In the figure, only the outline portion is shown for the portion imitating a car.

The combination of the car image and the medal image shown in FIG. 687 (B) (six in total) can be applied to each of the car effect pattern 01 to the vehicle effect pattern 05 shown in FIG. 688. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a total of 30 effect patterns.

With reference to FIG. 689, an execution example of a car effect using a car image and a medal image is shown. In this production example, the decorative symbols are changing, and the maximum number of reservations is four. Further, from left to right in the lower part of the display area, the hold image corresponding to the hold and the hold image corresponding to the first hold to the fourth hold image corresponding to the fourth hold are arranged respectively. The reserved image and each reserved image are the above-mentioned square-shaped reserved images having 80 pixels in the horizontal direction and 80 pixels in the vertical direction. As described above, when this image is arranged on a predetermined layer, it has a perfect circular shape, and is in a display state in which the outline is black and the inside of the outline is white.

FIG. 689 shows an example of an effect in the display area when the vehicle effect pattern 03 is executed. In this production example, the first medal image is arranged on the layer L49, and the first vehicle image is arranged on the layer L51. Further, a hold image corresponding to the second hold is arranged on the layer L50.

FIG. 689 (A) shows a state in which the arrangement of the first medal image on the layer L49 and the arrangement of the first vehicle image on the layer L50 have started. The hold image corresponding to the fourth hold is arranged on the layer L60. Therefore, the first medal image arranged on the layer L49 and the first vehicle image arranged on the layer L50 are located and visually recognized on the front side of the held image corresponding to the fourth hold. It is a display mode.

In FIG. 689 (B), the first medal image arranged on the layer L49 and the first vehicle image arranged on the layer L51 are displayed in the lower part of the display area from the state shown in FIG. 689 (A) to the left. It shows a state in which a predetermined pixel has been moved. In this state, the first vehicle image is located behind the hold image corresponding to the second hold arranged on the layer L50. Further, the first medal image is located on the front side of the hold image corresponding to the second hold arranged on the layer L50.

The first medal image is composed of a perfect circular outline portion consisting of black pixels, a character portion consisting of black pixels (in this case, the character "gold"), and a portion having 100% transparency other than that. There is. Therefore, when the first medal image is located on the front side of the reserved image, the black perfect circular contour portion of the first medal image and the black characters are on the front side of the white pixels of the reserved image. It becomes visible. In FIG. 689 (B), the left half of the character "gold" overlaps with the white portion of the reserved image, so that it can be visually recognized.

In FIG. 689 (C), the first medal image arranged on the layer L49 and the first vehicle image arranged on the layer L51 are displayed in the lower part of the display area from the state shown in FIG. 689 (B) to the left. Further, it shows a state in which a predetermined pixel has been moved. Even in this state, the first medal image arranged on the layer L49, the first vehicle image arranged on the layer L51, and the hold image corresponding to the second hold arranged on the layer L50 are positioned so as to overlap each other. Yes, the entire word "gold" overlaps the white part of the hold image corresponding to the second hold. Therefore, the entire character "gold" is visible to the player.

In FIG. 689 (D), the first medal image arranged on the layer L49 and the first vehicle image arranged on the layer L51 are displayed in the lower part of the display area from the state shown in FIG. 689 (C) to the left. Further, it shows a state in which a predetermined pixel has been moved. In this state, the first medal image arranged on the layer L49, the first vehicle image arranged on the layer L51, and the reserved image corresponding to the hold arranged on the layer L40 are located at overlapping positions. However, since the hold image corresponding to the hold arranged on the layer L40 has a higher display priority, the first vehicle image and the first medal image are higher than the hold image corresponding to the hold. It is displayed on the back side.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by arranging the predetermined images on the layers before and after the layer on which the predetermined reserved image is arranged, it is possible to perform the effect corresponding to the hold.

In the above-mentioned effect example, an effect example in which the car effect pattern 03 is executed to execute the effect corresponding to the second hold is shown, but by executing the car effect pattern 01, the hold corresponding to the hold is executed. A similar effect mode can be realized for an image. Similarly, by executing the car effect pattern 02, the car effect pattern corresponds to the hold image corresponding to the first hold, and by executing the car effect pattern 04, the car effect pattern corresponds to the hold image corresponding to the third hold. By executing 05, the same effect mode can be realized for the hold image corresponding to the fourth hold.

Based on the result of the special lottery, it may be configured to decide whether or not to execute the vehicle effect pattern. In addition, the type of medal that is visually recognized may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit. For example, the special lottery result is when the second medal is displayed than when the third medal is displayed, and when the first medal is displayed than when the second medal is displayed. It is good to configure it so that the expectation that is a big hit is high. For example, in this production example, with respect to the characters "silver" and "gold" on the front side of the white part of the hold image displayed as the second hold, the latter corresponds to the second hold. It is preferable to configure it so that the degree of expectation that the variation result of the decorative pattern will be a big hit is high.

An example of the effect in which the medal image moves from the right end to the left end at the bottom of the display area together with the car image is shown, but for the medal image, after moving to the position of the corresponding hold image, the movement in the horizontal direction is stopped. It may be configured as. FIG. 689 (E) shows a modified example in which the first medal image moved from the right direction is stopped at the center of the perfect circle portion of the hold image corresponding to the second hold. In the figure, the first car image shows a state immediately before the frame out from the display area by continuing to move to the left individually from the first medal image that has been stopped and displayed. Has been done.

FIG. 690 shows an effect example in which the second vehicle image is modified to move instead of the first vehicle image in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 689.

When each car effect pattern is executed using the second car image in this way, the player visually recognizes which medal image is arranged immediately after the car image appears at the left end of the lower part of the display area. Is possible. Therefore, the player can be interested in which hold the medal image that has become visible stops corresponding to.

In the embodiment shown below, an embodiment that suggests a special lottery result will be described according to the result of a display effect in which a plurality of characters perform a foot race.

FIG. 691 is a diagram showing layers for arranging various images used in the foot race reach effect in the present embodiment and display priorities of those layers. Further, FIG. 692 shows an example of a production in a foot race production.

In the present embodiment, in the reach state, a reach effect is executed in which six male characters who are six children and a rival character who is a rival of six children and a tall man perform a foot race, and depending on the result of the foot race. , The result of the special lottery is suggested.

Specifically, the six male characters who are six children are the eldest son's first sibling character, the second son's second sibling character, the third son's third sibling character, the fourth son's fourth sibling character, and the fifth son's fifth. It is composed of a sibling character and the sixth sibling character of the sixth son.

Each character defines a vertically long rectangular image composed of opaque and predetermined color pixels representing the character's head and the character's body, and pixels having 100% transparency other than the character's head and the character's body. By arranging the layers (layer L70, layer L72, layer L74, layer L76, layer L78, layer L80, layer L82), the display state is visually recognized as a predetermined character.

As shown in FIG. 692 (A), the head of each character image is configured so that each character can be identified by attaching a predetermined character. Specifically, the head of the first sibling character image is "1", the head of the second sibling character is "2", the head of the third sibling character is "3", and the head of the fourth sibling character is "4" is attached to the head, "5" is attached to the head of the 5th sibling character, "6" is attached to the head of the 6th sibling character, and "la" is attached to the head of the rival character. ing.

As shown in FIG. 691, layer L82 is a first sibling character image showing a first sibling character, layer L80 is a second sibling character image showing a second sibling character, and layer L78 is a third sibling character showing a third sibling character. The sibling character image, layer L74 is a fourth sibling character image showing a fourth sibling character, layer L72 is a fifth sibling character image showing a fifth sibling character, and layer L70 is a sixth sibling character showing a sixth sibling character. The layer on which the image is placed. Further, the layer L76 is a layer on which a rival character image showing a rival character is arranged. Further, the layer L69, the layer L71, the layer L73, the layer L75, the layer L77, the layer L79, and the layer L81 are layers on which the medal image is arranged.

FIG. 692 (A) shows the display state immediately after the foot race reach effect is started. In this state, the first sibling character image is on the layer L82, the second sibling character image is on the layer L80, the third sibling character image is on the layer L78, the rival character image is on the layer L76, and the fourth sibling character is on the layer L74. As for the image, the fifth sibling character image is arranged on the layer L72, and the sixth sibling character image is arranged on the layer L70. Further, the reserved image that is visually recognized as a white and perfect circle is arranged on the layer L60. Further, on the layer L65, decorative symbols with the numbers "2" are temporarily stopped at the upper left end and the upper right end, respectively, and the reach state is caused by the decorative symbols with the numbers "2". It is formed.

In the display state immediately after the start of the race reach effect shown in FIG. 692 (A), the first sibling character image is behind the second sibling character image, and the second sibling character image is behind the third sibling character image. On the side, the 3rd sibling character image is behind the rival character image, the rival character image is behind the 4th sibling character image, the 4th sibling character image is behind the 5th sibling character image, and the 5th sibling. The character image is located behind the sixth sibling character image. As described above, each image other than the sixth sibling character image is displayed in such a manner that a part of the image is hidden by the character image on the front side.

FIG. 692 (B) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 692 (A). Further, FIG. 692 (C) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 692 (B). In each layer, the race reach effect does not change the coordinates in the y-axis direction for the 1st sibling character image to the 6th sibling character image, but changes the value in the x-axis direction to a predetermined value, so that the 1st sibling character ~ The sixth sibling character is configured to be visually recognized as moving in the left-right direction. With respect to the rival character image, the arrangement coordinates on the layer L76 do not change during the execution of the foot race reach effect, and the state of being displayed in the center of the display area is maintained.

In this way, by arranging a plurality of character images at positions where they can overlap and moving them only in one axial direction, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the expression of how the characters are racing.

FIG. 692 (D) shows a display state when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 692 (C). Specifically, it shows a state in which the goal line image arranged on the layer L84 is moving from the right side to the left side of the display area. In layer L84, the goal line image is framed in from the right side of the display area, moved to the left side at a constant speed, and finally framed out on the left side of the display area.

In the foot race reach production, there are cases where the rival character wins the foot race and cases where any of the first brother character to the sixth brother character wins the foot race, and one of the first brother character to the sixth brother character wins the foot race. It is structured so that the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit is higher when the foot race is won. Whether or not to win the foot race is determined by whether or not the character image overlaps the goal line image first.

FIG. 692 (E) shows a display example when the rival character first overlaps the goal line image. On the other hand, FIG. 692 (G) shows a display example when the first sibling character and the second sibling character overlap the goal line image before the rival character.

After the display states shown in FIGS. 692 (E) and 692 (G), the first medal image described with reference to FIG. 687 (A) corresponding to the order in which each character reaches the goal line ~ The third medal image is displayed corresponding to the character image that has won the first to third places. The medal image is not displayed correspondingly to the character image that won the 4th place or later.

FIG. 692 (F) shows the first medal image to the third medal image described with reference to FIG. 687 (A) in accordance with the order of each character after the display state shown in FIG. 692 (E). Shows the display state arranged corresponding to the character images that won the prizes up to the third place.

Specifically, the first medal image is on the layer L75, the rival character image is on the layer L76, the second medal image is on the layer L77, the third sibling character image is on the layer L78, and the third medal image is on the layer L81. The first sibling character image is arranged on the layer L82. As a result, the display mode in which the rival character wins the gold medal, the third sibling character wins the silver medal, and the first sibling character wins the bronze medal is shown.

Similarly, FIG. 692 (H) is the first medal image to the first medal image described with reference to FIG. 687 (A) in accordance with the order of each character after the display state shown in FIG. 692 (G). The three-medal image shows the display state in which the characters are arranged corresponding to the character images that have won the third place.

Specifically, the third medal image is on the layer L75, the rival character image is on the layer L76, the second medal image is on the layer L77, the third sibling character image is on the layer L78, and the first medal image is on the layer L81. The first sibling character image is arranged on the layer L82. As a result, the display mode in which the first sibling character wins the gold medal, the third sibling character wins the silver medal, and the rival character wins the bronze medal is shown.

With such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 692 (F) and 692 (H), it is possible to realize a display state in which medals are visually recognized in a manner in which medals are overlapped on the front side of each character. Further, by performing such a display effect, the player is shown the expectation that the decorative symbol in the reach state is stopped and displayed in the stop mode indicating that a big hit occurs.

The display states shown in FIGS. 692 (F) and 692 (H) are for layers L69, L71, layer L73, layer L75, layer L77, layer L79, and layer L81, which are layers for arranging medal images. It is realized by arranging the medal image.

Specifically, the medal images corresponding to the ranks from 1st to 3rd are displayed corresponding to the layers in which the character images winning the ranks from 1st to 3rd are arranged.

A process of arranging a medal image on the layer L69 corresponding to a character image arranged on the layer L70, a process of arranging a medal image on the layer L71 corresponding to a character image arranged on the layer L72, and an arrangement on the layer L74. Corresponding to the process of arranging the medal image on the layer L73 corresponding to the character image, the process of arranging the medal image on the layer L75 corresponding to the character image arranged on the layer L76, and the process of arranging the medal image on the layer L78. The process of arranging the medal image on the layer L77, the process of arranging the medal image on the layer L79 corresponding to the character image arranged on the layer L80, and the process of arranging the medal image on the layer L80 corresponding to the character image arranged on the layer L82. The process of arranging is performed according to the result of the race.

In this way, in the foot race reach production, the special lottery result is suggested according to the character who reaches the goal line first. On the other hand, the foot race reach effect may be configured to suggest a special lottery result in a different manner. Hereinafter, a modified example of the foot race reach effect described with reference to FIGS. 691 and 692 will be described with reference to FIGS. 693 and 694.

FIG. 693 shows a first modification in the foot race reach production. In this production example, the 4th to 6th sibling characters leave the foot race in the middle of the foot race, and the 1st to 3rd sibling characters and rival characters who continue the foot race are mischievous. The display effect such as is executed.

FIG. 693 (A) shows the state immediately after the start of the foot race. This display state is the same as the state shown in FIG. 692 (A).

FIG. 693 (B) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 693 (A). FIG. 693 (B) shows a state in which the fourth sibling character and the sixth sibling character are moved to the left side of the display area, and the fifth sibling character is moved to the right side of the display area.

FIG. 693 (C) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 693 (B). FIG. 693 (C) shows a display state in which the fourth sibling character and the sixth sibling character are framed out to the left side of the display area, and the fifth sibling character is framed out to the right side of the display area. In the display area, the first to third sibling characters and the rival character are in a foot race.

FIG. 693 (D) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 693 (C). In the display state shown in FIG. 693 (D), the fifth sibling character holding the bronze medal (third medal image) frames in from the left side of the display area. The fifth sibling character image is arranged on the layer L72, and the third medal image is arranged on the layer L71.

FIG. 693 (E) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 693 (D). In the display state shown in FIG. 693 (E), the fifth sibling character holding the bronze medal (third medal image) moves to the center of the display area and overlaps with the rival character and the third sibling character on the front side. Become. In this state, a display effect is performed in which the fifth sibling character hands the bronze medal (third medal image) to the third sibling character. For example, in the layer L71 on which the third medal image is arranged, the arrangement position of the third medal image may be moved so as to vibrate in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction.

FIG. 693 (F) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 693 (E). In the display state shown in FIG. 693 (F), the bronze medal (third medal image) held by the fifth sibling character was handed over to the third sibling character and overlapped on the front side of the third sibling character. It becomes a state. The third sibling character image is arranged on the layer L78, and the third medal image is arranged on the layer L77. Further, at the timing when the third medal image is arranged on the layer L77, the third medal image is not arranged on the layer L71. The goal line is displayed at the right end of the display area.

FIG. 693 (G) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 693 (F). In the display state shown in FIG. 693 (G), the state in which the third sibling character reaches the goal line first while holding the bronze medal (third medal image) is shown.

FIG. 693 (H) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 693 (G). In the display state shown in FIG. 693 (H), on the left side of the display area, a state in which the fourth sibling character holds a gold medal (first medal image) and the sixth character holds a silver medal (second medal image) is shown. Has been done. In this production, the bronze medal won by the third sibling character suggests the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur. In addition, the expectation that a big hit will occur is not suggested by the rival character and the first sibling character who won the prize up to the third place but could not win the medal.

FIG. 694 shows a second modification of the foot race reach effect. In this production example, the 4th to 6th sibling characters leave the foot race in the middle of the foot race, and the 1st to 3rd sibling characters and rival characters who continue the foot race are mischievous. The display effect such as is executed.

FIG. 694 (A) shows the state immediately after the start of the foot race. This display state is the same as the state shown in FIG. 692 (A).

FIG. 694 (B) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 694 (A). FIG. 694 (B) shows a state in which the fourth sibling character and the sixth sibling character are moved to the left side of the display area, and the fifth sibling character is moved to the right side of the display area.

FIG. 694 (C) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 694 (B). FIG. 694 (C) shows a display state in which the fourth sibling character and the sixth sibling character are framed out to the left side of the display area, and the fifth sibling character is framed out to the right side of the display area. In the display area, the first to third sibling characters and the rival character are in a foot race. Further, at this time, the layer on which the third sibling character is arranged is changed from the layer L78 that has been arranged so far to the layer L74. In addition, the coordinates at which the third sibling character is arranged are also changed from the right side of the rival character to the lower left side.

FIG. 694 (D) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 694 (C). In the display state shown in FIG. 694 (D), the fourth sibling character holding the gold medal (first medal image) frames in from the left side of the display area. The fourth sibling character image is arranged on the layer L72, and the first medal image is arranged on the layer L71.

FIG. 694 (E) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 694 (D). In the display state shown in FIG. 694 (E), the fourth sibling character holding the gold medal (first medal image) moves to the center of the display area and overlaps the front side of the third sibling character. In this state, a display effect is performed in which the fourth sibling character hands the gold medal (first medal image) to the third sibling character.

FIG. 694 (F) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 694 (E). In the display state shown in FIG. 694 (F), the gold medal (first medal image) held by the fourth sibling character was handed over to the third sibling character and overlapped on the front side of the third sibling character. It becomes a state. The third sibling character image is arranged on the layer L74, and the first medal image is arranged on the layer L73. The goal line is displayed at the right end of the display area.

FIG. 694 (G) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 694 (F). In the display state shown in FIG. 694 (G), the state in which the rival character reaches the goal line first is shown. In addition, the state in which the third sibling character reaches the goal line in the second place while holding the gold medal (first medal image) is shown.

FIG. 694 (H) shows a display state at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the display state shown in FIG. 694 (G). In the display state shown in FIG. 694 (H), on the left side of the display area, a state in which the fourth sibling character holds a bronze medal (third medal image) and the sixth character holds a silver medal (second medal image) is shown. Has been done. In this production, the gold medal won by the third sibling character suggests the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur. In addition, the expectation that a big hit will occur is not suggested by the rival character and the first sibling character who won the prize up to the third place but could not win the medal.

As in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 692, the jackpot expectation may be suggested by the order of reaching the goal line. In particular, the jackpot expectation may be suggested by the rank of the sibling character or the rank of the rival character. In the present embodiment, a medal image is added to the character image as a display effect so that the order can be easily understood.

On the other hand, as described with reference to FIGS. 693 and 694, some characters are separated from the screen during the foot race production, and the separated characters hand the medals to the characters in the foot race. , It may be configured to perform an effect that forcibly determines the ranking. In this case, since the ranking of the characters can be predicted before the character in the foot race reaches the goal line, it is possible to enhance the interest as compared with the production described with reference to FIG. 692.

In FIG. 694, the layer on which the third sibling character image is arranged is changed from layer L78 to layer L74 during the foot race reach production. With such display control, it is possible to execute an effect display in which the third sibling character image receives a medal from another character on the front side of the L76 in which the rival character image is arranged.

When the third sibling character image is arranged in a layer behind the rival character image as shown in FIG. 693 (D), and when the third sibling character image is a rival character image as shown in FIG. 694 (D). It is preferable that the mode of the medal given to the third sibling character is different from that of the case where the medal is arranged in the layer on the front side.

For example, when the third sibling character is behind the rival character, the rival character interferes with the third sibling character, and the fourth sibling character or the fifth sibling character gives a predetermined medal to the third sibling character. It may be configured so that it may not be possible to pass it.

On the other hand, when the 3rd sibling character is in front of the rival character, the medals brought by the 4th and 5th sibling characters can be almost certainly handed over without being disturbed by the rival character. It may be configured as. In this way, when the third sibling character is on the front side of the rival character, the predetermined medal (for example, the gold medal) is the third as compared with the case where the third sibling character is on the back side of the rival character. It may be configured so that the probability of being passed to a sibling character is high.

Further, the medal may be handed to the third sibling character a plurality of times. In this case, a predetermined medal (for example, a gold medal) indicating that the jackpot expectation is higher when the third sibling character is on the front side than when the third sibling character is on the back side or the front side of the rival character. ) Should be configured so that the probability of possessing it at the goal is high.

In each of the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 623 to 694, examples of moving the displayed image from the front side to the back side or moving from the back side to the front side have been shown. Smell, by applying a display process using a layer structure as described with reference to FIG. 691, a predetermined image can be moved from the front layer to the back layer, or from the back layer to the front layer. By moving to a layer, the displayed image may be moved from the front side to the back side, or may be moved from the back side to the front side.

In the embodiment, each technical matter in the structure of the gaming machine may be combined and applied to form the embodiment. Further, each effect example and each technical matter in each effect example may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. Further, each technical matter in each accessory configuration may be applied in combination to form an embodiment. Further, each of these technical matters may be applied in combination to form an embodiment.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5'Game board 5a Game area 190 Glass unit 530 Door frame left side unit 550 Door frame right side unit 570 Door frame top unit 931 Power supply board 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1110 Panel plate 1117 Panel convex part 1200 Obstacle nail 1201 Obstacle nail 1202 Obstacle nail 1203 Obstacle nail 1204 Obstacle nail 1205 Obstacle nail 1206 Obstacle nail 1208 Obstacle nail 1208 1210 Obstacle nail 1211 Obstacle nail 1212 Obstacle nail 1213 Obstacle nail 1215 Obstacle nail 1216 Obstacle nail 1217 Obstacle nail 1218 Obstacle nail 1220 Obstacle nail 1221 Obstacle nail 1222 Obstacle nail 1223 Obstacle nail 1224 Nail 1232 Left guide nail 1233 Right guide nail 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 First special symbol display 1404 First special hold number indicator 1405 Second special symbol display 1406 Second special hold number indicator 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral Control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side effect display device 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting port 2005 Large winning port 2522 Warp exit 2530 Stage 2600 Area cover member 2600a Area cover member 2610 Penetration part 2610a Penetration part 2611 Penetration part 2612 Penetration part 2613 Penetration part 2614 Penetration part 2615 Penetration part 2616 Penetration part 2617 Penetration part 2617a Notch end part 2618 Penetration part 2619 Penetration part 2620 Penetration part 2630 Mounting boss 26 2633 Mounting boss 2640 Ball regulation protrusion 2650 Penetration part 2651 Penetration part 2652 Penetration part 2653 Penetration part 2660 Boss part 2670 Accommodating recess 2700 Flow path device 2710a First flow path entry port 2710b Second flow path entry port 2720a First flow path forming member 2720b Second flow path forming member 2730a First flow Road exit 2730b Second flow path exit 5000 Nail sheet 5100 Film sheet 5110 1st area print 5120 2nd area print 5200 Obstacle nail print 5950 Rail member 6000 Rabbit accessory 6010 Face cover 6011 Face cover front 6011a 1 Face light scattering part 6011b Second face light scattering part 6012 Face cover part Upper surface part 6013 Face cover part Right side part 6014 Face cover part Lower side part 6015 Face cover part Left side part 6016 First arm part 6017 Second arm part 6020 Face substrate 6021 1st ear part 6021a 1st ear decoration part 6022 2nd ear part 6022a 2nd ear decoration part 6023 face light emitting part 6023a 1st face light emitting part 6023b 2nd face light emitting part 6024 mouth decoration part 6025 control element 6026 driver 6027 resistance 6027a 1 resistance 6027b 2nd resistance 6027c 3rd resistance 6027d 4th resistance 6027e 5th resistance 6027f 6th resistance 6028 Capacitor 6028a 1st capacitor 6028b 2nd capacitor 6029 Connector 6030 Body 6100 Stump accessory 6200 Stump plate 6210 Opening 6300 Stump Box 6310 Box Upper Wall 6320 Box Right Wall 6330 Box Lower Wall 6340 Box Left Wall 6350 Box Rear Wall 6352 Rear Wall Board 6352a First Rear Wall Board 6352b Second Rear Wall Board 6354 Rear Wall Light emitting part 6354a 1st rear wall light emitting part 6354b 2nd rear wall light emitting part 6356 Rear wall cover 6358 Rear wall cover light scattering part 6358a 1st rear wall cover light scattering part 6358b 2nd rear wall cover light scattering part 6360 1st grass movable Part 6360a 1st grass decoration part 6370 2nd grass movable part 6370a 2nd grass decoration part 6380 Rear wall board part 6381 Grass board part 6381a Grass board colored transparent part 6381b Grass board colorless transparent part 6382a Grass board center decoration part 6382b On the grass board Decorative part 6382c Grass board right decoration part 6382d Grass board bottom decoration part 6382e Grass board left decoration part 6400 Grass accessory 6420 Grass board 6422 Grass board front light emitting part 6422a Grass board front first light emitting part 6422b Grass board front second light emitting part 6422c Grass substrate front surface third light emitting part 6424 Grass substrate rear surface light emitting part 6424a Grass substrate rear surface first Light emitting part 6424b Grass substrate rear surface 2nd light emitting part 6426 Grass substrate opening 6426a Grass substrate 1st opening 6426b Grass substrate 2nd opening 6440 Grass front cover 6442 Grass front cover Transparent part 6442a Grass front cover Colorless transparent part 6442b Grass front cover Colored transparent part 6444 Grass front cover Light scattering part 6444a Grass front cover Colorless light scattering part 6444b Grass front cover Colored light scattering part 6446 Grass front cover Opaque part 6448 Grass front cover opening 6448a Grass front cover 1st opening 6448b Grass front cover 2nd opening 6460 Grass-back cover 6462 Grass-back cover transparent part 6462a Grass-back cover colorless transparent part 6462b Grass-back cover colored transparent part 6464 Grass-back cover light scattering part 6464a Grass-back cover colorless light-scattering part 6464b Grass-back cover colored light scattering Part 6466 Grass back cover Opaque part 6470 1st grass accessory 6475 2nd grass accessory 6480 3rd grass accessory 6485 4th grass accessory 6500 Mountain accessory 6520 Mountain substrate 6522 Mountain substrate front light emitting part 6522a Mountain substrate front 1st Light emitting part 6522b Mountain board front second light emitting part 6522c Mountain board front third light emitting part 6522d Mountain board front fourth light emitting part 6522e Mountain board front fifth light emitting part 6522f Mountain board front sixth light emitting part 6522g Mountain board front seventh light emitting part 6522h Mountain board front 8th light emitting part 6522i Mountain board front 9th light emitting part 6524 Mountain board opening 6540 1st mountain front cover 6542 1st mountain front cover Colored transparent part 6544 1st mountain front cover Colored light scattering part 6548 1st mountain Front cover opening 6560 2nd mountain front cover 6562 2nd mountain front cover colorless transparent part 6564 2nd mountain front cover colorless light scattering part 6600 1st giant tree accessory 6610 1st giant tree trunk substrate 6630 1st giant tree leaf substrate 6650 2nd Giant tree accessory 6660 2nd giant tree trunk substrate 6680 2nd giant tree leaf substrate 6700 1st cloud accessory 6750 2nd cloud accessory 6800 Board back grass accessory 6820 Board back grass substrate 6822 Board back grass substrate Front light emitting part 6824 Board back grass Board opening 6824a Board back grass board 1st opening 6824b Board back grass board 2nd opening 6824c Board back grass board 3rd opening 6824d Board back grass board 4th opening 6840 Board back grass front cover 6842 Board back grass front Cover colored transparent part 6844 Board back grass front cover Colored light scattering part 6884 Board back grass front cover opening Part 6848a Board back grass front cover 1st opening 6848b Board back grass front cover 2nd opening 6848c Board back grass front cover 3rd opening 6848d Board back grass front cover 4th opening 7000 Door frame top unit upper right ear opening Part 7002 Door frame top unit upper first right ear opening 7004 Door frame top unit upper second right ear opening 7010 Door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7012 Door frame top unit upper first left ear opening 7014 Door frame Top unit upper second left ear opening 7020 Door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7022 Door frame top unit lower first right ear opening 7024 Door frame top unit lower second right ear opening 7030 Door frame top unit lower left Ear opening 7032 Door frame top unit lower 1st left ear opening 7034 Door frame top unit lower 2nd left ear opening 7040 Door frame top unit upper binaural opening 7050 Door frame top unit Right light emitting part 7052 Door frame top Left side light emitting part in the unit 7100 Right ear frame movable body 7110 Right ear frame movable body 1st surface 7112 Right ear frame movable body 1st surface Inner decoration part 7114 Right ear frame movable body 1st surface Outer decoration part 7116 Right ear frame movable body Inner light emitting part 7118 Right ear frame movable body Outer light emitting part 7120 Right ear frame movable body 2nd surface 7140 Right ear frame movable body Rotating axis 7200 Left ear frame movable body 7210 Left ear frame movable body 1st surface 7212 Left ear frame movable Body 1st surface inner decoration 7214 Left ear frame movable body 1st surface outer decoration 7216 Left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7218 Left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7220 Left ear frame movable body 2nd surface 7240 Left ear frame Movable body rotation axis 7300 Right ear inner frame movable body 7310 Right ear inner frame movable body 1st surface 7320 Right ear inner frame movable body 2nd surface 7330 Right ear inner frame movable body Light emitting part 7340 Right ear inner frame movable body rotation Axis 7350 Right ear outer frame movable body 7360 Right ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7370 Right ear outer frame movable body 2nd surface 7380 Right ear outer frame movable body Light emitting part 7390 Right ear outer frame movable body Rotating axis 7400 Left ear Inner frame movable body 7410 Left ear inner frame movable body 1st surface 7420 Left ear inner frame movable body 2nd surface 7430 Left ear inner frame movable body Light emitting part 7440 Left ear inner frame movable body Rotating axis 7450 Left ear outer frame movable body 7460 Left ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7470 Left ear outer frame movable body 2nd surface 7480 Left ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7490 Left ear outer frame movable body rotation axis 7 500 Door frame top unit Face decoration part 7510 Door frame top unit Face movable body 7512 Door frame top unit Right eye decoration part 7514 Door frame top unit Left eye decoration part 7520 Door frame top unit Face lower part 7522 Door frame top unit Face lower nose movable body 7524 Door frame top unit Face lower mouth movable body 7600 Door frame side unit Right arm 7610 Door frame Side unit Right arm Case 7620 Door frame Side unit Right arm Upper arm 7630 Door frame Side unit Right arm Lower arm 7650 Door frame Side unit Left arm 7660 Door frame side unit Left arm case 7670 Door frame side unit Left arm Upper arm 7680 Door frame Side unit Left arm Lower arm 7700 Curtain board bottom unit Right foot movable body 7710 Curtain board bottom unit Right foot sneak part 7720 Curtain board bottom unit Right foot tip 7750 Plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7760 curtain plate bottom unit left foot sneaker part 7770 curtain plate bottom unit left foot tip part 7800 root vegetable frame movable body 7802 root vegetable frame movable body first cover part 7804 root vegetable frame movable body second cover part 7810 root vegetable frame movable body Light emitting part 7820 Right side connecting linear member 7825 Right side vertical movement drive mechanism 7830 Left side connecting linear member 7835 Left side vertical movement drive mechanism 7850 Root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7852 Cover unit frame 7854 Cover unit front part 7856 Cover unit Right side part 7858 Cover unit Left side 9100 Character accessory 9110 Cover member (cover body)
9111 Transmissive part (first area)
9112 Non-transparent part (second region)
9120 Character accessory board 9130 Base member 9200 Snowman accessory 9210 Cover member 9210a Front side cover member 9210b Back side cover member 9220 Snowman board 9301 Light emitter (LED)
9302 resistor

Claims (1)

Judgment means that can derive a judgment result that is advantageous to the player,
Display control means that can generate drawing data by arranging various displays on multiple layers,
A display means for displaying based on the drawing data is provided.
The drawing data is generated by the display control means in a state where the specific display is arranged on the first layer having a lower priority for display than the layer on which the predetermined display is arranged, and the specific display is sent to the display means. When displayed and when
The drawing data is generated by the display control means in a state where the specific display is arranged on a second layer having a higher priority for display than the layer on which the predetermined display is arranged, and the specific display is the display. There are cases where it is displayed in the means, and there are
In the display means, the specific display and the predetermined display may be displayed overlapping.
The display mode of the specific display includes at least a first display mode and a second display mode in which the degree of expectation regarding a determination result that is more advantageous to the player than the first display mode is higher.
The specific display of the first display mode can be arranged in the first layer and the second layer.
The specific display of the second display mode can be arranged in the first layer and the second layer.
A gaming machine characterized in that the ratio of the specific display of the second display mode arranged and displayed on the second layer is higher than the ratio of being arranged and displayed on the first layer.

Images